Transportstyrelsens föreskrifter och allmänna råd om transport till sjöss av förpackat farligt gods (IMDG-koden) , TSFS 2015:66

Transport i fartområde D, fartområde E och på inre vattenvägar

Tillämpning av Östersjöavtalet

Införlivande av IMDG-koden

Erkännande av utländskt godkännande

Definitioner

Särskilda krav

Provning, kontroll, certifiering m.m.

Deklaration av farligt gods

Undantag

Bilaga 1

MSC 90/28/Add.2 Annex 4, page 1

ANNEX 4

RESOLUTION MSC.328(90) – ADOPTION OF AMENDMENTS TO THE INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE (AMENDMENT 36-12)

Annex 1 List of Contents, Foreword, Preamble and parts 1 to 7, including appendices A and B

I:\MSC\90\28-Add-2.doc

5

Bilaga 1

6

Bilaga 1

Contents

Page

Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi

Preamble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii

PART 1 – GENERAL PROVISIONS, DEFINITIONS AND TRAINING

Chapter 1.1 General provisions

1.1.0 Introductory note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 1.1.1 Application and implementation of the Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 1.1.2 Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 1.1.3 Dangerous goods forbidden from transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Chapter 1.2 Definitions, units of measurement and abbreviations

1.2.1 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 1.2.2 Units of measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 1.2.3 List of abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Chapter 1.3 Training

1.3.0 Introductory note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 1.3.1 Training of shore-side personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Chapter 1.4 Security provisions

1.4.0 Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 1.4.1 General provisions for companies, ships and port facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 1.4.2 General provisions for shore-side personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 1.4.3 Provisions for high consequence dangerous goods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Chapter 1.5 General provisions concerning class 7

1.5.1 Scope and application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 1.5.2 Radiation protection programme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 1.5.3 Quality assurance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 1.5.4 Special arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 1.5.5 Radioactive material possessing other dangerous properties . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 1.5.6 Non-compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

PART 2 – CLASSIFICATION

Chapter 2.0 Introduction

2.0.0 Responsibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 2.0.1 Classes, divisions, packing groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 2.0.2 UN Numbers and Proper Shipping Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 2.0.3 Classification of substances, mixtures and solutions with multiple hazards (precedence of hazard characteristics) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 2.0.4 Transport of samples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 2.0.5 Transport of wastes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) iii

7

Bilaga 1

Contents

Page

Chapter 2.1 Class 1 – Explosives

2.1.0 Introductory notes (these notes are not mandatory) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

2.1.1 Definitions and general provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 2.1.2 Compatibility groups and classification codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 2.1.3 Classification procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Chapter 2.2 Class 2 – Gases

2.2.0 Introductory note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 2.2.1 Definitions and general provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 2.2.2 Class subdivisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 2.2.3 Mixtures of gases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Chapter 2.3 Class 3 – Flammable liquids

2.3.0 Introductory note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 2.3.1 Definitions and general provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 2.3.2 Assignment of packing group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 2.3.3 Determination of flashpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 2.3.4 Determination of initial boiling point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Chapter 2.4 Class 4 – Flammable solids; substances liable to spontaneous combustion; substances which, in contact with water, emit flammable gases

2.4.0 Introductory note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 2.4.1 Definition and general provisions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 2.4.2 Class 4.1 – Flammable solids, self-reactive substances and solid desensitized explosives. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 2.4.3 Class 4.2 – Substances liable to spontaneous combustion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 2.4.4 Class 4.3 – Substances which, in contact with water, emit flammable gases 71 2.4.5 Classification of organometallic substances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Chapter 2.5 Class 5 – Oxidizing substances and organic peroxides

2.5.0 Introductory note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 2.5.1 Definitions and general provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 2.5.2 Class 5.1 – Oxidizing substances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 2.5.3 Class 5.2 – Organic peroxides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Chapter 2.6 Class 6 – Toxic and infectious substances

2.6.0 Introductory notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 2.6.1 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 2.6.2 Class 6.1 – Toxic substances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 2.6.3 Class 6.2 – Infectious substances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Chapter 2.7 Class 7 – Radioactive material

2.7.1 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 2.7.2 Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Chapter 2.8 Class 8 – Corrosive substances

2.8.1 Definition and properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 2.8.2 Assignment of packing groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

iv IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

8

Bilaga 1

Contents

Page

Chapter 2.9 Miscellaneous dangerous substances and articles (Class 9) and environmentally hazardous substances

2.9.1 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 2.9.2 Assignment to class 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 2.9.3 Environmentally hazardous substances (aquatic environment) . . . . . . . . . . . 121 2.9.4 Lithium batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Chapter 2.10 Marine pollutants

2.10.1 Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 2.10.2 General provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 2.10.3 Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

PART 3 – DANGEROUS GOODS LIST, SPECIAL PROVISIONS AND EXCEPTIONS

Chapter 3.1 General

3.1.1 Scope and general provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 3.1.2 Proper Shipping Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 3.1.3 Mixtures or solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 3.1.4 Segregation groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Chapter 3.2 Dangerous Goods List

3.2.1 Structure of the Dangerous Goods List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 3.2.2 Abbreviations and symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

Chapter 3.3 Special provisions applicable to certain substances, materials or articles

Chapter 3.4 Dangerous goods packed in limited quantities

3.4.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 3.4.2 Packing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 3.4.3 Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 3.4.4 Segregation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 3.4.5 Marking and placarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 3.4.6 Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

Chapter 3.5 Dangerous goods packed in excepted quantities

3.5.1 Excepted quantities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 3.5.2 Packagings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 3.5.3 Tests for packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 3.5.4 Marking of packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 3.5.5 Maximum number of packages in any cargo transport unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 3.5.6 Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 3.5.7 Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 3.5.8 Segregation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

Appendices

Appendix A – List of generic and N.O.S. Proper Shipping Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Appendix B – Glossary of terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) v

9

Bilaga 1

Contents

Page

PART 4 – PACKING AND TANK PROVISIONS

Chapter 4.1 Use of packagings, including intermediate bulk containers (IBCs) and large packagings

4.1.0 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 4.1.1 General provisions for the packing of dangerous goods in packagings, including IBCs and large packagings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 4.1.2 Additional general provisions for the use of IBCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 4.1.3 General provisions concerning packing instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 4.1.4 List of packing instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Packing instructions concerning the use of packagings (except IBCs and large packagings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Packing instructions concerning the use of IBCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Packing instructions concerning the use of large packagings . . . . . . . . . . 276 4.1.5 Special packing provisions for goods of class 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 4.1.6 Special packing provisions for goods of class 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 4.1.7 Special packing provisions for organic peroxides (class 5.2) and self-reactive substances of class 4.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 4.1.8 Special packing provisions for infectious substances of category A (class 6.2, UN 2814 and UN 2900) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 4.1.9 Special packing provisions for class 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

Chapter 4.2 Use of portable tanks and multiple-element gas containers (MEGCs)

4.2.0 Transitional provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 4.2.1 General provisions for the use of portable tanks for the transport of substances of class 1 and classes 3 to 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 4.2.2 General provisions for the use of portable tanks for the transport of non-refrigerated liquefied gases and chemicals under pressure . . . . . . . . 290 4.2.3 General provisions for the use of portable tanks for the transport of refrigerated liquefied gases of class 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 4.2.4 General provisions for the use of multiple-element gas containers (MEGCs) 292 4.2.5 Portable tank instructions and special provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 Portable tank instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 Portable tank special provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 4.2.6 Additional provisions for the use of road tank vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304

Chapter 4.3 Use of bulk containers

4.3.1 General provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 4.3.2 Additional provisions applicable to bulk goods of classes 4.2, 4.3, 5.1, 6.2, 7 and 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 4.3.3 Additional provisions for the use of sheeted bulk containers (BK1) . . . . . . . . 307 4.3.4 Additional provisions for the use of flexible bulk containers (BK3) . . . . . . . . . 307

PART 5 – CONSIGNMENT PROCEDURES

Chapter 5.1 General provisions

5.1.1 Application and general provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 5.1.2 Use of overpacks and unit loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 5.1.3 Empty uncleaned packagings or units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 5.1.4 Mixed packing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 5.1.5 General provisions for class 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 5.1.6 Packages packed into a cargo transport unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

vi IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

10

Bilaga 1

Contents

Page

Chapter 5.2 Marking and labelling of packages including IBCs

5.2.1 Marking of packages including IBCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 5.2.2 Labelling of packages including IBCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

Chapter 5.3 Placarding and marking of cargo transport units

5.3.1 Placarding. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 5.3.2 Marking of cargo transport units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327

Chapter 5.4 Documentation

5.4.1 Dangerous goods transport information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 5.4.2 Container/vehicle packing certificate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 5.4.3 Documentation required aboard the ship . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 5.4.4 Other required information and documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 5.4.5 Multimodal Dangerous Goods Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 5.4.6 Retention of dangerous goods transport information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

Chapter 5.5 Special provisions

5.5.1 [Reserved] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 5.5.2 Special provisions applicable to fumigated cargo transport units (UN 3359) 341 5.5.3 Special provisions applicable to packages and cargo transport units containing substances presenting a risk of asphyxiation when used for cooling or conditioning purposes (such as dry ice (UN 1845) or nitrogen, refrigerated liquid (UN 1977) or argon, refrigerated liquid (UN 1951)) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342

PART 6 – CONSTRUCTION AND TESTING OF PACKAGINGS, INTERMEDIATE BULK CONTAINERS (IBCs), LARGE PACKAGINGS, PORTABLE TANKS, MULTIPLE-ELEMENT GAS CONTAINERS (MEGCs) AND ROAD TANK VEHICLES

Chapter 6.1 Provisions for the construction and testing of packagings (other than for class 6.2 substances)

6.1.1 Applicability and general provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 6.1.2 Code for designating types of packagings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 6.1.3 Marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 6.1.4 Provisions for packagings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 6.1.5 Test provisions for packagings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360

Chapter 6.2 Provisions for the construction and testing of pressure receptacles, aerosol dispensers, small receptacles containing gas (gas cartridges) and fuel cell cartridges containing liquefied flammable gas

6.2.1 General provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 6.2.2 Provisions for UN pressure receptacles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370 6.2.3 Provisions for non-UN pressure receptacles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381 6.2.4 Provisions for aerosol dispensers, small receptacles containing gas (gas cartridges) and fuel cell cartridges containing liquefied flammable gas 382

Chapter 6.3 Provisions for the construction and testing of packagings for class 6.2 infectious substances of category A

6.3.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384 6.3.2 Provisions for packagings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384 6.3.3 Code for designating types of packagings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384 6.3.4 Marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384 6.3.5 Test provisions for packagings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) vii

11

Bilaga 1

Contents

Page

Chapter 6.4 Provisions for the construction, testing and approval of packages and material of class 7

6.4.1 [Reserved] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 6.4.2 General provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 6.4.3 Additional provisions for packages transported by air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390 6.4.4 Provisions for excepted packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390 6.4.5 Provisions for industrial packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390 6.4.6 Provisions for packages containing uranium hexafluoride . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 6.4.7 Provisions for Type A packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 6.4.8 Provisions for Type B(U) packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392 6.4.9 Provisions for Type B(M) packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394 6.4.10 Provisions for Type C packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394 6.4.11 Provisions for packages containing fissile material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394 6.4.12 Test procedures and demonstration of compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396 6.4.13 Testing the integrity of the containment system and shielding and evaluating criticality safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 6.4.14 Target for drop tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 6.4.15 Test for demonstrating ability to withstand normal conditions of transport . . 397 6.4.16 Additional tests for Type A packages designed for liquids and gases . . . . . . 398 6.4.17 Tests for demonstrating ability to withstand accident conditions of transport 398 6.4.18 Enhanced water immersion test for Type B(U) and Type B(M) packages 5 containing more than 10 A2 and Type C packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399 6.4.19 Water leakage test for packages containing fissile material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399 6.4.20 Tests for Type C packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399 6.4.21 Tests for packagings designed to contain uranium hexafluoride . . . . . . . . . . 399 6.4.22 Approvals of package designs and materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 6.4.23 Applications for approval and approvals for radioactive material transport . . 400 6.4.24 Transitional measures for class 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405

Chapter 6.5 Provisions for the construction and testing of intermediate bulk containers (IBCs)

6.5.1 General requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407 6.5.2 Marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 6.5.3 Construction requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412 6.5.4 Testing, certification and inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412 6.5.5 Specific provisions for IBCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414 6.5.6 Test provisions for IBCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419

Chapter 6.6 Provisions for the construction and testing of large packagings

6.6.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426 6.6.2 Code for designating types of large packagings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426 6.6.3 Marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426 6.6.4 Specific provisions for large packagings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428 6.6.5 Test provisions for large packagings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430

Chapter 6.7 Provisions for the design, construction, inspection and testing of portable tanks and multiple-element gas containers (MEGCs)

6.7.1 Application and general provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434 6.7.2 Provisions for the design, construction, inspection and testing of portable tanks intended for the transport of substances of class 1 and classes 3 to 9 . . . . . 434

viii IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

12

Bilaga 1

Contents

Page 6.7.3 Provisions for the design, construction, inspection and testing of portable tanks intended for the transport of non-refrigerated liquefied gases of class 2 . . . 448 6.7.4 Provisions for the design, construction, inspection and testing of portable tanks intended for the transport of refrigerated liquefied gases of class 2 . . . . . . . 459 6.7.5 Provisions for the design, construction, inspection and testing of multiple-element gas containers (MEGCs) intended for the transport of non-refrigerated gases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469

Chapter 6.8 Provisions for road tank vehicles

6.8.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476 6.8.2 Road tank vehicles for long international voyages for substances of classes 3 to 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476 6.8.3 Road tank vehicles for short international voyages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476

Chapter 6.9 Provisions for the design, construction, inspection and testing of bulk containers

6.9.1 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480 6.9.2 Application and general provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480 6.9.3 Provisions for the design, construction, inspection and testing of freight containers used as BK1 or BK2 bulk containers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480 6.9.4 Provisions for the design, construction and approval of BK1 or BK2 bulk containers other than freight containers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481 6.9.5 Requirements for the design, construction, inspection and testing of flexible bulk containers BK3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482

PART 7 – PROVISIONS CONCERNING TRANSPORT OPERATIONS

Chapter 7.1 General stowage provisions

7.1.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493 7.1.2 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493 7.1.3 Stowage categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494 7.1.4 Special stowage provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495

Chapter 7.2 General segregation provisions

7.2.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500 7.2.2 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500 7.2.3 Segregation provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500 7.2.4 Segregation table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501 7.2.5 Segregation groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502 7.2.6 Special segregation provisions and exemptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502 7.2.7 Segregation of goods of class 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503 Annex: Segregation flow chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505

Chapter 7.3 Consigning operations concerning the packing and use of cargo transport units (CTUs) and related provisions

7.3.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507 7.3.2 General provisions for cargo transport units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507 7.3.3 Packing of cargo transport units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507 7.3.4 Segregation provisions within cargo transport units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508 7.3.5 Tracking and monitoring equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509 7.3.6 Opening and unloading cargo transport units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509 7.3.7 Cargo transport units under temperature control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509 7.3.8 Loading of cargo transport units on board ships . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) ix

13

Bilaga 1

Contents

Page

Chapter 7.4 Stowage and segregation on containerships

7.4.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513 7.4.2 Stowage requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513 7.4.3 Segregation requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514

Chapter 7.5 Stowage and segregation on ro-ro ships

7.5.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517 7.5.2 Stowage provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517 7.5.3 Segregation provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518

Chapter 7.6 Stowage and segregation on general cargo ships

7.6.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519 7.6.2 Stowage and handling provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519 7.6.3 Segregation provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523

Chapter 7.7 Shipborne barges on barge-carrying ships

7.7.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527 7.7.2 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527 7.7.3 Barge loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527 7.7.4 Stowage of shipborne barges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528 7.7.5 Segregation between barges on board barge carrying ships . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528

Chapter 7.8 Special requirements in the event of an incident and fire precautions involving dangerous goods

7.8.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529 7.8.2 General provisions in the event of incidents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529 7.8.3 Special provisions for incidents involving infectious substances . . . . . . . . . . 529 7.8.4 Special provisions for incidents involving radioactive material . . . . . . . . . . . . 530 7.8.5 General fire precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530 7.8.6 Special fire precautions for class 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531 7.8.7 Special fire precautions for class 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531 7.8.8 Special fire precautions for class 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531 7.8.9 Special fire precautions and fire fighting for class 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531

Chapter 7.9 Exemptions, approvals and certificates

7.9.1 Exemptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532 7.9.2 Approvals (including permits, authorizations or agreements) and certificates 532 7.9.3 Contact information for the main designated national competent authorities 532

INDEX

x IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

14

Bilaga 1

Foreword

The International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea, 1974 (SOLAS), as amended, deals with various aspects of maritime safety and contains in chapter VII the mandatory provisions governing the carriage of dangerous goods in packaged form or in solid form in bulk. The carriage of dangerous goods is prohibited except in accordance with the relevant provisions of chapter VII, which are amplified by the International Maritime Dangerous Goods (IMDG) Code.

Regulation II-2/19 of the SOLAS Convention, as amended, specifies the special requirements for a ship intended to carry dangerous goods, the keel of which was laid or which was at a similar stage of construction on or after 1 July 2002.

The International Convention for the Prevention of Pollution from Ships, 1973, as modified by the Protocol of 1978 relating thereto (MARPOL), deals with various aspects of prevention of marine pollution, and contains in its Annex III the mandatory provisions for the prevention of pollution by harmful substances carried by sea in packaged form. Regulation 1(2) prohibits the carriage of harmful substances in ships except in accordance with the provisions of Annex III, which are also amplified by the IMDG Code.

In accordance with the Provisions concerning Reports on Incidents Involving Harmful Substances (Protocol I to MARPOL), incidents involving losses of such substances from ships must be reported by the master or other person having charge of the ship concerned.

The IMDG Code that was adopted by resolution A.716(17) and amended by Amendments 27 to 30 was recommended to Governments for adoption or for use as the basis for national regulations in pursuance of their obligations under regulation VII/1.4 of the 1974 SOLAS Convention, as amended, and regulation 1(3) of Annex III of MARPOL. The IMDG Code, as amended, attained mandatory status from 1 January 2004 under the umbrella of SOLAS, 1974; however, some parts of the Code continue to be recommendatory. Observance of the Code harmonizes the practices and procedures followed in the carriage of dangerous goods by sea and ensures compliance with the mandatory provisions of the SOLAS Convention and of Annex III of MARPOL.

The Code, which sets out in detail the requirements applicable to each individual substance, material or article, has undergone many changes, in both layout and content, in order to keep pace with the expansion and progress of industry. IMO’s Maritime Safety Committee (MSC) is authorized by the Organization’s Assembly to adopt amendments to the Code, thus enabling IMO to respond promptly to developments in transport.

The MSC at its ninetieth session agreed that, in order to facilitate the multimodal transport of dangerous goods, the provisions of the IMDG Code, 2012, may be applied from 1 January 2013 on a voluntary basis, pending their official entry into force on 1 January 2014 without any transitional period. This is described in resolution MSC.328(90) and the Preamble to this Code. It needs to be emphasized that, in the context of the language of the Code, the words “shall”, “should” and “may”, when used in the Code, mean that the relevant provisions are “mandatory”, “recommendatory” and “optional”, respectively.

Reference marks The following symbols placed against an item indicate changes from the previous edition, in accordance with Amendment 36-12 to the IMDG Code:

■ Insertion of an item

⊗ Deletion of an item

△ Change to an item For detailed information on changes, please visit http://gisis.imo.org and navigate to the IMDG Code module (free, instant registration required). Please inform IMO of any apparent discrepancies or errors in the texts of the different versions of the IMDG Code (IMO documents, the printed publication and CD/download and Internet versions of the Code) by means of the same link.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) xi

15

Bilaga 1

Foreword

The IMDG Code is also available as a fully searchable database on CD or as a download (including the items within its Supplement). Intranet and Internet (subscription) versions are also available. For more information, please visit the IMO Publishing Service website at www.imo.org to see a live demonstration of the CD/download versions and obtain details of how online subscription to the IMDG Code works. If and when required, the IMO website will also include any files that show errata or corrigenda to this edition of the IMDG Code. These are anchored objects for cutting and pasting when using InCopy:

xii IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

16

Bilaga 1

Preamble

1 Carriage of dangerous goods by sea is regulated in order to reasonably prevent injury to persons or damage to ships and their cargoes. Carriage of marine pollutants is primarily regulated to prevent harm to the marine environment. The objective of the IMDG Code is to enhance the safe carriage of dangerous goods while facilitating the free unrestricted movement of such goods and prevent pollution to the environment.

2 Over the years, many maritime countries have taken measures to regulate the transport of dangerous goods by sea. The various regulations, codes and practices, however, differed in their framework and, in particular, in the identification and labelling of such goods. Both the terminology used and the provisions for packaging and stowage varied from country to country and created difficulties for all directly or indirectly concerned with the transport of dangerous goods by sea.

3 The need for international regulation of the transport of dangerous goods by sea was recognized by the 1929 International Conference on Safety of Life at Sea (SOLAS), which recommended that rules on the subject have international effect. The classification of dangerous goods and certain general provisions concerning their transport in ships were adopted by the 1948 SOLAS Conference. This Conference also recommended further study with the object of developing international regulations. 4 Meanwhile, the Economic and Social Council of the United Nations had appointed an ad hoc Committee of Experts on the Transport of Dangerous Goods (UN Committee of Experts), which had been actively considering the international aspect of the transport of dangerous goods by all modes of transport. This committee completed a report in 1956 dealing with classification, listing and labelling of dangerous goods and with the transport documents required for such goods. This report, with subsequent modifications, offered a general framework to which existing regulations could be harmonized and within which they could be further developed. The primary goal being world-wide uniformity for regulations concerning the transport of dangerous goods by sea as well as other modes of transport.

5 As a further step towards meeting the need for international rules governing the transport of dangerous goods in ships, the 1960 SOLAS Conference, in addition to laying down a general framework of provisions in chapter VII of the SOLAS Convention, invited IMO (Recommendation 56) to undertake a study with a view to establishing a unified international code for the transport of dangerous goods by sea. This study would be pursued in co-operation with the UN Committee of Experts and should take account of existing maritime practices and procedures. The Conference further recommended that the unified code be prepared by IMO and that it be adopted by the Governments that were Parties to the 1960 Convention.

6 To implement Recommendation 56, IMO's Maritime Safety Committee (MSC) appointed a working group drawn from those countries having considerable experience in the transport of dangerous goods by sea. Preliminary drafts for each class of substances, materials and articles were subsequently brought under close scrutiny by the working group to take into account throughout the practices and procedures of a number of maritime countries in order to make the Code as widely acceptable as possible. This new International Maritime Dangerous Goods (IMDG) Code was approved by the MSC and recommended to Governments by the Assembly of IMO in 1965.

7 During another SOLAS Conference held in 1974, chapter VII of the Convention remained essentially unchanged. Since that date, several amendments to chapter VII adopted by the MSC have entered into force. Although invoked by a footnote reference in regulation 1 of chapter VII, the IMDG Code itself had only recommendatory status until 31 December 2003. 8 At the International Conference on Marine Pollution, 1973, the need was recognized to preserve the marine environment. It was further recognized that negligent or accidental release of marine pollutants transported by sea in packaged form should be minimized. Consequently, provisions were established and adopted by the Conference, and are contained in Annex III of the International Convention for the Prevention of Pollution from Ships, 1973, as modified by the Protocol of 1978 relating thereto (MARPOL 73/78). The Marine Environment Protection Committee (MEPC) decided in 1985 that Annex III should be implemented through the IMDG Code. This decision was also endorsed by the MSC in 1985. Since that date, several amendments to Annex III to MARPOL 73/78 have entered into force.

9 The UN Committee of Experts has continued to meet until the present day and its published "Recommendations on the Transport of Dangerous Goods" are updated biennially. In 1996, the MSC agreed that the IMDG Code should be reformatted consistent with the format of the UN Recommendations on the Transport of

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) xiii

17

Bilaga 1

Preamble

Dangerous Goods. The consistency in format of the UN Recommendations, the IMDG Code and other dangerous goods transport regulations is intended to enhance user-friendliness, compliance with the regulations, and the safe transport of dangerous goods. 10 In 2002, the MSC adopted amendments to SOLAS chapter VII to make the IMDG Code mandatory, which came into force on 1 January 2004. Since then, further amendments were adopted to facilitate user friendliness and promote uniform implementation of the Code. In addition, at its 90th session in May 2012, the MSC adopted amendment 36-12 to the mandatory IMDG Code, which is a complete consolidated and updated version of its text and which will enter into force on 1 January 2014 without any transitional period. However,

on part on a voluntary basis from 1 January 2013 11 In order to keep the Code up to date from the maritime transport operational aspect, the MSC will continue to take into account technological developments, as well as changes to chemical classifications and the related consignment provisions that primarily concern the shipper/consignor. The two-year periodicity of amendments to the UN Recommendations on Transport of Dangerous Goods will also provide the source of most future updating of the IMDG Code. 12 The MSC will also have regard to future implications for the carriage of dangerous goods by sea, in particular, arising from any acceptance by the UN Conference on Environmental Development (UNCED) of common criteria for the classification of chemicals on the basis of a Global Harmonization System (GHS). 13 Attention is drawn to IMO document FAL.6/Circ.14, a list of existing publications relevant to areas and topics relating to ship/port interface matters. 14 Advice on emergency procedures and for initial management of chemical poisoning and diagnosis that may be used in conjunction with the IMDG Code is published separately in "The EmS Guide: Emergency Response Procedures for Ships Carrying Dangerous Goods" (MSC.1/Circ.1025 as amended by MSC.1/

for Use in Accidents Involving Dangerous Goods" (see MSC/Circ.857 and DSC 3/15/Add.2), respectively. 15 In addition, referring to Part D of chapter VII of the SOLAS Convention, a ship transporting INF cargo, as defined in regulation VII/14.2, shall comply with the requirements of the International Code for the Safe Carriage of Packaged Irradiated Nuclear Fuel, Plutonium and High-Level Radioactive Wastes on board Ships (INF Code).

xiv IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

18

Bilaga 1

1

PART 1

GENERAL PROVISIONS, DEFINITIONS AND TRAINING

19

Bilaga 1

11

20

Bilaga 1

Chapter 1.1

General provisions

1.1.0 Introductory note

It should be noted that other international and national modal regulations exist and that those regulations may recognize all or part of the provisions of this Code. In addition, port authorities and other bodies and organizations should recognize the Code and may use it as a basis for their storage and handling bye-laws within loading and discharge areas.

1.1.1 Application and implementation of the Code

1.1.1.1 The provisions contained in this Code are applicable to all ships to which the International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea, 1974 (SOLAS 74), as amended, applies and which are carrying dangerous goods as defined in regulation 1 of part A of chapter VII of that Convention. 1.1.1.2 The provisions of regulation II-2/19 of that Convention apply to passenger ships and to cargo ships constructed on or after 1 July 2002. For: .1 a passenger ship constructed on or after 1 September 1984 but before 1 July 2002; or .2 a cargo ship of 500 gross tons or over constructed on or after 1 September 1984 but before 1 July 2002; or .3 a cargo ship of less than 500 gross tons constructed on or after 1 February 1992 but before 1 July 2002, the requirements of regulation II-2/54 of SOLAS, 1974, as amended by resolutions MSC.1(XLV), MSC.6(48), MSC.13(57), MSC.22(59), MSC.24(60), MSC.27(61), MSC.31(63) and MSC.57(67), apply (see II-2/1.2). For cargo ships of less than 500 gross tons constructed on or after 1 September 1984 and before 1 February 1992, it is recommended that Contracting Governments extend such application to these cargo ships as far as possible. 1.1.1.3 All ships, irrespective of type and size, carrying substances, material or articles identified in this Code as marine pollutants are subject to the provisions of this Code. 1.1.1.4 In certain parts of this Code, a particular action is prescribed, but the responsibility for carrying out the action is not specifically assigned to any particular person. Such responsibility may vary according to the laws and customs of different countries and the international conventions into which these countries have entered. For the purpose of this Code, it is not necessary to make this assignment, but only to identify the action itself. It remains the prerogative of each Government to assign this responsibility. 1.1.1.5 Although this Code is legally treated as a mandatory instrument under chapter VII of SOLAS 74, as amended, the following provisions of the Code remain recommendatory: .1 paragraph 1.1.1.8 (Notification of infringements); .2 paragraphs 1.3.1.4 to 1.3.1.7 (Training); .3 chapter 1.4 (Security provisions) except 1.4.1.1, which is mandatory; .4 section 2.1.0 of chapter 2.1 (Class 1 – Explosives, Introductory notes); .5 section 2.3.3 of chapter 2.3 (Determination of flashpoint); .6 columns (15) and (17) of the Dangerous Goods List in chapter 3.2; .7 The segregation flow chart and example in the annex to chapter 7.2 .8 section 5.4.5 of chapter 5.4 (Multimodal Dangerous Goods Form), insofar as the layout of the form is concerned;

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 3

21

Bilaga 1

Part 1 – General provisions, definitions and training

.9 chapter 7.8 (Special provisions in the event of an incident and fire precautions involving dangerous goods); .10 section 7.9.3 (Contact information for the main designated national competent authorities); and .11 appendix B.

1.1.1.6 Application of standards

Where the application of a standard is required and there is any conflict between the standard and the provisions of this Code, the provisions of this Code take precedence.

1.1.1.7 Transport of dangerous goods used as a coolant or conditioner

Dangerous goods, that are only asphyxiant (which dilute or replace the oxygen normally in the atmosphere), when used in cargo transport units for cooling or conditioning purposes are only subject to the provisions of section 5.5.3. Note: When carried on board as ship’s stores or equipment, these coolants and conditioners are not subject to the provisions of this Code

1.1.1.8 Notification of infringements

When a competent authority has reasons to believe that the safety of the transport of dangerous goods is compromised as a result of serious or repeated infringements of this Code by an enterprise which has its headquarters on the territory of another competent authority, it should if necessary notify that competent authority of such infringements.

1.1.2 Conventions

1.1.2.1 International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea, 1974

Part A of chapter VII of the International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea, 1974 (SOLAS 1974), as amended, deals with the carriage of dangerous goods in packaged form, and is reproduced in full:

CHAPTER VII Carriage of Dangerous Goods

Part A

Carriage of Dangerous Goods in Packaged Form

Regulation 1

Definitions

For the purpose of this chapter, unless expressly provided otherwise:

1 IMDG Code means the International Maritime Dangerous Goods (IMDG) Code adopted by the Maritime Safety Committee of the Organization by resolution MSC.122(75), as may be amended by the Organization, provided that such amendments are adopted, brought into force and take effect in accordance with the provisions of article VIII of the present Convention concerning the amendment procedures applicable to the annex other than chapter I.

2 Dangerous goods mean the substances, materials and articles covered by the IMDG Code.

3 Packaged form means the form of containment specified in the IMDG Code.

Regulation 2

Application*

1 Unless expressly provided otherwise, this part applies to the carriage of dangerous goods in packaged form in all ships to which the present regulations apply and in cargo ships of less than 500 gross tonnage.

* Refer to: .1 part D which contains special requirements for the carriage of INF cargo; and

4 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

22

Bilaga 1

Chapter 1.1 – General provisions

2 The provisions of this part do not apply to ships’ stores and equipment. 3 The carriage of dangerous goods in packaged form is prohibited except in accordance with the provisions of this chapter. 4 To supplement the provisions of this part, each Contracting Government shall issue, or cause to be issued, detailed instructions on emergency response and medical first aid relevant to incidents involving dangerous goods in packaged form, taking into account the guidelines developed by the Organization.*

Regulation 3

Requirements for the carriage of dangerous goods

The carriage of dangerous goods in packaged form shall comply with the relevant provisions of the IMDG Code. †

Regulation 4

Documents

1 Transport information relating to the carriage of dangerous goods in packaged form and the container/ vehicle packing certificate shall be in accordance with the relevant provisions of the IMDG Code and shall be made available to the person or organization designated by the port State authority. 2 Each ship carrying dangerous goods in packaged form shall have a special list, manifest or stowage plan setting forth, in accordance with the relevant provisions of the IMDG Code, the dangerous goods on board and the location thereof. A copy of one of these documents shall be made available before departure to the person or organization designated by the port State authority.

Regulation 5

Cargo Securing Manual

Cargo, cargo units‡ and cargo transport units, shall be loaded, stowed and secured throughout the voyage in accordance with the Cargo Securing Manual approved by the Administration. The Cargo Securing Manual shall be drawn up to a standard at least equivalent to the guidelines developed by the Organization.§

Regulation 6

Reporting of incidents involving dangerous goods

1 When an incident takes place involving the loss or likely loss overboard of dangerous goods in packaged form into the sea, the master, or other person having charge of the ship, shall report the particulars of such an incident without delay and to the fullest extent possible to the nearest coastal State. The report shall be drawn up based on general principles and guidelines developed by the Organization.¶ 2 In the event of the ship referred to in paragraph 1 being abandoned, or in the event of a report from such a ship being incomplete or unobtainable, the company, as defined in regulation IX/1.2, shall, to the fullest extent possible, assume the obligations placed upon the master by this regulation.

1.1.2.2 International Convention for the Prevention of Pollution from Ships, MARPOL 1973/78 1.1.2.2.1 Annex III of the International Convention for the Prevention of Pollution from Ships, 1973, as modified by the Protocol of 1978 relating thereto (MARPOL 73/78), deals with the prevention of pollution by harmful

.2 regulation II-2/19 which contains special requirements for ships carrying dangerous goods. * Refer to: .1 the Emergency Response Procedures for Ships Carrying Dangerous Goods (EmS Guide) (MSC.1/Circ.1025, as amended); and .2 the Medical First Aid Guide for Use in Accidents Involving Dangerous Goods (MFAG) (MSC/Circ.857), published by the Organization. entry into force date of amendment 36-12 of the IMDG code. ‡ As defined in the Code of Safe Practice for Cargo Stowage and Securing (CSS Code), adopted by the Organization by resolution A.714(17), as amended. § Refer to the Revised Guidelines for the preparation of the Cargo Securing Manual (MSC.1/Circ.1353). ¶ Refer to the General principles for ship reporting systems and ship reporting requirements, including guidelines for reporting incidents involving dangerous goods, harmful substances and/or marine pollutants, adopted by the Organization by resolution A.851(20), as amended.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 5

23

Bilaga 1

Part 1 – General provisions, definitions and training

substances carried by sea in packaged form and is reproduced in full, as revised by the Marine Environment Protection Committee.*

Annex III

Regulations for the Prevention of Pollution by Harmful Substances Carried by Sea in Packaged Form

Regulation 1

Application

1 Unless expressly provided otherwise, the regulations of this Annex apply to all ships carrying harmful substances in packaged form. .1 For the purpose of this Annex, "harmful substances" are those substances which are identified as marine pollutants in the International Maritime Dangerous Goods Code (IMDG Code)† or which meet the criteria in the Appendix of this Annex. .2 For the purposes of this Annex, "packaged form" is defined as the forms of containment specified for harmful substances in the IMDG Code. 2 The carriage of harmful substances is prohibited, except in accordance with the provisions of this Annex. 3 To supplement the provisions of this Annex, the Government of each Party to the Convention shall issue, or cause to be issued, detailed requirements on packing, marking, labelling, documentation, stowage, quantity limitations and exceptions for preventing or minimizing pollution of the marine environment by harmful substances.* 4 For the purposes of this Annex, empty packagings which have been used previously for the carriage of harmful substances shall themselves be treated as harmful substances unless adequate precautions have been taken to ensure that they contain no residue that is harmful to the marine environment. 5 The requirements of this Annex do not apply to ship's stores and equipment.

Regulation 2

Packing

Packages shall be adequate to minimize the hazard to the marine environment, having regard to their specific contents.

Regulation 3

Marking and labelling

1 Packages containing a harmful substance shall be durably marked or labelled to indicate that the substance is a harmful substance in accordance with the relevant provisions of the IMDG Code. 2 The method of affixing marks or labels on packages containing a harmful substance shall be in accordance with the relevant provisions of the IMDG Code.

Regulation 4‡ Documentation

1 Transport information relating to the carriage of harmful substances shall be in accordance with the relevant provisions of the IMDG Code and shall be made available to the person or organization designated by the port State authority. 2 Each ship carrying harmful substances shall have a special list, manifest or stowage plan setting forth, in accordance with the relevant provisions of the IMDG Code, the harmful substances on board and the location thereof. A copy of one of these documents shall be made available before departure to the person or organization designated by the port State authority.

* The revised text of Annex III was adopted by resolution MEPC.193(61), which will enter into force on 1 January 2014, which is the mandatory entry into force date of amendment 36-12 to the IMDG Code. † Refer to the IMDG Code adopted by the Organization by resolution MSC.122(75), as amended by the Maritime Safety Committee ‡ Reference to “documents” in this regulation does not preclude the use of electronic data processing (EDP) and electronic data interchange (EDI) transmission techniques as an aid to paper documentation.

6 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

24

Bilaga 1

Chapter 1.1 – General provisions

Regulation 5

Stowage

Harmful substances shall be properly stowed and secured so as to minimize the hazards to the marine environment without impairing the safety of the ship and persons on board.

Regulation 6

Quantity limitations

Certain harmful substances may, for sound scientific and technical reasons, need to be prohibited for carriage or be limited as to the quantity which may be carried aboard any one ship. In limiting the quantity, due consideration shall be given to size, construction and equipment of the ship, as well as the packaging and the inherent nature of the substances.

Regulation 7

Exceptions

1 Jettisoning of harmful substances carried in packaged form shall be prohibited, except where necessary for the purpose of securing the safety of the ship or saving life at sea. 2 Subject to the provisions of the present Convention, appropriate measures based on the physical, chemical and biological properties of harmful substances shall be taken to regulate the washing of leakages overboard, provided that compliance with such measures would not impair the safety of the ship and persons on board.

Regulation 8

*

Port State control on operational requirements

1 A ship when in a port or an offshore terminal of another Party is subject to inspection by officers duly authorized by such Party concerning operational requirements under this Annex. 2 Where there are clear grounds for believing that the master or crew are not familiar with essential shipboard procedures relating to the prevention of pollution by harmful substances, the Party shall take such steps, including carrying out detailed inspection and, if required, will ensure that the ship shall not sail until the situation has been brought to order in accordance with the requirements of this Annex. 3 Procedures relating to the port State control prescribed in article 5 of the present Convention shall apply to this regulation. 4 Nothing in this regulation shall be construed to limit the rights and obligations of a Party carrying out control over operational requirements specifically provided for in the present Convention.

Appendix to Annex III

Criteria for the identification of harmful substances in packaged form

For the purposes of this Annex, substances identified by any one of the following criteria are harmful substances:† (a) Acute (short-term) aquatic hazard Category: Acute 1 96 hr LC50 (for fish) ≤ 1 mg/ℓ and/or 48 hr EC50 (for crustacea) ≤ 1 mg/ℓ and/or 72 or 96 hr ErC50 (for algae or other aquatic plants) ≤ 1 mg/ℓ

* Refer to the Procedures for port State control adopted by the Organization by resolution A.787(19) and amended by resolution A.882(21). † The criteria are based on those developed by the United Nations Globally Harmonized System of Classification and Labelling of Chemicals (GHS), as amended. For definitions of acronyms or terms used in this appendix, refer to the relevant paragraphs of the IMDG Code.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 7

25

Bilaga 1

Part 1 – General provisions, definitions and training

(b) Long-term aquatic hazard (i) Non-rapidly degradable substances for which there are adequate chronic toxicity data available Category: Chronic 1 Chronic NOEC or ECx (for fish) ≤ 0.1 mg/ℓ and/or Chronic NOEC or ECx (for crustacea) ≤ 0.1 mg/ℓ and/or Chronic NOEC or ECx (for algae or other aquatic plants) ≤ 0.1 mg/ℓ

Category: Chronic 2 Chronic NOEC or ECx (for fish) ≤ 1 mg/ℓ and/or Chronic NOEC or ECx (for crustacea) ≤ 1 mg/ℓ and/or Chronic NOEC or ECx (for algae or other aquatic plants) ≤ 1 mg/ℓ

(ii) Rapidly degradable substances for which there are adequate chronic toxicity data available Category Chronic 1: Chronic NOEC or ECx (for fish) ≤ 0.01 mg/ℓ and/or Chronic NOEC or ECx (for crustacea) ≤ 0.01 mg/ℓ and/or Chronic NOEC or ECx (for algae or other aquatic plants) ≤ 0.01 mg/ℓ

Category Chronic 2: Chronic NOEC or ECx (for fish) ≤ 0.1 mg/ℓ and/or Chronic NOEC or ECx (for crustacea) ≤ 0.1 mg/ℓ and/or Chronic NOEC or ECx (for algae or other aquatic plants) ≤ 0.1 mg/ℓ

(iii) Substances for which adequate chronic toxicity data are not available Category Chronic 1: 96 hr LC50 (for fish) ≤ 1 mg/ℓ and/or 48 hr EC50 (for crustacea) ≤ 1 mg/ℓ and/or 72 or 96 hr ErC50 (for algae or other aquatic plants) ≤ 1 mg/ℓ and the substance is not rapidly degradable and/or the experimentally determined BCF is ≥ 500 (or, if absent the log Kow ≥ 4).

Category Chronic 2: 96 hr LC50 (for fish) >1 mg/ℓ but ≤ 10 mg/ℓ and/or 48 hr EC50 (for crustacea) >1 mg/ℓ but ≤ 10 mg/ℓ and/or 72 or 96 hr ErC50 (for algae or other aquatic plants) >1 mg/ℓ but ≤ 10 mg/ℓ and the substance is not rapidly degradable and/or the experimentally determined BCF is ≥ 500 (or, if absent, the log Kow ≥ 4).

Additional guidance on the classification process for substances and mixtures is included in the IMDG Code.

8 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

26

Bilaga 1

Chapter 1.1 – General provisions

1.1.3 Dangerous goods forbidden from transport

1.1.3.1 Unless provided otherwise by this Code, the following are forbidden from transport: Any substance or article which, as presented for transport, is liable to explode, dangerously react, produce a flame or dangerous evolution of heat or dangerous emission of toxic, corrosive or flammable gases or vapours under normal conditions of transport. In chapter 3.3, special provisions 349, 350, 351, 352, 353 and 900 list certain substances, which are forbidden for transport.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 9

27

Bilaga 1

1

Chapter 1.2

Definitions, units of measurement and abbreviations

1.2.1 Definitions

The following is a list of definitions of general applicability that are used throughout this Code. Additional definitions of a highly specific nature are presented in the relevant chapters. For the purposes of this Code: Aerosols or aerosol dispensers means non-refillable receptacles meeting the provisions of 6.2.4, made of metal, glass or plastics and containing a gas compressed, liquefied or dissolved under pressure, with or without a liquid, paste or powder, and fitted with a release device allowing the contents to be ejected as solid or liquid particles in suspension in a gas, as a foam, paste or powder or in a liquid state or in a gaseous state. Alternative arrangement means an approval granted by the competent authority for a portable tank or MEGC that has been designed, constructed or tested to technical requirements or testing methods other than those specified in this Code (see, for instance, 6.7.5.11.1). Animal material means animal carcasses, animal body parts, or animal foodstuffs. Approval Multilateral approval, for the transport of class 7 material, means approval by the relevant competent authority of the country of origin of the design or shipment, as applicable, and also, where the consignment is to be transported through or into any other country, approval by the competent authority of that country. Unilateral approval, for the transport of class 7 material, means an approval of a design which is required to be given by the competent authority of the country of origin of the design only. Bags means flexible packagings made of paper, plastic film, textiles, woven material, or other suitable materials. Barge-carrying ship means a ship specially designed and equipped to transport shipborne barges. Barge feeder vessel means a vessel specially designed and equipped to transport shipborne barges to or from a barge-carrying ship. Boxes means packagings with complete rectangular or polygonal faces, made of metal, wood, plywood, reconstituted wood, fibreboard, plastics, or other suitable material. Small holes for purposes such as ease of the handling or opening of the box or to meet classification provisions are permitted as long as they do not compromise the integrity of the packaging during transport. Bulk containers are containment systems (including any liner or coating) intended for the transport of solid substances which are in direct contact with the containment system. Packagings, intermediate bulk containers (IBCs), large packagings and portable tanks are not included. Bulk containers: – are of a permanent character and accordingly strong enough to be suitable for repeated use; – are specially designed to facilitate the transport of goods by one or more means of transport without intermediate reloading; – are fitted with devices permitting ready handling; and – have a capacity of not less than 1 cubic metre. Examples of bulk containers are freight containers, offshore bulk containers, skips, bulk bins, swap bodies, trough-shaped containers, roller containers, load compartments of vehicles or flexible bulk containers. Bundles of cylinders are assemblies of cylinders that are fastened together and which are interconnected by a manifold and transported as a unit. The total water capacity shall not exceed 3000 litres except that bundles intended for the transport of gases of class 2.3 shall be limited to 1000 litres water capacity.

10 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

28

Bilaga 1

Chapter 1.2 – Definitions, units of measurement and abbreviations

Cargo transport unit means a road transport tank or freight vehicle, a railway transport tank or freight wagon, a multimodal freight container or portable tank, or an MEGC. Carrier means any person, organization or Government undertaking the transport of dangerous goods by any means of transport. The term includes both carriers for hire or reward (known as common or contract carriers in some countries) and carriers on own account (known as private carriers in some countries). Cellular ship means a ship in which containers are loaded under deck into specially designed slots giving a permanent stowage of the container during sea transport. Containers loaded on deck in such a ship are specially stacked and secured on fittings. Closed cargo transport unit, with the exception of class 1, means a cargo transport unit which totally encloses the contents by permanent structures with complete and rigid surfaces. Cargo transport units with fabric sides or tops are not considered closed cargo transport units; for definition of closed cargo transport unit for class 1, see 7.1.2. Closed ro–ro cargo space means a ro–ro cargo space which is neither an open ro–ro cargo space nor a weather deck. Closure means a device which closes an opening in a receptacle. Combination packagings means a combination of packagings for transport purposes, consisting of one or more inner packagings secured in an outer packaging in accordance with 4.1.1.5. Competent authority means any body or authority designated or otherwise recognized as such for any purpose in connection with this Code. Compliance assurance means a systematic programme of measures applied by a competent authority which is aimed at ensuring that the provisions of this Code are met in practice. Composite packagings means packagings consisting of an outer packaging and an inner receptacle so constructed that the inner receptacle and the outer packaging form an integral packaging. Once assembled, it remains thereafter an integrated single unit; it is filled, stored, transported and emptied as such. Confinement system, for the transport of class 7 material, means the assembly of fissile material and packaging components specified by the designer and agreed to by the competent authority as intended to preserve criticality safety. Consignee means any person, organization or Government which is entitled to take delivery of a consignment. Consignment means any package or packages, or load of dangerous goods, presented by a consignor for transport. Consignor means any person, organization or Government which prepares a consignment for transport. Containment system, for the transport of class 7 material, means the assembly of components of the packaging specified by the designer as intended to retain the radioactive material during transport. Control temperature means the maximum temperature at which certain substances (such as organic peroxides and self-reactive and related substances) can be safely transported during a prolonged period of time. Conveyance means: .1 for transport by road or rail: any vehicle, .2 for transport by water: any ship, or any cargo space or defined deck area of a ship, .3 for transport by air: any aircraft. Crates are outer packagings with incomplete surfaces. Criticality safety index (CSI) assigned to a package, overpack or freight container containing fissile material, for the transport of class 7 material, means a number which is used to provide control over the accumulation of packages, overpacks or freight containers containing fissile material. Critical temperature is the temperature above which the substance cannot exist in the liquid state. Cryogenic receptacles are transportable thermally insulated receptacles for refrigerated liquefied gases, of a water capacity of not more than 1000 litres. Cylinders are transportable pressure receptacles of a water capacity not exceeding 150 litres. Defined deck area means the area, of the weather deck of a ship, or of a vehicle deck of a roll-on/roll-off ship, which is allocated for the stowage of dangerous goods. Design, for the transport of class 7 material, means the description of special form radioactive material, low dispersible radioactive material, package or packaging which enables such an item to be fully identified.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 11

29

Bilaga 1

Part 1 – General provisions, definitions and training

The description may include specifications, engineering drawings, reports demonstrating compliance with regulatory requirements, and other relevant documentation. Drums means flat-ended or convex-ended cylindrical packagings made of metal, fibreboard, plastics, plywood or other suitable materials. This definition also includes packagings of other shapes, such as round taper-necked packagings, or pail-shaped packagings. Wooden barrels and jerricans are not covered by this definition. Elevated temperature substance means a substance which is transported or offered for transport: – in the liquid state at a temperature at or above 100°C – in the liquid state with a flashpoint above 60°C that is intentionally heated to a temperature above its flashpoint; or – in the solid state at a temperature at or above 240°C. Emergency temperature means the temperature at which emergency procedures shall be implemented. Exclusive use, for the transport of class 7 material, means the sole use, by a single consignor, of a conveyance or of a large freight container, in respect of which all initial, intermediate and final loading and unloading is carried out in accordance with the directions of the consignor or consignee. Filling ratio means the ratio of the mass of gas to the mass of water at 15°C that would fill completely a pressure receptacle fitted ready for use. Flashpoint means the lowest temperature of a liquid at which its vapour forms an ignitable mixture with air. Foodstuff includes foodstuffs, feeds or other edible substances intended for consumption by humans or animals Freight container means an article of transport equipment that is of a permanent character and accordingly strong enough to be suitable for repeated use; specially designed to facilitate the transport of goods, by one or more modes of transport, without intermediate reloading; designed to be secured and/or readily handled, having fittings for these purposes, and approved in accordance with the International Convention for Safe Containers (CSC), 1972, as amended. The term “freight container” includes neither vehicle nor packaging. However, a freight container that is carried on a chassis is included. For freight containers for the transport of radioactive material, a freight container may be used as a packaging. A small freight container is that which has either any overall outer dimension less than 1.5 m, or an internal volume of not more than 3 m3. Any other freight container is considered to be a large freight container. Fuel cell means an electrochemical device that converts the chemical energy of a fuel to electrical energy, heat and reaction products. Fuel cell engine means a device used to power equipment and which consists of a fuel cell and its fuel supply, whether integrated with or separate from the fuel cell, and includes all appurtenances necessary to fulfil its function. GHS means the third revised edition of the Globally Harmonized System of Classification and Labelling of Chemicals, published by the United Nations as document ST/SG/AC.10/30/Rev.4. IMO type 4 tank means a road tank vehicle for the transport of dangerous goods of classes 3 to 9 and includes a semi-trailer with a permanently attached tank or a tank attached to a chassis, with at least four twist locks that take account of ISO standards (i.e. ISO International Standard 1161:1984). IMO type 6 tank means a road tank vehicle for the transport of non-refrigerated liquefied gases of class 2 and includes a semi-trailer with a permanently attached tank or a tank attached to a chassis which is fitted with items of service equipment and structural equipment necessary for the transport of gases. IMO type 8 tank means a road tank vehicle for the transport of refrigerated liquefied gases of class 2 and includes a semi-trailer with a permanently attached thermally insulated tank fitted with items of service equipment and structural equipment necessary for the transport of refrigerated liquefied gases. Inner packagings means packagings for which an outer packaging is required for transport. Inner receptacles means receptacles which require an outer packaging in order to perform their containment function. Inspection body means an independent inspection and testing body approved by the competent authority. Intermediate bulk containers (IBCs) means rigid or flexible portable packagings, other than specified in chapter 6.1, that: .1 have a capacity of: .1 not more than 3.0 m3 (3000 litres) for solids and liquids of packing groups II and III;

12 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

30

Bilaga 1

Chapter 1.2 – Definitions, units of measurement and abbreviations

.2 not more than 1.5 m3 for solids of packing group I when packed in flexible, rigid plastics, composite, fibreboard or wooden IBCs; .3 not more than 3.0 m3 for solids of packing group I when packed in metal IBCs; .4 not more than 3.0 m3 for radioactive material of class 7; .2 are designed for mechanical handling; and .3 are resistant to the stresses produced in handling and transport, as determined by tests. Remanufactured IBCs are metal, rigid plastics or composite IBCs that: .1 are produced as a UN type from a non-UN type; or .2 are converted from one UN design type to another UN design type. Remanufactured IBCs are subject to the same provisions of this Code that apply to new IBCs of the same type (see also design type definition in 6.5.6.1.1). Repaired IBCs are metal, rigid plastics or composite IBCs that, as a result of impact or for any other cause (e.g. corrosion, embrittlement or other evidence of reduced strength as compared to the design type) are restored so as to conform to the design type and to be able to withstand the design type tests. For the purposes of this Code, the replacement of the rigid inner receptacle of a composite IBC with a receptacle conforming to the original design type from the same manufacturer is considered repair. However, routine maintenance of rigid IBCs (see definition below) is not considered repair. The bodies of rigid plastics IBCs and the inner receptacles of composite IBCs are not repairable. Flexible IBCs are not repairable, unless approved by the competent authority. Routine maintenance of flexible IBCs is the routine performance on plastics or textile flexible IBCs of operations, such as: .1 cleaning; or .2 replacement of non-integral components, such as non-integral liners and closure ties, with components conforming to the original manufacturer’s specification; provided that these operations do not adversely affect the containment function of the flexible IBC or alter the design type. Note: For rigid IBCs, see “Routine maintenance of rigid IBCs”. Routine maintenance of rigid IBCs is the routine performance on metal, rigid plastics or composite IBCs of operations such as: .1 cleaning; .2 removal and reinstallation or replacement of body closures (including associated gaskets), or of service equipment, conforming to the original manufacturer’s specifications, provided that the leaktightness of the IBC is verified; or .3 restoration of structural equipment not directly performing a dangerous goods containment or discharge pressure retention function so as to conform to the design type (e.g. the straightening of legs or lifting attachments) provided that the containment function of the IBC is not affected. Note: For flexible IBCs, see “Routine maintenance of flexible IBCs”. Intermediate packagings means packagings placed between inner packagings, or articles, and an outer packaging. Jerricans means metal or plastics packagings of rectangular or polygonal cross-section. Large packagings means packagings consisting of an outer packaging which contains articles or inner packagings and which: .1 are designed for mechanical handling; and .2 exceed 400 kg net mass or 450 ℓ capacity but have a volume of not more than 3 m3. Liner means a separate tube or bag inserted into a packaging (including IBCs and large packagings) but not forming an integral part of it, including the closures of its openings. Liquids are dangerous goods which at 50°C have a vapour pressure of not more than 300 kPa (3 bar), which are not completely gaseous at 20°C and at a pressure of 101.3 kPa, and which have a melting point or initial melting point of 20°C or less at a pressure of 101.3 kPa. A viscous substance for which a specific melting point cannot be determined shall be subjected to the ASTM D 4359-90 test; or to the test for determining fluidity (penetrometer test) prescribed in section 2.3.4 of Annex A of the European Agreement concerning the International Carriage of Dangerous Goods by Road (ADR), as amended. Long international voyage means an international voyage that is not a short international voyage.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 13

31

Bilaga 1

Part 1 – General provisions, definitions and training

Manual of Tests and Criteria means the fifth revised edition of the United Nations publication entitled “Recommendations on the Transport of Dangerous Goods, Manual of Tests and Criteria” (ST/SG/AC.10/11/Rev.5 as amended by ST/SG/AC.10/11/Rev.5/Amend.1).

Maximum capacity as used in 6.1.4 means the maximum inner volume of receptacles or packagings expressed in litres.

Maximum net mass as used in 6.1.4 means the maximum net mass of contents in a single packaging or maximum combined mass of inner packagings and the contents thereof and is expressed in kilograms.

Maximum normal operating pressure, for the transport of class 7 material, means the maximum pressure above atmospheric pressure at mean sea-level that would develop in the containment system in a period of one year under the conditions of temperature and solar radiation corresponding to environmental conditions in the absence of venting, external cooling by an ancillary system, or operational controls during transport. Metal hydride storage system means a single complete hydrogen storage system, including a receptacle, metal hydride, pressure relief device, shut-off valve, service equipment and internal components used for the transport of hydrogen only.

Multiple-element gas containers (MEGCs) are multimodal assemblies of cylinders, tubes and bundles of cylinders which are interconnected by a manifold and which are assembled within a framework. The MEGC includes service equipment and structural equipment necessary for the transport of gases.

Net explosive mass (NEM) means the total mass of the explosive substances, without the packagings, casings, etc. (Net explosive quantity (NEQ), net explosive contents (NEC), or net explosive weight (NEW) are often used to convey the same meaning.)

Offshore bulk container means a bulk container specially designed for repeated use for the transport of dangerous goods to, from and between offshore facilities. An offshore bulk container is designed and constructed in accordance with MSC/Circ.860 “Guidelines for the approval of offshore containers handled in open seas”.

Open cargo transport unit means a unit which is not a closed cargo transport unit.

Open cryogenic receptacle means a transportable thermally insulated receptacle for refrigerated liquefied gases maintained at atmospheric pressure by continuous venting of the refrigerated liquefied gas.

Open ro–ro cargo space means a ro–ro cargo space either open at both ends, or open at one end and provided with adequate natural ventilation effective over its entire length through permanent openings in the side plating or deckhead to the satisfaction of the Administration.

Outer packaging means the outer protection of a composite or combination packaging together with any absorbent materials, cushioning and any other components necessary to contain and protect inner receptacles or inner packagings.

Overpack means an enclosure used by a single consignor to contain one or more packages and to form one unit for the convenience of handling and stowage during transport. Examples of overpacks are a number of packages either: .1 placed or stacked on to a load board, such as a pallet, and secured by strapping, shrink-wrapping, stretch-wrapping, or other suitable means; or .2 placed in a protective outer packaging such as a box or crate.

Overstowed means that a package or container is directly stowed on top of another.

Package means the complete product of the packing operation, consisting of the packaging and its contents prepared for transport.

Packaging means one or more receptacles and any other components or materials necessary for the receptacles to perform their containment and other safety functions.

Pressure drums are welded transportable pressure receptacles of a water capacity exceeding 150 litres and of not more than 1000 litres (e.g. cylindrical receptacles equipped with rolling hoops, spheres on skids).

Pressure receptacles is a collective term that includes cylinders, tubes, pressure drums, closed cryogenic receptacles, metal hydride storage systems, bundles of cylinders and salvage pressure receptacles.

Quality assurance means a systematic programme of controls and inspections applied by any organization or body which is aimed at providing adequate confidence that the standard of safety prescribed in this Code is achieved in practice.

Radiation level, for the transport of class 7 material, means the corresponding dose rate expressed in millisieverts per hour.

14 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

32

Bilaga 1

Chapter 1.2 – Definitions, units of measurement and abbreviations

Radioactive contents, for the transport of class 7 material, mean the radioactive material together with any contaminated or activated solids, liquids, and gases within the packaging. Receptacles means containment vessels for receiving and holding substances or articles, including any means of closing. Reconditioned packagings include: .1 metal drums that: .1 are cleaned to original materials of construction, with all former contents, internal and external corrosion, and external coatings and labels removed; .2 are restored to original shape and contour, with chimes (if any) straightened and sealed, and all non-integral gaskets replaced; and .3 are inspected after cleaning, but before painting, with rejection of packagings with visible pitting, significant reduction in material thickness, metal fatigue, damaged threads or closures, or other significant defects; .2 plastic drums and jerricans that: .1 are cleaned to original materials of construction, with all former contents, external coatings and labels removed; .2 have all non-integral gaskets replaced; and .3 are inspected after cleaning, with rejection of packagings with visible damage such as tears, creases or cracks, or damaged threads or closures, or other significant defects. Recycled plastics material means material recovered from used industrial packagings that has been cleaned and prepared for processing into new packagings. The specific properties of the recycled material used for production of new packagings shall be assured and documented regularly as part of a quality assurance programme recognized by the competent authority. The quality assurance programme shall include a record of proper pre-sorting and verification that each batch of recycled plastics material has the proper melt flow rate, density, and tensile yield strength, consistent with that of the design type manufactured from such recycled material. This necessarily includes knowledge about the packaging material from which the recycled plastics have been derived, as well as awareness of the prior contents of those packagings if those prior contents might reduce the capability of new packagings produced using that material. In addition, the packaging manufacturer’s quality assurance programme under 6.1.1.3 shall include performance of the mechanical design type test in 6.1.5 on packagings manufactured from each batch of recycled plastics material. In this testing, stacking performance may be verified by appropriate dynamic compression testing rather than static load testing. Note: ISO 16103:2005 “Packaging – Transport packages for dangerous goods – Recycled plastics material”, provides additional guidance on procedures to be followed in approving the use of recycled plastics material. Remanufactured IBCs (see Intermediate bulk containers (IBCs)). Remanufactured large packaging means a metal or rigid plastics large packaging that: .1 is produced as a UN type from a non-UN type; or .2 is converted from one UN design type to another UN design type. Remanufactured large packagings are subject to the same provisions of this Code that apply to new large packagings of the same type (see also design type definition in 6.6.5.1.2). Remanufactured packagings include: .1 metal drums that: .1 are produced as a UN type from a non-UN type; .2 are converted from one UN type to another UN type; or .3 undergo the replacement of integral structural components (such as non-removable heads); or .2 plastic drums that: .1 are converted from one UN type to another UN type (such as 1H1 to 1H2); or .2 undergo the replacement of integral structural components. Remanufactured drums are subject to the same provisions of this Code that apply to a new drum of the same type. Repaired IBCs (see Intermediate bulk containers (IBCs)). Re-used large packaging means a large packaging to be refilled which has been examined and found free of defects affecting the ability to withstand the performance tests: the term includes those which are refilled with the same or similar compatible contents and are transported within distribution chains controlled by the consignor of the product.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 15

33

Bilaga 1

Part 1 – General provisions, definitions and training

Re-used packagings means packagings to be refilled which have been examined and found free of defects affecting the ability to withstand the performance tests; the term includes those which are refilled with the same or similar compatible contents and are transported within distribution chains controlled by the consignor of the product.

Road tank vehicle means a vehicle equipped with a tank with a capacity of more than 450 litres, fitted with pressure-relief devices.

Ro–ro cargo space means spaces not normally subdivided in any way and extending to either a substantial length or the entire length of the ship in which goods (packaged or in bulk, in or on rail or road cars, vehicles (including road or rail tankers), trailers, containers, pallets, demountable tanks or in or on similar stowage units or other receptacles) can be loaded and unloaded normally in a horizontal direction.

Ro–ro ship (roll-on/roll-off ship) means a ship which has one or more decks, either closed or open, not normally subdivided in any way and generally running the entire length of the ship, carrying goods which are normally loaded and unloaded in a horizontal direction.

Routine maintenance of IBCs (see Intermediate bulk containers (IBCs)).

Salvage packagings are special packagings into which damaged, defective, leaking or non-conforming dangerous goods packages, or dangerous goods that have spilled or leaked, are placed for purposes of transport for recovery or disposal.

Salvage pressure receptacle means a pressure receptacle with a water capacity not exceeding 1 000 litres into which are placed damaged, defective, leaking or non conforming pressure receptacle(s) for the purpose of transport, e.g., for recovery or disposal.

Self-accelerating decomposition temperature (SADT) means the lowest temperature at which selfaccelerating decomposition may occur for a substance in the packaging as used in transport. The selfaccelerating decomposition temperature (SADT) shall be determined in accordance with the latest version of the United Nations Manual of Tests and Criteria.

Semi-trailer means any trailer designed to be coupled to a motor vehicle in such a way that part of it rests on the motor vehicle and a substantial part of its mass and of the mass of its load is borne by the motor vehicle.

Settled pressure means the pressure of the contents of a pressure receptacle in thermal and diffusive equilibrium.

Shipborne barge or barge means an independent, non-self-propelled vessel, specially designed and equipped to be lifted in a loaded condition and stowed aboard a barge-carrying ship or barge feeder vessel.

Shipment means the specific movement of a consignment from origin to destination.

Shipper, for the purpose of this Code, has the same meaning as consignor.

Short international voyage means an international voyage in the course of which a ship is not more than 200 miles from a port or place in which the passengers and crew could be placed in safety. Neither the distance between the last port of call in the country in which the voyage begins and the final port of destination nor the return voyage shall exceed 600 miles. The final port of destination is the last port of call in the scheduled voyage at which the ship commences its return voyage to the country in which the voyage began.

Sift-proof packagings are packagings impermeable to dry contents, including fine solid material produced during transport.

Solid bulk cargo means any material, other than liquid or gas, consisting of a combination of particles, granules or any larger pieces of material, generally uniform in composition, which is loaded directly into the cargo spaces of a ship without any intermediate form of containment (this includes a material loaded in a barge on a barge-carrying ship).

Solids are dangerous goods, other than gases, that do not meet the definition of liquids in this chapter.

Special category space means an enclosed space, above or below deck, intended for the transport of motor vehicles with fuel in their tanks for their own propulsion, into and from which such vehicles can be driven and to which passengers have access.

Tank means a portable tank (including a tank-container), a road tank-vehicle, a rail tank-wagon or a receptacle to contain solids, liquids, or liquefied gases and has a capacity of not less than 450 litres when used for the transport of gases as defined in 2.2.1.1.

Test pressure means the required pressure applied during a pressure test for qualification or requalification (for portable tanks, see 6.7.2.1).

16 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

34

Bilaga 1

Chapter 1.2 – Definitions, units of measurement and abbreviations

Through or into means through or into the countries in which a consignment is transported but specifically excludes countries “over” which a consignment is carried by air, provided that there are no scheduled stops in those countries. Transboundary movement of wastes means any shipment of wastes from an area under the national jurisdiction of one country to or through an area under the national jurisdiction of another country, or to or through an area not under the national jurisdiction of any country, provided at least two countries are concerned by the movement. Transport index (TI) assigned to a package, overpack or freight container, or to unpackaged LSA-I or SCO-I, for the transport of class 7 material, means a number which is used to provide control over radiation exposure. Tubes are seamless transportable pressure receptacles of a water capacity exceeding 150 litres and of not more than 3000 litres. Unit load means that a number of packages are either: .1 placed or stacked on and secured by strapping, shrink-wrapping, or other suitable means to a load board, such as a pallet; .2 placed in a protective outer enclosure, such as a pallet box; .3 permanently secured together in a sling. Vehicle means a road vehicle (including an articulated vehicle, i.e. a tractor and semi-trailer combination) or railroad car or railway wagon. Each trailer shall be considered as a separate vehicle. Wastes means substances, solutions, mixtures, or articles containing or contaminated with one or more constituents which are subject to the provisions of this Code and for which no direct use is envisaged but which are transported for dumping, incineration, or other methods of disposal. Water-reactive means a substance which, in contact with water, emits flammable gas. Weather deck means a deck which is completely exposed to the weather from above and from at least two sides. Wooden barrels means packagings made of natural wood, of round cross-section, having convex walls, consisting of staves and heads and fitted with hoops. Working pressure means the settled pressure of a compressed gas at a reference temperature of 15°C in a full pressure receptacle.

1.2.1.1 Clarifying examples for certain defined terms

The following explanations and examples are meant to assist in clarifying the use of some of the packaging terms defined in this chapter. The definitions in this chapter are consistent with the use of the defined terms throughout the Code. However, some of the defined terms are commonly used in other ways. This is particularly evident in respect of the term “inner receptacle” which has often been used to describe the “inners” of a combination packaging. The “inners” of “combination packagings” are always termed “inner packagings”, not “inner receptacles”. A glass bottle is an example of such an “inner packaging”. The “inners” of “composite packagings” are normally termed “inner receptacles”. For example, the “inner” of a 6HA1 composite packaging (plastics material) is such an “inner receptacle” since it is normally not designed to perform a containment function without its “outer packaging” and is not, therefore, an “inner packaging”.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 17

35

Bilaga 1

Part 1 – General provisions, definitions and training

1.2.2 Units of measurement

1.2.2.1 The following units of measurement* are applicable in this Code:

a Acceptable Measurement of: SI unit Relationship between units alternative unit Length m (metre) – – Area m2 (square metre) – – Volume m3 (cubic metre) ℓb (litre) 1 ℓ = 10–3 m3 Time s (second) min (minute) 1 min = 60 s h (hour) 1 h = 3600 s d (day) 1 d = 86400 s Mass kg (kilogram) g (gram) 1 g = 10–3 kg t (ton) 1 t = 103 kg Mass density kg/m3 kg/ℓ 1 kg/ℓ = 103 kg/m3 Temperature K (kelvin) °C (degree 0°C = 273.15 K Celsius) Difference of temperature K (kelvin) °C (degree 1°C = 1 K Celsius) Force N (newton) – 1 N = 1 kg·m/s2 Pressure Pa (pascal) bar (bar) 1 bar = 105 Pa 1 Pa = 1 N/m2 Stress N/m2 N/mm2 1 N/mm2 = 1 MPa Work kWh (kilowatt hour) 1 kWh = 3.6 MJ Energy J (joule) 1 J = 1 N·m = 1 W·s Quantity of heat eV (electronvolt) 1 eV = 0.1602 ×10–18 J

}

Power W (watt) – 1 W = 1 J/s = 1 N·m/s Kinematic viscosity m2/s mm2/s 1 mm2/s = 10–6 m2/s Dynamic viscosity Pa·s mPa·s 1 mPa·s = 10–3 Pa·s Activity Bq (becquerel) – – Dose equivalent Sv (sievert) – – Conductivity S/m (siemens/metre) – – a The International System of Units (SI) is the result of decisions taken at the General Conference on Weights and Measures (Address: Pavillon de Breteuil, Parc de St-Cloud, F-92312 Sèvres). b The abbreviation “L” for litre may also be used in place of the abbreviation “ℓ”, when a typewriter/word-processor cannot distinguish between figure “1” and letter “ℓ”.

* The following round figures are applicable for the conversion of the units hitherto used into SI units.

18 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

36

Bilaga 1

Chapter 1.2 – Definitions, units of measurement and abbreviations

Force Stress 1 kg = 9.807 N 1 kg/mm2 = 9.807 N/mm2 1 N = 0.102 kg 1 N/mm2 = 0.102 kg/mm2 Pressure 1 Pa = 1 N/m2= 10–5 bar = 1.02 × 10–5 kg/cm2 = 0.75 × 10–2 torr 1 bar = 105 Pa = 1.02 kg/cm2 = 750 torr 1 kg/cm2= 9.807 × 104 Pa = 0.9807 bar = 736 torr 1 torr = 1.33 × 102 Pa = 1.33 × 10–3 bar = 1.36 × 10–3 kg/cm2 Energy, work, quantity of heat 1 J = 1 N·m = 0.278 × 10–6 kWh = 0.102 kg·m = 0.239 × 10–3 kcal 1 kWh = 3.6 × 106 J = 367 × 103 kg·m = 860 kcal 1 kg·m = 9.807 J = 2.72 × 10–6 kWh = 2.34 × 10–3 kcal 1 kcal = 4.19 ×103 J = 1.16 × 10–3 kWh = 427 kg·m Power Kinematic viscosity 1 W = 0.102 kg·m/s = 0.86 kcal/h 1 m2/s = 104 St (stokes) 1 kg·m/s = 9.807 W = 8.43 kcal/h 1 St = 10–4 m2/s 1 kcal/h = 1.16 W = 0.119 kg·m/s

Dynamic viscosity 1 Pa·s = 1 N·s/m2 = 10 P (poise) = 0.102 kg·s/m2 1 P = 0.1 Pa·s = 0.1 N·s/m2 = 1.02 × 10–2 kg·s/m2 1 kg·s/m2= 9.807 Pa·s = 9.807 N·s/m2 = 98.07 P

The decimal multiples and sub-multiples of a unit may be formed by prefixes or symbols, having the following meanings, placed before the name or symbol of the unit:

Multiplying factor Prefix Symbol 1 000 000 000 000 000 000 = 1018 quintillion exa E 1 000 000 000 000 000 = 1015 quadrillion peta P 1 000 000 000 000 = 1012 trillion tera T 1 000 000 000 = 109 billion giga G 1 000 000 = 106 million mega M 1 000 = 103 thousand kilo k 100 = 102 hundred hecto h 10 = 101 ten deca da 0.1 = 10–1 tenth deci d 0.01 = 10–2 hundredth centi c 0.001 = 10–3 thousandth milli m 0.000 001 = 10–6 millionth micro μ 0.000 000 001 = 10–9 billionth nano n 0.000 000 000 001 = 10–12 trillionth pico p 0.000 000 000 000 001 = 10–15 quadrillionth femto f 0.000 000 000 000 000 001 = 10–18 quintillionth atto a

Note: 109 = 1 billion is United Nations usage in English. By analogy, so is 10–9 = 1 billionth.

1.2.2.2 [Reserved]

1.2.2.3 Whenever the mass of a package is mentioned, the gross mass is meant unless otherwise stated. The mass of containers or tanks used for the transport of goods is not included in the gross mass.

1.2.2.4 Unless expressly stated otherwise, the sign “%” represents:

.1 in the case of mixtures of solids or of liquids, and also in the case of solutions and of solids wetted by a liquid: a percentage mass based on the total mass of the mixture, the solution or the wetted solid;

.2 in the case of mixtures of compressed gases: when filled by pressure, the proportion of the volume indicated as a percentage of the total volume of the gaseous mixture, or, when filled by mass, the proportion of the mass indicated as a percentage of the total mass of the mixture;

.3 in the case of mixtures of liquefied gases and gases dissolved under pressure: the proportion of the mass indicated as a percentage of the total mass of the mixture.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 19

37

Bilaga 1

Part 1 – General provisions, definitions and training

1.2.2.5 Pressures of all kinds relating to receptacles (such as test pressure, internal pressure, safety-valve opening pressure) are always indicated in gauge pressure (pressure in excess of atmospheric pressure); however, the vapour pressure of substances is always expressed in absolute pressure.

1.2.2.6 Tables of equivalence

1.2.2.6.1 Mass conversion tables

1.2.2.6.1.1 Conversion factors

Multiply by to obtain Grams 0.03527 Ounces Grams 0.002205 Pounds Kilograms 35.2736 Ounces Kilograms 2.2046 Pounds Ounces 28.3495 Grams Pounds 16 Ounces Pounds 453.59 Grams Pounds 0.45359 Kilograms Hundredweight 112 Pounds Hundredweight 50.802 Kilograms

1.2.2.6.1.2 Pounds to kilograms and vice versa

When the central value in any row of these mass conversion tables is taken to be in pounds, its equivalent value in kilograms is shown on the left; when the central value is in kilograms, its equivalent in pounds is shown on the right.

← → ← → ← →

kg lb kg lb kg lb kg lb kg lb kg lb 0.227 0.5 1.10 22.7 50 110 90.7 200 441 0.454 1 2.20 24.9 55 121 95.3 210 463 0.907 2 4.41 27.2 60 132 99.8 220 485 1.36 3 6.61 29.5 65 143 102 225 496 1.81 4 8.82 31.8 70 154 104 230 507 2.27 5 11.0 34.0 75 165 109 240 529 2.72 6 13.2 36.3 80 176 113 250 551 3.18 7 15.4 38.6 85 187 118 260 573 3.63 8 17.6 40.8 90 198 122 270 595 4.08 9 19.8 43.1 95 209 125 275 606 4.54 10 22.0 45.4 100 220 127 280 617 4.99 11 24.3 47.6 105 231 132 290 639 5.44 12 26.5 49.9 110 243 136 300 661 5.90 13 28.7 52.2 115 254 159 350 772 6.35 14 30.9 54.4 120 265 181 400 882 6.80 15 33.1 56.7 125 276 204 450 992 7.26 16 35.3 59.0 130 287 227 500 1102 7.71 17 37.5 61.2 135 298 247 545 1202 8.16 18 39.7 63.5 140 309 249 550 1213 8.62 19 41.9 65.8 145 320 272 600 1323 9.07 20 44.1 68.0 150 331 318 700 1543 11.3 25 55.1 72.6 160 353 363 800 1764 13.6 30 66.1 77.1 170 375 408 900 1984 15.9 35 77.2 79.4 175 386 454 1000 2205 18.1 40 88.2 81.6 180 397 20.4 45 99.2 86.2 190 419

20 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

38

Bilaga 1

Chapter 1.2 – Definitions, units of measurement and abbreviations

1.2.2.6.2 Liquid measure conversion tables

1.2.2.6.2.1 Conversion factors

Multiply by to obtain

Litres 0.2199 Imperial gallons

Litres 1.759 Imperial pints

Litres 0.2643 US gallons

Litres 2.113 US pints

Gallons 8 Pints

Imperial gallons 4.546 Litres

Imperial gallons US gallons

1.20095

Imperial pints } { US pints

Imperial pints 0.568 Litres

US gallons 3.7853 Litres

US gallons Imperial gallons

0.83268

US pints } { Imperial pints

US pints 0.473 Litres

1.2.2.6.2.2 Imperial pints to litres and vice versa

When the central value in any row of these liquid measure conversion tables is taken to be in pints, its equivalent value in litres is shown on the left; when the central value is in litres, its equivalent in pints is shown on the right.

← →

ℓ pt ℓ pt 0.28 0.5 0.88 0.57 1 1.76 0.85 1.5 2.64 1.14 2 3.52 1.42 2.5 4.40 1.70 3 5.28 1.99 3.5 6.16 2.27 4 7.04 2.56 4.5 7.92 2.84 5 8.80 3.12 5.5 9.68 3.41 6 10.56 3.69 6.5 11.44 3.98 7 12.32 4.26 7.5 13.20 4.55 8 14.08

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 21

39

Bilaga 1

Part 1 – General provisions, definitions and training

1.2.2.6.2.3 Imperial gallons to litres and vice versa

When the central value in any row of these liquid measure conversion tables is taken to be in gallons, its equivalent value in litres is shown on the left; when the central value is in litres, its equivalent in gallons is shown on the right.

← → ← →

ℓ gal ℓ gal ℓ gal ℓ gal 2.27 0.5 0.11 159.11 35 7.70 4.55 1 0.22 163.65 36 7.92 9.09 2 0.44 168.20 37 8.14 13.64 3 0.66 172.75 38 8.36 18.18 4 0.88 177.29 39 8.58 22.73 5 1.10 181.84 40 8.80 27.28 6 1.32 186.38 41 9.02 31.82 7 1.54 190.93 42 9.24 36.37 8 1.76 195.48 43 9.46 40.91 9 1.98 200.02 44 9.68 45.46 10 2.20 204.57 45 9.90 50.01 11 2.42 209.11 46 10.12 54.55 12 2.64 213.66 47 10.34 59.10 13 2.86 218.21 48 10.56 63.64 14 3.08 222.75 49 10.78 68.19 15 3.30 227.30 50 11.00 72.74 16 3.52 250.03 55 12.09 77.28 17 3.74 272.76 60 13.20 81.83 18 3.96 295.49 65 14.29 86.37 19 4.18 318.22 70 15.40 90.92 20 4.40 340.95 75 16.49 95.47 21 4.62 363.68 80 17.60 100.01 22 4.84 386.41 85 18.69 104.56 23 5.06 409.14 90 19.80 109.10 24 5.28 431.87 95 20.89 113.65 25 5.50 454.60 100 22.00 118.19 26 5.72 613.71 135 29.69 122.74 27 5.94 681.90 150 32.98 127.29 28 6.16 909.20 200 43.99 131.83 29 6.38 1022.85 225 49.48 136.38 30 6.60 1136.50 250 54.97 140.92 31 6.82 1363.80 300 65.99 145.47 32 7.04 1591.10 350 76.96 150.02 33 7.26 1818.40 400 87.99 154.56 34 7.48 2045.70 450 98.95

22 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

40

Bilaga 1

Chapter 1.2 – Definitions, units of measurement and abbreviations

1.2.2.6.3 Temperature conversion tables

Degrees Fahrenheit to degrees Celsius and vice versa

When the central value in any row of these temperature conversion tables is taken to be in °F, its equivalent value in °C is shown on the left; when the central value is in °C, its equivalent in °F is shown on the right. General formula: °F = (°C × 9_ ) + 32; °C = (°F – 32) × 5_

5 9 ← → ← → ← → °C °F °C °F °C °F °C °F °C °F °C °F –73.3 –100 –148 –21.1 –6 21.2 1.1 34 93.2 –67.8 –90 –130 –20.6 –5 23.0 1.7 35 95 –62.2 –80 –112 –20.0 –4 24.8 2.2 36 96.8 –56.7 –70 –94 –19.4 –3 26.6 2.8 37 98.6 –51.1 –60 –76 –18.9 –2 28.4 3.3 38 100.4

–45.6 –50 –58 –18.3 –1 30.2 3.9 39 102.2 –40 –40 –40 –17.8 0 32.0 4.4 40 104 –39.4 –39 –38.2 –17.2 1 33.8 5 41 105.8 –38.9 –38 –36.4 –16.7 2 35.6 5.6 42 107.6 –38.3 –37 –34.6 –16.1 3 37.4 6.1 43 109.4

–37.8 –36 –32.8 –15.6 4 39.2 6.7 44 111.2 –37.2 –35 –31 –15.0 5 41.0 7.2 45 113 –36.7 –34 –29.2 –14.4 6 42.8 7.8 46 114.8 –36.1 –33 –27.4 –13.9 7 44.6 8.3 47 116.6 –35.6 –32 –25.6 –13.3 8 46.4 8.9 48 118.4

–35 –31 –23.8 –12.8 9 48.2 9.4 49 120.2 –34.4 –30 –22 –12.2 10 50.0 10.0 50 122.0 –33.9 –29 –20.2 –11.7 11 51.8 10.6 51 123.8 –33.3 –28 –18.4 –11.1 12 53.6 11.1 52 125.6 –32.8 –27 –16.6 –10.6 13 55.4 11.7 53 127.4

–32.2 –26 –14.8 –10.0 14 57.2 12.2 54 129.2 –31.7 –25 –13 –9.4 15 59.0 12.8 55 131.0 –31.1 –24 –11.2 –8.9 16 60.8 13.3 56 132.8 –30.6 –23 –9.4 –8.3 17 62.6 13.9 57 134.6 –30 –22 –7.6 –7.8 18 64.4 14.4 58 136.4

–29.4 –21 –5.8 –7.2 19 66.2 15.0 59 138.2 –28.9 –20 –4 –6.7 20 68 15.6 60 140.0 –28.3 –19 –2.2 –6.1 21 69.8 16.1 61 141.8 –27.8 –18 –0.4 –5.6 22 71.6 16.7 62 143.6 –27.2 –17 1.4 –5 23 73.4 17.2 63 145.4

–26.7 –16 3.2 –4.4 24 75.2 17.8 64 147.2 –26.1 –15 5 –3.9 25 77 18.3 65 149.0 –25.6 –14 6.8 –3.3 26 78.8 18.9 66 150.8 –25.0 –13 8.6 –2.8 27 80.6 19.4 67 152.6 –24.4 –12 10.4 –2.2 28 82.4 20.0 68 154.4

–23.9 –11 12.2 –1.7 29 84.2 20.6 69 156.2 –23.3 –10 14.0 –1.1 30 86 21.1 70 158.0 –22.8 –9 15.8 –0.6 31 87.8 21.7 71 159.8 –22.2 –8 17.6 0 32 89.6 22.2 72 161.6 –21.7 –7 19.4 0.6 33 91.4 22.8 73 163.4

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 23

41

Bilaga 1

Part 1 – General provisions, definitions and training

← → ← → ← → °C °F °C °F °C °F °C °F °C °F °C °F 23.3 74 165.2 37.8 100 212 52.2 126 258.8 23.9 75 167.0 38.3 101 213.8 52.8 127 260.6 24.4 76 168.8 38.9 102 215.6 53.3 128 262.4 25.0 77 170.6 39.4 103 217.4 53.9 129 264.2 25.6 78 172.4 40 104 219.2 54.4 130 266.0

26.1 79 174.2 40.6 105 221 55.0 131 267.8 26.7 80 176.0 41.1 106 222.8 55.6 132 269.6 27.2 81 177.8 41.7 107 224.6 56.1 133 271.4 27.8 82 179.6 42.2 108 226.4 56.7 134 273.2 28.3 83 181.4 42.8 109 228.2 57.2 135 275.0

28.9 84 183.2 43.3 110 230 57.8 136 276.8 29.4 85 185 43.9 111 231.8 58.3 137 278.6 30 86 186.8 44.4 112 233.6 58.9 138 280.4 30.6 87 188.6 45 113 235.4 59.4 139 282.2 31.1 88 190.4 45.6 114 237.2 60.0 140 284.0

31.7 89 192.2 46.1 115 239.0 65.6 150 302.0 32.2 90 194 46.7 116 240.8 71.1 160 320.0 32.8 91 195.8 47.2 117 242.6 76.7 170 338.0 33.3 92 197.6 47.8 118 244.4 82.2 180 356.0 33.9 93 199.4 48.3 119 246.2 87.8 190 374.0

34.4 94 201.2 48.9 120 248.0 93.3 200 392.0 35 95 203 49.4 121 249.8 98.9 210 410.0 35.6 96 204.8 50.0 122 251.6 104.4 220 428.0 36.1 97 206.6 50.6 123 253.4 110.0 230 446.0 36.7 98 208.4 51.1 124 255.2 115.6 240 464.0 37.2 99 210.2 51.7 125 257.0 121.1 250 482.0

1.2.3 List of abbreviations

ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, P.O. Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA, 19428-2959, United States of America) CGA Compressed Gas Association (CGA, 4221 Walney Road, 5th Floor, Chantilly VA 20151-2923, United States of America) CSC International Convention for Safe Containers, 1972, as amended DSC IMO Sub-Committee on Dangerous Goods, Solid Cargoes and Containers ECOSOC Economic and Social Council (UN) EmS The EmS Guide: Emergency Response procedures for Ships Carrying Dangerous Goods EN (standard) European standard published by the European Committee for Standardization (CEN) (CEN, 36 rue de Stassart, B-1050 Brussels, Belgium) FAO Food and Agriculture Organization (FAO; Viale delle Terme di Caracalla, 00100 Rome, Italy) HNS International Convention on Liability and Compensation for Damage in Connection with the Transport Convention of Hazardous and Noxious Substances (IMO) IAEA International Atomic Energy Agency (IAEA, P.O. Box 100, A – 1400 Vienna, Austria) ICAO International Civil Aviation Organization (ICAO, 999 University Street, Montreal, Quebec H3C 5H7, Canada) IEC International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC, 3 rue de Varembé, P.O. Box 131, CH-1211 Geneva 20, Switzerland) ILO International Labour Organization/Office (ILO, 4 route des Morillons, CH-1211 Geneva 22, Switzerland)

24 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

42

Bilaga 1

Chapter 1.2 – Definitions, units of measurement and abbreviations

IMGS International Medical Guide for Ships IMO International Maritime Organization (IMO, 4 Albert Embankment, London SE1 7SR, United Kingdom) IMDG Code International Maritime Dangerous Goods Code IMSBC Code International Maritime Solid Bulk Cargoes Code INF Code International Code for the Safe Carriage of Packaged Irradiated Nuclear Fuel, Plutonium and High-Level Radioactive Wastes on board Ships ISO (standard) An international standard published by the International Organization for Standardization (ISO, 1, ch. de la Voie-Creuse, CH-1211 Geneva 20, Switzerland) MARPOL 73/78 International Convention for the Prevention of Pollution from Ships, 1973/78, as amended MAWP Maximum allowable working pressure MEPC Marine Environment Protection Committee (IMO) MFAG Medical First Aid guide for use in Accidents Involving Dangerous Goods MSC Maritime Safety Committee (IMO) N.O.S. not otherwise specified SADT Self-accelerating decomposition temperature SOLAS 74 International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea, 1974, as amended UNECE United Nations Economic Commission for Europe (UNECE, Palais des Nations, 8–14 avenue de la Paix, CH-1211 Geneva 10, Switzerland) UN Number Four-digit United Nations Number is assigned to dangerous, hazardous and harmful substances, materials and articles most commonly transported UNEP United Nations Environment Programme (United Nations Avenue, Gigiri, PO Box 30552, 00100, Nairobi, Kenya) UNESCO/IOC UN Educational, Scientific and Cultural Organization/Intergovernmental Oceanographic Commission (UNESCO/IOC, 1 rue Miollis, 75732 Paris Cedex 15, France) WHO World Health Organization (Avenue Appia 20, CH-1211 Geneva 27, Switzerland) WMO World Meteorological Organization (WMO, 7bis, avenue de la Paix, Case postale No. 2300, CH-1211 Geneva 2, Switzerland)

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 25

43

Bilaga 1

1

Chapter 1.3

Training

1.3.0 Introductory note

The successful application of regulations concerning the transport of dangerous goods and the achievement of their objectives are greatly dependent on the appreciation by all persons concerned of the risks involved and on a detailed understanding of the regulations. This can only be achieved by properly planned and maintained initial and retraining programmes for all persons concerned with the transport of dangerous goods. The provisions of paragraphs 1.3.1.4 to 1.3.1.7 remain recommendatory (see 1.1.1.5).

1.3.1 Training of shore-side personnel

1.3.1.1 Shore-based personnel* engaged in the transport of dangerous goods intended to be transported by sea shall be trained in the contents of dangerous goods provisions commensurate with their responsibilities. Employees shall be trained in accordance with the provisions of 1.3.1 before assuming responsibilities and shall only perform functions, for which required training has not yet been provided, under the direct supervision of a trained person. Training requirements specific to security of dangerous goods in chapter 1.4 shall also be addressed. Entities engaging shore-based personnel in such activities shall determine which staff will be trained, what levels of training they require and the training methods used to enable them to comply with the provisions of the IMDG Code. This training shall be provided or verified upon employment in a position involving dangerous goods transport. For personnel who have not yet received the required training, the entities shall ensure that those personnel may only perform functions under the direct supervision of a trained person. The training shall be periodically supplemented with refresher training to take account of changes in regulations and practice. The competent authority, or its authorized body, may audit the entity to verify the effectiveness of the system in place, in providing training of staff commensurate with their role and responsibilities in the transport chain. 1.3.1.2 Shore-based personnel such as those who: Ř classify dangerous goods and identify Proper Shipping Names of dangerous goods; Ř pack dangerous goods; Ř mark, label or placard dangerous goods; Ř load/unload Cargo Transport Units; Ř prepare transport documents for dangerous goods; Ř offer dangerous goods for transport; Ř accept dangerous goods for transport; Ř handle dangerous goods in transport; Ř prepare dangerous goods loading/stowage plans; Ř load/unload dangerous goods into/from ships; Ř carry dangerous goods in transport; Ř enforce or survey or inspect for compliance with applicable rules and regulations; or Ř are otherwise involved in the transport of dangerous goods as determined by the competent authority shall be trained in the following:

1.3.1.2.1 General awareness/familiarization training:

.1 each person shall be trained in order to be familiar with the general provisions of dangerous goods transport provisions;

* For the training of officers and ratings responsible for cargo handling on ships carrying dangerous and hazardous substances in solid form in bulk, or in packaged form, see the STCW Code, as amended.

26 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

44

Bilaga 1

Chapter 1.3 – Training

.2 such training shall include a description of the classes of dangerous goods; labelling, marking, placarding, packing, stowage, segregation and compatibility provisions; a description of the purpose and content of the dangerous goods transport documents (such as the Multimodal Dangerous Goods Form and the Container/Vehicle Packing Certificate); and a description of available emergency response documents.

1.3.1.2.2 Function-specific training: Each person shall be trained in specific dangerous goods transport provisions which are applicable to the function that person performs. An indicative list, for guidance purposes only, of some of the functions typically found in dangerous goods transport operations by sea and training requirements is given in paragraph 1.3.1.6.

1.3.1.3 Records of training received according to this chapter shall be kept by the employer and made available to the employee or competent authority, upon request. Records shall be kept by the employer for a period of time established by the competent authority.

1.3.1.4 Safety training: Commensurate with the risk of exposure in the event of a release and the functions performed, each person should be trained in:

.1 methods and procedures for accident avoidance, such as proper use of package-handling equipment and appropriate methods of stowage of dangerous goods;

.2 available emergency response information and how to use it;

.3 general dangers presented by the various classes of dangerous goods and how to prevent exposure to those hazards, including, if appropriate, the use of personal protective clothing and equipment; and

.4 immediate procedures to be followed in the event of an unintentional release of dangerous goods, including any emergency response procedures for which the person is responsible and personal protection procedures to be followed.

1.3.1.5 Recommended training needs for shore-side personnel involved in the transport of dangerous goods under the IMDG Code

The following indicative table is for information purposes only as every entity is arranged differently and may have varied roles and responsibilities within that entity.

Numbers in this column refer Function Specific training requirements to the list of related codes and publications in 1.3.1.7 1 Classify dangerous Classification requirements, in particular .1, .4, .5 and .12 goods and identify – the structure of the description of substances Proper Shipping Name – the classes of dangerous goods and the principles of their classification – the nature of the dangerous substances and articles transported (their physical, chemical and toxicological properties) – the procedure for classifying solutions and mixtures – identification by Proper Shipping Name – use of Dangerous Goods List 2 Pack dangerous goods Classes .1 and .4 Packaging requirements – type of packages (IBC, large packaging, tank container and bulk container) – UN marking for approved packagings – segregation requirements – limited quantities and excepted quantities Marking and labelling First aid measures Emergency response procedures Safe handling procedures 3 Mark, label or placard Classes .1 dangerous goods Marking, labelling and placarding requirements – primary and subsidiary risk labels – marine pollutants – limited quantities and excepted quantities

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 27

45

Bilaga 1

Part 1 – General provisions, definitions and training

Numbers in this column refer Function Specific training requirements to the list of related codes and publications in 1.3.1.7 4 Load/unload cargo Documentation .1, .6, .7 and .8 transport units Classes Marking, labelling and placarding Stowage requirements, where applicable Segregation requirements Cargo securing requirements (as contained in the IMO/ILO/UNECE Guidelines) Emergency response procedures First aid measures CSC requirements Safe handling procedures 5 Prepare transport Documentation requirements .1 documents for – transport document dangerous goods – container/vehicle packing certificate – competent authorities’ approval – waste transport documentation – special documentation, where appropriate 6 Offer dangerous Thorough knowledge of the IMDG Code .1 to .10 and .12 goods for transport Local requirements at loading and discharge ports – port byelaws – national transport regulations 7 Accept dangerous Thorough knowledge of the IMDG Code .1 to .12 goods for transport Local requirements at loading, transiting and discharge ports – port byelaws, in particular quantity limitations – national transport regulations 8 Handle dangerous Classes and their hazards .1, .2, .3, .6, .7, .8 and .10 goods in transport Marking, labelling and placarding Emergency response procedures First aid measures Safe handling procedures such as – use of equipment – appropriate tools – safe working loads CSC requirements, local requirements at loading, transit and discharge ports Port byelaws, in particular, quantity limitation National transport regulations 9 Prepare dangerous Documentation .1, .10, .11 and .12 goods loading/ Classes stowage plans Stowage requirements Segregation requirements Document of compliance Relevant IMDG Code parts, local requirements at loading, transit and discharge ports Port byelaws, in particular, quantity limitations 10 Load/unload Classes and their hazards .1, .2, .3, .7, .9, .10 and .12 dangerous goods into/ Marking, labelling and placarding from ships Emergency response procedures First aid measures Safe handling procedures such as – use of equipment – appropriate tools – safe working loads Cargo securing requirements CSC requirements, local requirements at loading, transit and discharge ports Port byelaws, in particular, quantity limitation National transport regulations

28 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

46

Bilaga 1

Chapter 1.3 – Training

Numbers in this column refer Function Specific training requirements to the list of related codes and publications in 1.3.1.7 11 Carry dangerous Documentation .1, .2, .3, .6, .7, .10, .11 and goods Classes .12 Marking, labelling and placarding Stowage requirements, where applicable Segregation requirements Local requirements at loading, transit and discharge ports – port byelaws, in particular, quantity limitations – national transport regulations Cargo securing requirements (as contained in the IMO/ILO/ UNECE Guidelines) Emergency response procedures First aid measures CSC requirements Safe handling procedures 12 Enforce or survey or Knowledge of IMDG Code and relevant guidelines and .1 to .13 inspect for compliance safety procedures with applicable rules and regulations 13 Are otherwise involved As required by the competent authority commensurate – in the transport of with the task assigned dangerous goods, as determined by the competent authority

1.3.1.6 Indicative table describing sections of the IMDG Code or other relevant instruments that may be appropriate to be considered in any training for the transport of dangerous goods

o rg ures d ca of ures 9 gulations proce /1 e ing d Function t r I-2 s r I re r pack u proce te s p s nspor o response a a a f y e h law t units l tr ndling S c genc id m IMDG Code part / section A bye ha L rt nspor t as e * O a ir 1 2 2.0 3 4 5 6 6 7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4 7.5 7.6 7.7 7.8 7.9 S Po Nationa CSC Guidelines tr Emer F Saf 1 Classify X X X X X 2 Pack X X X X X X X X X X X X 3 Mark, label, placard X X X 4 Load/unload cargo X X X X X X X X X X X X X transport units 5 Prepare transport X X X X X X X documents 6 Offer for transport X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 7 Accept for transport X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 8 Handle in transport X X X X X X X X X X X X 9 Prepare loading/ X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X stowage plans 10 Load/unload from ships X X X X X X X X X X X X X 11 Carry X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

Remarks:

* Only sections 6.1.2, 6.1.3, 6.5.2, 6.6.3, 6.7.2.20, 6.7.3.16 and 6.7.4.15 apply

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 29

47

Bilaga 1

Part 1 – General provisions, definitions and training

1.3.1.7 Related Codes and publications which may be appropriate for function-specific training

.1 International Maritime Dangerous Goods (IMDG) Code, as amended .2 The EmS Guide: Emergency Response Procedures for Ships Carrying Dangerous Goods (EmS), as amended .3 Medical First Aid Guide for Use in Accidents Involving Dangerous Goods (MFAG), as amended .4 United Nations Recommendations on the Transport of Dangerous Goods – Model Regulations, as amended .5 United Nations Recommendations on the Transport of Dangerous Goods – Manual of Tests and Criteria, as amended .6 IMO/ILO/UNECE Guidelines for Packing of Cargo Transport Units (CTUs) .7 Recommendations on the Safe Transport of Dangerous Cargoes and Related Activities in Port Areas .8 International Convention for Safe Containers (CSC), 1972, as amended .9 Code of Safe Practice for Cargo Stowage and Securing (CSS Code), as amended .10 MSC.1/Circ.1265 Recommendations on the safe use of pesticides in ships applicable to the fumigation of cargo transport units* .11 International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea (SOLAS) 1974, as amended .12 International Convention for the Prevention of Pollution from Ships 1973 as modified by the Protocol of 1978 (MARPOL 73/78), as amended. .13 MSC.1/Circ.[…] Inspection programmes for cargo transport units carrying dangerous goods.

* At its eighty-seventh session, in May 2010, the Maritime Safety Committee of the IMO approved Revised Recommendations on the safe use of pesticides in ships applicable to the fumigation of cargo transport units (MSC.1/Circ.1361), which supersedes MSC.1/Circ.1265.

30 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

48

Bilaga 1

Chapter 1.4

Security provisions

1.4.0 Scope

1.4.0.1 The provisions of this chapter address the security of dangerous goods in transport by sea. National competent authorities may apply additional security provisions, which should be considered when offering or transporting dangerous goods. The provisions of this chapter remain recommendatory except 1.4.1.1 (see 1.1.1.5). 1.4.0.2 The provisions of 1.4.2 and 1.4.3 do not apply to: .1 UN 2908 and UN 2909 excepted packages; .2 UN 2910 and UN 2911 excepted packages with an activity level not exceeding the A2 value; and .3 UN 2912 LSA-I and UN 2913 SCO-I.

*

1.4.1 General provisions for companies, ships and port facilities

1.4.1.1 The relevant provisions of chapter XI-2 of SOLAS 74, as amended, and of part A of the International Ship and Port Facility Security (ISPS) Code apply to companies, ships and port facilities engaged in the transport of dangerous goods and to which regulation XI-2 of SOLAS 74, as amended, apply taking into account the guidance given in part B of the ISPS Code. 1.4.1.2 For cargo ships of less than 500 gross tons engaged in the transport of dangerous goods, it is recommended that Contracting Governments to SOLAS 74, as amended, consider security provisions for these cargo ships. 1.4.1.3 Any shore-based company personnel, ship-based personnel and port facility personnel engaged in the transport of dangerous goods should be aware of the security requirements for such goods, in addition to those specified in the ISPS Code, and commensurate with their responsibilities. 1.4.1.4 The training of the company security officer, shore-based company personnel having specific security duties, port facility security officer and port facility personnel having specific duties, engaged in the transport of dangerous goods, should also include elements of security awareness related to those goods. 1.4.1.5 All shipboard personnel and port facility personnel who are not mentioned in 1.4.1.4 and are engaged in thetransport of dangerous goods should be familiar with the provisions of the relevant security plans related to those goods, commensurate with their responsibilities.

1.4.2 General provisions for shore-side personnel

1.4.2.1 For the purpose of this subsection, shore-side personnel covers individuals mentioned in 1.3.1.2. However, the provisions of 1.4.2 do not apply to: – the company security officer and appropriate shore-based company personnel mentioned in 13.1 of part A of the ISPS Code, – the ship security officer and the shipboard personnel mentioned in 13.2 and 13.3 of part A of the ISPS Code, – the port facility security officer, the appropriate port facility security personnel and the port facility Personnel having specific security duties mentioned in 18.1 and 18.2 of part A of the ISPS Code. For the training of those officers and personnel, refer to the International Ship and Port Facility Security (ISPS) Code.

* Refer to MSC.1/Circ.1341 on Guidelines on security-related training and familiarization for port facility personnel and to MSC.1/ Circ.1188 on Guidelines on training and certification for port facility security officers.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 31

49

Bilaga 1

Part 1 – General provisions, definitions and training

1.4.2.2 Shore-side personnel engaged in transport by sea of dangerous goods should consider security provisions for the transport of dangerous goods commensurate with their responsibilities.

1.4.2.3 Security training

1.4.2.3.1 The training of shore-side personnel, as specified in chapter 1.3, shall also include elements of security awareness. 1.4.2.3.2 Security awareness training should address the nature of security risks, recognizing security risks, methods to address and reduce risks and actions to be taken in the event of a security breach. It should include awareness of security plans (if appropriate, refer to 1.4.3) commensurate with the responsibilities of individuals and their part in implementing security plans. 1.4.2.3.3 Such training should be provided or verified upon employment in a position involving dangerous goods transport and should be periodically supplemented with retraining. 1.4.2.3.4 Records of all security training received should be kept by the employer and made available to the employee or competent authority, upon request. Records should be kept by the employer for a period of time established by the competent authority.

1.4.3 Provisions for high consequence dangerous goods

1.4.3.1 Definition of high consequence dangerous goods

1.4.3.1.1 High consequence dangerous goods are those which have the potential for misuse in a terrorist event and which may, as a result, produce serious consequences such as mass casualties, mass destruction or, particularly for Class 7, mass socio-economic disruption. 1.4.3.1.2 An indicative list of high consequence dangerous goods in classes and divisions other than Class 7 is given in Table 1.4.1 below. Table 1.4.1 : Indicative list of high consequence dangerous goods Class 1, Division 1.1 explosives Class 1, Division 1.2 explosives Class 1, Division 1.3 compatibility group C explosives Class 1, Division 1.4 UN Nos. 0104, 0237, 0255, 0267, 0289, 0361, 0365, 0366, 0440, 0441, 0455, 0456 and 0500 Class 1, Division 1.5 explosives Class 2.1 Flammable gases in quantities greater than 3000 ℓ in a road tank vehicle, a railway tank wagon or a portable tank Class 2.3 Toxic gases Class 3 Flammable liquids of packing groups I and II in quantities greater than 3000 ℓ in a road tank vehicle, a railway tank wagon or a portable tank Class 3 Desensitized liquid explosives Class 4.1 Desensitized solid explosives Class 4.2 Goods of packing group I in quantities greater than 3000 kg or 3000 ℓ in a road tank vehicle, a railway tank wagon, a portable tank or a bulk container Class 4.3 Goods of packing group I in quantities greater than 3000 kg or 3000 ℓ in a road tank vehicle, a railway tank wagon, a portable tank or a bulk container Class 5.1 Oxidizing liquids of packing group I in quantities greater than 3000 ℓ in a road tank vehicle, a railway tank wagon or a portable tank Class 5.1 Perchlorates, ammonium nitrate, ammonium nitrate fertilizers and ammonium nitrate emulsions or suspensions or gels in quantities greater than 3000 kg or 3000 ℓ in a road tank vehicle, a railway tank wagon, a portable tank or a bulk container Class 6.1 Toxic substances of packing group I Class 6.2 Infectious substances of category A (UN Nos. 2814 and 2900)

32 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

50

Bilaga 1

Chapter 1.4 – Security provisions

Class 8 Corrosive substances of packing group I in quantities greater than 3000 kg or 3000 ℓ in a road tank vehicle, a railway tank wagon, a portable tank or a bulk container

1.4.3.1.3 For dangerous goods of Class 7, high consequence radioactive material is that with an activity equal to or greater than a transport security threshold of 3 000 A2 per single package (see also 2.7.2.2.1) except for the following radionuclides where the transport security threshold is given in Table 1.4.2 below.

Table 1.4.2 – Transport security thresholds for specific radionuclides

Element Radionuclide Transport security threshold (TBq) Americium Am-241 0.6 Gold Au-198 2 Cadmium Cd-109 200 Californium Cf-252 0.2 Curium Cm-244 0.5 Cobalt Co-57 7 Cobalt Co-60 0.3 Cesium Cs-137 1 Iron Fe-55 8000 Germanium Ge-68 7 Gadolinium Gd-153 10 Iridium Ir-192 0.8 Nickel Ni-63 600 Paladium Pd-103 900 Promethium Pm-147 400 Polonium Po-210 0.6 Plutonium Pu-238 0.6 Plutonium Pu-239 0.6 Radium Ra-226 0.4 Ruthenium Ru-106 3 Selenium Se-75 2 Strontium Sr-90 10 Thallium Tl-204 200 Thulium Tm-170 200 Yterbium Yb-169 3

1.4.3.1.4 For mixtures of radionuclides, determination of whether or not the transport security threshold has been met or exceeded can be calculated by summing the ratios of activity present for each radionuclide divided by the transport security threshold for that radionuclide. If the sum of the fractions is less than 1, then the radioactivity threshold for the mixture has not been met nor exceeded.

This calculation can be made with the formula:

__Ai < 1

∑ Ti

i

Where:

Ai = activity of radionuclide i that is present in a package (TBq)

Ti = transport security threshold for radionuclide i (TBq).

1.4.3.1.5 When radioactive material possess subsidiary risks of other classes or divisions, the criteria of table 1.4.1 should also be taken into account (see also 1.5.5.1).

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 33

51

Bilaga 1

Part 1 – General provisions, definitions and training

1.4.3.2 Specific security provisions for high consequence dangerous goods

1.4.3.2.1 The provisions of this section do not apply to ships and to port facilities (see the ISPS Code for ship security plan and for port facility security plan).

1.4.3.2.2 Security plans

1.4.3.2.2.1 Consignors and others engaged in the transport of high consequence dangerous goods (see 1.4.3.1) should adopt, implement and comply with a security plan that addresses at least the elements specified in 1.4.3.2.2.2. 1.4.3.2.2.2 The security plan should comprise at least the following elements: .1 specific allocation of responsibilities for security to competent and qualified persons with appropriate authority to carry out their responsibilities; .2 records of dangerous goods or types of dangerous goods transported; .3 review of current operations and assessment of vulnerabilities, including intermodal transfer, temporary transit storage, handling and distribution, as appropriate; .4 clear statements of measures, including training, policies (including response to higher threat conditions, new employee/employment verification, etc.), operating practices (e.g. choice/use of routes where known, access to dangerous goods in temporary storage, proximity to vulnerable infrastructure, etc.), equipment and resources that are to be used to reduce security risks; .5 effective and up-to-date procedures for reporting and dealing with security threats, breaches of security or security-related incidents; .6 procedures for the evaluation and testing of security plans and procedures for periodic review and update of the plans; .7 measures to ensure the security of transport information contained in the plan; and .8 measures to ensure that the distribution of transport information is limited as far as possible. (Such measures shall not preclude provision of transport documentation required by chapter 5.4 of this Code.) 1.4.3.2.3 For radioactive material, the provisions of this chapter are deemed to be complied with when the provisions of the Convention on Physical Protection of Nuclear Material and the IAEA circular on The Physical Protection of Nuclear Material* and Nuclear Facilities† are applied.

* INFCIRC/274/Rev.1, IAEA, Vienna (1980). † INFCIRC/225/Rev.4 (Corrected), IAEA, Vienna (1999).

34 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

52

Bilaga 1

Chapter 1.5

General provisions concerning class 7

1.5.1 Scope and application

1.5.1.1 The provisions of this Code establish standards of safety which provide an acceptable level of control of the radiation, criticality and thermal hazards to persons, property and the environment that are associated with the transport of radioactive material. These provisions are based on the IAEA Regulations for the Safe Transport of Radioactive Material (2009 Edition), Safety Standards Series No. TS-R-1, IAEA, Vienna (2009). Explanatory material can be found in “Advisory Material for the IAEA Regulations for the Safe Transport of Radioactive Material” (2005 Edition), Safety Standard Series No. TS-G-1.1 (Rev.1), IAEA, Vienna (2008).

1.5.1.2 The objective of this Code is to establish provisions that shall be satisfied to ensure safety and to protect persons, property and the environment from the effects of radiation in the transport of radioactive material. This protection is achieved by requiring: .1 Containment of the radioactive contents; .2 Control of external radiation levels; .3 Prevention of criticality; and .4 Prevention of damage caused by heat.

These provisions are satisfied firstly by applying a graded approach to contents limits for packages and conveyances and to performance standards applied to package designs depending upon the hazard of the radioactive contents. Secondly, they are satisfied by imposing requirements on the design and operation of packages and on the maintenance of packagings, including a consideration of the nature of the radioactive contents. Finally, they are satisfied by requiring administrative controls including, where appropriate, approval by competent authorities.

1.5.1.3 The provisions of this Code apply to the transport of radioactive material by sea, including transport which is incidental to the use of the radioactive material. Transport comprises all operations and conditions associated with and involved in the movement of radioactive material; these include the design, manufacture, maintenance and repair of packaging, and the preparation, consigning, loading, transport including in-transit storage, unloading and receipt at the final destination of loads of radioactive material and packages. A graded approach is applied to the performance standards in the provisions of this Code that are characterized by three general severity levels: .1 Routine conditions of transport (incident-free); .2 Normal conditions of transport (minor mishaps); and .3 Accident conditions of transport.

1.5.1.4 The provisions of this Code shall not apply to: .1 Radioactive material that is an integral part of the means of transport; .2 Radioactive material moved within an establishment which is subject to appropriate safety regulations in force in the establishment and where the movement does not involve public roads or railways; .3 Radioactive material implanted or incorporated into a person or live animal for diagnosis or treatment; .4 Radioactive material in consumer products which have received regulatory approval, following their sale to the end user; .5 Natural material and ores containing naturally occurring radionuclides which are either in their natural state, or have only been processed for purposes other than for extraction of the radionuclides, and which are not intended to be processed for use of these radionuclides provided the activity concentration of the material does not exceed 10 times the values specified in 2.7.2.2.1.2, or calculated in accordance with 2.7.2.2.2 to 2.7.2.2.6; and .6 Non-radioactive solid objects with radioactive substances present on any surfaces in quantities not in excess of the limit set out in the definition for “contamination” in 2.7.1.2.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 35

53

Bilaga 1

Part 1 – General provisions, definitions and training

1.5.1.5 Specific provisions for the transport of excepted packages

1.5.1.5.1 Excepted packages which may contain radioactive material in limited quantities, instruments, manufactured articles and empty packagings as specified in 2.7.2.4.1 shall be subject only to the following provisions of parts 5 to 7: .1 The applicable provisions specified in 5.1.2, 5.1.3.2, 5.1.4, 5.1.5.4, 5.2.1.5.2, 5.2.1.7, 7.1.3.2, 7.6.2.1.8, 7.8.4.2; .2 The provisions for excepted packages specified in 6.4.4; and .3 If the excepted package contains fissile material, one of the fissile exceptions provided by 2.7.2.3.5 shall apply and the provision of 6.4.7.2 shall be met.

1.5.1.5.2 Excepted packages shall be subject to the relevant provisions of all other parts of this Code.

1.5.2 Radiation protection programme

1.5.2.1 The transport of radioactive material shall be subject to a radiation protection programme which shall consist of systematic arrangements aimed at providing adequate consideration of radiation protection measures.

1.5.2.2 Doses to persons shall be below the relevant dose limits. Protection and safety shall be optimized in order that the magnitude of individual doses, the number of persons exposed, and the likelihood of incurring exposure shall be kept as low as reasonably achievable, economic and social factors being taken into account, within the restrictions that the doses to individuals be subject to dose constraints. A structured and systematic approach shall be adopted and shall include consideration of the interfaces between transport and other activities.

1.5.2.3 The nature and extent of the measures to be employed in the programme shall be related to the magnitude and likelihood of radiation exposures. The programme shall incorporate the provisions in 1.5.2.2, 1.5.2.4 and 7.1.4.5.13 to 7.1.4.5.18. Programme documents shall be available, on request, for inspection by the relevant competent authority.

1.5.2.4 For occupational exposures arising from transport activities, where it is assessed that the effective dose: .1 is likely to be between 1 and 6 mSv in a year, a dose assessment programme via workplace monitoring or individual monitoring shall be conducted; .2 is likely to exceed 6 mSv in a year, individual monitoring shall be conducted. When individual monitoring or workplace monitoring is conducted, appropriate records shall be kept. Note: For occupational exposures arising from transport activities, where it is assessed that the effective dose is most unlikely to exceed 1 mSv in a year, no special work patterns, detailed monitoring, dose assessment programmes or individual record keeping need be required.

1.5.3 Quality assurance

1.5.3.1 Quality assurance programmes based on international, national or other standards acceptable to the competent authority shall be established and implemented for the design, manufacture, testing, documentation, use, maintenance and inspection of all special form radioactive material, low dispersible radioactive material and packages and for transport and in-transit storage operations to ensure compliance with the relevant provisions of this Code. Certification that the design specification has been fully implemented shall be available to the competent authority. The manufacturer, consignor or user shall be prepared to provide facilities for competent authority inspection during manufacture and use and to demonstrate to any cognizant competent authority that: .1 the manufacturing methods and materials used are in accordance with the approved design specifications; and .2 all packagings are periodically inspected and, as necessary, repaired and maintained in good condition so that they continue to comply with all relevant requirements and specifications, even after repeated use. Where competent authority approval is required, such approval shall take into account and be contingent upon the adequacy of the quality assurance programme.

1.5.4 Special arrangement

1.5.4.1 Special arrangement shall mean those provisions, approved by the competent authority, under which consignments which do not satisfy all the provisions of this Code applicable to radioactive material may be transported.

36 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

54

Bilaga 1

Chapter 1.5 – General provisions concerning class 7

1.5.4.2 Consignments for which conformity with any provision applicable to class 7 is impracticable shall not be transported except under special arrangement. Provided the competent authority is satisfied that conformity with the class 7 provisions of this Code is impracticable and that the requisite standards of safety established by this Code have been demonstrated through alternative means, the competent authority may approve special arrangement transport operations for single or a planned series of multiple consignments. The overall level of safety in transport shall be at least equivalent to that which would be provided if all the applicable provisions had been met. For international consignments of this type, multilateral approval shall be required.

1.5.5 Radioactive material possessing other dangerous properties

1.5.5.1 In addition to the radioactive and fissile properties, any subsidiary risk of the contents of a package, such as explosiveness, flammability, pyrophoricity, chemical toxicity and corrosiveness, shall also be taken into account in the documentation, packing, labelling, marking, placarding, stowage, segregation and transport, in order to be in compliance with all relevant provisions for dangerous goods. (See also special provision 172 and, for excepted packages, special provision 290.)

1.5.6 Non-compliance

1.5.6.1 In the event of a non-compliance with any limit in the provisions of this Code applicable to radiation level or contamination, .1 The consignor shall be informed of the non-compliance (i) by the carrier if the non-compliance is identified during transport; or (ii) by the consignee if the non-compliance is identified at receipt; .2 The carrier, consignor or consignee, as appropriate, shall: (i) take immediate steps to mitigate the consequences of the non-compliance; (ii) investigate the non-compliance and its causes, circumstances and consequences; (iii) take appropriate action to remedy the causes and circumstances that led to the non-compliance and to prevent a recurrence of similar circumstances that led to the non-compliance; and (iv) communicate to the relevant competent authority(ies) on the causes of the non-compliance and on corrective or preventive actions taken or to be taken; and .3 The communication of the non-compliance to the consignor and relevant competent authority(ies), respectively, shall be made as soon as practicable and it shall be immediate whenever an emergency exposure situation has developed or is developing.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 37

55

Bilaga 1

11

56

Bilaga 1

PART 2

CLASSIFICATION

57

Bilaga 1

58

Bilaga 1

Chapter 2.0

Introduction

Note: For the purposes of this Code, it has been necessary to classify dangerous goods in different classes, to subdivide a number of these classes and to define and describe characteristics and properties of the substances, materials and articles which would fall within each class or division. Moreover, in accordance with the criteria for the selection of marine pollutants for the purposes of Annex III of the International Convention for the Prevention of Pollution from Ships, 1973, as modified by the Protocol of 1978 relating thereto (MARPOL 73/78), a number of dangerous substances in the various classes have also been identified as substances harmful to the marine environment (MARINE POLLUTANTS).

2.0.0 Responsibilities

The classification shall be made by the shipper/consignor or by the appropriate competent authority where specified in this Code.

2.0.1 Classes, divisions, packing groups

2.0.1.1 Definitions

Substances (including mixtures and solutions) and articles subject to the provisions of this Code are assigned to one of the classes 1–9 according to the hazard or the most predominant of the hazards they present. Some of these classes are subdivided into divisions. These classes or divisions are as listed below: Class 1: Explosives Division 1.1: substances and articles which have a mass explosion hazard Division 1.2: substances and articles which have a projection hazard but not a mass explosion hazard Division 1.3: substances and articles which have a fire hazard and either a minor blast hazard or a minor projection hazard or both, but not a mass explosion hazard Division 1.4: substances and articles which present no significant hazard Division 1.5: very insensitive substances which have a mass explosion hazard Division 1.6: extremely insensitive articles which do not have a mass explosion hazard Class 2: Gases Class 2.1: flammable gases Class 2.2: non-flammable, non-toxic gases Class 2.3: toxic gases Class 3: Flammable liquids Class 4: Flammable solids; substances liable to spontaneous combustion; substances which, in contact with water, emit flammable gases Class 4.1: flammable solids, self-reactive substances and solid desensitized explosives Class 4.2: substances liable to spontaneous combustion Class 4.3: substances which, in contact with water, emit flammable gases Class 5: Oxidizing substances and organic peroxides Class 5.1: oxidizing substances Class 5.2: organic peroxides Class 6: Toxic and infectious substances Class 6.1: toxic substances Class 6.2: infectious substances Class 7: Radioactive material Class 8: Corrosive substances Class 9: Miscellaneous dangerous substances and articles The numerical order of the classes and divisions is not that of the degree of danger.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 41

59

Bilaga 1

Part 2 – Classification

2.0.1.2 Marine pollutants

2.0.1.2.1 Many of the substances assigned to classes 1 to 9 are deemed as being marine pollutants (see chapter 2.10). 2.0.1.2.2 Known marine pollutants are noted in the dangerous goods list and are indicated in the Index. 2.0.1.3 For packing purposes, substances other than those of classes 1, 2, 5.2, 6.2 and 7, and other than self-reactive substances of class 4.1, are assigned to three packing groups in accordance with the degree of danger they present: Packing group I: substances presenting high danger; Packing group II: substances presenting medium danger; and Packing group III: substances presenting low danger. The packing group to which a substance is assigned is indicated in the Dangerous Goods List in chapter 3.2. 2.0.1.4 Dangerous goods are determined to present one or more of the dangers represented by classes 1 to 9, marine pollutants and, if applicable, the degree of danger (packing group) on the basis of the provisions in chapters 2.1 to 2.10. 2.0.1.5 Dangerous goods presenting a danger of a single class or division are assigned to that class or division and the packing group, if applicable, determined. When an article or substance is specifically listed by name in the Dangerous Goods List in chapter 3.2, its class or division, its subsidiary risk(s) and, when applicable, its packing group are taken from this list. 2.0.1.6 Dangerous goods meeting the defining criteria of more than one hazard class or division and which are not listed by name in the Dangerous Goods List are assigned to a class or division and subsidiary risk(s) on the basis of the precedence of hazard provisions prescribed in 2.0.3.

2.0.2 UN Numbers and Proper Shipping Names

2.0.2.1 Dangerous goods are assigned to UN Numbers and Proper Shipping Names according to their hazard classification and their composition. 2.0.2.2 Dangerous goods commonly transported are listed in the Dangerous Goods List in chapter 3.2. Where an article or substance is specifically listed by name, it shall be identified in transport by the Proper Shipping Name in the Dangerous Goods List. Such substances may contain technical impurities (for example those deriving from the production process) or additives for stability or other purposes that do not affect their classification. However, a substance listed by name containing technical impurities or additives for stability or other purposes affecting its classification shall be considered a mixture or solution (see 2.0.2.5). For dangerous goods not specifically listed by name, “generic” or “not otherwise specified” entries are provided (see 2.0.2.7) to identify the article or substance in transport. Each entry in the Dangerous Goods List is assigned a UN Number. This list also contains relevant information for each entry, such as hazard class, subsidiary risk(s) (if any), packing group (where assigned), packing and tank transport provisions, EmS, segregation and stowage, properties and observations, etc. Entries in the Dangerous Goods List are of the following four types: .1 single entries for well-defined substances or articles: e.g. UN 1090 acetone UN 1194 ethyl nitrite solution .2 generic entries for well-defined groups of substances or articles: e.g. UN 1133 adhesives UN 1266 perfumery product UN 2757 carbamate pesticide, solid, toxic UN 3101 organic peroxide type B, liquid .3 specific N.O.S. entries covering a group of substances or articles of a particular chemical or technical nature: e.g. UN 1477 nitrates, inorganic, N.O.S. UN 1987 alcohols, N.O.S. .4 general N.O.S. entries covering a group of substances or articles meeting the criteria of one or more classes: e.g. UN 1325 flammable solid, organic, N.O.S. UN 1993 flammable liquid, N.O.S. 2.0.2.3 All self-reactive substances of class 4.1 are assigned to one of twenty generic entries in accordance with the classification principles described in 2.4.2.3.3.

42 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

60

Bilaga 1

Chapter 2.0 – Introduction

2.0.2.4 All organic peroxides of class 5.2 are assigned to one of twenty generic entries in accordance with the classification principles described in 2.5.3.3. 2.0.2.5 A mixture or solution meeting the classification criteria of this Code composed of a single predominant substance identified by name in the Dangerous Goods List and one or more substances not subject to the provisions of this Code and/or traces of one or more substances identified by name in the Dangerous Goods List, shall be assigned the UN Number and Proper Shipping Name of the predominant substance named in the Dangerous Goods List unless: .1 the mixture or solution is identified by name in the Dangerous Goods List; .2 the name and description of the substance named in the Dangerous Goods List specifically indicate that they apply only to the pure substance; .3 the hazard class or division, subsidiary risk(s), packing group, or physical state of the mixture or solution is different from that of the substance named in the Dangerous Goods List; or .4 the hazard characteristics and properties of the mixture or solution necessitate emergency response measures that are different from those required for the substance identified by name in the Dangerous Goods List. In those other cases, except the one described in .1, the mixture or solution shall be treated as a dangerous substance not specifically listed by name in the Dangerous Goods List. 2.0.2.6 When the class, physical state or packing group has changed in comparison with the pure substance, the solution or mixture shall be shipped in accordance with the provisions for the changed hazard under an appropriate N.O.S. entry. 2.0.2.7 Substances or articles which are not specifically listed by name in the Dangerous Goods List shall be classified under a “generic” or “not otherwise specified” (N.O.S.) Proper Shipping Name. The substance or article shall be classified according to the class definitions and test criteria in this part, and the article or substance classified under the generic or “N.O.S.” Proper Shipping Name in the Dangerous Goods List which most appropriately describes the article or substance. This means that a substance is only to be assigned to an entry of type .3 – as defined in 2.0.2.2 – if it cannot be assigned to an entry of type .2, and to an entry of type .4 if it cannot be assigned to an entry of type .2 or .3.*

2.0.2.8 When considering a solution or mixture in accordance with 2.0.2.5, due account shall be given to whether the dangerous constituent comprising the solution or mixture has been identified as a marine pollutant. If this is the case, the provisions of chapter 2.10 are also applicable. 2.0.2.9 A mixture or solution, containing one or more substances identified by name in this Code or classified under an N.O.S. or generic entry and one or more substances not subject to the provisions of this Code, is not subject to the provisions of this Code if the hazard characteristics of the mixture or solution are such that they do not meet the criteria (including human experience criteria) for any class. 2.0.2.10 A mixture or solution meeting the classification criteria of this Code that is not identified by name in the Dangerous Goods List and that is composed of two or more dangerous goods shall be assigned to an entry that has the Proper Shipping Name, description, hazard class or division, subsidiary risk(s) and packing group that most precisely describe the mixture or solution.

2.0.3 Classification of substances, mixtures and solutions with multiple hazards (precedence of hazard characteristics)

2.0.3.1 The table of precedence of hazard characteristics in 2.0.3.6 shall be used to determine the class of a substance, mixture or solution having more than one hazard when it is not specifically listed by name in this Code. For substances, mixtures or solutions having multiple hazards which are not specifically listed by name, the most stringent packing group of those assigned to the respective hazards of the goods takes precedence over other packing groups, irrespective of the precedence of hazard table in 2.0.3.6. 2.0.3.2 The precedence of hazard table indicates which of the hazards shall be regarded as the primary hazard. The class which appears at the intersection of the horizontal line and the vertical column is the primary hazard and the remaining class is the subsidiary hazard. The packing groups for each of the hazards associated with the substance, mixture or solution shall be determined by reference to the appropriate criteria. The most stringent of the groups so indicated shall then become the packing group of the substance, mixture or solution. 2.0.3.3 The Proper Shipping Name (see 3.1.2) of a substance, mixture or solution when classified in accordance with 2.0.3.1 and 2.0.3.2 shall be the most appropriate N.O.S. (“not otherwise specified”) entry in this Code for the class shown as the primary hazard. 2.0.3.4 The precedence of hazard characteristics of the following substances, materials and articles have not been dealt with in the precedence of hazard table, as these primary hazards always take precedence:

* See also the generic or N.O.S. Proper Shipping Name in appendix A.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 43

61

Bilaga 1

Part 2 – Classification

.1 substances and articles of class 1; .2 gases of class 2; .3 liquid desensitized explosives of class 3; .4 self-reactive substances and solid desensitized explosives of class 4.1; .5 pyrophoric substances of class 4.2; .6 substances of class 5.2; .7 substances of class 6.1 with a packing group I vapour inhalation toxicity; .8 substances of class 6.2; and .9 materials of class 7.

2.0.3.5 Apart from excepted radioactive material (where the other hazardous properties take precedence), radioactive material having other hazardous properties shall always be classified in class 7, with the greatest of the additional hazards being identified. For radioactive material in excepted packages, special provision 290 of chapter 3.3 applies.

2.0.3.6 Precedence of hazards

Class and 5.1 5.1 5.1 6.1, I 6.1, I 6.1 6.1 8, I 8, I 8, II 8, II 8, III 8, III 4.2 4.3 Packing Group I II III Dermal Oral II III Liquid Solid Liquid Solid Liquid Solid 3 I* 4.3 3 3 3 3 3 – 3 – 3 – 3 II* 4.3 3 3 3 3 8 – 3 – 3 – 3 III* 4.3 6.1 6.1 6.1 3† 8 – 8 – 3 – 4.1 II* 4.2 4.3 5.1 4.1 4.1 6.1 6.1 4.1 4.1 – 8 – 4.1 – 4.1 4.1 III* 4.2 4.3 5.1 4.1 4.1 6.1 6.1 6.1 4.1 – 8 – 8 – 4.1 4.2 II 4.3 5.1 4.2 4.2 6.1 6.1 4.2 4.2 8 8 4.2 4.2 4.2 4.2 4.2 III 4.3 5.1 5.1 4.2 6.1 6.1 6.1 4.2 8 8 8 8 4.2 4.2 4.3 I 5.1 4.3 4.3 6.1 4.3 4.3 4.3 4.3 4.3 4.3 4.3 4.3 4.3 4.3 II 5.1 4.3 4.3 6.1 4.3 4.3 4.3 8 8 4.3 4.3 4.3 4.3 4.3 III 5.1 5.1 4.3 6.1 6.1 6.1 4.3 8 8 8 8 4.3 4.3 5.1 I 5.1 5.1 5.1 5.1 5.1 5.1 5.1 5.1 5.1 5.1 5.1 II 6.1 5.1 5.1 5.1 8 8 5.1 5.1 5.1 5.1 5.1 III 6.1 6.1 6.1 5.1 8 8 8 8 5.1 5.1 6.1 I, Dermal 8 6.1 6.1 6.1 6.1 6.1 6.1 I, Oral 8 6.1 6.1 6.1 6.1 6.1 6.1 II, Inhalation 8 6.1 6.1 6.1 6.1 6.1 6.1 II, Dermal 8 6.1 8 6.1 6.1 6.1 6.1 II, Oral 8 8 8 6.1 6.1 6.1 6.1 III 8 8 8 8 8 8 * Substances of class 4.1 other than self-reactive substances and solid desensitized explosives and substances of class 3 other than liquid desensitized explosives. † 6.1 for pesticides. –Denotes an impossible combination.

For hazards not shown in this table, see 2.0.3.

2.0.4 Transport of samples

2.0.4.1 When the hazard class of a substance is uncertain and it is being transported for further testing, a tentative hazard class, Proper Shipping Name and identification number shall be assigned on the basis of the consignor’s knowledge of the substances and application of: .1 the classification criteria of this Code; and .2 the precedence of hazards given in 2.0.3.

The most severe packing group possible for the Proper Shipping Name chosen shall be used.

44 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

62

Bilaga 1

Chapter 2.0 – Introduction

Where this provision is used, the Proper Shipping Name shall be supplemented with the word “SAMPLE” (such as FLAMMABLE LIQUID, N.O.S., SAMPLE). In certain instances, where a specific Proper Shipping Name is provided for a sample of a substance considered to meet certain classification criteria (such as UN 3167, GAS SAMPLE, NON-PRESSURIZED, FLAMMABLE), that Proper Shipping Name shall be used. When an N.O.S. entry is used to transport the sample, the Proper Shipping Name need not be supplemented with the technical name as required by special provision 274. 2.0.4.2 Samples of the substance shall be transported in accordance with the provisions applicable to the tentative assigned Proper Shipping Name provided: .1 the substance is not considered to be a substance prohibited for transport by 1.1.3; .2 the substance is not considered to meet the criteria for class 1 or considered to be an infectious substance or a radioactive material; .3 the substance is in compliance with 2.4.2.3.2.4.2 or 2.5.3.2.5.1 if it is a self-reactive substance or an organic peroxide, respectively; .4 the sample is transported in a combination packaging with a net mass per package not exceeding 2.5 kg; and .5 the sample is not packed together with other goods.

2.0.5 Transport of wastes

2.0.5.1 Preamble

Wastes, which are dangerous goods, shall be transported in accordance with the relevant international recommendations and conventions and, in particular, where it concerns transport by sea, with the provisions of this Code.

2.0.5.2 Applicability

2.0.5.2.1 The provisions of this chapter are applicable to the transport of wastes by ships and shall be considered in conjunction with all other provisions of this Code. 2.0.5.2.2 Substances, solutions, mixtures or articles containing or contaminated with radioactive material are subject to the applicable provisions for radioactive material in class 7, and are not to be considered as wastes for the purposes of this chapter.

2.0.5.3 Transboundary movements under the Basel Convention*

2.0.5.3.1 Transboundary movement of wastes is permitted to commence only when: .1 notification has been sent by the competent authority of the country of origin, or by the generator or exporter through the channel of the competent authority of the country of origin, to the country of final destination; and .2 the competent authority of the country of origin, having received the written consent of the country of final destination stating that the wastes will be safely incinerated or treated by other methods of disposal, has given authorization to the movement. 2.0.5.3.2 In addition to the transport document required in chapter 5.4, all transboundary movements of wastes shall be accompanied by a waste movement document from the point at which a transboundary movement commences to the point of disposal. This document shall be available at all times to the competent authorities and to all persons involved in the management of waste transport operations. 2.0.5.3.3 The transport of solid wastes in bulk in cargo transport units and road vehicles is only permitted with the approval of the competent authority of the country of origin. 2.0.5.3.4 In the event that packages and cargo transport units containing wastes are suffering from leakage or spillage, the competent authorities of the countries of origin and destination shall be immediately informed and advice on the action to be taken obtained from them. * Basel Convention on the Control of Transboundary Movements of Hazardous Wastes and their Disposal (1989)

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 45

63

Bilaga 1

Part 2 – Classification

2.0.5.4 Classification of wastes

2.0.5.4.1 A waste containing only one constituent which is a dangerous substance subject to the provisions of this Code shall be regarded as being that particular substance. If the concentration of the constituent is such that the waste continues to present a hazard inherent in the constituent itself, it shall be classified according to the criteria of the applicable classes. 2.0.5.4.2 A waste containing two or more constituents which are dangerous substances subject to the provisions of this Code shall be classified under the applicable class in accordance with their dangerous characteristics and properties as described in 2.0.5.4.3 and 2.0.5.4.4.

2.0.5.4.3 The classification according to the dangerous characteristics and properties shall be carried out as follows: .1 determination of the physical and chemical characteristics and physiological properties by measurement or calculation followed by classification according to the criteria of the applicable class(es); or .2 if the determination is not practicable, the waste shall be classified according to the constituent presenting the predominant hazard.

2.0.5.4.4 In determining the predominant hazard, the following criteria shall be taken into account: .1 if one or more constituents fall within a certain class and the waste presents a hazard inherent in these constituents, the waste shall be included in that class; or .2 if there are constituents falling under two or more classes, the classification of the waste shall take into account the order of precedence applicable to dangerous substances with multiple hazards set out in 2.0.3. 2.0.5.4.5 Wastes harmful to the marine environment only shall be transported under the class 9 entries for ENVIRON- MENTALLY HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCE, LIQUID, N.O.S., UN 3082, or ENVIRONMENTALLY HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCE, SOLID, N.O.S., UN 3077, with the addition of the word “WASTE”. However, this is not applicable to substances which are covered by individual entries in this Code.

2.0.5.4.6 Wastes not otherwise subject to the provisions of this Code but covered under the Basel Convention may be transported under the class 9 entries for ENVIRONMENTALLY HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCE, LIQUID, N.O.S., UN 3082 or ENVIRONMENTALLY HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCE, SOLID, N.O.S., UN 3077.

46 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

64

Bilaga 1

Chapter 2.1

Class 1 – Explosives

2.1.0 Introductory notes (these notes are not mandatory)

Note 1: Class 1 is a restricted class, that is, only those explosive substances and articles that are listed in the Dangerous Goods List in chapter 3.2 may be accepted for transport. However, the competent authorities retain the right by mutual agreement to approve transport of explosive substances and articles for special purposes under special conditions. Therefore entries have been included in the Dangerous Goods List for “Substances, explosive, not otherwise specified” and “Articles, explosive, not otherwise specified”. It is intended that these entries should only be used when no other method of operation is possible. Note 2: General entries such as “Explosive, blasting, type A” are used to allow for the transport of new substances. In preparing these provisions, military ammunition and explosives have been taken into consideration to the extent that they are likely to be transported by commercial carriers. Note 3: A number of substances and articles in class 1 are described in appendix B. These descriptions are given because a term may not be well-known or may be at variance with its usage for regulatory purposes. Note 4: Class 1 is unique in that the type of packaging frequently has a decisive effect on the hazard and therefore on the assignment to a particular division. The correct division is determined by use of the procedures provided in this chapter.

2.1.1 Definitions and general provisions

2.1.1.1 Class 1 comprises: .1 explosive substances (a substance which is not itself an explosive but which can form an explosive atmosphere of gas, vapour or dust is not included in class 1), except those which are too dangerous to transport or those where the predominant hazard is one appropriate to another class; .2 explosive articles, except devices containing explosive substances in such quantity or of such a character that their inadvertent or accidental ignition or initiation during transport shall not cause any effect external to the device either by projection, fire, smoke, heat or loud noise (see 2.1.3.4); and .3 substances and articles not mentioned under .1 and .2 which are manufactured with a view to producing a practical, explosive or pyrotechnic effect.

2.1.1.2 Transport of explosive substances which are unduly sensitive, or so reactive as to be subject to spontaneous reaction, is prohibited.

2.1.1.3 Definitions

For the purposes of this Code, the following definitions apply: .1 Explosive substance means a solid or liquid substance (or a mixture of substances) which is in itself capable by chemical reaction of producing gas at such a temperature and pressure and at such a speed as to cause damage to the surroundings. Pyrotechnic substances are included even when they do not evolve gases. .2 Pyrotechnic substance means a substance or a mixture of substances designed to produce an effect by heat, light, sound, gas or smoke or a combination of these as the result of non-detonative self-sustaining exothermic chemical reactions. .3 Explosive article means an article containing one or more explosive substances. .4 Mass explosion means one which affects almost the entire load virtually instantaneously. .5 Phlegmatized means that a substance (or “phlegmatizer”) has been added to an explosive to enhance its safety in handling and transport. The phlegmatizer renders the explosive insensitive, or less sensitive, to the following actions: heat, shock, impact, percussion or friction. Typical phlegmatizing agents include, but are not limited to: wax, paper, water, polymers (such as chlorofluoropolymers), alcohol and oils (such as petroleum jelly and paraffin).

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 47

65

Bilaga 1

Part 2 – Classification

2.1.1.4 Hazard divisions

The six hazard divisions of class 1 are: Division 1.1 Substances and articles which have a mass explosion hazard Division 1.2 Substances and articles which have a projection hazard but not a mass explosion hazard Division 1.3 Substances and articles which have a fire hazard and either a minor blast hazard or a minor projection hazard or both, but not a mass explosion hazard This division comprises substances and articles: .1 which give rise to considerable radiant heat; or .2 which burn one after another, producing minor blast or projection effects or both. Division 1.4 Substances and articles which present no significant hazard This division comprises substances and articles which present only a small hazard in the event of ignition or initiation during transport. The effects are largely confined to the package and no projection of fragments of appreciable size or range is to be expected. An external fire must not cause virtually instantaneous explosion of almost the entire contents of the package. Note: Substances and articles in this division are in compatibility group S if they are so packaged or designed that any hazardous effects arising from the accidental functioning are confined within the package unless the package has been degraded by fire, in which case all blast or projection effects are limited to the extent that they do not significantly hinder fire fighting or other emergency response efforts in the immediate vicinity of the package. Division 1.5 Very insensitive substances which have a mass explosion hazard This division comprises substances which have a mass explosion hazard but are so insensitive that there is very little probability of initiation or of transition from burning to detonation under normal conditions of transport. Note: The probability of transition from burning to detonation is greater when large quantities are transported in a ship. As a consequence, the stowage provisions for explosive substances in division 1.1 and for those in division 1.5 are identical. Division 1.6 Extremely insensitive articles which do not have a mass explosion hazard This division comprises articles which contain only extremely insensitive substances and which demonstrate a negligible probability of accidental initiation or propagation. Note: The risk from articles of division 1.6 is limited to the explosion of a single article. 2.1.1.5 Any substance or article having or suspected of having explosive characteristics shall first be considered for classification in class 1 in accordance with the procedures in 2.1.3. Goods are not classified in class 1 when: .1 unless specially authorized, the transport of an explosive substance is prohibited because sensitivity of the substance is excessive; .2 the substance or article comes within the scope of those explosive substances and articles which are specifically excluded from class 1 by the definition of this class; or .3 the substance or article has no explosive properties.

2.1.2 Compatibility groups and classification codes

2.1.2.1 Goods of class 1 are considered to be “compatible” if they can be safely stowed or transported together without significantly increasing either the probability of an accident or, for a given quantity, the magnitude of the effects of such an accident. By this criterion, goods listed in this class have been divided into a number of compatibility groups, each denoted by a letter from A to L (excluding I), N and S. These are described in 2.1.2.2 and 2.1.2.3.

48 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

66

Bilaga 1

Chapter 2.1 – Class 1 – Explosives

2.1.2.2 Compatibility groups and classification codes

Compatibility Classification Description of substance or articles to be classified group code Primary explosive substance A 1.1A

Article containing a primary explosive substance and not containing two or more B 1.1B effective protective features. Some articles, such as detonators for blasting, 1.2B detonator assemblies for blasting and primers, cap-type, are included even though 1.4B they do not contain primary explosives

Propellant explosive substance or other deflagrating explosive substance or article C 1.1C containing such explosive substance 1.2C 1.3C 1.4C Secondary detonating explosive substance or black powder or article containing a D 1.1D secondary detonating explosive substance, in each case without means of initiation 1.2D and without a propelling charge, or article containing a primary explosive substance 1.4D and containing two or more effective protective features 1.5D

Article containing a secondary detonating explosive substance, without means of E 1.1E initiation, with a propelling charge (other than one containing a flammable liquid or gel 1.2E or hypergolic liquids) 1.4E

Article containing a secondary detonating explosive substance with its own means of F 1.1F initiation, with a propelling charge (other than one containing a flammable liquid or gel 1.2F or hypergolic liquids) or without a propelling charge 1.3F 1.4F Pyrotechnic substance, or article containing a pyrotechnic substance, or article G 1.1G containing both an explosive substance and an illuminating, incendiary, tear- or 1.2G smoke-producing substance (other than a water-activated article or one containing 1.3G white phosphorus, phosphides, a pyrophoric substance, a flammable liquid or gel, or 1.4G hypergolic liquids) Article containing both an explosive substance and white phosphorus H 1.2H 1.3H

Article containing both an explosive substance and a flammable liquid or gel J 1.1J 1.2J 1.3J

Article containing both an explosive substance and a toxic chemical agent K 1.2K 1.3K Explosive substance or article containing an explosive substance and presenting L 1.1L a special risk (such as due to water-activation or presence of hypergolic liquids, 1.2L phosphides or a pyrophoric substance) and needing isolation of each type (see 1.3L 7.2.7.1.4, Note 2) Articles containing only extremely insensitive substances N 1.6N

Substance or article so packaged or designed that any hazardous effects arising S 1.4S from accidental functioning are confined within the package unless the package has been degraded by fire, in which case all blast or projection effects are limited to the extent that they do not significantly hinder or prohibit fire fighting or other emergency response efforts in the immediate vicinity of the package

Note 1: Articles of compatibility groups D and E may be fitted or packed together with their own means of initiation provided that such means have at least two effective protective features designed to prevent an explosion in the event of accidental functioning of the means of initiation. Such articles and packages shall be assigned to compatibility groups D or E.

Note 2: Articles of compatibility groups D and E may be packed together with their own means of initiation, which do not have two effective protective features when, in the opinion of the competent authority of the country of origin, the accidental functioning of the means of initiation does not cause the explosion of an article under normal conditions of transport. Such packages shall be assigned to compatibility groups D or E.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 49

67

Bilaga 1

Part 2 – Classification

2.1.2.3 Scheme of classification of explosives, combination of hazard division with compatibility group

Hazard Compatibility group ∑ A–S division A B C D E F G H J K L N S 1.1 1.1A 1.1B 1.1C 1.1D 1.1E 1.1F 1.1G 1.1J 1.1L 9 1.2 1.2B 1.2C 1.2D 1.2E 1.2F 1.2G 1.2H 1.2J 1.2K 1.2L 10 1.3 1.3C 1.3F 1.3G 1.3H 1.3J 1.3K 1.3L 7 1.4 1.4B 1.4C 1.4D 1.4E 1.4F 1.4G 1.4S 7 1.5 1.5D 1 1.6 1.6N 1 ∑1.1–1.6 1 3 4 4 3 4 4 2 3 2 3 1 1 35

2.1.2.4 The definitions of compatibility groups in 2.1.2.2 are intended to be mutually exclusive, except for a substance or article which qualifies for compatibility group S. Since the criterion of compatibility group S is an empirical one, assignment to this group is necessarily linked to the tests for assignment to division 1.4.

2.1.3 Classification procedure

2.1.3.1 Any substance or article having or suspected of having explosive characteristics shall be considered for classification in class 1. Substances and articles classified in class 1 shall be assigned to the appropriate division and compatibility group. Goods of class 1 shall be classified in accordance with the latest version of the United Nations Manual of Tests and Criteria. 2.1.3.2 Prior to transport, the classification of all explosive substances and articles, together with the compatibility group assignment and the Proper Shipping Name under which the substance or article is to be transported, shall have been approved by the competent authority of the country of manufacture. A new approval would be required for: .1 a new explosive substance; or .2 a new combination or mixture of explosive substances which is significantly different from other combinations or mixtures previously manufactured and approved; or .3 a new design of an explosive article, an article containing a new explosive substance, or an article containing a new combination or mixture of explosive substances; or .4 an explosive substance or article with a new design or type of packaging, including a new type of inner packaging. 2.1.3.3 Assessment of the hazard division is usually made on the basis of test results. A substance or article shall be assigned to the hazard division which corresponds to the results of the tests to which the substance or article, as offered for transport, has been subjected. Other test results, and data assembled from accidents which have occurred, may also be taken into account.

2.1.3.4 Exclusion from Class 1

2.1.3.4.1 The competent authority may exclude an article or substance from class 1 by virtue of test results and the Class 1 definition. 2.1.3.4.2 An article may be excluded from Class 1 by the competent authority when three unpackaged articles, each individually activated by its own means of initiation or ignition or external means to function in the designed mode, meet the following test criteria: .1 No external surface shall have a temperature of more than 65ºC. A momentary spike in temperature up to 200ºC is acceptable; .2 No rupture or fragmentation of the external casing or movement of the article or detached parts thereof of more than one metre in any direction; Note: Where the integrity of the article may be affected in the event of an external fire these criteria shall be examined by a fire test, such as described in ISO 12097-3. .3 No audible report exceeding 135 dB(C) peak at a distance of one metre; .4 No flash or flame capable of igniting a material such as a sheet of 80 ± 10 g/m² paper in contact with the article; and .5 No production of smoke, fumes or dust in such quantities that the visibility in a one cubic metre chamber equipped with appropriately sized blow out panels is reduced more than 50% as measured by a calibrated light (lux) meter or radiometer located one metre from a constant light source located at the midpoint on opposite walls. The general guidance on Optical Density Testing in ISO 5659-1 and the

50 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

68

Bilaga 1

Chapter 2.1 – Class 1 – Explosives

general guidance on the Photometric System described in Section 7.5 in ISO 5659-2 may be used or similar optical density measurement methods designed to accomplish the same purpose may also be employed. A suitable hood cover surrounding the back and sides of the light meter shall be used to minimize effects of scattered or leaking light not emitted directly from the source.

Note 1: If during the tests addressing criteria .1, .2, .3 and .4 no or very little smoke is observed the test described in .5 may be waived.

Note 2: The competent authority may require testing in packaged form if it is determined that, as packaged for transport, the article may pose a greater risk.".

2.1.3.5 Assignment of fireworks to hazard divisions

2.1.3.5.1 Fireworks shall normally be assigned to hazard divisions 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, and 1.4 on the basis of test data derived from Test Series 6 of the United Nations Manual of Tests and Criteria. However, since the range of such articles is very extensive and the availability of test facilities may be limited, assignment to hazard divisions may also be made in accordance with the procedure in 2.1.3.5.2. 2.1.3.5.2 Assignment of fireworks to UN Nos. 0333, 0334, 0335 or 0336 may be made on the basis of analogy, without the need for Test Series 6 testing, in accordance with the default fireworks classification table in 2.1.3.5.5. Such assignment shall be made with the agreement of the competent authority. Items not specified in the table shall be classified on the basis of test data derived from Test Series 6 of the United Nations Manual of Tests and Criteria. Note: The addition of other types of fireworks to column 1 of the table in 2.1.3.5.5 shall only be made on the basis of full test data submitted to the UN Sub-Committee of Experts on the Transport of Dangerous Goods for consideration. 2.1.3.5.3 Where fireworks of more than one hazard division are packed in the same package they shall be classified on the basis of the highest hazard division unless test data derived from Test Series 6 of the United Nations Manual of Tests and Criteria indicate otherwise. 2.1.3.5.4 The classification shown in the table in 2.1.3.5.5 applies only for articles packed in fibreboard boxes (4G).

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 51

69

Bilaga 1

Part 2 – Classification

, d ). e e or 2 rg s f 5.

a .3. h ms G G G G G re u .1 .1 1G 1G 3 4 1G 1G 2 3 g c 8 sification 1 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. t a e 2 s tin a an e h Cla , th t ta (s l rs, lif a h h s h o rks s s h s , d a a s n a a ot more a r shel r /or /or io m rewo be teria % fl % fl /o rial it ts % fl /o t m o 5 5 % fl d s c 0 m 5 d e fi n o 8 n k e t Cri 2 and 2 and 0 g 2 ae p e 0 g 2 h d d > ≤ ≤ r a m ff 1 ≤ r a c t e ork; er er 6 e o < 6 e o n . w h d h d ≤ h rical rt e < h a an it w it w r ion d r , r i rat ri wd h c o n wd d ts , o , wit o s p , o , wit o .g. nst te fire es m m w po m w po m a e e te ri m e p sphe r r m a m e p n o ification s sificat s e m the f T c 0 m 0 m 0 m o s 0 m % fl /o o s ( s d C o e 8 8 8 0 m o 8 5 d 0 m 0 m o e e n p loose loose n c re d S ls 1 1 1 5 s l rdous cla ls 1 2 5 5 s l n p s ≥ < , as < , as ≤ az ≥ > r a > ≤ s i s a ining l: l: ts l: ts l: substance ts l: l: e l: l: substance ts ta e a c c n a c thes n a c s a st Manual ion ion io ha io b s is e nt t shel fe fe it fe t shel wd it fe u it r o s shel shel shel shel chnic s ine shel shel o shel shel chnic s n c n por ef ef o ef por o ef re o e rt rt te p rt most rm e e p te p rt ic s u u l of T ti o o ro m o e e s ro m o n ic s a or a ll r p p y o p h ll r o y o p h n s u A Colour Colour composit re Colour composit re Colour p c re T det A Colour Colour lo Colour Colour p c re c h re n d N c a sing e te M ri it ro te e p n e y ro mp

r th o e U ic n ll p py c . h n o a s e e f t e h m n fo s c r a e in , o u te r m separat d of a k a o h te s o a tub y f ro rt inside c s t e m s 6 o wit a e la py je rm e United Nations the ri e e n a c ro o m e e s shell e m r f in th h d o lls i e p e r of ta t Ss it o m a m e e ti e r l ro h th n e , w t charge o th o f T e ) o d f l s owd s 7 of th met c (s a lan d to b s ix o rg it te ri e re t p le t e o a n c e cylindrical n n n d dia d c h je opel ig i n n l a or s d, a s e e e t c ic u ro a pr e e , u p d s n n c te c e p ll; n b lla h e p ri rical n e Definition c e s d ta rg A inside te e a e h ll i ta a n h n p te p same e s s h h ro e e b t i e s r i ro d to b sphe h s , the a n t e re s h a is u g c e rt t p n o t e s s n o d i u , py y h rw ti e o e igs b s e ic if n T of th s h rg e r m d e sing h t n l it a s h io re mine e m e u h le u ic c it e r w d d h oth or s h or n wo o y f s te o p k g c la s p ay b h o n h t e compri m w le ro or r of th it ti e a it propel n m e s w rs c l d ro o te t m u n a bly r f py e a e w ta e w m a charge h ic s ic rn e to h C fire m v d b b te s rt le, u s r of th e s t e n u ev s o b rs ing ia n D a s D wrapper ex A m a st a te d o fe e e ti e Fl tub a , e t r L m ll; id l: p bur S e s ic ith le ia h n if la * n b a s rc a , shot s colour e t shel e t as e H : e d e s e i la l, mult ut d ble s i ). o l, n r a e is d th t dle , th : u t g h n , th n rk c h ta t i rs a e m shel repor ta n e e lls in y shel l; n i use c e th of th c wo parach ll, t e h n e l, e mor charge n” n ref g r m ir non h rc , or ta t s n e y aerial shel in e ct io s u e f f l: d s ification it ct d S i-break shel n s p fe s fe b mm n e l t o : / s o u a Roma lin is star u shell ef o e r, shel ical l, o r, p ef in , th y mult s t ic s ta r cy l, ta cla e m n d p lls s a l te, s s c and o h n e o in naut shel k n c h e ispla l, e lu ll mor c aural l a mor ta Includes d shel a l kit e or re h te a in n e h d w s c r s o , s fe la an ro e ll in m shel n shel t s e y ri d g dy smok o u charge F e a le c l, ct l, ro n fire R: “ Dimensions h lin b fe a a p she a reloade 1 ing 2: 3: a Spherical shel ef shel m aerial Pe P te st te te r s r cy r a b is t produce 5 g of p h for * T Default No bur No to 0. No – fo – fo – – fo

pe y .5 T spherical .5 l, lindrical y .3 c 1 Shel or

2.

52 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

70

Bilaga 1

Chapter 2.1 – Class 1 – Explosives

G G G G G G G G 1G 3 1G 3 3 1G 2 3 4 3 4 sification 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. s

Cla

h ic it sh s h n n a s h fla % no a c h s ic u

5 % fl te a n n 2 5 h io pe ining > ining 2 % fl ro c it y a a 5 % fl te s t h ≤ h ≤ 5 o nt it nt d c d py 2 ro p ork ion o o n a d n ≤ m m w c c n o r, m w r, r a r, e r a d r, py e e te te te n te h c ification 0 m fire sificat 0 m e e 5 g a e e s c 0 s met 5 met m m 2 m % a m a

e 3 < ia ia ≤ ia 5 ia p ≤ rdous cla ion ion > % fl S d a r dia r dia r d r d r d r r d 5 n z , or e e unit e e the n n n , o n ≤ ha s n n n n d m m m m a m inne inne n ine m i m i m i 5 g m i chnic 2 0 m 0 m 0 m 0 m rm mm composit mm composit te > 2 20 m 0 most e 0 m 0 m 0 m 0 m 5 g a 1 1 3 20 20 e 50 50 5 3 ro 3 3 2 h y > ≤ > > ≤ T det ≥ composition flash ≥ flash < composition ≤ p composition ≤ unit composition ≤ ≤

d f g g r g g me n n e n d n ic ic a s o n ti signe ti ti n ti n ic g n ic s e io rs rs rt rs a rs h n n h n p it fuse u de u n p e u u c h ti c h y n of d io n c r c r the g d chnic ng it r te te a rs te te a e t n e ti d b n d b s a d b d b ro u ro h f i n a n o % i n units n ro rt ro rt f t , a rot ls p 0 rt o o ining e y e a a e a 6 o e a e a r py py d b r py py a ts o s ri s m s s n e o in nsisting rg p u e u o ≥ u chnic u /o % /o % nt n o o a ransmit d e d 0 e a d 0 o c h of t y f y f h c n y f y f n 6 m a m s n 6 m a m t c la la s m a m la rot la ro u ro r c n e mat e a n a ro e y e ≤ ≤ g to o wo p out rt m a d d f y f m a d d f units lla h io d f p r n la n ithe in r t e h d h d it h d a h d te e te e d p nsisting wit it ine it 5 g fl s te it /or rt it 0 m c 0 m c n e o o d o c d o 7 n a je 7 n a je ts o n ro c or , w n , w 2 p je , w n , w io h d io n p chnic h e a e ≤ m e a e ≤ it ro it ≤ it ro e s e , p o ro s s m e h o e rg lls rg lls rg lls rg lls o e p , w lls o e p le rr it rot c unit wit Definition a r a e p a m a m a p e p o y n h a h h c h h l e , w p ta rt s she ro she m rg she m le s t c she o t c she a t c t c o a o ra h c of chnic n rt n rt n d f n d to b h d to b e c b s b e o o d to b te h c e h c e v a a u lla p lla p % fl e lla c lla s n t c s n rie rot charge e e 3 n e olour e olour a n olour a se s e is t ic s y p re m a m p re 3 p c je p c igs lla c igs e h n lant ro ro ig ro ro ro e e e p se h p ro ≤ s p y n t a c a e % fl5 % fl5 t p ining d f t p ining t p ining e p t p ining d d ro ining d d l t d i te u a te u a d d u a u a 2 n a 2 n ra te ro fuse o nt c o nt with n o nt o nt ≤ nt ≤ ining ining h o h o h o h o h p o including ve is ng a , propel it je it it it e a it e a e ta ti , c ro , c ls a , c d to b , c c , c c s l n nt a e n n r s rk o te py o e w e w t unit, ri e w n e w with ta e w with ta mbly c a c ic rge e p ic rge te ic rge ig ic rge s ic rge s e o e rn e v v a v s v b v b se p e e e e e u e u s rewo ub lte ansmit ub D cha to b D cha repor m D cha d D cha units, s D cha units, s A ty fi T a tr T substance

x, ll e e r s h bo h e te ll g e f t , s n et l : h s a e m r s s os finale b h b mb y o a u s o s, a , smal s f e le t , b le non e s m , fl y g s ip s dle S ta cak lt e n n ro u ri a : / e cand rc e g rdos, tte , c r pherical) e h ) d, m a s ri dle ta ( b r b n ls ticle e a Includes re to t , hy g t Roman mor e to p ar n c d c s , bomba d a s f shel n e re lls a rb , b rie sho l o e ork age s fe h w rr e te ibition e we k h f s o a x Shel (R o fire Ba fl c bat E Single preloade

dle n pe a y / c be T ry n u

te t t

Bat combination Roma Sho

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 53

71

Bilaga 1

Part 2 – Classification

G G G G G G G G G G G .1 1G 3 4 1G 1G 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 sification 1 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. s

Cla

n, n, h h c r r m m m s io io s a e e d a it ts it ts 3 g te te te 1 g s c s c . E rt r i r i r i se d fl 3 g 1 ≤ o e o e n a ts o ≤ e e e n lack p ff p ff io c p ba e 0. d m m , it e e y, 5 g p 5 g p e h , b n o o e s ff r n > ≤ e a e ≤ loose rt e rt e c o h f a e e : : k 0 g p f t c c d rt a ts c o c o n p c c c c 5 g p 5 g p only n n n o c h p h p ta rt e a n n rs k rs a 3 > ≤ ta ta p , as e s e s e s m o e, i ta ta le c le ≤ : : nitrat ts % o s s e ff a a b o p tl s s a r p s s c 5 b b e a ion fl r r fl r r u e is b b rk rk e fe 2 u u rg r r /o /o h c h u u r p rs: m k m ification a e rt e % d % d s r r 5 g, e e le e c e m c ef > h o 5 n 5 n ic s a 2 spa spa s p it a it r pack; te ic s ic s p 2 2 n /o h w ic s ic s d s p d m rk d d e n 5 % n n p e h d ≤ c n n a r p r i p h 2 h g c io ≤ r a ≤ r a c n a h h se m se te p se e se pe e S c c n it r r d e d e % fl c c s ≤ ti s composit te 5 r a te 0 i d s s p substance te te o /o n wd n wd ≤ e unit te te ba 0 i ba 1 ba ba m rs d o o ro e e es e m e e 0 g p ro ro u p n wd ro ro 1 ≤ a it m m a m a 2 g ; e > d te 0 3 chnic r b o flash r a e p e p o chnic < py py ≤ composition composition e e s s ining t g g n 0 i 1 : h h te tal % 0 m o 0 m o 0 g py a e p te c or te b 1 ≤ s s s ro wd h cs o 5 wd 8 o 8 o 5 nt s ro rchlorat m rchlorat m a ra rchlorat > rchlorat m la la y 20 g py 20 g py o a t 2 o 1 s l 1 s l 1 o o y fe 1 k 1 k e e e e it e e e

F F p > composition ≤ p fl in > p ≥ a < a ≤ c lo p ef ≥ < P it P it N P or P and it

n d. d i n n t, u e units, h d ro c g ld i ig n n a la in e

a e g s i rn f fl h it aural e p e h chnic n u h e n o n t /or d b o units ining e rot ti d i ic u a e ip ) wit d to b y a e n and d to b m low- e z x h nt e a n t n p ili chnic c o n olidat h s io b e e fi te ig it it end ig /or r c s ns d fl n s d ta ro visual e o n g e n rot d c ) w one a r s y , d s a d n i d d e o ir p r to b s n n c d e py rse it or rk t a n s f e a n h n d a e e u long a n h d o r cylinde p n o a e a a a n ll t e se h ( c e u p ic u e s g s it d n to t rge ro f a dispe n in re g o e ta r m n pa h in n r w s subst e n o c p c lo b Definition d i e g o te u a u th lle cha h ti or s a m d h o coat

e nt n t c widely ro ining ro d ( it ly chnic r o p je n a a te ic s e lla a o e p a e w tial n ) o ro e d o s e cloth d py ti nt c c h (s e n c o n o n c rot k e p c t i or n c par te y c rop la c r: ta ta p ti p e e a u se s lly c s ro ff rg a b ia b ick h s e p ir o r bag a c u rt u st it d to b l e producing e h d to f a g py ining e ining a e a p n lic a n a ip st h t c llic ic s ic s in nt d w ig nt d to b c pa n a n e p n rn o e s o e n n t r a h ir h u d p e n ri bur lla a c c b n c c t i or e rt te te e ip e ig c p o -met id w ha u d d s e p e ro ro ub q n ub e h ff ro ig low- T e a T d T single e Cloth p a m Non py R py Non-metal s the

l a g , ling ile n s s e in

, , B ta whist mis s n : e u m et, et, c o rch y mine n l f o a a t rock , l c non rock y rs ri ing s y et , bag d

S sk lin er owe y non-handheld : / et, h signal rock mine luminat rs, arkl et, , ss le, c il rk sp rock rb a e table e ir Includes rock tle p et, , ground , g sparkle , w ick u s r s s bot fe r mine o te ountains, er st e n it f d et, rock d a

alanche pe t-a- lin lc arkl ippe v o o re, fl A rock ty P cy V fi cone Handheld sp D

pe ick y in r st T et ta n u

Rock Mine Fo Sparkle Bengal

54 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

72

Bilaga 1

Chapter 2.1 – Class 1 – Explosives

G G G G G G G G G G 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 4 1G 3 4 sification 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. s

Cla

l l , , n p e e r, ts d r, ts d g o 5 g 5 g o 5 g e o e r ev c n ev c io n p s ≤ s ≤ h h e e it in u t n , n 2 , n 5 g e o ri ff 0 g e a ri ff s d d 6 m u 20 g, n a n 20 g, n a n e ≤ r w e ≤ r w c c 0 g o n n 0 g ta s a in u > io ≤ io c ) e c ) e n r d 5 n r d p n p , b io it io it n y n y e rt e ≤ e rt e 1 pe m 1 o a ta e m it s m it s n n ta o ta o ≤ y o m m a m a ≤ n p to 1 n c s o s o ta n p ta n p s e p p d s e p p t te te te r y c o n te o p te o p s io s io b c e n el b c e d el a ; s p p b if a it b if a it u n u n n h c r i r i r i te in u phosphorus y c ta r i m m r i m m u s u s s r s r ork ion s e e g e g o a d a s e o e o e ( o e ( o ta ta w a in in s m ta e b p o p o tl p tl p ic s s n a 5 g a r whe ic s s n a r whe g g in n /r u e e c e e c ic s is ic s is n b 2 n b 5 g a f fl n p n p n p p o e s m c h c tl c h c tl n h m n h m h u io h u io fire r io io ak io ak m ification a lm n s is n s is h o h o c it ≤ pe c it ≤ pe sificat e it it c it c e c n u le ic s a h a h c c te s ) te s ) s g o s s a s a e r f y ca ic n ta ta h w e c h w e c ic s o y ion ic s o y ion wd o o o p d s e rt h s s te c tl te c tl ro n p n ro n p n o p p p r it n c ion b % fl r w b % fl r w ro a ro a h h rdous cla 0 m r p r p S ilv r a te u u is is c m if a c m if a a 4 m m e m e rs m chlorat e 3 , o 3 , o h h l py o l py o z 1 k p o o n o n r pe s a f s e ro ≤ ts ≤ ts l py t, e l py t, e te e ( te e ( the c n n e n p th ic s c ic s c c c ta ro h c tl ta ro h c tl s ≤ la r i r i d p ium n e n e ta e ta e s is s is ha h cs h cs e h cs e w ow g o o s ; o f py h ff h ff ff 0 g w ff 0 g w a h a h be a a a c c to 5 to 1 composit composit ine u wd tas re composit te ining te ining g rt e g rt e 0 g to le 0 g to le t po .6 m y p tu a rt e a rt e o ≤ o ≤ 0 g py % fl h w 0 g py % fl h w most rm 1 g b 0 g p 0 g p ro rt ro nt o ro nt o c c e e ≤ h a f po ix y o p y o p 1 k p 1 k p 20 6 3 a 20 6 3 a h 2 g fl 2 g fl 1 1 g fl 1

T to 1 p o m to 5 g o flash P c re P c re ≥ re and < re and > > ≤ e whist ≤ ≤ ≤ e whist T det Each or > ≤ ≤ ≤ ≤ black

d o n t a n d ic le e a /or e n ib c d f the h o d r ucing n t c n fix c t u a t i o te d /o d a - a r a d ro h ro de n me one n /o -p o t being o e d ic a rk subst fla s t t n n rt s -, c int h o be e c u ff le a spa -producing chnic p rks t d by a py ib te d e p e l e is ro - or e u ponding k ra osition s h rot spa the s in u c y d s, ) l d v f py ga noise a p n re n a mp ite tt a rd o t to a s s a c im ts o cor le o e a rt l n ining ils a ining g i b b c o u a a in rge ch a u ry o without fo h a rd d p m nt ro nt c e a ro re Definition o or e o a cha substance is t e ve c c tt pe h r c c ll a s t a nt y u a e u rs f a t n t r o ining d m , with o e lla chnic e d to p a h iv s o e e d i p e ct ro s s tub it n one te a d nt dr a rop rot is p n o fe in or r w e y s ( te c ta e p p s l e n e ef d to p n h o than rk b e o it u e i n tub h a m ining ring b tub ig h c substance it a f t u aural s substance llic , w including ng rewo llic e ic e a e nt ti f more ly o h t a an h c d w o o f fi c d chnic n e c b a e t w ta mbly e s -producing m ic c -met te s e id e s o e , e -met v e plosiv ro b s e s e e ff x y u s rov ub suppor pack p s s

D e e Non p s A p rotat T noise a A ty A fu Non produce

g rs tion w e c l, lin p ground k p r, n rol r : c , glo o e w e m ra s s sele ion y e y p ro y indoor , c rt c x, rack s a cha c non n r, n nt y , snak , p e o displa bo S ow g s x ising o p a , r x, tme , celebrat lady : / wd f a s tion r, n icopt S O bo c sor er ro s, , s ls, s h e e nge ts hel tion sele a , t n r, , UF c n x; ba s e n crack er Includes b whe o sh m , smok rp x rde bo ion o s e a sele spinne r rine S y crack , fla , s ga tion te le b c ng b rm rial ri lu a e ispla a T granule wo A spinne Cathe Flying D pack, sele Celebrat st S

d l n e pe rd a pack er y az s s T rk ie r r lt ls l whe tion ha e c crack w e ria e nge rewo ove h ir

Lo fi n Spinne W Ae Sele F Ba

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 55

73

Bilaga 1

Chapter 2.2

Class 2 – Gases

2.2.0 Introductory note

“Toxic” has the same meaning as “poisonous”.

2.2.1 Definitions and general provisions

2.2.1.1 A gas is a substance which: .1 at 50°C has a vapour pressure greater than 300 kPa; or .2 is completely gaseous at 20°C at a standard pressure of 101.3 kPa. 2.2.1.2 The transport condition of a gas is described according to its physical state as: .1 Compressed gas: a gas which when packaged under pressure for transport is entirely gaseous at –50°C; this category includes all gases with a critical temperature less than or equal to –50°C; .2 Liquefied gas: a gas which when packaged under pressure for transport is partially liquid at temperatures above –50 °C. A distinction is made between: high pressure liquefied gas: a gas with a critical temperature between –50°C and +65°C, and low pressure liquefied gas: a gas with a critical temperature above +65°C; .3 Refrigerated liquefied gas: a gas which when packaged for transport is made partially liquid because of its low temperature; or .4 Dissolved gas: a gas which when packaged under pressure for transport is dissolved in a liquid phase solvent. 2.2.1.3 The class comprises compressed gases, liquefied gases, dissolved gases, refrigerated liquefied gases, mixtures of one or more gases with one or more vapours of substances of other classes, articles charged with a gas and aerosols. 2.2.1.4 Gases are normally transported under pressure varying from high pressure in the case of compressed gases to low pressure in the case of refrigerated gases. 2.2.1.5 According to their chemical properties or physiological effects, which may vary widely, gases may be: flammable; non-flammable; non-toxic; toxic; supporters of combustion; corrosive; or may possess two or more of these properties simultaneously. 2.2.1.5.1 Some gases are chemically and physiologically inert. Such gases as well as other gases, normally accepted as non-toxic, will nevertheless be suffocating in high concentrations. 2.2.1.5.2 Many gases of this class have narcotic effects which may occur at comparatively low concentrations or may evolve highly toxic gases when involved in a fire. 2.2.1.5.3 All gases which are heavier than air will present a potential danger if allowed to accumulate in the bottom of cargo spaces.

2.2.2 Class subdivisions

Class 2 is subdivided further according to the primary hazard of the gas during transport: Note: For UN 1950 AEROSOLS, see also the criteria in special provision 63 and for UN 2037 RECEPTACLES, SMALL, CONTAINING GAS (GAS CARTRIDGES) see also special provision 303.

2.2.2.1 Class 2.1 Flammable gases

Gases which at 20°C and a standard pressure of 101.3 kPa: .1 are ignitable when in a mixture of 13% or less by volume with air; or

56 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

74

Bilaga 1

Chapter 2.2 – Class 2 – Gases

.2 have a flammable range with air of at least 12 percentage points regardless of the lower flammable limit. Flammability shall be determined by tests or calculation in accordance with methods adopted by the International Organization for Standardization (see ISO 10156:2010). Where insufficient data are available to use these methods, tests by a comparable method recognized by a national competent authority may be used.

2.2.2.2 Class 2.2 Non-flammable, non-toxic gases

Gases which: .1 are asphyxiant – gases which dilute or replace the oxygen normally in the atmosphere; or .2 are oxidizing – gases which may, generally by providing oxygen, cause or contribute to the combustion of other material more than air does; or .3 do not come under the other classes. Note: In 2.2.2.2.2, “gases which cause or contribute to the combustion of other material more than air does” means pure gases or gas mixtures with an oxidizing power greater than 23.5% as determined by a method specified in ISO 10156:2010.

2.2.2.3 Class 2.3 Toxic gases

Gases which: .1 are known to be so toxic or corrosive to humans as to pose a hazard to health; or .2 are presumed to be toxic or corrosive to humans because they have a LC50 value (as defined in 2.6.2.1) 3 equal to or less than 5,000 mℓ/m (ppm). Note: Gases meeting the above criteria owing to their corrosivity are to be classified as toxic with a subsidiary corrosive risk. 2.2.2.4 Gases and gas mixtures with hazards associated with more than one division take the following precedence: .1 class 2.3 takes precedence over all other classes; .2 class 2.1 takes precedence over class 2.2. 2.2.2.5 Gases of class 2.2 are not subject to the provisions of this Code if they are transported at a pressure of less than 200 kPa at 20°C and are not liquefied or refrigerated liquefied gases. 2.2.2.6 Gases of class 2.2 are not subject to the provisions of this Code when contained in the following: .1 Foodstuffs (except UN 1950), including carbonated beverages; .2 Balls intended for use in sports; .3 Tyres (except for air transport); or .4 Light bulbs provided they are packaged so that the projectile effects of any rupture of the bulb will be contained within the package.

2.2.3 Mixtures of gases

For the classification of gas mixtures (including vapours of substances from other classes), the following principles shall be used: .1 Flammability shall be determined by tests or calculation in accordance with methods adopted by the International Organization for Standardization (see ISO Standard 10156:2010). Where insufficient data are available to use these methods, tests by a comparable method recognized by a national competent authority may be used. .2 The level of toxicity is determined either by tests to measure the LC50 value (as defined in 2.6.2.1) or by a calculation method using the following formula: 1 LC50 Toxic (mixture) = _____ n fi

∑ __

Ti i=1 th where: fi = mole fraction of the i component substance of the mixture; th Ti = toxicity index of the i component substance of the mixture (the Ti equals the LC50 value when available). When LC50 values are unknown, the toxicity index is determined by using the lowest LC50 value of substances of similar physiological and chemical effects, or through testing if this is the only practical possibility.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 57

75

Bilaga 1

Part 2 – Classification

.3 A gas mixture has a subsidiary risk of corrosivity when the mixture is known by human experience to be destructive to the skin, eyes or mucous membranes or when the LC50 value of the corrosive components 3 of the mixture is equal to or less than 5,000 mℓ/m (ppm) when the LC50 is calculated by the formula: LC Corrosive (mixture) = 1 50 _____ n fci

∑ __

Tci i=1 th where: fci = mole fraction of the i corrosive component substance of the mixture; th Tci = toxicity index of the i corrosive component substance of the mixture (the Tci equals the LC50 value when available). .4 Oxidizing ability is determined either by tests or by calculation methods adopted by the International Organization for Standardization (see note in 2.2.2.2).

58 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

76

Bilaga 1

Chapter 2.3

Class 3 – Flammable liquids

2.3.0 Introductory note

The flashpoint of a flammable liquid may be altered by the presence of an impurity. The substances listed in class 3 in the Dangerous Goods List in chapter 3.2 shall generally be regarded as chemically pure. Since commercial products may contain added substances or impurities, flashpoints may vary, and this may have an effect on classification or determination of the packing group for the product. In the event of doubt regarding the classification or packing group of a substance, the flashpoint of the substance shall be determined experimentally.

2.3.1 Definitions and general provisions

2.3.1.1 Class 3 includes the following substances: .1 flammable liquids (see 2.3.1.2 and 2.3.1.3); .2 liquid desensitized explosives (see 2.3.1.4). 2.3.1.2 Flammable liquids are liquids, or mixtures of liquids, or liquids containing solids in solution or suspension (such as paints, varnishes, lacquers, etc., but not including substances which, on account of their other dangerous characteristics, have been included in other classes) which give off a flammable vapour at or below 60°C closed-cup test (corresponding to 65.6°C open-cup test), normally referred to as the “flashpoint”. This also includes: .1 liquids offered for transport at temperatures at or above their flashpoint; and .2 substances transported or offered for transport at elevated temperatures in a liquid state, which give off a flammable vapour at temperatures equal to or below the maximum transport temperature. 2.3.1.3 However, the provisions of this Code need not apply to such liquids with a flashpoint of more than 35°C which do not sustain combustion. Liquids are considered to be unable to sustain combustion for the purposes of the Code if: .1 they have passed the suitable combustibility test (see the Sustained Combustibility Test prescribed in part III, 32.5.2 of the United Nations Manual of Tests and Criteria); or .2 their fire point according to ISO 2592:1973 is greater than 100°C; or .3 they are water-miscible solutions with a water content of more than 90%, by mass. 2.3.1.4 Liquid desensitized explosives are explosive substances which are dissolved or suspended in water or other liquid substances, to form a homogeneous liquid mixture to suppress their explosive properties. Entries in the Dangerous Goods List for liquid desensitized explosives are UN 1204, UN 2059, UN 3064, UN 3343, UN 3357 and UN 3379.

2.3.2 Assignment of packing group

2.3.2.1 The criteria in 2.3.2.6 are used to determine the hazard grouping of a liquid that presents a risk due to flammability. 2.3.2.1.1 For liquids whose only risk is flammability, the packing group for the substance is the hazard grouping shown in 2.3.2.6. 2.3.2.1.2 For a liquid with additional risk(s), the hazard group determined from 2.3.2.6 and the hazard group based on the severity of the additional risk(s) shall be considered, and the classification and packing group determined in accordance with the provisions in chapter 2.0.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 59

77

Bilaga 1

Part 2 – Classification

2.3.2.2 Viscous substances such as paints, enamels, lacquers, varnishes, adhesives and polishes having a flashpoint of less than 23°C may be placed in packing group III in conformity with the procedures prescribed in part III, chapter 32.3, of the United Nations Manual of Tests and Criteria on the basis of: .1 the viscosity, expressed as the flowtime in seconds; .2 the closed-cup flashpoint; .3 a solvent separation test. 2.3.2.3 Viscous flammable liquids such as paints, enamels, varnishes, adhesives and polishes with a flashpoint of less than 23°C are included in packing group III provided that: .1 less than 3% of the clear solvent layer separates in the solvent separation test; .2 the mixture or any separated solvent does not meet the criteria for class 6.1or class 8. .3 the viscosity and flashpoint are in accordance with the following table: Flow time t in seconds Jet diameter in mm Flashpoint in °C c.c. 20 <t ≤ 60 4 above 17 60 <t ≤ 100 4 above 10 20 < t≤ 32 6 above 5 32 <t ≤ 44 6 above –1 44 <t ≤ 100 6 above –5 100 <t 6 –5 and below

.4 the capacity of the receptacle used does not exceed 30 ℓ. 2.3.2.4 Substances classified as flammable liquids due to their being transported or offered for transport at elevated temperatures are included in packing group III. 2.3.2.5 Viscous substances which: – have a flashpoint of 23°C or above and less than or equal to 60°C; – are not toxic, corrosive or environmentally hazardous; – contain not more than 20% nitrocellulose, provided the nitrocellulose contains not more than 12.6% nitrogen by dry mass; and – are packed in receptacles not exceeding 30 ℓ capacity are not subject to the provisions for the marking, labelling and testing of packages in chapters 4.1, 5.2 and 6.1, if: .1 in the solvent separation test (see part III, 32.5.1 of the United Nations Manual of Tests and Criteria) the height of the separated layer of solvent is less than 3% of the total height; and .2 the flowtime in the viscosity test (see part III, 32.4.3 of the United Nations Manual of Tests and Criteria) with a jet diameter of 6 mm is equal to or greater than: .1 60 s; or .2 40 s if the viscous substance contains not more than 60% of class 3 substances. The following statement shall be included in the transport document: “Transport in accordance with 2.3.2.5 of the IMDG Code.” (see 5.4.1.5.10).

2.3.2.6 Hazard grouping based on flammability

Flammable liquids are grouped for packing purposes according to their flashpoint, their boiling point, and their viscosity. This table shows the relationship between two of these characteristics. Packing group Flashpoint in °C closed cup (c.c.) Initial boiling point in °C I – ≤ 35 II < 23 > 35 III ≥ 23 to ≤ 60 > 35

60 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

78

Bilaga 1

Chapter 2.3 – Class 3 – Flammable liquids

2.3.3 Determination of flashpoint

Note: The provisions of this section are not mandatory. 2.3.3.1 The flashpoint of a flammable liquid is the lowest temperature of the liquid at which its vapour forms an ignitable mixture with air. It gives a measure of the risk of formation of explosive or ignitable mixtures when the liquid escapes from its packing. A flammable liquid cannot be ignited so long as its temperature remains below the flashpoint. Note: Do not confuse the flashpoint with the ignition temperature, which is the temperature to which an explosive vapour–air mixture must be heated to cause actual explosion. There is no relationship between the flashpoint and the ignition temperature. 2.3.3.2 The flashpoint is not an exact physical constant for a given liquid. It depends to some extent on the construction of the test apparatus used and on the testing procedure. Therefore, when providing flashpoint data, specify the name of the test apparatus. 2.3.3.3 Several standard apparatuses are in current use. They all operate on the same principle: a specified quantity of the liquid is introduced into a receptacle at a temperature well below the flashpoint to be expected, then slowly heated; periodically, a small flame is brought near to the surface of the liquid. The flashpoint is the lowest temperature at which a “flash” is observed. 2.3.3.4 The test methods can be divided into two groups, depending on the use in an apparatus of an open receptacle (open-cup methods) or a closed one which is only opened to admit the flame (closed-cup methods). As a rule, the flashpoints found in an open-cup test are a few degrees higher than in a closed-cup test. 2.3.3.5 In general, reproducibility in closed-cup apparatus is better than in open-cup. 2.3.3.5.1 It is therefore recommended that flashpoints, especially in the range around 23°C, shall be determined by means of closed-cup (c.c) methods. 2.3.3.5.2 Flashpoint data in this Code are generally based on closed-cup methods. In countries where it is customary to determine flashpoints by the open-cup method, the temperatures given by that method would need to be reduced to correspond with those in this Code.

2.3.3.6 Determination of flashpoint

The following methods for determining the flashpoint of flammable liquids may be used:

International standards:

ISO 1516 ISO 1523 ISO 2719 ISO 13736 ISO 3679 ISO 3680

National standards:

American Society for Testing Materials International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, Pennsylvania, USA 19428-2959: ASTM D3828-07a, Standard Test Methods for Flash Point by Small Scale Closed Cup Tester ASTM D56-05, Standard Test Method for Flash Point by Tag Closed Cup Tester ASTM D3278-96(2004)e, Standard Test Methods for Flash Point of Liquids by Small Scale Closed-Cup Apparatus ASTM D93-08, Standard Test Methods for Flash Point by Pensky-Martens Closed Cup Tester. Association française de normalisation, AFNOR, 11, rue de Pressensé, 93571 La Plaine Saint-Denis Cedex: French Standard NF M 07-019 French Standards NF M 07-011/NF T 30-050/NF T 66-009 French Standard NF M 07-036 Deutsches Institut für Normung, Burggrafenstr. 6, D-10787 Berlin: Standard DIN 51755 (flashpoints below 65°C) State Committee of the Council of Ministers for Standardization, 113813, GSP, Moscow, M-49 Leninsky Prospect, 9: GOST 12.1.044-84

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 61

79

Bilaga 1

Part 2 – Classification

2.3.4 Determination of initial boiling point

The following methods for determining the initial boiling point of flammable liquids may be used:

International standards:

ISO 3924 ISO 4626 ISO 3405

National standards:

American Society for Testing Materials International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, Pennsylvania, USA 19428-2959: ASTM D86-07a, Standard Test Method for Distillation of Petroleum Products at Atmospheric Pressure ASTM D1078-05, Standard Test Method for Distillation Range of Volatile Organic Liquids

Further acceptable methods:

Method A.2 as described in Part A of the Annex to Commission Regulation (EC) No 440/2008.*

* Commission Regulation (EC) No 440/2008 of 30 May 2008 laying down test methods pursuant to Regulation (EC) No 1907/2006 of the European Parliament and of the Council on the Registration, Evaluation, Authorisation and Restriction of Chemicals (REACH) (Official Journal of the European Union, No L 142 of 31.05.2008, pages 1–739 and No L 143 of 03.06.2008, page 55).

62 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

80

Bilaga 1

Chapter 2.4

Class 4 – Flammable solids; substances liable to spontaneous combustion; substances which, in contact with water, emit flammable gases

2.4.0 Introductory note

Since organometallic substances can be classified in classes 4.2 or 4.3 with additional subsidiary risks, depending on their properties, a specific classification flowchart for these substances is given in 2.4.5.

2.4.1 Definition and general provisions

2.4.1.1 In this Code, class 4 deals with substances, other than those classified as explosives, which, under conditions of transport, are readily combustible or may cause or contribute to a fire. Class 4 is subdivided as follows: Class 4.1 – Flammable solids Solids which, under conditions encountered in transport, are readily combustible or may cause or contribute to fire through friction; self-reactive substances (solids and liquids) which are liable to undergo a strongly exothermic reaction; solid desensitized explosives which may explode if not diluted sufficiently; Class 4.2 – Substances liable to spontaneous combustion Substances (solids and liquids) which are liable to spontaneous heating under normal conditions encountered in transport, or to heating up in contact with air, and being then liable to catch fire; Class 4.3 – Substances which, in contact with water, emit flammable gases Substances (solids and liquids) which, by interaction with water, are liable to become spontaneously flammable or to give off flammable gases in dangerous quantities. 2.4.1.2 As referenced in this chapter, test methods and criteria, with advice on application of the tests, are given in the United Nations Manual of Tests and Criteria for the classification of following types of substances of class 4: .1 flammable solids (class 4.1); .2 self-reactive substances (class 4.1); .3 pyrophoric solids (class 4.2); .4 pyrophoric liquids (class 4.2); .5 self-heating substances (class 4.2); and .6 substances which, in contact with water, emit flammable gases (class 4.3). Test methods and criteria for self-reactive substances are given in part II of the United Nations Manual of Tests and Criteria, and test methods and criteria for the other types of substances of class 4 are given in the United Nations Manual of Tests and Criteria, part III, chapter 33.

2.4.2 Class 4.1 – Flammable solids, self-reactive substances and solid desensitized explosives

2.4.2.1 General

Class 4.1 includes the following types of substances: .1 flammable solids (see 2.4.2.2);

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 63

81

Bilaga 1

Part 2 – Classification

.2 self-reactive substances (see 2.4.2.3); and .3 solid desensitized explosives (see 2.4.2.4). Some substances (such as celluloid) may evolve toxic and flammable gases when heated or if involved in a fire.

2.4.2.2 Class 4.1 Flammable solids

2.4.2.2.1 Definitions and properties

2.4.2.2.1.1 For the purpose of this Code, flammable solids means readily combustible solids and solids which may cause fire through friction. 2.4.2.2.1.2 Readily combustible solids means fibres, powdered, granular, or pasty substances which are dangerous if they can be easily ignited by brief contact with an ignition source such as a burning match, and if the flame spreads rapidly. The danger may come not only from the fire but also from toxic combustion products. Metal powders are especially dangerous because of the difficulty of extinguishing a fire, since normal extinguishing agents such as carbon dioxide or water can increase the hazard.

2.4.2.2.2 Classification of flammable solids

2.4.2.2.2.1 Powdered, granular or pasty substances shall be classified as readily combustible solids of class 4.1 when the time of burning of one or more of the test runs, performed in accordance with the test method described in the United Nations Manual of Tests and Criteria, part III, 33.2.1, is less than 45 s or the rate of burning is more than 2.2 mm/s. Powders of metals or metal alloys shall be classified in class 4.1 when they can be ignited and the reaction spreads over the whole length of the sample in 10 minutes or less. 2.4.2.2.2.2 Solids which may cause fire through friction shall be classified in class 4.1 by analogy with existing entries (such as matches) until definitive criteria are established.

2.4.2.2.3 Assignment of packing groups

2.4.2.2.3.1 Packing groups are assigned on the basis of the test methods referred to in 2.4.2.2.2.1. For readily combustible solids (other than metal powders), packing group II shall be assigned if the burning time is less than 45 s and the flame passes the wetted zone. Packing group II shall be assigned to powders of metal or metal alloys if the zone of reaction spreads over the whole length of the sample in five minutes or less. 2.4.2.2.3.2 Packing groups are assigned on the basis of the test methods referred to in 2.4.2.2.2.1. For readily combustible solids (other than metal powders), packing group III shall be assigned if the burning time is less than 45 s and the wetted zone stops the flame propagation for at least four minutes. Packing group III shall be assigned to metal powders if the reaction spreads over the whole length of the sample in more than five minutes but not more than ten minutes. 2.4.2.2.3.3 For solids which may cause fire through friction, the packing group shall be assigned by analogy with existing entries or in accordance with any appropriate special provision. 2.4.2.2.4 Pyrophoric metal powders, if wetted with sufficient water to suppress their pyrophoric properties, may be classified as class 4.1.

2.4.2.3 Class 4.1 Self-reactive substances

2.4.2.3.1 Definitions and properties

2.4.2.3.1.1 For the purposes of this Code: Self-reactive substances are thermally unstable substances liable to undergo a strongly exothermic decomposition even without participation of oxygen (air). Substances are not considered to be self-reactive substances of class 4.1, if: .1 they are explosives according to the criteria of class 1; .2 they are oxidizing substances according to the classification procedure for class 5.1 (see 2.5.2) except that mixtures of oxidizing substances which contain 5.0% or more of combustible organic substances shall be subjected to the classification procedure defined in Note 3; .3 they are organic peroxides according to the criteria of class 5.2; .4 their heat of decomposition is less than 300 J/g; or .5 their self-accelerating decomposition temperature (SADT) (see 2.4.2.3.4) is greater than 75°C for a 50 kg package.

64 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

82

Bilaga 1

Chapter 2.4 – Class 4 – Flammable solids

Note 1: The heat of decomposition may be determined using any internationally recognized method such as differential scanning calorimetry and adiabatic calorimetry. Note 2: Any substance which shows the properties of a self-reactive substance shall be classified as such, even if this substance gives a positive test result according to 2.4.3.2 for inclusion in class 4.2.

Note 3: Mixtures of oxidizing substances meeting the criteria of class 5.1 which contain 5.0% or more of combustible organic substances, which do not meet the criteria mentioned in .1, .3, .4 or .5 above, shall be subjected to the self-reactive substance classification procedure. A mixture showing the properties of a self-reactive substance, type B to F, shall be classified as a self-reactive substance of class 4.1.

A mixture showing the properties of a self-reactive substance, type G, according to the principle of 2.4.2.3.3.2.7 shall be considered for classification as a substance of class 5.1 (see 2.5.2).

2.4.2.3.1.2 The decomposition of self-reactive substances can be initiated by heat, contact with catalytic impurities (such as acids, heavy-metal compounds, bases), friction or impact. The rate of decomposition increases with temperature and varies with the substance. Decomposition, particularly if no ignition occurs, may result in the evolution of toxic gases or vapours. For certain self-reactive substances, the temperature shall be controlled. Some self-reactive substances may decompose explosively, particularly if confined. This characteristic may be modified by the addition of diluents or by the use of appropriate packagings. Some self-reactive substances burn vigorously. Self-reactive substances are, for example, some compounds of the types listed below: .1 aliphatic azo compounds (–C–N=N–C–); .2 organic azides (–C–N3); + - .3 diazonium salts (–C N 2 Z ); .4 N-nitroso compounds (–N–N=O); and .5 aromatic sulphohydrazides (–SO2–NH–NH2).

This list is not exhaustive and substances with other reactive groups and some mixtures of substances may have similar properties.

2.4.2.3.2 Classification of self-reactive substances

2.4.2.3.2.1 Self-reactive substances are classified into seven types according to the degree of danger they present. The types of self-reactive substance range from type A, which may not be accepted for transport in the packaging in which it is tested, to type G, which is not subject to the provisions for self-reactive substances of class 4.1. The classification of types B to F is directly related to the maximum quantity allowed in one packaging.

2.4.2.3.2.2 Self-reactive substances permitted for transport in packagings are listed in 2.4.2.3.2.3, those permitted for transport in IBCs are listed in packing instruction IBC520 and those permitted for transport in portable tanks are listed in portable tank instruction T23. For each permitted substance listed, the appropriate generic entry of the Dangerous Goods List (UN 3221 to UN 3240) is assigned, and appropriate subsidiary risks and remarks providing relevant transport information are given. The generic entries specify: .1 self-reactive substance type (B to F); .2 physical state (liquid or solid); and .3 temperature control, when required (2.4.2.3.4).

2.4.2.3.2.3 List of currently assigned self-reactive substances in packagings

In the column “Packing Method” codes “OP1” to “OP8” refer to packing methods in packing instruction P520. Self-reactive substances to be transported shall fulfill the classification and the control and emergency temperatures (derived from the SADT) as listed. For substances permitted in IBCs, see packing instruction IBC520, and for those permitted in tanks, see portable tank instruction T23. Note: The classification given in this table is based on the technically pure substance (except where a concentration of less than 100% is specified). For other concentrations, the substances may be classified differently following the procedures in 2.4.2.3.3 and 2.4.2.3.4.

UN Concen- Control Emergency Packing generic SELF-REACTIVE SUBSTANCE tration temper- temper- Remarks method entry (%) ature (°C) ature (°C) 3222 2-DIAZO-1-NAPHTHOL-4-SULPHONYL CHLORIDE 100 OP5 (2) 2-DIAZO-1-NAPHTHOL-5-SULPHONYL CHLORIDE 100 OP5 (2) 3223 SELF-REACTIVE LIQUID, SAMPLE OP2 (8)

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 65

83

Bilaga 1

Part 2 – Classification

UN Concen- Control Emergency Packing generic SELF-REACTIVE SUBSTANCE tration temper- temper- Remarks method entry (%) ature (°C) ature (°C) 3224 AZODICARBONAMIDE FORMULATION TYPE C < 100 OP6 (3) 2,2′-AZODI(ISOBUTYRONITRILE) as a ≤ 50 OP6 water-based paste N,N′-DINITROSO-N,N′-DIMETHYL- 72 OP6 TEREPHTHALAMIDE, as a paste N,N′-DINITROSOPENTAMETHYLENETETRAMINE 82 OP6 (7) SELF-REACTIVE SOLID, SAMPLE OP2 (8) 3226 AZODICARBONAMIDE FORMULATION TYPE D < 100 OP7 (5) 1,1′-AZODI(HEXAHYDROBENZONITRILE) 100 OP7 BENZENE-1,3-DISULPHONYL HYDRAZIDE 52 OP7 as a paste BENZENESULPHONYL HYDRAZIDE 100 OP7 4-(BENZYL(ETHYL)AMINO)-3-ETHOXY- 100 OP7 BENZENEDIAZONIUM ZINC CHLORIDE 3-CHLORO-4-DIETHYLAMINOBENZENE- 100 OP7 DIAZONIUM ZINC CHLORIDE 2-DIAZO-1-NAPHTHOLSULPHONIC ACID ESTER < 100 OP7 (9) MIXTURE TYPE D 2,5-DIETHOXY-4-(4-MORPHOLINYL)- 100 OP7 BENZENEDIAZONIUM SULPHATE DIPHENYLOXIDE-4,4′-DISULPHONYL HYDRAZIDE 100 OP7 4-DIPROPYLAMINOBENZENEDIAZONIUM ZINC 100 OP7 CHLORIDE 4-METHYLBENZENESULPHONYLHYDRAZIDE 100 OP7 SODIUM 2-DIAZO-1-NAPHTHOL-4-SULPHONATE 100 OP7 SODIUM 2-DIAZO-1-NAPHTHOL-5-SULPHONATE 100 OP7 3228 ACETONE–PYROGALLOL COPOLYMER 100 OP8 2-DIAZO-1-NAPHTHOL-5-SULPHONATE 4-(DIMETHYLAMINO)BENZENEDIAZONIUM 100 OP8 TRICHLOROZINCATE(–1) 2,5-DIBUTOXY-4-(4-MORPHOLINYL)- 100 OP8 BENZENEDIAZONIUM TETRACHLOROZINCATE(2:1) 3232 AZODICARBONAMIDE FORMULATION < 100 OP5 (1) (2) TYPE B, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED 3233 SELF-REACTIVE LIQUID, SAMPLE, TEMPERATURE OP2 (8) CONTROLLED 3234 AZODICARBONAMIDE FORMULATION < 100 OP6 (4) TYPE C, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED 2,2′-AZODI(ISOBUTYRONITRILE) 100 OP6 +40 +45 3-METHYL-4-(PYRROLIDIN-1-YL)BENZENE- 95 OP6 +45 +50 DIAZONIUM TETRAFLUOROBORATE SELF-REACTIVE SOLID, SAMPLE, OP2 (8) TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED TETRAMINEPALLADIUM(II) NITRATE 100 OP6 +30 +35 3235 2,2′-AZODI(ETHYL-2-METHYLPROPIONATE) 100 OP7 +20 +25

66 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

84

Bilaga 1

Chapter 2.4 – Class 4 – Flammable solids

UN Concen- Control Emergency Packing generic SELF-REACTIVE SUBSTANCE tration temper- temper- Remarks method entry (%) ature (°C) ature (°C) 3236 AZODICARBONAMIDE FORMULATION < 100 OP7 (6) TYPE D, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED 2,2′-AZODI(2,4-DIMETHYL-4-METHOXY- 100 OP7 –5 +5 VALERONITRILE) 2,2′-AZODI(2,4-DIMETHYLVALERONITRILE) 100 OP7 +10 +15 2,2′-AZODI(2-METHYLBUTYRONITRILE) 100 OP7 +35 +40 4-(BENZYL(METHYL)AMINO)-3-ETHOXY- 100 OP7 +40 +45 BENZENEDIAZONIUM ZINC CHLORIDE 2,5-DIETHOXY-4-MORPHOLINO- 67–100 OP7 +35 +40 BENZENEDIAZONIUM ZINC CHLORIDE 2,5-DIETHOXY-4-MORPHOLINO- 66 OP7 +40 +45 BENZENEDIAZONIUM ZINC CHLORIDE 2,5-DIETHOXY-4-MORPHOLINOBENZENE- 100 OP7 +30 +35 DIAZONIUM TETRAFLUOROBORATE 2,5-DIETHOXY-4-(PHENYLSULPHONYL)- 67 OP7 +40 +45 BENZENEDIAZONIUM ZINC CHLORIDE 2,5-DIMETHOXY-4-(4-METHYLPHENYL- 79 OP7 +40 +45 SULPHONYL)BENZENEDIAZONIUM ZINC CHLORIDE 4-DIMETHYLAMINO-6-(2-DIMETHYLAMINO- 100 OP7 +40 +45 ETHOXY)TOLUENE-2-DIAZONIUM ZINC CHLORIDE 2-(N,N-ETHOXYCARBONYLPHENYLAMINO)- 63–92 OP7 +40 +45 3-METHOXY-4-(N-METHYL-N- CYCLOHEXYLAMINO)- BENZENEDIAZONIUM ZINC CHLORIDE 2-(N,N-ETHOXYCARBONYLPHENYLAMINO)- 62 OP7 +35 +40 3-METHOXY-4-(N-METHYL-N- CYCLOHEXYLAMINO)- BENZENEDIAZONIUM ZINC CHLORIDE N-FORMYL-2-(NITROMETHYLENE)- 100 OP7 +45 +50 1,3-PERHYDROTHIAZINE 2-(2-HYDROXYETHOXY)-1-(PYRROLIDIN-1-YL)- 100 OP7 +45 +50 BENZENE-4-DIAZONIUM ZINC CHLORIDE 3-(2-HYDROXYETHOXY)-4-(PYRROLIDIN-1-YL)- 100 OP7 +40 +45 BENZENEDIAZONIUM ZINC CHLORIDE 2-(N,N-METHYLAMINOETHYLCARBONYL)- 96 OP7 +45 +50 4-(3,4-DIMETHYLPHENYLSULPHONYL)- BENZENEDIAZONIUM HYDROGEN SULPHATE 4-NITROSOPHENOL 100 OP7 +35 +40 3237 DIETHYLENEGLYCOL BIS(ALLYLCARBONATE) + ≥ 88 + OP8 –10 0 DI-ISOPROPYL PEROXYDICARBONATE ≤ 12 Remarks (1) Azodicarbonamide formulations which fulfil the criteria of 2.4.2.3.3.2.2. The control and emergency temperatures shall be determined by the procedure given in 7.3.7.2. (2) “EXPLOSIVE” subsidiary risk label (Model No 1, see 5.2.2.2.2) required. (3) Azodicarbonamide formulations which fulfil the criteria of 2.4.2.3.3.2.3. (4) Azodicarbonamide formulations which fulfil the criteria of 2.4.2.3.3.2.3. The control and emergency temperatures shall be determined by the procedure given in 7.3.7.2. (5) Azodicarbonamide formulations which fulfil the criteria of 2.4.2.3.3.2.4. (6) Azodicarbonamide formulations which fulfil the criteria of 2.4.2.3.3.2.4. The control and emergency temperatures shall be determined by the procedure given in 7.3.7.2. (7) With a compatible diluent having a boiling point of not less than 150°C. (8) See 2.4.2.3.2.4.2. (9) This entry applies to mixtures of esters of 2-diazo-1-naphthol-4-sulphonic acid and 2-diazo-1-naphthol-5-sulphonic acid meeting the criteria of 2.4.2.3.3.2.4.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 67

85

Bilaga 1

Part 2 – Classification

2.4.2.3.2.4 Classification of self-reactive substances not listed in 2.4.2.3.2.3, packing instruction IBC520 or portable tank instruction T23 and assignment to a generic entry shall be made by the competent authority of the country of origin on the basis of a test report. Principles applying to the classification of such substances are provided in 2.4.2.3.3. The applicable classification procedures, test methods and criteria, and an example of a suitable test report, are given in the United Nations Manual of Tests and Criteria, part II. The statement of approval shall contain the classification and the relevant transport conditions.

.1 Activators, such as zinc compounds, may be added to some self-reactive substances to change their reactivity. Depending on both the type and the concentration of the activator, this may result in a decrease in thermal stability and a change in explosive properties. If either of these properties is altered, the new formulation shall be assessed in accordance with this classification procedure.

.2 Samples of self-reactive substances or formulations of self-reactive substances not listed in 2.4.2.3.2.3, for which a complete set of test results is not available and which are to be transported for further testing or evaluation, may be assigned to one of the appropriate entries for self-reactive substances type C provided the following conditions are met: .1 the available data indicate that the sample would be no more dangerous than self-reactive substances type B; .2 the sample is packaged in accordance with packing method OP2 (see applicable packing instruction) and the quantity per cargo transport unit is limited to 10 kg; and .3 the available data indicate that the control temperature, if any, is sufficiently low to prevent any dangerous decomposition and sufficiently high to prevent any dangerous phase separation.

2.4.2.3.3 Principles for classification of self-reactive substances

Note: This section refers only to those properties of self-reactive substances which are decisive for their classification. A flow chart, presenting the classification principles in the form of a graphically arranged scheme of questions concerning the decisive properties together with the possible answers, is given in Figure 2.4.1 in chapter 2.4 of the United Nations Recommendations on the Transport of Dangerous Goods. These properties shall be determined experimentally. Suitable test methods with pertinent evaluation criteria are given in the United Nations Manual of Tests and Criteria, part II.

2.4.2.3.3.1 A self-reactive substance is regarded as possessing explosive properties when, in laboratory testing, the formulation is liable to detonate, to deflagrate rapidly or to show a violent effect when heated under confinement.

2.4.2.3.3.2 The following principles apply to the classification of self-reactive substances not listed in 2.4.2.3.2.3:

.1 Any substance which can detonate or deflagrate rapidly, as packaged for transport, is prohibited from transport under the provisions for self-reactive substances of class 4.1 in that packaging (defined as SELF-REACTIVE SUBSTANCE TYPE A);

.2 Any substance possessing explosive properties and which, as packaged for transport, neither detonates nor deflagrates rapidly, but is liable to undergo a thermal explosion in that package, shall also bear an “EXPLOSIVE” subsidiary risk label (Model No. 1, see 5.2.2.2.2). Such a substance may be packaged in amounts of up to 25 kg unless the maximum quantity has to be limited to a lower amount to preclude detonation or rapid deflagration in the package (defined as SELF-REACTIVE SUBSTANCE TYPE B);

.3 Any substance possessing explosive properties may be transported without an “EXPLOSIVE” subsidiary risk label when the substance as packaged (maximum 50 kg) for transport cannot detonate or deflagrate rapidly or undergo a thermal explosion (defined as SELF-REACTIVE SUBSTANCE TYPE C);

.4 Any substance which, in laboratory testing: .1 detonates partially, does not deflagrate rapidly and shows no violent effect when heated under confinement; or .2 does not detonate at all, deflagrates slowly and shows no violent effect when heated under confinement; or .3 does not detonate or deflagrate at all and shows a medium effect when heated under confinement

may be accepted for transport in packages of not more than 50 kg net mass (defined as SELF-REACTIVE SUBSTANCE TYPE D);

.5 Any substance which, in laboratory testing, neither detonates nor deflagrates at all and shows low or no effect when heated under confinement may be accepted for transport in packages of not more than 400 kg/450 ℓ (defined as SELF-REACTIVE SUBSTANCE TYPE E);

68 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

86

Bilaga 1

Chapter 2.4 – Class 4 – Flammable solids

.6 Any substance which, in laboratory testing, neither detonates in the cavitated state nor deflagrates at all and shows only a low or no effect when heated under confinement as well as low or no explosive power may be considered for transport in IBCs (defined as SELF-REACTIVE SUBSTANCE TYPE F); (for additional provisions see 4.1.7.2.2);

.7 Any substance which, in laboratory testing, neither detonates in the cavitated state nor deflagrates at all and shows no effect when heated under confinement nor any explosive power shall be exempted from classification as a self-reactive substance of class 4.1 provided that the formulation is thermally stable (self-accelerating decomposition temperature 60°C to 75°C for a 50 kg package) and any diluent meets the provisions of 2.4.2.3.5 (defined as SELF-REACTIVE SUBSTANCE TYPE G). If the formulation is not thermally stable or a compatible diluent having a boiling point less than 150°C is used for desensitization, the formulation shall be defined as SELF-REACTIVE LIQUID/SOLID TYPE F.

2.4.2.3.4 Temperature control provisions

2.4.2.3.4.1 Self-reactive substances are subject to temperature control in transport if their self-accelerating decomposition temperature (SADT) is less than or equal to 55°C. For currently assigned self-reactive substances, the control and emergency temperatures are shown in 2.4.2.3.2.3. Test methods for determining the SADT are given in the United Nations Manual of Tests and Criteria, part II, chapter 28. The test selected shall be conducted in a manner which is representative, both in size and material, of the package to be transported. The temperature control provisions are given in 7.3.7.

2.4.2.3.5 Desensitization of self-reactive substances

2.4.2.3.5.1 In order to ensure safety during transport, self-reactive substances may be desensitized through the use of a diluent. If a diluent is used, the self-reactive substance shall be tested with the diluent present in the concentration and form used in transport.

2.4.2.3.5.2 Diluents which may allow a self-reactive substance to concentrate to a dangerous extent in the event of leakage from a package shall not be used.

2.4.2.3.5.3 The diluent shall be compatible with the self-reactive substance. In this regard, compatible diluents are those solids or liquids which have no detrimental influence on the thermal stability and hazard type of the selfreactive substance.

2.4.2.3.5.4 Liquid diluents in liquid formulations requiring temperature control shall have a boiling point of at least 60°C and a flashpoint not less than 5°C. The boiling point of the liquid shall be at least 50°C higher than the control temperature of the self-reactive substance (see 7.3.7.2).

2.4.2.4 Class 4.1 Solid desensitized explosives

2.4.2.4.1 Definitions and properties

2.4.2.4.1.1 Solid desensitized explosives are explosive substances which are wetted with water or alcohols or are diluted with other substances to form a homogeneous solid mixture to suppress their explosive properties. The desensitizing agent shall be distributed uniformly throughout the substance in the state in which it is to be transported. Where transport under conditions of low temperature is anticipated for substances containing or wetted with water, a suitable and compatible solvent, such as alcohol, may have to be added to lower the freezing point of the liquid. Some of these substances, when in a dry state, are classified as explosives. Where reference is made to a substance which is wetted with water, or some other liquid, it shall be permitted for transport as a class 4.1 substance only when in the wetted condition specified. Entries in the Dangerous Goods List in chapter 3.2 for solid desensitized explosives are UN 1310, UN 1320, UN 1321, UN 1322, UN 1336, UN 1337, UN 1344, UN 1347, UN 1348, UN 1349, UN 1354, UN 1355, UN 1356, UN 1357, UN 1517, UN 1571, UN 2555, UN 2556, UN 2557, UN 2852, UN 2907, UN 3317, UN 3319, UN 3344, UN 3364, UN 3365, UN 3366, UN 3367, UN 3368, UN 3369, UN 3370, UN 3376, UN 3380 and UN 3474.

2.4.2.4.2 Substances that:

.1 have been provisionally accepted into class 1 according to Test Series 1 and 2 but exempted from class 1 by Test Series 6;

.2 are not self-reactive substances of class 4.1;

.3 are not substances of class 5

are also assigned to class 4.1. UN 2956, UN 3241, UN 3242 and UN 3251 are such entries.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 69

87

Bilaga 1

Part 2 – Classification

2.4.3 Class 4.2 – Substances liable to spontaneous combustion

2.4.3.1 Definitions and properties

2.4.3.1.1 Class 4.2 comprises: .1 Pyrophoric substances, which are substances, including mixtures and solutions (liquid or solid), which, even in small quantities, ignite within 5 minutes of coming into contact with air. These substances are the most liable to spontaneous combustion; and .2 Self-heating substances, which are substances, other than pyrophoric substances, which, in contact with air without energy supply, are liable to self-heating. These substances will ignite only when in large amounts (kilograms) and after long periods of time (hours or days). 2.4.3.1.2 Self-heating of a substance is a process where the gradual reaction of that substance with oxygen (in air) generates heat. If the rate of heat production exceeds the rate of heat loss, then the temperature of the substance will rise which, after an induction time, may lead to self-ignition and combustion. 2.4.3.1.3 Some substances may also give off toxic gases if involved in a fire.

2.4.3.2 Classification of class 4.2 substances

2.4.3.2.1 Solids are considered pyrophoric solids which shall be classified in class 4.2 if, in tests performed in accordance with the test method given in the United Nations Manual of Tests and Criteria, part III, 33.3.1.4, the sample ignites in one of the tests. 2.4.3.2.2 Liquids are considered pyrophoric liquids which shall be classified in class 4.2 if, in tests performed in accordance with the test method given in the United Nations Manual of Tests and Criteria, part III, 33.3.1.5, the liquid ignites in the first part of the test, or if it ignites or chars the filter paper.

2.4.3.2.3 Self-heating substances

2.4.3.2.3.1 A substance shall be classified as a self-heating substance of class 4.2 if, in tests performed in accordance with the test method given in the United Nations Manual of Tests and Criteria, part III, 33.3.1.6: .1 a positive result is obtained using a 25 mm cube sample at 140°C; .2 a positive result is obtained in a test using a 100 mm cube sample at 140°C and a negative result is obtained in a test using a 100 mm cube sample at 120°C and the substance is to be transported in 3 packages with a volume of more than 3 m ; .3 a positive result is obtained in a test using a 100 mm cube sample at 140°C and a negative result is obtained in a test using a 100 mm cube sample at 100°C and the substance is to be transported in packages with a volume of more than 450 ℓ; .4 a positive result is obtained in a test using a 100 mm cube sample at 140°C and a positive result is obtained using a 100 mm cube sample at 100°C. Note: Self-reactive substances, except for type G, giving also a positive result with this test method shall not be classified in class 4.2 but in class 4.1 (see 2.4.2.3.1.1). 2.4.3.2.3.2 A substance shall not be classified in class 4.2 if: .1 a negative result is obtained in a test using a 100 mm cube sample at 140°C; .2 a positive result is obtained in a test using a 100 mm cube sample at 140°C and a negative result is obtained in a test using a 25 mm cube sample at 140°C, a negative result is obtained in a test using a 100 mm cube sample at 120°C and the substance is to be transported in packages with a volume not 3 more than 3 m ; .3 a positive result is obtained in a test using a 100 mm cube sample at 140°C and a negative result is obtained in a test using a 25 mm cube sample at 140°C, a negative result is obtained in a test using a 100 mm cube sample at 100°C and the substance is to be transported in packages with a volume not more than 450 ℓ.

2.4.3.3 Assignment of packing groups

2.4.3.3.1 Packing group I shall be assigned to all pyrophoric solids and liquids. 2.4.3.3.2 Packing group II shall be assigned to self-heating substances which give a positive result in a test using a 25 mm cube sample at 140°C.

70 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

88

Bilaga 1

Chapter 2.4 – Class 4 – Flammable solids

2.4.3.3.3 Packing group III shall be assigned to self-heating substances if: .1 a positive result is obtained in a test using a 100 mm cube sample at 140°C and a negative result is obtained in a test using a 25 mm cube sample at 140°C and the substance is to be transported in 3 packages with a volume of more than 3 m ; .2 a positive result is obtained in a test using a 100 mm cube sample at 140°C and a negative result is obtained in a test using a 25 mm cube sample at 140°C, a positive result is obtained in a test using a 100 mm cube sample at 120°C and the substance is to be transported in packages with a volume of more than 450 ℓ; .3 a positive result is obtained in a test using a 100 mm cube sample at 140°C and a negative result is obtained in a test using a 25 mm cube sample at 140°C and a positive result is obtained in a test using a 100 mm cube sample at 100°C.

2.4.4 Class 4.3 – Substances which, in contact with water, emit flammable gases

2.4.4.1 Definitions and properties

2.4.4.1.1 For the purpose of this Code, the substances in this class are either liquids or solids which, by interaction with water, are liable to become spontaneously flammable or to give off flammable gases in dangerous quantities. 2.4.4.1.2 Certain substances, in contact with water, may emit flammable gases that can form explosive mixtures with air. Such mixtures are easily ignited by all ordinary sources of ignition, for example naked lights, sparking handtools or unprotected light bulbs. The resulting blast wave and flames may endanger people and the environment. The test method referred to in 2.4.4.2 is used to determine whether the reaction of a substance with water leads to the development of a dangerous amount of gases which may be flammable. This test method shall not be applied to pyrophoric substances.

2.4.4.2 Classification of class 4.3 substances

2.4.4.2.1 Substances which, in contact with water, emit flammable gases shall be classified in class 4.3 if, in tests performed in accordance with the test method given in the United Nations Manual of Tests and Criteria, part III, 33.4.1: .1 spontaneous ignition takes place in any step of the test procedure; or .2 there is an evolution of a flammable gas at a rate greater than 1 litre per kilogram of the substance per hour.

2.4.4.3 Assignment of packing groups

2.4.4.3.1 Packing group I shall be assigned to any substance which reacts vigorously with water at ambient temperatures and demonstrates generally a tendency for the gas produced to ignite spontaneously, or which reacts readily with water at ambient temperatures such that the rate of evolution of flammable gas is equal to or greater than 10 litres per kilogram of substance over any one minute. 2.4.4.3.2 Packing group II shall be assigned to any substance which reacts readily with water at ambient temperatures such that the maximum rate of evolution of flammable gas is equal to or greater than 20 litres per kilogram of substance per hour, and which does not meet the criteria for packing group I. 2.4.4.3.3 Packing group III shall be assigned to any substance which reacts slowly with water at ambient temperatures such that the maximum rate of evolution of flammable gas is equal to or greater than 1 litre per kilogram of substance per hour, and which does not meet the criteria for packing groups I or II.

2.4.5 Classification of organometallic substances

Depending on their properties, organometallic substances may be classified in classes 4.2 or 4.3, as appropriate, in accordance with the following flowchart:

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 71

89

Bilaga 1

Part 2 – Classification

1,2

Flowchart scheme for organometallic substances

Organometallic substance/formulation/ solution1 solid Organometallic substance, solid, pyrophoric UN 3391 No

Organometallic substance, liquid, pyrophoric Is the substance liquid UN 3392 Yes Is the substance pyrophoric? water-reactive? test N.2 (solid) test N.5 test N.3 (liquid) solid Organometallic substance, solid, pyrophoric, water-reactive UN 3393

No Yes Organometallic substance, liquid, pyrophoric, water-reactive liquid UN 3394

Organometallic substance, No solid, water-reactive UN 3395

Is the substance Organometallic substance, Yes a flammable solid? solid, water-reactive, flammable test N.1 UN 3396

No

Is the substance Organometallic substance, Yes self-heating? Yes solid, water-reactive, self-heating

test N.4 UN 3397

Is the substance Class 4.3, Organometallic substance, Yes PG I or II or III. No water-reactive? liquid, water-reactive test N.5 Is the substance UN 3398 a solid?

Does the substance Organometallic substance, No Yes contain a diluent with a liquid, water-reactive, flammable No flashpoint ≤ 60°C? UN 3399

Is the substance Organometallic substance, a self-heating solid? Yes solid, self-heating

test N.4 UN 3400

No

Substance does not have to be classified in class 4.2 or in class 4.3

1If applicable and testing is relevant, taking into account reactivity properties, class 6.1 and class 8 properties shall be considered according to the Precedence of hazards table 2.0.3.6.

2Test methods N.1 to N.5 can be found in the United Nations Manual of Tests and Criteria, part III, section 33.

72 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

90

Bilaga 1

Chapter 2.5

Class 5 – Oxidizing substances and organic peroxides

2.5.0 Introductory note

Note: Because of the differing properties exhibited by dangerous goods within classes 5.1 and 5.2, it is impracticable to establish a single criterion for classification in either class. Tests and criteria for assignment to the two classes are addressed in this chapter.

2.5.1 Definitions and general provisions

In this Code, class 5 is divided into two classes as follows: Class 5.1 – Oxidizing substances Substances which, while in themselves not necessarily combustible, may, generally by yielding oxygen, cause, or contribute to, the combustion of other material. Such substances may be contained in an article; Class 5.2 – Organic peroxides Organic substances which contain the bivalent –O–O– structure and may be considered derivatives of hydrogen peroxide, where one or both of the hydrogen atoms have been replaced by organic radicals. Organic peroxides are thermally unstable substances which may undergo exothermic self-accelerating decomposition. In addition, they may have one or more of the following properties: – be liable to explosive decomposition; – burn rapidly; – be sensitive to impact or friction; – react dangerously with other substances; – cause damage to the eyes.

2.5.2 Class 5.1 – Oxidizing substances

Note: For the classification of oxidizing substances to class 5.1, in the event of divergence between test results and known experience, judgement based on known experience shall take precedence over test results.

2.5.2.1 Properties

2.5.2.1.1 Substances of class 5.1 in certain circumstances directly or indirectly evolve oxygen. For this reason, oxidizing substances increase the risk and intensity of fire in combustible material with which they come into contact. 2.5.2.1.2 Mixtures of oxidizing substances with combustible material and even with material such as sugar, flour, edible oils, mineral oils, etc., are dangerous. These mixtures are readily ignited, in some cases by friction or impact. They may burn violently and may lead to explosion. 2.5.2.1.3 There will be a violent reaction between most oxidizing substances and liquid acids, evolving toxic gases. Toxic gases may also be evolved when certain oxidizing substances are involved in a fire. 2.5.2.1.4 The above-mentioned properties are, in general, common to all substances in this class. Additionally, some substances possess specific properties, which shall be taken into account in transport. These properties are shown in the Dangerous Goods List in chapter 3.2.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 73

91

Bilaga 1

Part 2 – Classification

2.5.2.2 Oxidizing solids

2.5.2.2.1 Classification of solid substances of class 5.1

2.5.2.2.1.1 Tests are performed to measure the potential for the solid substance to increase the burning rate or burning intensity of a combustible substance when the two are thoroughly mixed. The procedure is given in the United Nations Manual of Tests and Criteria, part III, 34.4.1. Tests are conducted on the substance to be evaluated mixed with dry fibrous cellulose in mixing ratios of 1:1 and 4:1, by mass, of sample to cellulose. The burning characteristics of the mixtures are compared with the standard 3:7 mixture, by mass, of potassium bromate to cellulose. If the burning time is equal to or less than this standard mixture, the burning times shall be compared with those from the packing group I or II reference standards, 3:2 and 2:3 ratios, by mass, of potassium bromate to cellulose respectively.

2.5.2.2.1.2 The classification test results are assessed on the basis of: .1 the comparison of the mean burning time with those of the reference mixtures; and .2 whether the mixture of substance and cellulose ignites and burns.

2.5.2.2.1.3 A solid substance is classified in class 5.1 if the 4:1 or 1:1 sample-to-cellulose ratio (by mass) tested exhibits a mean burning time equal to or less than the mean burning time of a 3:7 mixture (by mass) of potassium bromate and cellulose.

2.5.2.2.2 Assignment of packing groups

2.5.2.2.2.1 Solid oxidizing substances are assigned to a packing group according to the test procedure in the United Nations Manual of Tests and Criteria, part III, 34.4.1, in accordance with the following criteria: .1 Packing group I: any substance which, in the 4:1 or 1:1 sample-to-cellulose ratio (by mass) tested, exhibits a mean burning time less than the mean burning time of a 3:2 mixture (by mass) of potassium bromate and cellulose; .2 Packing group II: any substance which, in the 4:1 or 1:1 sample-to-cellulose ratio (by mass) tested, exhibits a mean burning time equal to or less than the mean burning time of a 2:3 mixture (by mass) of potassium bromate and cellulose and the criteria for packing group I are not met; .3 Packing group III: any substance which, in the 4:1 or 1:1 sample-to-cellulose ratio (by mass) tested, exhibits a mean burning time equal to or less than the mean burning time of a 3:7 mixture (by mass) of potassium bromate and cellulose and the criteria for packing groups I and II are not met; .4 Not classified as class 5.1: any substance which, in both the 4:1 and 1:1 sample-to-cellulose ratio (by mass) tested, does not ignite and burn, or exhibits mean burning times greater than that of a 3:7 mixture (by mass) of potassium bromate and cellulose.

2.5.2.3 Oxidizing liquids

2.5.2.3.1 Classification of liquid substances of class 5.1

2.5.2.3.1.1 A test is performed to determine the potential for a liquid substance to increase the burning rate or burning intensity of a combustible substance or for spontaneous ignition to occur when the two are thoroughly mixed. The procedure is given in the United Nations Manual of Tests and Criteria, part III, 34.4.2. It measures the pressure rise time during combustion. Whether a liquid is an oxidizing substance of class 5.1 and, if so, whether packing group I, II or III shall be assigned, is decided on the basis of the test result (see also Precedence of hazard characteristics in 2.0.3).

2.5.2.3.1.2 The classification test results are assessed on the basis of: .1 whether the mixture of substance and cellulose spontaneously ignites; .2 the comparison of the mean time taken for the pressure to rise from 690 kPa to 2070 kPa gauge with those of the reference substances.

2.5.2.3.1.3 A liquid substance is classified in class 5.1 if the 1:1 mixture, by mass, of substance and cellulose tested exhibits a mean pressure rise time less than or equal to the mean pressure rise time of a 1:1 mixture, by mass, of 65% aqueous nitric acid and cellulose.

2.5.2.3.2 Assignment of packing groups

2.5.2.3.2.1 Liquid oxidizing substances are assigned to a packing group according to the test procedure in the United Nations Manual of Tests and Criteria, part III, 34.4.2, in accordance with the following criteria: .1 Packing group I: any substance which, in the 1:1 mixture (by mass) of substance and cellulose tested, spontaneously ignites; or the mean pressure rise time of a 1:1 mixture (by mass) of substance and cellulose is less than that of a 1:1 mixture (by mass) of 50% perchloric acid and cellulose;

74 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

92

Bilaga 1

Chapter 2.5 – Class 5 – Oxidizing substances and organic peroxides

.2 Packing group II: any substance which, in the 1:1 mixture (by mass) of substance and cellulose tested, exhibits a mean pressure rise time less than or equal to the mean pressure rise time of a 1:1 mixture (by mass) of 40% aqueous sodium chlorate solution and cellulose; and the criteria for packing group I are not met; .3 Packing group III: any substance which, in the 1:1 mixture (by mass) of substance and cellulose tested, exhibits a mean pressure rise time less than or equal to the mean pressure rise time of a 1:1 mixture (by mass) of 65% aqueous nitric acid and cellulose; and the criteria for packing groups I and II are not met; .4 Not classified as class 5.1: any substance which, in the 1:1 mixture (by mass) of substance and cellulose tested, exhibits a pressure rise of less than 2070 kPa gauge; or exhibits a mean pressure rise time greater than the mean pressure rise time of a 1:1 mixture (by mass) of 65% aqueous nitric acid and cellulose.

2.5.3 Class 5.2 – Organic peroxides

2.5.3.1 Properties

2.5.3.1.1 Organic peroxides are liable to exothermic decomposition at normal or elevated temperatures. The decomposition can be initiated by heat, contact with impurities (such as acids, heavy-metal compounds, amines), friction or impact. The rate of decomposition increases with temperature and varies with the organic peroxide formulation. Decomposition may result in the evolution of harmful, or flammable, gases or vapours. For certain organic peroxides the temperature shall be controlled during transport. Some organic peroxides may decompose explosively, particularly if confined. This characteristic may be modified by the addition of diluents or by the use of appropriate packagings. Many organic peroxides burn vigorously.

2.5.3.1.2 Contact of organic peroxides with the eyes is to be avoided. Some organic peroxides will cause serious injury to the cornea, even after brief contact, or will be corrosive to the skin.

2.5.3.2 Classification of organic peroxides

2.5.3.2.1 Any organic peroxide shall be considered for classification in class 5.2, unless the organic peroxide formulation contains: .1 not more than 1.0% available oxygen from the organic peroxides when containing not more than 1.0% hydrogen peroxide; or .2 not more than 0.5% available oxygen from the organic peroxides when containing more than 1.0% but not more than 7.0% hydrogen peroxide.

Note: The available oxygen content (%) of an organic peroxide formulation is given by the formula: 16 × Σ(ni × ci/mi) where ni = number of peroxygen groups per molecule of organic peroxide i; ci = concentration (mass %) of organic peroxide i; mi = molecular mass of organic peroxide i.

2.5.3.2.2 Organic peroxides are classified into seven types according to the degree of danger they present. The types of organic peroxide range from type A, which may not be accepted for transport in the packaging in which it is tested, to type G, which is not subject to the provisions for organic peroxides of class 5.2. The classification of types B to F is directly related to the maximum quantity allowed in one packaging.

2.5.3.2.3 Organic peroxides permitted for transport in packagings are listed in 2.5.3.2.4, those permitted for transport in IBCs are listed in packing instruction IBC520 and those permitted for transport in portable tanks are listed in portable tank instruction T23. For each permitted substance listed, the generic entry of the Dangerous Goods List (UN 3101 to UN 3120) is assigned, appropriate subsidiary risks and remarks providing relevant transport information are given. The generic entries specify: .1 organic peroxide type (B to F); .2 physical state (liquid or solid); and .3 temperature control, when required (see 2.5.3.4).

2.5.3.2.3.1 Mixtures of the listed formulations may be classified as the same type of organic peroxide as that of the most dangerous component and be transported under the conditions of transport given for this type. However, as two stable components can form a thermally less stable mixture, the self-accelerating decomposition temperature (SADT) of the mixture shall be determined and, if necessary, temperature control applied as required by 2.5.3.4.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 75

93

Bilaga 1

Part 2 – Classification

d e n s ry d s 3) o 1 ) n a an ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) 17 ) ) o r th s (3 (3 (3 (3 (3 (3 (3 (3 (3 (3 (3 (3 (3 3 3 ti k (1 (1 a s remark (3) ( c Subsidia ri (3) (8) ( d fo ifi n s y e s la atur 20, a C) e c 5 °(

l th mper IBC Emergenc te lfi n o e fu ti c ol atur u C) shall °( d Contr mper te instr te

ing

ing 5 5 5 5 5 5 1 4 5 5 5 5 5 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 P P transpor pack ack OP OP OP O OP OP OP OP2 OP OP OP OP OP OP O OP OP OP OP OP OP6 OP6 OP OP OP OP6 e P method

be se o t s r te ) IBCs, a 6 23 23 10 7 xide (% ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥ in W ro d e te . P it 0 2 rm ) 5 14 48 73 P pe t solid (% s ≥ ≤ ≥

Iner tion c u t ) n B (1 e e ) instr lu p (% r substance Di ty ing o

. F d t pack e n A e e ) in lu p 23 48 23 48 48 23 18 list (% ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥ s Di ty a ) T D methods ) SA 0 0 8 ( 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ing 7 0 0 0 0 6 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 9 0 ation ) 0 > 0 the 77 77 27 77 + 52 77 82 (% 0 – 1 0 – 1 6 – 1 7 – 8 1 – 1 7 – 9 ≤ ≤ ≤ 2 – 1 5 – 1 10 ≤ ≤ 2 – 52 7 – 1 ≤ 10 ≤ pack 52 – 7 8 9 remark 8 52 – 1 5 5 7 8 8 72 – 1 ≤ 52 – 1 79 – 9 82 3 7 ≤ o 3. > > > e > > > > > > > > > > > >

packagings r t from 2 e <

e d Concentr s

in e n T

riv o ” ref ti 8 de c

xides P ( u o O s tr

s E “ n - ANE E T L o ure X T A Y

per k i )- A E R TE

” t rat n HYL T E UT A 1 a NE T Y )HE ON A

nic P A E X Y N -B TE NE

O X ) O X O AL rt A A

ga mpe le t M R RB )V BON O X

“ e b (S E RO A B Y te R Z

or s t a HE P TE XIDE E R X TE A N d rt O -TRI DE L A O A HE

o XIDE L ,5 XI Y E DE DIC DI- E C O ncy C L CID XI RO E Y L CA R + L L L Y ,3 A E N YLP X E Y C code e p E 3 RO UT A O E P E TE Y rge e ERO )C )- E RO P Z TE PY L DE DE A HYLBE

signe P -B YMA E L N RO A O Y YMA O T )C s e , s TAT Y Y P rt X OIC Y OP E XID O XI XI TAT Z ROP

m s X X P O R P Z R X N Y

a NIC E NE te( O NZ P (BE N P UT RO RO O E X

e k C RO RO R YL RO O E E R C E -ME Method n A A O E BE DE DE O NZ Y E S -B E A B ISOP RO a G Y E E T Z X BE rt Y Y -2 E X -DI- Y XI XI -DI- P Y X X Y Y

rently and n t E ,5 X N RO ,5 THYL) X Y I te X X

OR O YLP YLP N KE RO RO X I-( O O R T -2 RO E E ROBE E -2 YE CID O R R RO RO acking d i E U UT A O X RO E E MYLP

cur te X HYL E P P A E E E

P P -B -B E T MONOP L L O ,4-D HYDROP HYDROP E MONOP P P -A : it L H THYL -3 Y Y OROBE THYL N P PER L L

of control Y rt rt E YL ROP ICHL E L 4 YL YL ID YL Y Y YLP YLP rt

te rm T te te O NE O O H Y L X T T te e U ( ( L ME Y UT O Z Z HL -D ME Y UT UT O UT U UT U UT (

List No the p I- I- C X N N -P MYL M I-

-B -B -C ,4 -A -A UT -B -B R -B -B -B -B -B -D -D THYL -DI 4 -DIHYDROP -DI (2 -D rt 1 1 CY ,5 HE rt -CHL BE BE -2 ,2 ,5 rt rt -B rt rt PE rt rt rt rt rt 1 te 1, 1, ME 2 te 3 DI DI DI- DI 2 2 DI- DISUCCINIC te te n te te te te te te te 1,

.4 ic ) .2 y 1 2 3

0 0 0

.5.3 entr 31 31 31

2 Number (gener

76 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

94

Bilaga 1

Chapter 2.5 – Class 5 – Oxidizing substances and organic peroxides

ry d s ) ) ) ) 3) ans 1 3 1 1 k (30) (30) (26) (1 (1 (1 (2 ) ( (5) s remark (4 Subsidia ri

y e

atur C)° (

mper Emergenc te

e

ol atur C)° ( Contr mper

te

ing 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 P P ack OP6 OP OP OP OP OP OP OP O OP OP2 OP6 OP6 OP OP6 OP2 OP OP OP OP O OP OP OP OP OP OP OP P method

r ) te 9 23 18 18 8 a (% ≥ ≥ W ≥ ≥ ≥

) t solid (%

Iner

t ) n B (1 e e ) 28 23 10 lu p (% ≥ ≥ ≥ Di ty

t n A ) e e 14 lu p (% 48 28 20 10 48 38 20 23 48 23 23 28 ty ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥ Di

0 0 0 6 0 7 0 ation 0 0 0 0 0 0 ) (% 52 72 72 7 – 9 77 90 91 77 82 82 42 62 10 10 80 52 77 10 77 72 ≤ ≤ ≤ ≤ ≤ 0 – 1 7 – 1 ≤ ≤ ≤ ≤ ≤ ≤ ≤ ≤ ≤ ≤ 2 – 1 ≤ 52 – 8 5 9 52 – 8 7 ≤ ≤ 52 – 7 ≤ 3 > > > > > > >

Concentr

E E ANE E E T X AN NE T TE A - - - X T A E A A NO TE X NE NO NA )-HE E )H )- A ON O A Y HYL HYL HYL Y Y A A B X X NE N T T T X X YR )HE X X O A A E E E Y RB AR NE X X M M M O O X HE A E E R R UT LE O Y LE T C HE H E E )B X C A L NZE P P R L R Y ONYL O O -TRI -TRI -TRI L L Y MP E MP Y A X THYLHE XIDE ANE L L ,5 ,5 ,5 Y Y X ) RO X THYLHE E E ) RB C C O (S LP E M T H YLBE (S UT Y ,3 ,3 ,3 R , SA Y , SA E ME TE A L ERO A 3 3 3 UT UT E O A N N RIME )B C )C ) CY )- )- )- DE Z ID E RI DE Y E DE P Y Y Y Y Y Y Y -B -B XI X T XI O L FU O -T XI X X X X X X X rt rt N A -T Z Y T TH OP ,5 O te te YLP O T THYLHE ,5 N T O Y NIC R O ( ( LIQUID RO SOLID R E RO E U R -E X R ,5 RO A RO RO R RO RO RO UT E DE I(BE IHYDROP C -E ,5 E B B C -2 -3 E G E E E E E E E P A -2 -3 O P P -DI- -DI- -B XI -D -D PE Y Y Y Y Y Y Y R SOP Y L rt E X X X X E X OR YLP YLP YLP Y YLP E YLP E YLP E ,5 ,5 XIDE, ,5 ,5 XIDE, N X X X O O O O P -I T N N N -2 -2 te ONE RO -2 -2 R R R L -3 RO ONE UT UT A A A RO N E RO TO RO RO RO E E E Y E N U UT UT X UT X UT X I-( E P E E E E E L) -B -B A L HYDROP P PER P P Y P A -B -B -B E -B E -B E -3 P X P P P P L L L L UT X rt rt rt rt rt H rt H rt H THYL THYL ,3-D Y THYL THYL AC YL Y Y Y Y YL te( te te te te O te O te O NE O L T -B T ( ( ( ( L ( L ( L ME ME Y 3 NIC Z ME NIC UT UT U UT UT rt ROP U I- I- I- I- I- C I- C I- C X L A OHE N A Y MYL MYL MYL te OHE D Y T -A -A -A -B -B -B -B -B - -B -D -D -D -D -D -D -DI -DI H CL BE -DI -DIME E (2 CL 2- 6 1 1 1 CY 1 CY 1 CY ,5 ,5 HE T Y ,5 ,5 rt rt rt rt rt rt rt rt ISOP rt Y 2, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 2 2 E ORG C DI 2 2 ORG AC te te te te te te te te 1- te C

ic ) ) y 3 5 0 nt. 04 0 o 1 1 entr 31 (c 3 3 Number (gener

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 77

95

Bilaga 1

Part 2 – Classification

ry d s 9) 1 ) ) ) ) ( ) ) ) 0) ) ans 3 4 3 8 0 2 ( 0 k (1 (9 (22 1 (1 (2 (2 (2

s remark 3) ( (5) Subsidia ri (1

y e

atur C)° (

mper Emergenc te

e

ol atur

C)° (

Contr mper

te

ing 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 P ack OP OP OP OP OP OP OP OP OP OP OP OP OP O OP OP OP OP OP OP OP OP OP OP OP OP OP OP P method

r )

te 40 17 10 a (% W ≥ ≥ ≥

) t solid 48 60 58 3 6 28 48 (% ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥

Iner

t ) n B (1 e e ) lu p (%

Di ty

t n A ) e e 41 lu p (% 43 48 48 48 48 10 23 33 23 55 19 58 14 ty ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥ Di

te ) s 9 te te a 0 ( 0 s s 16 0 0 0 a 14 a ation ) 0 ≤ 0 s a p

57 52 + ≤ 52 77 67 77 62 43 42 52 + 42 57 77 a p 62 (% ≤ ≤ ≤ ≤ ≤ ≤ ≤ 6 – 1 10 ≤ s a p ≤ 10 ≤ ≤ ≤ s ≤ 2 a 5 – 52 42 – 52 42 – 52 52 – 9 remark ≤ ≤ ≤ 3 > 43 > > 72 – 1 e 5 2 a 12 > ≤ > e > 3 ≤ 72 a Concentr s ≤ ≤ 52 – 6 >

E E T AN A X DE + E E TE NO E )H T A XI + A E T Y A ) E E X NE N A X - YR (S RO T T A A YR d E - A A X X NO O ) DE ,7 N E A R HYL UT (S O HE H NE E T UT )B XI ilize ,4 NO X TE A P )B DE b -1 A ANE B NE O O A L Y RO ta X R THYLHE XIDE E L L Y Y X XI A CID CID ) A C C X O E , s UT (S T T Y ROP RIME E R P HYDROP TE )B A A ERO A UT -T N RO DE RO D THYL E LC RIME L )C ) CY )P A E E E YL ID A Y DE P ) BU E Y Y THYLHE HTHAL Y -B ,5 X E XI P T O X RY -T OIC OIC XI Y Z X rt P ONE Y DE ME X Z THYLHE O A X A X X -E )P ,5 YLP RO T XI U RI O N R E ,5 NIC Y O -2 Y te( (3 )HE E NE R E -E ,5 NZ NZ RO A RO R Y RO I- O , T -T E T E RO X E E X E Y MYLP UT T KE RO B -2 S -3 BE BE DE DE DE G E O P X -DI- -D X E HYLB ,9 PE Y Y Y Y Y Y P R RO -A -B YL CID ,6 E E X X YLP X XI XI XI OR E L RO E YLP ,5 ,5 rt rt KE A T N N O X X X YLP Y E RO te te -3 A O RO RO RO P T T -2 -2 E UT IC N R RO UT R RO RO RO ONE E E E MYLP L U UT P U I-( I-( HYDROP T AME TO E E -B E E E N Y YLP HYL E E P P PE P A P P P -A -B -B YL -B HYL YLP T THYL L rt L X L L L rt rt rt UT rt THYL T E C HYDROP TR E OXO te Y Y Y UT ,3-D ,3-D ISOB A R AC Y YL ( Y YL ROP ROP O O O te( te( te( UT -B te( NO 3 3 Y L I- T T O O Z Z Z I- -B rt I- ME A L L NTHYL X -TE E Y UT UT D U U OHE rt I- I- -B X Y Y NYL ,3 -TRI IP T N N N D te rt te( D -DI -DIME THYL THYL A ,9 R E -B -B 2- -B -B 2- -D -D 2- H H RO ,3 rt rt rt rt CL BE BE BE 1 1 te ,5 ,5 HE T T -ME E IN ,1 ,6 T 2, -CHL -CHL Y 2, DI- 1, 1, DI- 2, 2 2 E E p ME ME P P 1 3 AC te te te te 3 3 C DI DI DI

ic ) ) y 5 6 0 nt. 0 o 1 entr 31 (c 3 Number (gener

78 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

96

Bilaga 1

Chapter 2.5 – Class 5 – Oxidizing substances and organic peroxides

ry d s ) ) ) ) ) ans 0 0 4 3 1 k (2 (2 (2 3) (23) (1 (2 s remark (1 Subsidia ri

y e

atur C)° (

mper Emergenc te

e

ol atur C)° ( Contr mper

te

ing 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 P ack OP OP OP OP OP OP OP OP OP OP OP OP OP OP OP OP OP OP O OP OP OP OP OP OP OP P method

r ) te 5 15 6 14 40 a (% ≥ ≥ W ≥ > ≤

) t solid (% 45 57 45 58 18 48 48 ≥ ≤ ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥

Iner

t ) n B (1 e e ) lu p (% Di ty

t n A ) e e 13 13 5 6 lu p (% ≥ ≥ 10 18 25 58 43 ty ≥ ≥ ≤ ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥ Di

h it tes tes te 0 a a te w s oil 0 8 0 ation 0 s a n 0 0 ) a oil 0 0 o 0 0 n s p c – 42 (% 42 s a p 42 s a p 42 o 10 82 10 ili 82 52 85 52 10 88 79 0 – 9 10 6 27 42 57 ≤ ≤ ≤ ≤ ≤ ≤ s ≤ ≤ ≤ ≤ ≤ ≤ ≤ 9 ≤ 3 ≤ ≤ ≤ 42 – 1 s a p ilic 42 – 1 52 – 1 > s 52 a > > > > Concentr 52 a 52 a ≤ with ≤ ≤ 52 a

≤

) - (S ANE - X TE TE NE )- A A HYL DE N T HYL NE XI )HE Y E NE T A NZE E Y X O YR M A E X ID X O ]- X X RO R UT *) - M NE E RO E ARB -TRI ,2 HE L)BE TE ) XIDE O E P )B aR* HE TE O Y A A Y R DE L Y 2 ,9 -1 O A -TRI XIDE L DE X E Y X ,6 j] L ,5 C XI O RO XI YDIC O ,1 C Y ROP E YLP X S -3 ,3- Y ,3 ROP R RO O UT R 2 Y 4 3 ERO )C )P RO E P YL)P HYDROP E Z O E 1 X DE DE )C )- P Y E P E L X N -B R R, DE XI Y HTHAL X L N Y P rt E XI Y HTHAL Y X ISOP )P P Y O DI YLP 01 XI DE X )P X NIC A L) (BE te( THO ANO[ RO RO DE RO Y Y RO YL P OHE NE Y R, R RO E E XI DE RO Y RO A X X E O UT O NZ E O UT Y E DE XI X G E Z R CL Z Z ,9 ) P RO XI E E RO RO -B P Y XIDE -DI- -DI- -B -ME -P XI RO RO E E N rt N N ,5 ,5 THYL)P rt aS 0 H IN E RO E E OR YLP YLP )- C RO ,8 -1 2 P E RO E YLP YLP T T te( L ROBE Y E -2 -2 YE te E MYL E P T N U U I- Y O X LBE X I-( -1 X U P U UT A YLP YLP X Y P O ,6S Y C HYDROP P YL YLP X -B T -B -D E HYLBE -3 N S X HYDROP L -B -B E rt U UT rt OROBE H YL T THYL THYL E ,3-D a O YL YL MYL Y UT rt UT rt H te ICHL NE 5 HYDRO P ODIO HYDROP O te( -B -B ( HL (4,4 O ROP H 3 -A Z -B te( -B te( O I- rt rt I- I- L -D ME ME Y L R, A -E Z MYL UT UT I- rt I- L D -C C ,4 -HYDRO URO X -P Y -3 C 2 N rt N rt C -D te( te( 4 -D (1 A (4-ME -DI -DI (2 H ,1 -A -B -B MYL te te -D te( -D 1 2- CY -2 ISOP HE T R DE 3 BE rt rt rt U BE 1 1 CY ,2 ,5 ,5 3 1, DI- DI- 2, DI- 2 DI DI- DI DIL DI- 2 2 DI- E ([ te te te C DI- DI DI- 1, DI- 1,

ic ) ) y 6 7 0 nt. 0 31 o 31 entr (c Number (gener

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 79

97

Bilaga 1

Part 2 – Classification

ry d s 9) 9) 1 8) 1 ) ) ( ) ) 1 ) ) ) ) ans 0 5 0 3 5 3 7 1 6) ( k (1 1 (2 (1 3) ( (2 (1 (2 (3 1

s remark 3) ( (1 3) ( Subsidia ri (1 (1

y e

atur C)° (

mper Emergenc te

e

ol atur

C)° (

Contr mper

te

ing 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 P P P ack OP OP OP OP O OP OP OP OP OP OP OP OP OP OP OP OP OP O OP OP OP OP OP OP OP OP OP O P method

r )

te 15 28 a (% W ≥ ≥

) t solid (% 48 48 48 58 23 ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥

Iner

t ) n B (1 e e ) 42 78 48 68 68 48 74 lu p (% ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥

Di ty

t n A ) e e 10 13 lu p (% 26 60 58 48 28 28 70 ty ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥ Di

r r ) te le te le te )1 0 tes s tes te b a b a 3 1 a s ( ( a a a ta w ta w ation ) 0 in in rk

32 22 10 43 52 52 52 52 s a p 42 s a p s a p s a p 77 72 32 32 90 52 42 13 52 72 72 ma 43 (% ≤ ≤ ≤ ≤ ≤ ≤ ≤ ≤ ≤ ≤ ≤ ≤ ≤ s a s ≤ ≤ ≤ s a s ≤ ≤ ≤ ≤ remark ≤ .5 a rsion rsion re e 6 7 a e

Concentr e 52 a 5 52 a 4 42 a 42 a e s ≤ ≤ ≤ ≤ ≤ S ≤ dispe dispe

E E TE E

AN AN A AN - E X X X T E E E A ANO ) HYL E R )H )H X )H (S T N E Y Y E NE NE Y E A d - - X X A A X d ) AL O O -H X X O M EP Y )V -3 R R R XIDE (S ilize X Y L) E E E DE ilize ) X b O TE TE HE HE -TRI Y DE IO X A A Y P P THYL O O P XI RO b XIDE ta O L L L L L E ta ,5 X XI R R E E Y Y Y RO ,3 O -T , s PER E L L ME C C P , s 3 R RO L P ROP UT UT Y Y UT E DE ERO E E ,4 E Y DE L DE E RI NE F )- P E E T -B -B -T )C )C -B XI O E P Y L P ,21 P U XI Y YMA YMA XI Y Y T P X N Y X X ISOP NE rt rt TAT ,5 X X rt Y Y A L- -B RO UT O O Y te te E DE te RO E NIC P NE Y , T E X ( ( RO C ,5 XI DE ( E K , T A RO UT O O rt -B R R ZE DE DE E A -3 DE XI RO RO L G E T H te P rt E E N Y Y E E HYDROP -B R T CID - RO XI XI -DI- -DI- RO XI XIDE -DI- Y CID rt P E Y te E X X E RO OR YLP E )- KE M A LBE ,5 ,5 O E YLP YLP ,5 A N te L MYL I-( RO RO -2 -2 R RO RO T T RO -2 ROP A ( Y A IC E U YLP Y E E E E E P E UMYL IC UT I- T T POL T N U U P C HYDROP T X X HYL E R A C ,4-D MONOP MONOP T E P P HYDROP P P P YL L E -B E -D E T EN C U L L L L -B -B C rt H H E N YL 4 YL YL Y Y THYL THYL YL Y YL Y UT rt rt YL THYL Y ISOP -P A HE O L -B O O T HYDROP O A te( O (4,4 O 7 Y T B Y rt ROP Z Z Z -B te( te( Y I- L I- L 7, X E UT UT UT ME ME UT U UT I- I- ME ROP NTHYL X C C Y R te N N N rt URO -D -D THYL RO -B UT -B -B - -DI -DI -B -B -B MYL te -D -D A -DI THYL RO 1 CY ,2 CY 3,5, E CA rt -B rt rt (2 ISOP BE BE ,5 ,5 rt rt rt U BE 1 1 ,5 -ME E

1, 2 ME 3, P POL te n te te 1- DI DI 2 2 te te te C DI DI- 1, 1, DIL 2 ISOP p ME P

ic ) ) y 7 8 9 0 nt. 0 0 31 o 31 31 entr (c Number (gener

80 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

98

Bilaga 1

Chapter 2.5 – Class 5 – Oxidizing substances and organic peroxides

ry d s an ) ) ) ) ) ) ) s 2 (3) (3 (3 (3 (3) (3 (3) 1 1 k (1 (1 (1 s remark Subsidia ri

y e

atur 0 0 5 0 0 5 0 C)° 20 0 15 – 35 15 25 25 10 25 35 15 35 15 0 ( + –1 –1 + + + + + + –1 –1 + –1 –1 + + + +

mper Emergenc te

e

ol atur C) 15 0 0 0 10 5 30 10 20 20 0 0 20 5 0 30 10 30 10 0 ° 2 2 –1 0 2 2 2 2 ( + – – –1 + + + + + – – + – – + + + + –1 Contr mper

te

ing 8 8 8 8 5 5 5 4 5 5 5 5 4 5 5 5 5 5 7

ack OP OP OP OP OP OP OP OP OP3 OP2 OP OP OP OP6 OP OP OP OP OP3 OP OP2 OP6 OP OP6 OP OP2 OP P method

r ) te 12 13 9 a (% ≥ W ≥ ≥

) t solid (% 43 65 ≥ ≥

Iner

t ) n B (1 e e ) 23 48 23 23 68 lu p (% ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥ Di ty

t n A ) e e 18 lu p (% 44 23 ty ≥ ≥ ≥ Di

0 7 0 0 0 7 0 0 ation 0 + + 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ) (% 56 57 17 2 – 52 22 82 87 77 10 7 – 7 10 10 77 10 91 10 10 32 ≤ ≤ ≤ 52 28 ≤ ≤ 1 – 1 ≤ ≤ 7 – 1 ≤ ≤ ≤ 52 – 1 52 – 7 3 ≤ ≤ 9 52 – 1 ≤ 52 – 1 6 52 – 1 7 ≤ ≤ ≤ ≤ ≤ > > > > > > > > >

Concentr

)- Y + X E - T DE RO DE A XI E XI N E HYL O + RO E T RO T B E T A YLP E E - R E E E A E M ,7 T T P T E E E NO T P A A A T T T A E E LE, A LE, ,4 ICA N A A NO A X T T -TRI -1 E D O T A N RBON A A MP XIDE T Y ONYL DE E X A N N MP ONYL ,5 A B XI C O O O D - D ,3 X R RBON H RBON B RBON H 3 THYL YR O A A RBON A R DIC B B , SA YL) A , SA ERO )- A RO TE Y R R X P ICA ULP E TE A X THYLHE E ULP DE Y ME UT D DIC S DIC P A HYL THYLHE L ICA DIC S XI X RI DE Y Y Y DIC L T A D -E ICA ICA E Y ID NIC OB L PER X X X Y L) A E -E Y RO (2 D D OHE T X X RO -T XI Y Y IV E Y Y LIQUID A DE O SOLID A RO IS T O ANE X O IV -2 P X X X XI R ANE G E E ,9 Y RO U RO X RO Z P YDI Y Y O CL RO E X DE ,6 X E E E RO Y X X X L)P -DI- O O Y E E E -B P E N X Y ,5 XIDE, CONTROLLE C P RO P XIDE, CONTROLLE OR XI YLP -3 N O P P O X RBON E L N R L PER L OHE P RO RO R -2 YL A Y OHE RO UT A A E YL sec Y Y YL L RO E E E L PER RO URE YL P RO URE E X N T CL X Y E Y L PER L PER E T X O E T CL -B E P L U Y P P P T A UT YL N A Y HYDROP P THYL YR Y P L THYL PY PY P DIC A P rt H E YL -B ROP C THYLBE YL YL Y U HYLHE R -B Y T R C te O OXO UT OHE ROP T NE O O E rt X OHE NO E ( L R UT YL UT UT UT -B ME A R R NIC A C NIC NYL MYL I- C -TRI E ROP sec CL -ME MYL -E X A te- CL C A YL A U -B ISOP T Y -A -B -B -B -P -P MP RO Y -O MP T -D ,9 IP ISOB E ISOP (2 sec (2 -DI n n (4 E DE n E IN 1 CY ,6 R rt DI- DI C rt rt rt rt ,5 HE TE I- P TE C P DIC 1, 3 T te DI ISOP A DIC DI DI- te te te te DI- DI- 2 DI- DI- ORG D DIC DI DI- ORG A

ic ) ) y 9 0 2 3 4 5 0 nt. 1 1 o 11 1113 11 11 entr 31 (c 3 3 31 31 3 Number (gener

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 81

99

Bilaga 1

Part 2 – Classification

ry d s 3) an 1 s (6) ) ( k s remark (7 Subsidia ri

y e

atur 5 5 5 5 5 0 0 5 5 0 C)° 25 10 40 20 + 10 10 10 0 0 0 + 45 25 – – 0 – – + 40 0 10 10 15 ( + + + + + + + + + –1 –1 + + –1 + +

mper Emergenc te

e

ol atur C) 20 35 15 5 0 0 0 5 40 20 5 5 0 5 0 0 5 5 35 0 0 10 ° 0 – 0 0 0 –1 –1 –1 – –1 –1 –1 –1 2 2 –1 – –1 0 2 0 ( + + + + + – – + – +

Contr mper

te

ing 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7

ack OP OP OP OP OP OP OP OP OP OP OP OP OP OP OP OP OP OP OP OP OP OP OP OP OP OP OP OP P method

r )

te 8 a (% ≥

W

)

t solid (%

Iner

t ) n B (1 e e ) 23 33 48 23 33 23 23 26 73 48 48 48 23 68 48 48 58 10 28 lu p (% ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥

Di ty

t n A ) e e 13 18 lu p (% 23 23 68 48 45 29 ty ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥ Di

4 ≤ 36 0 7 + 2 ation 0 0 ) ≤ 77 + 52 77 77 77 87 77 77 57 27 52 52 77 32 52 32 52 18 52 52 71 72 (% 10 ≤ ≤ 7 – 1 ≤ ≤ 7 – 6 ≤ ≤ ≤ ≤ ≤ ≤ 7 – 52 ≤ ≤ ≤ ≤ ≤ ≤ ≤ ≤ ≤ ≤ ≤ ≤ ≤ 7 2 2 + 52 – 8 31 > > > > Concentr ≤ 20 ≤

L L E Y Y T O + A O Z TE E Z N - E A T ON N E DE E T N A E YL) XI T A O RB B IB A E E E E D OP NO T T T A + RO - TE NO A TE TE AT E A A A + R E A TE A TE ANE E A A O E S T ARB RBON DE P ,3 L A XIDE A X T A A DIC 1 A X UT A N TE TE AT DE ON Y XI DE )- ANO ANO A A O XI ON X XI YL) Y IV ANO ANO )B YR TA N RB YDIC DIC RBON RBON YISOP X P ERO Y C C P TE NO A X Y A A RO RO X NO Y C TE P C X E E E A RO RB O X E RO O X E A UT D D H L ANO A TA E A E P E A RO D L THYLHE O A C C P TE DIC R DE DIC DIC P P R X E A NIC THYLHE R OB O O O E A P E RO L) E RO O -E ODE -E E E E E IV DE H L DIC Y E XI Y Y Y L) E E IV A -2 IS N N N P ODE O O A Y X X X YL) O Y LP YLP N P G -2 NE Y Y Y Y Y Y DE RO Z O Y P Y Y Y Y X YLP X X X X X E IV X RO L)P E RO RO UT Z O L X X X X NE NE N P XI E HYL)P Y E E N HYLHE NO Y OR O O O O O Y Y Y Y COHOL RO T X P N N T A T O O RO UT R R R R R X X X X L E P P P YB A E X R R RO RO E E E E E E RO YE YL L L X C E E E E -B O A E P YL Y Y M P rt P P P P P RO RO R RO P X E P P P P L L L L E E E E YL YR E L L YL te( YL Y Y Y Y UT HO HYLHE THO THYLBE HYLBE ID ODE N -TRI Y Y I- T P P P P ONE YL T T UT ROP ROP T X E THYLBU X X UT UT UT UT U UT L T T UT -B O ,5 THYLHE E E MYL MYL D Y E E -E -E -ME -ME -NE ,5 -A -A -B 2- -B -B -B -B -B C C -B -ME R NZ -E -H -H MYL MYL M MYL n sec (2 (2 (3 (3 (2 (3 2 rt rt rt 2, rt rt rt rt rt U U U U ISOB ISOP ISOP (3 PE BE -( DIME rt rt

te te te te te te te te C C C C DIA DIA DI- DI- DI- DI- DI DI DI DI- DI- DI- DI- 1 te te

ic ) ) y 5 1 nt. 31 o entr (c Number (gener

82 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

100

Bilaga 1

Chapter 2.5 – Class 5 – Oxidizing substances and organic peroxides

ry d s

ans

k s remark Subsidia ri

y e

atur 0 5 5 C)° 5 40 20 10 35 25 10 15 35 0 10 10 20 25 10 5 25 40 10 45 10 ( + –1 + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + – + + + + +

mper Emergenc te

e

ol atur C) 5 0 35 15 5 30 20 10 30 0 15 5 20 5 35 40 ° – 2 – 0 0 0 0 – 0 20 0 0 ( – + + + + + + –1 + + –1 + + +

Contr mper

te

ing 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8

ack OP OP OP OP OP OP OP OP OP OP OP OP OP OP OP OP OP OP OP OP OP OP OP OP P method

r )

te 28 a (% W ≥

) t solid (% 48 ≥

Iner

t ) n B (1 e e ) 33 28 48 73 73 68 lu p (% ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥

Di ty

t n A ) e e lu p (% 23 38 23 48 48 53 Di ty ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥

r r r r

le te le te le te te le te b a b a b a s b a + 5 w w w a w ation 8 ta ta ) ta ) ta ) + 0 0 0 0 in in n in n 0 in

77 2 – 1 67 10 72 77 10 10 10 72 2 – 52 27 52 27 52 52 ze ze s a p 10 47 32 (% ≤ 32 5 – 1 ≤ ≤ ≤ ≤ ≤ s a s ≤ ≤ ≤ ≤ s a s ro s a s ro ≤ ≤ s a s ≤ 1 ≤ ≤ ≤ ≤ 3 rsion rsion (f rsion (f ≤ rsion 1 ≤ > ≤ 42 a 42 a 42 a 52 a 52 a Concentr ≤ ≤ ≤ ≤ ≤

dispe dispe dispe dispe

+

E T TE A A - N L - O A E Y Y E E B + E ) - IV T X X T T R E T (S -2 - A O O A A T A Y Y YP E R R A DE X X X E NO E E NO NO ICA N XI O O T A E AT P P A TE E A TE L D O A T O L A T XIDE TE A XIDE Y RO E X A YL X A A X Y B RBON RO E T N Y RO T X R A E P T T E U O L PER L PER A ON TA U U ANO ON ANO ERO P E P C P ANO C E ICA Y Y YL RBON RB E YB E RB L C E P T D DIC T T T A A H D A Y D Y Y U U U IDE XID THYLHE X THYLHE THYLHE HYLB L PER X B B RBON X O DE HYLB O O O NIC T OA Y X L L A DIC O RO -E E T -E E ODE -E E A E N O ANONE Y R -2 DIC N XI E -2 N DIC NZ -2 N G T RO Y E Y X E E Y Y Y Y NE Y M U E X H T H HYLB DIC P X Y E M Y X CID Y Y P T A T T Y P X X RO X X X X OR -DI ECA -B E E TE RO L O -HYDRO AT E -DI TE O A X O D L PER NO A X E Y CID RO RO R O P A RO R RO ROBE RO R ,1 O Y YL OHE M M O E E E -3 ,1 O E E E O RO E E -1 sec T A A A N AME RO P A P N -1 N P E Y E L OP CL R X R E L P P Y P P URIC P P X N U R Y A Y ANO L TA X A L A P L Y Y C T T C TR P T YL YL Y THYL P C YL Y YL L YL Y X -B E E L N E IONYL ICHL -T -T -TE Y UT T H UT Y O ROP 3 3 T UT U ME OP UT UT -D X MYL UT UT R sec HYLHE ODE ,3 -NO -B O ODE -B ,4 THYL ,3, T ,3, ,3 n -B n -B -DI E R -B -B n RO -A -B -B -HYDRO PE DI- DI-ISOP ,1 E ,1 NE ,1 MYRIS rt rt ,1 N P -HYDRO NE rt rt -2 E rt rt rt

3 ISOP ME 1 1 1 DICE DI DI- DISUCCINIC te DI- te 1 DI 3 te te DI- DI P te te te

ic ) ) y 5 6 8 9 1 nt. 17 1 1 o 11 entr 31 (c 3 31 31 31 Number (gener

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 83

101

Bilaga 1

Part 2 – Classification

ry d s

ans k (29) (29) (29) (29) (29) s remark Subsidia ri

y e

atur 5 C)° 10 35 0 35 35 20 5 25 15 25 15 5 5 ( + + + + + – + + + + + + –

mper Emergenc te

e

ol atur C) 0 30 0 30 30 15 5 20 10 20 10 5 5 5 °( + –1 + + + –1 + + + + – – –1

Contr mper

te

ing 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8

ack OP OP OP OP OP OP OP OP OP OP OP OP OP OP P method

r ) te a (% W

) t solid (% 68 65 58 68 48 ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥

Iner

t ) n B (1 e e ) 73 lu p (% ≥ Di ty

t n A ) e e lu p (% 68 62 48 Di ty ≥ ≥ ≥

r r r r r r r r r r le te le te le te le te le te le te le te le te le te le te b a b a b a b a b a b a b a b a b a b a

ta w ta w ta w ta w ta w ta w ta w ta w ta w ta w ) ation ) in in in in in in in in in in n

32 27 38 8 – 52 ze 32 35 42 32 52 (% ≤ ≤ s a s s a s s a s s a s s a s s a s s a s ≤ s a s s a s s a s ro ≤ ≤ ≤ ≤ ≤ rsion rsion rsion rsion rsion rsion rsion 3 rsion rsion rsion (f 2 a > Concentr 52 a 42 a 42 a 42 a 6 42 a 52 a 52 a 52 a 52 a ≤ ≤ ≤ ≤ ≤ ≤ ≤ ≤ ≤ ≤ dispe dispe dispe dispe dispe dispe dispe dispe dispe dispe

) (S

NE E E T DE DE DE T NZE A XI XI XI A E T A RO RO RO L)BE TE E E E E Y A RBON T RBON A A P P P L DE XIDE TE E Y A ) A T RBON YL) YL) YL) T (S ROP XI ANO YL) A A DIC U L DIC E ERO C TE X Y RBON NO NO NO Y Y RO P E A ANO X A A A A E T E X E D L DIC T T XID ISOP O A C E RBON Y RO X X X U Y P NIC OHE T X HYLB OA B OA RO RO X E IV A A E DIC T L E E E YL A N P ODE P Y E N Y N O G Y Y CL RO X M P ID RO Z X X Y DIC E L) H L)P X E DE OR O O NE C Y P Y RO HYLHE HYLHE HYLHE ECA T ECA Y O N XI Y RBON X X E T T T -DI D E D X R R R X YL A YL E E E ,1 M ONE E YLP E E RO X P M M M -1 O A O N T RO P P RO UT E L Y E R E A P U E L L DIC Y X N N X L P Y Y E -B Y P T Y T Y Y -B OROBE P rt X L OHE HYLHE -TRI -TRI -TRI X E X HYLHE O rt Y T ,5 ,5 ,5 -T T Z HL UT UT te- T CL ,5 ,5 ,5 O O OHE N te MYL RO Y -E R ,3 R -E E -2 -C U -B -B MYL (4 E (2 (3 (3 (3 3 (2 CL 4 rt rt U P MYRIS -HYDRO PE 1, PE Y IB I-( te te C DI- DICE DIC DI- DI DI- DI- DI- 3 1, DI- C D D DI- DIC

ic ) ) t t y 9 0 pt p p 1 nt. 2 m m m mpt o 1 e e e e empt entr 31 (c 3 x x x Number (gener E Ex Ex E E

84 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

102

Bilaga 1

Chapter 2.5 – Class 5 – Oxidizing substances and organic peroxides

(1) Diluent type B may always be replaced by diluent type A. The boiling point of diluent type B shall be at least 60°C higher than the SADT of the organic peroxide (2) Available oxygen ≤ 4.7% (3) “EXPLOSIVE” subsidiary risk label required. (Model No. 1, see 5.2.2.2.2) (4) Diluent may be replaced by di-tert-butyl peroxide (5) Available oxygen ≤ 9% (6) With ≤ 9% hydrogen peroxide; available oxygen ≤ 10% (7) Only non-metallic packagings are allowed (8) Available oxygen > 10% and ≤ 10.7%, with or without water (9) Available oxygen ≤ 10%, with or without water (10) Available oxygen ≤ 8.2%, with or without water (11) See 2.5.3.2.5.1 (12) Up to 2000 kg per receptacle assigned to ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE F on the basis of large-scale trials (13) “CORROSIVE” subsidiary risk label required (Model No. 8, see 5.2.2.2.2) (14) Peroxyacetic acid formulations which fulfil the criteria of 2.5.3.3.2.4 (15) Peroxyacetic acid formulations which fulfil the criteria of 2.5.3.3.2.5 (16) Peroxyacetic acid formulations which fulfil the criteria of 2.5.3.3.2.6 (17) Addition of water to this organic peroxide will decrease its thermal stability (18) No “CORROSIVE” subsidiary risk label required for concentrations below 80% (19) Mixtures with hydrogen peroxide, water and acid(s) (20) With diluent type A, with or without water (21) With ≥ 25% diluent type A by mass, and in addition ethylbenzene (22) With ≥ 19% diluent type A by mass, and in addition methyl isobutyl ketone (23) With < 6% di-tert-butyl peroxide (24) With ≤ 8% 1-isopropylhydroperoxy-4-isopropylhydroxybenzene (25) Diluent type B with boiling point > 110°C (26) With < 0.5% hydroperoxides content (27) For concentrations more than 56%, “CORROSIVE” subsidiary risk label required (Model No. 8, see 5.2.2.2.2) (28) Available active oxygen ≤ 7.6% in diluent type A having a 95% boil-off point in the range 200–260°C (29) Not subject to the provisions for peroxide, class 5.2 (30) Diluent type B with boiling point > 130°C (31) Active oxygen ≤ 6.7%

2.5.3.2.5 Classification of organic peroxides not listed in 2.5.3.2.4, packing instruction IBC520 or portable tank instruction T23 and assignment to a generic entry shall be made by the competent authority of the country of origin on the basis of a test report. Principles applying to the classification of such substances are provided in 2.5.3.3. Test methods and criteria and an example of a report are given in the current edition of the United Nations Manual of Tests and Criteria, part II. The statement of approval shall contain the classification and the relevant transport conditions (see 5.4.4.1.3).

2.5.3.2.5.1 Samples of new organic peroxides or new formulations of currently assigned organic peroxides for which complete test data are not available and which are to be transported for further testing or evaluation may be assigned to one of the appropriate entries for ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE C provided the following conditions are met:

.1 the available data indicate that the sample would be no more dangerous than ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE B;

.2 the sample is packaged in accordance with packing method OP2 and the quantity per cargo transport unit is limited to 10 kg; and

.3 the available data indicate that the control temperature, if any, is sufficiently low to prevent any dangerous decomposition and sufficiently high to prevent any dangerous phase separation.

2.5.3.3 Principles for classification of organic peroxides

Note: This section refers only to those properties of organic peroxides which are decisive for their classification. A flow chart, presenting the classification principles in the form of a graphically arranged scheme of questions concerning the decisive properties together with the possible answers, is given in Figure 2.5.1 in chapter 2.5 of the United Nations Recommendations on the Transport of Dangerous Goods. These properties shall be determined experimentally. Suitable test methods with pertinent evaluation criteria are given in the United Nations Manual of Tests and Criteria, part II.

2.5.3.3.1 Any organic peroxide formulation shall be regarded as possessing explosive properties when, in laboratory testing, the formulation is liable to detonate, to deflagrate rapidly or to show a violent effect when heated under confinement.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 85

103

Bilaga 1

Part 2 – Classification

2.5.3.3.2 The following principles apply to the classification of organic peroxide formulations not listed in 2.5.3.2.4: .1 Any organic peroxide formulation which can detonate or deflagrate rapidly, as packaged for transport, is prohibited from transport in that packaging under class 5.2 (defined as ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE A); .2 Any organic peroxide formulation possessing explosive properties and which, as packaged for transport, neither detonates nor deflagrates rapidly, but is liable to undergo a thermal explosion in that package, shall bear an “EXPLOSIVE” subsidiary risk label (Model No. 1, see 5.2.2.2.2). Such an organic peroxide may be packaged in amounts of up to 25 kg unless the maximum quantity has to be limited to a lower amount to preclude detonation or rapid deflagration in the package (defined as ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE B); .3 Any organic peroxide formulation possessing explosive properties may be transported without an “EXPLOSIVE” subsidiary risk label when the substance as packaged (maximum 50 kg) for transport cannot detonate or deflagrate rapidly or undergo a thermal explosion (defined as ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE C); .4 Any organic peroxide formulation which, in laboratory testing: .1 detonates partially, does not deflagrate rapidly and shows no violent effect when heated under confinement; or .2 does not detonate at all, deflagrates slowly and shows no violent effect when heated under confinement; or .3 does not detonate or deflagrate at all and shows a medium effect when heated under confinement is acceptable for transport in packages of not more than 50 kg net mass (defined as ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE D); .5 Any organic peroxide formulation which, in laboratory testing, neither detonates nor deflagrates at all and shows low or no effect when heated under confinement is acceptable for transport in packages of not more than 400 kg/450 ℓ (defined as ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE E); .6 Any organic peroxide formulation which, in laboratory testing, neither detonates in the cavitated state nor deflagrates at all and shows only a low or no effect when heated under confinement as well as low or no explosive power may be considered for transport in IBCs or tanks (defined as ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE F); for additional provisions see 4.1.7 and 4.2.1.13; .7 Any organic peroxide formulation which, in laboratory testing, neither detonates in the cavitated state nor deflagrates at all and shows no effect when heated under confinement nor any explosive power shall be exempted from class 5.2, provided that the formulation is thermally stable (self-accelerating decomposition temperature is 60°C or higher for a 50 kg package) and for liquid formulations diluent type A is used for desensitization (defined as ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE G). If the formulation is not thermally stable or a diluent other than type A is used for desensitization, the formulation shall be defined as ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE F.

2.5.3.4 Temperature control provisions

2.5.3.4.0 The properties of some organic peroxides require that they be transported under temperature control. Control and emergency temperatures for currently assigned organic peroxides are shown in the list 2.5.3.2.4. The controlled temperature provisions are given in chapter 7.3.7. 2.5.3.4.1 The following organic peroxides shall be subjected to temperature control during transport: .1 organic peroxides type B and C with a SADT ≤ 50°C; .2 organic peroxides type D showing a medium effect when heated under confinement* with a SADT ≤ 50°C or showing a low or no effect when heated under confinement with a SADT ≤ 45°C; and .3 organic peroxides types E and F with a SADT ≤ 45°C. 2.5.3.4.2 Test methods for determining the SADT are given in the United Nations Manual of Tests and Criteria, part II, chapter 28. The test selected shall be conducted in a manner which is representative, both in size and material, of the package to be transported. 2.5.3.4.3 Test methods for determining the flammability are given in the United Nations Manual of Tests and Criteria, part III, chapter 32.4. Because organic peroxides may react vigorously when heated, it is recommended to determine their flashpoint using small sample sizes such as described in ISO 3679.

2.5.3.5 Desensitization of organic peroxides

2.5.3.5.1 In order to ensure safety during transport, organic peroxides are in many cases desensitized by organic liquids or solids, inorganic solids or water. Where a percentage of a substance is stipulated, this refers to the percentage by mass, rounded to the nearest whole number. In general, desensitization shall be such that, in case of spillage or fire, the organic peroxide will not concentrate to a dangerous extent.

* As determined by test series E as prescribed in the United Nations Manual of Tests and Criteria, part II.

86 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

104

Bilaga 1

Chapter 2.5 – Class 5 – Oxidizing substances and organic peroxides

2.5.3.5.2 Unless otherwise stated for the individual organic peroxide formulation, the following definitions apply for diluents used for desensitization: .1 Diluents type A are organic liquids which are compatible with the organic peroxide and which have a boiling point of not less than 150°C. Type A diluents may be used for desensitizing all organic peroxides. .2 Diluents type B are organic liquids which are compatible with the organic peroxide and which have a boiling point of less than 150°C but not less than 60°C and a flashpoint of not less than 5°C. Type B diluents may be used for desensitization of all organic peroxides provided that the boiling point is at least 60°C higher than the SADT in a 50 kg package. 2.5.3.5.3 Diluents, other than type A or type B, may be added to organic peroxide formulations as listed in 2.5.3.2.4 provided that they are compatible. However, replacement of all or part of a type A or type B diluent by another diluent with differing properties requires that the organic peroxide formulation be re-assessed in accordance with the normal acceptance procedure for class 5.2.

2.5.3.5.4 Water may only be used for the desensitization of organic peroxides which are shown in 2.5.3.2.4 or in the statement of approval according to 2.5.3.2.5 as being with water or as a stable dispersion in water.

2.5.3.5.5 Organic and inorganic solids may be used for desensitization of organic peroxides provided that they are compatible.

2.5.3.5.6 Compatible liquids and solids are those which have no detrimental influence on the thermal stability and hazard type of the organic peroxide formulation.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 87

105

Bilaga 1

Chapter 2.6

Class 6 – Toxic and infectious substances

2.6.0 Introductory notes

Note 1: The word “toxic” has the same meaning as “poisonous”.

Note 2: Genetically modified microorganisms which do not meet the definition of a toxic or an infectious substance shall be considered for classification in class 9 and assigned to UN 3245.

Note 3: Toxins from plant, animal or bacterial sources which do not contain any infectious substances, or toxins that are contained in substances which are not infectious substances, shall be considered for classification in class 6.1 and assigned to UN 3172.

2.6.1 Definitions

Class 6 is subdivided into two classes as follows:

Class 6.1 – Toxic substances These are substances liable either to cause death or serious injury or to harm human health if swallowed or inhaled, or by skin contact.

Class 6.2 – Infectious substances These are substances known or reasonably expected to contain pathogens. Pathogens are defined as microorganisms (including bacteria, viruses, rickettsiae, parasites, fungi) and other agents such as prions, which can cause disease in humans or animals.

2.6.2 Class 6.1 – Toxic substances

2.6.2.1 Definitions and properties

2.6.2.1.1 LD50 (median lethal dose) for acute oral toxicity is the statistically derived single dose of a substance that can be expected to cause death within 14 days in 50 per cent of young adult albino rats when administered by the oral route. The LD50 value is expressed in terms of mass of test substance per mass of test animal (mg/kg).

2.6.2.1.2 LD50 for acute dermal toxicity is that dose of the substance which, administered by continuous contact for 24 hours with the bare skin of the albino rabbit, is most likely to cause death within 14 days in one half of the animals tested. The number of animals tested shall be sufficient to give a statistically significant result and be in conformity with good pharmacological practices. The result is expressed in milligrams per kilogram body mass.

2.6.2.1.3 LC50 for acute toxicity on inhalation is that concentration of vapour, mist or dust which, administered by continuous inhalation to both male and female young adult albino rats for one hour, is most likely to cause death within 14 days in one half of the animals tested. A solid substance shall be tested if at least 10% (by mass) of its total mass is likely to be dust in the respirable range, such as the aerodynamic diameter of that particle fraction is 10 microns or less. A liquid substance shall be tested if a mist is likely to be generated in a leakage of the transport containment. For both solid and liquid substances, more than 90% (by mass) of a specimen prepared for inhalation toxicity testing shall be in the respirable range as defined above. The result is expressed in milligrams per litre of air for dusts and mists or in millilitres per cubic metre of air (parts per million) for vapours.

2.6.2.1.4 Properties

.1 The dangers of poisoning which are inherent in these substances depend upon contact with the human body, that is by inhalation of vapours by unsuspecting persons at some distance from the cargo or the immediate dangers of physical contact with the substance. These have been considered in the context of the probability of accident occurring during transport by sea.

88 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

106

Bilaga 1

Chapter 2.6 – Class 6 – Toxic and infectious substances

.2 Nearly all toxic substances evolve toxic gases when involved in a fire or when heated to decomposition. .3 A substance specified as “stabilized” shall not be transported in an unstabilized condition.

2.6.2.2 Assignment of packing groups to toxic substances

2.6.2.2.1 Toxic substances have for packing purposes been apportioned among packing groups according to the degree of their toxic hazards in transport: .1 Packing group I: substances and preparations presenting a high toxicity risk; .2 Packing group II: substances and preparations presenting a medium toxicity risk; .3 Packing group III: substances and preparations presenting a low toxicity risk. 2.6.2.2.2 In making this grouping, account has been taken of human experience in instances of accidental poisoning, and of special properties possessed by any individual substance, such as liquid state, high volatility, any special likelihood of penetration, and special biological effects. 2.6.2.2.3 In the absence of human experience, the grouping has been based on data obtained from animal experiments. Three possible routes of administration have been examined. These routes are exposure through: – oral ingestion; – dermal contact; and – inhalation of dusts, mists or vapours. 2.6.2.2.3.1 For appropriate animal test data for the various routes of exposure, see 2.6.2.1. When a substance exhibits a different order of toxicity by two or more routes of administration, the highest degree of danger indicated by the tests has been used in assigning the packing group. 2.6.2.2.4 The criteria to be applied for grouping a substance according to the toxicity it exhibits by all three routes of administration are presented in the following paragraphs. 2.6.2.2.4.1 The grouping criteria for the oral and dermal routes as well as for inhalation of dusts and mists are shown in the following table:

Grouping criteria for administration through oral ingestion, dermal contact and inhalation of dusts and mists

Inhalation toxicity Oral toxicity Dermal toxicity by dusts and mists Packing group LD50 LD50 LC50 (mg/kg) (mg/kg) (mg/ℓ) I ≤ 5.0 ≤ 50 ≤ 0.2 II > 5.0 and ≤ 50 > 50 and ≤ 200 > 0.2 and ≤ 2.0 III* > ≤ > ≤ > ≤ 50 and 300 200 and 1000 2.0 and 4.0 * Tear gas substances shall be included in packing group II even if their toxicity data correspond to packing group III values.

Note: Substances meeting the criteria of class 8 and with an inhalation toxicity of dusts and mists (LC50) leading to packing group I are only accepted for an allocation to class 6.1 if the toxicity through oral ingestion or dermal contact is at least in the range of packing group I or II. Otherwise an allocation to class 8 is made when appropriate (see 2.8.2.3). 2.6.2.2.4.2 The criteria for inhalation toxicity of dusts and mists in 2.6.2.2.4.1 are based on LC50 data relating to one hour exposures, and where such information is available it shall be used. However, where only LC50 data relating to 4-hour exposures to dusts and mists are available, such figures can be multiplied by four and the product substituted in the above criteria, i.e. LC50 (4 hours) × 4 is considered the equivalent of LC50 (1 hour). 2.6.2.2.4.3 Liquids having toxic vapours shall be assigned to the following packing groups, where “V” is the saturated 3 vapour concentration in mℓ/m air at 20°C and standard atmospheric pressure: Packing group I: if V ≥ 10 LC and LC ≤ 1000 mℓ/m3. 50 50 3 Packing group II: if V ≥ LC50 and LC50 ≤ 3000 mℓ/m , and do not meet the criteria for packing group I. 3 Packing group III: if V ≥ 1 __ LC50 and LC50 ≤ 5000 mℓ/m , and do not meet the criteria for packing groups I 5 or II. Note: Tear gas substances shall be included in packing group II even if their toxicity data correspond to packing group III values.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 89

107

Bilaga 1

Part 2 – Classification

2.6.2.2.4.4 In figure 2-3 the criteria according to 2.6.2.2.4.3 are expressed in graphical form, as an aid to easy classification. Because of approximations inherent in the use of graphs, substances falling on or near packing group borderlines shall be checked using numerical criteria.

NOT DANGEROUS FOR TRANSPORT

10,000

GROUP III

GROUP II 1,000

3 m ℓ/ m 100 50 LC GROUP I

10

10 100 1,000 10,000 100,000

VOLATILITY mℓ/m3

Figure 2-3 – Inhalation toxicity: packing group borderlines

2.6.2.2.4.5 The criteria for inhalation toxicity of vapours in 2.6.2.2.4.3 are based on LC50 data relating to one hour exposures, and where such information is available it shall be used. However, where only LC50 data relating to 4-hour exposures to the vapours are available, such figures can be multiplied by two and the product substituted in the above criteria, i.e. LC50 (4 hours) × 2 is considered the equivalent of LC50 (1 hour). 2.6.2.2.4.6 Mixtures of liquids that are toxic by inhalation shall be assigned to packing groups according to 2.6.2.2.4.7 or 2.6.2.2.4.8. 2.6.2.2.4.7 If LC50 data are available for each of the toxic substances comprising a mixture, the packing group may be determined as follows: .1 Estimate the LC50 of the mixture using the formula: 1 LC50 (mixture) = ________ n fi

∑ ____

( LC50i)

i=1 th where: fi = mole fraction of the i component substance of the mixture LC = mean lethal concentration of the ith component substance in mℓ/m3. 50i .2 Estimate the volatility of each component substance comprising the mixture using the formula: 6 Pi × 10 3 Vi = _______ mℓ/m

( 101.3 )

th where: Pi = the partial pressure of the i component substance in kPa at 20°C and one atmosphere pressure. .3 Calculate the ratio of the volatility to the LC50 using the formula: n Vi R = ____

∑ ( LC50i)

i=1

90 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

108

Bilaga 1

Chapter 2.6 – Class 6 – Toxic and infectious substances

.4 Using the calculated values of LC50 (mixture) and R, the packing group for the mixture is determined: 3 Packing group I: R ≥ 10 and LC50 (mixture) ≤ 1000 mℓ/m . ≥ ≤ ℓ/ 3 Packing group II: R 1 and LC50 (mixture) 3000 m m and not meeting criteria for packing group I. 1 3 Packing group III: R ≥_ and LC50 (mixture) ≤ 5000 mℓ/m and not meeting criteria for packing groups 5 I or II.

2.6.2.2.4.8 In the absence of LC50 data on the toxic constituent substances, the mixture may be assigned a packing group based on the following simplified threshold toxicity tests. When these threshold tests are used, the most restrictive packing group shall be determined and used for transporting the mixture. .1 A mixture is assigned to packing group I only if it meets both of the following criteria: – A sample of the liquid mixture is vaporized and diluted with air to create a test atmosphere of ℓ/ 3 1000 m m vaporized mixture in air. Ten albino rats (five male and five female) are exposed to the test atmosphere for one hour and observed for 14 days. If five or more of the animals die within the 14-day 3 observation period, the mixture is presumed to have an LC50 equal to or less than 1000 mℓ/m . – A sample of the vapour in equilibrium with the liquid mixture at 20°C is diluted with 9 equal volumes of air to form a test atmosphere. Ten albino rats (five male and five female) are exposed to the test atmosphere for one hour and observed for 14 days. If five or more of the animals die within the 14-day observation period, the mixture is presumed to have a volatility equal to or greater than 10 times the mixture LC50. .2 A mixture is assigned to packing group II only if it meets both of the following criteria, and the mixture does not meet the criteria for packing group I: – A sample of the liquid mixture is vaporized and diluted with air to create a test atmosphere of 3 3000 mℓ/m vaporized mixture in air. Ten albino rats (five male and five female) are exposed to the test atmosphere for one hour and observed for 14 days. If five or more of the animals die within the 14-day 3 observation period, the mixture is presumed to have an LC50 equal to or less than 3000 mℓ/m . – A sample of the vapour in equilibrium with the liquid mixture at 20°C is used to form a test atmosphere. Ten albino rats (five male and five female) are exposed to the test atmosphere for one hour and observed for 14 days. If five or more of the animals die within the 14-day observation period, the mixture is presumed to have a volatility equal to or greater than the mixture LC50. .3 A mixture is assigned to packing group III only if it meets both of the following criteria, and the mixture does not meet the criteria for packing groups I or II: – A sample of the liquid mixture is vaporized and diluted with air to create a test atmosphere of 3 5000 mℓ/m vaporized mixture in air. Ten albino rats (five male and five female) are exposed to the test atmosphere for one hour and observed for 14 days. If five or more of the animals die within the 14-day observation period, the mixture is presumed to have an LC50 equal to or less than ℓ/ 3 5000 m m . – The vapour pressure of the liquid mixture is measured and if the vapour concentration is equal to or ℓ/ 3 greater than 1000 m m , the mixture is presumed to have a volatility equal to or greater than 1 __ the 5 mixture LC50.

2.6.2.3 Methods for determining oral and dermal toxicity of mixtures

2.6.2.3.1 When classifying and assigning the appropriate packing group to mixtures in class 6.1, in accordance with the oral and dermal toxicity criteria in 2.6.2.2, it is necessary to determine the acute LD50 of the mixture.

2.6.2.3.2 If a mixture contains only one active substance, and the LD50 of that constituent is known, in the absence of reliable acute oral and dermal toxicity data on the actual mixture to be transported, the oral or dermal LD50 may be obtained by the following method: LD50 value of active substance × 100 LD50 value of preparation = ______________________________ percentage of active substance by mass 2.6.2.3.3 If a mixture contains more than one active constituent, there are three possible approaches that may be used to determine the oral or dermal LD50 of the mixture. The preferred method is to obtain reliable acute oral and dermal toxicity data on the actual mixture to be transported. If reliable, accurate data are not available, then either of the following methods may be performed: .1 Classify the formulation according to the most hazardous constituent of the mixture as if that constituent were present in the same concentration as the total concentration of all active constituents; or .2 Apply the formula: CA CB CZ 100 ___ + ___ + … ___ = ____ TA TB TZ TM where: C = the % concentration of constituent A, B . . . Z in the mixture; T = the oral LD50 value of constituent A, B . . . Z; TM = the oral LD50 value of the mixture.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 91

109

Bilaga 1

Part 2 – Classification

Note: This formula can also be used for dermal toxicities provided that this information is available on the same species for all constituents. The use of this formula does not take into account any potentiation or protective phenomena.

2.6.2.4 Classification of pesticides

2.6.2.4.1 All active pesticide substances and their preparations for which the LC50 and/or LD50 values are known and which are classified in class 6.1 shall be classified under appropriate packing groups in accordance with the criteria given in 2.6.2.2. Substances and preparations which are characterized by subsidiary risks shall be classified according to the precedence of hazard table in 2.0.3 with the assignment of appropriate packing groups.

2.6.2.4.2 If the oral or dermal LD50 value for a pesticide preparation is not known, but the LD50 value of its active substance(s) is known, the LD50 value for the preparation may be obtained by applying the procedures in 2.6.2.3. Note: LD50 toxicity data for a number of common pesticides may be obtained from the most current edition of “The WHO Recommended Classification of Pesticides by Hazard and Guidelines to Classification”, available from the International Programme on Chemical Safety, World Health Organization (WHO), 1211 Geneva 27, Switzerland. While that publication may be used as a source of LD50 data for pesticides, its classification system shall not be used for purposes of transport classification of, or assignment of packing groups to, pesticides, which shall be in accordance with the provisions of this Code.

2.6.2.4.3 The Proper Shipping Name used in the transport of the pesticide shall be selected from those referenced on the basis of the active ingredient, of the physical state of the pesticide and any subsidiary risks which it may exhibit.

2.6.3 Class 6.2 – Infectious substances

2.6.3.1 Definitions

For the purposes of this Code:

2.6.3.1.1 Infectious substances are substances which are known or are reasonably expected to contain pathogens. Pathogens are defined as micro-organisms (including bacteria, viruses, rickettsiae, parasites, fungi) and other agents such as prions, which can cause disease in humans or animals.

2.6.3.1.2 Biological products are those products derived from living organisms which are manufactured and distributed in accordance with the requirements of appropriate national authorities, which may have special licensing requirements, and are used either for prevention, treatment, or diagnosis of disease in humans or animals, or for development, experimental or investigation purposes related thereto. They include, but are not limited to, finished or unfinished products such as vaccines.

2.6.3.1.3 Cultures are the result of a process by which pathogens are intentionally propagated. This definition does not include human or animal patient specimens as defined in 2.6.3.1.4.

2.6.3.1.4 Patient specimens are human or animal materials, collected directly from humans or animals, including, but not limited to, excreta, secreta, blood and its components, tissue and tissue fluid swabs, and body parts being transported for purposes such as research, diagnosis, investigational activities, disease treatment and prevention.

2.6.3.1.5 [Reserved]

2.6.3.1.6 Medical or clinical wastes are wastes derived from the medical treatment of animals or humans or from bio-research.

2.6.3.2 Classification of infectious substances

2.6.3.2.1 Infectious substances shall be classified in class 6.2 and assigned to UN 2814, UN 2900, UN 3291 or UN 3373, as appropriate.

2.6.3.2.2 Infectious substances are divided into the following categories:

2.6.3.2.2.1 Category A: An infectious substance which is transported in a form that, when exposure to it occurs, is capable of causing permanent disability, life-threatening or fatal disease in otherwise healthy humans or animals. Indicative examples of substances that meet these criteria are given in the table in this paragraph.

92 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

110

Bilaga 1

Chapter 2.6 – Class 6 – Toxic and infectious substances

Note: An exposure occurs when an infectious substance is released outside the protective packaging, resulting in physical contact with humans or animals.

(a) Infectious substances meeting these criteria which cause disease in humans or in both humans and animals shall be assigned to UN 2814. Infectious substances which cause disease only in animals shall be assigned to UN 2900.

(b) Assignment to UN 2814 or UN 2900 shall be based on the known medical history and symptoms of the source human or animal, endemic local conditions, or professional judgement concerning individual circumstances of the human or animal source. Note 1: The Proper Shipping Name for UN 2814 is INFECTIOUS SUBSTANCE, AFFECTING HUMANS. The Proper Shipping Name for UN 2900 is INFECTIOUS SUBSTANCE, AFFECTING ANIMALS only. Note 2: The following table is not exhaustive. Infectious substances, including new or emerging pathogens, which do not appear in the table but which meet the same criteria shall be assigned to Category A. In addition, if there is doubt as to whether or not a substance meets the criteria it shall be included in Category A. Note 3: In the following table, the microorganism names written in italics are bacteria, mycoplasmas, rickettsiae or fungi.

Indicative examples of infectious substances included in category A in any form unless otherwise indicated (2.6.3.2.2.1 (a))

UN Number and Proper Shipping Micro-organism Name UN 2814 Bacillus anthracis (cultures only) Infectious Brucella abortus (cultures only) substance, Brucella melitensis (cultures only) affecting Brucella suis (cultures only) humans Burkholderia mallei – Pseudomonas mallei – Glanders (cultures only) Burkholderia pseudomallei – Pseudomonas pseudomallei (cultures only) Chlamydia psittaci – avian strains (cultures only) Clostridium botulinum (cultures only) Coccidioides immitis (cultures only) Coxiella burnetii (cultures only) Crimean-Congo hemorrhagic fever virus Dengue virus (cultures only) Eastern equine encephalitis virus (cultures only) Escherichia coli, verotoxigenic (cultures only) Ebola virus Flexal virus Francisella tularensis (cultures only) Guanarito virus Hantaan virus Hantavirus causing hemorragic fever with renal syndrome Hendra virus Hepatitis B virus (cultures only) Herpes B virus (cultures only) Human immunodeficiency virus (cultures only) Highly pathogenic avian influenza virus (cultures only) Japanese Encephalitis virus (cultures only) Junin virus Kyasanur Forest disease virus Lassa virus Machupo virus Marburg virus Monkeypox virus Mycobacterium tuberculosis (cultures only) Nipah virus Omsk hemorrhagic fever virus Poliovirus (cultures only) Rabies virus (cultures only) Rickettsia prowazekii (cultures only) Rickettsia rickettsii (cultures only)

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 93

111

Bilaga 1

Part 2 – Classification

UN Number and Proper Shipping Micro-organism Name UN 2814 Rift Valley fever virus (cultures only) Infectious Russian spring–summer encephalitis virus (cultures only) substance, Sabia virus affecting Shigella dysenteriae type 1 (cultures only) humans Tick-borne encephalitis virus (cultures only) (cont.) Variola virus Venezuelan equine encephalitis virus (cultures only) West Nile virus (cultures only) Yellow fever virus (cultures only) Yersinia pestis (cultures only)

UN 2900 African swine fever virus (cultures only) Infectious Avian paramyxovirus Type 1 – Velogenic Newcastle disease virus (cultures only) substance, Classical swine fever virus (cultures only) affecting Foot and mouth disease virus (cultures only) animals only Lumpy skin disease virus (cultures only) Mycoplasma mycoides – Contagious bovine pleuropneumonia (cultures only) Peste des petits ruminants virus (cultures only) Rinderpest virus (cultures only) Sheep-pox virus (cultures only) Goatpox virus (cultures only) Swine vesicular disease virus (cultures only) Vesicular stomatitis virus (cultures only)

2.6.3.2.2.2 Category B: An infectious substance which does not meet the criteria for inclusion in Category A. Infectious substances in Category B shall be assigned to UN 3373.

Note: The Proper Shipping Name for UN 3373 is “BIOLOGICAL SUBSTANCE, CATEGORY B”.

2.6.3.2.3 Exemptions

2.6.3.2.3.1 Substances which do not contain infectious substances or substances which are unlikely to cause disease in humans or animals are not subject to the provisions of this Code, unless they meet the criteria for inclusion in another class.

2.6.3.2.3.2 Substances containing microorganisms which are non-pathogenic to humans or animals are not subject to the provisions of this Code unless they meet the criteria for inclusion in another class.

2.6.3.2.3.3 Substances in a form that any present pathogens have been neutralized or inactivated such that they no longer pose a health risk are not subject to the provisions of this Code unless they meet the criteria for inclusion in another class.

Note: Medical equipment which has been drained of free liquid is deemed to meet the requirements of this paragraph and is not subject to the provisions of this Code.

2.6.3.2.3.4 Environmental samples (including food and water samples) which are not considered to pose a significant risk of infection are not subject to the provisions of this Code unless they meet the criteria for inclusion in another class.

2.6.3.2.3.5 Dried blood spots, collected by applying a drop of blood onto absorbent material, or faecal occult blood screening tests and blood or blood components which have been collected for the purposes of transfusion or for the preparation of blood products to be used for transfusion or transplantation and any tissues or organs intended for use in transplants are not subject to this Code.

2.6.3.2.3.6 Human or animal specimens for which there is minimal likelihood that pathogens are present are not subject to the provisions of this Code if the specimen is transported in a packaging which will prevent any leakage and which is marked with the words “Exempt human specimen” or “Exempt animal specimen”, as appropriate. The packaging should meet the following conditions: (a) The packaging should consist of three components: (i) a leak-proof primary receptacle(s); (ii) a leak-proof secondary packaging; and (iii) an outer packaging of adequate strength for its capacity, mass and intended use, and with at least one surface having minimum dimensions of 100 mm × 100 mm;

94 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

112

Bilaga 1

Chapter 2.6 – Class 6 – Toxic and infectious substances

(b) For liquids, absorbent material in sufficient quantity to absorb the entire contents should be placed between the primary receptacle(s) and the secondary packaging so that, during transport, any release or leak of a liquid substance will not reach the outer packaging and will not compromise the integrity of the cushioning material; (c) When multiple fragile primary receptacles are placed in a single secondary packaging, they should be either individually wrapped or separated to prevent contact between them.

Note: An element of professional judgement is required to determine if a substance is exempt under this paragraph. That judgement should be based on the known medical history, symptoms and individual circumstances of the source, human or animal, and endemic local conditions. Examples of specimens which may be transported under this paragraph include the blood or urine tests to monitor cholesterol levels, blood glucose levels, hormone levels, or prostate specific antibodies (PSA); those required to monitor organ function such as heart, liver or kidney function for humans or animals with non-infectious diseases, or therapeutic drug monitoring; those conducted for insurance or employment purposes and are intended to determine the presence of drugs or alcohol; pregnancy test; biopsies to detect cancer; and antibody detection in humans or animals in the absence of any concern for infection (e.g., evaluation of vaccine-induced immunity, diagnosis of autoimmune disease, etc.).

2.6.3.2.3.7 Except for: (a) Medical waste (UN 3291); (b) Medical devices or equipment contaminated with or containing infectious substances in Category A (UN 2814 or UN 2900); and (c) Medical devices or equipment contaminated with or containing other dangerous goods that meet the definition of another hazard class,

medical devices or equipment potentially contaminated with or containing infectious substances which are being transported for disinfection, cleaning, sterilization, repair, or equipment evaluation are not subject to the provisions of this Code if packed in packagings designed and constructed in such a way that, under normal conditions of transport, they cannot break, be punctured or leak their contents. Packagings shall be designed to meet the construction requirements listed in 6.1.4 or 6.6.5.

These packagings shall meet the general packing requirements of 4.1.1.1 and 4.1.1.2 and be capable of retaining the medical devices and equipment when dropped from a height of 1.2 m.

The packagings shall be marked “USED MEDICAL DEVICE” or “USED MEDICAL EQUIPMENT”. When using overpacks, or unit loads these shall be marked in the same way, except when the inscription remains visible.

2.6.3.3 Biological products

2.6.3.3.1 For the purposes of this Code, biological products are divided into the following groups: (a) those which are manufactured and packaged in accordance with the requirements of appropriate national authorities and transported for the purposes of final packaging or distribution, and use for personal health care by medical professionals or individuals. Substances in this group are not subject to the provisions of this Code. (b) those which do not fall under (a) and are known or reasonably believed to contain infectious substances and which meet the criteria for inclusion in Category A or Category B. Substances in this group shall be assigned to UN 2814, UN 2900 or UN 3373, as appropriate.

Note: Some licensed biological products may present a biohazard only in certain parts of the world. Competent authorities may require that such biological products comply with local requirements for infectious substances or may impose other restrictions.

2.6.3.4 Genetically modified microorganisms and organisms

2.6.3.4.1 Genetically modified microorganisms not meeting the definition of infectious substance shall be classified in accordance with chapter 2.9.

2.6.3.5 Medical or clinical wastes

2.6.3.5.1 Medical or clinical wastes containing Category A infectious substances shall be assigned to UN 2814 or UN 2900, as appropriate. Medical or clinical wastes containing infectious substances in Category B shall be assigned to UN 3291.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 95

113

Bilaga 1

Part 2 – Classification

2.6.3.5.2 Medical or clinical wastes which are reasonably believed to have a low probability of containing infectious substances shall be assigned to UN 3291. For the assignment, international, regional or national waste catalogues may be taken into account. Note: The Proper Shipping Name for UN 3291 is CLINICAL WASTE, UNSPECIFIED, N.O.S. or (BIO) MEDICAL WASTE, N.O.S. or REGULATED MEDICAL WASTE, N.O.S. 2.6.3.5.3 Decontaminated medical or clinical wastes which previously contained infectious substances are not subject to the provisions of this Code unless they meet the criteria for inclusion in another class.

2.6.3.6 Infected animals

2.6.3.6.1 Unless an infectious substance cannot be consigned by any other means, live animals shall not be used to consign such a substance. A live animal which has been intentionally infected and is known or suspected to contain an infectious substance shall only be transported under terms and conditions approved by the competent authority. 2.6.3.6.2 Animal material affected by pathogens of Category A or which would be assigned to Category A in cultures only, shall be assigned to UN 2814 or UN 2900 as appropriate. Animal material affected by pathogens of Category B other than those which would be assigned to Category A if they were in cultures shall be assigned to UN 3373.

96 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

114

Bilaga 1

Chapter 2.7

Class 7 – Radioactive material

Note: For class 7, the type of packaging may have a decisive effect on classification.

2.7.1 Definitions

2.7.1.1 Radioactive material means any material containing radionuclides where both the activity concentration and the total activity in the consignment exceed the values specified in 2.7.2.2.1 to 2.7.2.2.6.

2.7.1.2 Contamination

Contamination means the presence of a radioactive substance on a surface in quantities in excess of 2 2 0.4 Bq/cm for beta and gamma emitters and low-toxicity alpha emitters, or 0.04 Bq/cm for all other alpha emitters. Non-fixed contamination means contamination that can be removed from a surface during routine conditions of transport. Fixed contamination means contamination other than non-fixed contamination.

2.7.1.3 Definitions of specific terms

A1 and A2 A1 means the activity value of special form radioactive material which is listed in the table in 2.7.2.2.1 or derived in 2.7.2.2.2 and is used to determine the activity limits for the provisions of this Code. A2 means the activity value of radioactive material, other than special form radioactive material, which is listed in the table in 2.7.2.2.1 or derived in 2.7.2.2.2 and is used to determine the activity limits for the provisions of this Code. Fissile nuclides means uranium-233, uranium-235, plutonium-239 and plutonium-241. Fissile material means a material containing any of the fissile nuclides. Excluded from the definition of fissile material are: .1 Natural uranium or depleted uranium which is unirradiated; and .2 Natural uranium or depleted uranium which has been irradiated in thermal reactors only. Low dispersible radioactive material means either a solid radioactive material or a solid radioactive material in a sealed capsule, that has limited dispersibility and is not in powder form. Low specific activity (LSA) material means radioactive material which by its nature has a limited specific activity, or radioactive material for which limits of estimated average specific activity apply. External shielding materials surrounding the LSA material shall not be considered in determining the estimated average specific activity. Low toxicity alpha emitters are: natural uranium; depleted uranium; natural thorium; uranium-235 or uranium-238; thorium-232; thorium-228 and thorium-230 when contained in ores or physical and chemical concentrates; or alpha emitters with a half-life of less than 10 days. Specific activity of a radionuclide means the activity per unit mass of that nuclide. The specific activity of a material shall mean the activity per unit mass of the material in which the radionuclides are essentially uniformly distributed. Special form radioactive material means either: .1 An indispersible solid radioactive material; or .2 A sealed capsule containing radioactive material. Surface contaminated object (SCO) means a solid object which is not itself radioactive but which has radioactive material distributed on its surfaces. -7 Unirradiated thorium means thorium containing not more than 10 g of uranium-233 per gram of thorium-232.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 97

115

Bilaga 1

Part 2 – Classification

× 3 Unirradiated uranium means uranium containing not more than 2 10 Bq of plutonium per gram of

6

uranium-235, not more than 9 × 10 Bq of fission products per gram of uranium-235 and not more than

3

5 × 10 g of uranium-236 per gram of uranium-235.

Uranium – natural, depleted, enriched means the following:

Natural uranium means uranium (which may be chemically separated) containing the naturally occurring distribution of uranium isotopes (approximately 99.28% uranium-238, and 0.72% uranium-235 by mass).

Depleted uranium means uranium containing a lesser mass percentage of uranium-235 than in natural uranium.

Enriched uranium means uranium containing a greater mass percentage of uranium-235 than 0.72%.

In all cases, a very small mass percentage of uranium-234 is present.

2.7.2 Classification

2.7.2.1 General provisions

2.7.2.1.1 Radioactive material shall be assigned to one of the UN Numbers specified in table 2.7.2.1.1 depending on the activity level of the radionuclides contained in a package, the fissile or non-fissile properties of these radionuclides, the type of package to be presented for transport, and the nature or form of the contents of the package, or special arrangements governing the transport operation, in accordance with the provisions laid down in 2.7.2.2 to 2.7.2.5.

Table 2.7.2.1.1 – Assignment of UN Numbers

Excepted packages (1.5.1.5) UN 2908 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, EXCEPTED PACKAGE – EMPTY PACKAGING UN 2909 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, EXCEPTED PACKAGE – ARTICLES MANUFACTURED FROM NATURAL URANIUM or DEPLETED URANIUM or NATURAL THORIUM UN 2910 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, EXCEPTED PACKAGE – LIMITED QUANTITY OF MATERIAL UN 2911 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, EXCEPTED PACKAGE – INSTRUMENTS or ARTICLES Low specific activity radioactive material (2.7.2.3.1) UN 2912 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, LOW SPECIFIC ACTIVITY (LSA-I), non-fissile or fissile – excepted UN 3321 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, LOW SPECIFIC ACTIVITY (LSA-II), non-fissile or fissile – excepted UN 3322 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, LOW SPECIFIC ACTIVITY (LSA-III), non-fissile or fissile – excepted UN 3324 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, LOW SPECIFIC ACTIVITY (LSA-II), FISSILE UN 3325 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, LOW SPECIFIC ACTIVITY (LSA-III), FISSILE Surface contaminated objects (2.7.2.3.2) UN 2913 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, SURFACE CONTAMINATED OBJECTS (SCO-I or SCO-II), non-fissile or fissile – excepted UN 3326 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, SURFACE CONTAMINATED OBJECTS (SCO-I or SCO-II), FISSILE Type A packages (2.7.2.4.4) UN 2915 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, TYPE A PACKAGE, non-special form, non-fissile or fissile – excepted UN 3327 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, TYPE A PACKAGE, FISSILE, non-special form UN 3332 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, TYPE A PACKAGE, SPECIAL FORM, non-fissile or fissile – excepted UN 3333 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, TYPE A PACKAGE, SPECIAL FORM, FISSILE Type B(U) package (2.7.2.4.6) UN 2916 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, TYPE B(U) PACKAGE, non-fissile or fissile – excepted UN 3328 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, TYPE B(U) PACKAGE, FISSILE

98 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

116

Bilaga 1

Chapter 2.7 – Class 7 – Radioactive material

Type B(M) package (2.7.2.4.6) UN 2917 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, TYPE B(M) PACKAGE, non-fissile or fissile – excepted UN 3329 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, TYPE B(M) PACKAGE, FISSILE Type C package (2.7.2.4.6) UN 3323 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, TYPE C PACKAGE, non-fissile or fissile – excepted UN 3330 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, TYPE C PACKAGE, FISSILE Special arrangement (2.7.2.5) UN 2919 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, TRANSPORTED UNDER SPECIAL ARRANGEMENT, non-fissile or fissile – excepted UN 3331 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, TRANSPORTED UNDER SPECIAL ARRANGEMENT, FISSILE Uranium hexafluoride (2.7.2.4.5) UN 2977 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, URANIUM HEXAFLUORIDE, FISSILE UN 2978 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, URANIUM HEXAFLUORIDE, non-fissile or fissile – excepted

2.7.2.2 Determination of activity level

2.7.2.2.1 The following basic values for individual radionuclides are given in table 2.7.2.2.1: .1 A1 and A2 in TBq; .2 Activity concentration for exempt material in Bq/g; and .3 Activity limits for exempt consignments in Bq.

Table 2.7.2.2.1 – Basic radionuclides values for individual radionuclides

Activity Activity limit A1 A2 concentration for for an exempt Radionuclide (atomic number) exempt material consignment (TBq) (TBq) (Bq/g) (Bq) Actinium (89) Ac-225 (a) –1 –3 1 4 8 × 10 6 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Ac-227 (a) 9 × 10–1 9 × 10–5 1 × 10–1 1 × 103 Ac-228 6 × 10–1 5 × 10–1 1 × 101 1 × 106 Silver (47) Ag-105 2 × 100 2 × 100 1 × 102 1 × 106 –1 –1 1 6 Ag-108m (a) 7 × 10 7 × 10 1 × 10 (b) 1 × 10 (b) –1 –1 1 6 Ag-110m (a) 4 × 10 4 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Ag-111 0 –1 3 6 2 × 10 6 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Aluminium (13) Al-26 –1 –1 1 5 1 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Americium (95) 1 –3 0 4 Am-241 1 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Am-242m (a) 1 –3 0 4 1 × 10 1 × 10 1× 10 (b) 1 × 10 (b) Am-243 (a) 5 × 100 1 × 10–3 1× 100(b) 1 × 103(b) Argon (18) Ar-37 1 1 6 8 4 × 10 4 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Ar-39 4 × 101 2 × 101 1 × 107 1 × 104 –1 –1 2 9 Ar-41 3 × 10 3 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Arsenic (33) –1 –1 1 5 As-72 3 × 10 3 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 1 1 3 7 As-73 4 × 10 4 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 As-74 0 –1 1 6 1 × 10 9 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 As-76 3 × 10–1 3 × 10–1 1 × 102 1 × 105 1 –1 3 6 As-77 2 × 10 7 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Astatine (85) At-211 (a) 2 × 101 5 × 10–1 1 × 103 1 × 107 Gold (79) Au-193 7 × 100 2 × 100 1 × 102 1 × 107 Au-194 1 × 100 1 × 100 1 × 101 1 × 106

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 99

117

Bilaga 1

Part 2 – Classification

Activity Activity limit A1 A2 concentration for for an exempt Radionuclide (atomic number) exempt material consignment (TBq) (TBq) (Bq/g) (Bq) 1 0 2 7 Au-195 1 × 10 6 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 0 –1 2 6 Au-198 1 × 10 6 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Au-199 1 –1 2 6 1 × 10 6 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Barium (56) Ba-131 (a) 0 0 2 6 2 × 10 2 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Ba-133 0 0 2 6 3 × 10 3 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Ba-133m 2 × 101 6 × 10–1 1 × 102 1 × 106 –1 –1 1 5 Ba-140 (a) 5 × 10 3 × 10 1× 10 (b) 1× 10 (b) Beryllium (4) 1 1 3 7 Be–7 2 × 10 2 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 1 –1 4 6 Be-10 4 × 10 6 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Bismuth (83) –1 –1 1 6 Bi-205 7 × 10 7 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 –1 –1 1 5 Bi-206 3 × 10 3 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Bi-207 –1 –1 1 6 7 × 10 7 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Bi-210 1 × 100 6 × 10–1 1 × 103 1 × 106 –1 –2 1 5 Bi-210m (a) 6 × 10 2 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Bi-212 (a) –1 –1 1 5 7 × 10 6 × 10 1× 10 (b) 1× 10 (b) Berkelium (97) 0 –4 0 4 Bk-247 8 × 10 8 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Bk-249 (a) 1 –1 3 6 4 × 10 3 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Bromine (35) –1 –1 1 5 Br-76 4 × 10 4 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Br-77 0 0 2 6 3 × 10 3 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Br-82 4 × 10–1 4 × 10–1 1 × 101 1 × 106 Carbon (6) C-11 0 –1 1 6 1 × 10 6 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 C-14 4 × 101 3 × 100 1 × 104 1 × 107 Calcium (20) Ca-41 Unlimited Unlimited 1 × 105 1 × 107 1 0 4 7 Ca-45 4 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 0 –1 1 6 Ca-47 (a) 3 × 10 3 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Cadmium (48) 1 0 4 6 Cd-109 3 × 10 2 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Cd-113m 1 –1 3 6 4 × 10 5 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Cd-115 (a) 0 –1 2 6 3 × 10 4 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Cd-115m 5 × 10–1 5 × 10–1 1 × 103 1 × 106 Cerium (58) Ce-139 7 × 100 2 × 100 1 × 102 1 × 106 1 –1 2 7 Ce-141 2 × 10 6 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 –1 –1 2 6 Ce-143 9 × 10 6 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Ce-144 (a) –1 –1 2 5 2 × 10 2 × 10 1 × 10 (b) 1× 10 (b) Californium (98) Cf-248 1 –3 1 4 4 × 10 6 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Cf-249 0 –4 0 3 3 × 10 8 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Cf-250 2 × 101 2 × 10–3 1 × 101 1 × 104 0 –4 0 3 Cf-251 7 × 10 7 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Cf-252 –1 –3 1 4 1 × 10 3 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Cf-253 (a) 1 –2 2 5 4 × 10 4 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Cf-254 1 × 10–3 1 × 10–3 1 × 100 1 × 103 Chlorine (17) Cl-36 1 × 101 6 × 10–1 1 × 104 1 × 106 –1 –1 1 5 Cl-38 2 × 10 2 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Curium (96) Cm-240 4 × 101 2 × 10–2 1 × 102 1 × 105 0 0 2 6 Cm-241 2 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Cm-242 1 –2 2 5 4 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Cm-243 0 –3 0 4 9 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Cm-244 2 × 101 2 × 10–3 1 × 101 1 × 104

100 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

118

Bilaga 1

Chapter 2.7 – Class 7 – Radioactive material

Activity Activity limit A1 A2 concentration for for an exempt Radionuclide (atomic number) exempt material consignment (TBq) (TBq) (Bq/g) (Bq) 0 –4 0 3 Cm-245 9 × 10 9 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 0 –4 0 3 Cm-246 9 × 10 9 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Cm-247 (a) 0 –3 0 4 3 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Cm-248 2 × 10–2 3 × 10–4 1 × 100 1 × 103 Cobalt (27) Co-55 –1 –1 1 6 5 × 10 5 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Co-56 3 × 10–1 3 × 10–1 1 × 101 1 × 105 1 1 2 6 Co-57 1 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Co-58 0 0 1 6 1 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Co-58m 1 1 4 7 4 × 10 4 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Co-60 4 × 10–1 4 × 10–1 1 × 101 1 × 105 Chromium (24) Cr-51 3 × 101 3 × 101 1 × 103 1 × 107 Caesium (55) Cs-129 0 0 2 5 4 × 10 4 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Cs-131 3 × 101 3 × 101 1 × 103 1 × 106 0 0 1 5 Cs-132 1 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Cs-134 –1 –1 1 4 7 × 10 7 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Cs-134m 1 –1 3 5 4 × 10 6 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Cs-135 4 × 101 1 × 100 1 × 104 1 × 107 –1 –1 1 5 Cs-136 5 × 10 5 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Cs-137 (a) 0 –1 1 4 2 × 10 6 × 10 1 × 10 (b) 1 × 10 (b) Copper (29) 0 0 2 6 Cu-64 6 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Cu-67 1 –1 2 6 1 × 10 7 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Dysprosium (66) 1 1 3 7 Dy-159 2 × 10 2 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Dy-165 –1 –1 3 6 9 × 10 6 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Dy-166 (a) 9 × 10–1 3 × 10–1 1 × 103 1 × 106 Erbium (68) Er-169 4 × 101 1 × 100 1 × 104 1 × 107 Er-171 8 × 10–1 5 × 10–1 1 × 102 1 × 106 Europium (63) Eu-147 2 × 100 2 × 100 1 × 102 1 × 106 –1 –1 1 6 Eu-148 5 × 10 5 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 1 1 2 7 Eu-149 2 × 10 2 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Eu-150 (short-lived) 0 –1 3 6 2 × 10 7 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Eu-150 (long-lived) 7 × 10–1 7 × 10–1 1 × 101 1 × 106 0 0 1 6 Eu-152 1 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 –1 –1 2 6 Eu-152m 8 × 10 8 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Eu-154 –1 –1 1 6 9 × 10 6 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Eu-155 2 × 101 3 × 100 1 × 102 1 × 107 –1 –1 1 6 Eu-156 7 × 10 7 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Fluorine (9) F-18 1 × 100 6 × 10–1 1 × 101 1 × 106 Iron (26) Fe-52 (a) 3 × 10–1 3 × 10–1 1 × 101 1 × 106 1 1 4 6 Fe-55 4 × 10 4 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 –1 –1 1 6 Fe-59 9 × 10 9 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Fe-60 (a) 1 –1 2 5 4 × 10 2 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Gallium (31) Ga-67 0 0 2 6 7 × 10 3 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Ga-68 –1 –1 1 5 5 × 10 5 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Ga-72 4 × 10–1 4 × 10–1 1 × 101 1 × 105 Gadolinium (64) Gd-146 (a) 5 × 10–1 5 × 10–1 1 × 101 1 × 106 1 –3 1 4 Gd-148 2 × 10 2 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 1 0 2 7 Gd-153 1 × 10 9 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Gd-159 0 –1 3 6 3 × 10 6 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 101

119

Bilaga 1

Part 2 – Classification

Activity Activity limit A1 A2 concentration for for an exempt Radionuclide (atomic number) exempt material consignment (TBq) (TBq) (Bq/g) (Bq) Germanium (32) Ge-68 (a) –1 –1 1 5 5 × 10 5 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Ge-71 4 × 101 4 × 101 1 × 104 1 × 108 –1 –1 1 5 Ge-77 3 × 10 3 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Hafnium (72) Hf-172 (a) 6 × 10–1 6 × 10–1 1 × 101 1 × 106 0 0 2 6 Hf-175 3 × 10 3 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Hf-181 0 –1 1 6 2 × 10 5 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Hf-182 Unlimited Unlimited 1 × 102 1 × 106 Mercury (80) Hg-194 (a) 0 0 1 6 1 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Hg-195m (a) 3 × 100 7 × 10–1 1 × 102 1 × 106 1 1 2 7 Hg-197 2 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 1 –1 2 6 Hg-197m 1 × 10 4 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Hg-203 0 0 2 5 5 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Holmium (67) Ho-166 –1 –1 3 5 4 × 10 4 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Ho-166m 6 × 10–1 5 × 10–1 1 × 101 1 × 106 Iodine (53) I-123 0 0 2 7 6 × 10 3 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 I-124 1 × 100 1 × 100 1 × 101 1 × 106 1 0 3 6 I-125 2 × 10 3 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 0 0 2 6 I-126 2 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 I-129 Unlimited Unlimited 2 5 1 × 10 1 × 10 I-131 3 × 100 7 × 10–1 1 × 102 1 × 106 –1 –1 1 5 I-132 4 × 10 4 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 –1 –1 1 6 I-133 7 × 10 6 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 I-134 –1 –1 1 5 3 × 10 3 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 I-135 (a) 6 × 10–1 6 × 10–1 1 × 101 1 × 106 Indium (49) In-111 3 × 100 3 × 100 1 × 102 1 × 106 In-113m 4 × 100 2 × 100 1 × 102 1 × 106 1 –1 2 6 In-114m (a) 1 × 10 5 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 In-115m 0 0 2 6 7 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Iridium (77) 1 1 2 7 Ir-189 (a) 1 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Ir-190 –1 –1 1 6 7 × 10 7 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Ir-192 1 × 100 (c) 6 × 10–1 1 × 101 1 × 104 –1 –1 2 5 Ir-194 3 × 10 3 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Potassium (19) K-40 9 × 10–1 9 × 10–1 1 × 102 1 × 106 –1 –1 2 6 K-42 2 × 10 2 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 K-43 –1 –1 1 6 7 × 10 6 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Krypton (36) 0 0 3 5 Kr-79 4 × 10 2 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Kr-81 1 1 4 7 4 × 10 4 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Kr-85 1 × 101 1 × 101 1 × 105 1 × 104 0 0 3 10 Kr-85m 8 × 10 3 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 –1 –1 2 9 Kr-87 2 × 10 2 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Lanthanum (57) 1 0 3 7 La-137 3 × 10 6 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 La-140 –1 –1 1 5 4 × 10 4 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Lutetium (71) –1 –1 1 6 Lu-172 6 × 10 6 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Lu-173 0 0 2 7 8 × 10 8 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Lu-174 9 × 100 9 × 100 1 × 102 1 × 107 1 1 2 7 Lu-174m 2 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 1 –1 3 7 Lu-177 3 × 10 7 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10

102 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

120

Bilaga 1

Chapter 2.7 – Class 7 – Radioactive material

Activity Activity limit A1 A2 concentration for for an exempt Radionuclide (atomic number) exempt material consignment (TBq) (TBq) (Bq/g) (Bq) Magnesium (12) Mg-28 (a) –1 –1 1 5 3 × 10 3 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Manganese (25) Mn-52 –1 –1 1 5 3 × 10 3 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Mn-53 Unlimited Unlimited 1 × 104 1 × 109 Mn-54 1 × 100 1 × 100 1 × 101 1 × 106 –1 –1 1 5 Mn-56 3 × 10 3 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Molybdenum (42) 1 1 3 8 Mo-93 4 × 10 2 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 0 –1 2 6 Mo-99 (a) 1 × 10 6 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Nitrogen (7) –1 –1 2 9 N-13 9 × 10 6 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Sodium (11) –1 –1 1 6 Na-22 5 × 10 5 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 –1 –1 1 5 Na-24 2 × 10 2 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Niobium (41) 1 1 4 7 Nb-93m 4 × 10 3 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Nb-94 –1 –1 1 6 7 × 10 7 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Nb-95 0 0 1 6 1 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Nb-97 9 × 10–1 6 × 10–1 1 × 101 1 × 106 Neodymium (60) Nd-147 6 × 100 6 × 10–1 1 × 102 1 × 106 –1 –1 2 6 Nd-149 6 × 10 5 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Nickel (28) Ni-59 Unlimited Unlimited 1 × 104 1 × 108 1 1 5 8 Ni-63 4 × 10 3 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 –1 –1 1 6 Ni-65 4 × 10 4 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Neptunium (93) 1 1 3 7 Np-235 4 × 10 4 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Np-236 (short-lived) 1 0 3 7 2 × 10 2 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Np-236 (long-lived) 9 × 100 2 × 10–2 1 × 102 1 × 105 Np-237 2 × 101 2 × 10–3 1× 100(b) 1 × 103(b) 0 –1 2 7 Np-239 7 × 10 4 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Osmium (76) 0 0 1 6 Os-185 1 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 1 0 2 7 Os-191 1 × 10 2 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Os-191m 1 1 3 7 4 × 10 3 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Os-193 2 × 100 6 × 10–1 1 × 102 1 × 106 –1 –1 2 5 Os-194 (a) 3 × 10 3 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Phosphorus (15) P-32 5 × 10–1 5 × 10–1 1 × 103 1 × 105 1 0 5 8 P-33 4 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Protactinium (91) 0 –2 1 6 Pa-230 (a) 2 × 10 7 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 0 –4 0 3 Pa-231 4 × 10 4 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Pa-233 0 –1 2 7 5 × 10 7 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Lead (82) Pb-201 0 0 1 6 1 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Pb-202 1 1 3 6 4 × 10 2 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Pb-203 4 × 100 3 × 100 1 × 102 1 × 106 4 7 Pb-205 Unlimited Unlimited 1 × 10 1 × 10 Pb-210 (a) 0 –2 1 4 1 × 10 5 × 10 1 × 10 (b) 1 × 10 (b) Pb-212 (a) –1 –1 1 5 7 × 10 2 × 10 1 × 10 (b) 1 × 10 (b) Palladium (46) Pd-103 (a) 1 1 3 8 4 × 10 4 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Pd-107 Unlimited Unlimited 1 × 105 1 × 108 0 –1 3 6 Pd-109 2 × 10 5 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Promethium (61) Pm-143 3 × 100 3 × 100 1 × 102 1 × 106

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 103

121

Bilaga 1

Part 2 – Classification

Activity Activity limit A1 A2 concentration for for an exempt Radionuclide (atomic number) exempt material consignment (TBq) (TBq) (Bq/g) (Bq) –1 –1 1 6 Pm-144 7 × 10 7 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 1 1 3 7 Pm-145 3 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Pm-147 1 0 4 7 4 × 10 2 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Pm-148m (a) 8 × 10–1 7 × 10–1 1 × 101 1 × 106 0 –1 3 6 Pm-149 2 × 10 6 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 0 –1 2 6 Pm-151 2 × 10 6 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Polonium (84) 1 –2 1 4 Po-210 4 × 10 2 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Praseodymium (59) –1 –1 2 5 Pr-142 4 × 10 4 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 0 –1 4 6 Pr-143 3 × 10 6 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Platinum (78) 0 –1 1 6 Pt-188 (a) 1 × 10 8 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 0 0 2 6 Pt-191 4 × 10 3 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Pt-193 1 1 4 7 4 × 10 4 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Pt-193m 4 × 101 5 × 10–1 1 × 103 1 × 107 1 –1 2 6 Pt-195m 1 × 10 5 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Pt-197 1 –1 3 6 2 × 10 6 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Pt-197m 1 –1 2 6 1 × 10 6 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Plutonium (94) Pu-236 1 –3 1 4 3 × 10 3 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Pu-237 2 × 101 2 × 101 1 × 103 1 × 107 1 –3 0 4 Pu-238 1 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 1 –3 0 4 Pu-239 1 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Pu-240 1 –3 0 3 1 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Pu-241 (a) 4 × 101 6 × 10–2 1 × 102 1 × 105 1 –3 0 4 Pu-242 1 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 –1 –3 0 4 Pu-244 (a) 4 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Radium (88) –1 –3 2 5 Ra-223 (a) 4 × 10 7 × 10 1 × 10 (b) 1× 10 (b) Ra-224 (a) –1 –2 1 5 4 × 10 2 × 10 1× 10 (b) 1× 10 (b) Ra-225 (a) –1 –3 2 5 2 × 10 4 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Ra-226 (a) 2 × 10–1 3 × 10–3 1× 101(b) 1× 104(b) –1 –2 1 5 Ra-228 (a) 6 × 10 2 × 10 1× 10 (b) 1× 10 (b) Rubidium (37) 0 –1 1 6 Rb-81 2 × 10 8 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 0 0 2 6 Rb-83 (a) 2 × 10 2 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Rb-84 0 0 1 6 1 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Rb-86 5 × 10–1 5 × 10–1 1 × 102 1 × 105 4 7 Rb-87 Unlimited Unlimited 1 × 10 1 × 10 4 7 Rb (nat) Unlimited Unlimited 1 × 10 1 × 10 Rhenium (75) 0 0 1 6 Re-184 1 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Re-184m 0 0 2 6 3 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Re-186 0 –1 3 6 2 × 10 6 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Re-187 Unlimited Unlimited 1 × 106 1 × 109 –1 –1 2 5 Re-188 4 × 10 4 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Re-189 (a) 0 –1 2 6 3 × 10 6 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Re (nat) Unlimited Unlimited 6 9 1 × 10 1 × 10 Rhodium (45) Rh-99 0 0 1 6 2 × 10 2 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Rh-101 4 × 100 3 × 100 1 × 102 1 × 107 –1 –1 1 6 Rh-102 5 × 10 5 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 0 0 2 6 Rh-102m 2 × 10 2 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Rh-103m 1 1 4 8 4 × 10 4 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Rh-105 1 × 101 8 × 10–1 1 × 102 1 × 107 Radon (86) Rn-222 (a) –1 –3 1 8 3 × 10 4 × 10 1× 10 (b) 1× 10 (b) Ruthenium (44)

104 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

122

Bilaga 1

Chapter 2.7 – Class 7 – Radioactive material

Activity Activity limit A1 A2 concentration for for an exempt Radionuclide (atomic number) exempt material consignment (TBq) (TBq) (Bq/g) (Bq) 0 0 2 7 Ru-97 5 × 10 5 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 0 0 2 6 Ru-103 (a) 2 × 10 2 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Ru-105 0 –1 1 6 1 × 10 6 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Ru-106 (a) 2 × 10–1 2 × 10–1 1 × 102(b) 1 × 105(b) Sulphur (16) S-35 1 0 5 8 4 × 10 3 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Antimony (51) Sb-122 –1 –1 2 4 4 × 10 4 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Sb-124 6 × 10–1 6 × 10–1 1 × 101 1 × 106 0 0 2 6 Sb-125 2 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 –1 –1 1 5 Sb-126 4 × 10 4 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Scandium (21) –1 –1 1 5 Sc-44 5 × 10 5 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 –1 –1 1 6 Sc-46 5 × 10 5 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Sc-47 1 –1 2 6 1 × 10 7 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Sc-48 3 × 10–1 3 × 10–1 1 × 101 1 × 105 Selenium (34) Se-75 3 × 100 3 × 100 1 × 102 1 × 106 Se-79 4 × 101 2 × 100 1 × 104 1 × 107 Silicon (14) Si-31 6 × 10–1 6 × 10–1 1 × 103 1 × 106 1 –1 3 6 Si-32 4 × 10 5 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Samarium (62) Sm-145 1 × 101 1 × 101 1 × 102 1 × 107 1 4 Sm-147 Unlimited Unlimited 1 × 10 1 × 10 Sm-151 1 1 4 8 4 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Sm-153 0 –1 2 6 9 × 10 6 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Tin (50) Sn-113 (a) 0 0 3 7 4 × 10 2 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Sn-117m 7 × 100 4 × 10–1 1 × 102 1 × 106 1 1 3 7 Sn-119m 4 × 10 3 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 1 –1 3 7 Sn-121m (a) 4 × 10 9 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Sn-123 –1 –1 3 6 8 × 10 6 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Sn-125 4 × 10–1 4 × 10–1 1 × 102 1 × 105 –1 –1 1 5 Sn-126 (a) 6 × 10 4 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Strontium (38) Sr-82 (a) 2 × 10–1 2 × 10–1 1 × 101 1 × 105 0 0 2 6 Sr-85 2 × 10 2 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Sr-85m 0 0 2 7 5 × 10 5 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Sr-87m 0 0 2 6 3 × 10 3 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Sr-89 6 × 10–1 6 × 10–1 1 × 103 1 × 106 –1 –1 2 4 Sr-90 (a) 3 × 10 3 × 10 1 × 10 (b) 1 × 10 (b) Sr-91 (a) –1 –1 1 5 3 × 10 3 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Sr-92 (a) 1 × 100 3 × 10–1 1 × 101 1 × 106 Tritium (1) T (H-3) 1 1 6 9 4 × 10 4 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Tantalum (73) Ta-178 (long-lived) 0 –1 1 6 1 × 10 8 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Ta-179 1 1 3 7 3 × 10 3 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Ta-182 9 × 10–1 5 × 10–1 1 × 101 1 × 104 Terbium (65) Tb-157 4 × 101 4 × 101 1 × 104 1 × 107 0 0 1 6 Tb-158 1 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 0 –1 1 6 Tb-160 1 × 10 6 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Technetium (43) 0 0 1 6 Tc-95m (a) 2 × 10 2 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Tc-96 –1 –1 1 6 4 × 10 4 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Tc-96m (a) –1 –1 3 7 4 × 10 4 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Tc-97 Unlimited Unlimited 1 × 103 1 × 108

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 105

123

Bilaga 1

Part 2 – Classification

Activity Activity limit A1 A2 concentration for for an exempt Radionuclide (atomic number) exempt material consignment (TBq) (TBq) (Bq/g) (Bq) 1 0 3 7 Tc-97m 4 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 –1 –1 1 6 Tc-98 8 × 10 7 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Tc-99 1 –1 4 7 4 × 10 9 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Tc-99m 1 × 101 4 × 100 1 × 102 1 × 107 Tellurium (52) Te-121 0 0 1 6 2 × 10 2 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Te-121m 5 × 100 3 × 100 1 × 102 1 × 106 0 0 2 7 Te-123m 8 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Te-125m 1 –1 3 7 2 × 10 9 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Te-127 1 –1 3 6 2 × 10 7 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Te-127m (a) 2 × 101 5 × 10–1 1 × 103 1 × 107 –1 –1 2 6 Te-129 7 × 10 6 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Te-129m (a) –1 –1 3 6 8 × 10 4 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Te-131m (a) 7 × 10–1 5 × 10–1 1 × 101 1 × 106 Te-132 (a) 5 × 10–1 4 × 10–1 1 × 102 1 × 107 Thorium (90) Th-227 1 × 101 5 × 10–3 1 × 101 1 × 104 –1 –3 0 4 Th-228 (a) 5 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 (b) 1× 10 (b) 0 –4 0 3 Th-229 5 × 10 5 × 10 1 × 10 (b) 1× 10 (b) Th-230 1 –3 0 4 1 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Th-231 4 × 101 2 × 10–2 1 × 103 1 × 107 1 4 Th-232 Unlimited Unlimited 1 × 10 1 × 10 –1 –1 3 5 Th-234 (a) 3 × 10 3 × 10 1 × 10 (b) 1× 10 (b) Th (nat) Unlimited Unlimited 0 3 1 × 10 (b) 1× 10 (b) Titanium (22) Ti-44 (a) –1 –1 1 5 5 × 10 4 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Thallium (81) –1 –1 1 6 Tl-200 9 × 10 9 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Tl-201 1 0 2 6 1 × 10 4 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Tl-202 2 × 100 2 × 100 1 × 102 1 × 106 1 –1 4 4 Tl-204 1 × 10 7 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Thulium (69) Tm-167 7 × 100 8 × 10–1 1 × 102 1 × 106 0 –1 3 6 Tm-170 3 × 10 6 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Tm-171 1 1 4 8 4 × 10 4 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Uranium (92) 1 –1 1 5 U-230 (fast lung absorption) (a) (d) 4 ×10 1 × 10 1× 10 (b) 1× 10 (b) U-230 (medium lung absorption) 1 –3 1 4 4 × 10 4 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 (a)(e) U-230 (slow lung absorption) (a)(f) 3 × 101 3 × 10–3 1 × 101 1 × 104 1 –2 0 3 U-232 (fast lung absorption) (d) 4 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 (b) 1× 10 (b) U-232 (medium lung absorption) (e) 1 –3 1 4 4 × 10 7 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 U-232 (slow lung absorption) (f) 1 –3 1 4 1 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 U-233 (fast lung absorption) (d) 4 × 101 9 × 10–2 1 × 101 1 × 104 1 –2 2 5 U-233 (medium lung absorption) (e) 4 × 10 2 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 U-233 (slow lung absorption) (f) 1 –3 1 5 4 × 10 6 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 U-234 (fast lung absorption) (d) 4 × 101 9 × 10–2 1 × 101 1 × 104 U-234 (medium lung absorption) (e) 4 × 101 2 × 10–2 1 × 102 1 × 105 1 –3 1 5 U-234 (slow lung absorption) (f) 4 × 10 6 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 U-235 (all lung absorption types) Unlimited Unlimited 1 4 1× 10 (b) 1× 10 (b) (a) (d) (e) (f) U-236 (fast lung absorption) (d) Unlimited Unlimited 1 × 101 1 × 104 1 –2 2 5 U-236 (medium lung absorption) (e) 4 × 10 2 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 U-236 (slow lung absorption) (f) 1 –3 1 4 4 × 10 6 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 U-238 (all lung absorption types) Unlimited Unlimited 1 4 1× 10 (b) 1× 10 (b) (d) (e) (f) 0 3 U (nat) Unlimited Unlimited 1 × 10 (b) 1× 10 (b) 0 3 U (enriched to 20% or less) (g) Unlimited Unlimited 1 × 10 1 × 10 U (dep) Unlimited Unlimited 0 3 1 × 10 1 × 10

106 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

124

Bilaga 1

Chapter 2.7 – Class 7 – Radioactive material

Activity Activity limit A1 A2 concentration for for an exempt Radionuclide (atomic number) exempt material consignment (TBq) (TBq) (Bq/g) (Bq) Vanadium (23) V-48 –1 –1 1 5 4 × 10 4 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 V-49 4 × 101 4 × 101 1 × 104 1 × 107 Tungsten (74) W-178 (a) 9 × 100 5 × 100 1 × 101 1 × 106 W-181 3 × 101 3 × 101 1 × 103 1 × 107 1 –1 4 7 W-185 4 × 10 8 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 W-187 0 –1 2 6 2 × 10 6 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 W-188 (a) 4 × 10–1 3 × 10–1 1 × 102 1 × 105 Xenon (54) Xe-122 (a) –1 –1 2 9 4 × 10 4 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Xe-123 2 × 100 7 × 10–1 1 × 102 1 × 109 0 0 3 5 Xe-127 4 × 10 2 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 1 1 4 4 Xe-131m 4 × 10 4 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Xe-133 1 1 3 4 2 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Xe-135 3 × 100 2 × 100 1 × 103 1 × 1010 Yttrium (39) Y-87 (a) 1 × 100 1 × 100 1 × 101 1 × 106 Y-88 4 × 10–1 4 × 10–1 1 × 101 1 × 106 –1 –1 3 5 Y-90 3 × 10 3 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Y-91 –1 –1 3 6 6 × 10 6 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Y-91m 2 × 100 2 × 100 1 × 102 1 × 106 –1 –1 2 5 Y-92 2 × 10 2 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 –1 –1 2 5 Y-93 3 × 10 3 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Ytterbium (70) 0 0 2 7 Yb-169 4 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 1 –1 3 7 Yb-175 3 × 10 9 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Zinc (30) 0 0 1 6 Zn-65 2 × 10 2 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Zn-69 0 –1 4 6 3 × 10 6 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Zn-69m (a) 3 × 100 6 × 10–1 1 × 102 1 × 106 Zirconium (40) Zr-88 0 0 2 6 3 × 10 3 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 Zr-93 Unlimited Unlimited 1 × 103(b) 1 × 107(b) 0 –1 1 6 Zr-95 (a) 2 × 10 8 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 –1 –1 1 5 Zr-97 (a) 4 × 10 4 × 10 1 × 10 (b) 1 × 10 (b)

(a) A1 and/or A2 values for these parent radionuclides include contributions from daughter radionuclides with half-lives less than 10 days, as listed in the following: Mg-28 Al-28 Ar-42 K-42 Ca-47 Sc-47 Ti-44 Sc-44 Fe-52 Mn-52m Fe-60 Co-60m Zn-69m Zn-69 Ge-68 Ga-68 Rb-83 Kr-83m Sr-82 Rb-82 Sr-90 Y-90 Sr-91 Y-91m Sr-92 Y-92 Y-87 Sr-87m Zr-95 Nb-95m Zr-97 Nb-97m, Nb-97 Mo-99 Tc-99m Tc-95m Tc-95

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 107

125

Bilaga 1

Part 2 – Classification

Tc-96m Tc-96 Ru-103 Rh-103m Ru-106 Rh-106 Pd-103 Rh-103m Ag-108m Ag-108 Ag-110m Ag-110 Cd-115 In-115m In-114m In-114 Sn-113 In-113m Sn-121m Sn-121 Sn-126 Sb-126m Te-118 Sb-118 Te-127m Te-127 Te-129m Te-129 Te-131m Te-131 Te-132 I-132 I-135 Xe-135m Xe-122 I-122 Cs-137 Ba-137m Ba-131 Cs-131 Ba-140 La-140 Ce-144 Pr-144m, Pr-144 Pm-148m Pm-148 Gd-146 Eu-146 Dy-166 Ho-166 Hf-172 Lu-172 W-178 Ta-178 W-188 Re-188 Re-189 Os-189m Os-194 Ir-194 Ir-189 Os-189m Pt-188 Ir-188 Hg-194 Au-194 Hg-195m Hg-195 Pb-210 Bi-210 Pb-212 Bi-212, Tl-208, Po-212 Bi-210m Tl-206 Bi-212 Tl-208, Po-212 At-211 Po-211 Rn-222 Po-218, Pb-214, At-218, Bi-214, Po-214 Ra-223 Rn-219, Po-215, Pb-211, Bi-211, Po-211, Tl-207 Ra-224 Rn-220, Po-216, Pb-212, Bi-212, Tl-208, Po-212 Ra-225 Ac-225, Fr-221, At-217, Bi-213, Tl-209, Po-213, Pb-209 Ra-226 Rn-222, Po-218, Pb-214, At-218, Bi-214, Po-214 Ra-228 Ac-228 Ac-225 Fr-221, At-217, Bi-213, Tl-209, Po-213, Pb-209 Ac-227 Fr-223 Th-228 Ra-224, Rn-220, Po-216, Pb-212, Bi-212, Tl-208, Po-212 Th-234 Pa-234m, Pa-234 Pa-230 Ac-226, Th-226, Fr-222, Ra-222, Rn-218, Po-214 U-230 Th-226, Ra-222, Rn-218, Po-214 U-235 Th-231 Pu-241 U-237 Pu-244 U-240, Np-240m

108 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

126

Bilaga 1

Chapter 2.7 – Class 7 – Radioactive material

Am-242m Am-242, Np-238 Am-243 Np-239 Cm-247 Pu-243 Bk-249 Am-245 Cf-253 Cm-249 (b) Parent nuclides and their progeny included in secular equilibrium are listed in the following: Sr-90 Y-90 Zr-93 Nb-93m Zr-97 Nb-97 Ru-106 Rh-106 Ag-108m Ag-108 Cs-137 Ba-137m Ce-144 Pr-144 Ba-140 La-140 Bi-212 Tl-208 (0.36), Po-212 (0.64) Pb-210 Bi-210, Po-210 Pb-212 Bi-212, Tl-208 (0.36), Po-212 (0.64) Rn-222 Po-218, Pb-214, Bi-214, Po-214 Ra-223 Rn-219, Po-215, Pb-211, Bi-211, Tl-207 Ra-224 Rn-220, Po-216, Pb-212, Bi-212, Tl-208 (0.36), Po-212 (0.64) Ra-226 Rn-222, Po-218, Pb-214, Bi-214, Po-214, Pb-210, Bi-210, Po-210 Ra-228 Ac-228 Th-228 Ra-224, Rn-220, Po-216, Pb-212, Bi-212, Tl-208 (0.36), Po-212 (0.64) Th-229 Ra-225, Ac-225, Fr-221, At-217, Bi-213, Po-213, Pb-209 Th (nat) Ra-228, Ac-228, Th-228, Ra-224, Rn-220, Po-216, Pb-212, Bi-212, Tl-208 (0.36), Po-212 (0.64) Th-234 Pa-234m U-230 Th-226, Ra-222, Rn-218, Po-214 U-232 Th-228, Ra-224, Rn-220, Po-216, Pb-212, Bi-212, Tl-208 (0.36), Po-212 (0.64) U-235 Th-231 U-238 Th-234, Pa-234m U (nat) Th-234, Pa-234m, U-234, Th-230, Ra-226, Rn-222, Po-218, Pb-214, Bi-214, Po-214, Pb-210, Bi-210, Po-210 Np-237 Pa-233 Am-242m Am-242 Am-243 Np-239 (c) The quantity may be determined from a measurement of the rate of decay or a measurement of the radiation level at a prescribed distance from the source. (d) These values apply only to compounds of uranium that take the chemical form of UF6, UO2F2 and UO2(NO3)2 in both normal and accident conditions of transport. (e) These values apply only to compounds of uranium that take the chemical form of UO3, UF4, UCl4 and hexavalent compounds in both normal and accident conditions of transport. (f) These values apply to all compounds of uranium other than those specified in (d) and (e) above. (g) These values apply to unirradiated uranium only.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 109

127

Bilaga 1

Part 2 – Classification

2.7.2.2.2 For individual radionuclides which are not listed in table 2.7.2.2.1, the determination of the basic radionuclide values referred to in 2.7.2.2.1 shall require multilateral approval. It is permissible to use an A2 value calculated using a dose coefficient for the appropriate lung absorption type as recommended by the International Commission on Radiological Protection, if the chemical forms of each radionuclide under both normal and accident conditions of transport are taken into consideration. Alternatively, the radionuclide values in table 2.7.2.2.2 may be used without obtaining competent authority approval.

Table 2.7.2.2.2 – Basic radionuclide values for unknown radionuclides or mixtures

Activity Activity limit A1 A2 concentration for for exempt Radioactive contents exempt material consignments (TBq) (TBq) (Bq/g) (Bq) Only beta or gamma emitting nuclides 0.1 0.02 1 4 1 × 10 1 × 10 are known to be present Alpha emitting nuclides but no 0.2 × –5 × –1 3 9 10 1 10 1 × 10 neutron emitters are known to be present Neutron emitting nuclides are known 0.001 –5 –1 3 9 × 10 1 × 10 1 × 10 to be present or no relevant data are available

2.7.2.2.3 In the calculations of A1 and A2 for a radionuclide not in table 2.7.2.2.1, a single radioactive decay chain in which the radionuclides are present in their naturally occurring proportions, and in which no daughter nuclide has a half-life either longer than 10 days or longer than that of the parent nuclide, shall be considered as a single radionuclide; and the activity to be taken into account and the A1 or A2 value to be applied shall be those corresponding to the parent nuclide of that chain. In the case of radioactive decay chains in which any daughter nuclide has a half-life either longer than 10 days or greater than that of the parent nuclide, the parent and such daughter nuclides shall be considered as mixtures of different nuclides.

2.7.2.2.4 For mixtures of radionuclides, the determination of the basic radionuclide values referred to in 2.7.2.2.1 may be determined as follows: Xm = 1 ______ f(i)

∑ ___

X(i) i where: f(i) is the fraction of activity or activity concentration of radionuclide i in the mixture; X(i) is the appropriate value of A1 or A2, or the activity concentration for exempt material or the activity limit for an exempt consignment, as appropriate, for the radionuclide i; and Xm is the derived value of A1 or A2, or the activity concentration for exempt material or the activity limit for an exempt consignment in the case of a mixture.

2.7.2.2.5 When the identity of each radionuclide is known but the individual activities of some of the radionuclides are not known, the radionuclides may be grouped and the lowest radionuclide value, as appropriate, for the radionuclides in each group may be used in applying the formulae in 2.7.2.2.4 and 2.7.2.4.4. Groups may be based on the total alpha activity and the total beta/gamma activity when these are known, using the lowest radionuclide values for the alpha emitters or beta/gamma emitters, respectively.

2.7.2.2.6 For individual radionuclides or for mixtures of radionuclides for which relevant data are not available, the values shown in table 2.7.2.2.2 shall be used.

2.7.2.3 Determination of other material characteristics

2.7.2.3.1 Low specific activity (LSA) material

2.7.2.3.1.1 [Reserved]

2.7.2.3.1.2 LSA material shall be in one of three groups: .1 LSA-I (i) uranium and thorium ores and concentrates of such ores, and other ores containing naturally occurring radionuclides which are intended to be processed for the use of these radionuclides; (ii) Natural uranium, depleted uranium, natural thorium or their compounds or mixtures, that are unirradiated and in solid or liquid form; (iii) radioactive material for which the A2 value is unlimited, excluding fissile material not excepted under 2.7.2.3.5; or

110 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

128

Bilaga 1

Chapter 2.7 – Class 7 – Radioactive material

(iv) other radioactive material in which the activity is distributed throughout and the estimated average specific activity does not exceed 30 times the values for activity concentration specified in 2.7.2.2.1 to 2.7.2.2.6, excluding fissile material not excepted under 2.7.2.3.5; .2 LSA-II (i) water with tritium concentration up to 0.8 TBq/ℓ; or (ii) other material in which the activity is distributed throughout and the estimated average specific –4 –5 activity does not exceed 10 A2/g for solids and gases, and 10 A2/g for liquids; .3 LSA-III – Solids (e.g., consolidated wastes, activated materials), excluding powders, meeting the requirements of 2.7.2.3.1.3, in which: (i) the radioactive material is distributed throughout a solid or a collection of solid objects, or is essentially uniformly distributed in a solid compact binding agent (such as concrete, bitumen, ceramic, etc.); (ii) the radioactive material is relatively insoluble, or it is intrinsically contained in a relatively insoluble matrix, so that, even under loss of packaging, the loss of radioactive material per package by leaching when placed in water for seven days would not exceed 0.1A2; and (iii) the estimated average specific activity of the solid, excluding any shielding material, does not exceed –3 2 × 10 A2/g.

2.7.2.3.1.3 LSA-III material shall be a solid of such a nature that, if the entire contents of a package were subjected to the test specified in 2.7.2.3.1.4, the activity in the water would not exceed 0.1A2.

2.7.2.3.1.4 LSA-III material shall be tested as follows:

A solid material sample representing the entire contents of the package shall be immersed for 7 days in water at ambient temperature. The volume of water to be used in the test shall be sufficient to ensure that at the end of the 7-day test period the free volume of the unabsorbed and unreacted water remaining shall be at least 10% of the volume of the solid test sample itself. The water shall have an initial pH of 6–8 and a maximum conductivity of 1 mS/m at 20°C. The total activity of the free volume of water shall be measured following the 7-day immersion of the test sample.

2.7.2.3.1.5 Demonstration of compliance with the performance standards in 2.7.2.3.1.4 shall be in accordance with 6.4.12.1 and 6.4.12.2.

2.7.2.3.2 Surface contaminated object (SCO)

SCO is classified in one of two groups: .1 SCO-I: A solid object on which: 2 (i) the non-fixed contamination on the accessible surface averaged over 300 cm (or the area of 2 2 the surface if less than 300 cm ) does not exceed 4 Bq/cm for beta and gamma emitters and / 2 low-toxicity alpha emitters, or 0.4 Bq cm for all other alpha emitters; 2 (ii) the fixed contamination on the accessible surface averaged over 300 cm (or the area of the surface 2 4 2 if less than 300 cm ) does not exceed 4 × 10 Bq/cm for beta and gamma emitters and low-toxicity 3 2 alpha emitters, or 4 × 10 Bq/cm for all other alpha emitters; and (iii) the non-fixed contamination plus the fixed contamination on the inaccessible surface averaged over 2 2 4 2 300 cm (or the area of the surface if less than 300 cm ) does not exceed 4 × 10 Bq/cm for beta × 3 / 2 and gamma emitters and low-toxicity alpha emitters, or 4 10 Bq cm for all other alpha emitters; .2 SCO-II: A solid object on which either the fixed or non-fixed contamination on the surface exceeds the applicable limits specified for SCO-I in 2.7.2.3.2.1 above and on which: 2 (i) the non-fixed contamination on the accessible surface averaged over 300 cm (or the area of 2 2 the surface if less than 300 cm ) does not exceed 400 Bq/cm for beta and gamma emitters and 2 low-toxicity alpha emitters, or 40 Bq/cm for all other alpha emitters; 2 (ii) the fixed contamination on the accessible surface averaged over 300 cm (or the area of the surface if less than 300 cm2) does not exceed 8 × 105 Bq/cm2 for beta and gamma emitters and low-toxicity 4 2 alpha emitters, or 8 × 10 Bq/cm for all other alpha emitters; and (iii) the non-fixed contamination plus the fixed contamination on the inaccessible surface averaged over 2 2 5 2 300 cm (or the area of the surface if less than 300 cm ) does not exceed 8 × 10 Bq/cm for beta 4 2 and gamma emitters and low-toxicity alpha emitters, or 8 × 10 Bq/cm for all other alpha emitters.

2.7.2.3.3 Special form radioactive material

2.7.2.3.3.1 .1 Special form radioactive material shall have at least one dimension not less than 5 mm. .2 When a sealed capsule constitutes part of the special form radioactive material, the capsule shall be so manufactured that it can be opened only by destroying it. .3 The design for special form radioactive material requires unilateral approval.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 111

129

Bilaga 1

Part 2 – Classification

2.7.2.3.3.2 Special form radioactive material shall be of such a nature or shall be so designed that, if it is subjected to the tests specified in 2.7.2.3.3.4 to 2.7.2.3.3.8, it shall meet the following requirements: .1 It would not break or shatter under the impact, percussion and bending tests 2.7.2.3.3.5.1, 2.7.2.3.3.5.2, 2.7.2.3.3.5.3, and 2.7.2.3.3.6.1 as applicable; .2 It would not melt or disperse in the applicable heat test 2.7.2.3.3.5.4 or 2.7.2.3.3.6.2 as applicable; and .3 The activity in the water from the leaching tests specified in 2.7.2.3.3.7 and 2.7.2.3.3.8 would not exceed 2 kBq; or alternatively for sealed sources, the leakage rate for the volumetric leakage assessment test specified in ISO 9978:1992 “Radiation protection – Sealed radioactive sources – Leakage test methods” would not exceed the applicable acceptance threshold acceptable to the competent authority.

2.7.2.3.3.3 Demonstration of compliance with the performance standards in 2.7.2.3.3.2 shall be in accordance with 6.4.12.1 and 6.4.12.2.

2.7.2.3.3.4 Specimens that comprise or simulate special form radioactive material shall be subjected to the impact test, the percussion test, the bending test, and the heat test specified in 2.7.2.3.3.5 or alternative tests as authorized in 2.7.2.3.3.6. A different specimen may be used for each of the tests. Following each test, a leaching assessment or volumetric leakage test shall be performed on the specimen by a method no less sensitive than the methods given in 2.7.2.3.3.7 for indispersible solid material or 2.7.2.3.3.8 for encapsulated material.

2.7.2.3.3.5 The relevant test methods are: .1 Impact test: The specimen shall drop onto the target from a height of 9 m. The target shall be as defined in 6.4.14; .2 Percussion test: The specimen shall be placed on a sheet of lead which is supported by a smooth solid surface and struck by the flat face of a mild steel bar so as to cause an impact equivalent to that resulting from a free drop of 1.4 kg through 1 m. The lower part of the bar shall be 25 mm in diameter with the edges rounded off to a radius of (3.0 ± 0.3) mm. The lead, of hardness number 3.5 to 4.5 on the Vickers scale and not more than 25 mm thick, shall cover an area greater than that covered by the specimen. A fresh surface of lead shall be used for each impact. The bar shall strike the specimen so as to cause maximum damage; .3 Bending test: The test shall apply only to long, slender sources with both a minimum length of 10 cm and a length to minimum width ratio of not less than 10. The specimen shall be rigidly clamped in a horizontal position so that one half of its length protrudes from the face of the clamp. The orientation of the specimen shall be such that the specimen will suffer maximum damage when its free end is struck by the flat face of a steel bar. The bar shall strike the specimen so as to cause an impact equivalent to that resulting from a free vertical drop of 1.4 kg through 1 m. The lower part of the bar shall be 25 mm in diameter with the edges rounded off to a radius of (3.0 ± 0.3) mm; .4 Heat test: The specimen shall be heated in air to a temperature of 800°C and held at that temperature for a period of 10 minutes and shall then be allowed to cool.

2.7.2.3.3.6 Specimens that comprise or simulate radioactive material enclosed in a sealed capsule may be excepted from: .1 The tests prescribed in 2.7.2.3.3.5.1 and 2.7.2.3.3.5.2 provided the mass of the special form radioactive material: (i) is less than 200 g and they are alternatively subjected to the class 4 impact test prescribed in ISO 2919:1999 “Radiation protection – Sealed radioactive sources – General requirements and classification”; or (ii) is less than 500 g and they are alternatively subjected to the class 5 impact test prescribed in ISO 2919:1999 “Radiation protection – Sealed radioactive sources – General requirements and classification”; and .2 The test prescribed in 2.7.2.3.3.5.4 provided they are alternatively subjected to the class 6 temperature test specified in ISO 2919:1999 “Radiation protection – Sealed radioactive sources – General requirements and classification”.

2.7.2.3.3.7 For specimens which comprise or simulate indispersible solid material, a leaching assessment shall be performed as follows: .1 The specimen shall be immersed for 7 days in water at ambient temperature. The volume of water to be used in the test shall be sufficient to ensure that at the end of the 7-day test period the free volume of the unabsorbed and unreacted water remaining shall be at least 10% of the volume of the solid test sample itself. The water shall have an initial pH of 6–8 and a maximum conductivity of 1 mS/m at 20°C; .2 The water with specimen shall then be heated to a temperature of (50 ± 5)°C and maintained at this temperature for 4 hours; .3 The activity of the water shall then be determined;

112 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

130

Bilaga 1

Chapter 2.7 – Class 7 – Radioactive material

.4 The specimen shall then be kept for at least 7 days in still air at not less than 30°C and relative humidity not less than 90%; .5 The specimen shall then be immersed in water of the same specification as in 2.7.2.3.3.7.1 above and the water with the specimen heated to (50 ± 5)°C and maintained at this temperature for 4 hours; .6 The activity of the water shall then be determined. 2.7.2.3.3.8 For specimens which comprise or simulate radioactive material enclosed in a sealed capsule, either a leaching assessment or a volumetric leakage assessment shall be performed as follows: .1 The leaching assessment shall consist of the following steps: (i) the specimen shall be immersed in water at ambient temperature. The water shall have an initial pH of 6–8 with a maximum conductivity of 1 mS/m at 20°C; (ii) the water and specimen shall be heated to a temperature of (50 ± 5)°C and maintained at this temperature for 4 hours; (iii) the activity of the water shall then be determined; (iv) the specimen shall then be kept for at least 7 days in still air at not less than 30°C and relative humidity of not less than 90%; (v) the process in (i), (ii) and (iii) shall be repeated. .2 The alternative volumetric leakage assessment shall comprise any of the tests prescribed in ISO 9978:1992 “Radiation protection – Sealed radioactive sources – Leakage test methods” which are acceptable to the competent authority.

2.7.2.3.4 Low dispersible material

2.7.2.3.4.1 The design for low dispersible radioactive material shall require multilateral approval. Low dispersible radioactive material shall be such that the total amount of this radioactive material in a package, taking into account the provisions of 6.4.8.14, shall meet the following provisions: .1 The radiation level at 3 m from the unshielded radioactive material does not exceed 10 mSv/h; .2 If subjected to the tests specified in 6.4.20.3 and 6.4.20.4, the airborne release in gaseous and particulate forms of up to 100 μm aerodynamic equivalent diameter would not exceed 100A2. A separate specimen may be used for each test; and .3 If subjected to the test specified in 2.7.2.3.1.4, the activity in the water would not exceed 100A2. In the application of this test, the damaging effects of the tests specified in 2.7.2.3.4.1.2 above shall be taken into account. 2.7.2.3.4.2 Low dispersible material shall be tested as follows: A specimen that comprises or simulates low dispersible radioactive material shall be subjected to the enhanced thermal test specified in 6.4.20.3 and the impact test specified in 6.4.20.4. A different specimen may be used for each of the tests. Following each test, the specimen shall be subjected to the leach test specified in 2.7.2.3.1.4. After each test it shall be determined if the applicable provisions of 2.7.2.3.4.1 have been met. 2.7.2.3.4.3 Demonstration of compliance with the performance standards in 2.7.2.3.4.1 and 2.7.2.3.4.2 shall be in accordance with 6.4.12.1 and 6.4.12.2.

2.7.2.3.5 Fissile material

Packages containing fissile material shall be classified under the relevant entry of table 2.7.2.1.1, the description of which includes the words “FISSILE” or “fissile-excepted”. Classification as “fissile-excepted” is allowed only if one of the conditions .1 to .4 of this paragraph is met. Only one type of exception is allowed per consignment (see also 6.4.7.2). .1 A mass limit per consignment, provided that the smallest external dimension of each package is not less than 10 cm, such that: mass of uranium -235 (g) mass of other fissile material (g) __________________ + _______________________ < 1 X Y where X and Y are the mass limits defined in table 2.7.2.3.5, provided that either: (i) each individual package contains not more than 15 g of fissile nuclides; for unpackaged material, this quantity limitation shall apply to the consignment being carried in or on the conveyance; or (ii) the fissile material is a homogeneous hydrogenous solution or mixture where the ratio of fissile nuclides to hydrogen is less than 5% by mass; or

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 113

131

Bilaga 1

Part 2 – Classification

(iii) there are not more than 5 g of fissile nuclides in any 10 litre volume of material. Beryllium shall not be present in quantities exceeding 1% of the applicable consignment mass limits provided in table 2.7.2.3.5 except where the concentration of beryllium in the material does not exceed 1 gram beryllium in any 1000 grams. Deuterium shall also not be present in quantities exceeding 1% of the applicable consignment mass limits provided in table 2.7.2.3.5 except where deuterium occurs up to natural concentration in hydrogen. .2 Uranium enriched in uranium-235 to a maximum of 1% by mass, and with a total plutonium and uranium-233 content not exceeding 1% of the mass of uranium-235, provided that the fissile nuclides are distributed essentially homogeneously throughout the material. In addition, if uranium-235 is present in metallic, oxide or carbide forms, it shall not form a lattice arrangement; .3 Liquid solutions of uranyl nitrate enriched in uranium-235 to a maximum of 2% by mass, with a total plutonium and uranium-233 content not exceeding 0.002% of the mass of uranium, and with a minimum nitrogen to uranium atomic ratio (N/U) of 2; .4 Plutonium containing not more than 20% of fissile nuclides by mass up to a maximum of 1 kg of plutonium per consignment. Shipments under this exception shall be under exclusive use.

Table 2.7.2.3.5 – Consignment mass limits for exceptions from the requirements for packages containing fissile material

Fissile material mass (g) Fissile material mass (g) mixed with substances having mixed with substances having an Fissile material an average hydrogen density less average hydrogen density greater than or equal to water than water Uranium-235 (X) 400 290 Other fissile material (Y) 250 180

2.7.2.4 Classification of packages or unpacked material

The quantity of radioactive material in a package shall not exceed the relevant limits for the package type as specified below.

2.7.2.4.1 Classification as excepted package

2.7.2.4.1.1 Packages may be classified as excepted packages if: .1 They are empty packagings having contained radioactive material; .2 They contain instruments or articles in limited quantities as specified in table 2.7.2.4.1.2; .3 They contain articles manufactured of natural uranium, depleted uranium or natural thorium; or .4 They contain radioactive material in limited quantities as specified in table 2.7.2.4.1.2.

2.7.2.4.1.2 A package containing radioactive material may be classified as an excepted package provided that the radiation level at any point on its external surface does not exceed 5 μSv/h.

Table 2.7.2.4.1.2 – Activity limits for excepted packages

Physical state Instruments or article Material package a a a of contents Item limits Package limits limits (1) (2) (3) (4) Solids –2 –3 special form 10 A1 A1 10 A1 other form 10–2 A A 10–3 A 2 2 2 –3 –1 –4 Liquids 10 A2 10 A2 10 A2 Gases –2 –1 –2 tritium 2 × 10 A2 2 × 10 A2 2 × 10 A2 –3 –2 –3 special form 10 A1 10 A1 10 A1 –3 –2 –3 other forms 10 A2 10 A2 10 A2 a For mixtures of radionuclides, see 2.7.2.2.4 to 2.7.2.2.6.

114 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

132

Bilaga 1

Chapter 2.7 – Class 7 – Radioactive material

2.7.2.4.1.3 Radioactive material which is enclosed in or is included as a component part of an instrument or other manufactured article may be classified under UN 2911, RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, EXCEPTED PACKAGE – INSTRUMENTS or ARTICLES only if: .1 the radiation level at 10 cm from any point on the external surface of any unpackaged instrument or article is not greater than 0.1 mSv/h; and .2 each instrument or manufactured article bears the marking “RADIOACTIVE” except: (i) radioluminescent time-pieces or devices; (ii) consumer products that either have received regulatory approval according to 1.5.1.4.4 or do not individually exceed the activity limit for an exempt consignment in table 2.7.2.2.1 (column 5), provided such products are transported in a package that bears the marking “RADIOACTIVE” on an internal surface in such a manner that warning of the presence of radioactive material is visible on opening the package; and .3 the active material is completely enclosed by non-active components (a device performing the sole function of containing radioactive material shall not be considered to be an instrument or manufactured article); and .4 the limits specified in columns 2 and 3 of table 2.7.2.4.1.2 are met for each individual item and each package, respectively. 2.7.2.4.1.4 Radioactive material in forms other than as specified in 2.7.2.4.1.3 and with an activity not exceeding the limits specified in column 4 of Table 2.7.2.4.1.2, may be classified under UN 2910, RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, EXCEPTED PACKAGE – LIMITED QUANTITY OF MATERIAL provided that: .1 the package retains its radioactive contents under routine conditions of transport; and .2 the package bears the marking “RADIOACTIVE” on an internal surface in such a manner that a warning of the presence of radioactive material is visible on opening the package. 2.7.2.4.1.5 An empty packaging which had previously contained radioactive material may be classified under UN 2908, RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, EXCEPTED PACKAGE – EMPTY PACKAGING, only if: .1 it is in a well-maintained condition and securely closed; .2 the outer surface of any uranium or thorium in its structure is covered with an inactive sheath made of metal or some other substantial material; 2 .3 the level of internal non-fixed contamination, when averaged over any 300 cm , does not exceed: 2 (i) 400 Bq/cm for beta and gamma emitters and low-toxicity alpha emitters; and 2 (ii) 40 Bq/cm for all other alpha emitters; and .4 any labels which may have been displayed on it in conformity with 5.2.2.1.12.1 are no longer visible. 2.7.2.4.1.6 Articles manufactured of natural uranium, depleted uranium or natural thorium and articles in which the sole radioactive material is unirradiated natural uranium, unirradiated depleted uranium or unirradiated natural thorium may be classified under UN 2909, RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, EXCEPTED PACKAGE – ARTICLES MANUFACTURED FROM NATURAL URANIUM or DEPLETED URANIUM or NATURAL THORIUM, only if the outer surface of the uranium or thorium is enclosed in an inactive sheath made of metal or some other substantial material.

2.7.2.4.2 Classification as Low specific activity (LSA) material

Radioactive material may only be classified as LSA material if the definition of LSA in 2.7.1.3 and the conditions of 2.7.2.3.1, 4.1.9.2 and 7.1.4.5.1 are met.

2.7.2.4.3 Classification as Surface contaminated object (SCO)

Radioactive material may be classified as SCO if the definition of SCO in 2.7.1.3 and the conditions of 2.7.2.3.2, 4.1.9.2 and 7.1.4.5.1 are met.

2.7.2.4.4 Classification as Type A package

Packages containing radioactive material may be classified as Type A packages provided that the following conditions are met: Type A packages shall not contain activities greater than the following: .1 For special form radioactive material – A1; or .2 For all other radioactive material – A2.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 115

133

Bilaga 1

Part 2 – Classification

For mixtures of radionuclides whose identities and respective activities are known, the following condition shall apply to the radioactive contents of a Type A package: B(i) C(j) ____ + ____ ≤ 1

∑ A1(i) ∑ A2(j)

i j where: B(i) is the activity of radionuclide i as special form radioactive material; A1(i) is the A1 value for radionuclide i; C(j) is the activity of radionuclide j as other than special form radioactive material; and A2(j) is the A2 value for radionuclide j.

2.7.2.4.5 Classification of uranium hexafluoride

Uranium hexafluoride shall only be assigned to UN No. 2977, RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, URANIUM HEXAFLUORIDE, FISSILE, or 2978, RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, URANIUM HEXAFLUORIDE, non-fissile or fissile – excepted. 2.7.2.4.5.1 Packages containing uranium hexafluoride shall not contain: .1 a mass of uranium hexafluoride different from that authorized for the package design; .2 a mass of uranium hexafluoride greater than a value that would lead to an ullage smaller than 5% at the maximum temperature of the package as specified for the plant systems where the package shall be used; or .3 uranium hexafluoride other than in solid form or at an internal pressure above atmospheric pressure when presented for transport.

2.7.2.4.6 Classification as Type B(U), Type B(M) or Type C packages

2.7.2.4.6.1 Packages not otherwise classified in 2.7.2.4 (2.7.2.4.1 to 2.7.2.4.5) shall be classified in accordance with the competent authority approval certificate for the package issued by the country of origin of design. 2.7.2.4.6.2 A package may only be classified as a Type B(U) if it does not contain: .1 activities greater than those authorized for the package design; .2 radionuclides different from those authorized for the package design; or .3 contents in a form, or a physical or chemical state, different from those authorized for the package design as specified in the certificate of approval. 2.7.2.4.6.3 A package may only be classified as a Type B(M) if it does not contain: .1 activities greater than those authorized for the package design; .2 radionuclides different from those authorized for the package design; or .3 contents in a form, or a physical or chemical state, different from those authorized for the package design, as specified in the certificate of approval. 2.7.2.4.6.4 A package may only be classified as a Type C if it does not contain: .1 activities greater than those authorized for the package design; .2 radionuclides different from those authorized for the package design; or .3 contents in a form, or physical or chemical state, different from those authorized for the package design, as specified in the certificate of approval.

2.7.2.5 Special arrangements

Radioactive material shall be classified as transported under special arrangement when it is intended to be transported in accordance with 1.5.4.

116 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

134

Bilaga 1

Chapter 2.8

Class 8 – Corrosive substances

2.8.1 Definition and properties

2.8.1.1 Definition

Class 8 substances (corrosive substances) means substances which, by chemical action, will cause severe damage when in contact with living tissue or, in the case of leakage, will materially damage, or even destroy, other goods or the means of transport.

2.8.1.2 Properties

2.8.1.2.1 In cases where particularly severe personal damage is to be expected, a note to that effect is made in the Dangerous Goods List in chapter 3.2 in the wording “causes (severe) burns to skin, eyes and mucous membranes”. 2.8.1.2.2 Many substances are sufficiently volatile to evolve vapour irritating to the nose and eyes. If so, this fact is mentioned in the Dangerous Goods List in chapter 3.2 in the wording “vapour irritates mucous membranes”. 2.8.1.2.3 A few substances may produce toxic gases when decomposed by very high temperatures. In these cases the statement “when involved in a fire, evolves toxic gases” appears in the Dangerous Goods List in chapter 3.2. 2.8.1.2.4 In addition to direct destructive action in contact with skin or mucous membranes, some substances in this class are toxic or harmful. Poisoning may result if they are swallowed, or if their vapour is inhaled; some of them even may penetrate the skin. Where appropriate, a statement is made to that effect in the Dangerous Goods List in chapter 3.2. 2.8.1.2.5 All substances in this class have a more or less destructive effect on materials such as metals and textiles. 2.8.1.2.5.1 In the Dangerous Goods List, the term “corrosive to most metals” means that any metal likely to be present in a ship, or in its cargo, may be attacked by the substance or its vapour. 2.8.1.2.5.2 The term “corrosive to aluminium, zinc, and tin” implies that iron or steel is not damaged in contact with the substance. 2.8.1.2.5.3 A few substances in this class can corrode glass, earthenware and other siliceous materials. Where appropriate, this is stated in the Dangerous Goods List in chapter 3.2. 2.8.1.2.6 Many substances in this class only become corrosive after having reacted with water, or with moisture in the air. This fact is indicated in the Dangerous Goods List in chapter 3.2 by the words “in the presence of moisture…”. The reaction of water with many substances is accompanied by the liberation of irritating and corrosive gases. Such gases usually become visible as fumes in the air. 2.8.1.2.7 A few substances in this class generate heat in reaction with water or organic materials, including wood, paper, fibres, some cushioning materials and certain fats and oils. Where appropriate, this is indicated in the Dangerous Goods List in chapter 3.2. 2.8.1.2.8 A substance which is designated as “stabilized” shall not be transported in the unstabilized state.

2.8.2 Assignment of packing groups

2.8.2.1 Substances and preparations of class 8 are divided among the three packing groups according to their degree of hazard in transport as follows: Packing group I: Very dangerous substances and preparations; Packing group II: Substances and preparations presenting medium danger; Packing group III: Substances and preparations presenting minor danger. The packing group to which a substance has been assigned is given in the Dangerous Goods List in chapter 3.2.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 117

135

Bilaga 1

Part 2 – Classification

2.8.2.2 Allocation of substances listed in the Dangerous Goods List in chapter 3.2 to the packing groups in class 8 has been on the basis of experience, taking into account such additional factors as inhalation risk (see 2.8.2.3) and reactivity with water (including the formation of dangerous decomposition products). New substances, including mixtures, can be assigned to packing groups on the basis of the length of time of contact necessary to produce full thickness destruction of human skin in accordance with the criteria in 2.8.2.5. Liquids, and solids which may become liquid during transport, which are judged not to cause full thickness destruction of human skin shall still be considered for their potential to cause corrosion in certain metal surfaces in accordance with the criteria in 2.8.2.5.3.2. 2.8.2.3 A substance or preparation meeting the criteria of class 8 and having an inhalation toxicity of dusts and mists (LC50) in the range of packing group I, but toxicity through oral ingestion or dermal contact only in the range of packing group III or less, shall be allocated to class 8 (see Note under 2.6.2.2.4.1). 2.8.2.4 In assigning the packing group to a substance in accordance with 2.8.2.2, account shall be taken of human experience in instances of accidental exposure. In the absence of human experience, the grouping shall be based on data obtained from experiments in accordance with OECD Test Guideline 404* or 435†. A substance ‡ § which is determined not to be corrosive in accordance with OECD Test Guideline 430 or 431 may be considered not to be corrosive to skin for the purposes of this Code without further testing. 2.8.2.5 Packing groups are assigned to corrosive substances in accordance with the following criteria: .1 Packing group I is assigned to substances that cause full thickness destruction of intact skin tissue within an observation period of up to 60 minutes starting after an exposure time of 3 minutes or less. .2 Packing group II is assigned to substances that cause full thickness destruction of intact skin tissue within an observation period of up to 14 days starting after an exposure time of more than 3 but not more than 60 minutes. .3 Packing group III is assigned to substances that: .1 cause full thickness destruction of intact skin tissue within an observation period of up to 14 days starting after an exposure time of more than 60 minutes but not more than 4 hours; or .2 are judged not to cause full thickness destruction of intact skin tissue but which exhibit a corrosion rate on either steel or aluminium surfaces exceeding 6.25 mm a year at a test temperature of 55°C when tested on both materials. For the purposes of testing steel, type S235JR+CR (1.0037 resp. St 37-2), S275J2G3+CR (1.0144 resp. St 44-3), ISO 3574:1999, Unified Numbering System (UNS) G10200 or SAE 1020, and for testing aluminium, non-clad, types 7075-T6 or AZ5GU T6 shall be used. An acceptable test is prescribed in the United Nations Manual of Tests and Criteria, part III, Section 37. Note: Where an initial test on either steel or aluminium indicates the substance being tested is corrosive, the follow-up test on the other metal is not required.

Table 2.8.2.5 – Table summarizing the criteria in 2.8.2.5

Packing Group Exposure Time Observation Period Effect I ≤ 3 min ≤ 60 min Full thickness destruction of intact skin II > 3 min ≤ 1 h ≤ 14 d Full thickness destruction of intact skin III > 1 h ≤ 4 h ≤ 14 d Full thickness destruction of intact skin III – – Corrosion rate on either steel or aluminium surfaces exceeding 6.25 mm a year at a test temperature of 55 °C when tested on both materials

* OECD Guideline for the testing of chemicals No. 404 “Acute Dermal Irritation/Corrosion” 2002. † OECD Guideline for the testing of chemicals No. 435 “In Vitro Membrane Barrier Test Method for Skin Corrosion” 2006. ‡ OECD Guideline for the testing of chemicals No. 430 “In Vitro Skin Corrosion: Transcutaneous Electrical Resistance Test (TER)” 2004. § OECD Guideline for the testing of chemicals No. 431 “In Vitro Skin Corrosion: Human Skin Model Test” 2004.

118 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

136

Bilaga 1

Chapter 2.9

Miscellaneous dangerous substances and articles (Class 9) and environmentally hazardous substances

Note 1: For the purposes of this Code, the environmentally hazardous substances (aquatic environment) criteria contained in this chapter apply to the classification of marine pollutants (see 2.10). Note 2: Although the environmentally hazardous substances (aquatic environment) criteria apply to all hazard classes (see 2.10.2.3 and 2.10.2.5), the criteria have been included in this chapter.

2.9.1 Definitions

2.9.1.1 Class 9 substances and articles (miscellaneous dangerous substances and articles) are substances and articles which, during transport, present a danger not covered by other classes.

2.9.2 Assignment to class 9

2.9.2.1 Class 9 includes, inter alia: .1 substances and articles not covered by other classes which experience has shown, or may show, to be of such a dangerous character that the provisions of part A of chapter VII of SOLAS 1974, as amended, shall apply. .2 substances not subject to the provisions of part A in chapter VII of the aforementioned Convention, but to which the provisions of Annex III of MARPOL 73/78, as amended, apply. 2.9.2.2 The substances and articles of class 9 are subdivided as follows:

Substances which, on inhalation as fine dust, may endanger health

2212 BLUE ASBESTOS (crocidolite) or 2212 BROWN ASBESTOS (amosite, mysorite) 2590 WHITE ASBESTOS (chrysotile, actinolite, anthophyllite, tremolite)

Substances evolving flammable vapour

2211 POLYMERIC BEADS, EXPANDABLE, evolving flammable vapour 3314 PLASTICS MOULDING COMPOUND in dough, sheet or extruded rope form evolving flammable vapour

Lithium batteries

3090 LITHIUM METAL BATTERIES (including lithium alloy batteries) 3091 LITHIUM METAL BATTERIES CONTAINED IN EQUIPMENT (including lithium alloy batteries) or 3091 LITHIUM METAL BATTERIES PACKED WITH EQUIPMENT (including lithium alloy batteries) 3480 LITHIUM ION BATTERIES (including lithium ion polymer batteries) 3481 LITHIUM ION BATTERIES CONTAINED IN EQUIPMENT (including lithium ion polymer batteries) or 3481 LITHIUM ION BATTERIES PACKED WITH EQUIPMENT (including lithium ion polymer batteries) Note: See 2.9.4.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 119

137

Bilaga 1

Part 2 – Classification

Electric double layer capacitors

3499 CAPACITOR, electric double layer (with an energy storage capacity greater than 0.3 Wh)

Life-saving appliances

2990 LIFE-SAVING APPLIANCES, SELF-INFLATING 3072 LIFE-SAVING APPLIANCES NOT SELF-INFLATING containing dangerous goods as equipment 3268 AIR BAG INFLATORS or 3268 AIR BAG MODULES or 3268 SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS

Substances and articles which, in the event of fire, may form dioxins

This group of substances includes: 2315 POLYCHLORINATED BIPHENYLS, LIQUID 3432 POLYCHLORINATED BIPHENYLS, SOLID 3151 POLYHALOGENATED BIPHENYLS, LIQUID or 3151 POLYHALOGENATED TERPHENYLS, LIQUID 3152 POLYHALOGENATED BIPHENYLS, SOLID or 3152 POLYHALOGENATED TERPHENYLS, SOLID Examples of articles are transformers, condensers and apparatus containing those substances.

Substances transported or offered for transport at elevated temperatures

3257 ELEVATED TEMPERATURE LIQUID, N.O.S., at or above 100°C and below its flashpoint (including molten metal, molten salts, etc.) 3258 ELEVATED TEMPERATURE SOLID, N.O.S., at or above 240°C

Environmentally hazardous substances

3077 ENVIRONMENTALLY HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCE, SOLID, N.O.S. 3082 ENVIRONMENTALLY HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCE, LIQUID, N.O.S. These entries are used for substances and mixtures which are dangerous to the aquatic environment that do not meet the classification criteria of any other class or another substance within class 9. These entries may also be used for wastes not otherwise subject to the provisions of this Code but which are covered under the Basel Convention on the Control of Transboundary Movements of Hazardous Wastes and their Disposal and for substances designated to be environmentally hazardous substances by the competent authority of the country of origin, transit or destination which do not meet the criteria for an environmentally hazardous substance according to the provisions of this Code or for any other hazard class. The criteria for substances which are hazardous to the aquatic environment are given in section 2.9.3.

Genetically modified microorganisms (GMMOs) and genetically modified organisms (GMOs)

3245 GENETICALLY MODIFIED MICROORGANISMS or 3245 GENETICALLY MODIFIED ORGANISMS GMMOs and GMOs which do not meet the definition of toxic substances (see 2.6.2) or infectious substances (see 2.6.3) shall be assigned to UN 3245. GMMOs or GMOs are not subject to the provisions of this Code when authorized for use by the competent authorities of the countries of origin, transit and destination. Genetically modified live animals shall be transported under terms and conditions of the competent authorities of the countries of origin and destination.

Other substances or articles presenting a danger during transport, but not meeting the definitions of another class:

1841 ACETALDEHYDE AMMONIA

120 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

138

Bilaga 1

Chapter 2.9 – Miscellaneous dangerous substances and articles (Class 9)

1845 CARBON DIOXIDE, SOLID (DRY ICE) 1931 ZINC DITHIONITE (ZINC HYDROSULPHITE) 1941 DIBROMODIFLUOROMETHANE 1990 BENZALDEHYDE 2071 AMMONIUM NITRATE BASED FERTILIZER 2216 FISH MEAL (FISH SCRAP), STABILIZED * 2807 MAGNETIZED MATERIAL 2969 CASTOR BEANS or 2969 CASTOR MEAL or 2969 CASTOR POMACE or 2969 CASTOR FLAKE 3166 ENGINE, INTERNAL COMBUSTION or 3166 VEHICLE, FLAMMABLE GAS POWERED or 3166 VEHICLE, FLAMMABLE LIQUID POWERED or 3166 ENGINE, FUEL CELL, FLAMMABLE GAS POWERED or 3166 ENGINE, FUEL CELL, FLAMMABLE LIQUID POWERED or 3166 VEHICLE, FUEL CELL, FLAMMABLE GAS POWERED or 3166 VEHICLE, FUEL CELL, FLAMMABLE LIQUID POWERED 3171 BATTERY-POWERED VEHICLE or 3171 BATTERY-POWERED EQUIPMENT 3316 CHEMICAL KIT or 3316 FIRST AID KIT 3334 AVIATION REGULATED LIQUID, N.O.S.* 3335 AVIATION REGULATED SOLID, N.O.S.* 3359 FUMIGATED CARGO TRANSPORT UNIT 3363 DANGEROUS GOODS IN MACHINERY or 3363 DANGEROUS GOODS IN APPARATUS 3496 BATTERIES, NICKEL-METAL HYDRIDE

2.9.3 Environmentally hazardous substances (aquatic environment)

2.9.3.1 General definitions

2.9.3.1.1 Environmentally hazardous substances include, inter alia, liquid or solid substances pollutant to the aquatic environment and solutions and mixtures of such substances (such as preparations and wastes). For the purposes of this section, Substance means chemical elements and their compounds in the natural state or obtained by any production process, including any additive necessary to preserve the stability of the product and any impurities deriving from the process used, but excluding any solvent which may be separated without affecting the stability of the substance or changing its composition. * Not subject to the provisions of this Code but may be subject to provisions governing the transport of dangerous goods by other modes (see also special provision 960).

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 121

139

Bilaga 1

Part 2 – Classification

2.9.3.1.2 The aquatic environment may be considered in terms of the aquatic organisms that live in the water, and the * aquatic ecosystem of which they are part . The basis, therefore, of the identification of hazard is the aquatic toxicity of the substance or mixture, although this may be modified by further information on the degradation and bioaccumulation behaviour. 2.9.3.1.3 While the following classification procedure is intended to apply to all substances and mixtures, it is recognized that in some cases, e.g., metals or poorly soluble inorganic compounds, special guidance will be necessary†. 2.9.3.1.4 The following definitions apply for acronyms or terms used in this section: BCF Bioconcentration Factor; BOD Biochemical Oxygen Demand; COD Chemical Oxygen Demand; GLP Good Laboratory Practices; ECx the concentration associated with x% response; EC50 the effective concentration of substance that causes 50% of the maximum response; ErC50 EC50 in terms of reduction of growth; Kow octanol/water partition coefficient; LC50 (50% lethal the concentration of a substance in water which causes the death of 50% (one half) in concentration) a group of test animals; L(E)C50 LC50 or EC50; NOEC (No the test concentration immediately below the lowest tested concentration with statisti- Observed Effect cally significant adverse effect. The NOEC has no statistically significant adverse Concentration) effect compared to the control; OECD Test Test guidelines published by the Organization for Economic Co-operation and Guidelines Development (OECD).

2.9.3.2 Definitions and data requirements

2.9.3.2.1 The basic elements for classification of environmentally hazardous substances (aquatic environment) are: (a) acute aquatic toxicity; (b) chronic aquatic toxicity (c) potential for or actual bioaccumulation; and (d) degradation (biotic or abiotic) for organic chemicals; 2.9.3.2.2 While data from internationally harmonized test methods are preferred, in practice, data from national methods may also be used where they are considered as equivalent. In general, it has been agreed that freshwater and marine species toxicity data can be considered as equivalent data and are preferably to be derived using OECD Test Guidelines or equivalent according to the principles of Good Laboratory Practices (GLP). Where such data are not available, classification shall be based on the best available data. 2.9.3.2.3 Acute aquatic toxicity means the intrinsic property of a substance to be injurious to an organism in a shortterm aquatic exposure to that substance. Acute (short-term) hazard, for classification purposes, means the hazard of a chemical caused by its acute toxicity to an organism during short-term aquatic exposure to that chemical. Acute aquatic toxicity shall normally be determined using a fish 96 hour LC50 (OECD Test Guideline 203 or equivalent), a crustacea species 48 hour EC50 (OECD Test Guideline 202 or equivalent) and/or an algal species 72 or 96 hour EC50 (OECD Test Guideline 201 or equivalent). These species are considered as surrogate for all aquatic organisms and data on other species such as Lemna may also be considered if the test methodology is suitable. 2.9.3.2.4 Chronic aquatic toxicity means the intrinsic property of a substance to cause adverse effects to aquatic organisms during aquatic exposures which are determined in relation to the life cycle of the organism.

* This does not address aquatic pollutants for which there may be a need to consider effects beyond the aquatic environment such as the impacts on human health, etc. † This can be found in annex 10 of the GHS.

122 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

140

Bilaga 1

Chapter 2.9 – Miscellaneous dangerous substances and articles (Class 9)

Long-term hazard, for classification purposes, means the hazard of a chemical caused by its chronic toxicity following long-term exposure in the aquatic environment.

Chronic toxicity data are less available than acute data and the range of testing procedures less standardized. Data generated according to the OECD Test Guidelines 210 (Fish Early Life Stage) or 211 (Daphnia Reproduction) and 201 (Algal Growth Inhibition) may be accepted. Other validated and internationally accepted tests may also be used. The NOECs or other equivalent ECx shall be used.

2.9.3.2.5 Bioaccumulation means net result of uptake, transformation and elimination of a substance in an organism due to all routes of exposure (i.e. air, water, sediment/soil and food).

The potential for bioaccumulation shall normally be determined by using the octanol/water partition coefficient, usually reported as a log Kow determined according to OECD Test Guideline 107 or 117. While this represents a potential to bioaccumulate, an experimentally determined Bioconcentration Factor (BCF) provides a better measure and shall be used in preference when available. A BCF shall be determined according to OECD Test Guideline 305.

2.9.3.2.6 Degradation means the decomposition of organic molecules to smaller molecules and eventually to carbon dioxide, water and salts.

Environmental degradation may be biotic or abiotic (e.g., hydrolysis) and the criteria used reflect this fact. Ready biodegradation is most easily defined using the biodegradability tests (A F) of OECD Test Guideline 301. A pass level in these tests may be considered as indicative of rapid degradation in most environments. These are freshwater tests and thus the use of the results from OECD Test Guideline 306, which is more suitable for marine environments, has also been included. Where such data are not available, a BOD(5 days)/COD ratio ≥ 0.5 is considered as indicative of rapid degradation. Abiotic degradation such as hydrolysis, primary degradation, both abiotic and biotic, degradation in non-aquatic media and proven rapid degradation in the * environment may all be considered in defining rapid degradability .

Substances are considered rapidly degradable in the environment if the following criteria are met:

(a) In 28-day ready biodegradation studies, the following levels of degradation are achieved:

(i) Tests based on dissolved organic carbon: 70%; (ii) Tests based on oxygen depletion or carbon dioxide generation: 60% of theoretical maxima.

These levels of biodegradation shall be achieved within 10 days of the start of degradation which point is taken as the time when 10% of the substance has been degraded, unless the substance is identified as a complex, multi-component substance with structurally similar constituents. In this case, and where there is † sufficient justification, the 10-day window condition may be waived and the pass level applied at 28 days ;

(b) In those cases where only BOD and COD data are available, when the ratio of BOD5/COD is ≥ 0.5; or

(c) If other convincing scientific evidence is available to demonstrate that the substance or mixture can be degraded (biotically and/or abiotically) in the aquatic environment to a level above 70% within a 28-day period.

2.9.3.3 Substance classification categories and criteria

2.9.3.3.1 Substances shall be classified as “environmentally hazardous substances (aquatic environment)”, if they satisfy the criteria for Acute 1, Chronic 1 or Chronic 2, according to Table 2.9.1. These criteria describe in detail the classification categories. They are diagrammatically summarized in Table 2.9.2.

Table 2.9.1 – Categories for substances hazardous to the aquatic environment (see Note 1)

(a) Acute (short-term) aquatic hazard

Category: Acute 1 (see Note 2) 96 hr LC50 (for fish) ≤ 1 mg/ℓ and/or 48 hr EC50 (for crustacea) ≤ 1 mg/ℓ and/or 72 or 96 hr ErC50 (for algae or other aquatic plants) ≤ 1 mg/ℓ (see Note 3)

* Special guidance on data interpretation is provided in chapter 4.1 and annex 9 of the GHS. † See chapter 4.1 and annex 9, paragraph A9.4.2.2.3 of the GHS.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 123

141

Bilaga 1

Part 2 – Classification

(b) Long-term aquatic hazard (see also Figure 2.9.1)

(i) Non-rapidly degradable substances (see Note 4) for which there are adequate chronic toxicity data available

Category Chronic 1: (see Note 2) Chronic NOEC or ECx (for fish) ≤ 0.1 mg/ℓ and/or Chronic NOEC or ECx (for crustacea) ≤ 0.1 mg/ℓ and/or Chronic NOEC or ECx (for algae or other aquatic plants) ≤ 0.1 mg/ℓ Category Chronic 2: Chronic NOEC or ECx (for fish) ≤ 1 mg/ℓ and/or Chronic NOEC or ECx (for crustacea) ≤ 1 mg/ℓ and/or Chronic NOEC or ECx (for algae or other aquatic plants) ≤ 1 mg/ℓ

(ii) Rapidly degradable substances for which there are adequate chronic toxicity data available

Category Chronic 1: (see Note 2) Chronic NOEC or ECx (for fish) ≤ 0.01 mg/ℓ and/or Chronic NOEC or ECx (for crustacea) ≤ 0.01 mg/ℓ and/or Chronic NOEC or ECx (for algae or other aquatic plants) ≤ 0.01 mg/ℓ Category Chronic 2: Chronic NOEC or ECx (for fish) ≤ 0.1 mg/ℓ and/or Chronic NOEC or ECx (for crustacea) ≤ 0.1 mg/ℓ and/or Chronic NOEC or ECx (for algae or other aquatic plants) ≤ 0.1 mg/ℓ

(iii) Substances for which adequate chronic toxicity data are not available

Category Chronic 1: (see Note 2) 96 hr LC50 (for fish) ≤ 1 mg/ℓ and/or 48 hr EC50 (for crustacea) ≤ 1 mg/ℓ and/or 72 or 96 hr ErC50 (for algae or other aquatic plants) ≤ 1 mg/ℓ (see Note 3) and the substance is not rapidly degradable and/or the experimentally determined BCF is ≥ 500 (or, if absent the log Kow≥ 4) (see Notes 4 and 5) Category Chronic 2: 96 hr LC50 (for fish) > 1 but ≤ 10 mg/ℓ and/or 48 hr EC50 (for crustacea) > 1 but ≤ 10 mg/ℓ and/or 72 or 96 hr ErC50 (for algae or other aquatic plants) > 1 but ≤ 10 mg/ℓ and/or (see Note 3) and the substance is not rapidly degradable and/or the experimentally determined BCF is ≥ 500 (or, if absent the log Kow≥ 4) (see Notes 4 and 5)

Note 1: The organisms fish, crustacea and algae are tested as surrogate species covering a range of trophic levels and taxa, and the test methods are highly standardized. Data on other organisms may also be considered, however, provided they represent equivalent species and test endpoints.

Note 2: When classifying substances as Acute 1 and/or Chronic 1 it is necessary at the same time to indicate an appropriate M factor (see 2.9.3.4.6.4) to apply the summation method.

Note 3: Where the algal toxicity ErC50 (= EC50 (growth rate)) falls more than 100 times below the next most sensitive species and results in a classification based solely on this effect, consideration shall be given to whether this toxicity is representative of the toxicity to aquatic plants. Where it can be shown that this is not the case, professional judgment shall be used in deciding if classification shall be applied. Classification shall be based on the ErC50. In circumstances where the basis of the EC50 is not specified and no ErC50 is recorded, classification shall be based on the lowest EC50 available.

Note 4: Lack of rapid degradability is based on either a lack of ready biodegradability or other evidence of lack of rapid degradation. When no useful data on degradability are available, either experimentally determined or estimated data, the substance shall be regarded as not rapidly degradable.

Note 5: Potential to bioaccumulate, based on an experimentally derived BCF ≥ 500 or, if absent, a log Kow≥ 4 provided log Kow is an appropriate descriptor for the bioaccumulation potential of the substance. Measured log Kow values take precedence over estimated values and measured BCF values take precedence over log Kow values.

124 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

142

Bilaga 1

Chapter 2.9 – Miscellaneous dangerous substances and articles (Class 9)

Are there adequate chronic Classify according to the criteria Yes given in Table 2.9.1(b)(i) or 2.9.1(b)(ii) toxicity data available for all three trophic levels? depending on information on rapid See Note 2 to degradation Table 2.9.1

No Assess both: (a) according to the criteria given in Table 2.9.1(b)(i) or 2.9.1(b)(ii) Are there (depending on information on rapid degradation), and adequate chronic Yes toxicity data available for one (b) (if for the other trophic level(s) or two trophic adequate acute toxicity data are levels? available) according to the criteria given in Table 2.9.1(b)(iii),

and classify according to the most stringent outcome No

Are there Yes Classify according to the criteria given adequate acute toxicity in Table 2.9.1(b)(iii) data available?

Figure 2.9.1 – Categories for substances long-term hazardous to the aquatic environment

2.9.3.3.2 The classification scheme in Table 2.9.2 below summarizes the classification criteria for substances.

Table 2.9.2 – Classification scheme for substances hazardous to the aquatic environment

Classification categories Acute hazard Long-term hazard (see Note 1) (see Note 2) Adequate chronic toxicity data available Adequate chronic toxicity Non-rapidly degradable Rapidly degradable data not available substances substances (see Note 1) (see Note 3) (see Note 3) Category: Acute 1 Category: Chronic 1 Category: Chronic 1 Category: Chronic 1 L(E)C50 ≤ 1.00 NOEC or ECx≤ 0.1 NOEC or ECx≤ 0.01 L(E)C50 ≤ 1.00 and lack of rapid degradability and/or BCF ≥ 500 or, if absent log Kow ≥ 4 Category: Chronic 2 Category: Chronic 2 Category: Chronic 2 0.1 < NOEC or ECx ≤ 1 0.01 < NOEC or ECx ≤ 0.1 1.00 < L(E)C50 ≤ 10.0 and lack of rapid degradability and/or BCF ≥ 500 or, if absent log Kow ≥ 4

Note 1: Acute toxicity band based on L(E)C50 values in mg/ℓ for fish, crustacea and/or algae or other aquatic

*

plants (or Quantitative Structure Activity Relationships (QSAR) estimation if no experimental data ).

Note 2: Substances are classified in the various chronic categories unless there are adequate chronic toxicity data available for all three trophic levels above the water solubility or above 1 mg/ℓ. (“Adequate” means that the data sufficiently cover the endpoint of concern. Generally this would mean measured test data, but in order to avoid unnecessary testing it can on a case by case basis also be estimated data, e.g., (Q)SAR, or for obvious cases expert judgment).

* Special guidance is provided in chapter 4.1, paragraph 4.1.2.13 and annex 9, section A9.6 of the GHS.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 125

143

Bilaga 1

Part 2 – Classification

Note 3: Chronic toxicity band based on NOEC or equivalent ECx values in mg/ℓ for fish or crustacea or other recognized measures for chronic toxicity.

2.9.3.4 Mixtures classification categories and criteria

2.9.3.4.1 The classification system for mixtures covers the classification categories which are used for substances, meaning categories Acute 1 and Chronic 1 and 2. In order to make use of all available data for purposes of classifying the aquatic environmental hazards of the mixture, the following assumption is made and is applied where appropriate:

The “relevant ingredients” of a mixture are those which are present in a concentration equal to or greater than 0.1% (by mass) for ingredients classified as Acute and/or Chronic 1 and equal to or greater than 1% for other ingredients, unless there is a presumption (e.g., in the case of highly toxic ingredients) that an ingredient present at less than 0.1% can still be relevant for classifying the mixture for aquatic environmental hazards.

2.9.3.4.2 The approach for classification of aquatic environmental hazards is tiered, and is dependent upon the type of information available for the mixture itself and for its ingredients. Elements of the tiered approach include: (a) classification based on tested mixtures; (b) classification based on bridging principles; (c) the use of “summation of classified ingredients” and/or an “additivity formula”.

Figure 2.9.2 below outlines the process to be followed.

Aquatic toxicity test data available on the mixture as a whole

CLASSIFY No Yes For acute/long-term hazard (2.9.3.4.3)

Sufficient data available on CLASSIFY Yes Apply bridging principles similar mixtures For acute/long-term (2.9.3.4.4) to estimate hazard hazards

No Apply Summation Method (2.9.3.4.6.1 to 2.9.3.4.6.4) using:

Ř Percentage of all ingredients classified as “Chronic” Either aquatic toxicity or Ř Percentage of ingredients CLASSIFY Yes classified as “Acute” classification data For acute/long-term available for all hazard Ř Percentage of ingredients relevant ingredients with acute toxicity data: apply additivity formula (2.9.3.4.5.2) and convert No the derived L(E)C50 or EqNOECm to the appropriate “Acute” or “Chronic” Category

Use available hazard Yes Apply Summation Method and CLASSIFY data of known additivity formula (2.9.3.4.6.1 to For acute/long-term ingredients 2.9.3.4.6.4) and apply 2.9.3.4.6.5 hazard

Figure 2.9.2 – Tiered approach to classification of mixtures for acute and long-term aquatic environmental hazards

126 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

144

Bilaga 1

Chapter 2.9 – Miscellaneous dangerous substances and articles (Class 9)

2.9.3.4.3 Classification of mixtures when toxicity data are available for the complete mixture

2.9.3.4.3.1 When the mixture as a whole has been tested to determine its aquatic toxicity, this information shall be used for classifying the mixture according to the criteria that have been agreed for substances. The classification is normally based on the data for fish, crustacea and algae/plants (see 2.9.3.2.3 and 2.9.3.2.4). When adequate acute or chronic data for the mixture as a whole are lacking, “bridging principles” or “summation method” shall be applied (see 2.9.3.4.4 to 2.9.3.4.6).

2.9.3.4.3.2 The long-term hazard classification of mixtures requires additional information on degradability and in certain cases bioaccumulation. There are no degradability and bioaccumulation data for mixtures as a whole. Degradability and bioaccumulation tests for mixtures are not used as they are usually difficult to interpret, and such tests may be meaningful only for single substances.

2.9.3.4.3.3 Classification for category Acute 1 (a) When there are adequate acute toxicity test data (LC50 or EC50) available for the mixture as a whole showing L(E)C50 ≤ 1 mg/ℓ: Classify the mixture as Acute 1 in accordance with Table 2.9.1 (a); (b) When there are acute toxicity test data (LC50(s) or EC50(s) available for the mixture as a whole showing L(E)C50(s) > 1 mg/l, or above the water solubility: No need to classify for acute hazard under these Regulations.

2.9.3.4.3.4 Classification for categories Chronic 1 and 2 (a) When there are adequate chronic toxicity data (ECx or NOEC) available for the mixture as a whole showing ECx or NOEC of the tested mixture ≤ 1 mg/ℓ: (i) classify the mixture as Chronic 1 or 2 in accordance with Table 2.9.1 (b)(ii) (rapidly degradable) if the available information allows the conclusion that all relevant ingredients of the mixture are rapidly degradable; (ii) classify the mixture as Chronic 1 or 2 in all other cases in accordance with Table 2.9.1 (b)(i) (non-rapidly degradable); (b) When there are adequate chronic toxicity data (ECx or NOEC) available for the mixture as a whole showing ECx(s) or NOEC(s) of the tested mixture > 1 mg/ℓ or above the water solubility: No need to classify for long-term hazard under these Regulations.

2.9.3.4.4 Classification of mixtures when toxicity data are not available for the complete mixture: bridging principles

2.9.3.4.4.1 Where the mixture itself has not been tested to determine its aquatic environmental hazard, but there are sufficient data on the individual ingredients and similar tested mixtures to adequately characterize the hazards of the mixture, these data shall be used in accordance with the following agreed bridging rules. This ensures that the classification process uses the available data to the greatest extent possible in characterizing the hazards of the mixture without the necessity for additional testing in animals.

2.9.3.4.4.2 Dilution

2.9.3.4.4.2.1 Where a new mixture is formed by diluting a tested mixture or a substance with a diluent which has an equivalent or lower aquatic hazard classification than the least toxic original ingredient and which is not expected to affect the aquatic hazards of other ingredients, then the resulting mixture shall be classified as equivalent to the original tested mixture or substance. Alternatively, the method explained in 2.9.3.4.5 may be applied.

2.9.3.4.4.2.2 If a mixture is formed by diluting another classified mixture or a substance with water or other totally non-toxic material, the toxicity of the mixture shall be calculated from the original mixture or substance.

2.9.3.4.4.3 Batching

2.9.3.4.4.3.1 The aquatic hazard classification of a tested production batch of a mixture shall be assumed to be substantially equivalent to that of another untested production batch of the same commercial product when produced by or under the control of the same manufacturer, unless there is reason to believe there is significant variation such that the aquatic hazard classification of the untested batch has changed. If the latter occurs, new classification is necessary.

2.9.3.4.4.4 Concentration of mixtures which are classified with the most severe classification categories (Chronic 1 and Acute 1)

2.9.3.4.4.4.1 If a tested mixture is classified as Chronic 1 and/or Acute 1, and the ingredients of the mixture which are classified as Chronic 1 and/or Acute 1 are further concentrated, the more concentrated untested mixture shall be classified with the same classification category as the original tested mixture without additional testing.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 127

145

Bilaga 1

Part 2 – Classification

2.9.3.4.4.5 Interpolation within one toxicity category

2.9.3.4.4.5.1 For three mixtures (A, B and C) with identical ingredients, where mixtures A and B have been tested and are in the same toxicity category, and where untested mixture C has the same toxicologically active ingredients as mixtures A and B but has concentrations of toxicologically active ingredients intermediate to the concentrations in mixtures A and B, then mixture C is assumed to be in the same category as A and B.

2.9.3.4.4.6 Substantially similar mixtures

2.9.3.4.4.6.1 Given the following: (a) Two mixtures: (i) A + B (ii) C + B (b) The concentration of ingredient B is essentially the same in both mixtures; (c) The concentration of ingredient A in mixture (i) equals that of ingredient C in mixture (ii); (d) Data on aquatic hazards for A and C are available and are substantially equivalent, i.e. they are in the same hazard category and are not expected to affect the aquatic toxicity of B. If mixture (i) or (ii) is already classified based on test data, then the other mixture can be assigned the same hazard category.

2.9.3.4.5 Classification of mixtures when toxicity data are available for all ingredients or only for some ingredients of the mixture

2.9.3.4.5.1 The classification of a mixture shall be based on summation of the concentrations of its classified ingredients. The percentage of ingredients classified as “Acute” or “Chronic” will feed straight into the summation method. Details of the summation method are described in 2.9.3.4.6.1 to 2.9.3.4.6.4.1. 2.9.3.4.5.2 Mixtures may be made of a combination of both ingredients that are classified (as Acute 1 and/or Chronic 1, 2) and those for which adequate toxicity test data are available. When adequate toxicity data are available for more than one ingredient in the mixture, the combined toxicity of those ingredients shall be calculated using the following additivity formulas (a) or (b), depending on the nature of the toxicity data: (a) Based on acute aquatic toxicity:

∑ Ci Ci

_______ = ∑ ______

L(E)C50m n L(E)C50i

where: Ci = concentration of ingredient i (mass percentage); L(E)C50i = LC50 or EC50 for ingredient i (mg/ℓ); n = number of ingredients, and i is running from 1 to n; and L(E)C50m = L(E)C50 of the part of the mixture with test data The calculated toxicity shall be used to assign that portion of the mixture an acute hazard category which is then subsequently used in applying the summation method; (b) Based on chronic aquatic toxicity:

∑ Ci+∑ Cj

Ci Cj ___________ = ______ + __________

EqNOECm ∑ NOECi ∑ 0.1 × NOECj

n n where: Ci = concentration of ingredient i (mass percentage) covering the rapidly degradable ingredients; Cj = concentration of ingredient j (mass percentage) covering the non-rapidly degradable ingredients; NOECi = NOEC (or other recognized measures for chronic toxicity) for ingredient i covering the rapidly degradable ingredients, in mg/ℓ; NOECj = NOEC (or other recognized measures for chronic toxicity) for ingredient j covering the non-rapidly degradable ingredients, in mg/ℓ; n = number of ingredients, and i and j are running from 1 to n; EqNOECm = equivalent NOEC of the part of the mixture with test data;

128 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

146

Bilaga 1

Chapter 2.9 – Miscellaneous dangerous substances and articles (Class 9)

The equivalent toxicity thus reflects the fact that non-rapidly degrading substances are classified one hazard category level more “severe” than rapidly degrading substances. The calculated equivalent toxicity shall be used to assign that portion of the mixture a long-term hazard category, in accordance with the criteria for rapidly degradable substances (Table 2.9.1 (b)(ii)), which is then subsequently used in applying the summation method. 2.9.3.4.5.3 When applying the additivity formula for part of the mixture, it is preferable to calculate the toxicity of this part of the mixture using for each ingredient toxicity values that relate to the same taxonomic group (i.e. fish, crustacea or algae) and then to use the highest toxicity (lowest value) obtained (i.e. use the most sensitive of the three groups). However, when toxicity data for each ingredient are not available in the same taxonomic group, the toxicity value of each ingredient shall be selected in the same manner that toxicity values are selected for the classification of substances, i.e. the higher toxicity (from the most sensitive test organism) is used. The calculated acute and chronic toxicity shall then be used to classify this part of the mixture as Acute 1 and/or Chronic 1 or 2 using the same criteria described for substances.

2.9.3.4.5.4 If a mixture is classified in more than one way, the method yielding the more conservative result shall be used.

2.9.3.4.6 Summation method

2.9.3.4.6.1 Classification procedure

2.9.3.4.6.1.1 In general a more severe classification for mixtures overrides a less severe classification, e.g., a classification with Chronic 1 overrides a classification with Chronic 2. As a consequence the classification procedure is already completed if the results of the classification is Chronic 1. A more severe classification than Chronic 1 is not possible; therefore, it is not necessary to pursue the classification procedure further.

2.9.3.4.6.2 Classification for the category Acute 1

2.9.3.4.6.2.1 First, all ingredients classified as Acute 1 are considered. If the sum of the concentrations (in %) of these ingredients is greater than or equal to 25% the whole mixture shall be classified as Acute 1. If the result of the calculation is a classification of the mixture as Acute 1, the classification process is completed. 2.9.3.4.6.2.2 The classification of mixtures for acute hazards based on this summation of the concentrations of classified ingredients is summarized in Table 2.9.3 below.

Table 2.9.3 – Classification of a mixture for acute hazards based on summation of the concentrations of classified ingredients

Sum of the concentrations (in %) of Mixture is classified as: ingredients classified as: Acute 1 × Ma≥ 25% Acute 1 a For explanation of the M factor, see 2.9.3.4.6.4.

2.9.3.4.6.3 Classification for categories Chronic 1 and 2

2.9.3.4.6.3.1 First, all ingredients classified as Chronic 1 are considered. If the sum of the concentrations (in %) of these ingredients is greater than or equal to 25% the mixture shall be classified as Chronic 1. If the result of the calculation is a classification of the mixture as Chronic 1 the classification procedure is completed 2.9.3.4.6.3.2 In cases where the mixture is not classified as Chronic 1, classification of the mixture as Chronic 2 is considered. A mixture shall be classified as Chronic 2 if 10 times the sum of the concentrations (in %) of all ingredients classified as Chronic 1 plus the sum of the concentrations (in %) of all ingredients classified as Chronic 2 is greater than or equal to 25%. If the result of the calculation is classification of the mixture as Chronic 2, the classification process is completed. 2.9.3.4.6.3.3 The classification of mixtures for long-term hazards based on this summation of the concentrations of classified ingredients is summarized in Table 2.9.4 below.

Table 2.9.4 – Classification of a mixture for long-term hazards based on summation of the concentrations of classified ingredients

Sum of the concentrations (in %) of Mixture classified as: ingredients classified as: Chronic 1 × Ma≥ 25% Chronic 1 (M × 10 × Chronic 1) + Chronic 2 ≥ 25% Chronic 2 a For explanation of the M factor, see 2.9.3.4.6.4.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 129

147

Bilaga 1

Part 2 – Classification

2.9.3.4.6.4 Mixtures with highly toxic ingredients

2.9.3.4.6.4.1 Acute 1 or Chronic 1 ingredients with acute toxicities well below 1 mg/l and/or chronic toxicities well below 0.1 mg/l (if non-rapidly degradable) and 0.01 mg/l (if rapidly degradable) may influence the toxicity of the mixture and are given increased weight in applying the summation method. When a mixture contains ingredients classified as Acute 1 or Chronic 1, the tiered approach described in 2.9.3.4.6.2 and 2.9.3.4.6.3 shall be applied using a weighted sum by multiplying the concentrations of Acute 1 and Chronic 1 ingredients by a factor, instead of merely adding up the percentages. This means that the concentration of “Acute 1” in the left column of Table 2.9.3 and the concentration of “Chronic 1” in the left column of Table 2.9.4 are multiplied by the appropriate multiplying factor. The multiplying factors to be applied to these ingredients are defined using the toxicity value, as summarized in Table 2.9.5 below. Therefore, in order to classify a mixture containing Acute 1 and/or Chronic 1 ingredients, the classifier needs to be informed of the value of the M factor in order to apply the summation method. Alternatively, the additivity formula (2.9.3.4.5.2) may be used when toxicity data are available for all highly toxic ingredients in the mixture and there is convincing evidence that all other ingredients, including those for which specific acute and/or chronic toxicity data are not available, are of low or no toxicity and do not significantly contribute to the environmental hazard of the mixture.

Table 2.9.5 – Multiplying factors for highly toxic ingredients of mixtures

Acute toxicity M factor Chronic toxicity M factor a b L(E)C50 value NOEC value NRD RD ingredients ingredients 0.1 < L(E)C50 ≤ 1 1 0.01 < NOEC ≤ 0.1 1 - 0.01 < L(E)C50 ≤ 0.1 10 0.001 < NOEC ≤ 0.01 10 1 0.001 < L(E)C50≤ 0.01 100 0.0001 < NOEC ≤ 0.001 100 10 0.0001 < L(E)C50≤ 0.001 1 000 0.00001 < NOEC ≤ 0.0001 1 000 100 0.00001 < L(E)C50≤ 0.0001 10 000 0.000001 < NOEC ≤ 10 000 1 000 0.00001 (continue in factor 10 intervals) (continue in factor 10 intervals) a Non-rapidly degradable. b Rapidly degradable.

2.9.3.4.6.5 Classification of mixtures with ingredients without any useable information

2.9.3.4.6.5.1 In the event that no useable information on acute and/or chronic aquatic toxicity is available for one or more relevant ingredients, it is concluded that the mixture cannot be attributed (a) definitive hazard category(ies). In this situation the mixture shall be classified based on the known ingredients only with the additional statement that: “x percent of the mixture consists of ingredient(s) of unknown hazards to the aquatic environment.”

2.9.4 Lithium batteries

Cells and batteries, cells and batteries contained in equipment, or cells and batteries packed with equipment, containing lithium in any form shall be assigned to UN Nos. 3090, 3091, 3480 or 3481 as appropriate. They may be transported under these entries if they meet the following provisions: .1 Each cell or battery is of the type proved to meet the requirements of each test of the Manual of Tests and Criteria, Part III, sub section 38.3. However batteries and cells manufactured before 1 January 2014 and conforming to a design type tested according to requirements of the 5th revised edition of the Manual of test and criteria, part III, sub section 38.3 may continue to be transported; Note: Batteries shall be of a design type proved to meet the testing requirements of the Manual of Tests and Criteria, Part III, sub section 38.3, irrespective of whether the cells of which they are composed are of a tested design type. .2 Each cell and battery incorporates a safety venting device or is designed to preclude a violent rupture under conditions normally incident to transport; .3 Each cell and battery is equipped with an effective means of preventing external short circuits; .4 Each battery containing cells or series of cells connected in parallel is equipped with effective means as necessary to prevent dangerous reverse current flow (e.g., diodes, fuses, etc.); .5 Cells and batteries shall be manufactured under a quality management programme that includes:

130 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

148

Bilaga 1

Chapter 2.9 – Miscellaneous dangerous substances and articles (Class 9)

(i) A description of the organizational structure and responsibilities of personnel with regard to design and product quality; (ii) The relevant inspection and test, quality control, quality assurance, and process operation instructions that will be used; (iii) Process controls that should include relevant activities to prevent and detect internal short circuit failure during manufacture of cells; (iv) Quality records, such as inspection reports, test data, calibration data and certificates. Test data shall be kept and made available to the competent authority upon request; (v) Management reviews to ensure the effective operation of the quality management programme; (vi) A process for control of documents and their revision; (vii) A means for control of cells or batteries that are not conforming to the type tested as mentioned in (.1) above; (viii) Training programmes and qualification procedures for relevant personnel; and (ix) Procedures to ensure that there is no damage to the final product. Note: In house quality management programmes may be accepted. Third party certification is not required, but the procedures listed in (i) to (ix) above shall be properly recorded and traceable. A copy of the quality management programme shall be made available to the competent authority upon request.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 131

149

Bilaga 1

Chapter 2.10

Marine pollutants

2.10.1 Definition

Marine pollutants means substances which are subject to the provisions of Annex III of MARPOL 73/78, as amended.

2.10.2 General provisions

2.10.2.1 Marine pollutants shall be transported under the provisions of Annex III of MARPOL 73/78, as amended. 2.10.2.2 The Index indicates by the symbol P in the column headed MP those substances, materials and articles that are identified as marine pollutants. 2.10.2.3 Marine pollutants shall be transported under the appropriate entry according to their properties if they fall within the criteria of any of the classes 1 to 8. If they do not fall within the criteria of any of these classes, they shall be transported under the entry: ENVIRONMENTALLY HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCE, SOLID, N.O.S., UN 3077 or ENVIRONMENTALLY HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCE, LIQUID, N.O.S., UN 3082, as appropriate, unless there is a specific entry in class 9. 2.10.2.4 Column 4 of the Dangerous Goods List also provides information on marine pollutants using the symbol P. 2.10.2.5 When a substance, material or article possesses properties that meet the criteria of a marine pollutant but is not identified in this Code, such substance, material or article shall be transported as a marine pollutant in accordance with the Code. 2.10.2.6 With the approval of the competent authority (see 7.9.2), substances, materials or articles that are identified as marine pollutants in this Code but which no longer meet the criteria as a marine pollutant need not be transported in accordance with the provisions of this Code applicable to marine pollutants.

2.10.3 Classification

2.10.3.1 Marine pollutants shall be classified in accordance with chapter 2.9.3.

132 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

150

Bilaga 1

PART 3

DANGEROUS GOODS LIST, SPECIAL PROVISIONS AND EXCEPTIONS

151

Bilaga 1

152

Bilaga 1

Chapter 3.1

General

3.1.1 Scope and general provisions

3.1.1.1 The Dangerous Goods List in chapter 3.2 lists many of the dangerous goods most commonly transported. The list includes entries for specific chemical substances and articles and generic or “not otherwise specified” entries. Since it is not practical to include a separate entry for every chemical substance or article of commercial importance specifically by name, especially names for mixtures and solutions of various chemical constituents and concentrations, the Dangerous Goods List also includes generic or “not otherwise specified” names (e.g., EXTRACTS, FLAVOURING, LIQUID, UN 1197 or FLAMMABLE LIQUID, N.O.S., UN 1993). On this basis, the Dangerous Goods List is intended to include an appropriate name or entry for any dangerous good which may be transported.

3.1.1.2 Where a dangerous good is specifically listed by name in the Dangerous Goods List, it shall be transported in accordance with the provisions in the List which are appropriate for that dangerous good. A generic or “not otherwise specified” entry may be used to permit the transport of substances, materials or articles which do not appear specifically by name in the Dangerous Goods List. Such a dangerous good may be transported only after its dangerous properties have been determined. Dangerous goods shall be classified according to the class definitions, tests and criteria. The name which most appropriately describes the dangerous goods shall be used. Only when the specific name of the dangerous goods does not appear in the Dangerous Goods List or the associated primary or subsidiary hazards assigned to it are not appropriate may a generic or “not otherwise specified” name be used. The classification shall be made by the shipper/consignor or by the appropriate competent authority where so specified in the Code. Once the class of the dangerous good has been so established, all conditions for transport, as provided in this Code, shall be met. Any dangerous good having or suspected of having explosive characteristics shall first be considered for inclusion in class 1. Some collective entries may be of the generic or “not otherwise specified” type provided that the Code contains provisions ensuring safety, both by excluding extremely dangerous goods from normal transport and by covering all subsidiary risks inherent in some goods.

3.1.1.3 Inherent instability in goods may take different dangerous forms, for example explosion, polymerization with intense evolution of heat or emission of flammable, toxic, corrosive or asphyxiant gases. The Dangerous Goods List indicates that certain dangerous goods, or dangerous goods in a specific form, concentration or state, are prohibited for transport by sea. This means that the goods specified are not suitable for transport by sea under normal conditions of transport. This does not mean that such goods may not be transported under any circumstances. For most goods, such inherent instability can be controlled by suitable packaging, dilution, stabilization, addition of an inhibitor, temperature control or other measures.

3.1.1.4 Where precautionary measures are laid down in the Dangerous Goods List in respect of a given dangerous good (such as that it shall be “stabilized” or “with x% water or phlegmatizer”), such dangerous good may not normally be transported when these measures have not been taken, unless the item in question is listed elsewhere (such as class 1) without any indication of, or with different, precautionary measures.

3.1.1.5 Certain substances, by the nature of their chemical composition, tend to polymerize or otherwise react in a dangerous manner under certain conditions of temperature or in contact with a catalyst. Mitigation of this tendency can be carried out either by requiring special transport conditions or by adding adequate amounts of chemical inhibitors or stabilizers to the product. These products shall be sufficiently stabilized to prevent any dangerous reaction during the intended voyage. If this cannot be ensured, the transport of such products is prohibited.

3.1.1.6 Where the contents of a portable tank is to be transported heated, the transport temperature is to be maintained during the intended voyage unless it is established that crystallization or solidification on cooling would not result in instability, which can occur with some stabilized or inhibited products.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 135

153

Bilaga 1

Dangerous Goods List, special provisions and exceptions –

3.1.2 Proper Shipping Names

Note 1: The Proper Shipping Names of the dangerous goods are those listed in chapter 3.2, Dangerous Goods List. Synonyms, secondary names, initials, abbreviations of names, etc. have been included in the Index to facilitate the search for the Proper Shipping Name (see part 5, Consignment Procedures). Note 2: For Proper Shipping Names to be used for transport of samples, see 2.0.4. For Proper Shipping Names to be used for transport of wastes, see 5.4.1.4.3.3. 3.1.2.1 The Proper Shipping Name is that portion of the entry most accurately describing the goods in the Dangerous Goods List, which is shown in upper-case characters (plus any numbers, Greek letters, ‘sec’, ‘tert’, and the letters m, n, o, p, which form an integral part of the name). An alternative Proper Shipping Name may be shown in brackets following the main Proper Shipping Name (such as ETHANOL (ETHYL ALCOHOL)). Portions of an entry appearing in lower case need not be considered as part of the Proper Shipping Name but may be used. 3.1.2.2 When conjunctions such as “and” or “or” are in lower case or when segments of the name are punctuated by commas, the entire name of the entry need not necessarily be shown in the transport document or package markings. This is the case particularly when a combination of several distinct entries are listed under a single UN Number. Examples illustrating the selection of the Proper Shipping Name for such entries are: .1 UN 1057 LIGHTERS or LIGHTER REFILLS – The Proper Shipping Name is the most appropriate of the following possible combinations: LIGHTERS LIGHTER REFILLS; .2 UN 2583 ALKYLSULPHONIC ACIDS, SOLID or ARYLSULPHONIC ACIDS, SOLID with more than 5% free sulphuric acid – The Proper Shipping Name is the most appropriate of the following: ALKYLSULPHONIC ACIDS, SOLID ARYLSULPHONIC ACIDS, SOLID; .3 UN 2793 FERROUS METAL BORINGS, SHAVINGS, TURNINGS or CUTTINGS in a form liable to selfheating. The Proper Shipping Name is the most appropriate of the following combinations: FERROUS METAL BORINGS FERROUS METAL SHAVINGS FERROUS METAL TURNINGS FERROUS METAL CUTTINGS. 3.1.2.3 Proper Shipping Names may be used in the singular or plural as appropriate. In addition, when qualifying words are used as part of the Proper Shipping Name, their sequence on documentation or packages is optional. Commercial or military names for goods of class 1, which contain the Proper Shipping Name supplemented by additional text, may be used. 3.1.2.4 Many substances have an entry for both the liquid and solid state (see definitions for liquids and solids in 1.2.1), or for the solid and solution. These are allocated separate UN Numbers which are not necessarily adjacent to each other. Details are provided in the alphabetical index, e.g.: NITROXYLENES, LIQUID – 6.1 1665 NITROXYLENES, SOLID – 6.1 3447. 3.1.2.5 Where it is not already included, the qualifying word “MOLTEN” shall be added to the Proper Shipping Name when a substance which is solid in accordance with the definition in 1.2.1 is offered for transport in the molten state (such as ALKYLPHENOL, SOLID, N.O.S., MOLTEN). For elevated temperature substances, see 5.4.1.4.3.4. 3.1.2.6 Except for self-reactive substances and organic peroxides and unless it is already included in capital letters in the name indicated in the Dangerous Goods List, the word STABILIZED shall be added as part of the Proper Shipping Name of the substance which without stabilization would be forbidden from transport in accordance with 1.1.3 due to it being liable to dangerously react under conditions normally encountered in transport (such as TOXIC LIQUID, ORGANIC, N.O.S., STABILIZED). When temperature control is used to stabilize such substances to prevent the development of any dangerous excess pressure, then: .1 For liquids: where the SADT is less than or equal to 50°C, the provisions of 7.3.7.5 shall apply; .2 For gases: the conditions of transport shall be approved by the competent authority. 3.1.2.7 Hydrates may be transported under the Proper Shipping Name for the anhydrous substance.

136 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

154

Bilaga 1

Chapter 3.1 – General

3.1.2.8 Generic or “not otherwise specified” (N.O.S.) entries

3.1.2.8.1 Generic and “not otherwise specified” Proper Shipping Names that are assigned to special provision 274 or 318 in column 6 of the Dangerous Goods List shall be supplemented with the technical or chemical group names unless a national law or international convention prohibits its disclosure if it is a controlled substance. For explosives of class 1, the dangerous goods description may be supplemented by additional descriptive text to indicate commercial or military names. Technical and chemical group names shall be entered in brackets immediately following the Proper Shipping Name. An appropriate modifier, such as “contains” or “containing” or other qualifying words such as “mixture”, “solution”, etc., and the percentage of the technical constituent may also be used. For example: “UN 1993 Flammable liquid, n.o.s. (contains xylene and benzene), 3, PG II”. 3.1.2.8.1.1 The technical name shall be a recognized chemical or biological name or other name currently used in scientific and technical handbooks, journals and texts. Trade names shall not be used for this purpose. In the case of pesticides, only ISO common name(s), other name(s) in the WHO Recommended Classification of Pesticides by Hazard and Guidelines to Classification, or the name(s) of the active substance(s) may be used. 3.1.2.8.1.2 When a mixture of dangerous goods is described by one of the “N.O.S” or “generic” entries to which special provision 274 has been allocated in the Dangerous Goods List, not more than the two constituents which most predominantly contribute to the hazard or hazards of a mixture need to be shown, excluding controlled substances when their disclosure is prohibited by national law or international convention. If a package containing a mixture is labelled with any subsidiary risk label, one of the two technical names shown in brackets shall be the name of the constituent which compels the use of the subsidiary risk label. 3.1.2.8.1.3 Examples illustrating the selection of the Proper Shipping Name supplemented with the technical name of goods for such N.O.S. entries are: UN 2902 PESTICIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC, N.O.S. (drazoxolon) UN 3394 ORGANOMETALLIC SUBSTANCE, LIQUID, PYROPHORIC, WATER-REACTIVE (trimethylgallium).

3.1.2.9 Marine pollutants

3.1.2.9.1 For generic or “not otherwise specified” (N.O.S.) entries, the Proper Shipping Name shall be supplemented with the recognized chemical name of the marine pollutant. 3.1.2.9.2 Examples illustrating the selection of the Proper Shipping Name supplemented with the recognized technical name of goods for such entries are indicated below: UN 1993 FLAMMABLE LIQUID, N.O.S. (propyl acetate, di-n-butyltin di-2-ethylhexanoate) class 3 PG III (50°C c.c.) MARINE POLLUTANT UN 1263 PAINT (triethylbenzene) class 3 PG III (27°C c.c.) MARINE POLLUTANT

3.1.3 Mixtures or solutions

Note: Where a substance is specifically listed by name in the Dangerous Goods List, it shall be identified in transport by the Proper Shipping Name in the Dangerous Goods List. Such substances may contain technical impurities (for example those deriving from the production process) or additives for stability or other purposes that do not affect their classification. However, a substance listed by name containing technical impurities or additives for stability or other purposes affecting its classification shall be considered a mixture or solution (see 2.0.2.2 and 2.0.2.5). 3.1.3.1 A mixture or solution is not subject to the provisions of this Code if the characteristics, properties, form or physical state of the mixture or solution are such that it does not meet the criteria, including human experience criteria, for inclusion in any class. 3.1.3.2 A mixture or solution meeting the classification criteria of this Code composed of a single predominant substance identified by name in the Dangerous Goods List and one or more substances not subject to the provisions of this Code and/or traces of one or more substances identified by name in the Dangerous Goods List, shall be assigned the UN Number and Proper Shipping Name of the predominant substance named in the Dangerous Goods List unless: .1 the mixture or solution is identified by name in the Dangerous Goods List; .2 the name and description of the substance named in the Dangerous Goods List specifically indicate that they apply only to the pure substance; .3 the hazard class or division, subsidiary risk(s), packing group, or physical state of the mixture or solution is different from that of the substance named in the Dangerous Goods List; or .4 the hazard characteristics and properties of the mixture or solution necessitate emergency response measures that are different from those required for the substance identified by name in the Dangerous Goods List.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 137

155

Bilaga 1

Dangerous Goods List, special provisions and exceptions –

3.1.3.3 Qualifying words such as “MIXTURE” or “SOLUTION”, as appropriate, shall be added as part of the Proper Shipping Name, for example, “ACETONE SOLUTION”. In addition, the concentration of the mixture or solution may also be indicated after the basic description of the mixture or solution, for example, “ACETONE 75% SOLUTION”. 3.1.3.4 A mixture or solution meeting the classification criteria of this Code that is not identified by name in the Dangerous Goods List and that is composed of two or more dangerous goods shall be assigned to an entry that has the Proper Shipping Name, description, hazard class or division, subsidiary risk(s) and packing group that most precisely describe the mixture or solution.

3.1.4 Segregation groups

3.1.4.1 For the purpose of segregation, dangerous goods having certain similar chemical properties have been grouped together in segregation groups, see 7.2.5. Where, in the Dangerous Goods List entry in column 16 (stowage and segregation), a particular segregation requirement refers to a group of substances, the particular segregation requirement applies to the goods allocated to the respective segregation group. 3.1.4.2 It is recognized that not all substances, mixtures, solutions or preparations falling within a segregation group are listed in the IMDG Code by name. These are shipped under N.O.S. entries. Although these N.O.S. entries are not themselves listed in the segregation groups (see 3.1.4.4), the consignor shall decide whether inclusion under the segregation group is appropriate and, if so, shall mention that fact in the transport document (see 5.4.1.5.11). 3.1.4.3 The segregation groups in this Code do not cover substances which fall outside the classification criteria of the Code. It is recognized that some non-hazardous substances have similar chemical properties as substances listed in the segregation groups. A consignor or the person responsible for packing the goods into a cargo transport unit who does have knowledge of the chemical properties of such non-dangerous goods may decide to implement the segregation provisions of a related segregation group on a voluntary basis. 3.1.4.4 The following segregation groups are identified. 1 Acids 1052 Hydrogen fluoride, anhydrous* 1182 Ethyl chloroformate 1183 Ethyldichlorosilane 1238 Methyl chloroformate 1242 Methyldichlorosilane 1250 Methyltrichlorosilane 1295 Trichlorosilane 1298 Trimethylchlorosilane 1305 Vinyltrichlorosilane 1572 Cacodylic acid 1595 Dimethyl sulphate 1715 Acetic anhydride 1716 Acetyl bromide 1717 Acetyl chloride 1718 Butyl acid phosphate 1722 Allyl chloroformate 1723 Allyl iodide 1724 Allyltrichlorosilane, stabilized 1725 Aluminium bromide, anhydrous 1726 Aluminium chloride, anhydrous 1727 Ammonium hydrogendifluoride, solid 1728 Amyltrichlorosilane 1729 Anisoyl chloride 1730 Antimony pentachloride, liquid 1731 Antimony pentachloride solution 1732 Antimony pentafluoride

138 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

156

Bilaga 1

Chapter 3.1 – General

1733 Antimony trichloride 1736 Benzoyl chloride 1737 Benzyl bromide 1738 Benzyl chloride 1739 Benzyl chloroformate 1740 Hydrogendifluorides, n.o.s. 1742 Boron trifluoride acetic acid complex, liquid 1743 Boron trifluoride propionic acid complex, liquid 1744 Bromine or bromine solution 1745 Bromine pentafluoride 1746 Bromine trifluoride 1747 Butyltrichlorosilane 1750 Chloroacetic acid solution 1751 Chloroacetic acid, solid 1752 Chloroacetyl chloride 1753 Chlorophenyltrichlorosilane 1754 Chlorosulphonic acid (with or without sulphur trioxide) 1755 Chromic acid solution 1756 Chromic fluoride, solid 1757 Chromic fluoride solution 1758 Chromium oxychloride 1762 Cyclohexenyltrichlorosilane 1763 Cyclohexyltrichlorosilane 1764 Dichloroacetic acid 1765 Dichloroacetyl chloride 1766 Dichlorophenyltrichlorosilane 1767 Diethyldichlorosilane 1768 Difluorophosphoric acid, anhydrous 1769 Diphenyldichlorosilane 1770 Diphenylmethyl bromide 1771 Dodecyltrichlorosilane 1773 Ferric chloride, anhydrous 1775 Fluoroboric acid 1776 Fluorophosphoric acid, anhydrous 1777 Fluorosulphonic acid* 1778 Fluorosilicic acid 1779 Formic acid with more than 85% acid by mass 1780 Fumaryl chloride 1781 Hexadecyltrichlorosilane 1782 Hexafluorophosphoric acid 1784 Hexyltrichlorosilane 1786 Hydrofluoric acid and sulphuric acid mixture* 1787 Hydriodic acid* 1788 Hydrobromic acid* 1789 Hydrochloric acid* 1790 Hydrofluoric acid* 1792 Iodine monochloride, solid 1793 Isopropyl acid phosphate 1794 Lead sulphate with more than 3% free acid 1796 Nitrating acid mixture*

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 139

157

Bilaga 1

Dangerous Goods List, special provisions and exceptions –

1798 Nitrohydrochloric acid* 1799 Nonyltrichlorosilane 1800 Octadecyltrichlorosilane 1801 Octyltrichlorosilane 1802 Perchloric acid with not more than 50% acid, by mass* 1803 Phenolsulphonic acid, liquid 1804 Phenyltrichlorosilane 1805 Phosphoric acid, solution 1806 Phosphorus pentachloride 1807 Phosphorus pentoxide 1808 Phosphorus tribromide 1809 Phosphorus trichloride 1810 Phosphorus oxychloride 1811 Potassium hydrogendifluoride, solid 1815 Propionyl chloride 1816 Propyltrichlorosilane 1817 Pyrosulphuryl chloride 1818 Silicon tetrachloride 1826 Nitrating acid mixture, spent* 1827 Stannic chloride, anhydrous 1828 Sulphur chlorides 1829 Sulphur trioxide, inhibited or sulphur trioxide, stabilized 1830 Sulphuric acid with more than 51% acid* 1831 Sulphuric acid, fuming* 1832 Sulphuric acid, spent* 1833 Sulphurous acid 1834 Sulphuryl chloride 1836 Thionyl chloride 1837 Thiophosphoryl chloride 1838 Titanium tetrachloride 1839 Trichloroacetic acid 1840 Zinc chloride solution 1848 Propionic acid with not less than 10% and less than 90% acid, by mass 1873 Perchloric acid with more than 50% but not more than 72% acid, by mass* 1898 Acetyl iodide 1902 Diisooctyl acid phosphate 1905 Selenic acid 1906 Sludge acid* 1938 Bromoacetic acid solution 1939 Phosphorus oxybromide 1940 Thioglycolic acid 2031 Nitric acid, other than red fuming* 2032 Nitric acid, red fuming* 2214 Phthalic anhydride with more than 0.05% of maleic anhydride 2215 Maleic anhydride 2218 Acrylic acid, inhibited 2225 Benzenesulphonyl chloride 2226 Benzotrichloride 2240 Chromosulphuric acid* 2262 Dimethylcarbamoyl chloride

140 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

158

Bilaga 1

Chapter 3.1 – General

2267 Dimethyl thiophosphoryl chloride 2305 Nitrobenzenesulphonic acid 2308 Nitrosylsulphuric acid, liquid* 2331 Zinc chloride, anhydrous 2353 Butyryl chloride 2395 Isobutyryl chloride 2407 Isopropyl chloroformate 2434 Dibenzyldichlorosilane 2435 Ethylphenyldichlorosilane 2437 Methylphenyldichlorosilane 2438 Trimethylacetyl chloride 2439 Sodium hydrogendifluoride 2440 Stannic chloride pentahydrate 2442 Trichloroacetyl chloride 2443 Vanadium oxytrichloride 2444 Vanadium tetrachloride 2475 Vanadium trichloride 2495 Iodine pentafluoride 2496 Propionic anhydride 2502 Valeryl chloride 2503 Zirconium tetrachloride 2506 Ammonium hydrogen sulphate 2507 Chloroplatinic acid, solid 2508 Molybdenum pentachloride 2509 Potassium hydrogen sulphate 2511 2-Chloropropionic acid 2513 Bromoacetyl bromide 2531 Methacrylic acid, stabilized 2564 Trichloroacetic acid solution 2571 Alkylsulphuric acids 2576 Phosphorus oxybromide, molten 2577 Phenylacetyl chloride 2578 Phosphorus trioxide 2580 Aluminium bromide solution 2581 Aluminium chloride solution 2582 Ferric chloride solution 2583 Alkylsulphonic acids, solid or arylsulphonic acids, solid with more than 5% free sulphuric acid 2584 Alkylsulphonic acids, liquid or arylsulphonic acids, liquid with more than 5% free sulphuric acid 2585 Alkylsulphonic acids, solid or arylsulphonic acids, solid with not more than 5% free sulphuric acid 2586 Alkylsulphonic acids, liquid or arylsulphonic acids, liquid with not more than 5% free sulphuric acid 2604 Boron trifluoride diethyl etherate 2626 Chloric acid, aqueous solution with not more than 10% chloric acid 2642 Fluoroacetic acid 2670 Cyanuric chloride 2691 Phosphorus pentabromide 2692 Boron tribromide 2698 Tetrahydrophthalic anhydrides with more than 0.05% maleic anhydride 2699 Trifluoroacetic acid 2739 Butyric anhydride

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 141

159

Bilaga 1

Dangerous Goods List, special provisions and exceptions –

2740 Propyl chloroformate 2742 Chloroformates, toxic, corrosive, flammable, n.o.s. 2743 n-Butyl chloroformate 2744 Cyclobutyl chloroformate 2745 Chloromethyl chloroformate 2746 Phenyl chloroformate 2748 2-Ethylhexyl chloroformate 2751 Diethylthiophosphoryl chloride 2789 Acetic acid, glacial or acetic acid solution, more than 80% acid, by mass 2790 Acetic acid solution, more than 10% but not more than 80% acid, by mass 2794 Batteries, wet, filled with acid electric storage 2796 Sulphuric acid with not more than 51% acid or battery fluid, acid* 2798 Phenylphosphorus dichloride 2799 Phenylphosphorus thiodichloride 2802 Copper chloride 2817 Ammonium hydrogendifluoride solution 2819 Amyl acid phosphate 2820 Butyric acid 2823 Crotonic acid, solid 2826 Ethyl chlorothioformate 2829 Caproic acid 2834 Phosphorous acid 2851 Boron trifluoride dihydrate 2865 Hydroxylamine sulphate 2869 Titanium trichloride mixture 2879 Selenium oxychloride 2967 Sulphamic acid 2985 Chlorosilanes, flammable, corrosive, n.o.s. 2986 Chlorosilanes, corrosive, flammable, n.o.s. 2987 Chlorosilanes, corrosive, n.o.s. 2988 Chlorosilanes, water-reactive, flammable, corrosive, n.o.s. 3246 Methanesulphonyl chloride 3250 Chloroacetic acid, molten 3260 Corrosive solid, acidic, inorganic, n.o.s. 3261 Corrosive solid, acidic, organic, n.o.s. 3264 Corrosive liquid, acidic, inorganic, n.o.s. 3265 Corrosive liquid, acidic, organic, n.o.s. 3277 Chloroformates, toxic, corrosive, n.o.s. 3361 Chlorosilanes, toxic, corrosive, n.o.s. 3362 Chlorosilanes, toxic, corrosive, flammable, n.o.s. 3412 Formic acid with not less than 10% but not more than 85% acid by mass 3412 Formic acid with not less than 5% but not more than 10% acid by mass 3419 Boron trifluoride acetic acid complex, solid 3420 Boron trifluoride propionic acid complex, solid 3421 Potassium hydrogendifluoride solution 3425 Bromoacetic acid, solid 3453 Phosphoric acid, solid 3456 Nitrosylsulphuric acid, solid 3463 Propionic acid with not less than 90% acid by mass 3472 Crotonic acid, liquid 3498 Iodine monochloride, liquid

142 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

160

Bilaga 1

Chapter 3.1 – General

* identifies strong acids 2 Ammonium compounds 0004 Ammonium picrate dry or wetted with less than 10% water, by mass 0222 Ammonium nitrate, with more than 0.2% combustible substances 0402 Ammonium perchlorate 1310 Ammonium picrate, wetted with not less than 10% water, by mass 1439 Ammonium dichromate 1442 Ammonium perchlorate 1444 Ammonium persulphate 1512 Zinc ammonium nitrite 1546 Ammonium arsenate 1630 Mercury ammonium chloride 1727 Ammonium hydrogendifluoride, solid 1835 Tetramethylammonium hydroxide solution 1843 Ammonium dinitro-o-cresolate, solid 1942 Ammonium nitrate with not more than 0.2% combustible substances 2067 Ammonium nitrate based fertilizer 2071 Ammonium nitrate based fertilizer 2073 Ammonia solution, relative density less than 0.880 at 15°C in water, with more than 35% but not more than 50% ammonia 2426 Ammonium nitrate, liquid (hot concentrated solution) 2505 Ammonium fluoride 2506 Ammonium hydrogen sulphate 2683 Ammonium sulphide solution 2687 Dicyclohexylammonium nitrite 2817 Ammonium hydrogendifluoride solution 2818 Ammonium polysulphide solution 2854 Ammonium fluorosilicate 2859 Ammonium metavanadate 2861 Ammonium polyvanadate 2863 Sodium ammonium vanadate 3375 Ammonium nitrate emulsion or suspension or gel intermediate for blasting explosives 3423 Tetramethylammonium hydroxide, solid 3424 Ammonium dinitro-o-cresolate solution 3 Bromates 1450 Bromates, inorganic, n.o.s. 1473 Magnesium bromate 1484 Potassium bromate 1494 Sodium bromate 2469 Zinc bromate 2719 Barium bromate 3213 Ammonium bromate 3213 Bromates, inorganic, aqueous solution, n.o.s. 4 Chlorates 1445 Barium chlorate, solid 1452 Calcium chlorate 1458 Chlorate and borate mixture 1459 Chlorate and magnesium chloride mixture, solid 1461 Chlorates, inorganic, n.o.s. 1485 Potassium chlorate

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 143

161

Bilaga 1

Dangerous Goods List, special provisions and exceptions –

1495 Sodium chlorate 1506 Strontium chlorate 1513 Zinc chlorate 2427 Potassium chlorate, aqueous solution 2428 Sodium chlorate, aqueous solution 2429 Calcium chlorate, aqueous solution 2573 Thallium chlorate 2721 Copper chlorate 2723 Magnesium chlorate 3405 Barium chlorate solution 3407 Chlorate and magnesium chloride mixture solution 5 Chlorites 1453 Calcium chlorite 1462 Chlorites, inorganic, n.o.s. 1496 Sodium chlorite 1908 Chlorite solution 6 Cyanides 1541 Acetone cyanhydrin, stabilized 1565 Barium cyanide 1575 Calcium cyanide 1587 Copper cyanide 1588 Cyanides, inorganic, solid, n.o.s. 1620 Lead cyanide 1626 Mercuric potassium cyanide 1636 Mercury cyanide 1642 Mercury oxycyanide, desensitized 1653 Nickel cyanide 1679 Potassium cuprocyanide 1680 Potassium cyanide, solid 1684 Silver cyanide 1689 Sodium cyanide, solid 1694 Bromobenzyl cyanides, liquid 1713 Zinc cyanide 1889 Cyanogen bromide 1935 Cyanide solution, n.o.s. 2205 Adiponitrile 2316 Sodium cuprocyanide, solid 2317 Sodium cuprocyanide solution 3413 Potassium cyanide solution 3414 Sodium cyanide solution 3449 Bromobenzyl cyanides, solid 7 Heavy metals and their salts (including their organometallic compounds) 0129 Lead azide, wetted, with not less than 20% water, or mixture of alcohol and water, by mass 0130 Lead styphnate (lead trinitroresorcinate), wetted with not less than 20% water, or mixture of alcohol and water, by mass 0135 Mercury fulminate, wetted with not less than 20% water, or mixture of alcohol and water, by mass 1347 Silver picrate, wetted with not less than 30% water, by mass 1366 Diethylzinc 1370 Dimethylzinc

144 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

162

Bilaga 1

Chapter 3.1 – General

1389 Alkali metal amalgam, liquid 1392 Alkaline earth metal amalgam, liquid 1435 Zinc ashes 1436 Zinc dust or zinc powder 1469 Lead nitrate 1470 Lead perchlorate, solid 1493 Silver nitrate 1512 Zinc ammonium nitrite 1513 Zinc chlorate 1514 Zinc nitrate 1515 Zinc permanganate 1516 Zinc peroxide 1587 Copper cyanide 1616 Lead acetate 1617 Lead arsenates 1618 Lead arsenites 1620 Lead cyanide 1623 Mercuric arsenate 1624 Mercuric chloride 1625 Mercuric nitrate 1626 Mercuric potassium cyanide 1627 Mercurous nitrate 1629 Mercury acetate 1630 Mercury ammonium chloride 1631 Mercury benzoate 1634 Mercury bromides 1636 Mercury cyanide 1637 Mercury gluconate 1638 Mercury iodide 1639 Mercury nucleate 1640 Mercury oleate 1641 Mercury oxide 1642 Mercury oxycyanide, desensitized 1643 Mercury potassium iodide 1644 Mercury salicylate 1645 Mercury sulphate 1646 Mercury thiocyanate 1649 Motor fuel anti-knock mixture 1653 Nickel cyanide 1674 Phenylmercuric acetate 1683 Silver arsenite 1684 Silver cyanide 1712 Zinc arsenate and zinc arsenite mixture 1713 Zinc cyanide 1714 Zinc phosphide 1794 Lead sulphate with more than 3% free acid 1838 Titanium tetrachloride 1840 Zinc chloride solution 1872 Lead dioxide 1894 Phenylmercuric hydroxide

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 145

163

Bilaga 1

Dangerous Goods List, special provisions and exceptions –

1895 Phenylmercuric nitrate 1931 Zinc hydrosulphite 1931 Zinc dithionite 2024 Mercury compound, liquid, n.o.s. 2025 Mercury compound, solid, n.o.s. 2026 Phenylmercuric compound, n.o.s. 2291 Lead compound, soluble, n.o.s. 2331 Zinc chloride, anhydrous 2441 Titanium trichloride, pyrophoric or titanium trichloride mixture, pyrophoric 2469 Zinc bromate 2546 Titanium powder, dry 2714 Zinc resinate 2777 Mercury based pesticide, solid, toxic 2778 Mercury based pesticide, liquid, flammable, toxic 2809 Mercury 2855 Zinc fluorosilicate 2869 Titanium trichloride mixture 2878 Titanium, sponge granules or titanium, sponge powders 2881 Metal catalyst, dry 2989 Lead phosphite, dibasic 3011 Mercury based pesticide, liquid, toxic, flammable 3012 Mercury based pesticide, liquid, toxic 3089 Metal powder, flammable, n.o.s. 3174 Titanium disulphide 3181 Metal salts of organic compounds, flammable, n.o.s. 3189 Metal powder, self-heating, n.o.s. 3401 Alkali metal amalgam, solid 3402 Alkaline earth metal amalgam, solid 3408 Lead perchlorate solution 3483 Motor fuel anti-knock mixture, flammable 8 Hypochlorites 1471 Lithium hypochlorite 1748 Calcium hypochlorite mixture 1791 Hypochlorite solution 2208 Calcium hypochlorite mixture, dry with more than 10% but not more than 39% available chlorine 2741 Barium hypochlorite with more than 22% available chlorine 2880 Calcium hypochlorite, hydrated or calcium hypochlorite, hydrated mixture with not less than 5.5% but not more than 16% water 3212 Hypochlorites, inorganic, n.o.s. 3255 tert-Butyl hypochlorite 3485 Calcium hypochlorite, dry, corrosive or calcium hypochlorite mixture, dry, corrosive with more than 39% available chlorine (8.8% available oxygen) 3486 Calcium hypochlorite mixture, dry, corrosive with more than 10% but not more than 39% available chlorine 3487 Calcium hypochlorite, hydrated, corrosive or calcium hypochlorite, hydrated mixture, corrosive, with not less than 5.5% but not more than 16% water 9 Lead and its compounds 0129 Lead azide, wetted with not less than 20% water, or mixture of alcohol and water, by mass 0130 Lead styphnate, wetted with not less than 20% water, or mixture of alcohol and water, by mass 0130 Lead trinitroresorcinate, wetted with not less than 20% water, or mixture of alcohol and water, by mass

146 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

164

Bilaga 1

Chapter 3.1 – General

1469 Lead nitrate 1470 Lead perchlorate, solid 1616 Lead acetate 1617 Lead arsenates 1618 Lead arsenites 1620 Lead cyanide 1649 Motor fuel anti-knock mixture 1794 Lead sulphate with more than 3% free acid 1872 Lead dioxide 2291 Lead compound, soluble, n.o.s. 2989 Lead phosphide, dibasic 3408 Lead perchlorate solution 3483 Motor fuel anti-knock mixture, flammable 10 Liquid halogenated hydrocarbons 1099 Allyl bromide 1100 Allyl chloride 1107 Amyl chloride 1126 1-Bromobutane 1127 Chlorobutanes 1134 Chlorobenzene 1150 1,2-Dichloroethylene 1152 Dichloropentanes 1184 Ethylene dichloride 1278 1-Chloropropane 1279 1,2-Dichloropropane 1303 Vinylidene chloride, stabilized 1591 o-Dichlorobenzene 1593 Dichloromethane 1605 Ethylene dibromide 1647 Methyl bromide and ethylene dibromide mixture, liquid 1669 Pentachloroethane 1701 Xylyl bromide 1702 1,1,2,2-Tetrachloroethane 1710 Trichloroethylene 1723 Allyl iodide 1737 Benzyl bromide 1738 Benzyl chloride 1846 Carbon tetrachloride 1887 Bromochloromethane 1888 Chloroform 1891 Ethyl bromide 1897 Tetrachloroethylene 1991 Chloroprene, stabilized 2234 Chlorobenzotrifluorides 2238 Chlorotoluenes 2279 Hexachlorobutadiene 2321 Trichlorobenzenes, liquid 2322 Trichlorobutene 2339 2-Bromobutane 2341 1-Bromo-3-methylbutane

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 147

165

Bilaga 1

Dangerous Goods List, special provisions and exceptions –

2342 Bromomethylpropanes 2343 2-Bromopentane 2344 Bromopropanes 2356 2-Chloropropane 2362 1,1-Dichloroethane 2387 Fluorobenzene 2388 Fluorotoluenes 2390 2-Iodobutane 2391 Iodomethylpropanes 2392 Iodopropanes 2456 2-Chloropropene 2504 Tetrabromoethane 2515 Bromoform 2554 Methylallyl chloride 2644 Methyl iodide 2646 Hexachlorocyclopentadiene 2664 Dibromomethane 2688 1-Bromo-3-chloropropane 2831 1,1,1-Trichloroethane 2872 Dibromochloropropanes 11 Mercury and mercury compounds 0135 Mercury fulminate, wetted with not less than 20% water 1389 Alkali metal amalgam, liquid 1392 Alkaline earth metal amalgam, liquid 1623 Mercuric arsenate 1624 Mercuric chloride 1625 Mercuric nitrate 1626 Mercuric potassium cyanide 1627 Mercurous nitrate 1629 Mercury acetate 1630 Mercury ammonium chloride 1631 Mercury benzoate 1634 Mercury bromides 1636 Mercury cyanide 1637 Mercury gluconate 1638 Mercury iodide 1639 Mercury nucleate 1640 Mercury oleate 1641 Mercury oxide 1642 Mercury oxycyanide, desensitized 1643 Mercury potassium iodide 1644 Mercury salicylate 1645 Mercury sulphate 1646 Mercury thiocyanate 1894 Phenylmercuric hydroxide 1895 Phenylmercuric nitrate 2024 Mercury compound, liquid, n.o.s. 2025 Mercury compound, solid, n.o.s. 2026 Phenylmercuric compound, n.o.s. 2777 Mercury based pesticide, solid, toxic

148 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

166

Bilaga 1

Chapter 3.1 – General

2778 Mercury based pesticide, liquid, flammable, toxic 2809 Mercury 3011 Mercury based pesticide, liquid, toxic, flammable 3012 Mercury based pesticide, liquid, toxic 3401 Alkali metal amalgam, solid 3402 Alkaline earth metal amalgam, solid 12 Nitrites and their mixtures 1487 Potassium nitrate and sodium nitrite mixture 1488 Potassium nitrite 1500 Sodium nitrite 1512 Zinc ammonium nitrite 2627 Nitrites, inorganic, n.o.s. 2726 Nickel nitrite 3219 Nitrites, inorganic, aqueous solution, n.o.s 13 Perchlorates 1442 Ammonium perchlorate 1447 Barium perchlorate, solid 1455 Calcium perchlorate 1470 Lead perchlorate, solid 1475 Magnesium perchlorate 1481 Perchlorates, inorganic, n.o.s. 1489 Potassium perchlorate 1502 Sodium perchlorate 1508 Strontium perchlorate 3211 Perchlorates, inorganic, aqueous solution, n.o.s. 3406 Barium perchlorate solution 3408 Lead perchlorate solution 14 Permanganates 1448 Barium permanganate 1456 Calcium permanganate 1482 Permanganates, inorganic, n.o.s. 1490 Potassium permanganate 1503 Sodium permanganate 1515 Zinc permanganate 3214 Permanganates, inorganic, aqueous solution, n.o.s. 15 Powdered metals 1309 Aluminium powder, coated 1326 Hafnium powder, wetted with not less than 25% water 1352 Titanium powder, wetted with not less than 25% water 1358 Zirconium powder, wetted with not less than 25% water 1383 Pyrophoric alloy or pyrophoric metal, n.o.s. 1396 Aluminium powder, uncoated 1398 Aluminium silicon powder, uncoated 1418 Magnesium powder 1435 Zinc ashes 1436 Zinc dust or zinc powder 1854 Barium alloys, pyrophoric 2008 Zirconium powder, dry 2009 Zirconium, dry, sheets, strip or coiled wire 2545 Hafnium powder, dry

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 149

167

Bilaga 1

Dangerous Goods List, special provisions and exceptions –

2546 Titanium powder, dry 2878 Titanium sponge powders 2881 Metal catalyst, dry 2950 Magnesium granules, coated, particle size not less than 149 microns 3078 Cerium, turnings or gritty powder 3089 Metal powder, flammable, n.o.s. 3170 Aluminium smelting by-products 3189 Metal powder, self-heating, n.o.s. 16 Peroxides 1449 Barium peroxide 1457 Calcium peroxide 1472 Lithium peroxide 1476 Magnesium peroxide 1483 Peroxides, inorganic, n.o.s. 1491 Potassium peroxide 1504 Sodium peroxide 1509 Strontium peroxide 1516 Zinc peroxide 2014 Hydrogen peroxide, aqueous solution, 20–60% 2015 Hydrogen peroxide, aqueous solution, stabilized 2466 Potassium superoxide 2547 Sodium superoxide 3149 Hydrogen peroxide and peroxyacetic acid mixture 3377 Sodium perborate monohydrate 3378 Sodium carbonate peroxyhydrate 17 Azides 0129 Lead azide, wetted 0224 Barium azide, dry 1571 Barium azide, wetted 1687 Sodium azide 18 Alkalis 1005 Ammonia, anhydrous 1160 Dimethylamine, aqueous solution 1163 Dimethylhydrazine, unsymmetrical 1235 Methylamine, aqueous solution 1244 Methylhydrazine 1382 Potassium sulphide, anhydrous or potassium sulphide with less than 30% water of crystallization 1385 Sodium sulphide, anhydrous or sodium sulphide with less than 30% water of crystallization 1604 Ethylenediamine 1719 Caustic alkali liquid, n.o.s. 1813 Potassium hydroxide, solid 1814 Potassium hydroxide solution 1819 Sodium aluminate solution 1823 Sodium hydroxide, solid 1824 Sodium hydroxide solution 1825 Sodium monoxide 1835 Tetramethylammonium hydroxide solution 1847 Potassium sulphide, hydrated with not less than 30% water of crystallization 1849 Sodium sulphide, hydrated with not less than 30% water 1907 Soda lime with more than 4% sodium hydroxide

150 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

168

Bilaga 1

Chapter 3.1 – General

1922 Pyrrolidine 2029 Hydrazine, anhydrous 2030 Hydrazine, aqueous solution with more than 37% hydrazine, by mass 2033 Potassium monoxide 2073 Ammonia solution relative density less than 0.880 at 15°C in water, with more than 35% but not more than 50% ammonia 2079 Diethylenetriamine 2259 Triethylenetetramine 2270 Ethylamine, aqueous solution, with not less than 50% but not more than 70% ethylamine 2318 Sodium hydrosulphide with less than 25% water of crystallization 2320 Tetraethylenepentamine 2379 1,3-Dimethylbutylamine 2382 Dimethylhydrazine, symmetrical 2386 1-Ethylpiperidine 2399 1-Methylpiperidine 2401 Piperidine 2491 Ethanolamine or ethanolamine solution 2579 Piperazine 2671 Aminopyridines 2672 Ammonia solution relative density between 0.880 and 0.957 at 15°C in water, with more than 10% but not more than 35% ammonia, by mass 2677 Rubidium hydroxide solution 2678 Rubidium hydroxide, solid 2679 Lithium hydroxide solution 2680 Lithium hydroxide 2681 Caesium hydroxide solution 2682 Caesium hydroxide 2683 Ammonium sulphide solution 2733 Amines, flammable, corrosive, n.o.s. or polyamines, flammable, corrosive, n.o.s. 2734 Amines, liquid, corrosive, flammable, n.o.s. or polyamines, liquid, corrosive, flammable, n.o.s. 2735 Amines, liquid, corrosive, n.o.s. or polyamines, liquid, corrosive, n.o.s. 2795 Batteries, wet, filled with alkali electric storage 2797 Battery fluid, alkali 2818 Ammonium polysulphide solution 2949 Sodium hydrosulphide, solid with not less than 25% water of crystallization 3028 Batteries, dry, containing potassium hydroxide, solid electric storage 3073 Vinylpyridines, stabilized 3253 Disodium trioxosilicate 3259 Amines, solid, corrosive, n.o.s. or polyamines, solid, corrosive, n.o.s. 3262 Corrosive solid, basic, inorganic, n.o.s. 3263 Corrosive solid, basic, organic, n.o.s. 3266 Corrosive liquid, basic, inorganic, n.o.s. 3267 Corrosive liquid, basic, organic, n.o.s. 3293 Hydrazine, aqueous solution with not more than 37% hydrazine, by mass 3318 Ammonia solution relative density less than 0.880 at 15°C in water, with more than 50% ammonia 3320 Sodium borohydride and sodium hydroxide solution with not more than 12% sodium borohydride and not more than 40% sodium hydroxide, by mass 3423 Tetramethylammonium hydroxide, solid 3484 Hydrazine aqueous solution, flammable, with more than 37% hydrazine, by mass

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 151

169

Bilaga 1

Chapter 3.2

Dangerous Goods List

3.2.1 Structure of the Dangerous Goods List

The Dangerous Goods List is divided into 18 columns as follows:

Column 1 UN No. – this column contains the United Nations Number assigned to a dangerous good by the United Nations Sub-Committee of Experts on the Transport of Dangerous Goods (UN List).

Column 2 Proper Shipping Name (PSN) – this column contains the Proper Shipping Names in uppercase characters, which may have to be followed by additional descriptive text in lower-case characters (see 3.1.2). Proper Shipping Names may be shown in plural where isomers of similar classification exist. Hydrates may be included under the Proper Shipping Name for the anhydrous substances. Unless otherwise indicated for an entry in the Dangerous Goods List, the word “SOLUTION” in a Proper Shipping Name means one or more named dangerous goods dissolved in a liquid that is not otherwise subject to this Code. When a flashpoint is mentioned in this column, the data is based on closed-cup (c.c.) methods.

Column 3 Class or division – this column contains the class and, in the case of class 1, the division and the compatibility group assigned to the substance or article according to the classification system described in part 2, chapter 2.1.

Column 4 Subsidiary risk(s) – this column contains the class number(s) of any subsidiary risk(s) which have been identified by applying the classification system described in part 2. This column also identifies a dangerous good as a marine pollutant as follows:

P – Marine pollutant: a non-exhaustive list of known marine pollutants, based on previous criteria and assignment

Column 5 Packing group – this column contains the packing group number (i.e., I, II or III) where assigned to the substance or article. If more than one packing group is indicated for the entry, the packing group of the substance or formulation to be transported shall be determined, based on its properties, through application of the hazard grouping criteria as provided in part 2.

Column 6 Special provisions – this column contains a number referring to any special provision(s) indicated in chapter 3.3 that is relevant to the substance or article. Special provisions apply to all packing groups permitted for a particular substance or article unless the wording makes it otherwise apparent. The special provision numbers specific to the sea mode start from 900.

Note: When a special provision is no longer needed, this special provision is deleted but the special provision number is not allocated again, in order not to confuse the users of this Code. For this reason, some of the numbers are missing.

Column 7a Limited quantities: this column provides the maximum quantity per inner packaging or article for transporting dangerous goods as limited quantities in accordance with chapter 3.4.

Column 7b Excepted quantities: this column provides an alpha-numeric code described in sub-section 3.5.1.2 which indicates the maximum quantity per inner and outer packaging for transporting dangerous goods as excepted quantities in accordance with chapter 3.5.

Column 8 Packing instructions – this column contains alpha-numeric codes which refer to the relevant packing instruction(s) in 4.1.4. The packing instructions indicate the packagings (including large packagings) which may be used for the transport of substances and articles.

A code including the letter “P” refers to packing instructions for the use of packagings described in chapter 6.1, 6.2 or 6.3.

A code including the letters “LP” refers to packing instructions for the use of large packagings described in chapter 6.6.

152 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

170

Bilaga 1

Chapter 3.2 – Dangerous Goods List

When a code including the letter(s) “P” or “LP” is not provided, it means that the substance is not allowed in that type of packaging. Column 9 Special packing provisions – this column contains alpha-numeric codes which refer to the relevant special packing provisions specified in 4.1.4. The special packing provisions indicate the packagings (including large packagings). A special packing provision including the letters “PP” refers to a special packing provision applicable to the use of a packing instruction bearing the Code “P” in 4.1.4.1. A special packing provision including the letter “L” refers to a special packing provision applicable to a packing instruction bearing the code “LP” in 4.1.4.3. Column 10 IBC packing instructions – this column contains alpha-numeric codes that refer to the relevant IBC instruction, which indicates the type of IBC that shall be used for the transport of the substance under reference. A code including the letters “IBC” refers to packing instructions for the use of IBCs described in chapter 6.5. When a code is not provided, it means the substance is not authorized in IBC. Column 11 IBC special provisions – this column contains an alpha-numeric code, including the letter “B”, which refers to special packing provisions applicable to the use of packing instructions bearing the code “IBC” in 4.1.4.2. Column 12 [Reserved] Column 13 Tank and bulk container instructions – this column contains T codes (see 4.2.5.2.6) applicable to the transport of dangerous goods in portable tanks and road tank vehicles. When a T code is not provided in this column, it means that the dangerous goods are not authorized for transport in tanks unless specifically approved by the competent authority. A code including the letters BK refers to type of bulk containers used for the transport of bulk goods described in chapter 4.3 and chapter 6.9. The gases authorized for transport in MEGCs are indicated in the column “MEGC” in Tables 1 and 2 of packing instruction P200 in 4.1.4.1. Column 14 Tank special provisions – this column contains TP notes (see 4.2.5.3) applicable to the transport of dangerous goods in portable tanks and road tank vehicles. The TP notes specified in this column apply to the portable tanks specified in both columns 12 and 13. Column 15 EmS – this column refers to the relevant emergency schedules for FIRE and SPILLAGE in “The EmS Guide – Emergency Response Procedures for Ships Carrying Dangerous Goods”. The first EmS code refers to the relevant Fire Schedule (e.g., Fire Schedule Alfa “F-A” General Fire Schedule). The second EmS code refers to the relevant Spillage Schedule (e.g., Spillage Schedule Alfa “S-A” Toxic Substances). Underlined EmS codes (special cases) indicate a substance, material or article for which additional advice is given in the emergency response procedures. For dangerous goods offered for transport under N.O.S. entries or other generic entries, the most relevant emergency response procedures may vary with the properties of the hazardous constituents. As a consequence, shippers may have to declare different EmS codes from those indicated, if, to their knowledge, such codes are more appropriate. The provisions in this column are not mandatory. Column 16 Stowage and segregation – this column contains the stowage and segregation provisions as prescribed in part 7. Column 17 Properties and observations – this column contains properties of and observations on the dangerous goods listed. The provisions in this column are not mandatory. Properties of most gases include an indication of its density in relation to air. The figures in brackets give the density relative to air. .1 “lighter than air” when the vapour density is down to half that of air; .2 “much lighter than air” when the vapour density is less than half that of air; .3 “heavier than air” when the vapour density is up to twice that of air; and .4 “much heavier than air” when the vapour density is more than twice that of air.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 153

171

Bilaga 1

Dangerous Goods List, special provisions and exceptions –

When explosive limits are given, these refer to the volume percentage of the vapour of the substance when mixed with air. The ease and extent to which different liquids mix with water varies greatly and most entries have included an indication of miscibility. In these cases “miscible with water” normally means capable of being mixed with water in all proportions to form a completely homogeneous liquid. Column 18 UN No. – see column 1.

3.2.2 Abbreviations and symbols

The following abbreviations and symbols are used in the Dangerous Goods List and have the meanings shown: Abbreviation/symbol Column Meaning N.O.S. 2 Not otherwise specified P 4 Marine pollutant

154 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

172

Bilaga 1

Chapter 3.3

Special provisions applicable to certain substances, materials or articles

3.3.1 When column 6 of the Dangerous Goods List indicates that a special provision is relevant to a dangerous good, the meaning and requirement(s) of that special provision are as set out below: 16 Samples of new or existing explosive substances or articles may be transported as directed by the competent authority for purposes including: testing, classification, research and development, quality control, or as a commercial sample. Explosive samples which are not wetted or desensitized shall be limited to 10 kg in small packages as specified by the competent authority. Explosive samples which are wetted or desensitized shall be limited to 25 kg. 23 Even though this substance has a flammability hazard, it only exhibits such hazard under extreme fire conditions in confined areas. 26 This substance is not permitted for transport in portable tanks, or intermediate bulk containers with a capacity exceeding 450 ℓ, due to the potential initiation of an explosion when transported in large volumes. 28 This substance may be transported under the provisions of class 4.1 only if it is so packaged that the percentage of diluent will not fall below that stated, at any time during transport (see 2.4.2.4). 29 The packages, including bales, are exempt from labelling provided that they are marked with the appropriate class (e.g., “class 4.2”). Packages, with the exception of bales, shall also display the Proper Shipping Name and the UN Number of the substance that they contain in accordance with 5.2.1. In any case, the packages, including bales, are exempt from class marking provided that they are loaded in a cargo transport unit and that they contain goods to which only one UN Number has been assigned. The cargo transport units in which the packages, including bales, are loaded shall display any relevant labels, placards and marks in accordance with chapter 5.3. 32 When in any other form, this substance is not subject to the provisions of this Code. 37 When coated, this substance is not subject to the provisions of this Code. 38 This substance, when it contains not more than 0.1% calcium carbide, is not subject to the provisions of this Code. 39 This substance, when it contains less than 30% or not less than 90% silicon, is not subject to the provisions of this Code. 43 When offered for transport as pesticides, these substances shall be transported under the relevant pesticide entry and in accordance with the relevant pesticide provisions (see 2.6.2.3 and 2.6.2.4). 45 Antimony sulphides and oxides which contain not more than 0.5% of arsenic, calculated on the total mass, are not subject to the provisions of this Code. 47 Ferricyanides and ferrocyanides are not subject to the provisions of this Code. 59 These substances, when they contain not more than 50% magnesium, are not subject to the provisions of this Code. 61 The technical name, which shall supplement the Proper Shipping Name, shall be the ISO common name, or other name listed in ‘The WHO Recommended Classification of Pesticides by Hazard and Guidelines to Classification’ or the name of the active substance (see also 3.1.2.8.1.1). 62 This substance, when it contains not more than 4% sodium hydroxide, is not subject to the provisions of this Code. 63 The division of class 2 and the subsidiary risks depend on the nature of the contents of the aerosol dispenser. The following provisions shall apply: .1 Class 2.1 applies if the contents include 85% by mass or more flammable components and the chemical heat of combustion is 30 kJ/g or more; .2 Class 2.2 applies if the contents contain 1% by mass or less flammable components and the heat of combustion is less than 20 kJ/g.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 155

173

Bilaga 1

Dangerous Goods List, special provisions and exceptions –

.3 Otherwise the product shall be classified as tested by the tests described in the United Nations Manual of Tests and Criteria, Part III, section 31. Extremely flammable and flammable aerosols shall be classified in class 2.1; non-flammable in class 2.2; .4 Gases of class 2.3 shall not be used as a propellant in an aerosol dispenser; .5 Where the contents other than the propellant of aerosol dispensers to be ejected are classified as class 6.1 packing groups II or III or class 8 packing groups II or III, the aerosol shall have a subsidiary risk of class 6.1 or class 8; .6 Aerosols with contents meeting the criteria for packing group I for toxicity or corrosivity shall be prohibited from transport; .7 Except for consignments transported in limited quantities (see chapter 3.4), packages containing aerosols shall bear labels for the primary risk and for the subsidiary risk(s), if any. Flammable components are flammable liquids, flammable solids or flammable gases and gas mixtures as defined in Notes 1 to 3 of sub-section 31.1.3 of Part III of the United Nations Manual of Tests and Criteria. This designation does not cover pyrophoric, self-heating or water-reactive substances. The chemical heat of combustion shall be determined by one of the following methods: ASTM D 240, ISO/FDIS 13943:1999 (E/F) 86.1 to 86.3 or NFPA 30B. 65 Hydrogen peroxide aqueous solutions with less than 8% hydrogen peroxide are not subject to the provisions of this Code. 66 Mercurous chloride shall be transported under UN 3077 and cinnabar is not subject to the provisions of this Code. 76 The transport of this substance shall be prohibited except with special authorization granted by the competent authority of the country concerned. 105 Nitrocellulose meeting the descriptions of UN 2556 or UN 2557 may be classified in class 4.1. 113 The transport of chemically unstable mixtures is prohibited. 117 Only regulated when transported by sea. 119 Refrigerating machines and refrigerating machinery components including machines or other appliances which have been designed for the specific purpose of keeping food or other items at a low temperature in an internal compartment, and air-conditioning units. Refrigerating machines and refrigerating machine components are not subject to the provisions of this Code if they contain less than 12 kg of gas in class 2.2 or less than 12 ℓ of ammonia solution (UN 2672). 122 The subsidiary risk(s), the control and emergency temperatures, if any, and the generic entry number for each of the currently assigned organic peroxide formulations are given in 2.5.3.2.4. 127 Other inert material or inert material mixture may be used at the discretion of the competent authority, provided this inert material has identical phlegmatizing properties. 131 The phlegmatized substance shall be significantly less sensitive than dry PETN. 133 If over-confined in packagings, this substance may exhibit explosive behaviour. Packagings authorized under packing instruction P409 are intended to prevent over-confinement. When a packaging other than those prescribed under packing instruction P409 is authorized by the competent authority of the country of origin in accordance with 4.1.3.7, the package shall bear an “EXPLOSIVE” subsidiary risk label (Model No. 1, see 5.2.2.2.2) unless the competent authority of the country of origin has permitted this label to be dispensed with for the specific packaging employed because test data have proved that the substance in this packaging does not exhibit explosive behaviour (see 5.4.1.5.5.1). The provisions of 7.2.3.3, 7.1.3.1 and 7.1.4.4 shall also be considered. 135 The dihydrated sodium salt of dichloroisocyanuric acid is not subject to the provisions of this Code. 138 p-Bromobenzyl cyanide is not subject to the provisions of this Code. 141 Products which have undergone sufficient heat treatment so that they present no hazard during transport are not subject to the provisions of this Code. 142 Solvent-extracted soya bean meal containing not more than 1.5% oil and 11% moisture, being substantially free from flammable solvents, which is accompanied by a certificate from the shipper stating that the substance, as offered for shipment, meets this requirement is not subject to the provisions of this Code. 144 An aqueous solution containing not more than 24% alcohol by volume is not subject to the provisions of this Code. 145 Alcoholic beverages of packing group III, when transported in receptacles of 250 ℓ or less, are not subject to the provisions of this Code. 152 The classification of this substance will vary with particle size and packaging, but borderlines have not been experimentally determined. Appropriate classifications shall be made as required by 2.1.3.

156 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

174

Bilaga 1

Chapter 3.3 – Special provisions applicable to certain substances, materials or articles

153 This entry applies only if it is demonstrated, on the basis of tests, that the substance, when in contact with water, is not combustible nor shows a tendency to auto-ignition and that the mixture of gases evolved is not flammable.

163 A substance specifically listed by name in the Dangerous Goods List shall not be transported under this entry. Materials transported under this entry may contain 20% or less nitrocellulose provided the nitrocellulose contains not more than 12.6% nitrogen (by dry mass).

168 Asbestos which is immersed or fixed in a natural or artificial binder (such as cement, plastics, asphalt, resins or mineral ore) in such a way that no escape of hazardous quantities of respirable asbestos fibres can occur during transport is not subject to the provisions of this Code. Manufactured articles containing asbestos and not meeting this provision are nevertheless not subject to the provisions of this Code when packaged so that no escape of hazardous quantities of respirable asbestos fibres can occur during transport.

169 Phthalic anhydride in the solid state and tetrahydrophthalic anhydride, with not more than 0.05% maleic anhydride, are not subject to the provisions of this Code. Phthalic anhydride molten at a temperature above its flashpoint, with not more than 0.05% maleic anhydride, shall be classified under UN 3256.

172 Radioactive material with a subsidiary risk shall: .1 be labelled with subsidiary risk labels corresponding to each subsidiary risk exhibited by the material; corresponding placard shall be affixed to transport units in accordance with the relevant provisions of 5.3.1; .2 be allocated to packing groups I, II or III, as and if appropriate, by application of the grouping criteria provided in part 2 corresponding to the nature of the predominant subsidiary risk.

The description required in 5.4.1.5.7.1.2 shall include a description of these subsidiary risks (e.g., “Subsidiary risk: 3, 6.1”), the name of the constituents which most predominantly contribute to this (these) subsidiary risk(s), and, where applicable, the packing group. For packing, see also 4.1.9.1.5.

For thorium nitrate solid and uranium nitrate solid, the subsidiary risk is 5.1. For uranyl nitrate hexahydrate solution and uranium hexafluoride, the subsidiary risk is 8. For pyrophoric uranium metal and pyrophoric thorium metal, the subsidiary risk is 4.2.

177 Barium sulphate is not subject to the provisions of this Code.

178 This entry shall be used only when no other appropriate entry exists in the list, and only with the approval of the competent authority of the country of origin.

181 Packages containing this type of substance shall bear the “EXPLOSIVE” subsidiary risk label (Model No. 1, see 5.2.2.2.2) unless the competent authority of the country of origin has permitted this label to be dispensed with for the specific packaging employed because test data have proved that the substance in this packaging does not exhibit explosive behaviour (see 5.4.1.5.5.1). The provisions of 7.2.3.3 shall also be considered.

182 The group of alkali metals includes lithium, sodium, potassium, rubidium and caesium.

183 The group of alkaline earth metals includes magnesium, calcium, strontium and barium.

186 In determining the ammonium nitrate content, all nitrate ions for which a molecular equivalent of ammonium ions is present in the mixture shall be calculated as ammonium nitrate.

188 Cells and batteries offered for transport are not subject to other provisions of this Code if they meet the following: .1 For a lithium metal or lithium alloy cell, the lithium content is not more than 1 g, and for a lithiumion cell, the watt-hour rating is not more than 20 W h; .2 For a lithium metal or lithium alloy battery, the aggregate lithium content is not more than 2 g, and for a lithium-ion battery, the watt-hour rating is not more than 100 W h. Lithium-ion batteries subject to this provision shall be marked with the watt-hour rating on the outside case, except those manufactured before 1 January 2009; .3 Each cell or battery meets the provisions of 2.9.4.1 and 2.9.4.5; .4 Cells and batteries, except when installed in equipment, shall be packed in inner packagings that completely enclose the cell or battery. Cells and batteries shall be protected so as to prevent short circuits. This includes protection against contact with conductive materials within the same packaging that could lead to a short circuit. The inner packagings shall be packed in strong outer packagings which conform to the provisions of 4.1.1.1, 4.1.1.2, and 4.1.1.5.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 157

175

Bilaga 1

Dangerous Goods List, special provisions and exceptions –

.5 Cells and batteries when installed in equipment shall be protected from damage and short circuit, and the equipment shall be equipped with an effective means of preventing accidental activation. This requirement does not apply to devices which are intentionally active in transport (radio frequency identification (RFID) transmitters, watches, sensors, etc.) and which are not capable of generating a dangerous evolution of heat. When batteries are installed in equipment, the equipment shall be packed in strong outer packagings constructed of suitable material of adequate strength and design in relation to the packaging’s capacity and its intended use unless the battery is afforded equivalent protection by the equipment in which it is contained. .6 Except for packages containing button cell batteries installed in equipment (including circuit boards), or no more than four cells installed in equipment or no more than two batteries installed in equipment, each package shall be marked with the following: (i) an indication that the package contains “lithium metal” or “lithium ion” cells or batteries, as appropriate; (ii) an indication that the package shall be handled with care and that a flammability hazard exists if the package is damaged; (iii) an indication that special procedures shall be followed in the event the package is damaged, to include inspection and repacking if necessary; and (iv) a telephone number for additional information. .7 Each consignment of one or more packages marked in accordance with paragraph .6 shall be accompanied with a document including the following: (i) an indication that the package contains “lithium metal” or “lithium ion” cells or batteries, as appropriate; (ii) an indication that the package shall be handled with care and that a flammability hazard exists if the package is damaged; (iii) an indication that special procedures shall be followed in the event the package is damaged, to include inspection and repacking if necessary; and (iv) a telephone number for additional information. .8 Except when batteries are installed in equipment, each package shall be capable of withstanding a 1.2 m drop test in any orientation without damage to cells or batteries contained therein, without shifting of the contents so as to allow battery to battery (or cell to cell) contact and without release of contents; and .9 Except when batteries are installed in or packed with equipment, packages shall not exceed 30 kg gross mass. As used above and elsewhere in this Code, “lithium content” means the mass of lithium in the anode of a lithium metal or lithium alloy cell. Separate entries exist for lithium metal batteries and lithium ion batteries to facilitate the transport of these batteries for specific modes of transport and to enable the application of different emergency response actions. 190 Aerosol dispensers shall be provided with protection against inadvertent discharge. Aerosols with a capacity not exceeding 50 mℓ containing only non-toxic constituents are not subject to the provisions of this Code. 191 Receptacles with a capacity not exceeding 50 mℓ containing only non-toxic constituents are not subject to the provisions of this Code. 193 This entry may only be used for uniform ammonium nitrate based fertilizer mixtures of the nitrogen, phosphate or potash type, containing not more than 70% ammonium nitrate and not more than 0.4% total combustible/organic material calculated as carbon or with not more than 45% ammonium nitrate and unrestricted combustible material. Fertilizers within these composition limits are not subject to the provisions of this Code when shown by a Trough Test (see United Nations Manual of Tests and Criteria, Part III, sub-section 38.2) that they are not liable to self-sustaining decomposition. 194 The control and emergency temperatures, if any, and the generic entry number for each of the currently assigned self-reactive substances are given in 2.4.2.3.2.3. 195 For certain organic peroxides types B or C, a smaller packaging than that allowed by packing methods OP5 or OP6 respectively has to be used (see 4.1.7 and 2.5.3.2.4). 196 Formulations which, in laboratory testing, neither detonate in the cavitated state nor deflagrate, which show no effect when heated under confinement and which exhibit no explosive power may be transported under this entry. The formulation must also be thermally stable (i.e., the SADT is 60°C or higher for a 50 kg package). Formulations not meeting these criteria shall be transported under the provisions of class 5.2 (see 2.5.3.2.4).

158 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

176

Bilaga 1

Chapter 3.3 – Special provisions applicable to certain substances, materials or articles

198 Nitrocellulose solutions containing not more than 20% nitrocellulose may be transported as paint, perfumery products or printing ink, as applicable. See UN Nos. 1210, 1263, 1266, 3066, 3469 and 3470. 199 Lead compounds which, when mixed in a ratio of 1:1000 with 0.07M hydrochloric acid and stirred for one hour at a temperature of 23°C ± 2°C, exhibit a solubility of 5% or less (see ISO 3711:1990 “Lead chromate pigments and lead chromate-molybdate pigments – Specifications and methods of test”) are considered insoluble and are not subject to the provisions of this Code unless they meet the criteria for inclusion in another hazard class. 201 Lighters and lighter refills shall comply with the provisions of the country in which they were filled. They shall be provided with protection against inadvertent discharge. The liquid portion of the gas shall not exceed 85% of the capacity of the receptacle at 15°C. The receptacles, including the closures, shall be capable of withstanding an internal pressure of twice the pressure of the liquefied petroleum gas at 55°C. The valve mechanisms and ignition devices shall be securely sealed, taped or otherwise fastened or designed to prevent operation or leakage of the contents during transport. Lighters shall not contain more than 10 g of liquefied petroleum gas. Lighter refills shall not contain more than 65 g of liquefied petroleum gas. 203 This entry shall not be used for polychlorinated biphenyls, UN 2315. 204 Articles containing smoke-producing substance(s) corrosive according to the criteria for class 8 shall be labelled with a “CORROSIVE” subsidiary risk label (Model No. 8, see 5.2.2.2.2). 205 This entry shall not be used for PENTACHLOROPHENOL, UN 3155. 207 Polymeric beads and moulding compounds may be made from polystyrene, poly(methyl methacrylate) or other polymeric material. 208 The commercial grade of calcium nitrate fertilizer, when consisting mainly of a double salt (calcium nitrate and ammonium nitrate) containing not more than 10% ammonium nitrate and at least 12% water of crystallization, is not subject to the provisions of this Code. 209 The gas shall be at a pressure corresponding to ambient atmospheric pressure at the time the containment system is closed and this shall not exceed 105 kPa absolute. 210 Toxins from plant, animal or bacterial sources which contain infectious substances, or toxins that are contained in infectious substances, shall be classified under class 6.2. 215 This entry only applies to the technically pure substance or to formulations derived from it, having an SADT higher than 75°C, and, therefore, does not apply to formulations which are self-reactive substances (for self-reactive substances, see 2.4.2.3.2.3). Homogeneous mixtures containing not more than 35% by mass of azodicarbonamide and at least 65% of inert substance are not subject to this Code unless criteria of other classes are met. 216 Mixtures of solids which are not subject to the provisions of this Code and flammable liquids may be transported under this entry without first applying the classification criteria of class 4.1, provided there is no free liquid visible at the time the substance is loaded or at the time the packaging or cargo transport unit is closed. Each cargo transport unit shall be leakproof when used as a bulk container. Sealed packets and articles containing less than 10 mℓ of a packing group II or III flammable liquid absorbed into a solid material are not subject to the provisions of this Code provided there is no free liquid in the packet or article. 217 This entry shall only be used for mixtures of solids which are not subject to the provisions of this Code and toxic liquids may be transported under this entry without first applying the classification criteria of class 6.1, provided there is no free liquid visible at the time the substance is loaded or at the time the packaging or cargo transport unit is closed. Each cargo transport unit shall be leakproof when used as a bulk container. This entry shall not be used for solids containing a packing group I liquid. 218 This entry shall only be used for mixtures of solids which are not subject to the provisions of this Code and corrosive liquids may be transported under this entry without first applying the classification criteria of class 8, provided there is no free liquid visible at the time the substance is loaded or at the time the packaging or cargo transport unit is closed. Each cargo transport unit shall be leakproof when used as a bulk container. This entry shall not be used for solids containing a packing group I liquid. 219 Genetically modified microorganisms (GMMOs) and genetically modified organisms (GMOs) packed and marked in accordance with packing instruction P904 are not subject to any other provisions of this Code. If GMMOs or GMOs meet the definition in chapter 2.6 of a toxic substance or an infectious substance and the criteria for inclusion in class 6.1 or 6.2, the provisions of this Code for transporting toxic substances or infectious substances apply.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 159

177

Bilaga 1

Dangerous Goods List, special provisions and exceptions –

220 The technical name of the flammable liquid component only of this solution or mixture shall be shown in parentheses immediately following the Proper Shipping Name. 221 Substances included under this entry shall not be of packing group I. 223 If the chemical or physical properties of a substance covered by this description are such that, when tested, it does not meet the established defining criteria for the class or division listed in column 3, or any other class or division, it is not subject to the provisions of this Code except in the case of a marine pollutant where 2.10.3 applies. 224 Unless it can be demonstrated by testing that the sensitivity of the substance in its frozen state is no greater than in its liquid state, the substance shall remain liquid during normal transport conditions. It shall not freeze at temperatures above -15°C. 225 Fire extinguishers under this entry may include installed actuating cartridges (cartridges, power device of division 1.4C or 1.4S) without changing the classification of class 2.2 provided the total quantity of deflagrating (propellant) explosives does not exceed 3.2 g per extinguishing unit. 226 Formulations of these substances containing not less than 30% non-volatile, non-flammable phlegmatizer are not subject to the provisions of this Code. 227 When phlegmatized with water and inorganic inert material, the content of urea nitrate may not exceed 75% by mass and the mixture shall not be capable of being detonated by the Series 1, type (a) test in the United Nations Manual of Tests and Criteria, Part I. 228 Mixtures not meeting the criteria for flammable gases (class 2.1) shall be transported under UN 3163. 230 Lithium cells and batteries may be transported under this entry if they meet the provisions of 2.9.4. 232 This entry shall only be used when the substance does not meet the criteria of any other class. Transport in cargo transport units other than in tanks shall be in accordance with standards specified by the competent authority of the country of origin. 235 This entry applies to articles which contain class 1 explosive substances and which may also contain dangerous goods of other classes. These articles are used as life-saving vehicle air-bag inflators or air-bag modules or seat-belt pretensioners. 236 Polyester resin kits consist of two components: a base material (class 3, packing group II or III) and an activator (organic peroxide). The organic peroxide shall be type D, E or F, not requiring temperature control. Packing group shall be II or III, according to the criteria for class 3, applied to the base material. The quantity limit and the excepted quantity code shown in columns 7a and 7b of the Dangerous Goods List apply to the base material. 237 The membrane filters, including paper separators, coating or backing materials, etc., that are present in transport, shall not be liable to propagate a detonation as tested by one of the tests described in the United Nations Manual of Tests and Criteria, Part I, Test series 1(a). In addition, the competent authority may determine, on the basis of the results of suitable burning rate tests taking account of the standard tests in the United Nations Manual of Tests and Criteria, Part III, 33.2.1, that nitrocellulose membrane filters in the form in which they are to be transported are not subject to the provisions of this Code applicable to flammable solids in class 4.1. 238 .1 Batteries can be considered as non-spillable provided that they are capable of withstanding the vibration and pressure differential tests given below, without leakage of battery fluid: Vibration test: The battery is rigidly clamped to the platform of a vibration machine and a simple harmonic motion having an amplitude of 0.8 mm (1.6 mm maximum total excursion) is applied. The frequency is varied at the rate of 1 Hz/min between the limits of 10 Hz and 55 Hz. The entire range of frequencies and return is traversed in 95 ± 5 minutes for each mounting position (direction of vibration) of the battery. The battery is tested in three mutually perpendicular positions (to include testing with fill openings and vents, if any, in an inverted position) for equal time periods. Pressure differential test: Following the vibration test, the battery is stored for six hours at 24°C ± 4°C while subjected to a pressure differential of at least 88 kPa. The battery is tested in three mutually perpendicular positions (to include testing with fill openings and vents, if any, in an inverted position) for at least six hours in each position. Non-spillable type batteries which are an integral part of and necessary for the operation of mechanical or electronic equipment shall be securely fastened in the battery holder on the equipment and protected in such a manner as to prevent damage and short circuits. .2 Non-spillable batteries are not subject to the provisions of this Code if, at a temperature of 55°C, the electrolyte will not flow from a ruptured or cracked case and there is no free liquid to flow and if, when packaged for transport, the terminals are protected from short circuit.

160 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

178

Bilaga 1

Chapter 3.3 – Special provisions applicable to certain substances, materials or articles

239 Batteries or cells shall not contain dangerous goods other than sodium, sulphur or sodium compounds (e.g., sodium polysulphides and sodium tetrachloroaluminate). Batteries or cells shall not be offered for transport at a temperature such that liquid elemental sodium is present in the battery or cell, unless approved and under the conditions established by the competent authority. Cells shall consist of hermetically sealed metal casings which fully enclose the dangerous goods and which are so constructed and closed as to prevent the release of the dangerous goods under normal conditions of transport. Batteries shall consist of cells secured within and fully enclosed by a metal casing so constructed and closed as to prevent the release of the dangerous goods under normal conditions of transport. Batteries installed in vehicles are not subject to the provisions of this Code. 240 This entry only applies to vehicles powered by wet batteries, sodium batteries, lithium metal batteries or lithium ion batteries and equipment powered by wet batteries or sodium batteries transported with these batteries installed. For the purpose of this special provision, vehicles are self-propelled apparatus designed to carry one or more persons or goods. Examples of such vehicles are electrically-powered cars, motorcycles, scooters, three- and four-wheeled vehicles or motorcycles, e bikes, wheel-chairs, lawn tractors, boats and aircraft. Examples of equipment are lawnmowers, cleaning machines or model boats and model aircraft. Equipment powered by lithium metal batteries or lithium ion batteries shall be consigned under the entries UN 3091 LITHIUM METAL BATTERIES CONTAINED IN EQUIPMENT or UN 3091 LITHIUM METAL BATTERIES PACKED WITH EQUIPMENT or UN 3481 LITHIUM ION BATTERIES CONTAINED IN EQUIPMENT or UN 3481 LITHIUM ION BATTERIES PACKED WITH EQUIPMENT, as appropriate. Hybrid electric vehicles powered by both an internal combustion engine and wet batteries, sodium batteries, lithium metal batteries or lithium ion batteries, transported with the battery(ies) installed shall be consigned under the entries UN 3166 VEHICLE, FLAMMABLE GAS POWERED or UN 3166 VEHICLE, FLAMMABLE LIQUID POWERED, as appropriate. Vehicles which contain a fuel cell shall be consigned under the entries UN 3166 VEHICLE, FUEL CELL, FLAMMABLE GAS POWERED or UN 3166 VEHICLE, FUEL CELL, FLAMMABLE LIQUID POWERED, as appropriate. 241 The formulation shall be prepared so that it remains homogeneous and does not separate during transport. Formulations with low nitrocellulose contents and not showing dangerous properties when tested for their liability to detonate, deflagrate or explode when heated under defined confinement by tests of Test series 1(a), 2(b) and 2(c) respectively in the United Nations Manual of Tests and Criteria, Part I and not being a flammable solid when tested in accordance with test No. 1 in the United Nations Manual of Tests and Criteria, Part III, paragraph 33.2.1.4 (chips, if necessary, crushed and sieved to a particle size of less than 1.25 mm) are not subject to the provisions of this Code. 242 Sulphur is not subject to the provisions of this Code when it has been formed to a specific shape (such as prills, granules, pellets, pastilles or flakes). 243 Gasoline, motor spirit and petrol for use in spark-ignition engines (e.g., in automobiles, stationary engines and other engines) shall be assigned to this entry regardless of variations in volatility. 244 This entry includes materials and substances such as aluminium dross, aluminium skimmings, spent cathodes, spent potliner and aluminium salt slags. 247 Alcoholic beverages containing more than 24% alcohol but not more than 70% by volume, when transported as part of the manufacturing process, may be transported in wooden barrels with a capacity of more than 250 litres and not more than 500 litres meeting the general requirements of 4.1.1, as appropriate, on the following conditions: .1 the wooden barrels shall be checked and tightened before filling; .2 sufficient ullage (not less than 3%) shall be left to allow for the expansion of the liquid; .3 the wooden barrels shall be transported with the bungholes pointing upwards; .4 the wooden barrels shall be transported in containers meeting the provisions of the International Convention for Safe Containers (CSC 1972), as amended, and each wooden barrel shall be secured in custom-made cradles and be wedged by appropriate means to prevent it from being displaced in any way during transport; and .5 when carried on board ships, the containers shall be stowed in open cargo spaces or in enclosed cargo spaces complying with the requirements for class 3 flammable liquids with a flashpoint of 23°C c.c. or less in regulation II-2/19 of SOLAS, 74, as amended or regulation II-2/54 of SOLAS 74, as amended by the resolutions indicated in II-2/1.2.1, as applicable. 249 Ferrocerium, stabilized against corrosion, with a minimum iron content of 10% is not subject to the provisions of this Code.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 161

179

Bilaga 1

Dangerous Goods List, special provisions and exceptions –

250 This entry may only be used for samples of chemicals taken for analysis in connection with the implementation of the Convention on the Prohibition of the Development, Production, Stockpiling and Use of Chemical Weapons and on their Destruction. The transport of substances under this entry shall be in accordance with the chain of custody and security procedures specified by the Organization for the Prohibition of Chemical Weapons. The chemical sample may only be transported provided prior approval has been granted by the competent authority or the Director General of the Organization for the Prohibition of Chemical Weapons and providing the sample complies with the following conditions: .1 it shall be packaged according to packing instruction 623 in the International Civil Aviation Organization’s Technical Instructions for the Safe Transport of Dangerous Goods by Air; and .2 during transport, it shall be accompanied by a copy of the document of approval for transport, showing the quantity limitations and the packing provisions. 251 The entry CHEMICAL KIT or FIRST AID KIT is intended to apply to boxes, cases, etc., containing small quantities of various dangerous goods which are used, for example, for medical, analytical, testing or repair purposes. Such kits may not contain dangerous goods for which the quantity “0” has been indicated in column 7a of the Dangerous Goods List. Components shall not react dangerously (see 4.1.1.6). The total quantity of dangerous goods in any one kit shall not exceed either 1 ℓ or 1 kg. The packing group assigned to the kit as a whole shall be the most stringent packing group assigned to any individual substance in the kit. Kits which are carried on board vehicles for first-aid or operating purposes are not subject to the provisions of this Code. Chemical kits and first aid kits containing dangerous goods in inner packagings which do not exceed the quantity limits for limited quantities applicable to individual substances as specified in column 7a of the Dangerous Goods List may be transported in accordance with chapter 3.4. 252 Provided the ammonium nitrate remains in solution under all conditions of transport, aqueous solutions of ammonium nitrate, with not more than 0.2% combustible material, in a concentration not exceeding 80%, are not subject to the provisions of this Code. 266 This substance, when containing less alcohol, water or phlegmatizer than specified, shall not be transported, unless specifically authorized by the competent authority. 267 Any explosives, blasting, type C containing chlorates shall be segregated from explosives containing ammonium nitrate or other ammonium salts. 270 Aqueous solutions of class 5.1 inorganic solid nitrate substances are considered as not meeting the criteria of class 5.1 if the concentration of the substances in solution at the minimum temperature encountered in transport is not greater than 80% of the saturation limit. 271 Lactose or glucose or similar materials may be used as a phlegmatizer provided that the substance contains not less than 90%, by mass, of phlegmatizer. The competent authority may authorize these mixtures to be classified under class 4.1 on the basis of series 6(c) tests of Part I of the United Nations Manual of Tests and Criteria on at least three packages as prepared for transport. Mixtures containing at least 98%, by mass, of phlegmatizer are not subject to the provisions of this Code. Packages containing mixtures with not less than 90%, by mass, of phlegmatizer need not bear a “TOXIC” subsidiary risk label. 272 This substance shall not be transported under the provisions of class 4.1 unless specifically authorized by the competent authority (see UN 0143 or UN 0150 as appropriate). 273 Maneb and maneb preparations stabilized against self-heating need not be classified in class 4.2 3 when it can be demonstrated by testing that a cubic volume of 1 m of substance does not self-ignite and that the temperature at the centre of the sample does not exceed 200°C when the sample is maintained at a temperature of not less than 75°C ± 2°C for a period of 24 hours. 274 For the purposes of documentation and package marking, the Proper Shipping Name shall be supplemented with the technical name (see 3.1.2.8.1). 277 For aerosols or receptacles containing toxic substances, the limited quantity value is 120 mℓ. For all other aerosols or receptacles, the limited quantity value is 1000 mℓ. 278 These substances shall not be classified and transported unless authorized by the competent authority on the basis of results from series 2 tests and series 6(c) tests of Part I of the United Nations Manual of Tests and Criteria on packages as prepared for transport (see 2.1.3.1). The competent authority shall assign the packing group on the basis of the chapter 2.3 criteria and the package type used for the series 6(c) tests. 279 The substance is assigned to this classification or packing group based on human experience rather than the strict application of classification criteria set out in this Code.

162 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

180

Bilaga 1

Chapter 3.3 – Special provisions applicable to certain substances, materials or articles

280 This entry applies to articles which are used as life-saving vehicle air bag inflators, or air bag modules or seat-belt pretensioners and which contain dangerous goods of class 1 or dangerous goods of other classes and when transported as component parts and when these articles as presented for transport have been tested in accordance with Test series 6(c) of Part I of the United Nations Manual of Tests and Criteria, with no explosion of the device, no fragmentation of device casing or pressure receptacle, and no projection hazard nor thermal effect which would significantly hinder fire-fighting or other emergency response efforts in the immediate vicinity. 281 Transport of hay, straw or bhusa when wet, damp or contaminated with oil is prohibited and when not wet or contaminated with oil is subject to the provisions of this Code. 283 Articles, containing gas, intended to function as shock absorbers, including impact-energy-absorbing devices or pneumatic springs, are not subject to the provisions of this Code provided: .1 each article has a gas space capacity not exceeding 1.6 ℓ and a charge pressure not exceeding 280 bar where the product of the capacity (litres) and charge pressure (bar) does not exceed 80 (i.e., 0.5 ℓ gas space and 160 bar charge pressure, 1 ℓ gas space and 80 bar charge pressure, 1.6 ℓ gas space and 50 bar charge pressure, 0.28 ℓ gas space and 280 bar charge pressure); .2 each article has a minimum burst pressure of 4 times the charge pressure at 20°C for products not exceeding 0.5 ℓ gas space capacity and 5 times charge pressure for products greater than 0.5 ℓ gas space capacity; .3 each article is manufactured from material which will not fragment upon rupture; .4 each article is manufactured in accordance with a quality-assurance standard acceptable to the competent authority; and .5 the design type has been subjected to a fire test demonstrating that pressure in the article is relieved by means of a fire-degradable seal or other pressure relief device, such that the article will not fragment and that the article does not rocket. 284 An oxygen generator, chemical, containing oxidizing substances shall meet the following conditions: .1 the generator, when containing an explosive device, shall only be transported under this entry when excluded from class 1 in accordance with 2.1.3 of this Code; .2 the generator, without its packaging, shall be capable of withstanding a 1.8 m drop test onto a rigid, non-resilient, flat and horizontal surface, in the position most likely to cause damage, without loss of its contents and without actuation; and .3 when the generator is equipped with an actuating device, it shall have at least two positive means of preventing unintentional actuation. 286 Nitrocellulose membrane filters covered by this entry, each with a mass not exceeding 0.5 g, are not subject to the provisions of this Code when contained individually in an article or a sealed packet. 288 These substances shall not be classified and transported unless authorized by the competent authority on the basis of results from series 2 tests and series 6(c) tests of Part I of the United Nations Manual of Tests and Criteria on packages as prepared for transport (see 2.1.3). 289 Air bag inflators, air bag modules or seat-belt pretensioners installed in vehicles, vessels or aircrafts or in completed components such as steering columns, door panels, seats, etc. are not subject to the provisions of this Code. 290 When this radioactive material meets the definitions and criteria of other classes or divisions as defined in part 2, it shall be classified in accordance with the following: .1 Where the substance meets the criteria for dangerous goods in excepted quantities as set out in chapter 3.5, the packagings shall be in accordance with 3.5.2 and meet the testing requirements of 3.5.3. All other requirements applicable to radioactive material, excepted packages as set out in 1.5.1.5 shall apply without reference to the other class or division; .2 Where the quantity exceeds the limits specified in 3.5.1.2, the substance shall be classified in accordance with the predominant subsidiary risk. The dangerous goods transport document shall describe the substance with the UN Number and Proper Shipping Name applicable to the other class supplemented with the name applicable to the radioactive excepted package according to column 2 in the Dangerous Goods List of chapter 3.2, and the substance shall be transported in accordance with the provisions applicable to that UN Number. An example of the information shown on the dangerous goods transport document is: UN 1993, Flammable liquid, N.O.S. (ethanol and toluene mixture), Radioactive material, excepted package – limited quantity of material, class 3, PG II. In addition, the provisions of 2.7.2.4.1 shall apply; .3 The provisions of chapter 3.4 for the transport of dangerous goods packed in limited quantities shall not apply to substances classified in accordance with subparagraph .2;

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 163

181

Bilaga 1

Dangerous Goods List, special provisions and exceptions –

.4 When the substance meets a special provision that exempts this substance from all dangerous goods provisions of the other classes, it shall be classified in accordance with the applicable UN Number of class 7 and all requirements specified in 1.5.1.5 shall apply. 291 Flammable liquefied gases shall be contained within refrigerating-machine components. These components shall be designed and tested to at least three times the working pressure of the machinery. The refrigerating machines and refrigerating machinery components shall be designed and constructed to contain the liquefied gas and preclude the risk of bursting or cracking of the pressure-retaining components during normal conditions of transport. Refrigerating machines and refrigerating-machine components are not subject to the provisions of this Code if they contain less than 12 kg of gas. 293 The following definitions apply to matches: (a) Fusee matches are matches the heads of which are prepared with a friction-sensitive igniter composition and a pyrotechnic composition which burns with little or no flame, but with intense heat; (b) Safety matches are combined with or attached to the box, book or card that can be ignited by friction only on a prepared surface; (c) “Strike anywhere” matches are matches that can be ignited by friction on a solid surface; (d) Wax ‘Vesta’ matches are matches that can be ignited by friction either on a prepared surface or on a solid surface. 294 Safety matches and wax ‘Vesta’ matches in an outer packaging not exceeding 25 kg net mass are not subject to any other provision (except marking) of this Code when packaged in accordance with packing instruction P407. 295 Batteries need not be individually marked and labelled if the pallet bears the appropriate mark and label. 296 These entries apply to life-saving appliances such as liferafts, personal flotation devices and selfinflating slides. UN 2990 applies to self-inflating appliances. UN 3072 applies to life-saving appliances that are not self-inflating. Life-saving appliances may contain: .1 signal devices (class 1) which may include smoke and illumination signal flares packed in packagings that prevent them from being inadvertently activated; .2 for UN 2990 only, cartridges, power device of division 1.4, compatibility group S, may be contained for purposes of the self-inflating mechanism and provided that the quantity of explosives per appliance does not exceed 3.2 g; .3 class 2.2 compressed or liquefied gases; .4 electric storage batteries (class 8) and lithium batteries (class 9); .5 first aid kits or repair kits containing small quantities of dangerous goods (e.g., classes 3, 4.1, 5.2, 8 or 9 substances); or .6 “Strike anywhere” matches packed in packagings that prevent them from being inadvertently activated. Life-saving appliances packed in strong rigid outer packagings with a total maximum gross mass of 40 kg, containing no dangerous goods other than Class 2.2 compressed or liquefied gases with no subsidiary risk in receptacles with a capacity not exceeding 120 mℓ, installed solely for the purpose of the activation of the appliance, are not subject to the provision of this Code. 299 Consignments of: 3 (i) Cotton, dry having a density not less than 360 kg/m ; 3 (ii) Flax, dry having a density not less than 400 kg/m ; 3 (iii) Sisal, dry having a density not less than 360 kg/m ; and (iv) Tampico fibre, dry having a density not less than 360 kg/m3, according to ISO 8115:1986, are not subject to the provisions of this Code when transported in closed cargo transport units. 300 Fish meal, fish scrap and krill meal shall not be transported if the temperature at the time of loading exceeds 35°C or 5°C above the ambient temperature, whichever is higher. 301 This entry only applies to machinery or apparatus containing dangerous substances as a residue or an integral element of the machinery or apparatus. It shall not be used for machinery or apparatus for which a Proper Shipping Name already exists in the Dangerous Goods List. Machinery and apparatus transported under this entry shall only contain dangerous goods which are authorized to be transported in accordance with the provisions in chapter 3.4 (Limited quantities). The quantity of dangerous goods in machinery or apparatus shall not exceed the quantity specified in column 7a of the Dangerous Goods List for each item of dangerous goods contained. If the machinery or apparatus contains more than one item of dangerous goods, the individual substances shall not be capable

164 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

182

Bilaga 1

Chapter 3.3 – Special provisions applicable to certain substances, materials or articles

of reacting dangerously with one another (see 4.1.1.6). When it is required to ensure liquid dangerous goods remain in their intended orientation, package orientation labels meeting the specifications of ISO 780: 1985 shall be affixed on at least two opposite vertical sides with the arrows pointing in the correct direction. The transport of dangerous goods in machinery or apparatus where the quantity of dangerous goods exceeds the quantity specified in column 7a of the Dangerous Goods List is authorized when approved by the competent authority, except where special provision 363 applies. 302 Fumigated cargo transport units containing no other dangerous goods are only subject to the provisions of 5.5.2. 303 Receptacles shall be assigned to the class and, if any, subsidiary hazard of the gas or mixture of gases contained therein determined in accordance with the provisions of chapter 2.2. 304 This entry may only be used for the transport of non-activated batteries which contain dry potassium hydroxide and which are intended to be activated prior to use by the addition of an appropriate amount of water to the individual cells. 305 These substances are not subject to the provisions of this Code when in concentrations of not more than 50 mg/kg. 306 This entry may only be used for substances that do not exhibit explosive properties of class 1 when tested in accordance to Test Series 1 and 2 of class 1 (see United Nations Manual of Tests and Criteria, Part I). 307 This entry shall be used for uniform mixtures containing ammonium nitrate as the main ingredient within the following composition limits: .1 not less than 90% ammonium nitrate with not more than 0.2% total combustible/organic material calculated as carbon and with added matter, if any, which is inorganic and inert towards ammonium nitrate; or .2 less than 90% but more than 70% ammonium nitrate with other inorganic materials or more than 80% but less than 90% ammonium nitrate mixed with calcium carbonate and/or dolomite and/or mineral calcium sulphate and not more than 0.4% total combustible/organic material calculated as carbon; or .3 nitrogen type ammonium nitrate based fertilizers containing mixtures of ammonium nitrate and ammonium sulphate with more than 45% but less than 70% ammonium nitrate and not more than 0.4% total combustible/organic material calculated as carbon such that the sum of the percentage compositions of ammonium nitrate and ammonium sulphate exceeds 70%. 308 Fish scrap or fish meal shall contain at least 100 ppm of antioxidant (ethoxyquin) at the time of consignment. 309 This entry applies to non-sensitized emulsions, suspensions and gels consisting primarily of a mixture of ammonium nitrate and fuel, intended to produce a Type E blasting explosive only after further processing prior to use. The mixture for emulsions typically has the following composition: 60–85% ammonium nitrate, 5–30% water, 2–8% fuel, 0.5–4% emulsifier agent, 0–10% soluble flame suppressants, and trace additives. Other inorganic nitrate salts may replace part of the ammonium nitrate. The mixture for suspensions and gels typically has the following composition: 60–85% ammonium nitrate, 0–5% sodium or potassium perchlorate, 0–17% hexamine nitrate or monomethylamine nitrate, 5–30% water, 2–15% fuel, 0.5–4% thickening agent, 0–10% soluble flame suppressants, and trace additives. Other inorganic nitrate salts may replace part of the ammonium nitrate. Substances shall satisfactorily pass Test Series 8 of the United Nations Manual of Tests and Criteria, Part I, section 18 and be approved by the competent authority. 310 The testing requirements in chapter 38.3 of the United Nations Manual of Tests and Criteria do not apply to production runs consisting of not more than 100 cells and batteries, or to pre-production prototypes of cells and batteries when these prototypes are transported for testing, if: .1 the cells and batteries are transported in an outer packaging that is a metal, plastics or plywood drum or a metal, plastics or wooden box and that meets the criteria for packing group I packagings; and .2 each cell and battery is individually packed in an inner packaging inside an outer packaging and is surrounded by cushioning material that is non-combustible, and non-conductive. 311 Substances shall not be transported under this entry unless approved by the competent authority on the basis of the results of appropriate tests according to Part I of the United Nations Manual of Tests and Criteria. Packaging shall ensure that the percentage of diluent does not fall below that stated in the competent authority approval at any time during transport. 312 Vehicles or machinery powered by a fuel cell engine shall be consigned under the entries UN 3166 VEHICLE, FUEL CELL, FLAMMABLE GAS POWERED or UN 3166 VEHICLE, FUEL CELL, FLAMMA- BLE LIQUID POWERED, or UN 3166 ENGINE, FUEL CELL, FLAMMABLE GAS POWERED or UN 3166

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 165

183

Bilaga 1

Dangerous Goods List, special provisions and exceptions –

ENGINE, FUEL CELL, FLAMMABLE LIQUID POWERED as appropriate. These entries include hybrid electric vehicles powered by both a fuel cell and an internal combustion engine with wet batteries, sodium batteries, lithium metal batteries or lithium ion batteries, transported with the battery(ies) installed. Other vehicles which contain an internal combustion engine shall be consigned under the entries UN 3166 VEHICLE, FLAMMABLE GAS POWERED or UN 3166 VEHICLE, FLAMMABLE LIQUID POWERED, as appropriate. These entries include hybrid electric vehicles powered by both an internal combustion engine and wet batteries, sodium batteries, lithium metal batteries or lithium ion batteries, transported with the batteries installed. 314 (a) These substances are liable to exothermic decomposition at elevated temperatures. Decomposition can be initiated by heat or by impurities (e.g., powdered metals (iron, manganese, cobalt, magnesium) and their compounds). (b) During the course of transport, these substances shall be shaded from direct sunlight and all sources of heat and be placed in adequately ventilated areas. 315 This entry shall not be used for class 6.1 substances which meet the inhalation toxicity criteria for packing group I described in 2.6.2.2.4.3. 316 This entry applies only to calcium hypochlorite, dry, when transported in non-friable tablet form. 317 “Fissile – excepted” applies only to those packages complying with 6.4.11.2. 318 For the purposes of documentation, the Proper Shipping Name shall be supplemented with the technical name (see 3.1.2.8). Technical names need not be shown on the package. When the infectious substances to be transported are unknown, but suspected of meeting the criteria for inclusion in category A and assignment to UN 2814 or UN 2900, the words “suspected category A infectious substance” shall be shown, in parentheses, following the Proper Shipping Name on the transport document, but not on the outer packagings. 319 Substances packed and packages marked in accordance with packing instruction P650 are not subject to any other provisions of this Code. 321 These storage systems shall always be considered as containing hydrogen. 322 When transported in non-friable tablet form, these goods are assigned to packing group III. 324 This substance needs to be stabilized when in concentrations of not more than 99%. 325 In the case of non-fissile or fissile excepted uranium hexafluoride, the material shall be classified under UN 2978. 326 In the case of fissile uranium hexafluoride, the material shall be classified under UN 2977. 327 Waste aerosols consigned in accordance with 5.4.1.4.3.3 may be transported under this entry for the purposes of reprocessing or disposal. They need not be protected against inadvertent discharge provided that measures to prevent dangerous build-up of pressure and dangerous atmospheres are addressed. Waste aerosols, other than those leaking or severely deformed, shall be packed in accordance with packing instruction P207 and special provision PP87, or packing instruction LP02 and special packing provision L2. Leaking or severely deformed aerosols shall be transported in salvage packagings provided appropriate measures are taken to ensure there is no dangerous build-up of pressure. Waste aerosols shall not be transported in closed freight containers. 328 This entry applies to fuel cell cartridges, including when contained in equipment or packed with equipment. Fuel cell cartridges installed in or integral to a fuel cell system are regarded as contained in equipment. “Fuel cell cartridge” means an article that stores fuel for discharge into the fuel cell through a valve(s) that controls the discharge of fuel into the fuel cell. Fuel cell cartridges, including when contained in equipment, shall be designed and constructed to prevent fuel leakage under normal conditions of transport. Fuel cell cartridge design types using liquids as fuels shall pass an internal pressure test at a pressure of 100 kPa (gauge) without leakage. Except for fuel cell cartridges containing hydrogen in metal hydride, which shall be in compliance with special provision 339, each fuel cell cartridge design type shall be shown to pass a 1.2 m drop test onto an unyielding surface, in the orientation most likely to result in failure of the containment system, with no loss of contents. When lithium metal or lithium ion batteries are contained in the fuel cell system, the consignment shall be consigned under this entry and under the appropriate entries for UN 3091 LITHIUM METAL BATTERIES CONTAINED IN EQUIPMENT or UN 3481 LITHIUM ION BATTERIES CONTAINED IN EQUIPMENT.

166 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

184

Bilaga 1

Chapter 3.3 – Special provisions applicable to certain substances, materials or articles

332 Magnesium nitrate hexahydrate is not subject to the provisions of this Code. 333 Ethanol and gasoline, motor spirit or petrol mixtures for use in spark-ignition engines (e.g., in automobiles, stationary engines and other engines) shall be assigned to this entry regardless of variations in volatility. 334 A fuel cell cartridge may contain an activator provided it is fitted with two independent means of preventing unintended mixing with the fuel during transport. 335 Mixtures of solids which are not subject to the provisions of this Code and environmentally hazardous liquids assigned to UN 3082 may be classified and transported as UN 3077, provided there is no free liquid visible at the time the substance is loaded or at the time the packaging or cargo transport unit is closed. If free liquid is visible at the time the mixture is loaded or at the time the packaging or cargo transport unit is closed, the mixture shall be classified as UN 3082. Each cargo transport unit shall be leakproof when used as a bulk container. Sealed packets and articles containing less than 10 mℓ of an environmentally hazardous liquid assigned to UN 3082, absorbed into a solid material but with no free liquid in the packet or article, or containing less than 10 g of an environmentally hazardous solid assigned to UN 3077, are not subject to the provisions of this Code. 338 Each fuel cell cartridge transported under this entry and designed to contain a liquefied flammable gas shall: .1 be capable of withstanding, without leakage or bursting, a pressure of at least two times the equilibrium pressure of the contents at 55°C; .2 Not contain more than 200 mℓ liquefied flammable gas, the vapour pressure of which shall not exceed 1 000 kPa at 55 °C; and .3 pass the hot water bath test prescribed in 6.2.4.1 of chapter 6.2. 339 Fuel cell cartridges containing hydrogen in a metal hydride transported under this entry shall have a water capacity less than or equal to 120 mℓ. The pressure in the fuel cell cartridge shall not exceed 5 MPa at 55°C. The design type shall withstand, without leaking or bursting, a pressure of two (2) times the design pressure of the cartridge at 55°C or 200 kPa more than the design pressure of the cartridge at 55°C, whichever is greater. The pressure at which this test is conducted is referred to in the Drop Test and the Hydrogen Cycling Test as the “minimum shell burst pressure”. Fuel cell cartridges shall be filled in accordance with procedures provided by the manufacturer. The manufacturer shall provide the following information with each fuel cell cartridge: .1 Inspection procedures to be carried out before initial filling and before refilling of the fuel cell cartridge; .2 Safety precautions and potential hazards to be aware of; .3 Method for determining when the rated capacity has been achieved; .4 Minimum and maximum pressure range; .5 Minimum and maximum temperature range; and .6 Any other requirements to be met for initial filling and refilling, including the type of equipment to be used for initial filling and refilling. The fuel cell cartridges shall be designed and constructed to prevent fuel leakage under normal conditions of transport. Each cartridge design type, including cartridges integral to a fuel cell, shall be subjected to and shall pass the following tests: Drop test A 1.8 m drop test onto an unyielding surface in four different orientations: .1 Vertically, on the end containing the shut-off valve assembly; .2 Vertically, on the end opposite to the shut-off valve assembly; .3 Horizontally, onto a steel apex with a diameter of 38 mm, with the steel apex in the upward position; and .4 At a 45° angle on the end containing the shut-off valve assembly. There shall be no leakage, determined by using a soap bubble solution or other equivalent means on all possible leak locations, when the cartridge is charged to its rated charging pressure. The fuel cell cartridge shall then be hydrostatically pressurized to destruction. The recorded burst pressure shall exceed 85% of the minimum shell burst pressure. Fire test A fuel cell cartridge filled to rated capacity with hydrogen shall be subjected to a fire engulfment test. The cartridge design, which may include a vent feature integral to it, is deemed to have passed the fire test if: .1 The internal pressure vents to zero gauge pressure without rupture of the cartridge; or .2 The cartridge withstands the fire for a minimum of 20 minutes without rupture.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 167

185

Bilaga 1

Dangerous Goods List, special provisions and exceptions –

Hydrogen cycling test This test is intended to ensure that a fuel cell cartridge design stress limits are not exceeded during use. The fuel cell cartridge shall be cycled from not more than 5% rated hydrogen capacity to not less than 95% rated hydrogen capacity and back to not more than 5% rated hydrogen capacity. The rated charging pressure shall be used for charging and temperatures shall be held within the operating temperature range. The cycling shall be continued for at least 100 cycles. Following the cycling test, the fuel cell cartridge shall be charged and the water volume displaced by the cartridge shall be measured. The cartridge design is deemed to have passed the hydrogen cycling test if the water volume displaced by the cycled cartridge does not exceed the water volume displaced by an uncycled cartridge charged to 95% rated capacity and pressurized to 75% of its minimum shell burst pressure.

Production leak test Each fuel cell cartridge shall be tested for leaks at 15°C ± 5°C, while pressurized to its rated charging pressure. There shall be no leakage, determined by using a soap bubble solution or other equivalent means on all possible leak locations. Each fuel cell cartridge shall be permanently marked with the following information: .1 The rated charging pressure in megapascals (MPa); .2 The manufacturer’s serial number of the fuel cell cartridges or unique identification number; and .3 The date of expiry based on the maximum service life (year in four digits; month in two digits). 340 Chemical kits, first aid kits and polyester resin kits containing dangerous substances in inner packagings which do not exceed the quantity limits for excepted quantities applicable to individual substances as specified in column 7b of the Dangerous Goods List may be transported in accordance with chapter 3.5. Class 5.2 substances, although not individually authorized as excepted quantities in the Dangerous Goods List, are authorized in such kits and are assigned code E2 (see 3.5.1.2). 341 Bulk transport of infectious substances in BK2 bulk containers is only permitted for infectious substances contained in animal material as defined in 1.2.1 (see 4.3.2.4.1). 342 Glass inner receptacles (such as ampoules or capsules) intended only for use in sterilization devices, when containing less than 30 mℓ of ethylene oxide per inner packaging with not more than 300 mℓ per outer packaging, may be transported in accordance with the provisions in chapter 3.5, irrespective of the indication of “E0” in column 7b of the Dangerous Goods List provided that: .1 After filling, each glass inner receptacle has been determined to be leak tight by placing the glass inner receptacle in a hot water bath at a temperature, and for a period of time, sufficient to ensure that an internal pressure equal to the vapour pressure of ethylene oxide at 55°C is achieved. Any glass inner receptacle showing evidence of leakage, distortion or other defect under this test shall not be transported under the terms of this special provision; .2 In addition to the packaging required by 3.5.2, each glass inner receptacle is placed in a sealed plastics bag compatible with ethylene oxide and capable of containing the contents in the event of breakage or leakage of the glass inner receptacle; and .3 Each glass inner receptacle is protected by a means of preventing puncture of the plastics bag (e.g., sleeves or cushioning) in the event of damage to the packaging (e.g., by crushing). 343 This entry applies to crude oil containing hydrogen sulphide in sufficient concentration that vapours evolved from the crude oil can present an inhalation hazard. The packing group assigned shall be determined by the flammability hazard and inhalation hazard, in accordance with the degree of danger presented. 344 The provisions of 6.2.4 shall be met. 345 This gas contained in open cryogenic receptacles with a maximum capacity of 1 litre constructed with glass double walls having the space between the inner and outer wall evacuated (vacuum insulated) is not subject to the provisions of this Code provided each receptacle is transported in an outer packaging with suitable cushioning or absorbent materials to protect it from impact damage. 346 Open cryogenic receptacles conforming to the requirements of packing instruction P203 and containing no dangerous goods except for UN 1977, nitrogen, refrigerated liquid, which is fully absorbed in a porous material, are not subject to any other provisions of this Code. 347 This entry shall only be used if the results of Test series 6 (d) of part I of the United Nations Manual of Tests and Criteria have demonstrated that any hazardous effects arising from functioning are confined within the package. 348 Batteries manufactured after 31 December 2011 shall be marked with the Watt hour rating on the outside case.

168 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

186

Bilaga 1

Chapter 3.3 – Special provisions applicable to certain substances, materials or articles

349 Mixtures of a hypochlorite with an ammonium salt are not to be accepted for transport. UN 1791 hypochlorite solution is a substance of class 8. 350 Ammonium bromate and its aqueous solutions and mixtures of a bromate with an ammonium salt are not to be accepted for transport. 351 Ammonium chlorate and its aqueous solutions and mixtures of a chlorate with an ammonium salt are not to be accepted for transport. 352 Ammonium chlorite and its aqueous solutions and mixtures of a chlorite with an ammonium salt are not to be accepted for transport. 353 Ammonium permanganate and its aqueous solutions and mixtures of a permanganate with an ammonium salt are not to be accepted for transport. 354 This substance is toxic by inhalation. 355 Oxygen cylinders for emergency use transported under this entry may include installed actuating cartridges (cartridges, power device of class 1.4, compatibility group C or S), without changing the classification of class 2.2 provided the total quantity of deflagrating (propellant) explosives does not exceed 3.2 g per oxygen cylinder. The cylinders with the installed actuating cartridges as prepared for transport shall have an effective means of preventing inadvertent activation. 356 Metal hydride storage systems installed in vehicles, vessels or aircrafts or in completed components or intended to be installed in vehicles, vessels or aircrafts shall be approved by the competent authority before acceptance for transport. The transport document shall include an indication that the package was approved by the competent authority or a copy of the competent authority approval shall accompany each consignment. 357 Petroleum crude oil containing hydrogen sulphide in sufficient concentration that vapours evolved from the crude oil can present an inhalation hazard shall be consigned under the entry UN 3494 PETROLEUM SOUR CRUDE OIL, FLAMMABLE, TOXIC. 358 Nitroglycerin solution in alcohol with more than 1% but not more than 5% nitroglycerin may be classified in Class 3 and assigned to UN 3064 provided all the requirements of packing instruction P300 are complied with. 359 Nitroglycerin solution in alcohol with more than 1% but not more than 5% nitroglycerin shall be classified in Class 1 and assigned to UN 0144 if not all the requirements of packing instruction P300 are complied with. 360 Vehicles only powered by lithium metal batteries or lithium ion batteries shall be consigned under the entry UN 3171 BATTERY POWERED VEHICLE. 361 This entry applies to electric double layer capacitors with an energy storage capacity greater than 0.3 Wh. Capacitors with an energy storage capacity of 0.3 Wh or less are not subject to the provisions of this Code. Energy storage capacity means the energy held by a capacitor, as calculated using the nominal voltage and capacitance. All capacitors to which this entry applies, including capacitors containing an electrolyte that does not meet the classification criteria of any class or division of dangerous goods, shall meet the following conditions: .1 Capacitors not installed in equipment shall be transported in an uncharged state. Capacitors installed in equipment shall be transported either in an uncharged state or protected against short circuit; .2 Each capacitor shall be protected against a potential short circuit hazard in transport as follows: (i) When a capacitor's energy storage capacity is less than or equal to 10 Wh or when the energy storage capacity of each capacitor in a module is less than or equal to 10 Wh , the capacitor or module shall be protected against short circuit or be fitted with a metal strap connecting the terminals; and (ii) When the energy storage capacity of a capacitor or a capacitor in a module is more than 10 Wh, the capacitor or module shall be fitted with a metal strap connecting the terminals; .3 Capacitors containing dangerous goods shall be designed to withstand a 95 kPa pressure differential; .4 Capacitors shall be designed and constructed to safely relieve pressure that may build up in use, through a vent or a weak point in the capacitor casing. Any liquid which is released upon venting shall be contained by the packaging or by the equipment in which a capacitor is installed; and .5 Capacitors shall be marked with the energy storage capacity in Wh Capacitors containing an electrolyte not meeting the classification criteria of any class or division of dangerous goods, including when installed in equipment, are not subject to other provisions of this Code.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 169

187

Bilaga 1

Dangerous Goods List, special provisions and exceptions –

Capacitors containing an electrolyte meeting the classification criteria of any class or division of dangerous goods, with an energy storage capacity of 10 Wh or less are not subject to other provisions of this Code when they are capable of withstanding a 1.2 metre drop test unpackaged on an unyielding surface without loss of contents. Capacitors containing an electrolyte meeting the classification criteria of any class or division of dangerous goods that are not installed in equipment and with an energy storage capacity of more than 10 Wh are subject to the provisions of this Code. Capacitors installed in the equipment and containing an electrolyte meeting the classification criteria of any class or division of dangerous goods, are not subject to other provisions of this Code provided the equipment is packaged in a strong outer packaging constructed of suitable material and of adequate strength and design, in relation to the packaging's intended use and in such a manner as to prevent accidental functioning of capacitors during transport. Large robust equipment containing capacitors may be offered for transport unpackaged or on pallets when capacitors are afforded equivalent protection by the equipment in which they are contained. Note: Capacitors which by design maintain a terminal voltage (e.g., asymmetrical capacitors) do not belong to this entry. 362 This entry applies to liquids, pastes or powders, pressurized with a propellant which meets the definition of a gas in 2.2.1.1 and 2.2.1.2 (.1) or (.2). Note: A chemical under pressure in an aerosol dispenser shall be transported under UN 1950. The following provisions shall apply: .1 The chemical under pressure shall be classified based on the hazard characteristics of the components in the different states: – the propellant; – the liquid; or – the solid. If one of these components, which can be a pure substance or a mixture, needs to be classified as flammable, the chemical under pressure shall be classified as flammable in class 2.1. Flammable components are flammable liquids and liquid mixtures, flammable solids and solid mixtures or flammable gases and gas mixtures meeting the following criteria: (i) A flammable liquid is a liquid having a flashpoint of not more than 93°C; (ii) A flammable solid is a solid which meets the criteria in 2.4.2.2 of this Code; (iii) A flammable gas is a gas which meets the criteria in 2.2.2.1 of this Code; .2 Gases of class 2.3 and gases with a subsidiary risk of 5.1 shall not be used as a propellant in a chemical under pressure; .3 Where the liquid or solid components are classified as dangerous goods of class 6.1, packing groups II or III, or class 8, packing groups II or III, the chemical under pressure shall be assigned a subsidiary risk of class 6.1 or class 8 and the appropriate UN number shall be assigned. Components classified in class 6.1, packing group I, or class 8, packing group I, shall not be used for transport under this proper shipping name; .4 In addition, chemicals under pressure with components meeting the properties of: class 1, explosives; class 3, liquid desensitized explosives; class 4.1, self-reactive substances and solid desensitized explosives; class 4.2, substances liable to spontaneous combustion; class 4.3, substances which, in contact with water, emit flammable gases; class 5.1 oxidizing substances; class 5.2, organic peroxides; class 6.2, Infectious substances or class 7, Radioactive material, shall not be used for transport under this proper shipping name; .5 Substances to which PP86 or TP7 are assigned in Column 9 and Column 14 of the Dangerous Goods List in Chapter 3.2 and therefore require air to be eliminated from the vapour space, shall not be used for transport under this UN number but shall be transported under their respective UN numbers as listed in the Dangerous Goods List of Chapter 3.2. 363 This entry also applies to dangerous goods above the quantity specified in Column 7a of the Dangerous Goods List of Chapter 3.2 in means of containment (other than vehicles or means of containment defined in Part 6 of these Code subject to special provision 301) integral to equipment or machinery (e.g. generators, compressors, heating units, etc) as part of their original design type. They are not subject to any other provisions of this Code if the following provisions are met: .1 the means of containment shall be in compliance with the construction requirements of the competent authority; .2 any valves or openings (e.g. venting devices) in the means of containment containing dangerous goods shall be closed during transport;

170 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

188

Bilaga 1

Chapter 3.3 – Special provisions applicable to certain substances, materials or articles

.3 the machinery or equipment shall be loaded in an orientation to prevent inadvertent leakage of dangerous goods and secured by means capable of restraining the machinery or equipment to prevent any movement during transport which would change the orientation or cause it to be damaged; .4 where the means of containment has a capacity of not more than 450 l, the labelling requirements of 5.2.2 and, when necessary, the marking requirements of 5.2.1.6 shall apply and, where the capacity is greater than 450 l but not more than 1 500 l, the machinery or equipment shall be labelled on all four external sides in accordance with 5.2.2 and, when necessary, shall be marked in accordance with 5.2.1.6 ; .5 where the means of containment has a capacity greater than 1500 l, the machinery or equipment shall be placarded on all four external sides in accordance with 5.3.1.1.2 and, when necessary, shall be marked in accordance with 5.2.1.6 ; .6 the provisions of Part 2, Part 3 except columns (8) to (14) of the dangerous goods list in 3.2, 5.1.1 except 5.1.1.4, 5.3 except 5.3.2.0 and 5.3.2.1, 5.4 and Part 7 shall apply. .7 the transport of machinery or equipment where the quantity of substance exceeds 1500 l is authorized when approved by the competent authority. 364 This article may only be transported under the provisions of Chapter 3.4 if, as presented for transport, the package is capable of passing the test in accordance with Test Series 6(d) of Part I of the Manual of Tests and Criteria as determined by the competent authority. 365 For manufactured instruments and articles containing mercury, see UN 3506. 366 Manufactured instruments and articles containing not more than 1 kg of mercury are not subject to the provisions of this Code. 900 The transport of the following substances is prohibited: AMMONIUM HYPOCHLORITE AMMONIUM NITRATE liable to self-heating sufficient to initiate decomposition AMMONIUM NITRITES and mixtures of an inorganic nitrite with an ammonium salt CHLORIC ACID, AQUEOUS SOLUTION with more than 10% chloric acid ETHYL NITRITE pure HYDROCYANIC ACID, AQUEOUS SOLUTION (HYDROGEN CYANIDE, AQUEOUS SOLUTION) with more than 20% hydrogen cyanide HYDROGEN CHLORIDE, REFRIGERATED LIQUID HYDROGEN CYANIDE SOLUTION, IN ALCOHOL with more than 45% hydrogen cyanide MERCURY OXYCYANIDE pure METHYL NITRITE PERCHLORIC ACID with more than 72% acid, by mass SILVER PICRATE, dry or wetted with less than 30% water by mass ZINC AMMONIUM NITRITE See also special provisions 349, 350, 351, 352 and 353. 903 HYPOCHLORITE MIXTURES with 10% or less available CHLORINE are not subject to the provisions of this Code. 904 The provisions of this Code, except for the marine pollution aspects, do not apply to these substances if they are completely miscible with water, except when transported in receptacles with a capacity greater than 250 ℓ and in tanks. 905 May only be shipped as an 80% solution in TOLUENE. The pure product is shock-sensitive and decomposes with explosive violence and the possibility of detonation when heated under confinement. Can be ignited by impact. 907 The consignment shall be accompanied by a certificate from a recognized authority stating: – moisture content; – fat content; – details of anti-oxidant treatment for meals older than 6 months (for UN 2216 only); – anti-oxidant concentration at the time of shipment, which must exceed 100 mg/kg (for UN 2216 only); – packing, number of bags and total mass of the consignment; – temperature of fishmeal at the time of despatch from the factory; – date of production. No weathering/curing is required prior to loading. Fishmeal under UN 1374 shall have been weathered for not less than 28 days before shipment.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 171

189

Bilaga 1

Dangerous Goods List, special provisions and exceptions –

When fishmeal is packed into containers, the containers shall be packed in such a way that the free air space has been restricted to the minimum. 912 This entry also covers solutions in water with concentrations above 70%. 915 This entry shall not be used for wetted explosives, self-reactive substances or metal powders. 916 The provisions of this Code do not apply to this substance when: – mechanically produced, with a particle size of 53 microns or greater; or – chemically produced, with a particle size of 840 microns or greater. 917 Scrap with rubber content below 45% or exceeding 840 microns and fully vulcanized hard rubber are not subject to the provisions of this Code. 919 UREA NITRATE, WETTED with not less than 10% water, by mass, may be transported under the provisions of this class, provided it is packaged in accordance with packing instruction P002. 920 Bars, ingots or sticks are not subject to the provisions of this Code. 921 Zirconium, dry, 254 microns or thicker is not subject to the provisions of this Code. 922 LEAD PHOSPHITE, DIBASIC which is accompanied by the certificate from the shipper stating that the substance, as offered for shipment, has been stabilized in such a way that it does not possess the properties of class 4.1 is not subject to the provisions of this Code. 923 The temperature shall be checked regularly. 925 The provisions of this Code do not apply to: – non-activated carbon blacks of mineral origin; – a consignment of carbon if it passes the tests for self-heating substances as reflected in the United Nations Manual of Tests and Criteria (see 33.3.1.3.3), and is accompanied by a certificate from a laboratory accredited by the competent authority, stating that the product to be loaded has been correctly sampled by trained staff from that laboratory and that the sample was correctly tested and has passed the test; and – carbons made by a steam activation process. 926 This substance shall preferably have been weathered for not less than one month before shipment unless a certificate from a person recognized by the competent authority of the country of shipment states a maximum moisture content of 5%. 927 p-Nitrosodimethylaniline, wetted with more than 50% water is not subject to the provisions of this Code. 928 The provisions of this Code shall not apply to: – fishmeal when acidified and wetted with more than 40% water, by mass, irrespective of other factors; – consignments of fishmeal which are accompanied by a certificate issued by a recognized competent authority of the country of shipment or other recognized authority stating that the product has no self-heating properties when transported in packaged form; or – fishmeal manufactured from “white” fish with a moisture content of not more than 12% and a fat content of not more than 5% by mass. 929 If satisfied, as a result of tests, that such relaxation is justified, the competent authority may permit: – the seed cakes described as “SEED CAKE, containing vegetable oil (a) mechanically expelled seeds, containing more than 10% of oil or more than 20% of oil and moisture combined” to be transported under conditions governing “SEED CAKE, containing vegetable oil (b) solvent extractions and expelled seeds, containing not more than 10% of oil and, when the amount of moisture is higher than 10% not more than 20% of oil and moisture combined”, and – the seed cakes described as “SEED CAKE, containing vegetable oil (b) solvent extractions and expelled seeds, containing not more than 10% of oil and, when the amount of moisture is higher than 10% not more than 20% of oil and moisture combined” to be transported under conditions governing SEED CAKE, UN 2217. Certificates from the shipper shall state oil content and moisture content and shall accompany the shipment. 930 All pesticides can only be carried under the provisions of this class if accompanied by a certificate supplied by the shipper stating that, when in contact with water, it is not combustible and does not show tendency to autoignition, and that the mixture of gases evolved is not flammable. Otherwise, the provisions of class 4.3 shall be applicable. 931 A consignment of this substance which is accompanied by a declaration from the shipper stating that it has no self-heating properties is not subject to the provisions of this Code. 932 Requires a certificate from the maker or shipper, stating that the shipment was stored under cover, but in the open air, in the size in which it was packaged, for not less than 3 days prior to shipment.

172 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

190

Bilaga 1

Chapter 3.3 – Special provisions applicable to certain substances, materials or articles

934 Requires the percentage range of calcium carbide impurity to be shown on the shipping documents. 935 Substances which do not evolve flammable gases when wet, which are accompanied by a certificate from the shipper stating that the substance, as offered for shipment, does not evolve flammable gases when wet, are not subject to the provisions of this Code. 937 The solid hydrated form of this substance is not subject to the provisions of this Code. 939 A consignment of this substance that is accompanied by a shipper’s certificate stating that it does not contain more than 0.05% maleic anhydride is not subject to the provisions of this Code. 942 The concentration and temperature of the solution at the time of loading, its percentage of combustible material and of chlorides as well as the contents of free acid shall be certified. 943 Water-activated articles shall bear a subsidiary risk of class 4.3. 945 Stabilization of fishmeal shall be achieved to prevent spontaneous combustion by effective application of between 400 and 1000 mg/kg (ppm) ethoxyquin, or liquid BHT (butylated hydroxytoluene) or between 1000 and 4000 mg/kg (ppm) BHT in powder form at the time of production. The said application shall occur no longer than twelve months prior to shipment. 946 Requires certification from the shipper that the substance is not of class 4.2. 948 These substances may be transported in bulk in cargo transport units only if their melting point is 75°C or above. 951 Bulk container shall be hermetically sealed and under a nitrogen blanket. 952 UN 1942 may be transported in bulk container if approved by the competent authority. 954 The provisions of this Code shall not apply to consignments of compressed baled hay with a moisture content of less than 14% shipped in closed cargo transport units and accompanied by a certificate from the shipper stating that the product does not present any class 4.1, UN 1327, hazard in transport and that its moisture content is less than 14%. 955 If a viscous substance and its packaging fulfils the provisions of 2.3.2.5, the packing provisions of chapter 4.1, the marking and labelling provisions of chapter 5.2 and the package testing provisions of chapter 6.1 are not applicable. 957 Lithium cells and batteries manufactured before 1 January 2003 that have not been tested in accordance with the requirements in chapter 38.3 of the United Nations Manual of Tests and Criteria, as well as articles which contain such lithium cells or batteries, may be transported until 31 December 2013 if all applicable provisions of this Code are met. 958 This entry covers articles, such as rags, cotton waste, clothing or sawdust, containing polychlorinated biphenyls, polyhalogenated biphenyls or polyhalogenated terphenyls where no free visible liquid is present. 959 Waste aerosols authorized for transport under special provision 327 shall only be transported on short international voyages. Long international voyages are authorized only with the approval of the competent authority. Packagings shall be marked and labelled and cargo transport units shall be marked and placarded for appropriate sub-division of class 2 and, if applicable, the subsidiary risk(s). 960 Not subject to the provisions of this Code but may be subject to provisions governing the transport of dangerous goods by other modes. 961 Vehicles and equipment are not subject to the provisions of this Code if they are stowed on a roll-on/ roll-off ship or in another cargo space designated by the Administration (flag State) as specifically designed and approved for the carriage of vehicles and equipment and there are no signs of leakage from the battery, engine, fuel cell, compressed gas cylinder or accumulator, or fuel tank when applicable. In addition, vehicles and equipment are not subject to the provisions of this Code if any of the following conditions are met: .1 The fuel tank(s) of the vehicle or equipment powered by a flammable liquid fuel is empty and installed batteries are protected from short circuit; .2 The fuel tank(s) of the vehicle or equipment powered by a flammable gas is emptied of liquefied or compressed gas, the positive pressure in the tank does not exceed 2 bar, the fuel shut-off or isolation valve is closed and secured, and installed batteries are protected from short circuit; or .3 The vehicle or equipment is solely powered by a wet or dry electric storage battery or a sodium battery, and the battery is protected from short circuit. 962 Vehicles or equipment powered by internal combustion engines, fuel cells or batteries not meeting the conditions of special provision 961 shall be assigned to class 9 and shall meet the following requirements: .1 vehicles and equipment shall not show signs of leakage from batteries, engines, fuel cells, compressed gas cylinders or accumulators, or fuel tank(s) when applicable;

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 173

191

Bilaga 1

Dangerous Goods List, special provisions and exceptions –

.2 for flammable liquid powered vehicles and equipment, the fuel tank(s) containing the flammable liquid shall not be more than one fourth full and in any case the flammable liquid shall not exceed 250 ℓ; .3 for flammable gas powered vehicles and equipment, the fuel shut-off valve of the fuel tank(s) shall be securely closed; .4 installed batteries shall be protected from damage, short circuit, and accidental activation during transport. Lithium ion or lithium metal batteries shall meet the requirements of the United Nations Manual of Tests and Criteria, part III, subsection 38.3, unless otherwise approved by the competent authority; and .5 dangerous goods required for the operation of the vehicle or equipment such as fire extinguishers, compressed gas accumulators, airbag inflators, etc., shall be securely mounted in the vehicle or equipment. The marking, labelling and placarding provisions of this Code shall not apply. 963 Nickel-metal hydride button cells or nickel-metal hydride cells or batteries packed with or contained in equipment are not subject to the provisions of this Code. All other nickel-metal hydride cells or batteries shall be securely packed and protected from short circuit. They are not subject to other provisions of this Code provided that they are loaded in a cargo transport unit in a total quantity of less than 100 kg gross mass. When loaded in a cargo transport unit in a total quantity of 100 kg gross mass or more, they are not subject to other provisions of this Code except those of 5.4.1, 5.4.3 and column (16) of the Dangerous Goods List in chapter 3.2. 964 This substance is not subject to the provisions of this Code when transported in non-friable prills or granules form and if it passes the test for oxidizing solid substances as reflected in the United Nations Manual of Tests and Criteria (see 34.4.1) and is accompanied by a certificate from a laboratory accredited by a competent authority, stating that the product has been correctly sampled by trained staff from the laboratory and that the sample was correctly tested and has passed the test. 965 .1 When transported in cargo transport units, the cargo transport units shall provide an adequate exchange of air in the unit (e.g., by using a ventilated container, open-top container or container in one door off operation) to prevent the build-up of an explosive atmosphere. Alternatively, these entries shall be transported under temperature control in refrigerated cargo transport units that comply with the provisions of 7.3.7.6. When cargo transport units with venting devices are used, these devices shall be kept clear and operable. When mechanical devices are used for ventilation, they shall be explosion-proof to prevent ignition of flammable vapours from the substances. .2 The provisions of .1 do not apply if: a) the substance is packed in hermetically sealed packagings or IBCs, which conform to packing group II performance level for liquid dangerous goods according to the provisions of 6.1 or 6.5, respectively; and b) the marked hydraulic test pressure exceeds 1.5 times the total gauge pressure in the packagings or IBCs determined at 55°C for the respective filling goods according to 4.1.1.10.1. .3 Where the substance is loaded in closed cargo transport units, the provisions of 7.3.6.1 shall be met. .4 Cargo transport units shall be marked with a warning mark including the words “CAUTION – MAY CONTAIN FLAMMABLE VAPOUR” with lettering not less than 25 mm high. This mark shall be affixed at each access point in a location where it will be easily seen by persons prior to opening or entering the cargo transport unit and shall remain on the cargo transport unit until the following provisions are met: a) the cargo transport unit has been completely ventilated to remove any hazardous concentration of vapour or gas; b) the immediate vicinity of the cargo transport unit is clear of any source of ignition; and c) the goods have been unloaded. 966 Sheeted bulk containers (BK1) are only permitted in accordance with 4.3.3. 967 Flexible bulk containers (BK3) are only permitted in accordance with 4.3.4.

174 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

192

Bilaga 1

Chapter 3.4

Dangerous goods packed in limited quantities

3.4.1 General

3.4.1.1 This Chapter provides the provisions applicable to the transport of dangerous goods of certain classes packed in limited quantities. The applicable quantity limit for the inner packaging or article is specified for each substance in Column 7a of the Dangerous Goods List of Chapter 3.2. In addition, the quantity "0" has been indicated in this column for each entry not permitted to be transported in accordance with this Chapter. 3.4.1.2 Limited quantities of dangerous goods packed in such limited quantities, meeting the provisions of this Chapter, are not subject to any other provisions of this Code except the relevant provisions of: .1 Part 1, Chapters 1.1, 1.2 and 1.3; .2 Part 2; .3 Part 3, Chapters 3.1, 3.2, 3.3; .4 Part 4, 4.1.1.1, 4.1.1.2 and 4.1.1.4 to 4.1.1.8; .5 Part 5, 5.1.1 except 5.1.1.4, 5.1.2.3, 5.2.1.7, 5.2.1.9, 5.3.2.3, 5.3.2.4, and chapter 5.4; .6 Part 6, construction requirements of 6.1.4, 6.2.1.2 and 6.2.4; .7 Part 7, 7.1.3.2, 7.6.3.1 and 7.3 except 7.3.3.15 and 7.3.4.1.

3.4.2 Packing

3.4.2.1 Dangerous goods shall be packed only in inner packagings placed in suitable outer packagings. Intermediate packagings may be used. In addition, for articles of Division 1.4, Compatibility Group S, the provisions of section 4.1.5 shall be fully complied with. The use of inner packagings is not necessary for the transport of articles such as aerosols or "receptacles, small, containing gas". The total gross mass of the package shall not exceed 30 kg. 3.4.2.2 Except for articles of Division 1.4, Compatibility Group S, shrink-wrapped or stretch-wrapped trays meeting the conditions of 4.1.1.1, 4.1.1.2 and 4.1.1.4 to 4.1.1.8 are acceptable as outer packagings for articles or inner packagings containing dangerous goods transported in accordance with this Chapter. Inner packagings that are liable to break or be easily punctured, such as those made of glass, porcelain, stoneware or certain plastics, shall be placed in suitable intermediate packagings meeting the provisions of 4.1.1.1, 4.1.1.2 and 4.1.1.4 to 4.1.1.8, and be so designed that they meet the construction requirements of 6.1.4. The total gross mass of the package shall not exceed 20 kg. 3.4.2.3 Liquid goods of Class 8, packing group II in glass, porcelain or stoneware inner packagings shall be enclosed in a compatible and rigid intermediate packaging.

3.4.3 Stowage

Dangerous goods packed in limited quantity are allocated stowage category A as defined in 7.1.3.2. The other stowage provisions indicated in column (16) of the Dangerous Goods List are not applicable.

3.4.4 Segregation

3.4.4.1 Different dangerous substances in limited quantities may be packed in the same outer packaging, provided: .1 the substances comply with the provisions of 7.2.6.1; and .2 the segregation provisions of chapter 7.2, including the segregation provisions in column (16) of the Dangerous Goods List, are taken into account. However, notwithstanding the individual provisions specified in the Dangerous Goods List, substances in packing group III within the same class may be

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 175

193

Bilaga 1

Dangerous Goods List, special provisions and exceptions –

packed together subject to compliance with 3.4.4.1.1 of the IMDG Code. The following statement shall be included in the transport document: ‘‘Transport in accordance with 3.4.4.1.2 of the IMDG Code’’ (see 5.4.1.5.2.2).

3.4.4.2 The segregation provisions of chapter 7.2 are not applicable for packagings containing dangerous goods in limited quantities or in relation to other dangerous goods.

3.4.5 Marking and placarding

3.4.5.1 Except for air transport, packages containing dangerous goods in limited quantities shall bear the marking shown below:

Marking for packages containing limited quantities

The marking shall be readily visible, legible and able to withstand open weather exposure without a substantial reduction in effectiveness. The top and bottom portions and the surrounding line shall be black. The centre area shall be white or a suitable contrasting background. The minimum dimensions shall be 100 mm × 100 mm and the minimum width of line forming the diamond shall be 2 mm. If the size of the package so requires, the dimension may be reduced, to be not less than 50 mm × 50 mm provided the marking remains clearly visible.

3.4.5.2 Packages containing dangerous goods consigned for air transport in conformity with the provisions of Part 3, Chapter 4 of the ICAO Technical Instructions for the Safe Transport of Dangerous Goods by Air shall bear the marking shown below:

Marking for packages containing limited quantities conforming to part 3, chapter 4 of the ICAO Technical Instructions for the Safe Transport of Dangerous Goods by Air

The marking shall be readily visible, legible and able to withstand open weather exposure without a substantial reduction in effectiveness. The top and bottom portions and the surrounding line shall be black. The centre area shall be white or a suitable contrasting background. The minimum dimensions shall be 100 mm × 100 mm. The minimum width of line forming diamond shall be 2 mm. The symbol “Y” shall be placed in the centre of the mark and shall be clearly visible. If the size of the package so requires, the dimension may be reduced, to be not less than 50 mm × 50 mm provided the marking remains clearly visible.

3.4.5.3 Packages containing dangerous goods bearing the marking shown in 3.4.5.2 shall be deemed to meet the provisions of sections 3.4.1 and 3.4.2 of this Chapter and need not bear the marking shown in 3.4.5.1.

3.4.5.4 When packages containing dangerous goods packed in limited quantities are placed in an overpack or in a unit load, the overpack or the unit load shall be marked with the marking required by this chapter unless the markings representative of all dangerous goods in the overpack or the unit load are visible. In addition, an overpack shall be marked with the word “OVERPACK” unless markings representative of all dangerous goods, as required by this chapter, in the overpack are visible. The other provisions of 5.1.2.1 apply only if other dangerous goods which are not packed in limited quantities are contained in the overpack or in a unit load and only in relation to these other dangerous goods.

176 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

194

Bilaga 1

Chapter 3.4 – Limited quantities

3.4.5.5 Placarding and marking of cargo transport unit

3.4.5.5.1 Cargo transport unit containing dangerous goods packed in limited quantities with no other dangerous goods shall not be placarded nor marked according to 5.3.2.0 and 5.3.2.1. However, they shall be suitably marked on the exterior with the mark in 3.4.5.5.4. 3.4.5.5.2 Cargo transport units containing dangerous goods and dangerous goods packed in limited quantities shall be placarded and marked according to the provisions applicable to the dangerous goods which are not packed in limited quantities. However, if no placard or mark is required for the dangerous goods not packed in limited quantities, the cargo transport units shall be marked with the mark in 3.4.5.5.4.

3.4.5.5.3 In all cases, if the dangerous goods packed in limited quantities are marine pollutants, the cargo transport units shall bear the marine pollutant mark as indicated in 5.3.2.3. 3.4.5.5.4 When required in 3.4.5.5.1 or 3.4.5.5.2, the following mark shall be affixed on cargo transport units :

The marking shall be readily visible, legible and be such that this information will still be identifiable on cargo transport units surviving at least three months’ immersion in the sea. In considering suitable marking methods, account shall be taken of ease with which the surface of the cargo transport unit can be marked. The top and bottom portions and the surrounding line shall be black. The centre area shall be white or a suitable contrasting background. The minimum dimensions shall be of 250 mm x 250 mm in locations indicated in 5.3.1.1.4.1.

3.4.6 Documentation

3.4.6.1 In addition to the provisions for documentation specified in chapter 5.4, the words ‘‘limited quantity’’ or ‘‘LTD QTY’’ shall be included on the dangerous goods declaration together with the description of the shipment.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 177

195

Bilaga 1

Chapter 3.5

Dangerous goods packed in excepted quantities

3.5.1 Excepted quantities

3.5.1.1 Excepted quantities of dangerous goods of certain classes, other than articles, meeting the provisions of this chapter, are not subject to any other provisions of this Code except for: .1 The training provisions in chapter 1.3; .2 The classification procedures and packing group criteria in Part 2, Classification; .3 The packaging provisions of 4.1.1.1, 4.1.1.2, 4.1.1.4, 4.1.1.4.1 and 4.1.1.6 in Part 4; and .4 The provisions for documentation specified in chapter 5.4. Note: In the case of radioactive material, the provisions for radioactive material in excepted packages in 1.5.1.5 apply. 3.5.1.2 Dangerous goods which may be carried as excepted quantities in accordance with the provisions of this chapter are shown in column 7b of the Dangerous Goods List by means of an alphanumeric code as follows:

Code Maximum net quantity per inner packaging Maximum net quantity per outer packaging (in grams for solids and mℓ (in grams for solids and mℓ for liquids for liquids and gases) and gases, or sum of grams and mℓ in the case of mixed packaging) E0 Not permitted as Excepted Quantity E1 30 1000 E2 30 500 E3 30 300 E4 1 500 E5 1 300

For gases, the volume indicated for inner packagings refers to the water capacity of the inner receptacle and the volume indicated for outer packagings refers to the combined water capacity of all inner packagings within a single outer packaging. 3.5.1.3 Where dangerous goods in excepted quantities for which different codes are assigned are packaged together, the total quantity per outer packaging shall be limited to that corresponding to the most restrictive code. 3.5.1.4 Excepted quantities of dangerous goods assigned to codes E1, E2, E4 and E5 are not subject to the provisions of this Code provided that: .1 The maximum net quantity of material per inner packaging is limited to 1 mℓ for liquids and gases and 1 g for solids; .2 The provisions of 3.5.2 are met, except that an intermediate packaging is not required if the inner packagings are securely packed in an outer packaging with cushioning material in such a way that, under normal conditions of transport, they cannot break, be punctured, or leak their contents; and for liquid dangerous goods, the outer packaging contains sufficient absorbent material to absorb the entire contents of the inner packagings; .3 The provisions of 3.5.3 are complied with; and .4 The maximum net quantity of dangerous goods per outer packaging does not exceed 100 g for solids or 100 mℓ for liquids and gases.

178 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

196

Bilaga 1

Chapter 3.5 – Dangerous goods packed in excepted quantities

3.5.2 Packagings

3.5.2.1 Packagings used for the transport of dangerous goods in excepted quantities shall be in compliance with the following: .1 There shall be an inner packaging and each inner packaging shall be constructed of plastic (when used for liquid dangerous goods it shall have a thickness of not less than 0.2 mm), or of glass, porcelain, stoneware, earthenware or metal (see also 4.1.1.2) and the closure of each inner packaging shall be held securely in place with wire, tape or other positive means; any receptacle having a neck with moulded screw threads shall have a leakproof threaded-type cap. The closure shall be resistant to the contents; .2 Each inner packaging shall be securely packed in an intermediate packaging with cushioning material in such a way that, under normal conditions of transport, they cannot break, be punctured or leak their contents. The intermediate packaging shall completely contain the contents in case of breakage or leakage, regardless of package orientation. For liquid dangerous goods, the intermediate packaging shall contain sufficient absorbe nt material to absorb the entire contents of the inner packaging. In such cases, the absorbent material may be the cushioning material. Dangerous goods shall not react dangerously with cushioning, absorbent material and packaging material or reduce the integrity or function of the materials; .3 The intermediate packaging shall be securely packed in a strong, rigid outer packaging (wooden, fibreboard or other equally strong material); .4 Each package type shall be in compliance with the provisions in 3.5.3; .5 Each package shall be of such a size that there is adequate space to apply all necessary markings; and .6 Overpacks may be used and may also contain packages of dangerous goods or goods not subject to the provisions of this Code.

3.5.3 Tests for packages

3.5.3.1 The complete package as prepared for transport, with inner packagings filled to not less than 95% of their capacity for solids or 98% for liquids, shall be capable of withstanding, as demonstrated by testing which is appropriately documented, without breakage or leakage of any inner packaging and without significant reduction in effectiveness: .1 Drops onto a rigid, non-resilient flat and horizontal surface from a height of 1.8 m: (i) Where the sample is in the shape of a box, it shall be dropped in each of the following orientations: – flat on the base; – flat on the top; – flat on the longest side; – flat on the shortest side; – on a corner (ii) Where the sample is in the shape of a drum, it shall be dropped in each of the following orientations: – diagonally on the top chime, with the centre of gravity directly above the point of impact; – diagonally on the base chime; – flat on the side. Note: Each of the above drops may be performed on different but identical packages. .2 A force applied to the top surface for a duration of 24 hours, equivalent to the total weight of identical packages if stacked to a height of 3 m (including the sample). 3.5.3.2 For the purposes of testing, the substances to be transported in the packaging may be replaced by other substances except where this would invalidate the results of the tests. For solids, when another substance is used, it shall have the same physical characteristics (mass, grain size, etc.) as the substance to be carried. In the drop tests for liquids, when another substance is used, its relative density (specific gravity) and viscosity shall be similar to those of the substance to be transported.

3.5.4 Marking of packages

3.5.4.1 Packages containing excepted quantities of dangerous goods prepared in accordance with this chapter shall be durably and legibly marked with the mark shown below. The primary hazard class of each of the dangerous goods contained in the package shall be shown in the mark. Where the name of the consignor or consignee is not shown elsewhere on the package, this information shall be included within the mark.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 179

197

Bilaga 1

Dangerous Goods List, special provisions and exceptions –

Excepted quantities mark Hatching and symbol of the same colour, black or red, on white or suitable contrasting background * The class, or, when assigned, the division number(s), shall be shown in this location. ** The name of the consignor or of the consignee shall be shown in this location if not shown elsewhere on the package. 3.5.4.2 The dimensions of the mark shall be a minimum of 100 mm × 100 mm. 3.5.4.3 An overpack containing dangerous goods in excepted quantities shall display the markings required by 3.5.4.1, unless such markings on packages within the overpack are clearly visible.

3.5.5 Maximum number of packages in any cargo transport unit

3.5.5.1 The number of packages containing dangerous goods packed in excepted quantities in any cargo transport unit shall not exceed 1000.

3.5.6 Documentation

3.5.6.1 In addition to the provisions for documentation specified in chapter 5.4, the words “dangerous goods in excepted quantities” and the number of packages shall be included on the dangerous goods declaration together with the description of the shipment.

3.5.7 Stowage

3.5.7.1 Dangerous goods packed in excepted quantity are allocated stowage category A as defined in 7.1.3.2. The other stowage provisions indicated in column (16) of the Dangerous Goods List are not applicable.

3.5.8 Segregation

3.5.8.1 The segregation provisions of chapters 7.2 to 7.7, including the segregation provisions in column (16) of the Dangerous Goods List, are not applicable for packagings containing dangerous goods packed in excepted quantities or in relation to other dangerous goods. 3.5.8.2 The segregation provisions of chapters 7.2 to 7.7, including the segregation provisions in column (16) of the Dangerous Goods List, are not applicable for different dangerous goods in excepted quantities in he same outer packaging provided that they do not react dangerously with each other (see 4.1.1.6).

180 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

198

Bilaga 1

APPENDICES

199

Bilaga 1

200

Bilaga 1

Appendix A

List of generic and N.O.S. Proper Shipping Names

Substances or articles not mentioned specifically by name in the Dangerous Goods List in chapter 3.2 shall be classified in accordance with 3.1.1.2. Thus the name in the Dangerous Goods List which most appropriately describes the substance or article shall be used as the Proper Shipping Name. The main generic entries and all the N.O.S. entries given in the Dangerous Goods List are listed below. This Proper Shipping Name shall be supplemented by the technical name when special provision 274 or 318 has been assigned to the entry in column 6 of the Dangerous Goods List. For marine pollutants, see also 3.1.2.9. In this list, general and N.O.S. names are grouped according to their hazard class or division. Within each hazard class or division, the names have been placed into three groups as follows: – specific entries covering a group of substances or articles of a particular chemical or technical nature; – pesticide entries, for class 3 and class 6.1; – general entries covering a group of substances or articles having one or more general dangerous properties. THE MOST SPECIFIC APPLICABLE NAME SHALL ALWAYS BE USED.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 183

201

Bilaga 1

Appendices

Class or Subsidiary UN Proper Shipping Name division risk Number CLASS 1 1 0190 SAMPLES, EXPLOSIVE, other than initiating explosive Division 1.1 1.1A 0473 SUBSTANCES, EXPLOSIVE, N.O.S. 1.1B 0461 COMPONENTS, EXPLOSIVE TRAIN, N.O.S. 1.1C 0462 ARTICLES, EXPLOSIVE, N.O.S. 1.1C 0474 SUBSTANCES, EXPLOSIVE, N.O.S. 1.1C 0497 PROPELLANT, LIQUID 1.1C 0498 PROPELLANT, SOLID 1.1D 0463 ARTICLES, EXPLOSIVE, N.O.S. 1.1D 0475 SUBSTANCES, EXPLOSIVE, N.O.S. 1.1E 0464 ARTICLES, EXPLOSIVE, N.O.S. 1.1F 0465 ARTICLES, EXPLOSIVE, N.O.S. 1.1G 0476 SUBSTANCES, EXPLOSIVE, N.O.S. 1.1L 0354 ARTICLES, EXPLOSIVE, N.O.S. 1.1L 0357 SUBSTANCES, EXPLOSIVE, N.O.S. Division 1.2 1.2B 0382 COMPONENTS, EXPLOSIVE TRAIN, N.O.S. 1.2C 0466 ARTICLES, EXPLOSIVE, N.O.S. 1.2D 0467 ARTICLES, EXPLOSIVE, N.O.S. 1.2E 0468 ARTICLES, EXPLOSIVE, N.O.S. 1.2F 0469 ARTICLES, EXPLOSIVE, N.O.S. 1.2K 6.1 0020 AMMUNITION, TOXIC with burster, expelling charge or propelling charge 1.2L 4.3 0248 CONTRIVANCES, WATER-ACTIVATED with burster, expelling charge or propelling charge 1.2L 0355 ARTICLES, EXPLOSIVE, N.O.S. 1.2L 0358 SUBSTANCES, EXPLOSIVE, N.O.S. Division 1.3 1.3C 0132 DEFLAGRATING METAL SALTS OF AROMATIC NITRO-DERIVATIVES, N.O.S. 1.3C 0470 ARTICLES, EXPLOSIVE, N.O.S. 1.3C 0477 SUBSTANCES, EXPLOSIVE, N.O.S. 1.3C 0495 PROPELLANT, LIQUID 1.3C 0499 PROPELLANT, SOLID 1.3G 0478 SUBSTANCES, EXPLOSIVE, N.O.S. 1.3K 6.1 0021 AMMUNITION, TOXIC with burster, expelling charge or propelling charge 1.3L 4.3 0249 CONTRIVANCES, WATER-ACTIVATED with burster, expelling charge or propelling charge 1.3L 0356 ARTICLES, EXPLOSIVE, N.O.S. 1.3L 0359 SUBSTANCES, EXPLOSIVE, N.O.S. Division 1.4 1.4B 0350 ARTICLES, EXPLOSIVE, N.O.S. 1.4B 0383 COMPONENTS, EXPLOSIVE TRAIN, N.O.S. 1.4C 0351 ARTICLES, EXPLOSIVE, N.O.S. 1.4C 0479 SUBSTANCES, EXPLOSIVE, N.O.S. 1.4C 0501 PROPELLANT, SOLID 1.4D 0352 ARTICLES, EXPLOSIVE, N.O.S. 1.4D 0480 SUBSTANCES, EXPLOSIVE, N.O.S. 1.4E 0471 ARTICLES, EXPLOSIVE, N.O.S. 1.4F 0472 ARTICLES, EXPLOSIVE, N.O.S. 1.4G 0353 ARTICLES, EXPLOSIVE, N.O.S. 1.4G 0485 SUBSTANCES, EXPLOSIVE, N.O.S. 1.4S 0349 ARTICLES, EXPLOSIVE, N.O.S. 1.4S 0384 COMPONENTS, EXPLOSIVE TRAIN, N.O.S. 1.4S 0481 SUBSTANCES, EXPLOSIVE, N.O.S. Division 1.5 1.5D 0482 SUBSTANCES, EXPLOSIVE, VERY INSENSITIVE (SUBSTANCES, EVI), N.O.S. Division 1.6 1.6N 0486 ARTICLES, EXPLOSIVE, EXTREMELY INSENSITIVE (ARTICLES, EEI)

184 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

202

Bilaga 1

Appendix A – List of generic and N.O.S. Proper Shipping Names

Class or Subsidiary UN Proper Shipping Name division risk Number CLASS 2 Class 2.1 Specific entries 2.1 1964 HYDROCARBON GAS MIXTURE, COMPRESSED, N.O.S. 2.1 1965 HYDROCARBON GAS MIXTURE, LIQUEFIED, N.O.S. 2.1 3354 INSECTICIDE GAS, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S.

General entries 2.1 1954 COMPRESSED GAS, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S. 2.1 3161 LIQUEFIED GAS, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S. 2.1 3167 GAS SAMPLE, NON-PRESSURIZED, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S., not refrigerated liquid 2.1 3312 GAS, REFRIGERATED LIQUID, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S. 2.1 3501 CHEMICAL UNDER PRESSURE, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S. 2.1 6.1 3504 CHEMICAL UNDER PRESSURE, FLAMMABLE, TOXIC, N.O.S. 2.1 8 3505 CHEMICAL UNDER PRESSURE, FLAMMABLE, CORROSIVE, N.O.S. Class 2.2 Specific entries 2.2 1078 REFRIGERANT GAS, N.O.S. 2.2 1968 INSECTICIDE GAS, N.O.S.

General entries 2.2 1956 COMPRESSED GAS, N.O.S. 2.2 3163 LIQUEFIED GAS, N.O.S. 2.2 3158 GAS, REFRIGERATED LIQUID, N.O.S. 2.2 3500 CHEMICAL UNDER PRESSURE, N.O.S. 2.2 5.1 3156 COMPRESSED GAS, OXIDIZING, N.O.S. 2.2 5.1 3157 LIQUEFIED GAS, OXIDIZING, N.O.S. 2.2 5.1 3311 GAS, REFRIGERATED LIQUID, OXIDIZING, N.O.S. 2.2 6.1 3502 CHEMICAL UNDER PRESSURE, TOXIC, N.O.S. 2.2 8 3503 CHEMICAL UNDER PRESSURE, CORROSIVE, N.O.S. Class 2.3 Specific entries 2.3 1967 INSECTICIDE GAS, TOXIC, N.O.S. 2.3 2.1 3355 INSECTICIDE GAS, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S.

General entries 2.3 1955 COMPRESSED GAS, TOXIC, N.O.S. 2.3 3162 LIQUEFIED GAS, TOXIC, N.O.S. 2.3 3169 GAS SAMPLE, NON-PRESSURIZED, TOXIC, N.O.S., not refrigerated liquid 2.3 2.1 1953 COMPRESSED GAS, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S. 2.3 2.1 3160 LIQUEFIED GAS, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S. 2.3 2.1 3168 GAS SAMPLE, NON-PRESSURIZED, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S., not refrigerated liquid 2.3 2.1 + 8 3305 COMPRESSED GAS, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE, CORROSIVE, N.O.S. 2.3 2.1 + 8 3309 LIQUEFIED GAS, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE, CORROSIVE, N.O.S. 2.3 5.1 3303 COMPRESSED GAS, TOXIC, OXIDIZING, N.O.S. 2.3 5.1 3307 LIQUEFIED GAS, TOXIC, OXIDIZING, N.O.S. 2.3 5.1 + 8 3306 COMPRESSED GAS, TOXIC, OXIDIZING, CORROSIVE, N.O.S. 2.3 5.1 + 8 3310 LIQUEFIED GAS, TOXIC, OXIDIZING, CORROSIVE, N.O.S. 2.3 8 3304 COMPRESSED GAS, TOXIC, CORROSIVE, N.O.S. 2.3 8 3308 LIQUEFIED GAS, TOXIC, CORROSIVE, N.O.S.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 185

203

Bilaga 1

Appendices

Class or Subsidiary UN Proper Shipping Name division risk Number CLASS 3 Specific entries 3 1224 KETONES, LIQUID, N.O.S. 3 1268 PETROLEUM DISTILLATES, N.O.S. or PETROLEUM PRODUCTS, N.O.S. 3 1987 ALCOHOLS, N.O.S. 3 1989 ALDEHYDES, N.O.S. 3 2319 TERPENE HYDROCARBONS, N.O.S. 3 3271 ETHERS, N.O.S. 3 3272 ESTERS, N.O.S. 3 3295 HYDROCARBONS, LIQUID, N.O.S. 3 3336 MERCAPTANS, LIQUID, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S. or MERCAPTAN MIXTURE, LIQUID, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S. 3 3343 NITROGLYCERIN MIXTURE, DESENSITIZED, LIQUID, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S. with not more than 30% nitroglycerin, by mass 3 3357 NITROGLYCERIN MIXTURE, DESENSITIZED, LIQUID, N.O.S. with not more than 30% nitroglycerin, by mass 3 3379 DESENSITIZED EXPLOSIVE, LIQUID, N.O.S. 3 6.1 1228 MERCAPTANS, LIQUID, FLAMMABLE, TOXIC, N.O.S. or MERCAPTAN MIXTURE, LIQUID, FLAMMABLE, TOXIC, N.O.S. 3 6.1 1986 ALCOHOLS, FLAMMABLE, TOXIC, N.O.S. 3 6.1 1988 ALDEHYDES, FLAMMABLE, TOXIC, N.O.S. 3 6.1 2478 ISOCYANATES, FLAMMABLE, TOXIC, N.O.S. or ISOCYANATE SOLUTION, FLAMMABLE, TOXIC, N.O.S. 3 6.1 3248 MEDICINE, LIQUID, FLAMMABLE, TOXIC, N.O.S. 3 6.1 3273 NITRILES, FLAMMABLE, TOXIC, N.O.S. 3 8 2733 AMINES, FLAMMABLE, CORROSIVE, N.O.S. or POLYAMINES, FLAMMABLE, CORROSIVE, N.O.S. 3 8 2985 CHLOROSILANES, FLAMMABLE, CORROSIVE, N.O.S. 3 8 3274 ALCOHOLATES SOLUTION, N.O.S. in alcohol

Pesticides 3 6.1 2758 CARBAMATE PESTICIDE, LIQUID, FLAMMABLE, TOXIC flashpoint <23°C 3 6.1 2760 ARSENICAL PESTICIDE, LIQUID, FLAMMABLE, TOXIC flashpoint <23°C 3 6.1 2762 ORGANOCHLORINE PESTICIDE, LIQUID, FLAMMABLE, TOXIC flashpoint <23°C 3 6.1 2764 TRIAZINE PESTICIDE, LIQUID, FLAMMABLE, TOXIC flashpoint <23°C 3 6.1 2772 THIOCARBAMATE PESTICIDE, LIQUID, FLAMMABLE, TOXIC flashpoint <23°C 3 6.1 2776 COPPER BASED PESTICIDE, LIQUID, FLAMMABLE, TOXIC flashpoint <23°C 3 6.1 2778 MERCURY BASED PESTICIDE, LIQUID, FLAMMABLE, TOXIC flashpoint <23°C 3 6.1 2780 SUBSTITUTED NITROPHENOL PESTICIDE, LIQUID, FLAMMABLE, TOXIC flashpoint <23°C 3 6.1 2782 BIPYRIDILIUM PESTICIDE, LIQUID, FLAMMABLE, TOXIC flashpoint <23°C 3 6.1 2784 ORGANOPHOSPHORUS PESTICIDE, LIQUID, FLAMMABLE, TOXIC flashpoint <23°C 3 6.1 2787 ORGANOTIN PESTICIDE, LIQUID, FLAMMABLE, TOXIC flashpoint <23°C 3 6.1 3021 PESTICIDE, LIQUID, FLAMMABLE, TOXIC, N.O.S. flashpoint <23°C 3 6.1 3024 COUMARIN DERIVATIVE PESTICIDE, LIQUID, FLAMMABLE, TOXIC flashpoint <23°C 3 6.1 3346 PHENOXYACETIC ACID DERIVATIVE PESTICIDE, LIQUID, FLAMMABLE, TOXIC flashpoint <23°C 3 6.1 3350 PYRETHROID PESTICIDE, LIQUID, FLAMMABLE, TOXIC flashpoint <23°C

General entries 3 1993 FLAMMABLE LIQUID, N.O.S. 3 3256 ELEVATED TEMPERATURE LIQUID, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S. with flashpoint above 60°C, at or above its flashpoint 3 6.1 1992 FLAMMABLE LIQUID, TOXIC, N.O.S. 3 6.1 + 8 3286 FLAMMABLE LIQUID, TOXIC, CORROSIVE, N.O.S. 3 8 2924 FLAMMABLE LIQUID, CORROSIVE, N.O.S.

186 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

204

Bilaga 1

Appendix A – List of generic and N.O.S. Proper Shipping Names

Class or Subsidiary UN Proper Shipping Name division risk Number CLASS 4 Class 4.1 Specific entries 4.1 1353 FIBRES or FABRICS IMPREGNATED WITH WEAKLY NITRATED NITROCELLULOSE, N.O.S. 4.1 3089 METAL POWDER, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S. 4.1 3182 METAL HYDRIDES, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S. 4.1 3221 SELF-REACTIVE LIQUID TYPE B 4.1 3222 SELF-REACTIVE SOLID TYPE B 4.1 3223 SELF-REACTIVE LIQUID TYPE C 4.1 3224 SELF-REACTIVE SOLID TYPE C 4.1 3225 SELF-REACTIVE LIQUID TYPE D 4.1 3226 SELF-REACTIVE SOLID TYPE D 4.1 3227 SELF-REACTIVE LIQUID TYPE E 4.1 3228 SELF-REACTIVE SOLID TYPE E 4.1 3229 SELF-REACTIVE LIQUID TYPE F 4.1 3230 SELF-REACTIVE SOLID TYPE F 4.1 3231 SELF-REACTIVE LIQUID TYPE B, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED 4.1 3232 SELF-REACTIVE SOLID TYPE B, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED 4.1 3233 SELF-REACTIVE LIQUID TYPE C, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED 4.1 3234 SELF-REACTIVE SOLID TYPE C, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED 4.1 3235 SELF-REACTIVE LIQUID TYPE D, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED 4.1 3236 SELF-REACTIVE SOLID TYPE D, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED 4.1 3237 SELF-REACTIVE LIQUID TYPE E, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED 4.1 3238 SELF-REACTIVE SOLID TYPE E, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED 4.1 3239 SELF-REACTIVE LIQUID TYPE F, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED 4.1 3240 SELF-REACTIVE SOLID TYPE F, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED 4.1 3319 NITROGLYCERIN MIXTURE, DESENSITIZED, SOLID, N.O.S. with more than 2% but not more than 10% nitroglycerin, by mass 4.1 3344 PENTAERYTHRITE TETRANITRATE MIXTURE (PENTAERYTHRITOL TETRANITRATE; PETN), DESENSITIZED, SOLID, N.O.S. with more than 10% but not more than 20% PETN, by mass 4.1 3380 DESENSITIZED EXPLOSIVE, SOLID, N.O.S.

General entries 4.1 1325 FLAMMABLE SOLID, ORGANIC, N.O.S. 4.1 3175 SOLIDS CONTAINING FLAMMABLE LIQUID, N.O.S. 4.1 3176 FLAMMABLE SOLID, ORGANIC, MOLTEN, N.O.S. 4.1 3178 FLAMMABLE SOLID, INORGANIC, N.O.S. 4.1 3181 METAL SALTS OF ORGANIC COMPOUNDS, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S. 4.1 5.1 3097 FLAMMABLE SOLID, OXIDIZING, N.O.S. 4.1 6.1 2926 FLAMMABLE SOLID, TOXIC, ORGANIC, N.O.S. 4.1 6.1 3179 FLAMMABLE SOLID, TOXIC, INORGANIC, N.O.S. 4.1 8 2925 FLAMMABLE SOLID, CORROSIVE, ORGANIC, N.O.S. 4.1 8 3180 FLAMMABLE SOLID, CORROSIVE, INORGANIC, N.O.S. Class 4.2 Specific entries 4.2 1373 FIBRES or FABRICS, ANIMAL or VEGETABLE or SYNTHETIC, N.O.S. with oil 4.2 1378 METAL CATALYST, WETTED with a visible excess of liquid 4.2 1383 PYROPHORIC METAL, N.O.S. or PYROPHORIC ALLOY, N.O.S. 4.2 2006 PLASTICS, NITROCELLULOSE-BASED, SELF-HEATING, N.O.S. 4.2 2881 METAL CATALYST, DRY 4.2 3189 METAL POWDER, SELF-HEATING, N.O.S. 4.2 3205 ALKALINE EARTH METAL ALCOHOLATES, N.O.S. 4.2 3313 ORGANIC PIGMENTS, SELF-HEATING 4.2 3342 XANTHATES 4.2 3391 ORGANOMETALLIC SUBSTANCE, SOLID, PYROPHORIC 4.2 3392 ORGANOMETALLIC SUBSTANCE, LIQUID, PYROPHORIC

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 187

205

Bilaga 1

Appendices

Class or Subsidiary UN Proper Shipping Name division risk Number CLASS 4 (continued) Class 4.2 (continued) Specific entries (continued) 4.2 3400 ORGANOMETALLIC SUBSTANCE, SOLID, SELF-HEATING 4.2 4.3 3393 ORGANOMETALLIC SUBSTANCE, SOLID, PYROPHORIC, WATER-REACTIVE 4.2 4.3 3394 ORGANOMETALLIC SUBSTANCE, LIQUID, PYROPHORIC, WATER-REACTIVE 4.2 8 3206 ALKALI METAL ALCOHOLATES, SELF-HEATING, CORROSIVE, N.O.S.

General entries 4.2 2845 PYROPHORIC LIQUID, ORGANIC, N.O.S. 4.2 2846 PYROPHORIC SOLID, ORGANIC, N.O.S. 4.2 3088 SELF-HEATING SOLID, ORGANIC, N.O.S. 4.2 3183 SELF-HEATING LIQUID, ORGANIC, N.O.S. 4.2 3186 SELF-HEATING LIQUID, INORGANIC, N.O.S. 4.2 3190 SELF-HEATING SOLID, INORGANIC, N.O.S. 4.2 3194 PYROPHORIC LIQUID, INORGANIC, N.O.S. 4.2 3200 PYROPHORIC SOLID, INORGANIC, N.O.S. 4.2 5.1 3127 SELF-HEATING SOLID, OXIDIZING, N.O.S. 4.2 6.1 3128 SELF-HEATING SOLID, TOXIC, ORGANIC, N.O.S. 4.2 6.1 3184 SELF-HEATING LIQUID, TOXIC, ORGANIC, N.O.S. 4.2 6.1 3187 SELF-HEATING LIQUID, TOXIC, INORGANIC, N.O.S. 4.2 6.1 3191 SELF-HEATING SOLID, TOXIC, INORGANIC, N.O.S. 4.2 8 3126 SELF-HEATING SOLID, CORROSIVE, ORGANIC, N.O.S. 4.2 8 3185 SELF-HEATING LIQUID, CORROSIVE, ORGANIC, N.O.S. 4.2 8 3188 SELF-HEATING LIQUID, CORROSIVE, INORGANIC, N.O.S. 4.2 8 3192 SELF-HEATING SOLID, CORROSIVE, INORGANIC, N.O.S. Class 4.3 Specific entries 4.3 1389 ALKALI METAL AMALGAM, LIQUID 4.3 1390 ALKALI METAL AMIDES 4.3 1391 ALKALI METAL DISPERSION or ALKALINE EARTH METAL DISPERSION 4.3 1392 ALKALINE EARTH METAL AMALGAM, LIQUID 4.3 1393 ALKALINE EARTH METAL ALLOY, N.O.S. 4.3 1409 METAL HYDRIDES, WATER-REACTIVE, N.O.S. 4.3 1421 ALKALI METAL ALLOY, LIQUID, N.O.S. 4.3 3208 METALLIC SUBSTANCE, WATER-REACTIVE, N.O.S. 4.3 3395 ORGANOMETALLIC SUBSTANCE, SOLID, WATER-REACTIVE 4.3 3398 ORGANOMETALLIC SUBSTANCE, LIQUID, WATER-REACTIVE 4.3 3401 ALKALI METAL AMALGAM, SOLID 4.3 3402 ALKALINE EARTH METAL AMALGAM, SOLID 4.3 3 3399 ORGANOMETALLIC SUBSTANCE, LIQUID, WATER-REACTIVE, FLAMMABLE 4.3 3 3482 ALKALI METAL DISPERSION, FLAMMABLE or ALKALINE EARTH METAL DISPERSION, FLAMMABLE 4.3 3 + 8 2988 CHLOROSILANES, WATER-REACTIVE, FLAMMABLE, CORROSIVE, N.O.S. 4.3 4.1 3396 ORGANOMETALLIC SUBSTANCE, SOLID, WATER-REACTIVE, FLAMMABLE 4.3 4.2 3209 METALLIC SUBSTANCE, WATER-REACTIVE, SELF-HEATING, N.O.S. 4.3 4.2 3397 ORGANOMETALLIC SUBSTANCE, SOLID, WATER-REACTIVE, SELF-HEATING

General entries 4.3 3148 WATER-REACTIVE LIQUID, N.O.S. 4.3 2813 WATER-REACTIVE SOLID, N.O.S. 4.3 4.1 3132 WATER-REACTIVE SOLID, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S. 4.3 4.2 3135 WATER-REACTIVE SOLID, SELF-HEATING, N.O.S. 4.3 5.1 3133 WATER-REACTIVE SOLID, OXIDIZING, N.O.S. 4.3 6.1 3130 WATER-REACTIVE LIQUID, TOXIC, N.O.S. 4.3 6.1 3134 WATER-REACTIVE SOLID, TOXIC, N.O.S. 4.3 8 3129 WATER-REACTIVE LIQUID, CORROSIVE, N.O.S. 4.3 8 3131 WATER-REACTIVE SOLID, CORROSIVE, N.O.S.

188 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

206

Bilaga 1

Appendix A – List of generic and N.O.S. Proper Shipping Names

Class or Subsidiary UN Proper Shipping Name division risk Number CLASS 5 Class 5.1 Specific entries 5.1 1450 BROMATES, INORGANIC, N.O.S. 5.1 1461 CHLORATES, INORGANIC, N.O.S. 5.1 1462 CHLORITES, INORGANIC, N.O.S. 5.1 1477 NITRATES, INORGANIC, N.O.S. 5.1 1481 PERCHLORATES, INORGANIC, N.O.S. 5.1 1482 PERMANGANATES, INORGANIC, N.O.S. 5.1 1483 PEROXIDES, INORGANIC, N.O.S. 5.1 2627 NITRITES, INORGANIC, N.O.S. 5.1 3210 CHLORATES, INORGANIC, AQUEOUS SOLUTION, N.O.S. 5.1 3211 PERCHLORATES, INORGANIC, AQUEOUS SOLUTION, N.O.S. 5.1 3212 HYPOCHLORITES, INORGANIC, N.O.S. 5.1 3213 BROMATES, INORGANIC, AQUEOUS SOLUTION, N.O.S. 5.1 3214 PERMANGANATES, INORGANIC, AQUEOUS SOLUTION, N.O.S. 5.1 3215 PERSULPHATES, INORGANIC, N.O.S. 5.1 3216 PERSULPHATES, INORGANIC, AQUEOUS SOLUTION, N.O.S. 5.1 3218 NITRATES, INORGANIC, AQUEOUS SOLUTION, N.O.S. 5.1 3219 NITRITES, INORGANIC, AQUEOUS SOLUTION, N.O.S.

General entries 5.1 1479 OXIDIZING SOLID, N.O.S. 5.1 3139 OXIDIZING LIQUID, N.O.S. 5.1 4.1 3137 OXIDIZING SOLID, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S. 5.1 4.2 3100 OXIDIZING SOLID, SELF-HEATING, N.O.S. 5.1 4.3 3121 OXIDIZING SOLID, WATER-REACTIVE, N.O.S. 5.1 6.1 3087 OXIDIZING SOLID, TOXIC, N.O.S. 5.1 6.1 3099 OXIDIZING LIQUID, TOXIC, N.O.S. 5.1 8 3085 OXIDIZING SOLID, CORROSIVE, N.O.S. 5.1 8 3098 OXIDIZING LIQUID, CORROSIVE, N.O.S. Class 5.2 Specific entries 5.2 3101 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE B, LIQUID 5.2 3102 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE B, SOLID 5.2 3103 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE C, LIQUID 5.2 3104 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE C, SOLID 5.2 3105 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE D, LIQUID 5.2 3106 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE D, SOLID 5.2 3107 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE E, LIQUID 5.2 3108 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE E, SOLID 5.2 3109 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE F, LIQUID 5.2 3110 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE F, SOLID 5.2 3111 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE B, LIQUID, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED 5.2 3112 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE B, SOLID, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED 5.2 3113 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE C, LIQUID, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED 5.2 3114 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE C, SOLID, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED 5.2 3115 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE D, LIQUID, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED 5.2 3116 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE D, SOLID, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED 5.2 3117 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE E, LIQUID, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED 5.2 3118 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE E, SOLID, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED 5.2 3119 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE F, LIQUID, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED 5.2 3120 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE F, SOLID, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 189

207

Bilaga 1

Appendices

Class or Subsidiary UN Proper Shipping Name division risk Number CLASS 6 Class 6.1 Specific entries 6.1 1544 ALKALOIDS, SOLID, N.O.S. or ALKALOID SALTS, SOLID, N.O.S. 6.1 1549 ANTIMONY COMPOUND, INORGANIC, SOLID, N.O.S. 6.1 1556 ARSENIC COMPOUND, LIQUID, N.O.S. inorganic, including: Arsenates, n.o.s., Arsenites, n.o.s., and Arsenic sulphides, n.o.s. 6.1 1557 ARSENIC COMPOUND, SOLID, N.O.S. inorganic, including: Arsenates, n.o.s., Arsenites, n.o.s., and Arsenic sulphides, n.o.s. 6.1 1564 BARIUM COMPOUND, N.O.S. 6.1 1566 BERYLLIUM COMPOUND, N.O.S. 6.1 1583 CHLOROPICRIN MIXTURE, N.O.S. 6.1 1588 CYANIDES, INORGANIC, SOLID, N.O.S. 6.1 1601 DISINFECTANT, SOLID, TOXIC, N.O.S. 6.1 1602 DYE, LIQUID, TOXIC, N.O.S. or DYE INTERMEDIATE, LIQUID, TOXIC, N.O.S. 6.1 1655 NICOTINE COMPOUND, SOLID, N.O.S. or NICOTINE PREPARATION, SOLID, N.O.S. 6.1 1693 TEAR GAS SUBSTANCE, LIQUID, N.O.S. 6.1 1707 THALLIUM COMPOUND, N.O.S. 6.1 1851 MEDICINE, LIQUID, TOXIC, N.O.S. 6.1 1935 CYANIDE SOLUTION, N.O.S. 6.1 2024 MERCURY COMPOUND, LIQUID, N.O.S. 6.1 2025 MERCURY COMPOUND, SOLID, N.O.S. 6.1 2026 PHENYLMERCURIC COMPOUND, N.O.S. 6.1 2206 ISOCYANATES, TOXIC, N.O.S. or ISOCYANATE SOLUTION, TOXIC, N.O.S. 6.1 2291 LEAD COMPOUND, SOLUBLE, N.O.S. 6.1 2570 CADMIUM COMPOUND 6.1 2788 ORGANOTIN COMPOUND, LIQUID, N.O.S. 6.1 2856 FLUOROSILICATES, N.O.S. 6.1 3140 ALKALOIDS, LIQUID, N.O.S or ALKALOIDS SALTS, LIQUID, N.O.S. 6.1 3141 ANTIMONY COMPOUND, INORGANIC, LIQUID, N.O.S. 6.1 3142 DISINFECTANT, LIQUID, TOXIC, N.O.S. 6.1 3143 DYE, SOLID, TOXIC, N.O.S. or DYE INTERMEDIATE, SOLID, TOXIC, N.O.S. 6.1 3144 NICOTINE COMPOUND, LIQUID, N.O.S. or NICOTINE PREPARATION, LIQUID, N.O.S. 6.1 3146 ORGANOTIN COMPOUND, SOLID, N.O.S. 6.1 3249 MEDICINE, SOLID, TOXIC, N.O.S. 6.1 3276 NITRILES, TOXIC, LIQUID, N.O.S. 6.1 3278 ORGANOPHOSPHORUS COMPOUND, TOXIC, LIQUID, N.O.S. 6.1 3280 ORGANOARSENIC COMPOUND, LIQUID, N.O.S. 6.1 3281 METAL CARBONYLS, LIQUID, N.O.S. with LC50 6.1 3282 ORGANOMETALLIC COMPOUND, TOXIC, LIQUID, N.O.S. with LC50 6.1 3283 SELENIUM COMPOUND, SOLID, N.O.S. with LC50 6.1 3284 TELLURIUM COMPOUND, N.O.S. with LC50 6.1 3285 VANADIUM COMPOUND, N.O.S. 6.1 3439 NITRILES, TOXIC, SOLID, N.O.S. 6.1 3440 SELENIUM COMPOUND, LIQUID, N.O.S. 6.1 3448 TEAR GAS SUBSTANCE, SOLID, N.O.S. 6.1 3462 TOXINS EXTRACTED FROM LIVING SOURCES, SOLID, N.O.S. 6.1 3464 ORGANOPHOSPHORUS COMPOUND, TOXIC, SOLID, N.O.S. 6.1 3465 ORGANOARSENIC COMPOUND, SOLID, N.O.S. 6.1 3466 METAL CARBONYLS, SOLID, N.O.S. 6.1 3467 ORGANOMETALLIC COMPOUND, TOXIC, SOLID, N.O.S. 6.1 3 3071 MERCAPTANS, LIQUID, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S. or MERCAPTAN MIXTURE, LIQUID, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S. 6.1 3 3080 ISOCYANATES, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S or ISOCYANATE SOLUTION, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S. 6.1 3 3275 NITRILES, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S. 6.1 3 3279 ORGANOPHOSPHORUS COMPOUND, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S. 6.1 3 + 8 2742 CHLOROFORMATES, TOXIC, CORROSIVE, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S.

190 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

208

Bilaga 1

Appendix A – List of generic and N.O.S. Proper Shipping Names

Class or Subsidiary UN Proper Shipping Name division risk Number CLASS 6 (continued) Class 6.1 (continued) Specific entries (continued) 6.1 3 + 8 3362 CHLOROSILANES, TOXIC, CORROSIVE, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S. 6.1 8 3277 CHLOROFORMATES, TOXIC, CORROSIVE, N.O.S. 6.1 8 3361 CHLOROSILANES, TOXIC, CORROSIVE, N.O.S.

Pesticides (a) Solid 6.1 2588 PESTICIDE, SOLID, TOXIC, N.O.S. 6.1 2757 CARBAMATE PESTICIDE, SOLID, TOXIC 6.1 2759 ARSENICAL PESTICIDE, SOLID, TOXIC 6.1 2761 ORGANOCHLORINE PESTICIDE, SOLID, TOXIC 6.1 2763 TRIAZINE PESTICIDE, SOLID, TOXIC 6.1 2771 THIOCARBAMATE PESTICIDE, SOLID, TOXIC 6.1 2775 COPPER BASED PESTICIDE, SOLID, TOXIC 6.1 2777 MERCURY BASED PESTICIDE, SOLID, TOXIC 6.1 2779 SUBSTITUTED NITROPHENOL PESTICIDE, SOLID, TOXIC 6.1 2781 BIPYRIDILIUM PESTICIDE, SOLID, TOXIC 6.1 2783 ORGANOPHOSPHORUS PESTICIDE, SOLID, TOXIC 6.1 2786 ORGANOTIN PESTICIDE, SOLID, TOXIC 6.1 3027 COUMARIN DERIVATIVE PESTICIDE, SOLID, TOXIC 6.1 3345 PHENOXYACETIC ACID DERIVATIVE PESTICIDE, SOLID, TOXIC 6.1 3349 PYRETHROID PESTICIDE, SOLID, TOXIC

(b) Liquid 6.1 2902 PESTICIDE, LIQUID TOXIC, N.O.S. 6.1 2992 CARBAMATE PESTICIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC 6.1 2994 ARSENICAL PESTICIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC 6.1 2996 ORGANOCHLORINE PESTICIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC 6.1 2998 TRIAZINE PESTICIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC 6.1 3006 THIOCARBAMATE PESTICIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC 6.1 3010 COPPER BASED PESTICIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC 6.1 3012 MERCURY BASED PESTICIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC 6.1 3014 SUBSTITUTED NITROPHENOL PESTICIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC 6.1 3016 BIPYRIDILIUM PESTICIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC 6.1 3018 ORGANOPHOSPHORUS PESTICIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC 6.1 3020 ORGANOTIN PESTICIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC 6.1 3026 COUMARIN DERIVATIVE PESTICIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC 6.1 3348 PHENOXYACETIC ACID DERIVATIVE PESTICIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC 6.1 3352 PYRETHROID PESTICIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC 6.1 3 2903 PESTICIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S., flashpoint ≥ 23°C 6.1 3 2991 CARBAMATE PESTICIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE, flashpoint ≥ 23°C 6.1 3 2993 ARSENICAL PESTICIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE flashpoint ≥ 23°C 6.1 3 2995 ORGANOCHLORINE PESTICIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE flashpoint ≥ 23°C 6.1 3 2997 TRIAZINE PESTICIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE, flashpoint ≥ 23°C 6.1 3 3005 THIOCARBAMATE PESTICIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE flashpoint ≥ 23°C 6.1 3 3009 COPPER BASED PESTICIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE flashpoint ≥ 23°C 6.1 3 3011 MERCURY BASED PESTICIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE flashpoint ≥ 23°C 6.1 3 3013 SUBSTITUTED NITROPHENOL PESTICIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE flashpoint ≥ 23°C 6.1 3 3015 BIPYRIDILIUM PESTICIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE flashpoint ≥ 23°C 6.1 3 3017 ORGANOPHOSPHORUS PESTICIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE flashpoint ≥ 23°C 6.1 3 3019 ORGANOTIN PESTICIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE flashpoint ≥ 23°C 6.1 3 3025 COUMARIN DERIVATIVE PESTICIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE flashpoint ≥ 23°C 6.1 3 3347 PHENOXYACETIC ACID DERIVATIVE PESTICIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE flashpoint ≥ 23°C 6.1 3 3351 PYRETHROID PESTICIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE flashpoint ≥ 23°C

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 191

209

Bilaga 1

Appendices

Class or Subsidiary UN Proper Shipping Name division risk Number CLASS 6 (continued) Class 6.1 (continued) General entries 6.1 2810 TOXIC LIQUID, ORGANIC, N.O.S. 6.1 2811 TOXIC SOLID, ORGANIC, N.O.S. 6.1 3172 TOXINS, EXTRACTED FROM LIVING SOURCES, LIQUID, N.O.S. 6.1 3243 SOLIDS CONTAINING TOXIC LIQUID, N.O.S. 6.1 3287 TOXIC LIQUID, INORGANIC, N.O.S. 6.1 3288 TOXIC SOLID, INORGANIC, N.O.S. 6.1 3315 CHEMICAL SAMPLE, TOXIC 6.1 3381 TOXIC BY INHALATION LIQUID, N.O.S. with an LC50 lower than or equal to 200 mℓ/ m3 and saturated vapour concentration greater than or equal to 500 LC 50 6.1 3382 TOXIC BY INHALATION LIQUID, N.O.S. with an LC50 lower than or equal to 1000 mℓ/ 3 m and saturated vapour concentration greater than or equal to 10 LC50 6.1 3462 TOXINS, EXTRACTED FROM LIVING SOURCES, SOLID, N.O.S. 6.1 3 2929 TOXIC LIQUID, FLAMMABLE, ORGANIC, N.O.S. 6.1 3 3383 TOXIC BY INHALATION LIQUID, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S. with an LC50 lower than or equal to 200 mℓ/m3 and saturated vapour concentration greater than or equal to 500 LC50 6.1 3 3384 TOXIC BY INHALATION LIQUID, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S. with an LC50 lower than or 3 equal to 1000 mℓ/m and saturated vapour concentration greater than or equal to 10 LC50 6.1 3 + 8 3488 TOXIC BY INHALATION LIQUID, FLAMMABLE, CORROSIVE, N.O.S. with an LC50 3 lower than or equal to 200 mℓ/m and saturated vapour concentration greater than or equal to 500 LC50 6.1 3 + 8 3489 TOXIC BY INHALATION LIQUID, FLAMMABLE, CORROSIVE, N.O.S. with an LC50 lower than or equal to 1000 mℓ/m3 and saturated vapour concentration greater than or equal to 10 LC50 6.1 4.1 2930 TOXIC SOLID, FLAMMABLE, ORGANIC, N.O.S. 6.1 4.2 3124 TOXIC SOLID, SELF-HEATING, N.O.S. 6.1 4.3 3123 TOXIC LIQUID, WATER-REACTIVE, N.O.S. 6.1 4.3 3125 TOXIC SOLID, WATER-REACTIVE, N.O.S. 6.1 4.3 3385 TOXIC BY INHALATION LIQUID, WATER-REACTIVE, N.O.S. with an LC50 lower than 3 or equal to 200 mℓ/m and saturated vapour concentration greater than or equal to 500 LC50 6.1 4.3 3386 TOXIC BY INHALATION LIQUID, WATER-REACTIVE, N.O.S. with an LC50 lower than or equal to 1000 mℓ/m3 and saturated vapour concentration greater than or equal to 10 LC50 6.1 4.3 + 3 3490 TOXIC BY INHALATION LIQUID, WATER-REACTIVE, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S. with an 3 LC50 lower than or equal to 200 mℓ/m and saturated vapour concentration greater than or equal to 500 LC50 6.1 4.3 + 3 3491 TOXIC BY INHALATION LIQUID, WATER-REACTIVE, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S. with an 3 LC50 lower than or equal to 1000 mℓ/m and saturated vapour concentration greater than or equal to 10 LC50 6.1 5.1 3122 TOXIC LIQUID, OXIDIZING, N.O.S. 6.1 5.1 3086 TOXIC SOLID, OXIDIZING, N.O.S. 6.1 5.1 3387 TOXIC BY INHALATION LIQUID, OXIDIZING, N.O.S. with an LC50 lower than or equal 3 to 200 mℓ/m and saturated vapour concentration greater than or equal to 500 LC50 6.1 5.1 3388 TOXIC BY INHALATION LIQUID, OXIDIZING, N.O.S. with an LC50 lower than or equal to 1000 mℓ/m3 and saturated vapour concentration greater than or equal to 10 LC 50 6.1 8 2927 TOXIC LIQUID, CORROSIVE, ORGANIC, N.O.S. 6.1 8 2928 TOXIC SOLID, CORROSIVE, ORGANIC, N.O.S. 6.1 8 3289 TOXIC LIQUID, CORROSIVE, INORGANIC, N.O.S. 6.1 8 3290 TOXIC SOLID, CORROSIVE, INORGANIC, N.O.S. 6.1 8 3389 TOXIC BY INHALATION LIQUID, CORROSIVE, N.O.S. with an LC50 lower than or 3 equal to 200 mℓ/m and saturated vapour concentration greater than or equal to 500 LC50 6.1 8 3390 TOXIC BY INHALATION LIQUID, CORROSIVE, N.O.S. with an LC50 lower than or equal to 1000 mℓ/m3 and saturated vapour concentration greater than or equal to 10 LC50

192 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

210

Bilaga 1

Appendix A – List of generic and N.O.S. Proper Shipping Names

Class or Subsidiary UN Proper Shipping Name division risk Number CLASS 6 (continued) Class 6.2 Specific entries 6.2 3291 CLINICAL WASTE, UNSPECIFIED, N.O.S. or (BIO)MEDICAL WASTE, N.O.S. or REGULATED MEDICAL WASTE, N.O.S. 6.2 3373 BIOLOGICAL SUBSTANCE, CATEGORY B

General entries 6.2 2814 INFECTIOUS SUBSTANCE, AFFECTING HUMANS 6.2 2900 INFECTIOUS SUBSTANCE, AFFECTING ANIMALS only

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 193

211

Bilaga 1

Appendices

Class or Subsidiary UN Proper Shipping Name division risk Number CLASS 7 General entries 7 2908 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, EXCEPTED PACKAGE – EMPTY PACKAGING 7 2909 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, EXCEPTED PACKAGE – ARTICLES MANUFACTURED FROM NATURAL URANIUM or DEPLETED URANIUM or NATURAL THORIUM 7 2910 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, EXCEPTED PACKAGE – LIMITED QUANTITY OF MATERIAL 7 2911 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, EXCEPTED PACKAGE – INSTRUMENTS or ARTICLES 7 2912 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, LOW SPECIFIC ACTIVITY (LSA-I) non fissile or fissile – excepted 7 2913 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, SURFACE CONTAMINATED OBJECTS (SCO-I or SCO-II) non fissile or fissile – excepted 7 2915 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, TYPE A PACKAGE, non-special form, non fissile or fissile – excepted 7 2916 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, TYPE B(U) PACKAGE non fissile or fissile – excepted 7 2917 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, TYPE B(M) PACKAGE non fissile or fissile – excepted 7 2919 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, TRANSPORTED UNDER SPECIAL ARRANGEMENT non fissile or fissile – excepted 7 3321 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, LOW SPECIFIC ACTIVITY (LSA-II), non fissile or fissile – excepted 7 3322 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, LOW SPECIFIC ACTIVITY (LSA-III), non fissile or fissile – excepted 7 3323 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, TYPE C PACKAGE non fissile or fissile – excepted 7 3324 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, LOW SPECIFIC ACTIVITY (LSA-II), FISSILE 7 3325 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, LOW SPECIFIC ACTIVITY (LSA-III), FISSILE 7 3326 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, SURFACE CONTAMINATED OBJECTS (SCO-I or SCO-II), FISSILE 7 3327 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, TYPE A PACKAGE, FISSILE non-special form 7 3328 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, TYPE B(U) PACKAGE, FISSILE 7 3329 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, TYPE B(M) PACKAGE, FISSILE 7 3330 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, TYPE C PACKAGE, FISSILE 7 3331 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, TRANSPORTED UNDER SPECIAL ARRANGEMENT, FISSILE 7 3332 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, TYPE A PACKAGE, SPECIAL FORM non fissile or fissile – excepted 7 3333 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, TYPE A PACKAGE, SPECIAL FORM, FISSILE

194 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

212

Bilaga 1

Appendix A – List of generic and N.O.S. Proper Shipping Names

Class or Subsidiary UN Proper Shipping Name division risk Number CLASS 8 Specific entries 8 1719 CAUSTIC ALKALI LIQUID, N.O.S. 8 1740 HYDROGENDIFLUORIDES, SOLID, N.O.S. 8 1903 DISINFECTANT, LIQUID, CORROSIVE, N.O.S. 8 2430 ALKYLPHENOLS, SOLID, N.O.S. (including C2–C12 homologues) 8 2693 BISULPHITES, AQUEOUS SOLUTION, N.O.S. 8 2735 AMINES, LIQUID, CORROSIVE, N.O.S. or POLYAMINES, LIQUID, CORROSIVE, N.O.S. 8 2801 DYE, LIQUID, CORROSIVE, N.O.S. or DYE INTERMEDIATE, LIQUID, CORROSIVE, N.O.S. 8 2837 BISULPHATES, AQUEOUS SOLUTION 8 2987 CHLOROSILANES, CORROSIVE, N.O.S. 8 3145 ALKYLPHENOLS, LIQUID, N.O.S. (including C2–C12 homologues) 8 3147 DYE, SOLID, CORROSIVE, N.O.S. or DYE INTERMEDIATE, SOLID, CORROSIVE, N.O.S. 8 3259 AMINES, SOLID, CORROSIVE, N.O.S. or POLYAMINES, SOLID, CORROSIVE, N.O.S. 8 3 2734 AMINES, LIQUID, CORROSIVE, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S. or POLYAMINES, LIQUID, CORROSIVE, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S. 8 3 2986 CHLOROSILANES, CORROSIVE, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S. 8 6.1 3471 HYDROGENDIFLUORIDES SOLUTION, N.O.S.

General entries 8 1759 CORROSIVE SOLID, N.O.S. 8 1760 CORROSIVE LIQUID, N.O.S. 8 3244 SOLIDS CONTAINING CORROSIVE LIQUID, N.O.S. 8 3260 CORROSIVE SOLID, ACIDIC, INORGANIC, N.O.S. 8 3261 CORROSIVE SOLID, ACIDIC, ORGANIC, N.O.S. 8 3262 CORROSIVE SOLID, BASIC, INORGANIC, N.O.S. 8 3263 CORROSIVE SOLID, BASIC, ORGANIC, N.O.S. 8 3264 CORROSIVE LIQUID, ACIDIC, INORGANIC, N.O.S. 8 3265 CORROSIVE LIQUID, ACIDIC, ORGANIC, N.O.S. 8 3266 CORROSIVE LIQUID, BASIC, INORGANIC, N.O.S. 8 3267 CORROSIVE LIQUID, BASIC, ORGANIC, N.O.S. 8 3 2920 CORROSIVE LIQUID, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S. 8 4.1 2921 CORROSIVE SOLID, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S. 8 4.2 3095 CORROSIVE SOLID, SELF-HEATING, N.O.S. 8 4.2 3301 CORROSIVE LIQUID, SELF-HEATING, N.O.S. 8 4.3 3094 CORROSIVE LIQUID, WATER-REACTIVE, N.O.S. 8 4.3 3096 CORROSIVE SOLID, WATER-REACTIVE, N.O.S. 8 5.1 3084 CORROSIVE SOLID, OXIDIZING, N.O.S. 8 5.1 3093 CORROSIVE LIQUID, OXIDIZING, N.O.S. 8 6.1 2922 CORROSIVE LIQUID, TOXIC, N.O.S. 8 6.1 2923 CORROSIVE SOLID, TOXIC, N.O.S.

Class or Subsidiary UN Proper Shipping Name division risk Number CLASS 9 General entries 9 3077 ENVIRONMENTALLY HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCE, SOLID, N.O.S. 9 3082 ENVIRONMENTALLY HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCE, LIQUID, N.O.S. 9 3245 GENETICALLY MODIFIED MICROORGANISMS or GENETICALLY MODIFIED ORGANISMS 9 3257 ELEVATED TEMPERATURE LIQUID, N.O.S. at or above 100°C and below its flashpoint (including molten metals, molten salts, etc.) 9 3258 ELEVATED TEMPERATURE SOLID, N.O.S., at or above 240°C see 3334 AVIATION REGULATED LIQUID, N.O.S. SP960 see 3335 AVIATION REGULATED SOLID, N.O.S. SP960

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 195

213

Bilaga 1

214

Bilaga 1

Appendix B

Glossary of terms

Note: The provisions of this appendix are not mandatory. Caution: The explanations in this glossary are for information only and are not to be used for purposes of hazard classification.

AIR BAG INFLATORS, PYROTECHNIC Articles which contain pyrotechnic substances and are or AIR BAG MODULES, PYROTECHNIC used as life-saving vehicle air bags or seat-belts. or SEAT-BELT PRETENSIONERS, PYROTECHNIC Ammunition Generic term related mainly to articles of military application consisting of all kind of bombs, grenades, rockets, mines, projectiles and other similar devices or contrivances. AMMUNITION, ILLUMINATING with or Ammunition designed to produce a single source of without burster, expelling charge or intense light for lighting up an area. The term includes propelling charge illuminating cartridges, grenades and projectiles; and illuminating and target identification bombs. The term excludes the following articles which are listed separately: CARTRIDGES, SIGNAL; SIGNAL DEVICES, HAND; SIGNALS, DISTRESS; FLARES, AERIAL and FLARES, SURFACE. AMMUNITION, INCENDIARY Ammunition containing incendiary substances which may be a solid, liquid or gel including white phosphorus. Except when the composition is an explosive per se, it also contains one or more of the following: a propelling charge with primer and igniter charge; a fuze with burster or expelling charge. The term includes: AMMUNITION, INCENDIARY, liquid or gel, with burster, expelling charge or propelling charge; AMMUNITION, INCENDIARY with or without burster, expelling charge or propelling charge; AMMUNITION, INCENDIARY, WHITE PHOSPHORUS with burster, expelling charge or propelling charge. AMMUNITION, PRACTICE Ammunition without a main bursting charge, containing a burster or expelling charge. Normally it also contains a fuze and a propelling charge. The term excludes the following articles which are listed separately: GRENADES, PRACTICE. AMMUNITION, PROOF Ammunition containing pyrotechnic substances, used to test the performance or strength of new ammunition, weapon component or assemblies.

IMDG Code IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)(Amdt. 36-12) 197197

215

Bilaga 1

Appendices

AMMUNITION, SMOKE Ammunition containing smoke producing substance such as chlorosulphonic acid mixture, titanium tetrachloride or white phosphorus; or smoke producing pyrotechnic composition based on hexachloroethane or red phosphorus. Except when the substance is an explosive per se, the ammunition also contains one or more of the following: a propelling charge with primer and igniter charge; a fuze with burster or expelling charge. The term includes grenades, smoke but excludes SIGNALS, SMOKE which are listed separately. The term includes: AMMUNITION, SMOKE with or without burster, expelling charge or propelling charge; AMMUNITION, SMOKE, WHITE PHOSPHORUS with burster, expelling charge or propelling charge. AMMUNITION, TEAR PRODUCING with Ammunition containing tear producing substance. It also burster, expelling charge or propelling contains one or more of the following: a pyrotechnic charge substance; a propelling charge with primer and igniter charge; a fuze with burster or expelling charge. AMMUNITION, TOXIC with burster, expelling Ammunition containing toxic agent. It also contains one charge or propelling charge or more of the following: a pyrotechnic substance; a propelling charge with primer and igniter charge; a fuze with burster or expelling charge. ARTICLES, EXPLOSIVE, EXTREMELY Articles that contain only extremely insensitive substances INSENSITIVE (ARTICLES, EEI) and which demonstrate a negligible probability of accidental initiation or propagation (under normal conditions of transport) and which have passed Test Series 7. ARTICLES, PYROPHORIC Articles which contain a pyrophoric substance (capable of spontaneous ignition when exposed to air) and an explosive substance or component. The term excludes articles containing white phosphorus. ARTICLES, PYROTECHNIC for technical Articles which contain pyrotechnic substances and are purposes used for technical purposes such as heat generation, gas generation, theatrical effects, etc. The term excludes the following articles which are listed separately: all ammunition; CARTRIDGES, SIGNAL; CUTTERS, CABLE, EXPLOSIVE; FIREWORKS; FLARES, AERIAL; FLARES, SURFACE; RELEASE DEVICES, EXPLOSIVE; RIVETS, EXPLOSIVE; SIGNAL DEVICES, HAND; SIGNALS, DISTRESS; SIGNALS, RAILWAY TRACK, EXPLOSIVE; SIGNALS, SMOKE. Auxiliary explosive component, isolated An "isolated auxiliary explosive component" is a small device that explosively performs an operation related to the article’s functioning, other than its main explosive loads’ performance. Functioning of the component does not cause any reaction of the main explosive loads contained within the article. BLACK POWDER (GUNPOWDER) Substance consisting of an intimate mixture of charcoal or other carbon and either potassium nitrate or sodium nitrate, with or without sulphur. It may be meal, granular, compressed or pelletized. Bombs Explosive articles which are dropped from aircraft. They may contain a flammable liquid with bursting charge, a photo flash composition or a bursting charge. The term excludes torpedoes (aerial) and includes: BOMBS, PHOTO FLASH; BOMBS with bursting charge; BOMBS WITH FLAMMABLE LIQUID with bursting charge.

198 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

216

Bilaga 1

Appendix B – Glossary of terms

BOOSTERS Articles consisting of a charge of detonating explosive with or without means of initiation. They are used to increase the initiating power of detonators or detonating cord. BURSTERS, explosive Articles consisting of a small charge of explosive used to open projectiles, or other ammunition in order to disperse their contents. Cartridges, blank Articles which consist of a cartridge case with a centre or rim fire primer and a confined charge of smokeless or black powder but no projectile. Used for training, saluting or in starter pistols, tools, etc. CARTRIDGES, FLASH Articles consisting of a casing, a primer and flash powder, all assembled in one piece ready for firing. Cartridges for Weapons (1) Fixed (assembled) or semi fixed (partially assembled) ammunition designed to be fired from weapons. Each cartridge includes all the components necessary to function the weapon once. The name and description shall be used for small arms cartridges that cannot be described as “cartridges, small arms”. Separate loading ammunition is included under this name and description when the propelling charge and projectile are packed together (see also “Cartridges, blank”).

(2) Incendiary, smoke, toxic and tear producing cartridges are described in this Glossary under AMMUNITION, INCENDIARY etc. CARTRIDGES FOR WEAPONS, INERT Ammunition consisting of a projectile without bursting PROJECTILE charge but with a propelling charge. The presence of a tracer can be disregarded for classification purposes provided that the predominant hazard is that of the propelling charge. CARTRIDGES, OIL WELL Articles consisting of a casing of thin fibre, metal or other material containing only propellant which projects a hardened projectile. The term excludes the following articles which are listed separately: CHARGES, SHAPED. CARTRIDGES, POWER DEVICE Articles designed to accomplish mechanical actions. They consist of a casing with a charge of deflagrating explosive and a means of ignition. The gaseous products of the deflagration produce inflation, or linear or rotary motion, or activate diaphragms, valves or switches or project fastening devices or extinguishing agents. CARTRIDGES, SIGNAL Articles designed to fire coloured flares or other signals from signal pistols, etc. CARTRIDGES, SMALL ARMS Ammunition consisting of a cartridge case fitted with a centre or rim fire primer and containing both a propelling charge and a solid projectile. They are designed to be fired in weapons of calibre not larger than 19.1 mm. Shot gun cartridges of any calibre are included in this description. The term excludes: CARTRIDGES, SMALL ARMS, BLANK listed separately in the Dangerous Goods List; and some small arms cartridges which are listed under CARTRIDGES FOR WEAPONS, INERT PROJECTILE. CASES, CARTRIDGE, EMPTY, WITH PRIMER Articles consisting of a cartridge case made from metal, plastics or other non flammable material, in which the only explosive component is the primer. CASES, COMBUSTIBLE, EMPTY, WITHOUT Articles consisting of cartridge cases made partly or PRIMER entirely from nitrocellulose.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 199

217

Bilaga 1

Appendices

Charges, bursting Articles consisting of a charge of detonating explosive such as hexolite, octolite or plastics bonded explosive designed to produce effect by blast or fragmentation. CHARGES, DEMOLITION Articles containing a charge of a detonating explosive in a casing of fibreboard, plastics, metal or other material. The term excludes the following articles which are listed separately: bombs, mines, etc. CHARGES, DEPTH Articles consisting of a charge of detonating explosive contained in a drum or projectile. They are designed to detonate under water. Charges, expelling A charge of deflagrating explosive designed to eject the payload from the parent articles without damage. CHARGES, EXPLOSIVE, COMMERCIAL Articles consisting of a charge of detonating explosive without detonator without means of initiation, used for explosive welding, jointing, forming and other metallurgical processes. CHARGES, PROPELLING Articles consisting of a propellant charge in any physical form, with or without a casing, for use as a component of rocket motors or for reducing the drag of projectiles. CHARGES, PROPELLING FOR CANNON Articles consisting of a propellant charge in any physical form, with or without a casing, for use in a cannon. CHARGES, SHAPED, without detonator Articles consisting of a casing containing a charge of detonating explosive with a cavity lined with rigid material, without means of initiation. They are designed to produce a powerful, penetrating jet effect. CHARGES, SHAPED, FLEXIBLE, LINEAR Articles consisting of a V-shaped core of a detonating explosive clad by a flexible metal sheath. CHARGES, SUPPLEMENTARY, EXPLOSIVE Articles consisting of a small removable booster used in the cavity of a projectile between the fuze and the bursting charge. COMPONENTS, EXPLOSIVE TRAIN, N.O.S. Articles containing an explosive designed to transmit the detonation or deflagration within an explosive train. CONTRIVANCES, WATER ACTIVATED with Articles whose functioning depends upon physico burster, expelling charge or propelling chemical reaction of their contents with water. charge CORD, DETONATING, flexible Article consisting of a core of detonating explosive enclosed in spun fabric, with plastics or other covering unless the spun fabric is sift proof. CORD (FUSE), DETONATING, metal clad Article consisting of a core of detonating explosive clad by a soft metal tube with or without protective covering. When the core contains a sufficiently small quantity of explosive, the words “MILD EFFECT” are added. CORD, IGNITER Article consisting of textile yarns covered with black powder or another fast burning pyrotechnic composition and of a flexible protective covering; or it consists of a core of black powder surrounded by a flexible woven fabric. It burns progressively along its length with an external flame and is used to transmit ignition from a device to a charge or primer. CUTTERS, CABLE, EXPLOSIVE Articles consisting of a knife edged device which is driven by a small charge of deflagrating explosive into an anvil. DETONATOR ASSEMBLIES, NON ELECTRIC Non electric detonators assembled with and activated for blasting by such means as safety fuse, shock tube, flash tube or detonating cord. They may be of instantaneous design or incorporate delay elements. Detonating relays incorporating detonating cord are included. Other detonating relays are included in “Detonators, non electric”.

200 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

218

Bilaga 1

Appendix B – Glossary of terms

Detonators Articles consisting of a small metal or plastics tube containing explosives such as lead azide, PETN or combinations of explosives. They are designed to start a detonation train. They may be constructed to detonate instantaneously, or may contain a delay element. The term includes: DETONATORS FOR AMMUNITION and DETONATORS for blasting, both ELECTRIC and NON ELECTRIC.

Detonating relays without flexible detonating cord are included. Entire load and total contents The phrases “entire load” and “total contents” mean such a substantial proportion that the practical hazard shall be assessed by assuming simultaneous explosion of the whole of the explosive content of the load or package. Explode The verb used to indicate those explosive effects capable of endangering life and property through blast, heat and projection of missiles. It encompasses both deflagration and detonation. Explosion of the total contents The phrase “explosion of the total contents” is used in testing a single article or package or a small stack of articles or packages. Explosive, blasting Detonating explosive substances used in mining, construction and similar tasks. Blasting explosives are assigned to one of five types. In addition to the ingredients listed, blasting explosives may also contain inert components such as kieselguhr, and minor ingredients such as colouring agents and stabilizers. EXPLOSIVE, BLASTING, TYPE A Substances consisting of liquid organic nitrates such as nitroglycerin or a mixture of such ingredients with one or more of the following: nitrocellulose; ammonium nitrate or other inorganic nitrates; aromatic nitro derivatives, or combustible materials, such as wood meal and aluminium powder. Such explosives shall be in powdery, gelatinous or elastic form.

The term includes dynamite gelatine, blasting and gelatine dynamites. EXPLOSIVE, BLASTING, TYPE B Substances consisting of (a) a mixture of ammonium nitrate or other inorganic nitrates with an explosive such as trinitrotoluene, with or without other substances such as wood meal and aluminium powder, or (b) a mixture of ammonium nitrate or other inorganic nitrates with other combustible substances which are not explosive ingredients. Such explosives shall not contain nitroglycerin, similar liquid organic nitrates, or chlorates. EXPLOSIVE, BLASTING, TYPE C Substances consisting of a mixture of either potassium or sodium chlorate or potassium, sodium or ammonium perchlorate with organic nitro derivatives or combustible materials such as wood meal or aluminium powder or a hydrocarbon. Such explosives shall not contain nitroglycerin or similar liquid organic nitrates. EXPLOSIVE, BLASTING, TYPE D Substances consisting of a mixture of organic nitrated compounds and combustible materials such as hydrocarbons and aluminium powder. Such explosives shall not contain nitroglycerin, similar liquid organic nitrates, chlorates or ammonium nitrate. The term generally includes plastic explosives.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 201

219

Bilaga 1

Appendices

EXPLOSIVE, BLASTING, TYPE E Substances consisting of water as an essential ingredient and high proportions of ammonium nitrate or other oxidizers, some or all of which are in solution. The other constituents may include nitro derivatives such as trinitrotoluene, hydrocarbons or aluminium powder. The term includes explosives, emulsion; explosives slurry and explosives, water gel. Explosive, deflagrating A substance which reacts by detonation rather than deflagration when initiated and used in its normal manner. Explosive, extremely insensitive substance A substance which has demonstrated through tests that (EIS) it is so insensitive that there is very little probability of accidental initiation. Explosive, primary Explosive substance manufactured with a view to producing a practical effect by explosion which is very sensitive to heat, impact or friction and which, even in very small quantities, either detonates or burns very rapidly. It is able to transmit detonation (in the case of initiating explosive) or deflagration to secondary explosives close to it. The main primary explosives are mercury fulminate, lead azide and lead styphnate. Explosive, secondary Explosive substance which is relatively insensitive (when compared to primary explosives), which is usually initiated by primary explosives with or without the aid of boosters or supplementary charges. Such an explosive may react as a deflagrating or as a detonating explosive. FIREWORKS Pyrotechnic articles designed for entertainment. Flares Articles containing pyrotechnic substances which are designed for use to illuminate, identify, signal or warn. The term includes: FLARES, AERIAL; FLARES, SURFACE. FLASH POWDER Pyrotechnic substance which, when ignited, produces an intense light. FRACTURING DEVICES, EXPLOSIVE for oil Articles consisting of a charge of detonating explosive wells, without detonator contained in a casing without means of initiation. They are used to fracture the rock around a drill shaft to assist the flow of crude oil from the rock. Fuse/Fuze (English text only) Although these two words have a common origin (French fusée, fusil) and are sometimes considered to be different spellings, it is useful to maintain the convention that fuse refers to a cord like igniting device whereas fuze refers to a device used in ammunition which incorporates mechanical, electrical, chemical or hydrostatic components to initiate a train by deflagration or detonation. FUSE, IGNITER, tubular, metal clad Article consisting of a metal tube with a core of deflagrating explosive. FUSE, INSTANTANEOUS, NON DETONATING Article consisting of cotton yarns impregnated with fine (QUICKMATCH) black powder (Quickmatch). It burns with an external flame and is used in ignition trains for fireworks, etc. FUSE, SAFETY Article consisting of a core of fine-grained black powder surrounded by a flexible woven fabric with one or more protective outer coverings. When ignited, it burns at a predetermined rate without any external explosive effect.

202 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

220

Bilaga 1

Appendix B – Glossary of terms

Fuzes Articles designed to start a detonation or a deflagration in ammunition. They incorporate mechanical, electrical, chemical or hydrostatic components and generally protective features. The term includes: FUZES, DETONATING; FUZES, DETONATING with protective features; FUZES, IGNITING. GRENADES, hand or rifle Articles which are designed to be thrown by hand or to be projected by a rifle. The term includes: GRENADES, hand or rifle, with bursting charge; GRENADES, PRACTICE, hand or rifle.

The term excludes grenades, smoke which are listed under AMMUNITION, SMOKE. IGNITERS Articles containing one or more explosive substances used to start deflagration in an explosive train. They may be actuated chemically, electrically or mechanically. This term excludes the following articles which are listed separately: CORD, IGNITER; FUSE, IGNITER; FUSE, NON DETONATING; FUZES, IGNITING; LIGHTERS, FUSE; PRIMERS, CAP TYPE; PRIMERS, TUBULAR. Ignition, means of A general term used in connection with the method employed to ignite a deflagrating train of explosive or pyrotechnic substances (for example: a primer for a propelling charge; an igniter for a rocket motor; an igniting fuze). Initiation, means of (1) A device intended to cause the detonation of an explosive (for example: detonator; detonator for ammunition; detonating fuze).

(2) The term “with its own means of initiation” means that the contrivance has its normal initiating device assembled to it and this device is considered to present a significant risk during transport but not one great enough to be unacceptable. The term does not apply, however, to a contrivance packed together with its means of initiation provided the device is packaged so as to eliminate the risk of causing detonation of the contrivance in the event of accidental functioning of the initiating device. The means of initiating can even be assembled to the contrivance provided there are protective features such that the device is very unlikely to cause detonation of the contrivance in conditions which are associated with transport.

(3) For the purposes of classification any means of initiation without two effective protective features shall be regarded as Compatibility Group B; an article with its own means of initiation, without two effective protective features, would be Compatibility Group F. On the other hand a means of initiation which itself possesses two effective protective features would be Compatibility Group D; and an article with a means of initiation which possesses two effective protective features would be Compatibility Group D or E. Means of initiation adjudged as having two effective protective features shall have been approved by the competent national authority. A common and effective way of achieving the necessary degree of protection is to use a means of initiation which incorporates two or more independent safety features.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 203

221

Bilaga 1

Appendices

JET PERFORATING GUNS, CHARGED, oil Articles consisting of a steel tube or metallic strip, well, without detonator into which are inserted shaped charges connected by detonating cord, without means of initiation. LIGHTERS, FUSE Articles of various design actuated by friction, percussion or electricity and used to ignite safety fuse. Mass explosion Explosion which affects almost the entire load virtually instantaneously. MINES Articles consisting normally of metal or composition receptacles and a bursting charge. They are designed to be operated by the passage of ships, vehicles or personnel. The term includes “Bangalore torpedoes”. OXYGEN GENERATORS, CHEMICAL Oxygen generators, chemical, are devices containing chemicals which upon activation releases oxygen as a product of chemical reaction. Chemical oxygen generators are used for the generation of oxygen for respiratory support, e.g. in aircraft, submarines, spacecraft, bomb shelters and breathing apparatus. Oxidizing salts such as chlorates and perchlorates of lithium, sodium and potassium, which are used in chemical oxygen generators, evolve oxygen when heated. These salts are mixed (compounded) with a fuel, usually iron powder, to form a chlorate candle, which produces oxygen by continuous reaction. The fuel is used to generate heat by oxidation. Once the reaction begins, oxygen is released from the hot salt by thermal decomposition (a thermal shield is used around the generator). A portion of the oxygen reacts with the fuel to produce more heat which produces more oxygen, and so on. Initiation of the reaction can be achieved by a percussion device, friction device or electric wire. POWDER CAKE (POWDER PASTE), WETTED Substance consisting of nitrocellulose impregnated with not more than 60% of nitroglycerin or other liquid organic nitrates or a mixture of these. POWDER, SMOKELESS Substance based on nitrocellulose used as propellant. The term includes propellants with a single base (nitrocellulose (NC) alone), those with a double base (such as NC and nitroglycerin (NG)) and those with a triple base (such as NC/NG/nitroguanidine). Cast, pressed or bag charges of smokeless powder are listed under “CHARGES, PROPELLING” or “CHARGES, PROPELLING FOR CANNON”. PRIMERS, CAP TYPE Articles consisting of a metal or plastics cap containing a small amount of primary explosive mixture that is readily ignited by impact. They serve as igniting elements in small arms cartridges, and in percussion primers for propelling charges. PRIMERS, TUBULAR Articles consisting of a primer for ignition and an auxiliary charge of deflagrating explosive such as black powder used to ignite the propelling charge in a cartridge case for cannon, etc. PROJECTILES Articles such as a shell or bullet which are projected from a cannon or other artillery gun, rifle or other small arm. They may be inert, with or without tracer, or may contain a burster or expelling charge or a bursting charge. The term includes: PROJECTILES, inert, with tracer; PROJECTILES with burster or expelling charge; PROJECTILES with bursting charge.

204 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

222

Bilaga 1

Appendix B – Glossary of terms

PROPELLANTS Deflagrating explosive used for propulsion or for reducing the drag of projectiles. PROPELLANTS, LIQUID Substances consisting of a deflagrating liquid explosive, used for propulsion. PROPELLANTS, SOLID Substances consisting of a deflagrating solid explosive, used for propulsion. RELEASE DEVICES, EXPLOSIVE Articles consisting of a small charge of explosive with means of initiation. They sever rods or links to release equipment quickly. ROCKET MOTORS Articles consisting of a solid, liquid or hypergolic fuel contained in a cylinder fitted with one or more nozzles. They are designed to propel a rocket or a guided missile. The term includes: ROCKET MOTORS; ROCKET MOTORS WITH HYPERGOLIC LIQUIDS with or without expelling charge; ROCKET MOTORS, LIQUID FUELLED. ROCKETS Articles consisting of a rocket motor and a payload which may be an explosive warhead or other device. The term includes guided missiles and: ROCKETS, LINE THROWING; ROCKETS, LIQUID FUELLED with bursting charge; ROCKETS with bursting charge; ROCKETS with expelling charge; ROCKETS with inert head. SIGNALS Articles containing pyrotechnic substances designed to produce signals by means of sound, flame or smoke or any combinations thereof. The term includes: SIGNAL DEVICES, HAND; SIGNALS, DISTRESS, ship; SIGNALS, RAILWAY TRACK, EXPLOSIVE; SIGNALS, SMOKE. SOUNDING DEVICES, EXPLOSIVE Articles consisting of a charge of detonating explosive. They are dropped from ships and function when they reach a predetermined depth or the sea bed. STABILIZED Stabilized means that the substance is in a condition that precludes uncontrolled reaction. This may be achieved by methods such as the addition of an inhibiting chemical, degassing the substance to remove dissolved oxygen and inerting the air space in the package, or maintaining the substance under temperature control. SUBSTANCES, EXPLOSIVE, VERY Substances which present a mass explosion hazard but INSENSITIVE (SUBSTANCES, EVI), N.O.S. which are so insensitive that there is very little probability of initiation, or of transition from burning to detonation (under normal conditions of transport) and which have passed Test Series 5. TORPEDOES Articles containing an explosive or non explosive propulsion system and designed to be propelled through water. They may contain an inert head or a warhead. The term includes: TORPEDOES, LIQUID FUELLED with inert head; TORPEDOES, LIQUID FUELLED with or without bursting charge; TORPEDOES with bursting charge.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 205

223

Bilaga 1

Appendices

TRACERS FOR AMMUNITION Sealed articles containing pyrotechnic substances, designed to reveal the trajectory of a projectile. Warheads Articles consisting of detonating explosives. They are designed to be fitted to a rocket, guided missile or torpedo. They may contain a burster or expelling charge or bursting charge. The term includes: WARHEADS, ROCKET with burster or expelling charge; WARHEADS, ROCKET with bursting charge; WARHEADS, TORPEDO with bursting charge.

206 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

224

Bilaga 1

PART 4

PACKING AND TANK PROVISIONS

225

Bilaga 1

226

Bilaga 1

Chapter 4.1

Use of packagings, including intermediate bulk containers (IBCs) and large packagings

4.1.0 Definitions

Effectively closed: liquid-tight closure. Hermetically sealed: vapour-tight closure.

Securely closed: so closed that dry contents cannot escape during normal handling; the minimum provisions for any closure.

4.1.1 General provisions for the packing of dangerous goods in packagings, including IBCs and large packagings

Note: For the packing of goods of classes 2, 6.2 and 7, the general provisions of this section only apply as indicated in 4.1.8.2 (class 6.2), 4.1.9.1.5 (class 7) and in the applicable packing instructions of 4.1.4 (P201 and LP02 for class 2 and P620, P621, P650, IBC620 and LP621 for class 6.2).

4.1.1.1 Dangerous goods shall be packed in good quality packagings, including IBCs and large packagings, which shall be strong enough to withstand the shocks and loadings normally encountered during transport, including trans-shipment between cargo transport units and between cargo transport units and warehouses as well as any removal from a pallet or overpack for subsequent manual or mechanical handling. Packagings, including IBCs and large packagings, shall be constructed and closed so as to prevent any loss of contents when prepared for transport which may be caused under normal conditions of transport, by vibration, or by changes in temperature, humidity or pressure (resulting from altitude, for example). Packagings, including IBCs and large packagings, shall be closed in accordance with the information provided by the manufacturer. No dangerous residue shall adhere to the outside of packages, IBCs and large packagings during transport. These provisions apply, as appropriate, to new, re-used, reconditioned or remanufactured packagings, and to new, re-used, repaired or remanufactured IBCs, and to new, re-used or remanufactured large packagings.

4.1.1.2 Parts of packagings, including IBCs and large packagings, which are in direct contact with dangerous goods: .1 shall not be affected or significantly weakened by those dangerous goods; and .2 shall not cause a dangerous effect, such as catalysing a reaction or reacting with the dangerous goods; .3 shall not allow permeation of the dangerous goods that could constitute a danger under normal conditions of transport.

Where necessary, they shall be provided with a suitable inner coating or treatment. 4.1.1.3 Unless otherwise provided elsewhere in this Code, each packaging, including IBCs and large packagings, except inner packagings, shall conform to a design type successfully tested in accordance with the provisions of 6.1.5, 6.3.2, 6.5.4 or 6.6.5, as applicable. However, IBCs manufactured before 1 January 2011 and conforming to a design type which has not passed the vibration test of 6.5.6.13 or which was not required to meet the criteria of 6.5.6.9.5.4 at the time it was subjected to the drop test may still be used. 4.1.1.4 When filling packagings, including IBCs and large packagings, with liquids,* sufficient ullage (outage) shall be left to ensure that neither leakage nor permanent distortion of the packaging occurs as a result of an expansion of the liquid caused by temperatures likely to occur during transport. Unless specific provisions are prescribed, liquids shall not completely fill a packaging at a temperature of 55°C. However, sufficient ullage

* With respect to ullage limits only, the provisions applicable for packagings for solid substances may be used if the viscous substance has an outflow time via a DIN-cup with a 4 mm diameter outlet exceeding 10 minutes at 20°C (corresponding to an outflow time via a Ford cup 4 of more than 690 seconds at 20°C, or to a viscosity of more than 2680 centistokes at 20°C).

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 209

227

Bilaga 1

Part 4 – Packing and tank provisions

shall be left in an IBC to ensure that at the mean bulk temperature of 50°C it is not filled to more than 98% of its water capacity.*

4.1.1.4.1 For air transport, packagings intended to contain liquids shall also be capable of withstanding a pressure differential without leakage as specified in the international regulations for air transport. 4.1.1.5 Inner packagings shall be packed in an outer packaging in such a way that, under normal conditions of transport, they cannot break, be punctured or leak their contents into the outer packaging. Inner packagings containing liquids shall be packaged with their closures upward and placed within outer packagings consistent with the orientation markings prescribed in 5.2.1.7 of this Code. Inner packagings that are liable to break or be punctured easily, such as those made of glass, porcelain or stoneware or of certain plastics materials, etc., shall be secured in outer packagings with suitable cushioning material. Any leakage of the contents shall not substantially impair the protective properties of the cushioning material or of the outer packaging. 4.1.1.5.1 Where an outer packaging of a combination packaging or a large packaging has been successfully tested with different types of inner packagings, a variety of such different inner packagings may also be assembled in this outer packaging or large packagings. In addition, provided an equivalent level of performance is maintained, the following variations in inner packagings are allowed without further testing of the package: .1 Inner packagings of equivalent or smaller size may be used provided: – the inner packagings are of similar design to the tested inner packagings (such as shape – round, rectangular, etc.); – the material of construction of inner packagings (glass, plastics, metal, etc.) offers resistance to impact and stacking forces equal to or greater than that of the originally tested inner packaging; – the inner packagings have the same or smaller openings and the closure is of similar design (such as screw cap, friction lid, etc.); – sufficient additional cushioning material is used to take up void spaces and to prevent significant movement of the inner packagings; – inner packagings are oriented within the outer packaging in the same manner as in the tested package; and .2 A lesser number of the tested inner packagings or of the alternative types of inner packagings identified in .1 above may be used, provided sufficient cushioning is added to fill the void space(s) and to prevent significant movement of the inner packagings. 4.1.1.5.2 Cushioning and absorbent material shall be inert and suited to the nature of the contents. 4.1.1.5.3 The nature and the thickness of the outer packagings shall be such that friction during transport does not generate any heating likely to alter dangerously the chemical stability of the contents. 4.1.1.6 Dangerous goods shall not be packed together in the same outer packaging, or in large packagings, with dangerous or other goods if they react dangerously with each other and cause: .1 combustion and/or evolution of considerable heat; .2 evolution of flammable, toxic or asphyxiant gases; .3 the formation of corrosive substances; or .4 the formation of unstable substances. 4.1.1.7 The closures of packagings containing wetted or diluted substances shall be such that the percentage of liquid (water, solvent or phlegmatizer) does not fall below the prescribed limits during transport. 4.1.1.7.1 Where two or more closure systems are fitted in series on an IBC, that nearest to the substance being transported shall be closed first. 4.1.1.7.2 Unless otherwise specified in the Dangerous Goods List, packages containing substances which: .1 evolve flammable gases or vapour; .2 may become explosive if allowed to dry; .3 evolve toxic gases or vapour;

* For a differing temperature, the maximum degree of filling may be determined as follows: Degree of filling = ___________ 98 per cent of the capacity of the IBC 1 + α(50 -tF) In this formula α represents the mean coefficient of cubic expansion of the liquid substance between 15°C and 50°C; that is to say, for a maximum rise in the temperature of 35°C, “α” is calculated according to the formula: d15- d50 α= _______ 35 × d50 where d15 and d50 are the relative densities of the liquid at 15°C and 50°C and tF is the mean temperature of the liquid at the time of filling.

210 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

228

Bilaga 1

Chapter 4.1 – Use of packagings, including IBCs and large packagings

.4 evolve corrosive gases or vapour; or

.5 may react dangerously with the atmosphere

should be hermetically sealed.

4.1.1.8 Where pressure may develop in a package by the emission of gas from the contents (as a result of temperature increase or other causes), the packaging or IBC may be fitted with a vent provided that the gas emitted will not cause danger on account of its toxicity, its flammability, the quantity released, etc.

A venting device shall be fitted if dangerous overpressure may develop due to normal decomposition of substances. The vent shall be so designed that, when the packaging or IBC is in the attitude in which it is intended to be transported, leakages of liquid and the penetration of foreign substances are prevented under normal conditions of transport.

4.1.1.8.1 Liquids may only be filled into inner packagings which have an appropriate resistance to internal pressure that may be developed under normal conditions of transport.

4.1.1.9 New, remanufactured or re-used packagings, including IBCs and large packagings, or reconditioned packagings and repaired or routinely maintained IBCs shall be capable of passing the tests prescribed in 6.1.5, 6.3.5, 6.5.6 or 6.6.5, as applicable. Before being filled and handed over for transport, every packaging, including IBCs and large packagings, shall be inspected to ensure that it is free from corrosion, contamination or other damage and every IBC shall be inspected with regard to the proper functioning of any service equipment. Any packaging which shows signs of reduced strength as compared with the approved design type shall no longer be used or shall be so reconditioned that it is able to withstand the design type tests. Any IBC which shows signs of reduced strength as compared with the tested design type shall no longer be used or shall be so repaired or routinely maintained that it is able to withstand the design type tests.

4.1.1.10 Liquids shall be filled only into packagings, including IBCs, which have an appropriate resistance to the internal pressure that may develop under normal conditions of transport. As the vapour pressure of low-boiling-point liquids is usually high, the strength of receptacles for these liquids shall be sufficient to withstand, with an ample factor of safety, the internal pressure likely to be generated. Packagings and IBCs marked with the hydraulic test pressure prescribed in 6.1.3.1(d) and 6.5.2.2.1, respectively, shall be filled only with a liquid having a vapour pressure: .1 such that the total gauge pressure in the packaging or IBC (i.e. the vapour pressure of the filling substance plus the partial pressure of air or other inert gases, less 100 kPa) at 55°C, determined on the basis of a maximum degree of filling in accordance with 4.1.1.4 and a filling temperature of 15°C, will not exceed two thirds of the marked test pressure; or .2 at 50°C, less than four sevenths of the sum of the marked test pressure plus 100 kPa; or .3 at 55°C, less than two thirds of the sum of the marked test pressure plus 100 kPa.

IBCs intended for the transport of liquids shall not be used to carry liquids having a vapour pressure of more than 110 kPa (1.1 bar) at 50°C or 130 kPa (1.3 bar) at 55°C.

Examples of required marked test pressures for packagings, including IBCs, calculated as in 4.1.1.10.3

Required Minimum minimum test pressure (Vp55×1.5) Packing Vp55 Vp55×1.5 test pressure (gauge) to be UN No. Name Class minus 100 group (kPa) (kPa) (gauge) under marked on (kPa) 6.1.5.5.4.3 the packaging (kPa) (kPa) 2056 Tetrahydrofuran 3 I 70 105 5 100 100 2247 n-Decane 3 II 1.4 2.1 –97.9 100 100 1593 Dichloromethane 6.1 III 164 246 146 146 150 1155 Diethyl ether 3 I 199 299 199 199 250 Note 1: For pure liquids, the vapour pressure at 55°C (Vp55) can often be obtained from scientific tables. Note 2: The table refers to the use of 4.1.1.10.3 only, which means that the marked test pressure shall exceed 1.5 times the vapour pressure at 55°C less 100 kPa. When, for example, the test pressure for n-decane is determined according to 6.1.5.5.4.1, the minimum marked test pressure may be lower. Note 3: For diethyl ether, the required minimum test pressure under 6.1.5.5.5 is 250 kPa.

4.1.1.11 Empty packagings, including IBCs and large packagings, that have contained a dangerous substance shall be treated in the same manner as is required by this Code for a filled packaging, unless adequate measures have been taken to nullify any hazard.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 211

229

Bilaga 1

Part 4 – Packing and tank provisions

4.1.1.12 Every packaging, as specified in chapter 6.1, intended to contain liquids shall successfully undergo a suitable leakproofness test, and be capable of meeting the appropriate test level indicated in 6.1.5.4.4: .1 before it is first used for transport; .2 after remanufacturing or reconditioning of any packaging, before it is re-used for transport.

For this test, the packaging need not have its closures fitted. The inner receptacle of a composite packaging may be tested without the outer packaging, provided the test results are not affected. This test is not necessary for inner packagings of combination packagings or large packagings.

4.1.1.13 Packagings, including IBCs, used for solids which may become liquid at temperatures likely to be encountered during transport shall also be capable of containing the substance in the liquid state.

4.1.1.14 Packagings, including IBCs, used for powdery or granular substances shall be sift-proof or shall be provided with a liner.

4.1.1.15 For plastics drums and jerricans, rigid plastics IBCs and composite IBCs with plastics inner receptacles, unless otherwise approved by the competent authority, the period of use permitted for the transport of dangerous substances shall be five years from the date of manufacture of the receptacles, except where a shorter period of use is prescribed because of the nature of the substance to be transported.

4.1.1.16 Where ice is used as a coolant it shall not affect the integrity of the packaging.

4.1.1.17 Explosives, self-reactive substances and organic peroxides

Unless specific provision to the contrary is made in this Code, the packagings, including IBCs and large packagings, used for goods of class 1, self-reactive substances of class 4.1 and organic peroxides of class 5.2 shall comply with the provisions for the medium danger group (packing group II).

4.1.1.18 Use of salvage packagings

4.1.1.18.1 Damaged, defective, leaking or non-conforming packages, or dangerous goods that have spilled or leaked may be transported in salvage packagings mentioned in 6.1.5.1.11. This does not prevent the use of a bigger size packaging of appropriate type and performance level under the conditions of 4.1.1.18.2.

4.1.1.18.2 Appropriate measures shall be taken to prevent excessive movement of the damaged or leaking packages within a salvage packaging. When the salvage packaging contains liquids, sufficient inert absorbent material shall be added to eliminate the presence of free liquid.

4.1.1.18.3 Appropriate measures shall be taken to ensure there is no dangerous build-up of pressure.

4.1.1.18.4 In addition to the general provisions of the Code, the following paragraphs apply specifically to salvage packagings: 5.2.1.3, 5.4.1.5.3, 6.1.2.4, 6.1.5.1.11 and 6.1.5.7.

4.1.1.19 Use of salvage pressure receptacles

4.1.1.19.1 In the case of damaged, defective, leaking or non-conforming pressure receptacles, salvage pressure receptacles according to 6.2.3 may be used.

Note: A salvage pressure receptacle may be used as an overpack in accordance with 5.1.2. When used as an overpack, markings shall be in accordance with 5.1.2.1 instead of 5.2.1.3.

4.1.1.19.2 Pressure receptacles shall be placed in salvage pressure receptacles of suitable size. More than one pressure receptacle may be placed in the same salvage pressure receptacle only if the contents are known and do not react dangerously with each other (see 4.1.1.6). Measures shall be taken to prevent movement of the pressure receptacles within the salvage pressure receptacle, e.g., by partitioning, securing or cushioning.

4.1.1.19.3 A pressure receptacle may only be placed in a salvage pressure receptacle if: .1 The salvage pressure receptacle is in accordance with 6.2.3.5 and a copy of the approval certificate is available; .2 Parts of the salvage pressure receptacle which are, or are likely to be in direct contact with the dangerous goods will not be affected or weakened by those dangerous goods and will not cause a dangerous effect (e.g., catalyzing reaction or reacting with the dangerous goods); and .3 The contents of the contained pressure receptacle(s) is limited in pressure and volume so that if totally discharged into the salvage pressure receptacle, the pressure in the salvage pressure receptacle at 65°C will not exceed the test pressure of the salvage pressure receptacle (for gases, see packing instruction in P200 (3) 4.1.4.1). The reduction of the useable water capacity of the salvage pressure receptacle, e.g., by any contained equipment and cushioning, shall be taken into account.

212 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

230

Bilaga 1

Chapter 4.1 – Use of packagings, including IBCs and large packagings

4.1.1.19.4 The proper shipping name, the UN Number preceded by the letters "UN" and label(s) as required for packages in Chapter 5.2 applicable to the dangerous goods inside the contained pressure receptacle(s) shall be applied to the salvage pressure receptacle for transport. 4.1.1.19.5 Salvage pressure receptacles shall be cleaned, purged and visually inspected internally and externally after each use. They shall be periodically inspected and tested in accordance with 6.2.1.6 at least once every five years. 4.1.1.20 During transport, packagings, including IBCs and large packagings, shall be securely fastened to or contained within the cargo transport unit, so that lateral or longitudinal movement or impact is prevented and adequate external support is provided.

4.1.2 Additional general provisions for the use of IBCs

4.1.2.1 When IBCs are used for the transport of liquids with a flashpoint of 60°C (closed cup) or lower, or of powders liable to dust explosion, measures shall be taken to prevent a dangerous electrostatic discharge. 4.1.2.2.1 Every metal, rigid plastics and composite IBC shall be inspected and tested, as relevant, in accordance with 6.5.4.4 or 6.5.4.5: .1 before it is put into service; .2 thereafter at intervals not exceeding two and a half and five years, as appropriate; and .3 after the repair or remanufacture, before it is re-used for transport. 4.1.2.2.2 An IBC shall not be filled and offered for transport after the date of expiry of the last periodic test or inspection. However, an IBC filled prior to the date of expiry of the last periodic test or inspection may be transported for a period not to exceed three months beyond the date of expiry of the last periodic test or inspection. In addition, an IBC may be transported after the date of expiry of the last periodic test or inspection: .1 after emptying but before cleaning, for purposes of performing the required test or inspection prior to refilling; and .2 unless otherwise approved by the competent authority, for a period not to exceed six months beyond the date of expiry of the last periodic test or inspection in order to allow the return of dangerous goods or residues for proper disposal or recycling. Reference to this exemption shall be entered in the transport document. 4.1.2.3 IBCs of type 31HZ2 when transporting liquids shall be filled to at least 80% of the volume of the outer casing and shall be transported in closed cargo transport units. 4.1.2.4 Except for routine maintenance of metal, rigid plastics, composite and flexible IBCs performed by the owner of the IBC, whose State and name or authorized symbol is durably marked on the IBC, the party performing routine maintenance shall durably mark the IBC near the manufacturer’s UN design type marking to show: .1 the State in which the routine maintenance was carried out; and .2 the name or authorized symbol of the party performing the routine maintenance.

4.1.3 General provisions concerning packing instructions

4.1.3.1 Packing instructions applicable to dangerous goods of classes 1 to 9 are specified in 4.1.4. They are subdivided in three sub-sections depending on the type of packagings to which they apply: sub-section 4.1.4.1 for packagings other than IBCs and large packagings; these packing instructions are designated by an alphanumeric code comprising the letter “P”; sub-section 4.1.4.2 for IBCs; these are designated by an alphanumeric code comprising the letters “IBC”; sub-section 4.1.4.3 for large packagings; these are designated by an alphanumeric code comprising the letters “LP”. Generally, packing instructions specify that the general provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.2 and/or 4.1.3, as appropriate, are applicable. They may also require compliance with the special provisions of 4.1.5, 4.1.6, 4.1.7, 4.1.8 or 4.1.9 when appropriate. Special packing provisions may also be specified in the packing instruction for individual substances or articles. They are also designated by an alphanumeric code comprising the letters: “PP” for packagings other than IBCs and large packagings “B” for IBCs “L” for large packagings. Unless otherwise specified, each packaging shall conform to the applicable provisions of part 6. Generally, packing instructions do not provide guidance on compatibility and the user shall not select a packaging

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 213

231

Bilaga 1

Part 4 – Packing and tank provisions

without checking that the substance is compatible with the packaging material selected (such as, most fluorides are unsuitable for glass receptacles). Where glass receptacles are permitted in the packing instructions, porcelain, earthenware and stoneware packagings are also allowed. 4.1.3.2 Column 8 of the Dangerous Goods List shows for each article or substance the packing instruction(s) that shall be used. Column 9 indicates the special packing provisions applicable to specific substances or articles. 4.1.3.3 Each packing instruction shows, where applicable, the acceptable single and combination packagings. For combination packagings, the acceptable outer packagings, inner packagings and, when applicable, the maximum quantity permitted in each inner or outer packaging are shown. Maximum net mass and maximum capacity are as defined in 1.2.1. 4.1.3.4 The following packagings shall not be used when the substances being transported are liable to become liquid during transport:

Packagings

Drums: 1D and 1G Boxes: 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G and 4H1 Bags: 5L1, 5L2, 5L3, 5H1, 5H2, 5H3, 5H4, 5M1 and 5M2 Composite: 6HC, 6HD1, 6HD2, 6HG1, 6HG2, 6PC, 6PD1, 6PD2, 6PG1, 6PG2 and 6PH1

Large packagings

Flexible plastics: 51H (outer packaging)

IBCs

For substances of packing group I: All types of IBCs For substances of packing groups II and III: Wooden: 11C, 11D and 11F Fibreboard: 11G Flexible: 13H1, 13H2, 13H3, 13H4, 13H5, 13L1, 13L2, 13L3, 13L4, 13M1 and 13M2 Composite: 11HZ2 and 21HZ2 4.1.3.5 Where the packing instructions in this chapter authorize the use of a particular type of packaging (such as 4G; 1A2), packagings bearing the same packaging identification code followed by the letters “V”, “U” or “W” marked in accordance with the provisions of part 6 (such as “4GV”, “4GU” or “4GW”; “1A2V”, “1A2U” or “1A2W”) may also be used under the same conditions and limitations applicable to the use of that type of packaging according to the relevant packing instructions. For example, a combination packaging marked with the packaging code “4GV” may be used whenever a combination packaging marked “4G” is authorized, provided the provisions in the relevant packing instruction regarding types of inner packagings and quantity limitations are respected.

4.1.3.6 Pressure receptacles for liquids and solids

4.1.3.6.1 Unless otherwise indicated in this Code, pressure receptacles conforming to: (a) the applicable requirements of chapter 6.2; or (b) the National or International standards on the design, construction, testing, manufacturing and inspection, as applied by the country in which the pressure receptacles are manufactured, provided that the provisions of 4.1.3.6 and 6.2.3.3 are met, are authorized for the transport of any liquid or solid substance other than explosives, thermally unstable substances, organic peroxides, self-reactive substances, substances where significant pressure may develop by evolution of chemical reaction and radioactive material (unless permitted in 4.1.9). This sub-section is not applicable to the substances mentioned in 4.1.4.1, packing instruction P200, table 3. 4.1.3.6.2 Every design type of pressure receptacle shall be approved by the competent authority of the country of manufacture or as indicated in chapter 6.2. 4.1.3.6.3 Unless otherwise indicated, pressure receptacles having a minimum test pressure of 0.6 MPa shall be used. 4.1.3.6.4 Unless otherwise indicated, pressure receptacles may be provided with an emergency pressure relief device designed to avoid bursting in case of overfill or fire accidents.

214 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

232

Bilaga 1

Chapter 4.1 – Use of packagings, including IBCs and large packagings

Pressure receptacle valves shall be designed and constructed in such a way that they are inherently able to withstand damage without release of the contents or shall be protected from damage which could cause inadvertent release of the contents of the pressure receptacle, by one of the methods as given in 4.1.6.1.8 (.1) to (.5).

4.1.3.6.5 The level of filling shall not exceed 95% of the capacity of the pressure receptacle at 50°C. Sufficient ullage (outage) shall be left to ensure that the pressure receptacle will not be liquid-full at a temperature of 55°C.

4.1.3.6.6 Unless otherwise indicated, pressure receptacles shall be subjected to a periodic inspection and test every 5 years. The periodic inspection shall include an external examination, an internal examination or alternative method as approved by the competent authority, a pressure test or equivalent effective non-destructive testing with the agreement of the competent authority, including an inspection of all accessories (e.g., tightness of valves, emergency relief valves or fusible elements). Pressure receptacles shall not be filled after they become due for periodic inspection and test but may be transported after the expiry of the time limit. Pressure receptacle repairs shall meet the requirements of 4.1.6.1.11.

4.1.3.6.7 Prior to filling, the filler shall perform an inspection of the pressure receptacle and ensure that the pressure receptacle is authorized for the substances to be transported and that the provisions of this Code have been met. Shut-off valves shall be closed after filling and remain closed during transport. The consignor shall verify that the closures and equipment are not leaking.

4.1.3.6.8 Refillable pressure receptacles shall not be filled with a substance different from that previously contained unless the necessary operations for change of service have been performed.

4.1.3.6.9 Marking of pressure receptacles for liquids and solids according to 4.1.3.6 (not conforming to the requirements of chapter 6.2) shall be in accordance with the requirements of the competent authority of the country of manufacturing.

4.1.3.7 Packagings, including IBCs and large packagings, not specifically authorized in the applicable packing instruction shall not be used for the transport of a substance or article unless specifically approved by the competent authority and provided: .1 the alternative packaging complies with the general provisions of this chapter; .2 when the packing instruction indicated in the Dangerous Goods List so specifies, the alternative packaging meets the provisions of part 6; .3 the competent authority determines that the alternative packaging provides at least the same level of safety as if the substance were packed in accordance with a method specified in the particular packing instruction indicated in the Dangerous Goods List; and .4 a copy of the competent authority approval accompanies each consignment or the transport document includes an indication that alternative packaging was approved by the competent authority.

Note: The competent authorities granting such approvals shall take action to amend the Code to include the provisions covered by the approval as appropriate.

4.1.3.8 Unpackaged articles other than class 1 articles

4.1.3.8.1 Where large and robust articles cannot be packaged in accordance with the requirements of chapter 6.1 or 6.6 and they have to be transported empty, uncleaned and unpackaged, the competent authority may approve such transport. In doing so, the competent authority shall take into account that: .1 Large and robust articles shall be strong enough to withstand the shocks and loadings normally encountered during transport, including trans-shipment between cargo transport units and between cargo transport units and warehouses, as well as any removal from a pallet for subsequent manual or mechanical handling; .2 All closures and openings shall be sealed so that there can be no loss of contents which might be caused under normal conditions of transport, by vibration, or by changes in temperature, humidity or pressure (resulting from altitude, for example). No dangerous residue shall adhere to the outside of the large and robust articles; .3 Parts of large and robust articles, which are in direct contact with dangerous goods: .1 shall not be affected or significantly weakened by those dangerous goods; and .2 shall not cause a dangerous effect, e.g. catalysing a reaction or reacting with the dangerous goods; .4 Large and robust articles containing liquids shall be stowed and secured to ensure that neither leakage nor permanent distortion of the article occurs during transport; .5 They shall be fixed in cradles or crates or other handling devices in such a way that they will not become loose during normal conditions of transport.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 215

233

Bilaga 1

Part 4 – Packing and tank provisions

4.1.3.8.2 Unpackaged articles approved by the competent authority in accordance with the provisions of 4.1.3.8.1 shall be subject to the consignment procedures of part 5. In addition the consignor of such articles shall ensure that a copy of any such approval is transported with the large and robust articles. Note: A large and robust article may include flexible fuel containment systems, military equipment, machinery or equipment containing dangerous goods above the limited quantity thresholds. 4.1.3.9 Where, in 4.1.3.6 and in the individual packing instructions, cylinders and other pressure receptacles for gases are authorized for the transport of any liquid or solid substance, use is also authorized of cylinders and pressure receptacles of a kind normally used for gases which conform to the requirements of the competent authority of the country in which the cylinder or pressure receptacle is filled. Valves shall be suitably protected. Pressure receptacles with capacities of 1 ℓ or less shall be packed in outer packagings constructed of suitable material of adequate strength and design in relation to the capacity of the packaging and its intended use and secured or cushioned so as to prevent significant movement within the outer packaging during normal conditions of transport.

216 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

234

Bilaga 1

Chapter 4.1 – Use of packagings, including IBCs and large packagings

4.1.4 List of packing instructions

4.1.4.1 Packing instructions concerning the use of packagings (except IBCs and large packagings)

P001 PACKING INSTRUCTION (LIQUIDS) P001 The following packagings are authorized provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met: Combination packagings Maximum capacity/net mass (see 4.1.3.3) Inner packagings Outer packagings Packing group I Packing group II Packing group III Glass 10 ℓ Drums Plastics 30 ℓ steel (1A1, 1A2) 75 kg 400 kg 400 kg Metal 40 ℓ aluminium (1B1, 1B2) 75 kg 400 kg 400 kg other metal (1N1, 1N2) 75 kg 400 kg 400 kg plastics (1H1, 1H2) 75 kg 400 kg 400 kg plywood (1D) 75 kg 400 kg 400 kg fibre (1G) 75 kg 400 kg 400 kg Boxes steel (4A) 75 kg 400 kg 400 kg aluminium (4B) 75 kg 400 kg 400 kg other metal (4N) 75 kg 400 kg 400 kg natural wood (4C1, 4C2) 75 kg 400 kg 400 kg plywood (4D) 75 kg 400 kg 400 kg reconstituted wood (4F) 75 kg 400 kg 400 kg fibreboard (4G) 75 kg 400 kg 400 kg expanded plastics (4H1) 40 kg 60 kg 60 kg solid plastics (4H2) 75 kg 400 kg 400 kg Jerricans steel (3A1, 3A2) 60 kg 120 kg 120 kg aluminium (3B1, 3B2) 60 kg 120 kg 120 kg plastics (3H1, 3H2) 30 kg 120 kg 120 kg Single packagings Drums steel, non-removable head (1A1) 250 ℓ 450 ℓ 450 ℓ steel, removable head (1A2) prohibited 250 ℓ 250 ℓ aluminium, non-removable head (1B1) 250 ℓ 450 ℓ 450 ℓ aluminium, removable head (1B2) prohibited 250 ℓ 250 ℓ other metal, non-removable head (1N1) 250 ℓ 450 ℓ 450 ℓ other metal, removable head (1N2) prohibited 250 ℓ 250 ℓ plastics, non-removable head (1H1) 250 ℓ* 450 ℓ 450 ℓ plastics, removable head (1H2) prohibited 250 ℓ 250 ℓ Jerricans steel, non-removable head (3A1) 60 ℓ 60 ℓ 60 ℓ steel, removable head (3A2) prohibited 60 ℓ 60 ℓ aluminium, non-removable head (3B1) 60 ℓ 60 ℓ 60 ℓ aluminium, removable head (3B2) prohibited 60 ℓ 60 ℓ plastics, non-removable head (3H1) 60 ℓ* 60 ℓ 60 ℓ plastics, removable head (3H2) prohibited 60 ℓ 60 ℓ Composite packagings Plastics receptacle in steel or aluminium drum 250 ℓ 250 ℓ 250 ℓ (6HA1, 6HB1) Plastics receptacle in fibre, plastics or plywood drum 120 ℓ* 250 ℓ 250 ℓ (6HG1, 6HH1, 6HD1) Plastics receptacle in steel or aluminium crate or box or 60 ℓ* 60 ℓ 60 ℓ plastics receptacle in wood, plywood, fibreboard or solid plastics box (6HA2, 6HB2, 6HC, 6HD2, 6HG2 or 6HH2) Glass receptacle in steel, aluminium, fibre, plywood, solid 60 ℓ 60 ℓ 60 ℓ plastics or expanded plastics drum (6PA1, 6PB1, 6PG1, 6PD1, 6PH1 or 6PH2) or in a steel, aluminium, wood or fibreboard box or in a wickerwork hamper (6PA2, 6PB2, 6PC, 6PG2 or 6PD2) Pressure receptacles, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.3.6 are met * Not permitted for class 3, packing group I.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 217

235

Bilaga 1

Part 4 – Packing and tank provisions

P001 PACKING INSTRUCTION (LIQUIDS) (continued) P001 Special packing provisions: PP1 For UN Nos. 1133, 1210, 1263 and 1866 and for adhesives, printing inks, printing ink related materials, paints, paint related materials and resin solutions which are assigned to UN 3082, metal or plastics packagings for substances of packing groups II and III in quantities of 5 litres or less per packaging are not required to meet the performance tests in chapter 6.1 when transported: (a) in palletized loads, a pallet box or a unit load device, such as individual packagings placed or stacked and secured by strapping, shrink- or stretch-wrapping or other suitable means to a pallet. For sea transport, the palletized loads, pallet boxes or unit load devices shall be firmly packed and secured in closed cargo transport units; or (b) as an inner packaging of a combination packaging with a maximum net mass of 40 kg. PP2 For UN 3065, wooden barrels with a maximum capacity of 250 litres and which do not meet the provisions of chapter 6.1 may be used. PP4 For UN 1774, packagings shall meet the packing group II performance level. PP5 For UN 1204, packagings shall be so constructed that explosion is not possible by reason of increased internal pressure. Gas cylinders and gas receptacles shall not be used for these substances. PP10 For UN 1791, for packing group II, the packaging shall be vented. PP31 For UN Nos. 1131, 1553, 1693, 1694, 1699, 1701, 2478, 2604, 2785, 3148, 3183, 3184, 3185, 3186, 3187, 3188, 3398 (PG II and III), 3399 (PG II and III), 3413 and 3414, packagings shall be hermetically sealed. PP33 For UN 1308, for packing groups I and II, only combination packagings with a maximum gross mass of 75 kg are allowed. PP81 For UN 1790 with more than 60% but not more than 85% hydrogen fluoride and UN 2031 with more than 55% nitric acid, the permitted use of plastics drums and jerricans as single packagings shall be two years from their date of manufacture.

P002 PACKING INSTRUCTION (SOLIDS) P002 The following packagings are authorized provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met. Combination packagings Maximum net mass (see 4.1.3.3) Inner packagings Outer packagings Packing group I Packing group II Packing group III Glass 10 kg Drums 1 Plastics 30 kg steel (1A1, 1A2) 125 kg 400 kg 400 kg Metal 40 kg aluminium (1B1, 1B2) 125 kg 400 kg 400 kg 1, 2, 3 Paper 50 kg other metal (1N1, 1N2) 125 kg 400 kg 400 kg Fibre1, 2, 3 50 kg plastics (1H1, 1H2) 125 kg 400 kg 400 kg plywood (1D) 125 kg 400 kg 400 kg fibre (1G) 125 kg 400 kg 400 kg Boxes steel (4A) 125 kg 400 kg 400 kg aluminium (4B) 125 kg 400 kg 400 kg other metal (4N) 125 kg 400 kg 400 kg natural wood (4C1) 125 kg 400 kg 400 kg natural wood with 250 kg 400 kg 400 kg sift-proof walls (4C2) 1 These inner packagings plywood (4D) 125 kg 400 kg 400 kg shall be sift-proof. reconstituted wood (4F) 125 kg 400 kg 400 kg 2 These inner packagings fibreboard (4G) 75 kg 400 kg 400 kg shall not be used when expanded plastics (4H1) 40 kg 60 kg 60 kg the substances being transported may become solid plastics (4H2) 125 kg 400 kg 400 kg liquid during transport. Jerricans 3 Paper and fibre inner steel (3A1, 3A2) 75 kg 120 kg 120 kg packagings shall not be used for substances of aluminium (3B1, 3B2) 75 kg 120 kg 120 kg packing group I. plastics (3H1, 3H2) 75 kg 120 kg 120 kg Single packagings Drums 4 steel (1A1 or 1A2 ) 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg aluminium (1B1 or 1B24) 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg metal, other than steel or aluminium (1N1 or 1N24) 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 4 plastics (1H1 or 1H2 ) 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 5 fibre (1G ) 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 5 plywood (1D ) 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 4 These packagings shall not be used for substances of packing group I that may become liquid during transport (see 4.1.3.4). 5 These packagings shall not be used when the substances being transported may become liquid during transport (see 4.1.3.4).

218 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

236

Bilaga 1

Chapter 4.1 – Use of packagings, including IBCs and large packagings

P002 PACKING INSTRUCTION (SOLIDS) (continued) P002 The following packagings are authorized provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met. Maximum net mass (see 4.1.3.3) Single packagings (continued) Packing group I Packing group II Packing group III Jerricans 4 steel (3A1 or 3A2 ) 120 kg 120 kg 120 kg aluminium (3B1 or 3B24) 120 kg 120 kg 120 kg 4 plastics (3H1 or 3H2 ) 120 kg 120 kg 120 kg Boxes 5 steel (4A) Not allowed 400 kg 400 kg 5 aluminium (4B) Not allowed 400 kg 400 kg 5 other metal (4N) Not allowed 400 kg 400 kg 5 natural wood (4C1) Not allowed 400 kg 400 kg 5 natural wood with sift-proof walls (4C2) Not allowed 400 kg 400 kg 5 plywood (4D) Not allowed 400 kg 400 kg reconstituted wood (4F)5 Not allowed 400 kg 400 kg 5 fibreboard (4G) Not allowed 400 kg 400 kg solid plastics (4H2)5 Not allowed 400 kg 400 kg Bags bags (5H3, 5H4, 5L3, 5M2)5 Not allowed 50 kg 50 kg Composite packagings Plastics receptacle in steel, aluminium, plywood, fibre or 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 5 5 plastics drum (6HA1, 6HB1, 6HG1 , 6HD1 , or 6HH1) Plastics receptacle in steel or aluminium crate or box, 75 kg 75 kg 75 kg wooden box, plywood box, fibreboard box or solid plastics box (6HA2, 6HB2, 6HC, 6HD25, 6HG25 or 6HH2) Glass receptacle in steel, aluminium, plywood or fibre 75 kg 75 kg 75 kg 5 5 drum (6PA1, 6PB1, 6PD1 or 6PG1 ) or in steel, aluminium, wood, or fibreboard box or in wickerwork hamper (6PA2, 6PB2, 6PC, 6PG25 or 6PD25) or in solid or expanded 5 plastics packaging (6PH2 or 6PH1 ) 4 These packagings shall not be used for substances of packing group I that may become liquid during transport (see 4.1.3.4). 5 These packagings shall not be used when the substances being transported may become liquid during transport (see 4.1.3.4). Pressure receptacles, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.3.6 are met

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 219

237

Bilaga 1

Part 4 – Packing and tank provisions

Special packing provisions: PP7 For UN 2000, celluloid may be transported unpacked on pallets, wrapped in plastic film and secured by appropriate means, such as steel bands, as a single commodity in closed cargo transport units. Each pallet shall not exceed 1000 kg. PP8 For UN 2002, packagings shall be so constructed that explosion is not possible by reason of increased internal pressure. Gas cylinders and gas receptacles shall not be used for these substances. PP9 For UN 3175, UN 3243 and UN 3244, packagings shall conform to a design type that has passed a leakproofness test at the packing group II performance level. For UN 3175 the leakproofness test is not required when the liquids are fully absorbed in solid material contained in sealed bags. PP11 For UN 1309, packing group III, and UN 1361 and UN 1362, 5M1 bags are allowed if they are overpacked in plastic bags and are wrapped in shrink or stretch wrap on pallets. PP12 For UN 1361, UN 2213 and UN 3077, 5H1, 5L1 and 5M1 bags are allowed when transported in closed cargo transport units. PP13 For articles classified under UN 2870, only combination packagings meeting the packing group I performance level are authorized. PP14 For UN 2211, UN 2698 and UN 3314, packagings are not required to meet the performance tests in chapter 6.1. PP15 For UN 1324 and UN 2623, packagings shall meet the packing group III performance level. PP20 For UN 2217, any sift-proof, tearproof receptacle may be used. PP30 For UN 2471, paper or fibre inner packagings are not permitted. PP31 For UN Nos. 1362, 1463, 1565, 1575, 1626, 1680, 1689, 1698, 1868, 1889, 1932, 2471, 2545, 2546, 2881, 3048, 3088, 3170, 3174, 3181, 3182, 3189, 3190, 3205, 3206, 3341, 3342, 3448, 3449 and 3450, packagings shall be hermetically sealed. PP34 For UN 2969 (as whole beans), 5H1, 5L1 and 5M1 bags are permitted. PP37 For UN 2590 and UN 2212, 5M1 bags are permitted. All bags of any type shall be transported in closed cargo transport units or be placed in closed rigid overpacks. PP38 For UN 1309, bags are permitted only in closed cargo transport units or as unit loads. PP84 For UN 1057, rigid outer packagings meeting the packing group II performance level shall be used. The packagings shall be designed and constructed and arranged to prevent movement, inadvertent ignition of the devices or inadvertent release of flammable gas or liquid. PP85 For UN Nos.1748, 2208, 2880, 3485, 3486 and 3487, bags are not allowed.

P003 PACKING INSTRUCTION P003 Dangerous goods shall be placed in suitable outer packagings. The packagings shall meet the provisions of 4.1.1.1, 4.1.1.2, 4.1.1.4, 4.1.1.8 and 4.1.3 and be so designed that they meet the construction provisions of 6.1.4. Outer packagings constructed of suitable material, and of adequate strength and design in relation to the packaging capacity and its intended use, shall be used. Where this packing instruction is used for the transport of articles or inner packagings of combination packagings, the packaging shall be designed and constructed to prevent inadvertent discharge of articles during normal conditions of transport. Special packing provisions: PP16 For UN 2800, batteries shall be protected from short circuit within the packagings. PP17 For UN Nos. 2037, packages shall not exceed 55 kg net mass for fibreboard packagings or 125 kg net mass for other packagings. PP18 For UN 1845, packagings shall be designed and constructed to permit the release of carbon dioxide gas to prevent a build-up of pressure that could rupture the packagings. PP19 For UN Nos. 1327, 1364, 1365, 1856 and 3360, transport as bales is authorized. PP20 For UN Nos. 1363, 1386, 1408 and 2793, any sift-proof, tearproof receptacle may be used. PP32 UN Nos. 2857 and 3358 may be transported unpackaged, in crates or in appropriate overpacks. PP90 For UN 3506, sealed inner liners or bags of strong leak-proof and puncture resistant material impervious to mercury which will prevent escape of the substance from the package irrespective of the position of the package shall be used.

P004 PACKING INSTRUCTION P004 This instruction applies to UN Nos. 3473, 3476, 3477, 3478 and 3479

220 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

238

Bilaga 1

Chapter 4.1 – Use of packagings, including IBCs and large packagings

The following packagings are authorized: (1) For fuel cell cartridges, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1.1, 4.1.1.2, 4.1.1.3, 4.1.1.6 and 4.1.3 are met: Drums (1A2, 1B2, 1N2, 1H2, 1D, 1G); Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2); Jerricans (3A2, 3B2, 3H2). Packagings shall conform to the packing group II performance level. (2) For fuel cell cartridges packed with equipment: strong outer packagings which meet the general provisions of 4.1.1.1, 4.1.1.2, 4.1.1.6 and 4.1.3. When fuel cell cartridges are packed with equipment, they shall be packed in inner packagings or placed in the outer packaging with cushioning material or divider(s) so that the fuel cell cartridges are protected against damage that may be caused by the movement or placement of the contents within the outer packaging. The equipment shall be secured against movement within the outer packaging. For the purpose of this packing instruction, "equipment" means apparatus requiring the fuel cell cartridges with which it is packed for its operation. (3) For fuel cell cartridges contained in equipment: strong outer packagings which meet the general provisions of 4.1.1.1, 4.1.1.2, 4.1.1.6 and 4.1.3. Large robust equipment (see 4.1.3.8) containing fuel cell cartridges may be transported unpackaged. For fuel cell cartridges contained in equipment, the entire system shall be protected against short circuit and inadvertent operation.

P010 PACKING INSTRUCTION P010 The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met. Combination packagings Maximum net mass (see 4.1.3.3) Inner packagings Outer packagings Glass 1 ℓ Drums Steel 40 ℓ steel (1A1, 1A2) 400 kg plastics (1H1, 1H2) 400 kg plywood (1D) 400 kg fibre (1G) 400 kg Boxes steel (4A) 400 kg natural wood (4C1, 4C2) 400 kg plywood (4D) 400 kg reconstituted wood (4F) 400 kg fibreboard (4G) 400 kg expanded plastics (4H1) 60 kg solid plastics (4H2) 400 kg Single packagings Maximum capacity (see 4.1.3.3) Drums steel, non-removable head (1A1) 450 ℓ Jerricans steel, non-removable head (3A1) 60 ℓ Composite packagings plastics receptacle in steel drums (6HA1) 250 ℓ Steel pressure receptacles provided that the general provisions of 4.1.3.6 are met.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 221

239

Bilaga 1

Part 4 – Packing and tank provisions

P099 PACKING INSTRUCTION P099 Only packagings which are approved for these goods by the competent authority may be used (see 4.1.3.7). A copy of the competent authority approval shall accompany each consignment or the transport document shall include an indication that the packaging was approved by the competent authority.

P101 PACKING INSTRUCTION P101 Only packagings which are approved by the competent authority may be used. The State’s distinguishing sign for motor vehicles in international traffic of the country for which the authority acts shall be marked on the transport documents as follows: “Packaging approved by the competent authority of …”

P110(a) PACKING INSTRUCTION P110(a) The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing provisions of 4.1.5 are met. Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings Bags Bags Drums plastics plastics steel (1A1, 1A2) textile, plastic coated or lined textile, plastic coated or lined metal, other than steel or aluminium rubber rubber (1N1, 1N2) textile, rubberized textile, rubberized plastics (1H1, 1H2) textile Receptacles Receptacles plastics wood metal wood

Additional provisions: 1 The intermediate packagings shall be filled with water-saturated material such as an anti-freeze solution or wetted cushioning. 2 Outer packagings shall be filled with water-saturated material such as an anti-freeze solution or wetted cushioning. Outer packagings shall be constructed and sealed to prevent evaporation of the wetting solution, except for UN 0224 when transported dry.

P110(b) PACKING INSTRUCTION P110(b) The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing provisions of 4.1.5 are met. Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings Receptacles Dividing partitions Boxes metal metal natural wood, sift-proof wall (4C2) wood wood plywood (4D) rubber, conductive plastics reconstituted wood (4F) plastics, conductive fibreboard

Bags rubber, conductive plastics, conductive

Special packing provisions: PP42 For UN Nos. 0074, 0113, 0114, 0129, 0130, 0135 and 0224, the following conditions shall be met: .1 inner packagings shall not contain more than 50 g of explosive substance (quantity corresponding to dry substance); .2 compartments between dividing partitions shall not contain more than one inner packaging, firmly fitted; and .3 the outer packaging may be partitioned into up to 25 compartments.

222 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

240

Bilaga 1

Chapter 4.1 – Use of packagings, including IBCs and large packagings

P111 PACKING INSTRUCTION P111 The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing provisions of 4.1.5 are met.

Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings Bags Boxes paper, waterproofed Not necessary steel (4A) plastics aluminium (4B) textile, rubberized other metal (4N) natural wood, ordinary (4C1) Sheets natural wood, sift-proof (4C2) plastics plywood (4D) textile, rubberized reconstituted wood (4F) fibreboard (4G) Receptacles plastics, expanded (4H1) wood plastics, solid (4H2)

Drums steel (1A1, 1A2) aluminium (1B1, 1B2) other metal (1N1, 1N2) plywood (1D) fibre (1G) plastics (1H1, 1H2)

Special packing provisions: PP43 For UN 0159, inner packagings are not required when metal (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1 or 1N2) or plastics (1H1 or 1H2) drums are used as outer packagings.

P112(a) PACKING INSTRUCTION P112(a) (Solid wetted, 1.1D) The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing provisions of 4.1.5 are met.

Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings Bags Bags Boxes paper, multiwall, water-resistant plastics steel (4A) plastics textile, plastic coated or lined aluminium (4B) textile other metal (4N) textile, rubberized Receptacles natural wood, ordinary (4C1) woven plastics metal natural wood, sift-proof (4C2) plastics plywood (4D) Receptacles wood reconstituted wood (4F) metal fibreboard (4G) plastics plastics, expanded (4H1) wood plastics, solid (4H2)

Drums steel (1A1, 1A2) aluminium (1B1, 1B2) other metal (1N1, 1N2) plywood (1D) fibre (1G) plastics (1H1, 1H2)

Additional provision: Intermediate packagings are not required if leakproof removable head drums are used as the outer packaging.

Special packing provisions: PP26 For UN Nos. 0004, 0076, 0078, 0154, 0219 and 0394, packagings shall be lead-free. PP45 For UN 0072 and UN 0226, intermediate packagings are not required.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 223

241

Bilaga 1

Part 4 – Packing and tank provisions

P112(b) PACKING INSTRUCTION P112(b) (Solid dry, other than powder 1.1D) The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing provisions of 4.1.5 are met.

Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings Bags Bags (for UN 0150 only) Bags paper, kraft plastics woven plastics, sift-proof (5H2) paper, multiwall, water-resistant textile, plastic coated or lined woven plastics, water-resistant plastics (5H3) textile plastics, film (5H4) textile, rubberized textile, sift-proof (5L2) woven plastics textile, water-resistant (5L3) paper, multiwall, water-resistant (5M2)

Boxes steel (4A) aluminium (4B) other metal (4N) natural wood, ordinary (4C1) natural wood, sift-proof (4C2) plywood (4D) reconstituted wood (4F) fibreboard (4G) plastics, expanded (4H1) plastics, solid (4H2)

Drums steel (1A1, 1A2) aluminium (1B1, 1B2) other metal (1N1, 1N2) plywood (1D) fibre (1G) plastics (1H1, 1H2)

Special packing provisions: PP26 For UN Nos. 0004, 0076, 0078, 0154, 0216, 0219 and 0386, packagings shall be lead-free. PP46 For UN 0209, bags, sift-proof (5H2) are recommended for flake or prilled TNT in the dry state and a maximum net mass of 30 kg. PP47 For UN 0222, inner packagings are not required when the outer packaging is a bag.

224 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

242

Bilaga 1

Chapter 4.1 – Use of packagings, including IBCs and large packagings

P112(c) PACKING INSTRUCTION P112(c) (Solid dry powder 1.1D) The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing provisions of 4.1.5 are met.

Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings Bags Bags Boxes paper, multiwall, water-resistant paper, multiwall, water-resistant steel (4A) plastics with inner lining aluminium (4B) woven plastics plastics other metal (4N) natural wood, ordinary (4C1) Receptacles Receptacles natural wood, sift-proof (4C2) fibreboard metal plywood (4D) metal plastics reconstituted wood (4F) plastics wood fibreboard (4G) wood plastics, solid (4H2)

Drums steel (1A1, 1A2) aluminium (1B1, 1B2) other metal (1N1, 1N2) plywood (1D) fibre (1G) plastics (1H1, 1H2) Additional provisions: 1 Inner packagings are not required if drums are used as the outer packaging. 2 The packaging shall be sift-proof.

Special packing provisions: PP26 For UN Nos. 0004, 0076, 0078, 0154, 0216, 0219 and 0386, packagings shall be lead-free. PP46 For UN 0209, bags, sift-proof (5H2) are recommended for flake or prilled TNT in the dry state and a maximum net mass of 30 kg. PP48 For UN 0504, metal packagings shall not be used.

P113 PACKING INSTRUCTION P113 The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing provisions of 4.1.5 are met.

Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings Bags Boxes paper Not necessary steel (4A) plastics aluminium (4B) textile, rubberized other metal (4N) natural wood, ordinary (4C1) Receptacles natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2) fibreboard plywood (4D) metal reconstituted wood (4F) plastics fibreboard (4G) wood plastics, solid (4H2)

Drums steel (1A1, 1A2) aluminium (1B1, 1B2) other metal (1N1, 1N2) plywood (1D) fibre (1G) plastics (1H1, 1H2)

Additional provision: The packaging shall be sift-proof.

Special packing provisions: PP49 For UN 0094 and UN 0305, no more than 50 g of substance shall be packed in an inner packaging. PP50 For UN 0027, inner packagings are not necessary when drums are used as the outer packaging. PP51 For UN 0028, paper kraft or waxed paper sheets may be used as inner packagings.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 225

243

Bilaga 1

Part 4 – Packing and tank provisions

P114(a) PACKING INSTRUCTION P114(a) (Solid wetted) The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing provisions of 4.1.5 are met.

Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings Bags Bags Boxes plastics plastics steel (4A) textile textile, plastic coated or lined metal, other than steel or aluminium woven plastics (4N) Receptacles natural wood, ordinary (4C1) Receptacles metal natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2) metal plastics plywood (4D) plastics reconstituted wood (4F) wood Dividing partitions fibreboard (4G) wood plastics, solid (4H2)

Drums steel (1A1, 1A2) aluminium (1B1, 1B2) other metal (1N1, 1N2) fibre (1G) plastics (1H1, 1H2) Additional provision: Intermediate packagings are not required if leakproof removable head drums are used as the outer packaging.

Special packing provisions: PP26 For UN Nos. 0077, 0132, 0234, 0235 and 0236, packagings shall be lead-free. PP43 For UN 0342, inner packagings are not required when metal (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1 or 1N2) or plastics (1H1 or 1H2) drums are used as outer packagings.

P114(b) PACKING INSTRUCTION P114(b) (Solid dry) The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing provisions of 4.1.5 are met.

Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings Bags Boxes paper, kraft Not necessary natural wood, ordinary (4C1) plastics natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2) textile, sift-proof plywood (4D) woven plastics, sift-proof reconstituted wood (4F) fibreboard (4G) Receptacles fibreboard Drums metal steel (1A1, 1A2) paper aluminium (1B1, 1B2) plastics other metal (1N1, 1N2) woven plastics, sift-proof plywood (1D) wood fibre (1G) plastics (1H1, 1H2)

Special packing provisions: PP26 For UN Nos. 0077, 0132, 0234, 0235 and 0236, packagings shall be lead-free. PP48 For UN 0508 and UN 0509, metal packagings shall not be used. PP50 For UN Nos. 0160, 0161 and 0508, inner packagings are not necessary when drums are used as the outer packaging. PP52 For UN 0160 and UN 0161, when metal drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1 or 1N2) are used as the outer packaging, metal packagings shall be so constructed that the risk of explosion, by reason of increase in internal pressure from internal or external causes, is prevented.

226 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

244

Bilaga 1

Chapter 4.1 – Use of packagings, including IBCs and large packagings

P115 PACKING INSTRUCTION P115 The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing provisions of 4.1.5 are met.

Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings Receptacles Bags Boxes plastics plastics in metal receptacles natural wood, ordinary (4C1) wood natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2) Drums plywood (4D) metal reconstituted wood (4F)

Receptacles Drums wood steel (1A1, 1A2) aluminium (1B1, 1B2) other metal (1N1, 1N2) plywood (1D) fibre (1G) plastics (1H1, 1H2)

Special packing provisions: PP45 For UN 0144, intermediate packagings are not required. PP53 For UN Nos. 0075, 0143, 0495 and 0497, when boxes are used as the outer packaging, inner packagings shall have taped screw-cap closures and be not more than 5 ℓ capacity each. Inner packagings shall be surrounded with non-combustible absorbent cushioning materials. The amount of absorbent cushioning material shall be sufficient to absorb the liquid contents. Metal receptacles shall be cushioned from each other. Net mass of propellant is limited to 30 kg for each package when outer packagings are boxes. PP54 For UN Nos. 0075, 0143, 0495 and 0497, when drums are used as the outer packaging and when intermediate packagings are drums, they shall be surrounded with non-combustible cushioning material in a quantity sufficient to absorb the liquid contents. A composite packaging consisting of a plastics receptacle in a metal drum may be used instead of the inner and intermediate packagings. The net volume of propellent in each package shall not exceed 120 ℓ. PP55 For UN 0144, absorbent cushioning material shall be inserted. PP56 For UN 0144, metal receptacles may be used as inner packagings. PP57 For UN Nos. 0075, 0143, 0495 and 0497, bags shall be used as intermediate packagings when boxes are used as outer packagings. PP58 For UN Nos. 0075, 0143, 0495 and 0497, drums shall be used as intermediate packagings when drums are used as outer packagings. PP59 For UN 0144, fibreboard boxes (4G) may be used as outer packagings. PP60 For UN 0144, aluminium drums (1B1 or 1B2) and metal, other than steel or aluminium, drums (1N1 or 1N2) shall not be used.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 227

245

Bilaga 1

Part 4 – Packing and tank provisions

P116 PACKING INSTRUCTION P116 The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing provisions of 4.1.5 are met.

Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings Bags Bags paper, water- and oil-resistant Not necessary woven plastics (5H1) plastics paper, multiwall, water-resistant textile, plastic coated or lined (5M2) woven plastics, sift-proof plastics, film (5H4) textile, sift-proof (5L2) Receptacles textile, water-resistant (5L3) fibreboard, water-resistant metal Boxes plastics steel (4A) wood, sift-proof aluminium (4B) other metal (4N) Sheets natural wood, ordinary (4C1) paper, water-resistant natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2) paper, waxed plywood (4D) plastics reconstituted wood (4F) fibreboard (4G) plastics, solid (4H2)

Drums steel (1A1, 1A2) aluminium (1B1, 1B2) other metal (1N1, 1N2) fibre (1G) plastics (1H1, 1H2) plywood (1D)

Jerricans steel (3A1, 3A2) plastics (3H1, 3H2)

Special packing provisions: PP61 For UN Nos. 0082, 0241, 0331 and 0332, inner packagings are not required if leakproof removable head drums are used as the outer packaging. PP62 For UN Nos. 0082, 0241, 0331 and 0332, inner packagings are not required when the explosive is contained in a material impervious to liquid. PP63 For UN 0081, inner packagings are not required when contained in rigid plastic which is impervious to nitric esters. PP64 For UN 0331, inner packagings are not required when bags (5H2, 5H3 or 5H4) are used as outer packagings. PP65 For UN Nos. 0082, 0241, 0331 and 0332, bags (5H2 or 5H3) may be used as outer packagings. PP66 For UN 0081, bags shall not be used as outer packagings.

228 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

246

Bilaga 1

Chapter 4.1 – Use of packagings, including IBCs and large packagings

P130 PACKING INSTRUCTION P130 The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing provisions of 4.1.5 are met.

Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings Boxes Not necessary Not necessary steel (4A) aluminium (4B) other metal (4N) natural wood, ordinary (4C1) natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2) plywood (4D) reconstituted wood (4F) fibreboard (4G) plastics, expanded (4H1) plastics, solid (4H2)

Drums steel (1A1, 1A2) aluminium (1B1, 1B2) other metal (1N1, 1N2) plywood (1D) fibre (1G) plastics (1H1, 1H2)

Special packing provision: PP67 The following applies to UN Nos. 0006, 0009, 0010, 0015, 0016, 0018, 0019, 0034, 0035, 0038, 0039, 0048, 0056, 0137, 0138, 0168, 0169, 0171, 0181, 0182, 0183, 0186, 0221, 0243, 0244, 0245, 0246, 0254, 0280, 0281, 0286, 0287, 0297, 0299, 0300, 0301, 0303, 0321, 0328, 0329, 0344, 0345, 0346, 0347, 0362, 0363, 0370, 0412, 0424, 0425, 0434, 0435, 0436, 0437, 0438, 0451, 0488, and 0502: large and robust explosives articles, normally intended for military use, without their means of initiation or with their means of initiation containing at least two effective protective features, may be transported unpackaged. When such articles have propelling charges or are self-propelled, their ignition systems shall be protected against stimuli encountered during normal conditions of transport. A negative result in Test Series 4 on an unpackaged article indicates that the article can be considered for transport unpackaged. Such unpackaged articles may be fixed to cradles or contained in crates or other suitable handling devices.

P131 PACKING INSTRUCTION P131 The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing provisions of 4.1.5 are met.

Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings Bags Boxes paper Not necessary steel (4A) plastics aluminium (4B) other metal (4N) Receptacles natural wood, ordinary (4C1) fibreboard natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2) metal plywood (4D) plastics reconstituted wood (4F) wood fibreboard (4G)

Reels Drums steel (1A1, 1A2) aluminium (1B1, 1B2) other metal (1N1, 1N2) plywood (1D) fibre (1G) plastics (1H1, 1H2)

Special packing provision: PP68 For UN Nos. 0029, 0267 and 0455, bags and reels shall not be used as inner packagings.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 229

247

Bilaga 1

Part 4 – Packing and tank provisions

P132(a) PACKING INSTRUCTION P132(a) (Articles consisting of closed metal, plastics or fibreboard casings that contain a detonating explosive, or consisting of plastics-bonded detonating explosives) The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing provisions of 4.1.5 are met.

Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings Boxes Not necessary Not necessary steel (4A) aluminium (4B) other metal (4N) natural wood, ordinary (4C1) natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2) plywood (4D) reconstituted wood (4F) fibreboard (4G) plastics, solid (4H2)

P132(b) PACKING INSTRUCTION P132(b) (Articles without closed casings) The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing provisions of 4.1.5 are met.

Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings Receptacles Boxes fibreboard Not necessary steel (4A) metal aluminium (4B) plastics other metal (4N) wood natural wood, ordinary (4C1) natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2) Sheets plywood (4D) paper reconstituted wood (4F) plastics fibreboard (4G) plastics, solid (4H2)

P133 PACKING INSTRUCTION P133 The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing provisions of 4.1.5 are met.

Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings Receptacles Receptacles Boxes fibreboard fibreboard steel (4A) metal metal aluminium (4B) plastics plastics other metal (4N) wood wood natural wood, ordinary (4C1) natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2) Trays, fitted with dividing partitions plywood (4D) fibreboard reconstituted wood (4F) plastics fibreboard (4G) wood plastics, solid (4H2)

Additional provision: Receptacles are only required as intermediate packagings when the inner packagings are trays.

Special packing provision: PP69 For UN Nos. 0043, 0212, 0225, 0268 and 0306, trays shall not be used as inner packagings.

230 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

248

Bilaga 1

Chapter 4.1 – Use of packagings, including IBCs and large packagings

P134 PACKING INSTRUCTION P134 The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing provisions of 4.1.5 are met.

Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings Bags Boxes water-resistant Not necessary steel (4A) aluminium (4B) Receptacles other metal (4N) fibreboard natural wood, ordinary (4C1) metal natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2) plastics plywood (4D) wood reconstituted wood (4F) fibreboard (4G) Sheets plastics, expanded (4H1) fibreboard, corrugated plastics, solid (4H2) Tubes Drums fibreboard steel (1A1, 1A2) aluminium (1B1, 1B2) other metal (1N1, 1N2) plywood (1D) fibre (1G) plastics (1H1, 1H2)

P135 PACKING INSTRUCTION P135 The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing provisions of 4.1.5 are met. Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings Bags Boxes paper Not necessary steel (4A) plastics aluminium (4B) other metal (4N) Receptacles natural wood, ordinary (4C1) fibreboard natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2) metal plywood (4D) plastics reconstituted wood (4F) wood fibreboard (4G) Sheets plastics, expanded (4H1) paper plastics, solid (4H2) plastics Drums steel (1A1, 1A2) aluminium (1B1, 1B2) other metal (1N1, 1N2) plywood (1D) fibre (1G) plastics (1H1, 1H2)

P136 PACKING INSTRUCTION P136 The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing provisions of 4.1.5 are met. Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings Bags Boxes plastics Not necessary steel (4A) textile aluminium (4B) other metal (4N) Boxes natural wood, ordinary (4C1) fibreboard natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2) plastics plywood (4D) wood reconstituted wood (4F) fibreboard (4G) Dividing partitions in the outer packagings plastics, solid (4H2) Drums steel (1A1, 1A2) aluminium (1B1, 1B2) other metal (1N1, 1N2) plywood (1D) fibre (1G) plastics (1H1, 1H2)

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 231

249

Bilaga 1

Part 4 – Packing and tank provisions

P137 PACKING INSTRUCTION P137 The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing provisions of 4.1.5 are met.

Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings Bags Boxes plastics Not necessary steel (4A) aluminium (4B) Boxes other metal (4N) fibreboard natural wood, ordinary (4C1) wood natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2) plywood (4D) Tubes reconstituted wood (4F) fibreboard fibreboard (4G) metal plastics Drums steel (1A1, 1A2) Dividing partitions in the outer aluminium (1B1, 1B2) packagings other metal (1N1, 1N2) plywood (1D) fibre (1G) plastics (1H1, 1H2)

Special packing provision: PP70 For UN Nos. 0059, 0439, 0440 and 0441, when the shaped charges are packed singly, the conical cavity shall face downwards and the package shall be marked “THIS SIDE UP”. When the shaped charges are packed in pairs, the conical cavities shall face inwards to minimize the jetting effect in the event of accidental initiation.

P138 PACKING INSTRUCTION P138 The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing provisions of 4.1.5 are met.

Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings Bags Boxes plastics Not necessary steel (4A) aluminium (4B) other metal (4N) natural wood, ordinary (4C1) natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2) plywood (4D) reconstituted wood (4F) fibreboard (4G) plastics, solid (4H2)

Drums steel (1A1, 1A2) aluminium (1B1, 1B2) other metal (1N1, 1N2) plywood (1D) fibre (1G) plastics (1H1, 1H2)

Additional provision: If the ends of the articles are sealed, inner packagings are not necessary.

232 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

250

Bilaga 1

Chapter 4.1 – Use of packagings, including IBCs and large packagings

P139 PACKING INSTRUCTION P139 The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing provisions of 4.1.5 are met.

Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings Bags Boxes plastics Not necessary steel (4A) aluminium (4B) Receptacles other metal (4N) fibreboard natural wood, ordinary (4C1) metal natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2) plastics plywood (4D) wood reconstituted wood (4F) fibreboard (4G) Reels plastics, solid (4H2) Sheets Drums paper steel (1A1, 1A2) plastics aluminium (1B1, 1B2) other metal (1N1, 1N2) plywood (1D) fibre (1G) plastics (1H1, 1H2)

Special packing provisions: PP71 For UN Nos. 0065, 0102, 0104, 0289 and 0290, the ends of the detonating cord shall be sealed; for example, by a plug firmly fixed so that the explosive cannot escape. The ends of flexible detonating cord shall be fastened securely. PP72 For UN 0065 and UN 0289, inner packagings are not required when they are in coils.

P140 PACKING INSTRUCTION P140 The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing provisions of 4.1.5 are met.

Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings Bags Boxes plastics Not necessary steel (4A) aluminium (4B) Reels other metal (4N) natural wood, ordinary (4C1) Sheets natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2) paper, kraft plywood (4D) plastics reconstituted wood (4F) Receptacles fibreboard (4G) wood plastics, solid (4H2)

Drums steel (1A1, 1A2) aluminium (1B1, 1B2) other metal (1N1, 1N2) plywood (1D) fibre (1G) plastics (1H1, 1H2)

Special packing provisions: PP73 For UN 0105, no inner packagings are required if the ends are sealed. PP74 For UN 0101, the packaging shall be sift-proof except when the fuse is covered by a paper tube and both ends of the tube are covered with removable caps. PP75 For UN 0101, steel, aluminium or other metal boxes or drums shall not be used.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 233

251

Bilaga 1

Part 4 – Packing and tank provisions

P141 PACKING INSTRUCTION P141 The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing provisions of 4.1.5 are met.

Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings Receptacles Boxes fibreboard Not necessary steel (4A) metal aluminium (4B) plastics other metal (4N) wood natural wood, ordinary (4C1) natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2) Trays, fitted with dividing partitions plywood (4D) plastics reconstituted wood (4F) wood fibreboard (4G) plastics, solid (4H2) Dividing partitions in the outer packagings Drums steel (1A1, 1A2) aluminium (1B1, 1B2) other metal (1N1, 1N2) plywood (1D) fibre (1G) plastics (1H1, 1H2)

P142 PACKING INSTRUCTION P142 The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing provisions of 4.1.5 are met.

Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings Bags Boxes paper Not necessary steel (4A) plastics aluminium (4B) other metal (4N) Receptacles natural wood, ordinary (4C1) fibreboard natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2) metal plywood (4D) plastics reconstituted wood (4F) wood fibreboard (4G) plastics, solid (4H2) Sheets paper Drums steel (1A1, 1A2) Trays, fitted with dividing partitions aluminium (1B1, 1B2) plastics other metal (1N1, 1N2) plywood (1D) fibre (1G) plastics (1H1, 1H2)

234 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

252

Bilaga 1

Chapter 4.1 – Use of packagings, including IBCs and large packagings

P143 PACKING INSTRUCTION P143 The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing provisions of 4.1.5 are met.

Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings Bags Boxes paper, kraft Not necessary steel (4A) plastics aluminium (4B) textile other metal (4N) textile, rubberized natural wood, ordinary (4C1) natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2) Receptacles plywood (4D) fibreboard reconstituted wood (4F) metal fibreboard (4G) plastics plastics, solid (4H2) wood Drums Trays, fitted with dividing partitions steel (1A1, 1A2) plastics aluminium (1B1, 1B2) wood other metal (1N1, 1N2) plywood (1D) fibre (1G) plastics (1H1, 1H2)

Additional provision: Instead of the above inner and outer packagings, composite packagings (6HH2) (plastics receptacle with outer solid box) may be used.

Special packing provision: PP76 For UN Nos. 0271, 0272, 0415 and 0491, when metal packagings are used, metal packagings shall be so constructed that the risk of explosion, by reason of increase in internal pressure from internal or external causes, is prevented.

P144 PACKING INSTRUCTION P144 The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing provisions of 4.1.5 are met.

Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings Receptacles Boxes fibreboard Not necessary steel (4A) metal aluminium (4B) plastics other metal (4N) wood natural wood, ordinary with metal liner (4C1) Dividing partitions in the outer plywood (4D) with metal liner packagings reconstituted wood with metal liner (4F) plastics, expanded (4H1) plastics, solid (4H2)

Drums steel (1A1, 1A2) aluminium (1B1, 1B2) other metal (1N1, 1N2) plastics (1H1, 1H2)

Special packing provision: PP 77 For UN 0248 and UN 0249, packagings shall be protected against the ingress of water. When water-activated contrivances are transported unpackaged, they shall be provided with at least two independent protective features which prevent the ingress of water.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 235

253

Bilaga 1

Part 4 – Packing and tank provisions

P200 PACKING INSTRUCTION P200 For pressure receptacles, the general packing provisions of 4.1.6.1 shall be met. In addition, for MEGCs, the general requirements of 4.2.4 shall be met. Cylinders, tubes, pressure drums, bundles of cylinders constructed as specified in 6.2 and MEGCs constructed as specified in 6.7.5 are authorized for the transport of a specific substance when specified in the following tables. For some substances, the special packing provisions may prohibit a particular type of cylinder, tube, pressure drum or bundle of cylinders. 3 (1) Pressure receptacles containing toxic substances with an LC50 less than or equal to 200 mℓ/m (ppm) as specified in the table shall not be equipped with any pressure relief device. Pressure relief devices shall be fitted on pressure receptacles used for the transport of UN 1013 carbon dioxide and UN 1070 nitrous oxide. Other pressure receptacles shall be fitted with a pressure relief device if specified by the competent authority of the country of use. The type of pressure relief device, the set-to-discharge pressure and relief capacity of pressure relief devices, if required, shall be specified by the competent authority of the country of use. (2) The following three tables cover compressed gases (table 1), liquefied and dissolved gases (table 2) and substances not in class 2 (table 3). They provide: (a) the UN Number, Proper Shipping Name and description, and classification of the substance; (b) the LC50 for toxic substances; (c) the types of pressure receptacles authorized for the substance, shown by the letter “X”; (d) the maximum test period for periodic inspection of the pressure receptacles; Note: For pressure receptacles which make use of composite materials, the periodic inspection frequencies shall be as determined by the competent authority which approved the receptacles. (e) the minimum test pressure of the pressure receptacles; (f) the maximum working pressure of the pressure receptacles for compressed gases (where no value is given, the working pressure shall not exceed two thirds of the test pressure) or the maximum filling ratio(s) dependent on the test pressure(s) for liquefied and dissolved gases; (g) special packing provisions that are specific to a substance. (3) In no case shall pressure receptacles be filled in excess of the limit permitted in the following requirements. (a) For compressed gases, the working pressure shall be not more than two thirds of the test pressure of the pressure receptacles. Restrictions to this upper limit on working pressure are imposed by special packing provision “o” in (4) below. In no case shall the internal pressure at 65°C exceed the test pressure. (b) For high pressure liquefied gases, the filling ratio shall be such that the settled pressure at 65°C does not exceed the test pressure of the pressure receptacles. The use of test pressures and filling ratios other than those in the table is permitted, except where (4), special packing provision “o” applies, provided that: (i) the criterion of (4), special packing provision “r” is met when applicable; or (ii) the above criterion is met in all other cases. For high pressure liquefied gases and gas mixtures for which relevant data are not available, the maximum filling ratio (FR) shall be determined as follows: -4 FR= 8.5 × 10 × dg× Ph where FR = maximum filling ratio dg = gas density (at 15°C, 1 bar) (in g/ℓ) Ph = minimum test pressure (in bar) If the density of the gas is unknown, the maximum filling ratio shall be determined as follows: -3 Ph ×MM × 10 FR=_____________ R × 338 where FR = maximum filling ratio Ph = minimum test pressure (in bar) MM = molecular mass (in g/mol) –2 R = 8.31451 × 10 bar·ℓ/mol·K (gas constant) For gas mixtures, the average molecular mass is to be taken, taking into account the volumetric concentrations of the various components. (c) For low pressure liquefied gases, the maximum mass of contents per litre of water capacity (filling factor) shall equal 0.95 times the density of the liquid phase at 50°C; in addition, the liquid phase shall not fill the pressure receptacle at any temperature up to 60°C. The test pressure of the pressure receptacle shall be at least equal to the vapour pressure (absolute) of the liquid at 65°C, minus 100 kPa (1 bar).

For low pressure liquefied gases and gas mixtures for which relevant data are not available, the maximum filling ratio shall be determined as follows: FR= (0.0032 × BP – 0.24) × dl where FR = maximum filling ratio BP = boiling point (in kelvin) dl = density of the liquid at boiling point (in kg/ℓ) (d) For UN 1001, acetylene, dissolved, and UN 3374 acetylene, solvent free, see (4), special packing provision “p”.

236 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

254

Bilaga 1

Chapter 4.1 – Use of packagings, including IBCs and large packagings

P200 PACKING INSTRUCTION (continued) P200 (4) Special packing provisions: Material compatibility a: Aluminium alloy pressure receptacles shall not be used. b: Copper valves shall not be used. c: Metal parts in contact with the contents shall not contain more than 65% copper. d: When steel pressure receptacles are used, only those bearing the "H" mark in accordance with 6.2.2.7.4 (p) are permitted. 3 Requirements for toxic substances with an LC50 less than or equal to 200 mℓ/m (ppm) k: Valve outlets shall be fitted with pressure-retaining gas-tight plugs or caps having threads that match those of the valve outlets. Each cylinder within a bundle shall be fitted with an individual valve that shall be closed during transport. After filling, the manifold shall be evacuated, purged and plugged. Bundles containing UN 1045 fluorine, compressed, may be constructed with isolation valves on groups of cylinders not exceeding 150 litres total water capacity instead of isolation valves on every cylinder. Cylinders and individual cylinders in a bundle shall have a test pressure greater than or equal to 200 bar and a minimum wall thickness of 3.5 mm for aluminium alloy or 2 mm for steel. Individual cylinders not complying with this requirement shall be transported in a rigid outer packaging that will adequately protect the cylinder and its fittings and meeting the packing group I performance level. Pressure drums shall have a minimum wall thickness as specified by the competent authority. Pressure receptacles shall not be fitted with a pressure relief device. Cylinders and individual cylinders in a bundle shall be limited to a maximum water capacity of 85 ℓ. Each valve shall be capable of withstanding the test pressure of the pressure receptacle and be connected directly to the pressure receptacle by either a taper thread or other means which meets the requirements of ISO 10692-2:2001. Each valve shall either be of the packless type with non-perforated diaphragm, or be of a type which prevents leakage through or past the packing. Each pressure receptacle shall be tested for leakage after filling. Gas specific provisions l: UN 1040 ethylene oxide may also be packed in hermetically sealed glass or metal inner packagings suitably cushioned in fibreboard, wooden or metal boxes meeting the packing group I performance level. The maximum quantity permitted in any glass inner packaging is 30 g, and the maximum quantity permitted in any metal inner packaging is 200 g. After filling, each inner packaging shall be determined to be leaktight by placing the inner packaging in a hot water bath at a temperature, and for a period of time, sufficient to ensure that an internal pressure equal to the vapour pressure of ethylene oxide at 55°C is achieved. The maximum net mass in any outer packaging shall not exceed 2.5 kg. m: Pressure receptacles shall be filled to a working pressure not exceeding 5 bar. n: Cylinders and individual cylinders in a bundle shall contain not more than 5 kg of the gas. When bundles containing UN 1045 fluorine, compressed are divided into groups of cylinders in accordance with special packing provision “k” each group shall contain not more than 5 kg of the gas. o: In no case shall the working pressure or filling ratio shown in the table be exceeded. p: For UN 1001 acetylene, dissolved and UN 3374 acetylene, solvent free: cylinders shall be filled with a homogeneous monolithic porous material; the working pressure and the quantity of acetylene shall not exceed the values prescribed in the approval or in ISO 3807-1:2000 or ISO 3807-2:2000, as applicable. For UN 1001 acetylene, dissolved: cylinders shall contain a quantity of acetone or suitable solvent as specified in the approval (see ISO 3807-1:2000 or ISO 3807-2:2000, as applicable); cylinders fitted with pressure relief devices or manifolded together shall be transported vertically. The test pressure of 52 bar applies only to cylinders conforming to ISO 3807-2:2000. q: Valve outlets of pressure receptacles for pyrophoric gases or flammable mixtures of gases containing more than 1% of pyrophoric compounds shall be fitted with gas-tight plugs or caps. When these pressure receptacles are manifolded in a bundle, each of the pressure receptacles shall be fitted with an individual valve that shall be closed during transport, and the outlet of the manifold valve shall be fitted with a pressure-retaining gas-tight plug or cap. Gas-tight plugs or caps shall have threads that match those of the valve outlets. r: The filling ratio of this gas shall be limited such that, if complete decomposition occurs, the pressure does not exceed two thirds of the test pressure of the pressure receptacle. ra: This gas may also be packed in capsules under the following conditions: (i) The mass of gas shall not exceed 150 g per capsule; (ii) The capsules shall be free from faults liable to impair the strength; (iii) The leakproofness of the closure shall be ensured by an additional device (cap, crown, seal, binding, etc.) capable of preventing any leakage of the closure during transport; (iv) The capsules shall be placed in an outer packaging of sufficient strength. A package shall not weigh more than 75 kg.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 237

255

Bilaga 1

Part 4 – Packing and tank provisions

P200 PACKING INSTRUCTION (continued) P200 s: Aluminium alloy pressure receptacles shall be: – equipped only with brass or stainless steel valves; and – cleaned in accordance with ISO 11621:1997 and not contaminated with oil. t: (i) The wall thickness of pressure receptacles shall be not less than 3 mm. (ii) Prior to transport, it shall be ensured that the pressure has not risen due to potential hydrogen generation. Periodic inspection u: The interval between periodic tests may be extended to 10 years for aluminium alloy pressure receptacles when the alloy of the pressure receptacle has been subjected to stress corrosion testing as specified in ISO 7866:1999. v: The interval between periodic inspections for steel cylinders may be extended to 15 years if approved by the competent authority of the country of use. Requirements for N.O.S. descriptions and for mixtures z: The construction materials of the pressure receptacles and their accessories shall be compatible with the contents and shall not react to form harmful or dangerous compounds therewith. The test pressure and filling ratio shall be calculated in accordance with the relevant requirements of (3). Toxic substances with an LC less than or equal to 200 mℓ/m3 shall not be transported in tubes, pressure 50 drums or MEGCs and shall meet the requirements of special packing provision “k”. However, UN 1975 nitric oxide and dinitrogen tetroxide mixtures may be transported in pressure drums. For pressure receptacles containing pyrophoric gases or flammable mixtures of gases containing more than 1% pyrophoric compounds, the requirements of special packing provision “q” shall be met. The necessary steps shall be taken to prevent dangerous reactions (i.e. polymerization or decomposition) during transport. If necessary, stabilization or addition of an inhibitor shall be required. Mixtures containing UN 1911 diborane shall be filled to a pressure such that, if complete decomposition of the diborane occurs, two thirds of the test pressure of the pressure receptacle shall not be exceeded. Mixtures containing UN 2192 germane, other than mixtures of up to 35% germane in hydrogen or nitrogen or up to 28% germane in helium or argon, shall be filled to a pressure such that, if complete decomposition of the germane occurs, two thirds of the test pressure of the pressure receptacle shall not be exceeded.

238 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

256

Bilaga 1

Chapter 4.1 – Use of packagings, including IBCs and large packagings

P200 PACKING INSTRUCTION (continued) P200 Table 1: COMPRESSED GASES s * r s ing linder ear , ba k * isk y or r ing UN r 3 ums , y Proper Shipping Name m f c sure w No. ry dr o iod , ba ℓ/ rs l pack e s , m d s sure per pres sure cia s 50 n e GCs ximum visions li b st e o res est e p Cla Subsidia LC Cy Tu P Bundles ME T T Ma pres S pr 1002 AIR, COMPRESSED 2.2 X X X X X 10 1006 ARGON, COMPRESSED 2.2 X X X X X 10 1016 CARBON MONOXIDE, COMPRESSED 2.3 2.1 3760 X X X X X 5 u 1023 COAL GAS, COMPRESSED 2.3 2.1 X X X X X 5 1045 FLUORINE, COMPRESSED 2.3 5.1, 8 185 X X 5 200 30 a, k, n, o 1046 HELIUM, COMPRESSED 2.2 X X X X X 10 1049 HYDROGEN, COMPRESSED 2.1 X X X X X 10 d 1056 KRYPTON, COMPRESSED 2.2 X X X X X 10 1065 NEON, COMPRESSED 2.2 X X X X X 10 1066 NITROGEN, COMPRESSED 2.2 X X X X X 10 1071 OIL GAS, COMPRESSED 2.3 2.1 X X X X X 5 1072 OXYGEN, COMPRESSED 2.2 5.1 X X X X 10 s 1612 HEXAETHYL TETRAPHOSPHATE AND 2.3 X X X X 5 z COMPRESSED GAS MIXTURE 1660 NITRIC OXIDE, COMPRESSED 2.3 5.1, 8 115 X X 5 225 33 k, o 1953 COMPRESSED GAS, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE, 2.3 2.1 ≤ 5000 X X X X X 5 z N.O.S. 1954 COMPRESSED GAS, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S 2.1 X X X X X 10 z 1955 COMPRESSED GAS, TOXIC, N.O.S. 2.3 ≤ 5000 X X X X X 5 z 1956 COMPRESSED GAS, N.O.S. 2.2 X X X X X 10 z 1957 DEUTERIUM, COMPRESSED 2.1 X X X X X 10 d 1964 HYDROCARBON GAS MIXTURE, 2.1 X X X X X 10 z COMPRESSED, N.O.S. 1971 METHANE, COMPRESSED or NATURAL GAS, 2.1 X X X X X 10 COMPRESSED with high methane content 2034 HYDROGEN AND METHANE MIXTURE, 2.1 X X X X X 10 d COMPRESSED 2190 OXYGEN DIFLUORIDE, COMPRESSED 2.3 5.1, 8 2.6 X X 5 200 30 a, k, n, o 3156 COMPRESSED GAS, OXIDIZING, N.O.S. 2.2 5.1 X X X X X 10 z 3303 COMPRESSED GAS, TOXIC, OXIDIZING, N.O.S. 2.3 5.1 ≤ 5000 X X X X X 5 z 3304 COMPRESSED GAS, TOXIC, CORROSIVE, 2.3 8 ≤ 5000 X X X X X 5 z N.O.S. 3305 COMPRESSED GAS, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE, 2.3 2.1, 8 ≤ 5000 X X X X X 5 z CORROSIVE, N.O.S. 3306 COMPRESSED GAS, TOXIC, OXIDIZING, 2.3 5.1, 8 ≤ 5000 X X X X X 5 z CORROSIVE, N.O.S. * Where the entries are blank, the maximum working pressure shall not exceed two thirds of the test pressure.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 239

257

Bilaga 1

Part 4 – Packing and tank provisions

P200 PACKING INSTRUCTION (continued) P200 Table 2: LIQUEFIED GASES AND DISSOLVED GASES s * r s linder ear , ba ing isk ums y UN r 3 , y Proper Shipping Name m f c sure No. ry dr o iod ℓ/ rs atio l pack e r s , m d s sure per pres cia s 50 n e GCs visions li b st e o res est e p Cla Subsidia LC Cy Tu P Bundles ME T T Filling S pr 1001 ACETYLENE, DISSOLVED 2.1 X X 10 60 c, p 52 1005 AMMONIA, ANHYDROUS 2.3 8 4000 X X X X X 5 29 0.54 b 1008 BORON TRIFLUORIDE 2.3 8 387 X X X X X 5 225 0.715 a 300 0.86 1009 BROMOTRIFLUOROMETHANE 2.2 X X X X X 10 42 1.13 (REFRIGERANT GAS R 13B1) 120 1.44 250 1.60 1010 BUTADIENES, STABILIZED 2.1 X X X X X 10 10 0.59 (1,2-butadiene), or 1010 BUTADIENES, STABILIZED 2.1 X X X X X 10 10 0.55 (1,3-butadiene), or 1010 BUTADIENES AND HYDROCARBON MIXTURE, 2.1 X X X X X 10 v, z STABILIZED with more than 40% butadienes 1011 BUTANE 2.1 X X X X X 10 10 0.52 v 1012 BUTYLENE (butylenes mixture) or 2.1 X X X X X 10 10 0.50 z 1012 BUTYLENE (1-butylene) or 2.1 X X X X X 10 10 0.53 1012 BUTYLENE (cis-2-butylene) or 2.1 X X X X X 10 10 0.55 1012 BUTYLENE (trans-2-butylene) 2.1 X X X X X 10 10 0.54 1013 CARBON DIOXIDE 2.2 X X X X X 10 190 0.68 250 0.76 1017 CHLORINE 2.3 5.1, 293 X X X X X 5 22 1.25 a 8 1018 CHLORODIFLUOROMETHANE 2.2 X X X X X 10 27 1.03 (REFRIGERANT GAS R 22) 1020 CHLOROPENTAFLUOROETHANE 2.2 X X X X X 10 25 1.05 (REFRIGERANT GAS R 115) 1021 1-CHLORO-1,2,2,2-TETRAFLUOROETHANE 2.2 X X X X X 10 11 1.20 (REFRIGERANT GAS R 124) 1022 CHLOROTRIFLUOROMETHANE 2.2 X X X X X 10 100 0.83 (REFRIGERANT GAS R 13) 120 0.90 190 1.04 250 1.11 1026 CYANOGEN 2.3 2.1 350 X X X X X 5 100 0.70 u 1027 CYCLOPROPANE 2.1 X X X X X 10 18 0.55 1028 DICHLORODIFLUOROMETHANE 2.2 X X X X X 10 16 1.15 (REFRIGERANT GAS R 12) 1029 DICHLOROFLUOROMETHANE 2.2 X X X X X 10 10 1.23 (REFRIGERANT GAS R 21) 1030 1,1-DIFLUOROETHANE 2.1 X X X X X 10 16 0.79 (REFRIGERANT GAS R 152a) 1032 DIMETHYLAMINE, ANHYDROUS 2.1 X X X X X 10 10 0.59 b 1033 DIMETHYL ETHER 2.1 X X X X X 10 18 0.58 1035 ETHANE 2.1 X X X X X 10 95 0.25 120 0.30 300 0.40 1036 ETHYLAMINE 2.1 X X X X X 10 10 0.61 b 1037 ETHYL CHLORIDE 2.1 X X X X X 10 10 0.80 a, ra 1039 ETHYL METHYL ETHER 2.1 X X X X X 10 10 0.64 1040 ETHYLENE OXIDE or ETHYLENE OXIDE WITH 2.3 2.1 2900 X X X X X 5 15 0.78 l NITROGEN up to a total pressure of 1 MPa (10 bar) at 50°C * Where the entries are blank, the maximum working pressure shall not exceed two thirds of the test pressure.

240 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

258

Bilaga 1

Chapter 4.1 – Use of packagings, including IBCs and large packagings

P200 PACKING INSTRUCTION (continued) P200 Table 2: LIQUEFIED GASES AND DISSOLVED GASES (continued) s * r s linder ear , ba ing isk ums y UN r 3 , y Proper Shipping Name m f c sure No. ry dr o iod ℓ/ rs atio l pack e r s , m d s sure per pres cia s 50 n e GCs visions li b st e o res est e p Cla Subsidia LC Cy Tu P Bundles ME T T Filling S pr 1041 ETHYLENE OXIDE AND CARBON DIOXIDE 2.1 X X X X X 10 190 0.66 MIXTURE with more than 9% ethylene oxide 250 0.75 but not more than 87% 1043 FERTILIZER AMMONIATING SOLUTION 2.2 X X X 5 b, z with free ammonia 1048 HYDROGEN BROMIDE, ANHYDROUS 2.3 8 2860 X X X X X 5 60 1.51 a, d 1050 HYDROGEN CHLORIDE, ANHYDROUS 2.3 8 2810 X X X X X 5 100 0.30 a, d 120 0.56 a, d 150 0.67 a, d 200 0.74 a, d 1053 HYDROGEN SULPHIDE 2.3 2.1 712 X X X X X 5 48 0.67 d, u 1055 ISOBUTYLENE 2.1 X X X X X 10 10 0.52 1058 LIQUEFIED GASES, non-flammable, 2.2 X X X X X 10 Test charged with nitrogen, carbon dioxide or air pressure = 1.5 × working pressure 1060 METHYLACETYLENE AND PROPADIENE 2.1 X X X X X 10 c, z MIXTURE, STABILIZED or 1060 METHYLACETYLENE AND PROPADIENE 2.1 X X X X X 10 22 0.52 c MIXTURE, STABILIZED (Propadiene with 1% to 4% methylacetylene) 1061 METHYLAMINE, ANHYDROUS 2.1 X X X X X 10 13 0.58 b 1062 METHYL BROMIDE with not more than 2.3 850 X X X X X 5 10 1.51 a 2% chloropicrin 1063 METHYL CHLORIDE (REFRIGERANT GAS R 40) 2.1 X X X X X 10 17 0.81 a 1064 METHYL MERCAPTAN 2.3 2.1 1350 X X X X X 5 10 0.78 d, u 1067 DINITROGEN TETROXIDE (NITROGEN DIOXIDE) 2.3 5.1, 115 X X X 5 10 1.30 k 8 1069 NITROSYL CHLORIDE 2.3 8 35 X X 5 13 1.10 k 1070 NITROUS OXIDE 2.2 5.1 X X X X X 10 180 0.68 225 0.74 250 0.75 1075 PETROLEUM GASES, LIQUEFIED 2.1 X X X X X 10 v, z 1076 PHOSGENE 2.3 8 5 X X X 5 20 1.23 k, a 1077 PROPYLENE 2.1 X X X X X 10 27 0.43 1078 REFRIGERANT GAS, N.O.S. 2.2 X X X X X 10 z 1079 SULPHUR DIOXIDE 2.3 8 2520 X X X X X 5 12 1.23 1080 SULPHUR HEXAFLUORIDE 2.2 X X X X X 10 70 1.06 140 1.34 160 1.38 1081 TETRAFLUOROETHYLENE, STABILIZED 2.1 X X X X X 10 200 m, o 1082 TRIFLUOROCHLOROETHYLENE, STABILIZED 2.3 2.1 2000 X X X X X 5 19 1.13 u 1083 TRIMETHYLAMINE, ANHYDROUS 2.1 X X X X X 10 10 0.56 b 1085 VINYL BROMIDE, STABILIZED 2.1 X X X X X 10 10 1.37 a 1086 VINYL CHLORIDE, STABILIZED 2.1 X X X X X 10 12 0.81 a 1087 VINYL METHYL ETHER, STABILIZED 2.1 X X X X X 10 10 0.67 1581 CHLOROPICRIN AND METHYL BROMIDE 2.3 850 X X X X X 5 10 1.51 a MIXTURE with more than 2% chloropicrin 1582 CHLOROPICRIN AND METHYL CHLORIDE 2.3 X X X X X 5 17 0.81 a MIXTURE * Where the entries are blank, the maximum working pressure shall not exceed two thirds of the test pressure.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 241

259

Bilaga 1

Part 4 – Packing and tank provisions

P200 PACKING INSTRUCTION (continued) P200 Table 2: LIQUEFIED GASES AND DISSOLVED GASES (continued) s * r s linder ear , ba ing isk ums y UN r 3 , y Proper Shipping Name m f c sure No. ry dr o iod ℓ/ rs atio l pack e r s , m d s sure per pres cia s 50 n e GCs visions li b st e o res est e p Cla Subsidia LC Cy Tu P Bundles ME T T Filling S pr 1589 CYANOGEN CHLORIDE, STABILIZED 2.3 8 80 X X 5 20 1.03 k 1741 BORON TRICHLORIDE 2.3 8 2541 X X X X X 5 10 1.19 a 1749 CHLORINE TRIFLUORIDE 2.3 5.1, 299 X X X X X 5 30 1.40 a 8 1858 HEXAFLUOROPROPYLENE 2.2 X X X X X 10 22 1.11 (REFRIGERANT GAS R 1216) 1859 SILICON TETRAFLUORIDE 2.3 8 450 X X X X X 5 200 0.74 a 300 1.10 1860 VINYL FLUORIDE, STABILIZED 2.1 X X X X X 10 250 0.64 a 1911 DIBORANE 2.3 2.1 80 X X 5 250 0.07 d, k, o 1912 METHYL CHLORIDE AND METHYLENE 2.1 X X X X X 10 17 0.81 a CHLORIDE MIXTURE 1952 ETHYLENE OXIDE AND CARBON DIOXIDE 2.2 X X X X X 10 190 0.66 MIXTURE with not more than 9% ethylene oxide 250 0.75 1958 1,2-DICHLORO-1,1,2,2-TETRAFLUOROETHANE 2.2 X X X X X 10 10 1.30 (REFRIGERANT GAS R 114) 1959 1,1-DIFLUOROETHYLENE 2.1 X X X X X 10 250 0.77 (REFRIGERANT GAS R 1132a) 1962 ETHYLENE 2.1 X X X X X 10 225 0.34 300 0.38 1965 HYDROCARBON GAS MIXTURE, LIQUEFIED, 2.1 X X X X X 10 v, z N.O.S. 1967 INSECTICIDE GAS, TOXIC, N.O.S. 2.3 X X X X X 5 z 1968 INSECTICIDE GAS, N.O.S. 2.2 X X X X X 10 z 1969 ISOBUTANE 2.1 X X X X X 10 10 0.49 v 1973 CHLORODIFLUOROMETHANE AND 2.2 X X X X X 10 31 1.01 CHLOROPENTAFLUOROETHANE MIXTURE with fixed boiling point, with approximately 49% chlorodifluoromethane (REFRIGERANT GAS R 502) 1974 CHLORODIFLUOROBROMOMETHANE 2.2 X X X X 10 10 1.61 (REFRIGERANT GAS R 12B1) 1975 NITRIC OXIDE AND DINITROGEN TETROXIDE 2.3 5.1, 115 X X X 5 k, z MIXTURE (NITRIC OXIDE AND NITROGEN 8 DIOXIDE MIXTURE) 1976 OCTAFLUOROCYCLOBUTANE 2.2 X X X X X 10 11 1.32 (REFRIGERANT GAS RC 318) 1978 PROPANE 2.1 X X X X X 10 23 0.43 v 1982 TETRAFLUOROMETHANE 2.2 X X X X X 10 200 0.71 (REFRIGERANT GAS R 14) 300 0.90 1983 1-CHLORO-2,2,2-TRIFLUOROETHANE 2.2 X X X X X 10 10 1.18 (REFRIGERANT GAS R 133a) 1984 TRIFLUOROMETHANE 2.2 X X X X X 10 190 0.88 (REFRIGERANT GAS R 23) 250 0.96 2035 1,1,1-TRIFLUOROETHANE 2.1 X X X X X 10 35 0.73 (REFRIGERANT GAS R 143a) 2036 XENON 2.2 X X X X X 10 130 1.28 2044 2,2-DIMETHYLPROPANE 2.1 X X X X X 10 10 0.53 * Where the entries are blank, the maximum working pressure shall not exceed two thirds of the test pressure.

242 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

260

Bilaga 1

Chapter 4.1 – Use of packagings, including IBCs and large packagings

P200 PACKING INSTRUCTION (continued) P200 Table 2: LIQUEFIED GASES AND DISSOLVED GASES (continued) s * r s linder ear , ba ing isk ums y UN r 3 , y Proper Shipping Name m f c sure No. ry dr o iod ℓ/ rs atio l pack e r s , m d s sure per pres cia s 50 n e GCs visions li b st e o res est e p Cla Subsidia LC Cy Tu P Bundles ME T T Filling S pr 2073 AMMONIA SOLUTION, relative density less 2.2 than 0.880 at 15°C in water, with more than 35% but not more than 40% X X X X X 5 10 0.80 b ammonia with more than 40% but not more than 50% X X X X X 5 12 0.77 b ammonia 2188 ARSINE 2.3 2.1 20 X X 5 42 1.10 d, k 2189 DICHLOROSILANE 2.3 2.1, 314 X X X X X 5 10 0.90 a 8 200 1.08 2191 SULPHURYL FLUORIDE 2.3 3020 X X X X X 5 50 1.10 u 2192 GERMANE 2.3 2.1 620 X X X X X 5 250 0.064 d, q, r 2193 HEXAFLUOROETHANE 2.2 X X X X X 10 200 1.13 (REFRIGERANT GAS R 116) 2194 SELENIUM HEXAFLUORIDE 2.3 8 50 X X 5 36 1.46 k 2195 TELLURIUM HEXAFLUORIDE 2.3 8 25 X X 5 20 1.00 k 2196 TUNGSTEN HEXAFLUORIDE 2.3 8 160 X X 5 10 3.08 a, k 2197 HYDROGEN IODIDE, ANHYDROUS 2.3 8 2860 X X X X X 5 23 2.25 a, d 2198 PHOSPHORUS PENTAFLUORIDE 2.3 8 190 X X 5 200 0.90 k 300 1.25 k 2199 PHOSPHINE 2.3 2.1 20 X X 5 225 0.30 d, k, q 250 0.45 d, k, q 2200 PROPADIENE, STABILIZED 2.1 X X X X X 10 22 0.50 2202 HYDROGEN SELENIDE, ANHYDROUS 2.3 2.1 2 X X 5 31 1.60 k 2203 SILANE 2.1 X X X X X 10 225 0.32 q 250 0.36 q 2204 CARBONYL SULPHIDE 2.3 2.1 1700 X X X X X 5 30 0.87 u 2417 CARBONYL FLUORIDE 2.3 8 360 X X X X X 5 200 0.47 300 0.70 2418 SULPHUR TETRAFLUORIDE 2.3 8 40 X X 5 30 0.91 k, a 2419 BROMOTRIFLUOROETHYLENE 2.1 X X X X X 10 10 1.19 2420 HEXAFLUOROACETONE 2.3 8 470 X X X X X 5 22 1.08 2421 NITROGEN TRIOXIDE 2.3 5.1, 57 X X 5 k 8 2422 OCTAFLUOROBUT-2-ENE 2.2 X X X X X 10 12 1.34 (REFRIGERANT GAS R 1318) 2424 OCTAFLUOROPROPANE 2.2 X X X X X 10 25 1.04 (REFRIGERANT GAS R 218) 2451 NITROGEN TRIFLUORIDE 2.2 5.1 X X X X X 10 200 0.50 2452 ETHYLACETYLENE, STABILIZED 2.1 X X X X X 10 10 0.57 c 2453 ETHYL FLUORIDE (REFRIGERANT GAS R 161) 2.1 X X X X X 10 30 0.57 2454 METHYL FLUORIDE (REFRIGERANT GAS R 41) 2.1 X X X X X 10 300 0.63 2455 METHYL NITRITE 2.2 (see special provision 900) 2517 1-CHLORO-1,1-DIFLUOROETHANE 2.1 X X X X X 10 10 0.99 (REFRIGERANT GAS R 142b) 2534 METHYLCHLOROSILANE 2.3 2.1, 600 X X X X X 5 z 8 2548 CHLORINE PENTAFLUORIDE 2.3 5.1, 122 X X 5 13 1.49 a, k 8 * Where the entries are blank, the maximum working pressure shall not exceed two thirds of the test pressure.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 243

261

Bilaga 1

Part 4 – Packing and tank provisions

P200 PACKING INSTRUCTION (continued) P200 Table 2: LIQUEFIED GASES AND DISSOLVED GASES (continued) s * r s linder ear , ba ing isk ums y UN r 3 , y Proper Shipping Name m f c sure No. ry dr o iod ℓ/ rs atio l pack e r s , m d s sure per pres cia s 50 n e GCs visions li b st e o res est e p Cla Subsidia LC Cy Tu P Bundles ME T T Filling S pr 2599 CHLOROTRIFLUOROMETHANE AND 2.2 X X X X X 10 31 0.12 TRIFLUOROMETHANE AZEOTROPIC MIXTURE 42 0.17 with approximately 60% chlorotrifluoromethane 100 0.64 (REFRIGERANT GAS R 503) 2601 CYCLOBUTANE 2.1 X X X X X 10 10 0.63 2602 DICHLORODIFLUOROMETHANE AND 2.2 X X X X X 10 22 1.01 DIFLUOROETHANE AZEOTROPIC MIXTURE with approximately 74% dichlorodifluoromethane (REFRIGERANT GAS R 500) 2676 STIBINE 2.3 2.1 20 X X 5 200 0.49 k, r 2901 BROMINE CHLORIDE 2.3 5.1, 290 X X X X X 5 10 1.50 a 8 3057 TRIFLUOROACETYL CHLORIDE 2.3 8 10 X X X 5 17 1.17 k 3070 ETHYLENE OXIDE AND DICHLORODIFLUORO- 2.2 X X X X X 10 18 1.09 METHANE MIXTURE with not more than 12.5% ethylene oxide 3083 PERCHLORYL FLUORIDE 2.3 5.1 770 X X X X X 5 33 1.21 u 3153 PERFLUORO(METHYL VINYL ETHER) 2.1 X X X X X 10 20 0.75 3154 PERFLUORO(ETHYL VINYL ETHER) 2.1 X X X X X 10 10 0.98 3157 LIQUEFIED GAS, OXIDIZING, N.O.S. 2.2 5.1 X X X X X 10 z 3159 1,1,1,2-TETRAFLUOROETHANE 2.2 X X X X X 10 18 1.05 (REFRIGERANT GAS R 134a) 3160 LIQUEFIED GAS, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S. 2.3 2.1 ≤ 5000 X X X X X 5 z 3161 LIQUEFIED GAS, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S. 2.1 X X X X X 10 z 3162 LIQUEFIED GAS, TOXIC, N.O.S. 2.3 ≤ 5000 X X X X X 5 z 3163 LIQUEFIED GAS, N.O.S. 2.2 X X X X X 10 z 3220 PENTAFLUOROETHANE 2.2 X X X X X 10 49 0.95 (REFRIGERANT GAS R 125) 35 0.87 3252 DIFLUOROMETHANE (REFRIGERANT GAS R 32) 2.1 X X X X X 10 48 0.78 3296 HEPTAFLUOROPROPANE 2.2 X X X X X 10 13 1.21 (REFRIGERANT GAS R 227) 3297 ETHYLENE OXIDE AND CHLOROTETRA- 2.2 X X X X X 10 10 1.16 FLUOROETHANE MIXTURE with not more than 8.8% ethylene oxide 3298 ETHYLENE OXIDE AND PENTAFLUOROETHANE 2.2 X X X X X 10 26 1.02 MIXTURE with not more than 7.9% ethylene oxide 3299 ETHYLENE OXIDE AND TETRAFLUOROETHANE 2.2 X X X X X 10 17 1.03 MIXTURE with not more than 5.6% ethylene oxide 3300 ETHYLENE OXIDE AND CARBON DIOXIDE 2.3 2.1 More X X X X X 5 28 0.73 MIXTURE with more than 87% ethylene oxide than 2900 3307 LIQUEFIED GAS, TOXIC, OXIDIZING, N.O.S. 2.3 5.1 ≤ 5000 X X X X X 5 z 3308 LIQUEFIED GAS, TOXIC, CORROSIVE, N.O.S. 2.3 8 ≤ 5000 X X X X X 5 z 3309 LIQUEFIED GAS, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE, 2.3 2.1, ≤ 5000 X X X X X 5 z CORROSIVE, N.O.S. 8 3310 LIQUEFIED GAS, TOXIC, OXIDIZING, 2.3 5.1, ≤ 5000 X X X X X 5 z CORROSIVE, N.O.S. 8 3318 AMMONIA SOLUTION, relative density 2.3 8 X X X X 5 b less than 0.880 at 15°C in water, with more than 50% ammonia 3337 REFRIGERANT GAS R 404A 2.2 X X X X X 10 36 0.82 * Where the entries are blank, the maximum working pressure shall not exceed two thirds of the test pressure.

244 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

262

Bilaga 1

Chapter 4.1 – Use of packagings, including IBCs and large packagings

P200 PACKING INSTRUCTION (continued) P200 Table 2: LIQUEFIED GASES AND DISSOLVED GASES (continued) s * r s linder ear , ba ing isk ums y UN r 3 , y Proper Shipping Name m f c sure No. ry dr o iod ℓ/ rs atio l pack e r s , m d s sure per pres cia s 50 n e GCs visions li b st e o res est e p Cla Subsidia LC Cy Tu P Bundles ME T T Filling S pr 3338 REFRIGERANT GAS R 407A 2.2 X X X X X 10 32 0.94 3339 REFRIGERANT GAS R 407B 2.2 X X X X X 10 33 0.93 3340 REFRIGERANT GAS R 407C 2.2 X X X X X 10 30 0.95 3354 INSECTICIDE GAS, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S. 2.1 X X X X X 10 z 3355 INSECTICIDE GAS, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S. 2.3 2.1 X X X X X 5 z 3374 ACETYLENE, SOLVENT FREE 2.1 X X 5 60 c, p 52 * Where the entries are blank, the maximum working pressure shall not exceed two thirds of the test pressure.

P200 PACKING INSTRUCTION (continued) P200 Table 3: SUBSTANCES NOT IN CLASS 2 s * r s linder ear , ba ing isk 3 ums y UN r , y Proper Shipping Name m f c sure No. ry dr o iod ℓ/ rs atio l pack e r s , m d s sure per pres s 50 n e GCs cia visions li b st e o res est e p Cla Subsidia LC Cy Tu P Bundles ME T T Filling S pr 1051 HYDROGEN CYANIDE, STABILIZED containing 6.1 3 40 X X 5 100 0.55 k less than 3% water 1052 HYDROGEN FLUORIDE, ANHYDROUS 8 6.1 966 X X X 5 10 0.84 t, a † 1745 BROMINE PENTAFLUORIDE 5.1 6.1, 25 X X X 5 10 k 8 † 1746 BROMINE TRIFLUORIDE 5.1 6.1, 50 X X X 5 10 k 8 2495 IODINE PENTAFLUORIDE 5.1 6.1, 120 X X X 5 10 † k 8 2983 ETHYLENE OXIDE AND PROPYLENE OXIDE 3 6.1 X X X 5 10 z MIXTURE with not more than 30% ethylene oxide * Where the entries are blank, the maximum working pressure shall not exceed two thirds of the test pressure. † A minimum ullage of 8% by volume is required.

P201 PACKING INSTRUCTION P201 This instruction applies to UN 3167, UN 3168 and UN 3169.

The following packagings are authorized: (1) Cylinders and gas receptacles conforming to the construction, testing and filling requirements approved by the competent authority. (2) The following combination packagings provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met: Outer packagings: Drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G); Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2); Jerricans (3A1, 3A2, 3B1, 3B2, 3H1, 3H2). Inner packagings: (a) For non-toxic gases, hermetically sealed inner packagings of glass or metal with a maximum capacity of 5ℓ per package; (b) For toxic gases, hermetically sealed inner packagings of glass or metal with a maximum capacity of 1ℓ per package. Packagings shall conform to the packing group III performance level.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 245

263

Bilaga 1

Part 4 – Packing and tank provisions

P202 PACKING INSTRUCTION P202 [Reserved]

P203 PACKING INSTRUCTION P203 This instruction applies to class 2 refrigerated liquefied gases. Requirements for closed cryogenic receptacles: (1) The general requirements of 4.1.6.1 shall be met. (2) The requirements of chapter 6.2 shall be met. (3) The closed cryogenic receptacles shall be so insulated that they do not become coated with frost. (4) Test pressure Refrigerated liquids shall be filled in closed cryogenic receptacles with the following minimum test pressures: (a) For closed cryogenic receptacles with vacuum insulation, the test pressure shall not be less than 1.3 times the sum of the maximum internal pressure of the filled receptacle, including during filling and discharge, plus 100 kPa (1 bar); (b) For other closed cryogenic receptacles, the test pressure shall be not less than 1.3 times the maximum internal pressure of the filled receptacle, taking into account the pressure developed during filling and discharge. (5) Degree of filling For non-flammable, non-toxic refrigerated liquefied gases the volume of liquid phase at the filling temperature and at a pressure of 100 kPa (1 bar) shall not exceed 98% of the water capacity of the pressure receptacle. For flammable refrigerated liquefied gases the degree of filling shall remain below the level at which, if the contents were raised to the temperature at which the vapour pressure equalled the opening pressure of the relief valve, the volume of the liquid phase would reach 98% of the water capacity at that temperature. (6) Pressure-relief devices Closed cryogenic receptacles shall be fitted with at least one pressure-relief device. (7) Compatibility Materials used to ensure the leakproofness of the joints or for the maintenance of the closures shall be compatible with the contents. In the case of receptacles intended for the transport of oxidizing gases (i.e. with a subsidiary risk of 5.1), these materials shall not react with these gases in a dangerous manner. (8) Periodic inspection The periodic inspection and test frequencies of pressure relief valves in accordance with 6.2.1.6.3 shall not exceed five years. Requirements for open cryogenic receptacles: Only the following non-oxidizing refrigerated liquefied gases of class 2.2 may be transported in open cryogenic receptacles: UN 1913, 1951, 1963, 1970, 1977, 2591, 3136 and 3158. Open cryogenic receptacles shall be constructed to meet the following requirements: (1) The receptacles shall be designed, manufactured, tested and equipped in such a way as to withstand all conditions, including fatigue, to which they will be subjected during their normal use and during normal conditions of transport. (2) The capacity shall be not more than 450 litres. (3) The receptacle shall have a double wall construction with the space between the inner and outer wall being evacuated (vacuum insulation). The insulation shall prevent the formation of hoar frost on the exterior of the receptacle. (4) The materials of construction shall have suitable mechanical properties at the service temperature. (5) Materials which are in direct contact with the dangerous goods shall not be affected or weakened by the dangerous goods intended to be transported and shall not cause a dangerous effect, e.g., catalysing a reaction or reacting with the dangerous goods. (6) Receptacles of glass double wall construction shall have an outer packaging with suitable cushioning or absorbent materials which withstand the pressures and impacts liable to occur under normal conditions of transport. (7) The receptacle shall be designed to remain in an upright position during transport, e.g., have a base whose smaller horizontal dimension is greater than the height of the centre of gravity when filled to capacity or be mounted on gimbals. (8) The openings of the receptacles shall be fitted with devices allowing gases to escape, preventing any splashing out of liquid, and so configured that they remain in place during transport. (9) Open cryogenic receptacles shall bear the following marks permanently affixed, e.g., by stamping, engraving or etching: – The manufacturer’s name and address; – The model number or name; – The serial or batch number; – The UN Number and Proper Shipping Name of gases for which the receptacle is intended; – The capacity of the receptacle in litres.

246 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

264

Bilaga 1

Chapter 4.1 – Use of packagings, including IBCs and large packagings

P205 PACKING INSTRUCTION P205 This instruction applies to UN 3468. (1) For metal hydride storage systems, the general packing requirements of 4.1.6.1 shall be met. (2) Only pressure receptacles not exceeding 150 litres in water capacity and having a maximum developed pressure not exceeding 25 MPa are covered by this packing instruction. (3) Metal hydride storage systems meeting the applicable requirements for the construction and testing of pressure receptacles containing gas of chapter 6.2 are authorized for the transport of hydrogen only. (4) When steel pressure receptacles or composite pressure receptacles with steel liners are used, only those bearing the “H” mark, in accordance with 6.2.2.9.2(j), shall be used. (5) Metal hydride storage systems shall meet the service conditions, design criteria, rated capacity, type tests, batch tests, routine tests, test pressure, rated charging pressure and provisions for pressure relief devices for transportable metal hydride storage systems specified in ISO 16111:2008 and their conformity and approval shall be assessed in accordance with 6.2.2.5. (6) Metal hydride storage systems shall be filled with hydrogen at a pressure not exceeding the rated charging pressure shown in the permanent markings on the system as specified by ISO 16111:2008. (7) The periodic test requirements for a metal hydride storage system shall be in accordance with ISO 16111:2008 and carried out in accordance with 6.2.2.6, and the interval between periodic inspections shall not exceed five years.

P206 PACKING INSTRUCTION P206 This instruction applies to UN Nos. 3500, 3501, 3502, 3503, 3504 and 3505. Unless otherwise indicated in these provisions, cylinders and pressure drums conforming to the applicable requirements of Chapter 6.2 are authorized. (1) The general packing requirements of 4.1.6.1 shall be met. (2) The maximum test period for periodic inspection shall be 5 years. (3) Cylinders and pressure drums shall be so filled that at 50 °C the non-gaseous phase does not exceed 95% of their water capacity and they are not completely filled at 60 °C. When filled, the internal pressure at 65 °C shall not exceed the test pressure of the cylinders and pressure drums. The vapour pressures and volumetric expansion of all substances in the cylinders and pressure drums shall be taken into account. (4) The minimum test pressure shall be in accordance with P200 for the propellant but shall not be less than 20 bar. Additional requirement: Cylinders and pressure drums shall not be offered for transport when connected with spray application equipment such as a hose and wand assembly. Special packing provision: PP89 For UN 3501, 3502, 3503, 3504 and 3505, notwithstanding 4.1.6.1.9.2, non-refillable cylinders used may have a water capacity in ℓ not exceeding 1 000 litres divided by the test pressure expressed in bars provided capacity and pressure restrictions of the construction standard comply with ISO 11118:1999, which limits the maximum capacity to 50 ℓ.

P207 PACKING INSTRUCTION P207 This instruction applies to UN No. 1950.. The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met: (a) Drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G); Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2). Packagings shall conform to the packing group II performance level. (b) Rigid outer packagings with a maximum net mass as follows: Fibreboard 55 kg Other than fibreboard 125 kg The provisions of 4.1.1.3 need not be met. The packagings shall be designed and constructed to prevent movement of the aerosols and inadvertent discharge during normal conditions of transport. Special packing provision: PP87 For UN 1950 waste aerosols transported in accordance with special provision 327, the packagings shall have a means of retaining any free liquid that might escape during transport, e.g., absorbent material. The packaging shall be adequately ventilated to prevent the creation of flammable atmosphere and the build-up of pressure.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 247

265

Bilaga 1

Part 4 – Packing and tank provisions

P300 PACKING INSTRUCTION P300 This instruction applies to UN 3064. The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met: Combination packagings consisting of inner metal cans of not more than 1 ℓ capacity each and outer wooden boxes (4C1, 4C2, 4D or 4F) containing not more than 5 ℓ of solution. Additional provisions: 1 Metal cans shall be completely surrounded with absorbent cushioning material. 2 Wooden boxes shall be completely lined with suitable material impervious to water and nitroglycerin.

P301 PACKING INSTRUCTION P301 This instruction applies to UN 3165. The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met: (1) Aluminium pressure receptacle made from tubing and having welded heads Primary containment of the fuel within this receptacle shall consist of a welded aluminium bladder having a maximum internal volume of 46 ℓ. The outer receptacle shall have a minimum design gauge pressure of 1,275 kPa and a minimum burst gauge pressure of 2,755 kPa. Each receptacle shall be leak-checked during manufacture and before shipment and shall be found leakproof. The complete inner unit shall be securely packed in non-combustible cushioning material, such as vermiculite, in a strong outer tightly closed metal packaging which will adequately protect all fittings. Maximum quantity of fuel per unit and package is 42 ℓ. (2) Aluminium pressure receptacle Primary containment of the fuel within this receptacle shall consist of a welded vapourtight fuel compartment with an elastomeric bladder having a maximum internal volume of 46 ℓ. The pressure receptacle shall have a minimum design gauge pressure of 2,680 kPa and a minimum burst pressure of 5,170 kPa. Each receptacle shall be leak-checked during manufacture and before shipment and shall be securely packed in non-combustible cushioning material such as vermiculite, in a strong outer tightly closed metal packaging which will adequately protect all fittings. Maximum quantity of fuel per unit and package is 42 ℓ.

P302 PACKING INSTRUCTION P302 This instruction applies to UN 3269. The following combination packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met: Outer packagings: Drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G). Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2). Jerricans (3A1, 3A2, 3B1, 3B2, 3H1, 3H2). Inner packagings: The activator (organic peroxide) shall have a maximum quantity of 125 ml per inner packaging if liquid, and 500 g per inner packaging if solid. The base material and the activator shall be each separately packed in inner packagings. The components may be placed in the same outer packaging provided that they will not interact dangerously in the event of a leakage. Packagings shall conform to the packing group II or III performance level according to the criteria for Class 3 applied to the base material.

248 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

266

Bilaga 1

Chapter 4.1 – Use of packagings, including IBCs and large packagings

P400 PACKING INSTRUCTION P400 The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met: (1) Pressure receptacles, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.3.6 are met. They shall be made of steel and shall be subjected to an initial test and periodic tests every 10 years at a pressure of not less than 1 MPa (10 bar, gauge pressure). During carriage, the liquid shall be under a layer of inert gas with a gauge pressure of not less than 20 kPa (0.2 bar). (2) Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F or 4G), drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1D or 1G) or jerricans (3A1, 3A2, 3B1 or 3B2) enclosing hermetically sealed metal cans with inner packagings of glass or metal, with a capacity of not more than 1 ℓ each, having threaded closures with gaskets. Inner packagings shall be cushioned on all sides with dry, absorbent, non-combustible material in a quantity sufficient to absorb the entire contents. Inner packagings shall not be filled to more than 90% of their capacity. Outer packagings shall have a maximum net mass of 125 kg. (3) Steel, aluminium or metal drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1 or 1N2), jerricans (3A1, 3A2, 3B1 or 3B2) or boxes (4A, 4B or 4N) with a maximum net mass of 150 kg each with hermetically sealed inner metal cans of not more than 4 ℓ capacity each, with threaded closures fitted with gaskets. Inner packagings shall be cushioned on all sides with dry, absorbent, non-combustible material in a quantity sufficient to absorb the entire contents. Each layer of inner packagings shall be separated by a dividing partition in addition to cushioning material. Inner packagings shall not be filled to more than 90% of their capacity. Special packing provision: PP86 For UN 3392 and UN 3394, air shall be eliminated from the vapour space by nitrogen or other means.

P401 PACKING INSTRUCTION P401 The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met: (1) Pressure receptacles, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.3.6 are met. They shall be made of steel and subjected to an initial test and periodic tests every 10 years at a pressure of not less than 0.6 MPa (6 bar, gauge pressure). During carriage, the liquid shall be under a layer of inert gas with a gauge pressure of not less than 20 kPa (0.2 bar).

(2) Combination packagings Outer packagings: Drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G); Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1,4H2); Jerricans (3A1, 3A2, 3B1, 3B2, 3H1, 3H2). Inner packagings: Glass, metal or plastics which have threaded closures with a maximum capacity of 1 ℓ. Each inner packaging shall be surrounded by inert cushioning and absorbent material in a quantity sufficient to absorb the entire contents. The maximum net mass per outer packaging shall not exceed 30 kg. Special packing provision: PP31 For UN Nos. 1183, 1242, 1295, 2965 and 2988, packagings shall be hermetically sealed.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 249

267

Bilaga 1

Part 4 – Packing and tank provisions

P402 PACKING INSTRUCTION P402 The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met: (1) Pressure receptacles, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.3.6 are met. They shall be made of steel and subjected to an initial test and periodic tests every 10 years at a pressure of not less than 0.6 MPa (6 bar, gauge pressure). During carriage, the liquid shall be under a layer of inert gas with a gauge pressure of not less than 20 kPa (0.2 bar). (2) Combination packagings Outer packagings: Drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G); Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2); Jerricans (3A1, 3A2, 3B1, 3B2, 3H1, 3H2). Inner packagings with a maximum net mass as follows: Glass 10 kg Metal or plastics 15 kg Each inner packaging shall be fitted with threaded closures. Each inner packaging shall be surrounded by inert cushioning and absorbent material in a quantity sufficient to absorb the entire contents. The maximum net mass per outer packaging shall not exceed 125 kg. (3) Steel drums (1A1) with a maximum capacity of 250 ℓ. (4) Composite packagings consisting of plastics receptacle in a steel or aluminium drum (6HA1 or 6HB1) with a maximum capacity of 250 ℓ. Special packing provision: PP31 For UN Nos.1389, 1391, 1392, 1420, 1421, 1422, 3148, 3184 (PG II), 3185 (PG II), 3187 (PG II), 3188 (PG II), 3398 (PG I), 3399 (PG I) and 3482, packagings shall be hermetically sealed.

250 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

268

Bilaga 1

Chapter 4.1 – Use of packagings, including IBCs and large packagings

P403 PACKING INSTRUCTION P403 The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met: Combination packagings Maximum net mass Inner packagings Outer packagings Glass 2 kg Drums Plastic 15 kg steel (1A1, 1A2) 400 kg Metal 20 kg aluminium (1B1, 1B2) 400 kg other metal (1N1, 1N2) 400 kg Inner packagings shall be hermetically plastics (1H1, 1H2) 400 kg sealed (e.g., by taping or by threaded plywood (1D) 400 kg closures). fibre (1G) 400 kg Boxes steel (4A) 400 kg aluminium (4B) 400 kg other metal (4N) 400 kg natural wood (4C1) 250 kg natural wood with sift-proof walls 250 kg (4C2) plywood (4D) 250 kg reconstituted wood (4F) 125 kg fibreboard (4G) 125 kg expanded plastics (4H1) 60 kg solid plastics (4H2) 250 kg Jerricans steel (3A1, 3A2) 120 kg aluminium (3B1, 3B2) 120 kg plastics (3H1, 3H2) 120 kg Single packagings Drums steel (1A1, 1A2) 250 kg aluminium (1B1, 1B2) 250 kg metal other than steel or aluminium (1N1, 1N2) 250 kg plastics (1H1, 1H2) 250 kg Jerricans steel (3A1, 3A2) 120 kg aluminium (3B1, 3B2) 120 kg plastics (3H1, 3H2) 120 kg Composite packagings Plastics receptacle in steel or aluminium drum (6HA1 or 6HB1) 250 kg Plastics receptacle in fibre, plastics or plywood drum (6HG1, 6HH1 or 6HD1) 75 kg Plastics receptacle in steel, aluminium, wood, plywood, fibreboard or solid 75 kg plastics box (6HA2, 6HB2, 6HC, 6HD2, 6HG2 or 6HH2) Pressure receptacles, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.3.6 are met Special packing provisions: PP31 For UN Nos. 1360, 1397, 1402 (PG I), 1404, 1407, 1409, 1410, 1413, 1414, 1415, 1418 (PG I), 1419, 1423, 1426, 1427, 1428, 1432, 1433, 1714, 1870, 2010, 2011, 2012, 2013, 2257, 2463, 2806, 2813 (PG I), 3208, 3209, 3401, 3402, 3403 and 3404, packagings shall be hermetically sealed, except for solid fused material. PP83 For UN 2813, waterproof bags containing not more than 20 g of substance for the purposes of heat formation may be packaged for transport. Each waterproof bag shall be sealed in a plastics bag and placed within an intermediate packaging. No outer packaging shall contain more than 400 g of substance. Water or liquid which may react with the water-reactive substance shall not be included in the packaging.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 251

269

Bilaga 1

Part 4 – Packing and tank provisions

P404 PACKING INSTRUCTION P404 This instruction applies to pyrophoric solids: UN Nos. 1383, 1854, 1855, 2008, 2441, 2545, 2546, 2846, 2881, 3200, 3391 and 3393. The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met: (1) Combination packagings Outer packagings: (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F or 4H2) Inner packagings: Metal packagings with a maximum net mass of 15 kg each. Inner packagings shall be hermetically sealed and have threaded closures. (2) Metal packagings: (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1N1, 1N2, 3A1, 3A2, 3B1 and 3B2) Maximum gross mass: 150 kg (3) Composite packagings: Plastics receptacles in a steel or aluminium drum (6HA1 or 6HB1) Maximum gross mass: 150 kg Pressure receptacles may be used provided that the general provisions of 4.1.3.6 are met. Special packing provisions: PP31 For UN Nos. 1383, 1854, 1855, 2008, 2441, 2545, 2546, 2846, 2881 and 3200, packagings shall be hermetically sealed. PP86 For UN 3391 and UN 3393, air shall be eliminated from the vapour space by nitrogen or other means.

P405 PACKING INSTRUCTION P405 This instruction applies to UN 1381. The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met: (1) For UN 1381, wet phosphorus: .1 Combination packagings Outer packagings: (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D or 4F); maximum net mass: 75 kg Inner packagings: (i) hermetically sealed metal cans, with a maximum net mass of 15 kg; or (ii) glass inner packagings cushioned on all sides with dry, absorbent, non-combustible material in a quantity sufficient to absorb the entire contents with a maximum net mass of 2 kg; or .2 Drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1 or 1N2); maximum net mass: 400 kg Jerricans (3A1 or 3B1); maximum net mass: 120 kg. These packagings shall be capable of passing the leakproofness test specified in 6.1.5.4 at the packing group II performance level. (2) For UN 1381, dry phosphorus: .1 When fused, drums (1A2, 1B2 or 1N2) with a maximum net mass of 400 kg; or .2 In projectiles or hard-cased articles when transported without class 1 components, as specified by the competent authority. Special packing provision: PP31 For UN 1381, packagings shall be hermetically sealed.

252 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

270

Bilaga 1

Chapter 4.1 – Use of packagings, including IBCs and large packagings

P406 PACKING INSTRUCTION P406 The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met: (1) Combination packagings Outer packagings: (4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2, 1G, 1D, 1H1, 1H2, 3H1 or 3H2) Inner packagings shall be water-resistant. (2) Plastics, plywood or fibreboard drums (1H2, 1D or 1G) or boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4D, 4F, 4C2, 4G and 4H2) with a water-resistant inner bag, plastics film lining or water-resistant coating. (3) Metal drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1 or 1N2), plastics drums (1H1 or 1H2), metal jerricans (3A1, 3A2, 3B1 or 3B2), plastics jerricans (3H1 or 3H2), plastics receptacle in steel or aluminium drums (6HA1 or 6HB1), plastics receptacle in fibre, plastics or plywood drums (6HG1, 6HH1 or 6HD1), plastics receptacle in steel, aluminium, wood, plywood, fibreboard or solid plastics boxes (6HA2, 6HB2, 6HC, 6HD2, 6HG2 or 6HH2). Additional provisions: 1 Packagings shall be designed and constructed to prevent the loss of water or alcohol content or the content of the phlegmatizer. 2 Packagings shall be so constructed and closed as to avoid an explosive overpressure or pressure build-up of more than 300 kPa (3 bar). 3 The type of packaging and maximum permitted quantity per packaging are limited by the provisions of 2.1.3.4. Special packing provisions: PP24 UN Nos. 2852, 3364, 3365, 3366, 3367, 3368 and 3369 shall not be transported in quantities of more than 500 g per package. PP25 UN 1347 shall not be transported in quantities of more than 15 kg per package. PP26 For UN Nos. 1310, 1320, 1321, 1322, 1344, 1347, 1348, 1349, 1517, 2907, 3317, 3344 and 3376, packagings shall be lead-free. PP31 For UN Nos. 1310, 1320, 1321, 1322, 1336, 1337, 1344, 1347, 1348, 1349, 1354, 1355, 1356, 1357, 1517, 1571, 2555, 2556, 2557, 2852, 3317, 3364, 3365, 3366, 3367, 3368, 3369, 3370 and 3376, packagings shall be hermetically sealed. PP48 For UN 3474, metal packagings shall not be used. PP78 UN 3370 shall not be transported in quantities of more than 11.5 kg per package. PP80 For UN 2907 and UN 3344, packagings shall meet the packing group II performance level. Packagings meeting the test criteria of packing group I shall not be used.

P407 PACKING INSTRUCTION P407 This instruction applies to UN Nos. 1331, 1944, 1945 and 2254. The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met: Outer packagings: Drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G); Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1,4 H2); Jerricans (3A1, 3A2, 3B1, 3B2, 3H1, 3H2). Inner packagings: Matches shall be tightly packed in securely closed inner packagings to prevent accidental ignition under normal conditions of transport. The maximum gross mass of the package shall not exceed 45 kg except for fibreboard boxes which shall not exceed 30 kg. Packagings shall conform to the packing group III performance level. Special packing provision: PP27 UN 1331, Strike-anywhere matches, shall not be packed in the same outer packaging with any other dangerous goods other than safety matches or wax Vesta matches, which shall be packed in separate inner packagings. Inner packagings shall not contain more than 700 strike-anywhere matches.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 253

271

Bilaga 1

Part 4 – Packing and tank provisions

P408 PACKING INSTRUCTION P408 This instruction applies to UN 3292. The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met: (1) For cells: Drums (1A2, 1B2, 1N2, 1H2, 1D, 1G); Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2); Jerricans (3A2, 3B2, 3H2). There shall be sufficient cushioning material to prevent contact between cells and between cells and the internal surfaces of the outer packaging and to ensure that no dangerous movement of the cells within the outer packaging occurs in transport. Packagings shall conform to the packing group II performance level. (2) Batteries may be transported unpacked or in protective enclosures (e.g., fully enclosed or wooden slatted crates). The terminals shall not support the weight of other batteries or materials packed with the batteries. Packagings need not meet the requirements of 4.1.1.3. Additional requirement: Cells and batteries shall be protected against short circuit and shall be isolated in such a manner as to prevent short circuits.

P409 PACKING INSTRUCTION P409 This instruction applies to UN Nos. 2956, 3242 and 3251. The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met: (1) Fibre drum (1G) which may be fitted with a liner or coating; maximum net mass: 50 kg. (2) Combination packagings: Fibreboard box (4G) with a single inner plastic bag; maximum net mass: 50 kg. (3) Combination packagings: Fibreboard box (4G) or fibre drum (1G) with inner plastic packagings each containing a maximum of 5 kg; maximum net mass: 25 kg.

254 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

272

Bilaga 1

Chapter 4.1 – Use of packagings, including IBCs and large packagings

P410 PACKING INSTRUCTION P410 The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met. Combination packagings Maximum net mass Inner packagings Outer packagings Packing group II Packing group III Glass 10 kg Drums 1 steel (1A1, 1A2) 400 kg 400 kg Plastics 30 kg aluminium (1B1, 1B2) 400 kg 400 kg Metal 40 kg 1, 2 other metal (1N1, 1N2) 400 kg 400 kg Paper 10 kg 1, 2 plastics (1H1, 1H2) 400 kg 400 kg Fibre 10 kg plywood (1D) 1 400 kg 400 kg fibre (1G) 400 kg 400 kg

Boxes steel (4A) 400 kg 400 kg aluminium (4B) 400 kg 400 kg other metal (4N) 400 kg 400 kg natural wood (4C1) 400 kg 400 kg natural wood with sift-proof 400 kg 400 kg walls (4C2) plywood (4D) 400 kg 400 kg reconstituted wood (4F) 400 kg 400 kg 1 fibreboard (4G) 400 kg 400 kg expanded plastics (4H1) 60 kg 60 kg solid plastics (4H2) 400 kg 400 kg Jerricans 1 Packagings shall be sift-proof. steel (3A1, 3A2) 120 kg 120 kg 2 aluminium (3B1, 3B2) 120 kg 120 kg These inner packagings shall not plastics (3H1, 3H2) 120 kg 120 kg be used when the substances being transported may become liquid during transport. Single packagings Drums steel (1A1 or 1A2) 400 kg 400 kg aluminium (1B1 or 1B2) 400 kg 400 kg metal other than steel or aluminium (1N1 or 1N2) 400 kg 400 kg plastics (1H1 or 1H2) 400 kg 400 kg Jerricans steel (3A1 or 3A2) 120 kg 120 kg aluminium (3B1 or 3B2) 120 kg 120 kg plastics (3H1 or 3H2) 120 kg 120 kg Boxes 3 steel (4A) 400 kg 400 kg aluminium (4B)3 3 400 kg 400 kg other metal (4N) 400 kg 400 kg 3 natural wood (4C1) 400 kg 400 kg natural wood with sift-proof walls (4C2)3 3 400 kg 400 kg plywood (4D) 400 kg 400 kg 3 reconstituted wood (4F) 400 kg 400 kg 3 fibreboard (4G) 3 400 kg 400 kg solid plastics (4H2) 400 kg 400 kg Bags 3, 4 Bags (5H3, 5H4, 5L3, 5M2) 50 kg 50 kg Composite packagings Plastics receptacle in steel, aluminium, plywood, fibre or plastics drum 400 kg 400 kg (6HA1, 6HB1, 6HG1, 6HD1 or 6HH1) Plastics receptacle in steel or aluminium crate or box, wooden box, 75 kg 75 kg plywood box, fibreboard box or solid plastics box (6HA2, 6HB2, 6HC, 6HD2, 6HG2 or 6HH2) Glass receptacle in steel, aluminium, plywood or fibre drum 75 kg 75 kg (6PA1, 6PB1, 6PD1 or 6PG1) or in steel, aluminium, wooden, wickerwork hamper or fibreboard box (6PA2, 6PB2, 6PC, 6PD2 or 6PG2) or in solid or expanded plastics packaging (6PH1 or 6PH2)

3 These packagings shall not be used when the substances being transported may become liquid during transport. 4 These packagings shall only be used for packing group II substances when transported in a closed cargo transport unit. Pressure receptacles, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.3.6 are met

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 255

273

Bilaga 1

Part 4 – Packing and tank provisions

P410 PACKING INSTRUCTION (continued) P410 Special packing provisions: PP31 For UN Nos. 1326, 1339, 1340, 1341, 1343, 1352, 1358, 1373, 1374, 1378, 1379, 1382, 1384, 1385, 1390, 1393, 1394, 1400, 1401, 1405, 1417, 1431, 1437, 1871, 1923, 1929, 2004, 2008, 2318, 2545, 2546, 2624, 2805, 2813, 2830, 2835, 2844, 2881, 2940, 3078, 3088, 3170 (PG II), 3182, 3189, 3190, 3205, 3206, 3208 and 3209, packagings shall be hermetically sealed. PP39 For UN 1378, for metal packagings a venting device is required. PP40 For the following UN Nos., falling in PG II, bags are not allowed: 1326, 1340, 1352, 1358, 1374, 1378, 1382, 1390, 1393, 1394, 1396, 1400, 1401, 1402, 1405, 1409, 1417, 1418, 1436, 1437, 1871, 2624, 2805, 2813, 2830, 2835, 3078, 3131, 3132, 3134, 3170, 3182, 3208 and 3209. PP83 For UN 2813, waterproof bags containing not more than 20 g of substance for the purposes of heat formation may be packaged for transport. Each waterproof bag shall be sealed in a plastics bag and placed within an intermediate packaging. No outer packaging shall contain more than 400 g of substance. Water or liquid which may react with the water-reactive substance shall not be included in the packaging.

P411 PACKING INSTRUCTION P411 This instruction applies to UN 3270. The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met: Drums (1A2, 1B2, 1N2, 1H2, 1D, 1G); Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2); Jerricans (3A2, 3B2, 3H2). provided that explosion is not possible by reason of increased internal pressure. The maximum net mass shall not exceed 30 kg.

P500 PACKING INSTRUCTION P500 This instruction applies to UN 3356. The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met: Drums (1A2, 1B2, 1N2, 1H2, 1D, 1G); Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2); Jerricans (3A2, 3B2, 3H2). Packagings shall conform to the packing group II performance level. The generator(s) shall be transported in a package which meets the following requirements when one generator in the package is actuated: (a) Other generators in the package will not be actuated; (b) Packaging material will not ignite; and (c) The outside surface temperature of the completed package shall not exceed 100 °C.

256 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

274

Bilaga 1

Chapter 4.1 – Use of packagings, including IBCs and large packagings

P501 PACKING INSTRUCTION P501 This instruction applies to UN 2015. The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met: Inner packagings Outer packagings Combination packagings maximum capacity maximum net mass (1) Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4H2) 5 ℓ 125 kg or drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D) or jerricans (3A1, 3A2, 3B1, 3B2, 3H1, 3H2) with glass, plastics or metal inner packagings (2) Fibreboard box (4G) or fibre drum (1G), 2 ℓ 50 kg with plastics or metal inner packagings each in a plastics bag Single packagings Maximum capacity Drums steel (1A1) 250 ℓ aluminium (1B1) 250 ℓ metal other than steel or aluminium (1N1) 250 ℓ plastics (1H1) 250 ℓ

Jerricans steel (3A1) 60 ℓ aluminium (3B1) 60 ℓ plastics (3H1) 60 ℓ Composite packagings Plastics receptacle in steel or aluminium drum (6HA1, 6HB1) 250 ℓ Plastics receptacle in fibre, plastics or plywood drum (6HG1, 6HH1, 6HD1) 250 ℓ Plastics receptacle in steel or aluminium crate or box or plastics receptacle 60 ℓ in wood, plywood, fibreboard or solid plastics box (6HA2, 6HB2, 6HC, 6HD2, 6HG2 or 6HH2) Glass receptacle in steel, aluminium, fibre, plywood, solid plastics or expanded 60 ℓ plastics drum (6PA1, 6PB1, 6PG1, 6PD1, 6PH1 or 6PH2) or in a steel, aluminium, wood, fibreboard or plywood box (6PA2, 6PB2, 6PC, 6PG2 or 6PD2) Additional provisions: 1 Packagings shall have a minimum ullage of 10%. 2 Packagings shall be vented.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 257

275

Bilaga 1

Part 4 – Packing and tank provisions

P502 PACKING INSTRUCTION P502 The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met: Combination packagings Maximum net mass Inner packagings Outer packagings Glass 5 ℓ Drums Metal 5 ℓ steel (1A1, 1A2) 125 kg Plastic 5 ℓ aluminium (1B1, 1B2) 125 kg other metal (1N1, 1N2) 125 kg plywood (1D) 125 kg fibre (1G) 125 kg plastics (1H1, 1H2) 125 kg Boxes steel (4A) 125 kg aluminium (4B) 125 kg other metal (4N) 125 kg natural wood (4C1) 125 kg natural wood with sift-proof 125 kg walls (4C2) plywood (4D) 125 kg reconstituted wood (4F) 125 kg fibreboard (4G) 125 kg expanded plastics (4H1) 60 kg solid plastics (4H2) 125 kg Single packagings Maximum capacity Drums steel (1A1) 250 ℓ aluminium (1B1) 250 ℓ plastics (1H1) 250 ℓ

Jerricans steel (3A1) 60 ℓ aluminium (3B1) 60 ℓ plastics (3H1) 60 ℓ

Composite packagings

Plastics receptacle in steel or aluminium drum (6HA1, 6HB1) 250 ℓ Plastics receptacle in fibre, plastics or plywood drum (6HG1, 6HH1, 6HD1) 250 ℓ Plastics receptacle in steel or aluminium crate or box or plastics receptacle in 60 ℓ wood, plywood, fibreboard or solid plastics box (6HA2, 6HB2, 6HC, 6HD2, 6HG2 or 6HH2) Glass receptacle in steel, aluminium, fibre, plywood, solid plastics or expanded 60 ℓ plastics drum (6PA1, 6PB1, 6PG1, 6PD1, 6PH1 or 6PH2) or in a steel, aluminium, wood, fibreboard or plywood box (6PA2, 6PB2, 6PC, 6PG2 or 6PD2) Special packing provision: PP28 For UN 1873, only glass inner packagings or receptacles are authorized for combination and composite packagings.

258 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

276

Bilaga 1

Chapter 4.1 – Use of packagings, including IBCs and large packagings

P503 PACKING INSTRUCTION P503 The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met: Combination packagings Maximum net mass Inner packagings Outer packagings Glass 5 kg Drums Metal 5 kg steel (1A1, 1A2) 125 kg Plastic 5 kg aluminium (1B1, 1B2) 125 kg other metal (1N1, 1N2) 125 kg fibre (1G) 125 kg plywood (1D) 125 kg plastics (1H1, 1H2) 125 kg Boxes steel (4A) 125 kg aluminium (4B) 125 kg other metal (4N) 125 kg natural wood (4C1) 125 kg natural wood with sift-proof 125 kg walls (4C2) plywood (4D) 125 kg reconstituted wood (4F) 125 kg fibreboard (4G) 40 kg expanded plastics (4H1) 60 kg solid plastics (4H2) 125 kg Single packagings Maximum net mass Metal drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1 or 1N2) with a maximum net mass. 250 kg Fibreboard (1G) or plywood drums (1D) fitted with inner liners. 200 kg

P504 PACKING INSTRUCTION P504 The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met: Combination packagings Maximum net mass (1) Outer packagings: (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G, 4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 75 kg 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H2) Inner packagings: Glass receptacles with a maximum capacity of 5 ℓ (2) Outer packagings: 1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G, 4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 75 kg 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H2 Inner packagings: Plastics receptacles with a maximum capacity of 30 ℓ (3) Outer packagings: 1G, 4F or 4G 125 kg Inner packagings: Metal receptacles with a maximum capacity of 40 ℓ (4) Outer packagings: (1A1, 1A2, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4H2) 225 kg Inner packagings: Metal receptacles with a maximum capacity of 40 ℓ Single packagings Maximum capacity Drums steel, non-removable head (1A1) 250 ℓ aluminium, non-removable head (1B1) 250 ℓ metal, other than steel or aluminium, non-removable head (1N1) 250 ℓ plastics, non-removable head (1H1) 250 ℓ Jerricans steel, non-removable head (3A1) 60 ℓ aluminium, non-removable head (3B1) 60 ℓ plastics, non-removable head (3H1) 60 ℓ Composite packagings Plastics receptacle in steel or aluminium drum (6HA1, 6HB1) 250 ℓ Plastics receptacle in fibre, plastics or plywood drum (6HG1, 6HH1, 6HD1) 120 ℓ Plastics receptacle in steel or aluminium crate or box or plastics receptacle in wood, 60 ℓ plywood, fibreboard or solid plastics box (6HA2, 6HB2, 6HC, 6HD2, 6HG2 or 6HH2) Glass receptacle in steel, aluminium, fibre, plywood, solid plastics or expanded plastics 60 ℓ drum (6PA1, 6PB1, 6PG1, 6PD1, 6PH1 or 6PH2) or in steel, aluminium, wood, fibreboard or plywood box (6PA2, 6PB2, 6PC, 6PG2 or 6PD2) Special packing provisions: PP10 For UN 2014 and UN 3149, the packaging shall be vented. PP31 For UN 2626, packagings shall be hermetically sealed.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 259

277

Bilaga 1

Part 4 – Packing and tank provisions

P520 PACKING INSTRUCTION P520 This instruction applies to organic peroxides of class 5.2 and self-reactive substances of class 4.1. The packagings listed below are authorized provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 and special provisions of 4.1.7 are met. The packing methods are designated OP1 to OP8. The packing methods appropriate for the individual currently assigned organic peroxides and self-reactive substances are listed in 2.4.2.3.2.3 and 2.5.3.2.4. The quantities specified for each packing method are the maximum quantities authorized per package. The following packagings are authorized: (1) Combination packagings with outer packagings comprising boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1 and 4H2), drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1G, 1H1, 1H2 and 1D), jerricans (3A1, 3A2, 3B1, 3B2, 3H1 and 3H2); (2) Single packagings consisting of drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1G, 1H1, 1H2 and 1D) and jerricans (3A1, 3A2, 3B1, 3B2, 3H1 and 3H2); (3) Composite packagings with plastics inner receptacles (6HA1, 6HA2, 6HB1, 6HB2, 6HC, 6HD1, 6HD2, 6HG1, 6HG2, 6HH1 and 6HH2). Maximum quantity per packaging/package1 for packing methods OP1 to OP8 Packing method 1 1 OP1 OP2 OP3 OP4 OP5 OP6 OP7 OP8 Maximum quantity 2 Maximum mass (kg) for solids and for 0.5 0.5/10 5 5/25 25 50 50 400 combination packagings (liquid and solid) 3 4 Maximum contents in litres for liquids 0.5 – 5 – 30 60 60 225 1 If two values are given, the first applies to the maximum net mass per inner packaging and the second to the maximum net mass of the complete package. 2 60 kg for jerricans/200 kg for boxes and, for solids, 400 kg in combination packagings with outer packagings comprising boxes (4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1 and 4H2) and with inner packagings of plastics or fibre with a maximum net mass of 25 kg. 3 Viscous liquids shall be treated as solids when they do not meet the criteria provided in the definition for liquids presented in 1.2.1. 4 60 ℓ for jerricans.

Additional provisions: 1 Metal packagings, including inner packagings of combination packagings and outer packagings of combination or composite packagings, may only be used for packing methods OP7 and OP8. 2 In combination packagings, glass receptacles may only be used as inner packagings with a maximum content of 0.5 kg for solids or 0.5 ℓ for liquids. 3 In combination packagings, cushioning materials shall not be readily combustible. 4 The packaging of an organic peroxide or self-reactive substance required to bear an EXPLOSIVE subsidiary risk label (Model No. 1, see 5.2.2.2.2) shall also comply with the provisions given in 4.1.5.10 and 4.1.5.11. Special packing provisions: PP21 For certain self-reactive substances of types B or C, UN Nos. 3221, 3222, 3223, 3224, 3231, 3232, 3233 and 3234, a smaller packaging than that allowed by packing methods OP5 or OP6 respectively shall be used (see 4.1.7 and 2.4.2.3.2.3). PP22 UN 3241, 2-bromo-2-nitropropane-1,3-diol, shall be packed in accordance with packing method OP6.

P600 PACKING INSTRUCTION P600 This instruction applies to UN Nos. 1700, 2016 and 2017. The following packagings are authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met: Outer packagings: (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G, 4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H2) meeting the packing group II performance level. The articles shall be individually packaged and separated from each other using partitions, dividers, inner packagings or cushioning material to prevent inadvertent discharge during normal conditions of transport. Maximum net mass: 75 kg

260 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

278

Bilaga 1

Chapter 4.1 – Use of packagings, including IBCs and large packagings

P601 PACKING INSTRUCTION P601 The following packagings are authorized provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met and the packagings are hermetically sealed: (1) Combination packagings with a maximum gross mass of 15 kg, consisting of: – one or more glass inner packaging(s) with a maximum net quantity of 1 litre each and filled to not more than 90% of their capacity; the closure(s) of which shall be physically held in place by any means capable of preventing back-off or loosening by impact or vibration during transport, individually placed in – metal receptacles together with cushioning and absorbent material sufficient to absorb the entire contents of the glass inner packaging(s), further packed in – 1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G, 4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G or 4H2 outer packagings. (2) Combination packagings consisting of metal inner packagings not exceeding 5 ℓ in capacity individually packed with absorbent material sufficient to absorb the contents and inert cushioning material in 1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G, 4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G or 4H2 outer packagings with a maximum gross mass of 75 kg. Inner packagings shall not be filled to more than 90% of their capacity. The closure of each inner packaging shall be physically held in place by any means capable of preventing back-off or loosening of the closure by impact or vibration during transport. (3) Packagings consisting of: Outer packagings: Steel or plastics drums, (1A1, 1A2, 1H1 or 1H2), tested in accordance with the test provisions in 6.1.5 at a mass corresponding to the mass of the assembled package either as a packaging intended to contain inner packagings, or as a single packaging intended to contain solids or liquids, and marked accordingly. Inner packagings: Drums and composite packagings (1A1, 1B1, 1N1, 1H1 or 6HA1), meeting the provisions of chapter 6.1 for single packagings, subject to the following conditions: .1 the hydraulic pressure test shall be conducted at a pressure of at least 3 bar (gauge pressure); .2 the design and production leakproofness tests shall be conducted at a test pressure of 0.30 bar; .3 they shall be isolated from the outer drum by the use of inert shock-mitigating cushioning material which surrounds the inner packaging on all sides; .4 their capacity shall not exceed 125 ℓ; .5 closures shall be of a screw-cap type that are: (i) physically held in place by any means capable of preventing back-off or loosening of the closure by impact or vibration during transport; and (ii) provided with a cap seal. .6 The outer and inner packagings shall be subjected periodically to a leakproofness test according to .2 at intervals of not more than two and a half years; and .7 The outer and inner packagings shall bear in clearly legible and durable characters: (i) the date (month, year) of the initial testing and the latest periodic test; (ii) the name or authorized symbol of the party performing the tests and inspections. (4) Pressure receptacles, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.3.6 are met. They shall be subjected to an initial test and periodic tests every 10 years at a pressure of not less than 1 MPa (10 bar) (gauge pressure). Pressure receptacles may not be equipped with any pressure relief device. Each pressure receptacle containing a toxic 3 by inhalation liquid with an LC50 less than or equal to 200 mℓ/m (ppm) shall be closed with a plug or valve conforming to the following: (a) Each plug or valve shall have a taper-threaded connection directly to the pressure receptacle and be capable of withstanding the test pressure of the pressure receptacle without damage or leakage; (b) Each valve shall be of the packless type with non-perforated diaphragm, except that, for corrosive materials, a valve may be of the packed type with an assembly made gas-tight by means of a seal cap with gasket joint attached to the valve body or the pressure receptacle to prevent loss of material through or past the packing; (c) Each valve outlet shall be sealed by a threaded cap or threaded solid plug and inert gasket material; (d) The materials of construction for the pressure receptacle, valves, plugs, outlet caps, luting and gaskets shall be compatible with each other and with the lading. Each pressure receptacle with a wall thickness at any point of less than 2.0 mm and each pressure receptacle that does not have fitted valve protection shall be transported in an outer packaging. Pressure receptacles shall not be manifolded or interconnected.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 261

279

Bilaga 1

Part 4 – Packing and tank provisions

P602 PACKING INSTRUCTION P602 The following packagings are authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met and the packagings are hermetically sealed: (1) Combination packagings with a maximum gross mass of 15 kg, consisting of: – one or more glass inner packaging(s) with a maximum net quantity of 1 litre each and filled to not more than 90% of their capacity, the closure(s) of which shall be physically held in place by any means capable of preventing back-off or loosening by impact or vibration during transport, individually placed in – metal receptacles together with cushioning and absorbent material sufficient to absorb the entire contents of the glass inner packaging(s), further packed in – 1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G, 4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G or 4H2 outer packagings. (2) Combination packagings consisting of metal inner packagings individually packed with absorbent material sufficient to absorb the contents and inert cushioning material in 1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2 1D, 1G, 4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G or 4H2 outer packagings with a maximum gross mass of 75 kg. Inner packagings shall not be filled to more than 90% of their capacity. The closure of each inner packaging shall be physically held in place by any means capable of preventing back-off or loosening of the closure by impact or vibration during transport. Inner packagings shall not exceed 5 ℓ in capacity. (3) Drums and composite packagings (1A1, 1B1, 1N1, 1H1, 6HA1 or 6HH1), subject to the following conditions: .1 the hydraulic pressure test shall be conducted at a pressure of at least 3 bar (gauge pressure); .2 the design and production leakproofness tests shall be conducted at a test pressure of 0.30 bar; and .3 closures shall be of a screw-cap type that are: (i) physically held in place by any means capable of preventing back-off or loosening of the closure by impact or vibration during transport; and (ii) provided with a cap seal. (4) Pressure receptacles, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.3.6 are met. They shall be subjected to an initial test and periodic tests every 10 years at a pressure of not less than 1 MPa (10 bar) (gauge pressure). Pressure receptacles may not be equipped with any pressure relief device. Each pressure receptacle containing a toxic 3 by inhalation liquid with an LC50 less than or equal to 200 mℓ/m (ppm) shall be closed with a plug or valve conforming to the following: (a) Each plug or valve shall have a taper-threaded connection directly to the pressure receptacle and be capable of withstanding the test pressure of the pressure receptacle without damage or leakage; (b) Each valve shall be of the packless type with non-perforated diaphragm, except that, for corrosive materials, a valve may be of the packed type with an assembly made gas-tight by means of a seal cap with gasket joint attached to the valve body or the pressure receptacle to prevent loss of material through or past the packing; (c) Each valve outlet shall be sealed by a threaded cap or threaded solid plug and inert gasket material; (d) The materials of construction for the pressure receptacle, valves, plugs, outlet caps, luting and gaskets shall be compatible with each other and with the lading. Each pressure receptacle with a wall thickness at any point of less than 2.0 mm and each pressure receptacle that does not have fitted valve protection shall be transported in an outer packaging. Pressure receptacles shall not be manifolded or interconnected.

262 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

280

Bilaga 1

Chapter 4.1 – Use of packagings, including IBCs and large packagings

P620 PACKING INSTRUCTION P620 This instruction applies to UN 2814 and UN 2900.

The following packagings are authorized, provided the special packing provisions of 4.1.8 are met: Packagings meeting the provisions of chapter 6.3 and approved accordingly consisting of: .1 Inner packagings comprising: (i) leakproof primary receptacle(s); (ii) a leakproof secondary packaging; (iii) other than for solid infectious substances, an absorbent material in sufficient quantity to absorb the entire contents placed between the primary receptacle(s) and the secondary packaging; if multiple primary receptacles are placed in a single secondary packaging, they shall be either individually wrapped or separated so as to prevent contact between them; .2 A rigid outer packaging: Drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G); Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2); Jerricans (3A1, 3A2, 3B1, 3B2, 3H1, 3H2). The smallest external dimension shall be not less than 100 mm. .

Additional provisions: 1 Inner packagings containing infectious substances shall not be consolidated with inner packagings containing unrelated types of goods. Complete packages may be overpacked in accordance with the provisions of 1.2.1 and 5.1.2: such an overpack may contain dry ice. 2 Other than for exceptional consignments, such as whole organs which require special packaging, the following additional provisions shall apply: (a) Substances consigned at ambient temperatures or at a higher temperature. Primary receptacles shall be of glass, metal or plastics. Positive means of ensuring a leakproof seal shall be provided, e.g., a heat seal, a skirted stopper or a metal crimp seal. If screw caps are used, they shall be secured by positive means, e.g., tape, paraffin sealing tape or a manufactured locking closure; (b) Substances consigned refrigerated or frozen. Ice, dry ice or other refrigerant shall be placed around the secondary packaging(s) or alternatively in an overpack with one or more complete packages marked in accordance with 6.3.3. Interior supports shall be provided to secure secondary packaging(s) or packages in position after the ice or dry ice has dissipated. If ice is used, the outer packaging or overpack shall be leakproof. If dry ice is used, the outer packaging or overpack shall permit the release of carbon dioxide gas. The primary receptacle and the secondary packaging shall maintain their integrity at the temperature of the refrigerant used; (c) Substances consigned in liquid nitrogen. Plastics primary receptacles capable of withstanding very low temperature shall be used. The secondary packaging shall also be capable of withstanding very low temperatures, and in most cases will need to be fitted over the primary receptacle individually. Provisions for the consignment of liquid nitrogen shall also be fulfilled. The primary receptacle and the secondary packaging shall maintain their integrity at the temperature of the liquid nitrogen. (d) Lyophilized substances may also be transported in primary receptacles that are flame-sealed glass ampoules or rubber-stoppered glass vials fitted with metal seals. 3 Whatever the intended temperature of the consignment, the primary receptacle or the secondary packaging shall be capable of withstanding, without leakage, an internal pressure producing a pressure differential of not less than 95 kPa and temperatures in the range –40°C to +55°C. 4 Other dangerous goods shall not be packed in the same packaging as class 6.2 infectious substances unless they are necessary for maintaining the viability, stabilizing or preventing degradation or neutralizing the hazards of the infectious substances. A quantity of 30 mℓ or less of dangerous goods included in classes 3, 8 or 9 may be packed in each primary receptacle containing infectious substances. These small quantities of dangerous goods of classes 3, 8 or 9 are not subject to any additional provisions of this Code when packed in accordance with this packing instruction. 5 Alternative packagings for the transport of animal material may be authorized by the competent authority in accordance with the provisions of 4.1.3.7.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 263

281

Bilaga 1

Part 4 – Packing and tank provisions

P621 PACKING INSTRUCTION P621 This instruction applies to UN 3291. The following packagings are authorized provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 except 4.1.1.15 and 4.1.3 are met: (1) Provided that there is sufficient absorbent material to absorb the entire amount of liquid present and the packaging is capable of retaining liquids: Drums (1A2, 1B2, 1N2, 1H2, 1D, 1G); Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2); Jerricans (3A2, 3B2, 3H2). Packagings shall conform to the packing group II performance level for solids. (2) For packages containing larger quantities of liquid: Drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G); Jerricans (3A1, 3A2, 3B1, 3B2, 3H1, 3H2); Composite packagings (6HA1, 6HB1, 6HG1, 6HH1, 6HD1, 6HA2, 6HB2, 6HC, 6HD2, 6HG2, 6HH2, 6PA1, 6PB1, 6PG1, 6PD1, 6PH1, 6PH2, 6PA2, 6PB2, 6PC, 6PG2 or 6PD2). Packagings shall conform to the packing group II performance level for liquids. Additional rerquirement: Packagings intended to contain sharp objects such as broken glass and needles shall be resistant to puncture and retain liquids under the performance test conditions in Chapter 6.1.

264 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

282

Bilaga 1

Chapter 4.1 – Use of packagings, including IBCs and large packagings

P650 PACKING INSTRUCTION P650 This instruction applies to UN 3373. (1) The packaging shall be of good quality, strong enough to withstand the shocks and loadings normally encountered during transport, including transhipment between cargo transport units and between cargo transport units and warehouses as well as any removal from a pallet or overpack for subsequent manual or mechanical handling. Packagings shall be constructed and closed to prevent any loss of contents that might be caused under normal conditions of transport by vibration or by changes in temperature, humidity or pressure. (2) The packaging shall consist of at least three components: (a) a primary receptacle; (b) a secondary packaging; and (c) an outer packaging. of which either the secondary or the outer packaging shall be rigid. (3) Primary receptacles shall be packed in secondary packagings in such a way that, under normal conditions of transport, they cannot break, be punctured or leak their contents into the secondary packaging. Secondary packagings shall be secured in outer packagings with suitable cushioning material. Any leakage of the contents shall not compromise the integrity of the cushioning material or of the outer packaging. (4) For transport, the mark illustrated below shall be displayed on the external surface of the outer packaging on a background of a contrasting colour and shall be clearly visible and legible. The mark shall be in the form of a square set at an angle of 45° (diamond-shaped) with each side having a length of at least 50 mm, the width of the line shall be at least 2 mm and the letters and numbers shall be at least 6 mm high. The proper shipping name “BIOLOGICAL SUBSTANCE, CATEGORY B” in letters at least 6 mm high shall be marked on the outer packaging adjacent to the diamond-shaped mark.

UN 3373

(5) At least one surface of the outer packaging shall have a minimum dimension of 100 mm × 100 mm. (6) The completed package shall be capable of successfully passing the drop test in 6.3.5.3 as specified in 6.3.5.2 of this Code at a height of 1.2 m. Following the appropriate drop sequence, there shall be no leakage from the primary receptacle(s) which shall remain protected by absorbent material, when required, in the secondary packaging. (7) For liquid substances (a) The primary receptacle(s) shall be leakproof; (b) The secondary packaging shall be leakproof; (c) If multiple fragile primary receptacles are placed in a single secondary packaging, they shall either be individually wrapped or separated to prevent contact between them; (d) Absorbent material shall be placed between the primary receptacle(s) and the secondary packaging. The absorbent material shall be in a quantity sufficient to absorb the entire contents of the primary receptacle(s) so that any release of the liquid substance will not compromise the integrity of the cushioning material or of the outer packaging; (e) The primary receptacle or the secondary packaging shall be capable of withstanding, without leakage, an internal pressure of 95 kPa (0.95 bar). (8) For solid substances (a) The primary receptacle(s) shall be siftproof; (b) The secondary packaging shall be siftproof; (c) If multiple fragile primary receptacles are placed in a single secondary packaging, they shall either be individually wrapped or separated to prevent contact between them. (d) If there is any doubt as to whether or not residual liquid may be present in the primary receptacle during transport then a packaging suitable for liquids, including absorbent materials, shall be used.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 265

283

Bilaga 1

Part 4 – Packing and tank provisions

P650 PACKING INSTRUCTION (continued) P650 (9) Refrigerated or frozen specimens: Ice, dry ice and liquid nitrogen (a) When dry ice or liquid nitrogen is used as a coolant, the requirements of 5.5.3 shall apply. When used, ice shall be placed outside the secondary packagings or in the outer packaging or an overpack. Interior supports shall be provided to secure the secondary packagings in the original position. If ice is used, the outside packaging or overpack shall be leakproof. (b) The primary receptacle and the secondary packaging shall maintain their integrity at the temperature of the refrigerant used as well as the temperatures and the pressures which could result if refrigeration were lost. (10) When packages are placed in an overpack, the package markings required by this packing instruction shall either be clearly visible or be reproduced on the outside of the overpack. (11) Infectious substances assigned to UN 3373 which are packed and marked in accordance with this packing instruction are not subject to any other provisions of this Code. (12) Clear instructions on filling and closing such packages shall be provided by packaging manufacturers and subsequent distributors to the consignor or to the person who prepares the package (e.g., patient) to enable the package to be correctly prepared for transport. (13) Other dangerous goods shall not be packed in the same packaging as class 6.2 infectious substances unless they are necessary for maintaining the viability, stabilizing or preventing degradation or neutralizing the hazards of the infectious substances. A quantity of 30 mℓ or less of dangerous goods included in classes 3, 8 or 9 may be packed in each primary receptacle containing infectious substances. When these small quantities of dangerous goods are packed with infectious substances in accordance with this packing instruction, no other provisions of the Code need be met. Additional provision: Alternative packagings for the transport of animal material may be authorized by the competent authority in accordance with the provisions of 4.1.3.7.

P800 PACKING INSTRUCTION P800 This instruction applies to UN 2803 and UN 2809. The following packagings are authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met: (1) Pressure receptacles, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.3.6 are met. (2) Steel flasks or bottles with threaded closures with a capacity not exceeding 3.0 ℓ; or (3) Combination packagings which conform to the following provisions: (a) Inner packagings shall comprise glass, metal or rigid plastics intended to contain liquids with a maximum net mass of 15 kg each. (b) The inner packagings shall be packed with sufficient cushioning material to prevent breakage. (c) Either the inner packagings or the outer packagings shall have inner liners or bags of strong leakproof and puncture-resistant material impervious to the contents and completely surrounding the contents to prevent it from escaping from the package irrespective of its position or orientation. (d) The following outer packagings and maximum net masses are authorized: Outer packaging Maximum net mass Drums steel ((1A1, 1A2) 400 kg metal, other than steel or aluminium (1N1, 1N2) 400 kg plastics (1H1, 1H2) 400 kg plywood (1D) 400 kg fibre (1G) 400 kg Boxes steel (4A) 400 kg metal, other than steel or aluminium (4N) 400 kg natural wood (4C1) 250 kg natural wood with sift-proof walls (4C2) 250 kg plywood (4D) 250 kg reconstituted wood (4F) 125 kg fibreboard (4G) 125 kg expanded plastics (4H1) 60 kg solid plastics (4H2) 125 kg Special packing provision: PP41 For UN 2803, when it is necessary to transport gallium at low temperatures in order to maintain it in a completely solid state, the above packagings may be overpacked in a strong, water-resistant outer packaging which contains dry ice or other means of refrigeration. If a refrigerant is used, all of the above materials used in the packaging of gallium shall be chemically and physically resistant to the refrigerant and shall have impact resistance at the low temperatures of the refrigerant employed. If dry ice is used, the outer packaging shall permit the release of carbon dioxide gas.

266 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

284

Bilaga 1

Chapter 4.1 – Use of packagings, including IBCs and large packagings

P801 PACKING INSTRUCTION P801 This instruction applies to new and used batteries assigned to UN Nos. 2794, 2795 or 3028. The following packagings are authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1, except 4.1.1.3, and 4.1.3 are met, except that packagings need not conform to the provisions of part 6: (1) Rigid outer packagings; (2) Wooden slatted crates; (3) Pallets. Used storage batteries may also be transported loose in stainless steel or plastics battery boxes capable of containing any free liquid. Additional provisions: 1 Batteries shall be protected against short circuits. 2 Batteries stacked shall be adequately secured in tiers separated by a layer of non-conductive material. 3 Battery terminals shall not support the mass of other superimposed elements. 4 Batteries shall be packaged or secured to prevent inadvertent movement. 5 For UN 2794 and UN 2795, batteries shall be capable of passing a tilt test at an angle of 45° with no spillage of liquid.

P802 PACKING INSTRUCTION P802 The following packagings are authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met: (1) Combination packagings Outer packagings: 1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G, 4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G or 4H2; maximum net mass: 75 kg. Inner packagings: glass or plastics; maximum capacity: 10 ℓ. (2) Combination packagings Outer packagings: 1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G, 4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G or 4H2; maximum net mass: 125 kg. Inner packagings: metal; maximum capacity: 40 ℓ (3) Composite packagings: Glass receptacle in steel, aluminium, plywood or solid plastics drum (6PA1, 6PB1, 6PD1 or 6PH2) or in a steel, aluminium, wood or plywood box (6PA2, 6PB2, 6PC or 6PD2); maximum capacity: 60 ℓ. (4) Steel drums (1A1) with a maximum capacity of 250 ℓ. (5) Pressure receptacles may be used provided that the general provisions of 4.1.3.6 are met. Special packing provisions: PP79 For UN 1790 with more than 60% but not more than 85% hydrofluoric acid, see P001. PP81 For UN 1790 with not more than 85% hydrogen fluoride and UN 2031 with more than 55% nitric acid, the permitted use of plastics drums and jerricans as single packagings shall be two years from their date of manufacture.

P803 PACKING INSTRUCTION P803 This instruction applies to UN 2028. The following packagings are authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met: (1) Drums (1A2, 1B2, 1N2, 1H2, 1D, 1G); (2) Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H2); Maximum net mass: 75 kg. The articles shall be individually packaged and separated from each other, using partitions, dividers, inner packagings or cushioning material to prevent inadvertent discharge during normal conditions of transport.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 267

285

Bilaga 1

Part 4 – Packing and tank provisions

P804 PACKING INSTRUCTION P804 This instruction applies to UN 1744. The following packagings are authorized provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met and the packagings are hermetically sealed: (1) Combination packagings with a maximum gross mass of 25 kg, consisting of one or more glass inner packaging(s) with a maximum capacity of 1.3 litres each and filled to no more than 90% of their capacity; the closure(s) of which shall be physically held in place by any means capable of preventing back-off or loosening by impact or vibration during transport, individually placed in: – metal or rigid plastics receptacles together with cushioning and absorbent material sufficient to absorb the entire contents of the glass inner packaging(s), further packed in: – 1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G, 4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G or 4H2 outer packagings. (2) Combination packagings consisting of metal or polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF) inner packagings, not exceeding 5 litres in capacity individually packed with absorbent material sufficient to absorb the contents and inert cushioning material in 1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G, 4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G or 4H2 outer packagings with a maximum gross mass of 75 kg. Inner packagings shall not be filled to more than 90% of their capacity. The closure of each inner packaging shall be physically held in place by any means capable of preventing back-off or loosening of the closure by impact or vibration during transport. (3) Packagings consisting of: Outer packagings: Steel or plastics drums (1A1, 1A2, 1H1 or 1H2) tested in accordance with the test requirements in 6.1.5 at a mass corresponding to the mass of the assembled package either as a packaging intended to contain inner packagings, or as a single packaging intended to contain solids or liquids, and marked accordingly; Inner packagings: Drums and composite packagings (1A1, 1B1, 1N1, 1H1 or 6HA1) meeting the requirements of chapter 6.1 for single packagings, subject to the following conditions: (a) The hydraulic pressure test shall be conducted at a pressure of at least 300 kPa (3 bar) (gauge pressure); (b) The design and production leakproofness tests shall be conducted at a test pressure of 30 kPa (0.3 bar); (c) They shall be isolated from the outer drum by the use of inert shock-mitigating cushioning material which surrounds the inner packaging on all sides; (d) Their capacity shall not exceed 125 litres; (e) Closures shall be of a screw type that are: (i) Physically held in place by any means capable of preventing back–off or loosening of the closure by impact or vibration during transport; (ii) Provided with a cap seal; (f) The outer and inner packagings shall be subjected periodically to an internal inspection and leakproofness test according to (b) at intervals of not more than two and a half years; and (g) The outer and inner packagings shall bear in clearly legible and durable characters: (i) the date (month, year) of the initial test and the latest periodic test and inspection of the inner packaging; and (ii) the name or authorized symbol of the expert performing the tests and inspections. (4) Pressure receptacles, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.3.6 are met. (a) They shall be subjected to an initial test and periodic tests every 10 years at a pressure of not less than 1 MPa (10 bar) (gauge pressure); (b) They shall be subjected periodically to an internal inspection and leakproofness test at intervals of not more than two and a half years; (c) They may not be equipped with any pressure relief device; (d) Each pressure receptacle shall be closed with a plug or valve(s) fitted with a secondary closure device; and (e) The materials of construction for the pressure receptacle, valves, plugs, outlet caps, luting and gaskets shall be compatible with each other and with the contents.

268 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

286

Bilaga 1

Chapter 4.1 – Use of packagings, including IBCs and large packagings

P900 PACKING INSTRUCTION P900 This instruction applies to UN 2216. The following packagings are authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met: (1) Packagings according to P002; or (2) Bags (5H1, 5H2, 5H3, 5H4, 5L1, 5L2, 5L3, 5M1 or 5M2) with a maximum net mass of 50 kg. Fish meal may also be transported unpackaged when it is packed in closed cargo transport units and the free air space has been restricted to a minimum.

P901 PACKING INSTRUCTION P901 This instruction applies to UN 3316. TThe following combination packagings are authorized provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met: Drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G); Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2); Jerricans (3A1, 3A2, 3B1, 3B2, 3H1, 3H2). Packagings shall conform to the performance level consistent with the packing group assigned to the kit as a whole (see 3.3.1, special provision 251). Maximum quantity of dangerous goods per outer packaging: 10 kg excluding the mass of any carbon dioxide, solid (dry ice) used as a refrigerant Additional requirement: Dangerous goods in kits shall be packed in inner packagings which shall not exceed either 250 ml or 250 g and shall be protected from other materials in the kit..

P902 PACKING INSTRUCTION P902 This instruction applies to UN 3268. Packaged articles: The following packagings are authorized provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met: Drums (1A2, 1B2, 1N2, 1H2, 1D, 1G); Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2); Jerricans (3A2, 3B2, 3H2). Packagings shall conform to the packing group III performance level. The packagings shall be designed and constructed so as to prevent movement of the articles and inadvertent operation during normal conditions of transport. Unpackaged articles: The articles may also be transported unpackaged in dedicated handling devices, vehicles or containers when moved from where they are manufactured to an assembly plant. Additional requirement: Any pressure receptable shall be in accordance with the requirements of the competent authority for the substance(s) contained therein.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 269

287

Bilaga 1

Part 4 – Packing and tank provisions

P903 PACKING INSTRUCTION P903 This instruction applies to UN Nos. 3090, 3091, 3480 and 3481. The following packagings are authorized provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met: (1) For cells and batteries: Drums (1A2, 1B2, 1N2, 1H2, 1D, 1G); Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2); Jerricans (3A2, 3B2, 3H2). Cells or batteries shall be packed in packagings so that the cells or batteries are protected against damage that may be caused by the movement or placement of the cells or batteries within the packaging. Packagings shall conform to the packing group II performance level. (2) In addition for cells or batteries with a gross mass of 12 kg or more employing a strong, impact resistant outer casing, and assemblies of such cells or batteries: (a) Strong outer packagings, in protective enclosures (e.g., in fully enclosed or wooden slatted crates); or (b) Pallets or other handling devices. Cells or batteries shall be secured to prevent inadvertent movement, and the terminals shall not support the weight of other superimposed elements. Packagings need not meet the requirements of 4.1.1.3. (3) For cells or batteries packed with equipment: Packagings conforming to the requirements in paragraph (1) of this packing instruction, then placed with the equipment in an outer packaging; or Packagings that completely enclose the cells or batteries, then placed with equipment in a packaging conforming to the requirements in paragraph (1) of this packing instruction. The equipment shall be secured against movement within the outer packaging. For the purpose of this packing instruction, "equipment" means apparatus requiring the lithium metal or lithium ion cells or batteries with which it is packed for its operation. (4) For cells or batteries contained in equipment: Strong outer packagings constructed of suitable material, and of adequate strength and design in relation to the packaging capacity and its intended use. They shall be constructed in such a manner as to prevent accidental operation during transport. Packagings need not meet the requirements of 4.1.1.3. Large equipment can be offered for transport unpackaged or on pallets when the cells or batteries are afforded equivalent protection by the equipment in which they are contained. Devices such as radio frequency identification (RFID) tags, watches and temperature loggers, which are not capable of generating a dangerous evolution of heat, may be transported when intentionally active in strong outer packagings. When active, these devices shall meet defined standards for electromagnetic radiation to ensure that the operation of the device does not interfere with aircraft systems. Additional requirement: Cells or batteries shall be protected against short circuit.

270 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

288

Bilaga 1

Chapter 4.1 – Use of packagings, including IBCs and large packagings

P904 PACKING INSTRUCTION P904 This instruction applies to UN 3245. The following packagings are authorized: (1) Packagings meeting the provisions of 4.1.1.1, 4.1.1.2, 4.1.1.4, 4.1.1.8 and 4.1.3 and so designed that they meet the construction requirements of 6.1.4. Outer packagings constructed of suitable material, and of adequate strength and design in relation to the packaging capacity and its intended use, shall be used. Where this packing instruction is used for the transport of inner packagings of combination packagings the packaging shall be designed and constructed to prevent inadvertent discharge during normal conditions of transport. (2) Packagings, which need not conform to the packaging test requirements of part 6, but conforming to the following: (a) An inner packaging comprising: (i) primary receptacle(s) and a secondary packaging, the primary receptacle(s) or the secondary packaging shall be leakproof for liquids or siftproof for solids; (ii) for liquids, absorbent material placed between the primary receptacle(s) and the secondary packaging. The absorbent material shall be in a quantity sufficient to absorb the entire contents of the primary receptacle(s) so that any release of the liquid substance will not compromise the integrity of the cushioning material or of the outer packaging; (iii) if multiple fragile primary receptacles are placed in a single secondary packaging they shall be individually wrapped or separated to prevent contact between them; (b) An outer packaging shall be strong enough for its capacity, mass and intended use, and with a smallest external dimension of at least 100 mm. For transport, the mark illustrated below shall be displayed on the external surface of the outer packaging on a background of a contrasting colour and shall be clearly visible and legible. The mark shall be in the form of a square set at an angle of 45° (diamond-shaped) with each side having a length of at least 50 mm; the width of the line shall be at least 2 mm and the letters and numbers shall be at least 6 mm high.

UN 3245

Additional requirement: Ice, dry ice and liquid nitrogen When dry ice or liquid nitrogen is used as a coolant, the requirements of 5.5.3 shall apply. When used, ice shall be placed outside the secondary packagings or in the outer packaging or an overpack. Interior supports shall be provided to secure the secondary packaging in the original position. If ice is used, the outside packaging or overpack shall be leakproof.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 271

289

Bilaga 1

Part 4 – Packing and tank provisions

P905 PACKING INSTRUCTION P905 This instruction applies to UN 2990 and UN 3072. Any suitable packaging is authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met, except that packagings need not conform to the provisions of part 6. When the life-saving appliances are constructed to incorporate or are contained in rigid outer weatherproof casings (such as for lifeboats), they may be transported unpackaged. Additional provisions: 1 All dangerous substances and articles contained as equipment within the appliances shall be secured to prevent inadvertent movement and in addition: (a) signal devices of class 1 shall be packed in plastics or fibreboard inner packagings; (b) gases (class 2.2) shall be contained in cylinders as specified by the competent authority, which may be connected to the appliance; (c) electric storage batteries (class 8) and lithium batteries (class 9) shall be disconnected or electrically isolated and secured to prevent any spillage of liquid; and (d) small quantities of other dangerous substances (for example in classes 3, 4.1 and 5.2) shall be packed in strong inner packagings. 2 Preparation for transport and packaging shall include provisions to prevent any accidental inflation of the appliance.

P906 PACKING INSTRUCTION P906 This instruction applies to UN Nos. 2315, 3151, 3152 and 3432. The following packagings are authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met: (1) For liquids and solids containing or contaminated with PCBs or polyhalogenated biphenyls or terphenyls: Packagings in accordance with P001 or P002, as appropriate. (2) For transformers and condensers and other devices: Leakproof containment system which is capable of containing, in addition to the devices, at least 1.25 times the volume of the liquid PCBs, polyhalogenated biphenyls or terphenyls present in them. There shall be sufficient absorbent material in the packagings to absorb at least 1.1 times the volume of liquid which is contained in the devices. In general, transformers and condensers shall be transported in leakproof metal packagings which are capable of holding, in addition to the transformers and condensers, at least 1.25 times the volume of the liquid present in them. Notwithstanding the above, liquids and solids not packaged in accordance with P001 and P002 and unpackaged transformers and condensers may be transported in cargo transport units fitted with a leakproof metal tray to a height of at least 800 mm, containing sufficient inert absorbent material to absorb at least 1.1 times the volume of any free liquid. Additional provision: Adequate provisions shall be taken to seal the transformers and condensers to prevent leakage during normal conditions of transport.

P907 PACKING INSTRUCTION P907 If the machinery or apparatus is constructed and designed so that the receptacles containing the dangerous goods are afforded adequate protection, an outer packaging is not required. Dangerous goods in machinery or apparatus shall otherwise be packed in outer packagings constructed of suitable material, and of adequate strength and design in relation to the packaging capacity and its intended use, and meeting the applicable requirements of 4.1.1.1. Receptacles containing dangerous goods shall conform to the general provisions in 4.1.1, except that 4.1.1.3, 4.1.1.4, 4.1.1.12 and 4.1.1.14 do not apply. For class 2.2 gases, the inner cylinder or receptacle, its contents and filling density shall be to the satisfaction of the competent authority of the country in which the cylinder or receptacle is filled. In addition, the manner in which receptacles are contained within the machinery or apparatus shall be such that, under normal conditions of transport, damage to receptacles containing the dangerous goods is unlikely; and in the event of damage to the receptacles containing solid or liquid dangerous goods, no leakage of the dangerous goods from the machinery or apparatus is possible (a leakproof liner may be used to satisfy this requirement). Receptacles containing dangerous goods shall be so installed, secured or cushioned as to prevent their breakage or leakage and so as to control their movement within the machinery or apparatus during normal conditions of transport. Cushioning material shall not react dangerously with the content of the receptacles. Any leakage of the contents shall not substantially impair the protective properties of the cushioning material.

4.1.4.2 Packing instructions concerning the use of IBCs

IBC01 PACKING INSTRUCTION IBC01 The following IBCs are authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.2 and 4.1.3 are met: Metal (31A, 31B and 31N).

272 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

290

Bilaga 1

Chapter 4.1 – Use of packagings, including IBCs and large packagings

IBC02 PACKING INSTRUCTION IBC02 The following IBCs are authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.2 and 4.1.3 are met: (1) Metal (31A, 31B and 31N); (2) Rigid plastics (31H1 and 31H2); (3) Composite (31HZ1). Special packing provisions: B5 For UN Nos. 1791, 2014, 2984 and 3149, IBCs shall be provided with a device to allow venting during transport. The inlet to the venting device shall be sited in the vapour space of the IBC under maximum filling conditions during transport. B8 The pure form of this substance shall not be transported in IBCs since it is known to have a vapour pressure of more than 110 kPa at 50°C or 130 kPa at 55°C. B15 For UN 2031 with more than 55% nitric acid, the permitted use of rigid plastics IBCs and of composite IBCs with a rigid plastics inner receptacle shall be two years from their date of manufacture. B20 For UN Nos. 1716, 1717, 1736, 1737, 1738, 1742, 1743, 1755, 1764, 1768, 1776, 1778, 1782, 1789, 1790, 1796, 1826, 1830, 1832, 2031, 2308, 2353, 2513, 2584, 2796 and 2817 coming under PG II, IBCs shall be fitted with two shut-off devices.

IBC03 PACKING INSTRUCTION IBC03 The following IBCs are authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.2 and 4.1.3 are met: (1) Metal (31A, 31B and 31N); (2) Rigid plastics (31H1 and 31H2); (3) Composite (31HZ1 and 31HA2, 31HB2, 31HN2, 31HD2 and 31HH2). Special packing provisions: B8 The pure form of this substance shall not be transported in IBCs since it is known to have a vapour pressure of more than 110 kPa at 50°C or 130 kPa at 55°C. B11 Notwithstanding the provisions of 4.1.1.10, UN 2672 ammonia solution in concentrations not exceeding 25% may be transported in rigid or composite plastics IBCs (31H1, 31H2 and 31HZ1).

IBC04 PACKING INSTRUCTION IBC04 The following IBCs are authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.2 and 4.1.3 are met: Metal (11A, 11B, 11N, 21A, 21B and 21N). Special packing provision: B1 For packing group I substances, IBCs shall be carried in closed cargo transport units or in freight containers/ vehicles, which shall have rigid sides or fences at least to the height of the IBC.

IBC05 PACKING INSTRUCTION IBC05 The following IBCs are authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.2 and 4.1.3 are met: (1) Metal (11A, 11B, 11N, 21A, 21B and 21N); (2) Rigid plastics (11H1, 11H2, 21H1 and 21H2); (3) Composite (11HZ1 and 21HZ1). Special packing provisions: B1 For packing group I substances, IBCs shall be carried in closed cargo transport units or in freight containers/ vehicles, which shall have rigid sides or fences at least to the height of the IBC. B2 For solid substances in IBCs other than metal or rigid plastics IBCs, the IBCs shall be carried in closed cargo transport units or in freight containers/vehicles, which shall have rigid sides or fences at least to the height of the IBC.

IBC06 PACKING INSTRUCTION IBC06 The following IBCs are authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.2 and 4.1.3 are met: (1) Metal (11A, 11B, 11N, 21A, 21B and 21N); (2) Rigid plastics (11H1, 11H2, 21H1 and 21H2); (3) Composite (11HZ1, 11HZ2, 21HZ1 and 21HZ2). Additional provision: Where the solid may become liquid during transport see 4.1.3.4. Special packing provisions: B1 For packing group I substances, IBCs shall be carried in closed cargo transport units or in freight containers/ vehicles, which shall have rigid sides or fences at least to the height of the IBC. B2 For solid substances in IBCs other than metal or rigid plastics IBCs, the IBCs shall be carried in closed cargo transport units or in freight containers/vehicles, which shall have rigid sides or fences at least to the height of the IBC. B12 For UN 2907, IBCs shall meet the packing group II performance level. IBCs meeting the test criteria of packing group I shall not be used.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 273

291

Bilaga 1

Part 4 – Packing and tank provisions

IBC07 PACKING INSTRUCTION IBC07 The following IBCs are authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.2 and 4.1.3 are met: (1) Metal (11A, 11B, 11N, 21A, 21B and 21N); (2) Rigid plastics (11H1, 11H2, 21H1 and 21H2); (3) Composite (11HZ1, 11HZ2, 21HZ1 and 21HZ2); (4) Wooden (11C, 11D and 11F). Additional provision: 1 Where the solid may become liquid during transport see 4.1.3.4. 2 Liners of wooden IBCs shall be sift-proof. Special packing provisions: B1 For packing group I substances, IBCs shall be carried in closed cargo transport units or in freight containers/ vehicles, which shall have rigid sides or fences at least to the height of the IBC. B2 For solid substances in IBCs other than metal or rigid plastics IBCs, the IBCs shall be carried in closed cargo transport units or in freight containers/vehicles, which shall have rigid sides or fences at least to the height of the IBC. B4 Flexible, fibreboard or wooden IBCs shall be sift-proof and water-resistant or shall be fitted with a sift-proof and water-resistant liner.

IBC08 PACKING INSTRUCTION IBC08 The following IBCs are authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.2 and 4.1.3 are met: (1) Metal (11A, 11B, 11N, 21A, 21B and 21N); (2) Rigid plastics (11H1, 11H2, 21H1 and 21H2); (3) Composite (11HZ1, 11HZ2, 21HZ1 and 21HZ2); (4) Fibreboard (11G); (5) Wooden (11C, 11D and 11F); (6) Flexible (13H1, 13H2, 13H3, 13H4, 13H5, 13L1, 13L2, 13L3, 13L4, 13M1 or 13M2). Additional provision: Where the solid may become liquid during transport see 4.1.3.4. Special packing provisions: B2 For substances, UN 1374 and UN 2590 in IBCs other than metal or rigid plastics IBCs, the IBCs shall be carried in closed cargo transport units or in freight containers/vehicles, which shall have rigid sides or fences at least to the height of the IBC. B3 Flexible IBCs shall be sift-proof and water-resistant or shall be fitted with a sift-proof and water-resistant liner. B4 Flexible, fibreboard or wooden IBCs shall be sift-proof and water-resistant or shall be fitted with a sift-proof and water-resistant liner. B6 For UN Nos. 1327, 1363, 1364, 1365, 1386, 1408, 1841, 2211, 2217, 2793 and 3314, IBCs are not required to meet the IBC testing provisions of chapter 6.5.

IBC99 PACKING INSTRUCTION IBC99 Only IBCs which are approved for these goods by the competent authority may be used (see 4.1.3.7). A copy of the competent authority approval shall accompany each consignment or the transport document shall include an indication that the packaging was approved by the competent authority.

IBC100 PACKING INSTRUCTION IBC100 This instruction applies to UN Nos. 0082, 0241, 0331 and 0332. The following IBCs are authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.2 and 4.1.3 and special provisions of 4.1.5 are met: (1) Metal (11A, 11B, 11N, 21A, 21B, 21N, 31A, 31B and 31N); (2) Flexible (13H2, 13H3, 13H4, 13L2, 13L3, 13L4 and 13M2); (3) Rigid plastics (11H1, 11H2, 21H1, 21H2, 31H1 and 31H2); (4) Composite (11HZ1, 11HZ2, 21HZ1, 21HZ2, 31HZ1 and 31HZ2). Additional provisions: 1 IBCs shall only be used for free-flowing substances. 2 Flexible IBCs shall only be used for solids. Special packing provisions: B9 For UN 0082, this packing instruction may only be used when the substances are mixtures of ammonium nitrate or other inorganic nitrates with other combustible substances which are not explosive ingredients. Such explosives shall not contain nitroglycerin, similar liquid organic nitrates, or chlorates. Metal IBCs are not authorized. B10 For UN 0241, this packing instruction may only be used for substances which consist of water as an essential ingredient and high proportions of ammonium nitrate or other oxidizing substances, some or all of which are in solution. The other constituents may include hydrocarbons or aluminium powder, but shall not include nitroderivatives such as trinitrotoluene. Metal IBCs are not authorized.

274 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

292

Bilaga 1

Chapter 4.1 – Use of packagings, including IBCs and large packagings

IBC520 PACKING INSTRUCTION IBC520 This instruction applies to organic peroxides and self-reactive substances of type F. The IBCs listed below are authorized for the formulations listed, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.2 and 4.1.3 and special provisions of 4.1.7.2 are met. For formulations not listed below, only IBCs which are approved by the competent authority may be used (see 4.1.7.2.2). Maximum Control Emergency UN Type of Organic peroxide quantity temper- temper- No. IBC (litres) ature ature 3109 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE F, LIQUID tert-Butyl hydroperoxide, not more than 72% with water 31A 1250 tert-Butyl peroxyacetate, not more than 32% in diluent type A 31HA1 1000 tert-Butyl peroxybenzoate, not more than 32% in diluent type A 31A 1250 tert-Butyl peroxy-3,5,5-trimethylhexanoate, not more than 37% 31A 1250 in diluent type A 31HA1 1000 Cumyl hydroperoxide, not more than 90% in diluent type A 31HA1 1250 Dibenzoyl peroxide, not more than 42% as a stable dispersion 31H1 1000 Di-tert-butyl peroxide, not more than 52% in diluent type A 31A 1250 31HA1 1000 1,1-Di-(tert-butylperoxy)cyclohexane, not more than 37% in 31A 1250 diluent type A 1,1-Di-(tert-butylperoxy)cyclohexane, not more than 42% in 31H1 1000 diluent type A Dilauroyl peroxide, not more than 42%, stable dispersion, in 31HA1 1000 water Isopropylcumyl hydroperoxide, not more than 72% in diluent 31HA1 1250 type A p-Menthyl hydroperoxide, not more than 72% in diluent type A 31HA1 1250 Peroxyacetic acid, stabilized, not more than 17% 31H1 1500 31H2 1500 31HA1 1500 31A 1500 3110 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE F, SOLID Dicumyl peroxide 31A 2000 31H1 31HA1 3119 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE F, LIQUID, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED tert-Amyl peroxypivalate, not more than 32% in diluent type A 31A 1250 +10°C +15°C tert-Butyl peroxy-2-ethylhexanoate, not more than 32% in 31HA1 1000 +30°C +35°C diluent type B 31A 1250 +30°C +35°C tert-Butyl peroxyneodecanoate, not more than 32% in diluent 31A 1250 0°C +10°C type A tert-Butyl peroxyneodecanoate, not more than 42%, stable 31A 1250 –5°C +5°C dispersion, in water tert-Butyl peroxyneodecanoate, not more than 52%, stable 31A 1250 –5°C +5°C dispersion, in water tert-Butyl peroxypivalate, not more than 27% in diluent type B 31HA1 1000 +10°C +15°C 31A 1250 +10°C +15°C Di-(2-neodecanoylperoxyisopropyl)benzene, not more than 31A 1250 –15°C –5°C 42%, stable dispersion, in water 3-Hydroxy-1,1-dimethylbutyl peroxy neodecanoate, not more 31A 1250 –15°C –5°C than 52%, stable dispersion, in water Cumyl peroxyneodecanoate, not more than 52%, stable 31A 1250 –15°C –5°C dispersion, in water Di-(4-tert-butylcyclohexyl) peroxydicarbonate, not more than 31HA1 1000 +30°C +35°C 42%, stable dispersion, in water Dicetyl peroxydicarbonate, not more than 42%, stable 31HA1 1000 +30°C +35°C dispersion, in water Dicyclohexyl peroxydicarbonate, not more than 42% as 31A 1250 +10°C +15°C a stable dispersion, in water Di-(2-ethylhexyl) peroxydicarbonate, not more than 62%, stable 31A 1250 –20°C –10°C dispersion, in water

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 275

293

Bilaga 1

Part 4 – Packing and tank provisions

IBC520 PACKING INSTRUCTION (continued) IBC520 Maximum Control Emergency UN Type of Organic peroxide quantity temper- temper- No. IBC (litres) ature ature 3119 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE F, LIQUID, TEMPERATURE (cont.) CONTROLLED (continued) Dimyristyl peroxydicarbonate, not more than 42%, stable 31HA1 1000 +15°C +20°C dispersion, in water Di-(3,5,5-trimethylhexanoyl) peroxide, not more than 52% in 31HA1 1000 +10°C +15°C diluent type A 31A 1250 +10°C +15°C Di-(3,5,5-trimethylhexanoyl) peroxide, not more than 52%, 31A 1250 +10°C +15°C stable dispersion, in water Diisobutyryl peroxide, not more than 28% as a stable 31HA1 1 000 -20ºC -10ºC dispersion in water 31A 1 250 -20 ºC -10 ºC Diisobutyryl peroxide, not more than 42% as a stable 31HA1 1 000 -25ºC -15ºC dispersion in water 31A 1 250 -25 ºC -15 ºC 1,1,3,3-Tetramethylbutyl peroxyneodecanoate, not more than 31A 1250 –5°C +5°C 52%, stable dispersion, in water 31HA1 1000 –5°C +5°C 3120 ORGANIC PEROXIDE, TYPE F, SOLID, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED Additional provisions: 1 IBCs shall be provided with a device to allow venting during transport. The inlet to the pressure relief device shall be sited in the vapour space of the IBC under maximum filling conditions during transport. 2 To prevent explosive rupture of metal IBCs or composite IBCs with complete metal casing, the emergency relief devices shall be designed to vent all the decomposition products and vapours evolved during self-accelerating decomposition or during a period of not less than one hour of fire-engulfment as calculated by the formula in 4.2.1.13.8. The control and emergency temperatures specified in this packing instruction are based on a non-insulated IBC. When consigning an organic peroxide in an IBC in accordance with this instruction, it is the responsibility of the consignor to ensure that: (a) the pressure and emergency relief devices installed on the IBC are designed to take appropriate account of the self-accelerating decomposition of the organic peroxide and of fire engulfment; and (b) when applicable, the control and emergency temperatures indicated are appropriate, taking into account the design (such as insulation) of the IBC to be used.

IBC620 PACKING INSTRUCTION IBC620 This instruction applies to UN 3291. The following IBCs are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1, except 4.1.1.15, 4.1.2 and 4.1.3 are met: Rigid, leakproof IBCs conforming to the packing group II performance level. Additional provisions: 1 There shall be sufficient absorbent material to absorb the entire amount of liquid present in the IBC. 2 IBCs shall be capable of retaining liquids. 3 IBCs intended to contain sharp objects such as broken glass and needles shall be resistant to puncture.

4.1.4.3 Packing instructions concerning the use of large packagings

LP01 PACKING INSTRUCTION (LIQUIDS) LP01 The following large packagings are authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met. Inner packagings Large outer packagings Packing group I Packing group II Packing group III Glass 10 ℓ Steel (50A) 3 Plastics 30 ℓ Aluminium (50B) Not allowed Not allowed 3 m Metal 40 ℓ Metal other than steel or aluminium (50N) Rigid plastics (50H) Natural wood (50C) Plywood (50D) Reconstituted wood (50F) Rigid fibreboard (50G)

276 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

294

Bilaga 1

Chapter 4.1 – Use of packagings, including IBCs and large packagings

LP02 PACKING INSTRUCTION (SOLIDS) LP02 The following large packagings are authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met. Inner packagings Large outer packagings Packing group I Packing group II Packing group III Glass 10 kg Steel (50A) 2 3 Plastics 50 kg Aluminium (50B) Not allowed Not allowed 3 m Metal 50 kg Metal other than steel or 1, 2 aluminium (50N) Paper 50 kg 1, 2 Rigid plastics (50H) Fibre 50 kg Natural wood (50C) Plywood (50D) Reconstituted wood (50F) Rigid fibreboard (50G) 3 Flexible plastics (51H) 1 These packagings shall not be used when the substances being transported may become liquid during transport. 2 Packagings shall be sift-proof. 3 To be used with flexible inner packagings only.

Special packing provision: L2 For UN 1950 aerosols, the large packaging shall meet the packing group III performance level. Large packagings for waste aerosols transported in accordance with special provision 327 shall have in addition a means of retaining any free liquid that might escape during transport, e.g., absorbent material.

LP99 PACKING INSTRUCTION LP99 Only packagings which are approved for these goods by the competent authority may be used (see 4.1.3.7). A copy of the competent authority approval shall accompany each consignment or the transport document shall include an indication that the packaging was approved by the competent authority.

LP101 PACKING INSTRUCTION LP101 The following packagings are authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 and special provisions of 4.1.5 are met. Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Large packagings Steel (50A) Not necessary Not necessary Aluminium (50B) Metal other than steel or aluminium (50N) Rigid plastics (50H) Natural wood (50C) Plywood (50D) Reconstituted wood (50F) Rigid fibreboard (50G)

Special packing provision: L1 For UN Nos. 0006, 0009, 0010, 0015, 0016, 0018, 0019, 0034, 0035, 0038, 0039, 0048, 0056, 0137, 0138, 0168, 0169, 0171, 0181, 0182, 0183, 0186, 0221, 0243, 0244, 0245, 0246, 0254, 0280, 0281, 0286, 0287, 0297, 0299, 0300, 0301, 0303, 0321, 0328, 0329, 0344, 0345, 0346, 0347, 0362, 0363, 0370, 0412, 0424, 0425, 0434, 0435, 0436, 0437, 0438, 0451, 0488 and 0502: Large and robust explosives articles, normally intended for military use, without their means of initiation or with their means of initiation containing at least two effective protective features, may be transported unpackaged. When such articles have propelling charges or are self-propelled, their ignition systems shall be protected against stimuli encountered during normal conditions of transport. A negative result in Test Series 4 on an unpackaged article indicates that the article can be considered for transport unpackaged. Such unpackaged articles may be fixed to cradles or contained in crates or other suitable handling devices.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 277

295

Bilaga 1

Part 4 – Packing and tank provisions

LP102 PACKING INSTRUCTION LP102 The following packagings are authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 and special provisions of 4.1.5 are met. Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings Bags Steel (50A) water-resistant Not necessary Aluminium (50B) Receptacles Metal other than steel or fibreboard aluminium (50N) metal Rigid plastics (50H) plastics Natural wood (50C) wood Plywood (50D) Sheets Reconstituted wood (50F) fibreboard, corrugated Rigid fibreboard (50G)

Tubes fibreboard

LP621 PACKING INSTRUCTION LP621 This instruction applies to UN 3291. The following large packagings are authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met: (1) For clinical waste placed in inner packagings: Rigid, leakproof large packagings conforming to the provisions of chapter 6.6 for solids, at the packing group II performance level, provided there is sufficient absorbent material to absorb the entire amount of liquid present and the large packaging is capable of retaining liquids. (2) For packages containing larger quantities of liquid: Large rigid packagings conforming to the provisions of chapter 6.6, at the packing group II performance level, for liquids. Additional provision: Large packagings intended to contain sharp objects such as broken glass and needles shall be resistant to puncture and retain liquids under the performance test conditions in chapter 6.6.

LP902 PACKING INSTRUCTION LP902 This instruction applies to UN 3268. Packaged articles: The following packagings are authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met: Packagings conforming to the packing group III performance level. The packagings shall be designed and constructed to prevent movement of the articles and inadvertent operation during normal conditions of transport. Unpackaged articles: The articles may also be transported unpackaged in dedicated handling devices, vehicles, containers or wagons when moved from where they are manufactured to an assembly plant. Additional provision: Any pressure receptacle shall be in accordance with the requirements of the competent authority for the substance(s) contained in the pressure receptacle(s).

4.1.5 Special packing provisions for goods of class 1

4.1.5.1 The general provisions of 4.1.1 shall be met.

4.1.5.2 All packagings for class 1 goods shall be so designed and constructed that: .1 they will protect the explosives, prevent them escaping and cause no increase in the risk of unintended ignition or initiation when subjected to normal conditions of transport, including foreseeable changes in temperature, humidity and pressure; .2 the complete package can be handled safely in normal conditions of transport; and

.3 the packages will withstand any loading imposed on them by foreseeable stacking to which they will be subject during transport so that they do not add to the risk presented by the explosives, the containment function of the packagings is not harmed, and they are not distorted in a way or to an extent which will reduce their strength or cause instability of a stack.

4.1.5.3 All explosive substances and articles, as prepared for transport, shall have been classified in accordance with the procedures detailed in 2.1.3.

4.1.5.4 Class 1 goods shall be packed in accordance with the appropriate packing instruction shown in columns 8 and 9 of the Dangerous Goods List, as detailed in 4.1.4.

278 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

296

Bilaga 1

Chapter 4.1 – Use of packagings, including IBCs and large packagings

4.1.5.5 Unless otherwise specified in this Code, packagings, including IBCs and large packagings, shall conform to the requirements of chapters 6.1, 6.5 or 6.6, as appropriate, and shall meet their test provisions for packing group II. 4.1.5.6 The closure device of packagings containing liquid explosives shall ensure a double protection against leakage. 4.1.5.7 The closure device of metal drums shall include a suitable gasket; if a closure device includes a screw-thread, the ingress of explosive substances into the screw-thread shall be prevented. 4.1.5.8 Packagings for water-soluble substances shall be water-resistant. Packagings for desensitized or phlegmatized substances shall be closed to prevent changes in concentration during transport. 4.1.5.9 When the packaging includes a double envelope filled with water which may freeze during transport, a sufficient quantity of an anti-freeze agent shall be added to the water to prevent freezing. Anti-freeze that could create a fire hazard because of its inherent flammability shall not be used. 4.1.5.10 Nails, staples and other closure devices made of metal without protective covering shall not penetrate to the inside of the outer packaging unless the inner packaging adequately protects the explosives against contact with the metal. 4.1.5.11 Inner packagings, fittings and cushioning materials and the placing of explosive substances or articles in packages shall be accomplished in a manner which prevents the explosive substances or articles from becoming loose in the outer packaging under normal conditions of transport. Metallic components of articles shall be prevented from making contact with metal packagings. Articles containing explosive substances not enclosed in an outer casing shall be separated from each other in order to prevent friction and impact. Padding, trays, partitioning in the inner or outer packaging, mouldings or receptacles may be used for this purpose. 4.1.5.12 Packagings shall be made of materials compatible with, and impermeable to, the explosives contained in the package, so that neither interaction between the explosives and the packaging materials nor leakage causes the explosive to become unsafe to transport, or the hazard division or compatibility group to change. 4.1.5.13 The ingress of explosive substances into the recesses of seamed metal packagings shall be prevented. 4.1.5.14 Plastics packagings shall not be liable to generate or accumulate sufficient static electricity so that a discharge could cause the packaged explosive substances or articles to initiate, ignite or function. 4.1.5.15 Large and robust explosives articles, normally intended for military use, without their means of initiation or with their means of initiation containing at least two effective protective features may be transported unpackaged. When such articles have propelling charges or are self-propelled, their ignition systems shall be protected against stimuli encountered during normal conditions of transport. A negative result in Test Series 4 on an unpackaged article indicates that the article can be considered for transport unpackaged. Such unpackaged articles may be fixed to cradles or contained in crates or other suitable handling, storage or launching devices in such a way that they will not become loose during normal conditions of transport. Where such large explosive articles are, as part of their operational safety and suitability tests, subjected to test regimes that meet the provisions of this Code and such tests have been successfully undertaken, the competent authority may approve such articles to be transported under this Code. 4.1.5.16 Explosive substances shall not be packed in inner or outer packagings where the differences in internal and external pressures, due to thermal or other effects, could cause an explosion or rupture of the package. 4.1.5.17 Whenever loose explosive substances or the explosive substance of an uncased or partly cased article may come into contact with the inner surface of metal packagings (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 4A, 4B and metal receptacles), the metal packaging shall be provided with an inner liner or coating (see 4.1.1.2). 4.1.5.18 Packing instruction P101 may be used for any explosive provided the package has been approved by a competent authority regardless of whether the packaging complies with the packing instruction assignment in the Dangerous Goods List. 4.1.5.19 Government-owned military dangerous goods, packaged prior to 1 January 1990 in accordance with the provisions of the IMDG Code in effect at that time, may be transported provided the packagings maintain their integrity and the goods are declared as government-owned goods packaged prior to 1 January 1990.

4.1.6 Special packing provisions for goods of class 2

4.1.6.1 General provisions

4.1.6.1.1 This section provides general requirements applicable to the use of pressure receptacles for the transport of class 2 gases and other dangerous goods in pressure receptacles (e.g. UN 1051 Hydrogen cyanide, stabilized). Pressure receptacles shall be constructed and closed so as to prevent any loss of contents which might be caused under normal conditions of transport, including by vibration, or by changes in temperature, humidity or pressure (resulting from change in altitude, for example).

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 279

297

Bilaga 1

Part 4 – Packing and tank provisions

4.1.6.1.2 Parts of pressure receptacles which are in direct contact with dangerous goods shall not be affected or weakened by those dangerous goods and shall not cause a dangerous effect (e.g. catalysing a reaction or reacting with the dangerous goods). The provisions of ISO 11114-1:1997 and ISO 11114-2:2000 shall be met as applicable.

4.1.6.1.3 Pressure receptacles, including their closures, shall be selected to contain a gas or a mixture of gases according to the requirements of 6.2.1.2 and the requirements of the specific packing instructions of 4.1.4.1. This section also applies to pressure receptacles which are elements of MEGCs. 4.1.6.1.4 Refillable pressure receptacles shall not be filled with a gas or gas mixture different from that previously contained unless the necessary operations for change of gas service have been performed. The change of service for compressed and liquefied gases shall be in accordance with ISO 11621:1997, as applicable. In addition, a pressure receptacle that previously contained a class 8 corrosive substance or a substance of another class with a corrosive subsidiary risk shall not be authorized for the transport of a class 2 substance unless the necessary inspection and testing as specified in 6.2.1.6 have been performed. 4.1.6.1.5 Prior to filling, the filler shall perform an inspection of the pressure receptacle and ensure that the pressure receptacle is authorized for the gas and, in case of a chemical under pressure, for the propellant to be transported and that the provisions of this Code have been met. Shut-off valves shall be closed after filling and remain closed during transport. The consignor shall verify that the closures and equipment are not leaking.

4.1.6.1.6 Pressure receptacles shall be filled according to the working pressures, filling ratios and provisions specified in the appropriate packing instruction for the specific substance being filled. Reactive gases and gas mixtures shall be filled to a pressure such that if complete decomposition of the gas occurs, the working pressure of the pressure receptacle shall not be exceeded. Bundles of cylinders shall not be filled in excess of the lowest working pressure of any given cylinder in the bundle.

4.1.6.1.7 Pressure receptacles, including their closures, shall conform to the design, construction, inspection and testing requirements detailed in chapter 6.2. When outer packagings are prescribed, the pressure receptacles shall be firmly secured therein. Unless otherwise specified in the detailed packing instructions, one or more inner packagings may be enclosed in an outer packaging. 4.1.6.1.8 Valves shall be designed and constructed in such a way that they are inherently able to withstand damage without release of the contents or shall be protected from damage which could cause inadvertent release of the contents of the pressure receptacle, by one of the following methods: .1 Valves are placed inside the neck of the pressure receptacle and protected by a threaded plug or cap; .2 Valves are protected by caps. Caps shall possess vent-holes of sufficient cross-sectional area to evacuate the gas if leakage occurs at the valves; .3 Valves are protected by shrouds or guards; .4 Pressure receptacles are transported in frames (e.g. bundles); or .5 Pressure receptacles are transported in an outer packaging. The packaging as prepared for transport shall be capable of meeting the drop test specified in 6.1.5.3 at the packing group I performance level. For pressure receptacles with valves as described in .2 and .3, the requirements of either ISO 11117:1998 or ISO 11117:2008 + Cor 1:2009 shall be met; for valves with inherent protection, the provisions of annex A of ISO 10297:2006 shall be met. For metal hydride storage systems, the valve protection requirements specified in ISO 16111:2008 shall be met. 4.1.6.1.9 Non-refillable pressure receptacles shall: .1 be transported in an outer packaging, such as a box, or crate, or in shrink-wrapped trays or stretchwrapped trays; .2 be of a water capacity less than or equal to 1.25 ℓ when filled with flammable or toxic gas; ℓ/ 3 .3 not be used for toxic gases with an LC50 less than or equal to 200 m m ; and .4 not be repaired after being put into service.

4.1.6.1.10 Refillable pressure receptacles, other than cryogenic receptacles, shall be periodically inspected in accordance with 6.2.1.6 and packing instruction P200, P205 or P206, as applicable. Pressure relief valves for closed cryogenic receptacles shall be subject to periodic inspections and tests according to the provisions of 6.2.1.6.3 and packing instruction P203. Pressure receptacles shall not be filled after they become due for periodic inspection but may be transported after the expiry of the time limit.

4.1.6.1.11 Repairs shall be consistent with the manufacture and testing requirements of the applicable design and construction standards and are only permitted as indicated in the relevant periodic inspection standards specified in 6.2.2.4. Pressure receptacles, other than the jacket of closed cryogenic receptacles, shall not be subjected to repairs of any of the following: .1 weld cracks or other weld defects;

280 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

298

Bilaga 1

Chapter 4.1 – Use of packagings, including IBCs and large packagings

.2 cracks in walls; .3 leaks or defects in the material of the wall, head or bottom.

4.1.6.1.12 Pressure receptacles shall not be offered for filling: .1 when damaged to such an extent that the integrity of the pressure receptacle or its service equipment may be affected; .2 unless the pressure receptacle and its service equipment has been examined and found to be in good working order; or .3 unless the required certification, retest, and filling markings are legible.

4.1.6.1.13 Filled pressure receptacles shall not be offered for transport: .1 when leaking; .2 when damaged to such an extent that the integrity of the pressure receptacle or its service equipment may be affected; .3 unless the pressure receptacle and its service equipment has been examined and found to be in good working order; or .4 unless the required certification, retest, and filling markings are legible.

4.1.6.1.14 Where in packing instruction P200 cylinders and other pressure receptacles for gases conforming to the requirements of this sub-section and chapter 6.2 are authorized, use is also authorized of cylinders and pressure receptacles which conform to the requirements of the competent authority of the country in which the cylinder or pressure receptacle is filled. Valves shall be suitably protected. Pressure receptacles with capacities of 1 ℓ or less shall be packed in outer packagings constructed of suitable material of adequate strength and design in relation to the capacity of the packaging and its intended use and secured or cushioned so as to prevent significant movement within the outer packaging during normal conditions of transport.

4.1.7 Special packing provisions for organic peroxides (class 5.2) and self-reactive substances of class 4.1

4.1.7.0 General

4.1.7.0.1 For organic peroxides, all receptacles shall be “effectively closed”. Where significant internal pressure may develop in a package by the evolution of gas, a vent may be fitted, provided the gas emitted will not cause danger, otherwise the degree of filling shall be limited. Any venting device shall be so constructed that liquid will not escape when the package is in an upright position and it shall be able to prevent ingress of impurities. The outer packaging, if any, shall be so designed as not to interfere with the operation of the venting device.

4.1.7.1 Use of packagings (except IBCs)

4.1.7.1.1 Packagings for organic peroxides and self-reactive substances shall conform to the provisions of chapter 6.1 and shall meet its test provisions for packing group II.

4.1.7.1.2 The packing methods for organic peroxides and self-reactive substances are listed in packing instruction P520 and are designated OP1 to OP8. The quantities specified for each packing method are the maximum quantities authorized per package. 4.1.7.1.3 The packing methods appropriate for the individual currently assigned self-reactive substances and organic peroxides are listed in 2.4.2.3.2.3 and 2.5.3.2.4.

4.1.7.1.4 For new organic peroxides, new self-reactive substances or new formulations of currently assigned organic peroxides or self-reactive substances, the following procedure shall be used to assign the appropriate packing method: .1 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE B or SELF-REACTIVE SUBSTANCE TYPE B: Packing method OP5 shall be assigned, provided that the organic peroxide (or self-reactive substance) satisfies the criteria of 2.5.3.3.2.2 (resp. 2.4.2.3.3.2.2) in a packaging authorized by the packing method. If the organic peroxide (or self-reactive substance) can only satisfy these criteria in a smaller packaging than those authorized by packing method OP5 (viz. one of the packagings listed for OP1 to OP4), then the corresponding packing method with the lower OP number is assigned; .2 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE C or SELF-REACTIVE SUBSTANCE TYPE C: Packing method OP6 shall be assigned, provided that the organic peroxide (or self-reactive substance) satisfies the criteria of 2.5.3.3.2.3 (resp. 2.4.2.3.3.2.3) in packaging authorized by the packing method. If the organic peroxide (or self-reactive substance) can only satisfy these criteria in a smaller packaging than those authorized by packing method OP6, then the corresponding packing method with the lower OP number is assigned;

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 281

299

Bilaga 1

Part 4 – Packing and tank provisions

.3 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE D or SELF-REACTIVE SUBSTANCE TYPE D: Packing method OP7 shall be assigned to this type of organic peroxide or self-reactive substance; .4 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE E or SELF-REACTIVE SUBSTANCE TYPE E: Packing method OP8 shall be assigned to this type of organic peroxide or self-reactive substance; .5 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE F or SELF-REACTIVE SUBSTANCE TYPE F: Packing method OP8 shall be assigned to this type of organic peroxide or self-reactive substance.

4.1.7.2 Use of intermediate bulk containers

4.1.7.2.1 The currently assigned organic peroxides specifically listed in packing instruction IBC520 may be transported in IBCs in accordance with this packing instruction. IBCs shall conform to the requirements of chapter 6.5 and shall meet its test provisions for packing group II. 4.1.7.2.2 Other organic peroxides and self-reactive substances of type F may be transported in IBCs under conditions established by the competent authority of the country of origin when, on the basis of the appropriate tests, that competent authority is satisfied that such transport may be safely conducted. The tests undertaken shall include those necessary: .1 to prove that the organic peroxide (or self-reactive substance) complies with the principles for classification; .2 to prove the compatibility of all materials normally in contact with the substance during the transport; .3 to determine, when applicable, the control and emergency temperatures associated with the transport of the product in the IBC concerned as derived from the SADT; .4 to design, when applicable, pressure and emergency relief devices; and .5 to determine if any special provisions are necessary for safe transport of the substance. 4.1.7.2.3 For self-reactive substances, temperature control is required according to 2.4.2.3.4. For organic peroxides, temperature control is required according to 2.5.3.4.1. Temperature control provisions are given in 7.3.7. 4.1.7.2.4 Emergencies to be taken into account are self-accelerating decomposition and fire engulfment. To prevent explosive rupture of metal or composite IBCs with a complete metal casing, the emergency relief devices shall be designed to vent all the decomposition products and vapours evolved during self-accelerating decomposition or during a period of not less than one hour of complete fire engulfment calculated by the equations given in 4.2.1.13.8.

4.1.8 Special packing provisions for infectious substances of category A (class 6.2, UN 2814 and UN 2900)

4.1.8.1 Consignors of infectious substances shall ensure that packages are prepared in such a manner that they arrive at their destination in good condition and present no hazard to persons or animals during transport. 4.1.8.2 The definitions in 1.2.1 and the general packing provisions of 4.1.1.1 to 4.1.1.14, except 4.1.1.10 to 4.1.1.12, apply to infectious substances packages. However, liquids shall only be filled into packagings which have an appropriate resistance to the internal pressure that may develop under normal conditions of transport. 4.1.8.3 An itemized list of contents shall be enclosed between the secondary packaging and the outer packaging. When the infectious substances to be transported are unknown, but suspected of meeting the criteria for inclusion in category A, the words “suspected category A infectious substance” shall be shown, in parentheses, following the Proper Shipping Name on the document inside the outer packaging. 4.1.8.4 Before an empty packaging is returned to the consignor, or sent elsewhere, it shall be disinfected or sterilized to nullify any hazard and any label or marking indicating that it had contained an infectious substance shall be removed or obliterated. 4.1.8.5 Provided an equivalent level of performance is maintained, the following variations in the primary receptacles placed within an intermediate packaging are allowed without further testing of the completed package: .1 Primary receptacles of equivalent or smaller size as compared to the tested primary receptacles may be used provided: (a) the primary receptacles are of similar design to the tested primary receptacle (such as shape: round, rectangular, etc.); (b) the material of construction of the primary receptacle (glass, plastics, metal, etc.) offers resistance to impact and stacking forces equal to or greater than that of the originally tested primary receptacle; (c) the primary receptacles have the same or smaller openings and the closure is of similar design (such as screw cap, friction lid, etc.); (d) sufficient additional cushioning material is used to take up void spaces and to prevent significant movement of the primary receptacles; and (e) primary receptacles are oriented within the intermediate packaging in the same manner as in the tested package.

282 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

300

Bilaga 1

Chapter 4.1 – Use of packagings, including IBCs and large packagings

.2 A lesser number of the tested primary receptacles, or of the alternative types of primary receptacles identified in .1 above, may be used provided sufficient cushioning is added to fill the void space(s) and to prevent significant movement of the primary receptacles.

4.1.9 Special packing provisions for class 7

4.1.9.1 General

4.1.9.1.1 Radioactive material, packagings and packages shall meet the provisions of chapter 6.4. The quantity of radioactive material in a package shall not exceed the limits specified in 2.7.2.2, 2.7.2.4.1, 2.7.2.4.4, 2.7.2.4.5, 2.7.2.4.6 and 4.1.9.3. The types of packages for radioactive materials covered by the provisions of this Code are: .1 Excepted package (see 1.5.1.5); .2 Industrial package Type 1 (Type IP-1 package); .3 Industrial package Type 2 (Type IP-2 package); .4 Industrial package Type 3 (Type IP-3 package); .5 Type A package; .6 Type B(U) package; .7 Type B(M) package; .8 Type C package. Packages containing fissile material or uranium hexafluoride are subject to additional requirements. 4.1.9.1.2 The non-fixed contamination on the external surfaces of any package shall be kept as low as practicable and, under routine conditions of transport, shall not exceed the following limits: 2 (a) 4 Bq/cm for beta and gamma emitters and low-toxicity alpha emitters, and 2 (b) 0.4 Bq/cm for all other alpha emitters. 2 These limits are applicable when averaged over any area of 300 cm of any part of the surface. 4.1.9.1.3 A package, other than an excepted package, shall not contain any items other than those that are necessary for the use of the radioactive material. The interaction between these items and the package under the conditions of transport applicable to the design shall not reduce the safety of the package. 4.1.9.1.4 Except as provided in 7.1.4.5.11, the level of non-fixed contamination on the external and internal surfaces of overpacks, cargo transport units, tanks, IBCs and conveyances shall not exceed the limits specified in 4.1.9.1.2. 4.1.9.1.5 For radioactive material having other dangerous properties the package design shall take into account those properties. Radioactive material with a subsidiary risk, packaged in packages that do not require competent authority approval, shall be transported in packagings, IBCs, tanks or bulk containers fully complying with the provisions of the relevant chapters of part 6 as appropriate, as well as applicable provisions of chapters 4.1, 4.2 or 4.3 for that subsidiary risk. 4.1.9.1.6 Before the first shipment of any package, the following provisions shall be fulfilled: .1 If the design pressure of the containment system exceeds 35 kPa (gauge), it shall be ensured that the containment system of each package conforms to the approved design requirements relating to the capability of that system to maintain its integrity under that pressure; .2 For each Type B(U), Type B(M) and Type C package and for each package containing fissile material, it shall be ensured that the effectiveness of its shielding and containment and, where necessary, the heat transfer characteristics and the effectiveness of the confinement system are within the limits applicable to or specified for the approved design; .3 For packages containing fissile material, where, in order to comply with the requirements of 6.4.11.1, neutron poisons are specifically included as components of the package, checks shall be performed to confirm the presence and distribution of those neutron poisons. 4.1.9.1.7 Before each shipment of any package, the following provisions shall be fulfilled: .1 For any package, it shall be ensured that all provisions specified in the relevant provisions of this Code have been satisfied; .2 It shall be ensured that lifting attachments which do not meet the requirements of 6.4.2.2 have been removed or otherwise rendered incapable of being used for lifting the package, in accordance with 6.4.2.3; .3 For each package requiring competent authority approval, it shall be ensured that all the requirements specified in the approval certificates have been satisfied;

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 283

301

Bilaga 1

Part 4 – Packing and tank provisions

.4 Each Type B(U), Type B(M) and Type C package shall be held until equilibrium conditions have been approached closely enough to demonstrate compliance with the requirements for temperature and pressure unless an exemption from these requirements has received unilateral approval; .5 For each Type B(U), Type B(M) and Type C package, it shall be ensured by inspection and/or appropriate tests that all closures, valves, and other openings of the containment system through which the radioactive contents might escape are properly closed and, where appropriate, sealed in the manner for which the demonstrations of compliance with the requirements of 6.4.8.8 and 6.4.10.3 were made; .6 For each special form radioactive material, it shall be ensured that all the provisions specified in the approval certificate and the relevant provisions of this Code have been satisfied; .7 For packages containing fissile material, the measurement specified in 6.4.11.4(b) and the tests to demonstrate closure of each package as specified in 6.4.11.7 shall be performed where applicable; .8 For each low dispersible radioactive material, it shall be ensured that all the requirements specified in the approval certificate and the relevant provisions of this Code have been satisfied. 4.1.9.1.8 The consignor shall also have a copy of any instructions with regard to the proper closing of the package and any preparation for shipment before making any shipment under the terms of the certificates. 4.1.9.1.9 Except for consignments under exclusive use, the transport index of any package or overpack shall not exceed 10, nor shall the criticality safety index of any package or overpack exceed 50. 4.1.9.1.10 Except for packages or overpacks transported under exclusive use by rail or by road under the conditions specified in 7.1.4.5.5.1, or under exclusive use and special arrangement by ship under the conditions specified in 7.1.4.5.7, the maximum radiation level at any point on any external surface of a package or overpack shall not exceed 2 mSv/h. 4.1.9.1.11 The maximum radiation level at any point on any external surface of a package or overpack under exclusive use shall not exceed 10 mSv/h. 4.1.9.1.12 Pyrophoric radioactive material shall be packaged in Type A, Type B(U), Type B(M) or Type C packages and shall also be suitably inerted.

4.1.9.2 Provisions and controls for transport of LSA material and SCO

4.1.9.2.1 The quantity of LSA material or SCO in a single Type IP-1 package, Type IP-2 package, Type IP-3 package, or object or collection of objects, whichever is appropriate, shall be so restricted that the external radiation level at 3 m from the unshielded material or object or collection of objects does not exceed 10 mSv/h. 4.1.9.2.2 For LSA material and SCO which is or contains fissile material, the applicable provisions of 6.4.11.1, 7.1.4.5.15 and 7.1.4.5.16 shall be met. 4.1.9.2.3 LSA material and SCO in groups LSA-I and SCO-I may be transported unpackaged under the following conditions: .1 all unpackaged material other than ores containing only naturally occurring radionuclides shall be transported in such a manner that, under routine conditions of transport, there will be no escape of the radioactive contents from the conveyance nor will there be any loss of shielding; .2 each conveyance shall be under exclusive use, except when only transporting SCO-I on which the contamination on the accessible and the inaccessible surfaces is not greater than ten times the applicable level specified in 2.7.1.2; and .3 for SCO-I where it is suspected that non-fixed contamination exists on inaccessible surfaces in excess of the values specified in 2.7.2.3.2.1(i), measures shall be taken to ensure that the radioactive material is not released into the conveyance. 4.1.9.2.4 LSA material and SCO, except as otherwise specified in 4.1.9.2.3, shall be packaged in accordance with table 4.1.9.2.4.

284 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

302

Bilaga 1

Chapter 4.1 – Use of packagings, including IBCs and large packagings

Table 4.1.9.2.4 – Industrial package provisions for LSA material and SCO

Industrial package type Radioactive contents Exclusive use Not under exclusive use LSA-I a Solid Type IP-1 Type IP-1 Liquid Type IP-1 Type IP-2 LSA-II Solid Type IP-2 Type IP-2 Liquid and gas Type IP-2 Type IP-3 LSA-III Type IP-2 Type IP-3 a SCO-I Type IP-1 Type IP-1 SCO-II Type IP-2 Type IP-2 a Under the conditions specified in 4.1.9.2.3, LSA-I material and SCO-I may be transported unpackaged.

4.1.9.3 Packages containing fissile material

Unless not classified as fissile in accordance with 2.7.2.3.5, packages containing fissile material shall not contain: .1 A mass of fissile material (or mass of each fissile nuclide for mixtures when appropriate) different from that authorized for the package design; .2 Any radionuclide or fissile material different from those authorized for the package design; or .3 Contents in a form or physical or chemical state, or in a spatial arrangement, different from those authorized for the package design,

as specified in their certificates of approval where appropriate.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 285

303

Bilaga 1

Chapter 4.2

Use of portable tanks and multiple-element gas containers (MEGCs)

The provisions of this chapter also apply to road tank vehicles to the extent indicated in chapter 6.8.

4.2.0 Transitional provisions

4.2.0.1 The provisions for the use and construction of portable tanks in this chapter and chapter 6.7 are based on the United Nations Recommendations on the transport of dangerous goods. IMO type portable tanks and road tank vehicles certified and approved prior to 1 January 2003 in accordance with the provisions of the IMDG Code in force on 1 July 1999 (amendment 29) may continue to be used provided that they are found to meet the applicable periodic inspections and test provisions. They shall meet the provisions set out in columns (13) and (14) of chapter 3.2. Detailed explanation and construction provisions may be found in DSC/Circ.12 (Guidance on the continued use of existing IMO type portable tanks and road tank vehicles for the transport of dangerous goods).

Note: For ease of reference, the following descriptions of existing IMO type tanks are included: IMO type 1 tank means a portable tank for the transport of substances of classes 3 to 9 fitted with pressurerelief devices, having a maximum allowable working pressure of 1.75 bar and above. IMO type 2 tank means a portable tank fitted with pressure-relief devices, having a maximum allowable working pressure equal to or above 1.0 bar but below 1.75 bar, intended for the transport of certain dangerous liquids of low hazard and certain solids. IMO type 4 tank means a road tank vehicle for the transport of dangerous goods of classes 3 to 9 and includes a semi-trailer with a permanently attached tank or a tank attached to a chassis, with at least four twist locks which comply with ISO standards, (e.g. ISO International Standard 1161:1984). IMO type 5 tank means a portable tank fitted with pressure-relief devices which is used for non-refrigerated gases of class 2. IMO type 6 tank means a road tank vehicle for the transport of non-refrigerated liquefied gases of class 2 and includes a semi-trailer with a permanently attached tank or a tank attached to a chassis which is fitted with items of service equipment and structural equipment necessary for the transport of gases. IMO type 7 tank means a thermally insulated portable tank fitted with items of service and structural equipment necessary for the transport of refrigerated liquefied gases. The portable tank shall be capable of being transported, loaded and discharged without the need of removal of its structural equipment, and shall be capable of being lifted when full. It shall not be permanently secured on board the ship. IMO type 8 tank means a road tank vehicle for the transport of refrigerated liquefied gases of class 2 and includes a semi-trailer with a permanently attached thermally insulated tank fitted with items of service equipment and structural equipment necessary for the transport of refrigerated liquefied gases.

Note: IMO type 4, 6 and 8 road tank vehicles may be constructed after 1 January 2003 in accordance with the provisions of chapter 6.8. 4.2.0.2 UN portable tanks and MEGCs constructed according to a design approval certificate which has been issued before 1 January 2008 may continue to be used provided that they are found to meet the applicable periodic inspection and test provisions. 4.2.0.3 Portable tanks and MEGCs manufactured before 1 January 2012, that conform to the marking provisions of 6.7.2.20.1, 6.7.3.16.1, 6.7.4.15.1 or 6.7.5.13.1 of the IMDG Code in force on 1 January 2010 (amendment 34-08), as relevant, may continue to be used if they comply with all other relevant provisions of the current edition of the Code including, when applicable, the requirement of 6.7.2.20.1 (g) for marking the symbol “S” on the plate when the shell or the compartment is divided by surge plates into sections of not more than 7500 litres capacity. When the shell, or the compartment, was already divided by surge plates into sections of not more than 7500 litres capacity before 1 January 2012, the capacity of the shell, or respectively of the compartment, need not be supplemented with the symbol “S” until the next periodic inspection or test according to 6.7.2.19.5 is performed. Portable tanks manufactured before 1 January 2014 need not be marked with the portable tank instruction as required in 6.7.2.20.2, 6.7.3.16.2 and 6.7.4.15.2 until the next periodic inspection and test.

286286286 IMDG Code IMDG Code IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)(Amdt. 36-12)(Amdt. 36-12)

304

Bilaga 1

Chapter 4.2 – Use of portable tanks and MEGCs

Portable tanks and MECGs manufactured before 1 January 2014 need not comply with the requirements of 6.7.2.13.1.6, 6.7.3.9.1.5, 6.7.4.8.1.5 and 6.7.5.6.1 (d) concerning the marking of the pressure relief devices.

4.2.1 General provisions for the use of portable tanks for the transport of substances of class 1 and classes 3 to 9

4.2.1.1 This section provides general provisions applicable to the use of portable tanks for the transport of substances of classes 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 and 9. In addition to these general provisions, portable tanks shall conform to the design, construction, inspection and testing provisions detailed in 6.7.2. Substances shall be transported in portable tanks conforming to the applicable portable tank instruction and the portable tank special provisions assigned to each substance in the Dangerous Goods List. 4.2.1.2 During transport, portable tanks shall be adequately protected against damage to the shell and service equipment resulting from lateral and longitudinal impact and overturning. If the shell and service equipment are so constructed as to withstand impact or overturning, it need not be protected in this way. Examples of such protection are given in 6.7.2.17.5. 4.2.1.3 Certain substances are chemically unstable. They are accepted for transport only when the necessary steps have been taken to prevent their dangerous decomposition, transformation or polymerization during transport. To this end, care shall in particular be taken to ensure that shells do not contain any substances liable to promote these reactions.

4.2.1.4 The temperature of the outer surface of the shell, excluding openings and their closures, or of the thermal insulation shall not exceed 70°C during transport. When necessary, the shell shall be thermally insulated. 4.2.1.5 Empty portable tanks not cleaned and not gas-free shall comply with the same provisions as portable tanks filled with the previous substance. 4.2.1.6 Substances shall not be transported in adjoining compartments of shells when they may react dangerously with each other and cause: .1 combustion and/or evolution of considerable heat; .2 evolution of flammable, toxic or asphyxiant gases; .3 the formation of corrosive substances; .4 the formation of unstable substances; .5 dangerous rise in pressure.

4.2.1.7 The design approval certificate, the test report and the certificate showing the results of the initial inspection and test for each portable tank issued by the competent authority or its authorized body shall be retained by the authority or body and the owner. Owners shall be able to provide this documentation upon the request of any competent authority. 4.2.1.8 Unless the name of the substance(s) being transported appears on the metal plate described in 6.7.2.20.2, a copy of the certificate specified in 6.7.2.18.1 shall be made available upon the request of a competent authority or its authorized body and readily provided by the consignor, consignee or agent, as appropriate.

4.2.1.9 Degree of filling

4.2.1.9.1 Prior to filling, the shipper shall ensure that the appropriate portable tank is used and that the portable tank is not loaded with substances which, in contact with the materials of the shell, gaskets, service equipment and any protective linings, are likely to react dangerously with them to form dangerous products or appreciably weaken these materials. The shipper may need to consult the manufacturer of the substance in conjunction with the competent authority for guidance on the compatibility of the substance with the portable tank materials.

4.2.1.9.1.1 Portable tanks shall not be filled in excess of the maximum degree of filling specified in 4.2.1.9.2 to 4.2.1.9.6. The applicability of 4.2.1.9.2, 4.2.1.9.3 or 4.2.1.9.5.1 to individual substances is specified in the applicable portable tank instructions or special provisions in 4.2.5.2.6 or 4.2.5.3 and columns 13 and 14 of the Dangerous Goods List. 4.2.1.9.2 The maximum degree of filling (in %) for general use is determined by the formula: = 97 Degree of filling _________ 1 +α(tr - tf) 4.2.1.9.3 The maximum degree of filling (in %) for liquids of class 6.1 and class 8, in packing groups I and II, and liquids with an absolute vapour pressure of more than 175 kPa (1.75 bar) at 65°C, or for liquids identified as marine pollutants is determined by the formula: Degree of filling = _________ 95 1 +α(tr - tf)

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 287

305

Bilaga 1

Part 4 – Packing and tank provisions

4.2.1.9.4 In these formulae, α is the mean coefficient of cubical expansion of the liquid between the mean temperature of the liquid during filling (tf) and the maximum mean bulk temperature during transport (tr) (both in °C). For liquids transported under ambient conditions, α could be calculated by the formula: d15 - d50 α= _______ 35 d50 in which d15 and d50 are the densities of the liquid at 15°C and 50°C, respectively.

4.2.1.9.4.1 The maximum mean bulk temperature (tr) shall be taken as 50°C except that, for journeys under temperate or extreme climatic conditions, the competent authorities concerned may agree to a lower or require a higher temperature, as appropriate.

4.2.1.9.5 The provisions of 4.2.1.9.2 to 4.2.1.9.4.1 do not apply to portable tanks which contain substances maintained at a temperature above 50°C during transport (such as by means of a heating device). For portable tanks equipped with a heating device, a temperature regulator shall be used to ensure the maximum degree of filling is not more than 95% full at any time during transport.

4.2.1.9.5.1 The maximum degree of filling (in %) for solids transported above their melting points and for elevated temperature liquids shall be determined by the following formula: dr Degree of filling = 95 __ df in which df and dr are the densities of the liquid at the mean temperature of the liquid during filling and the maximum mean bulk temperature during transport respectively.

4.2.1.9.6 Portable tanks shall not be offered for transport: 2/ ° .1 with a degree of filling, for liquids having a viscosity less than 2,680 mm s at 20 C or at the maximum temperature of the substance during transport in the case of a heated substance, of more than 20% but less than 80% unless the shells of portable tanks are divided, by partitions or surge plates, into sections of not more than 7,500 ℓ capacity; .2 with residue of substances previously transported adhering to the outside of the shell or service equipment; .3 when leaking or damaged to such an extent that the integrity of the portable tank or its lifting or securing arrangements may be affected; and .4 unless the service equipment has been examined and found to be in good working order.

For certain dangerous substances, a lower degree of filling may be required.

4.2.1.9.7 Forklift pockets of portable tanks shall be closed off where the tank is filled. This provision does not apply to portable tanks which, according to 6.7.2.17.4, need not be provided with a means of closing off the forklift pockets.

4.2.1.9.8 Portable tanks shall not be filled or discharged while they remain on board.

4.2.1.10 Additional provisions applicable to the transport of class 3 substances in portable tanks

All portable tanks intended for the transport of flammable liquids shall be closed and be fitted with relief devices in accordance with 6.7.2.8 to 6.7.2.15.

4.2.1.11 Additional provisions applicable to the transport of class 4 substances (other than class 4.1 self-reactive substances) in portable tanks

[Reserved]

Note: For class 4.1 self-reactive substances, see 4.2.1.13.

4.2.1.12 Additional provisions applicable to the transport of class 5.1 substances in portable tanks

[Reserved]

4.2.1.13 Additional provisions applicable to the transport of class 5.2 substances and class 4.1 self-reactive substances in portable tanks

4.2.1.13.1 Each substance shall have been tested and a report submitted to the competent authority of the country of origin for approval. Notification thereof shall be sent to the competent authority of the country of destination. The notification shall contain relevant transport information and the report with test results. The tests undertaken shall include those necessary: .1 to prove the compatibility of all materials normally in contact with the substance during transport;

288 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

306

Bilaga 1

Chapter 4.2 – Use of portable tanks and MEGCs

.2 to provide data for the design of the pressure and emergency relief devices, taking into account the design characteristics of the portable tank. Any additional provisions necessary for safe transport of the substance shall be clearly described in the report.

4.2.1.13.2 The following provisions apply to portable tanks intended for the transport of type F organic peroxides or type F self-reactive substances with a self-accelerating decomposition temperature (SADT) of 55°C or more. In case of conflict, these provisions prevail over those specified in 6.7.2. Emergencies to be taken into account are self-accelerating decomposition of the substance and fire-engulfment as described in 4.2.1.13.8.

4.2.1.13.3 The additional provisions for transport of organic peroxides or self-reactive substances with an SADT less than 55°C in portable tanks shall be specified by the competent authority of the country of origin. Notification thereof shall be sent to the competent authority of the country of destination. 4.2.1.13.4 The portable tank shall be designed for a test pressure of at least 0.4 MPa (4 bar).

4.2.1.13.5 Portable tanks shall be fitted with temperature-sensing devices.

4.2.1.13.6 Portable tanks shall be fitted with pressure-relief devices and emergency relief devices. Vacuum-relief devices may also be used. Pressure-relief devices shall operate at pressures determined according to both the properties of the substance and the construction characteristics of the portable tank. Fusible elements are not allowed in the shell.

4.2.1.13.7 The pressure-relief devices shall consist of spring-loaded valves fitted to prevent significant build-up within the portable tank of the decomposition products and vapours released at a temperature of 50°C. The cap acity and start-to-discharge pressure of the relief valves shall be based on the results of the tests specified in 4.2.1.13.1. The start-to-discharge pressure shall, however, in no case be such that liquid would escape from the valve(s) if the portable tank were overturned.

4.2.1.13.8 The emergency relief devices may be of the spring-loaded or frangible types, or a combination of the two, designed to vent all the decomposition products and vapours evolved during a period of not less than one hour of complete fire-engulfment as calculated by the following formula: q = 70961FA0.82

where: q = heat absorption (W) 2 A = wetted area (m ) F = insulation factor;

F = 1 for non-insulated vessels, or U (923 - T) F = _________ for insulated shells 47032 where: –1 –1 K = heat conductivity of insulation layer (W·m ·K ) L = thickness of insulation layer (m) U = K/L = heat transfer coefficient of the insulation (W·m–2·K–1) T = temperature of substance at relieving conditions (K)

The start-to-discharge pressure of the emergency relief device(s) shall be higher than that specified in 4.2.1.13.7 and based on the results of the tests referred to in 4.2.1.13.1. The emergency relief devices shall be dimensioned in such a way that the maximum pressure in the tank never exceeds the test pressure of the portable tank.

Note: An example of a method to determine the size of emergency relief devices is given in Appendix 5 of the Manual of Tests and Criteria.

4.2.1.13.9 For insulated portable tanks, the capacity and setting of emergency relief device(s) shall be determined assuming a loss of insulation from 1% of the surface area.

4.2.1.13.10 Vacuum-relief devices and spring-loaded valves shall be provided with flame arresters. Due attention shall be paid to the reduction of the relief capacity caused by the flame arrester.

4.2.1.13.11 Service equipment such as valves and external piping shall be so arranged that no substance remains in them after filling the portable tank.

4.2.1.13.12 Portable tanks may be either insulated or protected by a sunshield. If the SADT of the substance in the portable tank is 55°C or less, or the portable tank is constructed of aluminium, the portable tank shall be completely insulated. The outer surface shall be finished in white or bright metal.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 289

307

Bilaga 1

Part 4 – Packing and tank provisions

4.2.1.13.13 The degree of filling shall not exceed 90% at 15°C. 4.2.1.13.14 The marking as required in 6.7.2.20.2 shall include the UN Number and the technical name with the approved concentration of the substance concerned. 4.2.1.13.15 Organic peroxides and self-reactive substances specifically listed in portable tank instruction T23 in 4.2.5.2.6 may be transported in portable tanks.

4.2.1.14 Additional provisions applicable to the transport of class 6.1 substances in portable tanks

[Reserved]

4.2.1.15 Additional provisions applicable to the transport of class 6.2 substances in portable tanks

[Reserved]

4.2.1.16 Additional provisions applicable to the transport of class 7 substances in portable tanks

4.2.1.16.1 Portable tanks used for the transport of radioactive material shall not be used for the transport of other goods. 4.2.1.16.2 The degree of filling for portable tanks shall not exceed 90% or, alternatively, any other value approved by the competent authority.

4.2.1.17 Additional provisions applicable to the transport of class 8 substances in portable tanks

4.2.1.17.1 Pressure-relief devices of portable tanks used for the transport of class 8 substances shall be inspected at intervals not exceeding one year.

4.2.1.18 Additional provisions applicable to the transport of class 9 substances in portable tanks

[Reserved]

4.2.1.19 Additional provisions applicable to the transport of solid substances transported above their melting point

4.2.1.19.1 Solid substances transported or offered for transport above their melting point which are not assigned a portable tank instruction in column 13 of the Dangerous Goods List of chapter 3.2 or when the assigned portable tank instruction does not apply to transport at temperatures above their melting point may be transported in portable tanks provided that the solid substances are classified in classes 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 5.1, 6.1, 8 or 9 and have no subsidiary risk other than that of class 6.1 or class 8 and are in packing group II or III. 4.2.1.19.2 Unless otherwise indicated in the Dangerous Goods List, portable tanks used for the transport of these solid substances above their melting point shall conform to the provisions of portable tank instruction T4 for solid substances of packing group III or T7 for solid substances of packing group II. A portable tank that affords an equivalent or greater level of safety may be selected in accordance with 4.2.5.2.5. The maximum degree of filling (in %) shall be determined according to 4.2.1.9.5 (TP3).

4.2.2 General provisions for the use of portable tanks for the transport of non-refrigerated liquefied gases and chemicals under pressure

4.2.2.1 This section provides general provisions applicable to the use of portable tanks for the transport of nonrefrigerated liquefied gases of class 2 and chemicals under pressure. 4.2.2.2 Portable tanks shall conform to the design, construction, inspection and testing provisions detailed in 6.7.3. Non-refrigerated liquefied gases and chemicals under pressure shall be transported in portable tanks conforming to portable tank instruction T50 as described in 4.2.5.2.6 and any portable tank special provisions assigned to specific non-refrigerated liquefied gases in the Dangerous Goods List and described in 4.2.5.3. 4.2.2.3 During transport, portable tanks shall be adequately protected against damage to the shell and service equipment resulting from lateral and longitudinal impact and overturning. If the shell and service equipment are so constructed as to withstand impact or overturning, it need not be protected in this way. Examples of such protection are given in 6.7.3.13.5. 4.2.2.4 Certain non-refrigerated liquefied gases are chemically unstable. They are accepted for transport only when the necessary steps have been taken to prevent their dangerous decomposition, transformation or poly merization during transport. To this end, care shall be taken to ensure that portable tanks do not contain any non-refrigerated liquefied gases liable to promote these reactions.

290 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

308

Bilaga 1

Chapter 4.2 – Use of portable tanks and MEGCs

4.2.2.5 Unless the name of the gas(es) being transported appears on the metal plate described in 6.7.3.16.2, a copy of the certificate specified in 6.7.3.14.1 shall be made available upon a competent authority request and readily provided by the consignor, consignee or agent, as appropriate.

4.2.2.6 Empty portable tanks not cleaned and not gas-free shall comply with the same provisions as portable tanks filled with the previous non-refrigerated liquefied gas.

4.2.2.7 Filling

4.2.2.7.1 Prior to filling, the shipper shall ensure that the portable tank is approved for the non-refrigerated liquefied gas or the propellant of the chemical under pressure to be transported and that the portable tank is not loaded with non-refrigerated liquefied gases, or with chemicals under pressure which, in contact with the materials of the shell, gaskets and service equipment, are likely to react dangerously with them to form dangerous products or appreciably weaken these materials. During filling, the temperature of the non-refrigerated liquefied gas or propellant of chemicals under pressure shall fall within the limits of the design temperature range.

4.2.2.7.2 The maximum mass of non-refrigerated liquefied gas per litre of shell capacity (kg/ℓ) shall not exceed the density of the non-refrigerated liquefied gas at 50°C multiplied by 0.95. Furthermore, the shell shall not be liquid-full at 60°C.

4.2.2.7.3 Portable tanks shall not be filled above their maximum permissible gross mass and the maximum permissible load mass specified for each gas to be transported.

4.2.2.7.4 Portable tanks shall not be filled or discharged while they remain on board.

4.2.2.8 Portable tanks shall not be offered for transport: .1 in an ullage condition liable to produce an unacceptable hydraulic force due to surge within the portable tank; .2 when leaking; .3 when damaged to such an extent that the integrity of the tank or its lifting or securing arrangements may be affected; and .4 unless the service equipment has been examined and found to be in good working order.

4.2.2.9 Forklift pockets of portable tanks shall be closed off when the tank is filled. This provision does not apply to portable tanks which, according to 6.7.3.13.4, need not be provided with a means of closing off the forklift pockets.

4.2.3 General provisions for the use of portable tanks for the transport of refrigerated liquefied gases of class 2

4.2.3.1 This section provides general provisions applicable to the use of portable tanks for the transport of refrigerated liquefied gases.

4.2.3.2 Portable tanks shall conform to the design, construction, inspection and testing provisions detailed in 6.7.4. Refrigerated liquefied gases shall be transported in portable tanks conforming to portable tank instruction T75 as described in 4.2.5.2.6 and the portable tank special provisions assigned to each substance in columns 12 and 14 of the Dangerous Goods List and described in 4.2.5.3.

4.2.3.3 During transport, portable tanks shall be adequately protected against damage to the shell and service equipment resulting from lateral and longitudinal impact and overturning. If the shell and service equipment are so constructed as to withstand impact or overturning, it need not be protected in this way. Examples of such protection are provided in 6.7.4.12.5.

4.2.3.4 Unless the name of the gas(es) being transported appears on the metal plate described in 6.7.4.15.2, a copy of the certificate specified in 6.7.4.13.1 shall be made available upon a competent authority request and readily provided by the consignor, consignee or agent, as appropriate.

4.2.3.5 Empty portable tanks not cleaned and not gas-free shall comply with the same provisions as portable tanks filled with the previous substance.

4.2.3.6 Filling

4.2.3.6.1 Prior to filling, the shipper shall ensure that the portable tank is approved for the refrigerated liquefied gas to be transported and that the portable tank is not loaded with refrigerated liquefied gases which, in contact with the materials of the shell, gaskets and service equipment, are likely to react dangerously with them to form dangerous products or appreciably weaken these materials. During filling, the temperature of the refrigerated liquefied gas shall be within the limits of the design temperature range.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 291

309

Bilaga 1

Part 4 – Packing and tank provisions

4.2.3.6.2 In estimating the initial degree of filling, the necessary holding time for the intended journey, including any delays which might be encountered, shall be taken into consideration. The initial degree of filling of the shell, except as provided for in 4.2.3.6.3 and 4.2.3.6.4, shall be such that if the contents, except helium, were to be raised to a temperature at which the vapour pressure is equal to the maximum allowable working pressure (MAWP) the volume occupied by liquid would not exceed 98%. 4.2.3.6.3 Shells intended for the transport of helium can be filled up to but not above the inlet of the pressure-relief device. 4.2.3.6.4 A higher initial degree of filling may be allowed, subject to approval by the competent authority, when the intended duration of transport is considerably shorter than the holding time. 4.2.3.6.5 Portable tanks shall not be filled or discharged while they remain on board.

4.2.3.7 Actual holding time

4.2.3.7.1 The actual holding time shall be calculated for each journey in accordance with a procedure recognized by the competent authority, on the basis of the following: .1 the reference holding time for the refrigerated liquefied gas to be transported (see 6.7.4.2.8.1) (as indicated on the plate referred to in 6.7.4.15.1); .2 the actual filling density; .3 the actual filling pressure; .4 the lowest set pressure of the pressure-limiting device(s). 4.2.3.7.2 The actual holding time shall be marked either on the portable tank itself or on a metal plate firmly secured to the portable tank, in accordance with 6.7.4.15.2. 4.2.3.8 Portable tanks shall not be offered for transport: .1 in an ullage condition liable to produce an unacceptable hydraulic force due to surge within the shell; .2 when leaking; .3 when damaged to such an extent that the integrity of the portable tank or its lifting or securing arrangements may be affected; .4 unless the service equipment has been examined and found to be in good working order; .5 unless the actual holding time for the refrigerated liquefied gas being transported has been determined in accordance with 4.2.3.7 and the portable tank is marked in accordance with 6.7.4.15.2; and .6 unless the duration of transport, after taking into consideration any delays which might be encountered, does not exceed the actual holding time. 4.2.3.9 Forklift pockets of portable tanks shall be closed off when the tank is filled. This provision does not apply to portable tanks which, according to 6.7.4.12.4, need not be provided with a means of closing off the forklift pockets.

4.2.4 General provisions for the use of multiple-element gas containers (MEGCs)

4.2.4.1 This section provides general requirements applicable to the use of multiple-element gas containers (MEGCs) for the transport of non-refrigerated gases. 4.2.4.2 MEGCs shall conform to the design, construction, inspection and testing requirements detailed in 6.7.5. The elements of MEGCs shall be periodically inspected according to the provisions set out in packing instruction P200 and in 6.2.1.6. 4.2.4.3 During transport, MEGCs shall be protected against damage to the elements and service equipment resulting from lateral and longitudinal impact and overturning. If the elements and service equipment are so constructed as to withstand impact or overturning, they need not be protected in this way. Examples of such protection are given in 6.7.5.10.4. 4.2.4.4 The periodic testing and inspection requirements for MEGCs are specified in 6.7.5.12. MEGCs or their elements shall not be charged or filled after they become due for periodic inspection but may be transported after the expiry of the time limit.

4.2.4.5 Filling

4.2.4.5.1 Prior to filling, the MEGC shall be inspected to ensure that it is authorized for the gas to be transported and that the applicable provisions of this Code have been met.

292 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

310

Bilaga 1

Chapter 4.2 – Use of portable tanks and MEGCs

4.2.4.5.2 Elements of MEGCs shall be filled according to the working pressures, filling ratios and filling provisions specified in packing instruction P200 for the specific gas being filled into each element. In no case shall an MEGC or group of elements be filled as a unit in excess of the lowest working pressure of any given element. 4.2.4.5.3 MEGCs shall not be filled above their maximum permissible gross mass. 4.2.4.5.4 Isolation valves shall be closed after filling and remain closed during transport. Toxic gases of class 2.3 shall only be transported in MEGCs where each element is equipped with an isolation valve. 4.2.4.5.5 The opening(s) for filling shall be closed by caps or plugs. The leakproofness of the closures and equipment shall be verified by the shipper after filling. 4.2.4.5.6 MEGCs shall not be offered for filling: .1 when damaged to such an extent that the integrity of the pressure receptacles or their structural or service equipment may be affected; .2 unless the pressure receptacles and their structural and service equipment have been examined and found to be in good working order; and .3 unless the required certification, retest, and filling markings are legible. 4.2.4.6 Filled MEGCs shall not be offered for transport; .1 when leaking; .2 when damaged to such an extent that the integrity of the pressure receptacles or their structural or service equipment may be affected; .3 unless the pressure receptacles and their structural and service equipment have been examined and found to be in good working order; and .4 unless the required certification, retest, and filling markings are legible. 4.2.4.7 Empty MEGCs that have not been cleaned and purged shall comply with the same requirements as MEGCs filled with the previous substance.

4.2.5 Portable tank instructions and special provisions

4.2.5.1 General

4.2.5.1.1 This section includes the portable tank instructions and special provisions applicable to dangerous goods authorized to be transported in portable tanks. Each portable tank instruction is identified by an alpha-numeric designation (T1 to T75). The Dangerous Goods List in chapter 3.2 indicates the portable tank instruction that shall be used for each substance permitted for transport in a portable tank. When no portable tank instruction appears in the Dangerous Goods List, transport of the substance in portable tanks is not permitted unless a competent authority approval is granted as set out in 6.7.1.3. Portable tank special provisions are assigned to specific dangerous goods in the Dangerous Goods List in chapter 3.2. Each portable tank special provision is identified by an alpha-numeric designation (such as TP1). A listing of the portable tank special provisions is provided in 4.2.5.3. Note: The gases authorized for transport in MEGCs are indicated in the column “MEGC” in Tables 1 and 2 of packing instruction P200 in 4.1.4.1.

4.2.5.2 Portable tank instructions

4.2.5.2.1 Portable tank instructions apply to dangerous goods of classes 1 to 9. Portable tank instructions provide specific information relevant to portable tank provisions applicable to specific substances. These provisions shall be met in addition to the general provisions in this chapter and chapter 6.7. 4.2.5.2.2 For substances of class 1 and classes 3 to 9, the portable tank instructions indicate the applicable minimum test pressure, the minimum shell thickness (in reference steel), bottom opening provisions and pressure-relief provisions. In T23, self-reactive substances of class 4.1 and class 5.2 organic peroxides permitted to be transported in portable tanks are listed along with applicable control and emergency temperatures. 4.2.5.2.3 Non-refrigerated liquefied gases are assigned to portable tank instruction T50. T50 provides the maximum allowable working pressures, bottom opening provisions, pressure-relief provisions and degree of filling provisions for non-refrigerated liquefied gases permitted for transport in portable tanks. 4.2.5.2.4 Refrigerated liquefied gases are assigned to portable tank instruction T75.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 293

311

Bilaga 1

Part 4 – Packing and tank provisions

4.2.5.2.5 Determination of the appropriate portable tank instructions

When a specific portable tank instruction is specified in the Dangerous Goods List, additional portable tanks which possess higher test pressures, greater shell thicknesses, more stringent bottom opening and pressure-relief device arrangements may be used. The following guidelines apply to determining the appropriate portable tanks which may be used for transport of particular substances:

Portable tank instruction Portable tank instructions also permitted specified T1 T2, T3, T4, T5, T6, T7, T8, T9, T10, T11, T12, T13, T14, T15, T16, T17, T18, T19, T20, T21, T22 T2 T4, T5, T7, T8, T9, T10, T11, T12, T13, T14, T15, T16, T17, T18, T19, T20, T21, T22 T3 T4, T5, T6, T7, T8, T9, T10, T11, T12, T13, T14, T15, T16, T17, T18, T19, T20, T21, T22 T4 T5, T7, T8, T9, T10, T11, T12, T13, T14, T15, T16, T17, T18, T19, T20, T21, T22 T5 T10, T14, T19, T20, T22 T6 T7, T8, T9, T10, T11, T12, T13, T14, T15, T16, T17, T18, T19, T20, T21, T22 T7 T8, T9, T10, T11, T12, T13, T14, T15, T16, T17, T18, T19, T20, T21, T22 T8 T9, T10, T13, T14, T19, T20, T21, T22 T9 T10, T13, T14, T19, T20, T21, T22 T10 T14, T19, T20, T22 T11 T12, T13, T14, T15, T16, T17, T18, T19, T20, T21, T22 T12 T14, T16, T18, T19, T20, T22 T13 T14, T19, T20, T21, T22 T14 T19, T20, T22 T15 T16, T17, T18, T19, T20, T21, T22 T16 T18, T19, T20, T22 T17 T18 , T19, T20, T21, T22 T18 T19, T20, T22 T19 T20, T22 T20 T22 T21 T22 T22 None T23 None T50 None

294 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

312

Bilaga 1

Chapter 4.2 – Use of portable tanks and MEGCs

4.2.5.2.6 Portable tank instructions

Portable tank instructions specify the provisions applicable to a portable tank when used for the transport of specific substances. Portable tank instructions T1 to T22 specify the applicable minimum test pressure, the minimum shell thickness (in mm of reference steel), and the pressure relief and bottom-opening provisions.

T1 – T22 PORTABLE TANK INSTRUCTIONS T1 – T22 These portable tank instructions apply to liquid and solid substances of classes 3 to 9. The general provisions of 6.7.2 shall be met. Minimum shell thickness Pressure relief Bottom opening Portable tank Minimum test a b (in mm – reference provisions provisions instruction pressure (bar) steel) (see 6.7.2.8) (see 6.7.2.6) (see 6.7.2.4) T1 1.5 See 6.7.2.4.2 Normal See 6.7.2.6.2 T2 1.5 See 6.7.2.4.2 Normal See 6.7.2.6.3 T3 2.65 See 6.7.2.4.2 Normal See 6.7.2.6.2 T4 2.65 See 6.7.2.4.2 Normal See 6.7.2.6.3 T5 2.65 See 6.7.2.4.2 See 6.7.2.8.3 Not allowed T6 4 See 6.7.2.4.2 Normal See 6.7.2.6.2 T7 4 See 6.7.2.4.2 Normal See 6.7.2.6.3 T8 4 See 6.7.2.4.2 Normal Not allowed T9 4 6 mm Normal Not allowed T10 4 6 mm See 6.7.2.8.3 Not allowed T11 6 See 6.7.2.4.2 Normal See 6.7.2.6.3 T12 6 See 6.7.2.4.2 See 6.7.2.8.3 See 6.7.2.6.3 T13 6 6 mm Normal Not allowed T14 6 6 mm See 6.7.2.8.3 Not allowed T15 10 See 6.7.2.4.2 Normal See 6.7.2.6.3 T16 10 See 6.7.2.4.2 See 6.7.2.8.3 See 6.7.2.6.3 T17 10 6 mm Normal See 6.7.2.6.3 T18 10 6 mm See 6.7.2.8.3 See 6.7.2.6.3 T19 10 6 mm See 6.7.2.8.3 Not allowed T20 10 8 mm See 6.7.2.8.3 Not allowed T21 10 10 mm Normal Not allowed T22 10 10 mm See 6.7.2.8.3 Not allowed a When the word “Normal” is indicated, all the provisions of 6.7.2.8 apply except for 6.7.2.8.3. b When this column indicates “not allowed”, bottom openings are not permitted when the substance to be transported is a liquid (see 6.7.2.6.1). When the substance to be transported is a solid at all temperatures encountered under normal conditions of transport, bottom openings conforming to the provisions of 6.7.2.6.2 are authorized.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 295

313

Bilaga 1

Part 4 – Packing and tank provisions

T23 PORTABLE TANK INSTRUCTION T23 This portable tank instruction applies to substances of class 4.1 and class 5.2, organic peroxides. The general provisions of 4.2.1 and the provisions of 6.7.2 shall be met. The provisions specific to self-reactive substances of class 4.1 and organic peroxides of class 5.2 in 4.2.1.13 shall also be met. Minimum Minimum shell Bottom Pressure Control UN test thickness opening relief Degree Emergency Substance temper- No. pressure (mm – require- require- of filling temperature ature (bar) reference ments ments steel) 3109 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE F, 4 See See See See LIQUID 6.7.2.4.2 6.7.2.6.3 6.7.2.8.2, 4.2.1.13.13 tert-Butyl hydroperoxide,* not 4.2.1.13.6, more than 72% with water 4.2.1.13.7, Cumyl hydroperoxide, not more 4.2.1.13.8 than 90% in diluent type A Di-tert-butyl peroxide, not more than 32% in diluent type A Isopropyl cumyl hydroperoxide, not more than 72% in diluent type A p-Menthyl hydroperoxide, not more than 72% in diluent type A Pinanyl hydroperoxide, not more than 56% in diluent type A 3110 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE F, 4 See See See See SOLID 6.7.2.4.2 6.7.2.6.3 6.7.2.8.2, 4.2.1.13.13 Dicumyl peroxide† 4.2.1.13.6, 4.2.1.13.7, 4.2.1.13.8 3119 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE F, 4 See See See See ‡ ‡ LIQUID, TEMPERATURE 6.7.2.4.2 6.7.2.6.3 6.7.2.8.2, 4.2.1.13.13 CONTROLLED 4.2.1.13.6, 4.2.1.13.7, 4.2.1.13.8 tert-Amyl peroxyneodecan oate, –10°C –5°C not more than 47% in diluent type A tert-Butyl peroxyacetate, not +30°C +35°C more than 32% in diluent type B tert-Butyl peroxy-2-ethyl- +15°C +20°C hexanoate, not more than 32% in diluent type B tert-Butyl peroxypivalate, not +5°C +10°C more than 27% in diluent type B tert-Butyl peroxy-3,5,5- +35°C +40°C trimethylhexanoate, not more than 32% in diluent type B Di-(3,5,5-trimethylhexanoyl) 0°C +5°C peroxide, not more than 38% in diluent type A or type B Peroxyacetic acid, distilled, +30°C +35°C stabilized§ 3120 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE F, 4 See See See See ‡ ‡ SOLID, TEMPERATURE 6.7.2.4.2 6.7.2.6.3 6.7.2.8.2, 4.2.1.13.13 CONTROLLED 4.2.1.13.6, 4.2.1.13.7, 4.2.1.13.8 * Provided that steps have been taken to achieve the safety equivalence of 65% tert-butyl hydroperoxide and 35% water. † Maximum quantity per portable tank: 2000 kg. ‡ As approved by the competent authority. § Formulation derived from distillation of peroxyacetic acid originating from peroxyacetic acid in concentration of not more than 41% with water, total active oxygen (peroxyacetic acid + H2O2) ≤ 9.5%, which fulfils the criteria of 2.5.3.3.2.6.

296 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

314

Bilaga 1

Chapter 4.2 – Use of portable tanks and MEGCs

T23 PORTABLE TANK INSTRUCTION (continued) T23 Minimum Minimum shell Bottom Pressure Control UN test thickness opening relief Degree Emergency Substance temper- No. pressure (mm – require- require- of filling temperature ature (bar) reference ments ments steel) 3229 SELF-REACTIVE LIQUID 4 See See See See TYPE F 6.7.2.4.2 6.7.2.6.3 6.7.2.8.2, 4.2.1.13.13 4.2.1.13.6, 4.2.1.13.7, 4.2.1.13.8 3230 SELF-REACTIVE SOLID 4 See See See See TYPE F 6.7.2.4.2 6.7.2.6.3 6.7.2.8.2, 4.2.1.13.13 4.2.1.13.6, 4.2.1.13.7, 4.2.1.13.8 3239 SELF-REACTIVE LIQUID 4 See See See See * * TYPE F, TEMPERATURE 6.7.2.4.2 6.7.2.6.3 6.7.2.8.2, 4.2.1.13.13 CONTROLLED 4.2.1.13.6, 4.2.1.13.7, 4.2.1.13.8 3240 SELF-REACTIVE SOLID 4 See See See See * * TYPE F, TEMPERATURE 6.7.2.4.2 6.7.2.6.3 6.7.2.8.2, 4.2.1.13.13 CONTROLLED 4.2.1.13.6, 4.2.1.13.7, 4.2.1.13.8 * As approved by the competent authority.

T50 PORTABLE TANK INSTRUCTION T50 This portable tank instruction applies to non-refrigerated liquefied gases and chemicals under pressure (UN Nos. 3500, 3501, 3502, 3503, 3504 and 3505). The general provisions of 4.2.2 and the provisions of 6.7.3 shall be met. Maximum allowable working pressure Openings Pressure relief Maximum UN Non-refrigerated liquefied b (bar) Small; Bare; below provisions filling density No. gases Sunshield; Insulated liquid level (see 6.7.3.7) (kg/ℓ) a respectively 1005 Ammonia, anhydrous 29.0 Allowed See 6.7.3.7.3 0.53 25.7 22.0 19.7 1009 Bromotrifluoromethane 38.0 Allowed Normal 1.13 (Refrigerant gas R 13B1) 34.0 30.0 27.5 1010 Butadienes, stabilized 7.5 Allowed Normal 0.55 7.0 7.0 7.0 1010 Butadienes and hydrocarbon See MAWP definition Allowed Normal See 4.2.2.7 mixture, stabilized with more in 6.7.3.1 than 40% butadienes 1011 Butane 7.0 Allowed Normal 0.51 7.0 7.0 7.0 1012 Butylene 8.0 Allowed Normal 0.53 7.0 7.0 7.0 a “Small” means tanks having a shell with a diameter of 1.5 metres or less; “Bare” means tanks having a shell with a diameter of more than 1.5 metres without insulation or sun shield (see 6.7.3.2.12); “Sunshield” means tanks having a shell with a diameter of more than 1.5 metres with sun shield (see 6.7.3.2.12); “Insulated” means tanks having a shell with a diameter of more than 1.5 metres with insulation (see 6.7.3.2.12); (See definition of “Design reference temperature” in 6.7.3.1). b The word “Normal” in the pressure relief column indicates that a frangible disc as specified in 6.7.3.7.3 is not required.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 297

315

Bilaga 1

Part 4 – Packing and tank provisions

T50 PORTABLE TANK INSTRUCTION (continued) T50 Maximum allowable working pressure Openings Pressure relief Maximum UN Non-refrigerated liquefied b (bar) Small; Bare; below provisions filling density No. gases Sunshield; Insulated liquid level (see 6.7.3.7) (kg/ℓ) respectivelya 1017 Chlorine 19.0 Not allowed See 6.7.3.7.3 1.25 17.0 15.0 13.5 1018 Chlorodifluoromethane 26.0 Allowed Normal 1.03 (Refrigerant gas R 22) 24.0 21.0 19.0 1020 Chloropentafluoroethane 23.0 Allowed Normal 1.06 (Refrigerant gas R 115) 20.0 18.0 16.0 1021 1-Chloro-1,2,2,2- 10.3 Allowed Normal 1.20 tetrafluoroethane 9.8 (Refrigerant gas R 124) 7.9 7.0 1027 Cyclopropane 18.0 Allowed Normal 0.53 16.0 14.5 13.0 1028 Dichlorodifluoromethane 16.0 Allowed Normal 1.15 (Refrigerant gas R 12) 15.0 13.0 11.5 1029 Dichlorofluoromethane 7.0 Allowed Normal 1.23 (Refrigerant gas R 21) 7.0 7.0 7.0 1030 1,1-Difluoroethane 16.0 Allowed Normal 0.79 (Refrigerant gas R 152a) 14.0 12.4 11.0 1032 Dimethylamine, anhydrous 7.0 Allowed Normal 0.59 7.0 7.0 7.0 1033 Dimethyl ether 15.5 Allowed Normal 0.58 13.8 12.0 10.6 1036 Ethylamine 7.0 Allowed Normal 0.61 7.0 7.0 7.0 1037 Ethyl chloride 7.0 Allowed Normal 0.80 7.0 7.0 7.0 1040 Ethylene oxide with nitrogen – Not allowed See 6.7.3.7.3 0.78 up to a total pressure of 1 MPa – (10 bar) at 50°C – 10.0 1041 Ethylene oxide and carbon See MAWP Allowed Normal See 4.2.2.7 dioxide mixture with more than definition 9% but not more than 87% in 6.7.3.1 ethylene oxide a “Small” means tanks having a shell with a diameter of 1.5 metres or less; “Bare” means tanks having a shell with a diameter of more than 1.5 metres without insulation or sun shield (see 6.7.3.2.12); “Sunshield” means tanks having a shell with a diameter of more than 1.5 metres with sun shield (see 6.7.3.2.12); “Insulated” means tanks having a shell with a diameter of more than 1.5 metres with insulation (see 6.7.3.2.12); (See definition of “Design reference temperature” in 6.7.3.1). b The word “Normal” in the pressure relief column indicates that a frangible disc as specified in 6.7.3.7.3 is not required.

298 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

316

Bilaga 1

Chapter 4.2 – Use of portable tanks and MEGCs

T50 PORTABLE TANK INSTRUCTION (continued) T50 Maximum allowable working pressure Openings Pressure relief Maximum UN Non-refrigerated liquefied b (bar) Small; Bare; below provisions filling density No. gases Sunshield; Insulated liquid level (see 6.7.3.7) (kg/ℓ) respectivelya 1055 Isobutylene 8.1 Allowed Normal 0.52 7.0 7.0 7.0 1060 Methylacetylene and propadiene 28.0 Allowed Normal 0.43 mixture, stabilized 24.5 22.0 20.0 1061 Methylamine, anhydrous 10.8 Allowed Normal 0.58 9.6 7.8 7.0 1062 Methyl bromide with not more 7.0 Not allowed See 6.7.3.7.3 1.51 than 2% chloropicrin 7.0 7.0 7.0 1063 Methyl chloride 14.5 Allowed Normal 0.81 (Refrigerant gas R40) 12.7 11.3 10.0 1064 Methyl mercaptan 7.0 Not allowed See 6.7.3.7.3 0.78 7.0 7.0 7.0 1067 Dinitrogen tetroxide 7.0 Not allowed See 6.7.3.7.3 1.30 7.0 7.0 7.0 1075 Petroleum gas, liquefied See MAWP definition Allowed Normal See 4.2.2.7 in 6.7.3.1 1077 Propylene 28.0 Allowed Normal 0.43 24.5 22.0 20.0 1078 Refrigerant gas, N.O.S. See MAWP definition Allowed Normal See 4.2.2.7 in 6.7.3.1 1079 Sulphur dioxide 11.6 Not allowed See 6.7.3.7.3 1.23 10.3 8.5 7.6 1082 Trifluorochloroethylene, 17.0 Not allowed See 6.7.3.7.3 1.13 stabilized 15.0 (Refrigerant gas R 1113) 13.1 11.6 1083 Trimethylamine, anhydrous 7.0 Allowed Normal 0.56 7.0 7.0 7.0 1085 Vinyl bromide, stabilized 7.0 Allowed Normal 1.37 7.0 7.0 7.0 1086 Vinyl chloride, stabilized 10.6 Allowed Normal 0.81 9.3 8.0 7.0 a “Small” means tanks having a shell with a diameter of 1.5 metres or less; “Bare” means tanks having a shell with a diameter of more than 1.5 metres without insulation or sun shield (see 6.7.3.2.12); “Sunshield” means tanks having a shell with a diameter of more than 1.5 metres with sun shield (see 6.7.3.2.12); “Insulated” means tanks having a shell with a diameter of more than 1.5 metres with insulation (see 6.7.3.2.12); (See definition of “Design reference temperature” in 6.7.3.1). b The word “Normal” in the pressure relief column indicates that a frangible disc as specified in 6.7.3.7.3 is not required.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 299

317

Bilaga 1

Part 4 – Packing and tank provisions

T50 PORTABLE TANK INSTRUCTION (continued) T50 Maximum allowable working pressure Openings Pressure relief Maximum UN Non-refrigerated liquefied b (bar) Small; Bare; below provisions filling density No. gases Sunshield; Insulated liquid level (see 6.7.3.7) (kg/ℓ) respectivelya 1087 Vinyl methyl ether, stabilized 7.0 Allowed Normal 0.67 7.0 7.0 7.0 1581 Chloropicrin and methyl bromide 7.0 Not allowed See 6.7.3.7.3 1.51 mixture with more than 2% 7.0 chloropicrin 7.0 7.0 1582 Chloropicrin and methyl chloride 19.2 Not allowed See 6.7.3.7.3 0.81 mixture 16.9 15.1 13.1 1858 Hexafluoropropylene 19.2 Allowed Normal 1.11 (Refrigerant gas R 1216) 16.9 15.1 13.1 1912 Methyl chloride and methylene 15.2 Allowed Normal 0.81 chloride mixture 13.0 11.6 10.1 1958 1,2-Dichloro-1,1,2,2- 7.0 Allowed Normal 1.30 tetrafluoroethane 7.0 (Refrigerant gas R 114) 7.0 7.0 1965 Hydrocarbon gas, mixture See MAWP definition Allowed Normal See 4.2.2.7 liquefied, N.O.S. in 6.7.3.1 1969 Isobutane 8.5 Allowed Normal 0.49 7.5 7.0 7.0 1973 Chlorodifluoromethane and 28.3 Allowed Normal 1.05 chloropentafluoroethane mixture 25.3 with fixed boiling point, with 22.8 approximately 20.3 49% chlorodifluoromethane (Refrigerant gas R 502) 1974 Chlorodifluorobromomethane 7.4 Allowed Normal 1.61 (Refrigerant gas R 12B1) 7.0 7.0 7.0 1976 Octafluorocyclobutane 8.8 Allowed Normal 1.34 (Refrigerant gas RC 318) 7.8 7.0 7.0 1978 Propane 22.5 Allowed Normal 0.42 20.4 18.0 16.5 1983 1-Chloro-2,2,2-trifluoroethane 7.0 Allowed Normal 1.18 (Refrigerant gas R 133a) 7.0 7.0 7.0 2035 1,1,1-Trifluoroethane 31.0 Allowed Normal 0.76 (Refrigerant gas R 143a) 27.5 24.2 21.8 a “Small” means tanks having a shell with a diameter of 1.5 metres or less; “Bare” means tanks having a shell with a diameter of more than 1.5 metres without insulation or sun shield (see 6.7.3.2.12); “Sunshield” means tanks having a shell with a diameter of more than 1.5 metres with sun shield (see 6.7.3.2.12); “Insulated” means tanks having a shell with a diameter of more than 1.5 metres with insulation (see 6.7.3.2.12); (See definition of “Design reference temperature” in 6.7.3.1). b The word “Normal” in the pressure relief column indicates that a frangible disc as specified in 6.7.3.7.3 is not required.

300 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

318

Bilaga 1

Chapter 4.2 – Use of portable tanks and MEGCs

T50 PORTABLE TANK INSTRUCTION (continued) T50 Maximum allowable working pressure Openings Pressure relief Maximum UN Non-refrigerated liquefied b (bar) Small; Bare; below provisions filling density No. gases Sunshield; Insulated liquid level (see 6.7.3.7) (kg/ℓ) respectivelya 2424 Octafluoropropane 23.1 Allowed Normal 1.07 (Refrigerant gas R 218) 20.8 18.6 16.6 2517 1-Chloro-1,1-difluoroethane 8.9 Allowed Normal 0.99 (Refrigerant gas R 142b) 7.8 7.0 7.0 2602 Dichlorodifluoromethane and 20.0 Allowed Normal 1.01 difluoroethane azeotropic 18.0 mixture with approximately 16.0 74% dichlorodifluoromethane 14.5 (Refrigerant gas R 500) 3057 Trifluoroacetyl chloride 14.6 Not allowed See 6.7.3.7.3 1.17 12.9 11.3 9.9 3070 Ethylene oxide and 14.0 Allowed See 6.7.3.7.3 1.09 dichlorodifluoromethane 12.0 mixture, with not more 11.0 than 12.5% ethylene oxide 9.0 3153 Perfluoro(methyl vinyl ether) 14.3 Allowed Normal 1.14 13.4 11.2 10.2 3159 1,1,1,2-Tetrafluoroethane 17.7 Allowed Normal 1.04 (Refrigerant gas R 134a) 15.7 13.8 12.1 3161 Liquefied gas, flammable, N.O.S. See MAWP definition Allowed Normal See 4.2.2.7 in 6.7.3.1 3163 Liquefied gas, N.O.S. See MAWP definition Allowed Normal See 4.2.2.7 in 6.7.3.1 3220 Pentafluoroethane 34.4 Allowed Normal 0.87 (Refrigerant gas R 125) 30.8 27.5 24.5 3252 Difluoromethane 43.0 Allowed Normal 0.78 (Refrigerant gas R 32) 39.0 34.4 30.5 3296 Heptafluoropropane 16.0 Allowed Normal 1.20 (Refrigerant gas R 227) 14.0 12.5 11.0 3297 Ethylene oxide and 8.1 Allowed Normal 1.16 chlorotetrafluoroethane mixture, 7.0 with not more than 8.8% 7.0 ethylene oxide 7.0 3298 Ethylene oxide and 25.9 Allowed Normal 1.02 pentafluoroethane mixture, with 23.4 not more than 7.9% ethylene 20.9 oxide 18.6 3299 Ethylene oxide and 16.7 Allowed Normal 1.03 tetrafluoroethane mixture, with 14.7 not more than 5.6% ethylene 12.9 oxide 11.2 a “Small” means tanks having a shell with a diameter of 1.5 metres or less; “Bare” means tanks having a shell with a diameter of more than 1.5 metres without insulation or sun shield (see 6.7.3.2.12); “Sunshield” means tanks having a shell with a diameter of more than 1.5 metres with sun shield (see 6.7.3.2.12); “Insulated” means tanks having a shell with a diameter of more than 1.5 metres with insulation (see 6.7.3.2.12); (See definition of “Design reference temperature” in 6.7.3.1). b The word “Normal” in the pressure relief column indicates that a frangible disc as specified in 6.7.3.7.3 is not required.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 301

319

Bilaga 1

Part 4 – Packing and tank provisions

T50 PORTABLE TANK INSTRUCTION (continued) T50 Maximum allowable working pressure Openings Pressure relief Maximum UN Non-refrigerated liquefied b (bar) Small; Bare; below provisions filling density No. gases Sunshield; Insulated liquid level (see 6.7.3.7) (kg/ℓ) respectivelya 3318 Ammonia solution, relative See MAWP definition Allowed See 6.7.3.7.3 See 4.2.2.7 density less than 0.880 at 15°C in 6.7.3.1 in water, with more than 50% ammonia 3337 Refrigerant gas R 404A 31.6 Allowed Normal 0.82 28.3 25.3 22.5 3338 Refrigerant gas R 407A 31.3 Allowed Normal 0.94 28.1 25.1 22.4 3339 Refrigerant gas R 407B 33.0 Allowed Normal 0.93 29.6 26.5 23.6 3340 Refrigerant gas R 407C 29.9 Allowed Normal 0.95 26.8 23.9 21.3 c 3500 Chemical under pressure, n.o.s. See MAWP definition Allowed See 6.7.3.7.3 TP4 in 6.7.3.1 c 3501 Chemical under pressure, See MAWP definition Allowed See 6.7.3.7.3 TP4 flammable, n.o.s. in 6.7.3.1 c 3502 Chemical under pressure, toxic, See MAWP definition Allowed See 6.7.3.7.3 TP4 n.o.s. in 6.7.3.1 c 3503 Chemical under pressure, See MAWP definition Allowed See 6.7.3.7.3 TP4 corrosive, n.o.s. in 6.7.3.1 3504 Chemical under pressure, See MAWP definition Allowed See 6.7.3.7.3 TP4c flammable, toxic, n.o.s. in 6.7.3.1 c 3505 Chemical under pressure, See MAWP definition Allowed See 6.7.3.7.3 TP4 flammable, corrosive, n.o.s. in 6.7.3.1 a “Small” means tanks having a shell with a diameter of 1.5 metres or less; “Bare” means tanks having a shell with a diameter of more than 1.5 metres without insulation or sun shield (see 6.7.3.2.12); “Sunshield” means tanks having a shell with a diameter of more than 1.5 metres with sun shield (see 6.7.3.2.12); “Insulated” means tanks having a shell with a diameter of more than 1.5 metres with insulation (see 6.7.3.2.12); (See definition of “Design reference temperature” in 6.7.3.1). b The word “Normal” in the pressure relief column indicates that a frangible disc as specified in 6.7.3.7.3 is not required. c For UN Nos. 3500, 3501, 3502, 3503, 3504 and 3505, the degree of filling shall be considered instead of the maximum filling ratio.

T75 PORTABLE TANK INSTRUCTION T75 This portable tank instruction applies to refrigerated liquefied gases. The general provisions of 4.2.3 and 6.7.4 shall be met.

4.2.5.3 Portable tank special provisions

Portable tank special provisions are assigned to certain substances to indicate provisions which are in addition to or in lieu of those provided by the portable tank instructions or the provisions in chapter 6.7. Portable tank special provisions are identified by an alpha-numeric designation beginning with the letters “TP” (tank provision) and are assigned to specific substances in column 14 of the Dangerous Goods List in chapter 3.2. The following is a list of the portable tank special provisions:

TP1 The degree of filling prescribed in 4.2.1.9.2 shall not be exceeded.

TP2 The degree of filling prescribed in 4.2.1.9.3 shall not be exceeded.

TP3 The maximum degree of filling (in %) for solids transported above their melting points and for elevated temperature liquids shall be determined in accordance with 4.2.1.9.5.

TP4 The degree of filling shall not exceed 90% or, alternatively, any other value approved by the competent authority (see 4.2.1.16.2).

TP5 The degree of filling prescribed in 4.2.3.6 shall be met.

302 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

320

Bilaga 1

Chapter 4.2 – Use of portable tanks and MEGCs

TP6 To prevent the tank bursting in any event, including fire engulfment, it shall be provided with pressurerelief devices which are adequate in relation to the capacity of the tank and to the nature of the substance transported. The device shall also be compatible with the substance. TP7 Air shall be eliminated from the vapour space by nitrogen or other means. TP8 The test pressure for the portable tank may be reduced to 1.5 bar when the flashpoint of the substances transported is greater than 0°C. TP9 A substance under this description shall only be transported in a portable tank under an approval granted by the competent authority. TP10 A lead lining, not less than 5 mm thick, which shall be tested annually, or another suitable lining material approved by the competent authority is required. TP11 [Reserved] TP12 [Reserved] TP13 Self-contained breathing apparatus shall be provided when this substance is transported, unless no self-contained breathing apparatus, as required by SOLAS regulation II-2/19 (II-2/54), is on board. TP14 [Reserved] TP15 [Reserved] TP16 The tank shall be fitted with a special device to prevent under-pressure and excess pressure during normal transport conditions. This device shall be approved by the competent authority. Pressurerelief provisions are as indicated in 6.7.2.8.3 to prevent crystallization of the product in the pressurerelief valve. TP17 Only inorganic non-combustible materials shall be used for thermal insulation of the tank. TP18 Temperature shall be maintained between 18°C and 40°C. Portable tanks containing solidified methacrylic acid shall not be reheated during transport. TP19 The calculated shell thickness shall be increased by 3 mm. Shell thickness shall be verified ultrasonically at intervals midway between periodic hydraulic tests. TP20 This substance shall only be transported in insulated tanks under a nitrogen blanket. TP21 The shell thickness shall be not less than 8 mm. Tanks shall be hydraulically tested and internally inspected at intervals not exceeding 2.5 years. TP22 Lubricant for joints or other devices shall be oxygen-compatible. TP23 Transport permitted under special conditions prescribed by the competent authorities. TP24 The portable tank may be fitted with a device located, under maximum filling conditions, in the vapour space of the shell to prevent the build-up of excess pressure due to the slow decom position of the substance transported. This device shall also prevent an unacceptable amount of leakage of liquid in the case of overturning or entry of foreign matter into the tank. This device shall be approved by the competent authority or its authorized body. TP25 Sulphur trioxide 99.95% pure and above may be transported in tanks without an inhibitor provided that it is maintained at a temperature equal to or above 32.5°C. TP26 When transported under heated conditions, the heating device shall be fitted outside the shell. For UN 3176, this provision only applies when the substance reacts dangerously with water. TP27 A portable tank having a minimum test pressure of 4 bar may be used if it is shown that a test pressure of 4 bar or less is acceptable according to the test pressure definition in 6.7.2.1. TP28 A portable tank having a minimum test pressure of 2.65 bar may be used if it is shown that a test pressure of 2.65 bar or less is acceptable according to the test pressure definition in 6.7.2.1. TP29 A portable tank having a minimum test pressure of 1.5 bar may be used if it is shown that a test pressure of 1.5 bar or less is acceptable according to the test pressure definition in 6.7.2.1. TP30 This substance shall be transported in insulated tanks. TP31 This substance shall be transported in tanks in solid state. TP32 For UN 0331, UN 0332 and UN 3375, portable tanks may be used subject to the following conditions: (a) To avoid unnecessary confinement, each portable tank constructed of metal shall be fitted with a pressure relief device that may be of the re-closing spring-loaded type, a frangible disc or a fusible element. The set-to-discharge or burst pressure, as applicable, shall not be greater than 2.65 bar for portable tanks with minimum test pressures greater than 4 bar. (b) Suitability for transport in tanks shall be demonstrated. One method to evaluate this suitability is test 8 (d) in Test Series 8 (see United Nations Manual of Tests and Criteria, Part 1, sub-section 18.7).

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 303

321

Bilaga 1

Part 4 – Packing and tank provisions

(c) Substances shall not be allowed to remain in the portable tank for any period that could result in caking. Appropriate measures shall be taken to avoid accumulation and packing of substances in the tank (e.g. cleaning, etc). TP33 The portable tank instruction assigned for this substance applies for granular and powdered solids and for solids which are filled and discharged at temperatures above their melting point and which are cooled and transported as a solid mass. For solids which are transported above their melting point, see 4.2.1.19. TP34 Portable tanks need not be subjected to the impact test in 6.7.4.14.1 if the portable tank is marked “NOT FOR RAIL TRANSPORT” on the plate specified in 6.7.4.15.1 and also in letters at least 10 cm high on both sides of the outer jacket. TP35 Portable tank instruction T14 may continue to be applied until 31 December 2014. TP36 Fusible elements in the vapour space may be used on portable tanks. TP37 Portable tank instruction T14 may continue to be applied until 31 December 2016 except that until that date: .1 For UN Nos. 1810, 2474 and 2668, T7 may be applied; .2 For UN No. 2486, T8 may be applied; and .3 For UN No. 1838, T10 may be applied. TP38 The portable tank instruction T9 may continue to be applied until 31 December 2018. TP39 The portable tank instruction T4 may continue to be applied until 31 December 2018 TP40 Portable tanks shall not be transported when connected with spray application equipment. TP90 Tanks with bottom openings may be used on short international voyages. TP91 Portable tanks with bottom openings may also be used on long international voyages.

4.2.6 Additional provisions for the use of road tank vehicles

4.2.6.1 The tank of a road tank vehicle shall be attached to the vehicle during normal operations of filling, discharge and transport. IMO type 4 tanks shall be attached to the chassis when transported on board ships. Road tank vehicles shall not be filled or discharged while they remain on board. A road tank vehicle shall be driven on board on its own wheels and be fitted with permanent tie-down attachments for securing on board the ship. 4.2.6.2 Road tank vehicles shall comply with the provisions of chapter 6.8. IMO type 4, 6 and 8 tanks may be used according to the provisions of chapter 6.8 for short international voyages only.

304 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

322

Bilaga 1

Chapter 4.3

Use of bulk containers

Note: Sheeted bulk containers (BK1) shall not be used for sea transport, except as indicated in 4.3.3.

4.3.1 General provisions

4.3.1.1 This section provides general requirements applicable to the use of containers for the transport of solid substances in bulk. Substances shall be transported in bulk containers conforming to the applicable bulk container instruction identified by the letters BK in column 13 of the dangerous goods list, with the following meaning: BK1: the transport in sheeted bulk containers is permitted BK2: the transport in closed bulk containers is permitted BK3: the transport in flexible bulk containers is permitted The bulk container used shall conform to the provisions of chapter 6.9 4.3.1.2 Except as provided in 4.3.1.3, bulk containers shall only be used when a substance is assigned a bulk container code in column 13 of the Dangerous Goods List. 4.3.1.3 When a substance is not assigned BK2 or BK3 in column 13 of the dangerous goods list, interim approval for transport may be issued by the competent authority of the country of origin. The approval shall be included in the documentation of the consignment and contain, as a minimum, the information normally provided in the bulk container instruction and the conditions under which the substance shall be transported. Appropriate measures should be initiated by the competent authority to have the assignment included in the Dangerous Goods List. When a substance is not permitted in a BK1 bulk container, an exemption may be issued in accordance with 7.9.1. 4.3.1.4 Substances which may become liquid at temperatures likely to be encountered during transport are not permitted in bulk containers. 4.3.1.5 Bulk containers shall be siftproof and shall be so closed that none of the contents can escape under normal conditions of transport, including the effect of vibration, or by changes of temperature, humidity or pressure. 4.3.1.6 Bulk solids shall be loaded into bulk containers and evenly distributed in a manner that minimizes movement that could result in damage to the container or leakage of the dangerous goods. 4.3.1.7 Where venting devices are fitted, they shall be kept clear and operable. 4.3.1.8 Bulk solids shall not react dangerously with the material of the bulk container, gaskets, equipment including lids and tarpaulins, or with protective coatings which are in contact with the contents, or significantly weaken them. Bulk containers shall be so constructed or adapted that the goods cannot penetrate between wooden floor coverings or come into contact with those parts of the bulk containers that may be affected by the dangerous goods or residues thereof. 4.3.1.9 Before being filled and offered for transport, each bulk container shall be inspected and cleaned to ensure that it does not contain any residue on the interior or exterior that could: – cause a dangerous reaction with the substance intended for transport; – detrimentally affect the structural integrity of the bulk container; or – affect the dangerous goods retention capabilities of the bulk container. 4.3.1.10 During transport, no dangerous residues shall adhere to the outer surfaces of a bulk container. 4.3.1.11 If several closure systems are fitted in series, the system which is located nearest to the dangerous goods to be transported shall be closed first before filling. 4.3.1.12 Empty bulk containers that have contained dangerous goods shall be treated in the same manner as is prescribed in this Code for a filled bulk container, unless adequate measures have been taken to nullify any hazard.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 305

323

Bilaga 1

Part 4 – Packing and tank provisions

4.3.1.13 If bulk containers are used for the carriage of bulk goods liable to cause a dust explosion, or evolve flammable vapours (e.g., for certain wastes), measures shall be taken to exclude sources of ignition and to prevent dangerous electrostatic discharge during transport, loading or unloading of the goods. 4.3.1.14 Substances, for example wastes, which may react dangerously with one another and substances of different classes and goods not subject to this Code, which are liable to react dangerously with one another, shall not be mixed together in the same bulk container. Dangerous reactions are: .1 combustion and/or evolution of considerable heat; .2 emission of flammable and/or toxic gases; .3 formation of corrosive liquids; or .4 formation of unstable substances. 4.3.1.15 Before a bulk container is filled, it shall be visually examined to ensure it is structurally serviceable, its interior walls, ceiling and floors are free from protrusions or damage and that any inner liners or substance retaining equipment are free from rips, tears or any damage that would compromise its cargo retention capabilities. “Structurally serviceable” means the bulk container does not have major defects in its structural components, such as top and bottom side rails, top and bottom end rails, door sill and header, floor cross members, corner posts, and corner fittings in a freight container. Major defects include: .1 bends, cracks or breaks in the structural or supporting members that affect the integrity of the container; .2 more than one splice or an improper splice (such as a lapped splice) in top or bottom end rails or door headers; .3 more than two splices in any one top or bottom side rail; .4 any splice in a door sill or corner post; .5 door hinges and hardware that are seized, twisted, broken, missing, or otherwise inoperative; .6 gaskets and seals that do not seal; .7 any distortion of the overall configuration great enough to prevent proper alignment of handling equipment, mounting and securing chassis or vehicle, or insertion into ships’ cargo spaces; .8 any damage to lifting attachments or handling equipment interface features; or .9 any damage to service or operational equipment. 4.3.1.16 Before a flexible bulk container is filled it shall be visually examined to ensure it is structurally serviceable, its textile slings, load-bearing structure straps, body fabric, lock device parts including metal and textile parts are free from protrusions or damage and that inner liners are free from rips, tears or any damage. 4.3.1.16.1 For flexible bulk containers, the period of use permitted for the transport of dangerous goods shall be two years from the date of manufacture of the flexible bulk container. 4.3.1.16.2 A venting device shall be fitted if a dangerous accumulation of gases may develop within the flexible bulk container. The vent shall be so designed that the penetration of foreign substances is prevented under normal conditions of transport.

4.3.2 Additional provisions applicable to bulk goods of classes 4.2, 4.3, 5.1, 6.2, 7 and 8

4.3.2.1 Bulk goods of class 4.2

Only closed bulk containers (BK2) may be used. The total mass carried in a bulk container shall be such that its spontaneous ignition temperature is greater than 55°C.

4.3.2.2 Bulk goods of class 4.3

Only closed bulk containers (BK2) may be used. These goods shall be transported in bulk containers which are waterproof.

4.3.2.3 Bulk goods of class 5.1

Bulk containers shall be so constructed or adapted that the goods cannot come into contact with wood or any other incompatible material.

306 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

324

Bilaga 1

Chapter 4.3 – Use of bulk containers

4.3.2.4 Bulk goods of class 6.2

4.3.2.4.1 Transport in bulk containers of animal material of class 6.2

Animal material containing infectious substances (UN Nos. 2814, 2900 and 3373) is authorized for transport in bulk containers provided the following conditions are met: .1 Closed bulk containers, and their openings, shall be leakproof by design or by the fitting of a suitable liner. .2 The animal material shall be thoroughly treated with an appropriate disinfectant before loading prior to transport. .3 Closed bulk containers shall not be re-used until they have been thoroughly cleaned and disinfected. Note: Additional provisions may be required by appropriate national health authorities.

4.3.2.4.2 Bulk wastes of class 6.2 (UN 3291)

.1 only closed bulk containers (BK2) shall be permitted; .2 closed bulk containers, and their openings, shall be leakproof by design. These bulk containers shall have non-porous interior surfaces and shall be free from cracks or other features that could damage packagings inside, impede disinfection or permit inadvertent release; .3 wastes of UN 3291 shall be contained within the closed bulk container in UN type tested and approved sealed leakproof plastics bags tested for solids of packing group II and marked in accordance with 6.1.3.1. Such plastics bags shall be capable of passing the tests for tear and impact resistance according to ISO 7765-1:1988 “Plastics film and sheeting – Determination of impact resistance by the free-falling dart method – Part 1: Staircase methods” and ISO 6383-2:1983 “Plastics – Film and sheeting – Determination of tear resistance – Part 2: Elmendorf method”. Each bag shall have an impact resistance of at least 165 g and a tear resistance of at least 480 g in both parallel and perpendicular planes with respect to the length of the bag. The maximum net mass of each plastics bag shall be 30 kg; .4 single articles exceeding 30 kg such as soiled mattresses may be transported without the need for a plastics bag when authorized by the competent authority; .5 wastes of UN 3291 which contain liquids shall only be transported in plastics bags containing sufficient absorbent material to absorb the entire amount of liquid without it spilling in the bulk container; .6 wastes of UN 3291 containing sharp objects shall only be transported in UN type tested and approved rigid packagings meeting the provisions of packing instructions P621, IBC620 or LP621. .7 rigid packagings specified in packing instructions P621, IBC620 or LP621 may also be used. They shall be properly secured to prevent damage during normal conditions of transport. Wastes transported in rigid packagings and plastics bags together in the same closed bulk container shall be adequately segregated from each other, e.g., by suitable rigid barriers or dividers, mesh nets or otherwise securing the packagings, such that they prevent damage to the packagings during normal conditions of transport; .8 wastes of UN 3291 in plastics bags shall not be compressed in a closed bulk container in such a way that bags may be rendered no longer leakproof; .9 the closed bulk container shall be inspected for leakage or spillage after each journey. If any wastes of UN 3291 have leaked or been spilled in the closed bulk container, it shall not be re-used until after it has been thoroughly cleaned and, if necessary, disinfected or decontaminated with an appropriate agent. No other goods shall be transported together with UN 3291 other than medical or veterinary wastes. Any such other wastes transported in the same closed bulk container shall be inspected for possible contamination.

4.3.2.5 Bulk material of class 7

For the transport of unpackaged radioactive material, see 4.1.9.2.3.

4.3.2.6 Bulk goods of class 8

Only closed bulk containers (BK2) may be used. These goods shall be transported in bulk containers which are watertight.

4.3.3 Additional provisions for the use of sheeted bulk containers (BK1)

4.3.3.1 Sheeted bulk containers (BK1) shall not be used for sea transport, except for UN 3077 not meeting the criteria of 2.9.3 transported on short international voyages.

4.3.4 Additional provisions for the use of flexible bulk containers (BK3)

4.3.4.1 Flexible bulk containers are only allowed in the holds of general cargo ships. They are not allowed to be transported in cargo transport units.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 307

325

Bilaga 1

326

Bilaga 1

PART 5

CONSIGNMENT PROCEDURES

327

Bilaga 1

328

Bilaga 1

Chapter 5.1

General provisions

5.1.1 Application and general provisions

5.1.1.1 This part sets forth the provisions for dangerous goods consignments relative to authorization of consignments and advance notifications, marking, labelling, documentation (by manual, electronic data processing (EDP) or electronic data interchange (EDI) techniques) and placarding.

5.1.1.2 Except as otherwise provided in this Code, no person may offer dangerous goods for transport unless those goods are properly marked, labelled, placarded, described and certified on a transport document, and otherwise in a condition for transport as required by this part.

5.1.1.3.1 A carrier shall not accept dangerous goods for transport unless:

(a) A copy of the dangerous goods transport document and other documents or information as required by the provisions of this Code are provided; or

(b) The information applicable to the dangerous goods is provided in electronic form.

5.1.1.3.2 The information applicable to the dangerous goods shall accompany the dangerous goods to final destination. This information may be on the dangerous goods transport document or may be on another document. This information shall be given to the consignee when the dangerous goods are delivered.

5.1.1.3.3 When the information applicable to the dangerous goods is given to the carrier in electronic form, the information shall be available to the carrier at all times during transport to final destination. The information shall be able to be produced without delay as a paper document.

5.1.1.4 The purpose of indicating the Proper Shipping Name (see 3.1.2.1 and 3.1.2.2) and the UN Number of a substance, material or article offered for transport and, in the case of a marine pollutant, of the addition of “marine pollutant” on documentation accompanying the consignment, and of marking the Proper Shipping Name in accordance with 5.2.1 on the package, including IBCs containing the goods, is to ensure that the substance, material or article can be readily identified during transport. This ready identification is particularly important in the case of an accident involving these goods, in order to determine what emergency procedures are necessary to deal properly with the situation and, in the case of marine pollutants, for the master to comply with the reporting requirements of Protocol I of MARPOL 73/78.

5.1.2 Use of overpacks and unit loads

5.1.2.1 An overpack and unit load shall be marked with the Proper Shipping Name and the UN Number and marked and labelled, as required for packages by chapter 5.2, for each item of dangerous goods contained in the overpack or unit load unless markings and labels representative of all dangerous goods in the overpack or unit load are visible. An overpack, in addition, shall be marked with the word “OVERPACK” unless markings and labels representative of all dangerous goods, as required by chapter 5.2, in the overpack are visible, except as required in 5.2.2.1.12.

5.1.2.2 The individual packages comprising a unit load or an overpack shall be marked and labelled in accordance with chapter 5.2. Each package of dangerous goods contained in the unit load or overpack shall comply with all applicable provisions of the Code. The “OVERPACK” marking on an overpack is an indication of compliance with this provision. The intended function of each package shall not be impaired by the unit load or overpack.

5.1.2.3 Each package bearing package orientation markings as prescribed in 5.2.1.7 of this Code and which is overpacked, placed in a unit load or used as an inner packaging in a large packaging shall be oriented in accordance with such markings.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 311

329

Bilaga 1

Part 5 – Consignment procedures

5.1.3 Empty uncleaned packagings or units

5.1.3.1 Other than for class 7, a packaging, including an IBC, which previously contained dangerous goods shall be identified, marked, labelled and placarded as required for those dangerous goods unless steps such as cleaning, purging of vapours or refilling with a non-dangerous substance are taken to nullify any hazard. 5.1.3.2 Packagings, including IBCs, and tanks used for the transport of radioactive material shall not be used for the 2 transport of other goods unless decontaminated below the level of 0.4 Bq/cm for beta and gamma emitters 2 and low-toxicity alpha emitters and 0.04 Bq/cm for all other alpha emitters. 5.1.3.3 Empty cargo transport units still containing residues of dangerous goods, or loaded with empty uncleaned packages or empty uncleaned bulk containers, shall comply with the provisions applicable to the goods last contained in the unit, packagings or bulk container.

5.1.4 Mixed packing

When two or more dangerous goods are packed within the same outer packaging, the package shall be labelled and marked as required for each substance. Subsidiary risk labels need not be applied if the hazard is already represented by a primary risk label.

5.1.5 General provisions for class 7

5.1.5.1 Approval of shipments and notification

5.1.5.1.1 General

In addition to the approval for package designs described in chapter 6.4, multilateral shipment approval is also required in certain circumstances (5.1.5.1.2 and 5.1.5.1.3). In some circumstances it is also necessary to notify competent authorities of a shipment (5.1.5.1.4).

5.1.5.1.2 Shipment approvals

Multilateral approval shall be required for: .1 the shipment of Type B(M) packages not conforming with the provisions of 6.4.7.5 or designed to allow controlled intermittent venting; .2 the shipment of Type B(M) packages containing radioactive material with an activity greater than 3000A1 or 3000A2, as appropriate, or 1000 TBq, whichever is the lower; .3 the shipment of packages containing fissile materials if the sum of the criticality safety indexes of the packages in a single freight container or in a single conveyance exceeds 50. Excluded from this requirement shall be shipments by seagoing vessels, if the sum of the criticality safety indexes does not exceed 50 for any hold, compartment or defined deck area and the distance of 6 m between groups of packages or overpacks as required in table 7.1.4.5.3.4 is met; and .4 radiation protection programmes for shipments by special use vessels according to 7.1.4.5.7 except that a competent authority may authorize transport into or through its country without shipment approval, by a specific provision in its design approval (see 5.1.5.2.1).

5.1.5.1.3 Shipment approval by special arrangement

Provisions may be approved by a competent authority under which a consignment which does not satisfy all of the applicable provisions of this Code may be transported under special arrangement (see 1.5.4).

5.1.5.1.4 Notifications

Notification to competent authorities is required as follows: .1 Before the first shipment of any package requiring competent authority approval, the consignor shall ensure that copies of each applicable competent authority certificate applying to that package design have been submitted to the competent authority of the country of origin of the shipment and to the competent authority of each country through or into which the consignment is to be transported. The consignor is not required to await an acknowledgement from the competent authority, nor is the competent authority required to make such acknowledgement of receipt of the certificate. .2 For each of the following types of shipments: .1 Type C packages containing radioactive material with an activity greater than 3000A 1 or 3000A2, as appropriate, or 1000 TBq, whichever is the lower;

312 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

330

Bilaga 1

Chapter 5.1 – General provisions

.2 Type B(U) packages containing radioactive material with an activity greater than 3000A1 or 3000A2, as appropriate, or 1000 TBq, whichever is the lower; .3 Type B(M) packages; .4 shipment under special arrangement the consignor shall notify the competent authority of the country of origin of the shipment and the competent authority of each country through or into which the consignment is to be transported. This notification shall be in the hands of each competent authority prior to the commencement of the shipment, and preferably at least 7 days in advance. .3 The consignor is not required to send a separate notification if the required information has been included in the application for shipment approval. .4 The consignment notification shall include: .1 sufficient information to enable the identification of the package or packages, including all applicable certificate numbers and identification marks; .2 information on the date of shipment, the expected date of arrival and proposed routeing; .3 the names of the radioactive material or nuclides; .4 descriptions of the physical and chemical forms of the radioactive material, or whether it is special form radioactive material or low dispersible radioactive material; and .5 the maximum activity of the radioactive contents during transport, expressed in units of becquerels (Bq) with an appropriate SI prefix symbol (see 1.2.2.1). For fissile material, the mass of fissile material (or of each fissile nuclide for mixtures when appropriate) in units of grams (g), or multiples thereof, may be used in place of activity.

5.1.5.2 Certificates issued by competent authority

5.1.5.2.1 Certificates issued by the competent authority are required for the following: .1 Designs for: .1 special form radioactive material; .2 low dispersible radioactive material; .3 packages containing 0.1 kg or more of uranium hexafluoride; .4 all packages containing fissile material unless excepted by 6.4.11.2; .5 Type B(U) packages and Type B(M) packages; .6 Type C packages; .2 Special arrangements; .3 Certain shipments (see 5.1.5.1.2). The certificates shall confirm that the applicable provisions are met, and for design approvals shall attribute to the design an identification mark. The package design and shipment approval certificates may be combined into a single certificate. Certificates and applications for these certificates shall be in accordance with the provisions in 6.4.23. 5.1.5.2.2 The consignor shall be in possession of a copy of each applicable certificate. 5.1.5.2.3 For package designs where a competent authority issued certificate is not required, the consignor shall, on request, make available, for inspection by the relevant competent authority, documentary evidence of the compliance of the package design with all the applicable provisions.

5.1.5.3 Determination of transport index (TI) and criticality safety index (CSI)

5.1.5.3.1 The transport index (TI) for a package, overpack or freight container, or for unpackaged LSA-I or SCO-I, shall be the number derived in accordance with the following procedure: .1 Determine the maximum radiation level in units of millisieverts per hour (mSv/h) at a distance of 1 m from the external surfaces of the package, overpack, freight container, or unpackaged LSA-I and SCO-I. The value determined shall be multiplied by 100 and the resulting number is the transport index. For uranium and thorium ores and their concentrates, the maximum radiation level at any point 1 m from the external surface of the load may be taken as: 0.4 mSv/h for ores and physical concentrates of uranium and thorium; 0.3 mSv/h for chemical concentrates of thorium; 0.02 mSv/h for chemical concentrates of uranium, other than uranium hexafluoride; .2 For tanks, freight containers and unpackaged LSA-I and SCO-I, the value determined in 5.1.5.3.1.1 above shall be multiplied by the appropriate factor from table 5.1.5.3.1;

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 313

331

Bilaga 1

Part 5 – Consignment procedures

.3 The value obtained in 5.1.5.3.1.1 and 5.1.5.3.1.2 above shall be rounded up to the first decimal place (e.g., 1.13 becomes 1.2), except that a value of 0.05 or less may be considered as zero.

Table 5.1.5.3.1 – Multiplication factors for tanks, freight containers and unpackaged LSA-I and SCO-I a Size of load Multiplication factor 2 size of load ≤ 1 m 1 2 2 2 1 m < size of load ≤ 5 m 5 m2< size of load ≤ 20 m2 3 2 20 m < size of load 10 a Largest cross-sectional area of the load being measured.

5.1.5.3.2 The transport index for each overpack, freight container or conveyance shall be determined as either the sum of the TIs of all the packages contained, or by direct measurement of radiation level, except in the case of non-rigid overpacks for which the transport index shall be determined only as the sum of the TIs of all the packages. 5.1.5.3.3 The criticality safety index for each overpack or freight container shall be determined as the sum of the CSIs of all the packages contained. The same procedure shall be followed for determining the total sum of the CSIs in a consignment or aboard a conveyance. 5.1.5.3.4 Packages and overpacks shall be assigned to either category I – WHITE, II – YELLOW or III – YELLOW in accordance with the conditions specified in table 5.1.5.3.4 and with the following requirements: .1 For a package or overpack, both the transport index and the surface radiation level conditions shall be taken into account in determining which is the appropriate category. Where the transport index satisfies the condition for one category but the surface radiation level satisfies the condition for a different category, the package or overpack shall be assigned to the higher category. For this purpose, category I – WHITE shall be regarded as the lowest category; .2 The transport index shall be determined following the procedures specified in 5.1.5.3.1 and 5.1.5.3.2; .3 If the surface radiation level is greater than 2 mSv/h, the package or overpack shall be transported under exclusive use and under the provisions of 7.1.4.5.6 or 7.1.4.5.7, as appropriate; .4 A package transported under a special arrangement shall be assigned to category III – YELLOW except under the provisions of 5.1.5.3.5; .5 An overpack which contains packages transported under special arrangement shall be assigned to category III – YELLOW except under the provisions of 5.1.5.3.5.

Table 5.1.5.3.4 – Categories of packages and overpacks Conditions Maximum radiation level at any point Transport index Category on external surface a 0 Not more than 0.005 mSv/h I – WHITE More than 0 but not more than 1a More than 0.005 mSv/h but not more than 0.5 mSv/h II – YELLOW More than 1 but not more than 10 More than 0.5 mSv/h but not more than 2 mSv/h III – YELLOW b More than 10 More than 2 mSv/h but not more than 10 mSv/h III – YELLOW a If the measured TI is not greater than 0.05, the value quoted may be zero in accordance with 5.1.5.3.1.3. b Shall also be transported under “exclusive use”.

5.1.5.3.5 In all cases of international transport of packages requiring competent authority design or shipment approval, for which different approval types apply in the different countries concerned by the shipment, the categorization shall be in accordance with the certificate of the country of origin of design.

5.1.5.4 Specific provisions for excepted packages

5.1.5.4.1 Excepted packages shall be legibly and durably marked on the outside of the packaging with: .1 The UN Number preceded by the letters “UN”; .2 An identification of either the consignor or consignee, or both; and .3 The permissible gross mass if this exceeds 50 kg.

314 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

332

Bilaga 1

Chapter 5.1 – General provisions

5.1.5.4.2 The documentation provisions of chapter 5.4 do not apply to excepted packages of radioactive material, except that the UN Number preceded by the letters “UN”, and the name and address of the consignor and the consignee shall be shown on a transport document such as a bill of lading, air waybill or other similar document.

5.1.6 Packages packed into a cargo transport unit

5.1.6.1 Regardless of the placarding and marking provisions for cargo transport units, each package containing dangerous goods packed into a cargo transport unit shall be marked and labelled in accordance with the requirements of chapter 5.2.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 315

333

Bilaga 1

Chapter 5.2

Marking and labelling of packages including IBCs

Note: These provisions relate essentially to the marking and labelling of dangerous goods according to their properties. However, additional markings or symbols indicating precautions to be taken in handling or storing a package (such as a symbol representing an umbrella, indicating that a package shall be kept dry) may be displayed on a package if appropriate.

5.2.1 Marking of packages including IBCs

5.2.1.1 Unless provided otherwise in this Code, the Proper Shipping Name for the dangerous goods as determined in accordance with 3.1.2 and the corresponding UN Number, preceded by the letters “UN”, shall be displayed on each package. The UN number and the letters “UN” shall be at least 12 mm high, except for packagings of 30 ℓ or 30 kg capacity or less and except for cylinders of 60 ℓ water capacity or less, when they shall be at least 6 mm in height and for packagings of 5 ℓ or 5 kg or less when they shall be of an appropriate size. In the case of unpackaged articles, the marking shall be displayed on the article, on its cradle or on its handling, storage or launching device. For goods of division 1.4, compatibility group S, the division and compatibility group letter shall also be marked unless the label for 1.4S is displayed. A typical package marking is: CORROSIVE LIQUID, ACIDIC, ORGANIC, N.O.S. (caprylyl chloride) UN 3265. Note: Cylinders of 60 ℓ water capacity or less marked with a UN number in accordance with the provisions of the IMDG Code up to 31 December 2013 and which do not conform to the provisions of 5.2.1.1 regarding the size of the UN number and of the letters “UN” applicable as from 1 January 2014 may continue to be used until the next periodic inspection but no later than 1 July 2018. 5.2.1.2 All package markings required by 5.2.1.1: .1 shall be readily visible and legible; .2 shall be such that this information will still be identifiable on packages surviving at least three months’ immersion in the sea. In considering suitable marking methods, account shall be taken of the durability of the packaging materials used and the surface of the package; .3 shall be displayed on a background of contrasting colour on the external surface of the package; and .4 shall not be located with other package markings that could substantially reduce their effectiveness. 5.2.1.3 Salvage packagings and salvage pressure receptacles shall additionally be marked with the word “SALVAGE”. 5.2.1.4 Intermediate bulk containers of more than 450 ℓ capacity and large packagings shall be marked on two opposing sides.

5.2.1.5 Special marking provisions for class 7

5.2.1.5.1 Each package shall be legibly and durably marked on the outside of the packaging with an identification of either the consignor or consignee, or both. 5.2.1.5.2 The marking of excepted packages shall be as required by 5.1.5.4.1. 5.2.1.5.3 Each package of gross mass exceeding 50 kg shall have its permissible gross mass legibly and durably marked on the outside of the packaging. 5.2.1.5.4 Each package which conforms to: .1 a Type IP-1 package, a Type IP-2 package or a Type IP-3 package design shall be legibly and durably marked on the outside of the packaging with “TYPE IP-1”, “TYPE IP-2” or “TYPE IP-3” as appropriate; .2 a Type A package design shall be legibly and durably marked on the outside of the packaging with “TYPE A”; .3 a Type IP-2 package, a Type IP-3 package or a Type A package design shall be legibly and durably marked on the outside of the packaging with the international vehicle registration code (VRI code) of the country of origin of design and either the name of the manufacturer or other identification of the packaging specified by the competent authority of the country of origin of design.

316 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

334

Bilaga 1

Chapter 5.2 – Marking and labelling of packages including IBCs

5.2.1.5.5 Each package which conforms to a design approved by the competent authority under 6.4.22.1–6.4.22.5 or 6.4.24.2–6.4.24.3 shall be legibly and durably marked on the outside of the packaging with: .1 the identification mark allocated to that design by the competent authority; .2 a serial number to uniquely identify each packaging which conforms to that design; .3 in the case of a Type B(U) or Type B(M) package design, with “TYPE B(U)” or “TYPE B(M)”; and .4 in the case of a Type C package design, with “TYPE C”. 5.2.1.5.6 Each package which conforms to a Type B(U), Type B(M) or Type C package design shall have the outside of the outermost receptacle which is resistant to the effects of fire and water plainly marked by embossing, stamping or other means resistant to the effects of fire and water with the trefoil symbol shown below. Basic trefoil symbol with proportions based on a central circle of radius X. The minimum allowable size of X shall be 4 mm. 60˚

60˚

X/2 X 5X

5.2.1.5.7 Where LSA-I or SCO-I material is contained in receptacles or wrapping materials and is transported under exclusive use as permitted by 4.1.9.2.3, the outer surface of these receptacles or wrapping materials may bear the marking ”RADIOACTIVE LSA-I” or ”RADIOACTIVE SCO-I”, as appropriate. 5.2.1.5.8 In all cases of international transport of packages requiring competent authority design or shipment approval, for which different approval types apply in the different countries concerned by the shipment, marking shall be in accordance with the certificate of the country of origin of the design.

5.2.1.6 Special marking provisions for marine pollutants

5.2.1.6.1 Packages containing marine pollutants meeting the criteria of 2.9.3 shall be durably marked with the environmentally hazardous substance mark with the exception of single packagings and combination packagings where such single packings or inner packagings of such combination packagings have: – a net quantity of 5 ℓ or less for liquids; or – a net mass of 5 kg or less for solids. 5.2.1.6.2 The marine pollutant mark shall be located adjacent to the markings required by 5.2.1.1. The provisions of 5.2.1.2 and 5.2.1.4 shall be met.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 317

335

Bilaga 1

Part 5 – Consignment procedures

5.2.1.6.3 The marine pollutant mark shall be as shown below. For packagings, the dimensions shall be at least 100 mm × 100 mm, except in the case of packages of such dimensions that they can only bear smaller marks.

Marine pollutant mark

Symbol (fish and tree): black on white or suitable contrasting background NOTE: The labelling provisions of 5.2.2 apply in addition to any requirement for packages to bear the environmentally hazardous substance mark 5.2.1.7 Except as provided in 5.2.1.7.1: – combination packagings having inner packagings containing liquid dangerous goods; – single packagings fitted with vents; and – cryogenic receptacles intended for the transport of refrigerated liquefied gases shall be legibly marked with package orientation arrows which are similar to the illustration shown below or with those meeting the specifications of ISO 780:1997. The orientation arrows shall appear on two opposite vertical sides of the package with the arrows pointing in the correct upright direction. They shall be rectangular and of a size that is clearly visible commensurate with the size of the package. Depicting a rectangular border around the arrows is optional.

or

Two black or red arrows on white or suitable contrasting background. The rectangular border is optional 5.2.1.7.1 Orientation arrows are not required on: (a) Outer packagings containing pressure receptacles except cryogenic receptacles; (b) Outer packagings containing dangerous goods in inner packagings each containing not more than 120 ml, with sufficient absorbent material between the inner and outer packagings to completely absorb the liquid contents; (c) Outer packagings containing Division 6.2 infectious substances in primary receptacles each containing not more than 50 ml; (d) Type IP-2, type IP-3, type A, type B(U), type B(M) or type C packages containing Class 7 radioactive material; (e) Outer packagings containing articles which are leak-tight in all orientations (e.g., alcohol or mercury in thermometers, aerosols, etc.); or (f) Outer packagings containing dangerous goods in hermetically sealed inner packagings each containing not more than 500 mℓ. 5.2.1.7.2 Arrows for purposes other than indicating proper package orientation shall not be displayed on a package marked in accordance with this sub-section.

318 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

336

Bilaga 1

Chapter 5.2 – Marking and labelling of packages including IBCs

5.2.1.8 Excepted quantity mark

5.2.1.8.1 Packages containing excepted quantities of dangerous goods shall be marked according to 3.5.4.

5.2.1.9 Limited quantity mark

5.2.1.9.1 Packages containing dangerous goods packed in limited quantities shall be marked according to 3.4.5.

5.2.2 Labelling of packages including IBCs

5.2.2.1 Labelling provisions

These provisions are related essentially to danger labels. However, additional markings or symbols indicating precautions to be taken in handling or storing a package (such as a symbol representing an umbrella, indicating that a package shall be kept dry) may be displayed on a package if appropriate. 5.2.2.1.1 Labels identifying primary and subsidiary risks shall conform to models Nos. 1 to 9 illustrated in 5.2.2.2.2. The “EXPLOSIVE” subsidiary risk label is model No. 1. 5.2.2.1.2 Where articles or substances are specifically listed in the Dangerous Goods List, a danger class label shall be affixed for the hazard shown in column 3. A subsidiary risk label shall also be affixed for any risk indicated by a class or division number in column 4 of the Dangerous Goods List. However, special provisions indicated in column 6 may also require a subsidiary risk label where no subsidiary risk is indicated in column 4 or may exempt from the requirement for a subsidiary risk label where such a risk is indicated in the Dangerous Goods List. 5.2.2.1.2.1 A package containing a dangerous substance which has a low degree of danger may be exempt from these labelling requirements. In this case, a special provision specifying that no hazard label is required appears in column 6 of the Dangerous Goods List for the relevant substance. However, for certain substances the package shall be marked with the appropriate text as it appears in the special provision, e.g.: Substance UN No. Class Mark required on bales Baled hay in cargo UN 1327 4.1 None transport unit Baled hay not in cargo UN 1327 4.1 Class 4.1 transport unit Baled dry vegetable fibres UN 3360 4.1 None in cargo transport unit

Substance UN No. Class Mark required on packages in addition to the Proper Shipping Name and UN Number Fishmeal* UN 1374 4.2 Class 4.2† Batteries, wet, non-spillable UN 2800 8 Class 8‡ * Only applicable to fishmeal in packing group III. † Exempt from class marking when loaded in a cargo transport unit containing only fishmeal under UN 1374. ‡ Exempt from class marking when loaded in a cargo transport unit containing only batteries under UN 2800.

5.2.2.1.3 Except as provided in 5.2.2.1.3.1, if a substance which meets the definition of more than one class is not specifically listed by name in the Dangerous Goods List in chapter 3.2, the provisions in chapter 2.0 shall be used to determine the primary risk class of the goods. In addition to the label required for that primary risk class, subsidiary risk labels shall also be applied as specified in the Dangerous Goods List. 5.2.2.1.3.1 Packagings containing substances of class 8 need not bear subsidiary risk label model No. 6.1 if the toxicity arises solely from the destructive effect on tissue. Substances of class 4.2 need not bear subsidiary risk label model No. 4.1.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 319

337

Bilaga 1

Part 5 – Consignment procedures

5.2.2.1.4 Labels for class 2 gases with subsidiary risk(s)

Subsidiary risk(s) Class Primary risk label Subsidiary risk label(s) shown in chapter 2.2 2.1 None 2.1 None 2.2 None 2.2 None 5.1 2.2 5.1 2.3 None 2.3 None 2.1 2.3 2.1 5.1 2.3 5.1 5.1, 8 2.3 5.1, 8 8 2.3 8 2.1, 8 2.3 2.1, 8

5.2.2.1.5 Three separate labels have been provided for class 2, one for flammable gases of class 2.1 (red), one for non-flammable, non-toxic gases of class 2.2 (green) and one for toxic gases of class 2.3 (white). Where the Dangerous Goods List indicates that a class 2 gas possesses single or multiple subsidiary risks, labels shall be used in accordance with the table in 5.2.2.1.4.

5.2.2.1.6 Except as provided in 5.2.2.2.1.2, each label shall: .1 be located on the same surface of the package near the Proper Shipping Name marking, if the package dimensions are adequate; .2 be so placed on the packaging that it is not covered or obscured by any part or attachment to the packaging or any other label or marking; and .3 when primary and subsidiary risk labels are required, be displayed next to each other.

Where a package is of such an irregular shape or small size that a label cannot be satisfactorily affixed, the label may be attached to the package by a securely affixed tag or other suitable means. 5.2.2.1.7 Intermediate bulk containers of more than 450 ℓ capacity and large packagings shall be labelled on two opposing sides. 5.2.2.1.8 Labels shall be affixed on a surface of contrasting colour.

5.2.2.1.9 Special provisions for the labelling of self-reactive substances

An “EXPLOSIVE” subsidiary risk label (No. 1) shall be applied for type B self-reactive substances, unless the competent authority has permitted this label to be dispensed with for a specific packaging because test data have proved that the self-reactive substance in such a packaging does not exhibit explosive behaviour.

5.2.2.1.10 Special provisions for the labelling of organic peroxides

The class 5.2 label (model No. 5.2) shall be affixed to packages containing organic peroxides classified as types B, C, D, E or F. This label also implies that the product may be flammable and hence no “FLAMMABLE LIQUID” subsidiary risk label (model No. 3) is required. In addition, the following subsidiary risk labels shall be applied: .1 An “EXPLOSIVE” subsidiary risk label (model No. 1) for organic peroxides type B, unless the competent authority has permitted this label to be dispensed with for a specific packaging because test data have proved that the organic peroxide in such a packaging does not exhibit explosive behaviour. .2 A “CORROSIVE” subsidiary risk label (model No. 8) is required when packing group I or II criteria of class 8 are met.

5.2.2.1.11 Special provisions for the labelling of infectious substances packages

In addition to the primary risk label (model No. 6.2), infectious substances packages shall bear any other label required by the nature of the contents.

5.2.2.1.12 Special provisions for the labelling of radioactive material

5.2.2.1.12.1 Except when enlarged labels are used in accordance with 5.3.1.1.5.1, each package, overpack and freight container containing radioactive material shall bear at least two labels which conform to the models Nos. 7A, 7B, and 7C, as appropriate, according to the category (see 5.1.5.3.4) of that package, overpack or freight container. Labels shall be affixed to two opposite sides on the outside of the package or on the outside of all four sides of the freight container. Each overpack containing radioactive material shall bear at least two labels on opposite sides of the outside of the overpack. In addition, each package, overpack and freight container containing fissile material, other than fissile material excepted under the provisions of 6.4.11.2, shall bear labels which conform to model No. 7E; such labels, where applicable, shall be affixed adjacent to the labels

320 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

338

Bilaga 1

Chapter 5.2 – Marking and labelling of packages including IBCs

for radioactive material. Labels shall not cover the markings specified in this chapter. Any labels which do not relate to the contents shall be removed or covered. 5.2.2.1.12.2 Each label conforming to the models Nos. 7A, 7B and 7C shall be completed with the following information: .1 Contents: .1 Except for LSA-I material, the name(s) of the radionuclide(s) as taken from the table under 2.7.2.2.1, using the symbols prescribed therein. For mixtures of radionuclides, the most restrictive nuclides must be listed to the extent the space on the line permits. The group of LSA or SCO shall be shown following the name(s) of the radionuclide(s). The terms “LSA-II”, “LSA-III”, “SCO-I” and “SCO-II” shall be used for this purpose. .2 For LSA-I material, the term “LSA-I” is all that is necessary; the name of the radionuclide is not necessary. .2 Activity: The maximum activity of the radioactive contents during transport, expressed in units of becquerels (Bq) with the appropriate SI prefix symbol (see 1.2.2.1). For fissile material, the mass of fissile material (or mass of each fissile nuclide for mixtures when appropriate) in units of grams (g), or multiples thereof, may be used in place of activity. .3 For overpacks and freight containers, the “contents” and “activity” entries on the label shall bear the information required in 5.2.2.1.12.2.1 and 5.2.2.1.12.2.2, respectively, totalled together for the entire contents of the overpack or freight container except that, on labels for overpacks or freight containers containing mixed loads of packages containing different radionuclides, such entries may read “See transport documents”. .4 Transport index: The number determined in accordance with 5.1.5.3.1 and 5.1.5.3.2. (No transport index entry is required for category I – WHITE.) 5.2.2.1.12.3 Each label conforming to the model No. 7E shall be completed with the criticality safety index (CSI) as stated in the certificate of approval for special arrangement or the certificate of approval for the package design issued by the competent authority. 5.2.2.1.12.4 For overpacks and freight containers, the criticality safety index (CSI) on the label shall bear the information required in 5.2.2.1.12.3 totalled together for the fissile contents of the overpack or freight container. 5.2.2.1.12.5 In all cases of international transport of packages requiring competent authority design or shipment approval, for which different approval types apply in the different countries concerned by the shipment, labelling shall be in accordance with the certificate of the country of origin of design.

5.2.2.2 Provisions for labels

5.2.2.2.1 Labels shall satisfy the provisions of this section and conform, in terms of colour, symbols, numbers and general format, to the specimen labels shown in 5.2.2.2.2. Note: Where appropriate, labels in 5.2.2.2.2 are shown with a dotted outer boundary as provided for in 5.2.2.2.1.1. This is not required when the label is applied on a background of contrasting colour.

5.2.2.2.1.1 Labels shall be in the form of a square set at an angle of 45° (diamond-shaped) with minimum dimensions of 100 mm by 100 mm, except in the case of packages of such dimensions that they can only bear smaller labels and as provided in 5.2.2.2.1.2. They shall have a line 5 mm inside the edge and running parallel with it. In the upper half of a label the line shall have the same colour as the symbol and in the lower half it shall have the same colour as the figure in the bottom corner. Labels shall be displayed on a background of contrasting colour, or shall have either a dotted or solid outer boundary line. 5.2.2.2.1.2 Cylinders for class 2 may, on account of their shape, orientation and securing mechanisms for transport, bear labels representative of those specified in this section, which have been reduced in size, according to ISO 7225:2005, for display on the non-cylindrical part (shoulder) of such cylinders. Labels may overlap to the extent provided for by ISO 7225:2005 “Gas cylinders – Precautionary labels”; however, in all cases, the labels representing the primary hazard and the numbers appearing on any label shall remain fully visible and the symbols recognizable. 5.2.2.2.1.3 With the exception of labels for divisions 1.4, 1.5 and 1.6 of class 1, the upper half of the label shall contain the pictorial symbol and the lower half shall contain the class number 1, 2, 3, 4, 5.1, 5.2, 6, 7, 8 or 9 as appropriate. The label may include text such as the UN Number, or words describing the hazard class (e.g., “flammable”) in accordance with 5.2.2.2.1.5 provided the text does not obscure or detract from the other required label elements. 5.2.2.2.1.4 In addition, except for divisions 1.4, 1.5 and 1.6, labels for class 1 shall show in the lower half, above the class number, the division number and compatibility group letter for the substance or article. Labels for divisions 1.4, 1.5 and 1.6 shall show in the upper half the division number and in the lower half the class number and

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 321

339

Bilaga 1

Part 5 – Consignment procedures

the compatibility group letter. For division 1.4, compatibility group S, no label is generally required. However, in cases where a label is considered necessary for such goods, it shall be based on model No. 1.4. 5.2.2.2.1.5 On labels other than those for material of class 7, the insertion of any text (other than the class or division number) in the space below the symbol shall be confined to particulars indicating the nature of the risk and precautions to be taken in handling. 5.2.2.2.1.6 The symbols, text and numbers shall be shown in black on all labels except for: .1 the class 8 label, where the text (if any) and class number shall appear in white; .2 labels with entirely green, red or blue backgrounds, where they may be shown in white; .3 the class 5.2 label, where the symbol may be shown in white; and .4 class 2.1 labels displayed on cylinders and gas cartridges for liquefied petroleum gases, where they may be shown in the background colour of the receptacle if adequate contrast is provided 5.2.2.2.1.7 The method of affixing the label(s) or applying stencil(s) of label(s) on packages containing dangerous goods shall be such that the label(s) or stencil(s) will still be identifiable on packages surviving at least three months’ immersion in the sea. In considering suitable labelling methods, account shall be taken of the durability of the packaging materials used and the surface of the package.

322 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

340

Bilaga 1

Chapter 5.2 – Marking and labelling of packages including IBCs

5.2.2.2.2 Specimen labels

Class 1 – Explosive substances or articles

***1

(No. 1) Divisions 1.1, 1.2 and 1.3 Symbol (exploding bomb): black. Background: orange. Figure ‘1’ in bottom corner.

1.4 1.5 1.6

* * *

1 1 1

(No. 1.4) (No. 1.5) (No. 1.6) Division 1.4 Division 1.5 Division 1.6 Background: orange. Figures: black. Numerals shall be about 30 mm in height and be about 5 mm thick (for a label measuring 100 mm × 100 mm). Figure ‘1’ in bottom corner.

** Place for division – to be left blank if explosive is the subsidiary risk. * Place for compatibility group – to be left blank if explosive is the subsidiary risk.

Class 2 – Gases

2 2 2 2

(No. 2.1) (No. 2.2) Class 2.1 Class 2.2 Flammable gases Non-flammable, non-toxic gases Symbol (flame): black or white Symbol (gas cylinder): black or white. (except as provided for in 5.2.2.2.1.6.4). Background: green. Figure ‘2’ in bottom corner. Background: red. Figure ‘2’ in bottom corner.

Class 3 – Flammable liquids

2 3 3

(No. 2.3) (No. 3) Class 2.3 Symbol (flame): black or white. Toxic gases Background: red. Figure ‘3’ in bottom corner. Symbol (skull and crossbones): black. Background: white. Figure ‘2’ in bottom corner.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 323

341

Bilaga 1

Part 5 – Consignment procedures

Class 4

4 4 4 4

(No. 4.1) (No. 4.2) (No. 4.3) Class 4.1 Class 4.2 Class 4.3 Flammable solids Substances liable to Substances which, in contact with water, Symbol (flame): black. spontaneous combustion emit flammable gases Background: white with Symbol (flame): black. Symbol (flame): black or white. seven vertical red stripes. Background: upper half white, Background: blue. Figure ‘4’ in bottom corner. lower half red. Figure ‘4’ in bottom corner. Figure ‘4’ in bottom corner.

Class 5

5.1 5.25.2 5.25.2

(No. 5.1) (No. 5.2) Class 5.1 Class 5.2 Oxidizing substances Organic peroxides Symbol (flame over circle): black; Symbol (flame): black or white; Background: yellow. Background: upper half red; lower half yellow; Figure ‘5.1’ in bottom corner. Figure ‘5.2’ in bottom corner

Class 6

6

(No. 6.1) Class 6.1 Toxic substances Symbol (skull and crossbones): black. Background: white. Figure ‘6’ in bottom corner.

6

(No. 6.2) Class 6.2 Infectious substances The lower half of the label may bear the inscriptions INFECTIOUS SUBSTANCE and In case of damage or leakage immediately notify Public Health Authority. Symbol (three crescents superimposed on a circle) and inscriptions: black. Background: white. Figure ‘6’ in bottom corner.

324 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

342

Bilaga 1

Chapter 5.2 – Marking and labelling of packages including IBCs

Class 7 – Radioactive material

TRANSPORT INDEX . . . . . TRANSPORT INDEX . . . . .

7 7 7

(No. 7A) (No. 7B) (No. 7C) Category I – White Category II – Yellow Category III – Yellow Symbol (trefoil): black. Symbol (trefoil): black. Background: white. Background: upper half yellow with white border, lower half white. Text (mandatory): black in Text (mandatory): black in lower half of label: lower half of label: RADIOACTIVE RADIOACTIVE CONTENTS … CONTENTS … ACTIVITY … ACTIVITY … In a black outlined box: TRANSPORT INDEX … One red bar shall follow the word Two red vertical bars shall Three red vertical bars shall RADIOACTIVE. follow the word RADIOACTIVE. follow the word RADIOACTIVE. Figure ‘7’ in bottom corner. Figure ‘7’ in bottom corner.

FISSILE

SAFETY INDEX CRITICALITY . . . . . . . . . .

7

(No. 7E) Class 7 fissile material Background: white. Text (mandatory): black in upper half of label: FISSILE. In a black outlined box in the lower half of the label: CRITICALITY SAFETY INDEX … Figure ‘7’ in bottom corner.

Class 8 – Corrosive substances Class 9 – Miscellaneous dangerous substances and articles

8 9

(No. 8) (No. 9) Symbol (liquids, spilling from two glass vessels Symbol (seven vertical stripes in upper half): black. and attacking a hand and a metal): black. Background: white. Background: upper half white; Figure ‘9’ underlined in bottom corner. lower half black with white border. Figure ‘8’ in bottom corner.*

* A class 8 label with a shaded hand may also be used.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 325

343

Bilaga 1

Chapter 5.3

Placarding and marking of cargo transport units

5.3.1 Placarding

5.3.1.1 Placarding provisions

5.3.1.1.1 General provisions

.1 Enlarged labels (placards) and marks and signs shall be affixed to the exterior surfaces of a cargo transport unit to provide a warning that the contents of the unit are dangerous goods and present risks, unless the labels and/or marks affixed to the packages are clearly visible from the exterior of the cargo transport unit; .2 the methods of placarding and marking as required in 5.3.1.1.4 and 5.3.2 on cargo transport units shall be such that this information will still be identifiable on cargo transport units surviving at least three months’ immersion in the sea. In considering suitable marking methods, account shall be taken of the ease with which the surface of the cargo transport unit can be marked; and .3 all placards, orange panels, marks and signs shall be removed from cargo transport units or masked as soon as both the dangerous goods or their residues which led to the application of those placards, orange panels, marks or signs are discharged. 5.3.1.1.2 Placards shall be affixed to the exterior surface of cargo transport units to provide a warning that the contents of the unit are dangerous goods and present risks. Placards shall correspond to the primary risk of the goods contained in the cargo transport unit except that: .1 placards are not required on cargo transport units carrying any quantity of explosives of division 1.4, compatibility group S; and .2 placards indicating the highest risk only need be affixed on cargo transport units carrying substances and articles of more than one division in class 1. Placards shall be displayed on a background of contrasting colour, or shall have either a dotted or solid outer boundary line. 5.3.1.1.3 Placards shall also be displayed for those subsidiary risks for which a subsidiary risk label is required according to 5.2.2.1.2. However, cargo transport units containing goods of more than one class need not bear a subsidiary risk placard if the hazard represented by that placard is already indicated by a primary risk placard.

5.3.1.1.4 Placarding requirements

5.3.1.1.4.1 A cargo transport unit containing dangerous goods or residues of dangerous goods shall clearly display placards as follows: .1 a freight container, semi-trailer or portable tank: one on each side and one on each end of the unit; .2 a railway wagon: at least on each side; .3 a multiple-compartment tank containing more than one dangerous substance or their residues: along each side at the positions of the relevant compartments; and .4 any other cargo transport unit: at least on both sides and on the back of the unit.

5.3.1.1.5 Special provisions for class 7

5.3.1.1.5.1 Large freight containers carrying packages other than excepted packages, and tanks, shall bear four placards which conform with the model No. 7D given in the figure. The placards shall be affixed in a vertical orientation to each side wall and each end wall of the large freight container or tank. Any placards which do not relate to the contents shall be removed. Instead of using both labels and placards, it is permitted as an alternative to use enlarged labels only, as shown in label model Nos. 7A, 7B and 7C, and where appropriate 7E, with dimensions as required for the placard in the figure.

326 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

344

Bilaga 1

Chapter 5.3 – Placarding and marking of cargo transport units

5.3.1.1.5.2 Rail and road vehicles carrying packages, overpacks or freight containers labelled with any of the labels shown in 5.2.2.2.2 as models Nos. 7A, 7B, 7C or 7E, or carrying consignments under exclusive use, shall display the placard shown in the figure (model No. 7D) on each of: .1 the two external lateral walls, in the case of a rail vehicle; .2 the two external lateral walls and the external rear wall, in the case of a road vehicle. In the case of a vehicle without sides, the placards may be affixed directly on the cargo-carrying unit provided that they are readily visible; in the case of physically large tanks or freight containers, the placards on the tanks or freight containers shall suffice. In the case of vehicles which have insufficient area to allow the fixing of larger placards, the dimensions of the placard as described in the figure may be reduced to 100 mm. Any placards which do not relate to the contents shall be removed.

5.3.1.2 Specifications for placards

5.3.1.2.1 Except as provided in 5.3.1.2.2 for the class 7 placard, a placard shall: .1 be not less than 250 mm by 250 mm, with a line running 12.5 mm inside the edge and parallel with it. In the upper half of the placard the line shall have the same colour as the symbol and in the lower half it shall have the same colour as the figure in the bottom corner; .2 correspond to the label for the class of the dangerous goods in question with respect to colour and symbol; and .3 display the number of the class or division (and, for goods in class 1, the compatibility group letter) of the dangerous goods in question in the manner prescribed in 5.2.2.2 for the corresponding label, in digits not less than 25 mm high. 5.3.1.2.2 For class 7, the placard shall have minimum overall dimensions of 250 mm by 250 mm (except as permitted by 5.3.1.1.5.2) with a black line running 5 mm inside the edge and parallel with it, and shall be otherwise as shown in the figure below. When different dimensions are used, the relative proportions shall be maintained. The number “7” shall not be less than 25 mm high. The background colour of the upper half of the placard shall be yellow and of the lower half white; the colour of the trefoil and the printing shall be black. The use of the word “RADIOACTIVE” in the bottom half is optional to allow the use of this placard to display the appropriate United Nations Number for the consignment.

Placard for radioactive material of class 7 5 mm

MINIMUM10 mm

RADIOACTIVE

MINIMUM DIMENSION 250 mm

7 250 mm

MINIMUM DIMENSION

(No. 7D) Symbol (trefoil): black. Background: upper half yellow with white border, lower half white. The lower half shall show the word RADIOACTIVE or alternatively, when required (see 5.3.2.1), the appropriate UN Number and the figure ‘7’ in the bottom corner.

5.3.2 Marking of cargo transport units

5.3.2.0 Display of Proper Shipping Name

5.3.2.0.1 The Proper Shipping Name of the contents shall be durably marked on at least both sides of: .1 tank transport units containing dangerous goods;

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 327

345

Bilaga 1

Part 5 – Consignment procedures

.2 bulk containers containing dangerous goods; or .3 any other cargo transport unit containing packaged dangerous goods of a single commodity for which no placard, UN Number or marine pollutant mark is required. Alternatively, the UN Number may be displayed. 5.3.2.0.2 The Proper Shipping Name for the goods shall be displayed in characters not less than 65 mm high. The Proper Shipping Name shall be of contrasting colour with the background.

5.3.2.1 Display of UN Numbers

5.3.2.1.1 Except for goods of class 1, the UN Number shall be displayed as required by this chapter on consignments of: .1 solids, liquids or gases transported in tank cargo transport units, including on each compartment of a multi-compartment tank cargo transport unit; .2 packaged dangerous goods loaded in excess of 4000 kg gross mass, to which only one UN Number has been assigned and which are the only dangerous goods in the cargo transport unit; .3 unpackaged LSA-I or SCO-I material of class 7 in or on a vehicle, or in a freight container, or in a tank; .4 packaged radioactive material with a single UN Number in or on a vehicle, or in a freight container, when required to be transported under exclusive use; .5 solid dangerous goods in bulk containers. 5.3.2.1.2 The UN Number for the goods shall be displayed in black digits not less than 65 mm high, either: .1 against a white background in the area below the pictorial symbol and above the class number and the compatibility group letter in a manner that does not obscure or detract from the other required label elements (see 5.3.2.1.3); or .2 on an orange rectangular panel not less than 120 mm high and 300 mm wide, with a 10 mm black border, to be placed immediately adjacent to each placard or marine pollutant mark (see 5.3.2.1.3). When no placard or marine pollutant mark is required, the UN Number shall be displayed immediately adjacent to the Proper Shipping Name.

5.3.2.1.3 Examples of display of UN Numbers

or

** ** * *

or or

or

**

** * *

* location of class or division number ** location of UN Number

5.3.2.2 Elevated temperature substances

5.3.2.2.1 Cargo transport units containing a substance that is transported or offered for transport in a liquid state at a temperature equal to or exceeding 100°C or in a solid state at a temperature equal to or exceeding 240°C shall bear on each side and on each end the mark shown in the figure. The triangular shaped mark shall have sides of at least 250 mm and shall be shown in red.

Mark for transport at elevated temperature

328 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

346

Bilaga 1

Chapter 5.3 – Placarding and marking of cargo transport units

5.3.2.2.2 In addition to the elevated temperature mark, the maximum temperature of the substance expected to be reached during transport shall be durably marked on both sides of the portable tank or insulation jacket, immediately adjacent to the elevated temperature mark, in characters at least 100 mm high.

5.3.2.3 Marine pollutant mark

Cargo transport units containing marine pollutants shall clearly display the marine pollutant mark in locations indicated in 5.3.1.1.4.1, even if the cargo transport unit contains packages not required to bear the marine pollutant mark. The mark shall conform to the specifications given in 5.2.1.6.3, and shall have minimum dimensions of 250 mm × 250 mm.

5.3.2.4 Limited quantities

Cargo transport units containing dangerous goods packed in limited quantities shall be placarded and marked according to 3.4.5.5.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 329

347

Bilaga 1

Chapter 5.4

Documentation

Note 1 The provisions of this Code do not preclude the use of electronic data processing (EDP) and electronic data interchange (EDI) transmission techniques as an alternative to paper documentation. All references to “dangerous goods transport document” in this chapter also include provision of the required information by use of EDP and EDI transmission techniques. Note 2 When dangerous goods are offered for transport, similar documents to those required for other categories of goods have to be prepared. The form of these documents, the particulars to be entered on them and the obligations they entail may be fixed by international conventions applying to certain modes of transport and by national legislation. Note 3 One of the primary requirements of a transport document for dangerous goods is to convey the fundamental information relative to the hazards of the goods. It is, therefore, necessary to include certain basic information on the document for a consignment of dangerous goods unless otherwise exempted or required in this Code. Note 4 In addition to the provisions of this chapter, other elements of information may be required by the competent authority. Note 5 In addition to the provisions of this chapter other additional information may be included. However, this information shall not: .1 divert attention from the safety information required by this chapter or by the competent authority; .2 contradict the safety information required by this chapter or by the competent authority; or .3 duplicate information already provided.

5.4.1 Dangerous goods transport information

5.4.1.1 General

5.4.1.1.1 Except as otherwise provided, the consignor who offers dangerous goods for transport shall give to the carrier the information applicable to those dangerous goods, including any additional information and documentation as specified in this Code. This information may be provided on a dangerous goods transport document or, with the agreement of the carrier, by EDP or EDI techniques. 5.4.1.1.2 When the dangerous goods transport information is given to the carrier by EDP or EDI techniques, the consignor shall be able to produce the information without delay as a paper document, with the information in the sequence required by this chapter.

5.4.1.2 Form of the transport document

5.4.1.2.1 A dangerous goods transport document may be in any form, provided it contains all of the information required by the provisions of this Code. 5.4.1.2.2 If both dangerous and non-dangerous goods are listed in one document, the dangerous goods shall be listed first, or otherwise be emphasized.

5.4.1.2.3 Continuation page

A dangerous goods transport document may consist of more than one page, provided pages are consecutively numbered. 5.4.1.2.4 The information on a dangerous goods transport document shall be easy to identify, legible and durable.

330 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

348

Bilaga 1

Chapter 5.4 – Documentation

5.4.1.2.5 Example of a dangerous goods transport document

The form shown in figure 5.4.5 is an example of a dangerous goods transport document.*

5.4.1.3 Consignor, consignee and date

The name and address of the consignor and the consignee of the dangerous goods shall be included on the dangerous goods transport document. The date the dangerous goods transport document or an electronic copy of it was prepared or given to the initial carrier shall be included.

5.4.1.4 Information required on the dangerous goods transport document

5.4.1.4.1 Dangerous goods description

The dangerous goods transport document shall contain the following information for each dangerous substance, material or article offered for transport: .1 The UN Number preceded by the letters “UN”; .2 The Proper Shipping Name, as determined according to 3.1.2, including the technical name enclosed in parenthesis, as applicable (see 3.1.2.8); .3 The primary hazard class or, when assigned, the division of the goods, including, for class 1, the compatibility group letter. The words “Class” or “Division” may be included preceding the primary hazard class or division numbers; .4 Subsidiary hazard class or division number(s) corresponding to the subsidiary risk label(s) required to be applied, when assigned, shall be entered following the primary hazard class or division and shall be enclosed in parenthesis. The words “Class” or “Division” may be included preceding the subsidiary hazard class or division numbers; .5 Where assigned, the packing group for the substance or article, which may be preceded by “PG” (e.g.“PG II”).

5.4.1.4.2 Sequence of the dangerous goods description

The five elements of the dangerous goods description specified in 5.4.1.4.1 shall be shown in the order listed above (i.e. .1, .2, .3, .4, and .5) with no information interspersed, except as provided in this Code. Unless permitted or required by this Code, additional information shall be placed after the dangerous goods description.

5.4.1.4.3 Information which supplements the Proper Shipping Name in the dangerous goods description

The Proper Shipping Name (see 3.1.2) in the dangerous goods description shall be supplemented as follows: .1 Technical names for “n.o.s.” and other generic descriptions: Proper Shipping Names that are assigned special provision 274 or 318 in column 6 of the Dangerous Goods List shall be supplemented with their technical or chemical group names as described in 3.1.2.8; .2 Empty uncleaned packagings, bulk containers and tanks: Empty means of containment (including packagings, IBCs, bulk containers, portable tanks, road tank vehicles and railway tank wagons) which contain the residue of dangerous goods of classes other than class 7 shall be described as such by, for example, placing the words “EMPTY UNCLEANED” or “RESIDUE LAST CONTAINED” before or after the dangerous goods description specified in 5.4.1.4.1.1 to .5; .3 Wastes: For waste dangerous goods (other than radioactive wastes) which are being transported for disposal, or for processing for disposal, the Proper Shipping Name shall be preceded by the word “WASTE”, unless this is already a part of the Proper Shipping Name; .4 Elevated temperature substances: If the Proper Shipping Name of a substance which is transported or offered for transport in a liquid state at a temperature equal to or exceeding 100°C, or in a solid state at a temperature equal to or exceeding 240°C, does not convey the elevated temperature condition (for example, by using the term “MOLTEN” or “ELEVATED TEMPERATURE” as part of the Proper Shipping Name), the word “HOT” shall immediately precede the Proper Shipping Name.

* For standardized formats, see also the relevant recommendations of the UNECE United Nations Centre for Trade Facilitation and Electronic Business (UN/CEFACT), in particular Recommendation No. 1 (United Nations Layout Key for Trade Documents) (ECE/TRADE/137, edition 81.3), UN Layout Key for Trade Documents – Guidelines for Applications (ECE/TRADE/270, edition 2002), Revised Recommendation No. 11 (Documentary Aspects of the International Transport of Dangerous Goods) (ECE/TRADE/C/CEFACT/2008/8) and Recommendation No. 22 (Layout Key for Standard Consignment Instructions) (ECE/TRADE/168, edition 1989). Refer also to the UN/CEFACT Summary of Trade Facilitation Recommendations (ECE/TRADE/346, edition 2006) and the United Nations Trade Data Elements Directory (UNTDED) (ECE/TRADE/362, edition 2005).

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 331

349

Bilaga 1

Part 5 – Consignment procedures

.5 Marine pollutants: If the goods to be transported are marine pollutants, the goods shall be identified as “MARINE POLLUTANT”, and for generic or “not otherwise specified” (N.O.S.) entries the Proper Shipping Name shall be supplemented with the recognized chemical name of the marine pollutant (see 3.1.2.9). The term “MARINE POLLUTANT” may be supplemented with the term “ENVIRONMENTALLY HAZARDOUS”; .6 Flashpoint: If the dangerous goods to be transported have a flashpoint of 60°C or below (in °C closedcup (c.c.)), the minimum flashpoint shall be indicated. Because of the presence of impurities, the flashpoint may be lower or higher than the reference temperature indicated in the Dangerous Goods List for the substance. For class 5.2 organic peroxides which are also flammable, the flashpoint need not be declared.

5.4.1.4.4 Examples of dangerous goods descriptions:

UN 1098 ALLYL ALCOHOL 6.1 (3) I (21°C c.c.) UN 1098, ALLYL ALCOHOL, class 6.1, (class 3), PG I, (21°C c.c.) UN 1092, Acrolein, stabilized, class 6.1 (3), PG I, (–24°C c.c.) MARINE POLLUTANT/ENVIRONMENTALLY HAZARDOUS UN 2761, Organochlorine pesticide, solid, toxic, (Aldrin 19%), class 6.1, PG III, MARINE POLLUTANT

5.4.1.5 Information required in addition to the dangerous goods description

In addition to the dangerous goods description, the following information shall be included after the dangerous goods description on the dangerous goods transport document.

5.4.1.5.1 Total quantity of dangerous goods

Except for empty uncleaned packagings, the total quantity of dangerous goods covered by the description (by volume or mass as appropriate) of each item of dangerous goods bearing a different Proper Shipping Name, UN Number or packing group shall be included. For class 1 dangerous goods, the quantity shall be the net explosive mass. For dangerous goods transported in salvage packagings, an estimate of the quantity of dangerous goods shall be given. The number and kind (e.g. drum, box, etc.) of packages shall also be indicated. UN packaging codes may only be used to supplement the description of the kind of package (e.g., one box (4G)). Abbreviations may be used to specify the unit of measurement for the total quantity. Note: The number, type and capacity of each inner packaging within the outer packaging of a combination packaging is not required to be indicated.

5.4.1.5.2 Limited quantities

5.4.1.5.2.1 When dangerous goods are transported according to the exceptions for dangerous goods packed in limited quantities provided for in column 7a of the Dangerous Goods List and chapter 3.4, the words “limited quantity” or “LTD QTY” shall be included. 5.4.1.5.2.2 Where a shipment is offered in accordance with 3.4.4.1.2, the following statement shall be included in the transport document: “Transport in accordance with 3.4.4.1.2 of the IMDG Code”.

5.4.1.5.3 Salvage packagings and salvage pressure receptacles

For dangerous goods transported in salvage packagings or salvage pressure receptacles, the words “SALVAGE PACKAGING” or “SALVAGE PRESSURE RECEPTACLE” shall be included.

5.4.1.5.4 Substances stabilized by temperature control

If the word “STABILIZED” is part of the Proper Shipping Name (see also 3.1.2.6), when stabilization is by means of temperature control, the control and emergency temperatures (see 7.3.7.2) shall be indicated in the transport document, as follows: “Control temperature: … °C Emergency temperature: … °C”.

5.4.1.5.5 Self-reactive substances and organic peroxides

For self-reactive substances of class 4.1 and for organic peroxides which require temperature control during transport, the control and emergency temperatures (see 7.3.7.2) shall be indicated on the dangerous goods transport document, as follows: “Control temperature: … °C Emergency temperature: … °C”. 5.4.1.5.5.1 When, for certain self-reactive substances of class 4.1 and organic peroxides of class 5.2, the competent authority has permitted the “EXPLOSIVE” subsidiary risk label (model No. 1) to be dispensed with for the specific package, a statement to this effect shall be included.

332 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

350

Bilaga 1

Chapter 5.4 – Documentation

5.4.1.5.5.2 When organic peroxides and self-reactive substances are transported under conditions where approval is required (for organic peroxides, see 2.5.3.2.5, 4.1.7.2.2, 4.2.1.13.1 and 4.2.1.13.3; for self-reactive substances, see 2.4.2.3.2.4 and 4.1.7.2.2), a statement to this effect shall be included in the dangerous goods transport document. A copy of the classification approval and conditions of transport for non-listed organic peroxides and self-reactive substances shall be attached to the dangerous goods transport document.

5.4.1.5.5.3 When a sample of an organic peroxide (see 2.5.3.2.5.1) or a self-reactive substance (see 2.4.2.3.2.4.2) is transported, a statement to this effect shall be included in the dangerous goods transport document.

5.4.1.5.6 Infectious substances

The full address of the consignee shall be shown on the document, together with the name of a responsible person and his telephone number.

5.4.1.5.7 Radioactive material

5.4.1.5.7.1 The following information shall be included for each consignment of class 7 material, as applicable, in the order given: .1 The name or symbol of each radionuclide or, for mixtures of radionuclides, an appropriate general description or a list of the most restrictive nuclides; .2 A description of the physical and chemical form of the material, or a notation that the material is special form radioactive material or low dispersible radioactive material. A generic chemical description is acceptable for chemical form; .3 The maximum activity of the radioactive contents during transport expressed in units of becquerels (Bq) with an appropriate SI prefix symbol (see 1.2.2.1). For fissile material, the mass of fissile material (or mass of each fissile nuclide for mixtures when appropriate) in units of grams (g), or appropriate multiples thereof, may be used in place of activity; .4 The category of the package, i.e. I – WHITE, II – YELLOW, III – YELLOW; .5 The transport index (categories II – YELLOW and III – YELLOW only); .6 For consignments including fissile material other than consignments excepted under 6.4.11.2, the criticality safety index; .7 The identification mark for each competent authority approval certificate (special form radioactive material, low dispersible radioactive material, special arrangement, package design, or shipment) applicable to the consignment; .8 For consignments of more than one package, the information contained in 5.4.1.4.1.1 to .3 and 5.4.1.5.7.1.1 to .7 shall be given for each package. For packages in an overpack, freight container, or conveyance, a detailed statement of the contents of each package within the overpack, freight container, or conveyance and, where appropriate, of each overpack, freight container, or conveyance shall be included. If packages are to be removed from the overpack, freight container, or conveyance at a point of intermediate unloading, appropriate transport documents shall be made available; .9 Where a consignment is required to be shipped under exclusive use, the statement “EXCLUSIVE USE SHIPMENT”; and .10 For LSA-II, LSA-III, SCO-I and SCO-II, the total activity of the consignment as a multiple of A2. For radioactive material for which the A2 value is unlimited, the multiple of A2 shall be zero.

5.4.1.5.7.2 The transport document shall include a statement regarding actions, if any, that are required to be taken by the carrier. The statement shall be in the languages deemed necessary by the carrier or the authorities concerned, and shall include at least the following points: .1 Supplementary requirements for loading, stowage, transport, handling and unloading of the package, overpack or freight container, including any special stowage provisions for the safe dissipation of heat (see 7.1.4.5.2), or a statement that no such requirements are necessary; .2 Restrictions on the mode of transport or conveyance and any necessary routeing instructions; .3 Emergency arrangements appropriate to the consignment.

5.4.1.5.7.3 In all cases of international transport of packages requiring competent authorities design or shipment approval, for which different approval types apply in the different countries concerned by the shipment, the UN Number and Proper Shipping Name required in 5.4.1.4.1 shall be in accordance with the certificate of the country of origin of design.

5.4.1.5.7.4 The applicable competent authority certificates need not necessarily accompany the consignment. The consignor shall make them available to the carrier(s) before loading and unloading.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 333

351

Bilaga 1

Part 5 – Consignment procedures

5.4.1.5.8 Aerosols

If the capacity of an aerosol is above 1000 mℓ, this shall be declared in the transport document.

5.4.1.5.9 Explosives

The following information shall be included for each consignment of class 1 goods, as applicable: .1 Entries have been included for “SUBSTANCES, EXPLOSIVE, N.O.S.”, “ARTICLES, EXPLOSIVE, N.O.S.”, and “COMPONENTS, EXPLOSIVE TRAIN, N.O.S.”. When a specific entry does not exist, the competent authority of the country of origin shall use the entry appropriate to the hazard division and compatibility group. The transport document shall contain the statement: “Transport under this entry approved by the competent authority of …” followed by the State’s distinguishing sign for motor vehicles in international traffic of the country of the competent authority. .2 The transport of explosive substances for which a minimum water or phlegmatizer content is specified in the individual entry is prohibited when containing less water or phlegmatizer than the specified minimum. Such substances shall only be transported with special authorization granted by the competent authority of the country of origin. The transport document shall contain the statement “Transport under this entry approved by the competent authority of …” followed by the State’s distinguishing sign for motor vehicles in international traffic of the country of the competent authority. .3 When explosive substances or articles are packaged “as approved by the competent authority”, the transport document shall contain the statement “Packaging approved by the competent authority of …” followed by the State’s distinguishing sign for motor vehicles in international traffic of the country of the competent authority. .4 There are some hazards which are not indicated by the hazard division and compatibility group of a substance. The shipper shall provide an indication of any such hazards on the dangerous goods documentation.

5.4.1.5.10 Viscous substances

When viscous substances are transported in accordance with 2.3.2.5, the following statement shall be included in the transport document: “Transport in accordance with 2.3.2.5 of the IMDG Code.”.

5.4.1.5.11 Special provisions for segregation

5.4.1.5.11.1 For substances, mixtures, solutions or preparations classified under N.O.S. entries not included in the segregation groups listed in 3.1.4.4 but belonging, in the opinion of the consignor, to one of these groups (see 3.1.4.2), the appropriate segregation group name preceded by the phrase “IMDG Code segregation group” shall be included in the transport document after the dangerous goods description. For example: “UN 1760 CORROSIVE LIQUID, N.O.S. (Phosphoric acid, acetic acid) 8 III IMDG Code segregation group 1 – Acids”.

5.4.1.5.11.2 When substances are loaded together in a cargo transport unit in accordance with 7.2.6.3, the following statement shall be included in the transport document: “Transport in accordance with 7.2.6.3 of the IMDG Code”.

5.4.1.5.11.3 When acid and alkali substances of class 8 are transported in the same cargo transport unit, whether in the same packaging or not, in accordance with 7.2.6.4, the following statement shall be included in the transport document: “Transport in accordance with 7.2.6.4 of the IMDG Code”.

5.4.1.5.12 Transport of solid dangerous goods in bulk containers

For bulk containers other than freight containers, the following statement shall be included on the transport document (see 6.9.4.6): “Bulk container BK2 approved by the competent authority of …”

5.4.1.5.13 Transport of IBCs or portable tanks after the date of expiry of the last periodic test or inspection

For transport in accordance with 4.1.2.2.2.2, 6.7.2.19.6.2, 6.7.3.15.6.2 or 6.7.4.14.6.2, a statement to this effect shall be included in the transport document, as follows: “Transport in accordance with 4.1.2.2.2.2”, “Transport in accordance with 6.7.2.19.6.2”, “Transport in accordance with 6.7.3.15.6.2” or “Transport in accordance with 6.7.4.14.6.2” as appropriate.

5.4.1.5.14 Dangerous goods in excepted quantities

5.4.1.5.14.1 When dangerous goods are transported according to the exceptions for dangerous goods packed in excepted quantities provided for in column 7b of the Dangerous Goods List and chapter 3.5, the words “dangerous goods in excepted quantities” shall be included.

334 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

352

Bilaga 1

Chapter 5.4 – Documentation

5.4.1.5.15 Firework classification reference

When fireworks of UN Nos. 0333, 0334, 0335, 0336 and 0337 are transported, the dangerous goods transport document shall include a classification reference(s) issued by the competent authority. The classification reference(s) shall consist of the competent authority's state, indicated by the distinguishing sign for motor vehicles in international traffic, the competent authority identification and a unique serial reference. Examples of such classification references are: – GB/HSE123456 – D/BAM1234 – USA EX20091234.

5.4.1.6 Certification

5.4.1.6.1 The dangerous goods transport document shall include a certification or declaration that the consignment is acceptable for transport and that the goods are properly packaged, marked and labelled, and in proper condition for transport in accordance with the applicable regulations. The text for this certification is: “I hereby declare that the contents of this consignment are fully and accurately described above by the Proper Shipping Name, and are classified, packaged, marked and labelled/placarded, and are in all respects in proper condition for transport according to applicable international and national government regulations.” The certification shall be signed and dated by the consignor. Facsimile signatures are acceptable where applicable laws and regulations recognize the legal validity of facsimile signatures. 5.4.1.6.2 If the dangerous goods documentation is presented to the carrier by means of EDP or EDI transmission techniques, the signature(s) may be electronic signature(s) or may be replaced by the name(s) (in capitals) of the person authorized to sign. 5.4.1.6.3 When the dangerous goods transport information is given to a carrier by EDP or EDI techniques and subsequently the dangerous goods are transferred to a carrier that requires a paper dangerous goods transport document, the carrier shall ensure that the paper document indicates “Original received electronically” and the name of the signatory shall be shown in capital letters.

5.4.2 Container/vehicle packing certificate

5.4.2.1 When dangerous goods are packed or loaded into any container* or vehicle, those responsible for packing the container or vehicle shall provide a “container/vehicle packing certificate” specifying the container/vehicle identification number(s) and certifying that the operation has been carried out in accordance with the following conditions: .1 The container/vehicle was clean, dry and apparently fit to receive the goods; .2 Packages which need to be segregated in accordance with applicable segregation requirements have not been packed together onto or in the container/vehicle (unless approved by the competent authority concerned in accordance with 7.3.4.1); .3 All packages have been externally inspected for damage, and only sound packages have been loaded; .4 Drums have been stowed in an upright position, unless otherwise authorized by the competent authority, and all goods have been properly loaded and, where necessary, adequately braced with securing material to suit the mode(s)† of transport for the intended journey; .5 Goods loaded in bulk have been evenly distributed within the container/vehicle; .6 For consignments including goods of class 1 other than division 1.4, the container/vehicle is structurally serviceable in accordance with 7.1.2; .7 The container/vehicle and packages are properly marked, labelled and placarded, as appropriate; .8 When solid carbon dioxide (CO2 – dry ice) is used for cooling purposes, the container/vehicle is externally marked in accordance with 5.5.3.6; and .9 A dangerous goods transport document, as indicated in 5.4.1, has been received for each dangerous goods consignment loaded in the container/vehicle. Note: The container/vehicle packing certificate is not required for portable tanks.

* See definition of ‘‘freight container'' in 1.2.1. † See IMO/ILO/UNECE Guidelines for packing of cargo transport units.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 335

353

Bilaga 1

Part 5 – Consignment procedures

5.4.2.2 The information required in the dangerous goods transport document and the container/vehicle packing certificate may be incorporated into a single document; if not, these documents shall be attached one to the other. If the information is incorporated into a single document, the document shall include a signed declaration such as “It is declared that the packing of the goods into the container/vehicle has been carried out in accordance with the applicable provisions”. This declaration shall be dated and the person signing this declaration shall be identified on the document. Facsimile signatures are acceptable where applicable laws and regulations recognize the legal validity of facsimile signatures.

5.4.2.3 If the container/vehicle packing certificate is presented to the carrier by means of EDP or EDI transmission techniques, the signature(s) may be electronic signature(s) or may be replaced by the name(s) (in capitals) of the person authorized to sign. 5.4.2.4 When the container/vehicle packing certificate is given to a carrier by EDP or EDI techniques and subsequently the dangerous goods are transferred to a carrier that requires a paper dangerous goods transport document, the carrier shall ensure that the paper document indicates “Original received electronically” and the name of the signatory shall be shown in capital letters.

5.4.3 Documentation required aboard the ship

5.4.3.1 Each ship carrying dangerous goods and marine pollutants shall have a special list, manifest‡ or stowage plan setting out, in accordance with regulation VII/ 4.2 of SOLAS 1974, as amended, and with regulation 4.2 of Annex III of MARPOL 73/78, the dangerous goods and marine pollutants and the location thereof. This special list or manifest shall be based on the documentation and certification required in this Code. It shall contain in addition to the information in 5.4.1.4, 5.4.1.5 and, for UN 3359, in 5.5.2.4.1.1, the stowage location and the total quantity of dangerous goods and marine pollutants. A detailed stowage plan, which identifies by class and sets out the location of all dangerous goods and marine pollutants, may be used in place of such special list or manifest. A copy of one of these documents shall be made available before departure to the person or organization designated by the port State authority.

5.4.3.2 Emergency response information

5.4.3.2.1 For consignments of dangerous goods, appropriate information shall be immediately available at all times for use in emergency response to accidents and incidents involving dangerous goods in transport. The information shall be available away from packages containing the dangerous goods and immediately accessible in the event of an incident. Methods of compliance include: .1 appropriate entries in the special list, manifest or dangerous goods declaration; or .2 provision of a separate document such as a safety data sheet; or .3 provision of separate documentation, such as the Emergency Response Procedures for Ships Carrying Dangerous Goods (EmS Guide) for use in conjunction with the transport document and the Medical First Aid Guide for Use in Accidents Involving Dangerous Goods (MFAG).

5.4.4 Other required information and documentation

5.4.4.1 In certain circumstances, special certificates or other documents are required such as: .1 a weathering certificate; as required in the individual entries of the Dangerous Goods List; .2 a certificate exempting a substance, material or article from the provisions of the IMDG Code (such as, see individual entries for charcoal, fishmeal, seedcake); .3 for new self-reactive substances and organic peroxides or new formulation of currently assigned selfreactive substances and organic peroxides, a statement by the competent authority of the country of origin of the approved classification and conditions of transport.

5.4.5 Multimodal Dangerous Goods Form

5.4.5.1 This form meets the requirements of SOLAS 74, chapter VII, regulation 4, MARPOL 73/78, Annex III, regulation 4 and the provisions of this chapter. The information required by the provisions of this chapter is mandatory; however, the layout of this form is not mandatory.

336 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

354

Bilaga 1

Chapter 5.4 – Documentation

MULTIMODAL DANGEROUS GOODS FORM

This form may be used as a dangerous goods declaration as it meets the requirements of SOLAS 74, chapter VII, regulation 4; MARPOL 73/78, Annex III, regulation 4.

1 Shipper/Consignor/Sender 2 Transport document number 3 Page 1 of pages 4 Shipper’s reference 5 Freight forwarder’s reference 6 Consignee 7 Carrier (to be completed by the carrier) SHIPPER’S DECLARATION I hereby declare that the contents of this consignment are fully and accurately described below by the Proper Shipping Name, and are classified, packaged, marked and labelled/placarded and are in all respects in proper condition for transport according to the applicable international and national governmental regulations. 8 This shipment is within the limitations prescribed for: 9 Additional handling information (Delete non-applicable) PASSENGER AND CARGO CARGO AIRCRAFT AIRCRAFT ONLY

10 Vessel/flight No. and date 11 Port/place of loading

12 Port/place of discharge 13 Destination

14 Shipping marks * Number and kind of packages; description of goods Gross mass (kg) Net mass (kg) Cube (m3)

15 Container identification No./ 16 Seal number(s) 17 Container/vehicle size 18 Tare mass 19 Total gross mass vehicle registration No. & type (kg) (including tare) (kg)

CONTAINER/VEHICLE PACKING CERTIFICATE 21 RECEIVING ORGANISATION RECEIPT I hereby declare that the goods described above have been packed/ Received the above number of packages/containers/trailers in apparent loaded into the container/vehicle identified above in accordance with † good order and condition, unless stated hereon: RECEIVING ORGANISATION the applicable provisions. REMARKS: MUST BE COMPLETED AND SIGNED FOR ALL CONTAINER/ VEHICLE LOADS BY PERSON RESPONSIBLE FOR PACKING/ LOADING 20 Name of company Haulier’s name 22 Name of company (OF SHIPPER PREPARING THIS NOTE) Vehicle reg. no. Name/status of declarant Name/status of declarant Signature and date Place and date Place and date

Signature of declarant DRIVER’S SIGNATURE Signature of declarant

* DANGEROUS GOODS: You must specify: UN No., Proper Shipping Name, hazard class, packing group, (where assigned) marine pollutant and observe the mandatory requirements under applicable national and international governmental regulations. For the purposes of the IMDG Code, see 5.4.1.4. † For the purposes of the IMDG Code, see 5.4.2.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 337

355

Bilaga 1

Part 5 – Consignment procedures

Documentary Aspects of the International Transport of Dangerous Goods Container/Vehicle Packing Certificate

The signature given overleaf in Box 20 must be When materials are transported in bulk packagings, that of the person controlling the container/vehicle the cargo has been evenly distributed in the operation. container/vehicle.

It is certified that: The packages and the container/vehicle have been properly marked, labelled and placarded. Any The container/vehicle was clean, dry and apparently irrelevant mark, labels and placards have been fit to receive the goods. removed. If the consignments include goods of class 1, other than division 1.4, the container is structurally When solid carbon dioxide (CO2 – dry ice) is used for serviceable. cooling purposes, the vehicle or freight container is externally marked in accordance with 5.5.3.6. No incompatible goods have been packed into the container/vehicle unless specially authorized by the When this Dangerous Goods Form is used as Competent Authority. a container/vehicle packing certificate only, not a combined document, a dangerous goods All packages have been externally inspected for declaration signed by the shipper or supplier must damage and only sound packages packed. have been issued/received to cover each dangerous goods consignment packed in the container. Drums have been stowed in an upright position unless otherwise authorized by the Competent Note: The container packing certificate is not Authority. required for tanks. All packages have been properly packed and secured in the container/vehicle.

338 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

356

Bilaga 1

Chapter 5.4 – Documentation

1 Shipper/Consignor/Sender 2 Transport document number 3 Page of pages 4 Shipper’s reference 5 Freight forwarder’s reference 14 Shipping marks * Number and kind of packages; description of goods Gross mass (kg) Net mass (kg) Cube (m3)

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 339

357

Bilaga 1

Part 5 – Consignment procedures

5.4.6 Retention of dangerous goods transport information

5.4.6.1 The consignor and the carrier shall retain a copy of the dangerous goods transport document and additional information and documentation as specified in this Code, for a minimum period of three months. 5.4.6.2 When the documents are kept electronically or in a computer system, the consignor and the carrier shall be able to reproduce them in a printed form.

340 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

358

Bilaga 1

Chapter 5.5

Special provisions

5.5.1 [Reserved]

5.5.2 Special provisions applicable to fumigated cargo transport units (UN 3359)

5.5.2.1 General

5.5.2.1.1 Fumigated cargo transport units (UN 3359) containing no other dangerous goods are not subject to any provisions of this Code other than those of this section. 5.5.2.1.2 When the fumigated cargo transport unit is loaded with dangerous goods in addition to the fumigant, any provision of this Code relevant to these goods (including placarding, marking and documentation) applies in addition to the provisions of this section. 5.5.2.1.3 Only cargo transport units that can be closed in such a way that the escape of gas is reduced to a minimum shall be used for the transport of cargo under fumigation. 5.5.2.1.4 The provisions of 3.2 and 5.4.3 apply to all fumigated cargo transport units (UN 3359).

5.5.2.2 Training

Persons engaged in the handling of fumigated cargo transport units shall be trained commensurate with their responsibilities.

5.5.2.3 Marking and placarding

5.5.2.3.1 A fumigated cargo transport unit shall be marked with a warning mark, as specified in 5.5.2.3.2, affixed at each access point in a location where it will be easily seen by persons opening or entering the cargo transport unit. This mark shall remain on the cargo transport unit until the following provisions are met: (a) The fumigated cargo transport unit has been ventilated to remove harmful concentrations of fumigant gas; and (b) The fumigated goods or materials have been unloaded. 5.5.2.3.2 The fumigation warning mark shall be rectangular and shall not be less than 300 mm wide and 250 mm high. The markings shall be in black print on a white background with lettering not less than 25 mm high. An illustration of this mark is given below.

DANGER

THIS UNIT IS UNDER FUMIGATION WITH [fumigant name*] APPLIED ON [ date* ] [ time* ] Not less than 250 mm VENTILATED ON [ date* ] DO NOT ENTER * Insert details as appropriate Not less than 300 mm

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 341

359

Bilaga 1

Part 5 – Consignment procedures

5.5.2.3.3 If the fumigated cargo transport unit has been completely ventilated either by opening the doors of the unit or by mechanical ventilation after fumigation, the date of ventilation shall be marked on the fumigation warning mark. 5.5.2.3.4 When the fumigated cargo transport unit has been ventilated and unloaded, the fumigation warning mark shall be removed. 5.5.2.3.5 Class 9 placards (Model No.9, see 5.2.2.2.2) shall not be affixed to a fumigated cargo transport unit except as required for other class 9 substances or articles packed therein.

5.5.2.4 Documentation

5.5.2.4.1 Documents associated with the transport of cargo transport units that have been fumigated and have not been completely ventilated before transport shall include the following information: .1 UN 3359, fumigated cargo transport unit, 9, or UN 3359, fumigated cargo transport unit, class 9; .2 The date and time of fumigation; and .3 The type and amount of the fumigant used. 5.5.2.4.2 The transport document may be in any form, provided it contains the information required in 5.5.2.4.1. This information shall be easy to identify, legible and durable. 5.5.2.4.3 Instructions for disposal of any residual fumigant including fumigation devices (if used) shall be provided. 5.5.2.4.4 A document is not required when the fumigated cargo transport unit has been completely ventilated and the date of ventilation has been marked on the warning mark (see 5.5.2.3.3 and 5.5.2.3.4).

5.5.2.5 Additional provisions

5.5.2.5.1 Cargo transport units shall be fumigated and handled taking into account the provisions of the MSC.1/Circ.1361 on Revised Recommendations on the safe use of pesticides in ships applicable to the fumigation of cargo transport units. 5.5.2.5.2 When fumigated cargo transport units are stowed under deck, equipment for detecting fumigant gas(es) shall be carried on the ship with instructions for their use. 5.5.2.5.3 Fumigants shall not be applied to the contents of a cargo transport unit once it has been loaded aboard the ship. 5.5.2.5.4 A fumigated cargo transport unit shall not be allowed on board until a sufficient period has elapsed to attain a reasonable uniform gas concentration throughout the cargo in it. Because of variations due to types and amounts of fumigants and commodities and temperature levels, the period between fumigant application and loading of the fumigated cargo transport unit on board the ship shall be determined by the competent authority. Twenty-four hours is normally sufficient for this purpose. Unless the doors of a fumigated cargo transport unit have been opened to allow the fumigant gas(es) and residues to be completely ventilated or the unit has been mechanically ventilated, the shipment shall conform to the provisions of this Code concerning UN 3359. Ventilated cargo transport units shall be marked with the date of ventilation on the fumigation warning mark. When the fumigated goods or materials have been unloaded, the fumigation warning mark shall be removed. 5.5.2.5.5 The master shall be informed prior to the loading of a fumigated cargo transport unit.

5.5.3 Special provisions applicable to packages and cargo transport units containing substances presenting a risk of asphyxiation when used for cooling or conditioning purposes (such as dry ice (UN 1845) or nitrogen, refrigerated liquid (UN 1977) or argon, refrigerated liquid (UN 1951))

Note: See also 1.1.1.7.

5.5.3.1 Scope

5.5.3.1.1 This section is not applicable to substances which may be used for cooling or conditioning purposes when transported as a consignment of dangerous goods. When they are transported as a consignment, these substances shall be transported under the relevant entry of the Dangerous Goods List in Chapter 3.2 in accordance with the associated conditions of transport. 5.5.3.1.2 This section is not applicable to gases in cooling cycles. 5.5.3.1.3 Dangerous goods used for cooling or conditioning portable tanks or MEGCs during transport are not subject to this section.

342 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

360

Bilaga 1

Chapter 5.5 – Special provisions

5.5.3.2 General

5.5.3.2.1 Cargo transport units containing substances used for cooling or conditioning purposes (other than fumigation) during transport are not subject to any provisions of this Code other than those of this section. 5.5.3.2.2 When dangerous goods are loaded in cooled or conditioned cargo transport units any provisions of this Code relevant to these dangerous goods apply in addition to the provisions of this section. For dangerous goods for which temperature control is required see also 7.3.7. 5.5.3.2.3 Reserved. 5.5.3.2.4 Persons engaged in the handling or transport of cooled or conditioned cargo transport units shall be trained commensurate with their responsibilities. 5.5.3.3 Packages containing a coolant or conditioner 5.5.3.3.1 Packaged dangerous goods requiring cooling or conditioning assigned to packing instructions P203, P620, P650, P800, P901 or P904 of 4.1.4.1 shall meet the appropriate requirements of that packing instruction. 5.5.3.3.2 For packaged dangerous goods requiring cooling or conditioning assigned to other packing instructions, the packages shall be capable of withstanding very low temperatures and shall not be affected or significantly weakened by the coolant or conditioner. Packages shall be designed and constructed to permit the release of gas to prevent a build-up of pressure that could rupture the packaging. The dangerous goods shall be packed in such a way to prevent movement after the dissipation of any coolant or conditioner. 5.5.3.3.3 Packages containing a coolant or conditioner shall be transported in well ventilated cargo transport units.

5.5.3.4 Marking of packages containing a coolant or conditioner

5.5.3.4.1 Packages containing dangerous goods used for cooling or conditioning shall be marked with the proper shipping name of these dangerous goods followed by the words “AS COOLANT” or “AS CONDITIONER” as appropriate. 5.5.3.4.2 The markings shall be durable, legible and placed in such a location and of such a size relative to the package as to be readily visible.

5.5.3.5 Cargo transport units containing unpackaged dry ice

5.5.3.5.1 If dry ice in unpackaged form is used, it shall not come into direct contact with the metal structure of a cargo transport unit to avoid embrittlement of the metal. Measures shall be taken to provide adequate insulation between the dry ice and the cargo transport unit by providing a minimum of 30 mm separation (e.g., by using suitable low heat conducting materials such as timber planks, pallets, etc.). 5.5.3.5.2 Where dry ice is placed around packages, measures shall be taken to ensure that packages remain in the original position during transport after the dry ice has dissipated.

5.5.3.6 Marking of cargo transport units

5.5.3.6.1 Cargo transport units containing dangerous goods used for cooling or conditioning shall be marked with a warning mark, as specified in 5.5.3.6.2 affixed at each access point in a location where it will be easily seen by persons opening or entering the cargo transport unit. This mark shall remain on the cargo transport unit until the following provisions are met: .1 The cargo transport unit has been ventilated to remove harmful concentrations of coolant or conditioner; and .2 The cooled or conditioned goods have been unloaded. 5.5.3.6.2 The warning mark shall be rectangular and shall not be less than 150 mm wide and 250 mm high. The warning mark shall include: .1 The word “WARNING” in red or white with lettering not less than 25 mm high; and .2 The proper shipping name followed by the words “AS COOLANT” or “AS CONDITIONER” as appropriate, shown below the symbol in black letters on a white background with lettering not less than 25 mm high. For example: CARBON DIOXIDE, SOLID, AS COOLANT. An illustration of this mark is given in Figure 5.5.2.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 343

361

Bilaga 1

Part 5 – Consignment procedures

WARNING

m 0 m 5 n 2 a h s t s e t l o N

Not less than 150 mm

* insert the proper shipping name followed by the words “AS COOLANT” or “AS CONDITIONER” as appropriate.

Figure 5.5.2

5.5.3.7 Documentation

5.5.3.7.1 Documents associated with the transport of cargo transport units that have been cooled or conditioned and have not been completely ventilated before transport shall include the following information:

.1 The UN number preceded by the letters “UN”; and .2 The proper shipping name followed by the words “AS COOLANT” or “AS CONDITIONER” as appropriate.

For example: UN 1845, CARBON DIOXIDE, SOLID, AS COOLANT".

5.5.3.7.2 The transport document may be in any form, provided it contains the information required in 5.5.3.7.1. This information shall be easy to identify, legible and durable.

344 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

362

Bilaga 1

PART 6

CONSTRUCTION AND TESTING OF PACKAGINGS, INTERMEDIATE BULK CONTAINERS (IBCs), LARGE PACKAGINGS, PORTABLE TANKS, MULTIPLE-ELEMENT GAS CONTAINERS (MEGCs) AND ROAD TANK VEHICLES

363

Bilaga 1

364

Bilaga 1

Chapter 6.1

Provisions for the construction and testing of packagings (other than for class 6.2 substances)

6.1.1 Applicability and general provisions

6.1.1.1 Applicability

The provisions in this chapter do not apply to: .1 pressure receptacles; .2 packages containing radioactive material, which shall comply with the Regulations of the International Atomic Energy Agency (IAEA), except that: (i) radioactive material possessing other dangerous properties (subsidiary risks) shall also comply with special provision 172 in chapter 3.3; and (ii) low specific activity (LSA) material and surface contaminated objects (SCO) may be carried in certain packagings defined in this Code provided that the supplementary provisions set out in the IAEA Regulations are also met; .3 packages whose net mass exceeds 400 kg; and .4 packages with a capacity exceeding 450 ℓ.

6.1.1.2 General provisions

6.1.1.2.1 The provisions for packagings in 6.1.4 are based on packagings currently used. In order to take into account progress in science and technology, there is no objection to the use of packagings having specifications different from those in 6.1.4, provided that they are equally effective, acceptable to the competent authority and able successfully to withstand the tests described in 6.1.1.2 and 6.1.5. Methods of testing other than those described in this chapter are acceptable, provided that they are equivalent. 6.1.1.2.2 Every packaging intended to contain liquids shall successfully undergo a suitable leakproofness test and be capable of meeting the appropriate test level indicated in 6.1.5.4.4: .1 before it is first used for transport; .2 after remanufacturing or reconditioning, before it is re-used for transport. For this test, packagings need not have their own closures fitted. The inner receptacle of a composite packaging may be tested without the outer packaging provided the test results are not affected. This test is not necessary for an inner packaging of a combination packaging. 6.1.1.2.3 Receptacles, parts of receptacles and closures (stoppers) made of plastics which may be directly in contact with a dangerous substance shall be resistant to it and shall not incorporate materials which may react dangerously or form hazardous compounds or lead to softening, weakening or failure of the receptacle or closure. 6.1.1.2.4 Plastics packagings shall be adequately resistant to ageing and to degradation caused either by the substance contained or by ultraviolet radiation. Any permeation of the substance contained shall not constitute a danger under normal conditions of transport. 6.1.1.3 Packagings shall be manufactured, reconditioned and tested under a quality-assurance programme which satisfies the competent authority in order to ensure that each packaging meets the provisions of this chapter. Note: ISO 16106:2006 “Packaging – Transport packages for dangerous goods – Dangerous goods packagings, intermediate bulk containers (IBCs) and large packagings – Guidelines for the application of ISO 9001” provides acceptable guidance on procedures which may be followed. 6.1.1.4 Manufacturers and subsequent distributors of packagings shall provide information regarding procedures to be followed and a description of the types and dimensions of closures (including required gaskets) and any other components needed to ensure that packages as presented for transport are capable of passing the applicable performance tests of this chapter.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 347

365

Bilaga 1

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc.

6.1.2 Code for designating types of packagings

6.1.2.1 The code consists of: .1 an Arabic numeral indicating the kind of packaging, such as drum, jerrican, etc., followed by .2 one or more capital letters in Latin characters indicating the nature of the material, such as steel, wood, etc., followed where necessary by .3 an Arabic numeral indicating the category of packaging within the type to which the packaging belongs. 6.1.2.2 In the case of composite packagings, two capital letters in Latin characters shall be used in sequence in the second position of the code. The first indicates the material of the inner receptacle and the second that of the outer packaging. 6.1.2.3 In the case of combination packagings, only the code number for the outer packaging shall be used. 6.1.2.4 The letters ‘T’, ‘V’ or ‘W’ may follow the packaging code. The letter ‘T’ signifies a salvage packaging conforming to the provisions of 6.1.5.1.11. The letter ‘V’ signifies a special packaging conforming to the provisions of 6.1.5.1.7. The letter ‘W’ signifies that the packaging, although of the same type as that indicated by the code, is manufactured to a specification different to that in 6.1.4 but is considered equivalent under the provisions of 6.1.1.2. 6.1.2.5 The following numerals shall be used for the kinds of packaging: 1 Drum 2 [Reserved] 3 Jerrican 4 Box 5 Bag 6 Composite packaging 6.1.2.6 The following capital letters shall be used for the types of material: A Steel (all types and surface treatments) B Aluminium C Natural wood D Plywood F Reconstituted wood G Fibreboard H Plastics material L Textile M Paper, multiwall N Metal (other than steel or aluminium) P Glass, porcelain or stoneware Note: “Plastics material” is taken to include other polymeric materials such as rubber. 6.1.2.7 The following table indicates the codes to be used for designating types of packagings depending on the kind of packagings, the material used for their construction and their category; it also refers to the paragraphs to be consulted for the appropriate provisions: Kind Material Category Code Paragraph 1 Drums A Steel non-removable head 1A1 6.1.4.1 removable head 1A2 B Aluminium non-removable head 1B1 6.1.4.2 removable head 1B2 D Plywood – 1D 6.1.4.5 G Fibre – 1G 6.1.4.7 H Plastics non-removable head 1H1 6.1.4.8 removable head 1H2 N Metal, other than steel non-removable head 1N1 6.1.4.3 or aluminium removable head 1N2 2 [Reserved]

348 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

366

Bilaga 1

Chapter 6.1 – Provisions for the construction and testing of packagings

Kind Material Category Code Paragraph 3 Jerricans A Steel non-removable head 3A1 6.1.4.4 removable head 3A2 B Aluminium non-removable head 3B1 6.1.4.4 removable head 3B2 H Plastics non-removable head 3H1 6.1.4.8 removable head 3H2 4 Boxes A Steel – 4A 6.1.4.14 B Aluminium – 4B 6.1.4.14 C Natural wood ordinary 4C1 6.1.4.9 with sift-proof walls 4C2 D Plywood – 4D 6.1.4.10 F Reconstituted wood – 4F 6.1.4.11 G Fibreboard – 4G 6.1.4.12 H Plastics expanded 4H1 6.1.4.13 solid 4H2 N Metal, other than steel – 4N 6.1.4.14 or aluminium 5 Bags H Woven plastics without inner lining or coating 5H1 6.1.4.16 sift-proof 5H2 water-resistant 5H3 H Plastics film – 5H4 6.1.4.17 L Textile without inner lining or coating 5L1 6.1.4.15 sift-proof 5L2 water-resistant 5L3 M Paper multiwall 5M1 6.1.4.18 multiwall, water-resistant 5M2 6 Composite H Plastics receptacle in steel drum 6HA1 6.1.4.19 packagings in steel crate or box 6HA2 6.1.4.19 in aluminium drum 6HB1 6.1.4.19 in aluminium crate or box 6HB2 6.1.4.19 in wooden box 6HC 6.1.4.19 in plywood drum 6HD1 6.1.4.19 in plywood box 6HD2 6.1.4.19 in fibre drum 6HG1 6.1.4.19 in fibreboard box 6HG2 6.1.4.19 in plastics drum 6HH1 6.1.4.19 in solid plastics box 6HH2 6.1.4.19 P Glass, porcelain or in steel drum 6PA1 6.1.4.20 stoneware receptacle in steel crate or box 6PA2 6.1.4.20 in aluminium drum 6PB1 6.1.4.20 in aluminium crate or box 6PB2 6.1.4.20 in wooden box 6PC 6.1.4.20 in plywood drum 6PD1 6.1.4.20 in wickerwork hamper 6PD2 6.1.4.20 in fibre drum 6PG1 6.1.4.20 in fibreboard box 6PG2 6.1.4.20 in expanded plastics packaging 6PH1 6.1.4.20 in solid plastics packaging 6PH2 6.1.4.20

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 349

367

Bilaga 1

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc.

6.1.3 Marking

Note 1: The marking indicates that the packaging which bears it corresponds to a successfully tested design type and that it complies with the provisions of this chapter which are related to the manufacture, but not to the use, of the packaging. In itself, therefore, the mark does not necessarily confirm that the packaging may be used for any substance. The type of packaging (such as steel drum), its maximum capacity or mass, and any special provisions are specified for each substance or article in part 3 of this Code.

Note 2: The marking is intended to be of assistance to packaging manufacturers, reconditioners, packaging users, carriers and regulatory authorities. In relation to the use of a new packaging, the original marking is a means for its manufacturer to identify the type and to indicate those performance test provisions that have been met.

Note 3: The marking does not always provide full details of the test levels, etc., and these may need to be taken further into account, such as by reference to a test certificate, test reports or register of successfully tested packagings. For example, a packaging having an X or Y marking may be used for substances to which a packing group having a lesser degree of danger has been assigned, with the relevant maximum permissible value of the relative density* determined by taking into account the factor 1.5 or 2.25 indicated in the packaging test provisions in 6.1.5 as appropriate, i.e., packing group I packaging tested for products of relative density 1.2 could be used as a packing group II packaging for products of relative density 1.8 or packing group III packaging of relative density 2.7, provided, of course, that all the performance criteria can still be met with the product having the higher relative density.

6.1.3.1 Each packaging intended for use according to this Code shall bear markings which are durable, legible and placed in such a location and of such a size relative to the packaging as to be readily visible. For packages with a gross mass of more than 30 kg, the markings or a duplicate thereof shall appear on the top or on a side of the packaging. Letters, numerals and symbols shall be at least 12 mm high, except for packagings of 30 ℓ or 30 kg capacity or less, when they shall be at least 6 mm in height, and for packagings of 5 ℓ or 5 kg or less, when they shall be of an appropriate size.

The marking shall show:

(a) The United Nations packaging symbol

This symbol shall not be used for any purpose other than certifying that a packaging, a flexible bulk container, a portable tank or a MEGC complies with the relevant requirements in Chapter 6.1, 6.2, 6.3, 6.5, 6.6, 6.7 or 6.9. For embossed metal packagings the capital letters “UN” may be applied as the symbol.

(b) The code designating the type of packaging according to 6.1.2.

(c) A code in two parts:

(i) a letter designating the packing group or groups for which the design type has been successfully tested:

“X” for packing groups I, II and III

“Y” for packing groups II and III

“Z” for packing group III only;

(ii) the relative density, rounded off to the first decimal, for which the design type has been tested for packagings, without inner packagings, intended to contain liquids; this may be omitted when the relative density does not exceed 1.2. For packagings intended to contain solids or inner packagings, the maximum gross mass in kilograms.

(d) Either a letter “S”, denoting that the packaging is intended for the transport of solids or inner packagings, or, for packagings (other than combination packagings) intended to contain liquids, the hydraulic test pressure which the packaging was shown to withstand in kilopascals, rounded down to the nearest 10 kPa.

* Relative density (d ) is considered to be synonymous with specific gravity (SG) and will be used throughout this text.

350 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

368

Bilaga 1

Chapter 6.1 – Provisions for the construction and testing of packagings

(e) The last two digits of the year during which the packaging was manufactured. Packagings of types 1H and 3H shall also be appropriately marked with the month of manufacture; this may be marked on the packaging in a different place from the remainder of the marking. An appropriate method is:

(f) The State authorizing the allocation of the mark, indicated by the distinguishing sign for motor vehicles in international traffic.

(g) The name of the manufacturer or other identification of the packaging specified by the competent authority.

6.1.3.2 In addition to the durable markings prescribed in 6.1.3.1, every new metal drum of a capacity greater than 100 ℓ shall bear the marks described in 6.1.3.1 (a) to (e) on the bottom, with an indication of the nominal thickness of at least the metal used in the body (in millimetres, to 0.1 mm), in permanent form (such as embossed). When the nominal thickness of either head of a metal drum is thinner than that of the body, the nominal thickness of the top head, body and bottom head shall be marked on the bottom in permanent form (such as embossed), for example ‘1.0 – 1.2 – 1.0’ or ‘0.9 – 1.0 – 1.0’. Nominal thicknesses of metal shall be determined according to the appropriate ISO standard, for example ISO 3574:1999 for steel. The marks indicated in 6.1.3.1 (f) and (g) shall not be applied in a permanent form (such as embossed) except as provided in 6.1.3.5.

6.1.3.3 Every packaging other than those referred to in 6.1.3.2 liable to undergo a reconditioning process shall bear the marks indicated in 6.1.3.1 (a) to (e) in a permanent form. Marks are permanent if they are able to withstand the reconditioning process (e.g., embossed). For packagings other than metal drums of a capacity greater than 100 ℓ, these permanent marks may replace the corresponding durable markings prescribed in 6.1.3.1.

6.1.3.4 For remanufactured metal drums, if there is no change to the packaging type and no replacement or removal of integral structural components, the required markings need not be permanent (such as embossed). Every other remanufactured metal drum shall bear the markings in 6.1.3.1 (a) to (e) in a permanent form (such as embossed) on the top head or side.

6.1.3.5 Metal drums made from materials (such as stainless steel) designed to be re-used repeatedly may bear the markings indicated in 6.1.3.1 (f) and (g) in a permanent (such as embossed) form.

6.1.3.6 Packagings manufactured with recycled plastics material as defined in 1.2.1 shall be marked “REC”. This mark shall be placed near the mark prescribed in 6.1.3.1.

6.1.3.7 Marking shall be applied in the sequence of the subparagraphs in 6.1.3.1; each element of the marking required in these subparagraphs and when appropriate subparagraphs (h) to (j) of 6.1.3.8 shall be clearly separated, e.g., by a slash or space, so as to be easily identifiable. For examples, see 6.1.3.10. Any additional markings authorized by a competent authority shall still enable the parts of the mark to be correctly identified with reference to 6.1.3.1.

6.1.3.8 After reconditioning a packaging, the reconditioner shall apply to it, in the following sequence, a durable marking showing:

(h) the State in which the reconditioning was carried out, indicated by the distinguishing sign for motor vehicles in international traffic;

(i) the name of the reconditioner or other identification of the packaging specified by the competent authority;

(j) the year of reconditioning; the letter “R”; and, for every packaging successfully passing the leakproofness test in 6.1.1.2.2, the additional letter “L”.

6.1.3.9 When, after reconditioning, the markings required by 6.1.3.1 (a) to (d) no longer appear on the top head or the side of a metal drum, the reconditioner shall apply them in a durable form followed by those required by 6.1.3.8 (h), (i) and (j). These markings shall not identify a greater performance capability than that for which the original design type has been tested and marked.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 351

369

Bilaga 1

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc.

6.1.3.10 Examples of markings for NEW packagings

4G/Y145/S/02 as in 6.1.3.1 (a), (b), (c), (d) and (e) For a new fibreboard box NL/VL823 as in 6.1.3.1 (f) and (g)

1A1/Y1.4/150/98 as in 6.1.3.1 (a), (b), (c), (d) and (e) For a new steel drum to contain liquids NL/VL824 as in 6.1.3.1 (f) and (g)

1A2/Y150/S/01 as in 6.1.3.1 (a), (b), (c), (d) and (e) For a new steel drum to contain solids or inner packagings NL/VL825 as in 6.1.3.1 (f) and (g)

4HW/Y136/S/98 as in 6.1.3.1 (a), (b), (c), (d) and (e) For a new plastics box of a specification equivalent to that NL/VL826 as in 6.1.3.1 (f) and (g) indicated by the packaging code

1A2/Y/100/01 as in 6.1.3.1 (a), (b), (c), (d) and (e) For a remanufactured steel drum to contain liquids of relative density USA/MM5 as in 6.1.3.1 (f) and (g) not exceeding 1.2 Note: For liquids, the marking of relative density not exceeding 1.2 is optional; see 6.1.3.1 (c)(ii)

6.1.3.11 Examples of markings for RECONDITIONED packagings

1A1/Y1.4/150/97 as in 6.1.3.1 (a), (b), (c), (d) and (e) NL/RB/01 RL as in 6.1.3.8 (h), (i) and (j)

1A2/Y150/S/99 as in 6.1.3.1 (a), (b), (c), (d) and (e) USA/RB/00 R as in 6.1.3.8 (h), (i) and (j)

6.1.3.12 Examples of markings for SALVAGE packagings

1A2T/Y300/S/01 as in 6.1.3.1 (a), (b), (c), (d) and (e) USA/abc as in 6.1.3.1 (f) and (g)

Note: The markings, for which examples are given in 6.1.3.10, 6.1.3.11 and 6.1.3.12, may be applied in a single line or in multiple lines provided the correct sequence is respected.

6.1.4 Provisions for packagings

6.1.4.0 General provisions

Any permeation of the substance contained in the packaging shall not constitute a danger under normal conditions of transport.

6.1.4.1 Steel drums

1A1 non-removable head 1A2 removable head

352 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

370

Bilaga 1

Chapter 6.1 – Provisions for the construction and testing of packagings

6.1.4.1.1 Body and heads shall be constructed of steel sheet of suitable type and adequate thickness in relation to the capacity of the drum and the intended use. Note: For carbon steel drums, “suitable” steels are identified in ISO 3573:1999 “Hot rolled carbon steel sheet of commercial and drawing qualities” and ISO 3574:1999 “Cold-reduced carbon steel sheet of commercial and drawing qualities”. For carbon steel drums below 100 litres, “suitable” steels in addition to the above standards are also identified in ISO 11949:1995 “Cold-reduced electrolytic tinplate”, ISO 11950:1995 “Cold-reduced electrolytic chromium/ chromium oxide-coated steel” and ISO 11951:1995 “Cold-reduced blackplate in coil form for the production of tinplate or electrolytic chromium/chromium-oxide coated steel”. 6.1.4.1.2 Body seams of drums intended to contain more than 40 ℓ of liquid shall be welded. Body seams of drums intended to contain solids or 40 ℓ or less of liquids shall be mechanically seamed or welded. 6.1.4.1.3 Chimes shall be mechanically seamed or welded. Separate reinforcing rings may be applied. 6.1.4.1.4 The body of a drum of a capacity greater than 60 ℓ shall, in general, have at least two expanded rolling hoops or, alternatively, at least two separate rolling hoops. If there are separate rolling hoops, they shall be fitted tightly on the body and so secured that they cannot shift. Rolling hoops shall not be spot-welded. 6.1.4.1.5 Openings for filling, emptying and venting in the bodies or heads of drums with a non-removable head (1A1) shall not exceed 7 cm in diameter. Drums with larger openings are considered to be of the removable-head type (1A2). Closures for openings in the bodies and heads of drums shall be so designed and applied that they will remain secure and leakproof under normal conditions of transport. Closure flanges may be mechanically seamed or welded in place. Gaskets or other sealing elements shall be used with closures, unless the closure is inherently leakproof. 6.1.4.1.6 Closure devices for removable-head drums shall be so designed and applied that they will remain secure and drums will remain leakproof under normal conditions of transport. Gaskets or other sealing elements shall be used with all removable heads. 6.1.4.1.7 If materials used for body, heads, closures and fittings are not in themselves compatible with the contents to be transported, suitable internal protective coatings or treatments shall be applied. These coatings or treatments shall retain their properties under normal conditions of transport. 6.1.4.1.8 Maximum capacity of drum: 450 ℓ. 6.1.4.1.9 Maximum net mass: 400 kg.

6.1.4.2 Aluminium drums

1B1 non-removable head 1B2 removable head 6.1.4.2.1 Body and heads shall be constructed of aluminium at least 99% pure or of an aluminium-based alloy. Material shall be of a suitable type and of adequate thickness in relation to the capacity of the drum and the intended use. 6.1.4.2.2 All seams shall be welded. Chime seams, if any, shall be reinforced by the application of separate reinforcing rings. 6.1.4.2.3 The body of a drum of a capacity greater than 60 ℓ shall, in general, have at least two expanded rolling hoops or, alternatively, at least two separate rolling hoops. If there are separate rolling hoops, they shall be fitted tightly on the body and so secured that they cannot shift. Rolling hoops shall not be spot-welded. 6.1.4.2.4 Openings for filling, emptying and venting in the bodies or heads of drums with a non-removable head (1B1) shall not exceed 7 cm in diameter. Drums with larger openings are considered to be of the removable-head type (1B2). Closures for openings in the bodies and heads of drums shall be so designed and applied that they will remain secure and leakproof under normal conditions of transport. Closure flanges shall be welded in place so that the weld provides a leakproof seam. Gaskets or other sealing elements shall be used with closures, unless the closure is inherently leakproof. 6.1.4.2.5 Closure devices for removable-head drums shall be so designed and applied that they will remain secure and drums will remain leakproof under normal conditions of transport. Gaskets or other sealing elements shall be used with all removable heads.

6.1.4.2.6 Maximum capacity of drum: 450 ℓ.

6.1.4.2.7 Maximum net mass: 400 kg.

6.1.4.3 Drums of metal other than aluminium or steel

1N1 non-removable head 1N2 removable head

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 353

371

Bilaga 1

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc.

6.1.4.3.1 The body and heads shall be constructed of metal or metal alloy other than steel or aluminium. Material shall be of a suitable type and of adequate thickness in relation to the capacity of the drum and to its intended use. 6.1.4.3.2 Chime seams, if any, shall be reinforced by the application of separate reinforcing rings. All seams, if any, shall be joined (welded, soldered, etc.) in accordance with the technical state of the art for the used metal or metal alloy.

6.1.4.3.3 The body of a drum of a capacity greater than 60 ℓ shall, in general, have at least two expanded rolling hoops or, alternatively, at least two separate rolling hoops. If there are separate rolling hoops, they shall be fitted tightly on the body and so secured that they cannot shift. Rolling hoops shall not be spot-welded.

6.1.4.3.4 Openings for filling, emptying and venting in the bodies or heads of non-removable-head (1N1) drums shall not exceed 7 cm in diameter. Drums with larger openings are considered to be of the removable-head type (1N2). Closures for openings in the bodies and heads of drums shall be so designed and applied that they will remain secure and leakproof under normal conditions of transport. Closure flanges shall be joined in place (welded, soldered, etc.) in accordance with the technical state of the art for the used metal or metal alloy so that the seam join is leakproof. Gaskets or other sealing elements shall be used with closures, unless the closure is inherently leakproof.

6.1.4.3.5 Closure devices for removable-head drums shall be so designed and applied that they will remain secure and drums will remain leakproof under normal conditions of transport. Gaskets or other sealing elements shall be used with all removable heads. 6.1.4.3.6 Maximum capacity of drum: 450 ℓ.

6.1.4.3.7 Maximum net mass: 400 kg.

6.1.4.4 Steel or aluminium jerricans

3A1 steel, non-removable head 3A2 steel, removable head 3B1 aluminium, non-removable head 3B2 aluminium, removable head

6.1.4.4.1 Body and heads shall be constructed of steel sheet, of aluminium at least 99% pure or of an aluminium-based alloy. Material shall be of a suitable type and of adequate thickness in relation to the capacity of the jerrican and to its intended use. 6.1.4.4.2 Chimes of steel jerricans shall be mechanically seamed or welded. Body seams of steel jerricans intended to contain more than 40 ℓ of liquid shall be welded. Body seams of steel jerricans intended to contain 40 ℓ or less shall be mechanically seamed or welded. For aluminium jerricans, all seams shall be welded. Chime seams, if any, shall be reinforced by the application of a separate reinforcing ring.

6.1.4.4.3 Openings in jerricans (3A1 and 3B1) shall not exceed 7 cm in diameter. Jerricans with larger openings are considered to be of the removable-head type (3A2 and 3B2). Closures shall be so designed that they will remain secure and leakproof under normal conditions of transport. Gaskets or other sealing elements shall be used with closures, unless the closure is inherently leakproof.

6.1.4.4.4 If materials used for body, heads, closures and fittings are not in themselves compatible with the contents to be transported, suitable internal protective coatings or treatments shall be applied. These coatings or treatments shall retain their protective properties under normal conditions of transport. 6.1.4.4.5 Maximum capacity of jerrican: 60 ℓ.

6.1.4.4.6 Maximum net mass: 120 kg.

6.1.4.5 Plywood drums

1D

6.1.4.5.1 The wood used shall be well seasoned, commercially dry and free from any defect likely to lessen the effectiveness of the drum for the purpose intended. If a material other than plywood is used for the manufacture of the heads, it shall be of a quality equivalent to the plywood.

6.1.4.5.2 At least two-ply plywood shall be used for the body and at least three-ply plywood for the heads; the plies shall be firmly glued together by a water-resistant adhesive with their grain crosswise.

6.1.4.5.3 The body and heads of the drum and their joins shall be of a design appropriate to the capacity of the drum and its intended use. 6.1.4.5.4 In order to prevent sifting of the contents, lids shall be lined with kraft paper or some other equivalent material, which shall be securely fastened to the lid and extend to the outside along its full circumference.

354 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

372

Bilaga 1

Chapter 6.1 – Provisions for the construction and testing of packagings

6.1.4.5.5 Maximum capacity of drum: 250 ℓ. 6.1.4.5.6 Maximum net mass: 400 kg.

6.1.4.6 [Reserved]

6.1.4.7 Fibre drums

1G 6.1.4.7.1 The body of the drum shall consist of multiple plies of heavy paper or fibreboard (without corrugations) firmly glued or laminated together and may include one or more protective layers of bitumen, waxed kraft paper, metal foil, plastics material, etc. 6.1.4.7.2 Heads shall be of natural wood, fibreboard, metal, plywood, plastics or other suitable material and may include one or more protective layers of bitumen, waxed kraft paper, metal foil, plastics material, etc. 6.1.4.7.3 The body and heads of the drum and their joins shall be of a design appropriate to the capacity of the drum and its intended use. 6.1.4.7.4 The assembled packaging shall be sufficiently water-resistant so as not to delaminate under normal conditions of transport. 6.1.4.7.5 Maximum capacity of drum: 450 ℓ. 6.1.4.7.6 Maximum net mass: 400 kg.

6.1.4.8 Plastics drums and jerricans

1H1 drums, non-removable head 1H2 drums, removable head 3H1 jerricans, non-removable head 3H2 jerricans, removable head 6.1.4.8.1 The packaging shall be manufactured from suitable plastics material and be of adequate strength in relation to its capacity and intended use. Except for recycled plastics material as defined in 1.2.1, no used material other than production residues or regrind from the same manufacturing process may be used. The packaging shall be adequately resistant to ageing and to degradation caused by the substance contained or by ultraviolet radiation. 6.1.4.8.2 If protection against ultraviolet radiation is required, it shall be provided by the addition of carbon black or other suitable pigments or inhibitors. These additives shall be compatible with the contents and remain effective throughout the life of the packaging. Where use is made of carbon black, pigments or inhibitors other than those used in the manufacture of the tested design type, retesting may be waived if the carbon black content does not exceed 2% by mass or if the pigment content does not exceed 3% by mass; the content of inhibitors of ultraviolet radiation is not limited. 6.1.4.8.3 Additives serving purposes other than protection against ultraviolet radiation may be included in the composition of the plastics material, provided that they do not adversely affect the chemical and physical properties of the material of the packaging. In such circumstances, retesting may be waived. 6.1.4.8.4 The wall thickness at every point of the packaging shall be appropriate to its capacity and intended use, taking into account the stresses to which each point is liable to be exposed. 6.1.4.8.5 Openings for filling, emptying and venting in the bodies or heads of non-removable-head drums (1H1) and jerricans (3H1) shall not exceed 7 cm in diameter. Drums and jerricans with larger openings are considered to be of the removable-head type (1H2 and 3H2). Closures for openings in the bodies or heads of drums and jerricans shall be so designed and applied that they will remain secure and leakproof under normal conditions of transport. Gaskets or other sealing elements shall be used with closures, unless the closure is inherently leakproof. 6.1.4.8.6 Closure devices for removable-head drums and jerricans shall be so designed and applied that they will remain secure and leakproof under normal conditions of transport. Gaskets shall be used with all removable heads unless the drum or jerrican design is such that, where the removable head is properly secured, the drum or jerrican is inherently leakproof. 6.1.4.8.7 Maximum capacity of drums and jerricans: 1H1, 1H2: 450 ℓ 3H1, 3H2: 60 ℓ 6.1.4.8.8 Maximum net mass: 1H1, 1H2: 400 kg 3H1, 3H2: 120 kg

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 355

373

Bilaga 1

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc.

6.1.4.9 Boxes of natural wood

4C1 ordinary 4C2 with sift-proof walls 6.1.4.9.1 The wood used shall be well seasoned, commercially dry and free from defects that would materially lessen the strength of any part of the box. The strength of the material used and the method of construction shall be appropriate to the capacity and intended use of the box. The tops and bottoms may be made of waterresistant reconstituted wood such as hardboard, particle board or other suitable type. 6.1.4.9.2 Fastenings shall be resistant to vibration experienced under normal conditions of transport. Nailing into the end shall be avoided whenever practicable. Joins which are likely to be highly stressed shall be made using clenched or annular ring nails or equivalent fastenings. 6.1.4.9.3 Box 4C2: each part shall consist of one piece or be equivalent thereto. Parts are considered equivalent to one piece when one of the following methods of glued assembly is used: Lindermann joint, tongue and groove joint, ship lap or rabbet joint or butt joint, all with at least two corrugated metal fasteners at each joint. 6.1.4.9.4 Maximum net mass: 400 kg.

6.1.4.10 Plywood boxes

4D 6.1.4.10.1 Plywood used shall be at least three-ply. It shall be made from well-seasoned rotary-cut, sliced or sawn veneer, commercially dry and free from defects that would materially lessen the strength of the box. The strength of the material used and the method of construction shall be appropriate to the capacity and intended use of the box. All adjacent plies shall be glued with water-resistant adhesive. Other suitable materials may be used together with plywood in the construction of boxes. Boxes shall be firmly nailed or secured to corner posts or ends or be assembled by equally suitable devices. 6.1.4.10.2 Maximum net mass: 400 kg.

6.1.4.11 Reconstituted wood boxes

4F 6.1.4.11.1 The walls of boxes shall be made of water-resistant reconstituted wood such as hardboard, particle board or other suitable type. The strength of the material used and the method of construction shall be appropriate to the capacity of the boxes and their intended use. 6.1.4.11.2 Other parts of the boxes may be made of other suitable material. 6.1.4.11.3 Boxes shall be securely assembled by means of suitable devices. 6.1.4.11.4 Maximum net mass: 400 kg.

6.1.4.12 Fibreboard boxes

4G 6.1.4.12.1 Strong and good-quality solid or double-faced corrugated fibreboard (single or multiwall) shall be used, appropriate to the capacity of the box and to its intended use. The water resistance of the outer surface shall be such that the increase in mass, as determined in a test carried out over a period of 30 minutes by the Cobb method of determining water absorption, is not greater than 155 g/m2 – see ISO 535:1991. It shall have proper bending qualities. Fibreboard shall be cut, creased without scoring, and slotted so as to permit assembly without cracking, surface breaks or undue bending. The fluting of corrugated fibreboard shall be firmly glued to the facings. 6.1.4.12.2 The ends of boxes may have a wooden frame or be entirely of wood or other suitable material. Reinforcements of wooden battens or other suitable material may be used. 6.1.4.12.3 Manufacturing joins in the body of boxes shall be taped, lapped and glued or lapped and stitched with metal staples. Lapped joins shall have an appropriate overlap. 6.1.4.12.4 Where closing is effected by gluing or taping, a water-resistant adhesive shall be used. 6.1.4.12.5 Boxes shall be designed so as to provide a good fit to the contents. 6.1.4.12.6 Maximum net mass: 400 kg.

6.1.4.13 Plastics boxes

4H1 expanded plastics boxes 4H2 solid plastics boxes

356 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

374

Bilaga 1

Chapter 6.1 – Provisions for the construction and testing of packagings

6.1.4.13.1 The box shall be manufactured from suitable plastics material and be of adequate strength in relation to its capacity and intended use. The box shall be adequately resistant to ageing and to degradation caused either by the substance contained or by ultraviolet radiation. 6.1.4.13.2 An expanded plastics box shall comprise two parts made of a moulded expanded plastics material, a bottom section containing cavities for the inner packagings and a top section covering and interlocking with the bottom section. The top and bottom sections shall be designed so that the inner packagings fit snugly. The closure cap for any inner packaging shall not be in contact with the inside of the top section of this box. 6.1.4.13.3 For dispatch, an expanded plastics box shall be closed with a self-adhesive tape having sufficient tensile strength to prevent the box from opening. The adhesive tape shall be weather-resistant and its adhesive compatible with the expanded plastics material of the box. Other closing devices at least equally effective may be used. 6.1.4.13.4 For solid plastics boxes, protection against ultraviolet radiation, if required, shall be provided by the addition of carbon black or other suitable pigments or inhibitors. These additives shall be compatible with the contents and remain effective throughout the life of the box. Where use is made of carbon black, pigments or inhibitors other than those used in the manufacture of the tested design type, retesting may be waived if the carbon black content does not exceed 2% by mass or if the pigment content does not exceed 3% by mass; the content of inhibitors of ultraviolet radiation is not limited. 6.1.4.13.5 Additives serving purposes other than protection against ultraviolet radiation may be included in the composition of the plastics material provided that they do not adversely affect the chemical and physical properties of the material of the box. In such circumstances, retesting may be waived. 6.1.4.13.6 Solid plastics boxes shall have closure devices made of a suitable material of adequate strength and be so designed as to prevent the box from unintentional opening. 6.1.4.13.7 Maximum net mass: 4H1: 60 kg 4H2: 400 kg

6.1.4.14 Steel, aluminium or other metal boxes

4A steel boxes 4B aluminium boxes 4N metal, other than steel or aluminium, boxes 6.1.4.14.1 The strength of the metal and the construction of the box shall be appropriate to the capacity of the box and to its intended use. 6.1.4.14.2 Boxes shall be lined with fibreboard or felt packing pieces or shall have an inner liner or coating of suitable material, as required. If a double-seamed metal liner is used, steps shall be taken to prevent the ingress of substances, particularly explosives, into the recesses of the seams. 6.1.4.14.3 Closures may be of any suitable type; they shall remain secured under normal conditions of transport. 6.1.4.14.4 Maximum net mass: 400 kg.

6.1.4.15 Textile bags

5L1 without inner lining or coating 5L2 sift-proof 5L3 water-resistant 6.1.4.15.1 The textiles used shall be of good quality. The strength of the fabric and the construction of the bag shall be appropriate to the capacity of the bag and its intended use. 6.1.4.15.2 Bags, sift-proof, 5L2: the bag shall be made sift-proof, for example by the use of: .1 paper bonded to the inner surface of the bag by a water-resistant adhesive such as bitumen; or .2 plastics film bonded to the inner surface of the bag; or .3 one or more inner liners made of paper or plastics material. 6.1.4.15.3 Bags, water-resistant, 5L3: to prevent the entry of moisture, the bag shall be made waterproof, for example by the use of: .1 separate inner liners of water-resistant paper (such as waxed kraft paper, tarred paper or plastics-coated kraft paper); or .2 plastics film bonded to the inner surface of the bag; or .3 one or more inner liners made of plastics material.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 357

375

Bilaga 1

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc.

6.1.4.15.4 Maximum net mass: 50 kg.

6.1.4.16 Woven plastics bags

5H1 without inner liner or coating 5H2 sift-proof 5H3 water-resistant 6.1.4.16.1 Bags shall be made from stretched tapes or monofilaments of a suitable plastics material. The strength of the material used and the construction of the bag shall be appropriate to the capacity of the bag and its intended use. 6.1.4.16.2 If the fabric is woven flat, the bags shall be made by sewing or some other method ensuring closure of the bottom and one side. If the fabric is tubular, the bag shall be closed by sewing, weaving or some other equally strong method of closure. 6.1.4.16.3 Bags, sift-proof, 5H2: the bag shall be made sift-proof, for example by means of: .1 paper or a plastics film bonded to the inner surface of the bag; or .2 one or more separate inner liners made of paper or plastics material. 6.1.4.16.4 Bags, water-resistant, 5H3: to prevent the entry of moisture, the bag shall be made waterproof, for example by means of: .1 separate inner liners of water-resistant paper (such as waxed kraft paper, double-tarred kraft paper or plastics-coated kraft paper); or .2 plastics film bonded to the inner or outer surface of the bag; or .3 one or more inner plastics liners. 6.1.4.16.5 Maximum net mass: 50 kg.

6.1.4.17 Plastics film bags

5H4 6.1.4.17.1 Bags shall be made of a suitable plastics material. The strength of the material used and the construction of the bag shall be appropriate to the capacity of the bag and its intended use. Joins and closures shall withstand pressures and impacts liable to occur under normal conditions of transport. 6.1.4.17.2 Maximum net mass: 50 kg.

6.1.4.18 Paper bags

5M1 multiwall 5M2 multiwall, water-resistant 6.1.4.18.1 Bags shall be made of a suitable kraft paper or of an equivalent paper with at least three plies, the middle ply of which may be net-cloth with adhesive bonding to the outermost ply. The strength of the paper and the construction of the bags shall be appropriate to the capacity of the bag and its intended use. Joins and closures shall be sift-proof. 6.1.4.18.2 Bags 5M2: to prevent the entry of moisture, a bag of four plies or more shall be made waterproof by the use of either a water-resistant ply as one of the two outermost plies or a water-resistant barrier made of a suitable protective material between the two outermost plies; a bag of three plies shall be made waterproof by the use of a water-resistant ply as the outermost ply. Where there is a danger of the substance contained reacting with moisture or where it is packed damp, a waterproof ply or barrier, such as double-tarred kraft paper, plastics-coated kraft paper, plastics film bonded to the inner surface of the bag, or one or more inner plastics liners, shall also be placed next to the substance. Joins and closures shall be waterproof. 6.1.4.18.3 Maximum net mass: 50 kg.

6.1.4.19 Composite packagings (plastics material)

6HA1 plastics receptacle with outer steel drum 6HA2 plastics receptacle with outer steel crate or box 6HB1 plastics receptacle with outer aluminium drum 6HB2 plastics receptacle with outer aluminium crate or box 6HC plastics receptacle with outer wooden box 6HD1 plastics receptacle with outer plywood drum 6HD2 plastics receptacle with outer plywood box

358 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

376

Bilaga 1

Chapter 6.1 – Provisions for the construction and testing of packagings

6HG1 plastics receptacle with outer fibre drum 6HG2 plastics receptacle with outer fibreboard box 6HH1 plastics receptacle with outer plastics drum 6HH2 plastics receptacle with outer solid plastics box

6.1.4.19.1 Inner receptacle

.1 The provisions of 6.1.4.8.1 and 6.1.4.8.3 to 6.1.4.8.6 shall apply to inner plastics receptacles. .2 The inner plastics receptacle shall fit snugly inside the outer packaging, which shall be free of any projection that might abrade the plastics material. .3 Maximum capacity of inner receptacle: 6HA1, 6HB1, 6HD1, 6HG1, 6HH1 250 ℓ 6HA2, 6HB2, 6HC, 6HD2, 6HG2, 6HH2 60 ℓ .4 Maximum net mass: 6HA1, 6HB1, 6HD1, 6HG1, 6HH1 400 kg 6HA2, 6HB2, 6HC, 6HD2, 6HG2, 6HH2 75 kg

6.1.4.19.2 Outer packaging

.1 Plastics receptacle with outer steel or aluminium drum (6HA1 or 6HB1): the relevant provisions of 6.1.4.1 or 6.1.4.2, as appropriate, shall apply to the construction of the outer packaging. .2 Plastics receptacle with outer steel or aluminium crate or box (6HA2 or 6HB2): the relevant provisions of 6.1.4.14 shall apply to the construction of the outer packaging. .3 Plastics receptacle with outer wooden box 6HC: the relevant provisions of 6.1.4.9 shall apply to the construction of the outer packaging. .4 Plastics receptacle with outer plywood drum 6HD1: the relevant provisions of 6.1.4.5 shall apply to the construction of the outer packaging. .5 Plastics receptacle with outer plywood box 6HD2: the relevant provisions of 6.1.4.10 shall apply to the construction of the outer packaging. .6 Plastics receptacle with outer fibre drum 6HG1: the provisions of 6.1.4.7.1 to 6.1.4.7.4 shall apply to the construction of the outer packaging. .7 Plastics receptacle with outer fibreboard box 6HG2: the relevant provisions of 6.1.4.12 shall apply to the construction of the outer packaging. .8 Plastics receptacle with outer plastics drum 6HH1: the provisions of 6.1.4.8.1 and 6.1.4.8.2 to 6.1.4.8.6 shall apply to the construction of the outer packaging. .9 Plastics receptacle with outer solid plastics box (including corrugated plastics material) 6HH2; the provisions of 6.1.4.13.1 and 6.1.4.13.4 to 6.1.4.13.6 shall apply to the construction of the outer packaging.

6.1.4.20 Composite packagings (glass, porcelain or stoneware)

6PA1 receptacle with outer steel drum 6PA2 receptacle with outer steel crate or box 6PB1 receptacle with outer aluminium drum 6PB2 receptacle with outer aluminium crate or box 6PC receptacle with outer wooden box 6PD1 receptacle with outer plywood drum 6PD2 receptacle with outer wickerwork hamper 6PG1 receptacle with outer fibre drum 6PG2 receptacle with outer fibreboard box 6PH1 receptacle with outer expanded plastics packaging 6PH2 receptacle with outer solid plastics packaging

6.1.4.20.1 Inner receptacle

.1 Receptacles shall be of a suitable form (cylindrical or pear-shaped) and be made of good-quality material free from any defect that could impair their strength. The walls shall be sufficiently thick at every point. .2 Screw-threaded plastics closures, ground glass stoppers or closures at least equally effective shall be used as closures for receptacles. Any part of the closure likely to come into contact with the contents of the receptacle shall be resistant to those contents. Care shall be taken to ensure that the closures are so fitted as to be leakproof and are suitably secured to prevent any loosening during transport. If vented closures are necessary, they shall comply with 4.1.1.8.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 359

377

Bilaga 1

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc.

.3 The receptacle shall be firmly secured in the outer packaging by means of cushioning and/or absorbent materials. .4 Maximum capacity of receptacle: 60 ℓ. .5 Maximum net mass: 75 kg.

6.1.4.20.2 Outer packaging

.1 Receptacle with outer steel drum 6PA1: the relevant provisions of 6.1.4.1 shall apply to the construction of the outer packaging. The removable lid required for this type of packaging may nevertheless be in the form of a cap. .2 Receptacle with outer steel crate or box 6PA2: the relevant provisions of 6.1.4.14 shall apply to the construction of the outer packaging. For cylindrical receptacles, the outer packaging shall, when upright, rise above the receptacle and its closure. If the crate surrounds a pear-shaped receptacle and is of matching shape, the outer packaging shall be fitted with a protective cover (cap). .3 Receptacle with outer aluminium drum 6PB1: the relevant provisions of 6.1.4.2 shall apply to the construction of the outer packaging. .4 Receptacle with outer aluminium crate or box 6PB2: the relevant provisions of 6.1.4.14 shall apply to the construction of the outer packaging. .5 Receptacle with outer wooden box 6PC: the relevant provisions of 6.1.4.9 shall apply to the construction of the outer packaging. .6 Receptacle with outer plywood drum 6PD1: the relevant provisions of 6.1.4.5 shall apply to the construction of the outer packaging. .7 Receptacle with outer wickerwork hamper 6PD2: the wickerwork hamper shall be properly made with material of good quality. It shall be fitted with a protective cover (cap) so as to prevent damage to the receptacle. .8 Receptacle with outer fibre drum 6PG1: the relevant provisions of 6.1.4.7.1 to 6.1.4.7.4 shall apply to the body of the outer packaging. .9 Receptacle with outer fibreboard box 6PG2: the relevant provisions of 6.1.4.12 shall apply to the construction of the outer packaging. .10 Receptacle with outer expanded plastics or solid plastics packaging (6PH1 or 6PH2): the materials of both outer packagings shall meet the relevant provisions of 6.1.4.13. Solid plastics packaging shall be manufactured from high-density polyethylene or some other comparable plastics material. The removable lid for this type of packaging may nevertheless be in the form of a cap.

6.1.5 Test provisions for packagings

6.1.5.1 Performance and frequency of tests

6.1.5.1.1 The design type of each packaging shall be tested as provided in this section, in accordance with procedures established by the competent authority.

6.1.5.1.2 Each packaging design type shall successfully pass the tests prescribed in this chapter before being used. A packaging design type is defined by the design, size, material and thickness, manner of construction and packing, but may include various surface treatments. It also includes packagings which differ from the design type only in their lesser design height.

6.1.5.1.3 Tests shall be repeated on production samples at intervals established by the competent authority. For such tests on paper or fibreboard packagings, preparation at ambient conditions is considered equivalent to the provisions of 6.1.5.2.3.

6.1.5.1.4 Tests shall also be repeated after each modification which alters the design, material or manner of construction of a packaging.

6.1.5.1.5 The competent authority may permit the selective testing of packagings that differ only in minor respects from a tested type, such as smaller sizes of inner packagings or inner packagings of lower net mass; and packagings such as drums, bags and boxes which are produced with small reductions in external dimensions.

6.1.5.1.6 [Reserved]

Note: For the conditions for assembling different inner packagings in an outer packaging and permissible variations in inner packagings, see 4.1.1.5.1.

360 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

378

Bilaga 1

Chapter 6.1 – Provisions for the construction and testing of packagings

6.1.5.1.7 Articles or inner packagings of any type for solids or liquids may be assembled and transported without testing in an outer packaging under the following conditions: .1 The outer packaging shall have been successfully tested in accordance with 6.1.5.3 with fragile (such as glass) inner packagings containing liquids, using the drop height for packing group I. .2 The total combined gross mass of inner packagings shall not exceed one half the gross mass of inner packagings used for the drop test in .1 above. .3 The thickness of the cushioning material between inner packagings and between inner packagings and the outside of the packaging shall not be reduced below the corresponding thicknesses in the originally tested packaging; and when a single inner packaging was used in the original test, the thicknesses of the cushioning between inner packagings shall not be less than the thickness of cushioning between the outside of the packaging and the inner packaging in the original test. When either fewer or smaller inner packagings are used (as compared to the inner packagings used in the drop test), sufficient additional cushioning material shall be used to take up void spaces. .4 The outer packaging shall have successfully passed the stacking test in 6.1.5.6 while empty. The total mass of identical packages shall be based on the combined mass of inner packagings used in the drop test in .1 above. .5 Inner packagings containing liquids shall be completely surrounded with a sufficient quantity of absorbent material to absorb the entire liquid contents of the inner packagings. .6 When the outer packaging is intended to contain inner packagings for liquids and is not leakproof, or is intended to contain inner packagings for solids and is not sift-proof, a means of containing any liquid or solid contents in the event of leakage shall be provided in the form of a leakproof liner, plastics bag or other equally efficient means of containment. For packagings containing liquids, the absorbent material required in .5 above shall be placed inside the means of containing the liquid contents. .7 Packagings shall be marked in accordance with section 6.1.3 as having been tested to packing group I performance for combination packagings. The marked gross mass, in kilograms, shall be the sum of the mass of the outer packaging plus one half of the mass of the inner packaging(s) as used for the drop test referred to in .1 above. Such a packaging mark shall also contain the letter ‘V’ as described in 6.1.2.4.

6.1.5.1.8 The competent authority may at any time require proof, by tests in accordance with this section, that serially produced packagings meet the provisions of the design type tests.

6.1.5.1.9 If an inner treatment or coating is required for safety reasons, it shall retain its protective properties after the tests.

6.1.5.1.10 Provided the validity of the test results is not affected, and with the approval of the competent authority, several tests may be made on one sample.

6.1.5.1.11 Salvage packagings

6.1.5.1.11.1 Salvage packagings (see 1.2.1) shall be tested and marked in accordance with the provisions applicable to packing group II packagings intended for the transport of solids or inner packagings, except as follows: .1 The test substance used in performing the tests shall be water and the packagings shall be filled to not less than 98% of their maximum capacity. It is permissible to use additives, such as bags of lead shot, to achieve the requisite total package mass so long as they are placed in such a way that the test results are not affected. Alternatively, in performing the drop test, the drop height may be varied in accordance with 6.1.5.3.5(b); .2 Packagings shall, in addition, have been successfully subjected to the leakproofness test at 30 kPa, with the results of this test reflected in the test report required by 6.1.5.7; and .3 Packagings shall be marked with the letter ‘T’ as described in 6.1.2.4.

6.1.5.2 Preparation of packagings for testing

6.1.5.2.1 Tests shall be carried out on packagings prepared as for transport, including, with respect to combination packagings, the inner packagings used. Inner or single receptacles or packagings, other than bags, shall be filled to not less than 98% of their maximum capacity for liquids or 95% for solids. Bags shall be filled to the maximum mass at which they may be used. For combination packagings where the inner packaging is designed to carry liquids and solids, separate testing is required for both solid and liquid contents. The substances or articles to be transported in the packagings may be replaced by other substances or articles except where this would invalidate the results of the tests. For solids, when another substance is used, it shall have the same physical characteristics (mass, grain size, etc.) as the substance to be carried. It is permissible to use additives, such as bags of lead shot, to achieve the requisite total package mass, so long as they are placed so that the test results are not affected.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 361

379

Bilaga 1

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc.

6.1.5.2.2 In the drop tests for liquids, when another substance is used, it shall be of similar relative density and viscosity to those of the substance being transported. Water may also be used for the liquid drop test under the conditions in 6.1.5.3.5.

6.1.5.2.3 Paper or fibreboard packagings shall be conditioned for at least 24 hours in an atmosphere having controlled temperature and relative humidity (r.h.). There are three options, one of which shall be chosen. The preferred atmosphere is 23°C ± 2°C and 50% ± 2% r.h. The two other options are 20°C ± 2°C and 65% ± 2% r.h. or 27°C ± 2°C and 65% ± 2% r.h.

Note: Average values shall fall within these limits. Short-term fluctuations and measurement limitations may cause individual measurements to vary by up to ± 5% relative humidity without significant impairment of test reproducibility.

6.1.5.2.4 Additional steps shall be taken to ascertain that the plastics material used in the manufacture of plastics drums, plastics jerricans and composite packagings (plastics material) intended to contain liquids complies with the provisions in 6.1.1.2, 6.1.4.8.1 and 6.1.4.8.3. This may be done, for example, by submitting sample receptacles or packagings to a preliminary test extending over a long period, for example six months, during which the samples would remain filled with the substances they are intended to contain and after which the samples shall be submitted to the applicable tests listed in 6.1.5.3, 6.1.5.4, 6.1.5.5, and 6.1.5.6. For substances which may cause stress cracking or weakening in plastics drums or jerricans, the sample, filled with the substance or another substance that is known to have at least as severe stress cracking influence on the plastics materials in question, shall be subjected to a superimposed load equivalent to the total mass of identical packages which might be stacked on it during transport. The minimum height of the stack including the test sample shall be 3 m.

6.1.5.3 Drop test

6.1.5.3.1 Number of test samples (per design type and manufacturer) and drop orientation

For other than flat drops, the centre of gravity shall be vertically over the point of impact.

Packaging Number of test samples Drop orientation

Steel drums Six First drop (using three samples): Aluminium drums (three for each drop) the packaging shall strike the target Metal drums, other than steel or diagonally on the chime or, if the aluminium drums packaging has no chime, on a Steel jerricans circumferential seam or an edge Aluminium jerricans Second drop (using the other three Plywood drums samples): the packaging shall strike Fibre drums the target on the weakest part not Plastics drums and jerricans tested by the first drop, for example a Composite packagings which are in closure or, for some cylindrical drums, the shape of a drum the welded longitudinal seam of the body Boxes of natural wood Five First drop: flat on the bottom Plywood boxes (one for each drop) Second drop: flat on the top Reconstituted wood boxes Third drop: flat on the long side Fibreboard boxes Fourth drop: flat on the short side Plastics boxes Fifth drop: on a corner Steel or aluminium boxes Composite packagings which are in the shape of a box Bags – single-ply with a side seam Three First drop: flat on a wide face (three drops per bag) Second drop: flat on a narrow face Third drop: on the end of the bag

Bags – single-ply without a side Three First drop: flat on a wide face seam or multi-ply (two drops per bag) Second drop: on an end of the bag

Where more than one orientation is possible for a given drop test, the orientation most likely to result in failure of the packaging shall be used.

6.1.5.3.2 Special preparation of test samples for the drop test

The temperature of the test sample and its contents shall be reduced to –18°C or lower for the following packagings: .1 plastics drums (see 6.1.4.8);

362 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

380

Bilaga 1

Chapter 6.1 – Provisions for the construction and testing of packagings

.2 plastics jerricans (see 6.1.4.8); .3 plastics boxes other than expanded plastics boxes (see 6.1.4.13); .4 composite packagings (plastics material) (see 6.1.4.19); and .5 combination packagings with plastics inner packagings, other than plastics bags intended to contain solids or articles. Where the test samples are prepared in this way, the conditioning in 6.1.5.2.3 may be waived. Test liquids shall be kept in the liquid state by the addition of anti-freeze if necessary. 6.1.5.3.3 Removable head packagings for liquids shall not be dropped until at least 24 hours after filling and closing to allow for any possible gasket relaxation.

6.1.5.3.4 Target

The target shall be a non-resilient and horizontal surface and shall be: .1 integral and massive enough to be immovable; .2 flat with a surface kept free from local defects capable of influencing the test results; .3 rigid enough to be non-deformable under test conditions and not liable to become damaged by the tests; and .4 sufficiently large to ensure that the test package falls entirely upon the surface.

6.1.5.3.5 Drop height

For solids and liquids, if the test is performed with the solid or liquid to be carried or with another substance having essentially the same physical characteristics: Packing group I Packing group II Packing group III 1.8 m 1.2 m 0.8 m For liquids in single packagings and for inner packagings of combination packagings, if the test is performed with water: Note: The term “water” includes water/antifreeze solutions with a minimum specific gravity of 0.95 for testing at -18°C. (a) where the substances to be transported have a relative density not exceeding 1.2: Packing group I Packing group II Packing group III 1.8 m 1.2 m 0.8 m (b) where the substances to be transported have a relative density exceeding 1.2, the drop height shall be calculated on the basis of the relative density (d) of the substance to be carried, rounded up to the first decimal, as follows: Packing group I Packing group II Packing group III d× 1.5 m d× 1.0 m d× 0.67 m

6.1.5.3.6 Criteria for passing the test

.1 Each packaging containing liquid shall be leakproof when equilibrium has been reached between the internal and external pressures, except for inner packagings of combination packagings, when it is not necessary that the pressures be equalized. .2 Where a packaging for solids undergoes a drop test and its upper face strikes the target, the test sample passes the test if the entire contents are retained by an inner packaging or inner receptacle (such as a plastics bag), even if the closure, while retaining its containment function, is no longer sift-proof. .3 The packaging or outer packaging of a composite or combination packaging shall not exhibit any damage liable to affect safety during transport. Inner receptacles, inner packagings, or articles shall remain completely within the outer packaging and there shall be no leakage of the filling substance from the inner receptacles or inner packaging(s). .4 Neither the outermost ply of a bag nor an outer packaging shall exhibit any damage liable to affect safety during transport. .5 A slight discharge from the closures upon impact shall not be considered to be a failure of the packaging provided that no further leakage occurs.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 363

381

Bilaga 1

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc.

.6 No rupture is permitted in packagings for goods of class 1 which would permit the spillage of loose explosive substances or articles from the outer packaging.

6.1.5.4 Leakproofness test

6.1.5.4.1 The leakproofness test shall be performed on all design types of packagings intended to contain liquids; however, this test is not required for the inner packagings of combination packagings. 6.1.5.4.2 Number of test samples: three test samples per design type and manufacturer. 6.1.5.4.3 Special preparation of test samples for the test: vented closures shall either be replaced by similar non-vented closures or the vent shall be sealed. 6.1.5.4.4 Test method and pressure to be applied: the packagings, including their closures, shall be restrained under water for 5 minutes while an internal air pressure is applied. The method of restraint shall not affect the results of the test. The air pressure (gauge) to be applied shall be: Packing group I Packing group II Packing group III Not less than Not less than Not less than 30 kPa (0.3 bar) 20 kPa (0.2 bar) 20 kPa (0.2 bar)

Other methods at least equally as effective may be used. 6.1.5.4.5 Criterion for passing the test: there shall be no leakage.

6.1.5.5 Internal pressure (hydraulic) test

6.1.5.5.1 Packagings to be tested: the internal pressure (hydraulic) test shall be carried out on all design types of metal, plastics and composite packagings intended to contain liquids. This test is not required for inner packagings of combination packagings. 6.1.5.5.2 Number of test samples: three test samples per design type and manufacture. 6.1.5.5.3 Special preparation of packagings for testing: vented closures shall either be replaced by similar non-vented closures or the vent shall be sealed. 6.1.5.5.4 Test method and pressure to be applied: metal packagings and composite packagings (glass, porcelain or stoneware), including their closures, shall be subjected to the test pressure for 5 minutes. Plastics packagings and composite packagings (plastics material), including their closures, shall be subjected to the test pressure for 30 minutes. This pressure is the one to be included in the marking required by 6.1.3.1(d). The manner in which the packagings are supported shall not invalidate the test. The test pressure shall be applied continuously and evenly; it shall be kept constant throughout the test period. The hydraulic pressure (gauge) applied, as determined by any one of the following methods, shall be: .1 not less than the total gauge pressure measured in the packaging (i.e., the vapour pressure of the filling liquid and the partial pressure of the air or other inert gases, minus 100 kPa) at 55°C, multiplied by a safety factor of 1.5; this total gauge pressure shall be determined on the basis of a maximum degree of filling in accordance with 4.1.1.4 and a filling temperature of 15°C; .2 not less than 1.75 times the vapour pressure at 50°C of the liquid to be transported, minus 100 kPa, but with a minimum test pressure of 100 kPa; .3 not less than 1.5 times the vapour pressure at 55°C of the liquid to be transported minus 100 kPa, but with a minimum test pressure of 100 kPa. 6.1.5.5.5 In addition, packagings intended to contain liquids of packing group I shall be tested to a minimum test pressure of 250 kPa (gauge) for a test period of 5 or 30 minutes, depending upon the material of construction of the packaging. 6.1.5.5.6 Criterion for passing the test: no packaging shall leak.

6.1.5.6 Stacking test

All design types of packagings other than bags shall be subjected to a stacking test. 6.1.5.6.1 Number of test samples: three test samples per design type and manufacturer. 6.1.5.6.2 Test method: the test sample shall be subjected to a force applied to the top surface of the test sample equivalent to the total mass of identical packages which might be stacked on it during transport: where the contents of the test sample are liquids with relative density different from that of the liquid to be transported,

364 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

382

Bilaga 1

Chapter 6.1 – Provisions for the construction and testing of packagings

the force shall be calculated in relation to the latter. The minimum height of the stack including the test sample shall be 3 m. The duration of the test shall be 24 hours except that plastics drums, jerricans, and composite packagings 6HH1 and 6HH2 intended for liquids shall be subjected to the stacking test for a period of 28 days at a temperature of not less than 40°C. 6.1.5.6.3 Criteria for passing the test: no test sample shall leak. In composite packagings or combination packagings, there shall be no leakage of the filling substance from the inner receptacle or inner packaging. No test sample shall show any deterioration which could adversely affect transport safety or any distortion liable to reduce its strength or cause instability in stacks of packages. Plastics packagings shall be cooled to ambient temperature before the assessment.

6.1.5.7 Test report

6.1.5.7.1 A test report containing at least the following particulars shall be drawn up and shall be available to the users of the packaging: .1 name and address of the test facility; .2 name and address of applicant (where applicable); .3 a unique test report identification; .4 date of the test report; .5 manufacturer of the packaging; .6 description of the packaging design type (such as dimensions, materials, closures, thickness, etc.), including method of manufacture (such as blow-moulding), and which may include drawing(s) and/or photograph(s); .7 maximum capacity; .8 characteristics of test contents, such as viscosity and relative density for liquids and particle size for solids; .9 test descriptions and results; .10 signature, with the name and status of the signatory. 6.1.5.7.2 The test report shall contain statements that the packaging prepared as for transport was tested in accordance with the appropriate provisions of this chapter and that the use of other packaging methods or components may render it invalid. A copy of the test report shall be available to the competent authority.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 365

383

Bilaga 1

Chapter 6.2

Provisions for the construction and testing of pressure receptacles, aerosol dispensers, small receptacles containing gas (gas cartridges) and fuel cell cartridges containing liquefied flammable gas

Note: Aerosol dispensers, small receptacles containing gas (gas cartridges) and fuel cell cartridges containing liquefied flammable gas are not subject to the provisions of 6.2.1 to 6.2.3.

6.2.1 General provisions

6.2.1.1 Design and construction

6.2.1.1.1 Pressure receptacles and their closures shall be designed, manufactured, tested and equipped in such a way as to withstand all conditions, including fatigue, to which they will be subjected during normal conditions of transport.

6.2.1.1.2 In recognition of scientific and technological advances, and recognizing that pressure receptacles other than those that are marked with a UN certification marking may be used on a national or regional basis, pressure receptacles conforming to requirements other than those specified in this Code may be used if approved by the competent authorities in the countries of transport and use.

6.2.1.1.3 In no case shall the minimum wall thickness be less than that specified in the design and construction technical standards.

6.2.1.1.4 For welded pressure receptacles, only metals of weldable quality shall be used.

6.2.1.1.5 The test pressure of cylinders, tubes, pressure drums and bundles of cylinders shall be in accordance with packing instruction P200, or, for a chemical under pressure, with packing instruction P206. The test pressure for closed cryogenic receptacles shall be in accordance with packing instruction P203. The test pressure of a metal hydride storage system shall be in accordance with packing instruction P205.

6.2.1.1.6 Pressure receptacles assembled in bundles shall be structurally supported and held together as a unit. Pressure receptacles shall be secured in a manner that prevents movement in relation to the structural assembly and movement that would result in the concentration of harmful local stresses. Manifold assemblies (e.g., manifold, valves, and pressure gauges) shall be designed and constructed such that they are protected from impact damage and forces normally encountered in transport. Manifolds shall have at least the same test pressure as the cylinders. For toxic liquefied gases, each pressure receptacle shall have an isolation valve to ensure that each pressure receptacle can be filled separately and that no interchange of pressure receptacle contents can occur during transport.

6.2.1.1.7 Contact between dissimilar metals which could result in damage by galvanic action shall be avoided.

6.2.1.1.8 The following additional provisions apply to the construction of closed cryogenic receptacles for refrigerated liquefied gases: .1 The mechanical properties of the metal used shall be established for each pressure receptacle, including the impact strength and the bending coefficient;

6

.2 The pressure receptacles shall be thermally insulated. The thermal insulation shall be protected against impact by means of a jacket. If the space between the pressure receptacle and the jacket is evacuated of air (vacuum insulation), the jacket shall be designed to withstand, without permanent deformation, an external pressure of at least 100 kPa (1 bar) calculated in accordance with a recognized technical code or a calculated critical collapsing pressure of not less than 200 kPa (2 bar) gauge pressure. If the jacket is so closed as to be gas-tight (e.g., in the case of vacuum insulation), a device shall be provided to prevent any dangerous pressure from developing in the insulating layer in the event of inadequate gas-tightness of the pressure receptacle or its fittings. The device shall prevent moisture from penetrating into the insulation.

366 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

384

Bilaga 1

Chapter 6.2 – Provisions for the construction and testing of receptacles for gases

.3 Closed cryogenic receptacles intended for the transport of refrigerated liquefied gases having a boiling point below –182°C at atmospheric pressure shall not include materials which may react with oxygen or oxygen-enriched atmospheres in a dangerous manner, when located in parts of the thermal insulation where there is a risk of contact with oxygen or with oxygen-enriched liquid. .4 Closed cryogenic receptacles shall be designed and constructed with suitable lifting and securing arrangements.

6.2.1.1.9 Additional requirements for the construction of pressure receptacle for acetylene

Pressure receptacle for UN 1001 acetylene, dissolved, and UN 3374 acetylene, solvent free, shall be filled with a porous material, uniformly distributed, of a type that conforms to the requirements and testing specified by the competent authority and which: .1 is compatible with the pressure receptacle and does not form harmful or dangerous compounds either with the acetylene or with the solvent in the case of UN 1001; and .2 is capable of preventing the spread of decomposition of the acetylene in the porous material.

In the case of UN 1001, the solvent shall be compatible with the pressure receptacle.

6.2.1.2 Materials

6.2.1.2.1 Construction materials of pressure receptacles and their closures which are in direct contact with dangerous goods shall not be affected or weakened by the dangerous goods intended to be transported and shall not cause a dangerous effect, e.g., catalysing a reaction or reacting with the dangerous goods.

6.2.1.2.2 Pressure receptacles and their closures shall be made of the materials specified in the design and construction technical standards and the applicable packing instruction for the substances intended for transport in the pressure receptacle. The materials shall be resistant to brittle fracture and to stress corrosion cracking as indicated in the design and construction technical standards.

6.2.1.3 Service equipment

6.2.1.3.1 Valves, piping and other fittings subjected to pressure, excluding pressure relief devices, shall be designed and constructed so that the burst pressure is at least 1.5 times the test pressure of the pressure receptacle.

6.2.1.3.2 Service equipment shall be configured or designed to prevent damage that could result in the release of the pressure receptacle contents during normal conditions of handling and transport. Manifold piping leading to shut-off valves shall be sufficiently flexible to protect the valves and the piping from shearing or releasing the pressure receptacle contents. The filling and discharge valves and any protective caps shall be capable of being secured against unintended opening. Valves shall be protected as specified in 4.1.6.1.8. 6.2.1.3.3 Pressure receptacles which are not capable of being handled manually or rolled shall be fitted with devices (skids, rings, straps) ensuring that they can be safely handled by mechanical means and so arranged as not to impair the strength of, nor cause undue stresses in, the pressure receptacle.

6.2.1.3.4 Individual pressure receptacles shall be equipped with pressure relief devices as specified in packing instruction P200(1), P205 or in 6.2.1.3.6.4 and 6.2.1.3.6.5. Pressure relief devices shall be designed to prevent the entry of foreign matter, the leakage of gas and the development of any dangerous excess pressure. When fitted, pressure relief devices on manifolded horizontal pressure receptacles filled with flammable gas shall be arranged to discharge freely to the open air in such a manner as to prevent any impingement of escaping gas upon the pressure receptacle itself under normal conditions of transport.

6.2.1.3.5 Pressure receptacles where filling is measured by volume shall be provided with a level indicator.

6.2.1.3.6 Additional provisions for closed cryogenic receptacles

6.2.1.3.6.1 Each filling and discharge opening in a closed cryogenic receptacle used for the transport of flammable refrigerated liquefied gases shall be fitted with at least two mutually independent shut-off devices in series, the first being a stop-valve, the second being a cap or equivalent device.

6.2.1.3.6.2 For sections of piping which can be closed at both ends and where liquid product can be trapped, a method of automatic pressure relief shall be provided to prevent excess pressure build-up within the piping.

6.2.1.3.6.3 Each connection on a closed cryogenic receptacle shall be clearly marked to indicate its function (e.g., vapour or liquid phase).

6.2.1.3.6.4 Pressure relief devices

6.2.1.3.6.4.1 Each closed cryogenic receptacle shall be provided with at least one pressure relief device. The pressure relief device shall be of the type that will resist dynamic forces, including surge.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 367

385

Bilaga 1

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc.

6.2.1.3.6.4.2 Closed cryogenic receptacles may, in addition, have a frangible disc in parallel with the spring-loaded device(s) in order to meet the provisions of 6.2.1.3.6.5. 6.2.1.3.6.4.3 Connections to pressure relief devices shall be of sufficient size to enable the required discharge to pass unrestricted to the pressure relief device. 6.2.1.3.6.4.4 All pressure relief device inlets shall, under maximum filling conditions, be situated in the vapour space of the closed cryogenic receptacle and the devices shall be so arranged as to ensure that the escaping vapour is discharged unrestrictedly.

6.2.1.3.6.5 Capacity and setting of pressure relief devices

Note: In relation to pressure relief devices of closed cryogenic receptacles, “MAWP” means the maximum effective gauge pressure permissible at the top of a loaded closed cryogenic receptacle in its operating position, including the highest effective pressure during filling and discharge. 6.2.1.3.6.5.1 The pressure relief device shall open automatically at a pressure not less than the MAWP and be fully open at a pressure equal to 110% of the MAWP. It shall, after discharge, close at a pressure not lower than 10% below the pressure at which discharge starts and shall remain closed at all lower pressures. 6.2.1.3.6.5.2 Frangible discs shall be set to rupture at a nominal pressure which is the lower of either the test pressure or 150% of the MAWP. 6.2.1.3.6.5.3 In the case of the loss of vacuum in a vacuum-insulated closed cryogenic receptacle, the combined capacity of all pressure relief devices installed shall be sufficient so that the pressure (including accumulation) inside the closed cryogenic receptacle does not exceed 120% of the MAWP. 6.2.1.3.6.5.4 The required capacity of the pressure relief devices shall be calculated in accordance with an established * technical code recognized by the competent authority.

6.2.1.4 Approval of pressure receptacles

6.2.1.4.1 The conformity of pressure receptacles shall be assessed at time of manufacture as required by the competent authority. Pressure receptacles shall be inspected, tested and approved by an inspection body. The technical documentation shall include full specifications on design and construction, and full documentation on the manufacturing and testing. 6.2.1.4.2 Quality assurance systems shall conform to the requirements of the competent authority.

6.2.1.5 Initial inspection and test

6.2.1.5.1 New pressure receptacles, other than closed cryogenic receptacles and metal hydride storage systems, shall be subjected to testing and inspection during and after manufacture in accordance with the applicable design standards including the following: On an adequate sample of pressure receptacles: .1 testing of the mechanical characteristics of the material of construction; .2 verification of the minimum wall thickness; .3 verification of the homogeneity of the material for each manufacturing batch; .4 inspection of the external and internal conditions of the pressure receptacles; .5 inspection of the neck threads; .6 verification of the conformance with the design standard; For all pressure receptacles: .7 a hydraulic pressure test. Pressure receptacles shall withstand the test pressure without expansion greater than that allowed in the design specification; Note: With the agreement of the competent authority, the hydraulic pressure test may be replaced by a test using a gas, where such an operation does not entail any danger. .8 inspection and assessment of manufacturing defects and either repairing them or rendering the pressure receptacles unserviceable. In the case of welded pressure receptacles, particular attention shall be paid to the quality of the welds; .9 an inspection of the markings on the pressure receptacles;

* See, for example, CGA S-1.2-2003 “Pressure Relief Device Standards – Part 2 – Cargo and Portable Tanks for Compressed Gases” and S-1.1-2003 “Pressure Relief Device Standards – Part 1 – Cylinders for Compressed Gases”.

368 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

386

Bilaga 1

Chapter 6.2 – Provisions for the construction and testing of receptacles for gases

.10 in addition, pressure receptacles intended for the transport of UN 1001 acetylene, dissolved and UN 3374 acetylene, solvent free shall be inspected to ensure proper installation and condition of the porous material and, if applicable, the quantity of solvent.

6.2.1.5.2 On an adequate sample of closed cryogenic receptacles, the inspections and tests specified in 6.2.1.5.1.1, .2, .4, and .6 shall be performed. In addition, welds shall be inspected by radiographic, ultrasonic or another suitable non-destructive test method on a sample of closed cryogenic receptacles, according to the applicable design and construction standard. This weld inspection does not apply to the jacket.

Additionally, all closed cryogenic receptacles shall undergo the inspections and tests specified in 6.2.1.5.1, .7, .8, and .9, as well as a leakproofness test and a test of the satisfactory operation of the service equipment after assembly.

6.2.1.5.3 For metal hydride storage systems, it shall be verified that the inspections and tests specified in 6.2.1.5.1.1, .2, .3, .4, .5 if applicable, .6, .7, .8 and .9 have been performed on an adequate sample of the receptacles used in the metal hydride storage system. In addition, on an adequate sample of metal hydride storage systems, the inspections and tests specified in 6.2.1.5.1.3 and .6 shall be performed, as well as 6.2.1.5.1.5, if applicable, and inspection of the external conditions of the metal hydride storage system.

Additionally, all metal hydride storage systems shall undergo the initial inspections and tests specified in 6.2.1.5.1.8 and .9, as well as a leakproofness test and a test of the satisfactory operation of the service equipment.

6.2.1.6 Periodic inspection and test

6.2.1.6.1 Refillable pressure receptacles, other than cryogenic receptacles, shall be subjected to periodic inspections and tests, by a body authorized by the competent authority, in accordance with the following: .1 Check of the external conditions of the pressure receptacle and verification of the equipment and the external markings; .2 Check of the internal conditions of the pressure receptacle (e.g., internal inspection, verification of minimum wall thickness); .3 Check of the threads if there is evidence of corrosion or if the fittings are removed; .4 A hydraulic pressure test and, if necessary, verification of the characteristics of the material by suitable tests; Note 1: With the agreement of the competent authority, the hydraulic pressure test may be replaced by a test using a gas, where such an operation does not entail any danger. Note 2: With the agreement of the competent authority, the hydraulic pressure test of cylinders or tubes may be replaced by an equivalent method based on acoustic emission testing or a combination of acoustic emission testing and ultrasonic examination. ISO 16148:2006 may be used as a guide for acoustic emission testing procedures. Note 3: The hydraulic pressure test may be replaced by ultrasonic examination carried out in accordance with ISO 10461:2005+A1:2006 for seamless aluminium alloy gas cylinders and in accordance with ISO 6406:2005 for seamless steel gas cylinders. .5 Check of service equipment, other accessories and pressure-relief devices, if to be reintroduced into service. Note: For the periodic inspection and test frequencies, see packing instruction P200 or, for a chemical under pressure, packing instruction P206 of 4.1.4.1.

6.2.1.6.2 Pressure receptacles intended for the transport of UN 1001 acetylene, dissolved and UN 3374 acetylene, solvent free shall be examined only as specified in 6.2.1.6.1.1, 6.2.1.6.3 and 6.2.1.6.1.5. In addition, the condition of the porous material (e.g., cracks, top clearance, loosening, or settlement) shall be examined.

6.2.1.6.3 Pressure relief valves for closed cryogenic receptacles shall be subject to periodic inspections and tests.

6.2.1.7 Requirements for manufacturers

6.2.1.7.1 The manufacturer shall be technically able and shall possess all resources required for the satisfactory manufacture of pressure receptacles; this relates in particular to qualified personnel: .1 to supervise the entire manufacturing process; .2 to carry out joining of materials; and .3 to carry out the relevant tests.

6.2.1.7.2 The proficiency test of a manufacturer shall in all instances be carried out by an inspection body approved by the competent authority of the country of approval.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 369

387

Bilaga 1

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc.

6.2.1.8 Requirements for inspection bodies

6.2.1.8.1 Inspection bodies shall be independent from manufacturing enterprises and competent to perform the tests, inspections and approvals required.

6.2.2 Provisions for UN pressure receptacles

In addition to the general requirements of 6.2.1, UN pressure receptacles shall comply with the provisions of this section, including the standards, as applicable.

Note: With the agreement of the competent authority, more recently published versions of the standards, if available, may be used.

6.2.2.1 Design, construction and initial inspection and test

6.2.2.1.1 The following standards apply for the design, construction, and initial inspection and test of UN cylinders, except that inspection requirements related to the conformity assessment system and approval shall be in accordance with 6.2.2.5:

ISO 9809-1:1999 Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless steel gas cylinders – Design, construction and testing – Part 1: Quenched and tempered steel cylinders with tensile strength less than 1100 MPa. Note: The note concerning the F factor in section 7.3 of this standard shall not be applied for UN cylinders. ISO 9809-2:2000 Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless steel gas cylinders – Design, construction and testing – Part 2: Quenched and tempered steel cylinders with tensile strength greater than or equal to 1100 MPa ISO 9809-3:2000 Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless steel gas cylinders – Design, construction and testing – Part 3: Normalized steel cylinders ISO 7866:1999 Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless aluminium alloy gas cylinders – Design, construction and testing Note: The note concerning the F factor in section 7.2 of this standard shall not be applied for UN cylinders. Aluminium alloy 6351A-T6 or equivalent shall not be authorized. ISO 4706:2008 Gas cylinders – Refillable welded steel cylinders – Test pressure 60 bar and below ISO 18172-1:2007 Gas cylinders – Refillable welded stainless steel cylinders – Part 1: Test pressure 6 MPa and below ISO 20703:2006 Gas cylinders – Refillable welded aluminium-alloy cylinders – Design, construction and testing ISO 11118:1999 Gas cylinders – Non-refillable metallic gas cylinders – Specification and test methods ISO 11119-1:2002 Gas cylinders of composite construction – Specification and test methods – Part 1: Hoop wrapped composite gas cylinders ISO 11119-2:2002 Gas cylinders of composite construction – Specification and test methods – Part 2: Fully wrapped fibre reinforced composite gas cylinders with load-sharing metal liners ISO 11119-3:2002 Gas cylinders of composite construction – Specification and test methods – Part 3: Fully wrapped fibre reinforced composite gas cylinders with non-load-sharing metallic or non-metallic liners

Note 1: In the above referenced standards, composite cylinders shall be designed for unlimited service life.

Note 2: After the first 15 years of service, composite cylinders manufactured according to these standards may be approved for extended service by the competent authority which was responsible for the original approval of the cylinders and which will base its decision on the test information supplied by the manufacturer or owner or user.

6.2.2.1.2 The following standards apply for the design, construction, and initial inspection and test of UN tubes, except that inspection requirements related to the conformity assessment system and approval shall be in accordance with 6.2.2.5:

ISO 11120:1999 Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless steel tubes for compressed gas transport, of water capacity between 150 ℓ and 3000 ℓ – Design, construction and testing Note: The note concerning the F factor in section 7.1 of this standard shall not be applied for UN tubes.

370 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

388

Bilaga 1

Chapter 6.2 – Provisions for the construction and testing of receptacles for gases

6.2.2.1.3 The following standards apply for the design, construction and initial inspection and test of UN acetylene cylinders, except that inspection requirements related to the conformity assessment system and approval shall be in accordance with 6.2.2.5:

For the cylinder shell:

ISO 9809-1:1999 Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless steel gas cylinders – Design, construction and testing – Part 1: Quenched and tempered steel cylinders with tensile strength less than 1100 MPa Note: The note concerning the F factor in section 7.3 of this standard shall not be applied for UN cylinders. ISO 9809-3:2000 Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless steel gas cylinders – Design, construction and testing – Part 3: Normalized steel cylinders

For the porous material in the cylinder:

ISO 3807-1:2000 Cylinders for acetylene – Basic requirements – Part 1: Cylinders without fusible plugs ISO 3807-2:2000 Cylinders for acetylene – Basic requirements – Part 2: Cylinders with fusible plugs

6.2.2.1.4 The following standard applies for the design, construction and initial inspection and test of UN cryogenic receptacles, except that inspection requirements related to the conformity assessment system and approval shall be in accordance with 6.2.2.5:

ISO 21029-1:2004 Cryogenic vessels – Transportable vacuum insulated vessels of not more than 1000 litres volume – Part 1: Design, fabrication, inspection and tests

6.2.2.1.5 The following standard applies for the design, construction, and initial inspection and test of UN metal hydride storage systems, except that inspection requirements related to the conformity assessment system and approval shall be in accordance with 6.2.2.5:

ISO 16111:2008 Transportable gas storage devices – Hydrogen absorbed in reversible metal hydride

6.2.2.2 Materials

In addition to the material requirements specified in the pressure receptacle design and construction standards, and any restrictions specified in the applicable packing instruction for the gas(es) to be transported (e.g., packing instruction P200 or P205), the following standards apply to material compatibility:

ISO 11114-1:1997 Transportable gas cylinders – Compatibility of cylinder and valve materials with gas contents – Part 1: Metallic materials ISO 11114-2:2000 Transportable gas cylinders – Compatibility of cylinder and valve materials with gas contents – Part 2: Non-metallic materials

Note: The limitations imposed in ISO 11114-1 on high strength steel alloys at ultimate tensile strength levels up to 1100 MPa do not apply to SILANE (UN 2203).

6.2.2.3 Service equipment

The following standards apply to closures and their protection:

ISO 11117:1998 Gas cylinders − Valve protection caps and valve guards − Design, construction and tests + Cor 1:2009 Note: Construction according to ISO 11117:1998 may continue until 31 December 2014. ISO 10297:2006 Gas cylinders – Refillable gas cylinder valves – Specification and type testing ISO 13340:2001 Transportable gas cylinders – Cylinders valves for non-refillable cylinders – Specification and prototype testing

For UN metal hydride storage systems, the requirements specified in the following standard apply to closures and their protection:

ISO 16111:2008 Transportable gas storage devices – Hydrogen absorbed in reversible metal hydride

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 371

389

Bilaga 1

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc.

6.2.2.4 Periodic inspection and test

The following standards apply to the periodic inspection and testing of UN cylinders and UN metal hydride storage systems: ISO 6406:2005 Seamless steel gas cylinders – Periodic inspection and testing ISO 10461:2005/ Seamless aluminium-alloy gas cylinders – Periodic inspection and testing Amd 1:2006 ISO 10462:2005 Transportable cylinders for dissolved acetylene – Periodic inspection and maintenance ISO 11623:2002 Transportable gas cylinders – Periodic inspection and testing of composite gas cylinders ISO 16111:2008 Transportable gas storage devices – Hydrogen absorbed in reversible metal hydride ISO 10460:2005 Gas cylinders – Welded carbon-steel gas cylinders – Periodic inspection and testing Note: The repair of welds described in clause 12.1 of this standard shall not be permitted. Repairs described in clause 12.2 require the approval of the competent authority which approved the periodic inspection and test body in accordance with 6.2.2.6.

6.2.2.5 Conformity assessment system and approval for manufacture of pressure receptacles

6.2.2.5.1 Definitions

For the purposes of this section: Conformity assessment system means a system for competent authority approval of a manufacturer, by pressure receptacle design type approval, approval of manufacturer’s quality system and approval of inspection bodies; Design type means a pressure receptacle design as specified by a particular pressure receptacle standard; Verify means confirm by examination or provision of objective evidence that specified requirements have been fulfilled.

6.2.2.5.2 General requirements

Competent authority 6.2.2.5.2.1 The competent authority that approves the pressure receptacle shall approve the conformity assessment system for the purpose of ensuring that pressure receptacles conform to the provisions of this Code. In instances where the competent authority that approves a pressure receptacle is not the competent authority in the country of manufacture, the marks of the approval country and the country of manufacture shall be indicated in the pressure receptacle marking (see 6.2.2.7 and 6.2.2.8). The competent authority of the country of approval shall supply, upon request, evidence demonstrating compliance of this conformity assessment system to its counterpart in a country of use. 6.2.2.5.2.2 The competent authority may delegate its functions in this conformity assessment system in whole or in part. 6.2.2.5.2.3 The competent authority shall ensure that a current list of approved inspection bodies and their identity marks and approved manufacturers and their identity marks is available. Inspection body 6.2.2.5.2.4 The inspection body shall be approved by the competent authority for the inspection of pressure receptacles and shall: .1 have a staff with an organizational structure, capable, trained, competent, and skilled, to satisfactorily perform its technical functions; .2 have access to suitable and adequate facilities and equipment; .3 operate in an impartial manner and be free from any influence which could prevent it from doing so; .4 ensure commercial confidentiality of the commercial and proprietary activities of the manufacturer and other bodies; .5 maintain clear demarcation between actual inspection body functions and unrelated functions; .6 operate a documented quality system; .7 ensure that the tests and inspections specified in the relevant pressure receptacle standard and in this Code are performed; and .8 maintain an effective and appropriate report and record system in accordance with 6.2.2.5.6.

372 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

390

Bilaga 1

Chapter 6.2 – Provisions for the construction and testing of receptacles for gases

6.2.2.5.2.5 The inspection body shall perform design type approval, pressure receptacle production testing and inspection, and certification to verify conformity with the relevant pressure receptacle standard (see 6.2.2.5.4 and 6.2.2.5.5). Manufacturer 6.2.2.5.2.6 The manufacturer shall: .1 operate a documented quality system in accordance with 6.2.2.5.3; .2 apply for design type approvals in accordance with 6.2.2.5.4; .3 select an inspection body from the list of approved inspection bodies maintained by the competent authority in the country of approval; and .4 maintain records in accordance with 6.2.2.5.6. Testing laboratory 6.2.2.5.2.7 The testing laboratory shall have: .1 staff with an organizational structure, sufficient in number, competence, and skill; and .2 suitable and adequate facilities and equipment to perform the tests required by the manufacturing standard to the satisfaction of the inspection body.

6.2.2.5.3 Manufacturer’s quality system

6.2.2.5.3.1 The quality system shall contain all the elements, requirements, and provisions adopted by the manufacturer. It shall be documented in a systematic and orderly manner in the form of written policies, procedures and instructions. The contents shall in particular include adequate descriptions of: .1 the organizational structure and responsibilities of personnel with regard to design and product quality; .2 the design control and design verification techniques, processes, and procedures that will be used when designing the pressure receptacles; .3 the relevant pressure receptacle manufacturing, quality control, quality assurance and process operation instructions that will be used; .4 quality records, such as inspection reports, test data and calibration data; .5 management reviews to ensure the effective operation of the quality system arising from the audits in accordance with 6.2.2.5.3.2; .6 the process describing how customer requirements are met; .7 the process for control of documents and their revision; .8 the means for control of non-conforming pressure receptacles, purchased components, in-process and final materials; and .9 training programmes and qualification procedures for relevant personnel.

6.2.2.5.3.2 Audit of the quality system

The quality system shall be initially assessed to determine whether it meets the requirements in 6.2.2.5.3.1 to the satisfaction of the competent authority. The manufacturer shall be notified of the results of the audit. The notification shall contain the conclusions of the audit and any corrective actions required. Periodic audits shall be carried out, to the satisfaction of the competent authority, to ensure that the manufacturer maintains and applies the quality system. Reports of the periodic audits shall be provided to the manufacturer.

6.2.2.5.3.3 Maintenance of the quality system

The manufacturer shall maintain the quality system as approved in order that it remains adequate and efficient. The manufacturer shall notify the competent authority that approved the quality system of any intended changes. The proposed changes shall be evaluated in order to determine whether the amended quality system will still satisfy the requirements in 6.2.2.5.3.1.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 373

391

Bilaga 1

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc.

6.2.2.5.4 Approval process

Initial design type approval 6.2.2.5.4.1 The initial design type approval shall consist of approval of the manufacturer’s quality system and approval of the pressure receptacle design to be produced. An application for an initial design type approval shall meet the requirements of 6.2.2.5.3, 6.2.2.5.4.2 to 6.2.2.5.4.6 and 6.2.2.5.4.9. 6.2.2.5.4.2 A manufacturer desiring to produce pressure receptacles in accordance with a pressure receptacle standard and this Code shall apply for, obtain, and retain a Design Type Approval Certificate issued by the competent authority in the country of approval for at least one pressure receptacle design type in accordance with the procedure given in 6.2.2.5.4.9. This certificate shall, on request, be submitted to the competent authority of the country of use. 6.2.2.5.4.3 An application shall be made for each manufacturing facility and shall include: .1 the name and registered address of the manufacturer and in addition, if the application is submitted by an authorized representative, its name and address; .2 the address of the manufacturing facility (if different from the above); .3 the name and title of the person(s) responsible for the quality system; .4 the designation of the pressure receptacle and the relevant pressure receptacle standard; .5 details of any refusal of approval of a similar application by any other competent authority; .6 the identity of the inspection body for design type approval; .7 documentation on the manufacturing facility as specified under 6.2.2.5.3.1; and .8 the technical documentation required for design type approval, which shall enable verification of the conformity of the pressure receptacles with the requirements of the relevant pressure receptacle design standard. The technical documentation shall cover the design and method of manufacture and shall contain, as far as is relevant for assessment, at least the following: .1 pressure receptacle design standard, design and manufacturing drawings, showing components and sub-assemblies, if any; .2 descriptions and explanations necessary for the understanding of the drawings and intended use of the pressure receptacles; .3 a list of the standards necessary to fully define the manufacturing process; .4 design calculations and material specifications; and .5 design type approval test reports, describing the results of examinations and tests carried out in accordance with 6.2.2.5.4.9. 6.2.2.5.4.4 An initial audit in accordance with 6.2.2.5.3.2 shall be performed to the satisfaction of the competent authority. 6.2.2.5.4.5 If the manufacturer is denied approval, the competent authority shall provide written detailed reasons for such denial. 6.2.2.5.4.6 Following approval, changes to the information submitted under 6.2.2.5.4.3 relating to the initial approval shall be provided to the competent authority. Subsequent design type approvals 6.2.2.5.4.7 An application for a subsequent design type approval shall encompass the requirements of 6.2.2.5.4.8 and 6.2.2.5.4.9, provided a manufacturer is in the possession of an initial design type approval. In such a case, the manufacturer’s quality system according to 6.2.2.5.3 shall have been approved during the initial design type approval and shall be applicable for the new design. 6.2.2.5.4.8 The application shall include: .1 the name and address of the manufacturer and in addition, if the application is submitted by an authorized representative, its name and address; .2 details of any refusal of approval of a similar application by any other competent authority; .3 evidence that initial design type approval has been granted; and .4 the technical documentation, as described in 6.2.2.5.4.3.8. Procedure for design type approval 6.2.2.5.4.9 The inspection body shall: .1 examine the technical documentation to verify that: .1 the design is in accordance with the relevant provisions of the standard, and .2 the prototype lot has been manufactured in conformity with the technical documentation and is representative of the design;

374 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

392

Bilaga 1

Chapter 6.2 – Provisions for the construction and testing of receptacles for gases

.2 verify that the production inspections have been carried out as required in accordance with 6.2.2.5.5; .3 select pressure receptacles from a prototype production lot and supervise the tests of these pressure receptacles as required for design type approval; .4 perform or have performed the examinations and tests specified in the pressure receptacle standard to determine that: .1 the standard has been applied and fulfilled, and .2 the procedures adopted by the manufacturer meet the requirements of the standard; and .5 ensure that the various type approval examinations and tests are correctly and competently carried out. After prototype testing has been carried out with satisfactory results and all applicable requirements of 6.2.2.5.4 have been satisfied, a Design Type Approval Certificate shall be issued which shall include the name and address of the manufacturer, results and conclusions of the examination, and the necessary data for identification of the design type. If the manufacturer is denied a design type approval, the competent authority shall provide written detailed reasons for such denial.

6.2.2.5.4.10 Modifications to approved design types

The manufacturer shall either: (a) inform the issuing competent authority of modifications to the approved design type, where such modifications do not constitute a new design, as specified in the pressure receptacle standard; or (b) request a subsequent design type approval where such modifications constitute a new design according to the relevant pressure receptacle standard. This additional approval shall be given in the form of an amendment to the original design type approval certificate. 6.2.2.5.4.11 Upon request, the competent authority shall communicate to any other competent authority information concerning design type approval, modifications of approvals, and withdrawn approvals.

6.2.2.5.5 Production inspection and certification

An inspection body, or its delegate, shall carry out the inspection and certification of each pressure receptacle. The inspection body selected by the manufacturer for inspection and testing during production may be different from the inspection body used for the design type approval testing. Where it can be demonstrated to the satisfaction of the inspection body that the manufacturer has trained and competent inspectors, independent of the manufacturing operations, inspection may be performed by those inspectors. In such a case, the manufacturer shall maintain training records of the inspectors. The inspection body shall verify that the inspections by the manufacturer and tests performed on those pressure receptacles fully conform to the standard and the provisions of this Code. Should non-conformance in conjunction with this inspection and testing be determined, the permission to have inspection performed by the manufacturer’s inspectors may be withdrawn. The manufacturer shall, after approval by the inspection body, make a declaration of conformity with the certified design type. The application of the pressure receptacle certification marking shall be considered a declaration that the pressure receptacle complies with the applicable pressure receptacle standards and the requirements of this conformity assessment system and with the provisions of this Code. The inspection body shall affix or delegate the manufacturer to affix the pressure receptacle certification marking and the registered mark of the inspection body to each approved pressure receptacle. A certificate of compliance, signed by the inspection body and the manufacturer, shall be issued before the pressure receptacles are filled.

6.2.2.5.6 Records

Design type approval and certificate of compliance records shall be retained by the manufacturer and the inspection body for not less than 20 years.

6.2.2.6 Approval system for periodic inspection and testing of pressure receptacles

6.2.2.6.1 Definitions

For the purposes of this section: Approval system means a system for competent authority approval of a body performing periodic inspection and testing of pressure receptacles (hereinafter referred to as “periodic inspection and testing body”), including approval of that body’s quality system.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 375

393

Bilaga 1

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc.

6.2.2.6.2 General provisions

Competent authority 6.2.2.6.2.1 The competent authority shall establish an approval system for the purpose of ensuring that the periodic inspection and testing of pressure receptacles conform to the provisions of this Code. In instances where the competent authority that approves a body performing periodic inspection and testing of a pressure receptacle is not the competent authority of the country approving the manufacture of the pressure receptacle, the marks of the approval country of periodic inspection and testing shall be indicated in the pressure receptacle marking (see 6.2.2.7). The competent authority of the country of approval for the periodic inspection and testing shall supply, upon request, evidence demonstrating compliance with this approval system, including the records of the periodic inspection and testing, to its counterpart in a country of use. The competent authority of the country of approval may terminate the Approval Certificate referred to in 6.2.2.6.4.1, upon evidence demonstrating non-compliance with the approval system. 6.2.2.6.2.2 The competent authority may delegate its functions in this approval system, in whole or in part. 6.2.2.6.2.3 The competent authority shall ensure that a current list of approved periodic inspection and testing bodies and their identity marks is available. Periodic inspection and testing body 6.2.2.6.2.4 The periodic inspection and testing body shall be approved by the competent authority and shall: .1 have a staff with an organizational structure, capable, trained, competent, and skilled, satisfactorily to perform its technical functions; .2 have access to suitable and adequate facilities and equipment; .3 operate in an impartial manner and be free from any influence which could prevent it from doing so; .4 ensure commercial confidentiality; .5 maintain clear demarcation between actual periodic inspection and testing body functions and unrelated functions; .6 operate a documented quality system in accordance with 6.2.2.6.3; .7 apply for approval in accordance with 6.2.2.6.4; .8 ensure that the periodic inspections and tests are performed in accordance with 6.2.2.6.5; and .9 maintain an effective and appropriate report and record system in accordance with 6.2.2.6.6.

6.2.2.6.3 Quality system and audit of the periodic inspection and testing body

6.2.2.6.3.1 Quality system. The quality system shall contain all the elements, requirements, and provisions adopted by the periodic inspection and testing body. It shall be documented in a systematic and orderly manner in the form of written policies, procedures, and instructions. The quality system shall include: .1 a description of the organizational structure and responsibilities; .2 the relevant inspection and test, quality control, quality assurance, and process operation instructions that will be used; .3 quality records, such as inspection reports, test data, calibration data and certificates; .4 management reviews to ensure the effective operation of the quality system arising from the audits performed in accordance with 6.2.2.6.3.2; .5 a process for control of documents and their revision; .6 a means for control of non-conforming pressure receptacles; and .7 training programmes and qualification procedures for relevant personnel. 6.2.2.6.3.2 Audit. The periodic inspection and testing body and its quality system shall be audited in order to determine whether it meets the requirements of this Code to the satisfaction of the competent authority. An audit shall be conducted as part of the initial approval process (see 6.2.2.6.4.3). An audit may be required as part of the process to modify an approval (see 6.2.2.6.4.6). Periodic audits shall be conducted, to the satisfaction of the competent authority, to ensure that the periodic inspection and testing body continues to meet the provisions of this Code. The periodic inspection and testing body shall be notified of the results of any audit. The notification shall contain the conclusions of the audit and any corrective actions required. 6.2.2.6.3.3 Maintenance of the quality system. The periodic inspection and testing body shall maintain the quality system as approved in order that it remains adequate and efficient. The periodic inspection and testing body shall notify the competent authority that approved the quality system of any intended changes, in accordance with the process for modification of an approval in 6.2.2.6.4.6.

376 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

394

Bilaga 1

Chapter 6.2 – Provisions for the construction and testing of receptacles for gases

6.2.2.6.4 Approval process for periodic inspection and testing bodies

Initial approval

6.2.2.6.4.1 A body desiring to perform periodic inspection and testing of pressure receptacles in accordance with a pressure receptacle standard and with this Code shall apply for, obtain, and retain an Approval Certificate issued by the competent authority. This written approval shall, on request, be submitted to the competent authority of a country of use.

6.2.2.6.4.2 An application shall be made for each periodic inspection and testing body and shall include: .1 the name and address of the periodic inspection and testing body and, if the application is submitted by an authorized representative, its name and address; .2 the address of each facility performing periodic inspection and testing; .3 the name and title of the person(s) responsible for the quality system; .4 the designation of the pressure receptacles, the periodic inspection and test methods, and the relevant pressure receptacle standards met by the quality system; .5 documentation on each facility, the equipment, and the quality system as specified under 6.2.2.6.3.1; .6 the qualifications and training records of the periodic inspection and test personnel; and .7 details of any refusal of approval of a similar application by any other competent authority.

6.2.2.6.4.3 The competent authority shall: .1 examine the documentation to verify that the procedures are in accordance with the requirements of the relevant pressure receptacle standards and of this Code; and .2 conduct an audit in accordance with 6.2.2.6.3.2 to verify that the inspections and tests are carried out as required by the relevant pressure receptacle standards and by this Code, to the satisfaction of the competent authority.

6.2.2.6.4.4 After the audit has been carried out with satisfactory results and all applicable requirements of 6.2.2.6.4 have been satisfied, an Approval Certificate shall be issued. It shall include the name of the periodic inspection and testing body, the registered mark, the address of each facility, and the necessary data for identification of its approved activities (e.g., designation of pressure receptacles, periodic inspection and test method and pressure receptacle standards).

6.2.2.6.4.5 If the periodic inspection and testing body is denied approval, the competent authority shall provide written detailed reasons for such denial.

Modifications to periodic inspection and testing body approvals

6.2.2.6.4.6 Following approval, the periodic inspection and testing body shall notify the issuing competent authority of any modifications to the information submitted under 6.2.2.6.4.2 relating to the initial approval. The modifications shall be evaluated in order to determine whether the requirements of the relevant pressure receptacle standards and of this Code will be satisfied. An audit in accordance with 6.2.2.6.3.2 may be required. The competent authority shall accept or reject these modifications in writing, and an amended Approval Certificate shall be issued as necessary.

6.2.2.6.4.7 Upon request, the competent authority shall communicate to any other competent authority, information concerning initial approvals, modifications of approvals, and withdrawn approvals.

6.2.2.6.5 Periodic inspection and test and certification

The application of the periodic inspection and test marking to a pressure receptacle shall be considered a declaration that the pressure receptacle complies with the applicable pressure receptacle standards and with the provisions of this Code. The periodic inspection and testing body shall affix the periodic inspection and test marking, including its registered mark, to each approved pressure receptacle (see 6.2.2.7.7). A record certifying that a pressure receptacle has passed the periodic inspection and test shall be issued by the periodic inspection and testing body, before the pressure receptacle is filled.

6.2.2.6.6 Records

The periodic inspection and testing body shall retain records of pressure receptacle periodic inspection and tests (both passed and failed), including the location of the test facility, for not less than 15 years. The owner of the pressure receptacle shall retain an identical record until the next periodic inspection and test unless the pressure receptacle is permanently removed from service.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 377

395

Bilaga 1

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc.

6.2.2.7 Marking of refillable UN pressure receptacles

Note: Marking provisions for UN metal hydride storage systems are given in 6.2.2.9.

6.2.2.7.1 Refillable UN pressure receptacles shall be marked clearly and legibly with certification, operational and manufacturing marks. These marks shall be permanently affixed (e.g., stamped, engraved, or etched) on the pressure receptacle. The marks shall be on the shoulder, top end or neck of the pressure receptacle or on a permanently affixed component of the pressure receptacle (e.g., welded collar or corrosion-resistant plate welded on the outer jacket of a closed cryogenic receptacle). Except for the UN packaging symbol, the minimum size of the marks shall be 5 mm for pressure receptacles with a diameter greater than or equal to 140 mm and 2.5 mm for pressure receptacles with a diameter less than 140 mm. The minimum size of the UN packaging symbol shall be 10 mm for pressure receptacles with a diameter greater than or equal to 140 mm and 5 mm for pressure receptacles with a diameter less than 140 mm.

6.2.2.7.2 The following certification marks shall be applied: (a) The UN packaging symbol

This symbol shall not be used for any purpose other than certifying that a packaging, a flexible bulk container, a portable tank or a MEGC complies with the relevant requirements in Chapter 6.1, 6.2, 6.3, 6.5, 6.6, 6.7 or 6.9; (b) The technical standard (e.g., ISO 9809-1) used for design, construction and testing; (c) The character(s) identifying the country of approval as indicated by the distinguishing signs of motor vehicles in international traffic; (d) The identity mark or stamp of the inspection body that is registered with the competent authority of the country authorizing the marking; (e) The date of the initial inspection, the year (four digits) followed by the month (two digits) separated by a slash (i.e., “/” ).

6.2.2.7.3 The following operational marks shall be applied: (f) The test pressure in bar, preceded by the letters “PH” and followed by the letters “BAR”; (g) The mass of the empty pressure receptacle including all permanently attached integral parts (e.g., neck ring, foot ring, etc.) in kilograms, followed by the letters “KG”. This mass shall not include the mass of valve, valve cap or valve guard, any coating, or porous mass for acetylene. The mass shall be expressed to three significant figures rounded up to the last digit. For cylinders of less than 1 kg, the mass shall be expressed to two significant figures rounded up to the last digit. In the case of pressure receptacles for UN 1001 acetylene, dissolved and UN 3374 acetylene, solvent free, at least one decimal shall be shown after the decimal point and two digits for pressure receptacles of less than 1 kg; (h) The minimum guaranteed wall thickness of the pressure receptacle in millimetres followed by the letters “MM”. This mark is not required for pressure receptacles with a water capacity less than or equal to 1 litre or for composite cylinders or for closed cryogenic receptacles; (i) In the case of pressure receptacles for compressed gases, UN 1001 acetylene, dissolved, and UN 3374 acetylene, solvent free, the working pressure in bar, preceded by the letters “PW”. In the case of closed cryogenic receptacles, the maximum allowable working pressure preceded by the letters “MAWP”; (j) In the case of pressure receptacles for liquefied gases and refrigerated liquefied gases, the water capacity in litres expressed to three significant figures rounded down to the last digit, followed by the letter “L”. If the value of the minimum or nominal water capacity is an integer, the digits after the decimal point may be neglected; (k) In the case of pressure receptacles for UN 1001 acetylene, dissolved, the total of the mass of the empty receptacle, the fittings and accessories not removed during filling, any coating, the porous material, the solvent and the saturation gas expressed to three significant figures rounded down to the last digit followed by the letters “KG”. At least one decimal shall be shown after the decimal point. For pressure receptacles of less than 1 kg, the mass shall be expressed to two significant figures rounded down to the last digit; (l) In the case of pressure receptacles for UN 3374 acetylene, solvent free, the total of the mass of the empty receptacle, the fittings and accessories not removed during filling, any coating and the porous material expressed to three significant figures rounded down to the last digit followed by the letters “KG”. At least one decimal shall be shown after the decimal point. For pressure receptacles of less than 1 kg, the mass shall be expressed to two significant figures rounded down to the last digit.

378 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

396

Bilaga 1

Chapter 6.2 – Provisions for the construction and testing of receptacles for gases

6.2.2.7.4 The following manufacturing marks shall be applied: (m) Identification of the cylinder thread (e.g., 25E). This mark is not required for closed cryogenic receptacles; (n) The manufacturer’s mark registered by the competent authority. When the country of manufacture is not the same as the country of approval, then the manufacturer’s mark shall be preceded by the character(s) identifying the country of manufacture as indicated by the distinguishing signs of motor vehicles in international traffic. The country mark and the manufacturer’s mark shall be separated by a space or slash; (o) The serial number assigned by the manufacturer; (p) In the case of steel pressure receptacles and composite pressure receptacles with steel liner intended for the transport of gases with a risk of hydrogen embrittlement, the letter “H” showing compatibility of the steel (see ISO 11114-1:1997). 6.2.2.7.5 The above marks shall be placed in three groups. – Manufacturing marks shall be the top grouping and shall appear consecutively in the sequence given in 6.2.2.7.4. – The operational marks in 6.2.2.7.3 shall be the middle grouping and the test pressure (f) shall be immediately preceded by the working pressure (i) when the latter is required. – Certification marks shall be the bottom grouping and shall appear in the sequence given in 6.2.2.7.2. The following is an example of the markings applied to a cylinder.

(m) (n) (o) (p) 25E D MF 765432 H

(i) (f) (g) (j) (h) PW200 PH300BAR 62.1KG 50L 5.8MM

(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)

ISO 9809-1 F IB 2000/12

6.2.2.7.6 Other marks are allowed in areas other than the side wall, provided they are made in low-stress areas and are not of a size and depth that will create harmful stress concentrations. In the case of closed cryogenic receptacles, such marks may be on a separate plate attached to the outer jacket. Such marks shall not conflict with required marks. 6.2.2.7.7 In addition to the preceding marks, each refillable pressure receptacle that meets the periodic and test requirements of 6.2.2.4 shall be marked in sequence as follows: (a) the character(s) identifying the country authorizing the body performing the periodic inspection and test, as indicated by the distinguishing sign of motor vehicles in international traffic. This marking is not required if this body is approved by the competent authority of the country approving manufacture; (b) the registered mark of the body authorized by the competent authority for performing periodic inspection and test; (c) the date of the periodic inspection and test, the year (two digits) followed by the month (two digits) separated by a slash (i.e., “/”). Four digits may be used to indicate the year. 6.2.2.7.8 For acetylene cylinders, with the agreement of the competent authority, the date of the most recent periodic inspection and the stamp of the body performing the periodic inspection and test may be engraved on a ring held on the cylinder by the valve. The ring shall be configured so that it can only be removed by disconnecting the valve from the cylinder. 6.2.2.7.9 For bundles of cylinders, pressure receptacle marking provisions shall only apply to the individual cylinders of a bundle and not to any assembly structure.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 379

397

Bilaga 1

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc.

6.2.2.8 Marking of non-refillable UN pressure receptacles

6.2.2.8.1 Non-refillable UN pressure receptacles shall be marked clearly and legibly with certification and gas or pressure receptacle specific marks. These marks shall be permanently affixed (e.g., stencilled, stamped, engraved, or etched) on the pressure receptacle. Except when stencilled, the marks shall be on the shoulder, top end or neck of the pressure receptacle or on a permanently affixed component of the pressure receptacle (e.g., welded collar). Except for the “UN” mark and the “DO NOT REFILL” mark, the minimum size of the marks shall be 5 mm for pressure receptacles with a diameter greater than or equal to 140 mm and 2.5 mm for pressure receptacles with a diameter less than 140 mm. The minimum size of the “UN” mark shall be 10 mm for pressure receptacles with a diameter greater than or equal to 140 mm and 5 mm for pressure receptacles with a diameter less than 140 mm. The minimum size of the “DO NOT REFILL” mark shall be 5 mm.

6.2.2.8.2 The marks listed in 6.2.2.7.2 to 6.2.2.7.4 shall be applied with the exception of (g), (h) and (m). The serial number (o) may be replaced by the batch number. In addition, the words “DO NOT REFILL” in letters of at least 5 mm in height are required.

6.2.2.8.3 The requirements of 6.2.2.7.5 shall apply.

Note: Non-refillable pressure receptacles may, on account of their size, substitute this marking by a label.

6.2.2.8.4 Other marks are allowed provided they are made in low-stress areas other than the side wall and are not of a size and depth that will create harmful stress concentrations. Such marks shall not conflict with required marks.

6.2.2.9 Marking of UN metal hydride storage systems

6.2.2.9.1 UN metal hydride storage systems shall be marked clearly and legibly with the marks listed below. These marks shall be permanently affixed (e.g., stamped, engraved, or etched) on the metal hydride storage system. The marks shall be on the shoulder, top end or neck of the metal hydride storage system or on a permanently affixed component of the metal hydride storage system. Except for the United Nations packaging symbol, the minimum size of the marks shall be 5 mm for metal hydride storage systems with a smallest overall dimension greater than or equal to 140 mm and 2.5 mm for metal hydride storage systems with a smallest overall dimension less than 140 mm. The minimum size of the United Nations packaging symbol shall be 10 mm for metal hydride storage systems with a smallest overall dimension greater than or equal to 140 mm and 5 mm for metal hydride storage systems with a smallest overall dimension less than 140 mm.

6.2.2.9.2 The following marks shall be applied: (a) The United Nations packaging symbol ;

This symbol shall not be used for any purpose other than certifying that a packaging, a flexible bulk container, a portable tank or a MEGC complies with the relevant requirements in Chapter 6.1, 6.2, 6.3, 6.5, 6.6, 6.7 or 6.9; (b) “ISO 16111” (the technical standard used for design, manufacture and testing); (c) The character(s) identifying the country of approval as indicated by the distinguishing signs of motor vehicles in international traffic; (d) The identity mark or stamp of the inspection body that is registered with the competent authority of the country authorizing the marking; (e) The date of the initial inspection, the year (four digits) followed by the month (two digits) separated by a slash (i.e., “/”); (f) The test pressure of the receptacle in bar, preceded by the letters “PH” and followed by the letters “BAR”; (g) The rated charging pressure of the metal hydride storage system in bar, preceded by the letters “RCP” and followed by the letters “BAR”; (h) The manufacturer’s mark registered by the competent authority. When the country of manufacture is not the same as the country of approval, then the manufacturer’s mark shall be preceded by the character(s) identifying the country of manufacture as indicated by the distinguishing signs of motor vehicles in international traffic. The country mark and the manufacturer’s mark shall be separated by a space or slash; (i) The serial number assigned by the manufacturer; (j) In the case of steel receptacles and composite receptacles with steel liner, the letter “H” showing compatibility of the steel (see ISO 11114-1:1997); and, (k) In the case of metal hydride storage systems having limited life, the date of expiry, denoted by the letters “FINAL” followed by the year (four digits) followed by the month (two digits) separated by a slash (i.e., “/”).

380 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

398

Bilaga 1

Chapter 6.2 – Provisions for the construction and testing of receptacles for gases

The certification marks specified in (a) to (e) above shall appear consecutively in the sequence given. The test pressure (f) shall be immediately preceded by the rated charging pressure (g). The manufacturing marks specified in (h) to (k) above shall appear consecutively in the sequence given.

6.2.2.9.3 Other marks are allowed in areas other than the side wall, provided they are made in low stress areas and are not of a size and depth that will create harmful stress concentrations. Such marks shall not conflict with required marks.

6.2.2.9.4 In addition to the preceding marks, each metal hydride storage system that meets the periodic and test requirements of 6.2.2.4 shall be marked indicating:

(a) The character(s) identifying the country authorizing the body performing the periodic inspection and test, as indicated by the distinguishing sign of motor vehicles in international traffic. This marking is not required if this body is approved by the competent authority of the country approving manufacture;

(b) The registered mark of the body authorized by the competent authority for performing periodic inspection and test;

(c) The date of the periodic inspection and test, the year (two digits) followed by the month (two digits) separated by a slash (i.e., “/” ). Four digits may be used to indicate the year.

The above marks shall appear consecutively in the sequence given.

6.2.3 Provisions for non-UN pressure receptacles

6.2.3.1 Pressure receptacles not designed, constructed, inspected, tested and approved according to 6.2.2 shall be designed, constructed, inspected, tested and approved in accordance with a technical code recognized by the competent authority and the general provisions of 6.2.1.

6.2.3.2 Pressure receptacles designed, constructed, inspected, tested and approved under the provisions of this section shall not be marked with the UN packaging symbol.

6.2.3.3 For metallic cylinders, tubes, pressure drums bundles of cylinders and salvage pressure receptacles, the construction shall be such that the minimum burst ratio (burst pressure divided by test pressure) is:

1.50 for refillable pressure receptacles,

2.00 for non-refillable pressure receptacles.

6.2.3.4 Marking shall be in accordance with the requirements of the competent authority of the country of use.

6.2.3.5 Salvage pressure receptacles

Note: These provisions of 6.2.3.5 for salvage pressure receptacles may be applied for new salvage pressure receptacles as from 1 January 2013, unless otherwise authorized, and shall be applied for all new salvage pressure receptacles as from 1 January 2014. Salvage pressure receptacles approved in accordance with national regulations may be used with the approval of the competent authorities of the countries of use.

6.2.3.5.1 To permit the safe handling and disposal of the pressure receptacles transported within the salvage pressure receptacle, the design may include equipment not otherwise used for cylinders or pressure drums such as flat heads, quick opening devices and openings in the cylindrical part.

6.2.3.5.2 Instructions on the safe handling and use of the salvage pressure receptacle shall be clearly shown in the documentation for the application to the competent authority and shall form part of the approval certificate. In the approval certificate, the pressure receptacles authorized to be transported in a salvage pressure receptacle shall be indicated. A list of the materials of construction of all parts likely to be in contact with the dangerous goods shall also be included.

6.2.3.5.3 A copy of the approval certificate shall be delivered by the manufacturer to the owner of a salvage pressure receptacle.

6.2.3.5.4 The marking of salvage pressure receptacles according to 6.2.3 shall be determined by the competent authority in taking into account suitable marking provisions of 6.2.2.7 as appropriate. The marking shall include the water capacity and test pressure of the salvage pressure receptacle

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 381

399

Bilaga 1

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc.

6.2.4 Provisions for aerosol dispensers, small receptacles containing gas (gas cartridges) and fuel cell cartridges containing liquefied flammable gas

6.2.4.1 Small receptacles containing gas (gas cartridges) and fuel cell cartridges containing liquefied flammable gas

6.2.4.1.1 Each receptacle or fuel cell cartridge shall be subjected to a test performed in a hot water bath. The temperature of the bath and the duration of the test shall be such that the internal pressure reaches that which would be reached at 55°C (50°C if the liquid phase does not exceed 95% of the capacity of the receptacle or the fuel cell cartridge at 50°C). If the contents are sensitive to heat or if the receptacles or the fuel cell cartridges are made of plastics material which softens at this test temperature, the temperature of the bath shall be set at between 20°C and 30°C, but in addition one receptacle or fuel cell cartridge in 2000 shall be tested at the higher temperature. 6.2.4.1.2 No leakage or permanent deformation of a receptacle or fuel cell cartridge shall occur, except that a plastics receptacle or fuel cell cartridge may be deformed through softening provided that it does not leak.

6.2.4.2 Aerosol dispensers

Each filled aerosol dispenser shall be subjected to a test performed in a hot water bath or an approved water bath alternative.

6.2.4.2.1 Hot water bath test

6.2.4.2.1.1 The temperature of the water bath and the duration of the test shall be such that the internal pressure reaches that which would be reached at 55°C (50°C if the liquid phase does not exceed 95% of the capacity of the aerosol dispenser at 50°C). If the contents are sensitive to heat or if the aerosol dispensers are made of plastics material which softens at this test temperature, the temperature of the bath shall be set at between 20°C and 30°C but, in addition, one aerosol dispenser in 2000 shall be tested at the higher temperature. 6.2.4.2.1.2 No leakage or permanent deformation of an aerosol dispenser may occur, except that a plastic aerosol dispenser may be deformed through softening provided that it does not leak.

6.2.4.2.2 Alternative methods

With the approval of the competent authority, alternative methods which provide an equivalent level of safety may be used provided that the requirements of 6.2.4.2.2.1, 6.2.4.2.2.2 and 6.2.4.2.2.3 are met.

6.2.4.2.2.1 Quality system

Aerosol dispenser fillers and component manufacturers shall have a quality system. The quality system shall implement procedures to ensure that all aerosol dispensers that leak or that are deformed are rejected and not offered for transport. The quality system shall include: (a) a description of the organizational structure and responsibilities; (b) the relevant inspection and test, quality control, quality assurance, and process operation instructions that will be used; (c) quality records, such as inspection reports, test data, calibration data and certificates; (d) management reviews to ensure the effective operation of the quality system; (e) a process for control of documents and their revision; (f) a means for control of non-conforming aerosol dispensers; (g) training programmes and qualification procedures for relevant personnel; and (h) procedures to ensure that there is no damage to the final product. An initial audit and periodic audits shall be conducted to the satisfaction of the competent authority. These audits shall ensure the approved system is and remains adequate and efficient. Any proposed changes to the approved system shall be notified to the competent authority in advance.

6.2.4.2.2.2 Pressure and leak testing of aerosol dispensers before filling

Every empty aerosol dispenser shall be subjected to a pressure equal to or in excess of the maximum expected in the filled aerosol dispensers at 55°C (50°C if the liquid phase does not exceed 95% of the capacity of the receptacle at 50°C). This shall be at least two-thirds of the design pressure of the aerosol dispenser. –2 –1 If any aerosol dispenser shows evidence of leakage at a rate equal to or greater than 3.3 × 10 mbar·ℓ·s at the test pressure, distortion or other defect, it shall be rejected.

382 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

400

Bilaga 1

Chapter 6.2 – Provisions for the construction and testing of receptacles for gases

6.2.4.2.2.3 Testing of the aerosol dispensers after filling

Prior to filling, the filler shall ensure that the crimping equipment is set appropriately and the specified propellant is used. Each filled aerosol dispenser shall be weighed and leak tested. The leak detection equipment shall be suffi- –3 –1 ciently sensitive to detect at least a leak rate of 2.0 × 10 mbar·ℓ·s at 20°C. Any filled aerosol dispenser which shows evidence of leakage, deformation or excessive mass shall be rejected. 6.2.4.3 With the approval of the competent authority, aerosols and receptacles, small, are not subject to 6.2.4.1 and 6.2.4.2, if they are required to be sterile but may be adversely affected by water bath testing, provided: (a) They contain a non-flammable gas and either (i) contain other substances that are constituent parts of pharmaceutical products for medical, veterinary or similar purposes; (ii) contain other substances used in the production process for pharmaceutical products; or (iii) are used in medical, veterinary or similar applications; (b) An equivalent level of safety is achieved by the manufacturer’s use of alternative methods for leak detection and pressure resistance, such as helium detection and water bathing a statistical sample of at least 1 in 2000 from each production batch; and (c) For pharmaceutical products according to (a)(i) and (iii) above, they are manufactured under the authority of a national health administration. If required by the competent authority, the principles of Good Manufacturing Practice (GMP) established by the World Health Organization (WHO)* shall be followed.

* WHO publication: “Quality assurance of pharmaceuticals. A compendium of guidelines and related materials. Volume 2: Good manufacturing practices and inspection”.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 383

401

Bilaga 1

Chapter 6.3

Provisions for the construction and testing of packagings for class 6.2 infectious substances of category A

6.3.1 General

6.3.1.1 The provisions of this chapter apply to packagings intended for the transport of infectious substances of category A.

6.3.2 Provisions for packagings

6.3.2.1 The provisions for packagings in this section are based on packagings, as specified in 6.1.4, currently used. In order to take into account progress in science and technology, there is no objection to the use of packagings having specifications different from those in this chapter provided that they are equally effective, acceptable to the competent authority and able successfully to withstand the tests described in 6.3.5. Methods of testing other than those described in the provisions of this Code are acceptable provided they are equivalent. 6.3.2.2 Packagings shall be manufactured and tested under a quality assurance programme which satisfies the competent authority in order to ensure that each packaging meets the provisions of this chapter.

Note: ISO 16106:2006 “Packaging – Transport packages for dangerous goods – Dangerous goods packagings, intermediate bulk containers (IBCs) and large packagings – Guidelines for the application of ISO 9001” provides acceptable guidance on procedures which may be followed. 6.3.2.3 Manufacturers and subsequent distributors of packagings shall provide information regarding procedures to be followed and a description of the types and dimensions of closures (including required gaskets) and any other components needed to ensure that packages as presented for transport are capable of passing the applicable performance tests of this chapter.

6.3.3 Code for designating types of packagings

6.3.3.1 The codes for designating types of packagings are set out in 6.1.2.7. 6.3.3.2 The letters “U” or “W” may follow the packaging code. The letter “U” signifies a special packaging conforming to the provisions of 6.3.5.1.6. The letter “W” signifies that the packaging, although of the same type as indicated by the code, is manufactured to a specification different from that in 6.1.4 and is considered equivalent under the provisions of 6.3.2.1.

6.3.4 Marking

Note 1: The marking indicates that the packaging which bears it corresponds to a successfully tested design type and that it complies with the provisions of this chapter which are related to the manufacture, but not to the use, of the packaging.

Note 2: The marking is intended to be of assistance to packaging manufacturers, reconditioners, packaging users, carriers and regulatory authorities. Note 3: The marking does not always provide full details of the test levels, etc., and these may need to be

6 taken further into account, e.g., by reference to a test certificate, to test reports or to a register of successfully

tested packagings.

6.3.4.1 Each packaging intended for use according to the provisions of this Code shall bear markings which are durable, legible and placed in a location and of such a size relative to the packaging as to be readily visible. For packages with a gross mass of more than 30 kg, the markings or a duplicate thereof shall appear on the top or on a side of the packaging. Letters, numerals and symbols shall be at least 12 mm high, except for packagings of 30 litres or 30 kg capacity or less, when they shall be at least 6 mm in height, and for packagings of 5 litres or 5 kg or less, when they shall be of an appropriate size.

384 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

402

Bilaga 1

Chapter 6.3 – Construction and testing of packagings for class 6.2 substances

6.3.4.2 A packaging that meets the provisions of this section and of 6.3.5 shall be marked with: (a) the United Nations packaging symbol;

This symbol shall not be used for any purpose other than certifying that a packaging, a flexible bulk container, a portable tank or a MEGC complies with the relevant requirements in Chapter 6.1, 6.2, 6.3, 6.5, 6.6, 6.7 or 6.9. (b) the code designating the type of packaging according to the provisions of 6.1.2; (c) the text “CLASS 6.2”; (d) the last two digits of the year of manufacture of the packaging; (e) the State authorizing the allocation of the mark, indicated by the distinguishing sign for motor vehicles in international traffic; (f) the name of the manufacturer or other identification of the packaging specified by the competent authority; (g) for packagings meeting the provisions of 6.3.5.1.6, the letter “U” shall be inserted immediately following the marking required in (b) above; and (h) each element of the marking applied in accordance with subparagraphs (a) to (g). 6.3.4.3 Marking shall be applied in the sequence shown in 6.3.4.2 (a) to (g); each element of the marking required in these subparagraphs shall be clearly separated, e.g., by a slash or space, so as to be easily identifiable. For examples, see 6.3.4.4. Any additional markings authorized by a competent authority shall still enable the parts of the mark to be correctly identified with reference to 6.3.4.1.

6.3.4.4 Example of marking

4G/CLASS 6.2/06 as in 6.3.4.2 (a), (b), (c) and (d) S/SP-9989-ERIKSSON as in 6.3.4.2 (e) and (f)

6.3.5 Test provisions for packagings

6.3.5.1 Performance and frequency of tests

6.3.5.1.1 The design type of each packaging shall be tested as provided in this section in accordance with procedures established by the competent authority. 6.3.5.1.2 Each packaging design type shall successfully pass the tests prescribed in this chapter before being used. A packaging design type is defined by the design, size, material and thickness, manner of construction and packing, but may include various surface treatments. It also includes packagings which differ from the design type only in their lesser design height. 6.3.5.1.3 Tests shall be repeated on production samples at intervals established by the competent authority. 6.3.5.1.4 Tests shall also be repeated after each modification which alters the design, material or manner of construction of a packaging. 6.3.5.1.5 The competent authority may permit the selective testing of packagings that differ only in minor respects from a tested type, such as smaller sizes or lower net mass of primary receptacles; and packagings such as drums and boxes which are produced with small reductions in external dimension(s). 6.3.5.1.6 Primary receptacles of any type may be assembled within a secondary packaging and transported without testing in the rigid outer packaging under the following conditions: .1 the rigid outer packaging shall have been successfully tested in accordance with 6.3.5.2.2 with fragile (such as glass) primary receptacles; .2 the total combined gross mass of primary receptacles shall not exceed one half of the gross mass of primary receptacles used for the drop test in .1 above; .3 the thickness of cushioning between primary receptacles and between primary receptacles and the outside of the secondary packaging shall not be reduced below the corresponding thicknesses in the originally tested packaging; and if a single primary receptacle was used in the original test, the thickness of cushioning between primary receptacles shall not be less than the thickness of cushioning between

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 385

403

Bilaga 1

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc.

the outside of the secondary packaging and the primary receptacle in the original test. When either fewer or smaller primary receptacles are used (as compared to the primary receptacles used in the drop test), sufficient additional cushioning material shall be used to take up the void spaces; .4 the rigid outer packaging shall have successfully passed the stacking test in 6.1.5.6 while empty. The total mass of identical packages shall be based on the combined mass of packagings used in the drop test in .1 above; .5 for primary receptacles containing liquids, an adequate quantity of absorbent material to absorb the entire liquid content of the primary receptacles shall be present; .6 if the rigid outer packaging is intended to contain primary receptacles for liquids and is not leakproof, or is intended to contain primary receptacles for solids and is not sift-proof, a means of containing any liquid or solid contents in the event of leakage shall be provided in the form of a leakproof liner, plastics bag or other equally effective means of containment; and .7 in addition to the markings prescribed in 6.3.4.2 (a) to (f), packagings shall be marked in accordance with 6.3.4.2(g). 6.3.5.1.7 The competent authority may at any time require proof, by tests in accordance with this section, that serially produced packagings meet the provisions of the design type tests. 6.3.5.1.8 Provided the validity of the test results is not affected and with the approval of the competent authority, several tests may be made on one sample.

6.3.5.2 Preparation of packagings for testing

6.3.5.2.1 Samples of each packaging shall be prepared as for transport except that a liquid or solid infectious substance shall be replaced by water or, where conditioning at –18°C is specified, by water containing antifreeze. Each primary receptacle shall be filled to not less than 98% of its capacity.

Note: The term “water” includes water/antifreeze solution with a minimum specific gravity of 0.95 for testing at –18°C.

6.3.5.2.2 Tests and number of samples required

Tests required for packaging types Type of packaginga Tests required Rigid outer Primary Water Cold Drop Additional Puncture Stack packaging receptacle spray conditioning 6.3.5.3 drop 6.3.5.4 6.1.5.6 6.3.5.3.6.1 6.3.5.3.6.2 6.3.5.3.6.3 Plastics Other Number of Number of Number of Number of Number of Number of samples samples samples samples samples samples Fibreboard box x 5 5 10 Required 2 Required on one on three x 5 0 5 2 sample samples Fibreboard drum x 3 3 6 when the 2 when packaging testing a x 3 0 3 2 is intended “U”-marked Plastics box x 0 5 5 to contain 2 packaging dry ice. as defined x 0 5 5 2 in 6.3.5.1.6 Plastics drum/ x 0 3 3 2 for specific jerrican provisions. x 0 3 3 2 Boxes of other x 0 5 5 2 material x 0 0 5 2 Drums/jerricans x 0 3 3 2 of other material x 0 0 3 2

a“Type of packaging” categorizes packagings for test purposes according to the kind of packaging and its material characteristics.

Note 1: In instances where a primary receptacle is made of two or more materials, the material most liable to damage determines the appropriate test.

Note 2: The materials of the secondary packagings are not taken into consideration when selecting the test or conditioning for the test.

386 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

404

Bilaga 1

Chapter 6.3 – Construction and testing of packagings for class 6.2 substances

Explanation for use of the table: If the packaging to be tested consists of a fibreboard outer box with a plastics primary receptacle, five samples must undergo the water spray test (see 6.3.5.3.6.1) prior to dropping and another five must be conditioned to -18°C (see 6.3.5.3.6.2) prior to dropping. If the packaging is to contain dry ice then one further single sample shall be dropped five times after conditioning in accordance with 6.3.5.3.6.3. Packagings prepared as for transport shall be subjected to the tests in 6.3.5.3 and 6.3.5.4. For outer packagings, the headings in the table relate to fibreboard or similar materials whose performance may be rapidly affected by moisture; plastics which may embrittle at low temperature; and other materials such as metal whose performance is not affected by moisture or temperature.

6.3.5.3 Drop test

6.3.5.3.1 Samples shall be subjected to free-fall drops from a height of 9 m onto a non-resilient, horizontal, flat, massive and rigid surface in conformity with 6.1.5.3.4. 6.3.5.3.2 Where the samples are in the shape of a box, five shall be dropped, one in each of the following orientations: .1 flat on the base; .2 flat on the top; .3 flat on the longest side; .4 flat on the shortest side; and .5 on a corner. 6.3.5.3.3 Where the samples are in the shape of a drum, three shall be dropped, one in each of the following orientations: .1 diagonally on the top chime, with the centre of gravity directly above the point of impact; .2 diagonally on the base chime; and .3 flat on the side. 6.3.5.3.4 While the sample shall be released in the required orientation, it is accepted that, for aerodynamic reasons, the impact may not take place in that orientation. 6.3.5.3.5 Following the appropriate drop sequence, there shall be no leakage from the primary receptacle(s), which shall remain protected by cushioning/absorbent material in the secondary packaging.

6.3.5.3.6 Special preparation of test sample for the drop test

6.3.5.3.6.1 Fibreboard – Water spray test

Fibreboard outer packagings: The sample shall be subjected to a water spray that simulates exposure to rainfall of approximately 5 cm per hour for at least one hour. It shall then be subjected to the test described in 6.3.5.3.1.

6.3.5.3.6.2 Plastics material – Cold conditioning

Plastics primary receptacles or outer packagings: The temperature of the test sample and its contents shall be reduced to -18°C or lower for a period of at least 24 hours and within 15 minutes of removal from that atmosphere the test sample shall be subjected to the test described in 6.3.5.3.1. Where the sample contains dry ice, the conditioning period shall be reduced to 4 hours.

6.3.5.3.6.3 Packagings intended to contain dry ice – Additional drop test

Where the packaging is intended to contain dry ice, a test additional to that specified in 6.3.5.3.1 and, when appropriate, in 6.3.5.3.6.1 or 6.3.5.3.6.2 shall be carried out. One sample shall be stored so that all the dry ice dissipates and then that sample shall be dropped in one of the orientations described in 6.3.5.3.2 which shall be that most likely to result in failure of the packaging.

6.3.5.4 Puncture test

6.3.5.4.1 Packagings with a gross mass of 7 kg or less

Samples shall be placed on a level hard surface. A cylindrical steel rod with a mass of at least 7 kg, a diameter of 38 mm and the impact end edges having a radius not exceeding 6 mm (see below) shall be dropped in a vertical free fall from a height of 1 m, measured from the impact end to the impact surface of a sample. One sample shall be placed on its base. A second sample shall be placed in an orientation perpendicular to that used for the first. In each instance, the steel rod shall be aimed to impact the primary receptacle. Following each impact, penetration of the secondary packaging is acceptable, provided that there is no leakage from the primary receptacle(s).

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 387

405

Bilaga 1

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc.

6.3.5.4.2 Packagings with a gross mass exceeding 7 kg

Samples shall be dropped on to the end of a cylindrical steel rod. The rod shall be set vertically in a level hard surface. It shall have a diameter of 38 mm and the edges of the upper end a radius not exceeding 6 mm (see below). The rod shall protrude from the surface a distance at least equal to that between the centre of the primary receptacle(s) and the outer surface of the outer packaging with a minimum of 200 mm. One sample shall be dropped with its top face lowermost in a vertical free fall from a height of 1 m, measured from the top of the steel rod. A second sample shall be dropped from the same height in an orientation perpendicular to that used for the first. In each instance, the packaging shall be so orientated that the steel rod would be capable of penetrating the primary receptacle(s). Following each impact, penetration of the secondary packaging is acceptable, provided that there is no leakage from the primary receptacle(s). 38

Radius Radius ≤ 6 mmd 6mm

Dimensions in millimetresDimensions In millimetres

6.3.5.5 Test report

6.3.5.5.1 A written test report containing at least the following particulars shall be drawn up and shall be available to the users of the packaging: .1 Name and address of the test facility; .2 Name and address of applicant (where appropriate); .3 A unique test report identification; .4 Date of the test and of the report; .5 Manufacturer of the packaging; .6 Description of the packaging design type (e.g., dimensions, materials, closures, thickness, etc.), including method of manufacture (e.g., blow moulding) and which may include drawing(s) and/or photograph(s); .7 Maximum capacity; .8 Test contents; .9 Test descriptions and results; .10 The test report shall be signed with the name and status of the signatory. 6.3.5.5.2 The test report shall contain statements that the packaging prepared as for transport was tested in accordance with the appropriate requirements of this chapter and that the use of other packaging methods or components may render it invalid. A copy of the test report shall be available to the competent authority.

388 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

406

Bilaga 1

Chapter 6.4

Provisions for the construction, testing and approval of packages and material of class 7

Note: This chapter includes provisions which apply to the construction, testing and approval of certain packages and material only when transported by air. Whilst these provisions do not apply to packages/material transported by sea, the provisions are reproduced for information/identification purposes, since such packages/ material, designed, tested and approved for air transport, may also be transported by sea.

6.4.1 [Reserved]

6.4.2 General provisions

6.4.2.1 The package shall be so designed in relation to its mass, volume and shape that it can be easily and safely transported. In addition, the package shall be so designed that it can be properly secured in or on the conveyance during transport.

6.4.2.2 The design shall be such that any lifting attachments on the package will not fail when used in the intended manner and that, if failure of the attachments shall occur, the ability of the package to meet other provisions of this Code would not be impaired. The design shall take account of appropriate safety factors to cover snatch lifting.

6.4.2.3 Attachments and any other features on the outer surface of the package which could be used to lift it shall be designed either to support its mass in accordance with the provisions of 6.4.2.2 or shall be removable or otherwise rendered incapable of being used during transport.

6.4.2.4 As far as practicable, the packaging shall be so designed and finished that the external surfaces are free from protruding features and can be easily decontaminated.

6.4.2.5 As far as practicable, the outer layer of the package shall be so designed as to prevent the collection and the retention of water.

6.4.2.6 Any features added to the package at the time of transport which are not part of the package shall not reduce its safety.

6.4.2.7 The package shall be capable of withstanding the effects of any acceleration, vibration or vibration resonance which may arise under routine conditions of transport without any deterioration in the effectiveness of the closing devices on the various receptacles or in the integrity of the package as a whole. In particular, nuts, bolts and other securing devices shall be so designed as to prevent them from becoming loose or being released unintentionally, even after repeated use.

6.4.2.8 The materials of the packaging and any components or structures shall be physically and chemically compatible with each other and with the radioactive contents. Account shall be taken of their behaviour under irradiation.

6.4.2.9 All valves through which the radioactive contents could escape shall be protected against unauthorized operation.

6.4.2.10 The design of the package shall take into account ambient temperatures and pressures that are likely to be encountered in routine conditions of transport.

6.4.2.11 For radioactive material having other dangerous properties, the package design shall take into account those properties; see 4.1.9.1.5, 2.0.3.1 and 2.0.3.2.

6.4.2.12 Manufacturers and subsequent distributors of packagings shall provide information regarding procedures to be followed and a description of the types and dimensions of closures (including required gaskets) and any other components needed to ensure that packages as presented for transport are capable of passing the applicable performance tests of this chapter.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 389

407

Bilaga 1

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc.

6.4.3 Additional provisions for packages transported by air

6.4.3.1 For packages to be transported by air, the temperature of the accessible surfaces shall not exceed 50°C at an ambient temperature of 38°C with no account taken for insolation. 6.4.3.2 Packages to be transported by air shall be so designed that, if they were exposed to ambient temperatures ranging from –40°C to +55°C, the integrity of containment would not be impaired. 6.4.3.3 Packages containing radioactive material, to be transported by air, shall be capable of withstanding, without leakage, an internal pressure which produces a pressure differential of not less than maximum normal operating pressure plus 95 kPa.

6.4.4 Provisions for excepted packages

An excepted package shall be designed to meet the provisions specified in 6.4.2 and, in addition, shall meet the provisions of 6.4.3 if carried by air.

6.4.5 Provisions for industrial packages

6.4.5.1 A Type IP-1 package shall be designed to meet the provisions specified in 6.4.2 and 6.4.7.2, and, in addition, shall meet the provisions of 6.4.3 if carried by air. 6.4.5.2 A package, to be qualified as a Type IP-2 package, shall be designed to meet the provisions for Type IP-1 as specified in 6.4.5.1 and, in addition, if it were subjected to the tests specified in 6.4.15.4 and 6.4.15.5, it would prevent: .1 loss or dispersal of the radioactive contents, and .2 more than a 20% increase in the maximum radiation level at any external surface of the package. 6.4.5.3 A package, to be qualified as a Type IP-3 package, shall be designed to meet the provisions for Type IP-1 as specified in 6.4.5.1 and, in addition, the provisions specified in 6.4.7.2–6.4.7.15.

6.4.5.4 Alternative provisions for Type IP-2 and Type IP-3 packages

6.4.5.4.1 Packages may be used as Type IP-2 package provided that: .1 they satisfy the provisions for Type IP-1 specified in 6.4.5.1; .2 they are designed to satisfy the provisions for packing group I or II in chapter 6.1 of this Code; and .3 when subjected to the tests for UN packing group I or II in chapter 6.1, they would prevent: (i) loss or dispersal of the radioactive contents; and (ii) more than a 20% increase in the maximum radiation level at any external surface of the package. 6.4.5.4.2 Portable tanks may also be used as Type IP-2 or Type IP-3 packages provided that: .1 they satisfy the provisions for Type IP-1 specified in 6.4.5.1; .2 they are designed to satisfy the provisions of chapter 6.7 of this Code, and are capable of withstanding a test pressure of 265 kPa; and .3 they are designed so that any shielding which is provided shall be capable of withstanding the static and dynamic stresses resulting from handling and routine conditions of transport and of preventing more than a 20% increase in the maximum radiation level at any external surface of the portable tanks. 6.4.5.4.3 Tanks, other than portable tanks, may also be used as Type IP-2 or Type IP-3 packages for transporting LSA-I and LSA-II liquids and gases as prescribed in the table under 4.1.9.2.4, provided that: .1 they satisfy the provisions of 6.4.5.1; .2 they are designed to satisfy the provisions prescribed in regional or national regulations for the transport of dangerous goods and are capable of withstanding a test pressure of 265 kPa; and .3 they are designed so that any additional shielding which is provided shall be capable of withstanding the static and dynamic stresses resulting from handling and routine conditions of transport and of preventing more than a 20% increase in the maximum radiation level at any external surface of the tanks. 6.4.5.4.4 Freight containers with the characteristics of a permanent enclosure may also be used as Type IP-2 or Type IP-3 packages provided that: .1 the radioactive contents are restricted to solid materials; .2 they satisfy the provisions for Type IP-1 specified in 6.4.5.1; and .3 they are designed to conform to the standards prescribed in the International Organization for Standardization document ISO 1496-1:1990(E), “Series 1 Freight Containers – Specifications and Testing – Part 1:

390 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

408

Bilaga 1

Chapter 6.4 – Construction, testing and approval of packages and material of class 7

General Cargo Containers” and subsequent amendments 1:1993, 2:1998, 3:2005, 4:2006 and 5:2006, excluding dimensions and ratings. They shall be designed such that, if subjected to the tests prescribed in that document and the accelerations occurring during routine conditions of transport, they would prevent: .1 loss or dispersal of the radioactive contents; and .2 more than a 20% increase in the maximum radiation level at any external surface of the package. 6.4.5.4.5 Metal intermediate bulk containers may also be used as Type IP-2 or Type IP-3 packages provided that: .1 they satisfy the provisions for Type IP-1 specified in 6.4.5.1; and .2 they are designed to satisfy the provisions of chapter 6.5 of this Code for packing group I or II, and if they were subjected to the tests prescribed in that chapter, but with the drop test conducted in the most damaging orientation, they would prevent: .1 loss or dispersal of the radioactive contents; and .2 more than a 20% increase in the maximum radiation level at any external surface of the package.

6.4.6 Provisions for packages containing uranium hexafluoride

6.4.6.1 Packages designed to contain uranium hexafluoride shall meet the requirements prescribed elsewhere in this Code which pertain to the radioactive and fissile properties of the material. Except as allowed in 6.4.6.4, uranium hexafluoride in quantities of 0.1 kg or more shall also be packaged and transported in accordance with ISO 7195:2005, “Nuclear energy – Packaging of uranium hexafluoride (UF6) for transport”, and the provisions of 6.4.6.2–6.4.6.3. 6.4.6.2 Each package designed to contain 0.1 kg or more of uranium hexafluoride shall be designed so that it would meet the following provisions: .1 withstand, without leakage and without unacceptable stress, as specified in ISO 7195:2005, the structural test as specified in 6.4.21; .2 withstand, without loss or dispersal of the uranium hexafluoride, the free drop test specified in 6.4.15.4; and .3 withstand, without rupture of the containment system, the thermal test specified in 6.4.17.3. 6.4.6.3 Packages designed to contain 0.1 kg or more of uranium hexafluoride shall not be provided with pressure relief devices. 6.4.6.4 Subject to the approval of the competent authority, packages designed to contain 0.1 kg or more of uranium hexafluoride may be transported if: (a) the packages are designed to international or national standards other than ISO 7195:2005, provided an equivalent level of safety is maintained; (b) the packages are designed to withstand, without leakage and without unacceptable stress, a test pressure of less than 2.76 MPa as specified in 6.4.21; or (c) for packages designed to contain 9000 kg or more of uranium hexafluoride, the packages do not meet the requirement of 6.4.6.2.3. In all other respects, the provisions of 6.4.6.1 to 6.4.6.3 shall be satisfied.

6.4.7 Provisions for Type A packages

6.4.7.1 Type A packages shall be designed to meet the general provisions of 6.4.2, shall meet the provisions of 6.4.3 if carried by air, and shall meet the provisions of 6.4.7.2–6.4.7.17. 6.4.7.2 The smallest overall external dimension of the package shall not be less than 10 cm. 6.4.7.3 The outside of the package shall incorporate a feature, such as a seal, which is not readily breakable and which, while intact, will be evidence that it has not been opened. 6.4.7.4 Any tie-down attachments on the package shall be so designed that, under normal and accident conditions of transport, the forces in those attachments shall not impair the ability of the package to meet the provisions of this Code. 6.4.7.5 The design of the package shall take into account temperatures ranging from –40°C to +70°C for the components of the packaging. Attention shall be given to freezing temperatures for liquids and to the potential degradation of packaging materials within the given temperature range. 6.4.7.6 The design and manufacturing techniques shall be in accordance with national or international standards, or other provisions, acceptable to the competent authority.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 391

409

Bilaga 1

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc.

6.4.7.7 The design shall include a containment system securely closed by a positive fastening device which cannot be opened unintentionally or by a pressure which may arise within the package. 6.4.7.8 Special form radioactive material may be considered as a component of the containment system. 6.4.7.9 If the containment system forms a separate unit of the package, it shall be capable of being securely closed by a positive fastening device which is independent of any other part of the packaging. 6.4.7.10 The design of any component of the containment system shall take into account, where applicable, the radiolytic decomposition of liquids and other vulnerable materials and the generation of gas by chemical reaction and radiolysis. 6.4.7.11 The containment system shall retain its radioactive contents under a reduction of ambient pressure to 60 kPa. 6.4.7.12 All valves, other than pressure relief valves, shall be provided with an enclosure to retain any leakage from the valve. 6.4.7.13 A radiation shield which encloses a component of the package specified as a part of the containment system shall be so designed as to prevent the unintentional release of that component from the shield. Where the radiation shield and such component within it form a separate unit, the radiation shield shall be capable of being securely closed by a positive fastening device which is independent of any other packaging structure. 6.4.7.14 A package shall be so designed that, if it were subjected to the tests specified in 6.4.15, it would prevent: (a) loss or dispersal of the radioactive contents; and (b) more than a 20% increase in the maximum radiation level at any external surface of the package. 6.4.7.15 The design of a package intended for liquid radioactive material shall make provision for ullage to accommodate variations in the temperature of the contents, dynamic effects and filling dynamics.

Type A packages to contain liquids

6.4.7.16 A Type A package designed to contain liquid radioactive material shall, in addition: .1 be adequate to meet the conditions specified in 6.4.7.14(a) above if the package is subjected to the tests specified in 6.4.16; and .2 either (i) be provided with sufficient absorbent material to absorb twice the volume of the liquid contents. Such absorbent material must be suitably positioned so as to contact the liquid in the event of leakage; or (ii) be provided with a containment system composed of primary inner and secondary outer containment components designed to enclose the liquid contents completely and ensure their retention within the secondary outer containment components even if the primary inner components leak.

Type A packages to contain gas

6.4.7.17 A package designed for gases shall prevent loss or dispersal of the radioactive contents if the package were subjected to the tests specified in 6.4.16. A Type A package designed for tritium gas or for noble gases shall be excepted from this requirement.

6.4.8 Provisions for Type B(U) packages

6.4.8.1 Type B(U) packages shall be designed to meet the provisions specified in 6.4.2, shall also meet the provisions of 6.4.3 if carried by air, and shall meet the provisions of 6.4.7–6.4.8, except as specified in 6.4.7.14(a), and, in addition, the provisions specified in 6.4.8.2–6.4.8.15. 6.4.8.2 A package shall be so designed that, under the ambient conditions specified in 6.4.8.5 and 6.4.8.6, heat generated within the package by the radioactive contents shall not, under normal conditions of transport, as demonstrated by the tests in 6.4.15, adversely affect the package in such a way that it would fail to meet the applicable provisions for containment and shielding if left unattended for a period of one week. Particular attention shall be paid to the effects of heat, which may: (a) alter the arrangement, the geometrical form or the physical state of the radioactive contents or, if the radioactive material is enclosed in a can or receptacle (for example, clad fuel elements), cause the can, receptacle or radioactive material to deform or melt; or (b) lessen the efficiency of the packaging through differential thermal expansion or cracking or melting of the radiation shielding material; or (c) in combination with moisture, accelerate corrosion.

392 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

410

Bilaga 1

Chapter 6.4 – Construction, testing and approval of packages and material of class 7

6.4.8.3 A package shall be so designed that, under the ambient condition specified in 6.4.8.5 and in the absence of insolation, the temperature of the accessible surfaces of a package shall not exceed 50°C, unless the package is transported under exclusive use.

6.4.8.4 Except as required in 6.4.3.1 for a package transported by air, the maximum temperature of any surface readily accessible during transport of a package under exclusive use shall not exceed 85°C in the absence of insolation under the ambient conditions specified in 6.4.8.5. Account may be taken of barriers or screens intended to give protection to persons without the need for the barriers or screens being subject to any test.

6.4.8.5 The ambient temperature shall be assumed to be 38°C.

6.4.8.6 The solar insolation conditions shall be assumed to be as specified in the table hereunder.

Insolation data Case Form and location of surface Insolation for 12 hours per day (W/m2)

1 Flat surfaces transported horizontally – 0 downward facing 2 Flat surfaces transported horizontally – 800 upward facing 3 Surfaces transported vertically 200* * 4 Other downward-facing (not horizontal) 200 surfaces 5 All other surfaces 400* * Alternatively, a sine function may be used, with an absorption coefficient adopted and the effects of possible reflection from neighbouring objects neglected.

6.4.8.7 A package which includes thermal protection for the purpose of satisfying the provisions of the thermal test specified in 6.4.17.3 shall be so designed that such protection will remain effective if the package is subjected to the tests specified in 6.4.15 and 6.4.17.2(a) and (b) or 6.4.17.2(b) and (c), as appropriate. Any such protection on the exterior of the package shall not be rendered ineffective by ripping, cutting, skidding, abrasion or rough handling. 6.4.8.8 A package shall be so designed that, if it were subjected to: .1 the tests specified in 6.4.15, it would restrict the loss of radioactive contents to not more than 10–6A per 2 hour; and .2 the tests specified in 6.4.17.1, 6.4.17.2(b), 6.4.17.3 and 6.4.17.4 and the tests in: (i) 6.4.17.2(c), when the package has a mass not greater than 500 kg, an overall density not greater than 1000 kg/m3 based on the external dimensions, and radioactive contents greater than 1000A not as 2 special form radioactive material, or (ii) 6.4.17.2(a), for all other packages, it would meet the following provisions: Ř retain sufficient shielding to ensure that the radiation level at 1 m from the surface of the package would not exceed 10 mSv/h with the maximum radioactive contents which the package is designed to contain; and Ř restrict the accumulated loss of radioactive contents in a period of one week to not more than 10A2 for krypton-85 and not more than A2 for all other radionuclides.

Where mixtures of different radionuclides are present, the provisions of 2.7.2.2.4–2.7.2.2.6 shall apply except that for krypton-85 an effective A2(i) value equal to 10A2 may be used. For case (.1) above, the assessment shall take into account the external contamination limits of 4.1.9.1.2. 5 6.4.8.9 A package for radioactive contents with activity greater than 10 A2 shall be so designed that, if it were subjected to the enhanced water immersion test specified in 6.4.18, there would be no rupture of the containment system. 6.4.8.10 Compliance with the permitted activity release limits shall depend neither upon filters nor upon a mechanical cooling system.

6.4.8.11 A package shall not include a pressure relief system from the containment system which would allow the release of radioactive material to the environment under the conditions of the tests specified in 6.4.15 and 6.4.17.

6.4.8.12 A package shall be so designed that, if it were at the maximum normal operating pressure and it were subjected to the tests specified in 6.4.15 and 6.4.17, the level of strains in the containment system would not

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 393

411

Bilaga 1

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc.

attain values which would adversely affect the package in such a way that it would fail to meet the applicable provisions. 6.4.8.13 A package shall not have a maximum normal operating pressure in excess of a gauge pressure of 700 kPa. 6.4.8.14 A package containing low dispersible radioactive material shall be so designed that any features added to the low dispersible radioactive material that are not part of it, or any internal components of the packaging, shall not adversely affect the performance of the low dispersible radioactive material. 6.4.8.15 A package shall be designed for an ambient temperature range from –40°C to +38°C.

6.4.9 Provisions for Type B(M) packages

6.4.9.1 Type B(M) packages shall meet the provisions for Type B(U) packages specified in 6.4.8.1, except that, for packages to be transported solely within a specified country or solely between specified countries, conditions other than those given in 6.4.7.5, 6.4.8.4, 6.4.8.5, 6.4.8.6 and 6.4.8.9–6.4.8.15 above may be assumed, with the approval of the competent authorities of these countries. Notwithstanding, the provisions for Type B(U) packages specified in 6.4.8.8–6.4.8.15 shall be met as far as practicable. 6.4.9.2 Intermittent venting of Type B(M) packages may be permitted during transport, provided that the operational controls for venting are acceptable to the relevant competent authorities.

6.4.10 Provisions for Type C packages

6.4.10.1 Type C packages shall be designed to meet the provisions specified in 6.4.2 and 6.4.3, and of 6.4.7.2–6.4.7.15, except as specified in 6.4.7.14, and of the provisions specified in 6.4.8.2–6.4.8.6, 6.4.8.10–6.4.8.15, and, in addition, of 6.4.10.2–6.4.10.4. 6.4.10.2 A package shall be capable of meeting the assessment criteria prescribed for tests in 6.4.8.8.2 and 6.4.8.12 after burial in an environment defined by a thermal conductivity of 0.33 W/(m.K) and a temperature of 38°C in the steady state. Initial conditions for the assessment shall assume that any thermal insulation of the package remains intact, the package is at the maximum normal operating pressure and the ambient temperature is 38°C. 6.4.10.3 A package shall be so designed that, if it were at the maximum normal operating pressure and subjected to: –6 (a) the tests specified in 6.4.15, it would restrict the loss of radioactive contents to not more than 10 A2 per hour; and (b) the test sequences in 6.4.20.1, it would meet the following provisions: (i) retain sufficient shielding to ensure that the radiation level at 1 m from the surface of the package would not exceed 10 mSv/h with the maximum radioactive contents which the package is designed to contain; and (ii) restrict the accumulated loss of radioactive contents in a period of 1 week to not more than 10A2 for krypton-85 and not more than A2 for all other radionuclides. Where mixtures of different radionuclides are present, the provisions of 2.7.2.2.4–2.7.2.2.6 shall apply except that for krypton-85 an effective A2(i) value equal to 10A2 may be used. For case (a) above, the assessment shall take into account the external contamination limits of 4.1.9.1.2. 6.4.10.4 A package shall be so designed that there will be no rupture of the containment system following performance of the enhanced water immersion test specified in 6.4.18.

6.4.11 Provisions for packages containing fissile material

6.4.11.1 Fissile material shall be transported so as to: (a) maintain subcriticality during normal and accident conditions of transport; in particular, the following contingencies shall be considered: (i) water leaking into or out of packages; (ii) the loss of efficiency of built-in neutron absorbers or moderators; (iii) rearrangement of the contents either within the package or as a result of loss from the package; (iv) reduction of spaces within or between packages; (v) packages becoming immersed in water or buried in snow; and (vi) temperature changes; and (b) meet the provisions: (i) of 6.4.7.2 for packages containing fissile material;

394 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

412

Bilaga 1

Chapter 6.4 – Construction, testing and approval of packages and material of class 7

(ii) prescribed elsewhere in this Code which pertain to the radioactive properties of the material; and (iii) specified in 6.4.11.3–6.4.11.12, unless excepted by 6.4.11.2. 6.4.11.2 Fissile material meeting one of the provisions .1 to .4 of 2.7.2.3.5 is excepted from the requirement to be transported in packages that comply with 6.4.11.3–6.4.11.12 as well as the other provisions of this Code that apply to fissile material. Only one type of exception is allowed per consignment. 6.4.11.3 Where the chemical or physical form, isotopic composition, mass or concentration, moderation ratio or density, or geometric configuration is not known, the assessments of 6.4.11.7–6.4.11.12 shall be performed assuming that each parameter that is not known has the value which gives the maximum neutron multiplication consistent with the known conditions and parameters in these assessments. 6.4.11.4 For irradiated nuclear fuel, the assessments of 6.4.11.7–6.4.11.12 shall be based on an isotopic composition demonstrated to provide: (a) the maximum neutron multiplication during the irradiation history, or (b) a conservative estimate of the neutron multiplication for the package assessments. After irradiation, but prior to shipment, a measurement shall be performed to confirm the conservatism of the isotopic composition. 6.4.11.5 The package, after being subjected to the tests specified in 6.4.15, shall: (a) Preserve the minimum overall outside dimensions of the package to at least 10 cm; and (b) Prevent the entry of a 10 cm cube. 6.4.11.6 The package shall be designed for an ambient temperature range of –40°C to +38°C unless the competent authority specifies otherwise in the certificate of approval for the package design. 6.4.11.7 For a package in isolation, it shall be assumed that water can leak into or out of all void spaces of the package, including those within the containment system. However, if the design incorporates special features to prevent such leakage of water into or out of certain void spaces, even as a result of error, absence of leakage may be assumed in respect of those void spaces. Special features shall include the following: (a) Multiple high-standard water barriers, not less than two of which would remain watertight if the package were subject to the tests prescribed in 6.4.11.12(b), a high degree of quality control in the manufacture, maintenance and repair of packagings and tests to demonstrate the closure of each package before each shipment; or (b) For packages containing uranium hexafluoride only, with maximum enrichment of 5 mass percent uranium-235: (i) packages where, following the tests prescribed in 6.4.11.12(b), there is no physical contact between the valve and any other component of the packaging other than at its original point of attachment and where, in addition, following the test prescribed in 6.4.17.3, the valves remain leaktight; and (ii) a high degree of quality control in the manufacture, maintenance and repair of packagings coupled with tests to demonstrate closure of each package before each shipment. 6.4.11.8 It shall be assumed that the confinement system is closely reflected by at least 20 cm of water or such greater reflection as may additionally be provided by the surrounding material of the packaging. However, when it can be demonstrated that the confinement system remains within the packaging following the tests prescribed in 6.4.11.12(b), close reflection of the package by at least 20 cm of water may be assumed in 6.4.11.9(c). 6.4.11.9 The package shall be subcritical under the conditions of 6.4.11.7 and 6.4.11.8 and with the package conditions that result in the maximum neutron multiplication consistent with: (a) routine conditions of transport (incident-free); (b) the tests specified in 6.4.11.11(b); (c) the tests specified in 6.4.11.12(b). 6.4.11.10 For packages to be transported by air: (a) the package shall be subcritical under conditions consistent with the Type C package tests specified in 6.4.20.1 assuming reflection by at least 20 cm of water but no water in-leakage; and (b) in the assessment of 6.4.11.9, allowance shall not be made for special features of 6.4.11.7 unless, following the Type C package tests specified in 6.4.20.1 and, subsequently, the water in-leakage test of 6.4.19.3, leakage of water into or out of the void spaces is prevented.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 395

413

Bilaga 1

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc.

6.4.11.11 A number “N” shall be derived, such that five times “N” packages shall be subcritical for the arrangement and package conditions that provide the maximum neutron multiplication consistent with the following: (a) there shall not be anything between the packages, and the package arrangement shall be reflected on all sides by at least 20 cm of water; and (b) the state of the packages shall be their assessed or demonstrated condition if they had been subjected to the tests specified in 6.4.15.

6.4.11.12 A number “N” shall be derived, such that two times “N” packages shall be subcritical for the arrangement and package conditions that provide the maximum neutron multiplication consistent with the following: (a) hydrogenous moderation between packages, and the package arrangement reflected on all sides by at least 20 cm of water; and (b) the tests specified in 6.4.15 followed by whichever of the following is the more limiting: (i) the tests specified in 6.4.17.2(b) and either 6.4.17.2(c), for packages having a mass not greater than 3 500 kg and an overall density not greater than 1000 kg/m based on the external dimensions, or 6.4.17.2(a), for all other packages; followed by the test specified in 6.4.17.3 and completed by the tests specified in 6.4.19.1–6.4.19.3; or (ii) the test specified in 6.4.17.4; and (c) where any part of the fissile material escapes from the containment system following the tests specified in 6.4.11.12(b), it shall be assumed that fissile material escapes from each package in the array and all of the fissile material shall be arranged in the configuration and moderation that results in the maximum neutron multiplication with close reflection by at least 20 cm of water.

6.4.11.13 The criticality safety index (CSI) for packages containing fissile material shall be obtained by dividing the number 50 by the smaller of the two values of N derived in 6.4.11.11 and 6.4.11.12 (i.e., CSI = 50/N). The value of the criticality safety index may be zero, provided that an unlimited number of packages is subcritical (i.e., N is effectively equal to infinity in both cases).

6.4.12 Test procedures and demonstration of compliance

6.4.12.1 Demonstration of compliance with the performance standards required in 2.7.2.3.1.3, 2.7.2.3.1.4, 2.7.2.3.3.1, 2.7.2.3.3.2, 2.7.2.3.4.1, 2.7.2.3.4.2 and 6.4.2–6.4.11 shall be accomplished by any of the methods listed below or by a combination thereof. (a) Performance of tests with specimens representing LSA-III material, or special form radioactive material, or low dispersible radioactive material or with prototypes or samples of the packaging, where the contents of the specimen or the packaging for the tests shall simulate as closely as practicable the expected range of radioactive contents and the specimen or packaging to be tested shall be prepared as presented for transport. (b) Reference to previous satisfactory demonstrations of a sufficiently similar nature. (c) Performance of tests with models of appropriate scale incorporating those features which are significant with respect to the item under investigation when engineering experience has shown results of such tests to be suitable for design purposes. When a scale model is used, the need for adjusting certain test parameters, such as penetrator diameter or compressive load, shall be taken into account. (d) Calculation, or reasoned argument, when the calculation procedures and parameters are generally agreed to be reliable or conservative.

6.4.12.2 After the specimen, prototype or sample has been subjected to the tests, appropriate methods of assessment shall be used to assure that the provisions of this chapter have been fulfilled in compliance with the performance and acceptance standards prescribed in this chapter (see 2.7.2.3.1.3, 2.7.2.3.1.4, 2.7.2.3.3.1, 2.7.2.3.3.2, 2.7.2.3.4.1, 2.7.2.3.4.2 and 6.4.2–6.4.11).

6.4.12.3 All specimens shall be inspected before testing in order to identify and record faults or damage, including the following: (a) divergence from the design; (b) defects in manufacture; (c) corrosion or other deterioration; and (d) distortion of features.

The containment system of the package shall be clearly specified. The external features of the specimen shall be clearly identified so that reference may be made simply and clearly to any part of such specimen.

396 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

414

Bilaga 1

Chapter 6.4 – Construction, testing and approval of packages and material of class 7

6.4.13 Testing the integrity of the containment system and shielding and evaluating criticality safety

After each of the applicable tests specified in 6.4.15–6.4.21: (a) faults and damage shall be identified and recorded; (b) it shall be determined whether the integrity of the containment system and shielding has been retained to the extent required in this chapter for the package under test; and (c) for packages containing fissile material, it shall be determined whether the assumptions and conditions used in the assessments required by 6.4.11.1–6.4.11.13 for one or more packages are valid.

6.4.14 Target for drop tests

The target for the drop tests specified in 2.7.2.3.3.5, 6.4.15.4, 6.4.16(a), 6.4.17.2 and 6.4.20.2 shall be a flat, horizontal surface of such a character that any increase in its resistance to displacement or deformation upon impact by the specimen would not significantly increase the damage to the specimen.

6.4.15 Test for demonstrating ability to withstand normal conditions of transport

6.4.15.1 The tests are: the water spray test, the free drop test, the stacking test and the penetration test. Specimens of the package shall be subjected to the free drop test, the stacking test and the penetration test, preceded in each case by the water spray test. One specimen may be used for all the tests, provided that the provisions of 6.4.15.2 are fulfilled. 6.4.15.2 The time interval between the conclusion of the water spray test and the succeeding test shall be such that the water has soaked in to the maximum extent, without appreciable drying of the exterior of the specimen. In the absence of any evidence to the contrary, this interval shall be taken to be two hours if the water spray is applied from four directions simultaneously. No time interval shall elapse, however, if the water spray is applied from each of the four directions consecutively. 6.4.15.3 Water spray test: The specimen shall be subjected to a water spray test that simulates exposure to rainfall of approximately 5 cm per hour for at least one hour. 6.4.15.4 Free drop test: The specimen shall drop onto the target so as to suffer maximum damage in respect of the safety features to be tested. (a) The height of drop measured from the lowest point of the specimen to the upper surface of the target shall be not less than the distance specified in the table hereunder for the applicable mass. The target shall be as defined in 6.4.14. (b) For rectangular fibreboard or wood packages not exceeding a mass of 50 kg, a separate specimen shall be subjected to a free drop onto each corner from a height of 0.3 m. (c) For cylindrical fibreboard packages not exceeding a mass of 100 kg, a separate specimen shall be subjected to a free drop onto each of the quarters of each rim from a height of 0.3 m.

Free drop distance for testing packages to normal conditions of transport Package mass (kg) Free drop distance (m) Package mass < 5000 1.2 5000 ≤ Package mass < 10000 0.9 10000 ≤ Package mass < 15000 0.6 15000 ≤ Package mass 0.3

6.4.15.5 Stacking test: Unless the shape of the packaging effectively prevents stacking, the specimen shall be subjected, for a period of 24 hours, to a compressive load equal to the greater of the following: (a) A total weight equal to 5 times the maximum weight of the package; and (b) The equivalent of 13 kPa multiplied by the vertically projected area of the package. The load shall be applied uniformly to two opposite sides of the specimen, one of which shall be the base on which the package would typically rest.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 397

415

Bilaga 1

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc.

6.4.15.6 Penetration test: The specimen shall be placed on a rigid, flat, horizontal surface which will not move significantly while the test is being carried out. (a) A bar of 3.2 cm in diameter with a hemispherical end and a mass of 6 kg shall be dropped and directed to fall, with its longitudinal axis vertical, onto the centre of the weakest part of the specimen, so that, if it penetrates sufficiently far, it will hit the containment system. The bar shall not be significantly deformed by the test performance. (b) The height of drop of the bar measured from its lower end to the intended point of impact on the upper surface of the specimen shall be 1 m.

6.4.16 Additional tests for Type A packages designed for liquids and gases

A specimen or separate specimens shall be subjected to each of the following tests unless it can be demonstrated that one test is more severe for the specimen in question than the other, in which case one specimen shall be subjected to the more severe test. (a) Free drop test: The specimen shall drop onto the target so as to suffer the maximum damage in respect of containment. The height of the drop measured from the lowest part of the specimen to the upper surface of the target shall be 9 m. The target shall be as defined in 6.4.14. (b) Penetration test: The specimen shall be subjected to the test specified in 6.4.15.6 except that the height of drop shall be increased to 1.7 m from the 1 m specified in 6.4.15.6(b).

6.4.17 Tests for demonstrating ability to withstand accident conditions of transport

6.4.17.1 The specimen shall be subjected to the cumulative effects of the tests specified in 6.4.17.2 and 6.4.17.3, in that order. Following these tests, either this specimen or a separate specimen shall be subjected to the effect(s) of the water immersion test(s) as specified in 6.4.17.4 and, if applicable, 6.4.18. 6.4.17.2 Mechanical test: The mechanical test consists of three different drop tests. Each specimen shall be subjected to the applicable drops as specified in 6.4.8.8 or 6.4.11.12. The order in which the specimen is subjected to the drops shall be such that, on completion of the mechanical test, the specimen shall have suffered such damage as will lead to the maximum damage in the thermal test which follows. (a) For drop I, the specimen shall drop onto the target so as to suffer the maximum damage, and the height of the drop measured from the lowest point of the specimen to the upper surface of the target shall be 9 m. The target shall be as defined in 6.4.14. (b) For drop II, the specimen shall drop so as to suffer the maximum damage onto a bar rigidly mounted perpendicularly on the target. The height of the drop measured from the intended point of impact of the specimen to the upper surface of the bar shall be 1 m. The bar shall be of solid mild steel of circular section, (15.0±0.5) cm in diameter and 20 cm long unless a longer bar would cause greater damage, in which case a bar of sufficient length to cause maximum damage shall be used. The upper end of the bar shall be flat and horizontal with its edge rounded off to a radius of not more than 6 mm. The target on which the bar is mounted shall be as described in 6.4.14. (c) For drop III, the specimen shall be subjected to a dynamic crush test by positioning the specimen on the target so as to suffer maximum damage by the drop of a 500 kg mass from 9 m onto the specimen. The mass shall consist of a solid mild steel plate 1 m by 1 m and shall fall in a horizontal attitude. The height of the drop shall be measured from the underside of the plate to the highest point of the specimen. The target on which the specimen rests shall be as defined in 6.4.14. 6.4.17.3 Thermal test: The specimen shall be in thermal equilibrium under conditions of an ambient temperature of 38°C, subject to the solar insolation conditions specified in the table under 6.4.8.6 and subject to the design maximum rate of internal heat generation within the package from the radioactive contents. Alternatively, any of these parameters are allowed to have different values prior to and during the test, providing due account is taken of them in the subsequent assessment of package response. The thermal test shall then consist of: (a) exposure of a specimen for a period of 30 minutes to a thermal environment which provides a heat flux at least equivalent to that of a hydrocarbon fuel/air fire in sufficiently quiescent ambient conditions to give a minimum average flame emissivity coefficient of 0.9 and an average temperature of at least 800°C, fully engulfing the specimen, with a surface absorptivity coefficient of 0.8 or that value which the package may be demonstrated to possess if exposed to the fire specified, followed by; (b) exposure of the specimen to an ambient temperature of 38°C, subject to the solar insolation conditions specified in the table under 6.4.8.6 and subject to the design maximum rate of internal heat generation within the package by the radioactive contents, for a sufficient period to ensure that temperatures in the specimen are everywhere decreasing and/or are approaching initial steady-state conditions. Alternatively, any of these parameters are allowed to have different values following cessation of heating, providing due account is taken of them in the subsequent assessment of package response.

398 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

416

Bilaga 1

Chapter 6.4 – Construction, testing and approval of packages and material of class 7

During and following the test, the specimen shall not be artificially cooled and any combustion of materials of the specimen shall be permitted to proceed naturally.

6.4.17.4 Water immersion test: The specimen shall be immersed under a head of water of at least 15 m for a period of not less than eight hours in the attitude which will lead to maximum damage. For demonstration purposes, an external gauge pressure of at least 150 kPa shall be considered to meet these conditions.

6.4.18 Enhanced water immersion test for Type B(U) and Type B(M) packages

5

containing more than 10 A2 and Type C packages

Enhanced water immersion test: The specimen shall be immersed under a head of water of at least 200 m for a period of not less than one hour. For demonstration purposes, an external gauge pressure of at least 2 MPa shall be considered to meet these conditions.

6.4.19 Water leakage test for packages containing fissile material

6.4.19.1 Packages for which water in-leakage or out-leakage to the extent which results in greatest reactivity has been assumed for purposes of assessment under 6.4.11.7–6.4.11.12 shall be excepted from the test.

6.4.19.2 Before the specimen is subjected to the water leakage test specified below, it shall be subjected to the tests in 6.4.17.2(b), and either 6.4.17.2(a) or (c) as required by 6.4.11.12, and the test specified in 6.4.17.3.

6.4.19.3 The specimen shall be immersed under a head of water of at least 0.9 m for a period of not less than eight hours and in the attitude for which maximum leakage is expected.

6.4.20 Tests for Type C packages

6.4.20.1 Specimens shall be subjected to the effects of each of the following test sequences in the orders specified: (a) the tests specified in 6.4.17.2(a), 6.4.17.2(c), 6.4.20.2 and 6.4.20.3; and (b) the test specified in 6.4.20.4.

Separate specimens are allowed to be used for each of the sequences (a) and (b).

6.4.20.2 Puncture/tearing test: The specimen shall be subjected to the damaging effects of a solid probe made of mild steel. The orientation of the probe to the surface of the specimen shall be as to cause maximum damage at the conclusion of the test sequence specified in 6.4.20.1(a). (a) The specimen, representing a package having a mass less than 250 kg, shall be placed on a target and subjected to a probe having a mass of 250 kg falling from a height of 3 m above the intended impact point. For this test, the probe shall be a 20 cm diameter cylindrical bar with the striking end forming a frustum of a right circular cone with the following dimensions: 30 cm height and 2.5 cm in diameter at the top with its edge rounded off to a radius of not more than 6 mm. The target on which the specimen is placed shall be as specified in 6.4.14. (b) For packages having a mass of 250 kg or more, the base of the probe shall be placed on a target and the specimen dropped onto the probe. The height of the drop, measured from the point of impact with the specimen to the upper surface of the probe, shall be 3 m. For this test, the probe shall have the same properties and dimensions as specified in (a) above, except that the length and mass of the probe shall be such as to incur maximum damage to the specimen. The target on which the base of the probe is placed shall be as specified in 6.4.14.

6.4.20.3 Enhanced thermal test: The conditions for this test shall be as specified in 6.4.17.3, except that the exposure to the thermal environment shall be for a period of 60 minutes.

6.4.20.4 Impact test: The specimen shall be subject to an impact on a target at a velocity of not less than 90 m/s, at such an orientation as to suffer maximum damage. The target shall be as defined in 6.4.14, except that the target surface may be at any orientation provided that the surface is normal to the specimen path.

6.4.21 Tests for packagings designed to contain uranium hexafluoride

Specimens that comprise or simulate packagings designed to contain 0.1 kg or more of uranium hexafluoride shall be tested hydraulically at an internal pressure of at least 1.38 MPa but, when the test pressure is less than 2.76 MPa, the design will require multilateral approval. For retesting packagings, any other equivalent non-destructive testing may be applied, subject to multilateral approval.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 399

417

Bilaga 1

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc.

6.4.22 Approvals of package designs and materials

6.4.22.1 The approval of designs for packages containing 0.1 kg or more of uranium hexafluoride requires that: (a) Each design that meets the provisions of 6.4.6.4 shall require multilateral approval; (b) Each design that meets the provisions of 6.4.6.1 to 6.4.6.3 shall require unilateral approval by the competent authority of the country of origin of the design, unless multilateral approval is otherwise required by this Code. 6.4.22.2 Each Type B(U) and Type C package design will require unilateral approval, except that: (a) a package design for fissile material which is also subject to 6.4.22.4, 6.4.23.7 and 5.1.5.2.1 will require multilateral approval; and (b) a Type B(U) package design for low dispersible radioactive material will require multilateral approval. 6.4.22.3 Each Type B(M) package design, including those for fissile material which are also subject to 6.4.22.4, 6.4.23.7 and 5.1.5.2.1 and those for low dispersible radioactive material, will require multilateral approval. 6.4.22.4 Each package design for fissile material which is not excepted according to 6.4.11.2 from the provisions that apply specifically to packages containing fissile material will require multilateral approval. 6.4.22.5 The design for special form radioactive material will require unilateral approval. The design for low dispersible radioactive material will require multilateral approval (see also 6.4.23.8).

6.4.23 Applications for approval and approvals for radioactive material transport

6.4.23.1 [Reserved] 6.4.23.2 An application for shipment approval shall include: (a) the period of time, related to the shipment, for which the approval is sought; (b) the actual radioactive contents, the expected modes of transport, the type of conveyance, and the probable or proposed route; and (c) the details of how the precautions and administrative or operational controls referred to in the package design approval certificates issued under 5.1.5.2.1 are to be put into effect. 6.4.23.3 An application for approval of shipments under special arrangement shall include all the information necessary to satisfy the competent authority that the overall level of safety in transport is at least equivalent to that which would be provided if all the applicable provisions of this Code had been met. The application shall also include: (a) a statement of the respects in which, and of the reasons why, the shipment cannot be made in full accordance with the applicable provisions; and (b) a statement of any special precautions or special administrative or operational controls which are to be employed during transport to compensate for the failure to meet the applicable provisions. 6.4.23.4 An application for approval of Type B(U) or Type C package design shall include: (a) a detailed description of the proposed radioactive contents with reference to their physical and chemical states and the nature of the radiation emitted; (b) a detailed statement of the design, including complete engineering drawings and schedules of materials and methods of manufacture; (c) a statement of the tests which have been done and their results, or evidence based on calculative methods or other evidence that the design is adequate to meet the applicable provisions; (d) the proposed operating and maintenance instructions for the use of the packaging; (e) if the package is designed to have a maximum normal operating pressure in excess of 100 kPa gauge, a specification of the materials of manufacture of the containment system, the samples to be taken, and the tests to be made; (f) where the proposed radioactive contents are irradiated fuel, a statement and a justification of any assumption in the safety analysis relating to the characteristics of the fuel and a description of any pre-shipment measurement required by 6.4.11.4(b); (g) any special stowage provisions necessary to ensure the safe dissipation of heat from the package, considering the various modes of transport to be used and type of conveyance or freight container; (h) a reproducible illustration, not larger than 21 cm by 30 cm, showing the make-up of the package; and (i) a specification of the applicable quality-assurance programme as required in 1.5.3.1.

400 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

418

Bilaga 1

Chapter 6.4 – Construction, testing and approval of packages and material of class 7

6.4.23.5 An application for approval of a Type B(M) package design shall include, in addition to the information required in 6.4.23.4 for Type B(U) packages: (a) a list of the provisions specified in 6.4.7.5, 6.4.8.4, 6.4.8.5, 6.4.8.6 and 6.4.8.9–6.4.8.15 with which the package does not conform; (b) any proposed supplementary operational controls to be applied during transport not regularly provided for in this Code, but which are necessary to ensure the safety of the package or to compensate for the deficiencies listed in (a) above; (c) a statement relative to any restrictions on the mode of transport and to any special loading, carriage, unloading or handling procedures; and (d) the range of ambient conditions (temperature, solar radiation) which are expected to be encountered during transport and which have been taken into account in the design. 6.4.23.6 The application for approval of designs for packages containing 0.1 kg or more of uranium hexafluoride shall include all information necessary to satisfy the competent authority that the design meets the provisions of 6.4.6.1, and a specification of the applicable quality-assurance programme as required by 1.5.3.1. 6.4.23.7 An application for a fissile package approval shall include all information necessary to satisfy the competent authority that the design meets the provisions of 6.4.11.1, and a specification of the applicable qualityassurance programme as required in 1.5.3.1. 6.4.23.8 An application for approval of design for special form radioactive material and design for low dispersible radioactive material shall include: (a) a detailed description of the radioactive material or, if a capsule, the contents; particular reference shall be made to both physical and chemical states; (b) a detailed statement of the design of any capsule to be used; (c) a statement of the tests which have been done and their results, or evidence based on calculative methods to show that the radioactive material is capable of meeting the performance standards, or other evidence that the special form radioactive material or low dispersible radioactive material meets the applicable provisions of this Code; (d) a specification of the applicable quality-assurance programme as required in 1.5.3.1; and (e) any proposed pre-shipment actions for use in the consignment of special form radioactive material or low dispersible radioactive material. 6.4.23.9 Each approval certificate issued by a competent authority shall be assigned an identification mark. The mark shall be of the following generalized type: VRI/number/type code (a) Except as provided in 6.4.23.10(b), “VRI” represents the international vehicle registration identification * code of the country issuing the certificate. (b) The number shall be assigned by the competent authority, and shall be unique and specific with regard to the particular design or shipment. The shipment approval identification mark shall be clearly related to the design approval identification mark. (c) The following type codes shall be used, in the order listed, to indicate the types of approval certificates issued: AF Type A package design for fissile material B(U) Type B(U) package design (“B(U)F” if for fissile material) B(M) Type B(M) package design (“B(M)F” if for fissile material) C Type C package design (“CF” if for fissile material) IF industrial package design for fissile material S special form radioactive material LD low dispTeersible radioactive material T shipment X special arrangement. In the case of package designs for non-fissile or fissile excepted uranium hexafluoride, where none of the above codes apply, then the following type codes shall be used: H(U) unilateral approval H(M) multilateral approval

* See Convention on Road Traffic, Vienna, 1968.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 401

419

Bilaga 1

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc.

(d) For package design and special form radioactive material approval certificates, other than those issued under the provisions of 6.4.24.2–6.4.24.4, and for low dispersible radioactive material approval certificates, the symbols “-96” shall be added to the type code.

6.4.23.10 These type codes shall be applied as follows: (a) Each certificate and each package shall bear the appropriate identification mark, comprising the symbols prescribed in 6.4.23.9(a), (b), (c) and (d) above, except that, for packages, only the applicable design type codes, including, if applicable, the symbols ‘-96’, shall appear following the second stroke; that is, the ‘T’ or ‘X’ shall not appear in the identification marking on the package. Where the design approval and shipment approval are combined, the applicable type codes do not need to be repeated. For example: A/132/B(M)F-96: A Type B(M) package design approved for fissile material, requiring multilateral approval, for which the competent authority of Austria has assigned the design number 132 (to be marked on both the package and on the package design approval certificate); A/132/B(M)F-96T: The shipment approval issued for a package bearing the identification mark elaborated above (to be marked on the certificate only); A/137/X: A special arrangement approval issued by the competent authority of Austria, to which the number 137 has been assigned (to be marked on the certificate only); A/139/IF-96: An Industrial package design for fissile material approved by the competent authority of Austria, to which package design number 139 has been assigned (to be marked on both the package and on the package design approval certificate); and A/145/H(U)-96: A package design for fissile excepted uranium hexafluoride approved by the competent authority of Austria, to which package design number 145 has been assigned (to be marked on both the package and on the package design approval certificate); (b) Where multilateral approval is effected by validation according to 6.4.23.16, only the identification mark issued by the country of origin of the design or shipment shall be used. Where multilateral approval is effected by issue of certificates by successive countries, each certificate shall bear the appropriate identification mark and the package whose design was so approved shall bear all appropriate identification marks. For example: A/132/B(M)F-96 CH/28/B(M)F-96 would be the identification mark of a package which was originally approved by Austria and was subsequently approved, by separate certificate, by Switzerland. Additional identification marks would be tabulated in a similar manner on the package; (c) The revision of a certificate shall be indicated by a parenthetical expression following the identification mark on the certificate. For example, A/132/B(M)F-96(Rev.2) would indicate revision 2 of the Austrian package design approval certificate; or A/132/B(M)F-96(Rev.0) would indicate the original issuance of the Austrian package design approval certificate. For original issuances, the parenthetical entry is optional and other words such as ‘original issuance’ may also be used in place of ‘Rev.0’. Certificate revision numbers may only be issued by the country issuing the original approval certificate; (d) Additional symbols (as may be necessitated by national provisions) may be added in parentheses to the end of the identification mark. For example, A/132/B(M)F-96(SP503); and (e) It is not necessary to alter the identification mark on the packaging each time that a revision to the design certificate is made. Such re-marking shall be required only in those cases where the revision to the package design certificate involves a change in the letter type codes for the package design following the second stroke.

6.4.23.11 Each approval certificate issued by a competent authority for special form radioactive material or low dispersible radioactive material shall include the following information: (a) Type of certificate. (b) The competent authority identification mark. (c) The issue date and an expiry date. (d) List of applicable national and international regulations, including the edition of the IAEA Regulations for the Safe Transport of Radioactive Material under which the special form radioactive material or low dispersible radioactive material is approved. (e) The identification of the special form radioactive material or low dispersible radioactive material. (f) A description of the special form radioactive material or low dispersible radioactive material. (g) Design specifications for the special form radioactive material or low dispersible radioactive material, which may include references to drawings. (h) A specification of the radioactive contents which includes the activities involved and which may include the physical and chemical form.

402 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

420

Bilaga 1

Chapter 6.4 – Construction, testing and approval of packages and material of class 7

(i) A specification of the applicable quality-assurance programme as required in 1.5.3.1. (j) Reference to information provided by the applicant relating to specific actions to be taken prior to shipment. (k) If deemed appropriate by the competent authority, reference to the identity of the applicant. (l) Signature and identification of the certifying official. 6.4.23.12 Each approval certificate issued by a competent authority for a special arrangement shall include the following information: (a) Type of certificate. (b) The competent authority identification mark. (c) The issue date and an expiry date. (d) Mode(s) of transport. (e) Any restrictions on the modes of transport, type of conveyance, freight container, and any necessary routeing instructions. (f) List of applicable national and international regulations, including the edition of the IAEA Regulations for the Safe Transport of Radioactive Material under which the special arrangement is approved. (g) The following statement: “This certificate does not relieve the consignor from compliance with any requirement of the government of any country through or into which the package will be transported.” (h) References to certificates for alternative radioactive contents, other competent authority validation, or additional technical data or information, as deemed appropriate by the competent authority. (i) Description of the packaging by a reference to the drawings or a specification of the design. If deemed appropriate by the competent authority, a reproducible illustration, not larger than 21 cm by 30 cm, showing the make-up of the package shall also be provided, accompanied by a brief description of the packaging, including materials of manufacture, gross mass, general outside dimensions and appearance. (j) A specification of the authorized radioactive contents, including any restrictions on the radioactive contents which might not be obvious from the nature of the packaging. This shall include the physical and chemical forms, the activities involved (including those of the various isotopes, if appropriate), amounts in grams (for fissile material or for each fissile nuclide when appropriate), and whether special form radioactive material or low dispersible radioactive material, if applicable. (k) Additionally, for packages containing fissile material: (i) a detailed description of the authorized radioactive contents; (ii) the value of the criticality safety index; (iii) reference to the documentation that demonstrates the criticality safety of the contents; (iv) any special features, on the basis of which the absence of water from certain void spaces has been assumed in the criticality assessment; (v) any allowance (based on 6.4.11.4(b)) for a change in neutron multiplication assumed in the criticality assessment as a result of actual irradiation experience; and (vi) the ambient temperature range for which the special arrangement has been approved. (l) A detailed listing of any supplementary operational controls required for preparation, loading, carriage, unloading and handling of the consignment, including any special stowage provisions for the safe dissipation of heat. (m) If deemed appropriate by the competent authority, reasons for the special arrangement. (n) Description of the compensatory measures to be applied as a result of the shipment being under special arrangement. (o) Reference to information provided by the applicant relating to the use of the packaging or specific actions to be taken prior to the shipment. (p) A statement regarding the ambient conditions assumed for purposes of design if these are not in accordance with those specified in 6.4.8.5, 6.4.8.6 and 6.4.8.15, as applicable. (q) Any emergency arrangements deemed necessary by the competent authority. (r) A specification of the applicable quality-assurance programme as required in 1.5.3.1. (s) If deemed appropriate by the competent authority, reference to the identity of the applicant and to the identity of the carrier. (t) Signature and identification of the certifying official.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 403

421

Bilaga 1

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc.

6.4.23.13 Each approval certificate for a shipment issued by a competent authority shall include the following information: (a) Type of certificate. (b) The competent authority identification mark(s). (c) The issue date and an expiry date. (d) List of applicable national and international regulations, including the edition of the IAEA Regulations for the Safe Transport of Radioactive Material under which the shipment is approved. (e) Any restrictions on the modes of transport, type of conveyance, freight container, and any necessary routeing instructions. (f) The following statement: “This certificate does not relieve the consignor from compliance with any requirement of the government of any country through or into which the package will be transported.” (g) A detailed listing of any supplementary operational controls required for preparation, loading, carriage, unloading and handling of the consignment, including any special stowage provisions for the safe dissipation of heat or maintenance of criticality safety. (h) Reference to information provided by the applicant relating to specific actions to be taken prior to shipment. (i) Reference to the applicable design approval certificate(s). (j) A specification of the actual radioactive contents, including any restrictions on the radioactive contents which might not be obvious from the nature of the packaging. This shall include the physical and chemical forms, the total activities involved (including those of the various isotopes, if appropriate), amounts in grams (for fissile material or for each fissile nuclide when appropriate), and whether special form radioactive material or low dispersible radioactive material, if applicable. (k) Any emergency arrangements deemed necessary by the competent authority. (l) A specification of the applicable quality-assurance programme as required in 1.5.3.1. (m) If deemed appropriate by the competent authority, reference to the identity of the applicant. (n) Signature and identification of the certifying official. 6.4.23.14 Each approval certificate of the design of a package issued by a competent authority shall include the following information: (a) Type of certificate. (b) The competent authority identification mark. (c) The issue date and an expiry date. (d) Any restriction on the modes of transport, if appropriate. (e) List of applicable national and international regulations, including the edition of the IAEA Regulations for the Safe Transport of Radioactive Material under which the design is approved. (f) The following statement: “This certificate does not relieve the consignor from compliance with any requirement of the government of any country through or into which the package will be transported.” (g) References to certificates for alternative radioactive contents, other competent authority validation, or additional technical data or information, as deemed appropriate by the competent authority. (h) A statement authorizing shipment where shipment approval is required under 5.1.5.1.2, if deemed appropriate. (i) Identification of the packaging. (j) Description of the packaging by a reference to the drawings or specification of the design. If deemed appropriate by the competent authority, a reproducible illustration, not larger than 21 cm by 30 cm, showing the make-up of the package shall also be provided, accompanied by a brief description of the packaging, including materials of manufacture, gross mass, general outside dimensions and appearance. (k) Specification of the design by reference to the drawings. (l) A specification of the authorized radioactive content, including any restrictions on the radioactive contents which might not be obvious from the nature of the packaging. This shall include the physical and chemical forms, the activities involved (including those of the various isotopes, if appropriate), amounts in grams (for fissile material or for each fissile nuclide when appropriate), and whether special form radioactive material or low dispersible radioactive material, if applicable. (m) A description of the containment system; (n) Additionally, for packages containing fissile material: (i) a detailed description of the authorized radioactive contents; (ii) a description of the confinement system; (iii) the value of the criticality safety index;

404 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

422

Bilaga 1

Chapter 6.4 – Construction, testing and approval of packages and material of class 7

(iv) reference to the documentation that demonstrates the criticality safety of the contents; (v) any special features, on the basis of which the absence of water from certain void spaces has been assumed in the criticality assessment; (vi) any allowance (based on 6.4.11.4(b)) for a change in neutron multiplication assumed in the criticality assessment as a result of actual irradiation experience; and (vii) the ambient temperature range for which the package design has been approved. (o) For Type B(M) packages, a statement specifying those prescriptions of 6.4.7.5, 6.4.8.4, 6.4.8.5, 6.4.8.6 and 6.4.8.9–6.4.8.15 with which the package does not conform and any amplifying information which may be useful to other competent authorities. (p) For packages containing more than 0.1 kg of uranium hexafluoride, a statement specifying those prescriptions of 6.4.6.4 that apply, if any, and any amplifying information which may be useful to other competent authorities. (q) A detailed listing of any supplementary operational controls required for preparation, loading, carriage, unloading and handling of the consignment, including any special stowage provisions for the safe dissipation of heat. (r) Reference to information provided by the applicant relating to the use of the packaging or specific actions to be taken prior to shipment. (s) A statement regarding the ambient conditions assumed for purposes of design if these are not in accordance with those specified in 6.4.8.5, 6.4.8.6 and 6.4.8.15, as applicable. (t) A specification of the applicable quality-assurance programme as required in 1.5.3.1. (u) Any emergency arrangements deemed necessary by the competent authority. (v) If deemed appropriate by the competent authority, reference to the identity of the applicant. (w) Signature and identification of the certifying official.

6.4.23.15 The competent authority shall be informed of the serial number of each packaging manufactured to a design approved under 6.4.22.2, 6.4.22.3, 6.4.22.4, 6.4.24.2 and 6.4.24.3.

6.4.23.16 Multilateral approval may be by validation of the original certificate issued by the competent authority of the country of origin of the design or shipment. Such validation may take the form of an endorsement on the original certificate or the issuance of a separate endorsement, annex, supplement, etc., by the competent authority of the country through or into which the shipment is made.

6.4.24 Transitional measures for class 7

Packages not requiring competent authority approval of design under the 1985 and

1985 (as amended 1990) editions of IAEA Safety Series No. 6

6.4.24.1 Excepted packages, Type IP-1, Type IP-2 and Type IP-3 and Type A packages that did not require approval of design by the competent authority and which meet the provisions of the 1985 or 1985 (as amended 1990) editions of IAEA Regulations for the Safe Transport of Radioactive Material (IAEA Safety Series No. 6) may continue to be used, subject to the mandatory programme of quality assurance in accordance with the provisions of 1.5.3.1 and the activity limits and material restrictions of 2.7.2.2, 2.7.2.4.1, 2.7.2.4.4, 2.7.2.4.5, 2.7.2.4.6 and 4.1.9.3. Any packaging modified, unless to improve safety, or manufactured after 31 December 2003 shall meet the provisions of this Code in full. Packages prepared for transport not later than 31 December 2003 under the 1985 or 1985 (as amended 1990) editions of IAEA Safety Series No. 6 may continue in transport. Packages prepared for transport after this date shall meet the provisions of this Code in full.

Packages approved under the 1973, 1973 (as amended), 1985 and 1985 (as amended 1990) editions of IAEA Safety Series No. 6

6.4.24.2 Packagings manufactured to a package design approved by the competent authority under the provisions of the 1973 or 1973 (as amended) editions of IAEA Safety Series No. 6 may continue to be used, subject to: multilateral approval of package design; the mandatory programme of quality assurance in accordance with the applicable provisions of 1.5.3.1; the activity limits and material restrictions of 2.7.2.2, 2.7.2.4.1, 2.7.2.4.4, 2.7.2.4.5, 2.7.2.4.6 and 4.1.9.3; and, for a package containing fissile material and transported by air, the requirement of 6.4.11.10 shall be met. No new manufacture of such packaging shall be permitted to commence. Changes in the design of the packaging or in the nature or quantity of the authorized radioactive contents which, as determined by the competent authority, would significantly affect safety shall require that the provisions of this Code be met in full. A serial number according to the provision of 5.2.1.5.5 shall be assigned to and marked on the outside of each packaging.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 405

423

Bilaga 1

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc.

6.4.24.3 Packagings manufactured to a package design approved by the competent authority under the provisions of the 1985 or 1985 (as amended 1990) editions of IAEA Safety Series No. 6 may continue to be used, subject to: the multilateral approval of package design; the mandatory programme of quality assurance in accordance with the provisions of 1.5.3.1; the activity limits and material restrictions of 2.7.2.2, 2.7.2.4.1, 2.7.2.4.4, 2.7.2.4.5, 2.7.2.4.6 and 4.1.9.3; and, for a package containing fissile material and transported by air, the requirement of 6.4.11.10 shall be met. Changes in the design of the packaging or in the nature or quantity of the authorized radioactive contents which, as determined by the competent authority, would significantly affect safety shall require that the provisions of this Code be met in full. All packagings for which manufacture begins after 31 December 2006 shall meet the provisions of this Code in full.

Special form radioactive material approved under the 1973, 1973 (as amended), 1985 and

1985 (as amended 1990) editions of IAEA Safety Series No. 6

6.4.24.4 Special form radioactive material manufactured to a design which had received unilateral approval by the competent authority under the 1973, 1973 (as amended), 1985 or 1985 (as amended 1990) editions of IAEA Safety Series No. 6 may continue to be used when in compliance with the mandatory programme of quality assurance in accordance with the applicable provisions of 1.5.3.1. All special form radioactive material manufactured after 31 December 2003 shall meet the provisions of this Code in full.

406 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

424

Bilaga 1

Chapter 6.5

Provisions for the construction and testing of intermediate bulk containers (IBCs)

6.5.1 General requirements

6.5.1.1 Scope

6.5.1.1.1 The provisions of this chapter apply to IBCs intended for the transport of certain dangerous substances and materials. 6.5.1.1.2 IBCs and their service equipment not conforming strictly to the provisions herein, but conforming to acceptable alternatives, may be considered by the competent authority concerned for approval. In order to take into account progress in science and technology, the use of alternative arrangements which offer at least an equivalent degree of safety in transport in respect of compatibility with the substances to be loaded therein and an equivalent or superior resistance to handling impact, and fire, may be considered by the competent authority concerned. 6.5.1.1.3 The construction, equipment, testing, marking and operation of IBCs shall be subject to acceptance by the competent authority of the country in which the IBCs are approved. 6.5.1.1.4 Manufacturers and subsequent distributors of IBCs shall provide information regarding procedures to be followed and a description of the types and dimensions of closures (including required gaskets) and any other components needed to ensure that IBCs as presented for transport are capable of passing the applicable performance tests of this chapter.

6.5.1.2 Definitions

Body (for all categories of IBCs other than composite IBCs) means the receptacle proper, including openings and their closures, but does not include service equipment; Handling device (for flexible IBCs) means any sling, loop, eye or frame attached to the body of the IBC or formed from a continuation of the IBC body material; Maximum permissible gross mass means the mass of the IBC and any service or structural equipment together with the maximum net mass; Plastics material, when used in connection with inner receptacles for composite IBCs, is taken to include other polymeric materials such as rubber; Protected (for metal IBCs) means the IBC being provided with additional protection against impact, the protection taking the form of, for example, a multi-layer (sandwich) or double-wall construction or a frame with a metal latticework packaging; Service equipment means filling and discharge devices and, according to the category of IBC, pressure relief or venting, safety, heating and heat-insulating devices and measuring instruments; Structural equipment (for all categories of IBCs other than flexible IBCs) means the reinforcing, fastening, handling, protective or stabilizing members of the body, including the base pallet for composite IBCs with plastics inner receptacle, fibreboard and wooden IBCs; Woven plastics (for flexible IBCs) means a material made from stretched tapes or monofilaments of a suitable plastics material.

6.5.1.3 Categories of IBCs

6.5.1.3.1 Metal IBCs consist of a metal body together with appropriate service and structural equipment. 6.5.1.3.2 Flexible IBCs consist of a body constituted of film, woven fabric or any other flexible material or combinations thereof, and if necessary an inner coating or liner, together with any appropriate service equipment and handling devices. 6.5.1.3.3 Rigid plastics IBCs consist of a rigid plastics body, which may have structural equipment together with appropriate service equipment.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 407

425

Bilaga 1

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc.

6.5.1.3.4 Composite IBCs consist of structural equipment in the form of a rigid outer packaging enclosing a plastics inner receptacle together with any service or other structural equipment. The IBC is so constructed that the inner receptacle and outer packaging, once assembled, form, and are used as, an integrated single unit to be filled, stored, transported or emptied as such. 6.5.1.3.5 Fibreboard IBCs consist of a fibreboard body with or without separate top and bottom caps, if necessary, an inner liner (but no inner packagings) and appropriate service and structural equipment. 6.5.1.3.6 Wooden IBCs consist of a rigid or collapsible wooden body together with an inner liner (but no inner packagings) and appropriate service and structural equipment.

6.5.1.4 Designatory code system for IBCs

6.5.1.4.1 The code shall consist of two Arabic numerals as specified in .1 followed by one or more capital letters as specified in .2; followed, when specified in an individual section, by an Arabic numeral indicating the category of IBC. .1 For solids, filled or discharged under pressure of more Type by gravity For liquids than 10 kPa (0.1 bar) Rigid 11 21 31 Flexible 13 – –

.2 Materials A Steel (all types and surface treatments) B Aluminium C Natural wood D Plywood F Reconstituted wood G Fibreboard H Plastics material L Textile M Paper, multiwall N Metal (other than steel or aluminium) 6.5.1.4.2 For a composite IBC, two capital letters in Latin characters shall be used in sequence in the second position of the code. The first shall indicate the material of the inner receptacle of the IBC and the second that of the outer packaging of the IBC. 6.5.1.4.3 The following types and codes of IBCs are assigned: Material Category Code Paragraph Metal 6.5.5.1 A Steel for solids, filled or discharged by gravity 11A for solids, filled or discharged under pressure 21A for liquids 31A B Aluminium for solids, filled or discharged by gravity 11B for solids, filled or discharged under pressure 21B for liquids 31B N Other than steel for solids, filled or discharged by gravity 11N or aluminium for solids, filled or discharged under pressure 21N for liquids 31N Flexible 6.5.5.2 H Plastics woven plastics without coating or liner 13H1 woven plastics, coated 13H2 woven plastics with liner 13H3 woven plastics, coated and with liner 13H4 plastics film 13H5 L Textile without coating or liner 13L1 coated 13L2 with liner 13L3 coated and with liner 13L4

408 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

426

Bilaga 1

Chapter 6.5 – Construction and testing of intermediate bulk containers (IBCs)

Material Category Code Paragraph Flexible (continued) 6.5.5.2 M Paper multiwall 13M1 multiwall, water-resistant 13M2 H Rigid plastics for solids, filled or discharged by gravity, fitted with 11H1 6.5.5.3 structural equipment for solids, filled or discharged by gravity, freestanding 11H2 for solids, filled or discharged under pressure, fitted with 21H1 structural equipment for solids, filled or discharged under pressure, freestanding 21H2 for liquids, fitted with structural equipment 31H1 for liquids, freestanding 31H2 HZ Composite with plastics for solids, filled or discharged by gravity, with rigid plastics 11HZ1 6.5.5.4 inner receptacle* inner receptacle for solids, filled or discharged by gravity, with flexible 11HZ2 plastics inner receptacle for solids, filled or discharged under pressure, with rigid 21HZ1 plastics inner receptacle for solids, filled or discharged under pressure, with flexible 21HZ2 plastics inner receptacle for liquids, with rigid plastics inner receptacle 31HZ1 for liquids, with flexible plastics inner receptacle 31HZ2 G Fibreboard for solids, filled or discharged by gravity 11G 6.5.5.5 Wooden 6.5.5.6 C Natural wood for solids, filled or discharged by gravity, with inner liner 11C D Plywood for solids, filled or discharged by gravity, with inner liner 11D F Reconstituted wood for solids, filled or discharged by gravity, with inner liner 11F

* The code shall be completed by replacing the letter ‘Z’ by a capital letter in accordance with 6.5.1.4.1.2 to indicate the nature of the material used for the outer packaging.

6.5.1.4.4 The letter ‘W’ may follow the IBC code. The letter ‘W’ signifies that the IBC, although of the same type as indicated by the code, is manufactured to a specification different from those in section 6.5.3 and is considered equivalent in accordance with the provisions in 6.5.1.1.2.

6.5.2 Marking

6.5.2.1 Primary marking

6.5.2.1.1 Each IBC manufactured and intended for use according to these provisions shall bear durable markings which are legible and placed in a location so as to be readily visible. Letters, numbers and symbols shall be at least 12 mm high and shall show:

.1 the United Nations packaging symbol

This symbol shall not be used for any purpose other than certifying that a packaging, a flexible bulk container, a portable tank or a MEGC complies with the relevant requirements in Chapter 6.1, 6.2, 6.3, 6.5, 6.6, 6.7 or 6.9;

.2 the code designating the type of IBC according to 6.5.1.4;

.3 a capital letter designating the packing group(s) for which the design type has been approved:

“X” for packing groups I, II and III (IBCs for solids only);

“Y” for packing groups II and III; or “Z” for packing group III only;

.4 the month and year (last two digits) of manufacture;

.5 the State authorizing the allocation of the mark, indicated by the distinguishing sign for motor vehicles in international traffic;

.6 the name or symbol of the manufacturer and other identifications of the IBC as specified by the competent authority;

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 409

427

Bilaga 1

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc.

.7 the stacking test load* in kilograms. For IBCs not designed for stacking, the figure “0” shall be shown;

.8 the maximum permissible gross mass in kilograms.

The primary marking required above shall be applied in the sequence indicated in the subparagraphs .1 to .8 above. The additional marking required by 6.5.2.2 and any further marking authorized by a competent authority shall still enable the various parts of the mark to be correctly identified.

6.5.2.1.2 Examples of markings for various types of IBCs in accordance with .1 to .8 above:

11A/Y/02 99/ For a metal IBC for solids discharged by gravity and made from steel/ for NL/...* 007/ packing groups II and III/ manufactured in February 1999/ authorized by the 5500/1500 Netherlands/ manufactured by . . . *(name of manufacturer) and of a design type to which the competent authority has allocated serial number 007/ the stacking test load in kilograms/ and the maximum permissible gross mass in kilograms.

13H3/Z/03 01/ For a flexible IBC for solids discharged by gravity and made from woven F/...* 1713/ plastics with a liner/ not designed to be stacked. 0/1500

31H1/Y/04 99/ For a rigid plastics IBC for liquids made from plastics with structural equip- GB/...* 9099/ ment withstanding the stack load. 10800/1200

31HA1/Y/05 01/ For a composite IBC for liquids with a rigid plastics inner receptacle and steel D/...* 1683/ outer packaging. 10800/1200

11C/X/01 02/ For a wooden IBC for solids with an inner liner and authorized for packing S/...* 9876/ group I solids. 3000/910

11G/Z/06 02/ For a fibreboard IBC/ not designed to be stacked. I/...* 962/ 0/500

11D/Y/07 02/ For a plywood IBC with inner liner. E/...* 261/ 3240/600

Each element of the marking applied in accordance with subparagraphs .1 to .8 and with 6.5.2.2 shall be clearly separated, such as by a slash or space, so as to be easily identifiable.

6.5.2.2 Additional marking

6.5.2.2.1 Each IBC shall bear the markings required in 6.5.2.1 and, in addition, the following information, which may appear on a corrosion-resistant plate permanently attached in a place readily accessible for inspection: Note: For metal IBCs, this plate shall be a corrosion-resistant metal plate.

Category of IBC Additional marking Rigid Metal Composite Fibreboard Wooden plastics a Capacity in litres at 20°C X X X Tare mass in kga X X X X X Test (gauge) pressure, in kPa or bar,a if X X applicable Maximum filling/discharge pressure in a X X X kPa or bar, if applicable

* The stacking test load in kilograms to be placed on the IBC shall be 1.8 times the combined maximum permissible gross mass of the number of similar IBC that may be stacked on top of the IBC during transport (see 6.5.6.6.4).

410 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

428

Bilaga 1

Chapter 6.5 – Construction and testing of intermediate bulk containers (IBCs)

Category of IBC Additional marking Rigid Metal Composite Fibreboard Wooden plastics Body material and its minimum thickness X in mm Date of last leakproofness test, if X X X applicable (month and year) Date of last inspection (month and year) X X X Serial number of the manufacturer X b Maximum permitted stacking load X X X X X

a The unit used shall be indicated. b See 6.5.2.2.2. This additional marking shall apply to all IBCs manufactured, repaired or remanufactured as from 1 January 2011.

6.5.2.2.2 The maximum permitted stacking load applicable when the IBC is in use shall be displayed on a symbol as follows:

Minimum ... kg max Minimum

10 10 0 m dime 0 m dime m m nsion nsion

Minimum dimension Minimum dimension 100 mm 100 mm IBCs capable of being stacked IBCs NOT capable of being stacked

The symbol shall be not less than 100 mm ×100 mm, be durable and clearly visible. The letters and numbers indicating the mass shall be at least 12 mm high.

The mass marked above the symbol shall not exceed the load imposed during the design type test (see 6.5.6.6.4) divided by 1.8.

Note: The provisions of 6.5.2.2.2 shall apply to all IBCs manufactured, repaired or remanufactured as from 1 January 2011.

6.5.2.2.3 Each flexible IBC may also bear a pictogram or pictograms indicating the recommended lifting methods.

6.5.2.2.4 The inner receptacle of composite IBCs manufactured after 1 January 2011 shall bear the markings indicated in 6.5.2.1.1.2, .3, .4 where this date is that of the manufacture of the plastics inner receptacle, .5 and .6. The UN packaging symbol shall not be applied. The marking shall be applied in the sequence shown in 6.5.2.1.1. It shall be durable, legible and placed in a location so as to be readily visible when the inner receptacle is placed in the outer casing.

The date of the manufacture of the plastics inner receptacle may alternatively be marked on the inner receptacle adjacent to the remainder of the marking. An example of an appropriate marking method is:

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 411

429

Bilaga 1

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc.

6.5.2.2.5 Where a composite IBC is designed in such a manner that the outer packaging is intended to be dismantled for transport when empty (such as for return of the IBC for re-use to the original consignor), each of the parts intended to be detached when so dismantled shall be marked with the month and year of manufacture and the name or symbol of the manufacturer and other identification of the IBC as specified by the competent authority (see 6.5.2.1.1.6).

6.5.2.3 Conformity to design type

The marking indicates that the IBCs correspond to a successfully tested design type and that the provisions referred to in the certificate have been met.

6.5.2.4 Marking of remanufactured composite IBCs (31HZ1)

The marking specified in 6.5.2.1.1 and 6.5.2.2 shall be removed from the original IBC or made permanently illegible and new markings shall be applied to an IBC remanufactured in accordance with these provisions of this Code.

6.5.3 Construction requirements

6.5.3.1 General requirements

6.5.3.1.1 IBCs shall be resistant to or adequately protected from deterioration due to the external environment. 6.5.3.1.2 IBCs shall be so constructed and closed that none of the contents can escape under normal conditions of transport, including the effects of vibration, or by changes in temperature, humidity or pressure. 6.5.3.1.3 IBCs and their closures shall be constructed of materials compatible with their contents, or be protected internally, so that they are not liable: .1 to be attacked by the contents so as to make their use dangerous; .2 to cause the contents to react or decompose, or form harmful or dangerous compounds with the IBCs. 6.5.3.1.4 Gaskets, where used, shall be made of materials not subject to attack by the contents of an IBC. 6.5.3.1.5 All service equipment shall be so positioned or protected as to minimize the risk of escape of the contents owing to damage during handling and transport. 6.5.3.1.6 IBCs, their attachments and their service and structural equipment shall be designed to withstand, without loss of contents, the internal pressure of the contents and the stresses of normal handling and transport. IBCs intended for stacking shall be designed for stacking. Any lifting or securing features of IBCs shall be of sufficient strength to withstand the normal conditions of handling and transport without gross distortion or failure and shall be so positioned that no undue stress is caused in any part of the IBC. 6.5.3.1.7 Where an IBC consists of a body within a framework, it shall be so constructed that: .1 the body does not chafe or rub against the framework so as to cause material damage to the body, .2 the body is retained within the framework at all times, .3 the items of equipment are fixed in such a way that they cannot be damaged if the connections between body and frame allow relative expansion or movement. 6.5.3.1.8 Where a bottom discharge valve is fitted, it shall be capable of being made secure in the closed position and the whole discharge system shall be suitably protected from damage. Valves having lever closures shall be able to be secured against accidental opening and the open or closed position shall be readily apparent. For IBCs containing liquids, a secondary means of sealing the discharge aperture shall also be provided, such as by a blank flange or equivalent device.

6.5.4 Testing, certification and inspection

6.5.4.1 Quality assurance

IBCs shall be manufactured, remanufactured, repaired and tested under a quality-assurance programme which satisfies the competent authority, in order to ensure that each manufactured, remanufactured or repaired IBC meets the provisions of this chapter. Note: ISO 16106:2006 “Packaging – Transport packages for dangerous goods – Dangerous goods packagings, intermediate bulk containers (IBCs) and large packagings – Guidelines for the application of ISO 9001” provides acceptable guidance on procedures which may be followed.

412 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

430

Bilaga 1

Chapter 6.5 – Construction and testing of intermediate bulk containers (IBCs)

6.5.4.2 Test provisions

IBCs shall be subjected to design type tests and, if applicable, to initial and periodic inspections and tests in accordance with 6.5.4.4.

6.5.4.3 Certification

In respect of each design type of IBC, a certificate and mark (as in 6.5.2) shall be issued attesting that the design type, including its equipment, meets the test provisions.

6.5.4.4 Inspection and testing

Note: See also 6.5.4.5 for tests and inspections on repaired IBCs. 6.5.4.4.1 Every metal, rigid plastics and composite IBC shall be inspected to the satisfaction of the competent authority: .1 before it is put into service (including after remanufactured), and thereafter at intervals not exceeding five years, with regard to: .1 conformity to the design type, including marking; .2 internal and external condition; and .3 proper functioning of service equipment. Thermal insulation, if any, need be removed only to the extent necessary for a proper examination of the body of the IBC. .2 at intervals of not more than two and a half years with regard to: .1 external condition; and .2 proper functioning of service equipment. Thermal insulation, if any, need be removed only to the extent necessary for a proper examination of the body of the IBC. Each IBC shall correspond in all respects to its design type. 6.5.4.4.2 Every metal, rigid plastics and composite IBC for liquids, or for solids which are filled or discharged under pressure, shall undergo a suitable leakproofness test at least equally effective as the test prescribed in 6.5.6.7.3 and be capable of meeting the test level indicated in 6.5.6.7.3: (a) before it is first used for transport; (b) at intervals of not more than two and a half years. For this test the IBC shall be fitted with the primary bottom closure. The inner receptacle of a composite IBC may be tested without the outer casing, provided the test results are not affected. 6.5.4.4.3 A report of each inspection and test shall be kept by the owner of the IBC at least until the next inspection or test. The report shall include the results of the inspection and test and shall identify the party performing the inspection and test (see also the marking requirements in 6.5.2.2.1). 6.5.4.4.4 The competent authority may at any time require proof, by tests in accordance with this chapter, that the IBCs meet the provisions of the design type tests.

6.5.4.5 Repaired IBCs

6.5.4.5.1 When an IBC is impaired as a result of impact (e.g., accident) or any other cause, it shall be repaired or otherwise maintained (see definition of “Routine maintenance of IBCs” in 1.2.1), so as to conform to the design type. The bodies of rigid plastics IBCs and the inner receptacles of composite IBCs that are impaired shall be replaced. 6.5.4.5.2 In addition to any other testing and inspection requirements in this Code, an IBC shall be subjected to the full testing and inspection requirements set out in 6.5.4.4, and the required reports shall be prepared, whenever it is repaired. 6.5.4.5.3 The party performing the tests and inspections after the repair shall durably mark the IBC near the manufacturer’s UN design type marking to show: .1 the State in which the tests and inspections were carried out; .2 the name or authorized symbol of the party performing the tests and inspections; and .3 the date (month, year) of the tests and inspections. 6.5.4.5.4 Test and inspections performed in accordance with 6.5.4.5.2 may be considered to satisfy the requirements for the 2.5- and 5-year periodic tests and inspections.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 413

431

Bilaga 1

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc.

6.5.5 Specific provisions for IBCs

6.5.5.1 Specific provisions for metal IBCs

6.5.5.1.1 These provisions apply to metal IBCs for the transport of liquids and solids. There are three categories of metal IBCs: those for solids which are filled and discharged by gravity (11A, 11B, 11N); those for solids which are filled and discharged at a gauge pressure greater than 10 kPa (21A, 21B, 21N); and those for liquids (31A, 31B, 31N). 6.5.5.1.2 Bodies shall be made of suitable ductile metal in which the weldability has been fully demonstrated. Welds shall be skilfully made and afford complete safety. Low-temperature performance shall be taken into account when appropriate. 6.5.5.1.3 Care shall be taken to avoid damage by galvanic action due to the juxtaposition of dissimilar metals. 6.5.5.1.4 Aluminium IBCs intended for the transport of flammable liquids shall have no movable parts, such as covers, closures, etc., made of unprotected steel liable to rust, which might cause a dangerous reaction by coming into frictional or percussive contact with the aluminium. 6.5.5.1.5 Metal IBCs shall be made of metals which meet the following provisions: .1 For steel, the elongation at fracture, per cent, shall not be less than 10,000/Rm with an absolute minimum 2 of 20%, where Rm = guaranteed minimum tensile strength of the reference steel to be used, in N/mm . .2 For aluminium and aluminium alloys, the elongation at fracture, per cent, shall not be less than 10,000/6Rm with an absolute minimum of 8%. Specimens used to determine the elongation at fracture shall be taken transversely to the direction of rolling and be so secured that: Lo = 5d, or __ Lo = 5.65 √A where : Lo = gauge length of the specimen before the test; d = diameter; and A = cross-sectional area of the test specimen.

6.5.5.1.6 Minimum wall thickness

.1 For a reference steel having a product of Rm × Ao = 10,000, the wall thickness shall not be less than: Wall thickness (T) in mm Capacity (C) in litres Types 11A, 11B, 11N Types 21A, 21B, 21N, 31A, 31B, 31N Unprotected Protected Unprotected Protected C≤ 1000 2.0 1.5 2.5 2.0 1000 <C≤ 2000 T = C/2000 + 1.5 T= C/2000 + 1.0 T =C/2000 + 2.0 T = C/2000 + 1.5 2000 <C ≤ 3000 T = C/2000 + 1.5 T= C/2000 + 1.0 T = C/1000 + 1.0 T = C/2000 + 1.5

where: Ao = minimum elongation (as a percentage) of the reference steel to be used on fracture under tensile stress (see 6.5.5.1.5). .2 For metals other than the reference steel described in .1, the minimum wall thickness is given by the following equivalence formula: 21.4 ×e0 e1 =_________ 3_________

√ Rm1 ×A1

where: e1 = required equivalent wall thickness of the metal to be used (in mm); e0 = required minimum wall thickness for the reference steel (in mm); 2 Rm1 = guaranteed minimum tensile strength of the metal to be used (in N/mm ) (see .3); and A1 = minimum elongation (as a percentage) of the metal to be used on fracture under tensile stress (see 6.5.5.1.5). However, in no case shall the wall thickness be less than 1.5 mm. .3 For purposes of the calculation described in .2, the guaranteed minimum tensile strength of the metal to be used (Rm1) shall be the minimum value according to national or international material standards.

414 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

432

Bilaga 1

Chapter 6.5 – Construction and testing of intermediate bulk containers (IBCs)

However, for austenitic steels, the specified minimum value for Rm according to the material standards may be increased by up to 15% when a greater value is attested in the material inspection certificate. When no material standard exists for the material in question, the value of Rm shall be the minimum value attested in the material inspection certificate.

6.5.5.1.7 Pressure relief provisions

IBCs for liquids shall be capable of releasing a sufficient amount of vapour in the event of fire engulfment to ensure that no rupture of the shell will occur. This can be achieved by conventional pressure relief devices or by other constructional means. The start-to-discharge pressure shall not be higher than 65 kPa and no lower than the total gauge pressure experienced in the IBC (i.e., the vapour pressure of the filling substance plus the partial pressure of the air or other inert gases, minus 100 kPa) at 55°C, determined on the basis of a maximum degree of filling as defined in 4.1.1.4. The pressure relief devices shall be fitted in the vapour space.

6.5.5.2 Specific provisions for flexible IBCs

6.5.5.2.1 These provisions apply to flexible IBCs of the following types: 13H1 woven plastics without coating or liner 13H2 woven plastics, coated 13H3 woven plastics with liner 13H4 woven plastics, coated and with liner 13H5 plastics film 13L1 textile without coating or liner 13L2 textile, coated 13L3 textile with liner 13L4 textile, coated and with liner 13M1 paper, multiwall 13M2 paper, multiwall, water-resistant. Flexible IBCs are intended for the transport of solids only. 6.5.5.2.2 Bodies of IBCs shall be manufactured from suitable materials. The strength of the material and the construction of a flexible IBC shall be appropriate to its capacity and its intended use. 6.5.5.2.3 All materials used in the construction of flexible IBCs of types 13M1 and 13M2 shall, after complete immersion in water for not less than 24 hours, retain at least 85% of the tensile strength as measured originally on the material conditioned to equilibrium at 67% relative humidity or less. 6.5.5.2.4 Seams of IBCs shall be formed by stitching, heat sealing, gluing or any equivalent method. All stitched seamends shall be secured. 6.5.5.2.5 Flexible IBCs shall provide adequate resistance to ageing and to degradation caused by ultraviolet radiation, by climatic conditions, or by the substance contained within which would thereby render them unsuitable for their intended use. 6.5.5.2.6 For plastics flexible IBCs where protection against ultraviolet radiation is required, it shall be provided by the addition of carbon black or other suitable pigments or inhibitors. These additives shall be compatible with the contents and remain effective throughout the life of the body of the IBC. Where use is made of carbon black, pigments or inhibitors other than those used in the manufacture of the tested design type, retesting may be waived if changes in the carbon black content, the pigment content or the inhibitor content do not adversely affect the physical properties of the material of construction. 6.5.5.2.7 Additives may be incorporated into the material of the body to improve the resistance to ageing or to serve other purposes, provided that these do not adversely affect the physical or chemical properties of the material. 6.5.5.2.8 No material recovered from used receptacles shall be used in the manufacture of IBC bodies. Production residues or scrap from the same manufacturing process may, however, be used. Component parts such as fittings and pallet bases may also be used provided such components have not in any way been damaged in previous use. 6.5.5.2.9 When filled, the ratio of height to width shall be not more than 2:1. 6.5.5.2.10 The liner shall be made of a suitable material. The strength of the material used and the construction of the liner shall be appropriate to the capacity of the IBC and the intended use. Joints and closures shall be siftproof and capable of withstanding pressures and impacts liable to occur under normal conditions of handling and transport.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 415

433

Bilaga 1

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc.

6.5.5.3 Specific provisions for rigid plastics IBCs

6.5.5.3.1 These provisions apply to rigid plastics IBCs for the transport of solids or liquids. Rigid plastics IBCs are of the following types: 11H1 fitted with structural equipment designed to withstand the whole load when IBCs are stacked, for solids which are filled or discharged by gravity 11H2 freestanding, for solids which are filled or discharged by gravity 21H1 fitted with structural equipment designed to withstand the whole load when IBCs are stacked, for solids which are filled or discharged under pressure 21H2 freestanding, for solids which are filled or discharged under pressure 31H1 fitted with structural equipment designed to withstand the whole load when IBCs are stacked, for liquids 31H2 freestanding, for liquids. 6.5.5.3.2 The body shall be manufactured from suitable plastics material of known specifications and be of adequate strength in relation to its capacity and to the service it is required to perform. The material shall be adequately resistant to ageing and to degradation caused by the substance contained within or, where relevant, by ultraviolet radiation. Low-temperature performance shall be taken into account when appropriate. Any permeation of the substance contained within shall not constitute a danger under normal conditions of transport. 6.5.5.3.3 Where protection against ultraviolet radiation is required, it shall be provided by the addition of carbon black or other suitable pigments or inhibitors. These additives shall be compatible with the contents and remain effective throughout the life of the body of the IBC. Where use is made of carbon black, pigments or inhibitors other than those used in the manufacture of the tested design type, retesting may be waived if changes in the carbon black content, the pigment content or the inhibitor content do not adversely affect the physical properties of the material of construction. 6.5.5.3.4 Additives may be incorporated in the material of the body to improve the resistance to ageing or to serve other purposes, provided that these do not adversely affect the physical or chemical properties of the material. 6.5.5.3.5 No used material other than production residues or regrind from the same manufacturing process may be used in the manufacturing of rigid plastics IBCs.

6.5.5.4 Specific provisions for composite IBCs with plastics inner receptacles

6.5.5.4.1 These provisions apply to composite IBCs for the transport of solids or liquids of the following types: 11HZ1 composite IBCs with a rigid plastics inner receptacle, for solids filled or discharged by gravity 11HZ2 composite IBCs with a flexible plastics inner receptacle, for solids filled or discharged by gravity 21HZ1 composite IBCs with a rigid plastics inner receptacle, for solids filled or discharged under pressure 21HZ2 composite IBCs with a flexible plastics inner receptacle, for solids filled or discharged under pressure 31HZ1 composite IBCs with a rigid plastics inner receptacle, for liquids 31HZ2 composite IBCs with a flexible plastics inner receptacle, for liquids. This code shall be completed by replacing the letter ‘Z’ by a capital letter in accordance with 6.5.1.4.1.2 to indicate the nature of the material used for the outer packaging. 6.5.5.4.2 The inner receptacle is not intended to perform a containment function without its outer packaging. A “rigid” inner receptacle is a receptacle which retains its general shape when empty without closures in place and without the benefit of the outer packaging. Any inner receptacle that is not “rigid” is considered to be “flexible”. 6.5.5.4.3 The outer packaging normally consists of rigid material formed so as to protect the inner receptacle from physical damage during handling and transport, but is not intended to perform the containment function. It includes the base pallet where appropriate. 6.5.5.4.4 A composite IBC with a fully enclosing outer packaging shall be so designed that the integrity of the inner receptacle may be readily assessed following the leakproofness and hydraulic tests. 6.5.5.4.5 IBCs of type 31HZ2 shall be limited to a capacity of not more than 1250 ℓ. 6.5.5.4.6 The inner receptacle shall be manufactured from suitable plastics material of known specifications and be of adequate strength in relation to its capacity and to the service it is required to perform. The material shall be adequately resistant to ageing and to degradation caused by the substance contained and, where relevant, by ultraviolet radiation. Low-temperature performance shall be taken into account when appropriate. Any permeation of the substance contained shall not constitute a danger under normal conditions of transport.

416 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

434

Bilaga 1

Chapter 6.5 – Construction and testing of intermediate bulk containers (IBCs)

6.5.5.4.7 Where protection against ultraviolet radiation is required, it shall be provided by the addition of carbon black or other suitable pigments or inhibitors. These additives shall be compatible with the contents and remain effective throughout the life of the inner receptacle. Where use is made of carbon black, pigments or inhibitors other than those used in the manufacture of the tested design type, re-testing may be waived if changes in carbon black content, the pigment content or the inhibitor content do not adversely affect the physical properties of the material of construction.

6.5.5.4.8 Additives may be incorporated in the material of the inner receptacle to improve the resistance to ageing or to serve other purposes, provided that these do not adversely affect the physical or chemical properties of the material.

6.5.5.4.9 No used material other than production residues or regrind from the same manufacturing process may be used in the manufacture of inner receptacles.

6.5.5.4.10 The inner receptacle of IBCs of type 31HZ2 shall consist of at least three plies of film.

6.5.5.4.11 The strength of the material and the construction of the outer packaging shall be appropriate to the capacity of the composite IBC and its intended use.

6.5.5.4.12 The outer packaging shall be free of any projection that might damage the inner receptacle.

6.5.5.4.13 Outer packagings of steel or aluminium shall be constructed of a suitable metal of adequate thickness.

6.5.5.4.14 Outer packagings of natural wood shall be of well-seasoned wood, commercially dry and free from defects that would materially lessen the strength of any part of the packaging. The tops and bottoms may be made of water-resistant reconstituted wood such as hardboard, particle board or other suitable type.

6.5.5.4.15 Outer packagings of plywood shall be made of well-seasoned rotary-cut, sliced or sawn veneer plywood, commercially dry and free from defects that would materially lessen the strength of the packaging. All adjacent plies shall be glued with water-resistant adhesive. Other suitable materials may be used in conjunction with plywood for the construction of packagings. Packagings shall be firmly nailed or secured to corner posts or ends or be assembled by equally suitable devices.

6.5.5.4.16 The walls of outer packagings of reconstituted wood shall be made of water-resistant reconstituted wood such as hardboard, particle board or other suitable type. Other parts of the packagings may be made of other suitable material.

6.5.5.4.17 For fibreboard outer packagings, strong and good-quality solid or double-faced corrugated fibreboard (single or multiwall) shall be used appropriate to the capacity of the packaging and to its intended use. The water resistance of the outer surface shall be such that the increase in mass, as determined in a test carried out 2 over 30 minutes by the Cobb method of determining water absorption, is not greater than 155 g/m – see ISO 535:1991. It shall have proper bending qualities. Fibreboard shall be cut, creased without scoring, and slotted so as to permit assembly without cracking, surface breaks or undue bending. The fluting of corrugated fibreboard shall be firmly glued by water-resistant adhesive to the facings.

6.5.5.4.18 The ends of fibreboard outer packagings may have a wooden frame or be entirely of wood. Reinforcements of wooden battens may be used.

6.5.5.4.19 Manufacturing joins in the fibreboard outer packagings shall be taped, lapped and glued, or lapped and stitched with metal staples. Lapped joins shall have an appropriate overlap. Where closing is effected by gluing or taping, a water-resistant adhesive shall be used.

6.5.5.4.20 Where the outer packagings are of plastics material, the relevant provisions of 6.5.5.4.6 to 6.5.5.4.9 shall apply.

6.5.5.4.21 The outer packagings of IBCs of type 31HZ2 shall enclose the inner receptacle on all sides.

6.5.5.4.22 Any integral pallet base forming part of the IBC or a detachable pallet shall be suitable for mechanical handling with the IBC filled to its maximum permissible gross mass.

6.5.5.4.23 The pallet or integral base shall be designed so as to avoid any protrusion of the base of the IBC that might be liable to damage in handling.

6.5.5.4.24 The outer packagings shall be secured to a detachable pallet to ensure stability in handling and transport. Where a detachable pallet is used, its top surface shall be free from sharp protrusions that might damage the IBC.

6.5.5.4.25 Strengthening devices such as timber supports to increase stacking performance may be used but shall be external to the inner receptacle.

6.5.5.4.26 Where IBCs are intended for stacking, the bearing surfaces shall be such as to distribute the load in a safe manner. Such IBCs shall be designed so that the load is not supported by the inner receptacle.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 417

435

Bilaga 1

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc.

6.5.5.5 Specific provisions for fibreboard IBCs

6.5.5.5.1 These provisions apply to fibreboard IBCs for the transport of solids which are filled or discharged by gravity. Fibreboard IBCs are of the following type: 11G.

6.5.5.5.2 Fibreboard IBCs shall not incorporate top lifting devices.

6.5.5.5.3 The body shall be made of strong and good-quality solid or double-faced corrugated fibreboard (single or multiwall), appropriate to the capacity of the IBC and to its intended use. The water resistance of the outer surface shall be such that the increase in mass, as determined in a test carried out over a period of 30 minutes 2 by the Cobb method of determining water absorption, is not greater than 155 g/m – see ISO 535:1991. It shall have proper bending qualities. Fibreboard shall be cut, creased without scoring, and slotted so as to permit assembly without cracking, surface breaks or undue bending. The fluting or corrugated fibreboard shall be firmly glued to the facings. 6.5.5.5.4 The walls, including top and bottom, shall have a minimum puncture resistance of 15 J, measured according to ISO 3036:1975. 6.5.5.5.5 Manufacturing joins in the body of IBCs shall be made with an appropriate overlap and shall be taped, glued, stitched with metal staples or fastened by other means at least equally effective. Where joins are effected by gluing or taping, a water-resistant adhesive shall be used. Metal staples shall pass completely through all pieces to be fastened and be formed or protected so that any inner liner cannot be abraded or punctured by them. 6.5.5.5.6 The liner shall be made of suitable material. The strength of the material used and the construction of the liner shall be appropriate to the capacity of the IBC and its intended use. Joins and closures shall be sift-proof and capable of withstanding pressure and impacts liable to occur under normal conditions of handling and transport. 6.5.5.5.7 Any integral pallet base forming part of the IBC or any detachable pallet shall be suitable for mechanical handling with the IBC filled to its maximum permissible gross mass. 6.5.5.5.8 The pallet or integral base shall be designed so as to avoid any protrusion of the base of the IBC that might be liable to damage in handling. 6.5.5.5.9 The body shall be secured to any detachable pallet to ensure stability in handling and transport. Where a detachable pallet is used, its top surface shall be free from sharp protrusions that might damage the IBC. 6.5.5.5.10 Strengthening devices such as timber supports to increase stacking performance may be used but shall be external to the liner. 6.5.5.5.11 Where IBCs are intended for stacking, the bearing surface shall be such as to distribute the load in a safe manner.

6.5.5.6 Specific provisions for wooden IBCs

6.5.5.6.1 These provisions apply to wooden IBCs for the transport of solids which are filled or discharged by gravity. Wooden IBCs are of the following types: 11C natural wood with inner liner 11D plywood with inner liner 11F reconstituted wood with inner liner. 6.5.5.6.2 Wooden IBCs shall not incorporate top lifting devices.

6.5.5.6.3 The strength of the materials used and the method of construction shall be appropriate to the capacity and intended use of the IBC.

6.5.5.6.4 Natural wood shall be well seasoned, commercially dry and free from defects that would materially lessen the strength of any part of the IBC. Each part of the IBC shall consist of one piece or be equivalent thereto. Parts are considered equivalent to one piece when a suitable method of glued assembly is used (as for instance Lindermann joint, tongue and groove joint, ship lap or rabbet joint, or butt joint), with at least two corrugated metal fasteners at each joint, or when other methods at least equally effective are used.

6.5.5.6.5 Bodies of plywood shall be at least three-ply. It shall be made of well-seasoned rotary-cut, sliced or sawn veneer, commercially dry and free from defects that would materially lessen the strength of the body. All adjacent plies shall be glued with water-resistant adhesive. Other suitable materials may be used with plywood for the construction of the body.

6.5.5.6.6 Bodies of reconstituted wood shall be made of water-resistant reconstituted wood such as hardboard, particle board or other suitable type.

6.5.5.6.7 IBCs shall be firmly nailed or secured to corner posts or ends or be assembled by equally suitable devices.

418 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

436

Bilaga 1

Chapter 6.5 – Construction and testing of intermediate bulk containers (IBCs)

6.5.5.6.8 The liner shall be made of a suitable material. The strength of the material used and the construction of the liner shall be appropriate to the capacity of the IBC and its intended use. Joins and closures shall be sift-proof and capable of withstanding pressure and impacts liable to occur under normal conditions of handling and transport.

6.5.5.6.9 Any integral pallet base forming part of the IBC or any detachable pallet shall be suitable for mechanical handling with the IBC filled to its maximum permissible gross mass.

6.5.5.6.10 The pallet or integral base shall be designed so as to avoid any protrusion of the base of the IBC that might be liable to damage in handling.

6.5.5.6.11 The body shall be secured to any detachable pallet to ensure stability in handling and transport. Where a detachable pallet is used, its top surface shall be free from sharp protrusions that might damage the IBC.

6.5.5.6.12 Strengthening devices such as timber supports to increase stacking performance may be used but shall be external to the liner.

6.5.5.6.13 Where IBCs are intended for stacking, the bearing surface shall be such as to distribute the load in a safe manner.

6.5.6 Test provisions for IBCs

6.5.6.1 Performance and frequency of tests

6.5.6.1.1 Each IBC design type shall successfully pass the tests prescribed in this chapter before being used. An IBC design type is defined by the design, size and material and thickness, manner of construction and means of filling and discharging, but may include various surface treatments; it also includes IBCs which differ from the design type only in their lesser external dimensions.

6.5.6.1.2 Tests shall be carried out on IBCs as prepared for transport. IBCs shall be filled as indicated in the relevant section. The substances to be transported in the IBCs may be replaced by other substances except where this would invalidate the results of the tests. For solids, when another substance is used, it shall have the same physical characteristics (mass, grain size, etc.) as the substance to be transported. It is permissible to use additives, such as bags of lead shot, to achieve the requisite total package gross mass, so long as they are placed so that the test results are not affected.

6.5.6.2 Design type tests

6.5.6.2.1 One IBC of each design type, size, wall thickness and manner of construction shall be submitted to the tests in the order shown in 6.5.6.3.5 and as set out in 6.5.6.4 to 6.5.6.13. These design type tests shall be carried out as required by the competent authority.

6.5.6.2.2 The competent authority may permit the selective testing of IBCs which differ only in minor respects from the tested type, such as with small reductions in external dimensions.

6.5.6.2.3 If detachable pallets are used in the tests, the test report issued in accordance with 6.5.6.14 shall include a technical description of the pallets to be used.

6.5.6.3 Preparation of IBC for testing

6.5.6.3.1 Paper and fibreboard IBCs and composite IBCs with fibreboard outer packagings shall be conditioned for at least 24 hours in an atmosphere having a controlled temperature and relative humidity (r.h.). There are three options, one of which shall be chosen. The preferred atmosphere is 23°C±2°C and 50%±2% r.h. The two other options are 20°C±2°C and 65%±2% r.h. or 27°C±2°C and 65%±2% r.h.

Note: Average values shall fall within these limits. Short-term fluctuations and measurement limitations may cause individual measurements to vary by up to ±5% relative humidity without significant impairment of test reproducibility.

6.5.6.3.2 Additional steps shall be taken to ascertain that the plastics material used in the manufacture of rigid plastics IBCs of types 31H1 and 31H2 and composite IBCs of type 31HZ1 and 31HZ2 complies with the provisions of 6.5.5.3.2 to 6.5.5.3.4 and 6.5.5.4.6 to 6.5.5.4.9.

6.5.6.3.3 This may be done, for example, by submitting sample IBCs to a preliminary test extending over a long period, for example six months, during which the samples would remain filled with the substances they are intended to contain or with substances which are known to have at least as severe a stress-cracking, weakening or molecular degradation influence on the plastics materials in question, and after which the samples shall be submitted to the applicable tests listed in the table in 6.5.6.3.5.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 419

437

Bilaga 1

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc.

6.5.6.3.4 Where the behaviour of the plastics material has been established by other means, the above compatibility test may be dispensed with.

6.5.6.3.5 Design type tests required in sequential order:

f Bottom a b Leak- Hydraulic c Type of IBC Vibration Top lift Stacking Drop Tear Topple Righting lift proofness pressure Metal: a e 11A, 11B, 11N – 1st 2nd 3rd – – 4th – – – a e 21A, 21B, 21N – 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th – – – a e 31A, 31B, 31N 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 7th – – – Flexibled – – xc x – – x x x x

Rigid plastics: a 11H1, 11H2 – 1st 2nd 3rd – – 4th – – – a 21H1, 21H2 – 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th – – – 31H1, 31H2 1st 2nda 3rd 4th 5th 6th 7th – – –

Composite: a e 11HZ1, 11HZ2 – 1st 2nd 3rd – – 4th – – – a e 21HZ1, 21HZ2 – 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th – – – 31HZ1, 31HZ2 1st 2nda 3rd 4th 5th 6th 7the – – –

Fibreboard – 1st – 2nd – – 3rd – – – Wooden – 1st – 2nd – – 3rd – – –

a When IBCs are designed for this method of handling. b When IBCs are designed to be stacked. c When IBCs are designed to be lifted from the top or the side. d Required test indicated by “x”; an IBC which has passed one test may be used for other tests, in any order. e Another IBC of the same design may be used for the drop test. f Another IBC of the same design may be used for the vibration test.

6.5.6.4 Bottom lift test

6.5.6.4.1 Applicability

For all fibreboard and wooden IBCs and for all types of IBCs which are fitted with means for lifting from the base, as a design type test.

6.5.6.4.2 Preparation of the IBC for test

The IBC shall be filled. A load shall be added and evenly distributed. The mass of filled IBC and the load shall be 1.25 times its maximum permissible gross mass.

6.5.6.4.3 Method of testing

The IBC shall be raised and lowered twice by a forklift truck with the forks centrally positioned so that the space between them is three quarters of the length of the side of entry (unless the points of entry are fixed). The forks shall penetrate to three quarters of the depth in the direction of entry. The test shall be repeated from each possible direction of entry.

6.5.6.4.4 Criteria for passing the test

No permanent deformation which renders the IBC, including the base pallet, if any, unsafe for transport and no loss of contents.

6.5.6.5 Top lift test

6.5.6.5.1 Applicability

For all types of IBCs which are designed to be lifted from the top, and for flexible IBCs designed to be lifted from the top or the side, as a design type test.

6.5.6.5.2 Preparation of the IBC for test

Metal, rigid plastics and composite IBCs shall be filled. A load shall be added and evenly distributed. The mass of filled IBC and the load shall be twice the maximum permissible gross mass. Flexible IBCs shall be filled with a representative material and then shall be loaded to six times their maximum permissible gross mass, the load being evenly distributed.

420 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

438

Bilaga 1

Chapter 6.5 – Construction and testing of intermediate bulk containers (IBCs)

6.5.6.5.3 Method of testing

Metal and flexible IBCs shall be lifted in the manner for which they are designed until clear of the floor and maintained in that position for a period of five minutes. Rigid plastics and composite IBCs shall be lifted: .1 by each pair of diagonally opposite lifting devices, so that the hoisting forces are applied vertically, for a period of five minutes; and .2 by each pair of diagonally opposite lifting devices, so that the hoisting forces are applied towards the centre at 45° to the vertical, for a period of five minutes. 6.5.6.5.4 Other methods of top-lift testing and preparation at least equally effective may be used for flexible IBCs.

6.5.6.5.5 Criteria for passing the test

.1 Metal, rigid plastics and composite IBCs: the IBC remains safe for normal conditions of transport, there is no observable permanent deformation of the IBC, including the base pallet, if any, and no loss of contents. .2 Flexible IBCs: no damage to the IBC or its lifting devices which renders the IBC unsafe for transport or handling and no loss of contents.

6.5.6.6 Stacking test

6.5.6.6.1 Applicability

For all types of IBCs which are designed to be stacked on each other, as a design type test.

6.5.6.6.2 Preparation of the IBC for test

The IBC shall be filled to its maximum permissible gross mass. If the specific gravity of the product being used for testing makes this impracticable, the IBC shall additionally be loaded so that it is tested at its maximum permissible gross mass, the load being evenly distributed.

6.5.6.6.3 Method of testing

.1 The IBC shall be placed on its base on level hard ground and subjected to a uniformly distributed superimposed test load (see 6.5.6.6.4). IBCs shall be subjected to the test load for a period of at least: – 5 minutes, for metal IBCs; – 28 days at 40°C, for rigid plastics IBCs of types 11H2, 21H2 and 31H2 and for composite IBCs with outer packagings of plastics material which bear the stacking load (i.e., types 11HH1, 11HH2, 21HH1, 21HH2, 31HH1 and 31HH2); – 24 hours, for all other types of IBCs. .2 The load shall be applied by one of the following methods: – one or more IBCs of the same type, filled to the maximum permissible gross mass, stacked on the test IBC; – appropriate mass loaded on to either a flat plate or a reproduction of the base of the IBC, which is stacked on the test IBC.

6.5.6.6.4 Calculation of superimposed test load

The load to be placed on the IBC shall be 1.8 times the combined maximum permissible gross mass of the number of similar IBCs that may be stacked on top of the IBC during transport.

6.5.6.6.5 Criteria for passing the test

.1 All types of IBCs other than flexible IBCs: no permanent deformation which renders the IBC, including the base pallet, if any, unsafe for transport and no loss of contents. .2 Flexible IBCs: no deterioration of the body which renders the IBC unsafe for transport and no loss of contents.

6.5.6.7 Leakproofness test

6.5.6.7.1 Applicability

For those types of IBCs used for liquids, or for solids filled or discharged under pressure, as a design type test and a periodic test.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 421

439

Bilaga 1

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc.

6.5.6.7.2 Preparation of the IBC for test

The test shall be carried out before the fitting of any thermal insulation equipment. Vented closures shall either be replaced by similar non-vented closures or the vent shall be sealed.

6.5.6.7.3 Method of testing and pressure to be applied

The test shall be carried out for a period of at least 10 minutes, using air at a gauge pressure of not less than 20 kPa (0.2 bar). The airtightness of the IBC shall be determined by a suitable method such as air-pressure differential test or by immersing the IBC in water, or for metal IBCs, by coating the seams and joints with a soap solution. In the latter case, a correction factor shall be applied for the hydrostatic pressure.

6.5.6.7.4 Criterion for passing the test

No leakage of air.

6.5.6.8 Hydraulic pressure test

6.5.6.8.1 Applicability

For those types of IBCs used for liquids or for solids filled or discharged under pressure, as a design type test.

6.5.6.8.2 Preparation of the IBC for test

The test shall be carried out before the fitting of any thermal insulation equipment. Pressure relief devices shall be removed and their apertures plugged, or shall be rendered inoperative.

6.5.6.8.3 Method of testing

The test shall be carried out for a period of at least ten minutes, applying a hydraulic pressure of not less than that indicated in 6.5.6.8.4. The IBC shall not be mechanically restrained during the test.

6.5.6.8.4 Pressures to be applied

6.5.6.8.4.1 Metal IBCs: .1 For IBCs of types 21A, 21B and 21N, for packing group I solids, a 250 kPa (2.5 bar) gauge pressure; .2 For IBCs of types 21A, 21B, 21N, 31A, 31B and 31N, for packing groups II or III substances, a 200 kPa (2 bar) gauge pressure; .3 In addition, for IBCs of types 31A, 31B and 31N, a 65 kPa (0.65 bar) gauge pressure. This test shall be performed before the 200 kPa (2 bar) test. 6.5.6.8.4.2 Rigid plastics and composite IBCs: .1 For IBCs of types 21H1, 21H2, 21HZ1 and 21HZ2: 75 kPa (0.75 bar) gauge; .2 For IBCs of types 31H1, 31H2, 31HZ1 and 31HZ2: whichever is the greater of two values, the first as determined by one of the following methods: – the total gauge pressure measured in the IBC (i.e., the vapour pressure of the filling substance and the partial pressure of the air or other inert gases, minus 100 kPa) at 55°C multiplied by a safety factor of 1.5; this total gauge pressure shall be determined on the basis of a maximum degree of filling in accordance with 4.1.1.4 and a filling temperature of 15°C; or – 1.75 times the vapour pressure at 50°C of the substance to be transported minus 100 kPa, but with a minimum test pressure of 100 kPa; or – 1.5 times the vapour pressure at 55°C of the substance to be transported minus 100 kPa, but with a minimum test pressure of 100 kPa; and the second as determined by the following method: – twice the static pressure of the substance to be transported, with a minimum of twice the static pressure of water.

6.5.6.8.5 Criteria for passing the test(s)

.1 For IBCs of types 21A, 21B, 21N, 31A, 31B and 31N, when subjected to the test pressure specified in 6.5.6.8.4.1.1 or .2: no leakage; .2 For IBCs of types 31A, 31B and 31N, when subjected to the test pressure specified in 6.5.6.8.4.1.3: neither permanent deformation which would render the IBC unsafe for transport nor leakage; and .3 For rigid plastics and composite IBCs: no permanent deformation which would render the IBC unsafe for transport and no leakage.

422 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

440

Bilaga 1

Chapter 6.5 – Construction and testing of intermediate bulk containers (IBCs)

6.5.6.9 Drop test

6.5.6.9.1 Applicability

For all types of IBCs, as a design type test.

6.5.6.9.2 Preparation of the IBC for test

.1 Metal IBCs: the IBC shall be filled to not less than 95% of its maximum capacity for solids or 98% of its maximum capacity for liquids. Pressure relief devices shall be rendered inoperative or shall be removed and their apertures sealed. .2 Flexible IBCs: the IBC shall be filled to the maximum permissible gross mass, the contents being evenly distributed. .3 Rigid plastics and composite IBCs: the IBC shall be filled to not less than 95% of its maximum capacity for solids or 98% of its maximum capacity for liquids. Arrangements provided for pressure relief may be removed and sealed or rendered inoperative. Testing of IBCs shall be carried out when the temperature of the test sample and its contents has been reduced to –18°C or lower. Where test samples of composite IBCs are prepared in this way, the conditioning specified in 6.5.6.3.1 may be waived. Test liquids shall be kept in the liquid state, if necessary by the addition of anti-freeze. This conditioning may be disregarded if the materials in question are of sufficient ductility and tensile strength at low temperatures. .4 Fibreboard and wooden IBCs: the IBC shall be filled to not less than 95% of its maximum capacity.

6.5.6.9.3 Method of testing

The IBC shall be dropped on its base onto a non-resilient, horizontal, flat, massive and rigid surface in conformity with the requirements of 6.1.5.3.4, in such a manner as to ensure that the point of impact is that part of the base of the IBC considered to be the most vulnerable. IBCs of 0.45 m3 or less capacity shall also be dropped: .1 Metal IBCs: on the most vulnerable part other than the part of the base of the IBC tested in the first drop; .2 Flexible IBCs: on the most vulnerable side; .3 Rigid plastics, composite, fibreboard and wooden IBCs: flat on a side, flat on the top and on a corner. The same or different IBCs may be used for each drop.

6.5.6.9.4 Drop height

For solids and liquids, if the test is performed with the solid or liquid to be transported or with another substance having essentially the same physical characteristics: Packing group I Packing group II Packing group III 1.8 m 1.2 m 0.8 m

For liquids, if the test is performed with water: (a) where the substances to be transported have a relative density not exceeding 1.2: Packing group II Packing group III 1.2 m 0.8 m

(b) where the substances to be transported have a relative density exceeding 1.2, the drop heights shall be calculated on the basis of the relative density (d) of the substance to be transported rounded up to the first decimal as follows: Packing group II Packing group III d × 1.0 m d × 0.67 m

6.5.6.9.5 Criterion for passing the test(s)

.1 Metal IBCs: no loss of contents. .2 Flexible IBCs: no loss of contents. A slight discharge, such as from closures or stitch holes, upon impact shall not be considered to be a failure of the IBC provided that no further leakage occurs after the IBC has been raised clear of the ground. .3 Rigid plastics, composite, fibreboard and wooden IBCs: no loss of contents. A slight discharge from a closure upon impact shall not be considered to be a failure of the IBC provided that no further leakage occurs.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 423

441

Bilaga 1

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc.

.4 All IBCs: no damage which renders the IBC unsafe to be transported for salvage or for disposal, and no loss of contents. In addition, the IBC shall be capable of being lifted by an appropriate means until clear of the floor for five minutes. Note: The criterion in 6.5.6.9.5.4 applies to design types for IBCs manufactured as from 1 January 2011.

6.5.6.10 Tear test

6.5.6.10.1 Applicability

For all types of flexible IBCs, as a design type test.

6.5.6.10.2 Preparation of the IBC for test

The IBC shall be filled to not less than 95% of its capacity and to its maximum permissible gross mass, the contents being evenly distributed.

6.5.6.10.3 Method of testing

Once the IBC is placed on the ground, a 100 mm knife score, completely penetrating the wall of a wide face, is made at a 45° angle to the principal axis of the IBC, halfway between the bottom surface and the top level of the contents. The IBC shall then be subjected to a uniformly distributed superimposed load equivalent to twice the maximum permissible gross mass. The load shall be applied for at least five minutes. An IBC which is designed to be lifted from the top or the side shall then, after removal of the superimposed load, be lifted until it is clear of the floor and maintained in that position for a period of five minutes.

6.5.6.10.4 Criterion for passing the test

The cut shall not propagate more than 25% of its original length.

6.5.6.11 Topple test

6.5.6.11.1 Applicability

For all types of flexible IBCs, as a design type test.

6.5.6.11.2 Preparation of the IBC for test

The IBC shall be filled to not less than 95% of its capacity and to its maximum permissible gross mass, the contents being evenly distributed.

6.5.6.11.3 Method of testing

The IBC shall be caused to topple onto any part of its top onto a rigid, non-resilient, smooth, flat and horizontal surface.

6.5.6.11.4 Topple height

Packing group I Packing group II Packing group III 1.8 m 1.2 m 0.8 m

6.5.6.11.5 Criterion for passing the test

No loss of contents. A slight discharge, such as from closures or stitch holes, upon impact shall not be considered to be a failure of the IBC provided that no further leakage occurs.

6.5.6.12 Righting test

6.5.6.12.1 Applicability

For all flexible IBCs designed to be lifted from the top or side, as a design type test.

6.5.6.12.2 Preparation of the IBC for test

The IBC shall be filled to not less than 95% of its capacity and its maximum permissible gross mass, the contents being evenly distributed.

424 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

442

Bilaga 1

Chapter 6.5 – Construction and testing of intermediate bulk containers (IBCs)

6.5.6.12.3 Method of testing

The IBC, lying on its side, shall be lifted at a speed of 0.1 m/s to an upright position, clear of the floor, by one lifting device or by two lifting devices when four are provided.

6.5.6.12.4 Criterion for passing the test

No damage to the IBC or its lifting devices which renders the IBC unsafe for transport or handling.

6.5.6.13 Vibration test

6.5.6.13.1 Applicability

For all IBCs used for liquids, as a design type test. Note: This test applies to design types for IBCs manufactured as from 1 January 2011.

6.5.6.13.2 Preparation of the IBC for test

A sample IBC shall be selected at random and shall be fitted and closed as for transport. The IBC shall be filled with water to not less than 98% of its maximum capacity.

6.5.6.13.3 Test method and duration

6.5.6.13.3.1 The IBC shall be placed in the centre of the test machine platform with a vertical sinusoidal, double amplitude (peak-to-peak displacement) of 25 mm ± 5%. If necessary, restraining devices shall be attached to the platform to prevent the specimen from moving horizontally off the platform without restricting vertical movement. 6.5.6.13.3.2 The test shall be conducted for one hour at a frequency that causes part of the base of the IBC to be momentarily raised from the vibrating platform for part of each cycle to such a degree that a metal shim can be completely inserted intermittently at, at least, one point between the base of the IBC and the test platform. The frequency may need to be adjusted after the initial set point to prevent the packaging from going into resonance. Nevertheless, the test frequency shall continue to allow placement of the metal shim under the IBC as described in this paragraph. The continuing ability to insert the metal shim is essential to passing the test. The metal shim used for this test shall be at least 1.6 mm thick, 50 mm wide, and be of sufficient length to be inserted between the IBC and the test platform a minimum of 100 mm to perform the test.

6.5.6.13.4 Criteria for passing the test

No leakage or rupture shall be observed. In addition, no breakage or failure of structural components, such as broken welds or failed fastenings, shall be observed.

6.5.6.14 Test report

6.5.6.14.1 A test report containing at least the following particulars shall be drawn up and shall be available to the users of the IBC: .1 name and address of the test facility; .2 name and address of applicant (where appropriate); .3 a unique test report identification; .4 date of the test report; .5 manufacturer of the IBC; .6 description of the IBC design type (such as dimensions, materials, closures, thickness, etc.), including method of manufacture (such as blow-moulding), and which may include drawing(s) and/or photograph(s); .7 maximum capacity; .8 characteristics of test contents, such as viscosity and relative density for liquids and particle size for solids; .9 test descriptions and results; and .10 signature, with the name and status of the signatory. 6.5.6.14.2 The test report shall contain statements that the IBC, prepared as for transport, was tested in accordance with the appropriate provisions of this chapter and that the use of other packaging methods or components may render it invalid. A copy of the test report shall be available to the competent authority.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 425

443

Bilaga 1

Chapter 6.6

Provisions for the construction and testing of large packagings

6.6.1 General

6.6.1.1 The provisions of this chapter do not apply to: – class 2, except articles including aerosols; – class 6.2, except clinical waste of UN 3291; – class 7 packages containing radioactive material. 6.6.1.2 Large packagings shall be manufactured, tested and remanufactured under a quality-assurance programme which satisfies the competent authority in order to ensure that each manufactured or remanufactured large packaging meets the provisions of this chapter. Note: ISO 16106:2006 “Packaging – Transport packages for dangerous goods – Dangerous goods packagings, intermediate bulk containers (IBCs) and large packagings – Guidelines for the application of ISO 9001” provides acceptable guidance on procedures which may be followed. 6.6.1.3 The specific requirements for large packagings in 6.6.4 are based on large packagings currently used. In order to take into account progress in science and technology, there is no objection to the use of large packagings having specifications different from those in 6.6.4 provided they are equally effective, acceptable to the competent authority and able successfully to withstand the tests described in 6.6.5. Methods of testing other than those prescribed in this Code are acceptable provided they are equivalent. 6.6.1.4 Manufacturers and subsequent distributors of packagings shall provide information regarding procedures to be followed and a description of the types and dimensions of closures (including required gaskets) and any other components needed to ensure that packages as presented for transport are capable of passing the applicable performance tests of this chapter.

6.6.2 Code for designating types of large packagings

6.6.2.1 The code used for large packagings consists of: (a) two Arabic numerals: “50” for rigid large packagings; or “51” for flexible large packagings; and (b) capital letters in Latin characters indicating the nature of the material, such as wood, steel, etc. The capital letters used shall be those shown in 6.1.2.6. 6.6.2.2 The letter “W” may follow the large packaging code. The letter “W” signifies that the large packaging, although of the same type as indicated by the code, is manufactured to a specification different from those in 6.6.4 and is considered equivalent in accordance with the requirements in 6.6.1.3.

6.6.3 Marking

6.6.3.1 Primary marking Each large packaging manufactured and intended for the use according to this Code shall bear markings

6 which are durable, legible and placed in a location so as to be readily visible. Letters, numerals and symbols

shall be at least 12 mm high and shall show:

(a) The United Nations packaging symbol

This symbol shall not be used for any purpose other than certifying that a packaging, a flexible bulk container, a portable tank or a MEGC complies with the relevant requirements in Chapter 6.1, 6.2, 6.3, 6.5, 6.6, 6.7 or 6.9;

426 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

444

Bilaga 1

Chapter 6.6 – Construction and testing of large packagings

(b) the code “50” designating a large rigid packaging or “51” for flexible large packagings, followed by the material type in accordance with 6.5.1.4.1.2; (c) a capital letter designating the packing group(s) for which the design type has been approved: “X” for packing groups I, II and III “Y” for packing groups II and III “Z” for packing group III only; (d) the month and year (last two digits) of manufacture; (e) the State authorizing the allocation of the marks, indicated by the distinguishing sign for motor vehicles in international traffic; (f) the name or symbol of the manufacturer and other identification of the large packagings as specified by the competent authority; * (g) the stacking test load in kilograms. For large packagings not designed for stacking, the figure “0” shall be shown; (h) the maximum permissible gross mass in kilograms. The primary marking required above shall be applied in the sequence of the subparagraphs. Each element of the marking applied in accordance with subparagraphs (a) to (h) shall be clearly separated, such as by a slash or space, so as to be easily identifiable. Note: The size requirement for the primary marking shall apply for large packagings manufactured as from 1 January 2014.

6.6.3.2 Examples of the marking

50A/X/05 01/N/PQRS For a large steel packaging suitable for stacking; stacking load: 2500/1000 2500 kg; maximum gross mass: 1000 kg.

50H/Y/04 02/D/ABCD 987 For a large plastics packaging not suitable for stacking; maximum 0/800 gross mass: 800 kg.

51H/Z/06 01/S/1999 For a large flexible packaging not suitable for stacking; maximum 0/500 gross mass: 500 kg.

6.6.3.3 The maximum permitted stacking load applicable when the large packaging is in use shall be displayed on a symbol as follows:

Minimum ... kg max Minimum

10 10 0 dime 0 dime m m m m nsion nsion

Minimum dimension Minimum dimension 100 mm 100 mm Large packaging capable of being stacked Large packaging NOT capable of being stacked

The symbol shall be not less than 100 mm × 100 mm, be durable and clearly visible. The letters and numbers indicating the mass shall be at least 12 mm high. The mass marked above the symbol shall not exceed the load imposed during the design type test (see 6.6.5.3.3.4) divided by 1.8. Note: The provisions of 6.6.3.3 shall apply to all large packagings manufactured, repaired or remanufactured as from 1 January 2015.

* The stacking test load in kilograms to be placed on the large packaging shall be 1.8 times the combined maximum permissible gross mass of the number of similar large packagings that may be stacked on top of the large packaging during transport (see 6.6.5.3.3.4).

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 427

445

Bilaga 1

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc.

6.6.4 Specific provisions for large packagings

6.6.4.1 Specific provisions for metal large packagings

50A steel 50B aluminium 50N metal (other than steel or aluminium) 6.6.4.1.1 The large packaging shall be made of suitable ductile metal in which the weldability has been fully demonstrated. Welds shall be skillfully made and afford complete safety. Low-temperature performance shall be taken into account when appropriate. 6.6.4.1.2 Care shall be taken to avoid damage by galvanic action due to the juxtaposition of dissimilar metals.

6.6.4.2 Specific provisions for flexible material large packagings

51H flexible plastics 51M flexible paper 6.6.4.2.1 The large packaging shall be manufactured from suitable materials. The strength of the material and the construction of the flexible large packaging shall be appropriate to its capacity and its intended use. 6.6.4.2.2 All materials used in the construction of flexible large packagings of types 51M shall, after complete immersion in water for not less than 24 hours, retain at least 85% of the tensile strength as measured originally on the material conditioned to equilibrium at 67% relative humidity or less. 6.6.4.2.3 Seams shall be formed by stitching, heat sealing, gluing or any equivalent method. All stitched seam-ends shall be secured. 6.6.4.2.4 Flexible large packagings shall provide adequate resistance to ageing and to degradation caused by ultraviolet radiation or the climatic conditions, or by the substance contained, thereby rendering them appropriate to their intended use. 6.6.4.2.5 For plastics flexible large packagings where protection against ultraviolet radiation is required, it shall be provided by the addition of carbon black or other suitable pigments or inhibitors. These additives shall be compatible with the contents and remain effective throughout the life of the large packaging. Where use is made of carbon black, pigments or inhibitors other than those used in the manufacture of the tested design type, re-testing may be waived if changes in the carbon black content, the pigment content or the inhibitor content do not adversely affect the physical properties of the material of construction. 6.6.4.2.6 Additives may be incorporated into the material of the large packaging to improve the resistance to ageing or to serve other purposes, provided that these do not adversely affect the physical or chemical properties of the material. 6.6.4.2.7 When filled, the ratio of height to width shall be not more than 2:1.

6.6.4.3 Specific provisions for plastics large packagings

50H rigid plastics 6.6.4.3.1 The large packaging shall be manufactured from suitable plastics material of known specifications and be of adequate strength in relation to its capacity and its intended use. The material shall be adequately resistant to ageing and to degradation caused by the substance contained or, where relevant, by ultraviolet radiation. Low-temperature performance shall be taken into account when appropriate. Any permeation of the substance contained shall not constitute a danger under normal conditions of transport. 6.6.4.3.2 Where protection against ultraviolet radiation is required, it shall be provided by the addition of carbon black or other suitable pigments or inhibitors. These additives shall be compatible with the contents and remain effective throughout the life of the outer packaging. Where use is made of carbon black, pigments or inhibitors other than those used in the manufacture of the tested design type, re-testing may be waived if changes in the carbon black content, the pigment content or the inhibitor content do not adversely affect the physical properties of the material of construction. 6.6.4.3.3 Additives may be incorporated into the material of the large packaging to improve the resistance to ageing or to serve other purposes, provided that these do not adversely affect the physical or chemical properties of the material.

6.6.4.4 Specific provisions for fibreboard large packagings

50G rigid fibreboard

428 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

446

Bilaga 1

Chapter 6.6 – Construction and testing of large packagings

6.6.4.4.1 Strong and good-quality solid or double-faced corrugated fibreboard (single or multiwall) shall be used, appropriate to the capacity of the large packagings and to their intended use. The water resistance of the outer surface shall be such that the increase in mass, as determined in a test carried out over a period of 30 minutes 2 by the Cobb method of determining water absorption, is not greater than 155 g/m – see ISO 535:1991. It shall have proper bending qualities. Fibreboard shall be cut, creased without scoring, and slotted so as to permit assembly without cracking, surface breaks or undue bending. The fluting of corrugated fibreboard shall be firmly glued to the facings.

6.6.4.4.2 The walls, including top and bottom, shall have a minimum puncture resistance of 15 J, measured according to ISO 3036:1975.

6.6.4.4.3 Manufacturing joins in the outer packaging of large packagings shall be made with an appropriate overlap and shall be taped, glued, stitched with metal staples or fastened by other means at least equally effective. Where joins are effected by gluing or taping, a water-resistant adhesive shall be used. Metal staples shall pass completely through all pieces to be fastened and be formed or protected so that any inner liner cannot be abraded or punctured by them.

6.6.4.4.4 Any integral pallet base forming part of a large packaging or any detachable pallet shall be suitable for mechanical handling with the large packaging filled to its maximum permissible gross mass.

6.6.4.4.5 The pallet or integral base shall be designed so as to avoid any protrusion of the base of the large packaging that might be liable to damage in handling.

6.6.4.4.6 The body shall be secured to any detachable pallet to ensure stability in handling and transport. Where a detachable pallet is used, its top surface shall be free from sharp protrusions that might damage the large packaging.

6.6.4.4.7 Strengthening devices such as timber supports to increase stacking performance may be used but shall be external to the liner.

6.6.4.4.8 Where large packagings are intended for stacking, the bearing surface shall be such as to distribute the load in a safe manner.

6.6.4.5 Specific provisions for wooden large packagings

50C natural wood 50D plywood 50F reconstituted wood

6.6.4.5.1 The strength of the materials used and the method of construction shall be appropriate to the capacity and intended use of the large packagings.

6.6.4.5.2 Natural wood shall be well seasoned, commercially dry and free from defects that would materially lessen the strength of any part of the large packaging. Each part of the large packaging shall consist of one piece or be equivalent thereto. Parts are considered equivalent to one piece when a suitable method of glued assembly is used, as for instance Lindermann joint, tongue and groove joint, ship lap or rabbet joint, or butt joint with at least two corrugated metal fasteners at each joint, or when other methods at least equally effective are used.

6.6.4.5.3 Large packagings of plywood shall be at least three-ply. They shall be made of well-seasoned rotary-cut, sliced or sawn veneer, commercially dry and free from defects that would materially lessen the strength of the large packaging. All adjacent plies shall be glued with water-resistant adhesive. Other suitable materials may be used with plywood for the construction of the large packaging.

6.6.4.5.4 Large packagings of reconstituted wood shall be made of water-resistant reconstituted wood such as hardboard, particle board or other suitable type.

6.6.4.5.5 Large packagings shall be firmly nailed or secured to corner posts or ends or be assembled by equally suitable devices.

6.6.4.5.6 Any integral pallet base forming part of a large packaging or any detachable pallet shall be suitable for mechanical handling with the large packaging filled to its maximum permissible gross mass.

6.6.4.5.7 The pallet or integral base shall be designed so as to avoid any protrusion of the base of the large packaging that might be liable to damage in handling.

6.6.4.5.8 The body shall be secured to any detachable pallet to ensure stability in handling and transport. Where a detachable pallet is used, its top surface shall be free from sharp protrusions that might damage the large packaging.

6.6.4.5.9 Strengthening devices such as timber supports to increase stacking performance may be used but shall be external to the liner.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 429

447

Bilaga 1

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc.

6.6.4.5.10 Where large packagings are intended for stacking, the bearing surface shall be such as to distribute the load in a safe manner.

6.6.5 Test provisions for large packagings

6.6.5.1 Performance and frequency of test

6.6.5.1.1 The design type of each large packaging shall be tested as provided in 6.6.5.3 in accordance with procedures established by the competent authority.

6.6.5.1.2 Each large packaging design type shall successfully pass the tests prescribed in this chapter before being used. A large packaging design type is defined by the design, size, material and thickness, manner of construction and packing, but may include various surface treatments. It also includes large packagings that differ from the design type only in their lesser design height.

6.6.5.1.3 Tests shall be repeated on production samples at intervals established by the competent authority. For such tests on fibreboard large packagings, preparation at ambient conditions is considered equivalent to the provisions of 6.6.5.2.4.

6.6.5.1.4 Tests shall also be repeated after each modification which alters the design, material or manner of construction of large packagings.

6.6.5.1.5 The competent authority may permit the selective testing of large packagings that differ only in minor respects from a tested type, such as smaller sizes of inner packagings or inner packagings of lower net mass, and large packagings which are produced with small reductions in external dimension(s).

6.6.5.1.6 [Reserved] Note: For the conditions for assembling different inner packagings in a large packaging and permissible variations in inner packagings, see 4.1.1.5.1.

6.6.5.1.7 The competent authority may at any time require proof, by tests in accordance with this section, that serially produced large packagings meet the provisions of the design type tests.

6.6.5.1.8 Provided the validity of the test results is not affected, and with the approval of the competent authority, several tests may be made on one sample.

6.6.5.2 Preparation for testing

6.6.5.2.1 Tests shall be carried out on large packagings prepared as for transport, including the inner packagings or articles used. Inner packagings shall be filled to not less than 98% of their maximum capacity for liquids or 95% for solids. For large packagings where the inner packagings are designed to carry liquids and solids, separate testing is required for both liquid and solid contents. The substances in the inner packagings or the articles to be transported in the large packagings may be replaced by other material or articles except where this would invalidate the results of the tests. When other inner packagings or articles are used, they shall have the same physical characteristics (mass, etc.) as the inner packagings or articles to be carried. It is permissible to use additives, such as bags of lead shot, to achieve the requisite total package mass, so long as they are placed so that the test results are not affected.

6.6.5.2.2 In the drop tests for liquids, when another substance is used, it shall be of similar relative density and viscosity to those of the substance being transported. Water may also be used for the liquid drop test under the conditions in 6.6.5.3.4.4.

6.6.5.2.3 Large packagings made of plastics materials and large packagings containing inner packagings of plastic materials – other than bags intended to contain solids or articles – shall be drop tested when the temperature of the test sample and its contents has been reduced to –18°C or lower. This conditioning may be disregarded if the materials in question are of sufficient ductility and tensile strength at low temperatures. Where test samples are prepared in this way, the conditioning in 6.6.5.2.4 may be waived. Test liquids shall be kept in the liquid state by the addition of anti-freeze if necessary.

6.6.5.2.4 Large packagings of fibreboard shall be conditioned for at least 24 hours in an atmosphere having a controlled temperature and relative humidity (r.h). There are three options, one of which shall be chosen. The preferred atmosphere is 23°C±2°C and 50%±2% r.h. The two other options are 20°C±2°C and 65%±2% r.h. or 27°C±2°C and 65%±2% r.h.

Note: Average values shall fall within these limits. Short-term fluctuation and measurement limitations may cause individual measurements to vary by up to ±5% relative humidity without significant impairment of test reproducibility.

430 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

448

Bilaga 1

Chapter 6.6 – Construction and testing of large packagings

6.6.5.3 Test provisions

6.6.5.3.1 Bottom lift test

6.6.5.3.1.1 Applicability

For all types of large packagings which are fitted with means of lifting from the base, as a design type test.

6.6.5.3.1.2 Preparation of large packaging for test

The large packaging shall be filled to 1.25 times its maximum permissible gross mass, the load being evenly distributed.

6.6.5.3.1.3 Method of testing

The large packaging shall be raised and lowered twice by a lift truck with the forks centrally positioned and spaced at three quarters of the dimension of the side of entry (unless the points of entry are fixed). The forks shall penetrate to three quarters of the depth in the direction of entry. The test shall be repeated from each possible direction of entry.

6.6.5.3.1.4 Criteria for passing the test

No permanent deformation which renders the large packaging unsafe for transport and no loss of contents.

6.6.5.3.2 Top lift test

6.6.5.3.2.1 Applicability

For types of large packaging which are intended to be lifted from the top and fitted with means of lifting, as a design type test.

6.6.5.3.2.2 Preparation of large packaging for test

The large packaging shall be loaded to twice its maximum permissible gross mass. A flexible large packaging shall be loaded to six times its maximum permissible gross mass, the load being evenly distributed.

6.6.5.3.2.3 Method of testing

The large packaging shall be lifted in the manner for which it is designed until clear of the floor and maintained in that position for a period of five minutes.

6.6.5.3.2.4 Criteria for passing the test

.1 Metal, rigid plastics and composite large packagings: no permanent deformation which renders the large packaging, including the base pallet, if any, unsafe for transport and no loss of contents. .2 Flexible large packagings: no damage to the large packaging or its lifting devices which renders the large packaging unsafe for transport or handling and no loss of contents.

6.6.5.3.3 Stacking test

6.6.5.3.3.1 Applicability

For all types of large packaging which are designed to be stacked on each other, as a design type test.

6.6.5.3.3.2 Preparation of large packaging for test

The large packaging shall be filled to its maximum permissible gross mass.

6.6.5.3.3.3 Method of testing

The large packaging shall be placed on its base on level hard ground and subjected to a uniformly distributed superimposed test load (see 6.6.5.3.3.4) for a period of at least five minutes: for large packaging of wood, fibreboard and plastics materials for a period of 24 hours.

6.6.5.3.3.4 Calculation of superimposed test load

The load to be placed on the large packaging shall be 1.8 times the combined maximum permissible gross mass of the number of similar large packagings that may be stacked on top of the large packaging during transport.

6.6.5.3.3.5 Criteria for passing the test

.1 All types of large packagings other than flexible large packagings: no permanent deformation which renders the large packaging, including the base pallet, if any, unsafe for transport and no loss of contents. .2 Flexible large packagings: no deterioration of the body which renders the large packaging unsafe for transport and no loss of contents.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 431

449

Bilaga 1

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc.

6.6.5.3.4 Drop test

6.6.5.3.4.1 Applicability

For all types of large packaging, as a design type test.

6.6.5.3.4.2 Preparation of large packaging for testing

The large packaging shall be filled in accordance with 6.6.5.2.1.

6.6.5.3.4.3 Method of testing

The large packaging shall be dropped onto a non-resilient, horizontal, flat, massive and rigid surface in conformity with the requirements of 6.1.5.3.4, in such a manner as to ensure that the point of impact is that part of the base of the large packaging considered to be the most vulnerable.

6.6.5.3.4.4 Drop height

Note: Large packagings for substances and articles of class 1 shall be tested at the packing group II performance level. 6.6.5.3.4.4.1 For inner packagings containing solid or liquid substances or articles, if the test is performed with the solid, liquid or articles to be transported, or with another substance or article having essentially the same characteristics: Packing group I Packing group II Packing group III 1.8 m 1.2 m 0.8 m

6.6.5.3.4.4.2 For inner packagings containing liquids if the test is performed with water: (a) Where the substances to be transported have a relative density not exceeding 1.2: Packing group I Packing group II Packing group III 1.8 m 1.2 m 0.8 m (b) Where the substances to be transported have a relative density exceeding 1.2, the drop height shall be calculated on the basis of the relative density (d) of the substance to be carried, rounded up to the first decimal, as follows: Packing group I Packing group II Packing group III d × 1.5 (m) d × 1.0 (m) d × 0.67 (m)

6.6.5.3.4.5 Criteria for passing the test

6.6.5.3.4.5.1 The large packaging shall not exhibit any damage liable to affect safety during transport. There shall be no leakage of the filling substance from inner packaging(s) or article(s). 6.6.5.3.4.5.2 No rupture is permitted in a large packaging for articles of class 1 which would permit the spillage of loose explosive substances or articles from the large packaging. 6.6.5.3.4.5.3 Where a large packaging undergoes a drop test, the sample passes the test if the entire contents are retained even if the closure is no longer sift-proof.

6.6.5.4 Certification and test report

6.6.5.4.1 In respect of each design type of large packaging, a certificate and mark (as in 6.6.3) shall be issued attesting that the design type, including its equipment, meets the test provisions. 6.6.5.4.2 A test report containing at least the following particulars shall be drawn up and shall be available to the users of the large packaging: .1 name and address of the test facility; .2 name and address of applicant (where appropriate); .3 a unique test report identification; .4 date of the test report; .5 manufacturer of the large packaging; .6 description of the large packaging design type (such as dimensions, materials, closures, thickness, etc.) and/or photograph(s); .7 maximum capacity/maximum permissible gross mass;

432 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

450

Bilaga 1

Chapter 6.6 – Construction and testing of large packagings

.8 characteristics of test contents, such as types and descriptions of inner packaging or articles used; .9 test descriptions and results; .10 the test report shall be signed with the name and status of the signatory. 6.6.5.4.3 The test report shall contain statements that the large packaging prepared as for transport was tested in accordance with the appropriate provisions of this chapter and that the use of other packaging methods or components may render it invalid. A copy of the test report shall be available to the competent authority.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 433

451

Bilaga 1

Chapter 6.7

Provisions for the design, construction, inspection and testing of portable tanks and multiple-element gas containers (MEGCs)

Note: The provisions of this chapter also apply to road tank vehicles to the extent indicated in chapter 6.8.

6.7.1 Application and general provisions

6.7.1.1 The provisions of this chapter apply to portable tanks intended for the transport of dangerous goods, and to MEGCs intended for the transport of non-refrigerated gases of class 2, by all modes of transport. In addition to the provisions of this chapter, unless otherwise specified, the applicable provisions of the International Convention for Safe Containers (CSC) 1972, as amended, shall be fulfilled by any multimodal portable tank or MEGC which meets the definition of a “container” within the terms of that Convention. Additional provisions may apply to offshore portable tanks that are handled in open seas. 6.7.1.1.1 The International Convention for Safe Containers does not apply to offshore tank-containers that are handled in open seas. The design and testing of offshore tank-containers shall take into account the dynamic lifting and impact forces that may occur when a tank is handled in open seas in adverse weather and sea conditions. The provisions for such tanks shall be determined by the approving competent authority (see also MSC/Circ.860 “Guidelines for the approval of offshore containers handled in open seas”). 6.7.1.2 In recognition of scientific and technological advances, the technical provisions of this chapter may be varied by alternative arrangements. These alternative arrangements shall offer a level of safety not less than that given by the provisions of this chapter with respect to the compatibility with substances transported and the ability of the portable tank to withstand impact, loading and fire conditions. For international transport, alternative arrangement portable tanks or MEGCs shall be approved by the applicable competent authorities. 6.7.1.3 When a substance is not assigned a portable tank instruction (T1 to T75) in the Dangerous Goods List in chapter 3.2, interim approval for transport may be issued by the competent authority of the country of origin. The approval shall be included in the documentation of the consignment and contain, as a minimum, the information normally provided in the portable tank instructions and the conditions under which the substance shall be transported. Appropriate measures shall be initiated by the competent authority to include the assignment in the Dangerous Goods List.

6.7.2 Provisions for the design, construction, inspection and testing of portable tanks intended for the transport of substances of class 1 and classes 3 to 9

6.7.2.1 Definitions

For the purposes of this section: Design pressure means the pressure to be used in calculations required by a recognized pressure-vessel code. The design pressure shall be not less than the highest of the following pressures: .1 the maximum effective gauge pressure allowed in the shell during filling or discharge; or .2 the sum of: .1 the absolute vapour pressure (in bar) of the substance at 65°C (or at the highest temperature during

6

filling, discharge or transport for substances which are filled, discharged or transported over 65°C), minus 1 bar; .2 the partial pressure (in bar) of air or other gases in the ullage space, being determined by a maximum ullage temperature of 65°C and a liquid expansion due to an increase in mean bulk temperature of tr – tf (tf = filling temperature, usually 15°C; tr = 50°C, maximum mean bulk temperature); and .3 a head pressure determined on the basis of the static forces specified in 6.7.2.2.12, but not less than 0.35 bar. .3 two thirds of the minimum test pressure specified in the applicable portable tank instruction in 4.2.5.2.6;

434 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

452

Bilaga 1

Chapter 6.7 – Design, construction, inspection and testing of portable tanks & MEGCs

Design temperature range for the shell shall be –40°C to 50°C for substances transported under ambient conditions. For the other substances filled, discharged or transported above 50°C, the design temperature shall not be less than the maximum temperature of the substance during filling, discharge or transport. More severe design temperatures shall be considered for portable tanks subjected to severe climatic conditions;

Fine grain steel means steel which has a ferritic grain size of 6 or finer when determined in accordance with ASTM E 112-96 or as defined in EN 10028-3, Part 3;

Fusible element means a non-reclosable pressure relief device that is thermally actuated;

Leakproofness test means a test using gas, subjecting the shell and its service equipment to an effective internal pressure of not less than 25% of the MAWP;

Maximum allowable working pressure (MAWP) means a pressure that shall be not less than the highest of the following pressures measured at the top of the shell while in operating position: .1 the maximum effective gauge pressure allowed in the shell during filling or discharge; or .2 the maximum effective gauge pressure to which the shell is designed, which shall be not less than the sum of: .1 the absolute vapour pressure (in bar) of the substance at 65°C (or at the highest temperature during filling, discharge or transport for substances which are filled, discharged or transported over 65°C) minus 1 bar; and .2 the partial pressure (in bar) of air or other gases in the ullage space, being determined by a maximum ullage temperature of 65°C and a liquid expansion due to an increase in mean bulk temperature of tr – tf (tf =filling temperature, usually 15°C; tr = 50°C, maximum mean bulk temperature);

Maximum permissible gross mass (MPGM) means the sum of the tare mass of the portable tank and the heaviest load authorized for transport; 2 2 Mild steel means a steel with a guaranteed minimum tensile strength of 360 N/mm to 440 N/mm and a guaranteed minimum elongation at fracture conforming to 6.7.2.3.3.3;

Offshore portable tank means a portable tank specially designed for repeated use for transport of dangerous goods to, from and between offshore facilities. An offshore portable tank is designed and constructed in accordance with MSC/Circ.860 “Guidelines for the approval of containers handled in open seas”;

Portable tank means a multimodal tank used for the transport of substances of class 1 and classes 3 to 9. The portable tank includes a shell fitted with service equipment and structural equipment necessary for the transport of dangerous substances. The portable tank shall be capable of being filled and discharged without the removal of its structural equipment. It shall possess stabilizing members external to the shell, and shall be capable of being lifted when full. It shall be designed primarily to be loaded onto a vehicle or ship and shall be equipped with skids, mountings or accessories to facilitate mechanical handling. Road tank-vehicles, rail tank-wagons, non-metallic tanks and intermediate bulk containers (IBCs) are not considered to fall within the definition for portable tanks; 2 Reference steel means a steel with a tensile strength of 370 N/mm and an elongation at fracture of 27%;

Service equipment means measuring instruments and filling, discharge, venting, safety, heating, cooling and insulating devices;

Shell means the part of the portable tank which retains the substance intended for transport (tank proper), including openings and their closures, but does not include service equipment or external structural equipment;

Structural equipment means the reinforcing, fastening, protective and stabilizing members external to the shell;

Test pressure means the maximum gauge pressure at the top of the shell during the hydraulic pressure test, equal to not less than 1.5 times the design pressure. The minimum test pressure for portable tanks intended for specific substances is specified in the applicable portable tank instruction in 4.2.5.2.6.

6.7.2.2 General design and construction provisions

6.7.2.2.1 Shells shall be designed and constructed in accordance with the provisions of a pressure-vessel code recognized by the competent authority. Shells shall be made of metallic materials suitable for forming. The materials shall, in principle, conform to national or international material standards. For welded shells, only a material whose weldability has been fully demonstrated shall be used. Welds shall be skillfully made and afford complete safety. When the manufacturing process or the materials make it necessary, the shells shall be suitably heat-treated to guarantee adequate toughness in the weld and in the heat-affected zones. In choosing the material, the design temperature range shall be taken into account with respect to risk of brittle

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 435

453

Bilaga 1

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc.

fracture, to stress corrosion cracking and to resistance to impact. When fine grain-steel is used, the guaran- 2 teed value of the yield strength shall be not more than 460 N/mm and the guaranteed value of the upper limit 2 of the tensile strength shall be not more than 725 N/mm according to the material specification. Aluminium may only be used as a construction material when indicated in a portable tank special provision assigned to a specific substance in the Dangerous Goods List or when approved by the competent authority. When aluminium is authorized, it shall be insulated to prevent significant loss of physical properties when subjected 2 to a heat load of 110 kW/m for a period of not less than 30 minutes. The insulation shall remain effective at all temperatures less than 649°C and shall be jacketed with a material with a melting point of not less than 700°C. Portable tank materials shall be suitable for the external environment in which they may be transported.

6.7.2.2.2 Portable tank shells, fittings, and pipework shall be constructed from materials which are: .1 substantially immune to attack by the substance(s) intended to be transported; or .2 properly passivated or neutralized by chemical reaction; or .3 lined with corrosion-resistant material directly bonded to the shell or attached by equivalent means.

6.7.2.2.3 Gaskets shall be made of materials not subject to attack by the substance(s) intended to be transported.

6.7.2.2.4 When shells are lined, the lining shall be substantially immune to attack by the substance(s) intended to be transported, homogeneous, non-porous, free from perforations, sufficiently elastic and compatible with the thermal expansion characteristics of the shell. The lining of every shell, shell fittings and piping shall be continuous, and shall extend around the face of any flange. Where external fittings are welded to the tank, the lining shall be continuous through the fitting and around the face of external flanges.

6.7.2.2.5 Joints and seams in the lining shall be made by fusing the material together or by other equally effective means.

6.7.2.2.6 Contact between dissimilar metals which could result in damage by galvanic action shall be avoided.

6.7.2.2.7 The materials of the portable tank, including any devices, gaskets, linings and accessories, shall not adversely affect the substance(s) intended to be transported in the portable tank.

6.7.2.2.8 Portable tanks shall be designed and constructed with supports to provide a secure base during transport and with suitable lifting and tie-down attachments.

6.7.2.2.9 Portable tanks shall be designed to withstand, without loss of contents, at least the internal pressure due to the contents and the static, dynamic and thermal loads during normal conditions of handling and transport. The design shall demonstrate that the effects of fatigue, caused by repeated application of these loads through the expected life of the portable tank, have been taken into account.

6.7.2.2.9.1 For portable tanks that are intended for use as offshore tank-containers, the dynamic stresses imposed by handling in open seas shall be taken into account.

6.7.2.2.10 A shell which is to be equipped with a vacuum-relief device shall be designed to withstand, without permanent deformation, an external pressure of not less than 0.21 bar above the internal pressure. The vacuum-relief device shall be set to relieve at a vacuum setting not greater than –0.21 bar unless the shell is designed for a higher external overpressure, in which case the vacuum-relief pressure of the device to be fitted shall be not greater than the tank design vacuum pressure. A shell used for the transport of solid substances of packing groups II or III only which do not liquefy during transport may be designed for a lower external pressure, subject to competent authority’s approval. In this case, the vacuum-relief device shall be set to relieve at this lower pressure. A shell that is not to be fitted with a vacuum-relief device shall be designed to withstand, without permanent deformation, an external pressure of not less than 0.4 bar above the internal pressure.

6.7.2.2.11 Vacuum-relief devices used on portable tanks intended for the transport of substances meeting the flashpoint criteria of class 3, including elevated-temperature substances transported at or above their flashpoint, shall prevent the immediate passage of flame into the shell, or the portable tank shall have a shell capable of withstanding, without leakage, an internal explosion resulting from the passage of flame into the shell.

6.7.2.2.12 Portable tanks and their fastenings shall, under the maximum permissible load, be capable of absorbing the following separately applied static forces: .1 in the direction of travel: twice the MPGM multiplied by the acceleration due to gravity (g);*

.2 horizontally at right angles to the direction of travel: the MPGM (when the direction of travel is not clearly determined, the forces shall be equal to twice the MPGM) multiplied by the acceleration due to gravity (g);* .3 vertically upwards: the MPGM multiplied by the acceleration due to gravity (g);* and

* For calculation purposes, g = 9.81 m/s2.

436 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

454

Bilaga 1

Chapter 6.7 – Design, construction, inspection and testing of portable tanks & MEGCs

.4 vertically downwards: twice the MPGM (total loading including the effect of gravity) multiplied by the * acceleration due to gravity (g).

6.7.2.2.13 Under each of the forces in 6.7.2.2.12, the safety factor to be observed shall be as follows: .1 for metals having a clearly defined yield point, a safety factor of 1.5 in relation to the guaranteed yield strength; or .2 for metals with no clearly defined yield point, a safety factor of 1.5 in relation to the guaranteed 0.2% proof strength and, for austenitic steels, the 1% proof strength.

6.7.2.2.14 The value of yield strength or proof strength shall be the value according to national or international material standards. When austenitic steels are used, the specified minimum values of yield strength or proof strength according to the material standards may be increased by up to 15% when these greater values are attested in the material inspection certificate. When no material standard exists for the metal in question, the value of yield strength or proof strength used shall be approved by the competent authority.

6.7.2.2.15 Portable tanks shall be capable of being electrically earthed when intended for the transport of substances meeting the flashpoint criteria of class 3, including elevated-temperature substances transported above their flashpoint. Measures shall be taken to prevent dangerous electrostatic discharge.

6.7.2.2.16 When required for certain substances by the applicable portable tank instruction indicated in column 13 of the Dangerous Goods List, or by a portable tank special provision indicated in column 14, portable tanks shall be provided with additional protection, which may take the form of additional shell thickness or a higher test pressure, the additional shell thickness or higher test pressure being determined in the light of the inherent risks associated with the transport of the substances concerned.

6.7.2.2.17 Thermal insulation directly in contact with the shell intended for substances transported at elevated temperature shall have an ignition temperature at least 50°C higher than the maximum design temperature of the tank.

6.7.2.3 Design criteria

6.7.2.3.1 Shells shall be of a design capable of being stress-analysed mathematically or experimentally by resistance strain gauges, or by other methods approved by the competent authority.

6.7.2.3.2 Shells shall be designed and constructed to withstand a hydraulic test pressure not less than 1.5 times the design pressure. Specific provisions are laid down for certain substances in the applicable portable tank instruction indicated in column 13 of the Dangerous Goods List and described in 4.2.5 or by a portable tank special provision indicated in column 14 of the Dangerous Goods List and described in 4.2.5.3. The minimum shell thickness shall not be less than that specified for these tanks in 6.7.2.4.1 to 6.7.2.4.10.

6.7.2.3.3 For metals exhibiting a clearly defined yield point or characterized by a guaranteed proof strength (0.2% proof strength, generally, or 1% proof strength for austenitic steels), the primary membrane stress σ (sigma) in the shell shall not exceed 0.75Re or 0.50Rm, whichever is lower, at the test pressure, where: 2 Re = yield strength in N/mm , or 0.2% proof strength or, for austenitic steels, 1% proof strength; = 2 Rm minimum tensile strength in N/mm .

6.7.2.3.3.1 The values of Re and Rm to be used shall be the specified minimum values according to national or international material standards. When austenitic steels are used, the specified minimum values for Re and Rm according to the material standards may be increased by up to 15% when these greater values are attested in the material inspection certificate. When no material standard exists for the metal in question, the values of Re and Rm used shall be approved by the competent authority or its authorized body.

6.7.2.3.3.2 Steels which have a Re/Rm ratio of more than 0.85 are not allowed for the construction of welded shells. The values of Reand Rm to be used in determining this ratio shall be the values specified in the material inspection certificate.

6.7.2.3.3.3 Steels used in the construction of shells shall have an elongation at fracture, in %, of not less than 10,000/Rm with an absolute minimum of 16% for fine-grain steels and 20% for other steels. Aluminium and aluminium alloys used in the construction of shells shall have an elongation at fracture, in %, of not less than 10,000/6Rm with an absolute minimum of 12%.

6.7.2.3.3.4 For the purpose of determining actual values for materials, it shall be noted that for sheet metal, the axis of the tensile test specimen shall be at right angles (transversely) to the direction of rolling. The permanent elongation at fracture shall be measured on test specimens of rectangular cross-section in accordance with ISO 6892:1998 using a 50 mm gauge length.

6.7.2.4 Minimum shell thickness

6.7.2.4.1 The minimum shell thickness shall be the greater thickness based on:

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 437

455

Bilaga 1

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc.

.1 the minimum thickness determined in accordance with the provisions of 6.7.2.4.2 to 6.7.2.4.10; .2 the minimum thickness determined in accordance with the recognized pressure-vessel code, including the provisions in 6.7.2.3; and .3 the minimum thickness specified in the applicable portable tank instruction indicated in column 13 of the Dangerous Goods List, or by a portable tank special provision indicated in column 14.

6.7.2.4.2 The cylindrical portions, ends (heads) and manhole covers of shells not more than 1.80 m in diameter shall be not less than 5 mm thick in the reference steel or of equivalent thickness in the metal to be used. Shells more than 1.80 m in diameter shall be not less than 6 mm thick in the reference steel or of equivalent thickness in the metal to be used, except that for powdered or granular solid substances of packing group II or III the minimum thickness requirement may be reduced to not less than 5 mm thick in the reference steel or of equivalent thickness in the metal to be used.

6.7.2.4.3 When additional protection against shell damage is provided, portable tanks with test pressures less than 2.65 bar may have the minimum shell thickness reduced, in proportion to the protection provided, as approved by the competent authority. However, shells not more than 1.80 m in diameter shall be not less than 3 mm thick in the reference steel or of equivalent thickness in the metal to be used. Shells more than 1.80 m in diameter shall be not less than 4 mm thick in the reference steel or of equivalent thickness in the metal to be used.

6.7.2.4.4 The cylindrical portions, ends (heads) and manhole covers of all shells shall be not less than 3 mm thick regardless of the material of construction.

6.7.2.4.5 The additional protection referred to in 6.7.2.4.3 may be provided by overall external structural protection, such as suitable “sandwich” construction with the outer sheathing (jacket) secured to the shell, double-wall construction or by enclosing the shell in a complete framework with longitudinal and transverse structural members.

6.7.2.4.6 The equivalent thickness of a metal other than the thickness prescribed for the reference steel in 6.7.2.4.3 shall be determined using the following equation: 21.4 × e 0 e 1= ________ 3_________

√R m1 ×A 1

where: e1 = required equivalent thickness (in mm) of the metal to be used; e0 = minimum thickness (in mm) of the reference steel specified in the applicable portable tank instruction or by a portable tank special provision indicated in column 13 or 14 of the Dangerous Goods List; 2 Rm1 = guaranteed minimum tensile strength (in N/mm ) of the metal to be used (see 6.7.2.3.3); A1 = guaranteed minimum elongation at fracture (in %) of the metal to be used according to national or international standards.

6.7.2.4.7 When, in the applicable portable tank instruction in 4.2.5.2.6, a minimum thickness of 8 mm, 10 mm or 12 mm is specified, it shall be noted that these thicknesses are based on the properties of the reference steel and a shell diameter of 1.80 m. When a metal other than mild steel (see 6.7.2.1) is used or the shell has a diameter of more than 1.80 m, the thickness shall be determined using the following equation: 21.4 × e 0d1 e = __________ 3 _________ 1

1.8 √R m1 ×A 1

where: e1 = required equivalent thickness (in mm) of the metal to be used; e0 = minimum thickness (in mm) of the reference steel specified in the applicable portable tank instruction or by a portable tank special provision indicated in column 13 or 14 of the Dangerous Goods List; d1 = diameter of the shell (in m), but not less than 1.80 m; = 2 Rm1 guaranteed minimum tensile strength (in N/mm ) of the metal to be used (see 6.7.2.3.3); A1 = guaranteed minimum elongation at fracture (in %) of the metal to be used according to national or international standards.

6.7.2.4.8 In no case shall the wall thickness be less than that prescribed in 6.7.2.4.2, 6.7.2.4.3 and 6.7.2.4.4. All parts of the shell shall have a minimum thickness as determined by 6.7.2.4.2 to 6.7.2.4.4. This thickness shall be exclusive of any corrosion allowance. 6.7.2.4.9 When mild steel is used (see 6.7.2.1), calculation using the equation in 6.7.2.4.6 is not required.

6.7.2.4.10 There shall be no sudden change of plate thickness at the attachment of the ends (heads) to the cylindrical portion of the shell.

438 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

456

Bilaga 1

Chapter 6.7 – Design, construction, inspection and testing of portable tanks & MEGCs

6.7.2.5 Service equipment

6.7.2.5.1 Service equipment shall be so arranged as to be protected against the risk of being wrenched off or damaged during handling and transport. When the connection between the frame and the shell allows relative movement between the sub-assemblies, the equipment shall be so fastened as to permit such movement without risk of damage to working parts. The external discharge fittings (pipe sockets, shut-off devices), the internal stop-valve and its seating shall be protected against the danger of being wrenched off by external forces (for example, by using shear sections). The filling and discharge devices (including flanges or threaded plugs) and any protective caps shall be capable of being secured against unintended opening.

6.7.2.5.1.1 For offshore tank-containers, where positioning of service equipment and the design and strength of protection for such equipment is concerned, the increased danger of impact damage when handling such tanks in open seas shall be taken into account.

6.7.2.5.2 All openings in the shell, intended for filling or discharging the portable tank, shall be fitted with a manually operated stop-valve located as close to the shell as reasonably practicable. Other openings, except for openings leading to venting or pressure relief devices, shall be equipped with either a stop-valve or another suitable means of closure located as close to the shell as reasonably practicable.

6.7.2.5.3 All portable tanks shall be fitted with a manhole or other inspection openings of a suitable size to allow for internal inspection and adequate access for maintenance and repair of the interior. Compartmented portable tanks shall have a manhole or other inspection openings for each compartment.

6.7.2.5.4 As far as reasonably practicable, external fittings shall be grouped together. For insulated portable tanks, top fittings shall be surrounded by a spill-collection reservoir with suitable drains.

6.7.2.5.5 Each connection to a portable tank shall be clearly marked to indicate its function. 6.7.2.5.6 Each stop-valve or other means of closure shall be designed and constructed to a rated pressure not less than the MAWP of the shell, taking into account the temperatures expected during transport. All stop-valves with screwed spindles shall close by a clockwise motion of the handwheel. For other stop-valves, the position (open and closed) and direction of closure shall be clearly indicated. All stop-valves shall be designed to prevent unintentional opening. 6.7.2.5.7 No moving parts, such as covers, components of closures, etc., shall be made of unprotected corrodible steel when they are liable to come into frictional or percussive contact with aluminium portable tanks intended for the transport of substances meeting the flashpoint criteria of class 3, including elevated-temperature substances transported above their flashpoint. 6.7.2.5.8 Piping shall be designed, constructed and installed so as to avoid the risk of damage due to thermal expansion and contraction, mechanical shock and vibration. All piping shall be of a suitable metallic material. Welded pipe joints shall be used wherever possible. 6.7.2.5.9 Joints in copper tubing shall be brazed or have an equally strong metal union. The melting point of brazing materials shall be no lower than 525°C. The joints shall not decrease the strength of the tubing, as may happen when cutting threads.

6.7.2.5.10 The burst pressure of all piping and pipe fittings shall be not less than the highest of four times the MAWP of the shell or four times the pressure to which it may be subjected in service by the action of a pump or other device (except pressure relief devices).

6.7.2.5.11 Ductile metals shall be used in the construction of valves and accessories.

6.7.2.5.12 The heating system shall be designed or controlled so that a substance cannot reach a temperature at which the pressure in the tank exceeds its MAWP or causes other hazards (e.g., dangerous thermal decomposition). 6.7.2.5.13 The heating system shall be designed or controlled so that power for internal heating elements is not available unless the heating elements are completely submerged. The temperature at the surface of the heating elements for internal heating equipment or the temperature at the shell for external heating equipment shall, in no case, exceed 80% of the auto-ignition temperature (in °C ) of the substances carried.

6.7.2.5.14 If an electrical heating system is installed inside the tank, it shall be equipped with an earth leakage circuit breaker with a releasing current of less than 100 mA.

6.7.2.5.15 Electrical switch cabinets mounted to tanks shall not have a direct connection to the tank interior and shall provide protection of at least the equivalent of IP 56 according to IEC 144 or IEC 529.

6.7.2.6 Bottom openings

6.7.2.6.1 Certain substances shall not be transported in portable tanks with bottom openings. When the applicable portable tank instruction identified in the Dangerous Goods List and described in 4.2.5.2.6 indicates that bottom openings are prohibited, there shall be no openings below the liquid level of the shell when it is filled

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 439

457

Bilaga 1

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc.

to its maximum permissible filling limit. When an existing opening is closed, it shall be accomplished by internally and externally welding one plate to the shell. 6.7.2.6.2 Bottom discharge outlets for portable tanks carrying certain solid, crystallizable or highly viscous substances shall be equipped with not less than two serially fitted and mutually independent shut-off devices. The design of the equipment shall be to the satisfaction of the competent authority or its authorized body and shall include: .1 an external stop-valve, fitted as close to the shell as reasonably practicable, and so designed as to prevent any unintended opening through impact or other inadvertent act; and .2 a liquid-tight closure at the end of the discharge pipe, which may be a bolted blank flange or a screw cap.

6.7.2.6.3 Every bottom discharge outlet, except as provided in 6.7.2.6.2, shall be equipped with three serially fitted and mutually independent shut-off devices. The design of the equipment shall be to the satisfaction of the competent authority or its authorized body and include: .1 a self-closing internal stop-valve, that is a stop-valve within the shell or within a welded flange or its companion flange, such that: .1 the control devices for the operation of the valve are designed so as to prevent any unintended opening through impact or other inadvertent act; .2 the valve may be operable from above or below; .3 if possible, the setting of the valve (open or closed) shall be capable of being verified from the ground; .4 except for portable tanks having a capacity of not more than 1000 ℓ, it shall be possible to close the valve from an accessible position of the portable tank that is remote from the valve itself; and .5 the valve shall continue to be effective in the event of damage to the external device for controlling the operation of the valve; .2 an external stop-valve fitted as close to the shell as reasonably practicable; and .3 a liquid-tight closure at the end of the discharge pipe, which may be a bolted blank flange or a screw cap. 6.7.2.6.4 For a lined shell, the internal stop-valve required by 6.7.2.6.3.1 may be replaced by an additional external stop-valve. The manufacturer shall satisfy the provisions of the competent authority or its authorized body.

6.7.2.7 Safety relief devices

6.7.2.7.1 All portable tanks shall be fitted with at least one pressure relief device. All relief devices shall be designed, constructed and marked to the satisfaction of the competent authority or its authorized body.

6.7.2.8 Pressure relief devices

6.7.2.8.1 Every portable tank with a capacity not less than 1900 ℓ and every independent compartment of a portable tank with a similar capacity shall be provided with one or more pressure relief devices of the spring-loaded type and may in addition have a frangible disc or fusible element in parallel with the spring-loaded devices except when prohibited by reference to 6.7.2.8.3 in the applicable portable tank instruction in 4.2.5.2.6. The pressure relief devices shall have sufficient capacity to prevent rupture of the shell due to over-pressurization or vacuum resulting from filling, from discharging, or from heating of the contents. 6.7.2.8.2 Pressure relief devices shall be designed to prevent the entry of foreign matter, the leakage of liquid and the development of any dangerous excess pressure.

6.7.2.8.3 When required for certain substances by the applicable portable tank instruction identified in the Dangerous Goods List and described in 4.2.5.2.6, portable tanks shall have a pressure relief device approved by the competent authority. Unless a portable tank in dedicated service is fitted with an approved relief device constructed of materials compatible with the load, the relief device shall comprise a frangible disc preceding a spring-loaded pressure relief device. When a frangible disc is inserted in series with the required pressure relief device, the space between the frangible disc and the pressure relief device shall be provided with a pressure gauge or suitable tell-tale indicator for the detection of disc rupture, pinholing, or leakage which could cause a malfunction of the pressure relief system. The frangible disc shall rupture at a nominal pressure 10% above the start-to-discharge pressure of the relief device. 6.7.2.8.4 Every portable tank with a capacity less than 1900 ℓ shall be fitted with a pressure relief device, which may be a frangible disc when this disc complies with the provisions of 6.7.2.11.1. When no spring-loaded pressure relief device is used, the frangible disc shall be set to rupture at a nominal pressure equal to the test pressure. In addition, fusible elements conforming to 6.7.2.10.1 may also be used.

6.7.2.8.5 When the shell is fitted for pressure discharge, the inlet line shall be provided with a suitable pressure relief device set to operate at a pressure not higher than the MAWP of the shell, and a stop-valve shall be fitted as close to the shell as reasonably practicable.

440 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

458

Bilaga 1

Chapter 6.7 – Design, construction, inspection and testing of portable tanks & MEGCs

6.7.2.9 Setting of pressure relief devices

6.7.2.9.1 It shall be noted that the pressure relief devices shall operate only in conditions of excessive rise in temperature, since the shell shall not be subject to undue fluctuations of pressure during normal conditions of transport (see 6.7.2.12.2).

6.7.2.9.2 The required pressure relief device shall be set to start to discharge at a nominal pressure of five sixths of the test pressure for shells having a test pressure of not more than 4.5 bar and 110% of two thirds of the test pressure for shells having a test pressure of more than 4.5 bar. After discharge, the device shall close at a pressure not more than 10% below the pressure at which the discharge starts. The device shall remain closed at all lower pressures. This requirement does not prevent the use of vacuum relief or combination pressure relief and vacuum relief devices.

6.7.2.10 Fusible elements

6.7.2.10.1 Fusible elements shall operate at a temperature between 100°C and 149°C on condition that the pressure in the shell at the fusing temperature will be not more than the test pressure. They shall be placed at the top of the shell with their inlets in the vapour space, and when used for transport safety purposes, they shall not be shielded from external heat. Fusible elements shall not be used on portable tanks with a test pressure which exceeds 2.65 bar unless specified by special provision TP36 in column 14 of the Dangerous Goods List of chapter 3.2. Fusible elements used on portable tanks intended for the transport of elevated-temperature substances shall be designed to operate at a temperature higher than the maximum temperature that will be experienced during transport and shall be to the satisfaction of the competent authority or its authorized body.

6.7.2.11 Frangible discs

6.7.2.11.1 Except as specified in 6.7.2.8.3, frangible discs shall be set to rupture at a nominal pressure equal to the test pressure throughout the design temperature range. Particular attention shall be given to the provisions of 6.7.2.5.1 and 6.7.2.8.3 if frangible discs are used.

6.7.2.11.2 Frangible discs shall be appropriate for the vacuum pressures which may be produced in the portable tank.

6.7.2.12 Capacity of pressure relief devices

6.7.2.12.1 The spring-loaded pressure relief device required by 6.7.2.8.1 shall have a minimum cross-sectional flow area equivalent to an orifice of 31.75 mm diameter. Vacuum relief devices, when used, shall have a cross-sectional 2 flow area not less than 284 mm .

6.7.2.12.2 The combined delivery capacity of the pressure relief system (taking into account the reduction of the flow when the portable tank is fitted with frangible discs preceding spring-loaded pressure relief devices or when the spring-loaded pressure relief devices are provided with a device to prevent the passage of the flame), in conditions of complete fire engulfment of the portable tank shall be sufficient to limit the pressure in the shell to 20% above the start-to-discharge pressure of the pressure-limiting device. Emergency pressure relief devices may be used to achieve the full relief capacity prescribed. These devices may be fusible, springloaded or frangible disc components, or a combination of spring-loaded and frangible disc devices. The total required capacity of the relief devices may be determined using the formula in 6.7.2.12.2.1 or the table in 6.7.2.12.2.3.

6.7.2.12.2.1 To determine the total required capacity of the relief devices, which shall be regarded as being the sum of the individual capacities of all the contributing devices, the following formula shall be used: 0.82 ___

Q = 12.4 ___ FA √ZT ___

LC M where: 3 Q = minimum required rate of discharge in cubic metres of air per second (m /s) at standard conditions: 1 bar and 0°C (273 K); F = a coefficient with the following value: foruninsulated shells, F= 1 forinsulated shells, F = U(649 – t)/13.6 but in no case is less than 0.25 where: U = thermal conductance of the insulation, in kW·m-2·K-1, at 38°C; t = actual temperature of the substance during filling (in °C) (when this temperature is unknown, let t = 15°C); The value of F given above for insulated shells may be taken provided that the insulation is in conformance with 6.7.2.12.2.4;

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 441

459

Bilaga 1

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc.

A = total external surface area of shell in square metres; Z = the gas compressibility factor in the accumulating condition (when this factor is unknown, let Z equal 1.0); T = absolute temperature in kelvin (°C + 273) above the pressure relief devices in the accumulating condition; L = the latent heat of vaporization of the liquid, in kJ/kg, in the accumulating condition; M = molecular mass of the discharged gas; C = a constant which is derived from one of the following formulae as a function of the ratio k of specific heats: C p k= __ C v where: Cp = specific heat at constant pressure; and Cv = specific heat at constant volume. When k > 1: __________ _____ k+ 1 C = k _____ 2 k - 1

√ ( k + 1)

When k = 1 or k is unknown: C = ___ 1 __ = 0.607 √e where e is the mathematical constant 2.7183. C may also be taken from the following table: k C k C k C 1.00 0.607 1.26 0.660 1.52 0.704 1.02 0.611 1.28 0.664 1.54 0.707 1.04 0.615 1.30 0.667 1.56 0.71 1.06 0.620 1.32 0.671 1.58 0.713 1.08 0.624 1.34 0.674 1.60 0.716 1.10 0.628 1.36 0.678 1.62 0.719 1.12 0.633 1.38 0.681 1.64 0.722 1.14 0.637 1.40 0.685 1.66 0.725 1.16 0.641 1.42 0.688 1.68 0.728 1.18 0.645 1.44 0.691 1.70 0.731 1.20 0.649 1.46 0.695 2.0 0.77 1.22 0.652 1.48 0.698 2.2 0.793 1.24 0.656 1.50 0.701

6.7.2.12.2.2 As an alternative to the formula above, shells designed for the transport of liquids may have their relief devices sized in accordance with the table in 6.7.2.12.2.3. This table assumes an insulation value of F =1 and shall be adjusted accordingly when the shell is insulated. Other values used in determining this table are: M = 86.7; T = 394 K; L = 334.94 kJ/kg; C = 0.607; Z = 1 6.7.2.12.2.3 Minimum required rate of discharge, Q, in cubic metres of air per second at 1 bar and 0°C (273 K): A Q A Q Exposed area (cubic metres of Exposed area (cubic metres of (square metres) air per second) (square metres) air per second) 2 0.230 14 1.132 3 0.320 16 1.263 4 0.405 18 1.391 5 0.487 20 1.517 6 0.565 22.5 1.670 7 0.641 25 1.821 8 0.715 27.5 1.969 9 0.788 30 2.115 10 0.859 32.5 2.258 12 0.998 35 2.400

442 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

460

Bilaga 1

Chapter 6.7 – Design, construction, inspection and testing of portable tanks & MEGCs

A Q A Q Exposed area (cubic metres of Exposed area (cubic metres of (square metres) air per second) (square metres) air per second) 37.5 2.539 62.5 3.860 40 2.677 65 3.987 42.5 2.814 67.5 4.112 45 2.949 70 4.236 47.5 3.082 75 4.483 50 3.215 80 4.726 52.5 3.346 85 4.967 55 3.476 90 5.206 57.5 3.605 95 5.442 60 3.733 100 5.676

6.7.2.12.2.4 Insulation systems, used for the purpose of reducing venting capacity, shall be approved by the competent authority or its authorized body. In all cases, insulation systems approved for this purpose shall: (a) remain effective at all temperatures up to 649°C; and (b) be jacketed with a material having a melting point of 700°C or greater.

6.7.2.13 Marking of pressure relief devices

6.7.2.13.1 Every pressure relief device shall be clearly and permanently marked with the following: .1 the pressure (in bar or kPa) or temperature (in °C) at which it is set to discharge; .2 the allowable tolerance at the discharge pressure, for spring-loaded devices; .3 the reference temperature corresponding to the rated pressure, for frangible discs; .4 the allowable temperature tolerance, for fusible elements; and .5 the rated flow capacity of the spring-loaded pressure relief devices, frangible discs or fusible elements 3 in standard cubic metres of air per second (m /s). .6 The cross sectional flow areas of the spring loaded pressure-relief devices, frangible discs and fusible 2 elements in mm When practicable, the following information shall also be shown: .7 the manufacturer’s name and relevant catalogue number. 6.7.2.13.2 The rated flow capacity marked on the spring-loaded pressure relief devices shall be determined according to ISO 4126 1:2004 and ISO 4126-7:2004.

6.7.2.14 Connections to pressure relief devices

6.7.2.14.1 Connections to pressure relief devices shall be of sufficient size to enable the required discharge to pass unrestricted to the safety device. No stop-valve shall be installed between the shell and the pressure relief devices except where duplicate devices are provided for maintenance or other reasons and the stop-valves serving the devices actually in use are locked open or the stop-valves are interlocked so that at least one of the duplicate devices is always in use. There shall be no obstruction in an opening leading to a vent or pressure relief device which might restrict or cut off the flow from the shell to that device. Vents or pipes from the pressure relief device outlets, when used, shall deliver the relieved vapour or liquid to the atmosphere in conditions of minimum back-pressure on the relieving devices.

6.7.2.15 Siting of pressure relief devices

6.7.2.15.1 Each pressure relief device inlet shall be situated on top of the shell in a position as near the longitudinal and transverse centre of the shell as reasonably practicable. All pressure relief device inlets shall, under maximum filling conditions, be situated in the vapour space of the shell and the devices shall be so arranged as to ensure the escaping vapour is discharged unrestrictedly. For flammable substances, the escaping vapour shall be directed away from the shell in such a manner that it cannot impinge upon the shell. Protective devices which deflect the flow of vapour are permissible provided the required relief-device capacity is not reduced.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 443

461

Bilaga 1

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc.

6.7.2.15.2 Arrangements shall be made to prevent access to the pressure relief devices by unauthorized persons and to protect the devices from damage caused by the portable tank overturning.

6.7.2.16 Gauging devices

6.7.2.16.1 Glass level-gauges and gauges made of other fragile material, which are in direct communication with the contents of the tank, shall not be used.

6.7.2.17 Portable tank supports, frameworks, lifting and tie-down attachments

6.7.2.17.1 Portable tanks shall be designed and constructed with a support structure to provide a secure base during transport. The forces specified in 6.7.2.2.12 and the safety factor specified in 6.7.2.2.13 shall be considered in this aspect of the design. Skids, frameworks, cradles or other similar structures are acceptable. 6.7.2.17.2 The combined stresses caused by portable tank mountings (such as cradles, framework, etc.) and portable tank lifting and tie-down attachments shall not cause excessive stress in any portion of the shell. Permanent lifting and tie-down attachments shall be fitted to all portable tanks. Preferably they shall be fitted to the portable tank supports but may be secured to reinforcing plates located on the shell at the points of support.

6.7.2.17.3 In the design of supports and frameworks, the effects of environmental corrosion shall be taken into account. 6.7.2.17.4 Forklift pockets shall be capable of being closed off. The means of closing forklift pockets shall be a permanent part of the framework or permanently attached to the framework. Single-compartment portable tanks with a length less than 3.65 m need not have closed-off forklift pockets provided that: .1 the shell, including all the fittings, is well protected from being hit by the forklift blades; and .2 the distance between the centres of the forklift pockets is at least half of the maximum length of the portable tank.

6.7.2.17.5 When portable tanks are not protected during transport, according to 4.2.1.2, the shells and service equipment shall be protected against damage to the shell and service equipment resulting from lateral or longitudinal impact or overturning. External fittings shall be protected so as to preclude the release of the shell contents upon impact or overturning of the portable tank on its fittings. Examples of protection include: .1 protection against lateral impact, which may consist of longitudinal bars protecting the shell on both sides at the level of the median line; .2 protection of the portable tank against overturning, which may consist of reinforcement rings or bars fixed across the frame; .3 protection against rear impact, which may consist of a bumper or frame; .4 protection of the shell against damage from impact or overturning by use of an ISO frame in accordance with ISO 1496-3:1995.

6.7.2.18 Design approval

6.7.2.18.1 The competent authority or its authorized body shall issue a design approval certificate for any new design of a portable tank. This certificate shall attest that a portable tank has been surveyed by that authority, is suitable for its intended purpose and meets the provisions of this chapter and, where appropriate, the provisions for substances provided in chapter 4.2 and in the Dangerous Goods List in chapter 3.2. When a series of portable tanks are manufactured without change in the design, the certificate shall be valid for the entire series. The certificate shall refer to the prototype test report, the substances or group of substances allowed to be transported, the materials of construction of the shell and lining (when applicable) and an approval number. The approval number shall consist of the distinguishing sign or mark of the State in whose territory the approval was granted, i.e., the distinguishing sign for use in international traffic as prescribed by the Convention on Road Traffic, Vienna, 1968, and a registration number. Any alternative arrangements according to 6.7.1.2 shall be indicated on the certificate. A design approval may serve for the approval of smaller portable tanks made of materials of the same kind and thickness, by the same fabrication techniques and with identical supports, equivalent closures and other appurtenances.

6.7.2.18.2 The prototype test report for the design approval shall include at least the following: .1 the results of the applicable framework test specified in ISO 1496-3:1995; .2 the results of the initial inspection and test in 6.7.2.19.3; and .3 the results of the impact test in 6.7.2.19.1, when applicable.

6.7.2.19 Inspection and testing

6.7.2.19.1 Portable tanks meeting the definition of container in the International Convention for Safe Containers (CSC), 1972, as amended, shall not be used unless they are successfully qualified by subjecting a representative

444 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

462

Bilaga 1

Chapter 6.7 – Design, construction, inspection and testing of portable tanks & MEGCs

prototype of each design to the Dynamic, Longitudinal Impact Test prescribed in the United Nations Manual of Tests and Criteria, part IV, section 41. This provision only applies to portable tanks which are constructed according to a design approval certificate which has been issued on or after 1 January 2008. 6.7.2.19.2 The shell and items of equipment of each portable tank shall be inspected and tested before being put into service for the first time (initial inspection and test) and thereafter at not more than five-year intervals (5-year periodic inspection and test) with an intermediate periodic inspection and test (2.5-year periodic inspection and test) midway between the 5-year periodic inspections and tests. The 2.5-year periodic inspection and test may be performed within 3 months of the specified date. An exceptional inspection and test shall be performed regardless of the date of the last periodic inspection and test when necessary according to 6.7.2.19.7. 6.7.2.19.3 The initial inspection and test of a portable tank shall include a check of the design characteristics, an internal and external examination of the portable tank and its fittings with due regard to the substances to be transported, and a pressure test. Before the portable tank is placed into service, a leakproofness test and a test of the satisfactory operation of all service equipment shall also be performed. When the shell and its fittings have been pressure-tested separately, they shall be subjected together after assembly to a leakproofness test.

6.7.2.19.4 The 5-year periodic inspection and test shall include an internal and external examination and, as a general rule, a hydraulic pressure test. For tanks only used for the transport of solid substances other than toxic or corrosive substances, which do not liquefy during transport, the hydraulic pressure test may be replaced by a suitable pressure test at 1.5 times MAWP, subject to competent authority approval. Sheathing, thermal insulation and the like shall be removed only to the extent required for reliable appraisal of the condition of the portable tank. When the shell and equipment have been pressure-tested separately, they shall be subjected together after assembly to a leakproofness test. 6.7.2.19.4.1 The heating system shall be subject to inspection and tests including pressure tests on heating coils or ducts during the 5-year periodic inspection. 6.7.2.19.5 The intermediate 2.5-year periodic inspection and test shall at least include an internal and external examination of the portable tank and its fittings with due regard to the substances intended to be transported, a leakproofness test and a test of the satisfactory operation of all service equipment. Sheathing, thermal insulation and the like shall be removed only to the extent required for reliable appraisal of the condition of the portable tank. For portable tanks dedicated to the transport of a single substance, the 2.5-year internal examination may be waived or substituted by other test methods or inspection procedures specified by the competent authority or its authorized body. 6.7.2.19.6 A portable tank may not be filled and offered for transport after the date of expiry of the last 5-year or 2.5-year periodic inspection and test as required by 6.7.2.19.2. However, a portable tank filled prior to the date of expiry of the last periodic inspection and test may be transported for a period not to exceed three months beyond the date of expiry of the last periodic test or inspection. In addition, a portable tank may be transported after the date of expiry of the last periodic test and inspection: .1 after emptying but before cleaning, for purposes of performing the next required test or inspection prior to refilling; and .2 unless otherwise approved by the competent authority, for a period not to exceed six months beyond the date of expiry of the last periodic test or inspection, in order to allow the return of dangerous goods for proper disposal or recycling. Reference to this exemption shall be mentioned in the transport document. 6.7.2.19.7 The exceptional inspection and test is necessary when the portable tank shows evidence of damaged or corroded areas, or leakage, or other conditions that indicate a deficiency that could affect the integrity of the portable tank. The extent of the exceptional inspection and test shall depend on the amount of damage or deterioration of the portable tank. It shall include at least the 2.5-year periodic inspection and test according to 6.7.2.19.5. 6.7.2.19.8 The internal and external examinations shall ensure that: .1 the shell is inspected for pitting, corrosion, or abrasions, dents, distortions, defects in welds or any other conditions, including leakage, that might render the portable tank unsafe for transport; .2 the piping, valves, heating/cooling system, and gaskets are inspected for corroded areas, defects, or any other conditions, including leakage, that might render the portable tank unsafe for filling, discharge or transport; .3 devices for tightening manhole covers are operative and there is no leakage at manhole covers or gaskets; .4 missing or loose bolts or nuts on any flanged connection or blank flange are replaced or tightened; .5 all emergency devices and valves are free from corrosion, distortion and any damage or defect that could prevent their normal operation. Remote closure devices and self-closing stop-valves shall be operated to demonstrate proper operation;

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 445

463

Bilaga 1

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc.

.6 linings, if any, are inspected in accordance with criteria outlined by the lining manufacturer; .7 required markings on the portable tank are legible and in accordance with the applicable provisions; and .8 the framework, supports and arrangements for lifting the portable tank are in a satisfactory condition. 6.7.2.19.9 The inspections and tests in 6.7.2.19.1, 6.7.2.19.3, 6.7.2.19.4, 6.7.2.19.5 and 6.7.2.19.7 shall be performed or witnessed by an expert approved by the competent authority or its authorized body. When the pressure test is a part of the inspection and test, the test pressure shall be the one indicated on the data plate of the portable tank. While under pressure, the portable tank shall be inspected for any leaks in the shell, piping or equipment. 6.7.2.19.10 In all cases when cutting, burning or welding operations on the shell have been effected, that work shall be to the approval of the competent authority or its authorized body, taking into account the pressure-vessel code used for the construction of the shell. A pressure test to the original test pressure shall be performed after the work is completed. 6.7.2.19.11 When evidence of any unsafe condition is discovered, the portable tank shall not be returned to service until it has been corrected and the test is repeated and passed.

6.7.2.20 Marking

6.7.2.20.1 Every portable tank shall be fitted with a corrosion-resistant metal plate permanently attached to the portable tank in a conspicuous place readily accessible for inspection. When for reasons of portable tank arrangements the plate cannot be permanently attached to the shell, the shell shall be marked with at least the information required by the pressure-vessel code. As a minimum, at least the following information shall be marked on the plate by stamping or by any other similar method: (a) Owner information (i) Owner’s registration number; (b) Manufacturing information (i) Country of manufacture; (ii) Year of manufacture; (iii) Manufacturer’s name or mark; (iv) Manufacturer’s serial number; (c) Approval information (i) The United Nations packaging symbol

This symbol shall not be used for any purpose other than certifying that a packaging, a flexible bulk container, a portable tank or a MEGC complies with the relevant requirements in Chapter 6.1, 6.2, 6.3, 6.5, 6.6, 6.7 or 6.9; (ii) Approval country; (iii) Authorized body for the design approval; (iv) Design approval number; (v) Letters “AA”, if the design was approved under alternative arrangements (see 6.7.1.2); (vi) Pressure-vessel code to which the shell is designed; (d) Pressures (i) MAWP (in bar gauge or kPa gauge);* (ii) Test pressure (in bar gauge or kPa gauge);* (iii) Initial pressure test date (month and year); (iv) Identification mark of the initial pressure test witness; † * (v) External design pressure (in bar gauge or kPa gauge); * (vi) MAWP for heating/cooling system (in bar gauge or kPa gauge) (when applicable); (e) Temperatures * (i) Design temperature range (in °C); (f) Materials (i) Shell material(s) and material standard reference(s); * (ii) Equivalent thickness in reference steel (in mm); and (iii) Lining material (when applicable);

* The unit used shall be indicated. † See 6.7.2.2.10.

446 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

464

Bilaga 1

Chapter 6.7 – Design, construction, inspection and testing of portable tanks & MEGCs

(g) Capacity (i) Tank water capacity at 20°C (in litres);*

This indication is to be followed by the symbol “S” when the shell is divided by surge plates into sections of not more than 7,500 litres capacity;

*

(ii) Water capacity of each compartment at 20°C (in litres) (when applicable, for multi-compartment tanks).

This indication is to be followed by the symbol “S” when the compartment is divided by surge plates into sections of not more than 7,500 litres capacity;

(h) Periodic inspections and tests

(i) Type of the most recent periodic test (2.5-year, 5-year or exceptional);

(ii) Date of the most recent periodic test (month and year);

(iii) Test pressure (in bar gauge or kPa gauge)* of the most recent periodic test (if applicable);

(iv) Identification mark of the authorized body who performed or witnessed the most recent test.

Figure 6.7.2.20.1 – Example of identification plate marking

Owner’s registration number MANUFACTURING INFORMATION Country of manufacture Year of manufacture Manufacturer Manufacturer’s serial number APPROVAL INFORMATION Approval country Authorized body for design approval Design approval number “AA” (if applicable) Shell design code (pressure-vessel code) PRESSURES MAWP bar or kPa Test pressure bar or kPa Initial pressure test date: (mm/yyyy) Witness stamp: External design pressure bar or kPa MAWP for heating/cooling system (when applicable) bar or kPa TEMPERATURES Design temperature range °C to °C MATERIALS Shell material(s) and material standard reference(s) Equivalent thickness in reference steel mm Lining material (when applicable) CAPACITY Tank water capacity at 20°C litres “S” (if applicable) Water capacity of compartment ⎯ ⎯ at 20°C litres “S” (if applicable) (when applicable, for multi-compartment tanks)

* The unit used shall be indicated.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 447

465

Bilaga 1

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc.

PERIODIC INSPECTIONS/TESTS Witness stamp and Witness stamp and Test type Test date a Test type Test date a test pressure test pressure (mm/yyyy) bar or kPa (mm/yyyy) bar or kPa

a Test pressure if applicable.

6.7.2.20.2 The following information shall be marked either on the portable tank itself or on a metal plate firmly secured to the portable tank: Name of the operator Maximum permissible gross mass (MPGM) . . . . . . . . . . kg Unladen (tare) mass . . . . . . . . . . kg Portable tank instruction in accordance with 4.2.5.2.6. 6.7.2.20.3 If a portable tank is designed and approved for handling in open seas, the words “OFFSHORE PORTABLE TANK” shall be marked on the identification plate.

6.7.3 Provisions for the design, construction, inspection and testing of portable tanks intended for the transport of non-refrigerated liquefied gases of class 2

Note: These requirements also apply to portable tanks intended for the transport of chemicals under pressure (UN Nos. 3500, 3501, 3502, 3503, 3504 and 3505).

6.7.3.1 Definitions

For the purposes of this section: Design pressure means the pressure to be used in calculations required by a recognized pressure-vessel code. The design pressure shall be not less than the highest of the following pressures: .1 the maximum effective gauge pressure allowed in the shell during filling or discharge; or .2 the sum of: .1 the maximum effective gauge pressure to which the shell is designed, as defined in .2 of the MAWP definition (see below); and .2 a head pressure determined on the basis of the static forces specified in 6.7.3.2.9, but not less than 0.35 bar; Design reference temperature means the temperature at which the vapour pressure of the contents is determined for the purpose of calculating the MAWP. The design reference temperature shall be less than the critical temperature of the non-refrigerated liquefied gas or liquefied gas propellants of chemicals under pressure intended to be transported to ensure that the gas at all times is liquefied. This value for each portable tank type is as follows: .1 shell with a diameter of 1.5 m or less: 65°C; .2 shell with a diameter of more than 1.5 m: .1 without insulation or sunshield: 60°C; .2 with sunshield (see 6.7.3.2.12): 55°C; and .3 with insulation (see 6.7.3.2.12): 50°C; Design temperature range for the shell shall be –40°C to 50°C for non-refrigerated liquefied gases transported under ambient conditions. More severe design temperatures shall be considered for portable tanks subjected to severe climatic conditions; Filling density means the average mass of non-refrigerated liquefied gas per litre of shell capacity (kg/ℓ). The filling density is given in portable tank instruction T50 in 4.2.5.2.6; Leakproofness test means a test using gas subjecting the shell and its service equipment to an effective internal pressure of not less than 25% of the MAWP;

448 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

466

Bilaga 1

Chapter 6.7 – Design, construction, inspection and testing of portable tanks & MEGCs

Maximum allowable working pressure (MAWP) means a pressure that shall be not less than the highest of the following pressures measured at the top of the shell while in operating position, but in no case less than 7 bar: .1 the maximum effective gauge pressure allowed in the shell during filling or discharge; or .2 the maximum effective gauge pressure to which the shell is designed, which shall be: .1 for a non-refrigerated liquefied gas listed in the portable tank instruction T50 in 4.2.5.2.6, the MAWP (in bar) given in portable tank instruction T50 for that gas; .2 for other non-refrigerated liquefied gases, not less than the sum of: – the absolute vapour pressure (in bar) of the non-refrigerated liquefied gas at the design reference temperature minus 1 bar; and – the partial pressure (in bar) of air or other gases in the ullage space, being determined by the design reference temperature and the liquid phase expansion due to an increase of the mean bulk temperature of tr – tf (tf = filling temperature, usually 15°C; tr = 50°C, maximum mean bulk temperature); .3 for chemicals under pressure, the MAWP (in bar) given in T50 portable tank instruction for the liquefied gas portion of the propellants listed in T50 in 4.2.5.2.6;

Maximum permissible gross mass (MPGM) means the sum of the tare mass of the portable tank and the heaviest load authorized for transport; 2 2 Mild steel means a steel with a guaranteed minimum tensile strength of 360 N/mm to 440 N/mm and a guaranteed minimum elongation at fracture conforming to 6.7.3.3.3.3;

Portable tank means a multimodal tank having a capacity of more than 450 ℓ used for the transport of non-refrigerated liquefied gases of class 2. The portable tank includes a shell fitted with service equipment and structural equipment necessary for the transport of gases. The portable tank shall be capable of being filled and discharged without the removal of its structural equipment. It shall possess stabilizing members external to the shell, and shall be capable of being lifted when full. It shall be designed primarily to be loaded onto a transport vehicle or ship and shall be equipped with skids, mountings or accessories to facilitate mechanical handling. Road tank-vehicles, rail tank-wagons, non-metallic tanks, intermediate bulk containers (IBCs), gas cylinders and large receptacles are not considered to fall within the definition for portable tanks; 2 Reference steel means a steel with a tensile strength of 370 N/mm and an elongation at fracture of 27%;

Service equipment means measuring instruments and filling, discharge, venting, safety and insulating devices; Shell means the part of the portable tank which retains the non-refrigerated liquefied gas intended for transport (tank proper), including openings and their closures, but does not include service equipment or external structural equipment;

Structural equipment means reinforcing, fastening, protective and stabilizing members external to the shell; Test pressure means the maximum gauge pressure at the top of the shell during the pressure test.

6.7.3.2 General design and construction provisions

6.7.3.2.1 Shells shall be designed and constructed in accordance with the provisions of a pressure-vessel code recognized by the competent authority. Shells shall be made of steel suitable for forming. The materials shall, in principle, conform to national or international material standards. For welded shells, only a material whose weldability has been fully demonstrated shall be used. Welds shall be skilfully made and afford complete safety. When the manufacturing process or the materials make it necessary, the shells shall be suitably heat-treated to guarantee adequate toughness in the weld and in the heat-affected zones. In choosing the material, the design temperature range shall be taken into account with respect to risk of brittle fracture, to stress corrosion cracking and to resistance to impact. When fine-grain steel is used, the guaranteed value of 2 the yield strength shall be not more than 460 N/mm and the guaranteed value of the upper limit of the tensile 2 strength shall be not more than 725 N/mm , according to the material specification. Portable tank materials shall be suitable for the external environment in which they may be transported.

6.7.3.2.2 Portable tank shells, fittings and pipework shall be constructed of materials which are: .1 substantially immune to attack by the non-refrigerated liquefied gas(es) intended to be transported; or .2 properly passivated or neutralized by chemical reaction.

6.7.3.2.3 Gaskets shall be made of materials compatible with the non-refrigerated liquefied gas(es) intended to be transported.

6.7.3.2.4 Contact between dissimilar metals which could result in damage by galvanic action shall be avoided. 6.7.3.2.5 The materials of the portable tank, including any devices, gaskets, and accessories, shall not adversely affect the non-refrigerated liquefied gas(es) intended for transport in the portable tank.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 449

467

Bilaga 1

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc.

6.7.3.2.6 Portable tanks shall be designed and constructed with supports to provide a secure base during transport and with suitable lifting and tie-down attachments. 6.7.3.2.7 Portable tanks shall be designed to withstand, without loss of contents, at least the internal pressure due to the contents and the static, dynamic and thermal loads during normal conditions of handling and transport. The design shall demonstrate that the effects of fatigue, caused by repeated application of these loads through the expected life of the portable tank, have been taken into account.

6.7.3.2.7.1 For portable tanks that are intended for use as offshore tank-containers, the dynamic stresses imposed by handling in open seas shall be taken into account.

6.7.3.2.8 Shells shall be designed to withstand an external pressure of at least 0.4 bar gauge above the internal pressure without permanent deformation. When the shell is to be subjected to a significant vacuum before filling or during discharge, it shall be designed to withstand an external pressure of at least 0.9 bar gauge above the internal pressure and shall be proven at that pressure. 6.7.3.2.9 Portable tanks and their fastenings shall, under the maximum permissible load, be capable of absorbing the following separately applied static forces: * .1 in the direction of travel: twice the MPGM multiplied by the acceleration due to gravity (g); .2 horizontally at right angles to the direction of travel: the MPGM (when the direction of travel is not clearly determined, the forces shall be equal to twice the MPGM) multiplied by the acceleration due to gravity (g);* .3 vertically upwards: the MPGM multiplied by the acceleration due to gravity (g);* and .4 vertically downwards: twice the MPGM (total loading including the effect of gravity) multiplied by the * acceleration due to gravity (g). 6.7.3.2.10 Under each of the forces in 6.7.3.2.9, the safety factor to be observed shall be as follows: .1 for steels having a clearly defined yield point, a safety factor of 1.5 in relation to the guaranteed yield strength; or .2 for steels with no clearly defined yield point, a safety factor of 1.5 in relation to the guaranteed 0.2% proof strength and, for austenitic steels, the 1% proof strength.

6.7.3.2.11 The values of yield strength or proof strength shall be the values according to national or international material standards. When austenitic steels are used, the specified minimum values of yield strength and proof strength according to the material standards may be increased by up to 15% when these greater values are attested in the material inspection certificate. When no material standard exists for the steel in question, the value of yield strength or proof strength used shall be approved by the competent authority.

6.7.3.2.12 When the shells intended for the transport of non-refrigerated liquefied gases are equipped with thermal insulation, the thermal insulation system shall satisfy the following provisions: .1 It shall consist of a shield covering not less than the upper third but not more than the upper half of the surface of the shell and separated from the shell by an air space about 40 mm across; or .2 It shall consist of a complete cladding of adequate thickness of insulating materials, protected so as to prevent the ingress of moisture and damage under normal conditions of transport and so as to provide a thermal conductance of not more than 0.67 W/m·K; .3 When the protective covering is so closed as to be gas-tight, a device shall be provided to prevent any dangerous pressure from developing in the insulating layer in the event of inadequate gas-tightness of the shell or of its items of equipment; .4 The thermal insulation shall not inhibit access to the fittings and discharge devices. 6.7.3.2.13 Portable tanks intended for the transport of flammable non-refrigerated liquefied gases shall be capable of being electrically earthed.

6.7.3.3 Design criteria

6.7.3.3.1 Shells shall be of a circular cross-section.

6.7.3.3.2 Shells shall be designed and constructed to withstand a test pressure not less than 1.3 times the design pressure. The shell design shall take into account the minimum MAWP values provided in portable tank instruction T50 in 4.2.5.2.6 for each non-refrigerated liquefied gas intended for transport. Attention is drawn to the minimum shell thickness provisions for these shells specified in 6.7.3.4.

6.7.3.3.3 For steels exhibiting a clearly defined yield point or characterized by a guaranteed proof strength (0.2% proof strength, generally, or 1% proof strength for austenitic steels), the primary membrane stress σ (sigma) in the shell shall not exceed 0.75Reor 0.50Rm, whichever is lower, at the test pressure, where:

* For calculation purposes, g = 9.81 m/s2.

450 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

468

Bilaga 1

Chapter 6.7 – Design, construction, inspection and testing of portable tanks & MEGCs

= 2 Re yield strength in N/mm , or 0.2% proof strength or, for austenitic steels, 1% proof strength. 2 Rm = minimum tensile strength in N/mm .

6.7.3.3.3.1 The values of Re and Rm to be used shall be the specified minimum values according to national or international material standards. When austenitic steels are used, these specified minimum values for Re and Rm according to the material standards may be increased by up to 15% when these greater values are attested in the material inspection certificate. When no material standard exists for the steel in question, the values of Re and Rm used shall be approved by the competent authority or its authorized body.

6.7.3.3.3.2 Steels which have a Re/Rm ratio of more than 0.85 are not allowed for the construction of welded shells. The values of Reand Rm to be used in determining this ratio shall be the values specified in the material inspection certificate.

6.7.3.3.3.3 Steels used in the construction of shells shall have an elongation at fracture, in %, of not less than 10,000/Rm with an absolute minimum of 16% for fine-grain steels and 20% for other steels.

6.7.3.3.3.4 For the purpose of determining actual values for materials, it shall be noted that for sheet metal, the axis of the tensile test specimen shall be at right angles (transversely) to the direction of rolling. The permanent elongation at fracture shall be measured on test specimens of rectangular cross-section in accordance with ISO 6892:1998 using a 50 mm gauge length.

6.7.3.4 Minimum shell thickness

6.7.3.4.1 The minimum shell thickness shall be the greater thickness based on: .1 the minimum thickness determined in accordance with the provisions in 6.7.3.4; and .2 the minimum thickness determined in accordance with the recognized pressure-vessel code, including the provisions in 6.7.3.3.

6.7.3.4.2 The cylindrical portions, ends (heads) and manhole covers of shells of not more than 1.80 m in diameter shall be not less than 5 mm thick in the reference steel or of equivalent thickness in the steel to be used. Shells of more than 1.80 m in diameter shall be not less than 6 mm thick in the reference steel or of equivalent thickness in the steel to be used.

6.7.3.4.3 The cylindrical portions, ends (heads) and manhole covers of all shells shall be not less than 4 mm thick regardless of the material of construction.

6.7.3.4.4 The equivalent thickness of a steel other than the thickness prescribed for the reference steel in 6.7.3.4.2 shall be determined using the following formula: 21.4 ×e0 e1 =________ 3 _________

√R m1 ×A1

where: e1 = required equivalent thickness (in mm) of the steel to be used; e0 = minimum thickness (in mm) of the reference steel specified in 6.7.3.4.2; 2 Rm1 = guaranteed minimum tensile strength (in N/mm ) of the steel to be used (see 6.7.3.3.3); A1 = guaranteed minimum elongation at fracture (in %) of the steel to be used according to national or international standards.

6.7.3.4.5 In no case shall the wall thickness be less than that prescribed in 6.7.3.4.1 to 6.7.3.4.3. All parts of the shell shall have a minimum thickness as determined by 6.7.3.4.1 to 6.7.3.4.3. This thickness shall be exclusive of any corrosion allowance.

6.7.3.4.6 When mild steel is used (see 6.7.3.1), calculation using the equation in 6.7.3.4.4 is not required.

6.7.3.4.7 There shall be no sudden change of plate thickness at the attachment of the ends (heads) to the cylindrical portion of the shell.

6.7.3.5 Service equipment

6.7.3.5.1 Service equipment shall be so arranged as to be protected against the risk of being wrenched off or damaged during handling and transport. When the connection between the frame and the shell allows relative movement between the sub-assemblies, the equipment shall be so fastened as to permit such movement without risk of damage to working parts. The external discharge fittings (pipe sockets, shut-off devices), the internal stop-valve and its seating shall be protected against the danger of being wrenched off by external forces (for example, by using shear sections). The filling and discharge devices (including flanges or threaded plugs) and any protective caps shall be capable of being secured against unintended opening.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 451

469

Bilaga 1

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc.

6.7.3.5.1.1 For offshore tank-containers, where positioning of service equipment and the design and strength of protection for such equipment is concerned, the increased danger of impact damage when handling such tanks in open seas shall be taken into account.

6.7.3.5.2 All openings with a diameter of more than 1.5 mm in shells of portable tanks, except openings for pressure relief devices, inspection openings and closed bleed holes, shall be fitted with at least three mutually independent shut-off devices in series, the first being an internal stop-valve, excess flow valve or equivalent device, the second being an external stop-valve and the third being a blank flange or equivalent device.

6.7.3.5.2.1 When a portable tank is fitted with an excess flow valve, the excess flow valve shall be so fitted that its seating is inside the shell or inside a welded flange or, when fitted externally, its mountings shall be designed so that, in the event of impact, its effectiveness shall be maintained. The excess flow valves shall be selected and fitted so as to close automatically when the rated flow specified by the manufacturer is reached. Connections and accessories leading to or from such a valve shall have a capacity for a flow more than the rated flow of the excess flow valve.

6.7.3.5.3 For filling and discharge openings, the first shut-off device shall be an internal stop-valve and the second shall be a stop-valve placed in an accessible position on each discharge and filling pipe.

6.7.3.5.4 For filling and discharge bottom openings of portable tanks intended for the transport of flammable and/or toxic non-refrigerated liquefied gases or chemicals under pressure, the internal stop-valve shall be a quickclosing safety device which closes automatically in the event of unintended movement of the portable tank during filling or discharge or fire engulfment. Except for portable tanks having a capacity of not more than 1000 ℓ, it shall be possible to operate this device by remote control.

6.7.3.5.5 In addition to filling, discharge and gas pressure equalizing orifices, shells may have openings in which gauges, thermometers and manometers can be fitted. Connections for such instruments shall be made by suitable welded nozzles or pockets and not be screwed connections through the shell.

6.7.3.5.6 All portable tanks shall be fitted with manholes or other inspection openings of suitable size to allow for internal inspection and adequate access for maintenance and repair of the interior.

6.7.3.5.7 External fittings shall be grouped together so far as reasonably practicable.

6.7.3.5.8 Each connection on a portable tank shall be clearly marked to indicate its function.

6.7.3.5.9 Each stop-valve or other means of closure shall be designed and constructed to a rated pressure not less than the MAWP of the shell, taking into account the temperatures expected during transport. All stop-valves with a screwed spindle shall close by a clockwise motion of the handwheel. For other stop-valves, the position (open and closed) and direction of closure shall be clearly indicated. All stop-valves shall be designed to prevent unintentional opening.

6.7.3.5.10 Piping shall be designed, constructed and installed so as to avoid the risk of damage due to thermal expansion and contraction, mechanical shock and vibration. All piping shall be of suitable metallic material. Welded pipe joints shall be used wherever possible.

6.7.3.5.11 Joints in copper tubing shall be brazed or have an equally strong metal union. The melting point of brazing materials shall be no lower than 525°C. The joints shall not decrease the strength of tubing, as may happen when cutting threads.

6.7.3.5.12 The burst pressure of all piping and pipe fittings shall be not less than the highest of four times the MAWP of the shell or four times the pressure to which it may be subjected in service by the action of a pump or other device (except pressure relief devices).

6.7.3.5.13 Ductile metals shall be used in the construction of valves and accessories.

6.7.3.6 Bottom openings

6.7.3.6.1 Certain non-refrigerated liquefied gases shall not be transported in portable tanks with bottom openings when portable tank instruction T50 in 4.2.5.2.6 indicates that bottom openings are not allowed. There shall be no openings below the liquid level of the shell when it is filled to its maximum permissible filling limit.

6.7.3.7 Pressure relief devices

6.7.3.7.1 Portable tanks shall be provided with one or more spring-loaded pressure relief devices. The pressure relief devices shall open automatically at a pressure not less than the MAWP and be fully open at a pressure equal to 110% of the MAWP. These devices shall, after discharge, close at a pressure not lower than 10% below the pressure at which discharge starts and shall remain closed at all lower pressures. The pressure relief devices shall be of a type that will resist dynamic forces, including liquid surge. Frangible discs not in series with a spring-loaded pressure relief device are not permitted.

452 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

470

Bilaga 1

Chapter 6.7 – Design, construction, inspection and testing of portable tanks & MEGCs

6.7.3.7.2 Pressure relief devices shall be designed to prevent the entry of foreign matter, the leakage of gas and the development of any dangerous excess pressure.

6.7.3.7.3 Portable tanks intended for the transport of certain non-refrigerated liquefied gases identified in portable tank instruction T50 in 4.2.5.2.6 shall have a pressure relief device approved by the competent authority. Unless a portable tank in dedicated service is fitted with an approved relief device constructed of materials compatible with the load, such device shall comprise a frangible disc preceding a spring-loaded device. The space between the frangible disc and the device shall be provided with a pressure gauge or a suitable tell-tale indicator. This arrangement permits the detection of disc rupture, pinholing or leakage which could cause a malfunction of the pressure relief device. The frangible discs shall rupture at a nominal pressure 10% above the start-to-discharge pressure of the relief device.

6.7.3.7.4 In the case of multi-purpose portable tanks, the pressure relief devices shall open at a pressure indicated in 6.7.3.7.1 for the gas having the highest maximum allowable pressure of the gases allowed to be transported in the portable tank.

6.7.3.8 Capacity of relief devices

6.7.3.8.1 The combined delivery capacity of the relief devices shall be sufficient that, in the event of total fire engulfment, the pressure (including accumulation) inside the shell does not exceed 120% of the MAWP. Springloaded relief devices shall be used to achieve the full relief capacity prescribed. In the case of multi-purpose tanks, the combined delivery capacity of the pressure relief devices shall be taken for the gas which requires the highest delivery capacity of the gases allowed to be transported in portable tanks.

6.7.3.8.1.1 To determine the total required capacity of the relief devices, which shall be regarded as being the sum of the individual capacities of the several devices, the following formula* shall be used: ___ 0.82

Q = 12.4 ___ FA √ZT ___

LC M where: 3 Q = minimum required rate of discharge in cubic metres of air per second (m /s) at standard conditions: 1 bar and 0°C (273 K); F = a coefficient with the following value: for uninsulated shells, F= 1 for insulated shells, F = U(649 – t)/13.6 but in no case is less than 0.25 where: -2 -1 U = thermal conductance of the insulation, in kW∙m ∙K , at 38°C; t = actual temperature of the non-refrigerated liquefied gas during filling (in °C) (when this temperature is unknown, let t = 15°C); The value of F given above for insulated shells may be taken provided that the insulation is in conformance with 6.7.3.8.1.2; A = total external surface area of shell in square metres; Z = the gas compressibility factor in the accumulating condition (when this factor is unknown, let Z equal 1.0); T = absolute temperature in kelvin (°C + 273) above the pressure relief devices in the accumulating condition; L = the latent heat of vaporization of the liquid, in kJ/kg, in the accumulating condition; M = molecular mass of the discharged gas; C = a constant which is derived from one of the following formulae as a function of the ratio k of specific heats: C p k = __ C v where: Cp = specific heat at constant pressure; and Cv = specific heat at constant volume.

* This formula applies only to non-refrigrated liquefied gases which have critical tempratures well above the temperature at the accumulating condition. For gases which have critical temperatures near or below the temperature at the accumulating condition, the calculation of the pressure-relief device delivery capacity shall consider futher thermodynamic properties of the gas (see, for example, CGA S-1.2-2003 “Pressure Relief Device Standards – Part 2 – Cargo and Portable Tanks for Compressed Gases”).

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 453

471

Bilaga 1

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc.

When k > 1: __________ _____ k+ 1 C = k _____ 2 k - 1

√ ( k + 1)

When k = 1 or k is unknown: C = ___ 1 __ = 0.607 √e where e is the mathematical constant 2.7183. C may also be taken from the following table:

k C k C k C 1.00 0.607 1.26 0.660 1.52 0.704 1.02 0.611 1.28 0.664 1.54 0.707 1.04 0.615 1.30 0.667 1.56 0.71 1.06 0.620 1.32 0.671 1.58 0.713 1.08 0.624 1.34 0.674 1.60 0.716 1.10 0.628 1.36 0.678 1.62 0.719 1.12 0.633 1.38 0.681 1.64 0.722 1.14 0.637 1.40 0.685 1.66 0.725 1.16 0.641 1.42 0.688 1.68 0.728 1.18 0.645 1.44 0.691 1.70 0.731 1.20 0.649 1.46 0.695 2.0 0.77 1.22 0.652 1.48 0.698 2.2 0.793 1.24 0.656 1.50 0.701

6.7.3.8.1.2 Insulation systems, used for the purpose of reducing the venting capacity, shall be approved by the competent authority or its authorized body. In all cases, insulation systems approved for this purpose shall: .1 remain effective at all temperatures up to 649°C; and .2 be jacketed with a material having a melting point of 700°C or greater.

6.7.3.9 Marking of pressure relief devices

6.7.3.9.1 Every pressure relief device shall be clearly and permanently marked with the following: .1 the pressure (in bar or kPa) at which it is set to discharge; .2 the allowable tolerance at the discharge pressure, for spring-loaded devices; .3 the reference temperature corresponding to the rated pressure, for frangible discs; and 3 .4 the rated flow capacity of the device in standard cubic metres of air per second (m /s). .5 The cross sectional flow areas of the spring loaded pressure-relief devices and frangible discs in mm²

When practicable, the following information shall also be shown: .6 the manufacturer’s name and relevant catalogue number.

6.7.3.9.2 The rated flow capacity marked on the pressure relief devices shall be determined according to ISO 4126 1:2004 and ISO 4126-7:2004.

6.7.3.10 Connections to pressure relief devices

6.7.3.10.1 Connections to pressure relief devices shall be of sufficient size to enable the required discharge to pass unrestricted to the safety device. No stop-valve shall be installed between the shell and the pressure relief devices except when duplicate devices are provided for maintenance or other reasons and the stop-valves serving the devices actually in use are locked open or the stop-valves are interlocked so that at least one of the duplicate devices is always operable and capable of meeting the provisions of 6.7.3.8. There shall be no obstruction in an opening leading to a vent or pressure relief device which might restrict or cut off the flow from the shell to that device. Vents from the pressure relief devices, when used, shall deliver the relieved vapour or liquid to the atmosphere in conditions of minimum back-pressure on the relieving device.

6.7.3.11 Siting of pressure relief devices

6.7.3.11.1 Each pressure relief device inlet shall be situated on top of the shell in a position as near the longitudinal and transverse centre of the shell as reasonably practicable. All pressure relief device inlets shall, under maximum filling conditions, be situated in the vapour space of the shell and the devices shall be so arranged as to ensure that the escaping vapour is discharged unrestrictedly. For flammable non-refrigerated liquefied gases, the escaping vapour shall be directed away from the shell in such a manner that it cannot impinge upon the

454 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

472

Bilaga 1

Chapter 6.7 – Design, construction, inspection and testing of portable tanks & MEGCs

shell. Protective devices which deflect the flow of vapour are permissible provided the required relief-device capacity is not reduced.

6.7.3.11.2 Arrangements shall be made to prevent access to the pressure relief devices by unauthorized persons and to protect the devices from damage caused by the portable tank overturning.

6.7.3.12 Gauging devices

6.7.3.12.1 Unless a portable tank is intended to be filled by mass, it shall be equipped with one or more gauging devices. Glass level-gauges and gauges made of other fragile material, which are in direct communication with the contents of the shell, shall not be used.

6.7.3.13 Portable tank supports, frameworks, lifting and tie-down attachments

6.7.3.13.1 Portable tanks shall be designed and constructed with a support structure to provide a secure base during transport. The forces specified in 6.7.3.2.9 and the safety factor specified in 6.7.3.2.10 shall be considered in this aspect of the design. Skids, frameworks, cradles or other similar structures are acceptable.

6.7.3.13.2 The combined stresses caused by portable tank mountings (such as cradles, frameworks, etc.) and portable tank lifting and tie-down attachments shall not cause excessive stress in any portion of the shell. Permanent lifting and tie-down attachments shall be fitted to all portable tanks. Preferably they shall be fitted to the portable tank supports but may be secured to reinforcing plates located on the shell at the points of support.

6.7.3.13.3 In the design of supports and frameworks, the effects of environmental corrosion shall be taken into account.

6.7.3.13.4 Forklift pockets shall be capable of being closed off. The means of closing forklift pockets shall be a permanent part of the framework or permanently attached to the framework. Single-compartment portable tanks with a length less than 3.65 m need not have closed-off forklift pockets provided that: .1 the shell and all the fittings are well protected from being hit by the forklift blades; and .2 the distance between the centres of the forklift pockets is at least half of the maximum length of the portable tank.

6.7.3.13.5 When portable tanks are not protected during transport, according to 4.2.2.3, the shells and service equipment shall be protected against damage to the shell and service equipment resulting from lateral or longitudinal impact or overturning. External fittings shall be protected so as to preclude the release of the shell contents upon impact or overturning of the portable tank on its fittings. Examples of protection include: .1 protection against lateral impact, which may consist of longitudinal bars protecting the shell on both sides at the level of the median line; .2 protection of the portable tank against overturning, which may consist of reinforcement rings or bars fixed across the frame; .3 protection against rear impact, which may consist of a bumper or frame; .4 protection of the shell against damage from impact or overturning by use of an ISO frame in accordance with ISO 1496-3:1995.

6.7.3.14 Design approval

6.7.3.14.1 The competent authority or its authorized body shall issue a design approval certificate for any new design of a portable tank. This certificate shall attest that the portable tank has been surveyed by that authority, is suitable for its intended purpose and meets the provisions of this chapter and, when appropriate, the provisions for gases provided in portable tank instruction T50 in 4.2.5.2.6. When a series of portable tanks are manufactured without change in the design, the certificate shall be valid for the entire series. The certificate shall refer to the prototype test report, the gases allowed to be transported, the materials of construction of the shell and an approval number. The approval number shall consist of the distinguishing sign or mark of the State in whose territory the approval was granted, i.e., the distinguishing sign for use in international traffic, as prescribed by the Convention on Road Traffic, Vienna, 1968, and a registration number. Any alternative arrangements according to 6.7.1.2 shall be indicated on the certificate. A design approval may serve for the approval of smaller portable tanks made of materials of the same kind and thickness, by the same fabrication techniques and with identical supports, equivalent closures and other appurtenances.

6.7.3.14.2 The prototype test report for the design approval shall include at least the following: .1 the results of the applicable framework test specified in ISO 1496-3:1995; .2 the results of the initial inspection and test in 6.7.3.15.3; and .3 the results of the impact test in 6.7.3.15.1, when applicable.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 455

473

Bilaga 1

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc.

6.7.3.15 Inspection and testing

6.7.3.15.1 Portable tanks meeting the definition of container in the International Convention for Safe Containers (CSC), 1972, as amended, shall not be used unless they are successfully qualified by subjecting a representative prototype of each design to the Dynamic, Longitudinal Impact Test prescribed in the United Nations Manual of Tests and Criteria, part IV, section 41. This provision only applies to portable tanks which are constructed according to a design approval certificate which has been issued on or after 1 January 2008. 6.7.3.15.2 The shell and items of equipment of each portable tank shall be inspected and tested before being put into service for the first time (initial inspection and test) and thereafter at not more than five-year intervals (5-year periodic inspection and test) with an intermediate periodic inspection and test (2.5-year periodic inspection and test) midway between the 5-year periodic inspections and tests. The 2.5-year periodic inspection and test may be performed within 3 months of the specified date. An exceptional inspection and test shall be performed regardless of the last periodic inspection and test when necessary according to 6.7.3.15.7. 6.7.3.15.3 The initial inspection and test of a portable tank shall include a check of the design characteristics, an internal and external examination of the portable tank and its fittings with due regard to the non-refrigerated liquefied gases to be transported, and a pressure test referring to the test pressures according to 6.7.3.3.2. The pressure test may be performed as a hydraulic test or by using another liquid or gas with the agreement of the competent authority or its authorized body. Before the portable tank is placed into service, a leakproofness test and a test of the satisfactory operation of all service equipment shall also be performed. When the shell and its fittings have been pressure-tested separately, they shall be subjected together after assembly to a leakproofness test. All welds subject to full stress level in the shell shall be inspected during the initial test by radiographic, ultrasonic, or another suitable non-destructive test method. This does not apply to the jacket. 6.7.3.15.4 The 5-year periodic inspection and test shall include an internal and external examination and, as a general rule, a hydraulic pressure test. Sheathing, thermal insulation and the like shall be removed only to the extent required for reliable appraisal of the condition of the portable tank. When the shell and equipment have been pressure-tested separately, they shall be subjected together after assembly to a leakproofness test. 6.7.3.15.5 The intermediate 2.5-year periodic inspection and test shall at least include an internal and external examination of the portable tank and its fittings with due regard to the non-refrigerated liquefied gases intended to be transported, a leakproofness test and a test of the satisfactory operation of all service equipment. Sheathing, thermal insulation and the like shall be removed only to the extent required for reliable appraisal of the condition of the portable tank. For portable tanks intended for the transport of a single non-refrigerated liquefied gas, the 2.5-year internal examination may be waived or substituted by other test methods or inspection procedures specified by the competent authority or its authorized body. 6.7.3.15.6 A portable tank may not be filled and offered for transport after the date of expiry of the last 5-year or 2.5-year periodic inspection and test as required by 6.7.3.15.2. However, a portable tank filled prior to the date of expiry of the last periodic inspection and test may be transported for a period not to exceed three months beyond the date of expiry of the last periodic test or inspection. In addition, a portable tank may be transported after the date of expiry of the last periodic test and inspection: .1 after emptying but before cleaning, for purposes of performing the next required test or inspection prior to refilling; and .2 unless otherwise approved by the competent authority, for a period not to exceed six months beyond the date of expiry of the last periodic test or inspection, in order to allow the return of dangerous goods for proper disposal or recycling. Reference to this exemption shall be mentioned in the transport document. 6.7.3.15.7 The exceptional inspection and test is necessary when the portable tank shows evidence of damaged or corroded areas, or leakage, or other conditions that indicate a deficiency that could affect the integrity of the portable tank. The extent of the exceptional inspection and test shall depend on the amount of damage or deterioration of the portable tank. It shall include at least the 2.5-year inspection and test according to 6.7.3.15.5. 6.7.3.15.8 The internal and external examinations shall ensure that: .1 the shell is inspected for pitting, corrosion, or abrasions, dents, distortions, defects in welds or any other conditions, including leakage, that might render the portable tank unsafe for transport; .2 the piping, valves, and gaskets are inspected for corroded areas, defects, or any other conditions, including leakage, that might render the portable tank unsafe for filling, discharge or transport; .3 devices for tightening manhole covers are operative and there is no leakage at manhole covers or gaskets; .4 missing or loose bolts or nuts on any flanged connection or blank flange are replaced or tightened; .5 all emergency devices and valves are free from corrosion, distortion and any damage or defect that could prevent their normal operation. Remote closure devices and self-closing stop-valves shall be operated to demonstrate proper operation; .6 required markings on the portable tank are legible and in accordance with the applicable provisions; and

456 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

474

Bilaga 1

Chapter 6.7 – Design, construction, inspection and testing of portable tanks & MEGCs

.7 the framework, the supports and the arrangements for lifting the portable tank are in satisfactory condition. 6.7.3.15.9 The inspections and tests in 6.7.3.15.1, 6.7.3.15.3, 6.7.3.15.4, 6.7.3.15.5 and 6.7.3.15.7 shall be performed or witnessed by an expert approved by the competent authority or its authorized body. When the pressure test is a part of the inspection and test, the test pressure shall be the one indicated on the data plate of the portable tank. While under pressure, the portable tank shall be inspected for any leaks in the shell, piping or equipment. 6.7.3.15.10 In all cases when cutting, burning or welding operations on the shell have been effected, that work shall be to the approval of the competent authority or its authorized body, taking into account the pressure-vessel code used for the construction of the shell. A pressure test to the original test pressure shall be performed after the work is completed. 6.7.3.15.11 When evidence of any unsafe condition is discovered, the portable tank shall not be returned to service until it has been corrected and the pressure test is repeated and passed.

6.7.3.16 Marking

6.7.3.16.1 Every portable tank shall be fitted with a corrosion-resistant metal plate permanently attached to the portable tank in a conspicuous place readily accessible for inspection. When for reasons of portable tank arrangements the plate cannot be permanently attached to the shell, the shell shall be marked with at least the information required by the pressure-vessel code. As a minimum, at least the following information shall be marked on the plate by stamping or by any other similar method: (a) Owner information (i) Owner’s registration number; (b) Manufacturing information (i) Country of manufacture; (ii) Year of manufacture; (iii) Manufacturer’s name or mark; (iv) Manufacturer’s serial number; (c) Approval information (i) The United Nations packaging symbol

This symbol shall not be used for any purpose other than certifying that a packaging, a flexible bulk container, a portable tank or a MEGC complies with the relevant requirements in Chapter 6.1, 6.2, 6.3, 6.5, 6.6, 6.7 or 6.9; (ii) Approval country; (iii) Authorized body for the design approval; (iv) Design approval number; (v) Letters “AA”, if the design was approved under alternative arrangements (see 6.7.1.2); (vi) Pressure-vessel code to which the shell is designed; (d) Pressures (i) MAWP (in bar gauge or kPa gauge);* * (ii) Test pressure (in bar gauge or kPa gauge); (iii) Initial pressure test date (month and year); (iv) Identification mark of the initial pressure test witness; † * (v) External design pressure (in bar gauge or kPa gauge); (e) Temperatures (i) Design temperature range (in °C);* (ii) Design reference temperature (in °C);* (f) Materials (i) Shell material(s) and material standard reference(s); (ii) Equivalent thickness in reference steel (in mm);* (g) Capacity (i) Tank water capacity at 20°C (in litres);* (h) Periodic inspections and tests (i) Type of the most recent periodic test (2.5-year, 5-year or exceptional);

* The unit used shall be indicated. † See 6.7.3.2.8.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 457

475

Bilaga 1

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc.

(ii) Date of the most recent periodic test (month and year); (iii) Test pressure (in bar gauge or kPa gauge)* of the most recent periodic test (if applicable); (iv) Identification mark of the authorized body who performed or witnessed the most recent test.

Figure 6.7.3.16.1 – Example of identification plate marking

Owner’s registration number MANUFACTURING INFORMATION Country of manufacture Year of manufacture Manufacturer Manufacturer’s serial number APPROVAL INFORMATION Approval country Authorized body for design approval Design approval number “AA” (if applicable) Shell design code (pressure-vessel code) PRESSURES MAWP bar or kPa Test pressure bar or kPa Initial pressure test date: (mm/yyyy) Witness stamp: External design pressure bar or kPa TEMPERATURES Design temperature range °C to °C Design reference temperature °C MATERIALS Shell material(s) and material standard reference(s) Equivalent thickness in reference steel mm CAPACITY Tank water capacity at 20°C litres PERIODIC INSPECTIONS/TESTS Witness stamp and Witness stamp and Test type Test date a Test type Test date a test pressure test pressure (mm/yyyy) bar or kPa (mm/yyyy) bar or kPa

a Test pressure if applicable.

6.7.3.16.2 The following information shall be durably marked either on the portable tank itself or on a metal plate firmly secured to the portable tank: Name of the operator Name of non-refrigerated liquefied gas(es) permitted for transport Maximum permissible load mass for each non-refrigerated liquefied gas permitted . . . . . . . . . . kg Maximum permissible gross mass (MPGM) . . . . . . . . . . kg Unladen (tare) mass . . . . . . . . . . kg

458 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

476

Bilaga 1

Chapter 6.7 – Design, construction, inspection and testing of portable tanks & MEGCs

Portable tank instruction in accordance with 4.2.5.2.6. 6.7.3.16.3 If a portable tank is designed and approved for handling in open seas, the words “OFFSHORE PORTABLE TANK” shall be marked on the identification plate.

6.7.4 Provisions for the design, construction, inspection and testing of portable tanks intended for the transport of refrigerated liquefied gases of class 2

6.7.4.1 Definitions

For the purposes of this section: Holding time means the time that will elapse from the establishment of the initial filling condition until the pressure has risen due to heat influx to the lowest set pressure of the pressure-limiting device(s); Jacket means the outer insulation cover or cladding, which may be part of the insulation system; Leakproofness test means a test, using gas, subjecting the shell and its service equipment to an effective internal pressure not less than 90% of the MAWP; Maximum allowable working pressure (MAWP) means the maximum effective gauge pressure permissible at the top of the shell of a filled portable tank in its operating position, including the highest effective pressure during filling and discharge; Maximum permissible gross mass (MPGM) means the sum of the tare mass of the portable tank and the heaviest load authorized for transport; Minimum design temperature means the temperature which is used for the design and construction of the shell, not higher than the lowest (coldest) temperature (service temperature) of the contents during normal conditions of filling, discharge and transport; Portable tank means a thermally insulated multimodal tank having a capacity of more than 450 ℓ fitted with service equipment and structural equipment necessary for the transport of refrigerated liquefied gases. The portable tank shall be capable of being filled and discharged without the removal of its structural equipment. It shall possess stabilizing members external to the tank, and shall be capable of being lifted when full. It shall be designed primarily to be loaded onto a transport vehicle or ship and shall be equipped with skids, mountings or accessories to facilitate mechanical handling. Road tank-vehicles, rail tank-wagons, non-metallic tanks, intermediate bulk containers (IBCs), gas cylinders and large receptacles are not considered to fall within the definition for portable tanks; 2 Reference steel means a steel with a tensile strength of 370 N/mm and an elongation at fracture of 27%; Service equipment means measuring instruments and filling, discharge, venting, safety, pressurizing, cooling and thermal insulation devices; Shell means the part of the portable tank which retains the refrigerated liquefied gas intended for transport, including openings and their closures, but does not include service equipment or external structural equipment; Structural equipment means the reinforcing, fastening, protective and stabilizing members external to the shell; Tank means a construction which normally consists of either: (a) a jacket and one or more inner shells where the space between the shell(s) and the jacket is exhausted of air (vacuum insulation) and may incorporate a thermal insulation system; or (b) a jacket and an inner shell with an intermediate layer of solid thermally insulating material (such as solid foam); Test pressure means the maximum gauge pressure at the top of the shell during the pressure test.

6.7.4.2 General design and construction provisions

6.7.4.2.1 Shells shall be designed and constructed in accordance with the provisions of a pressure-vessel code recognized by the competent authority. Shells and jackets shall be made of metallic materials suitable for forming. Jackets shall be made of steel. Non-metallic materials may be used for the attachments and supports between the shell and jacket, provided their material properties at the minimum design temperature are proven to be sufficient. The materials shall, in principle, conform to national or international material standards. For welded shells and jackets, only materials whose weldability has been fully demonstrated shall be used. Welds shall be skilfully made and afford complete safety. When the manufacturing process or the materials make it necessary, the shell shall be suitably heat-treated to guarantee adequate toughness in the weld and in the heat-affected zones. In choosing the material, the minimum design temperature shall be taken into account with respect to risk of brittle fracture, to hydrogen embrittlement, to stress corrosion cracking and to resistance to impact. When fine-grain steel is used, the guaranteed value of the yield strength shall be

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 459

477

Bilaga 1

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc.

2 not more than 460 N/mm and the guaranteed value of the upper limit of the tensile strength shall be not more 2 than 725 N/mm , in accordance with the material specifications. Portable tank materials shall be suitable for the external environment in which they may be transported. 6.7.4.2.2 Any part of a portable tank, including fittings, gaskets and pipe-work, which can be expected normally to come into contact with the refrigerated liquefied gas transported shall be compatible with that refrigerated liquefied gas. 6.7.4.2.3 Contact between dissimilar metals which could result in damage by galvanic action shall be avoided. 6.7.4.2.4 The thermal insulation system shall include a complete covering of the shell(s) with effective insulating materials. External insulation shall be protected by a jacket so as to prevent the ingress of moisture and other damage under normal transport conditions. 6.7.4.2.5 When a jacket is so closed as to be gas-tight, a device shall be provided to prevent any dangerous pressure from developing in the insulation space. 6.7.4.2.6 Portable tanks intended for the transport of refrigerated liquefied gases having a boiling point below –182°C at atmospheric pressure shall not include materials which may react with oxygen or oxygen-enriched atmospheres in a dangerous manner when located in parts of the thermal insulation when there is a risk of contact with oxygen or with oxygen-enriched fluid. 6.7.4.2.7 Insulating materials shall not deteriorate unduly in service. 6.7.4.2.8 A reference holding time shall be determined for each refrigerated liquefied gas intended for transport in a portable tank. 6.7.4.2.8.1 The reference holding time shall be determined by a method recognized by the competent authority on the basis of the following: .1 the effectiveness of the insulation system, determined in accordance with 6.7.4.2.8.2; .2 the lowest set pressure of the pressure-limiting device(s); .3 the initial filling conditions; .4 an assumed ambient temperature of 30°C; .5 the physical properties of the individual refrigerated liquefied gas intended to be transported. 6.7.4.2.8.2 The effectiveness of the insulation system (heat influx in watts) shall be determined by type testing the portable tank in accordance with a procedure recognized by the competent authority. This test shall consist of either: .1 a constant-pressure test (for example at atmospheric pressure), when the loss of refrigerated liquefied gas is measured over a period of time; or .2 a closed-system test, when the rise in pressure in the shell is measured over a period of time. When performing the constant-pressure test, variations in atmospheric pressure shall be taken into account. When performing either test, corrections shall be made for any variation of the ambient temperature from the assumed ambient temperature reference value of 30°C. Note: For the determination of the actual holding time before each journey, see 4.2.3.7. 6.7.4.2.9 The jacket of a vacuum-insulated double-wall tank shall have either an external design pressure not less than 100 kPa (1 bar) gauge pressure calculated in accordance with a recognized technical code or a calculated critical collapsing pressure of not less than 200 kPa (2 bar) gauge pressure. Internal and external reinforcements may be included in calculating the ability of the jacket to resist the external pressure. 6.7.4.2.10 Portable tanks shall be designed and constructed with supports to provide a secure base during transport and with suitable lifting and tie-down attachments. 6.7.4.2.11 Portable tanks shall be designed to withstand, without loss of contents, at least the internal pressure due to the contents and the static, dynamic and thermal loads during normal conditions of handling and transport. The design shall demonstrate that the effects of fatigue, caused by repeated application of these loads through the expected life of the portable tank, have been taken into account. 6.7.4.2.11.1 For tanks that are intended for use as offshore tank-containers, the dynamic stresses imposed by handling in open seas shall be taken into account. 6.7.4.2.12 Portable tanks and their fastenings under the maximum permissible load shall be capable of absorbing the following separately applied static forces: .1 in the direction of travel: twice the MPGM multiplied by the acceleration due to gravity (g);* .2 horizontally at right angles to the direction of travel: the MPGM (when the direction of travel is not clearly determined, the forces shall be equal to twice the MPGM) multiplied by the acceleration due to gravity (g);*

* For calculation purposes, g = 9.81 m/s2.

460 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

478

Bilaga 1

Chapter 6.7 – Design, construction, inspection and testing of portable tanks & MEGCs

.3 vertically upwards: the MPGM multiplied by the acceleration due to gravity (g);* and .4 vertically downwards: twice the MPGM (total loading including the effect of gravity) multiplied by the acceleration due to gravity (g).*

6.7.4.2.13 Under each of the forces in 6.7.4.2.12, the safety factor to be observed shall be as follows: .1 for materials having a clearly defined yield point, a safety factor of 1.5 in relation to the guaranteed yield strength; or .2 for materials with no clearly defined yield point, a safety factor of 1.5 in relation to the guaranteed 0.2% proof strength or, for austenitic steels, the 1% proof strength.

6.7.4.2.14 The values of yield strength or proof strength shall be the values according to national or international material standards. When austenitic steels are used, the specified minimum values according to the material standards may be increased by up to 15% when these greater values are attested in the material inspection certificate. When no material standard exists for the metal in question, or when non-metallic materials are used, the values of yield strength or proof strength shall be approved by the competent authority.

6.7.4.2.15 Portable tanks intended for the transport of flammable refrigerated liquefied gases shall be capable of being electrically earthed.

6.7.4.3 Design criteria

6.7.4.3.1 Shells shall be of a circular cross-section.

6.7.4.3.2 Shells shall be designed and constructed to withstand a test pressure not less than 1.3 times the MAWP. For shells with vacuum insulation, the test pressure shall not be less than 1.3 times the sum of the MAWP and 100 kPa (1 bar). In no case shall the test pressure be less than 300 kPa (3 bar) gauge pressure. Attention is drawn to the minimum shell thickness provisions, specified in 6.7.4.4.2 to 6.7.4.4.7.

6.7.4.3.3 For metals exhibiting a clearly defined yield point or characterized by a guaranteed proof strength (0.2% proof strength, generally, or 1% proof strength for austenitic steels), the primary membrane stress σ (sigma) in the shell shall not exceed 0.75Re or 0.50Rm, whichever is lower, at the test pressure, where: 2 Re = yield strength in N/mm , or 0.2% proof strength or, for austenitic steels, 1% proof strength; R = minimum tensile strength in N/mm2. m 6.7.4.3.3.1 The values of Re and Rm to be used shall be the specified minimum values according to national or international material standards. When austenitic steels are used, the specified minimum values for Re and Rm according to the material standards may be increased by up to 15% when greater values are attested in the material inspection certificate. When no material standard exists for the metal in question, the values of Re and Rm used shall be approved by the competent authority or its authorized body.

6.7.4.3.3.2 Steels which have a Re/Rm ratio of more than 0.85 are not allowed for the construction of welded shells. The values of Re and Rm to be used in determining this ratio shall be the values specified in the material inspection certificate.

6.7.4.3.3.3 Steels used in the construction of shells shall have an elongation at fracture, in %, of not less than 10,000/Rm with an absolute minimum of 16% for fine-grain steels and 20% for other steels. Aluminium and aluminium alloys used in the construction of shells shall have an elongation at fracture, in %, of not less than 10,000/6Rm with an absolute minimum of 12%.

6.7.4.3.3.4 For the purpose of determining actual values for materials, it shall be noted that for sheet metal, the axis of the tensile test specimen shall be at right angles (transversely) to the direction of rolling. The permanent elongation at fracture shall be measured on test specimens of rectangular cross-section in accordance with ISO 6892:1998 using a 50 mm gauge length.

6.7.4.4 Minimum shell thickness

6.7.4.4.1 The minimum shell thickness shall be the greater thickness based on: .1 the minimum thickness determined in accordance with the provisions in 6.7.4.4.2 to 6.7.4.4.7; and .2 the minimum thickness determined in accordance with the recognized pressure-vessel code, including the provisions in 6.7.4.3.

6.7.4.4.2 Shells of not more than 1.80 m in diameter shall be not less than 5 mm thick in the reference steel or of equivalent thickness in the metal to be used. Shells of more than 1.80 m in diameter shall be not less than 6 mm thick in the reference steel or of equivalent thickness in the metal to be used.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 461

479

Bilaga 1

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc.

6.7.4.4.3 Shells of vacuum-insulated tanks of not more than 1.80 m in diameter shall be not less than 3 mm thick in the reference steel or of equivalent thickness in the metal to be used. Such shells of more than 1.80 m in diameter shall be not less than 4 mm thick in the reference steel or of equivalent thickness in the metal to be used.

6.7.4.4.4 For vacuum-insulated tanks, the aggregate thickness of the jacket and the shell shall correspond to the minimum thickness prescribed in 6.7.4.4.2, the thickness of the shell itself being not less than the minimum thickness prescribed in 6.7.4.4.3.

6.7.4.4.5 Shells shall be not less than 3 mm thick regardless of the material of construction.

6.7.4.4.6 The equivalent thickness of a metal other than the thickness prescribed for the reference steel in 6.7.4.4.2 and 6.7.4.4.3 shall be determined using the following equation: 21.4 × e0 e = ________ 3_________ 1

√Rm1 ×A1

where: e1 = required equivalent thickness (in mm) of the steel to be used; e0 = minimum thickness (in mm) of the reference steel specified in 6.7.4.4.2 and 6.7.4.4.3; 2 Rm1 = guaranteed minimum tensile strength (in N/mm ) of the metal to be used (see 6.7.4.3.3); A1 = guaranteed minimum elongation at fracture (in %) of the metal to be used according to national or international standards.

6.7.4.4.7 In no case shall the wall thickness be less than that prescribed in 6.7.4.4.1 to 6.7.4.4.5. All parts of the shell shall have a minimum thickness as determined by 6.7.4.4.1 to 6.7.4.4.6. This thickness shall be exclusive of any corrosion allowance.

6.7.4.4.8 There shall be no sudden change of plate thickness at the attachment of the ends (heads) to the cylindrical portion of the shell.

6.7.4.5 Service equipment

6.7.4.5.1 Service equipment shall be so arranged as to be protected against the risk of being wrenched off or damaged during handling and transport. When the connection between the frame and the tank or the jacket and the shell allows relative movement, the equipment shall be so fastened as to permit such movement without risk of damage to working parts. The external discharge fittings (pipe sockets, shut-off devices), the stop-valve and its seating shall be protected against the danger of being wrenched off by external forces (for example, by using shear sections). The filling and discharge devices (including flanges or threaded plugs) and any protective caps shall be capable of being secured against unintended opening.

6.7.4.5.1.1 For offshore tank-containers, where positioning of service equipment and the design and strength of protection for such equipment is concerned, the increased danger of impact damage when handling such tanks in open seas shall be taken into account.

6.7.4.5.2 Each filling and discharge opening in portable tanks used for the transport of flammable refrigerated liquefied gases shall be fitted with at least three mutually independent shut-off devices in series, the first being a stopvalve situated as close as reasonably practicable to the jacket, the second being a stop-valve and the third being a blank flange or equivalent device. The shut-off device closest to the jacket shall be a quick-closing device, which closes automatically in the event of unintended movement of the portable tank during filling or discharge or fire engulfment. This device shall also be possible to operate by remote control.

6.7.4.5.3 Each filling and discharge opening in portable tanks used for the transport of non-flammable refrigerated liquefied gases shall be fitted with at least two mutually independent shut-off devices in series, the first being a stop-valve situated as close as reasonably practicable to the jacket, the second a blank flange or equivalent device.

6.7.4.5.4 For sections of piping which can be closed at both ends and where liquid product can be trapped, a method of automatic pressure relief shall be provided to prevent excess pressure build-up within the piping.

6.7.4.5.5 Vacuum-insulated tanks need not have an opening for inspection.

6.7.4.5.6 External fittings shall be grouped together so far as reasonably practicable.

6.7.4.5.7 Each connection on a portable tank shall be clearly marked to indicate its function.

6.7.4.5.8 Each stop-valve or other means of closure shall be designed and constructed to a rated pressure not less than the MAWP of the shell, taking into account the temperature expected during transport. All stop-valves with a screwed spindle shall be closed by a clockwise motion of the handwheel. In the case of other stopvalves, the position (open and closed) and direction of closure shall be clearly indicated. All stop-valves shall be designed to prevent unintentional opening.

462 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

480

Bilaga 1

Chapter 6.7 – Design, construction, inspection and testing of portable tanks & MEGCs

6.7.4.5.9 When pressure-building units are used, the liquid and vapour connections to that unit shall be provided with a valve as close to the jacket as reasonably practicable to prevent the loss of contents in case of damage to the pressure-building unit. 6.7.4.5.10 Piping shall be designed, constructed and installed so as to avoid the risk of damage due to thermal expansion and contraction, mechanical shock and vibration. All piping shall be of a suitable material. To prevent leakage due to fire, only steel piping and welded joints shall be used between the jacket and the connection to the first closure of any outlet. The method of attaching the closure to this connection shall be to the satisfaction of the competent authority or its authorized body. Elsewhere, pipe joints shall be welded when necessary. 6.7.4.5.11 Joints in copper tubing shall be brazed or have an equally strong metal union. The melting point of brazing materials shall be no lower than 525°C. The joints shall not decrease the strength of the tubing, as may happen by cutting of threads. 6.7.4.5.12 The materials of construction of valves and accessories shall have satisfactory properties at the lowest operating temperature of the portable tank. 6.7.4.5.13 The burst pressure of all piping and pipe fittings shall be not less than the highest of four times the MAWP of the shell or four times the pressure to which it may be subjected in service by the action of a pump or other device (except pressure relief devices).

6.7.4.6 Pressure relief devices

6.7.4.6.1 Every shell shall be provided with not less than two independent spring-loaded pressure relief devices. The pressure relief devices shall open automatically at a pressure not less than the MAWP and be fully open at a pressure equal to 110% of the MAWP. These devices shall, after discharge, close at a pressure not lower than 10% below the pressure at which discharge starts and shall remain closed at all lower pressures. The pressure relief devices shall be of the type that will resist dynamic forces, including surge. 6.7.4.6.2 Shells for non-flammable refrigerated liquefied gases and hydrogen may in addition have frangible discs in parallel with the spring-loaded devices as specified in 6.7.4.7.2 and 6.7.4.7.3. 6.7.4.6.3 Pressure relief devices shall be designed to prevent the entry of foreign matter, the leakage of gas and the development of any dangerous excess pressure. 6.7.4.6.4 Pressure relief devices shall be approved by the competent authority or its authorized body.

6.7.4.7 Capacity and setting of pressure relief devices

6.7.4.7.1 In the case of the loss of vacuum in a vacuum-insulated tank or of loss of 20% of the insulation of a tank insulated with solid materials, the combined capacity of all pressure relief devices installed shall be sufficient so that the pressure (including accumulation) inside the shell does not exceed 120% of the MAWP. 6.7.4.7.2 For non-flammable refrigerated liquefied gases (except oxygen) and hydrogen, this capacity may be achieved by the use of frangible discs in parallel with the required safety relief devices. Frangible discs shall rupture at nominal pressure equal to the test pressure of the shell. 6.7.4.7.3 Under the circumstances described in 6.7.4.7.1 and 6.7.4.7.2 together with complete fire engulfment, the combined capacity of all pressure relief devices installed shall be sufficient to limit the pressure in the shell to the test pressure. 6.7.4.7.4 The required capacity of the relief devices shall be calculated in accordance with a well-established technical code recognized by the competent authority.*

6.7.4.8 Marking of pressure relief devices

6.7.4.8.1 Every pressure relief device shall be plainly and permanently marked with the following: .1 the pressure (in bar or kPa) at which it is set to discharge; .2 the allowable tolerance at the discharge pressure, for spring-loaded devices; .3 the reference temperature corresponding to the rated pressure, for frangible discs; and 3 .4 the rated flow capacity of the device in standard cubic metres of air per second (m /s). .5 The cross sectional flow areas of the spring loaded pressure-relief devices and frangible discs in mm². When practicable, the following information shall also be shown:

* See, for example, CGA S-1.2-2003 “Pressure Relief Device Standards – Part 2 – Cargo and Portable Tanks for Compressed Gases.”

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 463

481

Bilaga 1

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc.

.6 the manufacturer’s name and relevant catalogue number.

6.7.4.8.2 The rated flow capacity marked on the pressure relief devices shall be determined according to ISO 4126 1:2004 and ISO 4126-7:2004.

6.7.4.9 Connections to pressure relief devices

6.7.4.9.1 Connections to pressure relief devices shall be of sufficient size to enable the required discharge to pass unrestricted to the safety device. No stop-valve shall be installed between the shell and the pressure relief devices except when duplicate devices are provided for maintenance or other reasons and the stop-valves serving the devices actually in use are locked open or the stop-valves are interlocked so that the provisions of 6.7.4.7 are always fulfilled. There shall be no obstruction in an opening leading to a vent or pressure relief device which might restrict or cut off the flow from the shell to that device. Pipework to vent the vapour or liquid from the outlet of the pressure relief devices, when used, shall deliver the relieved vapour or liquid to the atmosphere in conditions of minimum back-pressure on the relieving device

6.7.4.10 Siting of pressure relief devices

6.7.4.10.1 Each pressure relief device inlet shall be situated on top of the shell in a position as near the longitudinal and transverse centre of the shell as reasonably practicable. All pressure relief device inlets shall, under maximum filling conditions, be situated in the vapour space of the shell and the devices shall be so arranged as to ensure that the escaping vapour is discharged unrestrictedly. For refrigerated liquefied gases, the escaping vapour shall be directed away from the tank and in such a manner that it cannot impinge upon the tank. Protective devices which deflect the flow of vapour are permissible provided the required relief-device capacity is not reduced.

6.7.4.10.2 Arrangements shall be made to prevent access to the devices by unauthorized persons and to protect the devices from damage caused by the portable tank overturning.

6.7.4.11 Gauging devices

6.7.4.11.1 Unless a portable tank is intended to be filled by mass, it shall be equipped with one or more gauging devices. Glass level-gauges and gauges made of other fragile material, which are in direct communication with the contents of the shell, shall not be used.

6.7.4.11.2 A connection for a vacuum gauge shall be provided in the jacket of a vacuum-insulated portable tank.

6.7.4.12 Portable tank supports, frameworks, lifting and tie-down attachments

6.7.4.12.1 Portable tanks shall be designed and constructed with a support structure to provide a secure base during transport. The forces specified in 6.7.4.2.12 and the safety factor specified in 6.7.4.2.13 shall be considered in this aspect of the design. Skids, frameworks, cradles or other similar structures are acceptable.

6.7.4.12.2 The combined stresses caused by portable tank mountings (such as cradles, frameworks, etc.) and portable tank lifting and tie-down attachments shall not cause excessive stress in any portion of the tank. Permanent lifting and tie-down attachments shall be fitted to all portable tanks. Preferably they shall be fitted to the portable tank supports but may be secured to reinforcing plates located on the tank at the points of support.

6.7.4.12.3 In the design of supports and frameworks, the effects of environmental corrosion shall be taken into account.

6.7.4.12.4 Forklift pockets shall be capable of being closed off. The means of closing forklift pockets shall be a permanent part of the framework or permanently attached to the framework. Single-compartment portable tanks with a length less than 3.65 m need not have closed-off forklift pockets provided that: .1 the tank and all the fittings are well protected from being hit by the forklift blades; and .2 the distance between the centres of the forklift pockets is at least half of the maximum length of the portable tank.

6.7.4.12.5 When portable tanks are not protected during transport, according to 4.2.3.3, the shells and service equipment shall be protected against damage to the shell and service equipment resulting from lateral or longitudinal impact or overturning. External fittings shall be protected so as to preclude the release of the shell contents upon impact or overturning of the portable tank on its fittings. Examples of protection include: .1 protection against lateral impact, which may consist of longitudinal bars protecting the shell on both sides at the level of the median line; .2 protection of the portable tank against overturning, which may consist of reinforcement rings or bars fixed across the frame; .3 protection against rear impact, which may consist of a bumper or frame;

464 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

482

Bilaga 1

Chapter 6.7 – Design, construction, inspection and testing of portable tanks & MEGCs

.4 protection of the shell against damage from impact or overturning by use of an ISO frame in accordance with ISO 1496-3:1995; .5 protection of the portable tank from impact or overturning by a vacuum insulation jacket.

6.7.4.13 Design approval

6.7.4.13.1 The competent authority or its authorized body shall issue a design approval certificate for any new design of a portable tank. This certificate shall attest that a portable tank has been surveyed by that authority, is suitable for its intended purpose and meets the provisions of this chapter. When a series of portable tanks are manufactured without change in the design, the certificate shall be valid for the entire series. The certificate shall refer to the prototype test report, the refrigerated liquefied gases allowed to be transported, the materials of construction of the shell and jacket and an approval number. The approval number shall consist of the distinguishing sign or mark of the State in whose territory the approval was granted, i.e., the distinguishing sign for use in international traffic, as prescribed by the Convention on Road Traffic, Vienna, 1968, and a registration number. Any alternative arrangements according to 6.7.1.2 shall be indicated on the certificate. A design approval may serve for the approval of smaller portable tanks made of materials of the same kind and thickness, by the same fabrication techniques and with identical supports, equivalent closures and other appurtenances. 6.7.4.13.2 The prototype test report for the design approval shall include at least the following: .1 the results of the applicable framework test specified in ISO 1496-3:1995; .2 the results of the initial inspection and test in 6.7.4.14.3; and .3 the results of the impact test in 6.7.4.14.1, when applicable.

6.7.4.14 Inspection and testing

6.7.4.14.1 Portable tanks meeting the definition of container in the International Convention for Safe Containers (CSC), 1972, as amended, shall not be used unless they are successfully qualified by subjecting a representative prototype of each design to the Dynamic, Longitudinal Impact Test prescribed in the United Nations Manual of Tests and Criteria, part IV, section 41. This provision only applies to portable tanks which are constructed according to a design approval certificate which has been issued on or after 1 January 2008. 6.7.4.14.2 The tank and items of equipment of each portable tank shall be inspected and tested before being put into service for the first time (initial inspection and test) and thereafter at not more than five-year intervals (5-year periodic inspection and test) with an intermediate periodic inspection and test (2.5-year periodic inspection and test) midway between the 5-year periodic inspections and tests. The 2.5-year periodic inspection and test may be performed within 3 months of the specified date. An exceptional inspection and test shall be performed regardless of the last periodic inspection and test when necessary according to 6.7.4.14.7. 6.7.4.14.3 The initial inspection and test of a portable tank shall include a check of the design characteristics, an internal and external examination of the portable tank shell and its fittings with due regard to the refrigerated liquefied gases to be transported, and a pressure test referring to the test pressures according to 6.7.4.3.2. The pressure test may be performed as a hydraulic test or by using another liquid or gas, with the agreement of the competent authority or its authorized body. Before the portable tank is placed into service, a leakproofness test and a test of the satisfactory operation of all service equipment shall also be performed. When the shell and its fittings have been pressure-tested separately, they shall be subjected together after assembly to a leakproofness test. All welds subject to full stress level shall be inspected during the initial test by radiographic, ultrasonic, or another suitable non-destructive test method. This does not apply to the jacket. 6.7.4.14.4 The 5-year and 2.5-year periodic inspections and tests shall include an external examination of the portable tank and its fittings with due regard to the refrigerated liquefied gases transported, a leakproofness test, a test of the satisfactory operation of all service equipment and a vacuum reading, when applicable. In the case of non-vacuum-insulated tanks, the jacket and insulation shall be removed during the 2.5-year and the 5-year periodic inspections and tests, but only to the extent necessary for a reliable appraisal. 6.7.4.14.5 [Reserved] 6.7.4.14.6 A portable tank may not be filled and offered for transport after the date of expiry of the last 5-year or 2.5-year periodic inspection and test as required by 6.7.4.14.2. However, a portable tank filled prior to the date of expiry of the last periodic inspection and test may be transported for a period not to exceed three months beyond the date of expiry of the last periodic test or inspection. In addition, a portable tank may be transported after the date of expiry of the last periodic test and inspection: .1 after emptying but before cleaning, for purposes of performing the next required test or inspection prior to refilling; and .2 unless otherwise approved by the competent authority, for a period not to exceed six months beyond the date of expiry of the last periodic test or inspection, in order to allow the return of dangerous goods for proper disposal or recycling. Reference to this exemption shall be mentioned in the transport document.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 465

483

Bilaga 1

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc.

6.7.4.14.7 The exceptional inspection and test is necessary when the portable tank shows evidence of damaged or corroded areas, leakage, or any other conditions that indicate a deficiency that could affect the integrity of the portable tank. The extent of the exceptional inspection and test shall depend on the amount of damage or deterioration of the portable tank. It shall include at least the 2.5-year periodic inspection and test according to 6.7.4.14.4. 6.7.4.14.8 The internal examination during the initial inspection and test shall ensure that the shell is inspected for pitting, corrosion, or abrasions, dents, distortions, defects in welds or any other conditions that might render the portable tank unsafe for transport. 6.7.4.14.9 The external examination shall ensure that: .1 the external piping, valves, pressurizing/cooling systems when applicable, and gaskets are inspected for corroded areas, defects, or any other conditions, including leakage, that might render the portable tank unsafe for filling, discharge or transport; .2 there is no leakage at any manhole covers or gaskets; .3 missing or loose bolts or nuts on any flanged connection or blank flange are replaced or tightened; .4 all emergency devices and valves are free from corrosion, distortion and any damage or defect that could prevent their normal operation. Remote closure devices and self-closing stop-valves shall be operated to demonstrate proper operation; .5 required markings on the portable tank are legible and in accordance with the applicable provisions; and .6 the framework, the supports and the arrangements for lifting the portable tank are in satisfactory condition. 6.7.4.14.10 The inspections and tests in 6.7.4.14.1, 6.7.4.14.3, 6.7.4.14.4 and 6.7.4.14.7 shall be performed or witnessed by an expert approved by the competent authority or its authorized body. When the pressure test is a part of the inspection and test, the test pressure shall be the one indicated on the data plate of the portable tank. While under pressure, the portable tank shall be inspected for any leaks in the shell, piping or equipment. 6.7.4.14.11 In all cases when cutting, burning or welding operations on the shell of a portable tank have been effected, that work shall be to the approval of the competent authority or its authorized body, taking into account the pressure-vessel code used for the construction of the shell. A pressure test to the original test pressure shall be performed after the work is completed. 6.7.4.14.12 When evidence of any unsafe condition is discovered, the portable tank shall not be returned to service until it has been corrected and the test is repeated and passed.

6.7.4.15 Marking

6.7.4.15.1 Every portable tank shall be fitted with a corrosion-resistant metal plate permanently attached to the portable tank in a conspicuous place readily accessible for inspection. When for reasons of portable tank arrangements the plate cannot be permanently attached to the shell, the shell shall be marked with at least the information required by the pressure-vessel code. As a minimum, at least the following information shall be marked on the plate by stamping or by any other similar method: (a) Owner information (i) Owner’s registration number; (b) Manufacturing information (i) Country of manufacture; (ii) Year of manufacture; (iii) Manufacturer’s name or mark; (iv) Manufacturer’s serial number; (c) Approval information (i) The United Nations packaging symbol

This symbol shall not be used for any purpose other than certifying that a packaging, a flexible bulk container, a portable tank or a MEGC complies with the relevant requirements in Chapter 6.1, 6.2, 6.3, 6.5, 6.6, 6.7 or 6.9; (ii) Approval country; (iii) Authorized body for the design approval; (iv) Design approval number; (v) Letters “AA”, if the design was approved under alternative arrangements (see 6.7.1.2); (vi) Pressure-vessel code to which the shell is designed;

466 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

484

Bilaga 1

Chapter 6.7 – Design, construction, inspection and testing of portable tanks & MEGCs

(d) Pressures * (i) MAWP (in bar gauge or kPa gauge); (ii) Test pressure (in bar gauge or kPa gauge);* (iii) Initial pressure test date (month and year); (iv) Identification mark of the initial pressure test witness; (e) Temperatures (i) Minimum design temperature (in °C);† (f) Materials (i) Shell material(s) and material standard reference(s); (ii) Equivalent thickness in reference steel (in mm);* (g) Capacity (i) Tank water capacity at 20°C (in litres);* (h) Insulation (i) Either “Thermally insulated” or “Vacuum insulated” (as applicable); (ii) Effectiveness of the insulation system (heat influx) (in Watts);* (i) Holding times – For each refrigerated liquefied gas permitted to be transported in the portable tank: (i) Name, in full, of the refrigerated liquefied gas; * (ii) Reference holding time (in days or hours); * (iii) Initial pressure (in bar gauge or kPa gauge); (iv) Degree of filling (in kg);* (j) Periodic inspections and tests (i) Type of the most recent periodic test (2.5-year, 5-year or exceptional); (ii) Date of the most recent periodic test (month and year); (iii) Identification mark of the authorized body who performed or witnessed the most recent test.

* The unit used shall be indicated. † The unit used shall be indicated.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 467

485

Bilaga 1

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc.

Figure 6.7.4.15.1 – Example of identification plate marking

Owner’s registration number MANUFACTURING INFORMATION Country of manufacture Year of manufacture Manufacturer Manufacturer’s serial number APPROVAL INFORMATION Approval country Authorized body for design approval Design approval number “AA” (if applicable) Shell design code (pressure-vessel code) PRESSURES MAWP bar or kPa Test pressure bar or kPa Initial pressure test date: (mm/yyyy) Witness stamp: TEMPERATURES Minimum design temperature °C MATERIALS Shell material(s) and material standard reference(s) Equivalent thickness in reference steel mm CAPACITY Tank water capacity at 20°C litres INSULATION “Thermally insulated” or “Vacuum insulated” (as applicable) Heat influx Watts HOLDING TIMES Refrigerated liquefied gas(es) Reference holding time Initial pressure Degree permitted of filling days or hours bar or kPa kg

PERIODIC INSPECTIONS/TESTS Test type Test date Witness stamp Test type Test date Witness stamp (mm/yyyy) (mm/yyyy)

468 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

486

Bilaga 1

Chapter 6.7 – Design, construction, inspection and testing of portable tanks & MEGCs

6.7.4.15.2 The following information shall be durably marked either on the portable tank itself or on a metal plate firmly secured to the portable tank: Name of the owner and the operator Name of the refrigerated liquefied gas being transported (and minimum mean bulk temperature) Maximum permissible gross mass (MPGM) . . . . . . . . . . kg Unladen (tare) mass . . . . . . . . . . kg Actual holding time for gas being transported . . . . . . . . . . days (or hours) Portable tank instruction in accordance with 4.2.5.2.6. 6.7.4.15.3 If a portable tank is designed and approved for handling in open seas, the words “OFFSHORE PORTABLE TANK” shall be marked on the identification plate.

6.7.5 Provisions for the design, construction, inspection and testing of multiple-element gas containers (MEGCs) intended for the transport of non-refrigerated gases

6.7.5.1 Definitions

For the purposes of this section: Elements are cylinders, tubes or bundles of cylinders; Leakproofness test means a test, using gas, subjecting the elements and the service equipment of the MEGC to an effective internal pressure of not less than 20% of the test pressure; Manifold means an assembly of piping and valves connecting the filling and/or discharge openings of the elements; Maximum permissible gross mass (MPGM) means the sum of the tare mass of the MEGC and the heaviest load authorized for transport; Service equipment means measuring instruments and filling, discharge, venting and safety devices; Structural equipment means the reinforcing, fastening, protective and stabilizing members external to the elements.

6.7.5.2 General design and construction provisions

6.7.5.2.1 The MEGC shall be capable of being filled and discharged without the removal of its structural equipment. It shall possess stabilizing members external to the elements to provide structural integrity for handling and transport. MEGCs shall be designed and constructed with supports to provide a secure base during transport and with lifting and tie-down attachments which are adequate for lifting the MEGC, including when loaded to its maximum permissible gross mass. The MEGC shall be designed to be loaded onto or into a vehicle or ship and shall be equipped with skids, mountings or accessories to facilitate mechanical handling. 6.7.5.2.2 MEGCs shall be designed, manufactured and equipped in such a way as to withstand all conditions to which they will be subjected during normal conditions of handling and transport. The design shall take into account the effects of dynamic loading and fatigue. 6.7.5.2.3 Elements of an MEGC shall be made of seamless steel and be constructed and tested according to chapter 6.2. All of the elements in an MEGC shall be of the same design type. 6.7.5.2.4 Elements of MEGCs, fittings and pipework shall be: .1 compatible with the substances intended to be transported (for gases, see ISO 11114-1:1997 and ISO 11114-2:2000); or .2 properly passivated or neutralized by chemical reaction. 6.7.5.2.5 Contact between dissimilar metals which could result in damage by galvanic action shall be avoided. 6.7.5.2.6 The materials of the MEGC, including any devices, gaskets, and accessories, shall not adversely affect the gases intended for transport in the MEGC. 6.7.5.2.7 MEGCs shall be designed to withstand, without loss of contents, at least the internal pressure due to the contents, and the static, dynamic and thermal loads during normal conditions of handling and transport. The design shall demonstrate that the effects of fatigue, caused by repeated application of these loads through the expected life of the multiple-element gas container, have been taken into account.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 469

487

Bilaga 1

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc.

6.7.5.2.8 MEGCs and their fastenings shall, under the maximum permissible load, be capable of withstanding the following separately applied static forces: .1 in the direction of travel: twice the MPGM multiplied by the acceleration due to gravity (g);*

.2 horizontally at right angles to the direction of travel: the MPGM (when the direction of travel is not clearly determined, the forces shall be equal to twice the MPGM) multiplied by the acceleration due to gravity (g);* .3 vertically upwards: the MPGM multiplied by the acceleration due to gravity (g);* and

.4 vertically downwards: twice the MPGM (total loading including the effect of gravity) multiplied by the acceleration due to gravity (g).*

6.7.5.2.9 Under the forces defined above, the stress at the most severely stressed point of the elements shall not exceed the values given in either the relevant standards of 6.2.2.1 or, if the elements are not designed, constructed and tested according to those standards, in the technical code or standard recognized or approved by the competent authority of the country of use (see 6.2.3.1).

6.7.5.2.10 Under each of the forces in 6.7.5.2.8, the safety factor for the framework and fastenings to be observed shall be as follows: .1 for steels having a clearly defined yield point, a safety factor of 1.5 in relation to the guaranteed yield strength; or .2 for steels with no clearly defined yield point, a safety factor of 1.5 in relation to the guaranteed 0.2% proof strength and, for austenitic steels, the 1% proof strength.

6.7.5.2.11 MEGCs intended for the transport of flammable gases shall be capable of being electrically earthed.

6.7.5.2.12 The elements shall be secured in a manner that prevents undesired movement in relation to the structure and the concentration of harmful localized stresses.

6.7.5.3 Service equipment

6.7.5.3.1 Service equipment shall be configured or designed to prevent damage that could result in the release of the pressure receptacle contents during normal conditions of handling and transport. When the connection between the frame and the elements allows relative movement between the sub-assemblies, the equipment shall be so fastened as to permit such movement without damage to working parts. The manifolds, the discharge fittings (pipe sockets, shut-off devices), and the stop-valves shall be protected from being wrenched off by external forces. Manifold piping leading to shut-off valves shall be sufficiently flexible to protect the valves and the piping from shearing, or releasing the pressure receptacle contents. The filling and discharge devices (including flanges or threaded plugs) and any protective caps shall be capable of being secured against unintended opening.

6.7.5.3.2 Each element intended for the transport of gases of class 2.3 shall be fitted with a valve. The manifold for liquefied gases of class 2.3 shall be so designed that the elements can be filled separately and be kept isolated by a valve capable of being sealed. For the transport of gases of class 2.1, the elements shall be divided into groups of not more than 3000 litres each isolated by a valve.

6.7.5.3.3 For filling and discharge openings of the MEGC, two valves in series shall be placed in an accessible position on each discharge and filling pipe. One of the valves may be a non-return valve. The filling and discharge devices may be fitted to a manifold. For sections of piping which can be closed at both ends and where a liquid product can be trapped, a pressure relief valve shall be provided to prevent excessive pressure buildup. The main isolation valves on an MEGC shall be clearly marked to indicate their directions of closure. Each stop-valve or other means of closure shall be designed and constructed to withstand a pressure equal to or greater than 1.5 times the test pressure of the MEGC. All stop-valves with screwed spindles shall close by a clockwise motion of the handwheel. For other stop-valves, the positions (open and closed) and direction of closure shall be clearly indicated. All stop-valves shall be designed and positioned to prevent unintentional opening. Ductile metals shall be used in the construction of valves or accessories.

6.7.5.3.4 Piping shall be designed, constructed and installed so as to avoid damage due to expansion and contraction, mechanical shock and vibration. Joints in tubing shall be brazed or have an equally strong metal union. The melting point of brazing materials shall be no lower than 525°C. The rated pressure of the service equipment and of the manifold shall be not less than two thirds of the test pressure of the elements.

6.7.5.4 Pressure relief devices

6.7.5.4.1 The elements of MEGCs used for the transport of UN 1013 carbon dioxide and UN 1070 nitrous oxide shall be divided into groups of not more than 3000 litres each isolated by a valve. Each group shall be fitted with one

* For calculation purposes, g = 9.81 m/s2.

470 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

488

Bilaga 1

Chapter 6.7 – Design, construction, inspection and testing of portable tanks & MEGCs

or more pressure relief devices. If so required by the competent authority of the country of use, MEGCs for other gases shall be fitted with pressure relief devices as specified by that competent authority.

6.7.5.4.2 When pressure relief devices are fitted, every element or group of elements of an MEGC that can be isolated shall then be fitted with one or more pressure relief devices. Pressure relief devices shall be of a type that will resist dynamic forces, including liquid surge, and shall be designed to prevent the entry of foreign matter, the leakage of gas and the development of any dangerous excess pressure.

6.7.5.4.3 MEGCs used for the transport of certain non-refrigerated gases identified in instruction T50 in 4.2.5.2.6 may have a pressure relief device as required by the competent authority of the country of use. Unless an MEGC in dedicated service is fitted with an approved pressure relief device constructed of materials compatible with the load, such a device shall comprise a frangible disc preceding a spring-loaded device. The space between the frangible disc and the spring-loaded device may be equipped with a pressure gauge or a suitable tell-tale indicator. This arrangement permits the detection of disc rupture, pinholing or leakage which could cause a malfunction of the pressure relief device. The frangible disc shall rupture at a nominal pressure 10% above the start-to-discharge pressure of the spring-loaded device.

6.7.5.4.4 In the case of multi-purpose MEGCs used for the transport of low-pressure liquefied gases, the pressure relief devices shall open at a pressure as specified in 6.7.3.7.1 for the gas having the highest maximum allowable working pressure of the gases allowed to be transported in the MEGC.

6.7.5.5 Capacity of pressure relief devices

6.7.5.5.1 The combined delivery capacity of the pressure relief devices when fitted shall be sufficient that, in the event of complete fire engulfment of the MEGC, the pressure (including accumulation) inside the elements does not exceed 120% of the set pressure of the pressure relief device. The formula provided in CGA S-1.2-2003 “Pressure Relief Device Standards, Part 2, Cargo and Portable Tanks for Compressed Gases” shall be used to determine the minimum total flow capacity for the system of pressure relief devices. CGA S-1.1-2003 “Pressure Relief Device Standards, Part 1, Cylinders for Compressed Gases” may be used to determine the relief capacity of individual elements. Spring-loaded pressure relief devices may be used to achieve the full relief capacity prescribed in the case of low-pressure liquefied gases. In the case of multi-purpose MEGCs, the combined delivery capacity of the pressure relief devices shall be taken for the gas which requires the highest delivery capacity of the gases allowed to be transported in the MEGC.

6.7.5.5.2 To determine the total required capacity of the pressure relief devices installed on the elements for the transport of liquefied gases, the thermodynamic properties of the gas shall be considered (see, for example, CGA S-1.2-2003 “Pressure Relief Device Standards, Part 2, Cargo and Portable Tanks for Compressed Gases” for low-pressure liquefied gases and CGA S-1.1-2003 “Pressure Relief Device Standards, Part 1, Cylinders for Compressed Gases” for high-pressure liquefied gases).

6.7.5.6 Marking of pressure relief devices

6.7.5.6.1 Pressure relief devices shall be clearly and permanently marked with the following: (a) the manufacturer’s name and relevant catalogue number; (b) the set pressure and/or the set temperature; (c) the date of the last test. (d) The cross sectional flow areas of the spring loaded pressure-relief devices and frangible discs in mm².

6.7.5.6.2 The rated flow capacity marked on spring-loaded pressure relief devices for low-pressure liquefied gases shall be determined according to ISO 4126 1:2004 and ISO 4126-7:2004.

6.7.5.7 Connections to pressure relief devices

6.7.5.7.1 Connections to pressure relief devices shall be of sufficient size to enable the required discharge to pass unrestricted to the pressure relief device. No stop-valve shall be installed between the element and the pressure relief devices, except when duplicate devices are provided for maintenance or other reasons, and the stop-valves serving the devices actually in use are locked open, or the stop-valves are interlocked so that at least one of the duplicate devices is always operable and capable of meeting the requirements of 6.7.5.5. There shall be no obstruction in an opening leading to or leaving from a vent or pressure relief device which might restrict or cut off the flow from the element to that device. The opening through all piping and fittings shall have at least the same flow area as the inlet of the pressure relief device to which it is connected. The nominal size of the discharge piping shall be at least as large as that of the pressure relief device outlet. Vents from the pressure relief devices, when used, shall deliver the relieved vapour or liquid to the atmosphere in conditions of minimum back-pressure on the relieving device.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 471

489

Bilaga 1

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc.

6.7.5.8 Siting of pressure relief devices

6.7.5.8.1 Each pressure relief device shall, under maximum filling conditions, be in communication with the vapour space of the elements for the transport of liquefied gases. The devices, when fitted, shall be so arranged as to ensure that the escaping vapour is discharged upwards and unrestrictedly so as to prevent any impingement of escaping gas or liquid upon the MEGC, its elements or personnel. For flammable and pyrophoric and oxidizing gases, the escaping gas shall be directed away from the element in such a manner that it cannot impinge upon the other elements. Heat-resistant protective devices which deflect the flow of gas are permissible provided the required pressure relief device capacity is not reduced.

6.7.5.8.2 Arrangements shall be made to prevent access to the pressure relief devices by unauthorized persons and to protect the devices from damage caused by the MEGC overturning.

6.7.5.9 Gauging devices

6.7.5.9.1 When an MEGC is intended to be filled by mass, it shall be equipped with one or more gauging devices. Level-gauges made of glass or other fragile material shall not be used.

6.7.5.10 MEGC supports, frameworks, lifting and tie-down attachments

6.7.5.10.1 MEGCs shall be designed and constructed with a support structure to provide a secure base during transport. The forces specified in 6.7.5.2.8 and the safety factor specified in 6.7.5.2.10 shall be considered in this aspect of the design. Skids, frameworks, cradles or other similar structures are acceptable.

6.7.5.10.2 The combined stresses caused by element mountings (e.g., cradles, frameworks, etc.) and MEGC lifting and tie-down attachments shall not cause excessive stress in any element. Permanent lifting and tie-down attachments shall be fitted to all MEGCs. In no case shall mountings or attachments be welded onto the elements.

6.7.5.10.3 In the design of supports and frameworks, the effects of environmental corrosion shall be taken into account.

6.7.5.10.4 When MEGCs are not protected during transport, according to 4.2.4.3, the elements and service equipment shall be protected against damage resulting from lateral or longitudinal impact or overturning. External fittings shall be protected so as to preclude the release of the elements’ contents upon impact or overturning of the MEGC on its fittings. Particular attention shall be paid to the protection of the manifold. Examples of protection include: .1 protection against lateral impact, which may consist of longitudinal bars; .2 protection against overturning, which may consist of reinforcement rings or bars fixed across the frame; .3 protection against rear impact, which may consist of a bumper or frame; .4 protection of the elements and service equipment against damage from impact or overturning by use of an ISO frame in accordance with the relevant provisions of ISO 1496-3:1995.

6.7.5.11 Design approval

6.7.5.11.1 The competent authority or its authorized body shall issue a design approval certificate for any new design of an MEGC. This certificate shall attest that the MEGC has been surveyed by that authority, is suitable for its intended purpose and meets the requirements of this chapter, the applicable provisions for gases of chapter 4.1 and of packing instruction P200. When a series of MEGCs are manufactured without change in the design, the certificate shall be valid for the entire series. The certificate shall refer to the prototype test report, the materials of construction of the manifold, the standards to which the elements are made and an approval number. The approval number shall consist of the distinguishing sign or mark of the country granting the approval, i.e., the distinguishing sign for use in international traffic, as prescribed by the Convention on Road Traffic, Vienna, 1968, and a registration number. Any alternative arrangements according to 6.7.1.2 shall be indicated on the certificate. A design approval may serve for the approval of smaller MEGCs made of materials of the same type and thickness, by the same fabrication techniques and with identical supports, equivalent closures and other appurtenances.

6.7.5.11.2 The prototype test report for the design approval shall include at least the following: .1 the results of the applicable framework test specified in ISO 1496-3:1995; .2 the results of the initial inspection and test specified in 6.7.5.12.3; .3 the results of the impact test specified in 6.7.5.12.1; and .4 certification documents verifying that the cylinders and tubes comply with the applicable standards.

472 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

490

Bilaga 1

Chapter 6.7 – Design, construction, inspection and testing of portable tanks & MEGCs

6.7.5.12 Inspection and testing

6.7.5.12.1 MEGCs meeting the definition of container in the International Convention for Safe Containers (CSC), 1972, as amended, shall not be used unless they are successfully qualified by subjecting a representative prototype of each design to the Dynamic, Longitudinal Impact Test prescribed in the United Nations Manual of Tests and Criteria, part IV, section 41. This provision only applies to MEGCs which are constructed according to a design approval certificate which has been issued on or after 1 January 2008.

6.7.5.12.2 The elements and items of equipment of each MEGC shall be inspected and tested before being put into service for the first time (initial inspection and test). Thereafter, MEGCs shall be inspected at no more than five-year intervals (5-year periodic inspection). An exceptional inspection and test shall be performed, regardless of the last periodic inspection and test, when necessary according to 6.7.5.12.5. 6.7.5.12.3 The initial inspection and test of an MEGC shall include a check of the design characteristics, an external examination of the MEGC and its fittings with due regard to the gases to be transported, and a pressure test performed at the test pressures according to packing instruction P200. The pressure test of the manifold may be performed as a hydraulic test or by using another liquid or gas with the agreement of the competent authority or its authorized body. Before the MEGC is placed into service, a leakproofness test and a test of the satisfactory operation of all service equipment shall also be performed. When the elements and their fittings have been pressure-tested separately, they shall be subjected together after assembly to a leakproofness test.

6.7.5.12.4 The 5-year periodic inspection and test shall include an external examination of the structure, the elements and the service equipment in accordance with 6.7.5.12.6. The elements and the piping shall be tested at the periodicity specified in packing instruction P200 and in accordance with the provisions described in 6.2.1.6. When the elements and equipment have been pressure-tested separately, they shall be subjected together after assembly to a leakproofness test.

6.7.5.12.5 An exceptional inspection and test is necessary when the MEGC shows evidence of damaged or corroded areas, leakage, or other conditions that indicate a deficiency that could affect the integrity of the MEGC. The extent of the exceptional inspection and test shall depend on the amount of damage or deterioration of the MEGC. It shall include at least the examinations required under 6.7.5.12.6.

6.7.5.12.6 The examinations shall ensure that: .1 the elements are inspected externally for pitting, corrosion, abrasions, dents, distortions, defects in welds or any other conditions, including leakage, that might render the MEGC unsafe for transport; .2 the piping, valves, and gaskets are inspected for corroded areas, defects, and other conditions, including leakage, that might render the MEGC unsafe for filling, discharge or transport; .3 missing or loose bolts or nuts on any flanged connection or blank flange are replaced or tightened; .4 all emergency devices and valves are free from corrosion, distortion and any damage or defect that could prevent their normal operation. Remote closure devices and self-closing stop-valves shall be operated to demonstrate proper operation; .5 required markings on the MEGC are legible and in accordance with the applicable requirements; and .6 the framework, the supports and the arrangements for lifting the MEGC are in satisfactory condition.

6.7.5.12.7 The inspections and tests in 6.7.5.12.1, 6.7.5.12.3, 6.7.5.12.4 and 6.7.5.12.5 shall be performed or witnessed by a body authorized by the competent authority. When the pressure test is a part of the inspection and test, the test pressure shall be the one indicated on the data plate of the MEGC. While under pressure, the MEGC shall be inspected for any leaks in the elements, piping or equipment.

6.7.5.12.8 When evidence of any unsafe condition is discovered, the MEGC shall not be returned to service until it has been corrected and the applicable tests and verifications are passed.

6.7.5.13 Marking

6.7.5.13.1 Every MEGC shall be fitted with a corrosion-resistant metal plate permanently attached to the MEGC in a conspicuous place readily accessible for inspection. The metal plate shall not be affixed to the elements. The elements shall be marked in accordance with chapter 6.2. As a minimum, at least the following information shall be marked on the plate by stamping or by any other similar method: (a) Owner information (i) Owner’s registration number; (b) Manufacturing information (i) Country of manufacture; (ii) Year of manufacture; (iii) Manufacturer’s name or mark;

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 473

491

Bilaga 1

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc.

(iv) Manufacturer’s serial number; (c) Approval information (i) The United Nations packaging symbol

This symbol shall not be used for any purpose other than certifying that a packaging, a flexible bulk container, a portable tank or a MEGC complies with the relevant requirements in Chapter 6.1, 6.2, 6.3, 6.5, 6.6, 6.7 or 6.9; (ii) Approval country; (iii) Authorized body for the design approval; (iv) Design approval number; (v) Letters “AA”, if the design was approved under alternative arrangements (see 6.7.1.2); (d) Pressures (i) Test pressure (in bar gauge);* (ii) Initial pressure test date (month and year); (iii) Identification mark of the initial pressure test witness; (e) Temperatures (i) Design temperature range (in °C);* (f) Elements/Capacity (i) Number of elements; (ii) Total water capacity (in litres);* (g) Periodic inspections and tests (i) Type of the most recent periodic test (5-year or exceptional); (ii) Date of the most recent periodic test (month and year); (iii) Identification mark of the authorized body who performed or witnessed the most recent test.

* The unit used shall be indicated.

474 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

492

Bilaga 1

Chapter 6.7 – Design, construction, inspection and testing of portable tanks & MEGCs

Figure 6.7.5.13.1 – Example of identification plate marking

Owner’s registration number MANUFACTURING INFORMATION Country of manufacture Year of manufacture Manufacturer Manufacturer’s serial number APPROVAL INFORMATION Approval country Authorized body for design approval Design approval number “AA” (if applicable) PRESSURES Test pressure bar Initial pressure test date: (mm/yyyy) Witness stamp: TEMPERATURES Design temperature range °C to °C ELEMENTS/CAPACITY Number of elements Total water capacity litres PERIODIC INSPECTIONS/TESTS Test type Test date Witness stamp Test type Test date Witness stamp (mm/yyyy) (mm/yyyy)

6.7.5.13.2 The following information shall be marked on a metal plate firmly secured to the MEGC: Name of the operator Maximum permissible load mass . . . . . . . . . . kg Working pressure at 15°C: . . . . . . . . . . bar gauge Maximum permissible gross mass (MPGM) . . . . . . . . . . kg Unladen (tare) mass . . . . . . . . . . kg

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 475

493

Bilaga 1

Chapter 6.8

Provisions for road tank vehicles

6.8.1 General

*

6.8.1.1 Tank support frameworks, fitting and tie-down attachments

6.8.1.1.1 Road tank vehicles shall be designed and manufactured with supports to provide a secure base during transport and with suitable tie-down attachments. The tie-down attachments shall be located on the tank support or vehicle structure in such a manner that the suspension system is not left in free play. 6.8.1.1.2 Tanks shall be carried only on vehicles whose fastenings are capable, in conditions of maximum permissible loading of the tanks, of absorbing the forces specified in 6.7.2.2.12, 6.7.3.2.9 and 6.7.4.2.12.

6.8.2 Road tank vehicles for long international voyages for substances of classes 3 to 9

6.8.2.1 Design and construction

6.8.2.1.1 A road tank vehicle for long international voyages shall be fitted with a tank complying with the provisions of chapters 4.2 and 6.7 and shall comply with the relevant provisions for tank supports, frameworks, lifting and tie-down attachments,* except for the provisions for forklift pockets, and in addition comply with the provisions of 6.8.1.1.1.

6.8.2.2 Approval, testing and marking

6.8.2.2.1 For approval, testing and marking of the tank, see 6.7.2. 6.8.2.2.2 The tank supports and tie-down attachments* of vehicles for long international voyages shall be included in the visual external inspection provided for in 6.7.2.19. 6.8.2.2.3 The vehicle of a road tank vehicle shall be tested and inspected in accordance with the road transport provisions of the competent authority of the country in which the vehicle is operated.

6.8.3 Road tank vehicles for short international voyages

6.8.3.1 Road tank vehicles for substances of classes 3 to 9 (IMO type 4)

6.8.3.1.1 General provisions

6.8.3.1.1.1 An IMO type 4 tank shall comply with either: .1 the provisions of 6.8.2; or .2 the provisions of 6.8.3.1.2 and 6.8.3.1.3.

6

6.8.3.1.2 Design and construction

6.8.3.1.2.1 An IMO type 4 tank shall comply with the provisions of 6.7.2, with the exception of: .1 6.7.2.3.2; however, they shall have been subjected to a test pressure not less than that specified according to the appropriate tank instruction assigned to the substance; * See also IMO Assembly resolution A.581(14) of 20 November 1985, Guidelines for securing arrangements for the transport of road vehicles on ro–ro ships.

476 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

494

Bilaga 1

Chapter 6.8 – Provisions for road tank vehicles

.2 6.7.2.4; however, the thickness of cylindrical portions and ends in reference steel shall be: .1 not more than 2 mm thinner than the thickness specified according to the appropriate tank instruction assigned to the substance; .2 subject to an absolute minimum thickness of 4 mm of reference steel; and .3 for other materials, subject to an absolute minimum thickness of 3 mm; .3 6.7.2.2.13; however, the safety factor shall be not less than 1.3; .4 6.7.2.2.1 to 6.7.2.2.7; however, the materials of construction shall comply with the provisions of the competent authority for road transport; .5 6.7.2.5.1; however, the protection of valves and accessories shall comply with the provisions of the competent authority for road transport; .6 6.7.2.5.3; however, IMO type 4 tanks shall be provided with manholes or other openings in the tank which comply with the provisions of the competent authority for road transport; .7 6.7.2.5.2 and 6.7.2.5.4; however, tank nozzles and external fittings shall comply with the provisions of the competent authority for road transport; .8 6.7.2.6; however, IMO type 4 tanks with bottom openings shall not be used for substances for which bottom openings are not permitted in the appropriate tank instruction assigned to the substance. In addition, existing openings and hand inspection holes shall be either closed by bolted flanges mounted both internally and externally, fitted with product-compatible gaskets, or by welding as specified in 6.7.2.6.1. The closing of openings and hand inspection holes shall be approved by the competent authority for sea transport; .9 6.7.2.7 to 6.7.2.15; however, IMO type 4 tanks shall be fitted with pressure relief devices of the type required according to the appropriate tank instruction assigned to the substance. The devices shall be acceptable to the competent authority for the road transport for the substances to be transported. The start-to-discharge pressure of the spring-loaded pressure relief devices shall in no case be less than the maximum allowable working pressure, nor greater than 25% above that pressure; and .10 6.7.2.17; however, tank supports on permanently attached IMO type 4 tanks shall comply with the provisions of the competent authority for road transport. 6.8.3.1.2.2 For IMO type 4 tanks, the maximum effective gauge pressure developed by the substances to be transported shall not exceed the maximum allowable working pressure of the tank.

6.8.3.1.3 Approval, testing and marking

6.8.3.1.3.1 IMO type 4 tanks shall be approved for road transport by the competent authority. 6.8.3.1.3.2 The competent authority for sea transport shall issue additionally, in respect of an IMO type 4 tank, a certificate attesting compliance with the relevant design, construction and equipment provisions of this subsection and the special provisions for certain substances, as applicable. 6.8.3.1.3.3 IMO type 4 tanks shall be periodically tested and inspected in accordance with the provisions of the competent authority for road transport. 6.8.3.1.3.4 An IMO type 4 tank shall be marked in accordance with 6.7.2.20. However, where the marking required by the competent authority for road transport is substantially in agreement with that of 6.7.2.20, it will be sufficient to endorse the metal plate attached to the IMO type 4 tank with “IMO 4”. 6.8.3.1.3.5 IMO type 4 tanks which are not permanently attached to the chassis shall be marked “IMO type 4” in letters at least 32 mm high.

6.8.3.2 Road tank vehicles for non-refrigerated liquefied gases of class 2 (IMO type 6)

6.8.3.2.1 General provisions

6.8.3.2.1.1 An IMO type 6 tank shall comply with either: .1 the provisions of 6.7.3; or .2 the provisions of 6.8.3.2.2 and 6.8.3.2.3. 6.8.3.2.1.2 For an IMO type 6 tank, the design temperature range is defined in 6.7.3.1. The temperature to be taken is to be agreed by the competent authority for road transport.

6.8.3.2.2 Design and construction

6.8.3.2.2.1 An IMO type 6 tank shall comply with the provisions of 6.7.3, with the exception of: .1 the safety factor of 1.5 in 6.7.3.2.10; however, the safety factor shall not be less than 1.3;

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 477

495

Bilaga 1

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc.

.2 6.7.3.5.7; .3 6.7.3.6.1, if bottom openings are approved by the competent authority for sea transport; .4 6.7.3.7.1; however, the devices shall open at a pressure not less than the MAWP and be fully open at a pressure not exceeding the test pressure of the tank; .5 6.7.3.8, if the delivery capacity of the pressure relief devices is approved by the competent authorities for sea and road transport; .6 the location of the pressure relief device inlets in 6.7.3.11.1, which need not be in the longitudinal centre of the shell; .7 the provisions for forklift pockets; and .8 6.7.3.13.5. 6.8.3.2.2.2 If the landing legs of an IMO type 6 tank are to be used as support structure, the loads specified in 6.7.3.2.9 shall be taken into account in their design and method of attachment. Any bending stress induced in the shell as a result of this manner of support shall also be included in the design calculations. 6.8.3.2.2.3 Securing arrangements (tie-down attachments) shall be fitted to the tank support structure and the towing vehicle of an IMO type 6 tank. Semi-trailers unaccompanied by a towing vehicle shall be accepted for shipment only if the trailer supports and the securing arrangements and the position of stowage are agreed by the competent authority for sea transport, unless the approved Cargo Securing Manual includes this arrangement.

6.8.3.2.3 Approval, testing and marking

6.8.3.2.3.1 IMO type 6 tanks shall be approved for road transport by the competent authority for road transport. 6.8.3.2.3.2 The competent authority for sea transport shall issue additionally, in respect of an IMO type 6 tank, a certificate attesting compliance with the relevant design, construction and equipment provisions of this chapter and, where appropriate, the special provisions for the gases listed in the Dangerous Goods List. The certificate shall list the gases allowed to be transported. 6.8.3.2.3.3 An IMO type 6 tank shall be periodically tested and inspected in accordance with the provisions of the competent authority for road transport. 6.8.3.2.3.4 An IMO type 6 tank shall be marked in accordance with 6.7.3.16. However, where the marking required by the competent authority for road transport is substantially in agreement with that of 6.7.3.16.1, it will be sufficient to endorse the metal plate attached to the IMO type 6 tank with “IMO 6”.

6.8.3.3 Road tank vehicles for refrigerated liquefied gases of class 2 (IMO type 8)

6.8.3.3.1 General provisions

6.8.3.3.1.1 An IMO type 8 tank shall comply with either: .1 the provisions of 6.7.4; or .2 the provisions of 6.8.3.3.2 and 6.8.3.3.3. 6.8.3.3.1.2 An IMO type 8 tank shall not be offered for transport by sea in a condition that would lead to venting during the voyage under normal conditions of transport.

6.8.3.3.2 Design and construction

6.8.3.3.2.1 An IMO type 8 tank shall comply with the provisions of 6.7.4, with the exception: .1 that aluminium jackets may be used, with the approval of the competent authority for sea transport; .2 that IMO type 8 tanks may have a shell thickness less than 3 mm, subject to the approval of the competent authority for sea transport; .3 that for IMO type 8 tanks used for non-flammable refrigerated gases, one of the valves may be replaced by a frangible disc. The frangible disc shall rupture at a nominal pressure equal to the test pressure; .4 of the provisions of 6.7.4.7.3 for the combined capacity of all pressure relief devices under complete fire-engulfment conditions; .5 of the safety factor of 1.5 in 6.7.4.2.13; however, the safety factor shall not be less than 1.3; .6 of 6.7.4.8; and .7 of the provisions for forklift pockets. 6.8.3.3.2.2 If the landing legs of an IMO type 8 tank are to be used as support structure, the loads agreed as in 6.7.4.2.12 shall be taken into account in their design and method of attachment. Bending stress induced in the shell as a result of this manner of support shall be included in design calculations.

478 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

496

Bilaga 1

Chapter 6.8 – Provisions for road tank vehicles

6.8.3.3.2.3 Securing arrangements (tie-down attachments) shall be fitted to the tank support structure and the towing vehicle of an IMO type 8 tank. Semi-trailers unaccompanied by a towing vehicle shall be accepted for shipment only if the trailer supports and the securing arrangements and the position of stowage are agreed by the competent authority for sea transport, unless the approved Cargo Securing Manual includes this arrangement.

6.8.3.3.3 Approval, testing and marking

6.8.3.3.3.1 IMO type 8 tanks shall be approved for road transport by the competent authority for road transport.

6.8.3.3.3.2 The competent authority for sea transport shall issue additionally, in respect of an IMO type 8 tank, a certificate attesting compliance with the relevant design, construction and equipment provisions of this subsection and, where appropriate, the special tank type provisions for the gases in the Dangerous Goods List. The certificate shall list the gases allowed to be transported. 6.8.3.3.3.3 IMO type 8 tanks shall be periodically tested and inspected in accordance with the provisions of the competent authority for road transport. 6.8.3.3.3.4 IMO type 8 tanks shall be marked in accordance with 6.7.4.15. However, where the marking required by the competent authority for road transport is substantially in agreement with that of 6.7.4.15.1, it will be sufficient to endorse the metal plate attached to the IMO type 8 tank with “IMO 8”; the reference to holding time may be omitted.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 479

497

Bilaga 1

Chapter 6.9

Provisions for the design, construction, inspection and testing of bulk containers

Note: Sheeted bulk containers (BK1) shall not be used for sea transport, except as indicated in 4.3.3.

6.9.1 Definitions

For the purposes of this section: Closed bulk container means a totally closed bulk container having a rigid roof, sidewalls, end walls and floor (including hopper-type bottoms), including bulk containers with an opening roof, or side or end wall that can be closed during transport. Closed bulk container may be equipped with openings to allow for the exchange of vapours and gases with air and which prevent, under normal conditions of transport, the release of solid contents as well as the penetration of rain and splash water. Flexible bulk container means a flexible container with a capacity not exceeding 15 m3 and includes liners and attached handling devices and service equipment. Sheeted bulk container means an open-top bulk container with rigid bottom (including hopper-type bottom), side and end walls and a non-rigid covering.

6.9.2 Application and general provisions

6.9.2.1 Bulk containers and their service and structural equipment shall be designed and constructed to withstand, without loss of contents, the internal pressure of the contents and the stresses of normal handling and transport. 6.9.2.2 Where a discharge valve is fitted, it shall be capable of being made secure in the closed position and the whole discharge system shall be suitably protected from damage. Valves having lever closures shall be able to be secured against unintended opening and the open or closed position shall be readily apparent.

6.9.2.3 Code for designating types of bulk container

The following table indicates the codes to be used for designating types of bulk containers: Types of bulk container Code Sheeted bulk container BK1 Closed bulk container BK2 Flexible bulk container BK3

6.9.2.4 In order to take account of progress in science and technology, the use of alternative arrangements which offer at least equivalent safety as provided by the provisions of this chapter may be considered by the competent authority.

6.9.3 Provisions for the design, construction, inspection and testing

6 of freight containers used as BK1 or BK2 bulk containers

6.9.3.1 Design and construction provisions

6.9.3.1.1 The general design and construction provisions in this section are deemed to be met if the bulk container complies with the requirements of ISO 1496-4:1991 “Series 1 freight containers – Specification and testing – Part 4: Non-pressurized containers for dry bulk” and the container is siftproof. 6.9.3.1.2 Freight containers designed and tested in accordance with ISO 1496-1:1990 “Series 1 freight containers – Specification and testing – Part 1: General cargo containers for general purposes” shall be equipped with

480 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

498

Bilaga 1

Chapter 6.9 – Design, construction, inspection and testing of bulk containers

operational equipment which is, including its connection to the freight container, designed to strengthen the end walls and to improve the longitudinal restraint as necessary to comply with the test requirements of ISO 1496-4:1991, as relevant.

6.9.3.1.3 Bulk containers shall be siftproof. Where a liner is used to make the container siftproof, it shall be made of a suitable material. The strength of the material used for, and the construction of, the liner shall be appropriate to the capacity of the container and its intended use. Joins and closures of the liner shall withstand pressures and impacts liable to occur under normal conditions of handling and transport. For ventilated bulk containers, any liner shall not impair the operation of ventilating devices.

6.9.3.1.4 The operational equipment of bulk containers designed to be emptied by tilting shall be capable of withstanding the total filling mass in the tilted orientation.

6.9.3.1.5 Any movable roof or side or end wall or roof section shall be fitted with locking devices with securing devices designed to show the locked state to an observer at ground level.

6.9.3.2 Service equipment

6.9.3.2.1 Filling and discharge devices shall be so constructed and arranged as to be protected against the risk of being wrenched off or damaged during transport and handling. The filling and discharge devices shall be capable of being secured against unintended opening. The open and closed position and direction of closure shall be clearly indicated.

6.9.3.2.2 Seals of openings shall be so arranged as to avoid any damage by the operation, filling and emptying of the bulk container.

6.9.3.2.3 Where ventilation is required, bulk containers shall be equipped with means of air exchange, either by natural convection, e.g., by openings, or active elements, e.g., fans. The ventilation shall be designed to prevent negative pressures in the container at all times. Ventilating elements of bulk containers for the transport of flammable substances or substances emitting flammable gases or vapours shall be designed so as not to be a source of ignition.

6.9.3.3 Inspection and testing

6.9.3.3.1 Freight containers used, maintained and qualified as bulk containers in accordance with the requirements of this section shall be tested and approved in accordance with the International Convention for Safe Containers (CSC), 1972, as amended.

6.9.3.3.2 Freight containers used and qualified as bulk containers shall be inspected periodically according to that Convention.

6.9.3.4 Marking

6.9.3.4.1 Freight containers used as bulk containers shall be marked with a Safety Approval Plate in accordance with the International Convention for Safe Containers.

6.9.4 Provisions for the design, construction and approval of BK1 or BK2 bulk containers other than freight containers

6.9.4.1 Bulk containers covered in this section include skips, offshore bulk containers, bulk bins, swap bodies, trough-shaped containers, roller containers, and load compartments of vehicles.

6.9.4.2 These bulk containers shall be designed and constructed so as to be strong enough to withstand the shocks and loadings normally encountered during transport, including, as applicable, transhipment between modes of transport.

6.9.4.3 Load compartments of vehicles shall comply with the requirements of, and be acceptable to, the competent authority responsible for land transport of the dangerous goods to be transported in bulk.

6.9.4.4 These bulk containers shall be approved by the competent authority and the approval shall include the code for designating types of bulk containers in accordance with 6.9.2.3 and the provisions for inspection and testing, as appropriate.

6.9.4.5 Where it is necessary to use a liner in order to retain the dangerous goods, it shall meet the provisions of 6.9.3.1.3.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 481

499

Bilaga 1

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc.

6.9.4.6 The following statement shall be shown on the transport document: “Bulk container BK(x)* approved by the competent authority of …”.

6.9.5 Requirements for the design, construction, inspection and testing of flexible bulk containers BK3

6.9.5.1 Design and construction requirements

6.9.5.1.1 Flexible bulk containers shall be sift-proof. 6.9.5.1.2 Flexible bulk containers shall be completely closed to prevent the release of contents. 6.9.5.1.3 Flexible bulk containers shall be waterproof. 6.9.5.1.4 Parts of the flexible bulk container which are in direct contact with dangerous goods: (a) Shall not be affected or significantly weakened by those dangerous goods; (b) Shall not cause a dangerous effect, e.g., catalysing a reaction or reacting with the dangerous goods; and (c) Shall not allow permeation of the dangerous goods that could constitute a danger under normal conditions of transport.

6.9.5.2 Service equipment and handling devices

6.9.5.2.1 Filling and discharge devices shall be so constructed as to be protected against damage during transport and handling. The filling and discharge devices shall be capable of being secured against unintended opening. 6.9.5.2.2 Slings of the flexible bulk container, if fitted, shall withstand pressure and dynamic forces which can appear in normal conditions of handling and transport. 6.9.5.2.3 The handling devices shall be strong enough to withstand repeated use.

6.9.5.3 Inspection and testing

6.9.5.3.1 Each flexible bulk container design type shall successfully pass the tests prescribed in this Chapter before being used. 6.9.5.3.2 Tests shall also be repeated after each modification of design type which alters the design, material or manner of construction of a flexible bulk container. 6.9.5.3.3 Tests shall be carried out on flexible bulk containers prepared as for transport. Flexible bulk containers shall be filled to the maximum mass at which they may be used and the contents shall be evenly distributed. The substances to be transported in the flexible bulk container may be replaced by other substances except where this would invalidate the results of the tests. When another substance is used it shall have the same physical characteristics (mass, grain size, etc.) as the substance to be transported. It is permissible to use additives, such as bags of lead shot, to achieve the requisite total mass of the flexible bulk container, so long as they are placed so that the test results are not affected. 6.9.5.3.4 Flexible bulk containers shall be manufactured and tested under a quality assurance programme which satisfies the competent authority, in order to ensure that each manufactured flexible bulk container meets the requirements of this Chapter.

6.9.5.3.5 Drop test

6.9.5.3.5.1 Applicability

For all types of flexible bulk containers, as a design type test.

6.9.5.3.5.2 Preparation for testing

The flexible bulk container shall be filled to its maximum permissible gross mass. 6.9.5.3.5.3 The flexible bulk container shall be dropped onto a target surface that is non-resilient and horizontal. The target surface shall be: (a) Integral and massive enough to be immovable; (b) Flat with a surface kept free from local defects capable of influencing the test results; * “(x)” should be replaced with “1” or “2” as appropriate.

482 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

500

Bilaga 1

Chapter 6.9 – Design, construction, inspection and testing of bulk containers

(c) Rigid enough to be non-deformable under test conditions and not liable to become damaged by the tests; and (d) Sufficiently large to ensure that the test flexible bulk container falls entirely upon the surface. Following the drop, the flexible bulk container shall be restored to the upright position for observation. 6.9.5.3.5.4 Drop height shall be: Packing group III: 0.8 m 6.9.5.3.5.5 Criteria for passing the test: (a) There shall be no loss of contents. A slight discharge, e.g., from closures or stitch holes, upon impact shall not be considered to be a failure of the flexible bulk container provided that no further leakage occurs after the container has been restored to the upright position; (b) There shall be no damage which renders the flexible bulk container unsafe to be transported for salvage or for disposal.

6.9.5.3.6 Top lift test

6.9.5.3.6.1 Applicability

For all types of flexible bulk containers as a design type test.

6.9.5.3.6.2 Preparation for testing

Flexible bulk containers shall be filled to six times the maximum net mass, the load being evenly distributed. 6.9.5.3.6.3 A flexible bulk container shall be lifted in the manner for which it is designed until clear of the floor and maintained in that position for a period of five minutes. 6.9.5.3.6.4 Criteria for passing the test: there shall be no damage to the flexible bulk container or its lifting devices which renders the flexible bulk container unsafe for transport or handling, and no loss of contents.

6.9.5.3.7 Topple test

6.9.5.3.7.1 Applicability

For all types of flexible bulk containers as a design type test. 6.9.5.3.7.2 Preparation for testing The flexible bulk container shall be filled to its maximum permissible gross mass. 6.9.5.3.7.3 Flexible bulk container shall be toppled onto any part of its top by lifting the side furthest from the drop edge upon a target surface that is non-resilient and horizontal. The target surface shall be: (a) Integral and massive enough to be immovable; (b) Flat with a surface kept free from local defects capable of influencing the test results; (c) Rigid enough to be non-deformable under test conditions and not liable to become damaged by the tests; and (d) Sufficiently large to ensure that the test flexible bulk container falls entirely upon the surface. 6.9.5.3.7.4 For all flexible bulk containers, the topple height is specified as follows: Packing group III: 0.8 m 6.9.5.3.7.5 Criterion for passing the test: there shall be no loss of contents. A slight discharge, e.g., from closures or stitch holes, upon impact shall not be considered to be a failure of the flexible bulk container provided that no further leakage occurs.

6.9.5.3.8 Righting test

6.9.5.3.8.1 Applicability

For all types of flexible bulk containers designed to be lifted from the top or side, as a design type test. 6.9.5.3.8.2 Preparation for testing The flexible bulk container shall be filled to not less than 95% of its capacity and to its maximum permissible gross mass. 6.9.5.3.8.3 The flexible bulk container, lying on its side, shall be lifted at a speed of at least 0.1 m/s to an upright position, clear of the floor, by no more than half of the lifting devices.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 483

501

Bilaga 1

Part 6 – Construction and testing of packagings, IBCs, etc.

6.9.5.3.8.4 Criterion for passing the test: there shall be no damage to the flexible bulk container or its lifting devices which renders the flexible bulk container unsafe for transport or handling.

6.9.5.3.9 Tear test

6.9.5.3.9.1 Applicability

For all types of flexible bulk containers as a design type test.

6.9.5.3.9.2 Preparation for testing

The flexible bulk container shall be filled to its maximum permissible gross mass. 6.9.5.3.9.3 With the flexible bulk container placed on the ground, a 300 mm cut shall be made, completely penetrating all layers of the flexible bulk container on a wall of a wide face. The cut shall be made at a 45º angle to the principal axis of the flexible bulk container, halfway between the bottom surface and the top level of the contents. The flexible bulk container shall then be subjected to a uniformly distributed superimposed load equivalent to twice the maximum gross mass. The load must be applied for at least fifteen minutes. A flexible bulk container which is designed to be lifted from the top or the side shall, after removal of the superimposed load, be lifted clear of the floor and maintained in that position for a period of fifteen minutes. 6.9.5.3.9.4 Criterion for passing the test: the cut shall not propagate more than 25% of its original length.

6.9.5.3.10 Stacking test

6.9.5.3.10.1 Applicability

For all types of flexible bulk containers as a design type test.

6.9.5.3.10.2 Preparation for testing

The flexible bulk container shall be filled to its maximum permissible gross mass. 6.9.5.3.10.3 The flexible bulk container shall be subjected to a force applied to its top surface that is four times the design load-carrying capacity for 24 hours. 6.9.5.3.10.4 Criterion for passing the test: there shall be no loss of contents during the test or after removal of the load.

6.9.5.4 Test report

6.9.5.4.1 A test report containing at least the following particulars shall be drawn up and shall be available to the users of the flexible bulk container: 1. Name and address of the test facility; 2. Name and address of applicant (where appropriate); 3. Unique test report identification; 4. Date of the test report; 5. Manufacturer of the flexible bulk container; 6. Description of the flexible bulk container design type (e.g., dimensions, materials, closures, thickness, etc.) and/or photograph(s); 7. Maximum capacity/maximum permissible gross mass; 8. Characteristics of test contents, e.g., particle size for solids; 9. Test descriptions and results; 10. The test report shall be signed with the name and status of the signatory. 6.9.5.4.2 The test report shall contain statements that the flexible bulk container prepared as for transport was tested in accordance with the appropriate provisions of this Chapter and that the use of other containment methods or components may render it invalid. A copy of the test report shall be available to the competent authority.

6.9.5.5 Marking

6.9.5.5.1 Each flexible bulk container manufactured and intended for use according to these provisions shall bear markings that are durable, legible and placed in a location so as to be readily visible. Letters, numerals and symbols shall be at least 24 mm high and shall show:

(a) The United Nations packaging symbol

484 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

502

Bilaga 1

Chapter 6.9 – Design, construction, inspection and testing of bulk containers

This symbol shall not be used for any purpose other than certifying that a packaging, a flexible bulk container, a portable tank or a MEGC complies with the relevant requirements in Chapter 6.1, 6.2, 6.3, 6.5, 6.6, 6.7 or 6.9; (b) The code BK3; (c) A capital letter designating the packing group(s) for which the design type has been approved: Z for packing group III only; (d) The month and year (last two digits) of manufacture; (e) The character(s) identifying the country authorizing the allocation of the mark; as indicated by the distinguishing sign for motor vehicles in international traffic; (f) The name or symbol of the manufacturer and other identification of the flexible bulk container as specified by the competent authority; (g) The stacking test load in kg; (h) The maximum permissible gross mass in kg. Marking shall be applied in the sequence shown in (a) to (h); each element of the marking, required in these subparagraphs, shall be clearly separated, e.g., by a slash or space and presented in a way that ensures that all of the parts of the mark are easily identified. 6.9.5.5.2 Example of marking

BK3/Z/11 09 RUS/NTT/MK-14-10 56000/14000

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 485

503

Bilaga 1

504

Bilaga 1

PART 7 PROVISIONS CONCERNING TRANSPORT OPERATIONS

505

Bilaga 1

506

Bilaga 1

Chapter 7.1

General stowage provisions

7.1.1 Introduction

This chapter contains the general provisions for the stowage of dangerous goods in all types of ships. Specific provisions applicable to, container ships, ro-ro ships, general cargo ships and barge carrying ships, are stipulated in chapters 7.4 to 7.7.

7.1.2 Definitions

Note: The term “magazine” is no longer used in the context of the IMDG Code. A magazine that is not a fixed part of the ship shall meet the provisions for a closed cargo transport unit for class 1 (see 7.1.2). A magazine that is a fixed part of the ship such as compartment, below deck area or hold shall meet the provisions of 7.6.2.4.

Clear of living quarters means that packages or cargo transport units shall be stowed in a minimum distance of 3 m from accommodation, air intakes, machinery spaces and other enclosed work areas.

Closed cargo transport unit for class 1 means a unit which fully encloses the contents by permanent structures, can be secured to the ship's structure and is, except for division 1.4, structurally serviceable as defined in this section. Cargo transport units with fabric sides or tops are not closed cargo transport units. The floor of any closed cargo transport unit shall either be constructed of wood, close-boarded, or so arranged that goods are stowed on sparred gratings, wooden pallets or dunnage.

Combustible material means material which may or may not be dangerous goods but which is easily ignited and supports combustion. Examples of combustible materials include wood, paper, straw, vegetable fibres, products made from such materials, coal, lubricants, and oils. This definition does not apply to packaging material or dunnage.

Potential sources of ignition means, but is not limited to, open fires, machinery exhausts, galley uptakes, electrical outlets and electrical equipment including those on refrigerated or heated cargo transport units unless they are of certified safe type*.

Protected from sources of heat means that packages and cargo transport units shall be stowed at least 2.4 m from heated ship structures, where the surface temperature is liable to exceed 55°C. Examples of heated structures are steam pipes, heating coils, top or side walls of heated fuel and cargo tanks, and bulkheads of machinery spaces. In addition, packages not loaded inside a cargo transport unit and stowed on deck shall be shaded from direct sunlight. The surface of a cargo transport unit can heat rapidly when in direct sunlight in nearly windless conditions and the cargo may also become heated. Depending on the nature of the goods in the cargo transport unit and the planned voyage precautions shall be taken to ensure that exposure to direct sunlight is reduced.

Stowage means the proper placement of dangerous goods on board a ship in order to ensure safety and environmental protection during transport.

Stowage on deck means stowage on the weather deck. For open ro-ro cargo spaces see 7.5.2.6.

Stowage under deck means any stowage that is not on the weather deck. For hatchless containerships see 7.4.2.1.

Structurally serviceable for class 1 means, the cargo transport unit shall not have major defects in its structural components, e.g. top and bottom rails, top and bottom end rails, door sill and header, floor cross-members, corner posts, and corner fittings in a freight container. Major defects are: dents or bends in the structural members greater than 19 mm in depth, regardless of length; cracks or breaks in structural members; more

* For cargo spaces, refer to SOLAS II-2/19.3.2 and for refrigerated or heated cargo transport units refer to Recommendation published by the international Electrotechnical Commission, in particular IEC 60079.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 489

507

Bilaga 1

Part 7 – Provisions concerning transport operations

than one splice (e.g. a lapped splice) in top or bottom end rails or door headers; more than two splices in any one top or bottom side rail or any splice in a door sill or corner post; door hinges and hardware that are seized, twisted, broken, missing or otherwise inoperative; gaskets and seals that do not seal; or, for freight containers, any distortion of the overall configuration great enough to prevent proper alignment of handling equipment, mounting and securing on chassis or vehicle, or insertion into ship’s cells. In addition, deterioration in any component of the cargo transport unit, regardless of the material of construction, such as rusted-out metal in sidewalls or disintegrated fiberglass, is unacceptable. Normal wear, however, including oxidation (rust), slight dents and scratches and other damage that does not affect serviceability or the weathertight integrity of the units, is acceptable.

7.1.3 Stowage categories

7.1.3.1 Stowage categories for class 1

Dangerous goods of class 1 other than division 1.4 compatibility group S, packed in limited quantities shall be stowed as indicated in column 16 of the Dangerous Goods List in accordance with one of the categories specified below.

Stowage Cargo ships On deck in closed cargo transport unit or under deck category 01 (up to 12 passengers) Passenger ships On deck in closed cargo transport unit or under deck Stowage Cargo ships On deck in closed cargo transport unit or under deck category 02 (up to 12 passengers) Passenger ships On deck in closed cargo transport unit or under deck in closed cargo transport unit in accordance with 7.1.4.4.5

Stowage Cargo ships On deck in closed cargo transport unit or under deck category 03 (up to 12 passengers) Passenger ships Prohibited except if in accordance with 7.1.4.4.5 Stowage Cargo ships On deck in closed cargo transport unit or under deck in category 04 (up to 12 passengers) closed cargo transport unit Passenger ships Prohibited except if in accordance with 7.1.4.4.5 Stowage Cargo ships On deck only in closed cargo transport unit category 05 (up to 12 passengers) Passenger ships Prohibited except if in accordance with 7.1.4.4.5

7.1.3.2 Stowage categories for classes 2 to 9

Dangerous goods of classes 2 to 9 and division 1.4 compatibility group S, packed in limited quantities shall be stowed as indicated in column 16 of the Dangerous Goods List in accordance with one of the categories specified below:

Stowage category A Cargo ships or passenger ships carrying a number of passengers limited to not more than 25 or to 1 passenger per 3 m of overall ON DECK OR UNDER DECK

length, whichever is the greater number }

Other passenger ships in which the limiting number of passengers ON DECK OR UNDER DECK

transported is exceeded }

Stowage category B Cargo ships or passenger ships carrying a number of passengers limited to not more than 25 or to 1 passenger per 3 m of overall ON DECK OR UNDER DECK

length, whichever is the greater number }

Other passenger ships in which the limiting number of passengers ON DECK ONLY

transported is exceeded }

490 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

508

Bilaga 1

Chapter 7.1 – General stowage provisions

Stowage category C Cargo ships or passenger ships carrying a number of passengers limited to not more than 25 or to 1 passenger per 3 m of overall ON DECK ONLY

length, whichever is the greater number }

Other passenger ships in which the limiting number of passengers ON DECK ONLY

transported is exceeded }

Stowage category D Cargo ships or passenger ships carrying a number of passengers limited to not more than 25 or to 1 passenger per 3 m of overall ON DECK ONLY

length, whichever is the greater number }

Other passenger ships in which the limiting number of passengers PROHIBITED

transported is exceeded }

Stowage category E Cargo ships or passenger ships carrying a number of passengers limited to not more than 25 or to 1 passenger per 3 m of overall ON DECK OR UNDER DECK

length, whichever is the greater number }

Other passenger ships in which the limiting number of passengers PROHIBITED

transported is exceeded }

7.1.4 Special stowage provisions

7.1.4.1 Stowage of empty uncleaned packagings, including IBCs and large packagings.

Notwithstanding the stowage provisions given in the Dangerous Goods List, empty uncleaned packagings, including IBCs and large packagings, which shall be stowed on deck only when full may be stowed on deck or under deck in a mechanically ventilated cargo space. However, empty uncleaned pressure receptacles which carry a label of class 2.3 shall be stowed on deck only (see also 4.1.1.11) and waste aerosols shall only be stowed according to column (16) of the Dangerous Goods List.

7.1.4.2 Stowage of marine pollutants

Where stowage is permitted on deck or under deck, under deck stowage is preferred. Where stowage on deck only is required, preference shall be given to stowage on well-protected decks or to stowage inboard in sheltered areas of exposed decks.

7.1.4.3 Stowage of limited quantities and excepted quantities

For the stowage of limited quantities and excepted quantities see sections 3.4 and 3.5.

7.1.4.4 Stowage of goods of class 1

7.1.4.4.1 In cargo ships of 500 gross tons or over and passenger ships constructed before 1 September 1984 and in cargo ships of less than 500 gross tons constructed before 1 February 1992, goods of class 1 with the exception of division 1.4, compatibility group S, shall be stowed on deck only, unless otherwise approved by the Administration. 7.1.4.4.2 Goods of class 1 with the exception of division 1.4 shall be stowed not less than a horizontal distance of 12m from living quarters, life-saving appliances and areas with public access. 7.1.4.4.3 Goods of class 1 with the exception of division 1.4 shall be not be positioned closer to the ship's side than a distance equal to one eighth of the beam or 2.4 m, whichever is the lesser. 7.1.4.4.4 Goods of class 1 shall not be stowed within a horizontal distance of 6 m from potential sources of ignition. 7.1.4.4.5 Stowage on passenger ships 7.1.4.4.5.1 Goods in division 1.4, compatibility group S, may be transported in any amount on passenger ships. No other goods of class 1 may be transported on passenger ships except: .1 goods in compatibility groups C, D and E and articles in compatibility group G, if the total net explosive mass does not exceed 10 kg per ship and if they are transported in closed cargo transport units on deck or under deck ; .2 articles in compatibility group B, if the total net explosive mass does not exceed 10 kg per ship and if they are transported on deck only in closed cargo transport units. 7.1.4.4.6 Alternative arrangements to those prescribed in Chapter 7.1 for class 1 may be approved by the Administration.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 491

509

Bilaga 1

Part 7 – Provisions concerning transport operations

7.1.4.5 Stowage of goods of class 7

7.1.4.5.1 The total activity in a single cargo space of a sea going vessel for transport of LSA material or SCO in Type IP 1, Type IP 2, Type IP 3 packaging or unpackaged shall not exceed the limits shown in the table hereunder.

Conveyance activity limits for LSA material and SCO in industrial packages or unpackaged Nature of material Activity limit for a seagoing vessel LSA I No limit LSA II and LSA III non combustible solids No limit LSA II and LSA III combustible solids, 100A2 and all liquids and gases SCO 100A2

7.1.4.5.2 Provided that its average surface heat flux does not exceed 15 W/m2 and that the immediately surrounding cargo is not in sacks or bags, a package or overpack may be transported or stored among packaged general cargo without any special stowage provisions except as may be specifically required by the competent authority in an applicable approval certificate. 7.1.4.5.3 Loading of freight containers and accumulation of packages, overpacks and freight containers shall be controlled as follows: .1 Except under the condition of exclusive use, the total number of packages, overpacks and freight containers aboard a single conveyance shall be so limited that the total sum of the transport indexes aboard the conveyance does not exceed the values shown in the table hereunder. For consignments of LSA I material there shall be no limit on the sum of the transport indexes.

TI limits for freight containers and conveyances not under exclusive use Type of freight container Limit on total sum of transport indexes in or conveyance a freight container or aboard a conveyance Freight container – small 50 Freight container – large 50 Vehicle 50 Inland water-way vessel (barge) 50 Seagoing vessela 1 Hold, compartment or defined area Packages, overpacks, small freight 50 containers Large freight containers (closed 200 containers)

Type of freight container or conveyance Limit on total sum of transport indexes in a freight container or aboard a conveyance 2 Total vessel Packages, overpacks, small freight containers 200 Large freight containers (closed containers) No limit a Packages or overpacks transported in or on a vehicle which are in accordance with the provisions of 7.1.4.5.6 may be transported by vessels provided that they are not removed from the vehicle at any time while on board the ship.

.2 Where a consignment is transported under exclusive use, there shall be no limit on the sum of the transport indexes aboard a single conveyance. .3 The radiation level under routine conditions of transport shall not exceed 2 mSv/h at any point on, and 0.1 mSv/h at 2 m from, the external surface of the conveyance, except for consignments transported under exclusive use by road or rail, for which the radiation limits around the vehicle are specified in 7.1.4.5.6.2 and 7.1.4.5.6.3.

492 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

510

Bilaga 1

Chapter 7.1 – General stowage provisions

.4 The total sum of the criticality safety indexes in a freight container and aboard a conveyance shall not exceed the values shown in the table hereunder.

CSI limits for freight containers and conveyances containing fissile material

Type of freight container Limit on total sum of criticality safety indexes in a or conveyance freight container or aboard a conveyance Not under exclusive use Under exclusive use Freight container small 50 n.a. Freight container large 50 100 Vehicle 50 100 Inland water-way vessel (barge) 50 100 a Seagoing vessel 1 Cargo space or defined deck area Packages, overpacks, small freight 50 100 containers Large freight containers (closed 50 100 containers)

Type of freight container Limit on total sum of criticality safety or conveyance indexes in a freight container or aboard a conveyance Not under Under exclusive exclusive use use 2 Total vessel b c Packages, overpacks, small freight containers 200 200 b c Large freight containers (closed containers) No limit No limit a Packages or overpacks transported in or on a vehicle which are in accordance with the provisions of 7.1.4.5.5 may be transported by ships provided that they are not removed from the vehicle at any time while on board the ship. In that case, the entries under the heading “under exclusive use” apply. b The consignment shall be so handled and stowed that the total sum of CSIs in any group does not exceed 50, and that each group is handled and stowed so that the groups are separated from each other by at least 6 m. c The consignment shall be so handled and stowed that the total sum of CSIs in any group does not exceed 100, and that each group is handled and stowed so that the groups are separated from each other by at least 6 m. The intervening space between groups may be occupied by other cargo.

7.1.4.5.4 Any package or overpack having either a transport index greater than 10, or any consignment having a criticality safety index greater than 50, shall be transported only under exclusive use. 7.1.4.5.5 For consignments under exclusive use, the radiation level shall not exceed: .1 10 mSv/h at any point on the external surface of any package or overpack, and may only exceed 2 mSv/h provided that: .1 the vehicle is equipped with an enclosure which, during routine conditions of transport, prevents the access of unauthorized persons to the interior of the enclosure, and .2 provisions are made to secure the package or overpack so that its position within the vehicle enclosure remains fixed during routine conditions of transport, and .3 there is no loading or unloading during the shipment; .2 2 mSv/h at any point on the outer surfaces of the vehicle, including the upper and lower surfaces, or, in the case of an open vehicle, at any point on the vertical planes projected from the outer edges of the vehicle, on the upper surface of the load, and on the lower external surface of the vehicle; and .3 0.1 mSv/h at any point 2 m from the vertical planes represented by the outer lateral surfaces of the vehicle, or, if the load is transported in an open vehicle, at any point 2 m from the vertical planes projected from the outer edges of the vehicle.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 493

511

Bilaga 1

Part 7 – Provisions concerning transport operations

7.1.4.5.6 In the case of road vehicles, no persons other than the driver and assistants shall be permitted in vehicles carrying packages, overpacks or freight containers bearing category II YELLOW or III YELLOW labels. 7.1.4.5.7 Packages or overpacks having a surface radiation level greater than 2 mSv/h, unless being transported in or on a vehicle under exclusive use in accordance with the table under 7.1.4.5.3, footnote (a), shall not be transported by ship except under special arrangement.

7.1.4.5.8 The transport of consignments by means of a special use ship which, by virtue of its design or by reason of its being chartered, is dedicated to the purpose of carrying radioactive material shall be excepted from the provisions specified in 7.1.4.5.3 provided that the following conditions are met: .1 a radiation protection programme for the shipment shall be approved by the Administration and, when requested, by the competent authority at each port of call; .2 stowage arrangements shall be predetermined for the whole voyage, including any consignments to be loaded at ports of call en route; and .3 the loading, transport and unloading of the consignments shall be supervised by persons qualified in the transport of radioactive material.

7.1.4.5.9 Any conveyance and equipment used regularly for the transport of radioactive material shall be periodically checked to determine the level of contamination. The frequency of such checks shall be related to the likelihood of contamination and the extent to which radioactive material is transported.

7.1.4.5.10 Except as provided in 7.1.4.5.11, any conveyance, or equipment or part thereof, which has become contaminated above the limits specified in 4.1.9.1.2 in the course of the transport of radioactive material, or which shows a radiation level in excess of 5 μSv/h at the surface, shall be decontaminated as soon as possible by a qualified person and shall not be re used unless the non fixed contamination does not exceed the limits specified in 4.1.9.1.2, and the radiation level resulting from the fixed contamination on surfaces after decontamination is less than 5 μSv/h at the surface.

7.1.4.5.11 A freight container, tank, IBC or conveyance dedicated to the transport of unpackaged radioactive material under exclusive use shall be excepted from the provisions of 4.1.9.1.4 and 7.1.4.5.10 solely with regard to its internal surfaces and only for as long as it remains under that specific exclusive use.

7.1.4.5.12 Where a consignment is undeliverable, the consignment shall be placed in a safe location and the appropriate competent authority shall be informed as soon as possible and a request made for instructions on further action. 7.1.4.5.13 Radioactive material shall be segregated sufficiently from crew and passengers. The following values for dose shall be used for the purpose of calculating segregation distances or radiation levels: .1 for crew in regularly occupied working areas, a dose of 5 mSv in a year; .2 for passengers, in areas where the passengers have regular access, a dose of 1 mSv in a year to the critical group, taking account of the exposures expected to be delivered by all other relevant sources and practices under control. 7.1.4.5.14 Category II YELLOW or III YELLOW packages or overpacks shall not be transported in spaces occupied by passengers, except those exclusively reserved for couriers specially authorized to accompany such packages or overpacks.

7.1.4.5.15 Any group of packages, overpacks and freight containers containing fissile material stored in transit in any one storage area shall be so limited that the total sum of the criticality safety indexes in the group does not exceed 50. Each group shall be stored so as to maintain a spacing of at least 6 m from other such groups. 7.1.4.5.16 Where the total sum of the criticality safety indexes on board a conveyance or in a freight container exceeds 50, as permitted in the table under 7.1.4.5.3.4, storage shall be such as to maintain a spacing of at least 6 m from other groups of packages, overpacks or freight containers containing fissile material or other conveyances carrying radioactive material.

7.1.4.5.17 Any departure from the provisions in 7.1.4.5.15 and 7.1.4.5.16 shall be approved by Administration and, when requested, by the competent authority at each port of call.

7.1.4.5.18 The segregation requirements specified in 7.1.4.5.13 may be established in one of the following two ways: – by following the segregation table for persons (table 1 hereafter) in respect of living quarters or spaces regularly occupied by persons. – by demonstration that, for the following indicated exposure times, the direct measurement of the radiation level in regularly occupied spaces and living quarters is less than:

for the crew: 0.0070 mSv/h up to 700 hours in a year, or 0.0018 mSv/h up to 2750 hours in a year; and

494 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

512

Bilaga 1

Chapter 7.1 – General stowage provisions

for the passengers: 0.0018 mSv/h up to 550 hours in a year, taking into account any relocation of cargo during the voyage. In all cases, the measurements of radiation level must be made and documented by a suitably qualified person.

Table 1 – CLASS 7 – Radioactive material Segregation table for persons

Segregation distance of radioactive material from passengers and crew Sum of transport 1 General cargo ship Offshore indices 2 (TI) Break bulk Containers Ferry, etc. support 4 3 (metres) (TEUs) vessel Up to 10 6 1 Stow at bow or Stow at stern or at stern furthest from platform midpoint living quarters and regularly occupied work areas More than 10 but 8 1 as above as above not more than 20 More than 20 but 13 2 as above not applicable not more than 50 More than 50 but 18 3 as above not applicable not more than 100 More than 100 but 26 4 as above not applicable not more than 200 More than 200 but 36 6 as above not applicable not more than 400 1 General cargo, break bulk or ro ro containership of 150 m minimum length. 2 Ferry or cross channel, coastal and inter island ship of 100 m minimum length. 3 Offshore support vessel of 50 m minimum length. (In this case the practical maximum sum of TIs carried is 20). 4 TEU means "20 ft Equivalent Unit" (this is equivalent to a standard freight container of 6 m nominal length).

7.1.4.6 Stowage of dangerous goods under temperature control

7.1.4.6.1 When stowage arrangements are made, it shall be borne in mind that it may become necessary to take the appropriate emergency action, such as jettisoning or flooding of the container with water and the temperature need to be monitored in accordance to 7.3.7. If, during transport, the control temperature is exceeded, an alerting procedure shall be initiated involving either repair of the refrigeration machinery or an increase in the cooling capacity (such as by adding liquid or solid refrigerants). If an adequate cooling capacity is not restored, emergency procedures shall be started.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 495

513

Bilaga 1

Chapter 7.2

General segregation provisions

7.2.1 Introduction

This chapter contains the general provisions for the segregation of goods which are mutually incompatible. Additional segregation provisions are given in: 7.3 Consigning operations concerning the packing and use of cargo transport units (CTUs) and related provisions; 7.4 Stowage and segregation on containerships; 7.5 Stowage and segregation on roll-on/roll-off ships; 7.6 Stowage and segregation on general cargo ships; and 7.7 Shipborne barges on barge-carrying ships.

7.2.2 Definitions

7.2.2.1 Segregation

Segregation is the process of separating two or more substances or articles which are considered mutually incompatible when their packing or stowage together may result in undue hazards in case of leakage or spillage, or any other accident. However, as the extent of the hazard arising may vary, the segregation arrangements required may also vary as appropriate. Segregation is obtained by maintaining certain distances between incompatible dangerous goods or by requiring the presence of one or more steel bulkheads or decks between them, or a combination thereof. Intervening spaces between such dangerous goods may be filled with other cargo compatible with the dangerous substances or articles in question.

7.2.2.2 Segregation terms

The following segregation terms that are used throughout this Code are defined in other chapters of this part as they apply to packing cargo transport units and segregation on board different ship types: .1 “Away from”; .2 “Separated from”; .3 “Separated by a complete compartment or hold from”; .4 “Separated longitudinally by an intervening complete compartment or hold from”. Segregation terms such as “away from class …” that are used in the Dangerous Goods List, “class …” is deemed to include: .1 all substances within “class …”; and .2 all substances for which a subsidiary risk label of “class …” is required.

7.2.3 Segregation provisions

7.2.3.1 To determine the segregation requirements between two or more dangerous goods, the segregation provisions, including the segregation table (7.2.4) and column 16 of the dangerous goods list shall be consulted, see also the annex to this chapter. In case of conflicting provisions, the provisions of column 16 of the dangerous goods list, always take precedence. 7.2.3.2 Whenever a segregation term applies (see 7.2.2.2), the goods are: .1 not permitted to be packed in the same outer packaging; and .2 not permitted to be transported in the same cargo transport unit except as provided in 7.2.6 and 7.3.4.

496 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

514

Bilaga 1

Chapter 7.2 – General segregation provisions

For “limited quantities” and “excepted quantities” see chapters 3.4 and 3.5.

7.2.3.3 Where the provisions of this Code indicate a single secondary hazard (one subsidiary risk label), the segregation provisions applicable to that hazard shall take precedence where they are more stringent than those of the primary hazard. The segregation provisions corresponding to a subsidiary risk of class 1 are those for class 1 division 1.3.

7.2.3.4 The segregation provisions for substances, materials or articles having more than two hazards (two or more subsidiary risk labels) are given in column 16 of the Dangerous Goods List.

For example: In the Dangerous Goods List entry for BROMINE CHLORIDE, class 2.3, UN 2901, subsidiary risks 5.1 and 8, the following particular segregation is specified: “segregation as for class 5.1, but “separated from” class 7”.

7.2.4 Segregation table

The general provisions for segregation between the various classes of dangerous goods are shown in the “segregation table” given below.

Since the properties of substances, materials or articles within each class may vary greatly, the dangerous goods list shall always be consulted for particular provisions for segregation as, in the case of conflicting provisions, these take precedence over the general provisions.

Segregation shall also take account of a single subsidiary risk label.

1.1 1.3 CLASS 1.2 1.4 2.1 2.2 2.3 3 4.1 4.2 4.3 5.1 5.2 6.1 6.2 7 8 9 1.6 1.5 Explosives 1.1, 1.2, 1.5 * * * 4 2 2 4 4 4 4 4 4 2 4 2 4 X Explosives 1.3, 1.6 * * * 4 2 2 4 3 3 4 4 4 2 4 2 2 X Explosives 1.4 * * * 2 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 X 4 2 2 X Flammable gases 2.1 4 4 2 X X X 2 1 2 X 2 2 X 4 2 1 X Non-toxic, non-flammable gases 2.2 2 2 1 X X X 1 X 1 X X 1 X 2 1 X X Toxic gases 2.3 2 2 1 X X X 2 X 2 X X 2 X 2 1 X X Flammable liquids 3 4 4 2 2 1 2 X X 2 1 2 2 X 3 2 X X Flammable solids (including self- 4.1 4 3 2 1 X X X X 1 X 1 2 X 3 2 1 X reactive substances and solid desensitized explosives) Substances liable to 4.2 4 3 2 2 1 2 2 1 X 1 2 2 1 3 2 1 X spontaneous combustion Substances which, in contact 4.3 4 4 2 X X X 1 X 1 X 2 2 X 2 2 1 X with water, emit flammable gases Oxidizing substances (agents) 5.1 4 4 2 2 X X 2 1 2 2 X 2 1 3 1 2 X Organic peroxides 5.2 4 4 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 X 1 3 2 2 X Toxic substances 6.1 2 2 X X X X X X 1 X 1 1 X 1 X X X Infectious substances 6.2 4 4 4 4 2 2 3 3 3 2 3 3 1 X 3 3 X Radioactive material 7 2 2 2 2 1 1 2 2 2 2 1 2 X 3 X 2 X Corrosive substances 8 4 2 2 1 X X X 1 1 1 2 2 X 3 2 X X Miscellaneous dangerous 9 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X substances and articles

The numbers and symbols in the table have the following meanings:

1 – “Away from”;

2 – “Separated from”;

3 – “Separated by a complete compartment or hold from”;

4 – “Separated longitudinally by an intervening complete compartment or hold from”. X – The Dangerous Goods List has to be consulted to verify whether there are specific segregation provisions.

*

– See 7.2.7.1 of this chapter for the segregation provisions between class 1 substances or articles.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 497

515

Bilaga 1

Part 7 – Provisions concerning transport operations

7.2.5 Segregation groups

7.2.5.1 For the purpose of segregation, dangerous goods having certain similar chemical properties have been grouped together in segregation groups as listed in 7.2.5.2. The entries allocated to these segregation groups are listed in 3.1.4.4. Where in the Dangerous Goods List entry in column 16 (stowage and segregation) a particular segregation requirement refers to a group of substances, such as "acids", the particular segregation requirement applies to the goods allocated to the respective segregation group. 7.2.5.2 Segregation groups referred to in the Dangerous Goods List: .1 acids .2 ammonium compounds .3 bromates .4 chlorates .5 chlorites .6 cyanides .7 heavy metals and their salts (including their organometallic compounds) .8 hypochlorites .9 lead and its compounds .10 liquid halogenated hydrocarbons .11 mercury and mercury compounds .12 nitrites and their mixtures .13 perchlorates .14 permanganates .15 powdered metals .16 peroxides .17 azides .18 alkalis. 7.2.5.3 It is recognized that not all substances, mixtures, solutions or preparations falling within a segregation group are listed in the IMDG Code by name. These are shipped under N.O.S. entries. Although these N.O.S. entries are not themselves listed in the segregation groups (see 3.1.4.4), the consignor shall decide whether inclusion under the segregation group is appropriate and, if so, shall mention that fact in the transport document (see 5.4.1.5.11). 7.2.5.4 The segregation groups in this Code do not cover substances which fall outside the classification criteria of this Code. It is recognized that some non-hazardous substances have similar chemical properties as substances listed in the segregation groups. A consignor or the person responsible for packing the goods into a cargo transport unit who does have knowledge of the chemical properties of such non-dangerous goods may decide to implement the segregation requirements of a related segregation group on a voluntary basis.

7.2.6 Special segregation provisions and exemptions

7.2.6.1 Notwithstanding 7.2.3.3 and 7.2.3.4, substances of the same class may be stowed together without regard to segregation required by secondary hazards (subsidiary risk label(s)), provided that the substances do not react dangerously with each other and cause: .1 combustion and/or evolution of considerable heat; .2 evolution of flammable, toxic or asphyxiant gases; .3 the formation of corrosive substances; or .4 the formation of unstable substances. 7.2.6.2 Where the Dangerous Goods List specifies that "segregation as for class ..." applies, the segregation provisions applicable to that class in 7.2.4 shall be applied. However, for the purposes of interpreting 7.2.6.1, which permits substances of the same class to be stowed together provided they do not react dangerously with each other, the segregation provisions of the class as represented by the primary hazard class in the Dangerous Goods List shall be applied. For example: UN 2965 – BORON TRIFLUORIDE DIMETHYL ETHERATE, class 4.3 The Dangerous Goods List entry specifies “segregation as for class 3, but “away from” classes 3, 4.1 and 8”.

498 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

516

Bilaga 1

Chapter 7.2 – General segregation provisions

For the purposes of establishing the segregation provisions applicable in 7.2.4, the class 3 column shall be consulted. This substance may be stowed together with other class 4.3 substances where they do not react dangerously with each other, see 7.2.6.1. 7.2.6.3 No segregation needs to be applied: .1 between dangerous goods of different classes which comprise the same substance but vary only in their water content, such as sodium sulphide in classes 4.2 and 8 or for class 7 if the difference is due to quantity only; and .2 between dangerous goods which belong to a group of substances of different classes but for which scientific evidence exists that they do not react dangerously when in contact with each other. Substances within the same table shown below are compatible with one another.

Table 1 Subsidiary Packing UN Proper Shipping Name Class risk(s) group 2014 HYDROGEN PEROXIDE, AQUEOUS SOLUTION 5.1 8 II with not less than 20% but not more than 60% hydrogen peroxide (stabilized as necessary) 2984 HYDROGEN PEROXIDE, AQUEOUS SOLUTION 5.1 III with not less than 8% but less than 20% hydrogen peroxide (stabilized as necessary) 3105 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE D, LIQUID 5.2 8 (peroxyacetic acid, type D, stabilized) 3107 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE E, LIQUID 5.2 8 (peroxyacetic acid, type E, stabilized) 3109 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE F, LIQUID 5.2 8 (peroxyacetic acid, type F, stabilized) 3149 HYDROGEN PEROXIDE AND PEROXYACETIC ACID, 5.1 8 II MIXTURE with acid(s), water and not more than 5% peroxyacetic acid, STABILIZED

Table 2 Subsidiary Packing UN Proper Shipping Name Class risk(s) group 1295 TRICHLOROSILANE 4.3 3/8 I 1818 SILICON TETRACHLORIDE 8 – II 2189 DICHLOROSILANE 2.3 2.1/8 –

7.2.6.4 Notwithstanding the provisions of 7.2.5, substances of class 8, packing group II or III, that would otherwise be required to be segregated from one another due to the provisions pertaining to segregation groups as identified by an entry in column (16) of the dangerous goods list indicating “away from” or “separated from” “acids” or “away from” or “separated from” “alkalis”, may be transported in the same cargo transport unit, whether in the same packaging or not, provided: .1 the substances comply with the provisions of 7.2.6.1; .2 the package does not contain more than 30 litres for liquids or 30 kg for solids; .3 the transport document includes the statement required by 5.4.1.5.11.3; and .4 a copy of the test report that verifies that the substances do not react dangerously with each other shall be provided if requested by the competent authority.

7.2.7 Segregation of goods of class 1

7.2.7.1 Segregation between goods of class 1

7.2.7.1.1 Goods of class 1 may be stowed within the same compartment or hold, or closed cargo transport unit as indicated in 7.2.7.1.4. In other cases, they shall be stowed in separate compartments or holds, or closed cargo transport units.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 499

517

Bilaga 1

Part 7 – Provisions concerning transport operations

7.2.7.1.2 When goods requiring different stowage arrangements are permitted by 7.2.7.1.4 to be transported in the same compartment or hold, or closed cargo transport unit, the appropriate stowage arrangement shall conform to the most stringent provisions for the entire load. 7.2.7.1.3 Where a mixed load of different divisions is transported within the same compartment or hold, or closed cargo transport unit, the entire load shall be treated as if belonging to the hazard division in the order 1.1 (most dangerous), 1.5, 1.2, 1.3, 1.6 and 1.4 (least dangerous) and the stowage arrangement shall conform to the most stringent provisions for the entire load.

7.2.7.1.4 Permitted mixed stowage for goods of class 1

Compatibility A B C D E F G H J K L N S group A X B X X 6 6 1 4 C X X X X X X D X6 X X6 X1 X4 X 6 6 1 4 E X X X X X X F X X 1 1 1 G X X X X X H X X J X X K X X 2 L X 4 4 4 3 5 N X X X X X 5 S X X X X X X X X X X X “X” indicates that goods of the corresponding compatibility groups may be stowed in the same compartment, hold, or closed cargo transport unit

Notes: 1 Explosive articles in compatibility group G (other than fireworks and those requiring special stowage) may be stowed with explosive articles of compatibility groups C, D and E provided no explosive substances are transported in the same compartment or hold, or closed cargo transport unit. 2 A consignment of one type in compatibility group L shall only be stowed with a consignment of the same type within compatibility group L. 3 Different types of articles of Division 1.6, compatibility group N, may only be transported together when it is proven that there is no additional risk of sympathetic detonation between the articles. Otherwise they shall be treated as Division 1.1. 4 When articles of compatibility group N are transported with articles or substances of compatibility groups C, D or E, the goods of compatibility group N shall be treated as compatibility group D. 5 When articles of compatibility group N are transported together with articles or substances of compatibility group S, the entire load shall be treated as compatibility group N. 6 Any combination of articles in compatibility groups C, D and E shall be treated as compatibility group E. Any combination of substances in compatibility groups C and D shall be treated as the most appropriate compatibility group shown in 2.1.2.3, taking into account the predominant characteristics of the combined load. This overall classification code shall be displayed on any label or placard placed on a unit load or closed cargo transport unit as prescribed in 5.2.2.2.2.

7.2.7.1.5 Closed cargo transport units carrying different goods of class 1 do not require segregation from each other provided 7.2.7.1.4 authorizes the goods to be transported together. Where this is not permitted, closed cargo transport unit shall be “separated from” one another.

7.2.7.2 Segregation from goods of other classes

7.2.7.2.1 Notwithstanding the segregation provisions of this chapter, AMMONIUM NITRATE (UN 1942), AMMONIUM NITRATE FERTILZERS (UN 2067), alkali metal nitrates (e.g., UN 1486) and alkaline earth metal nitrates (e.g., UN 1454) may be stowed together with blasting explosives (except EXPLOSIVE, BLASTING, TYPE C, UN 0083) provided the aggregate is treated as blasting explosives under class 1.

500 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

518

Bilaga 1

Chapter 7.2 – General segregation provisions

Note: Alkali metal nitrates include caesium nitrate (UN 1451), lithium nitrate (UN 2722), potassium nitrate (UN 1486), rubidium nitrate (UN 1477) and sodium nitrate (UN 1498). Alkaline earth metal nitrates include barium nitrate (UN 1446), beryllium nitrate (UN 2464), calcium nitrate (UN 1454), magnesium nitrate (UN 1474) and strontium nitrate (UN 1507).

Annex Segregation flow chart

The use of this chart is not mandatory and is provided for information purposes only.

Read the general segregation provisions (refer to 7.2)

Identify the UN No., Proper Shipping Name, class or division, subsidiary hazard class or division, if any, and where assigned packing group for each substance

Are the dangerous goods exempted from the Yes Comply with the general segregation provisions exemption as (refer to e.g. 3.4, 3.5, 7.2.6.3 appropriate or 7.2.6.4)?

No

Is there any specific segregation No requirement in column (16) of Yes the Dangerous Goods List (DGL) or in the Transport Document (see 5.4.1.5.11)?

Use the segregation table in Use the segregation table taking accordance with the general into account any specific or general segregation provisions segregation provisions and determine the specific segregation provisions for each substance (e.g., segregation groups)

Conclusion Ensure the most stringent requirements are taken

Conclusion

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 501

519

Bilaga 1

Part 7 – Provisions concerning transport operations

Examples

The following examples only illustrate the process of segregation. Subsequent additional provisions of this Code may apply (e.g 7.3.4). a. Segregation of 300 kg of celluloid, scrap (UN 2002) in one drum and 200 l of epibromohydrin (UN 2558) in one drum. 1) According to the Dangerous Goods List, UN 2002 is class 4.2, PG III, and UN 2558 is class 6.1, PG I and has a subsidiary risk of class 3. 2) Neither are exempted by 3.4, 3.5, 7.2.6.3 or 7.2.6.4. 3) There are no specific segregation requirements for these substances in column (16) of the Dangerous Goods List. 4) According to the segregation table given in 7.2.4 for classes 4.2 and 6.1, the intersecting box shows number 1, whereas for classes 4.2 and 3, the intersecting box shows a number 2. The value 2 is the more stringent, therefore the substances are required to be 'Separated from' one another. b. Segregation of 50 kg of potassium perchlorate (UN 1489) in one drum and 50 kg of nickel cyanide (UN 1653) in 1 drum. 1) According to the Dangerous Goods List, UN 1489 is class 5.1, PG II and UN 1653 is class 6.1, PG II. 2) Neither are exempted by 3.4, 3.5, 7.2.6.3 or 7.2.6.4. 3) For UN 1489, column (16) of the Dangerous Goods List states: ““Separated from” ammonium compounds and cyanides”. 4) For UN 1653, column (16) of the Dangerous Goods List states: ““Separated from” acids”. 5) According to the segregation table given in 7.2.4 for classes 5.1 and 6.1, the intersecting box shows an “X”. 6) According to the segregation groups in section 3.1.4, UN 1653 is listed in group 6 (cyanides). 7) Therefore, the substances are required to be “Separated from” one another. c. Segregation of 10 kg of acetone (UN 1090) in one box and 20 kg of ethyldichlorosilane (UN 1183) in an other box. 1) According to the dangerous goods list, UN 1090 is class 3, PG II. 2) According to the Dangerous Goods List, UN 1183 is class 4.3, PG I and has subsidiary risks of classes 3 and 8. 3) Neither are exempted by 3.4, 3.5, 7.2.6.3 or 7.2.6.4. 4) UN 1090 has no specific segregation requirements in column 16. 5) For UN 1183, column (16) of the Dangerous Goods List states: “Segregation as for class 3 but “away from” classes 3, 4.1 and 8”. 6) According to the segregation table given in 7.2.4, the intersecting box shows an “X” for classes 3 and 3, but as UN 1183 is required to be 'away from' class 3, the substances are required to be “away from” one another. d. Segregation of 10 kg of adhesives (UN 1133, PG III) in limited quantities and 40 kg of beryllium nitrate (UN 2464) in the same freight container 1) According to the Dangerous Goods List, UN 1133 is class 3, PG II. 2) According to the Dangerous Goods List, UN 2464 is class 5.1, PG II and has a subsidiary risk of class 6.1. 3) According to section 3.4, UN 1333 in limited quantities is exempted from the segregation provisions of Part 7. 4) Therefore, no segregation requirements shall apply.

502 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

520

Bilaga 1

Chapter 7.3

Consigning operations concerning the packing and use of cargo transport units (CTUs) and related provisions

7.3.1 Introduction

This chapter contains the provisions appropriate to those responsible for the consignment operations in the dangerous goods transport supply chain, including provisions relating to packing of dangerous goods into cargo transport units.

7.3.2 General provisions for cargo transport units

7.3.2.1 Packages containing dangerous goods shall only be loaded in cargo transport units that are strong enough to withstand the shocks and loadings normally encountered during transport, having regard to the conditions to be expected during the anticipated journey. The cargo transport unit shall be constructed in such a way as to prevent the loss of contents. Where appropriate, the cargo transport unit shall be fitted with devices to facilitate securing and handling of the dangerous goods. The cargo transport units shall be adequately maintained. 7.3.2.2 Unless otherwise specified, the applicable provisions of the International Convention for Safe Containers (CSC) 1972, as amended, shall be followed for the use of any cargo transport unit which meets the definition of a "container" within the terms of that Convention. 7.3.2.3 The International Convention for Safe Containers does not apply to offshore containers that are handled in open seas. The design and testing of offshore containers shall take into account the dynamic lifting and impact forces that may occur when a container is handled in open seas in adverse weather and sea conditions. The requirement for such containers shall be determined by the approving competent authority. Such provisions should be based on MSC/Circ.860 “Guidelines for the Approval of Offshore Containers handled in Open Seas”. Such containers shall be clearly marked with the words “OFFSHORE CONTAINER” on the safety approval plate.

*

7.3.3 Packing of cargo transport units

7.3.3.1 The interior and exterior of a cargo transport unit shall be inspected prior to loading to ensure that there is no damage that could affect its integrity or that of the packages to be loaded in it.

7.3.3.2 Packages shall be examined and any found to be damaged, leaking or sifting shall not be packed into a cargo transport unit. Care shall be taken to see that excessive water, snow, ice or foreign matter adhering to packages is removed before packing into a cargo transport unit.

7.3.3.4 Drums containing dangerous goods shall always be stowed in an upright position unless otherwise authorized by the competent authority.

7.3.3.5 Cargo transport units shall be loaded in accordance with 7.3.4, so that incompatible dangerous or other goods are segregated. Specific loading instructions such as orientation arrows, not to be double stacked, keep dry or temperature control requirements shall be met. Liquid dangerous goods shall be loaded below dry dangerous goods whenever possible. 7.3.3.6 Packages containing dangerous goods and unpackaged dangerous articles shall be secured by suitable means capable of restraining the goods (such as fastening straps, sliding slatboards, adjustable brackets) in the cargo transport unit in a manner that will prevent any movement during transport which would change the orientation of the packages or cause them to be damaged. When dangerous goods are transported with other goods (e.g., heavy machinery or crates), all goods shall be securely fixed or packed in the cargo transport units so as to prevent the release of dangerous goods. Movement of packages may also be prevented

* See IMO/ILO/UNECE Guidelines for Packing of Cargo Transport Units.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 503

521

Bilaga 1

Part 7 – Provisions concerning transport operations

by filling any voids by the use of dunnage or by blocking and bracing. Where restraints such as banding or straps are used, these shall not be over-tightened to cause damage or deformation of the package or the securing points (such as D-rings) within the cargo transport unit. The packages shall be packed in such a way that there will be a minimum likelihood of damage to fittings during transport. Such fittings on packages shall be adequately protected. Where restraints such as banding or straps with integral container fittings are used, care should be taken to ensure that the Maximum Securing Load (MSL) of the fittings is not exceeded.

7.3.3.7 Packages shall not be stacked unless designed for that purpose. Where packages of different stacking designs are to be loaded together, consideration shall be given to their compatibility for stacking with each other. Where necessary, stacked packages shall be prevented from damaging the package below by the use of load bearing devices.

7.3.3.8 Cargo shall be entirely contained within the cargo transport unit without overhang or projections. Oversized machinery (such as tractors and vehicles) may overhang or project outside of the cargo transport unit provided that the dangerous goods integral to the machinery cannot leak or spill outside of the cargo transport unit.

7.3.3.9 During loading and unloading, packages containing dangerous goods shall be protected from being damaged. Particular attention shall be paid to the handling of packages during their preparation for transport, the type of cargo transport unit to be used for their carriage and to the method of loading or unloading, so that accidental damage is not caused through dragging or mishandling. Packages that appear to be leaking or damaged so that the contents may escape shall not be accepted for transport. If a package is found to be damaged so that the contents leak, the damaged package shall not be transported but moved to a safe place in accordance with instructions given by a competent authority or a designated responsible person who is familiar with the dangerous goods, the risks involved and the measures that should be taken in an emergency.

Note 1: Additional operational requirements for the transport of packagings and IBCs are provided in the special packing provisions for packagings and IBCs (see chapter 4.1).

7.3.3.10 When a dangerous goods consignment forms only part of the load of a cargo transport unit, it should, whenever possible, be packed adjacent to the doors with markings and labels visible, so as to be accessible in the event of an emergency or to facilitate inspection.

7.3.3.11 If the doors of a cargo transport unit are locked, the means of locking shall be such that, in cases of emergency, the doors can be opened without delay.

7.3.3.12 When venting is required, venting devices shall be kept clear and operable.

7.3.3.13 Cargo transport units containing dangerous goods shall be marked and placarded according to chapter 5.3. Irrelevant markings, labels, placards, orange panels, signs and marine pollutant marks shall be removed, masked or otherwise obliterated before packing a cargo transport unit.

7.3.3.14 Cargo transport units shall be packed so that the cargo is uniformly distributed consistent with the referenced guidelines*.

7.3.3.15 If goods of class 1 are packed, the cargo transport unit shall comply with the definition in 7.1.2 for closed cargo transport unit for class 1.

7.3.3.16 If goods of class 7 are packed, the transport index and, if applicable, the criticality safety index, shall be limited according to 7.1.4.5.3.

7.3.3.17 Those responsible for the packing of dangerous goods into a cargo transport unit shall provide a “container/ vehicle packing certificate” (see 5.4.2). This document is not required for tanks.

7.3.3.18 Flexible bulk containers are not allowed to be transported in cargo transport units (see 4.3.4).

7.3.4 Segregation provisions within cargo transport units

7.3.4.1 Dangerous goods which have to be segregated from each other according to the provisions in chapter 7.2 shall not be transported in the same cargo transport unit with the exception of dangerous goods which shall be segregated “away from” each other which may be transported in the same cargo transport unit with the approval of the competent authority. In such cases an equivalent standard of safety shall be maintained.

7.3.4.2 Segregation in relation to foodstuffs

7.3.4.2.1 Dangerous goods having a primary or subsidiary risk of classes 2.3, 6.1, 6.2, 7 (with the exception of UN 2908, 2909, 2910 and 2911), 8 and dangerous goods having a reference to 7.3.4.2.1 in column 16 of the Dangerous Goods List shall not be transported together with foodstuffs (see 1.2.1) in the same cargo transport unit.

* See IMO/ILO/UNECE Guidelines for Packing of Cargo Transport Units

504 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

522

Bilaga 1

Chapter 7.3 – Consigning operations concerning the packing and use of CTUs

7.3.4.2.2 Notwithstanding the provisions in 7.3.4.2.1, the following dangerous goods may be transported with foodstuffs provided that they are not loaded within 3 m from foodstuffs : .1 dangerous goods of packing group III of classes 6.1 and 8; .2 dangerous goods of packing group II of class 8; and .3 any other dangerous goods of packing group III with a subsidiary risk of classes 6.1 or 8; and .4 dangerous goods having a reference to 7.3.4.2.2 in column 16 of the Dangerous Goods List.

7.3.5 Tracking and monitoring equipment

When security devices, beacons or other tracking or monitoring equipment are used, they shall be securely installed to the cargo transport unit and shall be of a certified safe type* for the dangerous goods that will be carried within the cargo transport unit.

7.3.6 Opening and unloading cargo transport units

7.3.6.1 Cargo transport units shall be approached with caution. Before opening the doors, the nature of the contents and the possibility that leakages may have caused an unsafe condition, concentration of toxic or flammable vapours, or an oxygen-enriched or oxygen-depleted atmosphere, shall be considered. 7.3.6.2 After a cargo transport unit carrying dangerous goods has been unpacked or unloaded, precautions shall be taken to ensure that there is no contamination likely to make the cargo transport unit dangerous. 7.3.6.3 After unpacking or unloading corrosive substances, particular attention shall be paid to cleaning, as residues may be highly corrosive to the metal structures. 7.3.6.4 When the cargo transport unit offers no further hazard, the dangerous goods placards and other marks related to dangerous goods shall be removed, masked or otherwise obliterated.

7.3.7 Cargo transport units under temperature control

7.3.7.1 Preamble

7.3.7.1.1 If the temperature of certain substances (such as organic peroxides and self reactive substances) exceeds a value which is typical of the substance as packaged for transport, a self accelerating decomposition, possibly of explosive violence, may result. To prevent such decomposition, it is necessary to control the temperature of such substances during transport. Other substances not requiring temperature control for safety reasons may be transported under controlled temperature conditions for commercial reasons. 7.3.7.1.2 The provisions for the temperature control of certain specified substances are based on the assumption that the temperature in the immediate surroundings of the cargo does not exceed 55°C during transport and attains this value for a relatively short time only during each period of 24 hours. 7.3.7.1.3 If a substance which is not normally temperature controlled is transported under conditions where the temperature may exceed 55°C, it may require temperature control; in such cases, adequate measures shall be taken.

7.3.7.2 General provisions

7.3.7.2.1 A self accelerating decomposition temperature (SADT)† shall be determined in order to decide if a substance shall be subjected to temperature control during transport. The relationship between SADT, the control temperature and the emergency temperature is as follows: Type of receptacle SADT* Control temperature Emergency temperature Single packagings 20°C or less over 20°C to 20°C below SADT 10°C below SADT and IBC 35°C over 35°C 15°C below SADT 10°C below SADT 10°C below SADT 5°C below SADT Portable tanks < 50°C 10°C below SADT 5°C below SADT

* Refer to the Recommendations published by the International Electrotechnical Commission, in particular, to publication IEC 60079. † The self accelerating decomposition temperature (SADT) shall be determined in accordance with the latest version of the United Nations Recommendations on the Transport of Dangerous Goods, Manual of Tests and Criteria. Test methods for determining flammability are given in Part III, 32.4 of the United Nations Manual of Tests and Criteria. Because organic peroxides may react vigorously when heated, it is recommended to determine their flashpoint using small sample sizes such as described in ISO 3679.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 505

523

Bilaga 1

Part 7 – Provisions concerning transport operations

7.3.7.2.2 The substances for which a control temperature and an emergency temperature are indicated in 2.4.2.3.2.3 or 2.5.3.2.4 shall be transported under conditions of temperature control such that the temperature of the immediate surroundings of the cargo does not exceed the control temperature. 7.3.7.2.3 The actual transport temperature may be lower than the control temperature but shall be selected so as to avoid dangerous separation of phases. 7.3.7.2.4 The refrigeration system shall be subjected to a thorough inspection and a test prior to the cargo transport unit being packed to ensure that all parts are functioning properly. 7.3.7.2.5 When a cargo transport unit is to be filled with packages containing substances having different control temperatures, all packages shall be pre cooled to avoid exceeding the lowest control temperature. 7.3.7.2.5.1 In the event that non temperature controlled substances are transported in the same cargo transport unit as temperature controlled substances, the package(s) containing substances that require refrigeration shall be stowed in such a way as to be readily accessible from the door(s) of the cargo transport unit. 7.3.7.2.5.2 If substances with different control temperatures are loaded in the cargo transport unit, the substances with the lowest control temperature shall be stowed in the most readily accessible position from the doors of the cargo transport unit. 7.3.7.2.5.3 The door(s) shall be capable of being opened readily in case of emergency so that the package(s) can be removed. The carrier shall be informed about the location of the different substances within the unit. The cargo shall be secured to prevent packages from falling when the door(s) is (are) opened. The packages shall be securely stowed so as to allow for adequate air circulation throughout the cargo. 7.3.7.2.6 The master shall be provided with operating instructions for the refrigeration system, procedures to be followed in the event of loss of control and instructions for regular monitoring of operating temperatures. Spare parts shall be carried for the systems described in 7.3.7.3.2.3 and 7.3.7.3.2.4, 7.3.7.3.2.5 so that they are available for emergency use should the refrigeration system malfunction during transport. 7.3.7.2.7 In cases where it may not be possible to carry specific substances according to the general provisions, full details of the proposed method of shipment shall be submitted to the competent authority concerned for approval.

7.3.7.3 Methods of temperature control

7.3.7.3.1 The suitability of a particular means of temperature control for transport depends on a number of factors. Among those to be considered are: .1 the control temperature(s) of the substance(s) to be transported; .2 the difference between the control temperature and the anticipated ambient temperature conditions; .3 the effectiveness of the thermal insulation of the cargo transport unit. The overall heat transfer coefficient 2 2 shall not be more than 0.4 W / (m .K) for cargo transport units and 0.6 W / (m .K) for tanks; and .4 the duration of the voyage. 7.3.7.3.2 Suitable methods for preventing the control temperature being exceeded are, in order of increasing capability: .1 thermal insulation, provided that the initial temperature of the substance is sufficiently below the control temperature; .2 thermal insulation with a cooling method, provided that: – an adequate quantity of non flammable coolant (such as liquid nitrogen or solid carbon dioxide), allowing a reasonable margin for delay, is carried; – liquid oxygen or air is not used as a coolant; – there is uniform cooling effect even when most of the coolant has been consumed; and – the need to ventilate the cargo transport unit before entering is clearly indicated by a warning on the door(s) (see 5.5.3); .3 single mechanical refrigeration, provided that the unit is thermally insulated and, for substances with a flashpoint lower than the sum of the emergency temperature plus 5°C, explosion proof electrical fittings are used within the cooling compartment to prevent ignition of flammable vapours from the substances; .4 combined mechanical refrigeration system and cooling method, provided that: – the two systems are independent of one another; and – the provisions of 7.3.7.3.2.2 and 7.3.7.3.2.3 are met; .5 dual mechanical refrigeration system, provided that: – apart from the integral power supply unit, the two systems are independent of one another; – each system alone is capable of maintaining adequate temperature control; and

506 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

524

Bilaga 1

Chapter 7.3 – Consigning operations concerning the packing and use of CTUs

– for substances with a flashpoint lower than the sum of the emergency temperature plus 5°C, explosion proof electrical fittings are used within the coolant compartment to prevent ignition of flammable vapours from the substances.

7.3.7.3.3 The refrigeration equipment and its controls shall be readily and safely accessible and all electrical connections weatherproof. Inside the cargo transport unit, the temperature shall be measured continuously. The measurement shall be taken in the air space of the unit, using two measuring devices independent of each other. The type and place of the measuring devices shall be selected so that their results are representative of the actual temperature in the cargo. At least one of the two measurements shall be recorded in such a manner that temperature changes are easily detectable.

7.3.7.3.4 If substances are transported with a control temperature less than +25°C, the cargo transport unit shall be equipped with a visible and audible alarm effectively set at no higher than the control temperature. The alarms shall work independently from the power supply of the refrigeration system.

7.3.7.3.5 If an electrical supply is necessary for the cargo transport unit to operate the refrigeration or heating equipment, it shall be ensured that the correct connecting plugs are fitted. For under deck stowage, plugs shall, as a minimum, be of an IP 55 enclosure in accordance with IEC Publication 60529*, with the specification for electrical equipment of temperature class T4 and explosion group IIB. However, when stowed on deck, these plugs shall be of an IP 56 enclosure in accordance with IEC Publication 60529*

7.3.7.4 Special provisions for self reactive substances (class 4.1) and organic peroxides (class 5.2)

7.3.7.4.1 For self reactive substances (class 4.1) identified by UN Nos. 3231 and 3232 and organic peroxides (class 5.2) identified by UN Nos. 3111 and 3112, one of the following methods of temperature control described in 7.3.7.3.2 shall be used: .1 the methods referred to under 7.3.7.3.2.4 or 7.3.7.3.2.5; or .2 the method referred to under 7.3.7.3.2.3 when the maximum ambient temperature to be expected during transport is at least 10°C below the control temperature.

7.3.7.4.2 For self reactive substances (class 4.1) identified by UN Nos. 3233 to 3240 and organic peroxides (class 5.2) identified by UN Nos. 3113 to 3120, one of the following methods shall be used: .1 the methods referred to under 7.3.7.3.2.4 or 7.3.7.3.2.5; .2 the method referred to under 7.3.7.3.2.3 when the maximum ambient temperature to be expected during transport does not exceed the control temperature by more than 10°C; or .3 for short international voyages only (see 1.2.1), the methods referred to under 7.3.7.3.2.1 and 7.3.7.3.2.2 when the maximum ambient temperature to be expected during transport is at least 10°C below the control temperature.

7.3.7.5 Special provisions applicable to the transport of substances stabilized by temperature control (other than self-reactive substances and organic peroxides)

7.3.7.5.1 These provisions apply to the transport of substances: .1 the Proper Shipping Name of which contains the word “STABILIZED”; and .2 for which the SADT (see 7.3.7.2.1) as presented for transport in the package, IBC or tank is 50°C or lower.

When chemical inhibition is not used to stabilize a reactive substance which may generate dangerous amounts of heat and gas, or vapour, under normal transport conditions, these substances shall be transported under temperature control. These provisions do not apply to substances which are stabilized by the addition of chemical inhibitors such that the SADT is greater than 50°C.

7.3.7.5.2 The provisions in 7.3.7.2.1 to 7.3.7.2.3 and 7.3.7.3 apply to substances meeting criteria .1 and .2 in 7.3.7.5.1.

7.3.7.5.3 The actual transport temperature may be lower than the control temperature (see 7.3.7.2.1) but shall be selected so as to avoid dangerous separation of phases.

7.3.7.5.4 When these substances are transported in IBCs or portable tanks, the provisions for a SELF-REACTIVE LIQUID TYPE F, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED shall apply. For transport in IBCs, see the special provisions in 4.1.7.2 and the “Additional provisions” in packing instruction IBC520; for transport in portable tanks, see the additional provisions in 4.2.1.13.

* Reference is made to the Recommendations published by the International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) and, in particular, to Publication 60529 Classification of Degrees of Protection provided by Enclosures.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 507

525

Bilaga 1

Part 7 – Provisions concerning transport operations

7.3.7.5.5 If a substance the Proper Shipping Name of which contains the word “STABILIZED” and which is not normally required to be transported under temperature control is transported under conditions where the temperature may exceed 55°C, it may require temperature control.

7.3.7.6 Special provisions for flammable gases or liquids having a flashpoint less than 23°C c.c. transported under temperature control

7.3.7.6.1 When flammable gases or liquids having a flashpoint less than 23°C c.c. are packed or loaded in a cargo transport unit equipped with a refrigerating or heating system, the cooling or heating equipment shall comply with 7.3.7.3.

7.3.7.6.2 When flammable liquids having a flashpoint less than 23°C c.c. and not requiring temperature control for safety reasons are transported under temperature control conditions for commercial reasons, explosion proof electrical fittings are required except when the substances are pre cooled to and transported at a control temperature of at least 10°C below the flashpoint. In case of failure of a non explosion proof refrigerating system, the system shall be disconnected from the power supply. It shall not be reconnected if the temperature has risen to a temperature less than 10°C below the flashpoint. 7.3.7.6.3 When flammable gases not requiring temperature control for safety reasons are transported under temperature control conditions for commercial reasons, explosion proof electrical fittings are required.

7.3.7.7 Special provisions for vehicles transported on ships

Insulated, refrigerated and mechanically refrigerated vehicles shall conform to the provisions of 7.3.7.3 and 7.3.7.4 or 7.3.7.5 as appropriate. In addition, the refrigerating appliance of a mechanically refrigerated vehicle shall be capable of operating independently of the engine used to propel the vehicle.

7.3.7.8 Approval

The competent authority may approve that less stringent means of temperature control may be used or that artificial refrigeration may be dispensed with under conditions of transport such as short international voyages or low ambient temperatures.

7.3.8 Loading of cargo transport units on board ships

Before loading, cargo transport units used for the transport of dangerous goods shall be examined for external signs of damage, leakage or sifting of contents. Any cargo transport unit found to be damaged, leaking or sifting shall not be loaded on to a ship until repairs have been effected or damaged packages have been removed.

508 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

526

Bilaga 1

Chapter 7.4

Stowage and segregation on containerships

Note: To facilitate familiarization with these requirements and to support training of relevant personnel, illustrations applicable to the segregation requirements on containerships are given in MSC/Circ.[...].

7.4.1 Introduction

7.4.1.1 The provisions of this chapter apply to the stowage and segregation of containers which meet the definition of a container within the term of the International Convention for Safe Containers (CSC) 1972, as amended, which are transported on deck and in the cargo holds of container ships or on deck and in the cargo holds of other types of ships provided that these stowage positions are properly fitted to give a permanent stowage of containers during transport. 7.4.1.2 For ships carrying containers in conventional cargo spaces not properly fitted for the permanent stowage of containers the provisions of chapter 7.6 apply. 7.4.1.3 For stowage of FISHMEAL, UNSTABILIZED (UN 1374), FISHMEAL, STABILIZED (UN 2219) and KRILL MEAL (UN 3497) in containers, the provisions of 7.6.2.7.2.2 also apply. 7.4.1.4 For stowage of AMMONIUM NITRATE (UN 1942), AMMONIUM NITRATE BASED FERTILIZER (UN 2067 AND 2071) in containers, the applicable provisions of 7.6.2.8.4 and 7.6.2.11.1 also apply.

7.4.2 Stowage requirements

7.4.2.1 Provisions for hatchless containerships

Dangerous goods shall only be transported in or vertically above hatchless container holds if: .1 the dangerous goods are permitted for under deck stowage as specified in the Dangerous Goods List; and .2 the hatchless container hold is in full compliance with the provisions of regulation II 2/19 of SOLAS 74, as amended, or regulation II 2/54 of SOLAS 74, as amended by the resolutions indicated in II 2/1.2.1, as applicable.

7.4.2.2 Provisions for ships with partially weathertight hatchway covers

7.4.2.2.1 Provisions for partially weathertight hatchway covers with effective gutterbars*

7.4.2.2.1.1 Partially weathertight hatchway covers fitted with effective gutterbars* can be regarded as "resistant to fire and liquid" for the purpose of stowage and segregation of containers containing dangerous goods on containerships fitted with such hatchway covers. Additionally segregation requirements shall be in accordance with the requirements in paragraph 7.4.3.2. 7.4.2.2.1.2 When "not in the same vertical line unless separated by a deck" is required, containers containing dangerous goods shall not be stowed in any tier directly above a clear gap* unless the cargo hold complies with the relevant requirements for the class and flashpoint of the dangerous goods in regulation II-2/19 of SOLAS 74, as amended, or regulation II-2/54 of SOLAS 74, as amended by resolutions indicated in II-2/1.2.1, as applicable. Additionally, containers containing incompatible dangerous goods shall not be stowed within the relevant sensitive vertical lines* under deck. *

7.4.2.2.2 Provisions for partially weathertight hatchway covers without effective gutterbars

7.4.2.2.2.1 Where hatchway covers are not fitted with effective gutterbars, containers containing dangerous goods shall not be stowed on such hatchway covers, unless the cargo hold complies with the relevant requirements for

* For definitions and details see MSC/Circ.1087 found in the IMDG Code Supplement.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 509

527

Bilaga 1

Part 7 – Provisions concerning transport operations

the class and flashpoint of the dangerous goods in regulation II 2/19 of SOLAS 74, as amended, or regulation II 2/54 of SOLAS 74, as amended by the resolutions indicated in II 2/1.2.1, as applicable. * 7.4.2.2.2.2 Where hatchway covers are not fitted with effective gutterbars , the following applies where stowage “not in the same vertical line” is required in 7.4.3.3. 7.4.2.2.2.3 When containers containing dangerous goods are stowed on deck, containers containing incompatible * * dangerous goods shall not be stowed within the relevant sensitive vertical lines of any clear gap on either side of the hatchway cover below deck. 7.4.2.2.2.4 When containers containing dangerous goods are stowed below deck within the relevant sensitive vertical lines of a clear gap, containers with incompatible dangerous goods shall not be stowed on the hatches above the hold*.

7.4.2.3 Provisions for containers with flammable gases and highly flammable liquids

7.4.2.3.1 In cargo ships of 500 gross tons or over and passengers ships constructed before 1st September 1984, and in cargo ships of less than 500 gross tons constructed before 1st February 1992, containers with flammable gases or with flammable liquids having a flashpoint of less than 23°C c.c, shall be stowed on deck only, unless otherwise approved by the Administration. 7.4.2.3.2 A container with flammable gases or with flammable liquids having a flashpoint of less than 23°C c.c transported on deck shall be stowed at least 2.4 m from any potential source of ignition. 7.4.2.3.3 A container under temperature control that is not of a certified safe type shall not be stowed under deck together with containers containing flammable gases or with liquids having a flashpoint of less than 23°C c.c.

7.4.2.4 Ventilation provisions

7.4.2.4.1 In cargo ships of 500 gross tons or over and passengers ships constructed before 1st September 1984, and in cargo ships of less than 500 gross tons constructed before 1st February 1992, containers with the following dangerous goods, may be stowed under deck only if the cargo space is equipped with mechanical ventilation and if under deck stowage is permitted in the Dangerous Goods List: – dangerous goods of class 2.1; – dangerous goods of class 3 with a flash point of less than 23°C c.c.; – dangerous goods of class 4.3; – dangerous goods of class 6.1 with a subsidiary risk of class 3; – dangerous goods of class 8 with a subsidiary risk of class 3, and – dangerous goods to which a specific stowage requirement requiring mechanical ventilation in column 16 of the Dangerous Goods List is assigned. Otherwise containers shall be stowed on deck only. 7.4.2.4.2 The capacity of the mechanical ventilation (number of air changes per hour) shall be to the satisfaction of the Administration.

7.4.3 Segregation requirements

7.4.3.1 Definitions and application

7.4.3.1.1 Container space means a distance of not less than 6 m fore and aft or not less than 2.4 m athwartships. 7.4.3.1.2 The provisions for segregation between containers onboard containerships with closed cargo holds and onboard hatchless containerships are given in the tables in 7.4.3.2 and 7.4.3.3 respectively. * * For definitions and details see MSC/Circ.1087 found in the IMDG Code Supplement.

510 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

528

Bilaga 1

Chapter 7.4 – Stowage and segregation on containerships

R R D D SD SD SD CK D A A A A A INEA ONE A INEA E E E E ED DE C HK HK HK IT OR HE A LKHE LKHE L L L IB E U U U U U H EN CONT CA CONT SP B B O UNDER BULK O B O B O B PR OP ONE SP ONE ONE ONE WT WT WT

VERSUS R R R R R R M INE 4 EN INE INE INE INE S INE S A S AL 2 ED OP CK A E A E A E A E A E E NT IT CA CA CA C C C O OF IB DE A A CONT A Z CE H ON CONT SP CONT SP CONT SP CONT SP CONT SP E SP MINIMUM NA O O O HORI T PR ONE ONE ONE WT WT THRE DIS

R E R D D SD CK IONT IONT N D INE A A A INEA O A A S E ED DE RIC RIC R E HK IT T T HE CA LKHE LKHE L IB EN S S E O U U U H CONT AC CONT SP B B O OP UNDER RE RE P BULK O O B PR ON ON ONE S WT ONE ONE W T

VERSUS R R R R M L ION ION 4 A T T INE INE INE INE S AL 2 ED OSED CK A E A E A E A E NT IT ONT CL RIC RIC CA CA CA C O OF IB Z DE TS TS A Z CE H ON CONT SP CONT SP CONT SP CONT SP MINIMUM NA O HORI RE RE O HORI T PR ON ON ONE ONE ONE WT DIS

R R D D D M4 CK IONT IONT D A A AE AL 2 INEA ONE A INEA E H ED DE RIC RIC C K NT OF IT T T OR HE A LKHE LKHE L OZ IB S S E U U U MINIMUM CE H OSED CONT C CONT SP B B D NA O RE RE A BULK E BN N HORI T PR CL UNDER O O ONE SP ONE ONE ONE O A N N DIS

holds VERSUS R R R R M4 o IONT IONT INE INE INE INE AL 2 ED

CK A E A E A E A SE NT IT

rg OSED RIC RIC C C C C O OF IB

CL DE T T A A A A Z CE H S S SP SP SP CONT N O

ca ON RE RE CONT CONT CONT O SP MINIMUM A d W HORI T PR

NO NO ONE ONE ONE T DIS

close T T T T

- T - T - T - T

AF R S AF R S AF R S AF R S . A P A P A P A P s

with AND SHI AND SHI AND SHI AND SHI id

RE THWA RE THWA RE THWA RE THWA u OF OF OF OF q

hips . s d d li

a n EN Y e

iner AL S B h a OP E H C S D lk re a

ET K u N T RTI A CE fi T I VE UNLE G o VERSUS O E A D g b t t

cont N LINE GRE in n

EN SAM SE n

rd OP e ta

rv is D R s

boa TE O N ” te e

OF F E NE n r AL OP AS ” P ED i e

on T RMIT RSUSE N O OP IT s VERSUS EN E V E R “ IB m

OP ON PD N OP O HO ll b VERTIC N RWISE E RSUS ro a OSED E HE S FA E PR h

iner CL OP OSE T “OP V a CL O s s

E 6 m f k H D E EDT n c T ET M A a e

cont F IT A INE EG K

P O M E S L R CE th d d

of VERSUS RE H AL G s n

OSED TO C E s CL N R P N T SS Y A D e OSED E T I RTI B t l s a E O H O VE ESL d

ation CL N OT N N o a g O U n e

rs h

gre ” Y OR Y OR e lk

OM”R B E ” ” u ION MO F TE M TE M in

se TA R L O TEDA O

G TEDA P R R LE R * ta ll b Y F .1 TED .2 R M TMENTR D F .3 A TMENTR .4 n

of A AR A O A L A D FL o A:

GRE QUIREMENT W A O INTERVENINGN COMP O

SE “A A C H “SEP NGITUDINALL H C te

ble RE “SEP OL AY a “SEP COMP B COMP * T No

.2 4.3 7.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 511

529

Bilaga 1

Part 7 – Provisions concerning transport operations

R R D D SD SD SD D A AE A A A CK INE ONE A INE H E E E ED A A EC K H H H IT DE OR HE A LKHE L KL KL KL IB E U U U U U H EN CONT CA CONT SP B O BULK E B O B O B O B PR OP UNDER ONE SP ONE ONE NO W W W T T T

VERSUS R R R N R T E R T E R T E 4 R DL T I O MA O MA O MA 2 O EN INE INE INE O INE INE INEA AL N O H ED OP CK A E A E A SAME A D NN E S A D NN E S D NN E S NT OF T I E IT CA CA D N EV OV OV OV O CE O M IB DE N O AS B AS B AS B Z N A H CONT SP CONT SP CONT E A B HOLD CONT E A HOLD CONT E A HOLD CONTE E A HOLD A D N E S O ON A O AC R O AC R AC R MINIMUM T N PR AC W P O W P O P O HORI OV ONE ONE ONE PS OR T S IN T S IN THRE S IN DIS M A BA

R E R D D SD CK IONT IONT N D INE A A A INEA O A A S E ED DE RIC RIC R E HK IT T T HE CA LKHE LKHE L IB EN S S E O U U U H CONT CONT SP B B O OP RE RE ACP BULK O O B PR UNDER O O ONE S W ONE ONE W N N T T

VERSUS R R R N R T E 4 R DL L T I O MA 2 O A IONT IONT INE INE INE O INE AL N O H ED OSED CK A E A SE A SAME A D N E S NT OF T I E IT ONT CL RIC RIC C C D N E N O O M IB Z DE T T A A N VO AS OV Z CE A H S S SP CONT B HOLD CONT E B HOLD NA D N O ON RE RE CONT O SP CONT E A A O AR MINIMUM T N E S HORI O O W AC W ACP O HORI OV PR N N ONE T ONE PS OR T S IN DIS M A B A

R R D D D M4 CK IONT IONT D A A AE AL 2 INEA ONE A INEA E H ED DE RIC RIC C K NT OF IT T T OR HE A LKHE LKHE L OZ IB S S E U U U MINIMUM CE H OSED CONT C CONT SP B B D NA O RE RE A BULK E BN N HORI T PR CL UNDER O O ONE SP ONE ONE ONE O A N N DIS

VERSUS R R R N R T E 4 R DL T I O MA 2 O IONT IONT INE INE INE O INE AL N O H ED OSED CK A E A E A SAME A D NN E S NT OF T I E IT RIC RIC CA CA D N EV OV O O M IB CL DE TS TS N O AS B Z CEN A H CONT SP CONT SP CONT E A B HOLD CONT E A HOLD A D N E S O ON RE RE A O AC R MINIMUM T N PR AC W P O HORI OV NO NO ONE ONE ONE PS OR T S IN DIS M A B

s A ip h T T T T rs -T -T -T -T e AF R S AF R S AF R S AF R S . in A P A P A P A P s

AND SHI AND SHI AND SHI AND SHI id

ta RE THWA RE THWA RE THWA RE THWA u n OF OF OF OF q o .

d d li

s c a n s EN E e le M h

OP A INE lk re a

h E S L u tc H AL fi a C o

VERSUS N T RTI g b t t T I in n EN ON VE n

rd h OP e ta a is o D R rv s

TE O N ” te e

n b OF F E NE n r

AL OP AS ” P ED i e

T RMIT RSUSE N O OP IT

VERSUS EN E V E R “ IB m

rs o OP ON PD N OP O HO ll b e VERTIC N RWISE E RSUS ro a

OSED E HE S FA E PR h

in CL OP OSE T “OP V ta CL O s s n E 6 m f k o H D E n c

T ET M a e

f c F IT A INE

P O M E S L th d d VERSUS RE H AL s n

n o OSED TO C s o CL N R P N T RTI e ti OSED EH T I t l s a a E O O VE o d

CL NO OT N a

g n e re rs h g ” Y OR Y OR e lk e M B E ” ” u

IONT O TED ” TE M TED TE M in

A R A M TED L OR A OR

f s G .1 R O .2 A P TMENT .3 R LE TMENT .4 ta ll b

Y FA A R M R D F A R D F n A GRE FR A O A L INTERVENING A L o :

le o QUIREMENT W O NGITUDINALL N COMP O C b SE RE “A “SEP A C H “SEP O A H te a “SEP COMP L Y COMP T B * No

.3 .3 4 7.

512 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

530

Bilaga 1

Chapter 7.5

Stowage and segregation on ro-ro ships

Note: To facilitate familiarization with these requirements and to support training of relevant personnel, illustrations applicable to the segregation requirements on ro-ro ships are given in MSC/Circ.[..].

7.5.1 Introduction

7.5.1.1 The provisions of this chapter apply to the stowage and segregation of cargo transport units which are transported in ro-ro cargo spaces. 7.5.1.2 For ro-ro ships which incorporate stowage positions which are properly fitted to give a permanent stowage of containers during transport, the provisions of chapter 7.4 apply for containers carried in these spaces. 7.5.1.3 For ro-ro ships which incorporate conventional cargo spaces, the provisions of chapter 7.6 apply in these spaces. 7.5.1.4 In case more than one container is loaded on the same chassis in a ro-ro-cargo space, the segregation of chapter 7.4 apply between the containers.

7.5.2 Stowage provisions

7.5.2.1 Loading and unloading operations on each ro-ro cargo space shall take place under the supervision of either a working party consisting of officers and other crew members or responsible persons appointed by the master. 7.5.2.2 During the voyage, access to such spaces by passengers and other unauthorized persons shall only be permitted when such persons are accompanied by an authorized crew member. 7.5.2.3 All doors leading directly to these spaces shall be securely closed during the voyage and notices or signs prohibiting entrance to such spaces shall be conspicuously displayed. 7.5.2.4 The transport of dangerous goods shall be prohibited in any ro-ro cargo space in which the foregoing provisions cannot be met. 7.5.2.5 Closing arrangements for the openings between ro-ro cargo spaces and machinery and accommodation spaces shall be such as to avoid the possibility of dangerous vapours and liquids entering such spaces. Such openings shall normally be kept securely closed when dangerous cargo is on board, except to permit access by authorized persons or for emergency use. 7.5.2.6 Dangerous goods required to be carried on deck only shall not be carried in closed ro-ro cargo spaces, but may be carried in open ro-ro cargo spaces when authorized by the Administration. 7.5.2.7 Flammable gases or liquids having a flashpoint of less than 23°C c.c. shall not be stowed in a closed ro ro cargo space or special category space on a passenger ship unless: – the design, construction and equipment of the space comply with the provisions of regulation II 2/19 of SOLAS 74, as amended, or regulation II 2/54 of SOLAS 74, as amended by the resolutions indicated in II 2/1.2.1, as applicable, and the ventilation system is operated to maintain at least six air changes per hour; or – the ventilation system of the space is operated to maintain at least ten air changes per hour and non certified safe electrical systems in the space are capable of being isolated by means other than removal of fuses in the event of failure of the ventilation system or any other circumstance likely to cause accumulation of flammable vapours. Otherwise stowage is restricted to on deck only. 7.5.2.8 Cargo transport units with flammable gases or liquids having a flashpoint of less than 23°C c.c. and transported on deck shall be stowed at least 3 m from any potential sources of ignition.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 513

531

Bilaga 1

Part 7 – Provisions concerning transport operations

7.5.2.9 Mechanically operated refrigeration or heating equipment fitted to any cargo transport unit shall not be operated during the voyage when stowed in a closed ro ro cargo space or a special category space on a passenger ship.

7.5.2.10 Electrically operated refrigeration or heating equipment fitted to any cargo transport unit stowed in a closed ro ro cargo space or special category space on a passenger ship shall not be operated when flammable gases or liquids having a flashpoint of less than 23°C c.c. are present in the cargo transport unit or in the same space, unless: – the design, construction and equipment of the space comply with the provisions of regulation II 2/19 of SOLAS 1974, as amended, or regulation II 2/54 of SOLAS 74, as amended by the resolutions indicated II 2/1.2.1, as applicable; or

– the ventilation system of the space is operated to maintain at least ten air changes per hour and all electrical systems in the space are capable of being isolated by means other than removal of fuses in the event of ventilation failure or other circumstance likely to cause accumulation of flammable vapours;

– and, in either case, the refrigeration or heating equipment of the cargo transport unit shall comply with paragraph 7.3.7.6.

7.5.2.11 In ships the keel of which was laid before 1 September 1984 and for which regulation II 2/20 of SOLAS 74, as amended, or regulations II 2/37 and 38 of SOLAS 74, as amended by the resolutions indicated in II 2/1.2.1, are not applicable to a closed ro-ro cargo space, mechanical ventilation shall be provided to the satisfaction of the Administration. The ventilation fans shall be operating at all times when vehicles are in such spaces.

7.5.2.12 If continuous ventilation is impracticable in a closed ro-ro cargo space other than a special category space on a passenger ship, ventilation fans shall be operated daily for a limited period, as weather permits. In any case, prior to discharge, the fans shall be operated for a reasonable period. The ro-ro cargo space shall be proved gas-free at the end of the period. When the ventilation is not continuous, electrical systems which are not certified safe shall be isolated.

7.5.2.13 The master of a ship carrying dangerous goods in ro-ro cargo spaces shall ensure that, during loading and unloading operations and during the voyage, regular inspections of these spaces are made by an authorized crew member or responsible person in order to achieve early detection of any hazard.

7.5.3 Segregation provisions

7.5.3.1 The provisions for segregation between cargo transport units onboard ro-ro ships are given in the table in 7.5.3.2.

7.5.3.2 Table of segregation of cargo transport units on board ro–ro ships

HORIZONTAL SEGREGATION CLOSED VERSUS CLOSED CLOSED VERSUS OPEN OPEN VERSUS OPEN REQUIREMENT ON DECK UNDER DECK ON DECK UNDER DECK ON DECK UNDER DECK

AT LEAST AT LEAST FORE AND AFT NO RESTRICTION NO RESTRICTION NO RESTRICTION NO RESTRICTION 3 METRES 3 METRES “AWAY FROM” .1 ATHWARTSHIPS NO RESTRICTION NO RESTRICTION NO RESTRICTION NO RESTRICTION AT LEAST 3 METRES AT LEAST 3 METRES

AT LEAST AT LEAST AT LEAST AT LEAST AT LEAST AT LEAST FORE AND AFT 6 METRES OR 6 METRES OR 12 METRES OR 6 METRES ONE BULKHEAD 6 METRES ONE BULKHEAD 6 METRES ONE BULKHEAD “SEPARATED FROM” .2 AT LEAST AT LEAST AT LEAST ATHWARTSHIPS AT LEAST 3 METRES OR AT LEAST 6 METRES OR AT LEAST 12 METRES OR 3 METRES 3 METRES 6 METRES ONE BULKHEAD ONE BULKHEAD ONE BULKHEAD AT LEAST AT LEAST AT LEAST AT LEAST AT LEAST TWO DECKS OR “SEPARATED BY FORE AND AFT 24 METRES 24 METRES A COMPLETE 12 METRES 24 METRES 36 METRES TWO BULKHEADS + DECK + DECK COMPARTMENT OR HOLD FROM” AT LEAST AT LEAST AT LEAST AT LEAST .3 ATHWARTSHIPS 12 METRES 24 METRES 24 METRES 24 METRES PROHIBITED PROHIBITED + DECK + DECK “SEPARATED TWO BULKHEADS AT LEAST LONGITUDINALLY FORE AND AFT AT LEAST OR AT LEAST AT LEAST 48 METRES AT LEAST PROHIBITED BY AN INTERVENING 36 METRES 36 METRES 36 METRES INCLUDING 48 METRES COMPLETE + TWO DECKS TWO BULKHEADS COMPARTMENT OR HOLD FROM” ATHWARTSHIPS PROHIBITED PROHIBITED PROHIBITED PROHIBITED PROHIBITED PROHIBITED .4

Note: All bulkheads and decks shall be resistant to fire and liquid.

514 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

532

Bilaga 1

Chapter 7.6

Stowage and segregation on general cargo ships

7.6.1 Introduction

7.6.1.1 The provisions of this chapter apply to the stowage and segregation of dangerous goods stowed in the conventional way on board general cargo ships. They apply also to containers which are transported in conventional cargo spaces, including cargo spaces on the weather deck, not properly fitted to give a permanent stowage of the containers during transport.

7.6.1.2 For ships carrying containers in stowage positions which are properly fitted for the permanent stowage of containers the provisions of chapter 7.4 apply.

7.6.2 Stowage and handling provisions

7.6.2.1 Provisions for all classes

7.6.2.1.1 The minimum stacking height for testing packagings intended to contain dangerous goods in accordance with chapter 6.1 is 3 m. For IBCs and large packagings, the stacking test load shall be determined in accordance with 6.5.6.6.4 and 6.6.5.3.3.4 respectively. 7.6.2.1.2 Drums containing dangerous goods shall always be stowed in an upright position unless otherwise authorized by the competent authority.

7.6.2.1.3 The stowage of dangerous goods shall be so arranged as to ensure clear walkways and access to all facilities necessary for the safe working of the ship. When dangerous goods are stowed on deck, hydrants, sounding pipes and the like and access thereto shall be kept free and clear of such goods. 7.6.2.1.4 Fibreboard packagings, paper bags and other packages susceptible to water damage shall be stowed under deck or, if they are stowed on deck, they shall be so protected that at no time they are exposed to weather or to seawater. 7.6.2.1.5 Portable tanks shall not be overstowed by other cargo unless they are designed for that purpose or unless they are protected to the satisfaction of the competent authority. 7.6.2.1.6 Cargo spaces and decks shall be clean and dry as relevant to the hazards of the dangerous goods to be carried. In order to reduce the risk of ignition, the space shall be free of dust from other cargoes, such as grain or coal dust. 7.6.2.1.7 Packages and cargo transport units found to be damaged, leaking or sifting shall not be loaded on a general cargo ship. Care shall be taken to ensure that excessive water, snow, ice or foreign matter adhering to packages and cargo transport units shall be removed before loading. 7.6.2.1.8 Packages and cargo transport units and any other goods shall be adequately braced and secured for the * voyage . Packages shall be loaded in such a way that there will be a minimum likelihood of damage to them and to any fittings during transport. Fittings on packages or portable tanks shall be adequately protected.

7.6.2.2 Provisions for flammable gases and highly flammable liquids

7.6.2.2.1 In cargo ships of 500 gross tons or over and passengers ships constructed before 1st September 1984, and in cargo ships of less than 500 gross tons constructed before 1st February 1992, flammable gases or flammable liquids having a flashpoint of less than 23°C c.c, shall be stowed on deck only, unless otherwise approved by the Administration. 7.6.2.2.2 Flammable gases or liquids having a flashpoint less than 23°C c.c. transported on deck shall be stowed at least 3 m from any potential source of ignition.

* Refer to regulation VII/5 of SOLAS 74 as amended.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 515

533

Bilaga 1

Part 7 – Provisions concerning transport operations

7.6.2.3 Ventilation provisions

7.6.2.3.1 In cargo ships of 500 gross tons or over and passengers ships constructed before 1st September 1984, and in cargo ships of less than 500 gross tons constructed before 1st February 1992, the following dangerous goods, may be stowed under deck only if the cargo space is equipped with mechanical ventilation and if under deck stowage is permitted in the Dangerous Goods List: – dangerous goods of class 2.1; – dangerous goods of class 3 with a flash point of less than 23°C c.c.; – dangerous goods of class 4.3; – dangerous goods of class 6.1 with a subsidiary risk of class 3; – dangerous goods of class 8 with a subsidiary risk of class 3, and – dangerous goods to which a specific stowage requirement requiring mechanical ventilation in column 16 of the Dangerous Goods List is assigned. Otherwise containers shall be stowed on deck only. 7.6.2.3.2 The capacity of the mechanical ventilation (number of air changes per hour) shall be to the satisfaction of the Administration.

7.6.2.4 Provisions for class 1

7.6.2.4.1 All compartments or holds and cargo transport units shall be locked or suitably secured in order to prevent unauthorized access. The means of locking and securing shall be such that, in the case of emergency, access can be gained without delay. 7.6.2.4.2 Loading and unloading procedures and equipment used should be of such a nature that sparks are not produced, in particular where the floors of the cargo compartment are not constructed of close-boarded wood. All cargo handlers should be briefed by the shipper or receiver of the potential risks and necessary precautions, prior to commencing the handling of explosives. In the event of the contents of packages being affected by water whilst on board, immediate advice shall be sought from the shipper; pending this advice, handling of the packages shall be avoided.

7.6.2.4.3 Segregation on deck

When goods in different compatibility groups are transported on deck, they shall be stowed not less than 6 m apart unless their mixed stowage is allowed according to 7.2.7.

7.6.2.4.4 Segregation in single hold ships

In a single hold ship, dangerous goods of class 1 shall be segregated in accordance with 7.2.7 except that: .1 Goods in Division 1.1 or 1.2 of compatibility group B may be stowed in the same hold as substances of compatibility group D provided: – the net explosives mass of goods of compatibility group B does not exceed 50 kg; and – such goods are stowed in a closed cargo transport unit which is stowed at least 6 m from the substances of compatibility group D. .2 Goods in Division 1.4 of compatibility group B may be stowed in the same hold as substances of compatibility group D provided they are separated either by a distance of at least 6 m or by a steel division. 7.6.2.4.5 In the event that a package containing goods of class 1 is found to be suffering from breakage or leakage expert advice should be obtained for its safe handling and disposal.

7.6.2.5 Provisions for class 2

7.6.2.5.1 When pressure receptacles are stowed in a vertical position they shall be stowed in a block, cribbed or boxed-in with suitable sound lumber and the box or crib dunnaged to provide clearance from a steel deck. Pressure receptacles in a box or crib shall be braced to prevent any movement. The box or crib (gas rack) shall be securely chocked and lashed to prevent movement in any direction. 7.6.2.5.2 Pressure receptacles stowed on deck shall be protected from sources of heat.

7.6.2.6 Provisions for class 3

7.6.2.6.1 Class 3 substances with a flashpoint of less than 23°C c.c. packaged in jerricans, plastics (3H1, 3H2), drums, plastics (1H1,1H2), plastics receptacles in a plastic drum (6HH1, 6HH2) and Plastic Intermediate Bulk Containers (IBCs 31H1 and 31H2), shall be stowed on deck only unless packed in a closed cargo transport unit.

516 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

534

Bilaga 1

Chapter 7.6 – Stowage and segregation on general cargo ships

7.6.2.6.2 Packages loaded on deck shall be protected from sources of heat.

7.6.2.7 Provisions for classes 4.1, 4.2 and 4.3

7.6.2.7.1 Packages stowed on deck shall be protected from sources of heat. 7.6.2.7.2 Stowage provisions for FISHMEAL, UNSTABILIZED (UN 1374), FISHMEAL , STABILIZED (UN 2216, class 9) and KRILL MEAL (UN3497) 7.6.2.7.2.1 For loose packagings: .1 Temperature readings shall be taken 3 times a day during the voyage and recorded. .2 If the temperature of the cargo exceeds 55°C and continues to increase, ventilation to the hold shall be restricted. If self-heating continues, then carbon dioxide or inert gas shall be introduced. The ship shall be equipped with facilities for introducing carbon dioxide or inert gas into the holds. .3 The cargo shall be stowed protected from sources of heat. .4 For UN 1374 and 3497, where loose bags are being carried, double strip stowage is recommended, provided there is good surface and through ventilation. The diagram in 7.6.2.7.2.3 shows how this can be achieved. For UN 2216, where loose bags are being carried, no special ventilation is required for block stowage of bagged cargo. 7.6.2.7.2.2 For containers: .1 After packing, the doors and other openings shall be sealed to prevent the penetration of air into the unit. .2 Temperature readings in the hold shall be taken once a day early in the morning during the voyage and recorded. .3 If the temperature of the hold rises excessively above ambient and continues to increase, the possible need to apply copious quantities of water in an emergency and the consequent risk to the stability of the ship shall be considered. .4 The cargo shall be stowed protected from sources of heat. 7.6.2.7.2.3 Double strip stowage Ship’s Spar side ceiling

Each Plan tier is 2 bags wide

min. Transverse 10 cm Flaps 10 cm bulkhead

Dunnage hard against end bulkheads, boards overlapped minimum 45 cm Longitudinal section

2 layers of dunnage

Tank top ceiling

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 517

535

Bilaga 1

Part 7 – Provisions concerning transport operations

7.6.2.7.3 Stowage provisions for SEED CAKE (UN 1386)

7.6.2.7.3.1 Stowage provisions for SEED CAKE, containing vegetable oil (a) mechanically expelled seeds, containing more than 10% oil or more than 20% oil and moisture combined: .1 through and surface ventilation is required; .2 if the voyage exceeds 5 days, the ship shall be equipped with facilities for introducing carbon dioxide or inert gas into the cargo spaces; .3 bags shall always be stowed in double strip, as shown in 7.6.2.7.2.3 of this Code for fishmeal, unstabilized; and .4 regular temperature readings shall be taken at varying depths in the cargo space and recorded. If the temperature of the cargo exceeds 55°C and continues to increase, ventilation to the cargo spaces shall be restricted. If self-heating continues, then carbon dioxide or inert gas shall be introduced. 7.6.2.7.3.2 Stowage provisions for SEED CAKE, containing vegetable oil (b) solvent extractions and expelled seeds containing not more than 10% of oil and, when the amount of moisture is higher than 10%, not more than 20% of oil and moisture combined: .1 surface ventilation is required to assist in removing any residual solvent vapour; .2 if bags are stowed without provision for ventilation to circulate throughout the stow and the voyage exceeds 5 days, regular temperature readings shall be taken at varying depths in the hold and recorded; and .3 if the voyage exceeds 5 days, the vessel shall be equipped with facilities for introducing carbon dioxide or inert gas into the cargo spaces.

7.6.2.8 Provisions for class 5.1

7.6.2.8.1 Cargo spaces shall be cleaned before oxidizing substances are loaded into them. All combustible materials which are not necessary for the stowage of such cargoes shall be removed from the hold. 7.6.2.8.2 As far as reasonably practicable, non-combustible securing and protecting materials and only a minimum of clean dry wooden dunnage shall be used. 7.6.2.8.3 Precautions shall be taken to avoid the penetration of oxidizing substances into other cargo spaces, bilges, etc., which may contain combustible material. 7.6.2.8.4 UN 1942 AMMONIUM NITRATE and UN 2067 AMMONIUM NITRATE BASED FERTILIZER may be stowed under deck in a clean cargo space capable of being opened up in an emergency. The possible need to open hatches in case of fire to provide maximum ventilation and to apply water in an emergency and the consequent risk to the stability of the ship through flooding of cargo space shall be considered before loading. 7.6.2.8.5 After discharge, cargo spaces used for the transport of oxidizing substances shall be inspected for contamination. A space that has been contaminated shall be properly cleaned and examined before being used for other cargoes.

7.6.2.9 Provisions for self-reactive substances of class 4.1 and for class 5.2

7.6.2.9.1 Packages shall be stowed protected from sources of heat. 7.6.2.9.2 When stowage arrangements are made, it shall be borne in mind that it may become appropriate to jettison a package or packages of this cargo.

7.6.2.10 Provisions for classes 6.1 and 8

7.6.2.10.1 After discharge, spaces used for the transport of substances of this class shall be inspected for contamination. A space which has been contaminated shall be properly cleaned and examined before being used for other cargoes. 7.6.2.10.2 Substances of class 8 shall be kept as dry as reasonably practicable, since in the presence of moisture they may be corrosive to most metals and some also react violently with water.

7.6.2.11 Stowage of goods of class 9

7.6.2.11.1 Stowage provisions for AMMONIUM NITRATE BASED FERTILIZER , UN 2071

7.6.2.11.1.1 AMMONIUM NITRATE BASED FERTILIZER, UN 2071 shall be stowed in a clean cargo space capable of being opened up in an emergency. In the case of bagged fertilizer or fertilizer in containers or in bulk containers, it is sufficient if, in the case of an emergency, the cargo is accessible through free approaches (hatch entries), and mechanical ventilation enables the master to exhaust any gases or fumes resulting from decomposition.

518 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

536

Bilaga 1

Chapter 7.6 – Stowage and segregation on general cargo ships

The possible need to open hatches in case of fire to provide maximum ventilation and to apply water in an emergency, and the consequent risk to the stability of the ship through flooding of the cargo space, shall be considered before loading.

7.6.2.11.1.2 If suppression of decomposition should prove impracticable (such as in bad weather), there would not necessarily be immediate danger to the structure of the ship. However, the residue left after decomposition may have only half the mass of the original cargo; this loss of mass may also affect the stability of the ship and shall be considered before loading.

7.6.2.11.1.3 AMMONIUM NITRATE BASED FERTILIZER, UN 2071 shall be stowed out of direct contact with a metal engine-room bulkhead. In the case of bagged material, this may be done, for example, by using wooden boards to provide an air space between the bulkhead and the cargo. This requirement need not apply to short international voyages.

7.6.2.11.1.4 In the case of ships not fitted with smoke-detecting or other suitable devices, arrangements shall be made during the voyage to inspect cargo spaces containing these fertilizers at intervals not exceeding 4 hours (such as to sniff at the ventilators serving them) to ensure early detection of decomposition should that occur.

7.6.2.11.2 Stowage provisions for FISHMEAL, STABILIZED (UN 2216, class 9)

7.6.2.11.2.1 For stowage provisions for FISHMEAL, STABILIZED (UN 2216, class 9), see 7.6.2.7.2.

7.6.2.12 Stowage of dangerous goods in flexible bulk containers

7.6.2.12.1 The stowage of dangerous goods in flexible bulk containers is not permitted on deck.

7.6.2.12.2 Flexible bulk containers shall be stowed in such way that there are no void spaces between flexible bulk containers in the hold. If the flexible bulk containers do not completely fill the hold, adequate measures shall be taken to avoid shifting of cargo.

7.6.2.12.3 The maximum permissible stacking height of flexible bulk containers shall never exceed 3 high.

7.6.2.12.4 When flexible bulk containers are fitted with venting devices, the stowage of the flexible bulk containers shall not impede their function.

7.6.3 Segregation provisions

7.6.3.1 Segregation from foodstuffs

7.6.3.1.1 For the purpose of this subsection, the terms “away from”, “separated from” and “separated by a complete compartment or hold from” are defined in 7.6.3.2.

7.6.3.1.2 Dangerous goods having a primary or subsidiary risk of classes 2.3, 6.1, 7 (with the exception of UN 2908, 2909, 2910 and 2911), 8 and dangerous goods having a reference to 7.6.3.1.2 in column 16 of the Dangerous Goods List stowed in a conventional way shall be “separated from” foodstuffs stowed in a conventional way. If either dangerous goods or foodstuffs are in a closed cargo transport unit, dangerous goods shall be stowed “away from” foodstuffs. If both dangerous goods and foodstuffs are in different closed cargo transport units, no segregation requirements shall apply.

7.6.3.1.3 Dangerous goods of class 6.2 stowed in a conventional way shall be “separated by a complete compartment or hold from” foodstuffs stowed in a conventional way. If either dangerous goods or foodstuffs are in a closed cargo transport unit, dangerous goods shall be stowed “separated from” foodstuffs.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 519

537

Bilaga 1

Part 7 – Provisions concerning transport operations

7.6.3.2 Segregation of packages containing dangerous goods and stowed in the conventional way

Definitions of the segregation terms

Away from: Effectively segregated so that the incompatible goods cannot Prohibited interact dangerously in the event of an accident but may be stowage transported in the same compartment or hold or on deck, provided area a minimum horizontal separation of 3 metres, projected vertically is obtained. 3 m 3 m

Prohibited stowage area

Separated from: In different compartments or holds when stowed under deck. Provided the intervening deck is resistant to fire and liquid, a vertical separation, i.e. in different compartments, may be accepted as equivalent to this segregation. For on deck stowage, this segregation means a separation by a distance of at least 6 metres horizontally.

Separated by a complete compartment or hold from: Either a vertical or a horizontal separation. If the intervening 12 m decks are not resistant to fire and liquid, then only a longitudinal separation, i.e. by an intervening complete compartment or hold, is acceptable. For on deck stowage, this segregation means a separation by a distance of at least 12 metres horizontally. The same distance has to be applied if one package is stowed on (see note) deck, and the other one in an upper compartment.

Note: One of the two decks must be resistant to fire and to liquid

Separated longitudinally by an intervening complete compartment or hold from: Vertical separation alone does not meet this requirement. 24 m, including Between a package under deck and one on deck, a minimum intervening compartment distance of 24 m, including a complete compartment, must be maintained longitudinally. For on deck stowage, this segregation means a separation by a distance of at least 24 metres longitudinally.

Legend (1) Reference package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(2) Package containing incompatible goods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(3) Deck resistant to fire and liquid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Note: Vertical lines represent transverse watertight bulkheads between cargo spaces.

520 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

538

Bilaga 1

Chapter 7.6 – Stowage and segregation on general cargo ships

7.6.3.3 Segregation of dangerous goods stowed in the conventional way from those transported in cargo transport units

7.6.3.3.1 Dangerous goods stowed in the conventional way shall be segregated from goods transported in open cargo transport units in accordance with 7.6.3.2. 7.6.3.3.2 Dangerous goods stowed in the conventional way shall be segregated from goods transported in closed cargo transport units in accordance with 7.6.3.2 except that: .1 where "away from" is required, no segregation between the packages and the closed cargo transport units is required; and .2 where "separated from" is required, the segregation between the packages and the closed cargo transport units may be as for "away from" as defined in 7.6.3.2.

7.6.3.4 Segregation of dangerous goods in cargo transport units stowed in conventional cargo spaces

7.6.3.4.1 Dangerous goods in different closed cargo transport units (closed freight containers) stowed in holds and compartments not properly fitted to give a permanent stowage of the containers during transport shall be segregated from each other in accordance with 7.6.3.2 except that: .1 where “away from” is required, no segregation between the closed cargo transport units is required; and .2 where “separated from” is required, the segregation between the closed cargo transport units may be as for "away from" as defined in 7.6.3.2.

7.6.3.5 Segregation between bulk materials possessing chemical hazards and dangerous goods in packaged form

7.6.3.5.1 Unless otherwise required in this Code or in the IMSBC Code, segregation between bulk materials possessing chemical hazards and dangerous goods in packaged form shall be in accordance with the following table.

7.6.3.5.2 Segregation table

Dangerous goods in packaged form Bulk materials 1.1 1.3 2.2 (classified as CLASS 1.2 1.4 2.1 3 4.1 4.2 4.3 5.1 5.2 6.1 6.2 7 8 9 1.6 2.3 dangerous goods) 1.5 Flammable solids 4.1 4 3 2 2 2 2 X 1 X 1 2 X 3 2 1 X Substances liable 4.2 4 3 2 2 2 2 1 X 1 2 2 1 3 2 1 X to spontaneous combustion Substances which, 4.3 4 4 2 1 X 2 X 1 X 2 2 X 2 2 1 X in contact with water, emit flammable gases Oxidizing substances 5.1 4 4 2 2 X 2 1 2 2 X 2 1 3 1 2 X (agents) Toxic substances 6.1 2 2 X X X X X 1 X 1 1 X 1 X X X Radioactive material 7 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 X 3 X 2 X Corrosive substance 8 4 2 2 1 X 1 1 1 1 2 2 X 3 2 X X Miscellaneous 9 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X dangerous substances and articles Materials hazardous X X X X X X X X X X X X 3 X X X only in bulk (MHB)

Numbers and symbols relate to the following terms, as defined in this chapter: 1 – “Away from” 2 – “Separated from” 3 – “Separated by a complete compartment or hold from” 4 – “Separated longitudinally by an intervening complete compartment or hold from” X – The segregation, if any, is shown in the Dangerous Goods List in this Code or the individual entries in the IMSBC Code.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 521

539

Bilaga 1

Part 7 – Provisions concerning transport operations

7.6.3.5.3 Definitions of the segregation terms

Away from: Effectively segregated so that incompatible materials cannot Prohibited interact dangerously in the event of an accident but may be transported in the same compartment or hold or on deck provided stowage a minimum horizontal separation of 3 m, projected vertically, is 3 m 3 m provided.

Separated from: In different holds when stowed under deck. Provided an intervening deck is resistant to fire and liquid, a vertical separation, i.e. in different compartments, may be accepted as equivalent to this segregation.

Separated by a complete compartment or hold from: Either a vertical or a horizontal separation. If the decks are not resistant to fire and liquid, then only a longitudinal separation, i.e. by an intervening complete compartment, is acceptable.

Separated longitudinally by an intervening complete compartment or hold from: Vertical separation alone does not meet this requirement.

Legend (1) Reference bulk material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(2) Package containing incompatible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(3) Deck resistant to fire and liquid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Note: Vertical lines represent transverse watertight bulkheads between cargo spaces.

522 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

540

Bilaga 1

Chapter 7.7

Shipborne barges on barge-carrying ships

7.7.1 Introduction

7.7.1.1 The provisions of this chapter are applicable to shipborne barges which contain packaged dangerous goods or solid bulk materials possessing chemical hazards while aboard barge carrying ships.

7.7.1.2 Barges used for the shipborne transport of packaged dangerous goods or solid bulk materials possessing chemical hazards shall be of proper design and adequate strength to resist the stresses imposed by the conditions of the services in which they are employed and they shall be adequately maintained. Shipborne barges shall be approved in accordance with provisions for certification of a recognized classification society, or any organization approved by and acting on behalf of the competent authority of the countries concerned.

7.7.2 Definitions

7.7.2.1 Loading, for the purpose of this chapter, means the placement of cargo into a shipborne barge.

7.7.2.2 Stowage, for the purposes of this chapter, means the placement of a shipborne barge aboard the barge carrying ship.

7.7.3 Barge loading

7.7.3.1 Packages shall be examined and any found to be damaged, leaking or sifting shall not be loaded into a shipborne barge. Care shall be taken to ensure that excessive water, snow, ice or foreign matter adhering to packages shall be removed before loading into a shipborne barge.

7.7.3.2 Packages containing dangerous goods, cargo transport units and any other goods within a shipborne barge shall be adequately braced and secured for the voyage. Packages shall be loaded in such a way that there will be a minimum likelihood of damage to them and to any fittings during transport. Fittings on packages or portable tanks shall be adequately protected. 7.7.3.3 Certain dry dangerous goods may be transported in bulk in shipborne barges; this is indicated by the Code “BK2” in column 13 of the Dangerous Goods List. Where such solid bulk materials possessing chemical hazards are transported in shipborne barges, it shall be ensured that at all times the cargo is evenly distributed, properly trimmed and secured.

7.7.3.4 Shipborne barges into which packaged dangerous goods or solid bulk materials possessing chemical hazards are to be loaded shall be examined visually for hull or hatch cover damage which could impair watertight integrity. If there is evidence of such damage, the shipborne barge may not be used for the transport of packaged dangerous goods or solid bulk materials possessing chemical hazards and shall not be loaded.

7.7.3.5 Dangerous goods which have to be segregated from each other according to the provisions in chapter 7.2 shall not be transported in the same barge with the exception of dangerous goods which shall be segregated "away from" each other which may be transported in the same barge with the approval of the competent authority. In such cases an equivalent standard of safety shall be maintained.

7.7.3.6 Dangerous goods having a primary or subsidiary risk of classes 2.3, 6.1, 6.2, 7 (with the exception of UN 2908, 2909, 2910 and 2911), 8 and dangerous goods having a reference to 7.7.3.6 in column 16 of the Dangerous Goods List shall not be transported together with foodstuffs (see 1.2.1) in the same barge.

7.7.3.7 Notwithstanding the provisions in 7.7.3.6, the following dangerous goods may be transported with foodstuffs in the same barge provided that they are not loaded within 3 m from foodstuffs: .1 dangerous goods of packing group III of classes 6.1 and 8; .2 dangerous goods of packing group II of class 8; .3 any other dangerous goods of packing group III with a subsidiary risk of classes 6.1 or 8; and .4 dangerous goods having a reference to 7.7.3.7 in column 16 of the Dangerous Goods List.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 523

541

Bilaga 1

Part 7 – Provisions concerning transport operations

7.7.3.8 Shipborne barges containing a residue of a dangerous cargo or shipborne barges loaded with empty packagings still containing a residue of a dangerous substance shall comply with the same provisions as barges loaded with the substance itself.

7.7.3.9 Stowage of dangerous goods in flexible bulk containers

7.7.3.9.1 Flexible bulk containers shall be stowed in the barge in such way that there are no void spaces between the flexible bulk containers in the barge. If the flexible bulk containers do not completely fill the barge, adequate measures shall be taken to avoid shifting of cargo. 7.7.3.9.2 The maximum permissible height of the stack of the flexible bulk containers shall never exceed 3 high.

7.7.3.9.3 When flexible bulk containers are fitted with venting devices, the stowage of the flexible bulk containers in their barge shall not impede their function.

7.7.4 Stowage of shipborne barges

7.7.4.1 Stowage of shipborne barges carrying packaged dangerous goods or solid bulk materials possessing chemical hazards aboard barge carrying ships shall be as required for the substance in chapter 7.1 and in column 16 of the Dangerous Goods List. When a shipborne barge is loaded with more than one substance, and the stowage locations differ for the substances (i.e. some substances require on deck stowage while other substances require under deck stowage), the shipborne barge containing these substances shall be stowed on deck. 7.7.4.2 Provision shall be made to ensure that shipborne barges stowed under deck and loaded with cargoes requiring ventilation because of their dangerous nature are ventilated to the extent necessary. 7.7.4.3 Where it is required that a dangerous good shall be protected from sources of heat, this provision shall be applied to the shipborne barge as a whole, unless suitable alternative measures are provided. 7.7.4.4 When packaged dangerous goods or solid bulk materials possessing chemical hazards are loaded in shipborne barges aboard barge carrying ships having the capability of providing fixed fire fighting systems or fire detection systems to individual barges, care shall be taken to ensure that these systems are attached to the shipborne barge and operating properly.

7.7.4.5 When packaged dangerous goods or solid bulk materials possessing chemical hazards are loaded in shipborne barges aboard barge carrying ships having fixed fire fighting systems or fire detection systems installed in individual barge holds, care shall be taken to ensure that the ventilation closures on the shipborne barges are open, to permit the fire fighting medium to enter the barges in case of fire. 7.7.4.6 When ventilation ducts are provided to individual shipborne barges, the ventilation fans shall be secured when fire fighting medium is introduced into the hold to permit the medium to enter the shipborne barges.

7.7.5 Segregation between barges on board barge carrying ships

7.7.5.1 For barge carrying ships which incorporate other cargo spaces or any other method of stowage, the appropriate chapter shall apply to the relevant cargo space. 7.7.5.2 When a shipborne barge is loaded with two or more substances with different provisions for segregation, the most stringent segregation applicable shall be applied. 7.7.5.3 “Away from” and “separated from” require no segregation between shipborne barges. 7.7.5.4 “Separated by a complete compartment or hold from” means, for barge carrying ships with vertical holds, that separate holds are required. On barge carrying ships having horizontal barge levels, separate barge levels are required and the barges shall not be in the same vertical line.

7.7.5.5 “Separated longitudinally by an intervening complete compartment or hold from” means, for barge carrying ships with vertical holds, that separation by an intervening hold or engine room is required. On barge carrying ships having horizontal barge levels, separate barge levels and a longitudinal separation by at least two intervening barge spaces is required.

524 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

542

Bilaga 1

Chapter 7.8

Special requirements in the event of an incident and fire precautions involving dangerous goods

Note: The provisions of this chapter are not mandatory.

7.8.1 General

7.8.1.1 In the event of an incident involving dangerous goods, detailed recommendations are contained in The EmS Guide: Emergency Response Procedures for Ships Carrying Dangerous Goods. 7.8.1.2 In the event of personnel exposure during an incident involving dangerous goods, detailed recommendations are contained in Medical First Aid Guide for Use in Accidents Involving Dangerous Goods (MFAG). 7.8.1.3 In the event that a package containing dangerous goods is found to be suffering from breakage or leakage while the ship is in port, the port authorities should be informed and appropriate procedures should be followed.

7.8.2 General provisions in the event of incidents

7.8.2.1 Recommendations on emergency action may differ depending on whether or not the goods are stowed on deck or under deck or whether a substance is gaseous, liquid or solid. When dealing with incidents involving flammable gases, or flammable liquids with a flashpoint of 60°C closed-cup (c.c.) or below, all sources of ignition (such as naked lights, unprotected light bulbs, electric handtools) should be avoided. 7.8.2.2 In general, the recommendation is to wash spillages on deck overboard with copious quantities of water and, where there is likely to be a dangerous reaction with water, from as far away as practicable. Disposal of spilt dangerous goods overboard is a matter for judgement by the master, bearing in mind that the safety of the crew has priority over pollution of the sea. If it is safe to do so, spillages and leakages of substances, articles and materials identified in this Code as MARINE POLLUTANT should be collected for safe disposal. Inert absorbent material should be used for liquids. 7.8.2.3 Toxic, corrosive and/or flammable vapours in under deck cargo spaces should, where possible, be dispersed before undertaking any emergency action. Where a mechanical ventilation system is used, care will be necessary to ensure that flammable vapours are not ignited. 7.8.2.4 If there is any reason to suspect leakage of these substances, entry into a hold or cargo space should not be permitted until the master or responsible officer has taken all safety considerations into account and is satisfied that it is safe to do so. 7.8.2.5 Emergency entry into the hold under other circumstances should only be undertaken by trained crew wearing self-contained breathing apparatus and other protective clothing. 7.3.2.6 A careful inspection for structural damage should be carried out after dealing with spillages of substances corrosive to steel and cryogenic liquids.

7.8.3 Special provisions for incidents involving infectious substances

7.8.3.1 If any person responsible for the transport or opening of packages containing infectious substances becomes aware of damage to or leakage from such packages, he should: .1 avoid handling the package or keep handling to a minimum; .2 inspect adjacent packages for contamination and put aside any that have been contaminated; .3 inform the appropriate public health authority or veterinary authority, and provide information on any other countries of transit where persons may have been exposed to danger; and .4 notify the consignor and/or the consignee.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 525

543

Bilaga 1

Part 7 – Provisions concerning transport operations

7.8.3.2 Decontamination

A cargo transport unit, a bulk container or a cargo space of a ship, which has been used to transport infectious substances, shall be inspected for release of the substance before re-use. If infectious substances were released during transport, the cargo transport unit, the bulk container or the cargo space of a ship shall be decontaminated before it is re-used. Decontamination may be achieved by any means which effectively inactivates the infectious substance released.

7.8.4 Special provisions for incidents involving radioactive material

7.8.4.1 If it is evident that a package is damaged or leaking, or if it is suspected that the package may have leaked or been damaged, access to the package should be restricted and a qualified person should, as soon as possible, assess the extent of contamination and the resultant radiation level of the package. The scope of the assessment should include the package, the conveyance, the adjacent loading and unloading areas, and, if necessary, all other material which has been transported in the conveyance. When necessary, additional steps for the protection of persons, property and the environment, in accordance with provisions established by the relevant competent authority, should be taken to overcome and minimize the consequences of such leakage or damage.

7.8.4.2 Packages damaged or leaking radioactive contents in excess of allowable limits for normal conditions of transport may be removed to an acceptable interim location under supervision, but should not be forwarded until repaired or reconditioned and decontaminated.

7.8.4.3 In the event of accidents or incidents during the transport of radioactive material, emergency provisions, as established by relevant national and/or international organizations, should be observed to protect persons, property and the environment. Appropriate guidelines for such provisions are contained in the International Atomic Energy Agency’s document “Planning and Preparing for Emergency Response to Transport Accidents involving Radioactive Material”, Safety Standard Series No. TS-G-1.2 (ST-3), IAEA, Vienna (2002).

7.8.4.4 Attention is drawn to the latest versions of both The EmS Guide: Emergency Response Procedures for Ships Carrying Dangerous Goods and the Medical First Aid Guide for Use in Accidents Involving Dangerous Goods (MFAG).

7.8.4.5 Emergency response procedures should take into account the formation of other dangerous substances that may result from the reaction between the contents of a consignment and the environment in the event of an accident.

7.8.4.6 In the event of a package containing radioactive material suffering from breakage or leakage while the ship is in port, the port authorities should be informed and advice obtained from them or from the competent authority* . Procedures have been drawn up in many countries for summoning radiological assistance in any such emergency.

7.8.5 General fire precautions

7.8.5.1 The prevention of fire in a cargo of dangerous goods is achieved by practising good seamanship, observing in particular the following precautions: .1 keep combustible material away from ignition sources; .2 protect a flammable substance by adequate packing; .3 reject damaged or leaking packages; .4 stow packages protected from accidental damage or heating; .5 segregate packages from substances liable to start or spread fire; .6 where appropriate and practicable, stow dangerous goods in an accessible position so that packages in the vicinity of a fire may be protected; .7 enforce prohibition of smoking in dangerous areas and display clearly recognizable “NO SMOKING” notices or signs; and .8 the dangers from short-circuits, earth leakages or sparking will be apparent. Lighting and power cables and fittings should be maintained in good condition. Cables or equipment found to be unsafe should be disconnected. Where a bulkhead is required to be suitable for segregation purposes, cables and conduit penetrations of the decks and bulkheads should be sealed against the passage of gas and vapours.

* Reference is made to chapter 7.9 and the IAEA list of national competent authorities responsible for approvals and authorizations in respect of the transport of radioactive material. The list is updated annually.

526 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

544

Bilaga 1

Chapter 7.8 – Special requirements and fire precautions

When stowing dangerous goods on deck, the position and design of auxiliary machinery, electrical equipment and cable runs should be considered in order to avoid sources of ignition. 7.8.5.2 Fire precautions applying to individual classes, and where necessary to individual substances, are recommended in 7.8.2 and 7.8.6 to 7.8.9 and in the Dangerous Goods List.

7.8.6 Special fire precautions for class 1

7.8.6.1

.1 The greatest risk in the handling and transport of goods of class 1 is that of fire from a source external to the goods, and it is vital that any fire should be detected and extinguished before it can reach such goods. Consequently, it is essential that fire precautions, fire-fighting measures and equipment are of a high standard and ready for immediate application and use. .2 Compartments containing goods of class 1 and adjacent cargo spaces should be provided with a firedetection system. If such spaces are not protected by a fixed fire-extinguishing system, they should be accessible for fire-fighting operations. .3 No repair work should be carried out in a compartment containing goods of class 1. Special care should be exercised in carrying out repairs in any adjacent space. No welding, burning, cutting, or riveting operations involving the use of fire, flame, spark, or arc-producing equipment should be carried out in any space other than machinery spaces and workshops where fire-extinguishing arrangements are available, except in any emergency and, if in port, with prior authorization of the port authority.

7.8.7 Special fire precautions for class 2

7.8.7.1 Effective ventilation should be provided to remove any leakage of gas from within the cargo space or spaces, bearing in mind that some gases are heavier than air and may accumulate in dangerous concentrations in the lower part of the ship.

7.8.7.2 Measures should be taken to prevent leaking gases from penetrating into any other part of the ship.

7.8.7.3

.1 If there is any reason to suspect leakage of a gas, entry into cargo spaces or other enclosed spaces should not be permitted until the master or responsible officer has taken all safety considerations into account and is satisfied that it is safe to do so. Emergency entry under other circumstances should only be undertaken by trained crew wearing self-contained breathing apparatus, and protective clothing when recommended, and always under the supervision of a responsible officer. .2` Leakage from pressure receptacles containing flammable gases may give rise to explosive mixtures with air. Such mixtures, if ignited, may result in explosion and fire.

7.8.8 Special fire precautions for class 3

7.8.8.1 Flammable liquids give off flammable vapours which, especially in an enclosed space, form explosive mixtures with air. Such vapours, if ignited, may cause a “flashback” to the place in which the substances are stowed. Due regard should be paid to the provision of adequate ventilation to prevent accumulation of vapours.

7.8.9 Special fire precautions and fire fighting for class 7

7.8.9.1 The radioactive contents of Excepted, Industrial, and Type A packages are so restricted that, in the event of an accident and damage to the package, there is a high probability that any material released, or shielding efficiency lost, would not give rise to such radiological hazard as to hamper fire-fighting or rescue operations.

7.8.9.2 Type B(U) packages, Type B(M) packages and Type C packages are designed to be strong enough to withstand severe fire without significant loss of contents or dangerous loss of radiation shielding.

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 527

545

Bilaga 1

Chapter 7.9

Exemptions, approvals and certificates

7.9.1 Exemptions

Note 1 The provisions of this section do not apply to exemptions mentioned in chapters 1 to 7.8 of this Code and to approvals (including permits, authorizations or agreements) and certificates which are referred to in chapters 1 to 7.8 of this Code. For the said approvals and certificates, see 7.9.2. Note 2 The provisions of this section do not apply to class 7. For consignments of radioactive material for which conformity with any provision of this Code applicable to class 7 is impracticable, refer to 1.5.4. 7.9.1.1 Where this Code requires that a particular provision for the transport of dangerous goods shall be complied with, a competent authority or competent authorities (port State of departure, port State of arrival or flag State) may authorize any other provision by exemption if satisfied that such provision is at least as effective and safe as that required by this Code. Acceptance of an exemption authorized under this section by a competent authority not party to it is subject to the discretion of that competent authority. Accordingly, prior to any shipment covered by the exemption, the recipient of the exemption shall notify other competent authorities concerned.

7.9.1.2 Competent authority or competent authorities which have taken the initiative with respect to the exemption: .1 shall send a copy of such exemption to the International Maritime Organization which shall bring it to the attention of the Contracting Parties to SOLAS and/or MARPOL, as appropriate, and .2 if appropriate, take action to amend the IMDG Code to include the provisions covered by the exemption. 7.9.1.3 The period of validity of the exemption shall be not more than five years from the date of authorization. An exemption that is not covered under 7.9.1.2.2 may be renewed in accordance with the provisions of this section. 7.9.1.4 A copy of the exemption shall accompany each consignment when offered to the carrier for transport under the terms of the exemption. A copy of the exemption or an electronic copy thereof shall be maintained on board each ship transporting dangerous goods in accordance with the exemption, as appropriate.

7.9.2 Approvals (including permits, authorizations or agreements) and certificates

7.9.2.1 Approvals, including permits, authorizations or agreements, and certificates referred to in chapters 1 to 7.8 of this Code and issued by the competent authority (authorities when the Code requires a multilateral approval) or a body authorized by that competent authority (e.g. approvals for alternative packaging in 4.1.3.7, approval for segregation as in 7.3.4.1 or certificates for portable tanks in 6.7.2.18.1) shall be recognized, as appropriate: .1 by other contracting parties to SOLAS if they comply with the requirements of the International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea (SOLAS), 1974, as amended; and/or .2 by other contracting parties to MARPOL if they comply with the requirements of the International Convention for the Prevention of Pollution from Ships, 1973, as modified by the Protocol of 1978 relating thereto (MARPOL 73/78, Annex III), as amended.

7.9.3 Contact information for the main designated national competent authorities

Contact information for the main designated national competent authorities concerned is given in this * † paragraph . Corrections to these addresses should be sent to the Organization .

* Reference is made to MSC.1/Circ.1410, as may be amended, which provides a more comprehensive listing of contact information for competent authorities and bodies. † International Maritime Organization 4 Albert Embankment London SE1 7SR United Kingdom Email: info@imo.org Fax: +44 207587 3120

528 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

546

Bilaga 1

Chapter 7.9 – Exemptions, approvals and certificates

LIST OF CONTACT INFORMATION FOR THE MAIN DESIGNATED NATIONAL COMPETENT AUTHORITIES

Contact information for the main designated national Country competent authority ALGERIA Ministère des Transports/Direction de la Marine Marchande 119 Rue Didouche Mourad Alger ALGÉRIE Telephone: +213 26061 46 Telex: 66063 DGAF DZ

AMERICAN SAMOA Silila Patane Harbour Master Port Administration Pagopago American Samoa AMERICAN SAMOA 96799

ANGOLA National Director Marine Safety, Shipping and Ports National Directorate of Merchant Marine and Ports Rua Rainha Ginga 74, 4 Andar Luanda ANGOLA Telephone: +244 239 0034/397 984 Fax: +244 231 0375 Mobile: +244 924 393 36 Email: ispscode_angola@snet.co.ao

ARGENTINA Prefectura Naval Argentina (Argentine Coast Guard) Dirección de protección ambiental Departamento de protección ambiental y mercancías peligrosas Division mercancías y residuos peligrosos Avda. Eduardo Madero 235 4° piso, Oficina 4.36 y 4.37 Buenos Aires (C1106ACC) REPÚBLICA ARGENTINA Telephone: +54 11 4318 7669 Fax: +54 11 4318 7474 Email: dpma-mp@prefecturanaval.gov.ar

AUSTRALIA Manager, Ship Inspection Maritime Operations Australian Maritime Safety Authority GPO Box 2181 Canberra ACT 2601 AUSTRALIA Telephone: +61 2 6279 5048 Fax: +61 2 6279 5058 Email: psc@amsa.gov.au Website: www.amsa.gov.au

BAHAMAS The Director Bahamas Maritime Authority 120 Old Broad Street London, EC2N 1AR UNITED KINGDOM Telephone: +44 (0)20 7562 1300 Fax: +44 (0)20 7614 0650 Email: tech@bahamasmaritime.com Website: www.bahamasmaritime.com

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 529

547

Bilaga 1

Part 7 – Provisions concerning transport operations

Contact information for the main designated national Country competent authority BARBADOS Director of Maritime Affairs Ministry of Tourism and International Transport 2nd Floor, Carlisle House Hincks Street Bridgetown St. Michael BARBADOS Telephone: +1 246 426 2710/3342 Fax: +1 246 426 7882 Email: ctech@sunbeach.net

BELGIUM Brussels office Federal Public Service Mobility and Transport Directorate-General Maritime Transport Rue de Progrès 56 B-1210 Brussels BELGIUM Telephone: +32 2 277 3500 Fax: +32 2 277 4051 Email: dg.mar@mobilit.fgov.be Website: www.mobilit.fgov.be

Antwerp office Federale Overheidsdienst Mobiliteit en Vervoer Directoraat-generaal Maritiem Vervoer Scheepvaartcontrole Loodsgebouw Tavernierkaai 3 B-2000 Antwerpen BELGIUM Telephone: +32 3 229 0030 Fax: +32 3 229 0031 Email: hazmat.antwerpen@mobilit.fgov.be

Ostend office Federale Overheidsdienst Mobiliteit en Vervoer Directoraat-generaal Maritiem Vervoer Scheepvaartcontrole Natiënkaai 5 B-8400 Oostende BELGIUM Telephone: +32 59 56 1450 Fax: +32 59 56 1474 Email: hazmat.zeebrugge@mobilit.fgov.be

BELIZE Ports Commissioner Belize Port Authority P.O. Box 633 Belize City BELIZE, C.A. Telephone: +501 227 2540/0981 Fax: +501 227 2500

BRAZIL Diretoria de Portos e Costas (DPC-20) Rua Teófilo Otoni No. 04 Centro Rio de Janeiro CEP 20090-070 BRAZIL Telephone: +55 21 2104 5203 Fax: +55 21 2104 5202 Email: secom@dpc.mar.mil.br

530 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

548

Bilaga 1

Chapter 7.9 – Exemptions, approvals and certificates

Contact information for the main designated national Country competent authority BULGARIA Head office Captain Petar Petrov, Director Directorate “Quality Management” Bulgarian Maritime Administration 9 Dyakon Ignatii Str. Sofia 1000 REPUBLIC OF BULGARIA Telephone: +359 2 93 00 910/912 Fax: +359 2 93 00 920 Email: bma@marad.bg petrov@marad.bg

Regional offices Harbour-Master Directorate “Maritime Administration” – Bourgas 3 Kniaz Alexander Batemberg Str. Bourgas 8000 REPUBLIC OF BULGARIA Telephone: +359 56 875 775 Fax: +359 56 840 064 Email: hm_bs@marad.bg

Harbour-Master Directorate “Maritime Administration” – Varna 5 Primorski Bvd Varna 9000 REPUBLIC OF BULGARIA Telephone: +359 52 684 922 Fax: +359 52 602 378 Email: hm_vn@marad.bg

BURUNDI Minister Ministère des Transports, Postes et Télécommunications B.P. 2000 Bujumbura BURUNDI Telephone: +257 219 324 Fax: +257 217 773

CANADA The Chairman Marine Technical Review Board Director, Operations and Environmental Programs Marine Safety – Transport Canada Tower C, Place de Ville 330 Sparks Street, 10th Floor Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5 CANADA Telephone: +1 613 991 3132 +1 613 991 3143 +1 613 991 3139/40 Fax: +1 613 993 8196

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 531

549

Bilaga 1

Part 7 – Provisions concerning transport operations

Contact information for the main designated national Country competent authority CANADA Packaging approvals (continued) Director, Regulatory Affairs Transport Dangerous Goods Directorate Tower C, Place de Ville 330 Sparks Street, 9th Floor Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5 CANADA Telephone: +1 613 998 0519 +1 613 990 1163 +1 613 993 5266 Fax: +1 613 993 5925

CAPE VERDE The Director General Ministry of Infrastructure and Transport S. Vicente CAPE VERDE Telephone: +238 2 328 199/238 2 585 4643 Email: dgmp@cvtelecom.cv

CHILE Dirección General del Territorio Marítimo y de Marina Mercante Dirección de Seguridad y Operaciones Marítimas Servicio de Inspecciones Marítimas Divisón Prevención de Riesgos y Cargas Peligrosas Subida Cementerio No. 300 Valparaiso CHILE Telephone: +56 32 220 8699 +56 32 220 8654 +56 32 220 8692 Email: cargaspeligrosas@directemar.cl

CHINA Maritime Safety Administration People’s Republic of China 11 Jianguomen Nei Avenue Beijing 100736 CHINA Telephone: +86 10 6529 2588 +86 10 6529 2218 Fax: +86 10 6529 2245 Telex: 222258 CMSAR CN

COMOROS Ministre d’État Ministère du développement des infrastructures des postes et des télécommunications et des transports internationaux Moroni UNION DES COMORES Telephone: +269 744 287/735 794 Fax: +269 734 241/834 241 Mobile: +269 340 248 Email: houmedms@yahoo.fr

CROATIA Ministry of Maritime Affairs, Transport and Communication Marine Safety Division Prisavlje 14 1000 Zagreb REPUBLIC OF CROATIA Telephone: +385 1 611 5966 Fax: +385 1 611 5968 Email: pomorski-promet@zg.tel.hr

532 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

550

Bilaga 1

Chapter 7.9 – Exemptions, approvals and certificates

Contact information for the main designated national Country competent authority CROATIA Testing and certification of packagings (continued) Adriainspekt Ciottina 17/b 51000 Rijeka REPUBLIC OF CROATIA Telephone: +385 51 511 133 Fax: +385 51 36 176 Classification society for CSC containers (including IMO tanks) Croatian Register of Shipping Marasoviceva 67 21000 Split REPUBLIC OF CROATIA Telephone: +385 21 358 933 Fax: +385 21 358 159 CUBA Ministerio del Transporte Dirección de Seguridad e Inspección Marítima Boyeros y Tulipán Plaza Ciudad de la Habana CUBA Telephone: +53 7 881 6607 +53 7 881 9498 Fax: +53 7 881 1514 Email: dsim@mitrans.transnet.cu CYPRUS Department of Merchant Shipping Ministry of Communications and Works Kylinis Street Mesa Geitonia CY-4007 Lemesos P.O. Box 56193 CY-3305 Lemesos CYPRUS Telephone: +357 5 848 100 Fax: +357 5 848 200 Telex: 2004 MERSHIP CY Email: dms@cytanet.com.cy CZECH REPUBLIC Implementation Ministry of Transport of the Czech Republic Navigation Department Nábr. L. Svobody 12 110 15 Praha 1 CZECH REPUBLIC Telephone: +420 225 131 151 Fax: +420 225 131 110

Email: sekretariat.230@mdcr.cz Packaging, testing and certification CIMTO, s.p. Un Michelského lesa 336 146 23 Praha 4 CZECH REPUBLIC Telephone: +42 2 472 94 64 Fax: +42 2 472 36 76 IMET, s.r.o. Bažantni 697 165 00 Praha 6 CZECH REPUBLIC Telephone: +42 2 39 32 96 Fax: +42 2 29 23 70

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 533

551

Bilaga 1

Part 7 – Provisions concerning transport operations

Contact information for the main designated national Country competent authority CZECH REPUBLIC Classification of dangerous goods of all classes, except class 7 – radioac- (continued) tive materials Český lodní a prumysloý registr, s.r.o. (Czech Shipping and Industry Register, Ltd.) Jankovcova 10 170 00 Praha 7 CZECH REPUBLIC Telephone: +42 2 667 10001 Fax: +42 2 808 984 Telex: +42 2 122 874 csir c DEMOCRATIC Maritime Administration of the Democratic People's Republic of Korea PEOPLE'S REPUBLIC Ryonhwa-2 Dong OF KOREA Central District Pyongyang DEMOCRATIC PEOPLE'S REPUBLIC OF KOREA P.O.Box 416, Pyongyang Telephone: +850 2 18111 8059 Fax: +850 3 381 4410 Email: mab@silibank.com DENMARK Danish Maritime Authority P.O. Box 2605 Vermundsgade 38C 2100 Copenhagen Ø DENMARK Telephone: +45 39 17 44 00 Fax: +45 39 17 44 01 Email: SFS@dma.dk Packing, testing and certification Emballage og Transportinstituttet (E.T.I.) Dansk Teknologisk Institut Gregersensvej 2630 Tåstrup DENMARK Packagings in conformity with the IMDG Code will be marked “DK Eti” DJIBOUTI Director of Maritime Affairs Ministère de l’equipement et des transports P.O. Box 59 Djibouti DJIBOUTI Telephone: +253 357 913 Fax: +253 351 538/253 931/355 879 ECUADOR Dirección General de la Marine Mercante y del Litoral P.O. Box 7412 Guayaquil ECUADOR Telephone: +593 4 526 760 Fax: +593 4 324 246 Telex: 04 3325 DIGMER ED EQUATORIAL GUINEA The Director General (Maritime Affairs) Ministerio de Transportes, Tecnologia, Correos y Telecomunicaciones Malabo REPUBLICA DE GUINEA ECUATORIAL Telephone: +240 275 406 Fax: +240 092 618

534 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

552

Bilaga 1

Chapter 7.9 – Exemptions, approvals and certificates

Contact information for the main designated national Country competent authority ERITREA Director General Department of Maritime Transport Ministry of Transport and Communications ERITREA Telephone: +291 1 121 317/189 156/185 251 Fax: +291 1 184 690 / 186 541 Email: motcrez@eol.com.er

ESTONIA Estonian Maritime Administration Maritime Safety Division Valge 4 EST-11413 Tallinn ESTONIA Telephone: +372 6205 700/715 Fax: +372 6205 706 Email: mot@vta.ee

ETHIOPIA Maritime Affairs Authority P.O. Box 1B61 Addis Ababa ETHIOPIA Telephone: +251 11 550 36 83/38 Fax: +251 11 550 39 60 Mobile: +251 91 151 39 73 Email: maritime@ethione.et

FIJI The Director of Maritime Safety Fiji Islands Maritime Safety Administration GPO Box 326 Suva FIJI Telephone: +679 331 5266 Fax: +679 330 3251 Email: fimsa@connect.com.fj

FINLAND Transport Safety Agency Trafi P.O. Box 320 FI-00101 Helsinki FINLAND Telephone: +358 20 618 500 Fax: +358 20 618 5095 Email: kirjaamo@trafi.fi

Packaging and certification institute Safety Technology Authority (TUKES) P.O. Box 123 FI-00181 Helsinki FINLAND Telephone: +358 96 1671 Fax: +358 96 1674 66 Email: kirjaamo@tukes.fi

FRANCE MTETM/DGMT/MMD Arche sud 92055 La Défense Cedex FRANCE Telephone: +33 (0)1 40 81 86 49 Fax: +33 (0)1 40 81 10 65 Email: olga.lefevre@equipement.gouv.fr

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 535

553

Bilaga 1

Part 7 – Provisions concerning transport operations

Contact information for the main designated national Country competent authority FRANCE Organizations authorized to carry out testing and type approval of (continued) packaging 1 Bureau de vérifications techniques (BVT) ZAC de la Cerisaie 31, rue de Montjean 94266 Fresnes Cedex FRANCE 2 Laboratoire d'études et de recherche des emballages métalliques (LEREM) 3, rue Fernand Hainaut 93400 Saint-Ouen FRANCE 3 Laboratoire national d'essais (LNE) Laboratoire de Trappes 5, avenue Enrico Fermi 78197 Trappes Cedex FRANCE 4 CEREM-LNE Sud 190, rue Georges Besse 30035 Nîmes Cedex 1 FRANCE Organizations authorized to carry out checks of mass-produced packagings 1 Bureau de vérifications techniques (BVT) 2 Laboratoire d'études et de recherche des emballages métalliques (LEREM) 3 Laboratoire national d'essais (LNE) 4 Bureau Veritas (BV) The BVT, the LNE and the BV are each authorized to carry out checks of mass-produced IBCs, within their respective areas of authority. Organizations authorized to carry out testing and initial and periodic inspections of metal and rigid plastics IBCs and of composite IBCs with plastic inner receptacles 1 Bureau de vérifications techniques (BVT) 2 Laboratoire national d'essais (LNE) 3 Bureau Veritas (BV) 4 Groupement des associations de propriétaires d'appareils à vapeur et électriques (GAPAVE) Organizations authorized for the approval of tanks 1 American Bureau of Shipping (ABS) 2 Bureau Veritas (BV) 3 Lloyd's Register of Shipping (LR) 4 Groupement des associations de propriétaires d'appareils à vapeur et éléctriques (GAPAVE)*

GAMBIA The Director General Gambia Port Authority P.O. Box 617 Banjul THE GAMBIA Telephone: +220 4 227 270/4 227 260/4 227 266 Fax: +220 4 227 268

* For road tankers only.

536 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

554

Bilaga 1

Chapter 7.9 – Exemptions, approvals and certificates

Contact information for the main designated national Country competent authority GERMANY Federal Ministry of Transport, Building and Urban Affairs Division UI 33 – Transport of Dangerous Goods P.O. Box 20 01 00 D 53175 Bonn GERMANY Telephone: +49 228 3000 or 300-extension +49 228 300 2643 Fax: +49 228 300 3428 Email: Ref-UI33@bmvbs.bund.de

GHANA The Director General Ghana Maritime Authority P.M.B. 34, Ministries Post Office Ministries – Accra GHANA Telephone: +233 21 662 122/684 392 Fax: +233 21 677 702 Email: info@ghanamaritime.org

GREECE Ministry of Mercantile Marine Safety of Navigation Division International Relations Department 150 Gr. Lambraki Av. 185 18 Piraeus GREECE Telephone: +301 4191188 Fax: +301 4128150 Telex: +212022, 212239 YEN GR Email: dan@yen.gr

GUINEA BISSAU The Minister Ministry of Transport & Communication Av. 3 de Agosto, Bissau GUINEA BISSAU Telephone: +245 212 583/245 211 308

GUYANA Guyana Maritime Authority/Administration Ministry of Public Works and Communications Building Top Floor Fort Street Kingston Georgetown REPUBLIC OF GUYANA Telephone: +592 226 3356 +592 225 7330 +592 226 7842 Fax: +592 226 9581 Email: MARAD@networksgy.com

ICELAND Iceland Maritime Administration Verturvör 2 IS-202 Kópavogur ICELAND Telephone: +354 560 0000 Fax: +354 560 0060 Email: skrifstofa@vh.is

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 537

555

Bilaga 1

Part 7 – Provisions concerning transport operations

Contact information for the main designated national Country competent authority ICELAND Directorate of Shipping (continued) Hringbraut 121 P.O. Box 7200 127 Reykjavik ICELAND Telephone: +354 1 25844 Fax: +354 1 29835 Telex: 2307 ISINFO

INDIA The Directorate General of Shipping Jahz Bhawan Walchand Hirachand Marg Bombay 400 001 INDIA Telephone: +91 22 263651 Telex: +DEGESHIP 2813-BOMBAY

Packaging, testing and certification Indian Institute of Packaging Bombay Madras Calcutta INDIA

INDONESIA Director of Marine Safety Directorate-General of Sea Communication (Department Perhubungan) Jl. Medan Merdeka Barat No. 8 Jakarta Pusat INDONESIA Telephone: +62 381 3269 Fax: +62 384 0788

IRAN (ISLAMIC Director General of Port Affairs REPUBLIC OF) Ports and Shipping Organization PSO Building, South Didar Ave. Shahid Haghani Highway, Vanak Square Tehran IRAN Telephone: +98 21 8493 2201 Fax: +98 21 8493 2227

IRELAND The Chief Surveyor Marine Survey Office Department of Transport Leeson Lane Dublin 2 IRELAND Telephone: +353 1 604 14 20 Fax: +353 1 604 14 08 Email: mso@transport.ie

ISRAEL Shipping and Ports Inspectorate Itzhak Rabin Government Complex Building 2 Pal-Yam 15a Haifa 31999 ISRAEL Telephone: +972 4 8632080 Fax: +972 4 8632118 Email: techni@mot.gov.il

538 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

556

Bilaga 1

Chapter 7.9 – Exemptions, approvals and certificates

Contact information for the main designated national Country competent authority ITALY Italian Coast Guard Headquarters Ponte dei Mille 16100 Genoa ITALY Telephone: +39 010 25 18 154 + 102 +39 010 25 18 154 + 111 Fax: +39 010 24 78 245 Email: 001@sicnavge.it 005@sicnavge.it

JAMAICA The Maritime Authority of Jamaica 4th Floor, Dyoll Building 40 Knutsford Boulevard Kingston 5 JAMAICA, W.I. Telephone: +1 876 929 2201 +1 876 754 7260/5 Telex: +1 876 7256 Email: maj@jamaicaships.com Website: www.jamaicaships.com

Testing and certifying authority The Bureau of Standards 6 Winchester Road P.O. Box 113 Kingston JAMAICA Telephone: +1 809 92 63140 7 Telex: 2291 STANBUR Jamaica Cable: STANBUREAU

JAPAN Inspection and Measurement Division Maritime Bureau Ministry of Land, Infrastructure and Transport 2-1-3 Kasumigaseki, Chiyoda-ku Tokyo JAPAN Telephone: +81 3 5253 8639 Fax: +81 3 5253 1644 Email: MRB_KSK@mlit.go.jp

Packaging, testing and certification Nippon Hakuyohin Kentei Kyokai (HK) (The Ship Equipment Inspection Society of Japan) 3-32, Kioi-Cho, Chiyoda-ku Tokyo JAPAN Telephone: +81 3 3261 6611 Fax: +81 3 3261 6979 Packagings, IBCs and large packagings in conformity with the IMDG Code will be marked “J”, “J/JG” or “J/HK”.

KENYA Director General Kenya Maritime Authority P.O. Box 95076 (80104) Mombasa KENYA Telephone: +254 041 2318398/9 Fax: +254 041 2318397 Email: nkarigithu@yahoo.co.uk info@maritimeauthority.co.ke karigithu@ikenya.com

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 539

557

Bilaga 1

Part 7 – Provisions concerning transport operations

Contact information for the main designated national Country competent authority KENYA Ministry of Transport & Communications (continued) P.O. Box 52692 Nairobi KENYA Telephone: +254 020 2729200 Fax: +254 020 2724553 Email: motc@insightkenya.com peterthuo_2004@yahoo.com LATVIA Maritime Administration of Latvia Maritime Safety Department Trijadibas iela, 5 LV-1048 Riga LATVIA Telephone: +371 670 62 171 +371 670 62 120 Fax: +371 678 60 083 Email: janis.sticenko@lja.lv Website: www.jurasadministracija.lv Classification Societies American Bureau of Shipping Bureau Veritas Det Norske Veritas Lloyd's Register of Shipping Russian Maritime Register of Shipping LIBERIA Commissioner/Administration Bureau of Maritime Affairs P.O. Box 10-9042 1000 Monrovia 10 Monrovia LIBERIA Telephone: +231 227 744/37747/510 201 Fax: +231 226 069 Email: maritime@liberia.net Testing and certification American Bureau of Shipping Bureau Veritas China Classification Society Det Norske Veritas Germanischer Lloyd Korean Register of Shipping Lloyd's Register of Shipping Nippon Kaiji Kyokai Polski Rejestr Statkow Registro Italiano Navale Russian Maritime Register of Shipping LITHUANIA Implementation Ministry of Transport and Communications Water Transport Department Gedimino Av. 17 01505 Vilnius LITHUANIA Telephone: +370 5 239 3986 Fax: +370 5 212 4335 Email: d.krivickiene@transp.lt

540 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

558

Bilaga 1

Chapter 7.9 – Exemptions, approvals and certificates

Contact information for the main designated national Country competent authority LITHUANIA Inspection (continued) Lithuanian Maritime Safety Administration J. Janonio Str. 24 92251 Klaipeda LITHUANIA Telephone: +370 46 469 662 Fax: +370 46 469 600 Email: alvydas.nikolajus@msa.lt

MADAGASCAR Director Agence Portuaire Maritime et Fluviale (APMF) P.O. Box 581 Antananarivo-101 MADAGASCAR Telephone: +261 20 242 5701 Telephone/Fax: +261 20 222 5860 Mobile: +261 320 229 259 Email: spapmf.dt@mttpat.gov.mg

MALAWI Director of Marine Services Marine Department Ministry of Transport & Civil Aviation Private Bag A81 Capital City Lilongwe MALAWI Telephone: +265 1 755 546/752 666 Direct line: 753 531 Fax: +265 1 750 157/758 894 Email: marinedepartment@malawi.net marinesafety@africa-online.net

MALAYSIA Director Marine Department Peninsular Malaysia P.O. Box 12 42009 Port Kelang Selangor MALAYSIA Telex: MA 39748

Director Marine Department, Sabah P.O. Box 5 87007 Labuan Sabah MALAYSIA

Director Marine Department, Sarawak P.O. Box 530 93619 Kuching Sarawak MALAYSIA

MARSHALL ISLANDS Office of the Maritime Administrator Maritime Operations Department Republic of the Marshall Islands 11495 Commerce Park Drive Reston, Virginia 20191-1507 USA Telephone: +1 703 620 4880 Fax: +1 703 476 8522 Telex: 248403 IRI UR Email: maritime@register-iri.com

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 541

559

Bilaga 1

Part 7 – Provisions concerning transport operations

Contact information for the main designated national Country competent authority MAURITIUS Director of Shipping Ministry of Land Transport, Shipping and Public Safety New Government Centre, 4 Floor Port Louis MAURITIUS Telephone: +230 201 2115 Fax: +230 211 7699/216 1612/201 3417 Mobile: +230 774 0764 Email: pseebaluck@mail.gov.mu

MEXICO Stowage, segregation, labelling and documentation of goods Coordinación General de Puertos y Marina Mercante Secretaría de Comunicaciones y Transportes Avenida Nuevo León no. 210, Piso 19 Colonia Hipódromo Condesa, C.P. 06100 México, Distrito Federal MEXICO Telephone: +52 55 5265 3110 Fax: +52 55 5265 3108 Email: achacon@sct.gob.mx

Receipt and processing of notifications in the event of a package falling overboard Secretaría de Marina Eje 2 Oriente, tramo Heroica Escuela Naval Militar no. 861 Colonia Los Cipreses, C.P. 04830 México, Distrito Federal MEXICO Telephone: +52 55 5624 6500 Email: subsrio@semar.gob.mx

Laboratory testing of packagings containing dangerous goods Dirección General de la Sociedad Mexicana de Normalización y Certificación S.C. (NORMEX) Avenida San Antonio no. 256, Piso 7 Colonia Ampliación Nápoles, C.P. 03849 MEXICO Telephone: +52 55 5598 3036 Fax: +52 55 5598 5899 Email: normex@normex.com.mx

MONTENEGRO Ministry of Interior and Public Administration of the Republic of Montenegro Department for Contingency Plans and Civil Security REPUBLIC OF MONTENEGRO Telephone: +382 81 241 590 Fax: +382 81 246 779 Email: mup.emergency@cg.yu

MOROCCO Direction de la Marine Marchande et des Pêches Maritimes Boulevard EI Hansali Casablanca MOROCCO Telephone: +1 212 227 8092 +1 212 222 1931 Telex: 24613 MARIMAR M 22824

542 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

560

Bilaga 1

Chapter 7.9 – Exemptions, approvals and certificates

Contact information for the main designated national Country competent authority MOZAMBIQUE General Director National Maritime Authority (INAMAR) Av. Marquês do Pombal No. 297 P.O. Box 4317 Maputo MOZAMBIQUE Telephone: +258 21 320 552 Fax: +258 21 324 007 Mobile: +258 82 153 0280 Email: inamar@tvcabo.co.mz

Testing and certification of packaging, intermediate bulk containers and large packaging Instituto Nacional de Normalização e Qualidade (INNOQ) Av. 25 de Setembro No. 1179, 2nd Floor Maputo MOZAMBIQUE Telephone: +258 21 303 822/3 Fax: +258 21 304 206 Mobile: +258 823 228 840 Email: innoq@emilmoz.com

NAMIBIA Director of Maritime Affairs Ministry of Works, Transport and Communications Private Bag 13341 6719 Bell Street Snyman Circle, Windhoek NAMIBIA Telephone: +264 61 208 8025/6 Direct line: 208 8111 Fax: +264 61 240 024/224 060 Mobile: +264 811 220 599 Email: mmnangolo@mwtc.gov.na

NETHERLANDS Ministry of Transport, Public Works and Water Management P.O. Box 20904 2500 EX The Hague NETHERLANDS Telephone: +31 70 351 6171 Fax: +31 70 351 1479

Ministry of Transport, Public Works, Transport and Water Management Inspectorate P.O. Box 90653 2509 LR The Hague NETHERLANDS Telephone: +31 88 489 0000 Fax: +31 70 456 2413 Email: via www.ivw.nl/english/contact

Netherlands Antilles Directorate of Shipping and Maritime Affairs Seru Mahuma z/n Curaçao Netherlands Antilles (NETHERLANDS) Telephone: +599(9) 839 3700 +599(9) 839 3701 Fax: +599(9) 868 9964 Email: sina@onenet.an expertise@dsmz.org management@dsmz.org

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 543

561

Bilaga 1

Part 7 – Provisions concerning transport operations

Contact information for the main designated national Country competent authority NEW ZEALAND Maritime New Zealand Level 10, Optimation House 1 Grey Street PO Box 27-006 Wellington NEW ZEALAND Telephone: +64 4 473 0111 Fax: +64 4 494 1263 Email: enquiries@maritimenz.govt.nz Website: www.maritimenz.govt.nz The authorized organizations which have delegated authority from the Director of Maritime Safety for the approval, inspection and testing of all portable tanks, tank containers and freight containers are: American Bureau of Shipping Bureau Veritas Det Norske Veritas Germanischer Lloyd Lloyd's Register of Shipping NIGERIA Nigerian Maritime Administration and Safety Agency (NIMASA) Maritime House 4 Burma Road, Apapa PMB 12861, GPO Marina Lagos NIGERIA Telephone: +234 587 2214 / 580 4800/9 Fax: +234 587 1329 Telex: 23891 NAMARING Website: www.nimasa.gov.ng NORWAY Norwegian Maritime Directorate Smedasundet 50A N-5528 Haugesund NORWAY Telephone: +47 5274 5000 Fax: +47 5274 5001 Email: postmottak@sjofartsdir.no Certification of packaging and IBCs Det Norske Veritas AS Veritasveien 1 N-1322 Høvik NORWAY Telephone: +47 67 57 99 00 Fax: +47 67 57 99 11 Email: TNCNO754@dvn.com Certification of CSC containers Det Norske Veritas AS Veritasveien 1 N-1322 Høvik NORWAY Telephone: +47 67 57 99 00 Fax: +47 67 57 99 11 Email: mptno876@dnv.com Lloyd's Register EMEA P.O. Box 1562 Vika N-0253 Oslo NORWAY Telephone: +47 23 23 92 70 Fax: +47 23 23 92 71 Email: oslo@lr.org

544 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

562

Bilaga 1

Chapter 7.9 – Exemptions, approvals and certificates

Contact information for the main designated national Country competent authority NORWAY Certification of IMO tanks (continued) Det Norske Véritas AS Veritasveien 1 N-1322 Høvik NORWAY Telephone: +47 67 57 99 00 Fax: +47 67 57 99 11 Email: mptno876@dnv.com

PAKISTAN Mercantile Marine Department 70/4 Timber Hard N.M. Reclamation Keamari, Post Box No. 4534 Karachi 75620 PAKISTAN Telephone: +92 21 2851306 +92 21 2851307 Fax: +92 21 4547472 (24 hours) +92 21 4547897 Telex: 29822 DGPS PK (24 hours)

PANAMA Autoridad Marítima de Panamá Edificio 5534 Diablo Heights P.O. Box 0816 01548 Panamá PANAMA Telephone: +507 501 5000 Fax: +507 501 5007 Email: ampadmon@amp.gob.pa Website: www.amp.gob.pa

PAPUA NEW GUINEA First Assistant Secretary Department of Transport Division of Marine P.O. Box 457 Konedobu PAPUA NEW GUINEA (PNG) Telephone: +675 211866 Telex: 22203

PERU Dirección General de Capitanías y Guardacostas Marina de Guerra del Perú Jr. Constitución No. 150 Callao PERU Telephone: +51 1 613 6857 Fax: +51 1 613 6857 / 6726 Telex: 26042 PE COSTCAL Email: dicapi.medioambiente@dicapi.mil.pe

Dirección General de Capitanías y Guardacostas Comandancia de Operaciones Guardacostas Constitución 150 Callao PERU Telephone: +51 1 4291547/4200766/4202020 Fax: +51 1 4291547 Email: pemcc@dicapi.mil.pe/comoperguard@dicapi.mil.pe

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 545

563

Bilaga 1

Part 7 – Provisions concerning transport operations

Contact information for the main designated national Country competent authority PERU Dirección General de Capitanías y Guardacostas (continued) Costera Paita Paita PERU Telephone: +51 1 73 211670 Fax: +51 1 73 211670 Email: costera.paita@dicapi.mil.pe MMSI: 007600121 Radio Call Sign: OBY2 Lenguaje entendido: Español/ingles

Dirección General de Capitanías y Guardacostas Costera Callao Constitución 150 Callao PERU Telephone: +51 1 4299798 /4200177 Fax: +51 1 4299798 Email: costera.callao@dicapi.mil.pe MMSI: 007600125 Radio Call Sign: OB3 Lenguaje entendido: Español / ingles Telephone: +51 1 6136868 anexo 6671 / anexo 6752 Fax: +51 1 6136856 / +51 1 4121913 Email: dicaasuntos@dicapi.mil.pe

PHILIPPINES Philippines Ports Authority Port of Manila Safety Staff P.O. Box 193 Port Area Manila 2803 PHILIPPINES Telephone: +63 2473441 to 49

POLAND Ministry of Maritime Economy Department of Maritime Safety 00-928 Warsaw ul. Chałubińskiego 4/6 POLAND Telephone: +48 22 630 15 40 Fax: +48 22 830 09 47

Packaging, testing and certification Centralny Ośrodek Badawczo-Rozwojowy Opakowań ul.Konstancińska 11 02-942 Warszawa POLAND Telephone: +48 22 42 20 11 Fax: +48 22 42 23 03 Telex: 812473 Packagings in conformity with the IMDG Code will be marked “PL”.

546 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

564

Bilaga 1

Chapter 7.9 – Exemptions, approvals and certificates

Contact information for the main designated national Country competent authority POLAND Classification societies (continued) For CSC Containers Polski Rejestr Statków (Polish Register of Shipping) Al.Gen.J.Hallera 126 80-416 Gdańsk POLAND Telephone: +48 58 41 17 64 +48 58 46 03 82 +48 58 41 64 82 Fax: +48 58 46 03 92 +48 58 46 13 96 Telex: 0512 952 PRS PL PORTUGAL Direcção-Geral de Navegação e dos Transportes Marítimos Praça Luis de Camões, 22 – 2° Dto 1200 Lisboa PORTUGAL Telephone: +351 1 373821 Fax: +351 1 373826 Telex: 16753 SEMM PO REPUBLIC OF KOREA Maritime Technology Division Maritime Safety Policy Bureau Ministry of Land, Transport and Maritime Affairs (MLTM) 88, Gwanmunro, Gwacheon-si, Gyeonggi-do, 427-712 REPUBLIC OF KOREA Telephone: +82 2 2110 8590 Fax: +82 2 504 3062

RUSSIAN Department of State Policy for Maritime and River Transport FEDERATION* Ministry of Transport of the Russian Federation Rozhdestvenka Street, 1, bldg. 1 Moscow 109012 RUSSIAN FEDERATION Telephone: +7 495 926 14 74

Classification society has been designated as competent inspector agency for the approval, acceptance and all consequential activities connected with IMO Type tanks, CSC containers, IBCs and packaging to be registered in the Russian Federation: Russian Maritime Register of Shipping Telephone: +78 123 128 878 +78 123 140 743 +78 123 141 087 Telex: 121525 RSSU RU Email: pobox@rs-head.spb.ru Ministry of Transport of the Russian Federation Regulation of Maritime Transport Operation Department 1/4 Rozhdestvenka Street Moscow 103759 RUSSIAN FEDERATION Telephone: +7 095 151 3839 +7 095 151 3406 +7 095 151 3839 Telex: 411197 MMF RU

* Except for governmental explosives

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 547

565

Bilaga 1

Part 7 – Provisions concerning transport operations

Contact information for the main designated national Country competent authority RUSSIAN Packaging, testing and certification * FEDERATION Central Marine Research and Design Institute (CNIIMF) (continued) 6, Kavalergardskaya Street Saint Petersburg 193015 RUSSIAN FEDERATION Telephone: +7 812 275 89 47 Fax: +7 812 274 38 64 Telex: 821483 CNIMF RU

SAINT KITTS Department of Maritime Affairs AND NEVIS Director of Maritime Affairs Ministry of Transport P.O. Box 186 Needsmust ST. KITTS, W.I. Telephone: +869 466 7032/4846 Fax: +869 465 0604/9475 Email: Maritimeaffairs@yahoo.com

St. Kitts and Nevis International Registrar of Shipping and Seamen West Wing, York House 48-50 Western Road Romford RM1 3LP UNITED KINGDOM Telephone: +44 1708 380 400 Fax: +44 1708 380 401 Email: mail@stkittsregistry.net

SAO TOME & PRINCIPE The Minister Ministry of Public Works, Infrastructure & Land Planning C.P. 171 SAO TOME & PRINCIPE Telephone: +239 223 203/239 226 368 Fax: +239 222 824

SAUDI ARABIA Port Authority Saudi Arabia Civil Defence Riyadh SAUDI ARABIA Telephone: +966 1 464 9477

SEYCHELLES Director General Seychelles Maritime Safety Administration P.O. Box 912 Victoria, Mahe SEYCHELLES Telephone: +248 224 866 Fax: +248 224 829 Email: dg@msa.sc

SIERRA LEONE The Executive Director Sierra Leone Maritime Administration Maritime House Government Wharf Ferry Terminal P.O. Box 313 Freetown SIERRA LEONE Telephone: +232 22 221 211 Fax: +232 22 221 215 Email: slma@sierratel.sl slmaoffice@yahoo.com

* Except for governmental explosives

548 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

566

Bilaga 1

Chapter 7.9 – Exemptions, approvals and certificates

Contact information for the main designated national Country competent authority SINGAPORE Maritime and Port Authority of Singapore Shipping Division 21st Storey PSA Building 460 Alexandra Road SINGAPORE 119963 Telephone: +65 375 1931/6223/1600 Fax: +65 375 6231 Email: shipping@mpa.gov.sg

SLOVENIA Uprava Republike Slovenije za pomorstvo Ukmarjev trg 2 66 000 Koper SLOVENIA Telephone: +386 66 271 216 Fax: +386 66 271 447 Telex: +34 235 UP POM SI

SOUTH AFRICA South African Maritime Safety Authority P.O. Box 13186 Hatfield 0028 Pretoria SOUTH AFRICA Telephone: +27 12 342 3049 Fax: +27 12 342 3160

South African Maritime Safety Authority Hatfield Gardens, Block E (Ground Floor) Corner Arcadia and Grosvenor Street Hatfield 0083 Pretoria SOUTH AFRICA

Head Office Administration Chief Director Chief Directorate – Shipping Department of Transport Private Bag X193 0001 Pretoria SOUTH AFRICA Telephone: +27 12 290 2904 Fax: +27 12 323 7009

Durban, East London, Port Elizabeth and Richards Bay Chief Ship Surveyor Eastern Zone Department of Transport Marine Division Private Bag X54309 Durban SOUTH AFRICA Telephone: +27 12 3071501 Fax: +27 23 3064983

Cape Town, Saldanha Bay and Mossel Bay Chief Ship Surveyor Western Zone Department of Transport Marine Division Private Bag X7025 8012 Roggebaai SOUTH AFRICA Telephone: +2721 216 170 Fax: +2721 419 0730

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 549

567

Bilaga 1

Part 7 – Provisions concerning transport operations

Contact information for the main designated national Country competent authority SPAIN Dirección General de la Marina Mercante Subdirección General de Seguridad Marítima y Contaminación c/Ruiz de Alarcón, 1 28071 Madrid SPAIN Telephone: +34 91 597 92 69/70 Fax: +34 91 597 92 87 Email: mercancias.peligrosas@fomento.es pmreal@fomento.es

Subdirección General de Calidad y Seguridad Industrial Ministerio de Industria, Turismo y Comercio Paseo de la Castellana, 160 28071 Madrid SPAIN Telephone: +34 91 349 43 03 Fax: +34 91 349 43 00

SUDAN Director Maritime Administration Directorate Ministry of Transport Port Sudan P.O. Box 531 SUDAN Telephone: +249 311 825 660 Fax: +249 311 831 276 Mobile: +249 912 51 105/310 997 Telephone/Fax: +249 1 837 742 15 Email: smaco22@yahoo.com

SWEDEN Swedish Transport Agency Maritime Department Box 653 SE-601 78 Norrköping SWEDEN Telephone: +46 771 503 503 Fax: +46 11 239/934 Email: sjofart@transportstyrelsen.se

SP, Swedish National Testing and Research Institute Building Technology and Mechanics Box 857 SE-501 15 Borås SWEDEN Telephone: +46 33 165 000 Fax: +46 33 135 502

SWITZERLAND Office suisse de la navigation maritime Nauenstrasse 49 P.O. Box CH-4002 Basel SWITZERLAND Telephone: +41 61 270 91 20 Fax: +41 61 270 91 29 Email: dv-ssa@eda.admin.ch

550 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

568

Bilaga 1

Chapter 7.9 – Exemptions, approvals and certificates

Contact information for the main designated national Country competent authority TANZANIA Director General Surface & Marine Transport Regulatory Authority (SUMATRA) P.O. Box 3093 Dar es Salaam TANZANIA Telephone: +255 22 213 5081 Mobile: +255 744 781 865 Fax: +255 22 211 6697 Email: dg@sumatra.or.tz

Ministry of Infrastructure Development P.O. Box 9144 Dar es Salaam TANZANIA Telephone: +255 22 212 2268 Fax: +255 22 211 2751/212 2079 Mobile: +254 748 7404/748 5404 Email: brufunjo@yahoo.com

THAILAND Ministry of Transport and Communications Ratchadamnoen-Nok Avenue Bangkok 10100 THAILAND Telephone: +66 2 2813422 Fax: +66 2 2801714 Telex: 70000 MINOCOM TH

TUNISIA Ministère du Transport Direction Générale de la Marine Marchande Avenue 7 novembre (près de l’aéroport) 2035 Tunis B.P. 179 Tunis cedex TUNISIA Telephone: +216 71 806 362 Fax: +216 71 806 413

TURKEY Prime Ministry Undersecretariat for Maritime Affairs General Directorate for Maritime Transportation GMK BLV. No:128/A 06570 Maltepe-ANKARA TURKEY Telephone: +90 312 2321207 +90 312 2321249 Fax: +90 312 2313306 Email: dangerousgoods@uma.gov.tr

UNITED ARAB National Transport Authority EMIRATES Marine Affairs Department P.O. Box 900 Abu Dhabi UNITED ARAB EMIRATES Telephone: +9712 4182 124 Fax: +9712 4491 500 Email: marine@nta.gov.ae

UNITED KINGDOM Maritime and Coastguard Agency Bay 2/21 Spring Place 105 Commercial Road Southampton, SO15 1EG UNITED KINGDOM Telephone: +44 23 8032 9100 Fax: +44 23 8032 9204 Email: dangerous.goods@mcga.gov.uk

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 551

569

Bilaga 1

Part 7 – Provisions concerning transport operations

Contact information for the main designated national Country competent authority UNITED STATES US Department of Transportation Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration Office of International Standards East building / PHH-70 1200 New Jersey Ave, S.E. Washington, D.C. 20590 USA Telephone: +1 202 366 0656 Fax: +1 202 366 5713 Email: infocntr@dot.gov Website: hazmat.dot.gov

United States Coast Guard Hazardous Materials Standards Division (CG-5223) 2100 Second Street, S.W. Washington, D.C. 20593-7126 USA Telephone: +1 202 372 1420 +1 202 372 1426 Fax: +1 202 372 1926

URUGUAY Prefectura del Puerto de Montevideo Rambla 25 de Agosto de 1825 S/N Montevideo URUGUAY Telephone: +598 2 960123 +598 2 960022 Telex: 23929 COMAPRE-UY

VANUATU Deputy Commissioner of Maritime Affairs c/o Vanuatu Maritime Services Limited 39 Broadway, Suite 2020 New York, NY 10006 USA Telephone: +212 425 9600 Fax: +212 425 9652 Email: email@vanuatuships.com Website: www.vanuatuships.com

VENEZUELA Instituto Nacional de los Espacios Acuáticos (BOLIVARIAN Avenida Orinoco entre calles Perijá y Mucuchies REPUBLIC OF) Edificio INEA, Piso 6, Las Mercedes Caracas 1060 BOLIVARIAN REPUBLIC OF VENEZUELA Telephone: +58 212 909 1430 +58 212 909 1450 +58 212 909 1587 Fax: +58 212 909 1461 +58 212 909 1573 Email: asuntos_internacionales@inea.gob.ve Website: www.inea.gob.ve

VIETNAM Director General Vietnam Inland Waterway Administration 80 Tran Hung Dao Hanoi VIETNAM Telephone: +84 4 9421 887 Fax: +84 4 9420 788 Email: cuctruong.viwa@mt.gov.vn

552 IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12)

570

Bilaga 1

Chapter 7.9 – Exemptions, approvals and certificates

Contact information for the main designated national Country competent authority VIETNAM Further information (continued) Ms Yen International Relation Department Telephone: +84 4 9424 750 Mobile: +84 913 599 801 Email: yenton197@gmail.com viwa.inter.re@hn.vnn.vn YEMEN Executive Chairman Maritime Affairs Authority P.O. Box 19395 Sana’a REPUBLIC OF YEMEN Telephone: +967 1 414 412 / 419 914 / 423 005 Fax: +967 1 414 645 Email: MAA-Headoffice@y.net.ye Website: www.MAA.gov.ye ZAMBIA Department of Maritime & Inland Waterways Ministry of Communications & Transport P.O. Box 50346 Fairley Road Lusaka ZAMBIA Telephone: +260 1 250 716/251 444/251 022 Fax: +260 1 253 165/251 795 Email: dmiw@zamtel.zm Associate Member The Director of Marine HONG KONG, Marine Department CHINA GPO Box 4155 HONG KONG, CHINA Telephone: +852 2852 3085 Fax: +852 2815 8596 Email: pfdg@mardep.gov.hk

_____________

IMDG Code (Amdt. 36-12) 553

571

Bilaga 1

E

MARITIME SAFETY COMMITTEE MSC 90/28/Add.3 90th session 21 June 2012 Agenda item 28 Original: ENGLISH

REPORT OF THE MARITIME SAFETY COMMITTEE ON ITS NINETIETH SESSION

Attached is the second part of annex 4 (Annex 2, Amendments to the International Maritime Dangerous Goods (IMDG) Code (amendment 36-12), Dangerous Goods List) to the report of the Maritime Safety Committee on its ninetieth session (MSC 90/28). ***

I:\MSC\90\28-Add-3.doc

572

Bilaga 1

573

Bilaga 1

5 6 9 2 5 8 9 1 d.3d X 4 e 1 UN No. 8) (1 000 0005 000 0007 000 0010 001 0014 001 0016 001 001 0020 002 /A8 Pag /2 NNE A

C 90 MS

tionsa

erv

Obs 7) (1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . and B B B B B B B B B B B B B ies ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ert n n n n n n n n n n n n n

Prop

s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe rm rm rm rm rm rm rm rm rm rm rm rm rm te f te te f te te f te te f te te f te f te te f te of o of o of o of o of o o of o . ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo tances glossary gl glossary gl glossary gl glossary gl glossary gl gl glossary gl ub ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee S S S S S S S S S S S S S S r d s s s o r o r o n tea ad an rom tio f d rom rom f rom rom f rom rom f rom rom f rom rom source rom source rom rom f grega 7 chlor tec d f d d f d d f d d f d d f f f d f d rom" f rom" le f te te te te te te te te te te ation as f d ation as f d te te Se 6) o 7. c c c c c c c c c g te g te c c (1 1 t ining te te te te gre c gre c te 7. Pros. t. t t. t. t. t. t. t. t. t. e te e te t. t. ge and "Away "Away a Prote a Pro a Prote a Pro a Prote a Pro a Prote a Pro a Prote a S S Prote a Pro a contas f he he f he he f he he f he he f he he . Pro . Pro he f he 04. o 05. 04. o 05. 03. o 03. 01. o 01. 03. o 03. 03. 2G 03. 3G 05. 05. o Stowa ive s s of s s of s s of s s of s s of s of s gory los gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory at.e gory at.e gory gory px rchlorates.e tea tea tea tea tea tea Cate e p its compound source C source Cate source C source Cate source C source Cate source C source Cate source C source Cate Class 1. of h Cate Class 1. of h C source Cate source

X X X X X X X X X Z Z Z Z 5) 7.8 S-Y S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- EmS (1 5.4.3.2 B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F-

lk d bu ions 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - rs rovis (1 4.2.5 e P nks an inta a n ns ble t co ioct 3) a ank (1 4.2.5 4.3 - - - - - - - - - - - - - ort T stru P in

ions 1) (1 4.1.4 - - - - - - - - - - - - - rovisP IBC c- s 0) stru tion (1 4.1.4 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - In

ions ) g (9 4.1.4 - L1 - L1 L1 - - L1 L1 L1 L1 - rovis PP26 PP67 PP67 PP67 PP67 PP67 PP67 PP67 P ackinP cs ) 30 30 30 30 30 30 01 stru tion (8 4.1.4 12 (b) ), (c) 101P 101P 101P 101P 101P 101P 101P In P1 (a or P130 P1 L P130 P1 L P130 L P1 P130 P1 L P130 L P1 L P1 L P101 P1

ed se pt titi b) 3.5 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 ce an (7 Ex qu d se ite titi a) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 an (7 3.4 5 kg 5 kg Lim qu

l cia ions ) - - - - - - - pe (6 3.3 364 364 204 204 274 274 S rovisP

g ) - - - - - - - - - - - - - ackin Group (5 P 2.0.1.3

ry ) 40 40 ia (s ) 7 2P 8 8 1 1 sid sk (4 2.0 - - - - - - - 1/ 1/ 6. 6. ub Ri 349 6. 6. S See S See SP2

as v ) Cl (3 2.0 1 D 1 F 1 E 2 F 2 G 3 G 4 S 4 S 2 G 3 G 2 G 3 G 2 K 3 K or Di 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1.

s List K d r r

, ANL lling lling llinge llinge o o 10% r, r, e SE e ep e e e e e G , BS xp x xp xp rg rg an rg rg rg or L e e e e

s Goo urste urst r, r,e r, r, cha cha u ss th TILE te te o cha cha cha C RTRIDA rsu rsu lling lling

le R TOOO burste burst e e ting thout b e F px xp with rsting rsu rsting without b wi SE e e

nger d bu bu r r G with b with b r, r,

th th o oh RT PROJE ANK or C e ) charge charg L without PSN (2 3.1.2 wette wiS with b wiS with wit , INE , BS RTRID or e or without e CINGU e CINGU e or N N llinge lling N A rg h rg rg rg bursth burste ry ONS IARY op IARY ONS

IMO Da d APO AP APO AP APO or C with cha wit cha PROD cha PROD cha

E ND prr ND prope L ARMS K IC wit IC with WE o or WE WE AN ing AR- ing AR- ing e e R WE R WE e e R L ll lling ll ll rg FO FOR FO INCE rg INCE rg FOR , SMAL FO B SMOKE SMOKE TE TE TOX a TOX arg PICRAT S S S ON, S S S ON, ON, M mass EG GE EG cha cha GE GE EG chg g ch d.3d NIU y or prope or prope or prope or prope b NITION, lling NITI lling NITION, e NITI e NITION, e NITION, e NITI llin NITION, llin /A8 r, e /2 RTRIDA RTRIDA pe RTRIDA arg arg arg arg X 4 AMMO wate C CARTRID C AMMU xpe AMMU xe CARTRID CARTRID C MALL ARMS,S AMMU ch AMMU ch AMMU ch AMMU ch AMMU prope AMMU prope

C 90 e 1 ) 5 6 9 2 5 8 9 1 NNE UN No. (1 MS A Pag 000 0005 000 0007 000 0010 001 0014 001 0016 001 001 0020 002

574

Bilaga 1

7 8 9 0 3 4 5 7 8 9 2 3 8 0 d.3d X 4 e 2 UN No. 8) (1 002 002 002 003 003 003 003 003 003 003 004 004 0044 004 0049 005 /A8 Pag /2 NNE A

C 90 MS

tionsa

erv

Obs 7) (1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . and B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B ies ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ert n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n

Prop

s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe rm rm rm rm rm rm rm rm rm rm rm rm rm rm rm rm f te f te f te f te f te f te f te f te f te f te f te f te te f te te f te o o o o o o o o o o o o of o of o

ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo

gle gle gle gle gle gle gle gle gle gle gle gle glossarye gle glossarye gle eS eS eS eS eS eS eS eS eS eS eS eS eS eS eS eS

n tio rom f rom f rom f rom f rom f rom f rom f rom f rom f rom f rom f rom f rom rom f rom rom f grega 7 d d d d d d d d d d d d d f d d f d Se 6) o 7. tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec (1 1 t te te te te te te te te te te te te te te 7. t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a ge and Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro Prote Pro Prote Pro 04. f he 04. f he 05. f he 05. f he 05. f he 04. f he 04. f he 05. f he 04. f he 03. f he 04. f he 04. f he 01. he 04. f he 03. he 03. f he Stowa os os os os os os os os os os os os s of os s of os

gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory tea tea Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source C source Cate source C source Cate source

Y Y X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 5) 7.8 S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- EmS (1 5.4.3.2 B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F-

lk d bu ions 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - rs rovis (1 4.2.5 e P nks an inta a n ns ble t co ioct 3) a ank (1 4.2.5 4.3 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ort T stru P in

ions 1) (1 4.1.4 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - rovisP IBC c- s 0) stru tion (1 4.1.4 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - In

ions ) g (9 4.1.4 - - L1 L1 - L1 L1 - - L1 - rovis PP50 PP51 PP68 PP67 PP67 PP67 PP67 PP69 PP67 P ackinP cs ) 13 13 31 31 30 30 30 30 30 30 33 30 35 stru tion (8 4.1.4 101P 101P 101P 101P 32 ) or (b) 101P In P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 L P1 L P1 P1 L P1 L P1 (a P1 P133 P1 L P135 P1

ed se pt titi b) 3.5 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 ce an (7 Ex qu d se ite titi a) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 an (7 3.4 Lim qu

l cia ions ) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - pe (6 3.3 S rovisP

g ) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ackin Group (5 P 2.0.1.3

ryia ) (s ) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - sid sk (4 2.0 ubS Ri

as v ) Cl (3 2.0 1 D 1 D 1 B 1 B 1 F 1 D 2 D 1 F 1 D 2 G 1 D 1 D 4 S 1 D 1 G 3 G or Di 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1.

al

r o r as a me SED S , o ES TE RP LL ular M E lasting O P r b ng ran C o ) ) gR ), ) INR PSN (2 3.1.2 E ER E r blasti D TRIC f o f ator W WD CE arge arge arge POWD OP OP LE ch ch ch H H H ton N N N N TRIC g g g e U C ASL ASL ASL t d E H (GU G ( (GU LE tin tin tin F F F u LITIO R R NON- E rsu rsu rsu o E ER E plosive MOE , FLASH , FLAS D RS, RS, b b b with x AP TYP ES S W WD O O S eS , C D G GE d.3d O O PHOTO- PHOTO- PHOTO- RE R S S, D K POWD PK PK NAT S with S with S with S, S, S, TE RE RI /A8 C O /2 AC A TONATE TE MB MB MB MB MB MB RS X 4 LB BL LACB D D OB OB OB OB OB OB OOSTB UB PRIM CHARGE CART CARTRID

C 90 e 2 ) 7 8 9 0 3 4 5 7 8 9 2 3 8 0 NNE UN No. (1 MS A Pag 002 002 002 003 003 003 003 003 003 003 004 004 0044 004 0049 005

575

Bilaga 1

4 5 6 9 0 5 6 0 2 4 5 6 7 d.3d X 4 e 3 UN No. 8) (1 005 005 005 005 006 006 006 007 007 0073 007 007 007 007 /A8 Pag /2 NNE A g . an

C 90 r ically ining rity r th they cif o e b MS wettin r o lye th atiz d spe m conta e m ize the wate ss tre n t aun g if le x te leh thor n s e , whe ep p u e e au nsitive d, m c m r or lly se co tan , shall not bd coe te ss alcohol, e sb ifica tionsa le sporte th wa ce su cifiee y l,o erv s more bd h ining tran which b e ss sp Obs 7) s, This an sp riz lcoa (1 . . . . . . . . come ty. . t. o and B B B B B B B B e conta rio B r th th ss , unle b n ll not be atorn los d ies ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d thu ix d to au g le te ert n n n n n n n n whe sha a n e atize or which d, ts aren m sp Prop ce ie ent in d g tainin n ive tan et d leh cifically n a s s cif p age p e co tr s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe lop b mo s in appe use n e . rm rm rm rm rm rm rm rm x spe rm ce r or ss sp t bo ity eg is su an e ch whe n or f te f te f te f te f te f te f te f te te tan wettinge , th o o o o o o o o r th y t of sb , unle ce all u atin st. Th e b l, wateo d sh . . ton tiza ed su if th h rte , d nt a ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo e m zri co te gl gl gl gl gl gl gl gl t is lon g o glossary itives ifiec tances tances ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee e le thu ee nsitivee n ss al is substan e ub ub S S S S S S S S Mass d ag ph a S S se le transpo Th sp compe S S

d d

n ad an rom ad an rom tio f f rom f rom f rom f rom f rom f rom f rom f rom f rom f rom rom f rom f d d grega 7 d d d d d d d d d d f d d rom" le tec rom" le tec

Se 6) o 7. tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec f te f te

(1 1 t te te te te te te te te te te te Pro Pro 7. t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a s. t.a s. t.a ge and Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro Prote Pro Pro "Away “Away 03. f he 01. f he 04. f he 04. f he 04. f he 04. f he 02. f he 01. f he 04. f he 05. he 05. f he 04. f he 04. f he 04. f he Stowa os os os os os os os os os s of os os os os

gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory tea Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source C source Cate source Cate source Cate its compound source Cate its compound source

X X X X X X X X Y X Y Y Z Z 5) 7.8 S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- EmS (1 5.4.3.2 B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B,

F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F-

lk d bu ions 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - rs rovis (1 4.2.5 e P nks an inta a n ns ble t co ioct 3) a ank (1 4.2.5 4.3 - - - - - - - - - - - - - ort T stru P in

ions 1) (1 4.1.4 - - - - - - - - - - - - - rovisP IBC

c- s 0) stru tion (1 4.1.4 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - In

ions ) g (9 4.1.4 - - L1 - - - rovis PP67 PP70 PP71 PP72 PP45 PP42 PP53 PP54 PP57 PP58 PP26 PP26 P ackinP cs ) 35 36 30 37 39 40 34 ) 15 stru tion (8 4.1.4 101P 32 ) or (b) 102P 12 (a 10 ) or (b) 12 (b) ), (c) 14 ) or (b) In P1 P1 P1 L P1 P1 (a P1 P1 P1 L P1 P133 P1 (a P1 P1 (a or P1 (a

ed se

pt titi b) 3.5 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 ce an (7 Ex qu

d se

ite titi a) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 an (7 3.4 5 kg Lim qu

l cia ions ) - - - - - - - - - pe (6 3.3 364 266 266 266 S rovisP

g ) - - - - - - - - - - - - - ackin Group (5 P 2.0.1.3

ryia ) (s ) - - - - - - - - - - - - 1 P 1 P sid sk (4 2.0 6. 6. ubS Ri

as v ) Cl (3 2.0 3 G 4 S 1 D 1 D 1 D 1 D 4 G 4 S 1 D 1 B 1 A 1 D 1 D 3 C or Di 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1.

t r, o ), 40% n E d with ITN 15% tha with nD 15% wate tte

LO an ss an C t le massy TIZE le R Y ss th o b SI b or we , (C r, N ss th RIME IVE E SEE dry P ator OS IN not le D insolu ls, LP with n wate , r- ta ) ton X AM ON D d d with le (2 WITH e , E with TI PSN 3.1.2 , Y t d le E ITR D TTE l an wate tte li me T u ib IVS TE we P o TARY ex O TRIN T WE INITRATE r massy M N fl LP E L,O ss o alkaS b , E with E X NE WE N volatile- a E r, NAL GE D M ING E, L ), E of alcoho OL D n AT HT E T E Y NE HP re o y m L dry L , SIG P AP PPLE R LB HT G , b O O S TRID E H U ONA A O GLYCE er NE NE R D S S T ITE IME X mass ITRO N iz H H d.3 GE A S, S, S, , C R y IN r mixtu 25% n at P P 15% wate d , C , DE , IGN RS T (HE b D an ss an /A8 SE D LO ),X r, O r o HYLE ITRO a ITRO S RD TTE C D TONATORS FOR AMMUNI T ss th legm m ss th /2 X 4 CARTRID AC CHARGE CHARGE CHARGE COR OC UC YC (R wate ED IAZD wate IED le hp IND by IND le

C 90 e 3 ) 4 5 6 9 0 5 6 0 2 4 5 6 7 NNE UN No. (1 MS A Pag 005 005 005 005 006 006 006 007 007 0073 007 007 007 007

576

Bilaga 1

8 1 2 3 4 2 3 4 9 1 2 3 4 d.3d X 4 e 4 UN No. 8) (1 007 0079 008 008 008 008 009 009 009 009 010 010 010 010 0105 /A8 Pag /2 NNE A

C 90 MS

tionsa erv ix B.d ix B.d ix B.d ix B.d ne ne ne ne Obs 7) pp pp pp pp (1 a a a a . . . . . . . . . and B B B B B B B B B ies ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ert rms in rms in rms in rms in n n n n n n n n n

Prop f te f te f te f te o o o o ry ry ry ry ssa ssa ssa ssa s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe lo lo lo lo rm rm rm rm rm rm rm rm rm ge ge ge ge f te f te f te f te f te f te f te f te te e e e e o o o o o o o o of . . . S . S . S . S ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo tances tances tances tances tances gl gl gl gl gl gl gl gl glossary ub ubstance bu bu bu bu ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S d d r d r s o s o m n te te iun d ad an rom ing a m ing a m d o te tio f c d rom "Aways, fro "Aways, fro s an te rom f rom f rom f rom f rom f rom f rom f rom f rom f rom grega 7 rom" le tec d f rchlorates an chlor d rchlorates an chlor d amm d d d d d d d d d d f f te te e te e te rom" f Pro te te te te te te te te te te Se 6) o 7. c containn p c containn p c at.e c c c c c c c c c c (1 1 t Pro e ining ote e ining ote ining h te te te te te te te te te 7. s. t.a t.a Pr t.a Pr t.a salts. t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a ge and "Away Prote Wh Wh "Away or s of Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro Prote f he he rates or contas f he rates or contas f he contas s f he f he f he f he f he f he f he f he f he he 04. o 04. 04. lo o 04. lo o 04. rceu 04. o 03. o 03. o 03. o 04. o 03. o 04. o 02. o 02. o 01. Stowa s s of ive s ive s ive s s s s s s s s s s of gory gory gory gory gory so gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory te monium compound losp rchlorates. monium compound losp rchlorates. monium compound los te Cate its compound source aC source Cate am om" chfr xe ep source Cate am om" chfr xe ep source Cate am xpe compound om fr Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source aC source

Y Y Y Y Y Y X X Y X X X X X X 5) 7.8 S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- EmS (1 5.4.3.2 B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F-

lk d bu ions 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - rs rovis (1 4.2.5 e P nks an inta a n ns ble t co ioct 3) a ank (1 4.2.5 4.3 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ort T stru P in

ions 1) (1 4.1.4 - - - B9 - - - - - - - - - - rovisP IBC c- s 0) stru tion (1 4.1.4 - - - 100C - - - - - - - - - - - In IB

ions ) g (9 4.1.4 - - - - - - rovis PP26 PP63 PP66 PP61 PP62 PP65 PP49 PP74 PP75 PP71 PP71 PP73 P ackinP cs ) 16 16 16 16 35 35 13 34 40 39 40 39 stru tion (8 4.1.4 12 (b) ), (c) (c) 102P In P1 (a or P112 (b) or P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 L P1 P1 P1 P1 P140

ed se pt titi b) 3.5 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 ce an (7 Ex qu d se ite titi a) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 an (7 3.4 Lim qu

l cia ions ) - - - - - - - - - - - - - pe (6 3.3 267 S rovisP

g ) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ackin Group (5 P 2.0.1.3

ryia ) (s ) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - sid sk (4 2.0 ubS Ri

as v ) Cl (3 2.0 1 D 1 D 1 D 1 D 1 D 1 D 3 G 3 G 1 G 1 D 3 G 2 D 4 G 4 D 4 S or Di 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1.

15% YL)X out E (H with tal-clad

ss thanle NE), me

d CT,E LAMIY oil wells, F d with R cla F E C forE l- d ) IPI ta cla PSN (2 wetter (D A B C D me l- MILD 3.1.2 NE EP EP EP EP G ta oy PLOSIVX IN ING, TY TY TY TY ,E NG mer, G, G, G, G, SE NAT NYLAMIE TIN TIN TIN TIN E VIC TO TONAT H E ONATIT E E RCINOL dr IP LAS LAS LAS LAS AC RE E D R tubula D OS RF RIAL D ),E ), Y mass ODR , BE , BE , BE , BE U WD S SE d.3d y T IV IV IV IV , S , AE O RING D U U b S S S S S S TU ator (F IGNITE (F /A8 r, ANI OL OL OL OL H P , NON- RD , , SAFET /2 INITRORE XE P P P P ARE ARE AS AC tone O SE X 4 D wate H XE XE XE XE LF LF LF RF d FUSE C UF CORD FUSE

C 90 e 4 ) 8 1 2 3 4 2 3 4 9 1 2 3 4 NNE UN No. (1 MS A Pag 007 0079 008 008 008 008 009 009 009 009 010 010 010 010 0105

577

Bilaga 1

6 7 0 3 8 1 4 0 1 2 3 5 6 d.3d X 4 e 5 UN No. 8) (1 010 010 011 011 0114 011 012 012 0129 013 013 013 013 013 013 /A8 Pag /2 NNE A . . itive itive , an all s d, s d the , sh C 90 ining rity ining n n te r the y ly ce , MS ly o ly se ss orte se ss or b e d nt e th e thority ly ly sp atiz d m ifie te m conta e m e g le nspa e g le na m ize tre c n t au n conta t au m in m g x e trex n trex n tre tr . tre tre le e sp tee tee x tain be x tainin ty. h thor is substan n compee s ee , whee p s ee , whe p ee n ot ee n t bo ri p au Th m c m m ce m . m co m co n o lly comee t. r tha thy , shall not b shall not be s n thority n th r or n e b coe tans d coe co d, co co e coe all u te d tions b bstan ive wh shall n whe sh t a ificac age atiz e a cifie thy cifie the los , nt au , , ne wal, e will b iz su e b ich be by p ich be ce d, tee ec d et o gm or erv d his su d x p ifie p h th which b e wh T e e wh cifie m which b c m lco ss sp itizings hle u Obs 7) s, Thist. an sp riz s, riz g s, e s, e o a s which n r p a (1 . . . o tor tin . . tor co sp e c . ss se r o . and B B B ator los r th th a lost. r than spee tho B B a n sp ator n h B , unled ator e ically B ies ix ix ix n au n au tona ix ix n is substan the n is substan y t ix g le te n d ix ert dn dn dn toe atize to atiz e dn dn to r tha by toe Th r tha b dn toe or wate cife dn ts are m m e d e or g l, Prop n g nts are g ss da st. Tho e st. edz tainin spn in dd leh cifically d in de le cifically d in de l atiz in dd lo atiz ri n a in dd ss sp age e age gm gm o co tr s in appe s in appe s in appe p s in appe s in appe e thoriz thu s in appe n e . nle s in appe use use tting s of m use ts are au use ts are hle t b ity usee ss alcoho rm rm rm ce r or ss sp ce r or ph ss spe re rm rm ce ne ce ne y a rm whe o c s its wettine le d, u rm wetting we le r p lla , n or te f te f te f te tans e f te f te r or phl ically tans ag r o ic f te ce all th tans ing or f te o o o b l, wate , unle bstan l, wate un o o bstan g ag b g if o u b sp o o d f the o d, . Mixtu cif ec . sh . su if th h rte su i h su ttin wate su ttin wate p , d nt a su if it los ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo co ssaryo ssaryo l, l, s ssaryo te tran rity ssaryo itive itive tances we o ss spe we ss tances ifie itive containn e o gle gle gle nsitive sn nsitive sn b gle gle nsitive nsitive le gle is substan ce nsitive sn t b th gle e e e e ss al e ss alco u e e e the nle e the e ub e o e S S S S se le transpo S se le transporte S S S S if alcoh u S if alcoho un S S Th sp compe S se whe n au S

d

n ad an rom tio f rom f rom f rom f rom f rom rom f rom f rom f rom rom f rom f d rom f rom f rom f grega 7 d d d d d f d d d d f d d rom" le tec d d d

Se 6) o 7. tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec f te tec tec tec

(1 1 t te te te te te te te te te Pro te te te 7. t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a s. t.a t.a t.a t.a ge and Pro Pro Pro Pro Prote Pro Pro Pro Prote Pro Pro “Away Pro Pro Pro 05. f he 05. f he 01. f he 05. f he 05. he 04. f he 03. f he 04. f he 05. he 05. f he 01. f he 04. f he 04. f he 05. f he 05. f he Stowa os os os os s of os os os s of os os os os os os

gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory tea tea Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source C source Cate source Cate source Cate source C source Cate source Cate source Cate its compound source Cate source Cate source Cate source

X X X Y Y Y X X Y Y X Y Y Y X 5) 7.8 S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- EmS (1 5.4.3.2 B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B,

F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F-

lk d bu ions 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - rs rovis (1 4.2.5 e P nks an inta a n ns ble t co ioct 3) a ank (1 4.2.5 4.3 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ort T stru P in

ions 1) (1 4.1.4 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - rovisP IBC

c- s 0) stru tion (1 4.1.4 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - In

ions ) g (9 4.1.4 - - - - - - - - rovis PP42 PP42 PP42 PP42 PP26 PP42 P ackinP cs ) 41 41 41 42 01 42 ) 30 stru tion (8 4.1.4 10 ) or (b) ) or (b) 12 (b) ), (c) ) or (b) 10 ) or (b) 14 (b) 12 (a 10 ) or (b) In P1 P1 P1 P1 (a P110 (a P1 (a or P1 P1 P110 (a P1 (a P1 P1 P1 P1 (a P1

ed se

pt titi b) 3.5 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 ce an (7 Ex qu

d se

ite titi a) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 an (7 3.4 Lim qu

l cia ions ) - - - - - - - - pe (6 3.3 266 266 266 266 266 266 S rovisP

g ) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ackin Group (5 P 2.0.1.3

ryia ) (s ) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - sid sk (4 2.0 ubS Ri

as v ) Cl (3 2.0 1 B 2 B 4 S 1 A 1 A 1 D 1 G 1 D 1 A 1 A 4 S 3 C 1 D 1 A 1 F or Di 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1.

d or or D , r, r, of E l an 20% an 15% out te ), E re TT INE ss wa than ssa % wate0 with WE RAZ ma 3 ss th INAT mixtu ), ss m y NE le 20% RC ITE of alcoho t le by HYD b or N re o r, E r, AZER ssa with than ssa SO r, N NE te T ss than d oil well,D RE te leif wa ET le m ss m wa AROMATIC MA wate r LID GE r mixtu with n d ) Y byr, AR t leo byr, ITRO S OF ITRO o D PSN (2 3.1.2 or NA 30% not te wette te 20% T r, d U or LA . (N TTE G ry , CH TRIN S .S WE arge han O than with NS with n DA than mass .O ATE , IN ss NOGUANYL D and wa U D and wa E ss y N R f alcohol an ch M G (L b TAL S, IT 40% wate o g TICE A t le AMI TTE ol TOL) d TTE ol t le r, E N tin AC S o O o AX an rs RP OSR WE), lcoh X lcoh SEU ATIV LMINATE u ONATING ONATING , ITRO T E a , WEE a HNATE wated F HE ss th U ixture b TE TE SE N (HE mass ORATING RIV L mass FY m d.3d NL with nD NI of y RS of YP with nD l an RS, E y R r , DS , DS Y b E RFE ator AZID ST AGRATING ME D ITO b o S with /A8 NAD RAZET ture OLITE r, IT P ture L NN not le r, r, /2 ZE ZE AN TTE ix X T tone AD ix AD TTE FE ITRO RCU X 4 UF UF GRE GU WE GUANYL (TE m HE wate IGN JE d EL m EL WE alcoho LIGHTE D N MA with wate ME wate MINE

C 90 e 5 ) 6 7 0 3 8 1 4 0 1 2 3 5 6 NNE UN No. (1 MS A Pag 010 010 011 011 0114 011 012 012 0129 013 013 013 013 013 013

578

Bilaga 1

7 8 3 4 7 1 3 4 9 0 d.3d X 4 e 6 UN No. 8) (1 013 013 014 014 0146 014 0150 015 015 015 0155 015 016 /A8 Pag /2 NNE f i . e A bet . s an itive o an e the C 90 ically s th r the y MS cif n all n of th b to orr se n thority reo re atiz d spe re e . s m ize ss o wh d, sh t au ec t m g itives wate le m , ie n o le n n e ce cif tee tan n h thor e u m p s p au St. d, m b r a mixtu . co spe su os r or lly llan co te te e tions ss alcohol, than ive ated with a ificac p a sporte will be is substan r e the los gn itr wal, e ro ischarge leg by p o erv tran Th atiz d x rep ic n h nin nt. e eg lco ss sp as pd Obs 7) tai ty. which gm riz im rgan a es tatic d (1 . . n ri age tin ss u and B B co o phle tho , unled e trosc ies ix ix n ll not be th ng au tona llulose uid o g le te le ert dn dn u plosivex izi e e e sha a e its r or c r liq or llulos d Prop , whee d, ent n ss da itro e tainin spn oce an c ie et ting se wate cifically n oth n a cif p an r co tr itr re s in appe s in appe tans mo to of g o n e . ssu rm rm b spe s of m n t b ity on n re an e c g or de ss spe re ri whe o or d f te f te is su h le , n o o r th y t ttin ss alcohol, un ce all thu . Th e b . . . . Mass de le d, . Mixtu . . . consistin sh bases tiza ed , d nt a ssaryo ssaryo m zri its wes ining f nitroglyce te , friction, p gl gl tances g o tances tances tances tances tances tances ifiec tances ee ee bu le thu ub ubstance ub ubstance bu ub ub ubstance bu is substan e bu arks S S S ph a S S S S it lose conta transporte S S S S S 60% o Th sp compe S sp

ad

n " le tio m rom f rom f rom f rom f rom rom f rom rom f rom f rom f rom rom f rom f grega 7 d d d d d f d d f d d d fro d f d d

Se 6) o 7. tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec .s tec tec tec

(1 1 t te te te te te te te te "Away te te 7. t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a ge and Pro Pro Pro Pro Prote Pro Prote Pro Pro Pro Prote Pro Pro 04. f he 04. f he 04. f he 04. f he 04. he 04. f he 04. he 04. f he 04. f he 04. f he 04. he 04. f he 04. f he Stowa os os os os s of os s of os os os s of os os

gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory its compound gory gory gory tea tea d tea Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source C source Cate source C source Cate source Cate source Cate source an C source Cate source Cate source

X X Z Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 5) 7.8 S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- EmS (1 5.4.3.2 B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B,

F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F-

lk d bu ions 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - rs rovis (1 4.2.5 e P nks an inta a n ns ble t co ioct 3) a ank (1 4.2.5 4.3 - - - - - - - - - - - - ort T stru P in

ions 1) (1 4.1.4 - - - - - - - - - - - - rovisP IBC

c- s 0) stru tion (1 4.1.4 - - - - - - - - - - - - - In

ions ) g (9 4.1.4 L1 L1 - - - - - rovis PP67 PP67 PP53 PP54 PP57 PP58 PP45 PP55 PP56 PP59 PP60 PP26 PP43 PP50 PP52 P ackinP cs ) 30 30 15 15 11 stru tion (8 4.1.4 101P 101P (b)), 12 (b) ) or (b) 12 (b) ), (c) 12 (c) 12 (b) ), (c) (c) 14 (b) In P1 L P1 L P1 P1 P112 (a or (c) P1 P112 (a P1 (a or P1 (b) or P1 (a or P112 (b) or P1 P1

ed se

pt titi b) 3.5 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 ce an (7 Ex qu

d se

ite titi a) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 an (7 3.4 Lim qu

l cia ions ) - - - - - - - - pe (6 3.3 266 271 272 358 266 266 S rovisP

g ) - - - - - - - - - - - - ackin Group (5 P 2.0.1.3

ry ) 17 ia (s ) 2P sid sk (4 2.0 - - - - - - - - - - - ubS Ri See S

as v ) Cl (3 2.0 1 D 2 D 1 D 1 D 1 D 1 D 1 D 1 D 1 D 1 D 1 D 3 C 1 C or Di 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1.

n r, L by y ss ss 40% tha 25% r, br, le e t leo an mass more with ) n y THRITO ITRATE atiz d E ss th b RY ss than mg ID r, with le with L TAE TRA N TN), 15% wate wette LOR D not le HO rine ss than 20% wate N not le TE % ph an or TTE matizeg O c le ; PE 5 ry le C (PE with 1 ss th WE withD h AL ogly D ) d RYL CHC ), ) p , with THRITE ITRATE )E ID PI TE PSN (2 3.1.2 IN d TTE ( S N tte ITRATE RY ss than with le A arge arge SITIZEN oluble WE TRAN d R P s TIOU TRAN NTAE tte RIC AC E chg chg SEE in L an 10% nitr TE not le ICRAMID mass) NZENE mass SS r- O or we TE TN), we (P y WD y tin tin , D S th r b ROBE O b rs rs IN IN re ; PE with o NOL (PIC r, O (P r, u u RE wate RE o H dry ss or PEa D ry ILINE L KE OKELE b b C C mt A THRITOL E A d.3 Y o RE ITRATE m YR CHO , SM d LYG LG TARCS U RYTHRITE ITIZ R R C R /A S with S with volatile ssa AE byr, TAE NS 30% wate IT E 25% wate ED 8 - but n T N ES s ss IN WD /2 ITRO no ITRO ITRO m ITRO N TRAN E E NTOLITE d an R O an X 4 MINE MINE N n N 1% N by N PE TE wate (P D mas PE ma TRINITROAN TRINITROPHE th T P th POW C 90 e 6 ) 7 8 3 4 7 1 3 4 9 0 NNE UN No. (1 MS A Pag 013 013 014 014 0146 014 0150 015 015 015 0155 015 016

579

Bilaga 1

1 7 8 9 1 3 4 1 3 6 1 2 d.3d X 4 e 7 UN No. 8) (1 016 016 016 016 017 017 017 0180 018 0182 018 018 0190 019 019 0193 /A8 Pag /2 NNE A C 90 p as

MS to grou

itives ility ne St. . llane p d compatib tionsa ro ischarge erv as pd Obs 7) es tatic d ivision an . (1 u . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . and e trosc B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B ies le ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d thority ix d ix d ix d ert llulos e n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n d t au Prop oce an n itr re te ssu s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe pe s in appe s in appe s in appe

on nd re rm rm rm rm rm rm rm rm rm rm rm rm com rm rm rm f te f te f te f te f te f te te f te te f te f te te f te f te te base o o o o o o of o of o o of the o o of s by , friction, p ssary ssary ssary ssary ssary ssary ssary ssary ssary d ssary ssary tance o o o o o o o o o o o sb arks gl gl gl gl gl gl glossarye gl glossarye gl gl glossarye gl gl glossarye u ee ee ee ee ee ee e ee e ee ee e ee ee e S sp S S S S S S S S S S S S classifie S S S

n tio rom f rom f rom f rom f rom f rom f rom f rom rom f rom rom f rom f rom rom f rom f rom grega 7 d d d d d d d d f d d f d d d f d d d f Se 6) o 7. tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec (1 1 t te te te te te te te te te te te te 7. t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a ge and Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro Prote Pro Prote Pro Pro Prote Pro Pro Prote 04. f he 05. f he 04. f he 04. f he 03. f he 01. f he 01. f he 05. he 04. f he 04. he 04. f he 04. f he 05. he 02. f he 03. f he 01. he Stowa os os os os os os os s of os s of os os s of os os s of

gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory tea tea tea tea Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source C source Cate source C source Cate source Cate source C source Cate source Cate source C source

Y X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 5) 7.8 S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- EmS (1 5.4.3.2 B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F-

lk d bu ions 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - rs rovis (1 4.2.5 e P nks an inta a n ns ble t co ioct 3) a ank (1 4.2.5 4.3 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ort T stru P in

ions 1) (1 4.1.4 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - rovisP IBC c- s 0) stru tion (1 4.1.4 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - In

ions ) g (9 4.1.4 - L1 L1 L1 - - - L1 L1 L1 L1 - - - rovis PP50 PP52 PP67 PP67 PP67 PP67 PP67 PP67 PP67 P ackinP cs ) 30 30 30 30 34 34 30 30 30 35 35 stru tion (8 4.1.4 14 (b) 101P 101P 101P 102P 102P 101P 101P 101P 101P In P1 P1 P1 L P1 L P1 L P1 L P1 L P130 P1 L P130 L P1 L P1 L P101 P1 P1 P135

ed se pt titi b) 3.5 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 ce an (7 Ex qu d se ite titi a) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 an (7 3.4 Lim qu

l cia ions ) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - pe (6 3.3 16 274 S rovisP

g ) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ackin Group (5 P 2.0.1.3

ryia ) (s ) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - sid sk (4 2.0 ubS Ri

as v ) Cl (3 2.0 3 C 1 F 1 D 2 D 2 G 4 S 4 S 1 F 1 E 2 E 3 C 3 C 1 4 G 1 G 4 S or Di 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1.

r, te rsu ives lop out b x e

with E V IVE e e e SO charge initiating ) arg arg arg with or e e PLOSIX PLX PSN (2 3.1.2 ch ch ch VE than g g g llinge r , EK , EK op OSI charg charge charg ad D S pr PL eh othe S MINATING r X ting burstin burstin burstin o E rsting rs rsting rt e IVE HAN e S, E IV u RS OS , S OKELE ILLU rg CE SO L E WAY TRAC withS withS withS VI L TO PX E E E cha E PX VICE d.3 , SM S with b S with in MO , ES , RAILWAY TRAC , RAIL d RE TILC TILC TILC NITION, E D , E TS with buE T TS with buE T TE /A8 D JE JE JE llinge ASE TS K K K ALS L E C /2 X 4 POW ROP ROP ROP AMMU xpe ER RIV ROC ROCKE ROC ROCKE RO AMPLES IGNAL DS IGNALSS IGNS

C 90 e 7 ) 1 7 8 9 1 3 4 1 3 6 1 2 NNE UN No. (1 MS A Pag 016 016 016 016 017 017 017 0180 018 0182 018 018 0190 019 019 0193

580

Bilaga 1

4 5 6 7 4 7 9 2 3 5 6 7 d.3d X 4 e 8 UN No. 8) (1 019 019 019 019 020 020 0208 020 021 021 0214 021 021 021 /A8 Pag /2 NNE A

C 90 MS (TNT) en e

toluo

itr

tionsa of trin erv g

Obs 7) . (1 . . . . . . and B B B B B consistin B ies ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d plosive ix d ert n n n n n x tance n e s Prop ting an . s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe to l is a sub s in appe rm rm rm rm rm inium rm

f te f te f te f te f te um f te o o o o o al o . . Mass de . Tritona . . . . . ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo gl gl gl gl gl tances tances d with e gl tances tances tances tances ee ee ee ee ee ub ubstance bu x ee ub ubstance ub ub ub S S S S S S S S mi S S S S S S

d

n ad an rom tio f rom f rom f rom f rom f rom f rom f rom rom f rom f rom f rom rom f d rom f grega 7 d d d d d d d f d d d d f d rom" le tec d Se 6) o 7. tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec f te tec (1 1 t te te te te te te te te te te Pro te 7. t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a s. t.a t.a ge and Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro Prote Pro Pro Pro Prote Pro "Away Pro 03. f he 03. f he 03. f he 02. f he 05. f he 04. f he 04. he 04. f he 03. f he 04. f he 04. he 04. f he 04. f he 04. f he Stowa os os os os os os s of os os os s of os os os

gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory tea tea Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source C source Cate source Cate source Cate source C source Cate source Cate its compound source Cate source

X X X X X Y Y Y X Y Y Y Y Y 5) 7.8 S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- EmS (1 5.4.3.2 B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F-

lk d bu ions 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - rs rovis (1 4.2.5 e P nks an inta a n ns ble t co ioct 3) a ank (1 4.2.5 4.3 - - - - - - - - - - - - - ort T stru P in

ions 1) (1 4.1.4 - - - - - - - - - - - - - rovisP IBC c- s 0) stru tion (1 4.1.4 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - In

ions ) g (9 4.1.4 - - - - - - - - - - rovis PP46 PP69 PP26 P ackinP cs ) 35 35 35 35 34 33 stru tion (8 4.1.4 102P 12 (c) (c) 12 (b) ), (c) 12 (c) (b)), 12 (b) ), (c) 12 (c) 12 (c) In P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 L P1 (b) or P112 (b) or P1 (a or P1 P1 (b) or P112 (a or (c) P1 (a or P1 (b) or P1 (b) or

ed se pt titi b) 3.5 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 ce an (7 Ex qu d se ite titi a) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 an (7 3.4 Lim qu

l cia ions ) - - - - - - - - - - - - - pe (6 3.3 S rovisP

g ) - - - - - - - - - - - - - ackin Group (5 P 2.0.1.3

ryia ) (s ) - - - - - - - - - - - - - sid sk (4 2.0 ubS Ri

as v ) Cl (3 2.0 1 G 3 G 1 G 4 G 2 F 1 D 1 D 1 D 3 G 1 D 1 D 1 D 1 D 1 D or Di 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1.

than 0% an ss 3 ) ss th RYL le T with le ss than (TE d le withd E withd ) E r wette wette (2 IV o tte or PSN 3.1.2 SO dry N ry L LNITRAMIN d iph iph ITIO or we ID NE EXP THY N , s , s S,E ME (TNT) E ss MU dryE ss OLS SSE SSE IC L N a LE N IC AC a R R YN E m O EZ ZO m CRE HTHALE ST ST y R AM IS N ssa N y - DEVG PHE r, b EB m E r, b m d.3 , DIS , DIS , SMOKE , SMOKE N ITROANILINE FO d L L DI RSE by /A8 AN AN N r, /2 G G U TRAN X 4 SI SI IGNALSS IGNALSS SO TE TRINITRO TRINITROTOLU 30% wate TRAC TRINITROAN TRINITRO wate TRINITROB 30% wate TRINITRO- TRINITRONAP

C 90 e 8 ) 4 5 6 7 4 7 9 2 3 5 6 7 NNE UN No. (1 MS A Pag 019 019 019 019 020 020 0208 020 021 021 0214 021 021 021

581

Bilaga 1

8 0 1 4 5 6 4 5 6 8 0 d.3d X 4 e 9 UN No. 8) (1 021 0219 022 022 0222 022 022 022 023 023 023 0237 023 024 /A8 Pag /2 NNE if A . C 90 itives ining rity MS n o se conta th n e t aun moree , whe tee m ec p co m tans , shall not b co b d e tionsa su th will be cifiee y erv bd Thist. e Obs 7) which an sp riz (1 . . . o . . . and B B B sive ts los r th th B B B ies ix d ix d ix d plo ne au ix d ix d ix d ert n n n x atize n n n e g ag m Prop in g ating leh cifically n itiz p e s in appe s in appe s in appe to sn s in appe s in appe s in appe rm rm rm se r or ss sp rm rm rm f te f te f te de te f te f te o o o r , unle of o o . . . . . Mass de o l, wateo d . . . ssary ssary ssary h rte ssary ssary o o o nce co o o tances tances gl gl gl tas tances tances tances glossary gl gl e e e b wettinge ss al e e e ubS ubstanceS ubS eS ubstanceS eS eS uS th le transpo ubS ubS ubS eS eS eS

d d d d or s n ad an rom tea ad an rom ad an rom ad an rom tio " le " f f f rom f d f rom f rom f rom f rom f rom f d d d rom rom f rom f grega 7 d rom tec d d rom chlor d from d d d rom" le tec rom" le tec rom" le tec d f d d Se 6) o 7. tec fy tec tec fy cte tec tec tec f te f te f te tec tec tec (1 1 t te Prote te te ining te te te Pro Pro Pro te te 7. t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a s. t.a s. t.a s. t.a t.a t.a t.a ge and Pro "Awa ds. Pro Pro "Awa . Protes Pro Pro Pro "Away "Away "Away Prote Pro Pro f he n he f he f he te he f he f he f he f he f he f he he f he f he 04. o 04. 04. o 04. o 04. s conta 05. o 05. o 04. o 04. o 04. o 04. o 02. 03. o 03. o Stowa s s of s s ora s of s s s s s s s of s s gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory tea tea plosivex rchl tea Cate source C its compou source Cate source Cate source C e pe source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate its compound source Cate its compound source Cate its compound source C source Cate source Cate source

Y Y Y X Y Z X Y Z Y Y X X X 5) 7.8 S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- EmS (1 5.4.3.2 B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F-

lk d bu ions 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - rs rovis (1 4.2.5 e P nks an inta a n ns ble t co ioct 3) a ank (1 4.2.5 4.3 - - - - - - - - - - - - - ort T stru P in

ions 1) (1 4.1.4 - - - - - - - - - - - - - rovisP IBC c- s 0) stru tion (1 4.1.4 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - In

ions ) g (9 4.1.4 - - L1 - - rovis PP26 PP67 PP47 PP42 PP69 PP45 PP26 PP26 PP26 P ackinP cs ) 30 33 ) 30 30 stru tion (8 4.1.4 12 (c) (b)), 12 (b) ), (c) 101P (c) 10 ) or (b) 12 (a 14 ) or (b) 14 ) or (b) 14 ) or (b) In P1 (b) or P112 (a or (c) P1 (a or P1 L P112 (b) or P1 (a P1 P1 P1 (a P1 (a P1 (a P138 P1 P1

ed se pt titi b) 3.5 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 ce an (7 Ex qu d se ite titi a) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 an (7 3.4 Lim qu

l cia ions ) - - - - - - - - - - - - pe (6 3.3 266 S rovisP

g ) - - - - - - - - - - - - - ackin Group (5 P 2.0.1.3

ryia ) (s ) - - - - - 1 - - 1 P - - - - sid sk (4 2.0 6. 6. ubS Ri

as v ) Cl (3 2.0 1 D 1 D 1 D 1 D 1 D 1 A 1 B 1 D 3 C 3 C 3 C 4 D 2 G 3 G or Di 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. d ce d r, leb r, ss 20% ti ate y le tte d bstan ; br, 20% usb lcul n than m ca d su withd ss or we 20% wate o 50% wate (HMX n e c an E ss tha ) dry alcohol an rg 2% r adde IN 15% wate wette le ID 0. e AM with le of ss tha cha ss th an or d AC le an h othy ITR ry withd AR IC ting t ic substancen ss th d ) ixture rs re a an r wette (2 PHN m withd u of with led TRA N o , LINEE PSN 3.1.2 org n E OLATE wette y L TY or r, h mo io tte ATOR TE not le S or dr IB with b it s we N N ry XE L (S wette O w any r LE with CRE d O or D E xclu o TOE D o- mass , FL IN % wate ry AT e ry THY y AMATE D TOLE RC 0 d RT E TTE br, R E -THROWING -THROWING NE 2 ss the , dE AP SO a , TORPE including WE PIC H RE m S UM NI s, , to WITH DS TRAM INITRO-D ICRAMATE mass M mass S LINE LINE d.3d AD ce AZID R E N), P y y S, S, S, ss than by NITRATE ss M ss ET T M M b b T T /A8 le r, A a a S LO IU 15% wate IU r, r, RGE E m bstan m O C ss D an D A /2 X 4 TRINITROPHE TRINITRO with wate RU by WARHE AMMONI su as carbon ARIUB by OB YC OCTOGE ma OS th OS wate ZIRCONIU wate HC ROCKE ROCKE

C 90 e 9 ) 8 0 1 4 5 6 4 5 6 8 0 NNE UN No. (1 MS A Pag 021 0219 022 022 0222 022 022 022 023 023 023 0237 023 024

582

Bilaga 1

0 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 0 4 5 7 7 8 d.3d X 4 e 1 UN No. 8) (1 024 024 024 024 0245 024 024 024 0249 025 025 025 025 0266 026 026 /A8 Pag /2 NNE A

C 90 MS

s.

tionsa erv plosivex eg Obs 7) (1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . tin . . and B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B ies ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d tona ix d ix d ert n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n Prop ss dea

m s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe ofs s in appe s in appe rm rm rm rm rm rm rm rm rm rm rm rm rm re rm rm f te f te f te f te te f te f te f te te f te f te f te f te f te f te o o o o of o o o of o o o o o o . Mixtu ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo

gle gle gle gle glossarye gle gle gle glossarye gle gle gle gle bstance gle gle eS eS eS eS eS eS eS eS eS eS eS eS eS uS eS eS

d r rce

s o n ing tea sou tio m "Aways, fro rom f rom f rom f rom rom f rom f rom f rom rom f rom f rom f rom f rom rom f rom f grega 7 rchlorates an chlor d d d d d f d d d d f d d d d d f d d Se contain e tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec 6)(1 o 7. n p ining te te te te te te te te te te te te 1 t e ote 7. Pr t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a ge and Wh Pro Pro Pro Prote Pro Pro Pro Prote Pro Pro Pro Pro Prote Pro Pro 04. rates or contas f he 04. f he 05. f he 05. f he 05. he 05. f he 05. f he 05. f he 05. 05. f he 03. f he 05. f he 05. f he 04. he 05. f he 05. f he Stowa lo o o o o o o o . o o o o o o ive s s s s s of s s s s s s s s of s s gory monium compound los gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory om" ch px rchlorates.e tea tea f heat tea Cate am fr e p source Cate source Cate source Cate source C source Cate source Cate source Cate source C o Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source C source Cate source Cate source

X X X X X X X Y Y X X X X Y X X 5) 7.8 S- S- S- S- S- S-, S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- EmS (1 5.4.3.2 B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, F- F- F- F- F- F-B F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F-

lk d bu ions 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - rs rovis (1 4.2.5 e P nks an inta a n ns ble t co ioct 3) a ank (1 4.2.5 4.3 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ort T stru P in

ions 1) 0 (1 4.1.4 B1 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - rovisP IBC c- s 0) stru tion (1 4.1.4 100C - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - In IB

ions ) g (9 4.1.4 - L1 L1 L1 L1 - - L1 - - rovis PP61 PP62 PP65 PP67 PP67 PP67 PP67 PP77 PP77 PP67 PP68 PP69 P ackinP cs ) 16 30 30 30 30 01 44 01 30 31 41 31 33 stru tion (8 4.1.4 101P 101P 101P 101P 101P (b)), In P1 P1 P1 L P1 L P130 L P1 L P1 P1 P144 P1 P1 L P1 P1 P112 (a or (c) P1 P1

ed se pt titi b) 3.5 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 ce an (7 Ex qu d se ite titi a) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 an (7 3.4 Lim qu

l cia ions ) - - - - - - - - - - - - - pe (6 3.3 274 274 S rovisP

g ) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ackin Group (5 P 2.0.1.3

ryia ) (s ) - - - - - - - 3 3 - - - - - - sid sk (4 2.0 4. 4. ubS Ri

as v ) Cl (3 2.0 1 D 3 C 2 H 3 H 2 H 3 H 3 J 2 L 3 L 3 L 3 G 4 B 4 B 1 D 4 B 2 B or Di 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. r, r, te te r, r, rsu rsu r te with with r, r, o 5% S S rsu 1 e e burste withS arg arg with bS burste ID out b PHORU PHORU US with b with burste ss than R l, g ch g ch e e with with e with le PHO PHORU g D D lasting ONN llin llin S or ng with r b ITE PHOS ITE PHOS id ATE d o ) PHO charg PHOS charge u charge charge charg RGOLIC LIQU with or charge tte PSN (2 E , WH , WH liq TIV TIVATE r blasti 3.1.2 EP R CANO or prope or prope lling lling lling AC lling AC lling PE lling o TRIC f e e e e e HY e e f C ATOR TY , F IARY IARY WHITE, WHITE, op IARY op R- op R- op or we EL N G, ND arg ND arg prope pr ND pr pr prope arg pr TRIC E TO LING ch ch r r r MINATING r C ) dry E TIN LE g g or o o WATE o WATE or WITH g ch o LE INCE INCE SMOKE e SMOKE e INCE e S, e S, e ILLU e E TOL NON- LAS llin llin rg rg rg EC rg EC rg TORS lline rg C ss , B pe pe ON, p RS, ONATING a RS, WITH D E PROP x x cha cha cha AN cha AN cha x cha O TE (O m O S d.3d IV S, e e MOT ITE RE S NITION, r, NITION, r, NITI lling NITION, lling NITION, lling lling RIV lling NITION, lling NAT , DS by T /A8 OL e e TRIVN e TN out e e O TOL r, S /2 P rste rste pe O O pe TE ZE C TONATE O X 4 0 XE CHARGE AMMU bu AMMU bu AMMU xe AMMU xpe AMMU xpe C xpe C xe ROCKE with AMMU xpe D UF O wate D OB

C 90 e 1 ) 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 0 4 5 7 7 8 NNE UN No. (1 MS A Pag 024 024 024 024 0245 024 024 024 0249 025 025 025 025 0266 026 026

583

Bilaga 1

1 1 2 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 4 5 6 7 8 d.3d X 4 e 1 UN No. 8) (1 027 027 027 027 027 027 027 028 028 028 0283 028 028 028 028 028 /A8 Pag /2 NNE A

C 90 MS

tionsa

erv

Obs 7) (1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . and B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B ies ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ert n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n

Prop

s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe rm rm rm rm rm rm rm rm rm rm rm rm rm rm rm f te f te f te f te f te f te f te f te f te te f te f te f te f te f te o o o o o o o o o of o o o o o . ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo gl gl gl gl gl gl gl gl gl tances glossary gl gl gl gl gl ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ub ee ee ee ee ee ee S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S

n tio rom f rom f rom f rom f rom f rom f rom f rom f rom f rom f rom rom f rom f rom f rom f rom f grega 7 d d d d d d d d d d d f d d d d d Se 6) o 7. tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec (1 1 t te te te te te te te te te te te te te te te 7. t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a ge and Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro Prote Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro 04. f he 04. f he 04. f he 02. f he 04. f he 02. f he 04. f he 04. f he 04. f he 04. f he 04. he 04. f he 04. f he 04. f he 04. f he 04. f he Stowa os os os os os os os os os os s of os os os os os

gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory tea Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source C source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source

X X X X X X X X X Y X X Y X X X 5) 7.8 S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- EmS (1 5.4.3.2 B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F-

lk d bu ions 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - rs rovis (1 4.2.5 e P nks an inta a n ns ble t co ioct 3) a ank (1 4.2.5 4.3 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ort T stru P in

ions 1) (1 4.1.4 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - rovisP IBC c- s 0) stru tion (1 4.1.4 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - In

ions ) g (9 4.1.4 - - - - - L1 L1 - - - - L1 L1 rovis PP76 PP76 PP67 PP67 PP67 PP67 P ackinP cs ) 43 43 34 34 34 34 30 30 30 41 41 30 30 38 stru tion (8 4.1.4 102P 102P 102P 102P 101P 101P 12 (b) ), (c) ) or (b) 101P 101P In P1 P1 P1 L P1 L P1 L P1 L P1 P1 L P1 L P1 (a or P132 (a P1 P1 P1 L P1 L P1

ed se pt titi b) 3.5 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 ce an (7 Ex qu d se ite titi a) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 an (7 3.4 Lim qu

l cia ions ) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - pe (6 3.3 S rovisP

g ) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ackin Group (5 P 2.0.1.3

ryia ) (s ) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - sid sk (4 2.0 ubS Ri

as v ) Cl (3 2.0 1 C 3 C 3 C 4 C 3 C 4 C 1 C 1 C 2 C 1 D 2 D 1 D 2 D 1 D 2 D 1 D or Di 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1.

an

ss th le

d with arge arge tte chg chg

ONN we tin tin charge charge AR or rsu rsu ) b b ting ting (2 E E rsu rsu , LINE PSN 3.1.2 IC IC R CAN ) dry tor LE V V O a IB E E , F RITE , withle , withle X D D LL LL ton if if with b with b LING LING R E R E E E LING r r T T , FLE L L W W L (PIC ssa t deu or or D E E L L E RS RS o d d E , POW , POW INE my AP TO TO han han , ROCKE , ROCKE H PROP PROP ESG ESG ES, OIG ES, OIG PROP ANID r, b with S S S S S d.3d S, S, D D D D S, MO MO U RS E E AD AD S, RI RI RI RI TE TE G /A8 T T K K STE NAD NAD /2 R R C C ITRO O X 4 1 CHARGE CHARGE CART CART CA CA CHARGE RO RO N 20% wate OB GRE GRE WARHE WARHE CHARGE

C 90 e 1 ) 1 2 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 4 5 6 7 8 NNE UN No. (1 MS A Pag 027 027 027 027 027 027 027 028 028 028 0283 028 028 028 028 028

584

Bilaga 1

2 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 0 1 3 5 6 2 d.3d X 4 e 1 UN No. 8) (1 028 029 029 029 029 029 029 029 029 029 030 030 030 030 030 031 /A8 Pag /2 NNE A

C 90 MS

tionsa

erv

Obs 7) (1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . and B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B ies ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ert n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n

Prop

s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe rm rm rm rm rm rm rm rm rm rm rm rm rm rm rm rm

f te f te f te f te f te f te f te f te f te f te f te f te f te f te f te f te o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o

ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo

gle gle gle gle gle gle gle gle gle gle gle gle gle gle gle gle eS eS eS eS eS eS eS eS eS eS eS eS eS eS eS eS

s r o n tio rom f rom f rom f rom f rom f rom f rom f rom f rom f rom f rom f rom source rom f rom f rom f rom f grega 7 d d d d d d d d d d d ation as f f d d d d Se tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec g d tec tec tec tec 6)(1 o 7. te te te te te te te te te te te tec te te te te 1 t t. t. t. t. t. t. t. t. t. t. t. gree te t. t. t. t. 7. Pro a Pro a Pro a Pro a Pro a Pro a Pro a Pro a Pro a Pro a Pro a S Pro a Pro a Pro a Pro a ge and f he f he f he f he f he f he f he f he f he f he f he . Pro f he f he f he f he 02. o 04. o 05. o 05. o 05. o 05. o 05. o 05. o 02. o 03. o 02. o 02. 4G 02. o 03. o 02. o 02. o Stowa s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory at.e gory gory gory gory

Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate Class 1. of h Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source

X X X X X X X X X X X Z X Y X X 5) 7.8 S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- EmS (1 5.4.3.2 B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F-

lk d bu ions 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - rs rovis (1 4.2.5 e P nks an inta a n ns ble t co ioct 3) a ank (1 4.2.5 4.3 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ort T stru P in

ions 1) (1 4.1.4 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - rovisP IBC c- s 0) stru tion (1 4.1.4 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - In

ions ) g (9 4.1.4 - - - - - - L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 rovis PP71 PP72 PP71 PP67 PP67 PP67 PP67 PP67 PP49 PP69 P ackinP cs ) 39 39 30 41 41 30 30 34 30 30 30 30 30 13 33 35 stru tion (8 4.1.4 102P 101P 101P 101P 101P 101P In P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 L P1 L P1 L P1 L P1 L P1 L P1 P1 P1

ed se pt titi b) 3.5 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 ce an (7 Ex qu d se ite titi a) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 an (7 3.4 Lim qu

l cia ions ) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - pe (6 3.3 204 S rovisP

g ) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ackin Group (5 P 2.0.1.3

ry ) 40 ia (s ) 8 2P sid sk (4 2.0 - - - - - - - - - - - 1/ - - ub Ri 6. S See S

as v ) Cl (3 2.0 4 D 1 D 2 F 1 F 2 F 2 F 2 F 1 F 4 G 3 G 4 G 4 G 4 G 3 G 4 G 4 G or Di 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1.

r, llinge lling te r, e rsu xp xp urste er, e te r, arge arge out b rs u chg chg with burste clad tin tin without br rs rs o with b ) tal- u u E with or charge charge without (2 b b IV CING PSN 3.1.2 le S lling with lling U e or e N ib OL e e rg rg ex arge , with , with arge charge IARY ITIO fl ch leif leif op H op PROD with N g r r chg ting EXP MINATING pr AS ND pr cha cha ING tin rs S,E r L r AR- ing ing MU NAL T TONATING me or or tin u IC oe F oe ll ll E rsu d d rs ILLU rg INCE rg TE SMOKE R b u E R AM , SIG ONAT ), DE han han b DEV S d.3 S SE SE S with b G cha cha WDO FO GE d U T N NITION, PHOTO- NITION, NITION, or prope NITION, or prope RS /A , DE (F S with S with DI lling S, lling e e H P E 8 D MB NAD NAD NU e MB e /2 O xp O xp arg arg ASL X 4 2 COR CORD B GRE GRE MINE ROCKE SO AMMU e B AMMU e AMMU ch AMMU ch F TRAC CARTRID C 90 e 1 ) 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 0 1 3 5 6 2 NNE UN No. (1 MS A Pag 028 029 029 029 029 029 029 029 029 029 030 030 030 030 030 031

585

Bilaga 1

3 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 9 d.3d X 4 e 1 UN No. 8) (1 031 031 031 031 031 031 031 032 032 032 032 032 032 0326 032 032 032 /A8 Pag /2 NNE A

C 90 MS

tionsa

erv

Obs 7) (1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . and B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B ies ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ert n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n

Prop

s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe rm rm rm rm rm rm rm rm rm rm rm rm rm rm rm rm rm f te f te f te f te f te f te f te f te f te f te f te f te f te te f te f te f te o o o o o o o o o o o o o of o o o

ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo

gle gle gle gle gle gle gle gle gle gle gle gle gle glossarye gle gle gle eS eS eS eS eS eS eS eS eS eS eS eS eS eS eS eS eS

n tio rom f rom f rom f rom f rom f rom f rom f rom f rom f rom f rom f rom f rom f rom rom f rom f rom f grega 7 d d d d d d d d d d d d d d f d d d Se 6) o 7. tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec (1 1 t te te te te te te te te te te te te te te te te 7. t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a ge and Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro Prote Pro Pro Pro 03. f he 03. f he 03. f he 03. f he 02. f he 03. f he 03. f he 02. f he 04. f he 05. f he 01. f he 05. f he 02. f he 04. he 04. f he 04. f he 04. f he Stowa os os os os os os os os os os os os os s of os os os

gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory tea Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source C source Cate source Cate source Cate source

X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 5) 7.8 S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- EmS (1 5.4.3.2 B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F-

lk d bu ions 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - rs rovis (1 4.2.5 e P nks an inta a n ns ble t co ioct 3) a ank (1 4.2.5 4.3 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ort T stru P in

ions 1) (1 4.1.4 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - rovisP IBC c- s 0) stru tion (1 4.1.4 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - In

ions ) g (9 4.1.4 - - - - - - - - L1 - - - - - - L1 L1 rovis PP67 PP67 PP67 P ackinP cs ) 35 42 42 41 41 41 33 33 30 01 34 30 42 30 30 30 stru tion (8 4.1.4 101P 102P 101P 101P In P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 L P1 P1 L P1 P1 P130 P1 P1 L P1 L

ed se pt titi b) 3.5 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 ce an (7 Ex qu d se ite titi a) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 an (7 3.4 Lim qu

l cia ions ) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - pe (6 3.3 347 S rovisP

g ) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ackin Group (5 P 2.0.1.3

ryia ) (s ) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - sid sk (4 2.0 ubS Ri

as v ) Cl (3 2.0 2 G 2 G 3 G 3 G 4 G 3 G 3 G 4 G 2 E 2 L 4 S 2 F 4 G 1 C 3 C 2 C 1 E or Di 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1.

r , o SE e G rg withS E cha ID TILC CARTRID JE ting OR rsu leif e ANK ANK or RT P e ) r arg L L E (2 with b RGOLIC LIQU , B , B , IN arg PSN 3.1.2 ord PE E ch S S ICV g N N chg ONS HY e E ONS O han AP arg D APO AP AP R E K rstin TICE WE WITH g ch burstin WE WE AN WE bu G G LAR LAR R L R ACR U U FOR llin , POW FO FOR B FO ITIN ITIN P B B S TORS e withS S S S N N , S px ES E E E S withE d.3 , SMOKE E , TUS , TUS GE MO GD G GE G O d RSE RSE , IG , IG R R T RI TILC RSE ID D /A S S NAD out e JE E 8 IT IT ZE ZE IT RTRID ALL ARMS, RP /2 X 4 3 IGNALSS IGN IGN UF UF GRE PRIME PRIME CARTRID ROCKE with CART ROP IGN AC CARTRID MS ARTRC TO

C 90 e 1 ) 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 9 NNE UN No. (1 MS A Pag 031 031 031 031 031 031 031 032 032 032 032 032 032 0326 032 032 032

586

Bilaga 1

4 0 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 9 0 2 3 4 d.3d X 4 e 1 UN No. 8) (1 033 033 033 033 033 0335 033 033 033 033 034 0341 034 034 034 /A8 Pag /2 NNE A

C 90 MS

tionsa

erv

Obs 7) (1 . . . . . . . . . . . and B B B B B B B B B B B ies ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ert n n n n n n n n n n n

Prop

s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe rm rm rm rm rm rm rm rm rm rm rm f te f te f te f te f te te f te f te f te f te f te o o o o o of o o o o o . . . . ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo gl gl gl gl gl glossary gl gl gl gl tances tances tances gl ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ub ubstance ub ub ee S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S d r d r

s o s o n ing tea ing tea tio m m rom f "Aways, fro "Aways, fro rom f rom f rom rom f rom f rom f rom f rom f rom rom f rom f rom f grega 7 d rchlorates an chlor d rchlorates an chlor d d d d f d d d d d d f d d d Se tec contain e tec contain e tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec 6)(1 o 7. te n p ining n p ining te te te te te te te te te te 1 t e ote e ote 7. t.a Pr t.a Pr t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a ge and Pro Wh Wh Pro Pro Prote Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro Prote Pro Pro Pro 05. f he 03. rates or contas f he 03. rates or contas f he 03. f he 03. f he 03. he 02. f he 01. f he 02. f he 02. f he 04. f he 04. he 04. f he 04. f he 02. f he Stowa o lo o lo o o o o o o o o o o o s ive s ive s s s s of s s s s s s of s s s gory gory monium compound los gory monium compound los gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory om" ch px rchlorates.e om" ch px rchlorates.e tea tea Cate source Cate am fr e p source Cate am fr e p source Cate source Cate source C source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source C source Cate source Cate source Cate source

X Y Y X X X X X X X Y Y Y Y X 5) 7.8 S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- EmS (1 5.4.3.2 B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F-

lk d bu ions 4) - 1 1 - - - - - - - - - - - rs (1 4.2.5 TP P17T P32T TP P17T P32T e rovisP nks an inta a n ns ble t co ioct 3) a ank (1 4.2.5 4.3 - T1 T1 - - - - - - - - - - - ort T stru P in

ions 1) (1 4.1.4 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - rovisP IBC c- s 0) stru tion (1 4.1.4 - 100C 100C - - - - - - - - - - - - In IB IB

ions ) g (9 4.1.4 - - - - - - - - - - - L1 rovis PP61 PP62 PP64 PP65 PP61 PP62 PP65 PP43 PP67 P ackinP cs ) 30 16 16 35 35 35 35 30 30 ) 11 30 stru tion (8 4.1.4 12 ) or (b) (b) 14 (a 101P In P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P135 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 (a P112 P1 P1 P1 L

ed se pt titi b) 3.5 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 ce an (7 Ex qu d se ite titi a) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 an (7 3.4 Lim qu

l cia ions ) - - - - - - - - - - - - pe (6 3.3 105 105 S rovisP

g ) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ackin Group (5 P 2.0.1.3

ryia ) (s ) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - sid sk (4 2.0 ubS Ri

as v ) Cl (3 2.0 1 F 5 D 5 D 1 G 2 G 3 G 4 G 4 S 4 C 4 C 1 D 1 D 3 C 3 C 4 D or Di 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. ) r BE E)

TYPE ss 18% TYP % wate G, or an NG, 25% TIN TILE an 25 d with le an ss th AS LASTI C e B ss th ssa ss th , BLT , le not le N NT m e E GE K RT PROJE , by e A ANK or withd not le with ) arg (AG ( L or plasticiz ce DE ss arg PSN (2 3.1.2 B , B , BLAN , INE tte d with IZ ch EP PE E ie D ma chg g Y ONS ONS dif bstan E TIC TY AP AP or we o su TT , bye rstin G, L ARMS L ARMS m g LAS c bu ING, T WE WE dry un in , WE , P burstin TIN T ES mass ES ES ES AS O y O ticiz O ss O bstan LAS L FOR S , SMALS FOR S , SMALS L b L s L L withS S withE , B S S S S E UL l), LU LU may LU g su E d.3 O E E, B G GE GE GE LE o LE % pla LE b LE in d D IVS IV RK RK RK RK C h C 8 C l, C TIL /A E O WO WO WORKS WO WO co 1 ticiz CJE 8 RP LP al s /2 X 4 4 TO XE XPLOSE IREF IREF IREF IREF IREF CARTRID CARTRID CARTRID CARTRID ITRON (or ITRON than ITRON alcoho ITRON pla ROP

C 90 e 1 ) 0 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 9 0 2 3 4 NNE UN No. (1 MS A Pag 033 033 033 033 033 0335 033 033 033 033 034 0341 034 034 034

587

Bilaga 1

5 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 d.3d X 4 e 1 UN No. 8) (1 034 034 034 034 034 035 035 035 035 035 035 035 035 035 035 0360 036 /A8 Pag /2 NNE A

C 90 MS

tionsa

erv

Obs 7) (1 . . . . . . and B B B B B B ies ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ert n n n n n n

Prop

s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe rm rm rm rm rm rm f te f te f te f te te f te o o o o of o

ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo

gle gle gle gle glossarye gle eS eS eS eS - - - - - - - - - - - eS eS

n tio rom f rom f rom f rom f rom f rom f rom f rom f rom f rom f rom f rom f rom f rom f rom f rom rom f grega 7 d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d f d Se 6) o 7. tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec (1 1 t te te te te te te te te te te te te te te te te 7. t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a ge and Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro Prote Pro 01. f he 04. f he 02. f he 05. f he 01. f he 05. f he 02. f he 02. f he 02. f he 05. f he 05. f he 05. f he 05. f he 05. f he 05. f he 05. he 05. f he Stowa os os os os os os os os os os os os os os os s of os

gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory tea Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source C source Cate source

X X X X X X X X X X X X Y Y Y X X 5) 7.8 S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- EmS (1 5.4.3.2 B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F-

lk d bu ions 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - rs rovis (1 4.2.5 e P nks an inta a n ns ble t co ioct 3) a ank (1 4.2.5 4.3 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ort T stru P in

ions 1) (1 4.1.4 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - rovisP IBC c- s 0) stru tion (1 4.1.4 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - In

ions ) g (9 4.1.4 L1 L1 L1 - - - - - - - - - - - - - rovis PP67 PP67 PP67 P ackinP cs ) 30 30 30 30 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 31 stru tion (8 4.1.4 101P 101P 101P In P1 L P1 L P1 L P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P131 P1

ed se pt titi b) 3.5 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 ce an (7 Ex qu d se ite titi a) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 an (7 3.4 Lim qu

l cia ions ) - - - - - pe (6 3.3 178 274 178 274 178 274 178 274 178 274 178 274 178 274 178 274 178 274 178 274 178 274 S rovisP

g ) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ackin Group (5 P 2.0.1.3

ry ) 34 34 34 ia (s ) 9P 9P 9P sid sk (4 2.0 - - - - - - - - - - - - - ubS Ri See S See S See S as v ) Cl (3 2.0 4 S 2 D 4 D 4 F 4 S 4 B 4 C 4 D 4 G 1 L 2 L 3 L 1 L 2 L 3 L 1 B 4 B or Di 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1.

g g

e e e rg blastinr blastinr cha o f o f arg arg g ch g ch ting RICT TRIC rsu CE CE lline lline L L ) px px N-E -EN (2 re e e with b . . . . . . . . O O PSN 3.1.2 c or or S S S S S S S S .O.S. .O.S. .O.S. N r r ONS , N , N , N S, , NS tra E E E IE IE AP , N.O. , N.O. , N.O. , N.O. , N.O. , N.O. , N.O. , N.O. IV IV IV LB L with urste urste WE IVE IVE IVE IVE IVE IVE IVE IVE M MB rt, b b E ES e in with with FOR PLOSX PLOSX PLOSX PLOSX PLOSX PLOSX PLOSX PLOSX , EXPLOSS , EXPLOSS , EXPLOSS SE S S S E E E E E E E E R ASS R ASO d.3 GE S, S, S, S, S, S, S, S, NCE NCE NCE d TILC TILEC TILEC LE LE LE LE LE LE LE LE A A A NATO NAT /A8 JE TS TS TS O /2 TOE TE X 4 5 ROP PROJE PROJE CARTRID ARTIC ARTIC ARTIC ARTIC ARTIC ARTIC ARTIC ARTIC SUB SUB SUB D D

C 90 e 1 ) 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 NNE UN No. (1 MS A Pag 034 034 034 034 034 035 035 035 035 035 035 035 035 035 035 0360 036

588

Bilaga 1

6 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 d.3d X 4 e 1 UN No. 8) (1 036 036 036 036 036 036 036 036 037 037 037 037 037 037 037 037 0378 /A8 Pag /2 NNE A

C 90 MS

tionsa

erv

Obs 7) (1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . and B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B ies ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ert n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n

Prop

s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe rm rm rm rm rm rm rm rm rm rm rm rm rm rm rm rm rm f te f te f te f te f te f te f te f te f te f te f te f te f te f te f te f te te o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o of

ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo

gle gle gle gle gle gle gle gle gle gle gle gle gle gle gle gle glossarye eS eS eS eS eS eS eS eS eS eS eS eS eS eS eS eS eS

n tio rom f rom f rom f rom f rom f rom f rom f rom f rom f rom f rom f rom f rom f rom f rom f rom f rom grega 7 d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d f Se 6) o 7. tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec (1 1 t te te te te te te te te te te te te te te te te 7. t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a ge and Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro Prote 02. f he 02. f he 05. f he 05. f he 01. f he 01. f he 01. f he 05. f he 02. f he 05. f he 03. f he 01. f he 04. f he 04. f he 01. f he 05. f he 05. he Stowa os os os os os os os os os os os os os os os os s of

gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory tea Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source C source

X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 5) 7.8 S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- EmS (1 5.4.3.2 B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F-

lk d bu ions 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - rs rovis (1 4.2.5 e P nks an inta a n ns ble t co ioct 3) a ank (1 4.2.5 4.3 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ort T stru P in

ions 1) (1 4.1.4 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - rovisP IBC c- s 0) stru tion (1 4.1.4 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - In

ions ) g (9 4.1.4 L1 L1 - - - - - - L1 - - - - - - - rovis PP67 PP67 PP67 P ackinP cs ) 30 30 33 33 33 41 41 30 30 30 41 35 34 34 33 33 stru tion (8 4.1.4 101P 101P 101P 102P 102P In P1 L P1 L P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 L P1 P1 P1 P1 L P1 L P1 P1 P133

ed se pt titi b) 3.5 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 ce an (7 Ex qu d se ite titi a) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 an (7 3.4 Lim qu

l cia ions ) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - pe (6 3.3 347 S rovisP

g ) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ackin Group (5 P 2.0.1.3

ryia ) (s ) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - sid sk (4 2.0 ubS Ri

as v ) Cl (3 2.0 4 G 4 G 2 B 4 B 4 S 4 S 4 S 1 F 4 D 4 F 2 G 4 S 1 D 2 D 4 S 1 B 4 B or Di 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1.

arge arge chg chg

llin llin pex pex

charge r e r e N N N r o r o leif ) ting r E E (2 rsu rste rste or IV IV PSN 3.1.2 ITION ITION ITION d SO SO E L L MU MU MU han D TIC with bT with buT with buT EXP EXP OOF R AM R AM R AM E E TICE HAN S,E S,E E O O O K K , IC IC PEY PRAC G AC SE LARU RP B P T ION, PR RS FO RS FO RS FO ONATINGT ITIN , ROCKES , ROCS , ROCS , VIC DEV DEV AP TYP d.3 T E N SE E G G , TU , C d NITION, AD AD AD N N S S, CA S /A NAT NAT NAT , DS , IGS DI DI R ER RE 8 OT OT OT NAD NU NU /2 E E E ZEU ZEU IGNAL D IM X 4 6 AMMU AMMUNI D D D F F WARHE WARHE WARHE GRE S SO SO PRIME PR PRIM C 90 e 1 ) 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 NNE UN No. (1 MS A Pag 036 036 036 036 036 036 036 036 037 037 037 037 037 037 037 037 0378

589

Bilaga 1

7 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 1 d.3d X 4 e 1 UN No. 8) (1 037 038 038 038 038 038 038 038 038 038 0389 039 039 /A8 Pag /2 NNE if A bet . C 90 itive o sn rityo MS with en all n th d e se h x w d, sh t au mi more e, ie n e nc cif tee m tas e p (TNT) co bu sp m ne s coe tions ish than a will be r e thy erv otolue t. Ts bd lo atiz e Obs 7) which mg riz (1 . . . . . . re o and B B B B B B of trinitr sive a th ies ix ix ix ix ix ix g tsn phle d d d d d d plo e r au ert n n n n n n x r o istin e g ag Prop in cons ating wate cificallye s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe n itizs nce to n rm rm rm rm rm rm tas se ss sp f te f te f te f te f te f te b de o o o o o o su r ss alcohol, , unle . . . . . . Mass de o le d m. rte ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo niu nce ining gl gl gl gl gl gl tances tances tances tances tas e e e e e e b wettinge eS eS eS eS eS eS ubS ubS ubS ubS ubstanceS Tritonal is a alumi uS th conta transpo

d

n ad an rom tio f rom f rom f rom f rom f rom f rom f rom f d rom f rom f rom rom f rom f grega 7 d d d d d d d rom" le tec d d d f d d Se 6) o 7. tec tec tec tec tec tec tec f te tec tec tec tec tec (1 1 t te te te te te te te Pro te te te te 7. t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a s. t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a ge and Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro "Away Pro Pro Prote Pro Pro 02. f he 05. f he 04. f he 05. f he 05. f he 01. f he 04. f he 04. f he 04. f he 04. f he 04. he 04. f he 04. f he Stowa os os os os os os os os os os s of os os

gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory tea Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate its compound source Cate source Cate source C source Cate source Cate source

X X X X X X Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 5) 7.8 S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- EmS (1 5.4.3.2 B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F-

lk d bu ions 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - rs rovis (1 4.2.5 e P nks an inta a n ns ble t co ioct 3) a ank (1 4.2.5 4.3 - - - - - - - - - - - - ort T stru P in

ions 1) (1 4.1.4 - - - - - - - - - - - - rovisP IBC c- s 0) stru tion (1 4.1.4 - - - - - - - - - - - - - In

ions ) g (9 4.1.4 - - - - - - - - - - - rovis PP26 P ackinP cs ) 36 01 34 01 01 01 stru tion (8 4.1.4 102P 12 (c) 12 (c) 12 (c) 12 (c) (c) 12 (c) 12 ) or (b) In P1 P1 P1 L P1 P1 P1 P1 (b) or P1 (b) or P1 (b) or P1 (b) or P112 (b) or P1 (b) or P1 (a

ed se pt titi b) 3.5 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 ce an (7 Ex qu d se ite titi a) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 an (7 3.4 Lim qu

l cia ions ) - - - - - - - - pe (6 3.3 178 274 178 274 178 274 266 S rovisP

g ) - - - - - - - - - - - - ackin Group (5 P 2.0.1.3

ryia ) (s ) - - - - - - - - - - - - sid sk (4 2.0 ubS Ri

as v ) Cl (3 2.0 4 C 2 L 2 C 2 B 4 B 4 S 1 D 1 D 1 D 1 D 1 D 1 D 1 D or Di 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1.

% D ; ; ; RA-T ET ITIZE NEE NG an 15 E SN s Z NI E NITE NITE N E s NE AI NE OL (HMXE OL EL SE a R . . . B D C IN ss th C Y m S S S LB Y t le Y TH , D y RIME ITRO ) AN CONT (CE AMR o (CE RE , b P N.O. N.O. N.O. ID NT E IN IT n IN TU er UR TROSTI RAME iz ) TRIN (TE T AM with AM T at (2 WITH D N ER X D ) MIX PSN 3.1.2 , E TRAIN, TRAIN, TRAIN, N E U XANI ITR TRANE ITR NE gm YT ICV E E E ONIC AC A) LU MI) TE TTE CLOTE G leh P E V V V L H T O HE TRIN N TRIN p M D O LP T MIXT NTT E LE WE, E CY TO % , E R E US (TN E ( N D N D C 0 PLOSIX PLOSIX PLOSIX IAZ NONE E ITRO NE E AND EL RE EL ; O n 1 GE E E E TR NE NE B N Y ) AN THYE TU Y ) AN a ROPHORIC , POW ZO ZE U RIN TIL HT X HT X h t TRID N N LO T S LUENEO NZE (HMX s R PY ES NTS, NTS, NTS, E E T EB IME TRAM ) MIX mass IME se d.3 A S, GD B OFLUORE or OT O AL R N; RD E N y R N; RD INE t l d , C LE RI RE ITRO R T GE T GE b T GE o /A SE NA IT LO O LO r, LO O n 8 S TU X IN INITR C X C TO C X h /2 A R Y Y C Y ITRAM it X 4 7 C ARTIC CART COMPONE COMPONE COMPONE 5-NITRO TRINITROB TRINITR TRINITRO MIX HE T TR TRITON C HE C O wate or C HE N w C 90 e 1 ) 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 1 NNE UN No. (1 MS A Pag 037 038 038 038 038 038 038 038 038 038 0389 039 039

590

Bilaga 1

8 2 4 5 6 8 9 0 1 d.3d X 4 e 1 UN No. 8) (1 039 0393 039 039 039 0397 039 039 040 040 /A8 Pag /2 NNE A

C 90 MS

tionsa

erv

Obs 7) . . (1 . . . . . . and sive B B B B B B ies plo plosive ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ert x x n n n n n n e e . Prop ting atingn an atingn to to to s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe e e rm rm rm rm rm rm

f te f te te f te f te f te o o of o o o . Mass d . Mass de . Mass d . ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo tances tances gl gl glossary gl gl gl tances bu ubstance bu ee ee ee ee ee ee ub S S S S S S S S S S d f 6 6 f 6 f 5 os d d d 1. d 5 os d d 1. d 5 os d n ad an , 1. te d 1. te " ng te , 1. tec te , 1. te tio rom om" ning ive c om" ning c ni ce om" ning ive om" ning c om" ning ive c f fr d hold los te fr d hold 5 an te rom d e 5 an fr d hold los te fr d hold 5 an te fr d hold los te rom f rom d d te rve 1.3 p ro d te rve of fd te rv 1. rot d te rve 1.3 p d te rve 1. of d te rve 1.3 p rom f grega 7 d d f rom" le tec ara te t orn 2, x ara te t orn , 1. s te te t or hold n 3, s of P ara te t orn 2, x Pro ara te t orn 3, s ara te t orn 2, x d te te f te p in 1. J. p at. p in ive J. Pro at. para in at. p in 1. J. at. p in ive J. Pro at. p in 1. J. Pro at. te Se 6) o 7. c c arate n 1, p e arate n 1.3 p e ara n , 1. p J. e arate n 1, p e arate n , 1. p e arate n 1, p e c (1 1 t te Pro pe "Se a artme rom e h pe "Se a artme 2, losp h pe a artme .2 plosive h pe "Se a artme rom e h pe "Se a artme losp h pe "Se a artme rom e h te 7. t.a t.a s. t.a d by p s 1. t f d by p x d "Se by p 1 x rou d by p s 1. t f d by p 1.2 x d by p s 1. t f t.a ge and Pro Prote "Away "S m n p grou s of "S m 1. grou s of "S m 1, e g s of "S m n p grou s of "S m 1, grou s of "S m n p grou s of Pro he 4 an ally ce 4 an ally 1, 4 an ally ty 4 an ally ce 4 an ally 4 an ally ce 04. f he 04. 04. f he 05. in co sio x ility rce 05. in co rom e ility rce 05. in co 1.s rom bili rce 05. in co sio x ility rce 05. in co 1.s rom e ility rce 05. in co sio x ility rce 04. f he Stowa os s of os 1.n d te ivi 6 e u 1.n d te s 1. u 1.n d te ti 1.n d te ivi 6 e u 1.n d te n u 1.n d te ivi 6 e u os gory gory gory gory itu so gory itu t fp so gory itu " pt f pa sou gory itu so gory itu o t fp so gory itu so gory te sio 1.d sio sion ce te sio sio 1.d sio ce sio 1.d Cate source aC source Cate its compound source Cate ivid long comple om" dfr an compatib om fr Cate ivid long comple om"fr divi xe compatib om fr aC divi long comple omfr division xcee com omfr Cate ivid long comple om" dfr an compatib om fr Cate ivid long comple om"fr divisi xe compatib om fr Cate ivid long comple om" dfr an compatib om fr Cate source

Y Y Y X X X X X X Y 5) 7.8 S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- EmS (1 5.4.3.2 B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F-

lk d bu ions 4) - - - - - - - - - rs rovis (1 4.2.5 e P nks an inta a n ns ble t co ioct 3) a ank (1 4.2.5 4.3 - - - - - - - - - ort T stru P in

ions 1) (1 4.1.4 - - - - - - - - - rovisP IBC c- s 0) stru tion (1 4.1.4 - - - - - - - - - - In

ions ) g (9 4.1.4 - - - - - - - - rovis PP26 P ackinP cs ) ) 01 01 01 01 01 stru tion (8 4.1.4 12 (c) (b) 12 (a 12 (b) ), (c) In P1 (b) or P112 P1 P1 P1 P101 P1 P1 P1 P1 (a or

ed se pt titi b) 3.5 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 ce an (7 Ex qu d se ite titi a) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 an (7 3.4 Lim qu

l cia ions ) - - - - - - - - - pe (6 3.3 S rovisP

g ) - - - - - - - - - ackin Group (5 P 2.0.1.3

ryia ) (s ) - - - - - - - - - sid sk (4 2.0 ubS Ri

as v ) Cl (3 2.0 1 D 1 D 1 D 2 J 3 J 1 J 2 J 1 J 2 J 1 D or Di 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1.

e e with d arg arg D na e ch ch 10% TTE l o g g an h WE), co charg charge ss th ID ting burstin burstin of al rsting rs re D D u with with with le LE LE ID ID d ) LE LE U U tte PSN (2 3.1.2 PHNIC AC mixtu with bu with b IQ IQ we TY or FU FU D D LE LE r r, IDU IDU LE LB LB o te LLEE LE ry E IQ IQ MA MA d NE wa , L , L FU FU E B CINOL (SR RS RS ID ID LAM LAM TIL O 20% U S L S TO TO IQ LPHID A than mass L LIQU mass d.3d ITRO y MOT MOT TS, S,T y /A N TON ss br, E E E S WITH F S WITH F br, 8 AX OX KC KC K MB MB /2 t leo O O IPICRYL SU X 4 8 HE HE TRINITRORE n wate RO RO ROC ROCKE B B D wate C 90 e 1 ) 2 4 5 6 8 9 0 1 NNE UN No. (1 MS A Pag 039 0393 039 039 039 0397 039 039 040 040

591

Bilaga 1

9 2 4 5 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 7 8 d.3d X 4 e 1 UN No. 8) (1 040 0403 040 040 0406 040 040 040 0410 041 041 041 041 0415 041 041 /A8 Pag /2 NNE A

C 90 MS

tionsa

erv

Obs 7) (1 . . . . . . .] . . . . . and B B B B B B B B B B B ies ix ix ix ix ix ix ix Bd ix ix ix ix ix ert dn dn dn dn dn dn n dn dn dn dn dn e

Prop app

s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe rm rm rm rm rm rm rms in rm rm rm rm rm

te f te f te f te f te te f te f te te f te f te of o o o o of of te o o of o o . . . . sary ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo los ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo tances glossary gl gl tances gl gl glossary tances g gl gl glossary gl gl e e e e e e ee e e e e e ubS eS eS eS ubstanceS ubS eS eS eS ubS [S eS eS eS eS eS

r s o n tea tio m fro rom rom f rom f rom rom f rom f rom f rom rom f rom f rom f rom f rom rom f rom f grega 7 rom" chlor d d f d d d f d d d d f d d d d d f d d Se f tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec 6)(1 o 7. ining te te te te te te te te te te te 1 t ote t. t. t. t. t. t. t. t. t. t. t. t. t. t. t. t. 7. " Away Pr a Prote a Pro a Pro a Prote a Pro a Pro a Pro a Prote a Pro a Pro a Pro a Pro a Prote a Pro a Pro a ge and 04. contas f he 02. he 01. f he 01. f he 04. he 02. f he 04. f he 04. f he 02. he 04. f he 03. f he 04. f he 04. f he 04. he 04. f he 03. f he Stowa ive os s of os os s of os os os s of os os os os s of os os

gory los gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory px rchlorates.e tea tea tea tea Cate e p source C source Cate source Cate source C source Cate source Cate source Cate source C source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source C source Cate source Cate source

Y X X X Y Y X X X Y X X X X X X 5) 7.8 S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- EmS (1 5.4.3.2 B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F-

lk d bu ions 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - rs rovis (1 4.2.5 e P nks an inta a n ns ble t co ioct 3) a ank (1 4.2.5 4.3 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ort T stru P in

ions 1) (1 4.1.4 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - rovisP IBC c- s 0) stru tion (1 4.1.4 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - In

ions ) g (9 4.1.4 - - - - - - - - - - L1 - - - rovis PP67 PP76 P ackinP cs ) 35 35 41 41 30 30 30 30 35 stru tion (8 4.1.4 12 (c) (b) 14 (b) 12 (c) 101P In P1 (b) or P135 P1 P1 P114 P1 P1 P1 P141 P1 (b) or P1 L P1 P1 P143 P1 P1

ed se pt titi b) 3.5 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 ce an (7 Ex qu d se ite titi a) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 an (7 3.4 Lim qu

l cia ions ) - - - - - - - - - - - - - pe (6 3.3 152 131 S rovisP

g ) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ackin Group (5 P 2.0.1.3

ryia ) (s ) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - sid sk (4 2.0 ubS Ri

as v ) Cl (3 2.0 1 D 4 G 4 S 4 S 3 C 4 C 1 D 2 D 4 D 1 D 4 E 2 C 2 C 2 C 3 C 1 G or Di 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1.

by e or HRITOL T rg se se s Y TILE R 7% wax, cha C atur atur ature TAE an ting fe fe fe N rs (PE ss th u ONN ctive ctive ctive le ANK RT PROJE ) L PSN (2 3.1.2 rote rote not with b , B R CAN , INE E ID p p prote ITRATE O ONS ONS , F ONS AC with TRAN AP AP AP ICT G TN) with LING LING L ARMS NAL NE E WE WE L L WE E RCHLORAT TIN PE E E , SIG A FOR FOR FOR , SMAL AC PE RIAL RIAL S ENZE 1-AC ONATING with ONATING with S S S S RF M GE OB -L TE TE TONE GE EG PROP PROP GE GE U d.3d NIU , AE , AE OS O D D D RYTHRITE TE ITRATE; S, S, , S /A S S R , S , S , S S 8 T ss RGEA /2 AREL AREL INI TRAZ ZEU ZEU ZEU NTAE TRAN H AREL X 4 9 AMMO F F CARTRID D TE F F F PE TE ma CARTRID CARTRID CHARGE C CARTRID CARTRID F C 90 e 1 ) 2 4 5 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 7 8 NNE UN No. (1 MS A Pag 040 0403 040 040 0406 040 040 040 0410 041 041 041 041 0415 041 041

592

Bilaga 1

0 9 0 1 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 5 6 d.3d X 4 e 2 UN No. 8) (1 041 042 042 042 042 042 042 042 042 043 043 043 043 0434 043 043 /A8 Pag /2 NNE A

C 90 MS

tionsa

erv

Obs 7) (1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . and B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B ies ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ert n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n

Prop

s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe rm rm rm rm rm rm rm rm rm rm rm rm rm rm rm rm f te f te f te f te f te f te f te f te f te f te f te f te f te te f te f te o o o o o o o o o o o o o of o o

ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo

gle gle gle gle gle gle gle gle gle gle gle gle gle glossarye gle gle eS eS eS eS eS eS eS eS eS eS eS eS eS eS eS eS

n tio rom f rom f rom f rom f rom f rom f rom f rom f rom f rom f rom f rom f rom f rom rom f rom f grega 7 d d d d d d d d d d d d d d f d d Se 6) o 7. tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec (1 1 t te te te te te te te te te te te te te te te 7. t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a ge and Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro Prote Pro Pro 03. f he 03. f he 03. f he 03. f he 02. f he 05. f he 05. f he 03. f he 03. f he 03. f he 02. f he 01. f he 04. f he 03. he 02. f he 04. f he Stowa os os os os os os os os os os os os os s of os os

gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory tea Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source C source Cate source Cate source

X X X X X X X X X X X X Y X X X 5) 7.8 S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- EmS (1 5.4.3.2 B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F-

lk d bu ions 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - rs rovis (1 4.2.5 e P nks an inta a n ns ble t co ioct 3) a ank (1 4.2.5 4.3 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ort T stru P in

ions 1) (1 4.1.4 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - rovisP IBC c- s 0) stru tion (1 4.1.4 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - In

ions ) g (9 4.1.4 - - - L1 L1 - - - - - - - - L1 L1 L1 rovis PP67 PP67 PP67 PP67 PP67 P ackinP cs ) 35 35 35 30 30 30 30 35 35 35 35 35 11 30 30 stru tion (8 4.1.4 101P 101P 101P 101P 101P In P1 P1 P1 P1 L P1 L P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P130 L P1 L P1 L

ed se pt titi b) 3.5 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 ce an (7 Ex qu d se ite titi a) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 an (7 3.4 Lim qu

l cia ions ) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - pe (6 3.3 266 S rovisP

g ) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ackin Group (5 P 2.0.1.3

ryia ) (s ) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - sid sk (4 2.0 ubS Ri

as v ) Cl (3 2.0 2 G 1 G 2 G 3 G 4 G 2 F 4 F 1 G 2 G 3 G 4 G 4 S 1 C 2 G 4 G 2 C or Di 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1.

ss t leo se se se se se n e e so so so so so e e

arg arg rpu rpu rpu rpu rpu with arg arg D g ch g ch TTE g ch g ch lline lline nical p nical p nical p nical p nical p WE llin lline ) px px ch ch ch ch ch ), xpe px e (2 re re e e r te r te r te r te r te TES e rg PSN 3.1.2 c c or or o o o o o A or e or r r f f f f f ss r r cha tra tra R PE urste urste may urste lling with with b b CHNIC CHNIC CHNIC CHNIC CHNIC WD b burste b e E rt, rt, O l, xp AC e e (P in in with with ROTE ROTE ROTE ROTE ROTE KE with with RF RIAL RIAL SE SE S S PY PY PY PY PY A SE S d.3 U S, S, S, S, S, S with e d , SS , AES , AES TIL TIL TILE TILE LE LE LE LE LE R CE TILC TILE T /A CJE CJE C C 17% alcoho C 8 ARE ARE ARE WD an /2 X 4 0 LF LF LF ROP ROP PROJE PROJE ARTIC ARTIC ARTIC ARTIC ARTIC OP th PROJE PROJE ROCKE

C 90 e 2 ) 9 0 1 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 5 6 NNE UN No. (1 MS A Pag 041 042 042 042 042 042 042 042 042 043 043 043 043 0434 043 043

593

Bilaga 1

1 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 d.3d X 4 e 2 UN No. 8) (1 043 043 043 044 044 044 044 044 044 044 044 044 044 045 0451 /A8 Pag /2 NNE A

C 90 MS

tionsa

erv

Obs 7) (1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . and B B B B B B B B B B B B B B ies ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ert n n n n n n n n n n n n n n

Prop

s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe rm rm rm rm rm rm rm rm rm rm rm rm rm rm f te f te f te f te f te f te f te f te f te f te f te f te f te te o o o o o o o o o o o o o of . ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo gl gl gl gl gl gl gl gl gl gl gl tances gl gl glossary ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ub ee ee ee S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S

f f 5 os d 5 os d n ning , 1. ive tec ning , 1. ive tec tio om" fr d hold te om" fr d hold te rom rom rom rom rom rom rom rom rom rom rom rom te rve 1.3 losp te rve 1.3 losp rom grega 7 fd fd fd fd fd fd fd fd fd fd fd fd d te t orn 2, x d te t orn 2, x d f te te te te te te te te te te te te arap in 1. J. Pro arap in 1. J. Pro te Se 6) o 7. c c c c c c c c c c c c arate n 1, p at.e arate n 1, p at.e c (1 1 t te te te te te te te te te te te te pe "Se a artme rom e h pe "Se a artme rom e h 7. t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a d by p s 1. t f d by p s 1. t f t.a ge and Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro "S m n p grou s of "S m n p grou s of Prote f he f he f he f he f he f he f he f he f he f he f he f he 4 an ally co sio cex ility 4 an ally co sio cex ility he 04. o 02. o 04. o 02. o 01. o 04. o 04. o 02. o 01. o 02. o 04. o 02. o 05. 1. in ivi rceu 05. 1. in ivi rceu 04. Stowa s s s s s s s s s s s s n d te 6 e n d te 6 e s of gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory itu so gory itu so gory sio 1.d sio 1.d te Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate ivid long comple om" dfr an compatib om fr Cate ivid long comple om" dfr an compatib om fr aC source

X X X X X X X X X X X Y X X X 5) 7.8 S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- EmS (1 5.4.3.2 B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F-

lk d bu ions 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - rs rovis (1 4.2.5 e P nks an inta a n ns ble t co ioct 3) a ank (1 4.2.5 4.3 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ort T stru P in

ions 1) (1 4.1.4 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - rovisP IBC c- s 0) stru tion (1 4.1.4 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - In

ions ) g (9 4.1.4 L1 L1 - - - - - - - - - L1 rovis PP67 PP67 PP70 PP70 PP70 PP67 P ackinP cs ) 30 30 37 37 37 37 37 37 37 36 36 01 01 stru tion (8 4.1.4 101P 101P 14 (b) 101P In P1 L P1 L P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P130 L

ed se pt titi b) 3.5 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 ce an (7 Ex qu d se ite titi a) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 an (7 3.4 Lim qu

l cia ions ) - - - - - - - - - - - - pe (6 3.3 347 347 S rovisP

g ) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ackin Group (5 P 2.0.1.3

ryia ) (s ) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - sid sk (4 2.0 ubS Ri

as v ) Cl (3 2.0 3 C 4 C 2 D 4 D 4 S 1 D 2 D 4 D 4 S 4 C 3 C 4 C 1 J 3 J 1 D or Di 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1.

g

tonator tonator tonator tonator R R burstin de de de de IMER IMER ad

T PU T PU ID without rt he en AC or i ator ator ator ICT e e e ton ton ton CIAL without R CIAL without R CIAL without R CIAL without R WITHO WITHO E ) rg rg e e e withD withD arg PSN (2 3.1.2 Y,T Y,T t du t du t du P P 1-AC LEL LEL chg cha cha o o o M M EU EU , COMME , COMME , COMME , COMME , EE , EE F- -F rstin llinge llinge with with with IVE IVE IVE IVE L L D D D IDU IDU bu xp xp E E E TIBS TIBS TRAZOL- AP AP AP PLOS PLOS PLOS PLOS U U LIQ LIQ H H H X X X X MB MB TOTE S, S, S with S S S E E E E O O E E d.3d S with eT S with eT S, S, S, S, S, S, S, C C OE O O , S , S RCAP DE e DE DE /A8 E E /2 SA SA arg RP X 4 1 ROCKE ROCKE CHARGE CHARGE CHARGE CHARGE CHARGE CHARGE CHARGE C C 5-ME TORP ch TO TORP C 90 e 2 ) 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 NNE UN No. (1 MS A Pag 043 043 043 044 044 044 044 044 044 044 044 044 044 045 0451

594

Bilaga 1

2 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 2 3 5 6 8 d.3d X 4 e 2 UN No. 8) (1 045 045 045 045 045 045 045 045 046 0461 046 046 0464 046 046 0467 046 /A8 Pag /2 NNE A

C 90 MS

tionsa

erv

Obs 7) (1 . . . . . . . . . . and B B B B B B B B B B ies ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ert n n n n n n n n n n

Prop

s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe rm rm rm rm rm rm rm rm rm rm f te f te f te f te f te f te f te f te f te te o o o o o o o o o of

ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo

gle gle gle gle gle gle gle gle gle glossarye eS eS eS eS eS eS eS eS eS eS - - - - - - -

n tio rom f rom f rom f rom f rom f rom f rom f rom f rom f rom rom f rom f rom rom f rom f rom rom f grega 7 d d d d d d d d d d f d d d f d d d f d Se 6) o 7. tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec (1 1 t te te te te te te te te te te te te te te 7. t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a ge and Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro Prote Pro Pro Prote Pro Pro Prote Pro 02. f he 02. f he 01. f he 01. f he 01. f he 04. f he 04. f he 02. f he 01. f he 05. he 04. f he 04. f he 04. he 05. f he 04. f he 04. he 04. f he Stowa os os os os os os os os os s of os os s of os os s of os

gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory tea tea tea Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source C source Cate source Cate source C source Cate source Cate source C source Cate source

X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 5) 7.8 S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- EmS (1 5.4.3.2 B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F-

lk d bu ions 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - rs rovis (1 4.2.5 e P nks an inta a n ns ble t co ioct 3) a ank (1 4.2.5 4.3 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ort T stru P in

ions 1) (1 4.1.4 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - rovisP IBC c- s 0) stru tion (1 4.1.4 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - In

ions ) g (9 4.1.4 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - rovis PP68 P ackinP cs ) 41 30 42 31 31 30 30 30 30 01 01 01 01 01 stru tion (8 4.1.4 In P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P101 P1 P1 P101 P1 P1 P101 P1

ed se pt titi b) 3.5 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 ce an (7 Ex qu d se ite titi a) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 an (7 3.4 Lim qu

l cia ions ) - - - - - pe (6 3.3 347 347 347 178 274 178 274 178 274 178 274 178 274 178 274 178 274 178 274 S rovisP

g ) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ackin Group (5 P 2.0.1.3

ryia ) (s ) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - sid sk (4 2.0 ubS Ri

as v ) Cl (3 2.0 4 G 4 G 4 S 4 S 4 S 1 D 2 D 4 D 4 S 1 B 1 C 1 D 1 E 1 F 2 C 2 D 2 E or Di 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1.

D D D D . E E E E lasting ND ND ND ND O.S le r b ng O O O O if o B B B B N, N. ) r AI PSN (2 3.1.2 or r blasti TICS TICS TICS TICS R .S .S .S .S .S d TRIC f o f TE O.S. O.S. CE han LE PLAS PLAS PLAS PLAS , N.O. , N.O. , N.O. , N.O. , N.O. TRICC E, N.V E, N.V TICE PLOSIV IVE IVE IVE IVE IVE -THROWING LE TING, TING, TING, TING, ACR NON- E RS RS RS RS PLOS PLOS PLOSI PLOS PLOS PLOSI PLOS P, RS, RS, U U U U TS, EX X X X X X X X S LINE O O B B B B N E E E E E d.3d E S, S, S, S, S, S, S, ES, E S, S, ES, E S, T RSE NAT LE LE LE LE LE /A8 NAD IT O ICL ICL /2 TONATE TE T T X 4 2 GRE ROCKE IGN D D CHARGE CHARGE CHARGE CHARGE COMPONE ARTIC ARTIC AR ARTIC ARTIC AR ARTIC C 90 e 2 ) 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 2 3 5 6 8 NNE UN No. (1 MS A Pag 045 045 045 045 045 045 045 045 046 0461 046 046 0464 046 046 0467 046

595

Bilaga 1

3 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 0 2 3 4 d.3d X 4 e 2 UN No. 8) (1 046 047 047 047 047 047 047 047 047 0478 047 048 0481 048 048 048 0485 /A8 Pag /2 NNE if if A

C 90 itives itives MS n n se se

moree moree m m co co

tionsa will be will be erv st. st. Obs 7) which lo which lo (1 and sive ts are sive ts are ies plo ne plo ne ert x x e g ag e g ag Prop in in atingn itiz atingn itiz to sn to sn

se se de de r r . Mass de o . Mass de o

nce nce tas tas b wettinge b wettinge - - - - - - - - - - - - - - uS th uS th -

n tio rom rom f rom f rom f rom f rom f rom f rom f rom f rom rom f rom f rom rom f rom f rom f rom grega 7 d d d d f d d d d d d f d d d f d d d d f te te te tec te te te te te te te te te te te te te Se 6) o 7. c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c (1 1 t te te te rote te te te te te te te te te te 7. t.a t.a t.a P t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a ge and Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro Prote Pro Pro Prote Pro Pro Pro Prote 05. f he 04. f he 03. f he 05. f he 05. f he 04. f he 04. f he 03. f he 04. f he 03. he 02. f he 02. f he 01. he 03. f he 04. f he 04. f he 02. he Stowa os os os ryo os os os os os os s of os os s of os os os s of gory gory gory g gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory te te te te Cate source Cate source Cate source [Ca source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source aC source Cate source Cate source aC source Cate source Cate source Cate source aC source

X X X X Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 5) 7.8 S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- EmS (1 5.4.3.2 B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F-

lk d bu ions 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - rs rovis (1 4.2.5 e P nks an inta a n ns ble t co ioct 3) a ank (1 4.2.5 4.3 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ort T stru P in

ions 1) (1 4.1.4 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - rovisP IBC c- s 0) stru tion (1 4.1.4 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - In

ions ) g (9 4.1.4 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - rovisP ackinP cs ) 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 stru tion (8 4.1.4 12 (c) 12 (c) In P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P101 P1 P1 P101 P1 P1 (b) or P1 (b) or P101

ed se pt titi b) 3.5 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 ce an (7 Ex qu d se ite titi a) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 an (7 3.4 Lim qu

l cia ions ) - pe (6 3.3 178 274 178 274 178 274 178 274 178 274 178 274 178 274 178 274 178 274 178 274 178 274 178 274 178 274 178 274 178 274 S rovisP

g ) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ackin Group (5 P 2.0.1.3

ryia ) (s ) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - sid sk (4 2.0 ubS Ri

as v ) Cl (3 2.0 2 F 3 C 4 E 4 F 1 A 1 C 1 D 1 G 3 C 3 G 4 C 4 D 4 S 5 D 1 D 1 D 4 G or Di 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1.

N;E ; GO TC NITE OL (OE CY IN

NSITIVE (CE AMR IN IT . . INSE AM . ) RY D PSN (2 3.1.2 .S .S .S .S .O.S. .O.S. .O.S. .O.S. .O.S. .O.S .O.S. .O.S. .O.S ITR TRANE .O.S , N , N , N , N , N , N , N , N , N , VE .S ITIZE TE , N E E E E E E E E E EV TRIN S N E , N.O. , N.O. , N.O. , N.O. IV IV IV IV IV IV IV E NE LE IVE IVE IVE IVE N.O. NE SE D PLOSIV PLOSIV PLOSI I),V LY D THY PLOSIV X E , E H ),X E TIZE PLOSX PLOSX PLOSX PLOSX , EXPLOSS , EXPLOSS , EXPLOSS , EXPLOSS , EXPLOSS , EXS , EXPLOSS , EXPLOSS , EXS S, S T SI , EXS E E E E E NE d.3 S, S, S, S, C IMER ; RDN TRAME SE d LE LE LE LE NCEA NCEA NCEA NCEA NCEA NCEA NCEA NCEA NCEA ANCE T T D NCEA /A T T T T T T T T T TAN ST LO GE LO ), T 8 S S S S S BS S S BS BS B C OX C BS /2 U U U U Y Y U X 4 3 ARTIC ARTIC ARTIC ARTIC SUB SUB SUB SUB SUB S SUB SUB S S (S C HE C HMX S C 90 e 2 ) 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 0 2 3 4 NNE UN No. (1 MS A Pag 046 047 047 047 047 047 047 047 047 0478 047 048 0481 048 048 048 0485

596

Bilaga 1

4 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 9 0 d.3d X 4 e 2 UN No. 8) (1 048 048 048 048 049 049 049 049 049 0495 049 049 049 049 050 /A8 Pag /2 NNE A

C 90 MS

. s

tions ive a los erv px eg Obs 7) (1 . . . . . . . . tin . . . . and B B B B B B B B B B B B ies ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d tonae ix d ix d ix d ix d ert n n n n n n n n n n n n Prop ss da

s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s of m s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe rm rm rm rm rm rm rm rm re rm rm rm rm f te f te f te f te f te f te f te te f te f te f te f te o o o o o o o of o o o o . . . Mixtu ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo gl gl gl tances tances gl gl gl gl glossary tances gl gl gl gl ee ee ee ub ub ee ee ee ee ee bu ee ee ee ee S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S

n tio rom f rom f rom f rom f rom f rom f rom f rom f rom f rom rom f rom f rom f rom f rom f grega 7 d d d d d d d d d d f d d d d d Se 6) o 7. tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec (1 1 t te te te te te te te te te te te te te te 7. t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a ge and Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro Prote Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro 03. f he 03. f he 03. f he 04. f he 04. f he 02. f he 03. f he 02. f he 02. f he 04. he 04. f he 04. f he 04. f he 04. f he 01. f he Stowa os os os os os os os os os s of os os os os os

gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory tea Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source C source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source

X X X Y Y X X X X Y Y Y Y Y X 5) 7.8 S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- S- EmS (1 5.4.3.2 B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, B, F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F-

lk d bu ions 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - rs rovis (1 4.2.5 e P nks an inta a n ns ble t co ioct 3) a ank (1 4.2.5 4.3 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ort T stru P in

ions 1) (1 4.1.4 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - rovisP IBC c- s 0) stru tion (1 4.1.4 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - In

ions ) g (9 4.1.4 - - L1 - - - - - - - - rovis PP67 PP76 PP53 PP54 PP57 PP58 PP53 PP54 PP57 PP58 P ackinP cs ) 01 35 30 43 35 35 01 15 31 stru tion (8 4.1.4 101P 12 (c) 12 (c) 12 (c) 14 (b) 14 (b) In P1 P1 P1 L P1 (b) or P1 (b) or P1 P1 P1 P1 P115 P1 (b) or P1 P1 P1 P1

ed se pt titi b) 3.5 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 ce an (7 Ex qu d se ite titi a) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 an (7 3.4 Lim qu

l cia ions ) - - - - - - - - - - - pe (6 3.3 224 224 347 S rovisP

g ) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ackin Group (5 P 2.0.1.3

ryia ) (s ) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - sid sk (4 2.0 ubS Ri

as v ) Cl (3 2.0 6 N 3 G 3 G 1 D 1 D 4 C 3 G 4 G 4 D 3 C 1 D 1 C 1 C 3 C 4 S or Di 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1.

g

out blastinr with o f NSITIVE E E TRICC INSE V V oil well, E D L LY GE -E ) ME ) PLOSIX PLOSIX AR N PSN (2 3.1.2 U O TRE , EK , EK , N X E ING , CH S , E NS IEL TIC IL (D (NTO) U D D IVE R LINGL G ID ID MBE LU E QUI QUI S PLOS I) PRAC O , LI , LI , SOL , SOL X E C R AS E , ES , SMOKE LYG PROP , RAILWAY TRAC , RAILWAY TRAC ORATING NTA NTA NTA NTA O d.3d S, EL S, LE NITION, RFE ator ELL ELL NAT /A8 TIC ITRO P ONAL O /2 IN T tone OP OP OPELL OPELL TE X 4 4 ARTIC (AR IGNALSS AMMU D NITROTRIAZOLONE CHARGE IGNALSS IGNALSS JE d PR OCT PR PR PR D

C 90 e 2 ) 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 9 0 NNE UN No. (1 MS A Pag 048 048 048 048 049 049 049 049 049 0495 049 049 049 049 050

597

Bilaga 1

5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 5 6 d.3d X 4 e 2 UN No. 8) (1 050 050 050 050 050 050 050 050 050 100 100 100 100 100 1008 1009 /A8 Pag , /2 NNE . of ir A id a g u ic our cen C 90 tions n d luoride e atin au f liq ag t o re ritating s r than MS e c s o ne e fi ir n f r than air de re or has a ly pre avie p ture ite ngu ce em corrosive e s.e avie laye tr igh ite drogey h e d Mix ign a p ex H In the chu to local h samee t. er s. wh g h s.e bran ch h 1% to 80%. re lt in n cid M me 2. su th e . Maye is substan a nse mu ls. m o sue as with und olvinv f ta s tions its: px r g ag lod g th rd s de e ite e a e ya withd in p hg za r, lim d iz x ives u rmo ucou erv ive m ey o ha ntly with F ost m m ht odour. Mu ang a ro th hc le s. as wh Obs 7) los carrie oxid m ne u . a th wate nt d m (1 . . . . . . . px be gn ils cor v ss se g wi and s a slig and B B B B B B B E andlin nda . E it ts vioc ey ies ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d ix d conditions Stro r o b a ntly lass an e ert n n n n n n n h h e ould s. ic hi Re mbran ). 4 rrosive , s with g se sh a als o tionsa s. e a Prop odour. u rs g ri , tox tr ly ex a gas appare to g g ht Ro th e te n n re d co d blea able ce t o a air (1. acts viole g to skin able s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe s in appe slig lin ma ). n , i d cous m n m 907). since, cy s. le 6 u xic an Re. tin rm rm rm rm rm rm rm d amm amm rda fine r tha ir corrosive corrosive e typ rs. z n , to f te f te f te f te f te f te f te s witha m a co avie ble hly irrita o o o o o o o g air (0.n air (0.n in low co and ms a ist ao and ig ly . . avoid linde mable ga , non-fl , non-fl ty h in ey He m m non-flam ble e cy d combustib d ilib s. , h d, ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo ssaryo a r tha b ion. E d am als. r tha a , e a in High tances tances te ld los fl- fiee ri fiee te ocating m itions g flam- s e ritating 5). fiee ). gle gle gle gle gle gle gle uo p ille n u te u ff m skin rt n ir oisture u .2 e e e ub e e e ub e lamm x u a e o iq S S S S S S S S S F Ligh sh e as f No Liq air with ma Liq Ligh S fl cond to In N fum an m (2.3 L (5 s rs.

. s n arte tio source ' qu rom rom rom rom rom rom rom rom rom arteru . '' acids. f f f f f f f f f rom m ing grega 7 d d d d d d d d d d f rom' f liv Se tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec tec te d frod 6)(1 o 7. te te te te te te te te te c chlorine r of 1 t f living q ' ar of living a 7. t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a t.a rote arate le ge and Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro ar o rom' Cle pe parate C f he f he f he f he f he f he f he f he f he . P . . e . 02. o 04. o 02. o 04. o 02. o 01. o 01. o 04. o 02. o D d f A. D D . "S . "S A. D A. Stowa s s s s s s s s s rs e ry gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory at. Clee arate gory gory gory rin gory gory go pe arte lo te e Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate source Cate of h "S Cate Cate Cate uq ch Cate aC Cat

Y X X Y Y U V W U V U V 5) 7.8 S- S- S- S- S- S-, S- S- S- S- S- S- EmS (1 5.4.3.2 B, B, B, B, B, X B, X B, X B, Y B, D C, C, C, C, C, C, F- F- F- F- F- S- F- S- F- S- F- S- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F-

lk d bu ions 4) - - - - - - - - - - - 5 - - - rs (1 4.2.5 TP P22T e rovisP nks an inta a n ns ble t co ioct 3) a ank (1 4.2.5 4.3 - - - - - - - - - - - T75 T50 - - T50 ort T stru P in

ions 1) (1 4.1.4 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - rovisP IBC

c- s 0) stru tion (1 4.1.4 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - In

ions ) g (9 4.1.4 - L1 - - - - - - - - - - rovis PP67 PP48 PP48 PP50 PP48 P ackinP ) ) c- s ) (b (b stru (8 14 (b) 30 101 35 12 (c) 35 35 35 14 14 00 00 03 00 00 In tion 4.1.4 P1 P1 PL P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P2 P2 P2 P2 P2 P200 P200 P1 P1 ed se

pt titi b) 3.5 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E1 E0 E0 E1 E0 E1 ce an (7 Ex qu

d se ℓ ℓ ℓ

ite titi a) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 m 0 0 m 0 an (7 3.4 Lim qu 120 120 120 m

l cia ions ) - - - - - - - - - - - - - pe (6 3.3 235 289 23 S rovisP

g ) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ackin Group (5 P 2.0.1.3

ryia ) (s ) - - - - - - - - - - - 1 8 - 8 sid sk (4 2.0 5. ubS Ri

as v ) 1 2 2 3 2 3 2 Cl (3 2.0 4 C 2 C 4 G 1 D 4G 4S 4S 3C 4C 2. 2. 2. 2. 2. 2. 2. or Di 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1.

r

ry o , d

OUS ssa R DY m

byr,

) PSN (2 3.1.2 ) RS ID NE 1 ad ip ip ZOLE, ANH S e h h IA ED D THA h S or or IONES , s , s an 20% wate SS VL LIQU OUR E E R 13B ID rt e S NE SS SS O D D D SS IDR OME LE T E E ZOTRN S O R , SOL ATOR U LE R R E ss th OKELE IS SES ATER OU GAST L D OZ ST ST YB le D ANHY LU NT T PRE A E, RAN d.3d A S with in LE R , DIS , DIS , SMOKE OX , SMR EN FRIGE COMPRE TRIF TRIFL T AG INF AG MO TE L L RD withd E LY NIA, /A8 AN AN Y D COMPRE RE RIGEF /2 OPELL AT-B G G H- ETC RON OMO X 4 5 PR ROCKE AIR B AIR B ES 1H-T SI SI IGNALSS 1 wette POW A AIR, AIR, AMMO ARGON, OB RB (RE

C 90 e 2 ) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 5 6 NNE UN No. (1 MS A Pag 050 050 050 050 050 050 050 050 050 100 100 100 100 100 1008 1009

598

Bilaga 1

6 0 1 2 3 6 7 0 1 3 6 8 9 0 2 d.3d X 4 e 2 UN No. 8) (1 101 101 101 101 101 101 1018 102 102 1022 102 102 1027 102 102 103 103 /A8 Pag /2 NNE to r in r r A the hly a 2% in aviee m ts: aviee C 90 htly Hig an ai n air our. t which limi (2.3). ir MS main lig ch h not re r th ch h a limits: e (2.4). na hte sive r tha ive nt od idan an not r air C plo th avie los 6). x our. Mu r xp punge ul oxrf E Her. E Can a thanr odour. Mu (5.4). (4.7). (3. Much lig (4.2). od aviee u r.u 12% to 75%. S we like air air air air h do trations. (1.5). avie . Po - an an odour. an ch o n tions do its: s 40%. . rm-like a t o air as with e orm r th r th r than nt e r th o Mu like erv lim w g of ie 5% to air of viea viea va ung viea w conce Obs 7) asan thanr lloe . Much he mbran 4. 17%. lo (1 le losive y e he a p thanr to monia and np px tals m a chlor ie a chlor g in aviee E ive s v 5% ies n u H s. os Much he Much he Much limits: a Much he n am tin ert a a rr cou s with s. ive as with (1.9). He C. a ac s. s. as. u a as. as. a s s. as. as with 9° o Prop a 4%. a g ss g co m g g g g 9°C. ic g air a g g limits: ffu 8. 10%. d most me 2 plox g int: S as with able to and able able able able E an able able o ive as with g (1.84).ir 1). ). C. ourle s ove , tox p g C. le a arbon g 8% to 1 arbon g 6% to 0 xic an ey m m b le r th losp le 7° b c c amm 31° od e amm amm a b vie amm amm x b an ro r (2. ro r (2. (0.97). to ass and , a E int: mma d d . e mma drocarbon s. mma o r th y y above air ir ). state He y a p h limits: 1. an ai h limits: 1. an ai , toxic, mable, to gl f non-flam non-flam id , toxic gas. h g , flad avie ble ble , non-fld ble an to skin d, (3.0 , non-fld , non-fld d, u ble 6). , flad ble , non-fld , non-fld (3.6). Boiling ble , flad a ive r th a ive r th state a am ive g use ir iq a 0. 43%. a ir a fiee He s s fiee m r th fl- tin ca fiee a fiee fiee fiee l m o fiee to m fiee fiee a fiee u lop avie lop avie u teh n ros y u u u u u u u u lamm x lamm x lam iq iq the lam 6% lam an lamm Liq 12%. F E He F E He Liq liquid F lig No Cor irrita ma L than Liq Liq L in F (0.4 t Liq 6. F Liq Liq th F Liq (1.6). Boiling . . . . . . rs rs. rs. rs ss rs rs rs. rs rs rte rte arte 7. arte arte rte arte n arteu au au u cla ss u u arteu u

tio q q q q q q qua q q gn gn grega 7 as forn Se rom" cla f living 6)(1 o 7. atio d 1 t ar of living r of livia r of livia ar of living ar of living g ar of living ar of living r ofa ar of living ar of living 7. re le ge and Cle Cle. Cle. g aratep Cle. Cle. Cle Cle. . . Cle . Cle e . C . B E E A. D D . Se A. A. A. A. D D E A. A. B D Stowa rs t "S ry ry gory gory gory gory gory gory u go gory gory go gory gory gory gory gory gory gory arte 1 b e e te Cate Cate Cate Cate Cate Cate uq 5. Cat Cate Cate Cat Cate Cate aC Cate Cate Cate Cate

U U U V U U V V V V U U U V V U U 5) 7.8 S-, S-, S-, S- S-, S- S- S- S- S- S-, S-, S-, S- S- S-, S-, EmS (1 5.4.3.2 D D D C, D C, C, C, C, C, D D D C, C, D D

F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F-

lk d bu ions 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - rs (1 4.2.5 P19T e rovisP nks an inta a n ns ble t co ioct 3) a ank (1 4.2.5 4.3 T50 T50 T50 - - T50 T50 T50 T50 - - - T50 T50 T50 T50 T50 ort T stru P in

ions 1) (1 4.1.4 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - rovisP IBC

c- s 0) stru tion (1 4.1.4 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - In

ions ) g (9 4.1.4 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - rovisP

ackinP cs ) 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 stru tion (8 4.1.4 In P2 P2 P2 P2 P2 P2 P200 P2 P2 P200 P2 P2 P200 P2 P2 P2 P2

ed se

pt titi b) 3.5 E0 E0 E0 E1 E0 E0 E1 E1 E1 E1 E0 E0 E0 E1 E1 E0 E0 ce an (7 Ex qu

d se ℓ ℓ ℓ ℓ ℓ ℓ ℓ

ite titi a) 0 0 0 m 0 0 m m 0 0 0 m m 0 0 an (7 3.4 Lim qu 120 120 m 120 120 120 m 120 120

l cia ions ) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - pe (6 3.3 S rovisP

g ) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ackin Group (5 P 2.0.1.3

ryia ) 8 (s ) - - - - 1 P - - - - 1 1 - - - - sid sk (4 2.0 2. 1/ 2. 2. ub Ri 5. S

as v ) 1 1 1 2 3 3 2 2 2 2 3 3 1 2 2 1 1 Cl or Di (3 2.0 2. 2. 2. 2. 2. 2. 2. 2. 2. 2. 2. 2. 2. 2. 2. 2. 2.

)2 13) 1 )1 more R R 2

AS R 52a)1 D ining T GAS E AN T GAS R ANS RANT G R AN E , conta HAN R N D TE RIGE T GAS IE FRIGE F RIGE AN ILIZE DE RO F R ) TADU SS OU (RE (RE S (2 ABT L E (RE RIGE PSN 3.1.2 S NE ANE N F or B , THANE ROU D RE THA OETH TRAF THAE DE THANE (RE IZE TU s , COMPRE M SS HYD IL e E R 22) R 115)S 2-TE R 124)S O ROME AB n E ID ROME LUOR 2, R O ROME HANET , AN T D O GAS 2, O U O , S tadie NOX U T AF T GA 1, T GA LU IFL S BON MIX u OXI IFL - COMPRE, ROEO EN b E D RAN ANR ANR TRIF S NE U d.3d IE N NE ROO A NE E ON DI ON MO RI RO ROPENT RO G THYLAMINE /A8 ROCAR 40% A YL B O RIGEF O RIGEF RIGEF /2 TAD an R HLO E E HLO ANOG ICHLOROD ICHLOROFLU 1-DIFL IME X 4 6 UB HYD th BUT BUT CA CARB CHL C (RE CHL (R 1-CHL (R C COAL CY CYCLOPROPANE D D 1, D

C 90 e 2 ) 0 1 2 3 6 7 0 1 3 6 8 9 0 2 NNE UN No. (1 MS A Pag 101 101 101 101 101 101 1018 102 102 1022 102 102 1027 102 102 103 103

599

Bilaga 1

7 3 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 3 4 5 6 8 9 0 1 d.3d X 4 e 2 UN No. 8) (1 103 103 103 103 103 103 104 104 104 104 104 104 104 104 105 105 /A8 Pag /2 NNE n r. A n ). 5 , f tals. u r tha an tea o t n to od ly with C 90 ie air r tha r th r e hly hly hly h le limits: av n ie itr ours e ng t o cib MS air e av ts. u ist air Hig ne Hig .n (1.6). ive e avie n air (1. m n n o Hig ).3 toxic ch h r tha s und te a p m ngu ly Mis air r than los te r tha r to most me (1.3). our. Hig e c. an xp ch h toxic vap sea con r o d (3.6). r (1. m c. avie E Mu our. He avie , calciu g na . C r th r. Ligh Mu tea d ing s witha air nt od air trex 18° inhalatio he u od He mits fie g wate ss . an ai - by vie tly do r. itr e ish than than s 75% r a h o like u s. E u gu r . r e r th . int: t o tions He lig r- do m n to gla s punge s op c a S like oint: 17°C. 5% to 15%. o iu r liq xtin llowish avie e a avie 4% to ss gas with a p avie e volving e erv - p 3. 3% to 34%. 2% to 10%. the no o e acts with ive e mbran rle e our. e like d -e y os . H e ts: u Her. lash Obs 16%. its: its: its: an monia ga ire lea Re. rr n mbran as with m te mbran id, F 7) od monia ilingo r-e m sse e limi e (1 to B lim lim lim th f amm a rep g f p ire Co oge g Much he colo wa liqu skin conta and ive o g llin ive f s. dr ive r. cous sive ive 26°C. y ies 3% n am s with n e n m os os u os of ble t: , b ert rm-like a losive los losive a nin co pe rr meu hy cous m (0.14).ir rr m plo rr cous m in d fo (1.6). px px px ase tai x cause f u a dn x nce u ma o Prop limits: air E C. E E C. ic g C. n ing r e co ya co a co se g p s. s. s. solutio o f d ives with an d of wate s s. E d re lam ive as with an a 13° a a 11° 11° as with s co a ro and m ey p and m ilin g g t: g g t: , tox t: g ouse P s r th nce , e (0.07). e s ss f o swallowe a chloro losp le r th in le in le in le xic an ey hte xic an se ss ga xic an ey rle B x b vie blea o b blea o b o b ixture cord mixedn re air rs. ic if E a m ma m m rs, containe 175 k to t which m n , e to p skin ourle an to in th , e lou u s with s. mma m g p m m g p mma g p mma an a e ive op tox a a He la ilin la ilin ilin ir e id ic whee skin th r th s skin , co ly g g f o f o o mable aqu uishg mable, x d Much lig mable, , od te mable, ro va ble ble , flad d, , flad d, , flad , flad th . above l o tox lo to s. in to the ble h to igh a a 14%. e ). B2 e ). B1 ). B5 am d tin am u ec p g a am ive g a am cor g blea H fiee to fie fiee fie fiee fiee fl- an x fl- r. rf u xe tin g fl- tin fl- ly tin volatile r. u u u u n a monia ee ssure n d ita rt n ros ita ch lig n h ita ry lamm lamm 5% iqu iqu re ir dou ro e lamm e amm F F (1.05). Liq 3. L air (2. Liq (0.98). L air (2. Liq air (1. Liq No u am F pre No o Powe p Will irr In No cor irr F Mu No Hig irr V fl wate . . . . . . . . . . rs rs. rs rs rs rs rs rs rs. rs rs. rs rs

arte rtea arte arte arte arte arte arte rtea arte rtea arte arte n u u u u u u u u u class r ass 7. u u u u tio q q q q q q q q q o cl' q q . q q gn gn gn

grega 7 rom' Se 6) o 7. fd chlorine (1 1 t r of livi r of livi tion as f te r of livi ' 7. ar of living a ar of living ar of living ar of living ar of living ar of living ar of living a ar of living ga ar of living a ar of living ar of living

ge and Cle Cle Cle Cle Cle Cle Cle Cle gre arap Cle rom' Cle Cle . . Cle . . . . . . . Cle . . . Cle . . B E D B D B D B E A. D . Se A. D E d f D D Stowa rs t "Se

gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory aratep gory gory arteu 1 bu e Cate Cate Cate Cate Cate Cate Cate Cate Cate Cate Cate q 5. Cate Cate Cate "S Cate Cate

U U U U U U U U V V W V U U U D 5) 7.8 S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S- S- S- S- S- S-, S- S-, EmS (1 5.4.3.2 D D D D D D D D C, C, C, C, C, D C, E

F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F-

lk d bu ions 4) - - - - 5 - - - - - - - - - rs (1 4.2.5 TP P20T P90T e rovisP nks an inta a n ns ble t co ioct 3) a ank (1 4.2.5 4.3 T50 - T50 T50 T75 - T50 T50 - - - - - - - ort T stru P in

ions 1) (1 4.1.4 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - rovisP IBC

c- s 0) stru tion (1 4.1.4 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - In

ions ) g (9 4.1.4 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - rovisP

ackinP cs ) 00 00 00 00 03 00 00 00 00 03 00 00 00 00 00 00 stru tion (8 4.1.4 In P2 P2 P2 P2 P2 P2 P2 P2 P2 P0 P2 P2 P2 P2 P2 P2

ed se

pt titi b) 3.5 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E1 E0 E0 E1 E0 E0 E0 E5 ce an (7 Ex qu

d se ℓ ℓ ℓ

ite titi a) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 m m 0 m 0 0 0 0 an (7 3.4 Lim qu 120 120 120

l cia ions ) - - - - - - - - - - - - pe (6 3.3 912 342 225 S rovisP

g ) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - I ackin Group (5 P 2.0.1.3

ryia ) 8 (s ) - - - - - - 1 - - - - 8 - 8 3 P sid sk (4 2.0 2. 1/ ub Ri 5. S

as v ) 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 2 2 3 2 3 1 3 1 Cl or Di (3 2.0 2. 2. 2. 2. 2. 2. 2. 2. 2. 2. 2. 2. 2. 2. 2. 6.

ian N o s an EG with E d ga R oxide amm efi ss th ITRO e e e le nle re f qu 50°C y li ing at MIXTUE th WITH NE r)a ID d or X S S IDX IO 87% e TION with sse contain ID n OUR D ) OE (10 ba pre ROU D PSN (2 3.1.2 N ON D tha OLU S ILIZE LIQUD LE re com HYD AB HY o D DE T T of 1MP CARB t m E , AN SS , ANHYE S, ATER R E re o with SS DE E E HET or AND t n NIATING RS SS R E RIGE E E ssue E HE HE F L ID IS OMIDR T X pr COMPRE LORID , RE THY O OXID 9% bun AMMOR GU , COMPRE N B N, N CHLORID N CYANID d.3 EN EN EN , COMPRE E E E E r d E TINX M te /A THYL E a total tha E RINE ROG ROG ROG ROG 8 HANE HYLAMINE HYL CH HYLE HYL ME HYL to HYLE RTILIZE OU LIU /2 X 4 7 IMED TE TE TE TE TE TE pu TE more EF IREF LF HE HYD HYD HYD HYD 3% wa

C 90 e 2 ) 3 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 3 4 5 6 8 9 0 1 NNE UN No. (1 MS A Pag 103 103 103 103 103 103 104 104 104 104 104 104 104 104 105 105

600

Bilaga 1

8 2 3 5 6 7 8 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 d.3d X 4 e 2 UN No. 8) (1 105 105 105 105 105 105 106 106 106 106 106 106 106 106 106 1070 /A8 Pag t /2 NNE n g . A eg s n lin n tai il re air e C 90 u ilingo n g r f ssu n air n rown to p Cause (1.2). in o in s (1.7). b ly ive d ). MS dn . B . n air co ry f re r tha ility n air in th na a re gas. de r p r tha s off ive igh lation, with ros s g tu an May va ble s e (1.4). itio an s H ha ey (1.5ir u dn avie aviee mab dn ive ro C. a r th 8%. , in ma u air r th in Corr. , e tatinri f mois vie tc. are d an He lam co vie 21° y u ink inhalatio a e lam r. ch h ire a Cort. o s ir o . , e r f rse r th u f n int: xic b r than an ce r by es He n e do Mu e He e o g od to ne ot n 8% to 8. le s which ispe viea o r.u has a f m (0.97). as which g p . To avie tions s c ra 1. oth se d o ec tre g g ag s tin a with re b r e He like x air ive in e ita erv id p m odour. its: , buty oe ga - od 8% to 20%. odour. an s iz ritating t. Hen u e conta e e to b r ee ro id ir e Obs m lim tan 11%. like its: r th mbran n irr ly 7) liq in us tan such to monia - und te cor e a ag (1 sk o a foul ive bu is substan lim a foul h g ox (1.6). Boiling m . igh and ass in th y cu los , bu s of ts aren th nda n ir ing ies , b p ne (2.9). ing 3% n am oform h ard z Lig tro a ne ert volatile gl d m x le (1.94). r. a g a losive ic S cous as with ly d dn as with E air lor uo h p as with as. an u (2.3). H oxidiz a s.a air ixture conte ch ch x E , tox m w g ir g Prop igh ic g than m an ai limits: a th u s. ic g ss g r th phosge llo a n h tals an , propy r the ive as with ne a air (0.7). le odour. e otr d swallowe , tox e than fills contain s or r th g v its s g , tox able nt avie and s r to an , eyes le r se losp le E ib ).8 le our e ey xic y s. s. S g an ic if ink b carbon g avie r re aviee x b s witha °C. h ble b . d amm r. He e r th to me s ro avie te ga which h E x a r than o ung , to ga min ive o d e m e s. 4.5 e s. m r (1. 6°C te simila aviee u s Tox t mma y clopropan . H ligh ble b a mma xic g t: a m mma t: a p ct, mbrane blea f ro ns h s r s fro g in only la f an ai in f wate h ss, ur , fla , cy n Much he ma , fla , to o it are , fla o Ligh mable, , non-fld o to skin ffe mable, ch m cor b d blea e tio as. rs o blea d d , de d,e r th d s.a am with ce g ed am me rleu r. ly 20°C .t: re fie n or g flam tacle fie fie g p rd fi fie g p fl fie n tin e fl Mu flam h e eu p rt te -n p eu eu a in e avie eu rt g -n eu our es -n l.e cous -n dou ino ve lamm ro e o ce lamm ilino za iqu ilino e re ita laye o Colo o Hig p s Liq F propa p In Ligh N re Vapour may F Liq (1.09). Liq (3.3). B h conf L He Liq B In No Liq vap p irr d No ste mu N . . . . . . . . . rs rs rs. rs rs rs rs rs rs rs rs.

arte arte rtea arte arte arte arte arte arte arte arte n u u u u u u u u u class r ass 7. u tio q q q q q q q q q o cl' q g qu gn

grega 7 rom' ivin l Se 6) o 7. fd of (1 1 t r of livi tion as f te r 7. ar of living ar of living a ar of living ar of living ar of living ar of living ar of living ar of living ar of living ga ar of living a ge and Cle Cle Cle Cle Cle Cle Cle Cle Cle ara Cle le . . . Cle . . . . . . . gre p . C

D D E A. B A. B B D D D A. A. D . Se D A. Stowa rs t "Se

gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory arteu 1 bu tea Cate Cate Cate Cate Cate Cate Cate Cate Cate Cate Cate Cate Cate Cate q 5. Cate C

U U U V U V U U U U U V V W U W 5) 7.8 S- S-, S-, S- S-, S- S-, S-, S- S-, S-, S- S- S- S- S- EmS (1 5.4.3.2 C, D D C, D C, D D C, D D C, C, C, C, C,

F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F-

lk d bu ions 4) 2 - - - - - - - - - - - - - rs (1 4.2.5 TP P21T e rovisP nks an inta a n ns ble t co ioct 3) a ank (1 4.2.5 4.3 T10 - T50 - - - T50 T50 T50 T50 T50 - - T50 - ort T stru P in

ions 1) (1 4.1.4 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - rovisP IBC

c- s 0) stru tion (1 4.1.4 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - In

ions ) g (9 4.1.4 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - rovis PP84 P ackinP cs ) 00 00 00 00 02 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 stru tion (8 4.1.4 In P2 P2 P2 P2 P0 P2 P2 P2 P2 P2 P2 P2 P2 P2 P2 P200

ed se

pt titi b) 3.5 E0 E0 E0 E1 E0 E1 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E1 E1 E0 E0 E0 ce an (7 Ex qu

d se ℓ ℓ ℓ ℓ

ite titi a) 0 0 0 m 0 m 0 0 0 0 0 m m 0 0 0 an (7 3.4 Lim qu 120 120 120 120

l cia ions ) - - - - - - - - - - - - - pe (6 3.3 201 23 S rovisP

g ) I - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ackin Group (5 P 2.0.1.3

ryia ) 8 (s ) 1 1 - - - - - - - - 1 P - - 8 1 sid sk (4 2.0 6. 2. 2. 1/ 5. ub Ri 5. S

as v ) 3 1 2 1 2 1 1 3 1 3 2 2 3 3 2 Cl (3 2.0 8 2. 2. 2. 2. 2. 2. 2. 2. 2. 2. 2. 2. 2. 2. 2. or Di

s in

icrp , o

mable ga ER lor ) with E lam f d IDX g 0% ch MIXTU 2. IO S nin NE tai charge IE GAS R 40) N D OU n than T GE ) R co AD RO (2 D S RAN IT PSN 3.1.2 HY ILLS mable, r air F am oe PROP D (N AN, D fl- id ROU not more FRIGE E E E E ES R RE n SS IDX SE o iox ANDE HYD (RE D E RID R d N withE E TAN E RE ID O LPHID S nE n , AN SS MP TRO R YLE E O LO E LIGHTE AS TE LORID RCAP TEN H N FLU N SU N G carbo D , C E d.3 E E D NE G L CY OXIDE d YLET ON, COMP RS or IEF n,e G S /A8 ROG ROG U E og ILIZE ITRO OUSR /2 OB YPT itr THYLAC AB THYLAMINE THYL BROMID THYL CH THYL ME ITRO IN ITRO T X 4 8 HYD HYD IS KR LIGHTE LIQU n ME TS ME ME ME ME NEON, COMPR N D N NI

C 90 e 2 ) 2 3 5 6 7 8 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 NNE UN No. (1 MS A Pag 105 105 105 105 105 105 106 106 106 106 106 106 106 106 106 1070

601

Bilaga 1

9 1 2 3 5 6 7 9 0 2 3 6 7 9 d.3d X 4 e 2 UN No. 8) (1 107 107 107 107 107 107 1078 107 108 1081 108 108 1085 108 108 1088 108 /A8 Pag s /2 NNE . a . A id r . . n C n r ide air u s o s . g ic ). ch with C 90 x a lay r tha ch 1 r than 16° r tha an ai c. on f liq our ilino This g. iate e Mu ie c. MS o r than s o al g d B se d d avie aviee av r th C m , rs' us 7%. 2% to 12%. point: e ture atur uo He , non-tox our. Mu oc n air (5. avie aviee pane proportion (3.5). imme ble ch h its: ch h H ro g mbran w h a He 4%. Miscible t. Mix in a foul o air e m nt od mu r tha s.e lim Boiling Mu d carbon n t.n rom n f ry 11.1%. 4% to 38. ). oint: -27°p lation. e e d in p va r a fe and avie ive ag than without d te flam- e bran 8. los r. ha s ann g g ag , in as with r cous mu n punge m its: p (3.7 6% to 10. lash in tionsa in taine conta tc. g ale 2 % to o a ch h e x ir 6% to 39%. 1. C. y iz in e ive avie h th af r n in, eyes m . E a odou b erv iz . e obs , e s in ae its: k Mu 11% to 60%. Mu su lim 3°C. 4% to 31%. 2. its: our. F 21° or re May n ro and m e d s its: our t: its: ble d Obs 7) drocarbo oxid oxid lod tc. le s b d lim othe as with cou d in r than its: ae lim od int: (1 y gn g p cor ey ive ts. g to losivep oy o re ity o and n x Much he , e an s or ne ng ss gas. lim x avie lim lim ru p ey , buty nda r. mayit ge los ive erl d m E ish g p e ive ag f ies of h Stro Stro a r mixtu coal, e e p t ag os tati u an s. f h plosive t, ert re s. m s o r ic skin ama x E rr ri o s a a ilino ch losive los x ne swallowe as. a se tan that s. ran ir xplosive ey u px px th an E Boiling l if Prop g ils a ils o , tox of wate to g d a e co hly , od E , e ss g ). B M E E wi c. ngu u ss g r o , bu s in re drocarbon d g s. s with 1 s. s. s. A mixtu le blea o ral o ne able nce tin u ve y frig able a a a a a C. a p 57%. our en e le se ita ro se ). Hi g ourle ). g g g g 8°C c.1 d le arbon g re ge es arbon g xic an .3 ble to skin od 0 leb air (2. ble ble leb 6° liquid r. Harmf o amm ty c amm p irrly c luoroh as red to 2 amm a g n a a int: ile with ro f min r. e an ro of re m ma m m ma o low - id dy on , propye d n cau dy e m tin air (4. m r tha m m m p u wate , toxic gas. h th High h id s. , toxic, n la volat be mable, , non-fl an ai , non-fl in . larly ca sn mable, an air ( , non-fl fla , fla fla f , fla limits: 4% to ble d with ace ble d ut ble ). t chlor h d d, ble d aviee d, d, ). d ss, ss liq a amfl fie n a r th fie ive 8°C a 5 n amfl r te fie fie 5). Irrita a r tha fie fie efi 2 fie rle point: rle ives m - e eg istillatio e ros t: articu ct b re s co - e e m e e e e u r. u lo cible with n u y d clopropan avie u in feif se n mbrane u u avie u ch h u u p lamF No (1.1). Liq ox lammF yb cy He Liq Cor op is p ffee lammF air (1. D ag No heavi me Liq iqL air (3. lamF eh Liq Mu iqL iquL air (2. Liq (2.0). Boiling oloC lashF wate Colo xE Mis

. . . . . . . rs rs rs rs. rs rs rs. rs rs

arte arte arte rte arte arte arte arte arte n u u u u u u u tio q quarters. q quarters. q qua q q qu q q

grega 7 ing

Se f living f living living liv 6)(1 o 7. r o r o 1 t ar of living a ar of living a ar of living r ofa ar of living ar of living r ofa ar of living ar of living 7. le le ge and Cle. . Cle. Cle. Cle. Cle C Cle Cle . Cle . Cle . C . . . . . . D A. D E D E A. D A. E D B B B B E E Stowa ry ry

gory gory gory gory gory gory goe gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory goe gory tea tea Cate Cate Cate Cate Cate Cate Cat Cate Cate C Cate Cate C Cate Cate Cat Cate

U W W U U U V U V U U U U U U D D 5) 7.8 S-, S- S- S-, S- S-, S- S- S- S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, EmS (1 5.4.3.2 D C, C, D C, D C, C, C, D D D D D D E E

F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F-

lk d bu ions 4) - - 5 - - - - - - - - - - - 7 (1 4.2.5 TP P22 P19 TP1 P2 T TP rse rovis T T in P nks ana ta n ns ble t co ioct 3) a ank (1 4.2.5 4.3 - - T75 T50 - T50 T50 T50 - - T50 T50 T50 T50 T50 T4 T11 ort T stru P in

ions 1) (1 4.1.4 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - rovisP IBC

c- s 0) 20 stru tion (1 4.1.4 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - C - In IB

ions ) g (9 4.1.4 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - rovisP

ackinP cs ) 00 00 03 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 stru tion (8 4.1.4 In P2 P2 P2 P2 P2 P2 P200 P2 P2 P200 P2 P2 P200 P2 P2 P001 P0

ed se

pt titi b) 3.5 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E1 E0 E1 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E2 E3 ce an (7 Ex qu

d se ℓ ℓ

ite titi a) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 m 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 an (7 3.4 1 ℓ Lim qu 120 m 120

l cia ions ) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - pe (6 3.3 355 274 S rovisP

g ) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - II I ackin Group (5 P 2.0.1.3

ryia ) (s ) 1 1 1 - 8 - - 8 - - 1 - - - - - sid sk (4 2.0 2. 5. 5. 2. ubS Ri

as v ) 3 2 2 1 3 1 2 3 2 1 3 1 1 1 1 Cl (3 2.0 2. 2. 2. 2. 2. 2. 2. 2. 2. 2. 2. 2. 2. 2. 2. 3 3 or Di

D

D ILIZE E AB T D ) ID ILIZ , S S (2 DE AB NE OU D ILIZE PSN 3.1.2 T R ED LIQU . E , S LE D ABT D .S EN HY IZL ILIZE S DE DE IQUEFI .O RID LE T R, SS SS ATER , LS N O , ANHY ABI HE RE E UL THY , STABE T SEA ID E E, ST E E RIGEF T GAS, X XAF O D LY G E IO RO AMINEL HYD d.3 COMPRE COMP RE N ANR ROCHLOROE OMI TH E d N, N, R D LU O ME /A OLEUM GENE YLE IGE HU U THY AL ALD 8 YGE YGE R FR LP LPHUR HE TRAF T TE /2 T U U NYL BR X 4 9 OIL GAS, OX OX PE PHOS PROP RE S S TE TRIFL TRIME VI VINYL CHLORID VINYL ACE AC C 90 e 2 ) 1 2 3 5 6 7 9 0 2 3 6 7 9 NNE UN No. (1 MS A Pag 107 107 107 107 107 107 1078 107 108 1081 108 108 1085 108 108 1088 108

602

Bilaga 1

0 0 1 2 3 8 9 0 5 5 6 7 8 9 d.3d X 4 e 3 UN No. 8) (1 109 109 109 109 109 109 110 1104 110 110 1106 110 110 110 110 /A8 Pag . /2 NNE - r. r. . s c. A t: te C E . r. oin 26°C r. ation. rane te C 90 p r. - wate at te wa 44° 0°C c. nes t: t: hal AMIN l by mb 2 ra wa MS lash c. s th wa in L fu L - b : oin ing withe by Y me t: m with hp g poin r. al - M rm s. AMY in e e s . with or rm A ne ous l- m our. F with wate 8°C c. cible with miscible with n le iscibl ilin o - Har. ra c RMATEO od le to . Fla ly ackag cib . o tact wate n te b ma uso iscibl cib °C Mis ation. r. ation. our ation. . c. me mu our. or Flashpo c L F 4 our r. alatio u d Imm 1%. B rtiary wa od n r. u t-like - d hal uo h rom p o . Mis hal o hal uro con C c. te and u m Imm Mis t: o 52°C. in d Partial in d in 3%. in d c. ts: do C. dn OAMY tionsa min in t: t o y ak f o 18% o skin odour. c. 5%. c. with cous m r. o a in n b le c. 2% to 22%. °C u limi 30° IS erv 13%. o e or y like ritating ent by like c. C miscible with to 21° 2. 4 , eyesn romatic t: c. stic ritating g p ng ls. % to ir 4% to 7. 3% to 11. d, -a c. C 10. d m ki a sive wate ablee in Obs 7) ri u tact ma ung 3. n Im to its: s , eyes 7% to 10%. (1 tec 5% to . Flashpo ilin tact or by p 3% to 17%. n ec mica stard- 2.5 tact or by 4. tact or by a t 32° r.u t 19° oint p Miscible an o an plo pog ink our. 1. and s o ild e ts: t p its: lowe o 2% lim c. se t x with s od ara idu B con its: co tan con its: con an oin 1. c. y with le isagre ilin o int 27°C c. its: ies ch a most ir sb r ch t mu with an sa lim p lash e s C. E o t . o ert a liq lim e ne limi id lim le swal point 25°C ng od ): f tating id B ng s sant p lim limits: 2. skin ive skiny skin u skin ar-or ban o lash plosive E t 2°C rri u 11° miscib ti ion a Prop ily with by with a m is su oth ngu sive by by lash : flashpoin f limits: x skin, i t: with a d 7%. ait le lash with ives o id d, los , bd th d, d, unp plosive : f ive E r, 8. rr trat : f lo u 8% to 31%. px f to a p plox plosivex n x a pe ATE a str AMINL hpoin s to wn liq oin to . I n a p plosive p r. liq 2. E oo llow liqe E h a E r. Toxic if TE r. los s rn ro hp 6%. Im ce x uid, x wnish, lowe liquid c. that c. E lowe c. lowe it c. TATE p TY fla weve s liquid 4% ter E liq E ro its: with t y w c. s with E AC withs x liquids. N ): bu t b 8. 1. a withs c. r wate llow e bile akpr id C c. c. d wate id wate id . E r E es . Ho : Fla to w con id c. a y lim swal o °C c.5 swallowe le u swal ligh °C swal ui 9°C AC u a u ligh e hit h u °C cle C c.c. r m iq cle (1-PE a ove r id 4% volatile w to b ive - xic if s showna are 21° -1 ls -2 with -AMYL with E AMIN . C 1. limits: w hig ss, -18° llo ss o los ss, int: h ss liq int: ss to nt: nt: ss liqu ry ss liq AMYL ALCOHOL: abovey ss, ss o E ss, le ss liq nt 26 rle e rle p toxic if rle o To rle o toxic if rle oi toxic if les oi rle rle - tr rle TYL ry ab rle lchlor rle ive ibc rle oi u t y u x ly u p r. arily u p ly u p ly ur p u al-AMYL iscible u n u LAMIN NE lation u u s is u p C to miscible with E h in h h lo miscible rm m e P Amy lop m rcotic in rmal-AMYL FORMATE c. lash d lash lash lash olo o conda rtiary ee olo ha ee ent - x a o ash Colo 20° Ligh Im Colo c. Hig Colo F wate Practice or Colo F Hig Colo F Hig Co F Im C n se Im Colo te S C AMY (3- in S Colo n CHLORID Colo E Im N Colo n fl . . . rs rs. rs rs rs.

arte rtea arte arte rtea n u u u u u tio q q q q q gn gn

grega 7

Se 6) o 7. (1 1 t ar of living r of livi ar of living ar of living r of livi 7. a a ge and Cle. Cle. Cle . . . Cle . . Cle . . . . E B D E D B E A. B A. B A. B E A. Stowa ry ry

gory gory gory gory gory gory gory goe gory gory goe gory gory gory gory

Cate Cate Cate Cate Cate Cate Cate Cat Cate Cate Cat Cate Cate Cate Cate

D D D D D D D D D D C C D D D 5) 7.8 S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, EmS (1 5.4.3.2 E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E

F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F-

lk d bu ions 4) 1 8 2 7 2 1 1 1 2 1 (1 4.2.5 TP P1 T TP TP TP P13 P35 P2 T P13 TP P13 P35 P2 T P13 P2 T P13 TP1 P1 T P29 TP TP1 TP TP TP TP rse rovis T T T T T T T T in P nks ana ta n ns ble t co ioct 3) a ankT (1 4.2.5 4.3 T4 T4 T22 T14 T20 T14 T14 T2 T4 T2 T7 T4 T4 T11 T2 ortP stru in

ions 1) (1 4.1.4 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - rovisP IBC

c- s 0) 02 02 30 02 03 20 03 02 03 stru tion (1 4.1.4 C C - - - - - C C C C C C - C In IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB

ions ) g (9 4.1.4 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - rovisP

ackinP cs ) 01 01 01 01 02 01 01 1 01 01 1 01 01 01 01 1 stru tion (8 4.1.4 LP0 LP0 LP0 In P0 P0 P6 P0 P6 P0 P0 P001 P0 P0 P001 P0 P0 P0 P0

ed se

pt titi b) 3.5 E2 E2 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E1 E2 E1 E2 E1 E2 E3 E1 ce an (7 Ex qu

d se

ite titi a) ℓ 0 0 0 0 0 ℓ 0 an (7 3.4 1 ℓ 1 5 ℓ 1 ℓ 5 1 ℓ 5 ℓ 1 ℓ 5 ℓ Lim qu

l cia ions ) - - - - - - - - - - pe (6 3.3 354 354 223 223 S rovisP

g ) II II I I I I I III II III II III II I III ackin Group (5 P 2.0.1.3

ryia ) (s ) - - 3 P 1 3 1 P 1 - - - 8 8 - - sid sk (4 2.0 6. 6. 6. ubS Ri

as v ) 1 1 Cl (3 2.0 3 3 6. 3 6. 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 or Di

) PSN (2 3.1.2 D

)E

D N ABILIZE

ILIZE , ST E S E SE AB E LS T RID ATE (n-AMYLE AT S COHOL OMID LO T S S NE E M d.3 IN, R H N d AMINE CHLORID FOR /A ONET ONE OIT LONITRILE L AL L B L C ANOL ANOL L L NTE 8 ROLE RY LY LY LY NT NT YL /2 X 4 0 ACE ACE AC AC AL AL AL AMYL ACE PE PE AMYLAMI AMY AMY 1-PE MA

C 90 e 3 ) 0 1 2 3 8 9 0 5 5 6 7 8 9 NNE UN No. (1 MS A Pag 109 109 109 109 109 109 110 1104 110 110 1106 110 110 110 110

603

Bilaga 1

1 0 1 3 4 0 0 3 3 5 6 7 8 9 0 d.3d X 4 e 3 UN No. 8) (1 111 111 1112 111 111 112 112 112 112 112 112 112 112 112 113 /A8 Pag /2 NNE g A e in to se ze r. C 90 : ous may c. . 3%. MS Thr. of to iscible . fre and 5% to urns C rlic-like ro m itr ce wate bs 8. te p our C c.c. tan volatile e t 51° c. r. ga wa ka ITRATEN d xic n s , eyes s 13°C c. c. low its b 4% to 8%. n with ss, t: otic. 6% to C le c.c. Im to -11° be ki le limits: 1. Cau rc wate ablee with re C ng t: s is su s ive r. oin g poin 47° c. e a AMYL t fruity o oin OL 2. o s p Nar. lin t: l - t 52° c. olvi p th t miscib lo in rilya a ran c. v to . 2%. TAN p Colourle lash limits: 1. our. o iscibl in c. e lash flashe e UB x F , boi 12.5%. tionsa disagre t-7°C c. c. rd orm C C c. r, . F ure r. tating E c. ives lye in c. n hpoins n so atur - . r. rri our. Im 10%. with wate uid. c. lo nt od erv miscible with m C Imm t o a frag 20° 10° p our. C to le with wate C p % to Flash p c. : fla - wate our. oint 5°C, x 4% to 11. r. Ie od C c.c. cib r liq le x r. Obs 7) Im tre t 19° c. alatio od E xic n od rtiary 7% a E punge 1.4 uo (1 x C s tha odour with t or h p te t 25° with wate like t 27° scib d and en : flashpo oin ng idu in ing OL 1. ou le . Mis . cle, nt -30° ts: C c.c. a p t 18° like ITRATE . L NITRITE: ligh y ristic z rcotic. f a to ablee b with wate th wat oin its 1. es d oi C c.c. ristic ies r- n liq L NITRITE: l b e re 9.8%. a le wi hp our n re p limi stic o ert 49° TAN ash oin N io u re Na cts o TAN at le apple- s lim d ra u Immi 18° ri t: fl: p ackagi the lat AMY racte F r. UB s ib e ive o b 6%. lash t: racte sive te Prop in e ah l - to air, colour. ffe isag % to ie iscib immiscib c in : fla me colo : f in c RCAP flash AMYL n OAMY re in 8%. los 6. E plo ara TAN : rom p an O i volatilet, IS ma su eg a cha to ic e a d 1.7 is mis a p ATE p ia-like m w- a cha x L ME IS n re or o n r. Harmf n rmal - s T x n us a RID r. r. r. r. w liquids with ak f c.; l by u n p a 4% with o OL L solidif OL i s. with E Ec. o oc str 6% to . OL c. E . Flashpo RCAP TAN s with fu are p re x or with 1. with wate s O OL is imm s AC u le s H . Flashpo with c. id lloe AMY- AP le s. id c.C sp e u en wate id le s chro id TAN TAN NOL . e id L . e a d C wate id wate id °C wate with a ch wate u y C o are u u u U U A v u v amm md p ui L u u 7 R may Harm s scib rio B TANU TAN B TU mbrane ob TY ob n iq TY - il rtiary s mical r. , tran e limits: limits: n -y UB -y B UB a limits: 2. ls U t: ss liq ss to MEL ec ss liqu int of th int of p ss liq se ss liq me ss liq int -9°C c. ss to ss liq ss liq in ss o rle rle te Y rle o o rle ives Immi ec rle ives - B - ry a rle ry a o with an rle ives les -B rle rle rle u u r.u M tan r che u point 48° wate p p s whiche u lo t. u u lo u p , eyes u lo ur u u u lo o rmal-AMYL ME A sb llowish compos m miscible with p in d p condar rtiary rmal - condar iaryrt cous rmal - in p lo rtiary miscible with miscible with miscible with miscible with o o O olo e lash lash e x o ro x o o lash k x Colo C od n IS su othe C flash with Y F F D fu Im Colo E p p Colo E se te n se te mu See ent Colo n 15%. See ent F liquid s Colo E Co te Im Colo Im Colo Flashpo Im Colo Im r- rs. . . . 2 u rs. rs rs rs 1. o rte n 3. arte a arte arte arte tio m 6. u u u u g qu qg q q q fro , 7. rom" od n grega 7 fd ivin Se ation .4.2 te l 6)(1 o 7. g s. ofr 1 t re 7.3 ara oe a r of livia ar of living ar of living ar of living 7. ge p le ge and S C Cle Cle Cle . as ins "Se carg . Cle . . . . . . . . A. B ff 6. A. E B B A. B A. B B B B B A. Stowa 3. gory gory stu 7. gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory od 7. tea Cate Cate fo or absorbing C Cate Cate Cate Cate Cate Cate Cate Cate Cate Cate Cate Cate

D D D D D D D D D C D D D D E 5) 7.8 S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, EmS (1 5.4.3.2 E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E

F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F-

lk d bu ions 4) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 (1 4.2.5 TP TP TP1 TP TP P1 T P29 TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP rse rovis T in P nks ana ta n ns ble t co ioct 3) a ankT (1 4.2.5 4.3 T2 T4 T2 T4 T4 T4 T2 T4 T2 T7 T4 T4 T4 T4 T2 ortP stru in

ions 1) (1 4.1.4 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - rovisP IBC

c- s 0) 03 02 30 02 02 02 03 02 03 02 02 02 02 02 03

stru tion (1 4.1.4 C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C In IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB

ions ) g (9 4.1.4 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - rovisP

ackinP cs ) 01 1 01 1 01 01 01 01 1 01 01 1 01 01 01 01 01 01 1 stru tion (8 4.1.4 LP0 LP0 LP0 LP0 LP0 In P0 P0 P001 P0 P0 P0 P0 P0 P0 P0 P0 P0 P0 P0 P0

ed se

pt titi b) 3.5 E1 E2 E1 E2 E2 E2 E1 E2 E1 E2 E2 E2 E2 E2 E1 ce an (7 Ex qu

d se

ite titi a) ℓ an (7 3.4 5 ℓ 1 ℓ 5 ℓ 1 ℓ 1 1 ℓ 5 ℓ 1 ℓ 5 ℓ 1 ℓ 1 ℓ 1 ℓ 1 ℓ 1 ℓ 5 ℓ Lim qu

l cia ions ) - - - - - - - - - - - - pe (6 3.3 223 223 S rovisP

g ) III II III II II II III II III II II II II II III ackin Group (5 P 2.0.1.3

ryia ) (s ) - - - - - - - - - 8 - - - - sid sk (4 2.0 ubS Ri

as v ) Cl (3 2.0 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 or Di

) PSN (2 3.1.2

TONEE S ET TAN S S E

THYL K ATE ATE NE TANE RMA HYD L ATE TE TE MI BU TANE O E OI d.3 ME RCAP TR SL SL A d L E LY MO L F /A MEL NITRITEL EN NO NO L AC L AC TY RALD 8 AMY Z A A TY TY BUT UB TY /2 X 4 1 -n AMY AMYL NI AMY BEN BUT BUT UB UB n- 1-BRO CHLOROBU -n UB CAMPHOR

C 90 e 3 ) 0 1 3 4 0 0 3 3 5 6 7 8 9 0 NNE UN No. (1 MS A Pag 111 111 1112 111 111 112 112 112 112 112 112 112 112 112 113

604

Bilaga 1

2 1 3 3 3 4 5 6 9 9 9 3 4 5 d.3d X 4 e 3 UN No. 8) (1 113 113 113 113 113 113 113 1136 113 113 113 114 114 114 /A8 Pag /2 NNE e C A e in to ; th r. tact by d ation. skiny g C 90 re n d, th 60°t: tin . u co to c. volve n hal , bd ns MS p to a y we e c. oin e in s with ita o n b u in g by d irr ti with wate cen d d C hps n dro nu ra ition. or o tly ista nite os 29°t: Whe p ent ss whe r. d ig p . Fla r. (hy tact m swallowe nc u iscible e volatile m ino our co . Sligh o b co r. d xic if our r. h c odo rable ya . Toxic if swallo ally ir l o rosive con d ig odourlet e . Imm a itives ition. r. to tionsa s bl C ide the Flash p re skin n os r.u lyh n h o ae rs mu , usu r. e with wate d cor p o d ai ic erv re o m pipe tc. on u th le by sely m na with wate ti , alm g : 100° p a e od with watele e cib ) ane d, e co t od Hig r. le o Obs 7) id 1% to 60%. re l a cons Va s up o n we m e ne ht c. c. rc (1 u its: sins, dn aint, e lo e g t aromatic o scib and disag ratu ck. e e like iscib sg trx n lig wate . Na r liq n lim e a pe o on thp u 3°C c. es ies a ro p swal 5 n ert m will trave . ms, r r d Imm with a f rm e s u - Immi ra r, or a warm ste n te 15.9%. Mis o f tact with oint: 13°C c. t: 4%. b Prop w, cle s a st losivep f gu lmond- nde with a p p in with a swee me

lloe h E nition te an ai will flash b bulb s o an liquid 9% to lye toxic ifly e con lash n ge o t miscible with m y c. n le h r. May salts. r d ashpo % c. us nce Ig r th ht inhalatio with 3% to b m ir liquid r. F ma .4 Im liquid 2% to oc ta and n lig lutio with tre Hig llow in a Fl 1 u sb 0°C c. avie ry ility . e . e id x s. wate r the e. . e . e bile e d id. bile faintly 3 46°C. e itio r byo so v v u mma limits: 4. s e v v v o y wate inhalatio ng 27°C. o 8°C c.1 md r su - t: h t scib ob ob ive me o ob ob m le mits: t: m - n t: dina c s are Mi limits: 1. s u tals o with wate r by lue li ino limits: 1. a ss o rcial are f ign or ry a ry a ss liq ss fla lo volve ) f ry ab ry a ry a ss, o s ss lique e ss, int: rle poin g poin o sive ts.n rle ives rle px , e me rle t c rl ivs g p rle op ives u an conta e u lo u E cibility u s to pa cible with cau lo u lo , eyes ilin p ire loride miscible with avye rn louo p ilino p in Colo comme lashF oB Vapours source with skin Adh solve See ent See ent Colo xE Colo o.c. a f ch Im h See ent Mis See ent See ent Colo Tu Mis conta May C xE B Colo lashF xE ks

. . rs rs

n Class 1. arteu arteu

tio te q q

om" fr grega 7 longitudinally Se 6) o 7. d ld o (1 1 t ar of living g comple h ar of living ar of living 7. aratep inn ge and Cle. e e nt or Cle. Cle. rv . . . . . . . D . "S E B A. A. D B A. E B A. D E E Stowa rs ry gory inte gory gory gory gory gory gory go gory gory gory gory gory gory arte an e Cate uq yb compartme Cate Cate Cate Cate Cate Cate Cat Cate Cate Cate Cate Cate Cate

D D D D D D E E E E E D D D 5) 7.8 S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, EmS (1 5.4.3.2 E E E E E E E E E E E E E E

F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F-

lk d bu ions 4) 1 8 1 1 1 8 1 2 1 (1 4.2.5 P2 T P7 T P13 P1 T P8 T P27 TP TP TP TP P2 T P13 P37 TP TP1 P1 T P8 T P27 P1 T TP TP P2 T P13 P35 TP TP rse rovis T T T T TP29 T T T in P nks ana ta n ns ble t co ioct 3) a ankT (1 4.2.5 4.3 T14 T11 T4 T2 T2 T20 T4 T4 T11 T4 T2 T20 T11 T4 ortP stru in

ions 1) (1 4.1.4 - - - - - - - - - - - - - rovisP IBC

c- s 0) 02 03 03 02 30 02 03 02 stru tion (1 4.1.4 - - C C C - C C - C C - - C In IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB

ions ) g (9 4.1.4 - PP1 PP1 - - - - - - - - - rovis PP31 P ackinP cs ) 01 01 01 01 1 01 1 02 01 1 01 01 01 1 02 01 01 stru tion (8 4.1.4 LP0 LP0 LP0 LP0 In P0 P0 P0 P0 P0 P6 P0 P001 P0 P0 P0 P6 P0 P0

ed se

pt titi b) 3.5 E0 E3 E2 E1 E1 E0 E2 E1 E3 E2 E1 E0 E3 E2 ce an (7 Ex qu

d se ℓ ℓ

ite titi a) 0 m 0 m 0 0 an (7 3.4 5 ℓ 5 ℓ 5 ℓ 1 ℓ 5 ℓ 5 ℓ 5 ℓ 1 ℓ Lim qu 500 500

l cia ions ) - - - - - - - - pe (6 3.3 223 955 354 223 955 955 324 354 S rovisP

g ) I I II III III I II III I II III I I II ackin Group (5 P 2.0.1.3

ryia ) (s ) 1 - - - - 3 - - - - - 3 P - sid sk (4 2.0 6. ubS Ri

as v ) 1 1 Cl (3 2.0 3 3 3 3 3 6. 3 3 3 3 3 6. 3 3 or Di

r as r as r as EDZ o o o ts ts ts ILI n suchs n suchs n suchs AB e )g e )g e )g T tmea os tmea os tmea os , SE urp nin urp nin urp nin idu idu idu tre l li tre l li tre l li HYD EL LE r p r p r p E

the the the ) surface o surface o surface o (2 s s s ONALD PSN 3.1.2 mable liq mable liq mable liq N m or barre m or barre m or barre OT lam lam lam FLAMMAB FLAMMAB, f f f S, S (include strial oru , dru (include strial oru , dru (include strial oru , dru r CR E g g g o nin nin nin OHYDRI ind ing ind ing ind ing tai tai tai E ILLATE TION r o TION r o TION r o PHIDL n n n N LOR T f f f U IS ISTILLATE LU de r-coat LU de r-coat LU de r-coat EHYDE NEE IS coS coS coS NZE CH D O s O s O s XANE d.3 R D s u nde s u nde s u nde d IVES IVES IVES TA g u g u g u ONALD ONYL /A ON D OHE 8 HE HE HE HYLENE icleh icleh icleh OT OT /2 X 4 2 CARB AD AD AD CHLOROBE TE COAL COAL TAR COATING S coatin ve COATING S coatin ve COATING S coatin ve CR CR CYCL

C 90 e 3 ) 1 3 3 3 4 5 6 9 9 9 3 4 5 NNE UN No. (1 MS A Pag 113 113 113 113 113 113 113 1136 113 113 113 114 114 114

605

Bilaga 1

3 6 7 8 8 9 0 2 3 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 d.3d X 4 e 3 UN No. 8) (1 114 114 114 114 114 115 115 115 115 115 115 115 115 115 115 /A8 Pag /2 NNE on A r f s e and o s y o C 90 9% to c. ne l b ce xid . c. and r. 0. c. c. our. g time 1%. fu n ro MS y C ng y ly 7. c. . c. es e ated l b its: C c. c. in, eyes lu c. rma s c. re p 18°C c. , eyes fu wate k ong C H C le he lim 6°t: s atic od of ox s some tr 8% to r. rane p b n ink rm to rouse e . S -7° sta low- s a with ive oin oint: -39° s g nce t: mb the n e o . H le p p rn n se xid In u r whe . b r. cib losp r. u a nt arom re ro ated oinp me r. o t: ing t x lash oint: 35°C c.p lash C. b de sa p e he limits: 0. oint: -29°p ht, sly oin tionsa E F es s a e p n er. with wate ous lig u tionsa itat tr 55° le c. ive lash le c n o ctricity hps rr n our. c. our. c. lash cau th . wat s lash us le erv ec with wate 8%. Mis our. F int: . Caus a p r whe th lop scib mu e er. I n le to od C c. od with wate c. o d 7% to 48%. r. In o x our. F with wate to Obs 7) . Fla our. le °C our. F od p e tions 1. unstable E mi and our. F le ontane (1 co 4% like 25° w a with t, slyu ctricity le wi ody ures sp and ourd wat igh od scib 1. r- t iscib od lo trn id its: wate o le ib od iscib o e static th e rm-like nt 26 ec u e oint: 13°C c. c C c.c. shfi rtially p ies t o th oinp oi like wal n liq lim nligh p a a , eyesn like x lodp d by ert ne in h Immi e fo Imm p r- f s su mis 49° P ki r- Imm e x tic romatic limits: monia-like l i r co ontane lash m I t: s or e nite Prop ngu ible wic a c. 9%. r. lash f C. lash the m u e losive to static in 1%. o the g ig

a p mis an los a mild wate a chloro E an an d E miscible with s d by o t rn an maye m 57°C c. p HET to 61° r. r. c. op lod % r. u s adily 4% to I s. Narco with 7% to x with 6% to C TAN 7% to s. Hig an Im x xp nite liquid. F .6 liquid with 1% to b 1% to Re with s . E s with L E with NE with with er. Harmf e e ig 1 . Flashpo es with the id id C to id . e id le TY id P wate id wate . e id 0°C c. bile id wate id u 49°C. u u vo u U u : 48° OR u vo u wat 4 34°C. org o u u rm;o t: mbrane 52° b IB e O b th mbrane volatile - t: in may adily m mits: volatile rcotic. limits: 1. ino limits: 0. limits: 5. ng w liquids. L limits: 1. ino d es Re li limits: 1. limits: 1. on long stan s f a ss liq me ss liq int: ss liq ry a ss liq miscib - D ss liq a llo H ss liq ry a ss liq me ss, nt: ss, e ss liq ss, on. Caus ss liq or n rle ives g p rle op ives rle rle rle ives g r e IC rle rle ives rle oip g p the rle ivs rle rle ives rle ives n time ly u lo in u lo lation. u u u lo t y u u lo ible wic tion. u stan u lo u u lo ati u lo eg p il cous p ha 5%. Im rmal p ilin 5-D miscible with miscible with p cous ilin rm; rcotic. p miscible with p hal p y Colo xE oB mu Colo lashF xE in Colo See ent Colo 8. on Colo xE oB Ligh 1, Im Colo Im See ent Colo xE Mis mu irrita Colo lashF oB long fo an Colo xE Colo Im Colo xE in Colo xE ox some trongS

rs. rs. rs.

rtea rtea rtea n u u u tio q q q gn gn gn

grega 7

Se 6) o 7. (1 1 t r of livi r of livi r of livi 7. a a a ge and . . . . Cle . Cle . . . Cle E A. B A. A. B A. A. A. E E B A. B E Stowa

gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory

Cate Cate Cate Cate Cate Cate Cate Cate Cate Cate Cate Cate Cate Cate Cate

D D D D D D D D D C D D D C D 5) 7.8 S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, EmS (1 5.4.3.2 E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E

F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F-

lk d bu ions 4) 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 rs rovis (1 4.2.5 TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP e P nks an inta a n ns ble t co ioct 3) a ankT (1 4.2.5 4.3 T7 T2 T4 T2 T2 T7 T2 T4 T2 T7 T11 T4 T2 T7 T4 ortP stru in

ions 1) (1 4.1.4 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - rovisP IBC

c- s 0) 02 03 02 03 03 02 03 02 03 02 02 03 02 02 stru tion (1 4.1.4 C C C C C C C C C C - C C C C In IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB

ions ) g (9 4.1.4 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - rovisP

ackinP cs ) 01 01 1 01 01 1 01 01 01 1 01 01 1 01 01 01 01 1 01 01 stru tion (8 4.1.4 LP0 LP0 LP0 LP0 LP0 In P0 P0 P0 P0 P0 P0 P0 P0 P0 P0 P0 P0 P0 P0 P0

ed se

pt titi b) 3.5 E2 E1 E2 E1 E1 E2 E1 E2 E1 E2 E3 E2 E1 E2 E2 ce an (7 Ex qu

d se

ite titi a) 0 ℓ an (7 3.4 1 ℓ 5 ℓ 1 ℓ 5 ℓ 5 ℓ 1 ℓ 5 ℓ 1 ℓ 5 ℓ 1 ℓ 1 ℓ 5 ℓ 1 ℓ 1 Lim qu

l cia ions ) - - - - - - - - - - - - - pe (6 3.3 223 S rovisP

g ) II III II III III II III II III II I II III II II ackin Group (5 P 2.0.1.3

ryia ) (s ) - - - - - - - - - 8 - - - 8 sid sk (4 2.0 ubS Ri

as v ) Cl (3 2.0 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 or Di

R R ) HET HET (2 R)E PSN 3.1.2 L E L E H NE E HY HY T N T T L L S IE IE THALE O O HYLE D D THYL E R H T ANE ONE NE HE NE COH COH RS OE COL COL R (E T A AL AL HE TONE EL T ONAPR HET GLY GLY T E Y d.3 N D LOR E E YL KET P d ONE ONE L E N N UT OPYLAMI RO /A OPE TE TE TY DICH HYLAMINE HYL E HYL K P 8 CAHY U - HYLE HYLE T T T OBS OPRS O /2 X 4 3 CYCL ED IACD IACD IBD ,21 ICHLOROPENTD TE TE IED IED IED IID IID IISD

C 90 e 3 ) 6 7 8 8 9 0 2 3 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 NNE UN No. (1 MS A Pag 114 114 114 114 114 115 115 115 115 115 115 115 115 115 115

606

Bilaga 1

4 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 9 0 0 1 2 3 d.3d X 4 e 3 UN No. 8) (1 116 116 116 116 116 116 116 116 116 116 117 117 117 117 117 /A8 Pag /2 NNE A th c. r. or to , a e , eyes ht, ly C 90 8% 25% . n ives rm a id in hly y r. lo o k s. l b 0°C c. lig ouse . MS uo 2. lently wi p s se fu 3 nu t for alatio x to f o t t c a c. halation. - s tan c. od oin h vio c. E r chlorn s a C c.c. in int: with watele n ctricity r. in ts c. e rn e ic g y Harm o to le c. limits: hp y ca C c.c. g u y r -37° l b r. p ure spo c. ive s l b e °C wate ro b a t: fu te iscib s e °C r. Fla u 18° 9 d es with acids. Hig s tox lash op d tic e 4 te los . R - tly . M oin wa F x lop int 13°C c. r. monia-like px C. nes nt: t: s hy us n es p C. oint: 12°C c.p r. Imm e x sta o r. with wate t: wa E oi oin tion. n volve Harm uo C. e ition. p le in tionsa c. 36° rab p acts with olve . Can rab lash 37° , e r. with org y d by os c. r: r. Harmf m hps v o 95%. m F e lash le 30° in ite p lash with erv an am C te lash r. Re ed ti our. to e int: d mae n m f iscib le me F la acts viole inhala our. o a fir cib int: s co OL: with wate m Obs 7) wa wate r. . Fla an ah od 2% y m .s p our. F ristic od o e ig e with wate le Flashpor. iscib (1 in us te wate se n Re r b us e od ind with wate Mis p th; le u and as with r: -32° n oc ourd y i at. oc c od le c. adily s.n HAN c.c. cib c.c. o g wa xan b u tan able c. aracte rm on th T cib C C d Imm ies mu t o with limits: he m s e . like cib C o p E t o ert able wate cible with with ne ful d b re s r- 2° ch Boiling s f lutio s u re Mis 40° 51° n e lsilo rm monia-like ive n su involven ion Mis t: a on long stan tic. Re so t: t: ra Prop Mis and ngu a m a g isag e the in or nde 11.5%. 60% solutio thy a losp ratinge in 19.7%. Boiling trat e 27%. n time arco lic o p 19%. 15.6%. Mis 10.1%. Partially tion in r iscibl miscible . Hs s. x n iz n 22%. eg n h e o a p Im ne an E e skin contact oy , eyes id a d r. Wh ce an y ly r d a frag f a flamm t f C c.c. in, eyes dime ga ra c. r, g in 2% to uid with 7% to g lco liquids. Pu 3% to ashpoin 7% to ashpoin 7% to 18% to o in 0° k Imm with 5%. of e b with c. k ox with with . Flashpo s somee n a Fl Fl with n r: s id. id re ivs m id C so id wate con id id r liq of ox tro . . id. id. id r 60% solu po te to u tu o u wate wed, b t u h u u a ce xid S ev ev u o g s x rr mes 18° ns with cle n ro d. ist of o volatile o ilin wa rn o c u - ly limits: 2. hig limits: 2% to limits: 1. es e with wate b limits: 3. b limits: 1. limits: 1. limits: 2. solutio int f o in u ss liqu ss liq 4% to 9. mi d ss liq int: ur ss liq ss liq ss liq ss, e p ate ss, ss liqu ss liqu ss liq o B n b erl rle 1. x co rle o b rous rle ive rle ive rle rle ive le e cons ry a rle ive ry a erl ive erl ive rle ive ous p es u an u p if swallo es e u s u s u lation. u s pr b hn u s s s u s e 4%. lou its: ic mud cible with ic us g lop miscible with rcotic in lop lop sta allyu cibility lop lou lop lou lop lop lash o x lash an x a x ha x the n s x o x o x x Aqu F 14. solutio Caus acids. C Colo lim comple to an Colo F Mis tox Ca d Colo E Im N Colo E Colo in Colo E In u whe U Mis See ent Colo E See ent C E C E Colo E .s . . rs rs. rs rs. class rte rte n " acid arteu class 3 au arteu au tio m q r o q q q 1 and gn gn grega 7 frod

Se 6) o 7. tion as f class 4. (1 1 t ar of living ar of living ga ' r of livi ar of living r of livi 7. paratee rom" acids. a a ge and "S Cle Cle gre fd Cle . . . . rom' f . Cle . . . Cle . . B B B D . Se E B B E B A. A. A. A. A. B Stowa rs aratep

gory gory gory gory e gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory arteu t "Awayu "S Cate Cate Cate Cate q b 8. Cate Cate Cate Cate Cate Cate Cate Cate Cate Cate Cate

C D C C D D D D D D D D D D D 5) 7.8 S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, EmS (1 5.4.3.2 E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E

F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F-

lk d bu ions 4) 1 1 2 2 1 1 2 8 1 1 1 1 1 1 (1 4.2.5 TP TP TP P7 T P13 P2 T P13 P35 TP TP TP TP P1 T TP TP TP TP TP TP TP rse rovis T T T in P nks ana ta n ns ble t co ioct 3) a ankT (1 4.2.5 4.3 T7 T4 T10 T20 T7 T4 T4 T11 T4 T2 T4 T2 T2 T2 T4 ortP stru in

ions 1) (1 4.1.4 - - - - B8 - - - - - - - - - rovisP IBC

c- s 0) 02 02 02 02 02 02 03 02 03 03 03 02 stru tion (1 4.1.4 C C - - C C C - C C C C C C C In IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB

ions ) g (9 4.1.4 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - rovisP

ackinP cs ) 01 01 10 02 01 01 01 01 01 01 1 01 01 1 01 1 01 1 01 stru tion (8 4.1.4 LP0 LP0 LP0 LP0 In P0 P0 P0 P6 P0 P0 P0 P0 P0 P0 P0 P0 P0 P0 P0

ed se

pt titi b) 3.5 E2 E2 E0 E0 E2 E2 E2 E3 E2 E1 E2 E1 E1 E1 E2 ce an (7 Ex qu

d se

ite titi a) 0 0 0 an (7 3.4 1 ℓ 1 ℓ 1 ℓ 1 ℓ 1 ℓ 5 ℓ 5 ℓ 1 ℓ 5 ℓ 5 ℓ 5 ℓ 1 ℓ Lim qu

l cia ions ) - - - - - - - - - - pe (6 3.3 354 223 955 144 144 223 S rovisP

g ) II II II I II II II I II III II III III III II ackin Group (5 P 2.0.1.3

ryia ) (s ) 8 - 8 8 P - - - - - - - - - - sid sk (4 2.0 3/ ubS Ri

as v ) 1 Cl (3 2.0 3 3 3 6. 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 or Di

TION TION LU LU ATET E

AL OL SO OL SO R R AC N NA NA E E H H HT HT TIO TRIC T T ) LUO E E PSN (2 YMME ID ID THYL E THYL E 3.1.2 S S E S D OU N ION) ION) E E ILAN , U , LIQU , LIQU NOE NOE U E ABILIZE MO MO , AQ ONAT ST RAZINE LPHID R, OL SOLUT OL SOLUT COL COL E ICHLOROS EH AROMATIC AROMATIC THYL ALCOHOL) or THYL ALCOHOL) or ATT T (E (E GLYE GLYE E d.3d ANE TS, TS, ALCOH ALCOH N N

/A8 THYLAMINE THYL CARB THYLD THYLHYD THYL SU ANE OL YL YL TRAC TRAC HANOL HT HANOL HT HYLE HYLE HYL AC /2 X 4 4 IMED IMED IMED IMED IMED IOXD IOXD IVINYL ED XE XE TE (E TE (E TE TE TE

C 90 e 3 ) 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 9 0 0 1 2 3 NNE UN No. (1 MS A Pag 116 116 116 116 116 116 116 116 116 116 117 117 117 117 117

607

Bilaga 1

5 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 4 5 8 9 0 1 2 d.3d X 4 e 3 UN No. 8) (1 117 117 117 117 117 118 118 118 1183 118 118 118 118 119 119 119 /A8 Pag /2 NNE r A te to or ic wa r rrosive . C 90 lation. ive tion. c. 7%. s tox ha as os wate ing our MS 7. with g rr d co s. y d 20%. c. iny se th e o ic if c. r. r. r. volve b ive co inhalay ic b c. 2% to our. osp s lyh wi xic an ranb 13°C c.t: . tox 8% to , ed ro r b to m ia-like ly 44°C c. wate wate . od m ntly ; e oin Tox nes n t: 22°C tea tact or co cor , hig p r. ra o igh t: our n de nd . s m b H oinp 5%. r. r. oin r. with wate limits: 1. with d fruity he co a es ition tact with oxidizn lash me r. limits: 1. r. p le le o d ne g isture n F t amm tionsa ive o rab odour. acts viole co ucou m n ive lashF our. lash iscib s t an Wh skin ts and m m nt lf-ign in our. us e s erv miscible with lop miscib -like r. n r. y ca tatinri skin contact o e e Re ly with wate o ng lop our. with wate with wate x le e , b of y g r. se s od le cu u x our. 5% to 16. r. le with wate Obs 7) le Im Imm E pp ng d Re ir m te to and ms with wate tion. E od with wate 3. od le (1 our. F .c. c. Im a wate u wate nce d, b us da rou e iscib md le le and c. , ane se we oc a pun o y n th a p romatic od its: wate scib c.c. cib scib C c.c. C o C c.c. ine llowe C c.c. re u th wa ley , e rm-like a scib inhala C c.c. ristic scib ristic C ies °C1 with with p m wi a wi int: 55°C. y lim ert 11° 54° 11° - le le swa 16° e d with m act vig skin fo idu o Mi 38° Mi Immi 46° Immi t: t: t: t: with a p t: n id , eyes p r b t: racte sant aa racte t: Prop romatic od in in in in with a p idu in chloridn if swallo a u ich re to in 0%. in 2%. le c. 2%. a 7%. In th ic iq l iscible 15.9%. Imm k iling 6. 8. p plosive 7. 11.4%. Mis 6. miscib miscib oge s.e m s o a x miscible with a cha an r. Toxic if m , eyes at wh d. May a chloro o B a cha E liquid c. Im c. Im s. dr u toxly in Im e s burns 2% to t mable liq c. 6% to r. 7% to c. Im 52°C c. 9% to ashpoin 5% to with . Flashpo . Flashpo . Flashpo . Flashpo e . Flashpo hy f k c. h with ng c. . Flashpo with with c. withs Fl id id id id wate id C c. mable liq C c. mu id so volatile olvev use id tia lam f C id id id id C to id. u u u u u lam f u High t ry e a u it skin contact oy u wate u u 0°C 54°C. u liq volatile 26° f 54° ns ve -1°C c. C rr ily 13°- -2 t: 44° limits: 1% to ive volving ur s. limits: 6. . I limits: 3. limits: 1. in limits: 0. limits: 1. ss ss liq ss liq ss liq ss liq ss, int: ss, int: os ss liq t as white tals. ss, ce ss liq no ss o int: ss liq ss liq ss liq nt: o ss liq int: ss lique rle ives rle rle rle rle rle o rle o rr rle n b rle to produce rle ives ti rle o ives wed, b rle rle ives rle oi g p rle o ives rl ives u lo u u u u u p u p co u at, e es u point: m s will bee u lo la u p lo u u lo u p u p lo lo p miscible with d he us a bstan p a p cible with p ilin p lou p x lash lash olo lash x h lash x x lash o lash x o x Colo E Colo Colo Colo Im Colo Colo F Colo F an Colo or appare most me Ca C F ste fum su Colo E in Colo F E swallo Colo Mis Colo E Colo F B Colo F E C E . . 3 s rs rs

n class 3 clas 1 and arte arteu tio r r 4. u q g o 1. o q n ing f s 3,

grega 7 liv Se 6) o 7. r of livi tion as f on asti (1 1 t a class 4.' r ofa a classe ar of living 7. ga le g '' ar of living

ge and Cle. gre rom' C. gre rom Cle Cle. . . . . f f . . B B A. B B A. A. D . Se D . Ses y B D A. A. E A. A. Stowa rs gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory ter gory gory gory gory gory gory gory arteu t "Awayu tea aru t "Awa Cate Cate Cate Cate Cate Cate Cate Cate q b C q bu 8. Cate Cate Cate Cate Cate Cate Cate

D D D D D D D C O D D D D D D D 5) 7.8 S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S- S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, EmS (1 5.4.3.2 E E E E E E E E G, E E E E E E E

F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F-

lk d bu ions 4) 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 (1 4.2.5 TP TP TP TP TP TP TP P2 T P13 P37 TP2 TP7 TP TP P13 TP TP TP TP TP rse rovis T T TP13 T in P nks ana ta n ns ble t co ioct 3) a ankT (1 4.2.5 4.3 T4 T4 T2 T4 T4 T2 T7 T20 T14 T7 T22 T2 T2 T4 T2 T2 ortP stru in

ions 1) (1 4.1.4 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - rovisP IBC

c- s 0) 02 02 03 02 02 03 02 02 03 03 02 03 03 stru tion (1 4.1.4 C C C C C C C - - C - C C C C C In IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB

ions ) g (9 4.1.4 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - rovis PP31 P ackinP cs ) 01 01 01 1 01 01 01 1 01 02 01 01 01 1 01 1 01 01 1 01 1 stru tion (8 4.1.4 LP0 LP0 LP0 LP0 LP0 LP0 In P0 P0 P0 P0 P0 P0 P0 P6 P401 P0 P6 P0 P0 P0 P0 P0

ed se

pt titi b) 3.5 E2 E2 E1 E2 E2 E1 E4 E0 E0 E2 E0 E1 E1 E2 E1 E1 ce an (7 Ex qu

d se ℓ

ite titi a) ℓ m 0 0 0 an (7 3.4 1 ℓ 1 5 ℓ 1 ℓ 1 ℓ 5 ℓ 1 ℓ 5 ℓ 5 ℓ 1 ℓ 5 ℓ 5 ℓ Lim qu 100

l cia ions ) - - - - - - - - - - - - - pe (6 3.3 354 354 S rovisP

g ) II II III II II III II I I II I III III II III III ackin Group (5 P 2.0.1.3

ryia ) (s ) - - - - - - 3 8 8 1 3 - - - - sid sk (4 2.0 3/ 3/ 6. ubS Ri

as v ) 1 1 3 1 Cl (3 2.0 3 3 3 3 3 3 6. 6. 4. 3 6. 3 3 3 3 3 or Di

ATET E

RE R ACE HT HT

) HYL ET HYL ET PSN (2 3.1.2 D

ED E EN E ILIZE NOME NOME ATET HYE TATE MAT A ID AB E D R E IL R T MO MO S HE OL , S E E ACL ALR T OFOR ROS H COL COL D E N YT YT IC HYE AT U U TYL E TYRATE LOROAC LOR HLO IMINE GLY GLY D T d.3 NZEE LB LB IC E DN EN EN EN d D E L AL /A LY 8 HYLB HYL BORATE HYL BU HYL BU HYL CH HYL CH H HYLE HYLE HYLE HYL FORMATE HYL LAC /2 X 4 5 TE TE 2-ETHY 2-ETHY TE TE TE TE THYLE ET TE TE TE TE OCTY TE

C 90 e 3 ) 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 4 5 8 9 0 1 2 NNE UN No. (1 MS A Pag 117 117 117 117 117 118 118 118 1183 118 118 118 118 119 119 119

608

Bilaga 1

6 3 4 5 7 7 8 1 1 2 4 6 7 d.3d X 4 e 3 UN No. 8) (1 119 119 119 1196 119 119 119 1199 120 120 120 1203 120 120 120 /A8 Pag /2 NNE le e A cts g on of ic eff tin d cib 3%. g s C 90 r. . a s up akag skin, atic, te tox n ly is dn Mis r. c. Toxic if istin olve le to MS Boiling reu e c. v or the wa pe c.C , e aromn volve c. , an irrita . 1% to 19. cons to, ave c. a 50%. with , rapids to skin an r d 60°C c. s t odoun : 2. 48° re e ritating c. le inhalatio c.C ide s te en e E E a fire Ir C at to e by titie rn wa ra ng D D r. , with e r L NITRITE p bu 32- b HY HY ind damag thus le 32° r. iscib h anu . t: 14° chlorn s t: m E E d 6.7%. t: uct: 3% to m or t oc HY e es with oin e a pu D D A mixtu ut %tions od r T u m r.u volve b an oin a all q E 11% a ility hps RAL RAL o tea hp volatile pr of shpoin drog C uso with inn or 1.1 with wate s erv lye re artially wate t our. % to hy s.e c id od e ts: le with wate m u p t, in sm or Fla scib . Fla u 3-FU tion. le is state apv . Fla Obs 7) le e p skin conta n sp od 1.8 r. ng m . Mi m liqu c., ba . Wh th limi scib (1 c. cib tr or y ev n fu s. ourd dn ala e r. our and c. x the le b, e a like ts: olviv nes n a bile its for 2-FU c. re in t to e . d ies C . E of cib d . Tr t odou e ra t o o C inh g adily n te sive Immi t o 1° rs,u limi n , b lutio ne e sive plo c. n ert - to air, ligh apple- e m lim 60°E disa s r lve sta x .s e t: itrite re rous e sive ng t as white ngu , eyes D a plo ng Prop in l n limits C. Mis su vapo eg in isture n mem lic so ink with wate iten x ive °C c.4 u 11.5%. Mis y n plo o us o s HYE act or by le rane th ives 17° po swallowe a a p x a pu m o h a p to plosivex D with losp t - a p ashpo lo ct: x itrite de r. lco iscib r. r. r. Ig allow soy x in mb r. 8% to p u r e ic if nl c. E a with ng r. E RAL uid s. Not e a liquids. E Fl x d e b with with d by s appare muco s ti ddish-brown, m me with id. tion of e E ro Tox thy id C c. wate id se a of . e id ta re skin cont liq Imm . e wate wate wate me e an e id wate r.u p und s. e can u g ist vo u ri wate vo g ousc u o se of d . 12° ng tti ition. b Ir 2-FU oily b with s fu n in volatile : flashpoE limits: 1. ure me d drolyy a os . d, by u acka ri mu ss lique f p fu ss liq int: ss liqu h it cons p ry a ss liq ter ss or with ss, ry a itro ce ss, AN ss liq rl ives al od art an rle op rle rrosive rr m rle a rle points: rle n a p ly rle TP rle lo re t o ous lation ibite u u ilyd . I ally u w u u l alcohols. iscible ic og u and u lou p e in compos ha hee miscible with a d co u coe hit y miscible with m miscible with om, HE miscible with oC xE Alcoholic solu the op eD itrn In th proh Colo lashF Im oloC Re an eyes sU th See ent Colo w oloC Miscible lashF swallowe Colo am See ent Im Im Im tox fr itrn Colo -n eyes Colo Im

. . rs rs. rs

n arteu arte arteu

tio q qu

grega 7 ing

Se liv living q 6)(1 o 7. of 1 t ar of living r ofa ar 7. le ge and Cle. C Cle . . . . . . . . B D B B B A. A. A. B A. A. E B B A. Stowa ry ry

gory gory gory gory gory gory gory goe gory gory gory goe gory gory gory tea Cate Cate Cate C Cate Cate Cate Cat Cate Cate Cate Cat Cate Cate Cate

D D D C D D C D D D E E D D D 5) 7.8 S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, EmS (1 5.4.3.2 E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E

F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F-

lk d bu ions 4) 1 - 1 8 1 1 1 1 1 - 1 1 (1 4.2.5 TP TP TP2 TP7 P1 T TP TP TP TP2 TP TP TP TP1 TP TP rse rovis TP13 in P nks ana ta n ns ble t co ioct 3) a ank (1 4.2.5 4.3 T4 - T4 T10 T4 T2 T4 T7 T4 T2 T2 T4 - T4 T2 ort T stru P in

ions 1) (1 4.1.4 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - rovisP IBC

c- s 0) 02 02 02 03 03 20 02 03 03 20 02 02 03 stru tion (1 4.1.4 C - C - C C C C C C C C C C C In IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB

ions ) g (9 4.1.4 - - - - - - - - - - - - PP5 - rovisP

ackinP cs ) 01 01 01 01 01 1 01 01 01 1 01 1 01 01 01 1 stru tion (8 4.1.4 LP0 LP0 LP0 LP0 In P0 P0 P0 P010 P0 P0 P0 P001 P0 P0 P0 P001 P0 P0 P0

ed se

pt titi b) 3.5 E2 E0 E2 E0 E2 E1 E1 E4 E2 E1 E1 E2 E0 E2 E1 ce an (7 Ex qu

d se ℓ

ite titi a) 0 0 ℓ an (7 3.4 1 ℓ 1 ℓ 5 ℓ 5 ℓ 5 ℓ 1 ℓ 5 ℓ 5 ℓ 1 ℓ 1 1 ℓ 5 ℓ Lim qu 100 m

l 36 cia ions ) - - - - - - - - - pe (6 3.3 900 223 955 223 955 363 S rovisP 243 3

g ) II I II II II III III II II III III II II II III ackin Group (5 P 2.0.1.3

ryia ) (s ) - 1 - 8 - - 8 3 - - - - - - sid sk (4 2.0 6. ubS Ri

as v ) 1 Cl (3 2.0 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 6. 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 or Di

reo

) t m T o

TONEE IGH

L, L L L with n

HYL KT HO TRO OC L E NG OI ) HY IDU IDU AMMABLEL ATI AL PSN (2 3.1.2 T IQ IQ F E or PEE IN L L r H IN N (ME E G, G, TION, L TION TIOU TONE LU ILAN RINU RINU OLU ASO L rin OS O O S FUEL oL G O S ec KE SO R E ES IN L O LAV LAV ES IE R E HL F F HYD DY D IRIT or E ogly THY E P C S HYD d.3d RIC TS, TS, orL LY E E T AC AC DEHL G AN D /A8 A L OIL L OIL OI TOR S 1% nitr T AL /2 HYL ME HYL NITRITE HYL PROPIONATE TR TR RMALD R SE SE ITRO an P X X 4 6 TE TE TE THYLE XE XE OF UF UF UF GAS MO N th HE HE

C 90 e 3 ) 3 4 5 7 7 8 1 1 2 4 6 7 NNE UN No. (1 MS A Pag 119 119 119 1196 119 119 119 1199 120 120 120 1203 120 120 120

609

Bilaga 1

7 8 0 0 2 4 6 9 0 2 3 4 4 d.3d X 4 e 3 UN No. 8) (1 120 121 1210 121 121 1213 121 121 1218 121 122 1221 122 122 122 122 /A8 Pag /2 NNE C A to to 37° .n C 90 tion. 5% MS 1% c. 1. t: - with 1. c. . ucous ousc esn its: c. 100%. r. inhalay c. d m inhalatio mu tion or rab lim shpoin n to p limits: c. l b Fla Miscible a r. fu em 11°C r. se ul by ive and point: 18°C rm m t: r. 2°C. y los r in solu a plosivex 3 , e p C. with wate lash H uso E oin odou t: limits: u tions x , eyes le r. c c. r. r. p . Harmf a E t 69° int 50°C. in atte nt. oint: 28°C c. th wate c. c. skin ives r.u in o k s lve p iscib wi mu lash lo erv o p o g m o wate with wate ia-like g poin s to p atinge d po t in so lash m tg r. le no rn x Obs 7) g e odour. F n te -48°C with our. F ilino E (1 oiling lour iscible c. with wate tia with wate scib m B on h and aint o ilino tating like- m c. le it wa le %. s bu e ies c. b co on thp our. F C rr point: oint: 12°C c. am 4 C c.c. b rri Im 9° scib . I with iscible p cib Immi usea lodp ert C c. s u t od apple %. - Mi e m th an C 12° x with a f htly i ining nd e t: lashF lash Mis romatic od 8%. . d t: e Prop C c.c. 48° g e in eyes Im a wi e in t - li pe 10.9%. Partially 10.5 9%. dn iscibl 7. 3% to 10. w conta a swee a pin to a 4°C. 12%. an r. May r. liquids int-22° oin er. S id r d ashpo in liquid. 3 liquid 2. o p u 2% to 3% Fl 4% to k Imm t: liquid. F 8% to its: p wat . with with 1. s ile with ile . Flashpo wate wate ash th s liq e. e idu id id. o ids. bileo idu l if swallo idu lash fl: u vo vo ts g poin lim fu volatile : f E s. . b imits: rn volat m liq volat .s ss, E scovi with wate ss liq limits: 1. ss liqu l ss liqu limits: 3. u ss liqu ss, ilin ss, limits: 2% to ss limits: 1. ss, rm e ss liq N ANX ible wi r sion ry ab ry a ive e ive b e o ive ive rle AX c n rle s rle rl s es rl rle rle s rle s rle plosivex Ha ran rle u mbrane cibility u lo u lo u u lo u lo u E r. mb u 5%. HE- OHE mis spe p olo plosive louo p us louo olo 7%. B p p olo c. miscible with miscible with Colo 7. n NE Im me luid oF su Mis See ent See ent Colo xE C xE C xE Ca C C 9. Colo xE Colo xE C c. wate me Colo Im Im - -

. rs rs.

arte rte n u tio q qua

grega 7 Se 6) o 7. living

(1 1 t ar of living r of 7. ale ge and Cle . . . . . . . . . . . C . E E B A. A. B B B E B B E D A. B A. Stowa ry ry ry

gory gory goe gory gory goe gory gory goe gory gory gory gory gory gory gory tea Cate Cate Cat Cate Cate Cat Cate Cate Cat Cate Cate C Cate Cate Cate Cate

D D D D D D C D D D D C D E D D 5) 7.8 S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, EmS (1 5.4.3.2 E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E

F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F-

lk d bu ions 4) 1 8 1 1 1 1 1 1 - 2 1 (1 4.2.5 TP P1 T TP TP1 TP8 TP TP TP1 TP TP TP2 TP TP TP2 TP P1 T P8 T P28 TP P29 rse rovis T T in P nks ana ta n ns ble t co ioct 3) a ank (1 4.2.5 4.3 T4 T11 T4 T2 T2 T4 T7 T4 T11 T4 T4 T11 - T2 T7 T4 ort T stru P in

ions 1) (1 4.1.4 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - rovisP IBC

c- s 0) 02 20 03 03 20 02 02 02 02 03 02 03 stru tion (1 4.1.4 C - C C C C C C - C C - - C C C In IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB

ions ) g (9 4.1.4 - - PP1 PP1 - - - - - - - - - - - rovisP

ackinP cs ) 01 01 01 1 01 1 01 01 01 01 01 01 1 01 01 1 stru tion (8 4.1.4 LP0 LP0 LP0 LP0 In P0 P0 P001 P0 P0 P001 P0 P0 P001 P0 P0 P001 P0 P0 P0 P0

ed se

pt titi b) 3.5 E2 E3 E2 E1 E1 E2 E2 E2 E3 E2 E2 E0 E2 E1 E2 E1 ce an (7 Ex qu

d se ℓ

ite titi a) m 0 0 an (7 3.4 1 ℓ 5 ℓ 5 ℓ 5 ℓ 1 ℓ 1 ℓ 1 ℓ 1 ℓ 1 ℓ 1 ℓ 5 ℓ 1 ℓ 5 ℓ Lim qu 500

l cia ions ) - - - - - - - - pe (6 3.3 163 163 163 223 955 26 363 274 223 274 S rovisP

g ) II I II III III II II II I II II I II III II III ackin Group (5 P 2.0.1.3

ryia ) (s ) - - - - - - 8 - - - - 8 - - - sid sk (4 2.0 ubS Ri

as v ) Cl (3 2.0 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 or Di

D cingu D D cingu

de TEA ducing de LATE r L LATE r RE org RE g or re RE org K INK IN in INK innin G innin )

k th TIN k thinn k th ) RINTING in INR in RINTING in PSN (2 3.1.2 r P P r P COHOL) ALCOHOL

o or o . . le rinting ble le rinting L AL p le a printing ble p le TY D OPYL .O.S .O.S mab g m g a mab g U EZ PR ind mab din m ind mab BO O ATE ATE , N , N lam lam lam IS TE NE D D f clu lam K f clu lam f clu lam TR ), f ), f S QUI QUI (in (in d), f (in OL (IS NE L AC , LI , LI d.3d G IN AN YLAMINE NE, STABILI PANOL ( PYL NI NE SE SE NES RIAL IN RIAL RIAL T T TEC O O /A8 U UTYL ACETATE U O /2 XAE OB OB OB O OPRE OPR OPROPY OPROPYLAMI OPR

X 4 7 H PRINTING INK MATE compound PRINT MATE compoun PRINTING INK MATE compound IS IS IS IS IS IS IS IS IS KEROSE KETON KETON C 90 e 3 ) 8 0 0 2 4 6 9 0 2 3 4 4 NNE UN No. (1 MS A Pag 120 121 1210 121 121 1213 121 121 1218 121 122 1221 122 122 122 122

610

Bilaga 1

8 8 8 9 0 1 3 4 5 7 9 2 4 d.3d X 4 e 3 UN No. 8) (1 122 122 122 123 123 123 123 123 123 1238 123 124 1243 124 /A8 Pag /2 NNE y , s c. A C rn c. r. ation. ; ma c. u C to , C 90 hal d c. b toxic r. d ink plosivex ic if C our. t 48° s 26°- a s c. with MS in hly t: le ct a c. E tly tox by and od with use s to n ly r. g poin ly Ca r. Hig oin with wate re rn c.C leo or C c.c. swallowe -7°C (pure ive r. with wate p le may u r. vi igh , eyes lin te le May b 32° . H tact ic if oint: -10°p r. in int:o los wate lash iscib s oint: 20°C c. s 32°t: u k p : boi xp wa ation. d. t: - wate p acts ec in od 6%. so s. scib at which use . con Toxr. lash with wate o mmonia-like with ne hal Imm e volve Ca lash Rer. tan es le a act e with acids. in C. h e . with sb n tionsa r.u skin c. r. like ing t re tly . bra Immi se shpoin rab o our. F iscib - an tion with n m c. nt odour. F 41° uce c m erv d by Flashpo 6% to 12. itat leo miscible with iscible e e od Fla our. F g su e d, r.u rr ving uct). Boiling vi m lation int: r. od in tion. m Obs 7) o with wate nt od Imm oform 3. od r. May . Im a s m 8°C c.1 tact or by ung o s will be . Miscible with wate iz (1 arlic o lowe d le ra with wate .c. er. I s Im h p p to pr substan C le id uso and g t o le lor its: as ha pr acts e c. in cou a m me odou c a e oint: 12°C c. cib rag C o wat g re wate C c.c. c. u low - con a fu ing ble cib inhala u ies swal p cib lim th u e a t: 32° y m ert 43° able mbran 14° or by d m b with Boiling ste ives idiz .s e Mis with ox r b d swe lash contact. Mis t: ct is a 40% solu tion. Re e t: t: 5°C n t: skin idu re monia-like ly n Prop a with a f in with a ch in tact s a in by r or g g poin m a uids with skin plosivex ible wic cible with n ey d, liq 70%. te corro rane a a 98%. 36.5%. Mis 16%. E 20.7% (p l produ an oilin an rouse r. Toxic if id c. f a flamm Mis inhalay cous mu ashpoin co , en wa mb g , eyes w liq uid with r. liquid. F liquid liquid Mis s. o lowe 5% to 5% to na ink llo Avo . Flashpo c. n rciae l b . Flashpo . Fl skin ski . Flashpo volatile tact with oxn me with 7%. B with s e wate . e liq id 8°C C c.c. fu id id to id ry id id skin contact o o y vo wate ss.e u 42°C. and m u by s u swal ; toxic and co ousc u act d y t with b oily volatile n volatile volatile -2 t: mbrane omm rma s d, ve ntly with re ns limits: 6% to d limits: 3% to ino solutio limits: 5% to ey rn limits: 4. le in mu limits: 2. ur ss to ry a ss, ss, lin ss, ss liq ss, nt: me t). C int-13° . H ss liq ss liqu ss liq ss, ition sly ss liqu ss liq b rle rle rle ives b rle ives rle rle oip g p ous ives c o ry , e rle rle s bu rle toxic if rle ives u rle 5% to 22. rle ives wed, b u u cible with u lo es u lo u u in e lo p u u u se u lyh u lo ts vioc ign- ro and u u lo es miscible p p il cous p rc skin u p a lf o its: p us Colo Im See ent Colo Mis Colo xE cau Colo xE Colo Colo lashF oB mu Aqu xE produ ashfl me to Colo oloC swalloweif aC Colo Hig Colo xE Re se vig eyes oloC lim Colo xE acids. May swallo Ca

. . . . rs g rs g rs 3 s rs in in class n arte rb arte rb arte nds. clas arte class 3 1 and class 3 u as ins 6. u as ins 6. u '' r u r 4. r tio q ff 3. q ff 3. q m o q o o abso abso ing f 1. s 3, 1 and grega 7 stu 7. stu 7. frod compou s. od our- od our- liv on as Se 6) o 7. o o rate cid ti class 4. tion as f classe tion as f class 4. (1 1 t ar of living 2 or 7. ar of living 2 or 7. ar of living a rcury r ofa ag '' ar of living ar of living ga ' ar of living ga ' 7. 1. 1. pe le rom" acids. ge and Cle rom f 3. rom" od Cle rom f 3. rom” od Cle me rom" a C gre Cle Cle gre Cle gre fd . 6. . 6. . . . . "S d . . rom f . . rom' f . . rom' f B 7. d f B 7. d f A. B B A. E E an d f B D . Se y D D . Se E D . Se Stowa ation f s. ation f s. ry s rs ry rs arate gory g 2, arate gory g 2, arate gory gory gory gory gory gory u arate gory gory ter gory gory go gory pe 4. p 4. p rc p te ar t "Awa arte t "Away e arte t "Away gree 3. e gree 3. e e a u u u u u "S Cate S 7. "S cargoe Cate S 7. “S cargoe Cate Cate Cate Cate Cate Cate me "S Cate C q bu Cate Cate q b 8. Cat Cate q b 8.

D D D D D D D C D C D O D C 5) 7.8 S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, EmS (1 5.4.3.2 E E E E E E E E E E E G E E

F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F-

lk d bu ions 4) 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 2 (1 4.2.5 P2 T P27 TP P28 TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP2 TP P13 P35 P2 T P7 T P13 TP2 P2 T P13 P35 rse rovis T T TP13 TP35 T T T T T in P nks ana ta n ns ble t co ioct 3) a ankT (1 4.2.5 4.3 T11 T7 T2 T7 T4 T2 T7 T7 T4 T22 T22 T14 T11 T22 ortP stru in

ions 1) (1 4.1.4 - - - - - - B8 - - - - - - rovisP IBC

c- s 0) 02 03 03 02 02 03 02 02 02 stru tion (1 4.1.4 C C C C C C C C C - - - - - In IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB

ions ) g (9 4.1.4 - - - - - - - - - - - - rovis PP31 P ackinP cs ) 01 01 01 1 01 01 01 1 01 01 01 02 01 02 stru tion (8 4.1.4 LP0 LP0 In P0 P0 P0 P0 P0 P0 P0 P0 P0 P602 P6 P4 P001 P6

ed se

pt titi b) 3.5 E2 E1 E1 E2 E2 E1 E2 E2 E2 E0 E0 E0 E3 E0 ce an (7 Ex qu

d se

ite titi a) ℓ 0 0 0 0 0 an (7 3.4 1 ℓ 5 ℓ 5 ℓ 1 ℓ 1 ℓ 5 1 ℓ 1 ℓ 1 ℓ Lim qu

l cia ions ) - - - - - - - pe (6 3.3 274 223 274 279 354 354 354 S rovisP

g ) II III III II II III II II II I I I I I ackin Group (5 P 2.0.1.3

ryia ) (s ) 1 1 - 1 - - - 8 - 8 3 8 - 8 sid sk (4 2.0 6. 6. 6. 3/ 3/ 3/ ubS Ri

as v ) 1 1 3 1 Cl (3 2.0 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 6. 6. 4. 3 6. or Di

O.S O.S r N. r N.

. o . o O.S XIC, O.S XIC,

N. TO, N. TO, EL EL

XIC, XIC,

TO, TO, EL EL TION R ) , FLAMMAB , FLAMMAB LU EH PSN (2 3.1.2 ID ID SO T S E E , LIQU , LIQU UO , FLAMMAB , FLAMMAB E MAT HYL ET ID RE ID RE ATET U ILAN

TU TU E E OFOR , LIQU , LIQU E AT , AQ S MIX S MIX TE TYRATE LOR LOROME RMATE RAZINE

d.3 TAN TAN TAN TAN OXID ICHLOROS FO d L CHY /A8 H /2 RCAP RCAP RCAP RCAP SITYL THANOL THYL AC THYLAMYL AC THYLAL THYLAMINE THYL BU T THYL CH THYLD THYL THYLHYD

X 4 8 ME ME ME ME ME ME ME ME ME ME ME ME ME ME ME ME C 90 e 3 ) 8 8 9 0 1 3 4 5 7 9 2 4 NNE UN No. (1 MS A Pag 122 122 122 123 123 123 123 123 123 1238 123 124 1243 124

611

Bilaga 1

9 5 6 7 8 9 0 9 1 3 3 3 4 d.3d X 4 e 3 UN No. 8) (1 124 124 124 124 124 125 1251 125 126 1262 126 126 126 126 1265 /A8 Pag /2 NNE A ture isture sa to ra xic if . 8%. C 90 % to . o e to d th rcotic in 2%. sive m nt d, by p ly re . 4% to a MS 13% plo are urns xplosive m h tu c. .. wi N 1.5 ous 8. x p bs pu s. c. 8% to 9%. ts: c % to to d bye pa e E Hig e c. E z s s r. r. 1% to 63%. is r 3°C c. 3% to iscible n 1. limi mu 5% ly s at a te 7. e 1 imits: 1. m rab 2.4 1. ro ga Cau if swallowe de l m its: and ts: dy ic wate its: . Im e 14°C c. r. sive 8°C o. h ive th wate s. plo im ackag point C t: lim plo limi mits: t: os tals. wi tox ne x L limits: 1. oin ive x li oin rr . ly e with if p ition. plosivex tionsa p , eyesn adily es bra d le lash os ive E t 28° los c. E ki sive hps cod n m osive ard 5%. : fE p s r. ucous m erv lash with wate px s plo Re ra High e r an pl 6. m lop F le E C c. o x plosive r.e an b Miscible c. liquid. x az co x poing d m Obs 7) t x . Fla to most me r. s m le miscib tion. E to TAN e E odou n (1 c. E E em c.C b in ais CO as and our. scib our. c. c. ourd wat ive m cou e c.c. ion h 1% - like e od od oint: 8° tating c. ritating s us u mma 0%. Im inhala C los on th C c.c. - boilin y ies p rri °C2 C t o with ir ro o t odou idiz y its: p in ): , e ert Immi - 7° ne c ne d m 2. 35° xp s u 27° ff sant a sant a lash r. I t: t: ble , an , cor point:-7° .n n , fla Ox r b t: e lim c.c. nC t: skin Prop le 5%. le e in ngu e re mu ng io s a c. nd nde in TANEU 7. id o t e limit: a p B to a p misci tu g a pu lash lat y ive e e a para L a p r. th wat r. r. a p lor n a , e 0°C c. ir plosivex r. r d HY 4% to liquid. F ashpoin tia nh n 2 los ashpoin r. F E r. T with with wi . Flashpo Fl with n ch it with 6%. F i p Fl s. point-12° . Flashpo s with ritating id id wate le id wate id. wate id eg of mois rr id ski llow, volatilee w - x id. id wate . . id id ir tions. u u ibc u u ce . I to y loe r e skin contact oy wate lash ev ev u wate a volatile rod n or by s r : f o o (2-ME tly tr limits: 1. s. y s.e es ct rn b E with with wate b b h n ss liq ss liq ss, Immis ss liq ss lique ss liq 1% to 20%. Im m e eyes ss liqu 1% to 15. ss o int: Lowe ss lique ss liqu ss liq ss liqu lig cen rle ives rle rle . rle rl rle 5. u pr dn rle 2. s bu rle o C. wed, b rl rle TAN ry a ry a rle rle NTANE S u lo u u % u u f a u conta se u p u C iscible u u E r . co p miscible with .6 mbrane miscible with lou miscible with its: in its: u lou cible with O m cibility cible with P x 1 o volving h the k olo a lash o olo O olo O igh Colo E Colo Im Colo 1 me Colo Im C Im Colo lim e white In s C lim skin C Colo F of 60° swallo C Mis C IS Im Mis See ent See ent Colo Mis C IS wate h . . 3 rs rs s

n arteu arteu clas Class 1. tio q q r o f 1. te ing om" fr grega 7 liv longitudinally Se 6) o 7. on as d ld o (1 1 t r of tia class 4. g comple h 7. ar of living ar of living a g '' ar of living in ge and leC Cle aratep n . . Cle. . . Cle. . gre rom . e e nt or . . . . B B B B B B D . Se fy D rv A. B E B A. A. E Stowa s . "S ry ry rs inte gory gory gory gory gory gory gory ter gory gory goe gory gory gory gory goe tea aru t "Awa arteu any Cate Cate Cate Cate Cate Cate C q bu Cate q b compartme Cate Cat Cate Cate Cate Cate Cat

D D D D D C C D D E E E E D D 5) 7.8 S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, EmS (1 5.4.3.2 E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E

F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F-

lk d bu ions 4) 1 1 1 1 1 2 - - 1 8 1 8 1 1 (1 4.2.5 TP TP TP TP TP TP P7 T P13 TP2 TP1 TP TP P27 TP TP P28 TP P29 TP TP2 rse rovis T TP13 TP37 T T T in P nks ana ta n ns ble t co ioct 3) a ank (1 4.2.5 4.3 T4 T4 T4 T4 T4 T10 T22 - - T4 T11 T4 T2 T2 T11 ort T stru P in

ions 1) (1 4.1.4 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - rovisP IBC

c- s 0) 02 02 02 02 02 20 02 03 03 stru tion (1 4.1.4 C C C C C - - - - C - C C C - In IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB

ions ) g (9 4.1.4 - - - - - - - - - - - PP1 PP1 - rovisP

ackinP cs ) 01 01 01 01 01 10 01 01 01 01 01 1 01 1 stru tion (8 4.1.4 LP0 LP0 In P0 P0 P0 P0 P0 P0 P601 P6 P0 P001 P0 P0 P0 P0 P001

ed se

pt titi b) 3.5 E2 E2 E2 E2 E2 E0 E0 E5 E2 E2 E3 E2 E1 E1 E3 ce an (7 Ex qu

d se ℓ

ite titi a) ℓ 0 0 0 m 0 an (7 3.4 1 ℓ 1 1 ℓ 1 ℓ 1 ℓ 1 ℓ 1 ℓ 5 ℓ 5 ℓ 5 ℓ Lim qu 500

l cia ions ) - - - - - - - - - pe (6 3.3 354 26 163 163 163 223 955 S rovisP

g ) II II II II II II I I II II I II III III I ackin Group (5 P 2.0.1.3

ryia ) (s ) - - - - - 8 8 3 P - - - - - - sid sk (4 2.0 3/ ubS Ri

as v ) 1 1 Cl (3 2.0 3 3 3 3 3 3 6. 6. 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 or Di

c, r r c, r r c, r r lla ) o o lla ) o o lla ) o o e se e se e se D a ning a ning a ning , sh r b in , sh r b in , sh r b in

D ILIZE ue t th ue t th ue t th AB stainl, cq ina stainl, cq ina stainl, cq ina ILIZE TS la p la p la p , R ame id g ame id g ame id g ABT DE n u in n u in n u in , S e liq d e liq d e liq d ) NOME ILIZ r,e d clu r,e d clu r,e d clu PSN (2 3.1.2 AB u (in u (in u (in TONE E T r an L r an L r an L

KE , SE lacq fille RIA lacq fille RIA lacq fille RIA TONE L LATE MO ONE ILANS ) ) ) KE NY T O aint, d aint, d aint, d L RY KE R TONE p n p n p n YT O K E liquid MATE ou liquid MATE ou liquid MATE ou id U ROPE HL L ONYL ing p ing p ing p E uq B P THAC OPYL lish, lish, lish, D THAN S o LATED com o LATED com o LATED com HY d.3d TRIC VINY , p g , p g , p g E ME NE n n n ANES, li /A8 HYL PR A ci ci ci /2 THYL ISO THYL ISO THYL ME THYL PROPIONATE T THYL THYL CKEL CARB ITRO du du du NT

X 4 9 ME ME ME ME ME ME ME NI N OCT PAINT (includ varnish PAINT RE re PAINT (includ varnish PAINT RE re PAINT (includ varnish PAINT RE re PARALD PE C 90 e 3 ) 5 6 7 8 9 0 9 1 3 3 3 4 NNE UN No. (1 MS A Pag 124 124 124 124 124 125 1251 125 126 1262 126 126 126 126 1265

612

Bilaga 1

0 5 6 6 7 7 7 8 8 4 5 7 8 d.3d X 4 e 4 UN No. 8) (1 126 126 126 126 126 126 126 1268 126 1272 127 1274 127 1276 127 127 /A8 Pag /2 NNE r. A C 90 r. . d c. c. c. we MS c. c. C c.c. with wate C C 2% to le 18°C c. with wate its: -18° le 10° t: iscib to 60°C low- lim l if swallo oin C. e cib fu p b point: . Imm t: 57° t: Mis r. losivep rma es lash C. t 36° ition. r. oin C. . lash x H n F tionsa os se F E r. rab 47° oin p c. hps 49° r. c. m our. erv g p m shpoin e int: co 12%. c. int: with wate od o Obs 7) ilin e Fla to . Fla o mbran t odou m p (1 o rs. with wate 26°C our p e n 18°C c. uso and : b 2% le d sa with wate c on thp cib to a iscible low- le u rm-like ies C t on m m fo ert s u mits: e Boiling cous mu ple be scib d NTANE li Mis ng a Im t: n Prop nde ristic odou c. t: 23° u in Mi a pe 21%. with 8%. C. 10.5%. Boiling r. r. r. losive a p and ms to , eyes a chloro rmal-PE r d aracte px 23°C c. e ashpo 48°t: in E ashpoin 3% to y liquid 8% Fl in k 6% to . No . wate . . wate . wate . Fl with , e r 1. s with ev ev ev e. v ev id. C to idu a id. po o t idu o o o o o skin cle g ns with wate b b b b with 15° limits: 2. imits: l ilin limits: 2. abovey ss liqu int: abovey ss liq to ss, ss liqu o ur ss liq tr ry a ry a ry a ry ab ry a oils with ch erl o tr rle ive g rle erl B b rle ive n iscible p n u s tin u es u s ee cibility miscible with miscible with latile m lou ee lop ita plosive lou 4%. us lop eS Mis See ent Im See ent See ent Im See ent See ent oV Im oC lashF eS Colo xE Irr oloC xE oC 10. Ca Colo xE

rs. rtea n u tio q gn grega 7 Se 6) o 7. (1 1 t r of livi 7. a ge and . . . . . . . . . . Cle . E B A. E B A. E B A. A. B A. E B E E Stowa ry ry ry ry gory gory gory gory gory gory gory goe gory goe gory goe gory goe gory gory

Cate Cate Cate Cate Cate Cate Cate Cat Cate Cat Cate Cat Cate Cat Cate Cate

D D D E E E E E E E D D D D C D 5) 7.8 S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, EmS (1 5.4.3.2 E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F-

lk d bu ions 4) 1 1 8 1 1 8 1 8 1 1 8 1 1 1 1 2 rs (1 4.2.5 TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP1 TP8 TP28 TP P29T TP1 TP TP1 TP TP1 TP TP e rovisP nks an inta a n ns ble t co ioct 3) a ankT (1 4.2.5 4.3 T4 T4 T2 T11 T4 T2 T11 T7 T4 T2 T4 T2 T7 T4 T7 T7 ortP stru in

ions 1) (1 4.1.4 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - B8 rovisP IBC c- s 0) 02 02 03 02 03 20 03 30 02 30 02 20 02 02 stru tion (1 4.1.4 C C C - C C - C C C C C C C C C In IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB

ions ) g (9 4.1.4 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - rovisP ackinP cs ) 01 01 01 1 01 01 01 1 01 01 1 1 01 1 01 01 01 stru tion (8 4.1.4 LP0 LP0 LP0 LP0 LP0 In P0 P0 P0 P0 P0 P0 P0 P001 P0 P001 P0 P001 P0 P001 P0 P0

ed se pt titi b) 3.5 E2 E2 E1 E3 E2 E1 E3 E2 E1 E1 E2 E1 E2 E2 E2 E2 ce an (7 Ex qu d se ℓ ℓ ite titi a) ℓ m ℓ m ℓ an (7 3.4 1 ℓ 5 5 ℓ 1 5 ℓ 1 5 ℓ 5 ℓ 1 ℓ 5 ℓ 1 ℓ 1 ℓ 1 ℓ 1 ℓ Lim qu 500 500

l cia ions ) - - - - - - pe (6 3.3 163 163 223 904 955 357 357 223 357 363 363 955 223 S rovisP 223 363

g ) II II III I II III I II III III II III II II II II ackin Group (5 P 2.0.1.3

ryia ) (s ) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8 sid sk (4 2.0 ubS Ri

as v ) Cl (3 2.0 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 or Di

nts nts lve lve AL) M

mable so mable so r r NOR . o or . o ) lam lam . .S. . . PSN (2 3.1.2 f f .O N.O.S N, N.O.S with with N.O.S S N.O.S ALCOHOL, NORMAL) TS TS L L L TES, TES, C C OI OI OI AL LATE AL E U U E E E IL IL IL idu UD UD UD IST TIS IST PROPYL ALCOHOL, PROPYL YDH q PROD PROD CR CR CR D D D E , li YR YR MU OPROPANE d.3d E L ANOL ( ANOL ( YL ACETATE ANES ME ME OLEUM OLEUM OLEUM OLEUM OLEUM PRODUCTS, L OLEUM PRODUCTS, N.O.S OLEUM OLEUM PRODUCTS, OP IONALD YLAMINE LOR /A8 U U R R R R R R R OI /2 NT RF RF T T T T T TRO TR T T NE PR PROP OP PROP -CH X 4 0 PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PI n- n- PR n- PROP 1 C 90 e 4 ) 5 6 6 7 7 7 8 8 4 5 7 8 NNE UN No. (1 MS A Pag 126 126 126 126 126 126 126 1268 126 1272 127 1274 127 1276 127 127

613

Bilaga 1

1 9 0 1 2 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 2 3 3 d.3d X 4 e 4 UN No. 8) (1 127 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 129 129 129 1294 /A8 Pag /2 NNE y A , l bu 8%. 17°C C 90 y MS oint: l b uso . 23%. to sking p u c se c. r. Harmf 4% to 7. tin lash mu c. 2. 3% to wate ita mbran t: 7°C its: our. F r. Harmf and e . 22%. lim od m r. to ive ition. Irr nt wate ition. limits: 1. ition. tions ourd r. os os in, eyesk cousu ive os ashpoin wate a o 2% losp p p s s p Fl th erv x m m md lo m r. miscible with wate E punge tos n px wi Obs Im r-like mits: coe a cible with coe a E coe 7) . e li our. rnu s e odou (1 th with Mis b y iscible and C c.c. e od on th on th , e C c.c. on th like ies eyes p uid 4%. p es in p - m ert 15° dn plosivex sant s u . s u ks 37° s u nee Im t: a E miscible with a s liquid. Caus t: z Prop in in with an c. ly le nde w liq nde r. to in nde n k c. a p pe rane lloe 8% to 12. pe e pe to 7%. so C y a be t r d mb 1. r. r d r. wat r. r d liquid Partial with tly n viscous th ritating 27% . Flashpo ngti w-18° s me its: w . Flashpo with 1. id a lo id sligh ro wate . e . e wate . e . Ir id wate . e id u it 34°C. u ousc r lim b vo vo vo u vo rr volatile be t: ive b b b s. b imits: . In ino with wate mu with wate lently wi above with wate l ss liq o ss, nt: ss liq ss o los ss to ry a ry a ry a y ss liq ry a ss liqu rle ti rle oip g p rle rle px rle vio trn rle rle u laa u u cibility and u E lation. u cibility tsc mbrane e u cibility u h lash ilino c. ha miscible with miscible with ae ee miscible with olo plosivex Colo in Colo F B Colo Mis eyes Colo c. in Colo Im See ent Mis See ent Im See ent R me S Colo Im Mis See ent C E . rs. rs rtea arte n u u tio q q gn grega 7 Se 6) o 7. (1 1 t r of livi ar of living 7. a ge and Cle . . Cle . . . . . . . . B E B B B A. B A. B A. B A. A. B A. B Stowa ry gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory goe

Cate Cate Cate Cate Cate Cate Cate Cate Cate Cate Cate Cate Cate Cate Cate Cat

D D D D E E D D E E C C D D D D 5) 7.8 S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, EmS (1 5.4.3.2 E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F-

lk d bu ions 4) 1 2 7 1 2 1 1 1 8 1 1 8 1 1 8 1 1 1 8 1 rs rovis (1 4.2.5 TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP1 e P nks an inta a n ns ble t co ioct 3) a ankT (1 4.2.5 4.3 T4 T11 T4 T4 T4 T2 T4 T2 T4 T2 T7 T4 T2 T4 T2 T4 ortP stru in

ions 1) (1 4.1.4 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - rovisP IBC c- s 0) 02 02 02 02 03 02 03 02 03 02 03 03 02 03 20 stru tion (1 4.1.4 C - C C C C C C C C C C C C C C In IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB

ions ) g (9 4.1.4 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - rovisP ackinP cs ) 01 01 01 01 01 01 1 01 01 1 01 01 1 01 01 01 1 01 01 1 stru tion (8 4.1.4 LP0 LP0 LP0 LP0 LP0 In P0 P0 P0 P0 P0 P0 P0 P0 P0 P0 P0 P0 P0 P0 P0 P001

ed se pt titi b) 3.5 E2 E3 E2 E2 E2 E1 E2 E1 E2 E1 E2 E1 E1 E2 E1 E2 ce an (7 Ex qu d se ite titi a) 0 an (7 3.4 1 ℓ 1 ℓ 1 ℓ 1 ℓ 5 ℓ 5 ℓ 5 ℓ 1 ℓ 5 L 1 ℓ 5 ℓ 5 ℓ 1 ℓ 5 ℓ 1 ℓ Lim qu

l cia ions ) - - - - - - - - - - pe (6 3.3 223 223 955 223 223 904 955 S rovisP

g ) II I II II II III II III II III II III III II III II ackin Group (5 P 2.0.1.3

ryia ) (s ) - - - - - - - - - - 8 8 - - - sid sk (4 2.0 ubS Ri

as v ) Cl (3 2.0 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 or Di

alcohol alcohol

) PSN (2 3.1.2 TION in TION in

LU LU L L SO SO ET NA NA E S N N ATE ATE A ICI ICI D L L LIC DE DE OPROPANE TIOU TIOU SI OXI L L THY THY d.3 LOR E L L O O ME ME HYL d IN SR SR OIL OIL M M T URES, M URES, M /A DICH YLENE YL FORMATE IN OI IN OI EB EB E E IU IU 8 - OP RID B B AL AL D D TRAE CT CT LUENE /2 X 4 1 ,21 PR PROP YP OSR OSR RU RU HS HS OS OS TE INT INT OT

C 90 e 4 ) 9 0 1 2 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 2 3 3 NNE UN No. (1 MS A Pag 127 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 129 129 129 1294

614

Bilaga 1

2 5 6 7 7 7 8 0 1 3 5 6 d.3d X 4 e 4 UN No. 8) (1 129 129 129 129 129 129 1299 130 1300 130 1302 130 1304 130 130 /A8 Pag /2 NNE - in us c. A lf ly oc s y ive g es a int: sa os C 90 ous mu 1°C c. tion. ilin oils. its: ; m o rr or 1 r. o 8% to 6%. 7% to p , nt MS point: ad to se -t: . uo tion of 45% . s lim r. re are , co y le and in es act a b e 1. by s. Cau 1. u lash tu p re l b ingil y inhalay n od d its: d ga its: active o r. F pa tu fu o act vig ra rey solu se d volatile losive re te r. s . B , eyes l b b c. an tion. lim ly ive p lim ly t od uo mois id rey in fu em Ma ous mbrane ro os x e wa y ga f mois u 5%. k Flashpo s. C c. dy rr sin an E me bd Ma. so r. rma m a . m c. 5%. t odn e ive o liq 90. d t uo H us monia-like g 45° inhalay es losivep h co re plosive xtr a swee with e s os ce ive at, which ma d r. oc d n cous x d of °C c. x E gn ly rr ne ition. Harm tionsa s e o An aque f - l b rab u E adily re 8 E r. u rod s os ro % to he olvev urns mu r. t o fu m m c. .s - c. with iscible cod re p erv c e b like o an am e d id m hy p m cor 1.2 ud e es - t issolve oin rma n r. Re toxic an nt: u 5% to 15. r. an e co Obs 7) ts: gn f d p H m as a rane oip 8°C c. 6. Im e (1 ro with wate ti o ). us e 18°C c. , 1 liq c. with a p adily and and monia le a as with e with wate lash oc y wate ide mb c.c. Mixtu r. with wate its: wate o. In thr. le limi to p s will be . Caus it g le fa u , e C lash . Re ritating on th ies ve m m es scib rr tagn s m in low- lor me F low- lim 9°C liquid ir p ert mab si a u nc . I able cib d ks be id. wate iscible , volatile k s u f ta ng am Mi rce ha n t: chn ousc t: 35° t: be m t: - in , an Prop lam plox ive s o eyes e a to in e p 3% to... e nde , f r ste bu 8%. d . Mis to PG I only g with Im. plosive id with wate p . EC r o ros n ry miscible with ro mu le C x miscible with ts: le e g s a str a g on p u mass,y , eyes dy r. r. llow lique coloured E w or lor r d cor in 2% to in f a flamm in rc in ritating ashpo Im h and ashpoin scib ashpoin c. Im ashpoin llo limi scib d iz with k o d , b licablep k Fl . Fl t y . Fl t: 33° c. . Fl e n ch volatile w-50° id id so n ne so . . Ir id. id wate wate gh id id y sive eg ry lo u t p (ap t ev 57°C. , eyes e. v straw- 8°C 32°C. ls. ve ic an ox s e with me AMINE C ns o t: volving n o Immi poin t: pale plo rod Immi ta be th s. limits: 1. rn ly L b in ki with g . e -2 in x y s.e with wate ss, int: acts with wate ss liq u solutio int d ur abovey ss liqu o , e s ss liqu ss to li ss liqu ss to nt: o ss liqu ss, m rle o t wi rle ive b o ive THY f 30° b ry a tr erl re o rle ry ab erl 14%. rle oilin rize rle oi rle rle c. E u u p Re ca u s es ous p t o es n g p tu ts u iscible u B m u p g p u u f lation. C. mbrane lop us e losp in us e lou ilin rn m miscible with lou ilin C c. cibility lash nition; tox ont x lash x o ee o o u olo o 6% to olo lash o olo volving h ha Colo F 32° ig c me Colo E Ca Aqu F e TRIME p Ca See ent S C B mois b C Im Im See ent C 2. C 28%. poly Colo F B C Colo 11° e white to most me Mis in . . . . rs rs rs rs. rs. rs

1 and arte rcury arte arte rtea rtea arte n class 3 r u u u u u u tio o 4. q ' me q and and q q q s 3, s. gn gn grega 7 rom' dn f u rcury .s living q rcury .s Se 6) o 7. tion as f d op of (1 1 t ar of living classe' ar of living ' me ' me r of livi r of livi 7. ga .2. ar of living arate m ar of living ound ar ound a a ar of living ge and Cle gre Cle Cle p co Cle om' p Cle om' p Cle . rom' f .6.3 . . e . fr m fr m . Cle . . . . Cle . . . D . Se B D . "S B d co A. d co E A. B A. B D E B B B Stowa rs 7.2 rs rcury ry ry ry ry ry ry gory e gory gory gory arate u gory arate u gory go gory go gory go gory go gory gory arte t "Away arte med p rc p rc e e e e u u Se u e e Cate q b 8. Cate Cate q an Cate "S me Cate "S me Cate Cat Cate Cat Cate Cat Cate Cat Cate Cate

O C C C C C E E E D D D D C D 5) 7.8 S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, EmS (1 5.4.3.2 G E E E E E E E E E E E E E E

F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F-

lk d bu ions 4) 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 7 2 7 1 8 (1 4.2.5 P2 T P7 T P13 TP TP TP TP TP P7 T P13 TP1 TP TP1 TP TP2 TP TP TP1 TP TP P13 TP TP rse rovis T T T in P nks ana ta n ns ble t co ioct 3) a ankT (1 4.2.5 4.3 T14 T7 T11 T7 T7 T10 T2 T4 T2 T4 T11 T12 T4 T10 T4 ortP stru in

ions 1) (1 4.1.4 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - rovisP IBC

c- s 0) 02 02 03 30 02 30 02 20 02 stru tion (1 4.1.4 - C - C C - C C C C - - C - C In IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB

ions ) g (9 4.1.4 - - - - - - - - - - - - - rovis PP31 P ackinP cs ) 01 01 01 01 01 10 1 01 1 01 01 10 01 stru tion (8 4.1.4 LP0 LP0 In P4 P0 P0 P0 P0 P0 P001 P0 P001 P0 P001 P0 P001 P0 P0

ed se

pt titi b) 3.5 E0 E2 E0 E2 E1 E0 E1 E2 E1 E2 E3 E3 E2 E0 E2 ce an (7 Ex qu

d se

ite titi a) 0 0 0 ℓ 0 0 0 an (7 3.4 1 ℓ 1 ℓ 5 ℓ 5 1 ℓ 5 ℓ 1 ℓ 1 ℓ 5 ℓ Lim qu

l cia ions ) - - - - - - - - - - - - pe (6 3.3 223 223 S rovisP

g ) I II I II III II III II III II I I II II II ackin Group (5 P 2.0.1.3

ryia ) (s ) 3 8 8 8 8 8 - - - - - - P - 8 sid sk (4 2.0 8/ ubS Ri

as v ) 3 Cl (3 2.0 4. 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 or Di

than than than

TION not more TION not more TION not more D DE LU LU LU D Z ) SO SO SO EZ ILIZE ILI ID PSN (2 3.1.2 SU ss SU ss SU ss D AB U O a O a O a E ILI EU m EU m EU m TE TE ILIZE ABT , STAB , ST LIQ ILAN E RE ANE S, , by , by , by S AB , SR H IL , AQ ine , AQ ine , AQ ine RO TITUS TITUS T E O B B S H OS ANE lam lam lam L T VATIVE IL AMINE y AMINE y AMINE y H E SUE SUE ATE, L E CHLORID LOR RE OS L th L th L th LC TE Y NE S d.3 LAMINE e e e TIN TIN TIN E OBUTYL ET ICH d LOR HY THY THY THY THY N N N ETH S R PRE /A T E E E E 8 ICH RP RP RP NYL NYL I NYLT /2 X 4 2 RT TRIE TRIME 50% trim TRIME 50% trim TRIME 50% trim TRIM TU TU TU VINYL AC VI VINYLID VI VI WOOD

C 90 e 4 ) 5 6 7 7 7 8 0 1 3 5 6 NNE UN No. (1 MS A Pag 129 129 129 129 129 129 1299 130 1300 130 1302 130 1304 130 130

615

Bilaga 1

3 6 7 7 8 8 8 9 0 2 3 4 8 1 d.3d X 4 e 4 UN No. 8) (1 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 1309 131 131 131 131 131 1320 132 /A8 Pag . /2 NNE is, r s . . ir A s e tal se se ya e in lkal wd s y m y th C 90 n doe a izing o el ; stals. or MS it idx pd em r. r. mbran r. mbran le ds with dr s ide o tr if e e tib tal s whea ustic re llow crye m m s ch as oun the e r wax ca tte to an y ex ul wate wate wate llow cry p tact or by m n g on ox with rm in (sus e m y e ir s sca ise r le in cous in cous re y va g re ts of y fo Harmf b leb u leb u combu ib co con rod the ive s a m m ily f iction infr he ation. r. ition. y with s, g ts. d d d le skin uid. with oil o mixtu . M Insolu n n a s. nsitive to with hal tions liq ign- adily cle te salir Insolu a Insolu a Re tab en by, s in a c. lf ated re sive ta mayd rm consi ta e s. ink s. ink r. ge ra consists of se d c. c. se e with acids and p o our. p s p s te b re ly by erv °C able volving h tr plo ce an f ry s th ve m e we nsitive ound with wate to adily acts x e re d od lum to lum to wa pun m se p Obs 7) le of e r; if e eh r r with me m tact or (1 to 23 30°C c. Re m of re lam t tals or -like r o r o in d s xtre co and C scib rty as. ge fn in pu n e e u whe e and ies C to a flamm ep watea acts re g for e ec n i me wd ritating wd ritating ate co ce con ert 17° is liable ro aka op oti o Ir o Ir soluble in orm sive t: Immi 23° tal in p se Res. May re ic avye p g. p g. mu fy nsitive skin t: e e able tin tin d bstan a plox se Prop in m illage cially ct.e ubstan fro Camphor a a an u M ly by 7%. p s th e ture ff t of b rks ora . S S. r. . Es e d, ashpoin m r. S ps ra lamm e ne . e t with h phous s he phous s he solid. In if contam salts. Toxic if swallo m sse e ep a f v sp re ivit mps. u u ir ives we Fl 1% to es r, m e y osive nds t lu o o to skin wate trex . . Flashpo wate . . s te n,e rmite e b phe pl ens skin contact. n stion. , amor , amor lack uslyo g plosive lop e ids. zirconiu e e o te e d so e. x s y ec e x in x d vo vo wa ry rog ite vo e d b ge n e leb e rm e b b it p dy . In ths n de or slu in white ontane white ontane itatin de de o f above ss liqu limits: 1. above d dina g a th ig atm ane compou na y - - wnish-b onta tals or the . y e ive y ivid ry a ry a tea or ce ive ry ab itiz iv l b ro itiz solu e itiz ntry rl s trn d ct with cinu sn s wed , tr fu to sp to sp sp sn m sn . Ma e lo e ly d tans adilye los lo itives ite htly lation e louo p e miscible with unco t at o ro b see p n llowishe llowishe rk ba nite see avye ha see Se C xE eS ineF Im See ent See ent If conta n volving he p su is r xpe See ent D xE se swallo Wh Harm Y Liable Y Liable D ig cotton). Irr D ligS h in D state salts. Toxic if swallo

" n " n m y tio irod from salts. salts. frod n d nd iron ir ir salts. ir as "Away. d a as "Awa. d a '' class 3 the '' class 3 the ' class 3 the grega 7 ry tea ry te m n d na rate rom rom' Se 6) o 7. as d e parate kalis as e pa fro f f (1 1 t p e ls and y ls and y ls and 7. ee acticable alog "S epe loga "Se ta ta ta ge and K s.n s. "Away e . . . . pr practicable acids, alkalis . me . "Awa m . "Awa me A. B A. D B B A. acids, al A. Ky D A. A. A. A. E E Stowa ably 1, ably 1, avy avy avy gory gory gory gory gory gory gory n carbo . gor " liquid h . gory gory gory gory gory gory gory rod ide drocarbon hed te d he hed aso om" liquid h y ason om y a Cate Cate Cate Cate Cate Cate Cate re fr h class 5. ox Cate re fr h class 5. oxide Cate an Cate Cate Cate Cate C an Cate an

D D D D D D G G J I I I I J J 5) 7.8 S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S- S- S-, S-, S-, S-, S- S- EmS (1 5.4.3.2 E E E E E E G G, B, A A A A B, B,

F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F-

lk d bu ions 4) 1 1 1 - - - - - rs (1 4.2.5 TP TP TP P33T TP33 P33T P33T P33T P33T e rovisP nks an inta a n ns ble t co ioct 3) a ank (1 4.2.5 4.3 T2 T4 T2 - - - T3 T1 - T1 T1 T1 T1 - ort T stru P in

ions 1) (1 4.1.4 - - - - - - B2 B4 B3 - B3 - - - - rovisP IBC

c- s 0) 03 02 03 08 80 06 04 06 stru (1 C C C - - - C C - 08 C C C C - - In tion 4.1.4 IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB

ions ) g (9 4.1.4 - - - - - - - rovis PP33 PP33 PP38 PP11 PP38 PP26 PP31 PP26 PP31 PP26 PP31 P ackinP cs ) 01 1 01 01 1 01 01 01 02 2 06 02 2 02 02 02 06 stru tion (8 4.1.4 LP0 LP0 LP0 LP0 In P0 P0 P0 P0 P0 P0 P0 P002 P4 P0 P0 P0 P0 P406 P4

ed se

pt titi b) 3.5 E1 E2 E1 E3 E2 E1 E2 E1 E0 E1 E1 E1 E1 E0 E0 ce an (7 Ex qu

d se

ite titi a) 0 0 0 0 an (7 3.4 5 ℓ 1 ℓ 5 ℓ 1 ℓ 5 ℓ 1 kg 5 kg 5 kg 5 kg 5 kg 5 kg Lim qu

l cia ions ) - - - - - - - pe (6 3.3 223 955 223 223 223 28 28 28 S rovisP

g ) III II III I II III II III I III III III III I I ackin Group (5 P 2.0.1.3

ryia ) (s ) - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1 P 1 P sid sk (4 2.0 6. 6. ubS Ri

as v ) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Cl (3 2.0 3 3 3 3 3 3 4. 4. 4. 4. 4. 4. 4. 4. 4. or Di

r, te %

10% wa ID ID ID an an 15

15% LIQU LIQU LIQU ss th ss th than t le ss o not le t le n

AMMABLE AMMABLE AMMABLE D o ) LF LF LF with with (2 ID D D D D PSN 3.1.2 U ITATE with n TTE IN A IN A IN A TTE D LIQ DE DE DE CIP WE S, D D D , COATE , WEE FUSED TTE , S N N N RE ER, COATE , E PRE, E E E E T WE AT VATIVE SPU SPU SPU NA L,O LO R PICRAT INATES SI INATE N N ES , S , S , S M E S E M M M M POWD mass R E HEP HP mass d.3d S S IU NIU y L M RE M y PRE EN EN N b EO IU U ssa b /A8 E E MINIUM POWD r, N C ALT R ITRO ITRO r, /2 L L U R LCI IN m IN

X 4 3 WOOD XY XY ZIRCONIU ZIRCONIU ZIRCONIU AL ALUMI AMMO wate BO CAL CA COB D by D wate C 90 e 4 ) 6 7 7 8 8 8 9 0 2 3 4 8 1 NNE UN No. (1 MS A Pag 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 1309 131 131 131 131 131 1320 132

616

Bilaga 1

4 2 3 4 5 5 6 8 0 1 2 3 4 d.3d X 4 e 4 UN No. 8) (1 132 132 132 132 132 132 1327 132 133 133 133 133 133 /A8 Pag /2 NNE . A ts. g 65% wed C 90 salir de . rms or atin t air, struck. able e o p t or e or m MS air . F h swallo th clos ry , we if mois d with d p ouse flam s; in n t, dam ul r or tche s tals or dam tan a ition of 10% to me wen , n volve me ixture when po Harmf scrn E add m whe s . r. avye e ive to d with wate toxic fu s n loosee . tionsa s lo . s se uire wate px e q in tact arks whe nt odour. erv with h olve e combustio c bustion t whn r. Liable e le n , with th ve tan e r. b co s sp Obs 7) nds tale , us o s com m mbrane it rsiste (1 tact. ire rm an e b s p wate solu . Ins m and n f o n ou n i wate is not r E pe oint. ies a f g su in In tal s.a a p co ischm . onta in ne or shi ble le cous m ace ts. e ert compou m k ind iz f lu b u rf m g with skin uc s may id o su leb r lting Prop itive y or tr e to sp fuse S d table arth . sn b um volve mu r. or e ma or ri en s in f to sponta Re . Insolu and ms arep re m its me . se d h n es with ox lid ey re a powde osive lye w e Liabler. s powde wder tion. low, pl dry m rks th re e , e o 99% r , a flan s or e x ne e rom ce f a . Whe tu . Liable wn so p r b ed h trx d p ily nts, x ily d with oil. d with oil. llin ro skin oge lake e w swallowe ss da mi da te te tas b tals, fe e rive it e in wate a a to friction; py sy st inhala dr itizs rm e l if e m le ive in in rka g u ins 94%- llin s at, o n osiv o fu E s r lub s re m m , cry d tin b cr dy s hy ta se pl f n. losp te ite ry ita ite s our e x o nite so x ni nite b ry D E May Harm Alloy d ir Ig compartme In e Ig conta conta Wh Ve Irr Ig Wh or Conta volve C vap s s g r g -e oil in s - ind ir al or in bale space da orary the a d f for ' ind 12 n salts. " class im d s, rom f p ne lo te 2. tio ir m it by o e have All othe shall be m , a fire d an ady 6. ' class 3 '' class 3. '' an n d rga re s.n te wh d ring then rom' or 7. the m fro re allh e d hatche g , re u i pt re fd sp e grega 7 rom' d e . C d fn cowls le e na Se 6) o 7. f fro from ss carrie a or s an o space rinu s ke te ser, (1 ratea y len sport u cov like ace s scr ce rg pt. D oking tion. ara trn 1 t ls and p an e p loading ncove prohibite nce ra p 1. ne 7. ta e U rly th dry tilatn ca d. D ke 5. tai ge and "Away. "Awa n,a e nting ntran ins u , sme "Se d Whe n . "Away me . . . "S oils. or . V ve e a ll be rg all be pplia ope . n 9. E A. D B B E A. prope s cle cargo s s, close tion of m a a A. A. B A. A. A. 3. Stowa avy lin sea g to the ly p sha sh g diate 3 as ulk co 7. gory gory gory gory gory gory gory table d cargo tr the ing in re rru re ity tin e gory gory gory gory gory gory hed te eg ll bea all be n d cu tch m 3 b d 7. 1. a a te a K Cate an Cate Cate Cate Cate Cate 5. C ve close sh tarpau sh or gre into spark-pre ope le se in h watch or disch vicin figh im Cate Cate Cate Cate Cate classe Cate B an

J G I G G J I G I I G P G 5) 7.8 S- S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S- S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, EmS (1 5.4.3.2 B, G A A A A A, A A A A G A

F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F-

lk d bu ions 4) - - - - rs (1 4.2.5 P33T P33T P33T P33T P33T P33T P33T P33T e rovisP nks an inta a n ns co io 2 K 3 ble ta ank ct 3) 4.3 - T3 - T3 T1 T3 - T1 T1 - T1 ort T stru (1 4.2.5 BK P in T1 B

ions 1) (1 4.1.4 - B2 B4 - B2 B4 B3 B2 B6 B3 - - B3 B2 B4 B3 rovisP IBC

c- s 0) 08 08 08 06 80 08 06 08 stru (1 - C - C C C C C C - 08 C C 08 C In tion 4.1.4 IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB

ions ) g (9 4.1.4 - - - - - - - rovis PP26 PP31 PP15 PP31 PP40 PP19 PP27 P ackinP cs ) 06 02 02 02 02 10 02 02 07 02 2 02 02 2 stru tion (8 4.1.4 LP0 LP0 In P4 P0 P0 P0 P0 P4 P003 P0 P0 P4 P0 P0 P0

ed se

pt titi b) 3.5 E0 E2 E1 E2 E1 E2 E0 E1 E1 E1 E1 E2 E1 ce an (7 Ex qu

d se

ite titi a) 0 an (7 3.4 1 kg 5 kg 1 kg 5 kg 1 kg 3 kg 5 kg 5 kg 5 kg 5 kg 1 kg 5 kg Lim qu

l cia ions ) - - - - pe (6 3.3 28 249 274 915 223 274 915 916 29 281 954 293 S rovisP 948 967

g ) I II III II III II - III III III III II III ackin Group (5 P 2.0.1.3

ryia ) (s ) - - - - - - - - - - - - sid sk (4 2.0 ubS Ri

as v ) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Cl or Di (3 2.0 4. 4. 4. 4. 4. 4. 4. 4. 4. 4. 4. 4. 4.

t p

15% n 53 D xce 25% nt) an 840 INE an se an F ss tha re ss th , RE let ss th pe le ss th E o e le NE . . st b siz e

latin coated, ee not le siz THAL ) with nD g r mu " H (2 E C, N.O.S C, N.O.S with particle RE s PSN 3.1.2 AS D , d NAP TTE B f wate d particle HE o r E GANI GANI TTE d, WY or ss o uce ce A ED LOS , OR , OR , WE od S TRAMINEE AN LU R cex T INATE E gots or L ID ID E e pr E S RCINOL, WE OL OL le produ N E in , CRU O M ly REE TRIK NE S IU LE S LE S ically S "S d.3 massy R M POWD an ; RAW or BHU THYLE S, HYDE d b , NITROCE IU ch mical T HE M slabs, THALE /A r, p r (a visib ons ons S MEA H 8 RROCE AMMAB AMMAB cr cr Y, X TC TALD RIU /2 INITRORE E ILMS ) me X 4 4 D wate F F scra FL FL HAFN wate (a mi (b) che mi HA HE MANGANE MA ME CE NAP C 90 e 4 ) 2 3 4 5 5 6 8 0 1 2 3 4 NNE UN No. (1 MS A Pag 132 132 132 132 132 132 1327 132 133 133 133 133 133

617

Bilaga 1

5 6 7 8 0 3 4 5 6 8 9 0 d.3d X 4 e 4 UN No. 8) (1 133 133 133 1339 134 1341 134 134 134 134 1347 134 134 135 /A8 Pag . /2 NNE s s s s s s r. r. a A re tal y 0% rm y rm s. toxic iction d re re re re s d n 3 y in a o y in a o t. a y . s tod C 90 s avy fr e ts. . Ma ts. a s or el d fy r b el d fy c g g b e e ive mixtu ixtu ixtu tal d c ). MS olve s he to air. May sal m mixtu m mixtu te sal adily skin e emtr ma emtr ma tin ite rmo es v lop ir ive halation. halation. halation. halation. halation. llow cry ir e m ss than llow powde s llow powde s ac f e x in clos e friction. y tact with ive tact with ive e sta e ; rd plosive yv e ex involve e ex involve o The is ak , e withs s;e with th b losp los los y th x a le y n meu y n meu ff ign substan . r fl nsitive m re x st inu con plosive st in contact with p st inu con plosive st in contact with p st inu drye ite E d or by rm e f rm e f skin contay su be it n o se u x du x x du x ts of n r. he with ts of se ts of se b d y ing a fire rm an adily dy dy dy s th ig te d s y foa Wh skin contact o s y foa Wh isture esll in o ic f mixtu tals or re rms e b at in s e at in b at in s e at in b n i tals or n llowe with ts. y ts. or an idiz o whe ti d f and s o rm rms e rm rms e . s wa tte . M the . M the d g sa me ite F ord o d or by hes o ord o d or by hes o ord me in ds te sal ts, te sal ts, tions compound sive s tox sive s. F F F F , whe swa ta ir ne wed, b ta ir ne itatin of m , ps a volve s may plo avye lops he s. lop s. lops he s. lop s. rm consi riction avye tance l if oun or we rm consi e rm consi e r which ma erv in e plox x Ignr. me ve se ve se ve se ve se o f air s fu p o f ry s th tm o f ry s th tm irr with oxs nce let n m nsitive volve e fu e a e a e a e a re to f in oluble m re d or re d or swallowe ry se to sulphur el Obs e u f r. E , e D g g D g g sub S rm , dry e e reu re ly , p 7) e se e e with h swallowe ble swallowe ble swallowe ble swallowe ble swallowe with h urns ls. co h if swallo h l ifu ve with ai p p (1 . Wh se ly wd rm an l if a a l if a a l if itives tact. ta . Ha RATE tn tals compar ic tn tals compar re e pa es and e o a fir o nds in wate ritating u tion. m ful if tion. D u tion. m ful if tion. D u in pue n nds n . B izing sy in pue d in pue d xic, tu mixt th t ul ies th m p f le ric ric ric ric c co cr nsitive c n io me es c n io me es x o an ert solid tre e ind b s ir f lam rm f lamm f lam rm f lamm d se xid state R PIC ti . Tox ti s to n gr nts, x lu f f g. wdero o se E ic avye clo ic avye clo mi losive lar in ld , s ite e s may so olve . Harmf by d f by d . Harmf by d f by d . Harmf an skiny tin llow lye V d. fr h air fr h air. Harmf olve p uo ll Prop m e compou v s s. Ha s s. Ha s ubstan compou a eY dry IL ite ubstan o in ubstan o in v ive x ri . Wh . Orang m . In , e adily ic an adily ic an adily ic an adily ic an . S b with . m S ib . S s; . S s; , e los articu sh p for involven u f itive re re re re losive itive or s he tallic p e t with e t with p p s ives ives e e s wder tance s s tance s s tance p s d u e in the xtre ivit meu ivit meu re x rms e h a lo ts. lo se n o a fire s tox tox s tox tox s osive x n o m e osive nds with osive nds with a fire en o l, in Code c p compartmed Mayr. p . Wh se ite ite ite ite pl Er. se -n mixedn plosive sport of pl ens ic f ixture pl ens ic f a . F e us x e sal x ly n p in sub substance sub substance sub x ly o x orm an x s x s in s e ire e e w d Ign olving ng . Ign olving Ign olving ng . Ign olving e e ontane n ed riction fy ss is proha ed d tox m ed d tox mixtu d m f this e (p de de nts th m ro v v v v de wate m swallowe whe e a Tr e s ive e s tricity o a th statey e b- volve izing e izi lid er, izing e izi lid er, izing n e wn, to f M m ane compou s ane compou sive volve c to ste sn h itiz in clos with ai itiz trx idx solid. so idx solid. so idx itiz i trx l if ro able itiz lts. by itiz iv lo itiz iv st for le ive sc sn s; re sn dr ish in t ai t ai sn fu to sp sn itive ct. sa r, sn s itive volvee px sn s itive volvee plo in u ifi se e tu tals or se ne o oxid o oxid o se ble rk b se s ir se lo s , e lation. se lo s , x ne d ic e ros visio e m x e the rm e dd llow e oist air, llow e llow e oist air, llow e e luo rm e a amm e n e px n re ha e px n re e e ro ecp D fu mi me D in compartme fo Re Wh with Y m with Y mois with Y m with Y mois with D S fo Harm Liable D fl D se conta the wate D E se fi an in D E se fi an Wh Th stat Cor p s s 1. 9. ss ss ss ce 3. n class ' 7. salts. salts. '' cla '' cla '' cla salts. salts. salts. sour tio ir ir m ir ir salts. ir ir m ' class 5. bulk d 7. ' class 3 '' class 3 rom' f fro ' class 3 rom" class f '' class 3 ' class 3 ' class 3 3 grega 7 the m the d d from d from d the d the the the fro K rom' te rom' te rom' rom' d rom' f B 12 an Se 6) o 7. f fro rate rate f from f f tec d in 2. (1 1 t y ls and ls and arap y ls and arap ls and y ls and y ls and d 6. 7. ta ta pa pa paratee ta ta ta ta ote rte 7. ge and "Away "Se "Se "Se "S "Se "Away e Pr aratep o e . "Awa me . me . . . . . "Awa me . m . "Awa me . "Awa me e sp se E D A. B D B B E A. A. D E E A. r, Stowa avy avy avy avy avy avy gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory at. "Se trann ine hed hed te te hed te d he hed hed e 1. a 1 a 1. 1. 1. a Cate an Cate an Cate 5. C 5. Cate C 5. Cate 5. Cate an Cate Cate 5. C an Cate an Cate an Cate of h Wh conta

J J G G N G G J I G J J J G 5) 7.8 S- S- S-, S- S-, S- S-, S- S-, S-, S- S- S- S-, EmS (1 5.4.3.2 B, B, A G, G A, G B, A A B, B, B, A

F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F-

lk d bu ions 4) - - - - - rs (1 4.2.5 P33T TP33 P33T TP33 P33T P33T P33T P33T e rovisP nks an inta a n ns ble t co ioct 3) a ank (1 4.2.5 4.3 - - T1 T3 T3 T3 T3 - T3 T1 - - - T1 2 BK3 ort T stru K P in B

ions 1) (1 4.1.4 - - B3 - - - - - B2 B4 B3 - - - B3 rovisP IBC

c- s 0) 08 40 04 40 04 08 08 stru (1 - - C C C C C - C 08 C - - - C In tion 4.1.4 IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB

ions ) g (9 4.1.4 - - - rovis PP31 PP31 PP31 PP31 PP40 PP31 PP31 PP26 PP31 PP25 PP26 PP31 PP26 PP31 PP26 PP31 P ackinP cs ) 06 06 10 10 10 06 02 02 2 06 06 02 2 stru tion (8 4.1.4 LP0 LP0 In P4 P4 P4 P410 P4 P410 P4 P4 P0 P0 P406 P4 P4 P0

ed se

pt titi b) 3.5 E0 E0 E1 E2 E2 E2 E2 E0 E2 E1 E0 E0 E0 E1 ce an (7 Ex qu

d se ite titi a) g an (7 3.4 0 0 5 kg 1 kg 1 kg 1 kg 0 1 kg 5 kg 0 0 0 5 kg Lim qu 500

l cia ions ) - - - - pe (6 3.3 28 28 28 223 917 32 28 900 28 28 S rovisP 242 967

g ) I I III II II II II I II III I I I III ackin Group (5 P 2.0.1.3

ryia ) (s ) - - - - 1 - - - - - - 1 P - sid sk (4 2.0 4. 6. ubS Ri

as v ) 1 1 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Cl or Di (3 2.0 4. 4. 4. 4. 4. 4. 4. 4. 4. 4. 4. 4. 4. 4.

an byr, ite ite ss g g r, ss wh wh e in in or de 20% ss th whit eedc ce not le not le t x an 20% wate llow or llow or llow or whitee t ex 45% t e 30% wate th not le e e y with o , no n with ss an y y llow or D , n ding d te D le e tea t with ss th rom rom f ye TTE ted ce ul ss than TTE o D frome fe e m la x r con n TTE re fro WE nu t e an , WE ) fre f freE e ), ra n bbe not le with (2 WE not le E E re ID r gr D PSN 3.1.2 ), D HID f r g od d ru OLATE PHID ED o e PHOUS with S TTE withD L LP ed r conte er D RITE PHOUS U ULPHI UIS PHI RIC AC er be d CRE AS U L mass d wo TTE mass , WE (PIC ss TTE Q U y w rub p crons an , AMOR o- y a WE PTAS NT SE ISR b o d R , WE b INE m AMOR HE S T NOL (PIC r, P p na DY ED r, y H, S S A ATE US, UR s US PE su RU s US su OD 840 mi R INITRO- ICRAMATE d.3 ANIDU r, b ARC SCR ons g D P massy d G TS icr in PIC ss M M b /A PHOR PHOS PHOR phor PHOS PHOR phor 30% wate m de R a IU 15% wate IU r, 8 ss osphoru so osphoru so BBER BBER SH ce m D D LPHUR /2 ITRO ITRO h h an U U x ILICON POW ILVE O an O U X 4 5 N 20% wate N ma PHOS PHO ph PHOS p PHO ph PHOS p TRINITROPHE th R 840 R e 45% S S by S th S wate S C 90 e 4 ) 6 7 8 0 3 4 5 6 8 9 0 NNE UN No. (1 MS A Pag 133 133 133 1339 134 1341 134 134 134 134 1347 134 134 135

618

Bilaga 1

6 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 1 1 2 d.3d X 4 e 4 UN No. 8) (1 135 135 135 135 135 135 135 136 136 136 136 1363 /A8 Pag . . . /2 NNE s s s . s n A in tal y tal ord tal y ly tly e ly tly e d y s b s d s b tals d y n for n for y C 90 se avy y se el whe ous e ous e a . s ma nts d or e nts d or cr contact mable Toxic if e ficie b e ficie b m MS s n e d clo air. h n e d clo air. emtr tion . tan e tan e involve llow cry a ivit llow cry in llow cry a ivit in s in lam se n suf n suf ich tance n meu e ive e s; swallowe e ive s; ex f c n n s e f y s ens y with l if s with y s ens f white with ly ee ratur ee ratur se lo me re fu d lo me re rm . s slowly spo spo sub Wh ts of px y s swallowe ts of n ts of px y s swallowe combu e s ouse ite b mpe ite b mpe s. s compartmed el s uo s compartmed el ists o y foa c e ve ve odour wh oe the e . E l if mixtu p e . E l if mixtu ts. ous tan tan substan ign t te ign t te izing sh ts, air em fu Harm m air em fu . M e s no d ha n d ha n cid ne tr s toxic fu tr cons s toxic fu te sal tan b ing bie bie tions xid ex sive co ex sive ta ir n compos an m an m a o tm rm consi in clos with Harm rm consi plo state. rm consi in clos with Harm rm plo e o g su e idiz a a ran erv o f s; rm o f volve x ry itive o f s; rm o f volve x ry s th in d , a spe t should t should re e re e d s re e re e d iz or in n n ating Obs withs oots and mu y fo salts. , e n mu y fo salts. , e e to sp id s h tion. at slowly at slowly tr 7) re compar ixture a ir ire se ixture a ir ire h le ps with ox e wn to o e wn to o (1 of b d m rm an the ly m rm an tn tals or b o d d ne and re es . in pue xic f e. M the in pue o in e in pue xic f e. M the in pue o acid h tlyn d d pe ies air c ives tat r c in a f f n me c ives tat r c in a f f n io me Lia p inhalay to h r shipme le to h r shipme le a ert mixtu clo s to lo s d tr s to lo s d ti r. with oxs o f o f factu p ry ls o x p ry ls o ic avye r b d coo d coo sive un in with olve x ta s may rictio f olve x ta s may fr re Liable re e Liable re e with Prop a s; ubstan v e e d ubstan volve e ubstan v e e d ubstan volve e o tux acts with volving acts viole s. b s. b plo . S , e h me . S in m to rm eo . S , e h me . S in m in wate e ffe ffe ts, x m meu ixture tn n u f f tn n u f e t with h le mi . Res r, Re es rm an avy e itive rm an avy e ivit b ai s. . m the ic f m osive a fire o f n i osive se s ts. osive a fire o f n i osive se nds lu ive tals a l as oa should l as oa should s in ive pl tio he pl Wher. n May pl tio he pl Wher. ens so los y r granule ri d . r granule ri d coconu d tox s x in ic x se t.c sal x in ic x s p damp ic g skin contact o ev . For es s lo e d with e d ire e d with e d . In x n cr r y r o an o r o an ls of u p de s maye fro s ct. de nts th n de s maye fro s ct. de nts th w tox e mate d b e mate d x volve m t a th volve m t ane compou ro r o ly e tea e tea rne r cargoee wdero volvee e itiz u e itiz in wate ive itiz u e itiz in wate iv wdero rms e wed, b e ry a e p oard , an sn in f ivit sn s sn in f ivit sn s itive p o to b powd . Th powd . Th ke y b re se ne es se ble lo tals or se ne es se ble lo s y . F wate high d fi rm e e ens e luo px skin contay e e ens e luo px n ry d d lack air at-tre acking. lack air at-tre acking. rie nt oth Gre Toe a fo D Wh th s compound skin conta D S compartme E b me D Wh th s compound skin conta D S compartme E se Gre d Re with an swallo B in h p See ent B in h p D tai

d d If . . rate te a ing d. ture n " class " class a c r ows uring o ra tio m salts.ir salts.ir salts.ir salts.ir m a ace pe o . The sh rature e , ' class 3 ' class 3 ' class 3 ' class 3 as Prote ip d 3 . Dd e corde p d down fro the the the the fro spd ol as ol as ol as ry . Provide str e p carg m sea grega 7 d d ck in nde 2. v m d re e Se rom' rom' rom' rom' de d at. e 7. the t ten cr close 6)(1 o 7. rate fy fy fy fy rate r as co as co as co as e tilation fn 2. taken at vary in 1 t ap ls and ls and ls and ls and ap e ntilate pe pe pe h ouble 6. achie lar te e of bie 7. e ta ta ta ta e dn quarters. "S epe comm 7. gu b hold an s to all be ge and ve Ke Ke Ke s of h ve o. D n be all ture am e . "S . . "Awa me . "Awa me . "Awa me . "Awa me . "S . U ly practicable i re h ra u E D E E E E E E ical A. . A. . A. . A. Ky rce is re ge s the e tin Stowa avy avy avy avy f living ably d carg e tion a p s the n tion sh gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory r o gory gory gory gor sou e ings m de hed hed hed hed chan a ssible ssible ssible od throug g w this can voy pths in te d co tilan 1. 1. om" acids. ason om o o ad xce Cate 5. Cate Cate an Cate an Cate an Cate an Cate 5. Cate me Cle fr Cate po Cate po Cate po Cate re fr g bag stowag illustra h the re de the e an ve

J I J J J J J N J J J J 5) 7.8 S-, S-, S- S- S- S- S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S- EmS (1 5.4.3.2 A A B, B, B, B, G G A A A A,

F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F-

lk d bu ions 4) - - - - - - rs (1 4.2.5 P33T P33T P33T P33T P33T e rovisP nks an inta a n ns ble t co ioct 3) 2 a ank (1 4.2.5 4.3 T3 - - - - - T3 - T3 T1 T1 BK ort T stru P in

ions 1) (1 4.1.4 B2 B3 - - - - B2 - - B3 B3 B3 B6 rovisP IBC

c- s 0) 06 08 06 06 08 80 stru (1 C C - - - - C - C C 08 C C In tion 4.1.4 IB IB IB IB IB IB IB

ions ) g (9 4.1.4 rovis PP31 PP40 PP31 PP31 PP31 PP31 PP31 PP40 PP31 PP12 PP12 PP11 PP31 PP20 P ackinP cs ) 10 10 06 06 06 06 10 03 02 02 2 02 2 stru tion (8 4.1.4 LP0 LP0 In P4 P4 P4 P4 P4 P4 P4 P4 P0 P0 P0 P003

ed se

pt titi b) 3.5 E2 E1 E0 E0 E0 E0 E2 E0 E2 E1 E1 E1 ce an (7 Ex qu

d se

ite titi a) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 an (7 3.4 1 kg 5 kg 1 kg Lim qu

l cia ions ) - pe (6 3.3 28 916 28 28 28 28 227 919 916 925 223 925 223 925 29 926 S rovisP

g ) II III I I I I II I II III III III ackin Group (5 P 2.0.1.3

ryia ) (s ) - - - - - - - 1 - - - sid sk (4 2.0 6. ubS Ri

as v ) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 2 2 2 2 Cl or Di (3 2.0 4. 4. 4. 4. 4. 4. 4. 4. 4. 4. 4. 4.

byr, 30% n 53 an 25% 53 25% nt) an 840 30% ss tha an nt) an 840 an se an LY an ss th le se an

re ss th AK t o ss th re ss th ss th pe lee ss th WE ss th an 20% wate pe lee ss th le not le le st b siz e ss th not le st b siz e not le WITH .S. with with n in in siz D not le D D t le siz ) r mu .ON o with r mu rig rig (2 with , with TTE TTE n D o o PSN 3.1.2 D particle, NATE ES D particle, f wate d particle G O , WE with TTE f wate d particle table table TTE d, LU TTE ID D d, e e ss o uce ce , WE ss o uce ce E g g , WE ce od IMPRE LLE , WE (TNT), WE TTE RE ce od D ve ve RE x C IC AC EN ssa x e pr NE E WE, e pr WD le produ RICS ITRO ZE ZO my le produ TIVATED OP ically ly NE NE POWD ically ly N mass mass r, b M AC d.3d M an ; r FAB DE y y an ; M PHOSPHI ch mical oS b b NITRATE ch mical U ON animal or ON animal or ON, A /A8 r (a visib ons ons E r, r, A ss r (a visib ons ons /2 ) me cr cr R ITRAT ER ) me cr cr X 4 6 TITANIU wate (a mi (b) che mi IBF N TRINITROB wate TRINITROB wate TRINITROTOLU 30% wate U ma ZIRCONIU wate (a mi (b) che mi CALCI CARB CARB CARB COPR

C 90 e 4 ) 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 1 1 2 NNE UN No. (1 MS A Pag 135 135 135 135 135 135 135 136 136 136 136 1363

619

Bilaga 1

7 4 5 9 2 3 4 4 6 8 9 0 2 3 d.3d X 4 e 4 UN No. 8) (1 136 136 136 137 137 137 137 137 137 137 138 1381 138 138 1384 /A8 Pag /2 NNE ld A re in r e n usly nce a tu ly . s. t o by ou xic n, C 90 our sly n se on e mable d, sh ous u t oth eg ag ss tha n e ur MS e o n le lam substa nite , a to roged h to mois g odn rod ic t o ould onta fa llowe llag y lp g tan tai . , h in no nt. tro hy tox n she s sp ne with nt u to ig su rd t.n S. ontane may re rum d g swa d sp a ford nite ro ille icie sulphide volve olve s sp conte ish ich volve re tal d d f ff n e ve acco re conte f iten wh e e is Co Ig xic ifo . Liable r, nite il ily hy lation. T su e oge te Ig tu o o ig whiche f th ng ha . A llin dr tions uslyo r. e m nd our . May id o 63°C. in C usually s. ta wa and to a e a sly weathed in a m sn .d olvi y s s hy erv n fro at odg u an d io e v b air to mois to th d n o an is g C to e t: 44° s are cry t withc n Obs onta in wate g g ve he n cy d acke v a r, volve i 7) le in in ri troS e ro rly : 48° poin solidifie , e (1 sp . rd rd e to . . p e eg tact orn g come s with acids. r. and lub d ontane roged cool ss p ry op wate ptacle ntly tly ouslye ies nite so ct du sp y ne nle The pr ran co ltin ce ue n In conta r. ert acco acco Liable h if d . s q to be acid in ai tan , in rod fication iten d be int Me . Ren re Prop . to ig usly usly riu an nt, ue usly usly o skiny io usly arks. in swallowe oe oe ig e m oe oe p , b subse oe sp powde spon s. ig solid n n wn p r cargo. s p nd id have ip n n article contact with d in air. lata acts viole n e a liable, l if ro e a a x d iling ich ceu llin nite g or le fu onta onta b- at io sh onta onta re o ins sly nh i Res. onta d ta g le talline he d e . B e llowe ou wh rbs moistu a ro s d ig tibs s sp sp ish ct oth . e coal g should for sp sp factu id by . In contact with g sp p y tab ne fe v m to ec e u ne y s. cr ge , cry . Harm nite nite o s b nite nite swa state sly nite a a y at an rritatin i n ry af ab fro k anu compos ct or id d. uo able , m g e ve e dn ay d , sulphure m ss liq e u n ble an, combu t.n to ig to ig ry Liable id to ig to ig rle s sponta iq l we solid, abso to ig a or gre to h s of ily ine h t wee u . D Toxic if te flamm re da rk gre ta lp is substan h s. the allo ontane d ite ib a rown to gre ee ent ig air a ni lack shake amm iable F Re conte D air whe Liable Liable B which m s Ob cargo. su Th e Liable Liable apply to Colo in g Ig skin conta in be B sp an Liable If fl Wh L dioxide

2 n 2. 1. " ions 7. n 3. sio at. 2. at. m 6. ivi e 6. e tio a r hold rovis h h rom" fro , 7. y t o pe 2. d 7. rom" acids. grega 7 fd bd n 7. s of s of fd ry as . te oil. .4.2 e rom d 2. ial stowagec 3 an te d Se 6) o 7. le ationg t f 6. rceu e 1. rceu (1 1 t ara re artm p 4. ara as 7. p tab g 7.3 parate p ce d 7. so sp so p ge and eS e m x 7. "Se ge . "S. cial stowage rom For e rom . . . "Se . . Keep practicable A. ve A. D as ins A. A. B co 3 an f A. se f E C. A. D E A. D E Stowa r ff 6. te sp 1. d n d ry ry l o 3. 4. te o te ably gory gory gory stu 7. gory gory gory For c gory c gory gory gory gory go gory gory go ima od 4. 7.e te te e e ason Cate an Cate Cate fo or 7. Cate Cate Cate comple om class 1 efr 1. se Pro Cate provisi Pro Cate Cate Cate Cate Cat Cate Cate Cat re

J J J J J J J P M J L J J M J 5) 7.8 S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S- S-, S-, S- EmS (1 5.4.3.2 A A A A A A A G H A G A, A G A,

F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F-

lk d bu ions 4) - - - - - 7 rs (1 4.2.5 P33T P33T P33T P33T P33T P33T TP3 TP31 P33T TP P33T TP33 e rovisP nks an inta a n ns ble t co ioct 3) 2 a ank (1 4.2.5 4.3 - - T3 - T1 T3 T1 T1 BK T3 - - T9 T3 T21 T3 ort T stru P in

ions 1) B3 (1 4.1.4 B3 B6 B3 B6 B2 - B3 B2 B4 B3 - B3 - - B2 - B2 rovis B2 IBC P

c- s 0) 08 08 06 08 08 08 01 08 06 60 stru (1 C C C - C C C 08 C C C - - C - C In tion 4.1.4 IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB

ions ) g (9 4.1.4 - - - rovis PP19 PP19 PP31 PP31 PP40 PP31 PP31 PP39 PP40 PP31 PP31 PP31 PP40 PP31 PP31 P ackinP cs ) 03 2 03 10 10 10 10 10 02 2 10 10 01 10 04 stru tion (8 4.1.4 LP0 LP0 In P0 P0 P4 P4 P4 P4 P4 P0 P4 P4 P6 P405 P4 P4 P410

ed se

pt titi b) 3.5 E1 E1 E2 E1 E1 E2 E1 E1 E2 E1 E0 E0 E2 E0 E2 ce an (7 Ex qu

d se

ite titi a) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 an (7 3.4 Lim qu

l 0 cia ions ) - - - - - pe (6 3.3 29 29 927 117 223 274 274 S rovisP 928 300 29 30 907 928

g ) III III II III III II III III II III I I II I II ackin Group (5 P 2.0.1.3

ryia ) (s ) - - - - - - - - - - 1 1 P - - sid sk (4 2.0 6. 6. ubS Ri

as v ) 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Cl or Di (3 2.0 4. 4. 4. 4. 4. 4. 4. 4. 4. 4. 4. 4. 4. 4. 4.

idu d R mpa TIC, D p D an d e in a f liq ri r d ILIZE ss; scr ILIZE th not d M t o NTHE a t:n taine ss o ly R WATE IU ation ) e SY ABT m mass, shfi ABT te te E S S . y y r S more n cex lep ND t, w or N b N t:n T obN m TAS tallizs PHITE rn EL , U ent l oa , U te t co E OP L u nt n co or U r cry U TAB RAP o f 12%, b 15%, me RAP Fa , SP in o OS E bL c of sh co E RY S r of R B GE re fi a visible e D AT HSC tu ss o ss HSC ONG ATED W, ROU ) E VE ISF iso ce ce ISF mass.y wate PSN (2 3.1.2 NE r x x ated r b with LLO or . M HYD LI o m e o . Moisture D E HYD .S. IU NI D in e t tre D d r) Y 30% .O D A ES VEG ted nt t inn n ssa IRON SP tion TTE OIL TRE , AN n LY BR ic te a ate pe or E tha , N (SO HYL , ANIMAL or tr n xid an 12%, m T or WE r FI ABILIZE es ABILIZE tre th y N rifica pan ss TAL NITE E, OI o re E u ST, RATED LPHID le TS T AL RICS STN at conte f at co ti-o STN o TU rbo E , WHITES ME ALLOY, N.O.S A oil . Unr d fd idant m , SPE ION IC , WE ODIMET IM U rd U ox t 12%, b l gas p SAN cag RU M SU with RIC ITHIO d.3d N OS N r FAB AL, za icte of an AL, o ID a ORAN IU E O D ON W oS . with tricte nti- than U din PHO S HP M /A8 T ITR ES A E ha s str a but n R,E lu S SOLUTN OPHOR IU TTO N BR R O.S re casee t om co TAL CATALY c NTAB LPHID RO D /2 X 4 7 COT OC -p FI IBF N. ISHMEF ighH nU nreu th ISHMEF No 5% more IRON OX fr ME PAP n(i PE PHO r Io POTAS US YP PYR OS

C 90 e 4 ) 4 5 9 2 3 4 4 6 8 9 0 2 3 NNE UN No. (1 MS A Pag 136 136 136 137 137 137 137 137 137 137 138 1381 138 138 1384

620

Bilaga 1

8 5 6 6 7 0 2 3 4 5 6 d.3d X 4 e 4 UN No. 8) (1 138 138 138 138 1389 139 1391 139 139 139 139 139 /A8 Pag , /2 NNE y g , , A le eed in s d ld r or n, s the -lf da or al d e ane e g uo o acts bey arth te adily ane in C 90 il- er d e nt. ake se in n a ee wa roge the ceu mab o ig s lo ss im rive aiz fl, e e t.n . . Re , toxic , res d d en h MS m and y a ng ec n e an re carg with id s y s m , a ro , a , it is lam f ra), ) np e M ri ro as de d, m soya b fo hts sh e Whe olving u ch m tal n n d e w ated d fro most e o se . u e p a e . Th e s.a v tions iq l alkalin isture olve e ps, re d ne n h r tc oil conte d t se ining ly ligd conte acts g e a whi o ve m volve oge oge lo g a lly y c el rtion of this cargo should d tim n inly thos ran, tion of ag to thy re Re s, n, 10% , e dr cen dr p ic ica r. Th in a o the y lin b rm of cake ouse nt. B ra ake tr tu . ble solu in d arth volving h ly a n e m flowe e op nt e ma o conta lve u n a cida d ate e , e id s hy s hy y ex .e conut (cop o n , m solve d clude rice f tan d m r droge with m e e s p mst a , a tox cha h su s pr m with rohibite a es nut),a , d n of n rcury kaline nde y 2% to h a r s. st is scatteu M uid halo llin e e rtilize co e ( let ip s p (s) at an s in e e the The on ed e lam r o s acts ne acid . n r, volve cu sea volve n. tionsa ta id m f m iz el sh byd U in spo . use to moisg m g h te io s h d or a and ssive e be ace s.d t (pu se d if wet or mable so d e in a f tic al suspe . Re Wh , es ic g , es m d s erv lp lle d fro an , p ce e cake n pe , ite e th g an d n,e wate s olvin with actio wa ilar cir iu lo with liq cry ep e d , m e es x for g varie sp tracte de rape d lam d withd tal, v ryu px Obs 7) n su x fe ve ak ine ould o x se l, ip an ign f ag e cau e e . Contain rc gas. tlyn re acids. r acid tox r acid e acts (1 e e rie eeds an e . Be sh rg e se sh m rly an drog ly e le rtion of alkalin t with r sim ly g and come g n d in ly n no roundg rne e oil, ep g r accor lloy y act with h o f the c ed alumin in ro e imal e , l soya b ke, fl hts ca e aringe , de fro unloadin ai a g h ig rth ma . rcury p with lis o n lis o de su . Res ies dy . be os a ining ous de ke y ba iz e ro d g h e mab ro t oa tly u, high a ec ert to be . s s t )u ran, f c e ligd s be e lm at slowly id re pe mokin in tale cont e me acts viole n y ivid c, re s h as an th b o tion of ag to the ha comm a e f b an olvin in cin lin r or acids, action lam e he le a d s tan Prop usly ed ean tann ra kea y st , p ey m h- nox . usly m v se u to 98% mp tial p r e In conta o ly ht s oe acid p rice rm conta u n trn oil o de h t lf tially nt. S oe of e d re withd u , a fn d th r.e s m ig b n volve r oil ha ainly ( , fo d e r rom oil-b f m d ading n g ro , wate e y ine l with te m de e spo of te n se lo r time p the g r an b wd acts vi caustic alkar, , which are caustic alkar, fn ed g su af de s inclu nutd h t ite The an af ra), cottons r se a g istin d li or alka lloye ro te d o k in rbs moistu onta tlyn s n se n if wet or – use d ically The p ige nri the onta s compos at of a dy a substan p Re a iz sp u i , ign d e n r. n eed rtion of uo substan u o sp n r or acids, toxic vapours. e r anu oisture tal contain h wa nite or s. Impuritie arsine Whe y n ining U cake o ed d e th ag ining an e ), r s tc May p e oil conte d y co s D o alka m he e ing by ig s a s. d s. b s.d de gr rapel, p an oil, ag d ch iliz e l e ro b is cargo should d , p d m d e tal g a a d oxid s. nite ma e , d ip d ma rt w a p the ite nite idu olve tals. the mayd by s g ane g te re rne h e rly an re me conut (co chop o ib iq , wate v s va with volving a y blea ni solid, abso to ig tact with acids, e acts viole e g se ees e s iz pe g e d fe nfl me nt th with h to ig l , e cry tly s. tact with wate blea tact with wate blea g n Re u n ke b id ro u lle or u ts, ssive should me s ro (s) at an ry d dividely n d by ists of ur containn n phin n y i ct with s. sid rina ott lm y at slowly p unloadind sid ep d sd lle ce ip p ace ate monia te tals an o e compose llow cr amm so ils drocarbon lack co a e o a a e nox e mokin x e om co ominy n e x e ilve oisture e mall ine ni e e fl co h co amm y B Liable In g Re b common se c p m h u b S an Re e fe fr (h a p e cake sh varie b sp Liable S m h S am F viole ig Cons me acids, e vap Wh d which m Y a In flamm p In fl ea conta h .s . 2. ids. rs. ids. s d .2. d 7. c rte c lis. lis. n ciale te ciale 2. " a a " a " acid d . s gn tec .2.7 c u m " acid n . alka uid . alka tio sp te sp 6. q m io d d rom" acids. ote r o 7.6 o r o 7. rom gn rom fro rom" acids. cally ons an '' liq ons an grega 7 fd F e F e d f s. d f d frod fd loadee dit ani r of livi s m s te . Pry te te te a rba rba Se 6) o 7. at. e se ry. Pr at. e , se ra cid ra che c cid fro c cid (1 1 t ara dr d r of livi ratea ara to b r cone . Cle rom" liquid ro ro 7. p p e h ions ep h ions pae a pae paratee p p th m f d d ge and e "S "S "S e a a ace hy hy "Se . Ke s of . K s of . . Cle rom" a . . . "S "Se Only e d rom" a "Away d rom" a A. E rce rovis rce rovis A. D E d f D D E A. A. w ck in sp d f A. d f Stowa u pe ry A u pe ry ry d . "Away ate ate so o so o o te rs n n gory gory g gory g gory arate g gory gory gory gory r dry r dee tila arate gory arate om te om tea pe tea de dn n arteu pe pe Cate Cate fr stowag Ca fr stowag Cate C Cate "S C Cate Cate Cate Cate nu U ve q alogeh "S Cate alogeh "S

J J J J N O N N N N N O 5) 7.8 S-, S-, S-, S-, S- S-, S- S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, EmS (1 5.4.3.2 A A A A G, G G, G G G G G

F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F-

lk d bu ions 4) - - - - - rs (1 4.2.5 P33T P33T P33T P33T P33T P33T e rovisP nks an inta a n ns ble t co ioct 3) 2 2 2 a ank (1 4.2.5 4.3 T3 BK BK - - T3 - - T3 T3 T3 BK T3 ort T stru P in

ions 1) (1 4.1.4 B2 B3 B6 B3 B6 - - B2 - - B2 B2 B2 B2 rovisP IBC

c- s 0) 06 08 08 07 07 07 05 07 stru tion (1 4.1.4 C C C - - C - - C C C C In IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB

ions ) g (9 4.1.4 - rovis PP31 PP20 PP20 PP31 PP31 PP40 PP31 PP31 PP31 PP40 PP31 PP40 PP40 P ackinP cs ) 10 03 2 03 2 10 10 02 10 10 10 10 stru tion (8 4.1.4 LP0 LP0 In P4 P0 P0 P4 P402 P4 P402 P4 P4 P4 P4 P4

ed se

pt titi b) 3.5 E2 E1 E1 E1 E0 E2 E0 E0 E2 E2 E2 E2 ce an (7 Ex qu

d se ite titi a) g g g g g an (7 3.4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Lim qu 500 500 500 500 500

l cia ions ) - - pe (6 3.3 29 929 29 929 117 182 182 182 183 183 183 932 S rovisP

g ) II III III III I II I I II II II II ackin Group (5 P 2.0.1.3

ryia ) (s ) - - - - - - - - - - 1 sid sk (4 2.0 6. ubS Ri

as v ) 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Cl or Di (3 2.0 4. 4. 4. 4. 4. 4. 4. 4. 4. 4. 4. 4.

E d e ing than in f LPHID b t o more m n SU co uo 20% of oil M g s, contain an ID IUD de am th O ation isture .S S il o il sed the N LIQU O. R or lliz o m o lle n E S tas containins, d e SIOR GAM, , N. D ) d na p whe not more E WD PSN (2 OU table e il table x QUID P LOY OP 3.1.2 RD f cry eg se eg ed nda or N IS Y r o ve d ve n il D COATEN H lle a d SIO g e 20% o g f o an 10%, E R TAL TAL AMAL TAL AL E ILICON , U AN, p n EP RE E x r the TE IS ME ID e tha h RROS 30% wate reo tractions x n 10% o ig combine , WE RTH LPHID an , containin ically , containin e h re T TAL AMALGAM, LI TAL AMID TAL D A ARTH ME ARTH ME U E an m E nt tha is tu SA EE E E d.3d S ss th or re re ME M CAK ch il CAK lve o tu LI I ME I ME IN INE INE /A8 IU le D me D mois A AL AL AL MINIUM CARB MINIUM FE MINIUM POWD /2 D E ) E t mo d OOL W K KAL KAL K K U U U X 4 8 OS with ES (a 10% o ES (b) so n mois an W ALK AL AL AL AL AL AL AL AL

C 90 e 4 ) 5 6 6 7 0 2 3 4 5 6 NNE UN No. (1 MS A Pag 138 138 138 138 1389 139 1391 139 139 139 139 139

621

Bilaga 1

9 6 7 8 0 1 2 4 5 5 7 9 d.3d X 4 e 4 UN No. 8) (1 139 139 139 140 140 1402 140 1403 140 140 140 140 1408 140 1409 /A8 Pag /2 NNE s y A ble tact t c a s ble n , a n rd. C 90 volve m rm tact a co . n e a so is mable Toxic if e ul if m o acts m which m acids, za , MS . d f con , n or d also s are h s tion. lam se toxic and volving volving fla en Re lam e d. In r actio drogy se ce ring which ma in conta f c ly le . In f g calciu h , an conditions, a du ala n, ly at ane are h ty hly ro re ir ga d , wly tals.e ig dy s. If volve s. , wate a es te plosion surf s roge ouse purity e a f the olvev e x n a d slo action. Harmf action. , a hig Ace m s h e g e tilan e ch y se tan substan rates h which en b t oa y Th no s,e with acids, e re with acids, e re le tion. avye n im olve so blea istureo a s with s. ve the broke su vapour inh osp ing ne ty c h as ich is a h v mable ga he m se r ly d, tions m tlyn the tlyn the a e a , e m e ct. ture a cally h a idiz , ges silan of of re e th ffe ix s volving h erv co , a spe at at aces , wh lam f will ale lamm f y e m ic g ani t ove , e de in olve e e the som ne isture a n b an fre tact or by s Obs r h tion. v h h le o , n le sly d ive tox che in 7) ps with ox r acid e olvev carbid ty e ty uo ntly with is or acids, ly m rom is disturbe (1 o o acts viole the acts viole the e at ofe lts of m m action. g e le nite losp plosive gh r om f con r acid and h tlyn lis re y re y ly h sa re ro , ace ig x x de d st o tion. ies p inhalay also b b d ace d e alkal e hi tea c ert d d pid ids. the tyri ontan ts vioc b r, r pre cargo skin ae r b May r and ite r and ite ra the s calciu c acids or s hy a ay rmo , un a re isture r with acids o s. lation. r, ds with ia an a r, s with e f ich are f r the , byd o e Prop volving acts viole a ly. ign ign te d by tain on te at of olve , a sp Re , wate ya ev m acts e g s wate ha wate ite n m with e v impu tal. which e we r, r, Re caustic alka u be be wa n o m ly wa h e e time , wh s rd by tion is g ne . Re ai s. r, able s in y st in s in y . C a s r, which m ch m ne za at of the a m neo u ig s s the t as an s silane n, oisture hi oluv wh swallo wate h . ta dy be compoun . leu rou witht y n . e whi ha e ev wder damp ic g skin contact o no ct with y acids. ev olve o c bd es ev , soft m , some s, osp ase if e. v o o r y p b a o ran v ig re volve o rog a thy o b r p tox a flam s compose which ma or compose which ma m b e ite e b dy g proportion gas e b r o ly n, te e n, e n, plosive with or g r, ts vc conta s ctileu active poison of Toxic act with d ry a wed, b ni d wed d ich x ry a r a ign is pe ry a re blea nd ph ind . g Re ite ry ab tals o tact with waten ily ily In conta ely tlyn e . In tact with waten , d ly tact with mn m a the to incre . s n s wate high y ig d roge d roge wh wate R bey acid ite h ke ratee le y d co drogey a a dy a dy lid.o s,a igh s.a lido co volving h co olvev a b lido ige See ent Cr with an swallo In h m Re h swallo Re h S g h viole See ent Powde with g S ma In carbid with See ent Wh e Hig In flam arsine e m Th lia loadin S b See ent . . .s . .s p .s d s s s e . ids. lis. lis. ids.c f " c n . ratea d . s gn " acids. d . s om" d . s om" " acid d . Kes o " acid " a uid . alka p n . alka " acid " acid " a " acid " acid n fr n fr m m tio d a ace e io d m m m m io d io d ear d from '' liq ons an sp cally ons an rom rom cally cally fro ition cticable cally fro rom grega 7 m s d loadee dit ani r of livi s frod frod d f frod d f frod loadee dit ani loadee dit ani d loade dn ani e. Cl rate d d f rba ck in a rba te te aratep aratep pra te Se 6) o 7. fro c cid de che c cid che e che e che acp pa ra (1 1 t ro r e to b r cone . Cle rom" liquid ro ratea ratea ra ratea to b r cone . S to b r cone . S to be r co bly s 7. d d ntilate th m f d p p pa parate para p ly th m ly th m paratee the m "Se paratee pae ge and hy n ve quarters. "S a a ace hy e e e e e a a ace a a ace "S nly a a rs. "S "S "Away d rom" a . U ly Only e d rom" a . "S . "S "S. "S. "Se . "S On. e On. e . O asona . . A. d f E A. w ck in spd d f E E B B A. E B w ck in spd B w ck in spd D A. we re ck in cargo rte alkalis. D D Stowa aten ical f living . "Away aten ry s nd ry r dry r de te rs o r dry r de te r dry r de te r dry a r de lated qua o gory aratep gory chan r oa gory e tila aratep gory gory g gory gory gory gory e tila gory e tila gory gory dry e gory g aloge e om" acids. den dn n arteu aloge e tea tea den dn n den dn n tea den dn tea Cate h "S Cate me Cle fr Cate u U ve q h "S Cate Cate C Cate C Cate Cate u U ve acids. Cate u U ve acids. Cate C u as U venti living acids a Cate C

O N N O O N N N O N N N N L L 5) 7.8 S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S- S-, S- S-, S-, S-, S-, S- S-, S- EmS (1 5.4.3.2 G G G G G G, G G, G G G G G, G G,

F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F-

lk d bu ions 4) - - - - rs (1 4.2.5 P33T P33T P33T P33T P33T TP33 P33T P33T TP33 TP33 e rovisP nks an inta a n ns ble t co ioct 3) 2 2 2 2 a ank (1 4.2.5 4.3 T1 - T1 BK T3 T3 BK T3 BK T1 - T3 T1 - T1 BK - T3 ort T stru P in

ions 1) (1 4.1.4 B4 - B4 B2 B2 B1 B2 B4 - B2 B4 B1 B4 B6 - rovisP IBC

c- s 0) 08 08 07 07 40 07 80 07 08 04 80 40 stru tion (1 4.1.4 C - C C C C C C - C C C C - C In IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB

ions ) g (9 4.1.4 - - rovis PP31 PP31 PP40 PP31 PP40 PP31 PP40 PP31 PP31 PP31 PP40 PP31 PP20 PP31 PP40 P ackinP cs ) 10 03 10 10 10 10 03 10 10 03 03 stru tion (8 4.1.4 In P4 P4 P4 P4 P4 P403 P4 P410 P4 P4 P4 P4 P003 P4 P410

ed se

pt titi b) 3.5 E1 E0 E1 E2 E2 E0 E2 E1 E0 E2 E1 E0 E1 E0 E2 ce an (7 Ex qu

d se ite titi a) g g g g an (7 3.4 1 kg 0 1 kg 0 1 kg 0 1 kg 0 1 kg 0 Lim qu 500 500 500 500 500 g

l cia ions ) - - - - pe (6 3.3 223 37 223 932 951 951 38 934 932 223 932 39 223 932 274 274 S rovisP

g ) III I III II II I II III I II III I III I II ackin Group (5 P 2.0.1.3

ryia ) (s ) - 1 - - - - - - - - - - 1 - sid sk (4 2.0 6. 6. ubS Ri

as v ) 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Cl or Di (3 2.0 4. 4. 4. 4. 4. 4. 4. 4. 4. 4. 4. 4. 4. 4. 4.

m

lciu 90% ca . . D 1% than .S ss O.S .O

n 0. , N. , NE

D COATEN tha but le TIVE TIV

) , U reo ore AC AC PSN (2 3.1.2 RE COATE th m -RER R-RE N E wi E , UR E E HID E 30% or m WAT WATE E E E E , S , S ID ID AMID RID with E E B AN D N ID ID Y O RD RD d.3 IC d M MU M CARU M CARB M C e M HY M SILICID M SILICID ILS /A MINIUM POWD MINIUM PHOSP MINIUM SILICON POWD IUC IUC IUC IUC IUC SIUM 8 U U U L L RRO con TAL HY TAL HY /2 X 4 9 AL AL AL ARIUB CALCI CALCI CAL AC carbid AC CAL CAL CAE EF sili ME ME

C 90 e 4 ) 6 7 8 0 1 2 4 5 5 7 9 NNE UN No. (1 MS A Pag 139 139 139 140 140 1402 140 1403 140 140 140 140 1408 140 1409

622

Bilaga 1

0 0 1 3 4 5 7 8 8 8 1 2 6 7 d.3d X 4 e 5 UN No. 8) (1 141 141 141 141 141 141 141 141 141 1419 1420 142 142 1423 142 142 /A8 Pag /2 NNE n, ily ry , n, A e d r d at the , the e g ae ite adily e , ds of ntly of r. ich s g C 90 ro acts r he able es r or le and te e s ro dy s istureo which be gh lodp o hly skin istureo at e istureo at e wh, dy MS Re tea m , n in wate ign acts re u x rp r shoulde ig m h as, h wa n tim s h r.e e s be on e u by ts vioc g e volve s h th or action. g es y ould . Re E p wd nd h d, th a on , e e re ro o lithium sh s. a flamm g o acts with liquid a the able they drog , some volve vap iction. dy p ma ry r our n, tin p wi by . Re with m b re volve , e in E fr the m d e d se ite . Red blea d ct. tly d ct. oats hy , e re e as. r of s h co s, wd . o roge ion. May gh h tact with wate ntly ite ffe tile s. n ite ffe . Fl ng action. re tu rid g r, acids and e e o d d los -fi te n m swallowe e ga leo e active tu dy le at olve d , which os p te y p e or a flamm e vi olvi re moistu re . b ark o e v n rp or s h x ir f grap sp co lam f ic if ign n, ign ive v y . tions n h wate h , e u iteh ritating mable ga na in ly be th be los e hl the n a mois adily sp am g e ore s acts viole y ite acts y p of mois erv or actio mma a spy they droge g p an fl in air. volve ins . For uo Tox a xplosive s. Not volae roged n x Hig. at or actio s inium b b isture r. Re tin arp ir , re se is tr e s. Re y ig Re point: 39°C acids orr, e s Obs re d d o hy h r grap e tu , es c ce s slowly ce r. ch m y r. h re 7) acid um , a fla oe is tr sh x chlorid tan te ratur lting or acids, acid (1 r, f the n ite ite m action. wate -fig ce silan d, cau tans tan s with e ma s with e r action the r, f the and re n olving e id acid ite b m sb bstan whi which ma Me re y ies t oa oge ign ign v fir withr, as mi iu n, mpe volving h on wate n, b t oa ert dr In contact with be the ts o e or e and g r or ign g su , a spon timee te time tal. , wate the with wate d he silya y acids or a F chlor ne in sod is su compose g su , es t which roge e ite he e hy lid. r, lo cids, . wd g the sily iz ry . ine in droge ary a d tact e Prop with wate th te at of F a n is substan po ro , wate a d thn . Floats on wa y , som ind he . Floats y , some t m isture at of n ign with wate th y ic so e tal. dium th r d nite re id r, ons .n id g h r acid e id o e y tact b tion of lithium al wa h e so n e rb oxidiz io u u , sof m h co be tact b n d volving with actioe y ls o hy tu st is e wd whe ac iq at or r o rabl ct. y n d co er, which is e which ma the r dr ta ng to ig u rd acids or de phosphg lata l olvin active liq active ctile the r. In co nite eu roscop n, witht y ntly e r, sy with ox po ao rod . . with tal v re ryu ides tal volving h re with ffe nite ig ss solu g c bd , soft m le e ard whe olvi m d e ev ev nh e e rc , wate e , e ly byd e ig r. Ine e le sid roge f th cr v ratede iu tact id bn hy o o olvin tlyn i m hly re m s h , du ntly r. Ine e b , hy d ite wdo bo e n se n lor o d b b v le me tu con ite le ite powde which ma b wd ya lour e y conta ctileu ts vio at o p r, d ate acts with s. or by ry Hig ry e n, wd ya o with wate a re llin s h ign ca he e on mps, ge gn co n ry a ry a e a r acid wh- ign llin o p co ave ta . In , d e d lu tact with moisn in R air, e ts vio ct r or acids, likes loping r o ry xplosive ta p ite r,a s bey ite rid y wate bey Ma n p ic g c w mois , silve cts vio bey e s roge ite adily ry volve lido d re thy lo inh co s.a carriee aloge lid.o a ft, silveo action. lo ve fto action. Hig ilve a a ry dy Wh which m Cle re to le C e S ma Wh an b ch carrie S with ma In g whe lithium ch b h See ent See ent S dam tox Re conta S wate re F with de S wate re S Re m with C h Wh which m . . . . . .s .s . . s rs s s s d ids. ids. s s arte . . rate c c n " acid u " acid " acid " acid d s uid uid uid a " a " acid " acid " a " acid " acid tio m q m m m n . . . a pe m m m m io cally rom rom fro fro fro fro loade dit '' liq ons '' liq ons '' liq ons spaced fro fro fro fro grega 7 d d d d e ani m rb s. m rb s. m rb s. ck in rs. "S d f d d d f d d Se ch ac cid ac cid ac cid de te te 6)(1 o 7. rate rate rate rate to b r con e fro ro fro ro fro ro r ra ra rate rate 1 t ap ar of living ap ap ap e m . d d d e ntilate pa parate parate pa ap ap 7. e e e e tha a dn quarte e e e e e e ge and Cle Only e ace "Away hy rom" a "Away hy rom" a "Away hy rom" a ve g "S "S "S "S . "S . . "S . "S . "S w sp d d d . U . . . . . "S . "S E D E E E A. ck in d A. ate d f A. ate d f A. ate d f E ically livin D D D D E E Stowa te n n n ryo ryo gory gory gory gory gory gory r dry r dee tila gory arate gory arate gory arate gory r of " acids. g gory gory g gory gory de d n pe pe pe te chane a te te Cate Cate Cate Cate Cate Cate nu nU ve Cate alogeh "S Cate alogeh "S Cate alogeh "S aC m leC omfr aC Cate Cate aC Cate Cate

M M O N N N O O O N L L L N O O 5) 7.8 S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S- S- S-, S-, S- S-, S-, EmS (1 5.4.3.2 G G G G G G G G G G, G, G G G, G G

F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F-

lk d bu ions 4) - - - - - - - - - 3 7 - - rs (1 4.2.5 P33T P33T P33T TP TP P31T e rovisP nks an inta a n ns ble t co ioct 3) a ank (1 4.2.5 4.3 - - - - - T3 - T3 T1 - - - T9 - - ort T stru P in

ions 1) (1 4.1.4 - - - - B1 B2 - B2 B4 - - - - B1 - rovisP IBC

c- s 0) 04 07 05 08 40 stru tion (1 4.1.4 - - - - C C - C C - - - - C - - In IB IB IB IB IB

ions ) g (9 4.1.4 - rovis PP31 PP31 PP31 PP31 PP31 PP40 PP31 PP40 PP31 PP31 PP31 PP31 PP31 PP31 PP31 P ackinP cs ) 03 02 03 03 03 10 03 10 10 02 02 03 03 stru tion (8 4.1.4 In P4 P4 P4 P4 P4 P4 P4 P4 P4 P403 P402 P4 P4 P403 P4 P4

ed se

pt titi b) 3.5 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E2 E0 E2 E1 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 E0 ce an (7 Ex qu

d se ite titi a) g an (7 3.4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Lim qu 500

l cia ions ) - - - - - - - - - - - - - pe (6 3.3 223 182 S rovisP

g ) I I I I I II I II III I I I I I I I ackin Group (5 P 2.0.1.3

ryia ) (s ) - 3 - - - - 2 2 2 1 - - - - - sid sk (4 2.0 4. 4. 4. 6. ubS Ri

as v ) 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Cl or Di (3 2.0 4. 4. 4. 4. 4. 4. 4. 4. 4. 4. 4. 4. 4. 4. 4. 4.

RE RE RE

S POWD S POWD S POWD

AL RE M ALLOY M ALLOY M ALLOY . HE IU IU IU IDE ID O.S ID T S S S H U ) E , EE , N. LIQU PSN (2 3.1.2 , LIQ ID S, RID RID MAGNE MAGNE MAGNE SY D D r r r M PHOSP LOY HY E o o o U , LIQU E HY RID R R R NI M M E E E ALLO LOY M AL RID E IU D E HYD NO TAL D HY RID RID ROO LIC ME TAL AL RO D UM ALUMI M M SO O d.3d M ALUMINIU M ALUMINIU M B M HYD M M SI SIUM POWD SIUM POWD SIUM POWD SI IUS IUS M B HY I MEL IU M M /A8 A ID IU IU /2 TAS K B D D X 4 0 LITHIU LITHIU ITHIUL ITHIUL ITHIUL ITHIUL MAGNE MAGNE MAGNE MAGNE PO AL POTAS RU OS OS

C 90 e 5 ) 0 1 3 4 5 7 8 8 8 1 2 6 7 NNE UN No. (1 MS A Pag 141 141 141 141 141 141 141 141 141 1419 1420 142 142 1423 142 142

623

Bilaga 1

1 8 1 2 3 5 6 6 6 8 9 2 4 6 d.3d X 4 e 5 UN No. 8) (1 142 143 143 143 143 143 143 143 1437 143 143 144 144 1445 144 /A8 Pag /2 NNE , . A re the e d as. tact ive s re tu of by th nes r t with g may n s los re a and C 90 y ra r o ly c an le d al are e p tu xic if d at e d bd b h skin le s, b tly ri co x x tible id.c ite MS mois h m ig y b xic if inn and te in e mi s a rm and ite hd , b mma ly e o . Ton ign st n me n d s gase Sligh ma sly compos h se ric f tals or u with they ig us a in conta mma . Tos u whe r. nite le uo e ig hu e dy b composee e o fla ec ro de ig e , d Th combu p May m riction adily b tlyn d ct. b c blea wly e , a flan ily d . d xplosio re ite ffe Dr. tact with wate tan plo d te rms h tals. sul re to f e e e may mu n swallowe slos ously s oge x ae ontan a o e with s nite e b dang e in wate r Fs. m re ig itive an tact or ign ive wdo and co lamm f ic if os ne dr leb combustib sp hen e d with friction. sn . al areri n tions be los in p g su olve lu ite e m re . tux to lys powde use n te co a acts viole y p ic p which sly m onta in v s hy . Mayn o u e ite l, se io erv x , eyes uo . Tox co iz e S s with ign Wh n Mi rou ria re cay lat ma r. Re uid, in e se id t. y r. xic f wd r. o d or by a a ah le skin Obs k s slowly c de , a sp tion. to volve losio n aterial are .d po ig liable ate s m in y 7) liq s r e , e p sce m ture Ma. to r to atee m , b (1 wate s with e groscop o ontan tans as. s x le ly wate ng l o wate ared ture fire d and n which ma y able t b phin liable g e . s d. Mix in a in acts vig hn ix ies n, , h s with ox inhalay r, ing lique tibs r. rce le olvi ri liable le e e stible a dust ert ts o time g urns , a sp oh tly r acid s ce e u ie v R me in llowe a roge in b composee g su n r b able tan D b swallowe e, tion an r. wh se d combustib lo d wo es d ine in with acids o leo wate lis o cau s m l if n ared se t or by swa Prop F y , some a flamm hp iz vi or d, b tals. co in wate u . Solub . Solub ric id Th tal. -fle ors .n re s swallowe le burn fy sio tible mate nvolve s with e oxid acts alka g su r. l if b plo s to f an th combu i re anol, volving p acts tu a flamm r, nite in cry fu lu ma wder x wder or powde wi nds. ne ture Toxic if active , f th on. Caus acid phos . Re , e n, ig iz s with o d o e o s s . volving h re e ti ira Re . . powde re S r p r p tal ly , soft m , e ly ca s.a skin contact o roge silya ev ev d white s. an nsitive s with cy ture . Wh skin contac Mix s h phous m m e ntly with inhalatio solid g y d e oxid o o r . Harm le d with to friction an se y ly ix ite rce volving le amp ic y is b b ly de ite tals o ne tals o compou tals. ie ctileu for e rh acts with s. r byo hite g h ss o . Mixtu n ng acids. Harmf sy v with combu sy are ss cr rce m m d, by sy r acid Re a t w r d wed, b ry a ry a ive rce nee ig o , e s al , d r o , amor r to . air, e ts vio c r- r o toxly tact with moisn ind tact with waten ct with rleu ie f g cr re nsitive cr ri rleu oniu to ign cr ite ite p ic g c c dust ros n str ite tu se ite te cts fie m le ite burn fy lation. action. Hig lido ma a ilve igh co clu co lack coloure rn a adily adily x olo a plosivex b ha Wh wate re Wh wate heat of t S d tox Re conta S wate h swallo In in In Zin conta See ent See ent B Colo cor bu Or re with Wh re mi are Wh ma C Re e am lia swallowe Wh ma in .s d d . e n " acid . ratea . ratea '' xid '' tio m a ace pe a ace pe m ro d rom" acids rom" acids rom" acids rom" e rom frod spd spd fd fd fd fd fro n p d f grega 7 ck in ck in d nds an Se 6) o 7. de de te te te te te (1 1 t r e r e ara ara ara ara ratea roged 7. paratee d ntilate d ntilate p p p p p y para ge and "S n ve quarters. "S n ve quarters. "S e h . . . U ly . U ly "Se "Se "Se . "Se . "S d "Se compou D B E ical E ical A. A. A. A. E A. A. E an A. A. m . A. Stowa f living f living ry acids. se se gory gory gory r o gory r o gory gory gory gory go gory gory gn gory id gory gory oniu id gory chan a chan a alkalis.d alkalis.d alkalis.d e an te m an Cate Cate Cate me Cle om" acids.fr Cate me Cle om" acids.fr Cate Cate an Cate an Cate an Cat Cate Cate stro Cate cy Cate aC am cy Cate

N L N N O O O O G Q Q Q Q Q Q 5) 7.8 S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S- S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, EmS (1 5.4.3.2 G A G G G G G G A, A H H A H A

F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F-

lk d bu ions 4) 7 - - rs (1 4.2.5 TP P33T P33T P33T P33T P33T TP33 P33T P33T P33T P33T TP33 P33T e rovisP nks an inta a n ns ble t co ioct 3) 2 2 2 a ank (1 4.2.5 4.3 T9 T3 - - T1 BK - T3 T1 T3 T1 BK T3 T3 T1 T3 T3 BK ort T stru P in

ions 1) (1 4.1.4 B1 B2 - - B4 - B2 B4 - B3 B2 B4 B2 B3 B2 B2 B4 rovisP IBC

c- s 0) 04 05 08 07 08 40 08 06 60 08 stru (1 C C - - C - C C C 08 C C C 08 C C C In tion 4.1.4 IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB

ions ) g (9 4.1.4 - - - - - - - - rovis PP31 PP31 PP31 PP31 PP40 PP31 PP40 P ackinP cs ) 03 10 03 03 02 03 10 10 02 2 02 02 02 2 02 stru tion (8 4.1.4 LP0 LP0 In P4 P4 P4 P4 P0 P4 P4 P4 P410 P0 P0 P0 P0 P002 P0

ed se

pt titi b) 3.5 E0 E2 E0 E0 E1 E0 E2 E1 E2 E1 E2 E2 E1 E2 E2 ce an (7 Ex qu

d se

ite titi a) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 an (7 3.4 1 kg 1 kg 5 kg 1 kg 1 kg 5 kg 1 kg 1 kg Lim qu

l cia ions ) - - - - - - - - - - - pe (6 3.3 223 935 223 152 S rovisP

g ) I II I I III I II III II III II II III II II ackin Group (5 P 2.0.1.3

ryia ) (s ) - 8 1 1 - 2 2 2 - - - - - 1 1 sid sk (4 2.0 6. 6. 4. 4. 4. 6. 6. ubS Ri

as v ) 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Cl or Di (3 2.0 4. 4. 4. 4. 4. 4. 4. 4. 4. 5. 5. 5. 5. 5. 5.

) PSN (2 3.1.2 ST ST ST E U U U LID D D D O E E E ED PHATEL , S TA ID ID ZINC ZINC ZINC YL H HP DRI RCHLORAT RSU E H PS S orR orR orR Y ICHROMATE RATE T O O S E E E D PE PE M M M HLO ITRAT d.3d ME PH IC PH HE UM H C N N NIU NIU NIU M M /A8 UM UM UM N AS POWD POWD POWD MINIUM NITRATE DI DI A CONIR U RIU /2 X 4 1 SO SODI SO ST ZINC ZINC ZINC ZINC ZI AL AMMO AMMO AMMO AB ARIUB

C 90 e 5 ) 8 1 2 3 5 6 6 6 8 9 2 4 6 NNE UN No. (1 MS A Pag 142 143 143 143 143 143 143 143 1437 143 143 144 144 1445 144

624

Bilaga 1

2 7 8 9 0 1 3 5 6 7 8 8 d.3d X 4 e 5 UN No. 8) (1 144 144 144 145 145 1452 145 1454 145 145 145 145 145 /A8 Pag /2 NNE n . n . d d r s le A tals s d tals d. f dn s are y , s ide ite an ate e nd ated l, ts s o de tibs s are C 90 me a . Toxic whes le rictio es n . ib d e m a . e ari nsitive ane ca rm. u d e ture mae a f o halation. a s h ite d acts h se s llowe ive to o ive to , ani b ture , maye MS riction. re id ix st r, p cy monium ro n n h re n stible . Re los fd acts los titie impact o s cy m ix f e an ustib m st in . ig cau p te Re p co with by wd osion with b me a fir du act or co u with s ite acts whe at. Re ares swa x monium liable ra . x monium liable quan acid me a fir ly r o plx m s in p e d with re s plosionx he s whe re l if e d ide e with s in o to friction e e d y ly t of am adily r. Re ed to friction e e tible mate may combu rm am are y x rm am are llowing r or ly with e d d , p co s of wate g im b compound or salt is p e , powde to s ire th fu uric acid o d ro o d o s ate alri an with cy rce m to ign sp m r ani rial an anid f rm h fy na e fy na small f rceie re gorous e itives es ly tact or by ie mixtu le iun re wate te itives se mixtu a wis lp ion. ion. ite vi h n rce s with nds. Th involve antitie acids, d ive iun b o a cy a n cy es . Ha Ma tals ore n pe Ma tals ore nds. Th involve n ts vigorously n con u tact orn act f o lia Tran. rial in se nsitive ind ly . losp g . losp with ign mixtu n tions acts mate se cauy c e followin r or los n with m cauy with ture n md x ro n md x d ya with wate acts f e a whe le lation. a ts fie ixture ll q te co Re rea amm ble ly a Ser. ly . The ix rce with su e Occurs in hr. d e Re erv Re s tib ares ma ha Re ca . Wh skin nite xp amm sio ares m with combus s volve M ie ly rictio ree n y rictio ree n tact sive . Wh r. e s re r. m compou wa an mate Solu rce stible re rce re r. f f to friction a hd f to friction a n cid. plo compou Obs id ire te ive ite by ig skiny rm e and plox le ie bu ire f efi tu inn rn y wd n y wd if wette a x ite 7) an f st inu . Ree s d, ic acid. o n e tib a x oundp b itives a b itives y aterial m con ic e (1 a wa lo with sma t withc , bd f tals or s wed. tals.s ixtu in wate m wate buy gorous or pol, n cause in wate or pol, n cause o m and in wate cy mixtu in dy xid px monium to ign lowe d l may an y acts f m in le acts mi . Whe in a vi a ya le a ya larl m monium to ign ies le es de b in ro e le tte ari may me rictio es ate with es d co le m ri se ri se le , or for le ert with e v or e am b llowe d d m swallo t crn Re e lubo . Re ive m ite b ated , m lubo ric acid ated , m tib e . am b lub ly with combus luble p m swal we sulphur ree to f ro f with coms los iu n acts are e u are e s ir ne sulphur re . Th vol o n or lia if in conta cau ces cid.a re Th volve . Ss cida n ig and hen s ir . Ss h hen s ir . Particu ub g or lia Prop , so rce s in tact S for s rea r swa with wd itive ul i e ds. xp o to solu d . Re re lp re m y s rea efi n n ls. oge tal , o o s may of a b s with combu ric n in tals ic ite tible mate tals su tible mate in a f with tal co ta dr . May e larly tible mate sly , p n s re liqu ixtu y rm e whe s in a f y whe s in a f wder co d sly e wder mixtu s n m and . Toxic if icu s u riction; an al se re hup m o r amm ign wder s mixtu d s mixtu d o u riction. May m and . o acts . Whe y hyd d e n rt a fire Toxic if roo f ri re a fire . Harmf de . Whe t crn f liable t solid,n o ide e t crn with ide e p ro f d e n r p ive ite skin . by a ly sul ite sulphur r p n se n se with o by . . Re los compound n y t crle an rictio osion in ne r s in compoun n ces tals o are ces adily a volve ces a volve re involve volving ox r osion ev p m , b fy wder rictio pl r. Pae d gy o mate re d mixtu r. Mixtue rce . m ig e d e re cy . Th in e cy . Th in ne es, o wder rictio pl o tals o x iu d o x act vig d le tu d ie llowishe with xplosive iu u with me u tals o s n u s n llowishe d o x b sy n to ige b p to f e wd volve ate x volve wd ly e n to liq d liq sy with combu liq with combu y Wh acts vig ate p to f e rm e o or al, o with combu e tibs o s rm o e slyu re ion. with s e with s . Re e al, ry a cr uric acid o uric acid ri itive ane p re in . Res mie in ate an p to y friction o m d friction. May e de rial are cr ly re . Whe t d ly re . Whe or a mixtur, n . ri itive ane ite h f liabl h te s s lation. ite tu ne n h s ne m ite burn fy ite rouo f liable ite roo y los ite te ite tu cts vigorously tu ite n h te s s lp amm swallowe rownish-vio lp ated e n ha x volving ox lido e ro b wdo xp a rcee x nite a rcee x nite ictio composee lido n Wh su May or are if B su h ma se cau in Wh mi Wh e S whe combu Th Wh b Wh ma Wh vig or by May or am are Wh vig or p to friction an e Wh m Wh fi mi compound ig Viole Re fi mi compound ig Wh wate fr d S whe ma se cau See ent

s d s d e dn 12 e dn n ' '' id arate ' '' ' d in 2. ' '' id arate ' ' tio d m an pe d d d 6. d m an pe d d rom' cy as "S rom' rom rom' orte 7. rom' cy as "S rom' rom' fd s an frod s, ry . acids a fd s an d f fd s an e fd s an frod s, ry . acids a fd s an fd s an grega 7 nds an nspa Se 6) o 7. te te te te ser, te te te (1 ara as d ates, ara ara trn ara as d ates, ara ara 1 t p parate pe an p para p ne p parate pe an p p 7. e s. e acticable tai e s. e acticable ge and "Se "S. e K ang "Se "Se compou "Se Whe n "Se "S. e K ang "Se "Se pr m 9. pr A. .s D xid A. rm 1. A. .s A. A. .s A. .s A. k co 3. A. .s D xid A. rm 1. A. .s A. .s Stowa roe ably e 7. roe ably gory ide gory gory n ' pe gory ide gory gory oniu id gory ide gory gory ide gory gory n ' pe gory ide gory ide monium compound an monium compound pd monium compound an te m an monium compound an te 3 bul d 7. monium compound an monium compound pd monium compound an monium compound an aso om' a a K aso om' Cate am cy Cate am an Cate re fr class 4. Cate am cy Cate C am cy Cate am cy C B an Cate am cy Cate am an Cate re fr class 4. Cate am cy Cate am cy

Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q 5) 7.8 S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S- S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, EmS (1 5.4.3.2 H H G H A H H A, H H G H H

F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F-

lk d bu ions 4) rs (1 4.2.5 P33T P33T P33T P33T P33T TP33 P33T TP33 P33T P33T P33T P33T P33T e rovisP nks an inta a n ns 3 ble t co ioct 3) a ankT (1 4.2.5 4.3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T1 T3 T3 T1 2 BK T3 T3 T3 T3 T1 ortP stru KB in

ions 1) (1 4.1.4 B2 B2 B2 B2 B4 B3 B2 B4 B2 B4 B3 B2 B2 B2 B2 B4 B3 rovisP IBC

c- s 0) 06 06 06 08 80 08 8 06 06 06 08 08 stru (1 C C C C 08 C C C 0C C C C C C In tion 4.1.4 IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB

ions ) g (9 4.1.4 - - - - - - - - - - - - rovisP

ackinP cs ) 02 02 02 02 02 2 02 2 02 02 02 02 02 2 stru tion (8 4.1.4 LP0 LP0 LP0 In P0 P0 P0 P0 P0 P002 P0 P002 P0 P0 P0 P0 P0

ed se

pt titi b) 3.5 E2 E2 E2 E2 E1 E2 E2 E1 E2 E2 E2 E2 E1 ce an (7 Ex qu

d se

ite titi a) an (7 3.4 1 kg 1 kg 1 kg 1 kg 5 kg 1 kg 1 kg 5 kg 1 kg 1 kg 1 kg 1 kg 5 kg Lim qu

l 76 cia ions ) - - - - - - - - - pe (6 3.3 274 350 223 S rovisP 208 9

g ) II II II II III II II III II II II II III ackin Group (5 P 2.0.1.3

ryia ) (s ) 1 1 1 - - - - - - - - - sid sk (4 2.0 6. 6. 6. ubS Ri

as v ) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Cl or Di (3 2.0 5. 5. 5. 5. 5. 5. 5. 5. 5. 5. 5. 5. 5.

. RE RE ) TU TU PSN (2 3.1.2 LID O S C, N.O.S

E E ANATE E E GANI AT RIT LORATE D BORATE MIX BORATE MIX ID O D D NOR LOR LH RCH RMANG RCHLORATE, RMANGANATE ROX , IS d.3d PE PE E M CH M C M NITRATE M PE M PE M PEROXI /A M M M PE U IU IU IU IU U 8 OMAT SIUM NITRATE CL CL C C /2 X 4 2 ARIUB ARIUB ARIUB RB CAE CALCI AC AC CAL CAL CALCI CHLORATE AN CHLORATE AN

C 90 e 5 ) 7 8 9 0 1 3 5 6 7 8 8 NNE UN No. (1 MS A Pag 144 144 144 145 145 1452 145 1454 145 145 145 145 145

625

Bilaga 1

3 9 9 1 3 5 6 7 0 1 d.3d X 4 e 5 UN No. 8) (1 145 145 146 1462 146 146 146 146 1469 147 147 /A8 Pag s /2 NNE le l if t n f A ly . s s a s y . In u re tals o s e tibs s are ed tibles s are a a e skin, ya fe re tact dn in acid ce s. C 90 rce re ne ub , may ofs ub , m of d m m rn if a n me a . Toxic t ire ne ound anid m ture e re ani m ture s s with lop s to iu u rial co d f s MS p cy ix cy ix x rn m C. b . Harmf te riction. f re re mixtu m . Wh co m tux co m ture e u y and s aterial are is a d a e osion p mbrane acts fie ite e a fir e a fire ix ne b do d 47° tal m skin with by wd pl acts with sive with se in mi with se in Mixture v s se ite may e le INE m sly r o x cause the me m co ly withs d d ly withs d d m r. e es int: d m ID by u od , p to friction e Re plo iun ya ra ign o an st tibs N d, ro al itical ambien May s.d In x o to ign rce re rce re an pd p d o u A stible o ate ri itive ane Cr n s.a cous e le ie ie volven md . Cau m b e s s r. C. u g ric acid. Re m b nds. Th involve rate an ixtu nds. Th i rite n s an adily lting nite m llowe hn n op ic uh lia act f mixtu n lo act f m ne lo in wate a tal te re to co mate se cau m s mu tionsa lp for r amm re e . pou ch . le ly e a Me ig ive swa acts vig le y tox a . Re sive m ch d Re m d lub m itr r. ilyd whes are lation. w as 60° co d itate erv su compou . Wh iu ite com . Wh iu ite o ous st al are a osrr s with . NITROGU with combu Rer. e tibs s ma ha in watele lo tals o cid plo ite n ib cid. plosive ite n ib . S e o m n ri e ite s xic ifo id re ire b s an Obs 7) and n ion. a x o h a x um o s tan m te r re re T f st in lu a ive st irru (1 with med los ic e ro ric e ign m tal n miu in wate . wate an a u o e and riction. May re m oni sy o to y ma le htly co ixtu ly cy d S b monium ros D f e rictio xp monium to ign f amm hup m to am sp ive do le d. Mixtu to ign in mixtue ind y r. ma ies e for le form leb t cr e lub r. le rce le se ev b uo may r tals. ert byr wdo to f sulphur am b rt o sul n osrr .s o aterial are slig te b r. M ie with with combu or n l o , corg o an e lia o salt is p May or am lia salt is proh ce nite of n . S lia ly s vol a Prop d p s ors re sp m s re port ofs m se ig , co s m r are wa re re . Ths t odn ri cts vigorously itives with a iu with a iu u ya rane re swallowe tal le te in a wate burn f . Solub rcee inn tact n itatin a ate n cau tale no ly tale n combustib sy tib in y fi gen e aterial, ay slyu riction. May m s riction. o liqe m mb l if su wa a wder co u . Re n h se f d and n f d m and . Tran m d alri istureo fu t cr b luble and n ble o mixtu . Whe compositio ic mate to most me m re , m roo by e rouo by d me . Mixtu n m ins o d m tion. acts ive e na , an irr ive le as . e r ion. Trans amm re am m s with ce n S Solu r p iten skiny g e s whe tib ire f v o rictio lo or riction re of ousc se co s. rictio d an ala . Re los compound with pr in ro t solidn se s re a ob d wder p d plosion mate ture . Harmly u lutio px m , bd e of de or lor id ub tux act vig o x act vig x le nce ic solid o ule . tals.s iten tals os iun to ig sce m in Re atee p to f e e ate powde to f e with an rplishu tib mu rce liqe s with S ran to f ec y st inh y o e owd , cor an mi d ry a . al, an R e an p s se . Mix ie re . ly wed. g cr ig cr uric acid rm e p ratur t withc re cy co es s n h ri itive e rate with an n h rial, itive rite re and te f t d itive du h o f ep tu lique e lid te sn s lo lids. e tea sn se lo rk- pe groscop a rn rce ite sn bstan ite adily ite lp amm liabl ite m e volve o o a itr e swallowe volving ch D with with Th in See ent S whe ma se cau ch S wh m se cau ch D combu th eyes Hy n bu Viole Mixtu fi swallo Wh se su Wh re or by Wh su May or are if Wh te conta e mois

7.d d , all rom t u e o y e f n ' ' ' '' ' ' b t o cn h sh g. , d tio d d d d 1 b 1 an d y e t e t h s, in m se uid te rom' rom' rom' rom rom' rom' a rg o t ace d iu c f s an f s an f s an s 4. f f s an m f fir tilation an e k a no id liq te grega 7 d d d d f d d le need o n m is roug sp lo an nd Se te te te te nds an te te ib es r th re a . Pro 6)(1 o 7. ara ara ara r class 5. classe ara ara ss a an e ip fo amm , cys e s 1 t p p p para o p p o m ve uent cargo e ' 7. ntilation n c i r in she b xid nce t.a ge and "Se "Se "Se "Se compou om" fr "Se "Se Ve e p eq d rom' , acid roe tas h hes ns the ree s b f he A. . A. . A. . A. m . A. d A. A. A. A. A. . A. . T tc wate o of th of id d f n p su o Stowa s s s se ation as f ry s ed maximu ly e c g s gory ide gory ide gory ide gory oniu id gory g arate gory gory gory rates. go gory ide gory ir ha h in arate monium compound monium compound monium compound te m p e monium compound u en vide td do cons p roge anic an an an a an gree e lo an q p ro n o e e dy g Cate am cy Cate am cy Cate am cy C am cy Cate S "S Cate Cate Cate ch Cat Cate am cy Cate re o p to app a stability fl b "S compound h or source

Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q 5) 7.8 S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S- S-, S-, EmS (1 5.4.3.2 H H H H A A A A A, H H

F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F-

lk d bu ions 4) rs (1 4.2.5 P33T P33T P33T TP33 P33T P33T P33T P33T TP33 P33T P33T e rovisP nks an inta a n ns ble t co ioct 3) 2 a ankT (1 4.2.5 4.3 T3 T1 T3 T3 T3 T1 T1 T1 T3 BK T3 T3 ortP stru in

ions 1) (1 4.1.4 B2 B4 B3 B2 B2 B2 B4 B3 B3 B3 B2 B4 B2 B2 B4 rovisP IBC

c- s 0) 08 08 06 60 08 80 06 08 stru (1 C C C C C 08 C 08 C 08 C C C C In tion 4.1.4 IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB

ions ) g (9 4.1.4 - - - - - - - - - rovis PP31 P ackinP cs ) 02 02 2 02 02 02 2 02 2 02 2 02 02 stru tion (8 4.1.4 LP0 LP0 LP0 LP0 In P0 P0 P0 P002 P0 P0 P0 P0 P002 P0 P0

ed se

pt titi b) 3.5 E2 E1 E2 E2 E2 E1 E1 E1 E2 E2 E2 ce an (7 Ex qu

d se

ite titi a) an (7 3.4 1 kg 5 kg 1 kg 1 kg 1 kg 5 kg 5 kg 5 kg 1 kg 1 kg 1 kg Lim qu

l cia ions ) - - - - - - - pe (6 3.3 223 274 351 274 352 S rovisP

g ) II III II II II III III III II II II ackin Group (5 P 2.0.1.3

ryia ) (s ) - - - - 1 8 - - - 1 P 1 P sid sk (4 2.0 6. 6. 6. ubS Ri

as v ) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Cl or Di (3 2.0 5. 5. 5. 5. 5. 5. 5. 5. 5. 5. 5.

LIDO LIDO

, S , S RE RE

TU TU

MIXE MIXE

RID RID S

LOH LOH . OU RE ) C C . R (2 .O.S .S D Y or R TU PSN 3.1.2 M M .O HY IUS IUS , N LID , D MIX C, N IC AN N , E , SO RITE RITE GANI ID E O O MAGNE MAGNE RGA X HL HL D D NOR O E C C , I IN NITRATE O O S, ATR d.3 M NITRATEU INE T RCHLORAT d RITE ID M HYP M HYP /A ORATES NI PE 8 YMI RRIC NITRATE AN AD /2 X 4 3 CHLORATE AN CHLORATE AN CHL HLOC CHROMIUM TRIO IDD EF GU LEAD LE ITHIUL ITHIUL

C 90 e 5 ) 9 9 1 3 5 6 7 0 1 NNE UN No. (1 MS A Pag 145 145 146 1462 146 146 146 146 1469 147 147

626

Bilaga 1

4 1 2 3 5 6 7 7 9 9 1 1 d.3d X 4 e 5 UN No. 8) (1 147 147 147 1474 147 147 147 147 147 1479 147 148 148 /A8 Pag /2 NNE ts . n le A d. s ives with eac ated l, an ts , s nd e tibs s are C 90 e ari nsitive e stible ca rictio es a u ro re n volving . R h se s llowe ive to a f o d anid b ture , maye MS e e er n . Re los r, p ite m ix cor s, at cauy p m cy co w ares a swa x monium liable act or co me a fir a mixtu n s whe re m l if e p e ign with s in kaline r, e tible mate , rm am are ly with e d le ib s ire with combu fu uric acid o d s of wate g im adily s composee lu anid f s rm h fy na rce re friction. Wh mixtu a re lp ion. re ie , ds So. cy es . Ha Ma tals ore antitie acids, d nds. Th involve r is an al s of wate ind ly . losp u l are mixtu n tions act or erd with e n md x followin r or a act f e a p acid w ly . The v r. Mixtu rce with su e ll q te ri erv wate o with combus s vol ie ly rictio ree n nite . Re sive . Wh antitieu g im r or rce re f f to friction a wa cid plo compou Obs e p efi tu inn wate rn y wd ig a x ite 7) ll q inll x oundp b itives ic e (1 a ta m in buy gorous or pol, n cause with sma t withc tible mate wed. m and acts mi . Whe e a vi a ya d l may wed. s monium to ign ies Solution in followin with wate rys co bl m ri se tte ari for le ert r. . Re ive m ite ated , m swallo am b nite r c los iu n acts are e we swallo f sulphur with smd ig tact o cida n s, solu and hen s ir if in conta f or lia Prop y n ls xp o to ig d . Re re r ul i s rea in wate tte a co ta ic e tals ite tible mate , o ul i with tal le m rys rm e y whe s in a f larly tible mate with combus sly e we al in c o r amm ign wder s mixtu d icu s re u riction. May m and . lub if ri or f liabl t crn o ide e rt a fire . Harmf ro f d e n . o , ent sulphur r p n se . Harmf tux ly . o by . ev larly ire c tals o ces adily a volve in ne ev r osion ev o r. Se mate f es d are e re cy . Th in r. Pae d gy mi rce o o wder rictio pl o b icu le a uq with me u tals o s n ie b d o x b wd rt in d liq sy with combu wd volve ox olid act vig ate p to f e ry a o tibs d eli slyu re ion. with s o with combu S ry a Re e al, ry a p e d friction. May e de rial are cr ly re . Whe p re in . s . s ri itive ane ite it roo y riction an los ite te ite tu ite tu ne burn fy n h te s s volve ygen.x h b wdo xp a rcee x nite x volving lido lido n See ent Wh liquid. Pa combu in o W vig or p to f e Wh m Wh fi mi compound ig Wh mi Wh e S ma See ent - - - S whe ma se cau See ent

n re d d he in a d d d s m foe n n 12 n n T. e r in uent ip o b ae at.e arate ' d in 2. ' arate '' '' '' ' ' tio d sh d . h pe d 6. d pe d d m um m um d d re atch wate eq carg re acids, xid se as "S rom' orte 7. rom' as "S rom" rom" nio d nium o d nio d rom' rom' ui h maximu ly ns e e om” s, ro c s of ry . acids a fd s an e fd s an ry . acids a fd s an fd s an frod an an fro an fd s an fd s an grega 7 qe n p o the fr e nspa m s d from s d m s Se 6) o 7. r e pa e c of f th d n p rce te ser, te te te m e e m e te te (1 e op vide h o u as d ates, ara trn ara as d ates, ara ara , a id rate , amm id , a id ara ara 1 t y b ro to td ility conside substan so pe an p ne p pe an p p parate ls an pa an parate ls an p p 7. a to d n b arate roge e acticable tai e acticable e ta e ta ge and de to p a ding pe dy ic K ang "Se Whe n "Se K ang "Se "Se "S. e , cy "Se cy "S e , cy "Se "Se n m e e y, sta loo all b na rom f pr 9. pr m s . metals ds, . . m s A. o n ir f . “S , hs g d A. rm 1. A. .s A. k co 3. A. .s A. rm 1. A. .s A. .s D ed s.e B d se B ed s.e A. .s A. .s Stowa tia le tion an h s, sh g e te ably 7. ably gory il ib of f genc to the id c gory n ' pe gory ide gory gory ide gory n ' pe gory ide gory ide gory erd xid gory ere gory erd xid gory ide gory ide ss tilan er roug ace monium compound an te monium compound an te 3 bul d 7. monium compound an monium compound an monium compound an w ro te roxid w ro monium compound an monium compound an o sk aso om' a K aso om' o e a owd o e Cate Vent p case ve em ri th sp loadin am cy liquid or Pro Cate re fr class 4. Cate am cy C B an Cate am cy Cate re fr class 4. Cate am cy Cate am cy Cate p compound p C p compoun pe Cate p compound p Cate am cy Cate am cy

Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q 5) 7.8 - S-, S-, S- S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S- S-, S-, S-, EmS (1 5.4.3.2 H, Q G H A, H G A A A A, A H H -F S- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F-

lk d bu ions 4) rs (1 4.2.5 P33T P33T P33T TP33 P33T P33T P33T P33T TP33 P33T P33T P33T e rovisP nks an inta a n ns 3 ble t co ioct 3) a ank (1 4.2.5 4.3 T1 T3 T3 T1 2 BK T3 T3 T3 T1 - T3 T1 T3 T1 ort T stru K P in B

ions 1) (1 4.1.4 B3 B2 B2 B4 B3 B2 B2 B2 B4 B3 B1 B2 B4 B3 B2 B3 rovisP IBC

c- s 0) 08 06 08 8 06 06 08 08 05 80 08 06 08 stru (1 C C C 0C C C C C C C C C C In tion 4.1.4 IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB

ions ) g (9 4.1.4 - - - - - - - - - - - - rovisP

ackinP cs ) 02 2 02 02 2 02 02 02 02 2 03 02 2 02 02 2 stru tion (8 4.1.4 LP0 LP0 LP0 LP0 LP0 In P0 P0 P0 P002 P0 P0 P0 P0 P5 P002 P0 P0 P0

ed se

pt titi b) 3.5 E1 E2 E2 E1 E2 E2 E2 E1 E0 E2 E1 E2 E1 ce an (7 Ex qu

d se

ite titi a) 0 an (7 3.4 5 kg 1 kg 1 kg 5 kg 1 kg 1 kg 1 kg 5 kg 1 kg 5 kg 1 kg 5 kg Lim qu

l 76 cia ions ) - - - - - pe (6 3.3 223 223 274 900 274 900 223 274 900 223 S rovisP 332 9

g ) III II II III II II II III I II III II III ackin Group (5 P 2.0.1.3

ryia ) (s ) - - - - - - - - - - - - - sid sk (4 2.0 ubS Ri

as v ) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Cl or Di (3 2.0 5. 5. 5. 5. 5. 5. 5. 5. 5. 5. 5. 5. 5.

M

. . LITHIU ) .O.S .O.S (2 Y orR .S. .S. PSN 3.1.2 C, N C, N , D .O .O . . . RE E , N , N S S GANI GANI RITE TU ID IC IC O. .O.S O. E NA NA NOR NOR HLO MIX G G , N. , ND , N. C E IDX OMATER TRATE RCHLORATE ROX R R LID LID , I , I O RIT RO O E UM NI , INO , INO d.3d HL SIUM B SI SIUM PE SIUM PE SE SE ORATES ORATES M HYP C M P ING SOLI /A8 O IZING SO IZ IZING SO HLC HLC /2 ITRAT ITRAT ID ID ID R R X 4 4 ITHIUL HYP ITHIUL MAGNE MAGNE MAGNE MAGNE N N OX OX OX PE PE

C 90 e 5 ) 1 2 3 5 6 7 7 9 9 1 1 NNE UN No. (1 MS A Pag 147 147 147 1474 147 147 147 147 147 1479 147 148 148

627

Bilaga 1

5 2 2 3 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 d.3d X 4 e 5 UN No. 8) (1 148 148 148 148 148 148 148 148 148 148 149 149 149 1493 /A8 Pag /2 NNE le s ic r. . n A s re tals . e tals .s e tibs s are , s dn d rgan dn s are , s ly with rial C 90 ub , may es d me a o rn lodp me a with whes le , may a friction. es rane re tea MS anid m ture e mixtu op riction. re riction. d tible s llowe in wate u x riction. d ly e ture e r, op tible s rceie cy ix d f e to friction f ree m leb b e f ree id ix mb m Irritating co m with m with by wd with by iun ya with by ous an ustib m act or m mixtu d. es a fir an re coe r o itive r wd swa o . luo ly r wd or b es a fir f wate p coe me with e in te sly o sn sly o o combu l if d S mayd ms o o m e in combu acts f sive ustible ly withs d . u d s, p u d , p to friction fu e d , p to friction co d s o ous b re ana d ro al se ro al amm an id al with cy g im c . Re plo m rce g ite friction. o atee ri o atee ri itive with mps. d an gorous atee ri itive acts vig ly titie with x swallowe ie nds. Th a mixtu acids, d are s s in contact with lu vi s nds. Th acids, d mu s nite e co involve hib r, hn s hn n re . Harm ire swallowe or r sticks. nite cy hn n Re rce s with involve re m l if act f mixtu ne rmane ro act or r or mate re mate se tu ly f s with k ig mate se r. ne quan r or and tu fu tionsa p p te acts vig le ion. acts vig le ion. x re l ifu c acts le ion. , followin te x to ig for s with . Re sive m whes s whes are s rce lo tals os ilyd nds or whe are s ts fiec ixture . s rm erv compou . Wh iu lt is p of wate wa Rer. e tibs lo Rer. e tibs s lo Mir. ie f b y a Rer. se tibs s lo a m compou . Wh small nite wa Mir. cid plo ite n s g im id mixtue px id re px rn cause Mixtu e id re px in wate ite ig , eyesn liable . Ha Obs 7) a x o sa se e e u t cr r e le . Re ive ki ound ly (1 ic e titien t with wate an wate an wate b May aw. . Harmfe solid n an b e s with t with s wate are tion. May p Mixture rce and m a c cy an cy an y r. d d sce compou cy an lu lop d l may c o d ric m r. monium to ign f amm u followin in . Ths es in mixtue es in a lo se e in wate mixtue es o xid x monium to ign a t in f fie ies for le monium q le le se le m r str px u le se S roe e le ri le rn s. ert sulphur am b rt o with with combu with with combu on e f fu liq aterial are with with combu r.e m am b byr m co e lia o nite in conta ly s cau ly s cau and in wate y lub ly s cau pn lia if wette in conta tating o iun in wate bu Prop ors re sp small ig r re re . Ths d le tto de m monium re . Ths wd for ors re r rri iction an d o ya bran with a an am ya . Solub rcee . Solub rcee . Solub b ma rm oo le , so rcee o oge a i . Solub fr m tale , o fi . , may fi , may ite lu , co se f tib am fi , may p tale larly , o ly ate luble e slyu riction. May m with m wder compound wder wder o od id e su d. wder dr . May m tible mates hg wder to e o d m f d and n with d alri o mixtu m nite o mixtu . o ign . S llowishe b o mixtu . hy n d and n . o n h r amm an s m roo by e te a fire . acts ive iun ig a fire acts ive a fire an m with s acts ive a fire tals or d e a fire Hi s. S d r ion. Trans . e in n . e r p o in r p iten in r p adily cy in thd r p iten in s . Particu in r p nsitive tal o rictio lo ana v d eg v . Re los to d . Re los compound d as wo e co re . Re los compound d an rictio f rictio osion d en. whe tals o sy nite ucou d wder p g ob if wette mate y ob px px m re t solidn or p htly y tux px m cry y wder pl yg se se act vig o x le tals os amm tals os iun to ig tals os s ip swallowe tals os iun to ig le b o x wder tals os id me ig Re atee p to f e tib volve y liable volve y o e volve y sce slig s with l if y o e volve or p to f e o with combu volve y d ss cr . al, an rmane ry a larly s in ry a cr uric acid rm e cr uric acid rm e cr al are al such she or re . Mily cr uric acid rm e urp uric acid al, an re in cr al are an ree rle adily and m s n h ri itive e n h o f are n in h o f n in ri ri b fu h o f n in h ri itive e tu n ri cy u lid te sn s e ite lp tals or d e ite lp amm liabl e ite te lique te ite rce ite lp amm liabl e rk p lp ated te sn s llow p x e ite te re skin oS whe ma se cau of a p See ent Particu combu Wh volving oxe See ent Wh su May me an Wh Wh su May or are Wh Wh ma eD ma compound May Wh Mixtu efi Harm Wh su May or are Wh aD su eh ma se cau eY mi Wh evolving ox Wh ma with owdp oloC are to

s s d d s d an e e dn dn in 12 e dn n '' id '' id arate arate ' ' d 2. ' ' ' '' id arate r th N tio m an m an p p d d te d d d m an p e e e or 6. e (U fro cys, fro cys, as "S as "S rom' f s an rom' f s an 7. rom' f s an rom' f s an rom' f s an fro cys, as "S rom" f s oth grega 7 d d ry . acids a ry . acids a d d spn e d d d d ry . acids a d Se te te a se te te te te PHATEL s. 6)(1 o 7. as d ates, as d ates, ara ara tr r, ara ara ara as d ates, ara de 1 t parate parate p an p an p p n ne p p p parate p an p 7. e s. e s. ee acticable ee acticable tai e s. e acticable RSU ani ge and "S. e "S. e K ang K ang "Se "Se Whe n "Se "Se "Se "S. e Ke ang "Se PE pr pr 9. . pr M d cy D xid D xid A. rm 1. A. rm 1. A. .s A. .s A. 3. A. .s A. .s A. .s D xid B rm 1. A. A. Stowa roe roe ably ably ulk co 7. roe ably NIU an ry gory gory gory n ' pe gory n ' pe gory ide gory ide gory gory ide gory ide gory ide gory gory n ' pe gory 4), go monium compound pd monium compound pd monium compound an monium compound an 3 b d 7. monium compound an monium compound an monium compound an monium compound pd monium compound e aso om' aso om' K aso om' Cate am an Cate am an Cate re fr class 4. Cate re fr class 4. Cate am cy Cate am cy Cate B an Cate am cy Cate am cy Cate am cy Cate am an Cate re fr class 4. Cate am AMMO 144 Cat

Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q 5) 7.8 S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S- EmS (1 5.4.3.2 H H G G H H A A A H H G A A,

F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F-

lk d bu ions 4) rs (1 4.2.5 P33T P33T P33T P33T P33T P33T P33T P33T P33T P33T P33T P33T TP33 e rovisP nks an inta a n ns co io 2 2 K 3 ble ta ank ct 3) 4.3 T3 T1 T3 T1 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 - T1 T3 ort T stru (1 4.2.5 BK BK P in T1 B

ions 1) (1 4.1.4 B2 B3 B2 B3 B2 B4 B2 B4 B3 B2 B4 B2 B4 B2 B2 B4 B1 B3 B2 B4 rovisP IBC

c- s 0) 06 08 06 08 08 08 08 08 06 08 06 80 stru (1 C C C C C C 08 C C C C C C 08 C C In tion 4.1.4 IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB

ions ) g (9 4.1.4 - - - - - - - - - - - - - rovisP

ackinP cs ) 02 02 02 02 2 02 02 02 2 02 02 02 02 03 02 2 stru tion (8 4.1.4 LP0 LP0 LP0 In P0 P0 P0 P0 P0 P0 P0 P0 P0 P0 P0 P5 P0 P002

ed se

pt titi b) 3.5 E2 E1 E2 E1 E2 E2 E1 E2 E2 E2 E2 E0 E1 E2 ce an (7 Ex qu

d se

ite titi a) 0 an (7 3.4 1 kg 5 kg 1 kg 5 kg 1 kg 1 kg 5 kg 1 kg 1 kg 1 kg 1 kg 5 kg 1 kg Lim qu

l cia ions ) - - - - - - - - - pe (6 3.3 274 353 223 274 353 223 S rovisP 964 967

g ) II III II III II II III II II II II I III II ackin Group (5 P 2.0.1.3

ryia ) (s ) - - - - - - - - - - - - - sid sk (4 2.0 ubS Ri

as v ) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Cl or Di (3 2.0 5. 5. 5. 5. 5. 5. 5. 5. 5. 5. 5. 5. 5. 5.

ER

U

MIXT

. . ITRITE

N M ) C, N.O.S C, N.O.S IUD

PSN (2 3.1.2 O S GANI GANI ATE C, N.O.S. C, N.O.S. E AND ANATE E NOR I NOR I TA LOR D PHATEL

S, S, M O LORATE RMANG RSU

, INORGANIS , INORGANIS M BR M CH M NITRATE M NITRATE M NITRITE M PERCH M PE M PEROXI M PE d.3 E E IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU ITRATE d ID ID S S S S S SS S SS S N /A ANGANATE ANGANATE X X A A R 8 MR MR OR OR TAS TAS TAS /2 X 4 5 PE PE PE PE OP POTAS POTAS PO OP POT POTAS POT POTAS ILVES

C 90 e 5 ) 2 2 3 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 NNE UN No. (1 MS A Pag 148 148 148 148 148 148 148 148 148 148 149 149 149 1493

628

Bilaga 1

6 4 5 6 8 0 2 3 6 7 8 9 d.3d X 4 e 5 UN No. 8) (1 149 149 149 149 1499 150 150 150 1504 1505 150 150 150 150 /A8 Pag /2 NNE le le , l A tals tals tals . d. fu tals or tible tals tals a dn dn dn d h dn uric h an all s ly with dn h dn r, C 90 me a with me a me a ustible ated it me a lp ated nsitive e , ub re me a it me a d sly d with d llowe b llowe he d al, se s te skin, m rce with d d MS with riction. re u riction. re ion. ly riction. re ion. m ly w riction. re ion. he ri ni ie ixtu riction. re ion. aterial are ly w riction. re ion. f wate s, ly f e ro f e f e combustib co combustib s if us f e n te cauy tact with to co m f e us f e by wd o by wd losp ous by wd losp swa e. swa tion. Harms ro by wd losp ares a igy n g by wd losp m ro by wd losp s o act orp cida r o r o x or r o x l if tre l if s with o r o x with su whe ma re m d with sm a acts f r o x le o r o x r od , p to friction od , p to friction od , p to friction s with fu p s with fu s with ig od , p to friction ly s le , tte l m co withs od , p to friction tibs ig od , p to friction titie gorous al al an e al an e lta v al an e ire rritatin re . Re plosive al an e u wed. v al an e g im r o vi ate ri itive acts vig ate ri itive e ate ri itive e rm composee ts ate ri itive e iden f we ria iy te x ate ri itive e b ts ate ri itive e e s e s s acts vig e s s ture e Sil ture D combug ca e s s a mixtue a if , or in ni e cts vigorouslya e s s m ca e s s quan hn n Rer. hn n hn n . Harm . Ha . Mixture . e hn n gorousvi cy s in ate eir hl hn n e hn n wate acts mate se mate se cau Re mate se cau Mix ly Ch Mixture ly Mix ly de rtin R. mate se cau d rly m Hig Mixtu Re mate se cau co swallo R. mate se cau tionsa Re le le ya r. le ya r. s r. r. o le ya combustib ev . r. to ig form r. le ya if le ya small followin r. whe are ion. s wate whe are m whe are m rce rce rce plo p ter whe are m acts with . Thes n te te whe are m ul ter whe are m erv se tibs s lo se tibs s , se tibs s , ie f n a ie f ie f x a se tibs s , ly vol rticula stible d in a f eg ds. se tibs s , s with a se tibs s , nite id re p in id re id re w e id re Re in a wa iable l May wa id re re id re with ig Obs 7) x le ire f in wate ire f in wate rnu no in wate rn in wate rnu ya s sup n w ire f r. rce s with ound n P. lve oxy in oun in ire f Harmf n w ire f d (1 an e an a le an a le k bu le se le i an a ie p se vo g are tion. p an a . le i an a contact with and in wate cy an cy b cy b by s i ble y b by ms cy ture m d m cy ly cy in le mixtue e Solub mixtue ind lu mixtue ind lu a lu a lu a e gad lub mixtue ind ix . Whe ul th combu inn an ric f mixtue ind Mixtu lub mixtue ind ls maya ies lub s s s o s o m rm oS m . o m id os s in wate acts f m co ran olvin oluble co s r. rce os s if wette ri , or ert o with with combu e with with combu e . S with with combu e . S . S an tion. , with with combu e le Re m iten wi v S by m , soluble with with combu e te ie , with with combu e e . ly s cau tals.s ly s volve ly s volve s an er ly s volve . ive iu . Whe e s. r. iu ly s volve wa er ly s volve ir ne Prop . Ss re . Ths re . Ths re . Ths and d re fou and d ilizer and d cy me d re . Ths lub no r or g ture n s, ne riction or d no re . Ths d re . Ths larly g rcee rcee inn rcee inn p rt w rcee inn o idex losp to ig ix ra m rcee inn in w rcee inn y tals fi , may t cryn fi t solidn fi t solidn ite m ite t solidn ite s or fu o fi r. S x e b ate t solidn fi burn fy o fi in a f y a fe st inhalau r p e roe e rictio m to f e r p tible mates d mixtu sce mixtu sce mixtu sce ign he i ign sce ign ous o mixtu r amm a m e or powde h sce mixtu lubleo ma o mixtu . Particu t crn acts ive . a fire acts ive . Whe acts ive . Whe t as itr dy ls acts ive . Whe wdo n p rmo liabl powde r, compose s ne acts ive . Whe S d ls acts ive . Whe ite ite ite n roscopic solid. d b ta ite p eg f te de tal nsitive ite . ta ite volving ox ces . Re los compound n ind lique . Re los compound n lique . Re los compound n lique adily e i gy adily are lique adily . Re los compound n y tals o d are arse act or f sy wh tals or am lique . Re los compound n lid and . Re los compound n wder involve e eu px m e px m ig e px m ig e re nc h re p e re xic n or rys px m ig rod Ma wa p cous mu se se e e px m ig rys px m ig o ne s, iu iu iu ta re to d cs iu y . me of m id m iu ite cs iu liq no to ige volve ss d no to ss d no to ss d s ss, ss d no to tals or h n d s ig ss cr are d ss d no to ss so n no to ss p with combu Wh e rm e rle rm e rle rm e rle al are bu rle e p rle al are les rm e s dn re ion. llow co d m rle an re rle rm e rle ig les rm e rle re . n d uric acidh o n in u uric acidh o u uric acidh o u ri s u rial are ur u ri ur uric acidh o cry a e e y titie r or acids, an u rial cy u uric acidh o u ur uric acidh o u ite lp f liabl e lp f liable lp f liable te s te te monium compound lo lp f liable d rictio f wd riction an los an s te lp f liable lo lp f liable tux compose amm amm amm hi olo a iving off swallowe amm y o xp llowin ey olo a amm adily amm ictio e Wh su May or are Wh Colo su May or are Colo su May or are Colo ma T C m Mixt Colo ma am g if Co su May or are Re acid b p to f e Pale qu fo wate e C m with powde Colo su May or are Colo re Co su May or are Colo mi fr d

s d d in 12 12 e te nd dn n ' ' ' d 2. d in 2. ' ' '' id ara " r than N ' ' arate tio d d d te 6. 6. d d m an p U ( d d p rom' rom' rom' or orte rom' rom' cy e rom othe rom' rom' e f s an f s an f s an sp 7.e 7.e f s an f s an fro s, as "S. acids a f s an f s an as "S. acids a grega 7 d d d n nsp d d d ry s, d f d d ry te te te a se a se te te d te te nds, .s te te Se 6) o 7. tr r, tr r, as a e as d ates, (1 1 t arap arap arap n ne n ne arap arap parate p na para d arap arap p an 7. tai tai e s. RSULPHATE ani ee acticable ge and "Se "Se "Se Whe n Whe n "Se "Se "S. e Kee ang "Se compou "Se "Se K ang 9. 9. . practicable m d cy pr A. .s A. .s A. .s A. 3. A. k co 3. A. .s A. .s D xid By rm 1. A. UM PE A. .s A. A. .s A. rm 1. Stowa ulk co 7. 7. roe ably an ably gory ide gory ide gory ide gory gory gory ide gory ide gory gor '' pe gory oniu gory ide gory gory ide gory n ' pe monium compound an monium compound an monium compound an 3 b d 7. te 3 bul d 7. monium compound an monium compound an monium compound pd te m monium compound an monium compound an K a K ason om a aso om' Cate am cy Cate am cy Cate am cy Cate B an C B an Cate am cy Cate am cy Cate am an Cate re fr class 4. C am AMMONI 1444), Cate am cy Cate Cate am cy Cate re fr class 4.

Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q 5) 7.8 S-, S-, S-, S-, S- S-, S-, S-, S- S- S-, S-, S-, S-, EmS (1 5.4.3.2 H H H A A, A H H G, A, H A H G

F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F-

lk d bu ions 4) rs (1 4.2.5 P33T P33T P33T P33T TP33 P33T P33T P33T TP33 P33T P33T P33T P33T e rovisP nks an inta a n ns 3 ble t co ioct 3) 2 a ank (1 4.2.5 4.3 T3 T3 BK T3 T1 2 BK3 T1 2 BK T1 T3 T3 - T1 T3 T1 T3 T3 ort T stru K K P in B B

ions 1) (1 4.1.4 B2 B4 B2 B4 B2 B4 B3 B3 B3 B2 B2 B1 B3 B2 B4 B3 B2 B2 rovisP IBC

c- s 0) 08 08 08 8 08 06 06 50 8 08 06 06 stru (1 C C C 08 C 0C C C C C 0C C 08 C C C In tion 4.1.4 IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB

ions ) g (9 4.1.4 - - - - - - - - - - - - - rovisP

ackinP cs ) 02 02 02 02 2 2 02 02 02 2 02 02 2 02 02 stru tion (8 4.1.4 LP0 LP0 LP0 LP0 In P0 P0 P0 P0 P002 P0 P0 P0 P503 P002 P0 P0 P0 P0

ed se

pt titi b) 3.5 E2 E2 E2 E1 E1 E1 E2 E2 E0 E1 E2 E1 E2 E2 ce an (7 Ex qu

d se

ite titi a) 0 an (7 3.4 1 kg 1 kg 1 kg 5 kg 5 kg 5 kg 1 kg 1 kg 5 kg 1 kg 5 kg 1 kg 1 kg Lim qu

l 76 cia ions ) - - - - - - - - - - - pe (6 3.3 S rovisP 964 967 964 9

g ) II II II III III III II II I III II III II II ackin Group (5 P 2.0.1.3

ryia ) (s ) - - - - - 1 - - - - - - - sid sk (4 2.0 6. ubS Ri

as v ) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Cl or Di (3 2.0 5. 5. 5. 5. 5. 5. 5. 5. 5. 5. 5. 5. 5. 5.

MIXTURE

TRATE

) SIUM NIS PSN (2 3.1.2

POTA ATER E E E AT ATER ID E AND HLO X AT RITE DE LOH ITRAT RC RO M O XI ULPHS E E O LORATE L TRATE RITE RCHLORATE RMANGANATE O H H IT E E M C M N M P M P d.3d BR C C N P P PER TIU TIU TIU TIU UM M M M NITRATE M M M UM N N N N /A8 IU IU IU IU IU IU /2 DI D D D DIUM NI D D D DI X 4 6 SO OS OS OS OS OS OS OS SO SODIUM PER TROS TROS TROS TROS

C 90 e 5 ) 4 5 6 8 0 2 3 6 7 8 9 NNE UN No. (1 MS A Pag 149 149 149 149 1499 150 150 150 1504 1505 150 150 150 150

629

Bilaga 1

7 0 1 2 5 7 1 4 4 4 6 d.3d X 4 e 5 UN No. 8) (1 151 151 151 1513 1514 151 1516 151 154 154 154 154 1545 154 1547 /A8 Pag /2 NNE e . tly A le tals sn se in n tact . e nd with d , s , a n by C 90 lub rn skin, with m a ly . Th riction icie r. e s d, so u tible to ly d rce with s s a r, ose ff lts. id con by MS In , b s s riction. re olutioS p su sa an use volving alatio d rou f s with . acts fie re involve m ir wate xic if ca e h llowe ite o by plosion. ly ne wate co in e cyn skin ct or 5°C. n x pact or f th by To toxic if combu ritating or to friction e rce r. Re acts mixtu of or if oge d, and swa 12. ig hly . Ir d , powde ie compound . Wh s g im te alkalis, dust in t: acts vig ate rial an . Mixture . Ree ive m ite cible with dr igin. by xic if ino adily with s nite e e te itives se wate los sta tals ore hy lowe or r o e re R a n burn f d. in xid iun antitie Mis ritating skin conta T g p r k. Higc r. n he se cau y le ro xp o m r. t oc tions in re o tux to ig m ya a llowe e to ign followin r or acids, de drye uo swal table is ir by acts with a ze a wh p rm e leb ll qua te te avye p olvingv ge d, erv al sh Mi wate s ares , m point: 36°C d m Solub ne o amm ni thn h va e ich Re ri r. in e stible re swa r. g f lia wa i f ve r. Obs . Fre tion. liablee id bu ire f d an l if e ro re igy ic lis, toxic if o tion. wh with acids. 7) ble an a lting d a a witht ly y skin conta (1 our mate wate ard ixtu iten fu wd tals or with sm ct with osive c h ll swallowe wate y and d le in cy m in Me rm po hyd d l m pl alkad rae in , b acts ies t o tib friction ory inhalay le Solu es d r. ig r ion. May me and n tte ria x Hig n inhalay ic if le d ert ne s b . with e te . Ha an d . e s. e . Re r b s ly with coms adily ls o frict ree n we ate hly volving tox s an r b id . ng de stals. re Th volve wa ta cida y rictio io if m in conta in conta e cid gae Tox n Prop u plo . Solub riction an rane rce ds. in re sy wd los id a bl g toxic vapour c. Solub io x fie n in re rrosive ic r b o p , or . Hig ntly u c. swallowe liqu lat a p to f mb d. ixtu a k cr od , p to f x larly le liq ma solids, g C tals. a wder m co c al e stible r ic olvinv s nh with s with combu o me acts . Whe oluble rial tly la ate ri itive an rticu a fire osive vio eb t withc lam e ic if i also ey r p llowish crye ite S te h b sulphur e sn . pl . t: 46° cry , volatile idu re a skin contact o nsitive ous rohibite y Re compoun n a hn use in ne x act e d fn skin contact o ev ev id or Tox m y se c m ig m slig mate se r. Pa d g e r am a of toxe y o o r e s. or by tals o xplosive iu re wn or with le re ca th combu de ic b b . a oily ct ss liq sy are mu rt is p ss or e n to ss solid. a ro whe a y volve ss to in conta ss liqu shpoin wd g ss, r. Mixtu and wed, b al rm o stible r slyu se tibs s wi g oxy itiz . May halation. rang wed, b ry a ry a o rleu ly cr ri and rleu uric acid. o m rleu t-b id re , ma powde sn d rleu toxly in e rleu Fla p rleu conta ite te h f liable roo tu e ite ture n ine se tables y rs. lation ite monia wate rcee olo lp olo wate an x ir ix olvinv e n igh b olo a ha olo Colo in fi swallo Wh ma eyes Transpo C su May or am are C combu in Viole vig cy combu mi a f Wh m Wh e D wette Colo U h or A wid swallo See ent See ent C te in Wh am C skin d s rs. se te . lis. id nd s arte n '' '' an ara salts. source alka tio ' class d m pe ir arter d qu " acids. as rom cy as "S '' class 3 u rom" g rom' ry . d f frod s, ry . acids a m the rom ans ing fd rom grega 7 f nds an d s, d f liv ivin l Se 6) o 7. d te te fro te cid te of d f (1 as d as an c r of ara r te 1 t ar of living pe para parate ep a ls and f living q a p a 7. aratep e acticable e s. e ta rote le le para ge and Cle. e K "Se compou "S. e ang "Away. . P ar o rom" a C. "Se C pr m practicable me d f D . "S A. A. .s A. D xid A. Ky rm 1. D D A. A. A. D A. A. "Se Stowa rs ably e ry roe ably avy rs. gory gory n gory oniu id go gory gor '' pe gory gory at. Clee arate gory gory gory gory gory gory arte te m an e monium compound pd hed p te te arte u 1. aso a ason om e a a Cate q 4. Cate re - C am cy Cat Cate am an Cate re fr class 4. Cate an Cate of h "S Cate Cate Cate C Cate alkalis. C qu

Q Q Q Q Q Q J A A A A D A A 5) 7.8 S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S- S- S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S- EmS (1 5.4.3.2 H A - H H H G, B, A A A A E A A,

F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F-

lk d bu ions 4) - - - (1 4.2.5 P33 P33 P2 T P13 P37 P33 P33 P33 TP2 P33 TP2 rse rovis T TP33 TP33 T TP33 T T T T T T in P nks ana ta n ns ble t co ioct 3) a ank (1 4.2.5 4.3 - T1 - T3 T3 T3 T3 - T20 T6 T3 T1 T7 T3 T7 ort T stru P in

ions 1) (1 4.1.4 - B3 - B2 B4 B2 B4 B2 B2 - - B1 B2 B4 B3 - B2 B4 rovisP IBC

c- s 0) 08 80 80 06 60 07 08 08 20 08 20 stru tion (1 4.1.4 - C - C C C C - - C C C C C C In IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB

ions ) g (9 4.1.4 - - - - - - - - - - - - - rovis PP26 PP31 P ackinP cs ) 02 02 02 06 02 02 02 02 2 02 stru tion (8 4.1.4 - In P6 P0 P002 P002 P0 P002 P4 P6 P0 P0 P0 LP0 P001 P0 P001

ed se

pt titi b) 3.5 E0 E1 - E2 E2 E2 E2 E0 E0 E5 E4 E1 E4 E4 E4 ce an (7 Ex qu

d se ℓ ℓ ite titi a) g g an (7 3.4 0 5 kg - 1 kg 1 kg 1 kg 1 kg 0 0 0 5 kg Lim qu 500 100 m 500 100 m

l cia ions ) - - - - - - pe (6 3.3 354 900 28 354 43 274 43 274 43 223 274 279 S rovisP

g ) I III - II II II II I I I II III II II II ackin Group (5 P 2.0.1.3

ryia ) (s ) 1 8 - - - - - - - P - - - 3 - sid sk (4 2.0 5. ubS Ri

as v ) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Cl or Di (3 2.0 6. 5. 5. 5. 5. 5. 5. 4. 6. 6. 6. 6. 6. 6. 6.

20% n

ss tha let

o

D D with n E D ILIZE .S. .S. .S. ILIZ ) AB .O .O .O AB PSN (2 3.1.2 TTE T r r r T DE S , S XI , WE .S. o ID, N .S. o ID, N .S. o ID, N E O RIN, .O L .O L .O L ATE R D ATE HAN PE NITRITE AMATE ID, N , SOS ID, N , SOS ID, N , SOS ANY NE TE EN M R L LT L LT L LT M GO NIU E PIC ANOHY SO SA SO SA SO SA O RATE AT M S, S S, S S, S THIOC M ARS d.3 ITR DR R massy CY ID ID ID ID ID ID O d Y HLO T RMANGANATE ROXIDE NIU E /A H AMMO C PE br, ONE LO LO LO LO LO LO L IS IN 8 TRAN EA C TE AK AK AK AK AK AK LY IL /2 R NC NI NC PE L L L L L L N X 4 7 TE U ZINC ZIN ZI ZINC ZI ZIRCONIU wate AC A A A A A A AL AMMO A C 90 e 5 ) 0 1 2 5 7 1 4 4 4 6 NNE UN No. (1 MS A Pag 151 151 151 1513 1514 151 1516 151 154 154 154 154 1545 154 1547

630

Bilaga 1

8 8 9 0 1 3 4 5 6 6 7 8 9 d.3d X 4 e 5 UN No. 8) (1 154 154 155 155 155 155 155 1556 155 155 1557 155 1557 155 155 /A8 Pag /2 NNE d, d, A t: tact or in e if skin C 90 by dust o y skin d e ic or y r. Toxic idh id by MS in contact . byr con g p ma g an lp swallowe h swallowe Tox d, e n C. skin y lp lin tact skin ltin tals, wate su ic if ic if tal. we ct o e wed, b in 33° itatin c ic su e con by ly ni n to ani d, ble wed, b Tox Tox s inhalatio with m arse s.a s.a by skin liquid. Me if swallo imate , an irr g arse g of a m r by llowe ic Solut. xo e ce . t o d, skin contay tact if swallo ble ids,c ble n n tionsa c come n acids, a a a ara compose we , bd swa e co toxly lation. romid ic m m r. Toxic if swallo erv e b g poin ha b ic ifx ily r. In int: appr n Tox lam lam appe Obs 7) r. D wallo o High ltin st in o s. tact with d f ct with d f e inhalatio wate (1 T. ad s. u p oge . in and wate skin contay er re wate a meh d dr me ust ies swallowe d g ig y lting fu con ic an ic an d ble in , b w ic h b hy In .n lation with th y ert d ic if o ly or Me . s. io In conta ah r b Solu . ble e p tox n id , a tox , a tox r. n Prop Tox it cible with lye tive tact volving e lata lids. e solid e Solu h m .n la n e t as white idh nh idh solids. Toxic if s tals. r w e co r, n alatioh lp i lp dust in alatioh lid. swallowe ic s o crystals which Mis tr a re crystals. in by by talline powd in so ls nt x nt are s nt e ic if cry ta ce e skin ce wate toxic liqu n su . . toxic so n su . ce or s 35°C. y s y app of ct or ev ev of ct or ev e. v cry, skin contact o s llin Tox of toxe r e rys eu , an inhalatio ls with , b eu bd dust ty o o ty o o y dust tas cs halation. ately ta d e as, droge b b droge b wd liqe r byo s liqe g r byo y y rittle lique r byo rang o les im arsine t ive t varie hs ry a ry a varie hs ry a ry ab , b wed, b t , cry alkalis. lation. p lation. ur st inu , d ox c cry , d c ry , de c ite ha ite ha lo d ite ite ite compos ros olve skin conta olve skin conta ite Wh with A wide in Wh in Co yb Wh appr volvee conta Wh swalloweif Wh eD cor conta A wide ve by See ent See ent A wide ve by See ent See ent ilveS swallo Wh conta

d . . re rs. d rs d rs d s, s, s, e f te te te e e e n r o arte arte arte idh idh idh tio owd a u ara u ara lp lp lp qu para q p q p '' p ol as . Cle ing su . su su . grega 7 m "Se , "Se , "Se c s s. c s liv s, s s ni id nic ni id Se 6) o 7. fro as co de c cid c (1 1 t p r ofa hi ar of living ar of living " a arse " a 7. ee acticable .s le p m m ge and "Away K C Cle Cle For arse ro For rom" a For arse ro . pr ter . ic sul . ic sulphide . ic sulphide f d f f A. A. A. A. B A. A. aru B n B n B n A. ed A. A. ed A. A. Stowa ably at at gory gory gory gory gory gory gory n g q gory rsea " acids. gory rsea gory rsea gory ar gory arate gory ar gory gory tals. aso in tea r om r om" acids. r om" acids. tea pe tea Cate Cate Cate Cate Cate me Cate Cate re vli C oF fr Cate oF fr Cate oF fr C "Sep Cate "S C "Sep Cate Cate

A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A 5) 7.8 S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S- S-, S-, S- S-, S- S-, S-, EmS (1 5.4.3.2 A A A A A A A A, A A A, A A, A A

F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F-

lk d bu ions 4) 2 2 (1 4.2.5 P33 P33 P33 P33 P2 T P7 T P13 P33 P33 TP2 TP P13 P27 TP P28 P33 P33 P33 rse rovis T T T T T T T TP13 TP27 T T T TP33 T TP33 T T in P nks ana ta n ns ble t co ioct 3) a ankT (1 4.2.5 4.3 T1 T1 T1 T1 T20 T3 T3 T14 T11 T7 T6 T3 T1 T3 T3 ortP stru in

ions 1) (1 4.1.4 B3 B3 B3 B3 - B2 B4 B2 B4 - - - B1 B2 B4 B3 B2 B4 B2 B4 rovisP IBC

c- s 0) 08 08 02 03 70 08 80 08 08 stru (1 08 C 08 C 08 C 08 C - C C - C C C C C C C In tion 4.1.4 IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB

ions ) g (9 4.1.4 - - - - - - - - - - - - - rovis PP31 P ackinP cs ) 02 2 02 2 02 2 02 2 01 02 02 01 01 1 02 2 02 02 stru tion (8 4.1.4 LP0 LP0 LP0 LP0 LP0 LP0 In P0 P0 P0 P0 P0 P0 P0 P001 P0 P0 P002 P0 P002 P0 P0

ed se

pt titi b) 3.5 E1 E1 E1 E1 E5 E4 E4 E5 E4 E1 E5 E4 E1 E4 E4 ce an (7 Ex qu

d se ℓ ite titi a) g g m g g g an (7 3.4 5 kg 5 kg 5 kg 5 kg 0 0 5 ℓ 0 5 kg Lim qu 500 500 100 500 500 500

l cia ions ) - - - - - - - pe (6 3.3 45 274 43 274 43 274 43 223 274 43 274 43 274 43 223 274 S rovisP

g ) III III III III I II II I II III I II III II II ackin Group (5 P 2.0.1.3

ryia ) (s ) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - sid sk (4 2.0 ubS Ri

as v ) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Cl or Di (3 2.0 6. 6. 6. 6. 6. 6. 6. 6. 6. 6. 6. 6. 6. 6. 6.

. d d d d d .O.S ic, ic, an ic, an ; an an ; an , N n ., and n n .; D a .s a s., a s., nic, a o.s. nic, o.s nic, a o.s. .o g o. g o. , n n. n. org n. rgao n. org n. . inorg s s, s, s, s, s, C, SOLI .S te . inor ite . inor ite in te in in te O.S O.S .S. ni S. .S. ni .O enis .O O. .O ) GANI , N Ar , N. Arsen , N. Arsen N, N., N, PSN (2 3.1.2 ID ., ID , ID , ; Arse ; Arsenite ; Arse E NOR U .s .s. .s. IDL s. LID IDL s. , I TARTRATE s. .o s. .o s. .o. s. .o.s. s. .o. s. RID D M , LIQ , n.o , LIQU , LIQU , SO n , SO n , SO n OL IU IDU D s .o. s, n .o. s, n .o. D s, .o. .o. D s, .o. E H OUN ATE S LID E N e n ND n ND n N tea n ND ates, n N tea n ID C T U s,e ate s, ate s, U n s,e n s, U n s,e TAS , LIQ , SO nate id n ide n ide id ide id OX RO COMP O ID ID OMID MPO s h MPO h MPO h NT LACY PY R O lp lph lph O Arse lp lph O Arse lp d.3 HYD N N AC C g: Ar : Arseg : Arseg C g: : Arseg C g: PE d E ONY IC IC AC IC B IC in IC COMPOU in IC COMPOU in IC in IC COMPOU in IC in IC C /A8 IN IM NE NE NE NE nic su NE d nic su NE d nic su NE d nic su NE d nic su NE d nic su NE /2 IL TIMO TIMO ludc clu clu clu clu clu

X 4 8 AN ANT AN AN ARS ARS ARS ARS in Arse ARS in Arse ARS in Arse ARS in Arse ARS in Arse ARS in Arse ARS ARSENI C 90 e 5 ) 8 9 0 1 3 4 5 6 6 7 8 9 NNE UN No. (1 MS A Pag 154 154 155 155 155 155 155 1556 155 155 1557 155 1557 155 155

631

Bilaga 1

9 0 1 2 4 4 6 7 9 1 2 3 4 5 d.3d X 4 e 5 UN No. 8) (1 156 156 156 156 156 1565 156 1566 156 156 1570 157 157 157 157 157 /A8 Pag /2 NNE n e A r. byr or v st , a iti tals or in xic k C 90 ide s. by st . tact sn du le tion. wate ct o a ') n to MS lor lation. g or du me lye ala skin ha co d sen avy m skin volving chn y able tact a e Solub y m a wea toxic if eg , b st in m tion. ar Gas' skin tact or by r.u trex , b st inh for s, e ly acts with d u ala con y o e d du h rod d skin contay acids or acid tact or by , b skin contact or by osive con with h d me y Re ation. y r ("Teu d pl o , an halation. r to fu Hig h s. b , bd d flam st inh skin con o x e s. me hal or p d, by E skin nds sive st in cid u in swallowe du by va r. ne u swallowe ar gae .n tionsa f acts with xic an d, skin g by larsin d tact or by in wate bl volving tact n e to we by swallowe d, off y erv e xic if R ly n thy b xic if con wly ma white co swallowe r. h d, tatin compou a Obs 7) air, s Tor. wallo ri xic if if swallowe llowe ive ime Tor. slo lam inhalatio (1 t tact or by ic if tact or by llowe ir ic it d skin es and nt a skiny wate To tals or powde swa sn r with tact orn s with acids o d fn ust con Tox in , a hige con c. s e ng by op a d ies mois arep , b d swa toxly se wd co d, m ic y ert in p in wate d ble volving cry lye o olviv in wate o acts s a skin le .n tals.s ani skin e ite m p e le .n lowe ec r b Prop me s, by b Solu cy by id 45°C c. High Toxic if. e skiny b tox u a d, lu cry r. n , d u r. e tr lu r. D ly F g alatio e solids. Toxic if s Toxic ifr. . Wh x , bd alatio swal e tion. Re igh ive h swallowe or we ss liq ately stat white h d uid. lowe htly so in drog ic im rm e or htly so in wo os xic if mps ox osive dry o s with acids, llowe solue , a h liq rr lig . e hy e. plx e f tal lig r p id ide co swal r. S dust To r, lu v ng of tox v e sy act r. S dust r. Toxic if o skin contact oy oily d e r. e ob e o llic powde appr d th e swa e ls an an r by e tals or powdes olvi ta , colourle tals or powdes e r r by ta ss, ang wdo o wd wdo y v reu int: lation. y lts. ss cr wdo o rys n cy n cy rle toxic if p t c p ry a cr e toxic if swallo rang halation. ry ab , me p o cr halation. itizs rle May p t c powde wed, b u tin ly po lation. s,e lation. n p ha n lation. May u r. Toxic if e c ita h ite ite ite hly st in ite e in ite st in se riction in ir sae s. ite ite it roged droge ine ha u ha lash y e ha a h y y Colo irr Hig Wh conta F Wh in See ent Wh fum Hig A wide d See ent Wh in Wh F b Wh du D to f in th Colo wate g Wh conta Wh W h h swallo . . . rs rs. rs rs

n arte arte arteu '' acids. arteu tio u q salts. q g qu ir m . '' class 3 the fro . grega 7 ivin s m d s Se l id fro living q 6)(1 o 7. ofr rate of acid 1 t ar of living a '' ac ar of living ls and ap ar ' 7. le m ta e ge and Cle C ro Cle. "Away. Cle rom' . f me . "S d f B A. A. A. A. A. ed A. A. A. D A. D E A. A. A. Stowa at ry ry avy

gory gory gory gory gory gory ar gory goe gory gory goe gory he gory gory gory gory aratep tea d e Cate Cate Cate Cate Cate C "Sep Cate Cat Cate Cate Cat Cate an Cate Cate Cate Cate "S

A A A A A A A A G D A J A A A A 5) 7.8 S-, S-, S-, S-, S-, S- S-, S- S-, S-, S- S- S-, S-, S-, S-, EmS (1 5.4.3.2 A A A A A A, A A, G E A, B, A A A A

F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F-

lk d bu ions 4) 2 - (1 4.2.5 P2 T P13 P33 P33 P33 P33 P33 P33 TP P13 P33 P33 P33 P33 rse rovis T T T T T TP33 T TP33 T T TP33 T T T T in P nks ana ta n ns ble t co ioct 3) a ank (1 4.2.5 4.3 T14 T3 T3 T3 T1 T6 T3 T1 T3 T20 T6 - T3 T3 T3 T6 ort T stru P in

ions 1) (1 4.1.4 - B2 B4 B2 B4 B2 B4 B3 B1 B2 B4 B3 B2 B4 - B1 - B2 B4 B2 B4 B2 B4 B1 rovisP IBC

c- s 0) 08 08 08 08 70 08 80 08 70 08 08 08 07 stru tion (1 4.1.4 - C C C C C C C C - C - C C C C In IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB

ions ) g (9 4.1.4 - - - - - - - - - - - - rovis PP31 PP31 PP31 P ackinP cs ) 02 02 02 02 02 2 02 2 02 02 06 02 02 02 02 stru tion (8 4.1.4 LP0 LP0 In P6 P0 P0 P0 P0 P002 P0 P002 P0 P6 P002 P4 P0 P0 P0 P0

ed se

pt titi b) 3.5 E5 E4 E4 E4 E1 E5 E4 E1 E4 E4 E5 E0 E4 E4 E4 E5 ce an (7 Ex qu

d se ite titi a) g g g g g g g g an (7 3.4 0 5 kg 0 5 kg 0 0 0 0 Lim qu 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500

l cia ions ) - - - - - - - - - pe (6 3.3 177 274 177 223 274 274 223 274 43 28 S rovisP

g ) I II II II III I II III II II I I II II II I ackin Group (5 P 2.0.1.3

ryia ) (s ) - - - - - - P - - 1 3 P - 1 - - P - P - P sid sk (4 2.0 4. 6. ubS Ri

as v ) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Cl or Di (3 2.0 6. 6. 6. 6. 6. 6. 6. 6. 6. 6. 6. 4. 6. 6. 6. 6.

y , r, b ER

MIXTU

50% waten NITE

ss tha M ARSE let . . o IU ) S PSN (2 3.1.2 S. S. N.O. N.O.S CALC O. O. , , with n D E N. N. ND D , , R AN E ND ND OU OUND E TTE E ID ST MP D NATE NATE D X U IDE O WDO ONE , WEE IO D T C ACI d.3 TR COMPOU COMPOU M C M COMP M P AZID LI d IC TRICHLORID IC ICAL M M NE M Y M ARSE M ARSE M CYANIU /A NE NE NE IUM CYAN IUC IUC ID 8 RYLLIU RYLLIU RYLLIU OMOACE UCI ss L /2 X 4 9 ARS ARS ARS ARIUB ARIUB BAR EB EB EB RB RB ARIUB ma CACOD CAL CAL SO CALCI

C 90 e 5 ) 0 1 2 4 4 6 7 9 1 2 3 4 5 NNE UN No. (1 MS A Pag 156 156 156 156 156 1565 156 1566 156 156 1570 157 157 157 157 157

632

Bilaga 1

0 7 8 9 0 1 3 3 5 6 8 8 8 d.3d X 4 e 6 UN No. 8) (1 157 157 157 158 158 1582 158 158 1583 158 158 1587 158 158 158 /A8 Pag t /2 NNE y o A , b s, k n d y e all C 90 b by r u by r xic if skin mu wea wed, MS or ic o ic tact orn y a she st p pou . To , b d xic if tact tox tox ur co d rmo volving swallowe du n ly ; vas ly ; vas o s. Toxic if f if swallo . To ey ey ga y s, e ic is Co ic if °C co skiny High High xic vap ids or acid fc ble mar, me f th skin rs. rs. , bd swallowe a a fu Tox os . Toxe to 80 tact or by y u and e and e to m te n C , b lyh ic if . wa cid gas. io s. tions con d skin skin llowe flam n ar le isv e a a fir 30° to Tox ts withc io idn erv in ly ic vapo to ic vapou hig r. a lat witht ro a d tea skin ve swa a c mab p yc tion. tox tox olv tion. Re h o Obs 7) by swallowe lyh burns ly e r. in lam f The rr (1 xim d, s gh s burns te toxic and conta . n e f and involve Toxic if in wate with acids o nd d ies if ppro inhalay lowe xic if hig hi use May inhalay r. le wa hly dust On a ert e a Cause s.e aC s.e s. lub in ig r. act ic alatio ans . t: r b to . . r b . h e lodp n in swal lyh olving n olving n wate so n , a h tox id Prop x v bran v io bran ixture in In e t or by wate ly an e pog Hig m lat me m le r.e soluble id in tion. Re uid e a b alatioh an le igh dust in icy ltin mes nh ms wd in tlyh b rre . Mays inhalatio e . Toxic if uid. liq inhalatio liquid e i u o n cy lu solu , a h byr f liq cou co . p e e e x . . idu r by . M skin contact o tile r by tile u skin contact o ev e. v Insolu ne Slig skin contac so id id t oc ev ev o ls y o or by of liquid e y o o r.e re dust r. an an o o t c tas oily vola t c vola ct b halation. g drogy bey b b ss liq ss, ly to mu ly wd - r byo d, by n cy n cy comple rle wed, b rle e g e g to m rang wed, b ry a ry ab po t powde g h . Ma ry a ry a u conta w cry lation. u lation. m conta tin m conta tin e n st inu c n s llo solid or paste tre tre e d llowish e olvin lid roged roged skin conta e ry ha ha x x y e v o y y y Colo skin Y swallo D in Colo in E skin irrita E skin irrita A wid swallo See ent See ent Gre b Y conta Gre e swallowe S h h b apply to See ent See ent . s s . . s. s. s. rs rs rs rs. ids. class .s ca cida cida cida n ' arteu rs. arteu arteu arte '' ' ' ' tio q source source rom' arteru arte g qu rom rom' rom' rom' fd rom rom qu d f fd fd fd grega 7 d f d f g living q living q ivin l Se 6) o 7. te te of of of te te te te (1 1 t ara c cte livin r ara ara ara 7. p ar of living f living q ar ar a para p p p ge and Cle rote roteP r of le "Se . . P ar o . a Cle Cle . C "Se "Se "Se "Se A. A. A. D D D le C. C. C A. A. A. A. A. A. Stowa gory gory gory gory gory at. Clee gory at. Ce gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory gory tea h tea tea Cate 3. Cate Cate Cate Cate of h C of Cate Cate C Cate Cate C Cate Cate Cate

A A A A U U A A A A A A A A A 5) 7.8 S-, S-, S-, S-, S- S- S-, S-, S- S-, S-, S- S-, S-, S-, EmS (1 5.4.3.2 A A A A C, C, A A A, A A A, A A A

F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F-

lk d bu ions 4) 2 - - - - - (1 4.2.5 TP P33 P33 P2 T P13 P37 P33 P33 P33 P33 P33 rse rovis T T T T T T TP33 T T T in P nks ana ta n ns ble t co ioct 3) a ank (1 4.2.5 4.3 T7 T3 T1 T22 T50 T50 - - - T3 T3 T3 T6 T3 T1 ort T stru P in

ions 1) (1 4.1.4 - B2 B4 B3 - - - - - - B2 B4 B2 B4 B2 B4 B1 B2 B4 B3 rovisP IBC

c- s 0) 02 08 08 02 30 08 08 80 07 08 08 stru tion (1 4.1.4 C C C - - - - C C C C C C C C In IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB IB

ions ) g (9 4.1.4 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - rovisP

ackinP cs ) 01 02 02 2 01 00 02 01 1 02 02 02 02 02 2 stru tion (8 4.1.4 LP0 LP0 LP0 In P0 P0 P0 P6 P2 P200 P6 P0 P001 P0 P0 P002 P0 P0 P0

ed se

pt titi b) 3.5 E4 E4 E1 E0 E0 E0 E5 E4 E1 E4 E4 E4 E5 E4 E1 ce an (7 Ex qu

d se ℓ ℓ ite titi a) m g m g g g an (7 3.4 5 kg 0 0 0 0 5 ℓ 0 5 kg Lim qu 100 500 100 500 500 500 g 500

l cia ions ) - - - - - pe (6 3.3 279 279 354 43 274 315 43 274 43 223 274 47 274 47 274 47 223 274 S rovisP

g ) II II III I - - I II III II II II I II III ackin Group (5 P 2.0.1.3

ryia ) (s ) - P - - - P - - - - - - P - P - P - P - P - P sid sk (4 2.0 ubS Ri

as v ) 1 1 1 1 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Cl or Di (3 2.0 6. 6. 6. 6. 2. 2. 6. 6. 6. 6. 6. 6. 6. 6. 6.